Dodge - Dakota 4wd - Workshop Manual - 2008 - 2008

Factory Workshop Manual Make Dodge Model Dakota 4wd Engine and year V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 8 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 11 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 162 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 18VT/BR IGNITION RUN/START SWITCH SENSE 2-3 F20 20PK/GY IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 8-Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 15 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 17 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 162 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 18VT/BR IGNITION RUN/START SWITCH SENSE 2-3 F20 20PK/GY IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 8-Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 18 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and is also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Several unique SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS, and another version has an additional coaxial connector receptacle that allows it to receive inputs from the optional remote start antenna module. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 22 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver and may receive RF inputs either directly through an internal antenna from the RKE key fob transmitter or, on vehicles equipped with an optional remote start system, indirectly through the external remote start antenna module. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Description and Operation/Description. The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM using the diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM over the CAN data bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM. The PCM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM is an invalid key ; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends electronic security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or if the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 25 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, disconnect the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. 10. Remove the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column housing. 11. Disengage the antenna ring (3) from around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4) and remove the SKREEM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 26 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column with the antenna ring (3) oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4). 2. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, reconnect the coaxial cable to the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 27 5. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 6. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 8. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 9. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), if the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated.See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 162 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 18VT/BR IGNITION RUN/START SWITCH SENSE 2-3 F20 20PK/GY IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 8-Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 32 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 33 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 34 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 162 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 18VT/BR IGNITION RUN/START SWITCH SENSE 2-3 F20 20PK/GY IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 8-Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 35 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 36 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and is also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Several unique SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS, and another version has an additional coaxial connector receptacle that allows it to receive inputs from the optional remote start antenna module. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 39 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver and may receive RF inputs either directly through an internal antenna from the RKE key fob transmitter or, on vehicles equipped with an optional remote start system, indirectly through the external remote start antenna module. See: Locks/Power Locks/Description and Operation/Description. The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM using the diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM over the CAN data bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM. The PCM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM is an invalid key ; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends electronic security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or if the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 42 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, disconnect the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. 10. Remove the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column housing. 11. Disengage the antenna ring (3) from around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4) and remove the SKREEM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 43 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column with the antenna ring (3) oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4). 2. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, reconnect the coaxial cable to the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 44 5. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 6. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 8. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 9. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), if the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated.See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Towing Relay: Locations Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Left Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay > Page 49 Trailer Towing Relay: Locations Right Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Right Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 186 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) > Page 52 Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Right Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 187 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 154 Component : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 46 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 4-5-6-- 7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 13 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 14 - 15 - 16 Z923 18BK GROUND 17 - 18 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 27 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) 32 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 57 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - 41 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 42 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 43 - 44 - 45 Z107 12BK/DG GROUND 46 - - Component Location - 6 Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (RWAL) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 58 Pin Circuit Description 1 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 2 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 3 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 5 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 6 Z107 12BK/DG GROUND 7 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 8 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 9-10 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 59 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 60 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 154 Component : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 46 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 4-5-6-- 7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 13 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 14 - 15 - 16 Z923 18BK GROUND 17 - 18 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 27 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) 32 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 61 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - 41 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 42 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 43 - 44 - 45 Z107 12BK/DG GROUND 46 - - Component Location - 6 Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (RWAL) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 62 Pin Circuit Description 1 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 2 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 3 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 5 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 6 Z107 12BK/DG GROUND 7 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 8 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 9-10 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 63 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Antilock Brake Module (ABM) is a microprocessor which handles testing, monitoring and controlling the ABS brake system operation. The ABM is mounted on the top of the hydraulic control unit (HCU). The ABM operates the ABS system and is separate from other vehicle electrical circuits. ABM voltage source is through CKT A111 (fused B+). NOTE: If the ABM needs to be replaced, the rear axle type and tire revolutions per mile must be programed into the new ABM. For axle type refer to Differential See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications. For tire revolutions per mile,See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Specifications. To program the ABM refer to the Appropriate Diagnostic Information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 66 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SYSTEM SELF-TEST When the ignition switch is turned-on the microprocessor is tested. If an error occurs during the test, a DTC will be set into the memory. However it is possible the DTC will not be stored in memory if the error has occurred in the module were the DTC's are stored. The ABM contains a self check program that illuminates the ABS warning light when a system fault is detected. Faults are stored in memory and are accessible with the scan tool. ABS faults remain in memory until cleared, or until after the vehicle is started approximately 50 times. Stored faults are not erased if the battery is disconnected. ABM INPUTS The ABM continuously monitors the speed of the vehicle by monitoring signals generated by the wheel speed sensors. The ABM determines a wheel locking tendency when it recognizes the axle is decelerating too rapidly. The ABM monitors the following inputs to determine when a wheel locking tendency may exists: - Wheel Speed Sensors - Brake Lamp Switch - Brake Fluid Level Sensor - G-Sensor - 4WD Switch (If equipped) ABM OUTPUTS The ABM requests the following outputs for antilock braking and brake warning information from the CCN via CAN C Bus: - ABS Warning Lamp - Brake Warning Lamp Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the ABM needs to be replaced, the rear axle type and tire revolutions per mile must be programed into the new ABM. For axle type refer to Differential See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications. For tire revolutions per mile,See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Specifications. To program the ABM refer to the Appropriate Diagnostic Information. 1. Disconnect the pump electrical connector (3) from the HCU (2). 2. Remove the module mounting screws (1). 3. Remove the module (1) from the HCU (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 69 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the ABM needs to be replaced, the rear axle type and tire revolutions per mile must be programed into the new ABM. For axle type refer to Differential See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications. For tire revolutions per mile See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Specifications. To program the ABM refer to the Appropriate Diagnostic Information. 1. Position the module (1) on the HCU (2). 2. Install the mounting screws (1) and tighten to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs). 3. Install the pump electrical connector (3) to the module (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Trailer Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 155 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 3 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z911 14BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 73 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 74 Trailer Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 155 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 3 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z911 14BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 75 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Blower Motor Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 80 Blower Motor Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 176 Component : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR Connector: Name : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 87 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The blower motor relay (1) for the heating-A/C system is a standard size International Standards Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal function and patterns (2). The blower motor relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current from a fuse in the power distribution center (PDC) directly to the blower motor. The blower motor relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a ground path by the control circuitry within the front control module (FCM). The blower motor relay is located in the integrated power module (IPM) in the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 83 Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The blower motor relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the battery to control the high current output to the blower motor. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the blower motor. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The blower motor relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the integrated power module (IPM). The inputs and outputs of the blower motor relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground circuit through the front control module (FCM). - The coil battery terminal (86) receives fused battery current at all times. - The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current output to the blower motor only when the blower motor relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the blower motor relay coil is de-energized. The blower motor relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Open the cover of the integrated power module (IPM) (1) located in the engine compartment. NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the IPM cover for blower motor relay identification and location. 3. Remove the blower motor relay (2) from the IPM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 86 Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the integrated power module (IPM) cover for blower motor relay identification and location. 1. Position the blower motor relay (2) into the proper receptacle of the IPM (1). 2. Align the blower motor relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the IPM receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the cover of the IPM. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations A/C Compressor Clutch Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 90 Compressor Clutch Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 174 Component : RELAY-A/C CLUTCH Connector: Name : RELAY-A/C CLUTCH Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C clutch relay (1) is a International Standards Organization (ISO) mini-relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal functions and patterns (2). The ISO mini-relay terminal functions are the same as a conventional size ISO relay. However, the ISO mini-relay terminal pattern (or footprint) is different, the current capacity is lower, and the physical dimensions are smaller than those of the conventional size ISO relay. The A/C clutch relay is located in the integrated power module (IPM) in the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 93 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C clutch relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input controlled by the powertrain control module (PCM) to control the high current output to the A/C clutch field coil. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the A/C clutch field coil. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The A/C clutch relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the integrated power module (IPM). The inputs and outputs of the A/C clutch relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current through a B(+) circuit at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground input from the PCM through the A/C clutch control circuit only when the PCM electronically pulls the control circuit to ground. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives fused battery current through the ignition switch circuit only when the switch is in RUN. - The normally open terminal (87) provides a battery current output to the A/C clutch coil through the A/C clutch relay output circuit only when the compressor clutch relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the A/C clutch relay coil is de-energized. The A/C clutch relay cannot be repaired must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Compressor Clutch Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Open the cover of the integrated power module (IPM) (1) located in the engine compartment. NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the IPM cover for A/C clutch relay identification and location. 3. Remove the A/C clutch relay (2) from the IPM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 96 Compressor Clutch Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the integrated power module (IPM) cover for A/C clutch relay identification and location. 1. Position the A/C clutch relay (2) into the proper receptacle of the IPM (1). 2. Align the A/C clutch relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the IPM receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the cover of the IPM. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Fog Lamp Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 101 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 177 Component : RELAY-FOG LAMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FOG LAMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 L139 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The front fog lamp relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The front fog lamp relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The front fog lamp relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 104 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The front fog lamp relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to the front fog lamps. Within the relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the front fog lamp relay include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a fog lamp relay control circuit. The FCM controls front fog lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the front fog lamps through a fog lamp relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the front fog lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The front fog lamp relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Horn Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 179 Component : RELAY-HORN Connector: Name : RELAY-HORN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 X4 HORN RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Park Lamp Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 111 Parking Lamp Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 182 Component : RELAY-PARK LAMP Connector: Name : RELAY-PARK LAMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A INTERNAL FUSED B(+) B INTERNAL FUSED B(+) C Z385 GROUND D L779 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park lamp relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The park lamp relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The park lamp relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 114 Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park lamp relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to the park lamps. Within the relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the park lamp relay include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a park lamp relay control circuit. The FCM controls park lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the park lamps through a park lamp relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the park lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The park lamp relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Left Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay > Page 119 Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Right Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Right Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 186 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) > Page 122 Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Right Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 187 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration Technical Service Bulletin # H20 Date: 080701 Campaign - Front Module Configuration July 2008 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification H20 Reconfigure Front Control Module Models 2008 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This notification applies only to the above vehicles that are NOT equipped with the Trailer Tow Group (sales code AHC) built through May 21, 2008 (MDH 052118). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The 4-way electrical connector for trailer lights on about 20,600 of the above vehicles may not function properly due to an improperly configured Front Control Module (FCM). Repair The Front Control Module must be reconfigured. Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The existing special tools are required to perform this repair shown. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 132 Use the labor operation number and time allowance shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive one copy of this dealer notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure Reconfigure the Front Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 8.05 or later. If the reconfigure procedure for the FCM is aborted or interrupted, repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 133 Use an accurate stand alone voltmeter. The battery charger volt meter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarSCAN to the data link connector on the vehicle and the dealership network. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Power "ON" the StarSCAN." 5. Starting at the StarSCAN "HOME" screen, select "ECU View". 6. Select "FCMCGW Central Gateway" from the list. 7. Select "Misc Functions". 8. Select "Restore Vehicle Configurations" from the list and press the blue "START" button in the upper right corner of the screen. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the reconfiguration process. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN from the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the battery charger. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 134 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging Hazard Warning Lamps: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging NUMBER: 23-035-07 GROUP: Body DATE: August 08, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-041-06, DATED SEPTEMBER 27, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Exterior Lamp - Lens Fogging MODELS: 2006 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2008 (DC/DM) Ram Truck - Cab & Chassis (3500/4500/5500) 2006 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck - Pick-up (1500/2500/3500) 2006 - 2008 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2006 (JR) Stratus/Sebring 2006 - 2007 (JR27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2006 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty/Cherokee 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2008 (MK49) Compass 2007 - 2008 (MK74) Patriot 2006 - 2008 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) PT Cruiser 2006 - 2007 (RS/RG) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2006-2008 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (XK/XH) Commander DISCUSSION: Some customers may report that on occasion, vehicle exterior lamp assemblies are fogged with a light layer of condensation on the inside of the lenses. This may be reported after the lamps have been turned on and brought up to operating temperature, turned off, and then rapidly cooled by cold water (such as rain, or the water from a car wash). Lens fogging can also occur under certain atmospheric conditions after a vehicle has been parked outside overnight (i.e., a warm humid day followed by clear cool night). This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate this process. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging > Page 138 A lamp that has large amounts of water droplets visible on most internal surfaces indicates a problem with the lamp sealing that has allowed water to enter the lamp. In this instance, the customer is likely to report that moisture in the lamp is always present and never disappears. A lamp that exhibits internal moisture permanently should be replaced. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 09-002-08 > Jun > 08 > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration Technical Service Bulletin # H20 Date: 080701 Campaign - Front Module Configuration July 2008 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification H20 Reconfigure Front Control Module Models 2008 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This notification applies only to the above vehicles that are NOT equipped with the Trailer Tow Group (sales code AHC) built through May 21, 2008 (MDH 052118). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The 4-way electrical connector for trailer lights on about 20,600 of the above vehicles may not function properly due to an improperly configured Front Control Module (FCM). Repair The Front Control Module must be reconfigured. Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The existing special tools are required to perform this repair shown. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 09-002-08 > Jun > 08 > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 148 Use the labor operation number and time allowance shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive one copy of this dealer notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure Reconfigure the Front Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 8.05 or later. If the reconfigure procedure for the FCM is aborted or interrupted, repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 09-002-08 > Jun > 08 > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 149 Use an accurate stand alone voltmeter. The battery charger volt meter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarSCAN to the data link connector on the vehicle and the dealership network. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Power "ON" the StarSCAN." 5. Starting at the StarSCAN "HOME" screen, select "ECU View". 6. Select "FCMCGW Central Gateway" from the list. 7. Select "Misc Functions". 8. Select "Restore Vehicle Configurations" from the list and press the blue "START" button in the upper right corner of the screen. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the reconfiguration process. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN from the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the battery charger. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 09-002-08 > Jun > 08 > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 150 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine coolant temperature gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This gauge is part of the minor gauge set with the fuel gauge located on the left side of the instrument cluster, just left of the speedometer. The gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree gauge scale on the cluster overlay that reads bottom-to-top from C (or Cold) to H (or Hot). An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the bottom end of the scale. The engine coolant temperature gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the high end of the gauge scale, making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the white gauge dial face appears blue-green with the black graphics silhouetted against the illuminated background and the red graphics and the red gauge needle still appear red. Gauge illumination is provided by an integral electro-luminescent lamp that is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. The engine coolant temperature gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 154 Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine coolant temperature gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine coolant temperature. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine coolant temperature gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Temperature Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is between the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F)] and the high end of normal [about 122 °C (252 °F)], the gauge needle is moved to the actual relative temperature position on the gauge scale. - Engine Temperature Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is below the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F)], the gauge needle is held at the C increment at the low end of the gauge scale. The gauge needle remains at the low end of the gauge scale until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is above about 54 °C (130 °F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is above about 122 °C (252 °F), the gauge needle is moved to the red zone at the high end of the gauge scale, the engine temperature indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The gauge needle remains in the red zone and the engine temperature indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is below about 122 °C (252 °F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine temperature message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about five seconds or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After five seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine coolant temperature gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, Refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier Testing and Inspection See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection. If the instrument cluster turns ON the engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine coolant temperature gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Integrated Power Battery Cable: Service and Repair Battery Cables - Installation INSTALLATION NEGATIVE 1. Position the battery negative cable (4) in the vehicle and into the engine harness conduit. 2. One at a time, install the battery cable retaining pushpins (5) , fasteners and routing clips until the cable is secure in the vehicle. 3. Install the bolt (2) securing the negative cable eyelet (3) to the left front fender. Tighten the bolt to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance. 5. Install the bolt (3) securing the negative cable (1) to the engine block (2). Tighten the bolt to 16.5 Nm (145 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Integrated Power > Page 157 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Connect the battery negative cable terminal clamp (4). Tighten the battery terminal clamp pinch-bolt hex nut to 5 NmM (45 in. Lbs.). 8. Check the vehicle for normal operation. POSITIVE 1. Position the battery positive cable (4 and 8) in the vehicle. 2. Install the nut (5) securing the cable to the Integrated Power Module (IPM) (7) stud (6). Tighten the nut to 11.5 Nm (105 in. lbs.). 3. Install the nut (3) securing the cable (4) to the alternator. Tighten the nut to 14 Nm (125 in. lbs.). 4. Install the cable pushpin (5) into the left frame rail (4). 5. Connect the starter solenoid wire harness connector (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Integrated Power > Page 158 6. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance. 7. Install the nut (2) securing the cable (1) to the starter solenoid (3). Tighten the nut to 13 Nm (115 in. lbs.). 8. Connect the battery cable retaining pushpin (6) securing the cable to the engine block. 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Connect the battery positive cable terminal clamp (8). Tighten the battery terminal clamp pinch-bolt hex nut to 5 NmM (45 in. Lbs.). 11. Position the resonator (4) into the vehicle. Install the bolts (3) into the air intake resonator (4) and tighten the band clamp (2) on the air inlet tube (1). 12. Connect the battery negative cable terminal clamp. Tighten the battery terminal clamp pinch-bolt hex nut to 5 NmM (45 in. Lbs.). 13. Check the vehicle for normal operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Cables - Description Battery Cable: Description and Operation Battery Cables - Description DESCRIPTION The battery cables (2) and (4) are large gauge, stranded copper wires sheathed within a heavy plastic or synthetic rubber insulating jacket. The wire used in the battery cables combines excellent flexibility and reliability with high electrical current carrying capacity. The battery cables feature a stamped brass clamping type female battery terminal crimped onto one end of the battery cable wire and then solder-dipped. A square headed pinch-bolt and hex nut are installed at the open end of the female battery terminal clamp. Large eyelet type terminals are crimped onto the opposite end of the battery cable wire and then solder-dipped. The battery positive cable wires (2) have a red insulating jacket to provide visual identification and feature a larger female battery terminal clamp to allow connection to the larger battery positive terminal post. The battery negative cable wires (4) have a black insulating jacket and a smaller female battery terminal clamp. The battery cables cannot be repaired and, if damaged or faulty they must be replaced. Both the battery positive and negative cables are available for service replacement. The replacement parts may include portions of the wiring circuits for the generator and other components on some models. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for the location of the proper battery cable wire harness diagrams. The wiring information also includes proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Cables - Description > Page 163 Battery Cable: Description and Operation Battery Cables - Operation OPERATION The battery cables connect the battery terminal posts to the vehicle electrical system. These cables also provide a return path for electrical current generated by the charging system for restoring the voltage potential of the battery. The female battery terminal clamps on the ends of the battery cable wires provide a strong and reliable connection of the battery cable to the battery terminal posts. The terminal pinch bolts allow the female terminal clamps to be tightened around the male terminal posts on the top of the battery. The eyelet terminals secured to the ends of the battery cable wires opposite the female battery terminal clamps provide secure and reliable connection of the battery to the vehicle electrical system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 164 Battery Cable: Testing and Inspection BATTERY CABLES A voltage drop test will determine if there is excessive resistance in the battery cable terminal connections or the battery cables. If excessive resistance is found in the battery cable connections, the connection point should be disassembled, cleaned of all corrosion or foreign material, then reassembled. Following reassembly, check the voltage drop for the battery cable connection and the battery cable again to confirm repair. When performing the voltage drop test, it is important to remember that the voltage drop is giving an indication of the resistance between the two points at which the voltmeter probes are attached. EXAMPLE: When testing the resistance of the battery positive cable, touch the voltmeter leads to the battery positive cable terminal clamp and to the battery positive cable eyelet terminal at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud. If you probe the battery positive terminal post and the battery positive cable eyelet terminal at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud, you are reading the combined voltage drop in the battery positive cable terminal clamp-to-terminal post connection and the battery positive cable. TESTING VOLTAGE DROP TEST WARNING: If the battery shows signs of freezing, leaking, loose posts, or low electrolyte level, do not test, assist-boost, or charge. The battery may arc internally and explode. Personal injury and/or vehicle damage may result. WARNING: Explosive hydrogen gas forms in and around the battery. Do not smoke, use flame, or create sparks near the battery. Personal injury and/or vehicle damage may result. WARNING: Explosive hydrogen gas forms in and around the battery. Do not smoke, use flame, or create sparks near the battery. Personal injury and/or vehicle damage may result. WARNING: If the battery is equipped with removable cell caps, be certain that each of the cell caps is in place and tight before the battery is returned to service. Personal injury and/or vehicle damage may result from loose or missing cell caps. The following operation will require a voltmeter accurate to 1/10 (0.10) volt. Before performing this test, be certain that the following procedures are accomplished: - The battery is fully-charged and tested, See: Testing and Inspection/Micro 420 Battery Tester. - Fully engage the parking brake. - If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Park position. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Neutral position and block the clutch pedal in the fully depressed position. - Verify that all lamps and accessories are turned off. - To prevent a gasoline engine from starting, remove the Automatic ShutDown (ASD) relay. The ASD relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM), in the engine compartment. See the fuse and relay layout label on the underside of the IPM cover for ASD relay identification and location. 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter (1) to the battery negative terminal post. Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter (1) to the battery negative cable terminal clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If voltage is detected, correct the poor connection between the battery negative cable terminal clamp and the battery negative terminal post. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 165 2. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter (1) to the battery positive terminal post. Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter to the battery positive cable terminal clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If voltage is detected, correct the poor connection between the battery positive cable terminal clamp and the battery positive terminal post. 3. Connect the voltmeter (2) to measure between the battery positive cable terminal clamp (1) and the starter solenoid (3) B(+) terminal stud. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery positive cable eyelet terminal connection at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud. Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2 volt, replace the faulty battery positive cable. 4. Connect the voltmeter (1) to measure between the battery (2) negative cable terminal clamp and a good clean ground (3) on the engine block. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery negative cable eyelet terminal connection to the engine block. Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2 volt, replace the faulty battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal Battery Cable: Service and Repair Battery Cables - Removal REMOVAL NEGATIVE 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Be certain that all electrical accessories are turned off. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable terminal clamp (4). 3. Remove the bolt (2) securing the negative cable eyelet (3) to the left front fender. 4. One at a time, trace the battery cable retaining pushpins (5) , fasteners and routing clips until the cable is free from the vehicle. 5. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance 6. Remove the bolt (3) securing the negative cable (1) to the engine (2). 7. Separate the cable from the engine harness conduit. 8. Remove the battery negative cable from the vehicle. POSITIVE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 168 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Be certain that all electrical accessories are turned off. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. Loosen the band clamp (2) on the air inlet tube (1) and remove the bolts (3) from the air intake resonator (4). Remove the resonator from the vehicle. 4. Disconnect the battery positive cable terminal clamp (8). 5. Remove the nut (5) securing the cable to the Integrated Power Module (IPM) (7) stud (6). 6. Lift the terminal cap and remove the nut (3) securing the cable (4) to the alternator. 7. Disconnect the starter solenoid wire harness connector (1). 8. Disconnect the battery cable retaining pushpin (5) securing the cable to the left frame rail (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 169 9. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance. 10. Remove the nut (2) securing the cable (1) to the starter solenoid (3). 11. Disconnect the battery cable retaining pushpin (6) securing the cable to the engine block. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Remove the battery positive cable from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 170 Battery Cable: Service and Repair Battery Cables - Installation INSTALLATION NEGATIVE 1. Position the battery negative cable (4) in the vehicle and into the engine harness conduit. 2. One at a time, install the battery cable retaining pushpins (5) , fasteners and routing clips until the cable is secure in the vehicle. 3. Install the bolt (2) securing the negative cable eyelet (3) to the left front fender. Tighten the bolt to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance. 5. Install the bolt (3) securing the negative cable (1) to the engine block (2). Tighten the bolt to 16.5 Nm (145 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 171 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Connect the battery negative cable terminal clamp (4). Tighten the battery terminal clamp pinch-bolt hex nut to 5 NmM (45 in. Lbs.). 8. Check the vehicle for normal operation. POSITIVE 1. Position the battery positive cable (4 and 8) in the vehicle. 2. Install the nut (5) securing the cable to the Integrated Power Module (IPM) (7) stud (6). Tighten the nut to 11.5 Nm (105 in. lbs.). 3. Install the nut (3) securing the cable (4) to the alternator. Tighten the nut to 14 Nm (125 in. lbs.). 4. Install the cable pushpin (5) into the left frame rail (4). 5. Connect the starter solenoid wire harness connector (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 172 6. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance. 7. Install the nut (2) securing the cable (1) to the starter solenoid (3). Tighten the nut to 13 Nm (115 in. lbs.). 8. Connect the battery cable retaining pushpin (6) securing the cable to the engine block. 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Connect the battery positive cable terminal clamp (8). Tighten the battery terminal clamp pinch-bolt hex nut to 5 NmM (45 in. Lbs.). 11. Position the resonator (4) into the vehicle. Install the bolts (3) into the air intake resonator (4) and tighten the band clamp (2) on the air inlet tube (1). 12. Connect the battery negative cable terminal clamp. Tighten the battery terminal clamp pinch-bolt hex nut to 5 NmM (45 in. Lbs.). 13. Check the vehicle for normal operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Locations Trailer Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 155 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 3 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z911 14BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Locations > Page 175 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Locations > Page 176 Trailer Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 155 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 3 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z911 14BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Component Information > Locations > Page 177 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-002-08 > Jun > 08 > Engine - Oil Level Incorrect Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Customer Interest Engine - Oil Level Incorrect NUMBER: 09-002-08 GROUP: Engine DATE: June 20, 2008 SUBJECT: Engine Oil Level Incorrect OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves inspecting the part number on the current engine oil dipstick. If necessary, the dealer is to replace the dipstick with one that is correctly calibrated, and verify that the engine oil is at the correct level. MODELS: 2008 (ND) Dakota NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built from February 17, 2008 (MDH0217XX) and built before April 25, 2008 (MDH0425XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may state engine oil capacity on their 4.7L engine is greater than 6 quarts (5.7 Liters liquid). If engine is filled with the proper amount, (6 quarts) of oil, indicator (dipstick) may read up to 2 quarts low. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. 2. With the engine off, raise hood. 3. Remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick) from the engine. 4. Read and record the part number on the WRO that is on the engine oil level indicator. 5. Is the engine oil level indicator part number 53032936AE (or higher i.e. AF, AG, etc.), then verify that the engine oil level is in the "safe zone. Install the engine oil level indicator to the engine and close hood. No further action is required. 6. If the engine oil level indicator part number is earlier than 53032936AE (i.e. AA, AB, AC, or AD), then the engine oil level indicator will require replacement and the engine oil level may require adjustment. Proceed to the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Install the correct engine oil level indicator, p/n 53032936AE, to the engine. 2. Verify that the engine oil level is in the "safe" zone. 3. If the engine oil level is correct, then STOP. No further action is required. 4. If the engine oil level is incorrect, then CAREFULLY remove any excess engine oil from the engine until the engine oil level is correct. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-002-08 > Jun > 08 > Engine - Oil Level Incorrect > Page 186 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > 09-002-08 > Jun > 08 > Engine - Oil Level Incorrect Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Level Incorrect NUMBER: 09-002-08 GROUP: Engine DATE: June 20, 2008 SUBJECT: Engine Oil Level Incorrect OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves inspecting the part number on the current engine oil dipstick. If necessary, the dealer is to replace the dipstick with one that is correctly calibrated, and verify that the engine oil is at the correct level. MODELS: 2008 (ND) Dakota NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built from February 17, 2008 (MDH0217XX) and built before April 25, 2008 (MDH0425XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may state engine oil capacity on their 4.7L engine is greater than 6 quarts (5.7 Liters liquid). If engine is filled with the proper amount, (6 quarts) of oil, indicator (dipstick) may read up to 2 quarts low. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. 2. With the engine off, raise hood. 3. Remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick) from the engine. 4. Read and record the part number on the WRO that is on the engine oil level indicator. 5. Is the engine oil level indicator part number 53032936AE (or higher i.e. AF, AG, etc.), then verify that the engine oil level is in the "safe zone. Install the engine oil level indicator to the engine and close hood. No further action is required. 6. If the engine oil level indicator part number is earlier than 53032936AE (i.e. AA, AB, AC, or AD), then the engine oil level indicator will require replacement and the engine oil level may require adjustment. Proceed to the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Install the correct engine oil level indicator, p/n 53032936AE, to the engine. 2. Verify that the engine oil level is in the "safe" zone. 3. If the engine oil level is correct, then STOP. No further action is required. 4. If the engine oil level is incorrect, then CAREFULLY remove any excess engine oil from the engine until the engine oil level is correct. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > 09-002-08 > Jun > 08 > Engine - Oil Level Incorrect > Page 192 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration Technical Service Bulletin # H20 Date: 080701 Campaign - Front Module Configuration July 2008 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification H20 Reconfigure Front Control Module Models 2008 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This notification applies only to the above vehicles that are NOT equipped with the Trailer Tow Group (sales code AHC) built through May 21, 2008 (MDH 052118). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The 4-way electrical connector for trailer lights on about 20,600 of the above vehicles may not function properly due to an improperly configured Front Control Module (FCM). Repair The Front Control Module must be reconfigured. Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The existing special tools are required to perform this repair shown. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 198 Use the labor operation number and time allowance shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive one copy of this dealer notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure Reconfigure the Front Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 8.05 or later. If the reconfigure procedure for the FCM is aborted or interrupted, repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 199 Use an accurate stand alone voltmeter. The battery charger volt meter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarSCAN to the data link connector on the vehicle and the dealership network. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Power "ON" the StarSCAN." 5. Starting at the StarSCAN "HOME" screen, select "ECU View". 6. Select "FCMCGW Central Gateway" from the list. 7. Select "Misc Functions". 8. Select "Restore Vehicle Configurations" from the list and press the blue "START" button in the upper right corner of the screen. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the reconfiguration process. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN from the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the battery charger. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 200 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Component Locations 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 204 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations Component ID: 269 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 205 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 206 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Page 207 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 269 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Page 208 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Page 209 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Locations > Page 210 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The IAT sensor provides an input voltage to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating the density of the air entering the intake manifold based upon intake manifold temperature. At key-on, a 5-volt power circuit is supplied to the sensor from the PCM. The sensor is grounded at the PCM through a low-noise, sensor-return circuit. The PCM uses this input to calculate the following: - Injector pulse-width - Adjustment of spark timing (to help prevent spark knock with high intake manifold air-charge temperatures) The resistance values of the IAT sensor is the same as for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from IAT sensor. 2. Clean dirt from sensor base. 3. Gently lift on small plastic release tab (3) and rotate sensor about 1/4 turn counter-clockwise for removal. 4. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 213 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). 2. Clean sensor mounting hole. 3. Position sensor (1) into base and rotate clockwise until past release tab (3). 4. Install electrical connector (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations Relay Box: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module Relay Box: Diagrams Integrated Power Module Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 219 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 220 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 221 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 222 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 223 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 224 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 225 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 226 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 227 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 228 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 229 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 230 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 231 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 232 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 233 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 234 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Ignition Run Component ID: 180 Component : RELAY-IGNITION RUN Connector: Name : RELAY-IGNITION RUN Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 87 F921 12PK/WT IGNITION RUN OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 235 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Ignition Run-ACC Component ID: 181 Component : RELAY-IGNITION RUN-ACC Connector: Name : RELAY-IGNITION RUN-ACC Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 87 F984 12PK/YL IGNITION RUN-ACC RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 236 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run/Start Component ID: 184 Component : RELAY-RUN/START Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN/START Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 87 F941 18PK/LG RUN/START RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 237 Relay Box: Application and ID Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 238 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 239 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 240 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 241 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Body Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Front Control Module (FCM) (2) is a micro controller based module located in the left front corner of the engine compartment. The FCM mates to the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) to form the Integrated Power Module (IPM). The IPM connects directly to the battery and provides the primary means of circuit protection and power distribution for all vehicle electrical systems. The front control module controls power to some of these vehicle systems electrical and electromechanical loads based on inputs received from hard wired switch inputs and data received on the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 248 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION As messages are sent over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit, the Front Control Module (FCM) reads these messages and controls power to some of the vehicles electrical systems by completing the circuit to ground (low side driver) or completing the circuit to 12 volt power (high side driver). The following functions are controlled by the FCM: - Front turn signals - Stop, turn signal and tail lamps - Front and rear hazard warning lamps - Headlamps - Fog Lamps - Daytime running lamps - if equipped - Horn - Windshield and liftgate wiper and washer systems - Transfer case shifting - Trailer tow wiring output - Rear window defroster power and timing The FCM provides the following features for the above function: - It operates the electric transfer case mechanism, replacing a stand-alone module. - It flashes lamps in response to turn signal, Remote Keyless Entry and Vehicle Theft Security Alarm inputs. - It sounds the horn in response to Remote Keyless Entry and Vehicle Theft Security Alarm inputs. - It turns off the horn in the event of excessively long operation that could otherwise damage the horn. - It minimized voltage variations to the headlamps to extend bulb life and to equalize the light output from the lamps, which might otherwise differ due to variations in wiring resistance. - If the headlamps are left on, it automatically turns them off after eight minutes to protect the battery from discharge. - It monitors battery voltage and turns off non-essential functions such as the fog lamps, rear window defogger and heated seats if necessary to conserve battery power. - It operates the high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity by pulse-width modulation of the power supply to provide the daytime running lamps. - It provides the variable delay intermittent windshield and liftgate wiper time delay features, and the vehicle speed sensitive windshield wiper delay variation. - It acts as a gateway between the CAN-C network for critical powertrain and anti-lock brake systems and the CAN-B network for body and interior modules. For example it collects battery temperature data and relays it to the PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Body Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) from the engine compartment, See: Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Removal. 3. Remove the four fasteners (2) securing the Front Control Module (FCM) (1) to the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (3). 4. Separate the FCM from the PDC by pulling the two straight away from each other to disengage the electrical connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 251 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (3) to the Front Control Module (FCM) by lining up the electrical connector and pushing the two together. 2. Install the four fasteners (2) securing the FCM (1) to the PDC (3). 3. Install the Integrated Power Module (IPM), See: Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Installation. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID: 161 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-- 8-9 Z913 16BK GROUND 10 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z937 16BK GROUND 19 - 20 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 20 G6 18VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A803 18GY/RD GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 - 29 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 30 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 255 36 - 37 - 38 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 256 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 257 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20PK/GY TP SENSOR RETURN 16 - 17 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 258 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 259 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 260 7-8-9 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 18VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V72 18VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 22 - 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 - 28 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 - 34 V71 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SWITCH SIGNAL 36 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 261 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 262 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3-4 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 263 6 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 7-8 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 16BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 20YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/VT 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 20YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 264 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 265 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3-4-5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 266 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 7-8-9-10 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 14BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 - 21 - 22 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/PK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 18YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 267 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 268 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 269 Engine Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 161 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-- 8-9 Z913 16BK GROUND 10 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z937 16BK GROUND 19 - 20 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 20 G6 18VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A803 18GY/RD GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 - 29 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 30 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 270 36 - 37 - 38 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 271 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 272 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20PK/GY TP SENSOR RETURN 16 - 17 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 273 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 274 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 275 7-8-9 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 18VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V72 18VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 22 - 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 - 28 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 - 34 V71 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SWITCH SIGNAL 36 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 276 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 277 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3-4 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 278 6 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 7-8 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 16BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 20YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/VT 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 20YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 279 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 280 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3-4-5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 281 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 7-8-9-10 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 14BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 - 21 - 22 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/PK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 18YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 282 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 283 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Description Description DESCRIPTION The PCM (1) is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. Description - Modes Of Operation DESCRIPTION - MODES OF OPERATION As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output devices. The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop. During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM programming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes. During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1 part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance. The fuel injection system has the following modes of operation: - Ignition switch ON - Engine start-up (crank) - Engine warm-up - Idle - Cruise - Acceleration - Deceleration - Wide open throttle (WOT) - Ignition switch OFF The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed Loop modes. IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur: - The PCM pre-positions the idle air control (IAC) motor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 286 - The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy. - The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this input. - Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored. - Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored. - The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds. - The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approximately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. - The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the ASD relay. The O2S sensor input is not used by the PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation. ENGINE START-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged. The PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Starter motor relay - Camshaft position sensor signal The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal within 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system. The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay. Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor. ENGINE WARM-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Based on these inputs the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. - When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation. IDLE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 287 - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Battery voltage - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. CRUISE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen (O2S) sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. ACCELERATION MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response to increased throttle opening. DECELERATION MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Vehicle speed sensor Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 288 If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the oxygen sensor input signal. The PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue injection. Based on the above inputs, the PCM will adjust engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done by adjusting injector pulse width. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and fuel pump relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 289 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Operation OPERATION The PCM is a pre-programmed, microprocessor digital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to meet changing operating conditions. The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs. The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmission), vehicle speed and the brake switch. The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed, transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch switch and brake switch. Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation. NOTE: PCM Inputs: - Accelerator pedal position sensor (if equipped) - A/C request (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C select (if equipped with factory A/C) - Auto shutdown (ASD) sense - Battery temperature - Battery voltage - Brake switch - CAN bus (+) circuits - CAN bus (-) circuits - Camshaft position sensor signal - Clutch Interlock Switch (if equipped) - Crankshaft position sensor - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - EGR position sensor (if equipped) - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Fuel level - Generator (battery voltage) output - Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position) - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Knock sensor(s) (if equipped) - Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped) - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Oil pressure sensor - Output shaft speed sensor - Overdrive/override switch - Oxygen sensors - Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only) - Power ground - Power steering pressure switch (if equipped) - Sensor return - Signal ground - Speed control multiplexed single wire input - Throttle position sensor - Transmission governor pressure sensor - Transmission output speed sensor - Transmission temperature sensor - Vehicle speed inputs from ABS or RWAL system NOTE: PCM Outputs: - A/C clutch relay Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 290 - Auto shutdown (ASD) relay - CAN bus (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and speed control warn. lamp - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - Double start override (if equipped) - EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped) - Electronic throttle control - EVAP canister purge solenoid - Five volt sensor supply (primary) - Five volt sensor supply (secondary) - Fuel injectors - Fuel pump relay - Generator field driver (-) - Generator field driver (+) - Generator lamp (if equipped) - Idle air control (IAC) motor - Ignition coil(s) - CAN bus circuits - Leak detection pump (if equipped) - Natural Vacuum Leak Detection (NVLD) pump (if equipped) - Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Overdrive indicator lamp (if equipped) - Radiator cooling fan (if equipped) - Speed control vacuum solenoid - Speed control vent solenoid - Starter relay - Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Transmission convertor clutch circuit - Transmission 3-4 shift solenoid - Transmission relay - Transmission temperature lamp (if equipped) - Transmission variable force solenoid Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM Programming SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, and the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: NOTE: If the PCM and the SKREEM are replaced at the same time, program the PCM VIN into the PCM first. 1. If applicable first replace the PCM/ECM with the original WCM still connected to the vehicle. 2. Program the new PCM/ECM. (This will ensure the Secret Key Transfer from the original WCM into the new PCM/ECM). 3. Now replace and program the WCM. This will retain the Secret Key from the PCM/ECM back into the new WCM. 4. With the scan tool, select Miscellaneous Functions, WCM/Wireless Control Module. Then select the desired procedure and follow the display on the scan tool. 5. If the vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System program the Placard Pressure Values into the WCM/SKREEM. 6. Ensure all the customer's keys have been programmed into the new module if necessary. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED , ECM REPLACED , WCM REPLACED , or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. NOTE: Before replacing the ECU for a failed driver, control circuit or ground circuit, be sure to check the related component/circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most ECM driver/control circuit failures are caused by internal component failures (i.e. relay and solenoids) and shorted circuits (i.e. pull-ups, drivers and switched circuits). These failures are difficult to detect when a double fault has occurred and only one DTC has set. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When a ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When an ECM (Bosch) and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM (Bosch) 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING THE SKIM CAUTION: Read all notes and cautions for programming procedures. 1. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle. 2. Connect the StarSCAN(R). CAUTION: If the ECM/PCM and SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, the ECM/PCM MUST be programmed before the SKREEM/WCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 293 3. Select "ECU View". 4. Select "WCM Wireless Control Module". 5. Select "Miscellaneous Functions". 6. Select WCM replaced. 7. Enter the PIN when prompted. 8. Verify the correct information. NOTE: If the ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle keys will need to be replaced and programmed to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: - PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 294 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection PCM/ECM Reprogramming 1 PCM / TCM Flash Procedure PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS PCM / TCM FLASH REPROGRAMING This procedure will need to be done when one or more of the following situations are true: 1. A vehicle's Powertrain control module (PCM) has been replaced. 2. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set "P1602 - PCM Not Programmed." 3. An updated calibration or software release is available for either the PCM or TCM ECUs. This procedure assumes that the StarSCAN and StarMOBILE devices are configured to your dealership's network with either a wired or wireless connection. The StarSCAN and StarMOBILE must also be running at the latest operating system and software release level. For more help on how to network your StarSCAN or StarMOBILE reference the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation or at www.dcctools.com, under the Download Center. Table Of Contents 1. SECTION 1 PCM / TCM FLASH PROCEDURE: (below) 2. REQUIRED TOOLS/EQUIPMENT: See: 2 Required Tools / Equipment 3. TECH TIPS and INFORMATION: See: 3 Tech Tips and Information 4. PARTS REQUIRED: See: 4 Parts Required SECTION 1 - PCM / TCM FLASH PROCEDURE If using StarSCAN or StarMOBILE Desktop Client. Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE Using StarSCAN or StarMOBILE Desktop Client (immediately below) If using StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode. Go To REPAIR PROCEDURE Using StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode REPAIR PROCEDURE Using StarSCAN or StarMOBILE Desktop Client NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood of the vehicle and install a battery charger. Verify that the charging rate provides a continuous charge of 13.2 - 13.5 volts. 2. Connect the StarSCAN or StarMOBILE to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 3. Power on the StarSCAN or StarMOBILE. If the StarMOBILE is being used, launch the StarMOBILE Desktop Client and connect to the appropriate StarMOBILE device. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. From the tool's Home screen, a. Select "ECU View" b. Select "PCM" c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the Flash PCM screen for later reference. 5. Program the ECU as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE at the Home screen, select "ECU View" b. Select "PCM" c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New File" and follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 4e, or by using Year/Model/Engine and appropriate emissions selection for the vehicle being worked on. NOTE: If you are not connected to the vehicle, you may also search for flash files by selecting the "Flash Download" button from the Home screen. g. Select "Download to Scantool" h. Once the download is complete, select "Close" and then "Back" i. Highlight the listed calibration, select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. j. When the PCM update is complete, select "OK" k. Verify that the part number at the top of the Flash PCM screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 295 6. Continue to SECTION 2 - ADDITIONAL PCM / TCM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES to complete the process if the ECU has been replaced. 7. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" (p/n 04275086AB) and attach near the VECI label (See SECTION 3 - AUTHORIZED MODIFCATION LABEL (shown below) for details). REPAIR PROCEDURE - Using StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode NOTE: StarMOBILE« Standalone Mode is an efficient way to flash ECUs without having direct access to a network connection. It involves first copying the flash file to the StarMOBILE device which DOES require a network connection. Once the file has been copied to the StarMOBILE device, it can be used in a Standalone mode to flash the ECU WITHOUT a network connection. NOTE: StarMOBILE« does not need to be connected to a vehicle when retrieving a flash file for Standalone Mode. 1. Power on the StarMOBILE. Launch the StarMOBILE Desktop Client and connect to the tool. 2. At the Home screen, select "ECU View" a. Select "PCM" b. Select "More Options' c. Select "ECU Flash" d. Select "Browse for New File" and follow the on screen instructions. e. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the current ECU part number, or by using Year/Model/Engine and appropriate emissions selection for the vehicle being worked on. NOTE: If you are not connected to the vehicle, you may also search for flash files by selecting the "Flash Download" button from the Home screen. 3. From the Flash File List, select the appropriate calibration for the PCM and select "Download to Client" 4. Once the download is complete, hit "OK" and then "Manage Files" Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 296 5. In the Manage Files screen, highlight the downloaded flash file and select "Copy to SM Device". A green checkmark should now appear in the On SM Device column. 6. Exit the StarMOBILE« Desktop Client application. 7. Open the hood of the vehicle and install a battery charger. Verify that the charging rate provides a continuous charge of 13.2 - 13.5 volts. 8. Connect the StarMOBILE to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 9. On the StarMOBILE device, select "Enter Standalone Diagnostic Mode" (use the right function key). NOTE: If a StarMOBILE« Desktop Client is still associated with the device, you will receive the following error: "Your StarMOBILE« device is currently locked by a pc named 'xxxxxxxx' on your network. To remove the lock, close its Desktop Client or reboot this device". 10. Program the ECU as follows: a. Select "ECU View" b. Select "PCM" c. Select "Flash ECU" Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 297 d. Record the ECU part number at the very top of the screen for later reference. e. Highlight the flash file that you want to use. Hit "SELECT" and then "OK". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Once the flash is complete, verify that the part number at the top of the Flash PCM screen has updated to the new part number. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 298 NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. 11. Continue to SECTION 2 - ADDITIONAL PCM / TCM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES to complete the process if the ECU has been replaced. 12. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" (p/n 04275086AB) and attach near the VECI label (See SECTION 3 - AUTHORIZED MODIFCATION LABEL for details). SECTION 2 - ADDITIONAL PCM / TCM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES Find the PCM/TCM Type for the vehicle (below), read and write down the steps, and then go to the step by step instructions (immediately following) for additional information on how to perform these procedures. If a NGC3 or NGC4 PCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. PCM Replaced - if WCM equipped 2. Learn ETC - if ETC equipped 3. Check PCM Odometer 4. Check PCM VIN - if NOT WCM equipped 5. Quicklearn - if EATX equipped If a GPEC PCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. If the vehicle is equipped with a CVT, ensure that the TCM has the latest software calibration available (if the vehicle is not equipped with a CVT, skip to Step 3). 2. PCM Replaced - if WCM equipped 3. Learn ETC 4. Check PCM Odometer 5. Check PCM VIN if NOT WCM equipped 6. TCM Quicklearn - if EATX equipped If a CVT TCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. Initialize CVT If an EGS TCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. Initialize EGS STEP-BY-STEP INSTRUCTIONS Check PCM Odometer From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View". - Select "PCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Check PCM Odometer" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish". Check PCM VIN From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "PCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Check PCM VIN" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Initialize CVT From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "TCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Initialize CVT" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Initialize EGS From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "TCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Initialize EGS" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Learn ETC From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "PCM" Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 299 - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Learn ETC" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" PCM Replaced The vehicle pin (Personal Identification Number) will be required to complete the routine. This information may be obtained in three ways: 1. The original selling invoice 2. DealerCONNECT > Parts > Key Codes 3. Contacting the District Manager. From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "WCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "PCM Replaced" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Quicklearn From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "PCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Quicklearn" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Update CVT TCM From the "Home" screen: - Select "ECU View" - Select "TCM" - Select "More Options" - Select "ECU Flash" - Select "Browse for New File" and follow the on screen instructions. - Highlight the appropriate calibration. - Select "Download to Scantool" - Once the download is complete, select "Close" and then "Back" - Highlight the listed calibration, select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. - When the TCM update is complete, select "OK" - Verify that the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen has updated to the latest level. SECTION 3 - AUTHORIZED MODIFCATION LABEL NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach near the VECI label. 1. Powertrain Control / Transmission Control Module Part Numbers (Insert P/Ns) Used 2. Change Authority: TSB XX--XX 3. Dealer Code: XXXXX 4. Date: XX-XX-XX 2 Required Tools / Equipment PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS REQUIRED TOOLS/EQUIPMENT: PART NUMBER StarSCAN .............................................................................................................................................. PART NUMBER StarMOBILE NPN Battery Charger ..................................................................................... .................................................................................... NPN Battery Charger CH9401 StarSCAN Tool Kit ............................................................................................................................................... CH9801 StarMOBIL Tool Kit Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 300 CH9404 StarSCAN Vehicle Cable ............................................................................................................................ CH9804 StarMOBILE Vehicle Cable ................................................................................................................. ....................................................................... TechCONNECT PC or equivalent 3 Tech Tips and Information PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS TECH TIPS and INFORMATION: 1. StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode is an efficient way to flash ECUs without having direct access to a network connection. It involves first copying the flash file to the StarMOBILE device which DOES require a network connection. Once the file has been copied to the StarMOBILE device, it can be used in a Standalone mode to flash the ECU WITHOUT a network connection. 2. To use the StarMOBILE in Pass-Through Mode requires that your StarMOBILE is connected to the dealerships network via a wired or wireless connection. For more information on how to use the StarMOBILE in Pass-Through Mode see the StarMOBILE training tutorials available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Training Aids' link or at www.dcctools.com, under the Training Aids' link. 3. StarMOBILE does not need to be connected to a vehicle when retrieving a flash file for Standalone Mode. 4. Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The ECU can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. 5. If the flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. 6. Due to the PCM / TCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other ECUs within the vehicle. Some DTCs may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. 7. When replacing a GPEC PCM for a vehicle that is equipped with a CVT, it is extremely important that the PCM and TCM both have the latest software calibrations. 8. Do not allow the battery charger to time out or the charging rate to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 9. The StarSCAN« and StarMOBILE« diagnostic tools fully support Internet connectivity and must be configured for your dealership's network. For help on setting up your StarSCAN / StarMOBILE« for the dealership's network, refer to the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation or at www.dcctools.com, under the download center. 10. The operating software in the StarSCAN and StarMOBILE must be programmed with the latest software release level. The software level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Desktop Client screens. For instructions on how to update your scan tool, refer to the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE Software Update guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation or at www.dcctools.com, under the download center. 4 Parts Required PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS PARTS REQUIRED Qty ....................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. 1 Part Number ................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... 04275086AB DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................. ................................................................ Authorized Modification Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a diagnostic scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use a diagnostic scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. The PCM (1) is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM connectors. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Carefully unplug the four 38-way connectors (2) from PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal > Page 303 3. Remove three PCM mounting bolts (2), and position ground strap (4). Remove PCM from vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal > Page 304 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a diagnostic scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use a diagnostic scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 1. Position PCM (3) to vehicle. 2. Install three PCM mounting bolts (2). 3. Tighten bolts to 3-5 Nm (30-40 in. lbs.). 4. Be sure ground strap (4) is secured both at bottom of PCM, and at inner-fender. 5. Check pin connectors in the PCM. Also check the four 38-way connectors (2) for corrosion or damage. Repair as necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal > Page 305 6. Install the four 38-way connectors (2) to PCM. 7. Connect negative battery cable. 8. Use the diagnostic scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Automatic Shut Down Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 309 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 175 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A A955 ASD RELAY OUTPUT B INTERNAL FUSED B(+) C-D K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 312 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 315 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuel Pump Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 320 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 178 Component : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 5-pin, 12-volt, fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the label on the PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 323 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the electric fuel pump through the fuel pump relay. The fuel pump relay is energized by first applying battery voltage to it when the ignition key is turned ON, and then applying a ground signal to the relay from the PCM. Whenever the ignition key is turned ON, the electric fuel pump will operate. But, the PCM will shut-down the ground circuit to the fuel pump relay in approximately 1-3 seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 326 Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Automatic Shut Down Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 330 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 175 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A A955 ASD RELAY OUTPUT B INTERNAL FUSED B(+) C-D K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 333 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 336 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 342 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 345 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update Technical Service Bulletin # K29 Date: 101012 Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update October 2010 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification K29 Reprogram Occupant Restraint Controller Module Models 2008 - 2010 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles equipped with side airbag inflatable curtains (sales code CGS or CJ3) built through February 23, 2010 (MDH 022300). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) on about 4,800 of the above vehicles may not deploy during an Insurance Institute of Highway Safety side impact test. Repair The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module must be reprogrammed (flashed). Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The special tools are required to perform this repair: Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 355 Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System". Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Group LLC Service Procedure Use one of the two scan tools below to perform this service procedure. A. Reprogram the ORC using wiTECH The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module is "abort - recovery" supported. If this flash process is interrupted/aborted repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 356 NOTE: Use an accurate stand-alone voltmeter. The battery charger voltmeter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the wiPOD to the vehicle data link connector. 3. Place the ignition key in the "Run" position. 4. Launch the wiTECH diagnostic application. 5. Select "ORC" from the vehicle view screen. 6. Select the "FLASH" tab. 7. Select the flash file from the list. 8. Select the "UPDATE ECU" button and follow the screen prompts. If the flash was interrupted or failed, repeat the reprogramming procedure. 9. Clear all DTC's. NOTE: Due to the ORC programming procedure, DTC(s) may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, ABS, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. 10. Place the ignition in the "OFF" position, remove the wiPOD from the data link connector and disconnect the battery charger. B. Reprogram the ORC Using StarMOBILE CAUTION: The StarMOBILE operating software must be at release 10.02 or higher to perform this service procedure. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module is "abort - recovery" supported. If this flash process is interrupted/aborted repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Use an accurate stand-alone voltmeter. The battery charger voltmeter may not be accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarMOBILE scan tool to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 3. Connect the CH9410 StarMOBILE scan tool ethernet cable to the StarMOBILE and the dealer's network drop. 4. Power ON the StarMOBILE scan tool. 5. From the desktop, launch the "StarMOBILE Desktop Client" software. 6. Establish a connection with the StarMOBILE scan tool. 7. Retrieve the old ORC software part number. With the StarMOBILE on the "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select "ORC Occupant Restraint" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 357 e. Record the "Part Number" displayed at the end of the "Restraint flash file for" statement near the top of "Flash ORC" screen for later reference. 8. Download the flash file from the internet to the StarMOBILE. With the StarMOBILE on the "Flash ORC" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. b. Enter your "User id" and "Password", then select "OK". c. If the newly downloaded flash file "Part Number" description: > is the same as the number recorded in Step 7e, then the ORC is up to date. Continue with Step 11. > is different than the number recorded in Step 7e, then the ORC requires an update. Continue with Step 8d. d. Highlight the listed calibration on the StarMOBILE screen. e. Select "Download to Client". f. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select the "Back" arrow. g. Highlight the listed calibration. h. Select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. i. When the update is completed, select "OK". 9. Retrieve the ORC software part number. With the StarMOBILE on "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select "ORC Occupant Restraint" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Verify the "Part Number" (displayed at the end of the "Resident flash file for" statement) has been updated to the new part number. If it has updated, then the flash has been completed successfully. If the flash was interrupted or failed, repeat the reprogramming procedure. 10. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) as follows: NOTE: Due to the CCN programming procedure, DTC(s) may be set in other modules (TCM, ABS, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. a. From the "Home" screen select "System View". b. Select "All DTC's". c. "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. 11. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position and remove the StarMOBILE vehicle cable, and battery charger from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 358 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update Technical Service Bulletin # K29 Date: 101012 Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update October 2010 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification K29 Reprogram Occupant Restraint Controller Module Models 2008 - 2010 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles equipped with side airbag inflatable curtains (sales code CGS or CJ3) built through February 23, 2010 (MDH 022300). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) on about 4,800 of the above vehicles may not deploy during an Insurance Institute of Highway Safety side impact test. Repair The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module must be reprogrammed (flashed). Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The special tools are required to perform this repair: Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 364 Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System". Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Group LLC Service Procedure Use one of the two scan tools below to perform this service procedure. A. Reprogram the ORC using wiTECH The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module is "abort - recovery" supported. If this flash process is interrupted/aborted repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 365 NOTE: Use an accurate stand-alone voltmeter. The battery charger voltmeter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the wiPOD to the vehicle data link connector. 3. Place the ignition key in the "Run" position. 4. Launch the wiTECH diagnostic application. 5. Select "ORC" from the vehicle view screen. 6. Select the "FLASH" tab. 7. Select the flash file from the list. 8. Select the "UPDATE ECU" button and follow the screen prompts. If the flash was interrupted or failed, repeat the reprogramming procedure. 9. Clear all DTC's. NOTE: Due to the ORC programming procedure, DTC(s) may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, ABS, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. 10. Place the ignition in the "OFF" position, remove the wiPOD from the data link connector and disconnect the battery charger. B. Reprogram the ORC Using StarMOBILE CAUTION: The StarMOBILE operating software must be at release 10.02 or higher to perform this service procedure. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module is "abort - recovery" supported. If this flash process is interrupted/aborted repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Use an accurate stand-alone voltmeter. The battery charger voltmeter may not be accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarMOBILE scan tool to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 3. Connect the CH9410 StarMOBILE scan tool ethernet cable to the StarMOBILE and the dealer's network drop. 4. Power ON the StarMOBILE scan tool. 5. From the desktop, launch the "StarMOBILE Desktop Client" software. 6. Establish a connection with the StarMOBILE scan tool. 7. Retrieve the old ORC software part number. With the StarMOBILE on the "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select "ORC Occupant Restraint" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 366 e. Record the "Part Number" displayed at the end of the "Restraint flash file for" statement near the top of "Flash ORC" screen for later reference. 8. Download the flash file from the internet to the StarMOBILE. With the StarMOBILE on the "Flash ORC" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. b. Enter your "User id" and "Password", then select "OK". c. If the newly downloaded flash file "Part Number" description: > is the same as the number recorded in Step 7e, then the ORC is up to date. Continue with Step 11. > is different than the number recorded in Step 7e, then the ORC requires an update. Continue with Step 8d. d. Highlight the listed calibration on the StarMOBILE screen. e. Select "Download to Client". f. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select the "Back" arrow. g. Highlight the listed calibration. h. Select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. i. When the update is completed, select "OK". 9. Retrieve the ORC software part number. With the StarMOBILE on "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select "ORC Occupant Restraint" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Verify the "Part Number" (displayed at the end of the "Resident flash file for" statement) has been updated to the new part number. If it has updated, then the flash has been completed successfully. If the flash was interrupted or failed, repeat the reprogramming procedure. 10. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) as follows: NOTE: Due to the CCN programming procedure, DTC(s) may be set in other modules (TCM, ABS, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. a. From the "Home" screen select "System View". b. Select "All DTC's". c. "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. 11. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position and remove the StarMOBILE vehicle cable, and battery charger from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 367 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 368 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Component ID: 160 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 2 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 3 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 4 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 5-6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 14 - 15 R13 20LG/VT LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 16 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 17 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE 18 - 19 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 R1 20LB/BR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 30 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 31 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 32 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 369 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 370 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 371 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 4 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 5 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 6 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 372 7 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 8 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 9 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 10 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 11 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 12 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 13 - 14 - 15 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 16 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 17 - - 18 - 19 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 20 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 21 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 22 Z104 20BK/LG GROUND 23 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS(-) 24 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 - 32 - Component Location - 22 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 373 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 374 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 375 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 160 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 2 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 3 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 4 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 5-6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 14 - 15 R13 20LG/VT LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 16 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 17 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE 18 - 19 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 R1 20LB/BR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 30 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 31 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 32 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 376 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 377 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 378 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 4 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 5 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 6 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 379 7 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 8 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 9 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 10 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 11 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 12 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 13 - 14 - 15 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 16 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 17 - - 18 - 19 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 20 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 21 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 22 Z104 20BK/LG GROUND 23 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS(-) 24 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 - 32 - Component Location - 22 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 380 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 381 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) is located below the instrument panel center stack in the passenger compartment of the vehicle, where it is secured by three nuts to three studs on a stamped steel mounting bracket welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel just forward of the instrument panel center support bracket. Concealed within a hollow in the center of the die cast aluminum ORC housing is the electronic circuitry of the ORC which includes a microprocessor, an electronic impact sensor, an electronic safing sensor, and an energy storage capacitor. A stamped metal cover plate is secured to the bottom of the ORC housing with screws to enclose and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. An arrow (2) printed on the label on the top of the ORC housing provides a visual verification of the proper orientation of the unit, and should always be pointed toward the front of the vehicle. The ORC housing has three integral flanges with mounting holes. Two are on the corners oriented towards the rear of the vehicle, and one is near the center of the side facing the front of the vehicle. A molded plastic electrical connector (3) with two receptacles, each containing up to 32 terminal pins, exits the left facing side of the ORC housing. These terminal pins connect the ORC to the vehicle electrical system through two dedicated take outs and connectors, one each from the instrument panel and the body wire harnesses. The impact sensor and safing sensor internal to the ORC are calibrated for the specific vehicle, and are only serviced as a unit with the ORC. In addition, there are unique versions of the ORC for vehicles with or without the optional side curtain airbags. The ORC cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 386 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) contains the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) logic circuits and controls all of the SRS components. The ORC uses On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used for control of the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) and for SRS diagnosis and testing through the 16-way data link connector located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Malfunction Lamp / Indicator/Description and Operation/Operation. The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the SRS electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets an active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends electronic messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to turn ON the airbag indicator. An active fault only remains for the duration of the fault, or in some cases for the duration of the current ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault causes a DTC to be stored in memory by the ORC. For some DTCs, if a fault does not recur for a number of ignition cycles, the ORC will automatically erase the stored DTC. For other internal faults, the stored DTC is latched forever. The ORC receives battery current through two circuits; a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit through a fuse in the Junction Block (JB), and a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit through a second fuse in the JB. The ORC receives ground through a ground circuit and take out of the instrument panel wire harness. This take out has a single eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a ground screw to the left side of the floor panel transmission tunnel near the center of the instrument panel center support. These connections allow the ORC to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. The ORC also contains an energy-storage capacitor. When the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions, this capacitor is continually being charged with enough electrical energy to deploy the SRS components for up to one second following a battery disconnect or failure. The purpose of the capacitor is to provide backup SRS protection in case there is a loss of battery current supply to the ORC during an impact. Two sensors are contained within the ORC, an electronic impact sensor and a safing sensor. The ORC also monitors inputs from two remote front impact sensors located on the back of the right and left vertical members of the radiator support near the front of the vehicle. The electronic impact sensors are accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. On vehicles equipped with optional side curtain airbags the ORC also monitors inputs from two additional remote impact sensors located on the floor panel just behind the front seat crossmember beneath the outboard side of the left and right front seats to control deployment of the side curtain airbag units. The safing sensor is an electronic accelerometer sensor within the ORC that provides an additional logic input to the ORC microprocessor. The safing sensor is used to verify the need for a SRS component deployment by detecting impact energy of a lesser magnitude than that of the primary electronic impact sensors, and must exceed a safing threshold in order for the airbags to deploy. Vehicles equipped with optional side curtain airbags, feature a second safing sensor within the ORC to provide confirmation to the ORC microprocessor of side impact forces. This second safing sensor is a bi-directional unit that detects impact forces from either side of the vehicle. Pre-programmed decision algorithms in the ORC microprocessor determine when the deceleration rate as signaled by the impact sensors and the safing sensors indicate an impact that is severe enough to require SRS protection and, based upon the severity of the monitored impact, determines the level of front airbag deployment force required for each front seating position. When the programmed conditions are met, the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to deploy the dual multistage front airbags at the programmed force levels, the front seat belt tensioners and, if the vehicle is so equipped, either side curtain airbag unit. The hard wired inputs and outputs for the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the ORC or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the SRS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the ORC or the electronic controls and communication related to ORC operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The ORC contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an ORC is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper SRS component deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the floor distribution duct from the bottom of the heater-air conditioner housing. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair/Floor Ducts - Removal. 3. Disconnect the instrument panel (1) (C1) and body (3) (C2) wire harness connectors from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2) connector receptacles located on the left facing side of the module. To disconnect the connectors from the ORC: a. Slide the red Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock on the top of the connector toward the left side of the vehicle. b. Depress the edge of the CPA lock closest to the ORC to release the connector latch tab and pull the connector straight away from the ORC connector receptacle. 4. Remove the three nuts (2) that secure the ORC (1) to the studs of the ORC mount (4) welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel (3). 5. Remove the ORC from the ORC mount. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal > Page 389 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The ORC contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an ORC is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper SRS component deployment. 1. Carefully position the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) onto the studs of the ORC mount (4) on the floor panel transmission tunnel. When the ORC is correctly positioned, the arrow on the ORC label will be pointed forward in the vehicle and the ORC connector receptacles will be facing the left side of the vehicle. 2. Install and tighten the three nuts (2) that secure the ORC to the studs of the ORC mount that is welded onto the floor panel transmission tunnel. Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the instrument panel (1) (C1) and body (3) (C2) wire harness connectors to the ORC (2) connector receptacles located on the left facing side of the module. Be certain that the latches and the red CPA locks on both connectors are each fully engaged. 4. Reinstall the floor distribution duct onto the bottom of the heater-air conditioner housing. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair/Floor Ducts - Installation. 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Starter Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 394 Starter Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 185 Component : RELAY-STARTER Connector: Name : RELAY-STARTER Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT B INTERNAL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) C-D T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Starter Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The starter relay is an electromechanical device that switches battery current to the pull-in coil of the starter solenoid when the ignition switch is turned to the Start position. The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment. See the PDC cover for relay identification and location. The starter relay is a International Standards Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. The starter relay cannot be repaired or adjusted. If faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 397 Starter Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ISO relay consists of an electromagnetic coil, a resistor or diode, and three (two fixed and one movable) electrical contacts. The movable (common feed) relay contact is held against one of the fixed contacts (normally closed) by spring pressure. When electromagnetic coil is energized, it draws the movable contact away from normally closed fixed contact, and holds it against the other (normally open) fixed contact. When electromagnetic coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns movable contact to normally closed position. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with electromagnetic coil within relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes produced when coil is de-energized. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Starter Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove cover from Power Distribution Center (PDC) for relay identification and location. 3. Remove starter relay from PDC. 4. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 5. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 400 Starter Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Push down firmly on starter relay until terminals are fully seated into PDC receptacle. 2. Install PDC cover. 3. Connect battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (1). The PCM is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 407 Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Operation OPERATION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. See: Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 408 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 409 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn Control Module: Service and Repair TCM Quick Learn TCM QUICK LEARN The quick learn procedure requires the use of the scan tool. This program allows the electronic transmission system to recalibrate itself. This will provide the proper transmission operation. The quick learn procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed: - Transmission Assembly Replacement - Transmission Control Module Replacement - Solenoid Pack Replacement - Clutch Plate and/or Seal Replacement - Valve Body Replacement or Recondition To perform the Quick Learn Procedure, the following conditions must be met: - The brakes must be applied - The engine speed must be above 500 rpm - The throttle angle (TPS) must be less than 3 degrees - The shift lever position must stay in PARK until prompted to shift to overdrive - The shift lever position must stay in overdrive after the Shift to Overdrive prompt until the scan tool indicates the procedure is complete. - The calculated oil temperature must be above 60° and below 200° Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn > Page 412 Control Module: Service and Repair TCM Drive Learn DRIVE LEARN When a transmission is repaired and a Quick Learn procedure has been performed on the Transmission Control Module (TCM), the following Drive Learn procedure can be performed to fine tune any shifts which are particularly objectionable. NOTE: It is not necessary to perform the complete Drive Learn procedure every time the TCM is Quick Learned. Perform only the portions which target the objectionable shift. LEARN A SMOOTH 1ST NEUTRAL TO DRIVE SHIFT Perform this procedure only if the complaint is for a delayed or harsh shift the first time the transmission is put into gear after the vehicle is allowed to set with the engine not running for at least 10 minutes. Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 1st N-D UD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be between 27-43° C (80-110° F). 1. Start the engine only when the engine and ignition have been off for at least ten (10) minutes. 2. With the vehicle at a stop and the service brake applied, record the 1st N-D UD CVI while performing a Neutral to Drive shift. The 1st N-D UD CVI accounts for air entrapment in the UD clutch that may occur after the engine has been off for a period of time. 3. Repeat STEP 1 and STEP 2 until the recorded 1st N-D UD CVI value stabilizes. NOTE: It is important that this procedure be performed when the transmission temperature is between 27-43° C (80-110° F). If this procedure takes too long to complete fully for the allowed transmission oil temperature, the vehicle may be returned to the customer with an explanation that the shift will improve daily during normal vehicle usage. The TCM also learns at higher oil temperatures, but these values (line pressure correction values) are not available for viewing on the scan tool. LEARN A SMOOTH NEUTRAL TO DRIVE GARAGE SHIFT Perform this procedure if the complaint is for a delayed or harsh shift when the transmission is put into gear after the vehicle has had its first shift. Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the Norm N-D UD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be between 27-43° C (80-110° F) to learn the UD CVI. Additional learning occurs at temperatures as low as -18° C (0° F) and as high as 93° C (200° F). This procedure may be performed at any temperature that experiences poor shift quality. Although the UD CVI may not change, shift quality should improve. 1. Start the vehicle engine and shift to drive. 2. Move the vehicle forward to a speed of at least 16 km/h (10 MPH) and come to a stop. This ensures no air is present in the UD hydraulic circuit. 3. Perform repeated N-D shifts at a stop while pausing in Neutral for at least 2-3 seconds and monitor Norm N-D UD CVI volume until the value stabilizes. The value will change during the N-D shift. This is normal since the UD value is different for the N-D shift then the normal value shown which is used for 4-3 coastdown and kickdowns. Perform repeated shifts in this temperature range until the Norm N-D UD CVI value stabilizes and the N-D shifts become smooth. LEARN THE 1ST 2-3 SHIFT AFTER A RESTART OR SHIFT TO REVERSE Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 1st 2-3 shift OD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 27° C (80° F). 1. With the vehicle engine running, select reverse gear for over 2 seconds. 2. Shift the transmission to Drive and accelerate the vehicle from a stop at a steady 15 degree throttle opening and perform a 2-3 shift while noting the 1st 2-3 OD CVI. 3. Repeat STEP 1 and STEP 2 until the 1st 2-3 upshift becomes smooth and the 1st 2-3 OD CVI stabilizes. LEARN A SMOOTH 2-3 AND 3-4 UPSHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the OD and 4C CVI's. 1. Accelerate the vehicle from a stop at a steady 15 degree throttle opening and perform multiple 1-2, 2-3, and 3-4 upshifts. The 2nd 2-3 shift following a restart or shift to reverse will be shown during the shift as a value between the 1st 2-3 OD CVI and the normal OD CVI. Updates to the normal OD CVI will occur after the 2nd shift into 3rd gear, following a restart or shift to reverse. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 2-3 and 3-4 shifts become smooth and the OD and 4C CVI become stable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn > Page 413 LEARN A SMOOTH 4-3 COASTDOWN AND PART THROTTLE 4-3 KICKDOWN NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the UD shift volume. 1. At a vehicle speed between 64-97 km/h (40-60 MPH), perform repeated 4-3 kickdown shifts. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the UD volume becomes somewhat stable and the shift becomes smooth. LEARN A SMOOTH 1-2 UPSHIFT AND 3-2 KICKDOWN Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 2C shift volume. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). 1. With a vehicle speed below 48 km/h (30 MPH) and the transmission in 3rd gear, perform multiple 3-2 kickdowns. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 3-2 kickdowns become smooth and the 2C CVI becomes stable. LEARN A SMOOTH MANUAL 2-1 PULLDOWN SHIFT AS WELL AS A NEUTRAL TO REVERSE SHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the LR volume. 1. With the vehicle speed around 40-48 km/h (25-30 MPH) in Manual 2nd, perform manual pulldowns to Low or 1st gear at closed throttle. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the LR CVI becomes stable and the manual 2-1 becomes smooth. LEARN A SMOOTH NEUTRAL TO REVERSE SHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). 1. With the vehicle at a stop, perform Neutral to Reverse shifts until the shift is smooth. An unlearned Neutral to Reverse shift may be harsh or exhibit a double bump. 2. If any of the shifts are still not smooth after the clutch volume stabilizes, an internal transmission problem may be present. LEARN A SMOOTH 4-5 UPSHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the Alt 2C CVI. 1. Accelerate the vehicle through 88 km/h (55 mph) at a steady 10-15 degree throttle opening and perform multiple 4-5 upshifts. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 4-5 shift become smooth and the Alt 2C CVI become stable. There is a separate 2C volume used and learned for 4-5 shifts, 2CA. It is independent of the 2C CVI learned on 3-2 kickdowns. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Transmission Control Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 417 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 188 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 Z915 20BK GROUND 86 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 87 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay. The relay is supplied fused B+ voltage, energized by the TCM, and is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when the transmission is in normal operating mode. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 420 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay. When the relay is "off", no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in "limp-in" mode. After a controller reset, the TCM energizes the relay. Prior to this, the TCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking for no voltage at the switched battery terminals. After this is verified, the voltage at the solenoid pack pressure switches is checked. After the relay is energized, the TCM monitors the terminals to verify that the voltage is greater than 3 volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 426 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: f‘~ STACK: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 427 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Front Control Module (FCM) utilizes the input from the transfer case mounted mode sensor, the instrument panel mounted selector switch, and the following information from the vehicle's CAN bus to determine if a shift is allowed. - Engine RPM and Vehicle Speed - Diagnostic Requests - Manual Transmission Clutch Switch - Brake Applied - PRNDL - Ignition Status - ABS Messages Once the FCM determines that a requested shift is allowed, it actuates the bi-directional shift motor as necessary to achieve the desired transfer case operating mode. The FCM also monitors the mode sensor while controlling the shift motor to determine the status of the shift attempt. Several items can cause the requested shift not to be completed. If the FCM has recognized a fault (DTC) of some variety, it will begin operation in one of four Functionality Levels. These levels are: - Level Zero - Normal Operation. - Level One - Only Mode Shifts Are Allowed. - Level Two - Only Mode Shifts and Shifts Into LOW Are Allowed (No Neutral Shifts Are Allowed). - Level Three - No Shifts Are Allowed The FCM can also be operating in one of three possible power modes. These power modes are: - Full Power Mode is the normal operational mode of the module. This mode is achieved by normal CAN bus traffic being present and the ignition being in the RUN position. Reduced Power Mode will be entered when the ignition has been powered off. In this state, the module will shut down power supplied to external devices, and to electronic interface inputs and outputs. From this state the module can enter either Sleep Mode or Full Power Mode. To enter this mode, the module must receive an ignition message denoting that the ignition is off, or not receive any messages for 5 ±0.5 seconds. To exit this mode, the module must receive one ignition message that denotes that the ignition is in the RUN position. - Sleep Mode will be entered, from the Reduced Power Mode, when no CAN traffic has been sensed for 20 ±1 seconds. If during Sleep Mode the module detects CAN bus traffic, it will revert to the Reduced Power mode while monitoring for ignition messages. It will remain in this state as long as there is traffic other than run or start messages, and will return to Sleep mode if the bus goes without traffic for 20 ±1 seconds. SHIFT REQUIREMENTS If the FCM is in full power mode and at functionality level zero, it uses the following criteria to determine if a shift is allowed. If any of the driver controllable conditions are not met once the shift request is recognized, the FCM may illuminate one or more of the 4WD system message icons in the instrument cluster display. Mode shifts will be allowed regardless of transmission gear or vehicle speed, whenever the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - A change in the Selector switch state indicates that a mode shift has been requested. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. Range shifts will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - A change in the Selector Switch state indicating a range shift has been requested. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal must be recognized for at least 1.5 seconds ±100 msec. (Automatic transmissions only) - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Clutch signal is recognized for 500 msec ± 50 msec (Manual transmissions only). - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 428 - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. A shift into transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position, engine off. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 4.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. A shift out of transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. LAMP STRATEGY The following strategy for the FCM controlled transfer case system uses the instrument cluster VF display's 4LOCK, 4LO, Service 4WD, and Mode Switch Transfer Case Neutral LED. Flashing any of the lamps or LED is accomplished at a 2Hz rate. NOTE: There is no lamp for the 2WD or AWD position. If no 4WD system message icons are illuminated in the instrument cluster, the operator is to assume that the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD position. - 2WD or AWD to 4LO - Successful shifts will flash 4LO during a shift, then after the 4LO position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 2WD or AWD to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will flash 4LOCK during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LOCK lamp is flashing. - 4LOCK to 4LO - Successful shifts will turn off the 4LOCK lamp and flash 4LO during a shift, then after the 4LO position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In the blocked condition, turn off 4LOCK and flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, the 4LOCK lamp remains illuminated solid and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 4LOCK to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts will flash the 4LOCK lamp during a shift, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, turn off the 4LOCK lamp. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LOCK lamp is flashing. - 4LO to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts will flash the 4LO lamp during a shift, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, turn off the 4LO lamp. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 4LO to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will turn off the 4LO lamp and flash 4LOCK during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In the blocked condition, turn off 4LO and flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, the 4LO lamp remains illuminated solid and 4LOCK is flashing. - 2WD or AWD to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is depressed. - 4LOCK to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp is illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 429 depressed. - 4LO to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp is illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is depressed. - NEUTRAL to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, no lamps are illuminated. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, Phase 2 shifting will continue until the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, no lamp is illuminated, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while the push button is depressed, - Neutral to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will flash the 4LOCK lamp during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In a blocked condition, the 4LOCK lamp will flash during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, continue to flash the 4LOCK, Phase 2 shifting will continue until the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, turn off the 4LOCK lamp, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while the push button is depressed. - NEUTRAL to 4LO - Successful shifts will flash the 4LO lamp during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In a blocked condition, the 4LO lamp will flash during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, continue to flash 4LO, Phase 2 shifting will continue until transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, turn off the 4LO lamp, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp solid. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while push the button is depressed. SHIFT SEQUENCES (PHASE 1 SHIFTS) Once all the driver controllable conditions for the requested shift have been met, the FCM begins a shift timer with a maximum duration of 1 second per mode sensor target segment. If the shift timer expires before the FCM recognizes to correct mode sensor position, the shift is considered to have been blocked. The blocked shift will increment the blocked shift counter by one. The FCM strategy for handling blocked shifts will be described later. The process the FCM performs for the various shifts will be described first. RANGE AND MODE SHIFTS The process for performing all the range and mode shifts are the same. The following steps describe the process. - Allow time for Selector Switch debounce; 250 msec ±50 msec. - Activate/deactivate the 4WD system message icons in the instrument cluster as necessary. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec per mode sensor target segment in the destination gear's direction while monitoring the mode sensor. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor position is recognized. - Solidly illuminate the achieved position's instrument panel icon, unless the target is 2WD or AWD. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor position is not reached after the shift timer expires (i.e.: a blocked shift motor or other condition exists), the FCM will stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. per mode sensor target segment. The FCM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. The exception to the preceding sequence is when a shift from 4LO to 2WD or AWD is requested. If 2WD or AWD is requested from the 4LO position, the transfer case is first driven to the 4LOCK position. If the 4LOCK position is reached, the transfer case is then driven back to the 2WD or AWD position and the shift is considered complete. SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL The following steps describe the process for a shift out of NEUTRAL. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec toward the transfer case 4LOCK mode position while monitoring the mode sensor position. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor position is recognized. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor position is not received after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The FCM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. - When the Neutral button is released, if the 4LOCK position is the desired position, the shift is complete. Illuminate the 4LOCK message icon. - Otherwise when the Neutral button is released, if all of the shift requirements are being met then engage the shift motor towards the desired position for 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel. (if requirements for shifting are not met, illuminate the 4LOCK message icon and flash the destination message icon as an indication to the driver that all of the driver controllable shift conditions are not being met). If this requires another range or mode shift, begin the range/mode shift process. - If the desired mode sensor position is not achieved after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), refer to the section on Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 430 Blocked Shift Strategy, also known as Phase 2 shifts (below). NEUTRAL BLOCKED SHIFT STRATEGY (PHASE 2 SHIFTS) When a shift is commanded out of neutral, the shift motor will be driven towards its destination position, except in the case of shifting out of NEUTRAL if 4LO was selected (the transfer case will shift to the 4LOCK position first, before proceeding to 4LO). If the shift is blocked on the way to the destination, the FCM may attempt to drive the motor back to the original position. This process will be allowed to occur 5 times. If the transfer case has reached a non-NEUTRAL position during the shift re-attempts, the message icon for the achieved gear position is illuminated and the shift attempts are stopped. To re-attempt the desired shift, the selector switch will need to be rotated to the current position until the switch debounce timer expires then a shift will need to be requested again. At the end of the 5th blocked attempt, the shift motor is driven towards the last known mode sensor position. If this motor drive allows the transfer case to reach the 2WD or AWD position, the shift is considered complete and the shift attempts are ended. If the mode sensor is in the NEUTRAL region at the expiration of the shift timer, the FCM will continue to make the shift attempts according to the blocked shift strategy independent of whether or not the driver controlled conditions are met. For shifts from NEUTRAL, if all 5 attempts fail to reach the desired position (which by default is 4LOCK), the motor will be driven to stall in the direction of 4LOCK or 4LO, depending on the achieved position. Otherwise, the transfer case will be driven in the direction opposite the last attempt with the desired target being 4LOCK or 4LO. If the transfer case reaches the 2WD or AWD position when being driven in the 4LOCK direction, then one final 1.0 second drive toward 4LOCK is attempted. If the transfer case then reaches the 4LOCK position, the shift is considered complete and the 4LOCK message icon is illuminated. If the transfer case is still the 2WD or AWD position, the shift is considered complete and all message icons are extinguished. NEUTRAL DRIFT SHIFT STRATEGY (PHASE 3 SHIFTS) NOTE: If after the 5th blocked shift and reversal attempt, if the transfer case position is in the NEUTRAL or other undesired region, shift attempts will continue until a non-NEUTRAL or a desired position is reached. Phase 3 is a series of shifts whose intent is to escape from an undesired position that has been reached outside of a shift. A perceived drift of the transfer case into a non-target region without the FCM driving the shift motor will initiate a phase 3 shift. Phase 3 will be initiated by any non-target region with the exception of a position greater then encoder_4LO_min or less then encoder_4LOCK_max. Whenever these encoder readings have been seen for defined period of time, Phase 3 shifting will begin. The shifts in a given Phase 3 shifting event are always in a single-direction, toward the target region from which the drift occurred. These shifts are performed without regard to shift conditions. The timing of each shift should follow the outline of the Phase 1 forward attempts, allowing the shift timer to reach the target. Between each attempt, there is a calibrated delay. After each attempt the shift counter and the Phase 3 max shifts counter will be updated. SHIFT REVERSAL TARGETS If the shift timer expires (1.0 seconds per mode sensor position) and the transfer case has not reached the desired position, all shifts will attempt to return to their original position with the exceptions of: - If the intended shift is going to the High rail from Low and can't make it, but it can make the 2WD or AWD position, the motor stops at that position. The FCM will not attempt to cross back over NEUTRAL if it does not have to. This means that there was a block on the first attempt to go to 4LOCK and the transfer case has made it through NEUTRAL to a known good position, then the motor will go back only to the 2WD or AWD position and execute the remainder of the attempts from there. - For shifts out of NEUTRAL, any time a shift is commanded out of NEUTRAL, the system needs to get out. The FCM should never go to NEUTRAL unless the driver is commanding it and all required conditions are being met. ENCODER DRIFT CORRECTION Whenever a shift is completed, the FCM stores the position in memory as the transfer case's intended position. The FCM continuously monitors the mode sensor and if the mode sensor drifts toward into a NEUTRAL region sensor position for 2.0 seconds, the FCM will perform a motor drive to correct the drift. The transfer case will be driven toward the intended position for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. The FCM will wait for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeat the attempt to shift to the desired position. This will continue until the intended position is reached. SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL The FCM will have the ability to vary the speed of the transfer case motor through pulse width modulation (PWM). It is PWM from 0 to 100% at 100Hz. The PWM will function as follows: - Apply an initial duty cycle (APPROXIMATELY 94%) to shift motor control wires. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 431 - Control the acceleration of the shift motor by increasing the applied duty cycle at a specified rate. - Control the deceleration of the shift motor by updating the applied duty cycle to the shift motor control wires at a specified rate based upon the difference between the desired position and the current position. SHIFT ATTEMPT LIMIT To protect the transfer case system, the FCM will impose a limit on the number of shifts that can occur over a calibrated time period. The system will monitor the number of mode sensor position changes that occur in any 25 second time period. If the number of changes is 10 or greater, the system will go into a default mode. The default mode of operation for shifting is that the number of allowed changes permitted to occur will be 3 over each 15 second ±100 msec calibrated window of time. After 5 minutes ±100 msec, the motor can be assumed to have cooled down and the system will revert to normal operation. The following rules also apply to the shift limit: - The attempt limit will not prevent shifts coming out of NEUTRAL, they will be allowed regardless of the counter/timer. - Any shift that is in progress when the counter reaches a maximum count in time will be allowed to complete before the default mode is entered. Position changes during this period will not be counted towards the default mode limit. - A block, regardless of the direction, whether towards destination or back towards reversal target (shift timer expiring), will count as a value of 2 position changes towards the 10 position changes to go into default mode as defined above. Current attempt limit values are 10 transitions in 25 seconds and default mode values are 1 transition every 10 seconds for 5 minutes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Rear Window Defogger Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 436 Heated Glass Element Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 183 Component : RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Connector: Name : RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A C15 12DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT B F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) C-D C115 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The rear window defogger (EBL) relay (1) is an International Standards Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal functions and patterns (2). The EBL relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current through a fuse located in the integrated power module (IPM) to the rear window defogger grid. The EBL relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a ground path by the control circuitry within the front control module (FCM). The EBL relay is located in the IPM in the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 439 Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The rear window defogger (EBL) relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input controlled by the front control module (FCM) to control the high current output to the rear window defogger grid lines. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the rear window defogger grid lines. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The EBL relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the integrated power module (IPM). The inputs and outputs of the EBL relay include: - The common feed terminal (E) receives fused battery current through a B(+) circuit at all times. - The coil ground terminal (D) receives a ground input from the FCM through the EBL control circuit only when the FCM electronically pulls the control circuit to ground. - The coil battery terminal (B) receives fused battery current through the ignition switch circuit only when the switch is in RUN. - The normally open terminal (A) provides battery current to the rear window defogger grid lines through the EBL relay output circuit only when the EBL relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (C) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the EBL relay coil is de-energized. The EBL micro-relay cannot be repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard micro-relay and for complete rear window defogger (EBL) wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Heated Glass Element Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Open the cover of the integrated power module (IPM) (1) located in the engine compartment. NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the IPM cover for EBL relay location. 3. Remove the EBL relay (2) from the IPM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 442 Heated Glass Element Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the integrated power module (IPM) cover for EBL relay location. 1. Position the EBL relay (2) into the proper receptacle of the IPM (1) located in the engine compartment. 2. Align the EBL relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the IPM receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the cover of the IPM. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Wiper High/Low and On/Off Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper High/Low Component ID: 189 Component : RELAY-WIPER HIGH/LOW Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER HIGH/LOW Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL 85 INTERNAL WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 W4 14BR/OR WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 87A W3 14BR/WT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 449 Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper On/Off Component ID: 190 Component : RELAY-WIPER ON/OFF Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER ON/OFF Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL 85 INTERNAL WIPER ON/OFF RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87A Z904 14BK GROUND Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Relay-Wiper High/Low Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Relay-Wiper High/Low Description DESCRIPTION The wiper high/low relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The wiper high/low relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The wiper high/low relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The wiper high/low relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) to control a high current output to the front wiper motor. The movable common feed contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This electromagnetic field draws the movable relay contact point away from the fixed normally closed contact point, and holds it against the fixed normally open contact point. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact point back against the fixed normally closed contact point. A resistor is connected in parallel with the relay coil in the relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The wiper high/low relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector receptacle in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the wiper high/low relay include: Common Feed Terminal - The common feed terminal (30) is connected to the output of the wiper on/off relay at all times through the wiper on/off relay output circuit. - Coil Ground Terminal - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a control output of the Front Control Module (FCM) through a wiper high/low relay control circuit. The FCM controls wiper motor operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Coil Battery Terminal - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current when the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. - Normally Open Terminal - The normally open terminal (87) is connected to the high speed brush of the wiper motor through a wiper high/low relay high speed output circuit, and is connected to the high speed brush whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal - The normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to the low speed brush of the wiper motor through a wiper high/low relay low speed output circuit, and is connected to the low speed brush whenever the relay is de-energized. The wiper high/low relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 452 Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Relay-Wiper On/Off Description DESCRIPTION The wiper on/off relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The wiper on/off relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The wiper on/off relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The wiper on/off relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) to control a high current output to the wiper motor. The movable common feed contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This electromagnetic field draws the movable relay contact point away from the fixed normally closed contact point, and holds it against the fixed normally open contact point. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact point back against the fixed normally closed contact point. A resistor is connected in parallel with the relay coil in the relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The wiper on/off relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector receptacle in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the wiper on/off relay include: Common Feed Terminal - The common feed terminal (30) is connected to the common feed terminal of the wiper high/low relay at all times through the wiper on/off relay output circuit. - Coil Ground Terminal - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a control output of the Front Control Module (FCM) through a wiper on/off relay control circuit. The FCM controls wiper motor operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Coil Battery Terminal - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current at all times from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. - Normally Open Terminal - The normally open terminal (87) receives battery current at all times from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit, and provides battery current to the wiper on/off relay output circuit whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal - The normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to ground at all times through a take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness with an eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a screw to the front end sheet metal, and is connected to the wiper on/off relay output circuit whenever the relay is de-energized. The wiper on/off relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID: 302 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z384 20BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 458 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 459 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID: 302 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z384 20BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 460 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic market vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the left side of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel below the left rear corner of the inner hood panel reinforcement. The underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 463 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export market vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic market vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kOhm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the FCM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the FCM. The FCM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export market vehicle theft or domestic market remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch - Removal Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the left outboard end of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel, squeeze the two hood ajar switch latch tabs (2) together and pull the switch upward out of the mounting hole (1). 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the mounting hole far enough to access and disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the switch connector receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch - Removal > Page 466 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the hood ajar switch (2) near the mounting hole (1) in the left outboard end of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the switch connector receptacle. 3. Insert the switch into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 311 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22VT/BR MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 471 Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 312 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22VT/BR MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Remote Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two rocker-type switches are mounted in the sides of the rear (instrument panel side) steering wheel trim cover. The switch on the left spoke is the seek switch and has seek up, seek down, and preset station advance functions. The switch on the right spoke is the volume control switch and has volume up, and volume down functions. The switch on the right spoke also includes a "mode" control that allows the driver to sequentially select AM radio, FM radio, cassette player, CD player or satellite radio. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 474 Remote Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The six switches in the two remote radio switch units are normally open, resistor multiplexed momentary switches that are hard wired to the Instrument cluster through the clockspring. The instrument cluster sends a five volt reference signal to both switch units on one circuit, and senses the status of all of the switches by reading the voltage drop on a second circuit. When the instrument cluster senses an input (voltage drop) from any one of the remote radio switches, it sends the proper switch status messages on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to the radio. The electronic circuitry within the radio is programmed to respond to these remote radio switch status messages by adjusting the radio settings as requested. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 475 Remote Switch: Testing and Inspection REMOTE SWITCHES Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Remove the remote radio switch(es) (1) and (2) from the steering wheel See: Service and Repair/Removal. 2. Use an ohmmeter to check the switch resistances as shown in the Remote Radio Switch test table. If the remote radio switch resistances are not as indicated, replace the inoperative switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Remote Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver side airbag (5) from the steering wheel (1) See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal. 3. Remove the speed control switch (3) or (6) located on the same side of the steering wheel as the remote radio switch that is being serviced See: Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control/Cruise Control Switch/Service and Repair/Removal. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector from the connector receptacle of the remote radio switch. 5. Disengage the four remote radio switch latches that secure the switch to the inside of the mounting hole in the steering wheel rear trim cover. 6. From the outside of the steering wheel rear trim cover, remove the remote radio switch (2) from the trim cover. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 478 Remote Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the remote radio switch (2) to the mounting hole on the outside of the steering wheel rear trim cover. Be certain that the connector receptacle is oriented toward the bottom of the switch and pointed toward the center of the steering wheel. 2. Press firmly and evenly on the remote radio switch until each of the switch latches is fully engaged in the mounting hole of the steering wheel rear trim cover. 3. Connect the steering wheel wire harness connector to the connector receptacle of the remote radio switch. 4. Install the speed control switch (3) or (6) onto the steering wheel See: Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control/Cruise Control Switch/Service and Repair/Installation. 5. Install the driver side airbag (5) to the steering wheel See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID: 302 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z384 20BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 484 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 485 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID: 302 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z384 20BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 486 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic market vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the left side of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel below the left rear corner of the inner hood panel reinforcement. The underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 489 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export market vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic market vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kOhm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the FCM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the FCM. The FCM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export market vehicle theft or domestic market remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch - Removal Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the left outboard end of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel, squeeze the two hood ajar switch latch tabs (2) together and pull the switch upward out of the mounting hole (1). 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the mounting hole far enough to access and disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the switch connector receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch - Removal > Page 492 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the hood ajar switch (2) near the mounting hole (1) in the left outboard end of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the switch connector receptacle. 3. Insert the switch into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Component ID: 323 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 3 Z940 20BK GROUND 4 Z13 16BK/WT GROUND 5 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 7 Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP 8 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 497 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 2 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 3 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 4 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 5 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 498 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 499 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 324 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 2 Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 3 Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP 4 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 5 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 6 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 7 Z974 20BK/OR GROUND 8 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 500 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Component ID: 323 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 3 Z940 20BK GROUND 4 Z13 16BK/WT GROUND 5 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 7 Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP 8 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 503 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 2 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 3 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 4 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 5 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 504 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 505 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 324 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 2 Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 3 Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP 4 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 5 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 6 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 7 Z974 20BK/OR GROUND 8 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 506 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A window/lock switch located in each front door trim panel. The driver's side window/lock switch includes the following: - Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock out the window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be operated only from the drivers door switch. - Window Switches - A two-way, momentary window switch for the driver side front door also has a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side front door window. In addition to the window switch for its own door, the window/lock switch houses individual switches for each passenger door window. The passenger side window/lock switch includes the following: - Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the lock system. - Window Switch - A two-way, momentary window switch for the passenger side front door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 509 Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The driver side window/lock switch combines a lock switch, a driver window switch with an Auto-down feature, master switches for each passenger door window, and a window lockout switch. Lock Switch The lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the instrument cluster. Each lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to the instrument cluster input, which allows the instrument cluster to sense the switch position. Based upon the lock switch input, the instrument cluster controls the battery and ground feed outputs to the individual lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the lock switch is connected to battery current through the window circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Window Switches The window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the windows will operate whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger window switch in the window/lock switch provides battery current and ground to the individual window switches on each passenger door so that the window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respective window motor. The switch for the driver side front door window includes an auto-down feature. When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door window is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position window lockout switch in the window/lock switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current feed to each of the individual passenger window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power windows can only be operated from the switches in the window/lock switch. The window lockout switch also controls the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger window switch so that the switch will not be illuminated when it is locked out. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 510 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the window/lock switch window and lock switches receive battery current through the circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If only one LED in the switch is inoperative, replace the switch. If the driver side front door window operates in a normal manner, but the Auto-Down feature is inoperative, replace the window/lock switch. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the window/lock switch from the door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Removal. 3. Disconnect the door wire harness connectors from the switch. 4. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switches in each switch position. If not OK, replace the window/lock switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using a trim stick, start at the rear of the switch and pry up to remove from door trim panel. 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors from switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 513 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to switch. 2. Insert front end of switch into door trim panel opening. Press into place. 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Component ID: 305 Component : SWITCH-MIRROR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MIRROR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 P76 20TN/RD MIRROR COMMON DRIVER 4 Z13 20BK/WT GROUND 5 A940 16RD FUSED B(+) 6 P72 20TN/DG PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER 7 P71 20DB DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER 8 P74 20TN/YL PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER 9 P75 20TN/LG DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER 10 - Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 517 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 518 Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 305 Component : SWITCH-MIRROR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MIRROR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 P76 20TN/RD MIRROR COMMON DRIVER 4 Z13 20BK/WT GROUND 5 A940 16RD FUSED B(+) 6 P72 20TN/DG PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER 7 P71 20DB DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER 8 P74 20TN/YL PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER 9 P75 20TN/LG DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER 10 - Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 519 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Mirror Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A power mirror switch is located on the driver's door trim panel, attached to the window/lock switch. The power mirror switch includes the following: - Power Mirror Selector Switch - A three-position rotary joystick switch selects the right or left power mirror for adjustment, or turns the power mirror system Off in the center position. - Power Mirror Adjustment Switch - A momentary joystick directional switch allows the driver to adjust the selected power mirror in the Up, Down, Right or Left directions. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 522 Power Mirror Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The power mirror switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a fuse in the IPM on a fused B(+) circuit so that the power mirrors remain operational regardless of the ignition switch position. A rotary joystick selector switch has three positions, one to select the right mirror, one to select the left mirror, and a center Off position. After the right or left mirror is selected, the joystick is moved to move the selected mirror Up, Down, Right or Left. The power mirror switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to each of the four (two in each mirror head) power mirror motors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 523 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection SWITCH - MIRROR 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power mirror switch See: Service and Repair/Removal. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch. 4. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switch in each switch position. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the window/lock switch See: Power Door Lock Switch/Service and Repair/Removal. 3. Remove the mirror switch from the window/lock switch assembly by twisting switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 526 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install mirror switch to window/lock switch assembly. 2. Connect wire harness connectors to switches. 3. Install window/lock switch assembly See: Power Door Lock Switch/Service and Repair/Installation. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations Component ID: 316 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 2 Z975 12BK GROUND 3-4 P21 10LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER 5-6-- 7-8 P19 10LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER 9 P15 10LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 10 P17 10LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 11 P13 10LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER 12 P11 10LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 530 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 531 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 316 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 2 Z975 12BK GROUND 3-4 P21 10LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER 5-6-- 7-8 P19 10LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER 9 P15 10LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 10 P17 10LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 11 P13 10LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER 12 P11 10LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 532 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The power seat can be adjusted in six different ways using the power seat switch. The switch is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion side shield. The individual switches in the power seat switch unit cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or inoperative, the entire power seat switch assembly must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 535 Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When a power switch control knob or knobs are actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the switch contacts to the power seat track or recliner adjuster motor. The selected adjuster motor operates to move the seat track or recliner through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached. When the switch is moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor are reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the adjuster motor to run in the opposite direction. No power seat switch should be held applied in any direction after the adjuster has reached its travel limit. The power seat adjuster motors each contain a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect them from overload. However, consecutive or frequent resetting of the circuit breaker must not be allowed to continue, or the motor may be damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 536 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER SEAT SWITCH For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. See: Service and Repair/Power Seat Switch - Removal for the appropriate procedure. 3. With assistance from another person, use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the power seat switches in each position. See the Power Seat Switch schematic and Continuity chart. If OK, See: Body and Frame/Seats/Seat Track/Testing and Inspection for additional diagnostic procedures. If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch assembly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 537 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Switch - Removal Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Power Seat Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (4) that secures the recliner lever (5) to the recliner mechanism release shaft on the outboard side of the driver side front seat cushion side shield (2). 3. Pull the recliner lever (5) off of the recliner mechanism release shaft. 4. Remove the two screws (3) and (6) that secure the driver side seat cushion side shield (2) to the outboard seat cushion frame. 5. Pull the driver side seat cushion side shield (2) away from the seat cushion frame far enough to access the power seat switch assembly (1) wire harness connector. 6. Unplug the wire harness connector from the power seat switch module. 7. Remove the seat cushion side shield and power seat switch module from the seat as a unit. 8. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the power seat switch (2) to the inside of the seat cushion side shield (1). 9. Remove the power seat switch from the seat cushion side shield. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Switch - Removal > Page 540 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Power Seat Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the two screws (3) that secure the power seat switch (2) to the inside of the seat cushion side shield (1). 2. Install the wire harness connector on the power seat switch assembly. 3. position the seat cushion side shield (2) and power seat switch assembly (1) onto the seat frame. 4. Install the seat cushion side shield screws (3) and (6). 5. Install the recliner lever (5) on the recliner mechanism release shaft. 6. Install the screw (4) that secures the recliner lever (5) to the recliner mechanism release shaft on the outboard side of the driver side front seat. 7. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat Heater-Driver Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat Heater-Driver Component ID: 314 Component : SWITCH-SEAT HEATER-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT HEATER-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z737 18BK/LB GROUND 2-3 P187 18LG/BR DRIVER SEAT HEATED LED DRIVER 4 F525 16TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 5-6 F525 16TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat Heater-Driver > Page 545 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat Heater-Passenger Component ID: 315 Component : SWITCH-SEAT HEATER-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT HEATER-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z737 18BK/LB GROUND 2-3 P188 18LG/VT PASSENGER SEAT HEATED LED DRIVER 4 F525 16TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 5-6 F525 16TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Momentary contact push button switch/modules mounted in the front face of the center console storage bin operate the heated seat system. Each heated seat switch/module has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Pressing the switch/module button initiates heat. Heat remains on until switched off or until the ignition is turned off. If switched off by the ignition, a switch/module button must be pressed to restart heating. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated seat system. If any of the heated seat elements are inoperative or damaged one or more of the LED lamps in the switch/module for the effected seat will flash. The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch/module cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are faulty or damaged, or the switch/module is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch/module assembly must be replaced. See: Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch Removal for the switch/module replacement procedure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 548 Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated seat system. The heated seat switch/modules receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after two hours of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue indefinitely until the switch/module button is pushed to turn the system off. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Switch - Removal Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/modules from the console by gently prying up from the top edge of the switch/module bezel. Take care not to scratch or damage the console or bezel in any way. 3. Disconnect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 4. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/module (3) from the bezel (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Switch - Removal > Page 551 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Align the tabs of the switch/module to the bezel and gently push together until the tabs are securely in place. 2. Connect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 3. Gently push the heated seat switch/module bezel into the mounting hole in the center console until it is securely in place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 320 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Gender : FEMALE Pin Circuit Description 1 Q554 18OR/TN SUNROOF CLOSED 2 Z138 18BK/VT GROUND 3 Q553 18OR/YL SUNROOF OPEN 4 Q555 18OR/LB SUNROOF MOTOR B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a power sunroof utilize a sunroof control switch. On this model, the sunroof control switch is located in the overhead console, in between the two reading lamps. The switch is mounted in the overhead console with four plastic retaining tabs, molded into the switch housing. This switch incorporates six selections of operation open, auto open, close, auto close, auto vent and vent. The individual switches in the sunroof control switch unit cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or faulty, the entire sunroof control switch unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 557 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION With the operation of the sunroof control switch, voltage is directed to the sunroof motor, through the switch contacts or control module. If the control switch is depressed and held depressed the voltage signal is controlled manually through the switch contacts, so when the switch is released the sunroof stops. Refer to the Owner's Manual for more information on the operation of the sunroof switch and system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 558 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection CONTROL SWITCH The following test will determine if the sunroof control switch is operating properly. 1. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console Removal. 2. Remove the sunroof control switch from the overhead console See: Service and Repair/Control Switch/Removal. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the switch terminals for proper continuity using the table below. If any of the terminals do not show proper continuity, replace the sunroof control switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Switch Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Control Switch Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console Removal. 3. Disconnect the sunroof control switch electrical connector. Depress the connector retaining tab and pull the connector straight out. 4. To remove the switch from the overhead console, push on the back of the switch until it comes free from the overhead console. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch in the overhead console assembly. Be certain the switch is securely snapped in place. 2. Connect the sunroof control switch electrical connector. Be certain the switch connector is securely snapped in place. 3. Install the overhead console See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Installation. 4. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Switch > Page 561 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console Removal. 3. Disconnect the sunroof control switch electrical connector. Depress the connector retaining tab and pull the connector straight out. 4. To remove the switch from the overhead console, push on the back of the switch until it comes free from the overhead console. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Switch > Page 562 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch in the overhead console assembly. Be certain the switch is securely snapped in place. 2. Connect the sunroof control switch electrical connector. Be certain the switch connector is securely snapped in place. 3. Install the overhead console See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Installation. 4. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 261 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 2 Z420 20BK/OR GROUND Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 567 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 568 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 261 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 2 Z420 20BK/OR GROUND Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 569 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Description and Operation Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The G-sensor is located inside the ABS controller. The sensor is not a separate serviceable part from the controller. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 308 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 33 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 576 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 577 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 308 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 33 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 578 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 581 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 582 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. Refer to appropriate testing. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 585 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 284 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 590 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 591 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Component ID: 285 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 592 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 593 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 286 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 594 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 284 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 597 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 598 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Component ID: 285 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 599 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 600 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 286 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 601 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 602 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The Wheel Speed Sensor consists of a magnet (1) surrounded by windings from a single strand of wire (5). The sensor sends a small AC signal to the ABM. This signal is generated by magnetic induction. The magnetic induction is created when a toothed sensor ring (exciter ring or tone wheel) (4) passes the stationary magnetic WSS. When the ring gear is rotated, the exciter ring (4) passes the tip of the WSS. As the exciter ring tooth approaches the tip of the WSS, the magnetic lines of force expand, causing the magnetic field to cut across the sensor's windings (5). This, in turn causes current to flow through the WSS circuit in one direction. When the exciter ring tooth moves away from the sensor tip, the magnetic lines of force collapse cutting the winding in the opposite direction. This causes the current to flow in the opposite direction. Every time a tooth of the exciter ring passes the tip of the WSS, an AC signal is generated current. Each AC signal (positive to negative signal or squarewave) is interpreted by the ABM. It then compares the frequency of the sinewave to a time value to calculate vehicle speed. The ABM continues to monitor the frequency to determine a deceleration rate that would indicate a possible wheel-locking tendency. The signal strength of any magnetic induction sensor is directly affected by: - Magnetic field strength; the stronger the magnetic field, the stronger the signal - Number of windings in the sensor; more windings provide a stronger signal - Exciter ring speed; the faster the exciter ring/tone wheel rotates, the stronger the signal will be - Distance (3) "air gap" between the exciter ring teeth and WSS; the closer the WSS is to the exciter ring/tone wheel, the stronger the signal will be. The WSS is not adjustable. A clearance specification has been established for manufacturing tolerances. If the clearance is not within these specifications, then either the WSS or other components may be damaged. The clearance between the WSS and the exciter ring is 0.005 0.050 in. The assembly plant performs a "Rolls Test" on every vehicle that leaves the assembly plant. One of the test performed is a test of the WSS. To properly test the sensor, the assembly plant connects test equipment to the Data Link Connector (DLC). This connector is located to the right of the steering column and attached to the lower portion of the instrument panel. The rolls test terminal is spliced to the WSS circuit. The vehicle is then driven on a set of rollers and the WSS output is monitored for proper operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front rotor and caliper adapter.See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) from the hub (3). 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) from the hub (3). 5. Remove the wiring from the clips and disconnect the electrical connector (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 605 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the wiring to the clips and Reconnect the electrical connector (1). 2. Install the wheel speed sensor (2) to the hub (3). 3. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) to the hub (3). Tighten the bolt to 21 Nm (190 in. lbs.). 4. Install the front rotor and brake caliper assembly See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 606 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove brake line mounting nut (4) and remove the brake line (3) from the sensor stud. 3. Remove the park brake cable (2) and bracket (1) from the sensor stud. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (6). 5. Remove mounting stud (2) from the sensor (5). 6. Remove sensor (1) from differential housing (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 607 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect harness to sensor (1). Be sure seal is securely in place between sensor and wiring connector. 2. Install O-ring on sensor (if removed). 3. Insert sensor (1) in differential housing (3). 4. Install the sensor mounting stud and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the electrical connector (6). 6. Install the brake line (3) on the sensor stud. 7. Install the park brake cable (2) and bracket (1) to the stud and install the nut (4). 8. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Yaw Rate Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The G-sensor is located inside the ABS controller. The sensor is not a separate serviceable part from the controller. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 616 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 617 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 618 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Locations Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 317 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 624 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 625 Cruise Control Switch: Locations Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 318 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 626 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 317 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 629 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 630 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 318 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 631 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two separate switch pods operate the speed control system. The steering-wheel-mounted switches use multiplexed circuits to provide inputs to the PCM for ON, OFF, RESUME, ACCELERATE, SET, DECEL and CANCEL modes. Refer to "Operation" for more information on speed control switch functions and setting procedures. The individual switches cannot be repaired. If one switch fails, the entire switch module must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 634 Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When speed control is selected by depressing the ON, OFF switch, the PCM allows a set speed to be stored in its RAM for speed control. To store a set speed, depress the SET switch while the vehicle is moving at a speed between approximately 35 and 85 mph. In order for the speed control to engage, the brakes cannot be applied, nor can the gear selector be indicating the transmission is in Park or Neutral. The speed control can be disengaged manually by: - Stepping on the brake pedal - Depressing the OFF switch - Depressing the CANCEL switch. The speed control can be disengaged also by any of the following conditions: - An indication of Park or Neutral (auto. trans.) - The VSS signal increases at a rate of 10 mph per second (indicates that the co-efficient of friction between the road surface and tires is extremely low) - Depressing the clutch pedal (manual trans.). - Excessive engine rpm (indicates that the transmission may be in a low gear) - The VSS signal decreases at a rate of 10 mph per second (indicates that the vehicle may have decelerated at an extremely high rate) - If the actual speed is not within 20 mph of the set speed The previous disengagement conditions are programmed for added safety. Once the speed control has been disengaged, depressing the ACCEL switch restores the vehicle to the target speed that was stored in the PCM's RAM NOTE: Depressing the OFF switch will erase the set speed stored in the PCM's RAM. If, while the speed control is engaged, the driver wishes to increase vehicle speed, the PCM is programmed for an acceleration feature. With the ACCEL switch held closed, the vehicle accelerates slowly to the desired speed. The new target speed is stored in the PCM's RAM when the ACCEL switch is released. The PCM also has a "tap-up" feature in which vehicle speed increases at a rate of approximately 2 mph for each momentary switch activation of the ACCEL switch. The PCM also provides a means to decelerate without disengaging speed control. To decelerate from an existing recorded target speed, depress and hold the COAST switch until the desired speed is reached. Then release the switch. The ON, OFF switch operates two components: the PCM's ON, OFF input, and the battery voltage to the brake switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Before attempting to diagnose, remove or install any airbag system or related steering wheel and steering column components you must first disconnect and isolate the negative (ground) battery cable. Wait 2 minutes for system capacitor to discharge before further system service. Failure to do so could result in accidental deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable from battery. 2. Remove airbag module. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal . 3. Unplug electrical connector. 4. Remove speed control switch mounting screw (1) and remove switch from steering wheel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 637 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position switch to steering wheel. 2. Install switch mounting screw and tighten to 1.7 Nm (15 in. lbs.). 3. Plug electrical connector into switch. 4. Install airbag module. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation 5. Connect negative battery cable to battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Component ID: 307 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 642 Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 643 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 644 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Component ID: 307 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 645 Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 646 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The oil pressure switch is a pressure sensitive switch that is activated by the engine's oil pressure (in the main oil gallery). The switch is a two terminal device (one terminal is provided to the wiring harness and the other terminal is the switch's metal housing that screws into the engine block). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 649 Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The oil pressure switch is normally "Closed." The switch changes from a "Closed" circuit to an "Open" circuit, on increasing pressure of 7 psig. The oil pressure switch changes from an "Open" circuit to a "Closed" circuit, on decreasing pressure, between 2 psig and 4 psig. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install oil pressure sender. 2. Connect oil pressure sender wire. 3. Install front splash shield. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation > Page 652 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Raise vehicle on hoist. 3. Remove front splash shield. 4. Disconnect oil pressure sender wire (4). 5. Remove the pressure sender (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Component ID: 260 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/OR AAT SIGNAL 2 G931 20VT/BR SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 7 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 657 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 658 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Component ID: 260 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/OR AAT SIGNAL 2 G931 20VT/BR SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 7 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 659 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that monitors the air temperature outside of the vehicle. The ambient air temperature sensor is mounted onto the inside of the front bumper beam and its data is used by the heating-A/C system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 662 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit sent by the front control module (FCM) through a two-wire lead and connector of the vehicle wire harness. The ambient air temperature sensor changes its internal resistance in response to changes in the outside air temperature, which either increases or decreases the reference signal voltage read by the FCM. The FCM converts and broadcasts the sensor data over the controller area network (CAN) B bus, where it is read by the manual temperature control (MTC) A/C-heater control and other various vehicle control modules. The ambient air temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The ambient air temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the ambient air temperature sensor (2). 3. Remove the bolt (3) that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the front bumper beam (4) and remove the sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 665 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the ambient air temperature sensor (2) to the front bumper beam (4). 2. Install the bolt (3) that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the front bumper beam. Tighten the bolt securely. 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the ambient air temperature sensor. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 265 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C21 20VT/OR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 2 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 669 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 670 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 265 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C21 20VT/OR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 2 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 671 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The evaporator temperature sensor (1) is an electrical thermistor located within a molded plastic case that is inserted into the HVAC housing (2) to measure the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator (3). Two terminals within the connector receptacle connect the sensor to the vehicle electrical system through a wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. NOTE: Cutaway of typical HVAC housing shown for clarity in illustration. The external location of the evaporator temperature sensor allows the sensor to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 674 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator and supplies an input signal to the A/C-heater control. The A/C-heater control uses the evaporator temperature sensor input signal to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor will change its internal resistance in response to the temperatures it monitors and is connected to the A/C-heater control through sensor ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit. As the temperature of the A/C evaporator decreases, the internal resistance of the evaporator temperature sensor decreases. The A/C-heater control uses the monitored voltage reading as an indication of evaporator temperature and that conditions are correct to broadcast an A/C request message on the controller area network (CAN) B bus, where it is read by the front control module (FCM). The FCM then requests the powertrain control module (PCM) to cycle the A/C compressor clutch as necessary over the CAN C bus. The evaporator temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The evaporator temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage during this service procedure. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel assembly See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal. 3. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) from the evaporator temperature sensor (2) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3) near the blend door actuator (4). 4. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the HVAC housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 677 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the evaporator temperature sensor (2) into the opening in the HVAC housing (3) near the blend door actuator (4). 2. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) to the evaporator temperature sensor. 3. Install the instrument panel assembly See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Installation. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 326 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 2 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 681 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 682 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 326 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 2 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 683 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C pressure transducer (1) is a switch that is installed on a fitting located on the A/C liquid line. An internally threaded fitting on the A/C pressure transducer connects it to the externally threaded Schrader-type fitting on the A/C liquid line. A rubber O-ring seals the connection between the A/C pressure transducer and the liquid line fitting. The A/C pressure transducer is connected to the vehicle electrical system by a molded plastic connector with three terminals. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 686 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C pressure transducer monitors the pressures in the high side of the refrigerant system through its connection to a fitting on the A/C liquid line. The A/C pressure transducer will change its internal resistance in response to the pressures it monitors. A Schrader-type valve in the liquid line fitting permits the A/C pressure transducer to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. The front control module (FCM) provides a five volt reference signal to the A/C pressure transducer, then monitors the output voltage of the A/C pressure transducer on a sensor return circuit to determine refrigerant pressure. The FCM broadcasts a refrigerant pressure message to the PCM, which is programmed to respond to the A/C pressure transducer and other sensor inputs by controlling the operation of the A/C compressor clutch to help optimize A/C system performance and to protect the system components from damage. The PCM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch when high side pressure rises above 3172 kPa (460 psi) and re-engage the clutch when high side pressure drops below 1999 kPa (290 psi). The A/C pressure transducer will also disengage the A/C compressor clutch if the high side pressure drops below 193 kPa (28 psi) and will re-engage the clutch when the high side pressure rises above 234 kPa (34 psi). The A/C pressure transducer message to the PCM will also prevent the A/C compressor clutch from engaging when ambient temperatures are below about 4.5° C (40° F) due to the pressure/temperature relationship of the refrigerant. The A/C pressure transducer is diagnosed using a scan tool. The A/C pressure transducer cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 687 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER The A/C pressure transducer is diagnosed using a scan tool. Before testing the A/C pressure transducer, be certain that the transducer wire harness connection is clean of corrosion and properly connected. For the A/C to operate, an A/C pressure transducer voltage reading between 0.451 and 4.519 volts is required. Voltages outside this range indicate a low or high refrigerant system pressure condition to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM is programmed to respond to a low or high refrigerant system pressure by suppressing operation of the A/C compressor. Refer to the A/C Pressure Transducer Voltage chart (below) for the possible conditions indicated by the transducer voltage reading. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to replace the A/C pressure transducer. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the A/C pressure transducer (2). 3. Remove the A/C pressure transducer from the A/C liquid line (3). 4. Remove the O-ring seal (4) from the liquid line fitting and discard. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 690 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of special material for R-134a. Use only refrigerant oil of the type required for the A/C compressor. 1. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal (4) with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the liquid line fitting (3). 2. Install the A/C pressure transducer (2) onto the A/C liquid line. Tighten the A/C pressure transducer securely. 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the A/C pressure transducer. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Solar Sensor: Locations Component ID: 282 Component : SENSOR-SUN Connector: Name : SENSOR-SUN Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (HIGHLINE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 G939 22VT/DB SUN SENSOR RETURN 4 G39 22VT/LB SUN SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 27 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 694 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 695 Solar Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 282 Component : SENSOR-SUN Connector: Name : SENSOR-SUN Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (HIGHLINE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 G939 22VT/DB SUN SENSOR RETURN 4 G39 22VT/LB SUN SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 27 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 696 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle has up to four door ajar switches, one for each full door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair/Front Door Latch - Removal or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Latch/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 702 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then uses these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The EMIC also sends the proper electronic door ajar switch status messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations The module assembly (5) contains the following components: An internal fuel filter See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Fuel Filter/Description and Operation/Fuel Filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor Description DESCRIPTION The fuel gauge level sending unit is attached to the side of fuel pump module. The level sensor is a variable resistor. Operation OPERATION Its resistance changes with the amount of fuel in the tank. The float arm attached to the sensor moves as the fuel level changes. The fuel level input is used as an input for OBD II. If the fuel level is below 15% or above 85% of total tank capacity several monitors are disabled. There are diagnostics for the level circuit open and shorted. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor > Page 708 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor > Page 709 Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Removal 2. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 3. Position Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 4. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 5. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring. 6. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 7. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal > Page 712 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Whenever the fuel pump module is serviced, the rubber seal (gasket) must be replaced. 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Install fuel tank. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor mounted to a bracket that is secured with a screw to the left side of the radiator yoke, behind the radiator grille and in front of the engine compartment. The ambient temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if inoperative or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 717 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a five-volt reference signal sent by the Front Control Module (FCM). The resistance in the sensor changes as temperature changes, changing the temperature sensor signal circuit voltage to the FCM. Based upon the resistance in the sensor, the FCM senses a specific voltage on the temperature sensor signal circuit. The FCM then translates the voltage into a temperature reading that it sent over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to other modules utilizing temperature information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 718 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Testing and Inspection AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR The temperature function is supported by the ambient temperature sensor, a wiring circuit, and the Front Control Module (FCM). When the sensor is exposed to temperatures above 60° C (140° F), or if the sensor circuit is shorted, 60° C (130/140° F) will appear in the display in place of the temperature. When the sensor is exposed to temperatures below - 40° C (- 40° F) or if the sensor circuit is open, - 40° C (- 40° F) will appear in the display. The ambient temperature sensor circuit can be diagnosed using the following Temperature System Test, and Sensor Test. If the temperature sensor and circuit are confirmed to be OK, but the temperature display is inoperative or incorrect, test the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC),See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Testing and Inspection. TEMPERATURE SYSTEM TEST For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. NOTE: Temperature readings do not update immediately. Allow up to 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the On position for readings to meet test specifications. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the ambient temperature sensor. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The CMTC display should now read - 40° C (- 40° F). If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the shorted sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Taking care not to damage the wire terminals, connect a jumper wire between the two terminals in the body half of the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The CMTC display should now read 60° C (130/140° F). If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 5. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes that may have been set while performing the test. Perform further diagnosis of the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC),See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Testing and Inspection as needed. SENSOR TEST 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the ambient temperature sensor. At - 40° C (- 40° F), the sensor resistance is 336 kilohms. At 55° C (130° F), the sensor resistance is 2.488 kilohms. The sensor resistance should read between these two values. If OK, perform further diagnosis of the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC),See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Testing and Inspection Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the ambient temperature sensor (1), on the left side of the radiator yoke (2) behind the grille. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the ambient temperature sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the one screw that secures the ambient temperature sensor bracket to the radiator yoke. 5. Remove the ambient temperature sensor from the radiator yoke. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 721 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the ambient temperature sensor (1) onto the radiator yoke (2). 2. Install the screw that secures the ambient temperature sensor to the radiator yoke. Tighten the screw to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector (3) to the ambient temperature sensor (1). 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 308 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 33 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 725 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 726 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 308 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 33 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 727 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 730 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 731 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. Refer to appropriate testing. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 734 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 298 Component : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z906 20BK GROUND Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 739 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 740 Backup Lamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 298 Component : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z906 20BK GROUND Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 741 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission have a normally open, spring-loaded plunger type backup lamp switch (2). Vehicles with an optional electronic automatic transmission have a Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) that is used to perform several functions, including that of the backup lamp switch. The TRS is described in further detail in Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T. See: Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management/Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems/Transmission Position Switch/Sensor/Description and Operation The backup lamp switch is located in a threaded hole on the side of the manual transmission housing. The switch has a threaded body and a hex formation near the plunger end of the switch. An integral connector receptacle at the end of the switch opposite the plunger connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a take out and connector of the engine wire harness. When installed, only the switch connector and the hex formation are visible on the outside of the transmission housing. The backup lamp switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire switch unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 744 Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The backup lamp switch controls the flow of battery voltage to the backup lamp bulbs through an output on the backup lamp feed circuit. The switch plunger is mechanically actuated by the gearshift mechanism within the transmission, which will depress the switch plunger and close the switch contacts whenever the REVERSE gear has been selected. The switch receives battery voltage through a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON position. The backup lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 745 Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection BACKUP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Locate and disconnect the engine wire harness connector for the backup lamp switch. 4. Check for continuity between the two terminal pins in the backup lamp switch connector receptacle. a. With the gear selector lever in the REVERSE position, there should be continuity. b. With the gear selector lever in any position other than REVERSE, there should be no continuity. 5. If the switch fails either of these two continuity tests, replace the ineffective backup lamp switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Component ID: 319 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 16WT/LB BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 F202 22PK/GY S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 22DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 749 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 750 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 751 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 319 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 16WT/LB BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 F202 22PK/GY S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 22DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 752 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 753 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The brake lamp switch (2) is a three circuit, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch that is secured to the steering column support bracket under the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle. The molded plastic switch housing has an integral connector receptacle (1) containing six terminal pins and featuring a Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the instrument panel wire harness. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) on one end of the switch housing. The plunger has a one time telescoping self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by moving an adjustment release lever (5) on the opposite end of the switch housing clockwise, until it locks into a position that is horizontal and parallel to the connector receptacle. An installed brake lamp switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or removed from its mounting position for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 756 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake lamp switch controls three independent circuits. These circuits are described as follows: - Brake Lamp Switch Circuit - A normally open brake lamp switch circuit receives a battery voltage input, and supplies this battery voltage to the brake lamps and the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) on a brake lamp switch output circuit only when the brake pedal is depressed (brake lamp switch plunger released). - Brake Lamp Switch Signal Circuit - A normally closed brake lamp switch signal circuit receives a direct path to ground, and supplies this ground input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on a brake lamp switch sense circuit only when the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). - Speed Control Circuit - A normally closed speed control circuit receives a battery voltage input from the Powertrain Control Module on a speed control supply circuit, and supplies this battery voltage to the speed control servo solenoids (dump, vacuum, and vent) on a speed control brake switch output circuit only when the speed control system is turned ON and the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). The components of the self-adjusting brake switch plunger consist of a two-piece telescoping plunger, a split plunger locking collar, and a release wedge. The release lever has a shaft with a wedge that spreads the plunger locking collar to an open or released position. After the switch is installed and the brake pedal is released, the plunger telescopes to the correct adjustment position. When the release lever is moved to the release position, the wedge is disengaged from the locking collar causing the collar to apply a clamping pressure to the two plunger halves, fixing the plunger length. The brake lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 757 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection BRAKE LAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Do not remove the brake lamp switch from the mounting bracket. The self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the brake lamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, perform the continuity tests at the terminal pins (1) in the brake lamp switch connector receptacle as shown in the Brake Lamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the continuity tests, replace the ineffective brake lamp switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the brake lamp switch (1) near the support bracket on the lower steering column (3). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (5) from the brake lamp switch. 4. Rotate the brake lamp switch housing clockwise about 30 degrees to align the tabs on the switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket (4). 5. Pull the switch straight back from the keyed hole to remove it from the bracket. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 6. Discard the removed brake lamp switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 760 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal in the depressed position. 2. Align the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket (4) on the lower steering column (3). 3. Insert the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar through the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket until the switch housing (1) is firmly seated against the bracket. 4. Rotate the switch housing counterclockwise about 30 degrees to engage the tabs on the locking collar with the switch mounting bracket. CAUTION: Do not release or pull up on the brake pedal before the switch plunger adjustment has been completed. 5. Release the brake pedal, but do not pull it upward. 6. Rotate the plunger adjustment release lever (2) clockwise until it locks into place. The lever should be parallel to the brake lamp switch connector receptacle. This action will set the switch plunger length to a final adjustment position and cannot be undone. If not performed properly the first time, a new brake lamp switch must be installed. 7. Reconnect the wire harness connector (5) to the brake lamp switch. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Combination Switch: Locations Component ID: 306 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G194 20LB/RD HIGH BEAM/FRONT WASHER SWITCH MUX 2 G902 20VT/OR SWITCH MUX RETURN 3 L12 20WT/OR TURN SIGNAL INPUT MUX 4 W52 20BR/YL FRONT WIPER SWITCH MUX Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 764 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 765 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 766 Combination Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 306 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G194 20LB/RD HIGH BEAM/FRONT WASHER SWITCH MUX 2 G902 20VT/OR SWITCH MUX RETURN 3 L12 20WT/OR TURN SIGNAL INPUT MUX 4 W52 20BR/YL FRONT WIPER SWITCH MUX Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 767 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 768 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Combination Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The multi-function switch (3) is located on the steering column, just below the steering wheel. The only visible components of the multi-function switch are the control stalk (2) and control knob (1) that extend through the steering column shrouds on the left side of the column, and the hazard warning push button (4) that extends through the shroud on the top of the column. The remainder of the switch including its mounting provisions, its electrical connection, and the turn signal cancel actuator (5) are concealed beneath the shrouds. The switch housing and controls are constructed of molded black plastic. Each of the switch controls has white International Control and Display Symbol graphics applied to it, which clearly identify its many functions. Three integral locating posts on the switch housing, one on the top and two on the bottom, slide into channels in a receptacle on the left side of the multi-function switch mounting housing near the top of the steering column to ensure proper positioning of the switch. Then two screws secure the switch to the mounting housing. A single integral connector receptacle containing four terminal pins on the back of the switch housing connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The multi-function switch provides the vehicle operator with a control interface for the following functions: - Hazard Warning Control - The multi-function switch hazard warning push button provides two detent positions (ON and OFF) to control the hazard warning lamps. Headlamp Beam Selection - The multi-function switch control stalk provides detent switching for selection of the headlamp HIGH or LOW beams. There is also an intermediate momentary position that allows the headlamp high beam circuits to be momentarily flashed to provide an optical horn feature (sometimes referred to as flash-to-pass) as an optical signalling device. - Turn Signal Control - The multi-function switch control stalk provides momentary non-detent (lane change) switching or detent switching with automatic cancellation for both the left and right turn signal lamps. - Washer Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides a momentary WASH position for washer system operation. - Wiper Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides two continuous wipe switch positions, LOW speed or HIGH speed; and, an intermittent wipe mode with five delay interval positions. The multi-function switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any function of the switch is ineffective, or if the switch is damaged, the entire switch must be replaced as a unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 771 Combination Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The multi-function switch uses resistor multiplexing to control the many functions and features it provides using only three hard wired output circuits. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a multi-function switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a wash/beam select switch signal circuit to control washer and headlamp beam selection, on an intermittent wiper switch signal circuit to control wipers, and on a turn lamps switch signal circuit to control turn signal and hazard warning functions. The multi-function switch operates as follows: - Hazard Warning Control - The hazard warning push button of the multi-function switch is depressed to activate the hazard warning system, and depressed again to turn the system OFF. When the push button is actuated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic hazard switch status messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM then energizes and flashes or de-energizes both the left and right turn signal circuits to provide the visual hazard warning. - Headlamp Beam Selection - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is pulled towards the steering wheel past a detent to actuate the integral beam select switch circuitry, or to an intermediate, momentary position before the detent to actuate the optical horn feature. Each time the control stalk is actuated to a detent position, the opposite headlamp beam from what is currently selected will be energized. Each time the control stalk is actuated to the momentary position with the headlamps turned OFF, the headlamp high beams will be illuminated for as long as the control stalk is held in this position. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic beam select switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes or de-energizes the selected LOW or HIGH beam circuits. - Turn Signal Control - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved upward to activate the RIGHT turn signal circuitry, and, downward to activate the LEFT turn signal circuitry. The turn signal switch has a detent position in each direction that provides turn signals with automatic cancellation, and an intermediate, momentary position in each direction that automatically provides three turn signal blinks as a LANE CHANGE feature when the control stalk is tapped or will energize the turn signals for as long as the control stalk is held in the momentary position. When the control stalk is moved to a detent turn signal switch position, the cancel actuator extends toward the center of the steering column. A turn signal cancel cam that is integral to the clockspring rotates with the steering wheel and the cam lobes contact the cancel actuator when it is extended from the multi-function switch. When the steering wheel is rotated during a turning maneuver, one of the two turn signal cancel cam lobes will contact the turn signal cancel actuator. The cancel actuator latches against the cancel cam rotation in the direction opposite that which is signaled. If the LEFT turn signal detent is selected, the lobes of the cancel cam will ratchet past the cancel actuator when the steering wheel is rotated to the left, but will unlatch the cancel actuator as the steering wheel rotates to the right and returns to center, which will cancel the turn signal event and release the control stalk from the detent so it returns to the neutral OFF position. When a turn signal is activated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic turn signal switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes and flashes or de-energizes the selected left or right turn signal circuits. - Washer Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is depressed towards the steering column to momentarily activate the washer pump in the WASH mode. The washer pump will continue to operate in the washer mode until the control knob is released or for 10 continuous seconds, whichever occurs first. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic washer switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the washer pump in the washer mode. - Wiper Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is rotated to one of the continuous wiper detents, to one of five intermittent wiper detents, or to the OFF position to select the wiper mode. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic wiper switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the wiper on/off and high/low relays in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) for wiper system control. The multi-function switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 772 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the multi-function switch from the switch mounting housing on the steering column. See: Service and Repair/Removal. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the multi-function switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Multi-Function Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective multi-function switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Combination Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal. 3. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors from the upper clockspring connector receptacles. CAUTION: Be certain that the screws that secure the steering wheel puller to the steering wheel are fully engaged in the steering wheel armature without passing through the steering wheel and damaging the clockspring. 4. Remove the steering wheel from the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Removal. 5. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 6. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 7. Using hand pressure, press inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 8. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 9. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 10. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 775 11. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the back of the multi-function switch housing (1). 12. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the multi-function switch mounting housing (3). 13. Grasp the switch control stalk and pull it toward the left side of the vehicle to remove the switch from the mounting housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 776 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Slide the multi-function switch (1) into the multi-function switch mounting housing (3) from the left side. Be certain that the alignment pins on the top and bottom of the switch are properly engaged in the channels of the mounting housing. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the mounting housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the back of the switch. 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 777 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). NOTE: When reinstalling the steering wheel, be certain to index the yellow rubber booted engagement dowel on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor between the two fins cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature hub. 10. Reinstall the steering wheel onto the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Installation. 11. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors to the upper clockspring connector receptacles. Be certain that the steering wheel wire harness is routed between the steering wheel back trim cover and the steering wheel armature. 12. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation. 13. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle has up to four door ajar switches, one for each full door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair/Front Door Latch - Removal or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Latch/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 782 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then uses these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The EMIC also sends the proper electronic door ajar switch status messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 301 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L307 20PK/RD HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX 2 E2 20OR/BR INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL 3 L900 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN 4 E19 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL 5 Z942 20BK GROUND 6 L914 20WT FOG LAMP INDICATOR DRIVER 7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 786 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 787 Headlamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 301 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L307 20PK/RD HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX 2 E2 20OR/BR INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL 3 L900 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN 4 E19 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL 5 Z942 20BK GROUND 6 L914 20WT FOG LAMP INDICATOR DRIVER 7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 788 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The headlamp switch (1) is located on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. Three different switches are used. The standard switch features a three-position rotary knob (4) for exterior lighting control, a thumbwheel (2) for panel lamps dimming and interior lighting control, and a momentary push button (3) for cargo lamp control. An optional switch has a momentary PUSH function added to the rotary knob for front fog lamp control. A second optional switch has the same thumbwheel and momentary push button, but has a fourth detent position added to the rotary knob for selecting the optional automatic headlamps feature. Each of these switches is constructed of molded plastic. The rotary knob is molded plastic and knurled around its circumference to ease operator control. The thumbwheel is also plastic and knurled. On vehicles with optional fog lamps the rotary knob has the text PUSH and an International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light applied to it. The cargo lamp push button is plastic with a smooth finish and the text CARGO applied to it. The switch face plate is also labeled with graphics and icons to clearly identify the many functions of the rotary knob and thumbwheel. Three screws secure the switch to the back of the cluster bezel through integral mounting flanges that are molded to each side of the switch housing. The back of the switch housing has an integral connector receptacle containing terminal pins that connect the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. A panel dimmer controlled incandescent bulb soldered to the circuit board within the switch provides back lighting for visibility at night, but is not serviceable. The headlamp switch cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 791 Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The headlamp switch uses two resistor multiplexed outputs and one conventional output to control the many functions and features it provides. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a headlamp switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a headlamp switch signal circuit to control exterior lighting functions, on a panel lamps dimmer signal circuit to control panel dimmer and interior lighting functions, and on a cargo lamp return circuit to control the cargo lamps. The switch illumination circuit receives a path to ground at all times through the left instrument panel ground circuit. The illumination level is controlled by a Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) output received from the EMIC on a headlamp switch illumination control circuit. The EMIC controls this output based upon the dimmer signal select mux input from the headlamp switch. The headlamp switch operates as follows: - Cargo Lamps Control - The cargo lamp push button on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the cargo lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate cargo lighting control outputs through its internal cargo lamp driver circuit. Front Fog Lamps Control - For vehicles so equipped, the rotary knob on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the optional front fog lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic fog lamp switch status messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the front fog lamp relay in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the front fog lamp indicator. - Exterior Lighting Control - The rotary knob on the headlamp switch is rotated to a detent position to activate or deactivate the exterior lighting. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic exterior lighting switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the park lamp relay in the PDC and the high or low beam headlamp circuits, and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the high beam indicator. The FCM also remembers which headlamp beams were last selected using the multi-function switch, and energizes those beams by default the next time the headlamps are turned ON. If the vehicle is equipped with optional automatic headlamps and the A (Automatic) position is selected, the EMIC also monitors an input from a sun load sensor on the instrument panel and, based upon the monitored ambient light levels, responds by automatically sending appropriate messages to the FCM to turn the exterior lighting ON or OFF while the ignition switch is in the ON position. - Interior Lighting Control - The thumbwheel on the headlamp switch is rotated to the dome DEFEAT, dome ON, PARADE mode, or one of the six panel dimmer detent positions to control the interior courtesy/dome and panel lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate interior lighting control outputs through its internal courtesy lamp driver circuits, electronic dimming level messages to other modules over the CAN data bus, and the proper PWM outputs to control dimming levels through several panel dimmer illumination control driver circuits. The headlamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 792 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection HEADLAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the cluster bezel from the instrument panel See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Removal. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance or continuity between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Headlamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective headlamp switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cluster bezel (1) from the instrument panel. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Removal. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch (2). 4. Place the cluster bezel face down on a suitable work surface. Be certain to take the proper precautions to protect the face of the bezel from cosmetic damage. 5. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the headlamp switch to the back of the cluster bezel. 6. Remove the headlamp switch from the cluster bezel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 795 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the headlamp switch (2) to the back of the cluster bezel (1). 2. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the headlamp switch to the cluster bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Position the cluster bezel close enough to the instrument panel to reconnect the wire harness connector to the back of the headlamp switch. 4. Reinstall the cluster bezel onto the instrument panel. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Installation. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Component ID: 303 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 799 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 800 Horn Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 303 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 801 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 802 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection HORN SWITCH The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the horn system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 808 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 809 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 810 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 814 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 815 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 816 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 817 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 818 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 821 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 824 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to o-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (3), be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs). 5. Connect electrical connector (4) to sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 828 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 829 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 830 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 834 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 835 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 836 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 837 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 838 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 839 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 840 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 841 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 842 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 845 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor (3) is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 4.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 848 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (2) , be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations The module assembly (5) contains the following components: An internal fuel filter See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Fuel Filter/Description and Operation/Fuel Filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 852 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 853 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Removal 2. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 3. Position Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 4. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 5. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring. 6. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 7. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal > Page 856 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Whenever the fuel pump module is serviced, the rubber seal (gasket) must be replaced. 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Install fuel tank. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Component Locations 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 861 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations Component ID: 269 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 862 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 863 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 864 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 269 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 865 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 866 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 867 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The IAT sensor provides an input voltage to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating the density of the air entering the intake manifold based upon intake manifold temperature. At key-on, a 5-volt power circuit is supplied to the sensor from the PCM. The sensor is grounded at the PCM through a low-noise, sensor-return circuit. The PCM uses this input to calculate the following: - Injector pulse-width - Adjustment of spark timing (to help prevent spark knock with high intake manifold air-charge temperatures) The resistance values of the IAT sensor is the same as for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from IAT sensor. 2. Clean dirt from sensor base. 3. Gently lift on small plastic release tab (3) and rotate sensor about 1/4 turn counter-clockwise for removal. 4. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 870 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). 2. Clean sensor mounting hole. 3. Position sensor (1) into base and rotate clockwise until past release tab (3). 4. Install electrical connector (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 875 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 876 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 877 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 878 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 881 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 882 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 883 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 884 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 887 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors from engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 890 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts (2) will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock senor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft.lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Sensor-MAP Component ID: 273 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 895 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 896 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Manifold Air Pressure (MAP) Sensor The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor (7) is mounted into the front of the intake manifold (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 897 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 273 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 898 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 899 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The MAP sensor is used as an input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It contains a silicon based sensing unit to provide data on the manifold vacuum that draws the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The PCM requires this information to determine injector pulse width and spark advance. When manifold absolute pressure (MAP) equals Barometric pressure, the pulse width will be at maximum. A 5 volt reference is supplied from the PCM and returns a voltage signal to the PCM that reflects manifold pressure. The zero pressure reading is 0.5V and full scale is 4.5V. For a pressure swing of 0-15 psi, the voltage changes 4.0V. To operate the sensor, it is supplied a regulated 4.8 to 5.1 volts. Ground is provided through the low-noise, sensor return circuit at the PCM. The MAP sensor input is the number one contributor to fuel injector pulse width. The most important function of the MAP sensor is to determine barometric pressure. The PCM needs to know if the vehicle is at sea level or at a higher altitude, because the air density changes with altitude. It will also help to correct for varying barometric pressure. Barometric pressure and altitude have a direct inverse correlation; as altitude goes up, barometric goes down. At key-on, the PCM powers up and looks at MAP voltage, and based upon the voltage it sees, it knows the current barometric pressure (relative to altitude). Once the engine starts, the PCM looks at the voltage again, continuously every 12 milliseconds, and compares the current voltage to what it was at key-on. The difference between current voltage and what it was at key-on, is manifold vacuum. During key-on (engine not running) the sensor reads (updates) barometric pressure. A normal range can be obtained by monitoring a known good sensor. As the altitude increases, the air becomes thinner (less oxygen). If a vehicle is started and driven to a very different altitude than where it was at key-on, the barometric pressure needs to be updated. Any time the PCM sees Wide Open Throttle (WOT), based upon Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) angle and RPM, it will update barometric pressure in the MAP memory cell. With periodic updates, the PCM can make its calculations more effectively. The PCM uses the MAP sensor input to aid in calculating the following: - Manifold pressure - Barometric pressure - Engine load - Injector pulse-width - Spark-advance programs - Shift-point strategies (certain automatic transmissions only) - Idle speed - Decel fuel shutoff The MAP sensor signal is provided from a single piezoresistive element located in the center of a diaphragm. The element and diaphragm are both made of silicone. As manifold pressure changes, the diaphragm moves causing the element to deflect, which stresses the silicone. When silicone is exposed to stress, its resistance changes. As manifold vacuum increases, the MAP sensor input voltage decreases proportionally. The sensor also contains electronics that condition the signal and provide temperature compensation. The PCM recognizes a decrease in manifold pressure by monitoring a decrease in voltage from the reading stored in the barometric pressure memory cell. The MAP sensor is a linear sensor; meaning as pressure changes, voltage changes proportionately. The range of voltage output from the sensor is usually between 4.6 volts at sea level to as low as 0.3 volts at 26 in. of Hg. Barometric pressure is the pressure exerted by the atmosphere upon an object. At sea level on a standard day, no storm, barometric pressure is approximately 29.92 in Hg. For every 100 feet of altitude, barometric pressure drops 0.10 in. Hg. If a storm goes through, it can change barometric pressure from what should be present for that altitude. You should know what the average pressure and corresponding barometric pressure is for your area. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 3.7L/4.7L The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor (7) is mounted into the front of the intake manifold (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) at sensor. 2. Clean area around MAP sensor. 3. Remove one sensor mounting screw (8). 4. Remove MAP sensor from intake manifold by slipping it from locating pin (6). 5. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 902 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 3.7L/4.7L 1. Clean MAP sensor mounting hole at intake manifold. 2. Check MAP sensor o-ring seal (2) for cuts or tears. 3. Position MAP sensor into manifold by sliding sensor over locating pin (6). 4. Install mounting bolt (8). Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 907 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front Component ID: 275 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z43 18BK/LB GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 908 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 909 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 910 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Rear Component ID: 276 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z42 18BK/LG GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 18DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 911 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 912 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 913 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 914 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Front Component ID: 277 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 18BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 915 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 916 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 917 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 918 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Rear Component ID: 278 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 18BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 919 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 920 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 921 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Component ID: 275 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z43 18BK/LB GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 924 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 925 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 926 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear Component ID: 276 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z42 18BK/LG GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 18DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 927 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 928 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 929 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 930 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front Component ID: 277 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 18BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 931 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 932 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 933 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 934 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear Component ID: 278 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 18BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 935 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 936 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 937 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 938 Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID - Cylinder bank number one is the bank that contains number one cylinder. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Firing Order Cylinder #1 on left side. Cylinder #1 on right side. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2. - A third oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 would be numbered O2 Sensor 1/3. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 2/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - If a V-6 or V-8 vehicle only uses one downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) it is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2, even if it uses two upstream HO2S. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 939 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. CAUTION: Never apply any type of grease to the oxygen sensor electrical connector, or attempt any soldering of the sensor wiring harness. WARNING: The exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes and catalytic converter become very hot during engine operation. Allow engine to cool before removing oxygen sensor. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. 4-Sensor System If removing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, remove the right-front tire/wheel, and then remove the plastic inner fender liner. 3. Disconnect wire connector from O2S sensor. CAUTION: When disconnecting sensor electrical connector, do not pull directly on wire going into sensor. 4. Remove O2S sensor with an oxygen sensor removal and installation tool. 5. Clean threads in exhaust pipe using appropriate tap. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 942 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Threads of new oxygen sensors are factory coated with anti-seize compound to aid in removal.DO NOT add any additional anti-seize compound to threads of a new oxygen sensor. 1. Install O2S sensor. Tighten to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) torque. 2. Connect O2S sensor wire connector. 3. 4-Sensor System: If installing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, install plastic inner fender liner, and right-front tire/wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 947 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 948 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 949 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 952 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 953 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 954 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 957 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 962 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 963 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 964 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 969 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 970 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 971 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 972 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 973 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 976 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 979 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to o-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (3), be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs). 5. Connect electrical connector (4) to sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 983 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 984 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 985 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 986 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 987 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 988 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 989 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 990 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 991 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 994 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor (3) is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 4.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 997 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (2) , be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder Removal REMOVAL The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly (2). a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 1003 The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (2) with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (2) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 1004 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key/Lock Cylinder - Removal REMOVAL The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly (2). a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 1005 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key/Lock Cylinder - Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (2) with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (2) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1010 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1011 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1012 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1013 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1016 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1017 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1018 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 1019 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1022 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors from engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1025 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts (2) will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock senor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft.lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 266 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 7 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1031 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1032 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 267 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1033 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1034 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 280 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 2 R13 20LG/VT LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1035 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1036 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1037 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 281 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 2 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1038 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1039 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 266 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 7 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1042 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1043 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 267 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1044 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1045 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 280 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 2 R13 20LG/VT LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1046 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1047 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1048 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 281 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 2 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1049 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 1050 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Description Front FRONT Two front impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each front sensor is secured with two screws to the backs of the right and left vertical members of the radiator support within the engine compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (2), an integral anti-rotation pin (3), and two integral mounting holes (4) with metal sleeves to provide crush protection. The right and left front impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A label on the sensor is imprinted with an arrow, which should always be pointed forward in the vehicle. A cavity in the center of the molded plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity and a stamped cover (5) is crimped over the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The front impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Side SIDE Two side impact sensors (2) are used on this vehicle when it is equipped with the optional side curtain airbags, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each side sensor is secured with two screws to the floor panel beneath the outboard seat adjuster riser within the passenger compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (3), an integral anti-rotation pin (4), and two integral mounting holes (1) with metal sleeves to provide crush protection. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1053 The right and left side impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity and a stamped cover (5) is crimped over the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The side impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1054 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Operation Front FRONT The front impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through dedicated left and right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the front impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to front impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Side SIDE The side impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the side passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through left or right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the side impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to side impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the right or left front impact sensor (1) to the back of the right or left radiator support vertical member (4). 3. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (3) from the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the right or left front impact sensor from the engine compartment. Side SIDE WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side supplemental restraint deployment. NOTE: Side impact sensors are used only on vehicles equipped with the optional side curtain airbags. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1057 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the scuff plate trim from the right or left front door opening sill (5). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate - Removal. 3. Lift the floor carpet upward from the sill far enough to access the side impact sensor on the floor panel (4) below the right or left outboard front seat adjuster riser. 4. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the side impact sensor (3) to the floor panel. 5. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (1) from the sensor connector receptacle. 6. Remove the sensor from the floor panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1058 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Position the right or left front impact sensor (1) into the engine compartment. 2. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (3) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Carefully position the sensor onto the back of the right or left radiator support vertical member (4). Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the center clearance hole of the radiator support and the arrow on the sensor label is pointed forward in the vehicle. 4. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the sensor to the back of the support vertical member. Tighten the screws to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Side SIDE WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side supplemental restraint deployment. NOTE: Side impact sensors are used only on vehicles equipped with the optional side curtain airbags. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1059 1. Position the side impact sensor (3) near the floor panel (4) below the right or left outboard front seat adjuster riser. 2. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (1) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Carefully position the sensor onto the floor panel. Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the center clearance hole of the floor panel and the arrow on the sensor label is pointed toward the outboard side of the vehicle. 4. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the sensor to the inner B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 8 Nm (75 in. lbs.). 5. Restore the floor carpet over the side impact sensor on the floor panel to the right or left front door opening sill (5). 6. Reinstall the scuff plate trim onto the right or left front door opening sill. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate - Installation. 7. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Component ID: 313 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z949 20BK GROUND 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1063 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1064 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 313 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z949 20BK GROUND 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1065 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat belt switch is a small, normally open, single pole, single throw, leaf contact, momentary switch. Only one seat belt switch is installed in the vehicle, and it is integral to the buckle of the driver side front seat belt buckle-half (3), located on the inboard side of the driver side front seat cushion frame. The seat belt switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a two-wire pigtail wire (2) and connector on the seat belt buckle-half, which is connected to a wire harness connector and take out of the seat wire harness routed beneath the driver side front seat cushion in the passenger compartment. The seat belt switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire driver side front seat belt buckle-half unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1068 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat belt switch is designed to control a path to ground for the seat belt switch sense input of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). When the driver side front seat belt tip-half is inserted into the seat belt buckle, the switch closes the path to ground; and, when the driver side front seat belt tip-half is removed from the seat belt buckle, the switch opens the ground path. The switch is actuated by the latch mechanism within the seat belt buckle. The seat belt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt switch sense input of the instrument cluster. The seat belt switch receives ground at all times through its pigtail wire connection to the seat wire harness from a take out of the body wire harness. An eyelet terminal connector on the body wire harness ground take out is secured beneath a ground screw on the left cowl side inner panel, beneath the instrument panel. The seat belt switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1069 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Testing and Inspection SEAT BELT SWITCH Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the seat belt switch pigtail wire connector from the seat wire harness connector for the seat belt switch beneath the driver side front seat cushion forward of the seat belt buckle-half anchor. Check for continuity between the seat belt switch sense circuit and the ground circuit cavities of the seat belt switch pigtail wire connector. There should be continuity with the seat belt buckled, and no continuity with the seat belt unbuckled. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective front seat belt buckle-half assembly. 2. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity in the seat wire harness connector for the seat belt switch and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit to ground (G301) as required. 3. Remove the instrument cluster from the instrument panel. Check for continuity between the seat belt switch sense circuit cavity of the seat wire harness connector for the seat belt switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, repair the shorted seat belt switch sense circuit between the seat belt switch and the instrument cluster as required. 4. Check for continuity between the seat belt switch sense circuit cavities of the seat wire harness connector for the seat belt switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If OK, test and replace the ineffective instrument cluster as required. Refer to appropriate testing. If not OK, repair the open seat belt switch sense circuit between the seat belt switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat track position sensor (1) is a Hall Effect-type sensor. This sensor consists of a Hall Effect Integrated Circuit (IC) chip encased in potting material within a cavity of the molded plastic sensor housing. The sensor housing has two integral snap features (3) and snaps into a stamped metal bracket located on the inboard side of one of the seat adjuster tracks on the front seat of vehicles so equipped. A molded connector receptacle (2) integral to the sensor housing is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector and take out of the seat wire harness beneath the front seat cushion frame. The seat track position sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire sensor must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1074 Seat Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat track position sensor is designed to provide a seat position data input to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) indicating whether the driver side front seat is in a full forward or a not full forward position. The ORC uses this data as an additional logic input for use in determining the appropriate deployment force to be used when deploying the multistage driver side front airbag. The seat track position sensor receives a nominal five volt supply from the ORC. The sensor communicates the seat position by modulating the voltage returned to the ORC on a sensor data circuit. The ORC also monitors the condition of the sensor circuits and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected. The ORC then sends messages over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to control the illumination of the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The hard wired circuits between the seat track position sensor and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the seat track position sensor or the electronic controls and communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the seat track position sensor or the electronic controls and communication related to seat track position sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Reach under the front seat cushion to access the seat track position sensor (4) in a bracket (1) located on the inboard side of either the inner or outer, driver or passenger seat track (5). 3. Disconnect the seat wire harness connector (3) from the sensor connector receptacle located on the end of the sensor. 4. Using a small screwdriver, depress the snap feature (2) and pull the connector end of the sensor out of the bracket. 5. Remove the sensor from under the front seat. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1077 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the front seat cushion to position the seat track position sensor (4) to the open end of the bracket (1) located on the inboard side of either the inner or outer, driver or passenger seat track (5). 2. Push the sensor firmly into the bracket until the snap feature (2) locks into place. 3. Reconnect the seat wire harness connector (3) to the sensor connector receptacle located on the end of the sensor. Be certain that the latch on the connector is fully engaged. 4. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 279 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 2 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1081 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1082 Seat Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 279 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 2 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1083 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1088 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1089 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1090 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder Removal REMOVAL The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly (2). a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 1096 The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (2) with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (2) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 1097 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key/Lock Cylinder - Removal REMOVAL The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly (2). a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 1098 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key/Lock Cylinder - Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (2) with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (2) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1102 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1103 Neutral Safety Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1104 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1112 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1115 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1116 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: A new TPM sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new TPM sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activation the TPM sensor. If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 13 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1123 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1124 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1125 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1126 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 272 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1127 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 13 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1130 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1131 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1132 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1133 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 272 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 1134 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1137 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1140 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 321 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 2 Z953 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1144 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1145 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 321 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 2 Z953 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 1146 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1149 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1154 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - A/T/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1157 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1162 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1163 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1164 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1167 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1168 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 1169 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1172 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 268 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1177 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1178 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1179 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 274 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1180 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1181 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 268 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1184 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1185 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1186 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 274 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1187 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1188 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Input Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1191 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Output Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Input Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 1194 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission temperature sensor is a thermistor that is integral to the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1199 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission temperature sensor is used by the TCM to sense the temperature of the fluid in the sump. Since fluid temperature can affect transmission shift quality and convertor lock up, the TCM requires this information to determine which shift schedule to operate in. Calculated Temperature A failure in the temperature sensor or circuit will result in calculated temperature being substituted for actual temperature. Calculated temperature is a predicted fluid temperature which is calculated from a combination of inputs: - Battery (ambient) temperature - Engine coolant temperature - In-gear run time since start-up Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Component ID: 322 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT 5 VOLT SELECTOR SWITCH SUPPLY 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 5 Z973 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR 4WD NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1204 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1205 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1206 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 322 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT 5 VOLT SELECTOR SWITCH SUPPLY 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 5 Z973 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR 4WD NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1207 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1208 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1211 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1212 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1213 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1214 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 1218 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 1219 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 1220 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 1221 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 1222 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 1223 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 1224 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift selector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4HI TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4HI if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4HI_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4HI_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - 2WD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 2WD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_2WD_max Volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1227 - 2WD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV233 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1228 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4LOCK TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LOCK if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LOCK_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LOCK_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - AWD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered AWD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_AWD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_AWD_max Volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1229 - AWD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_AWD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV244 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1230 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Powertrain Management/Transmission Control Systems/Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4HI TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4HI if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4HI_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4HI_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - 2WD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 2WD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_2WD_max Volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1231 - 2WD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV233 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1232 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION (first image below) for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES (second image below) for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1233 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The switch for the rear window defogger (EBL) system (1) is integrated into the A/C-heater control (2), which is located in the center of the instrument panel. When the rear window defogger switch is activated, the A/C-heater control requests the front control module (FCM) to operate the rear window defogger (EBL) relay and an amber indicator (3) will illuminate. When the EBL relay is activated, current is directed to the rear defogger grid lines. The grid lines heat the glass to help clear the surface of fog or frost. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1239 Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION An amber indicator will illuminate when the rear window defogger switch is activated. When the switch is activated, the A/C-heater control operates the rear window defogger (EBL) relay. The EBL relay controls the current flow to the heating grid of the rear window. NOTE: The EBL system turns off automatically after 10 minutes of initial operation. Each following activation cycle of the EBL system will last 5 minutes. The EBL system will automatically turn off after an initial programmed time interval of about 10 minutes as long as the ignition switch is in RUN. After the initial time interval has expired, if the rear window defogger switch is pressed to ON again during the same ignition cycle, the EBL system will automatically turn off after about 5 minutes. The EBL system will also turn off if the ignition switch is turned to any position other than RUN or by manually pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time. The rear window defogger switch is diagnosed using a scan tool. The rear window defogger switch and indicator cannot be adjusted or repaired. The A/C-heater control must be replaced if the rear window defogger switch or indicator is inoperative or damaged See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Assembly/Service and Repair/A/C Heater Control Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 309 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 2 Q211 14TN/LB LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3 Q111 14TN/YL LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 5-6 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1244 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1245 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 310 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 2 Q212 14OR/VT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3 Q112 14OR/BR RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 4 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 5-6 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1246 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1247 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Component ID: 323 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 3 Z940 20BK GROUND 4 Z13 16BK/WT GROUND 5 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 7 Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP 8 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1248 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 2 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 3 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 4 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 5 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1249 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1250 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 324 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 2 Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 3 Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP 4 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 5 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 6 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 7 Z974 20BK/OR GROUND 8 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1251 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 309 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 2 Q211 14TN/LB LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3 Q111 14TN/YL LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 5-6 Q15 14OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1254 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1255 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 310 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 2 Q212 14OR/VT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3 Q112 14OR/BR RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 4 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 5-6 Q15 14OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1256 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1257 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Component ID: 323 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 3 Z940 20BK GROUND 4 Z13 16BK/WT GROUND 5 Q15 14OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT 6 Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 7 Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP 8 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1258 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 2 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 3 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 4 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 5 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1259 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1260 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 324 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 2 Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 3 Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP 4 Q15 14OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT 5 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 6 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 7 Z974 20BK/OR GROUND 8 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 1261 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1262 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER WINDOW SWITCH For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The front door power window switches are included in the window/lock switch See: Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame/Power Door Lock Switch/Testing and Inspection. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the power window switch knobs receive battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the junction block. If all of the LEDs are inoperative in the power window switch and the power windows are inoperative, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures. If the power windows operate, but any or all of the LEDs are inoperative, the power window and lock switch units with the inoperative LED(s) must be replaced. 1. Check the fuse and the circuit breaker. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the fuse or circuit breaker. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If OK, turn the ignition switch to the Off position and go to STEP 3. If not OK, check circuit breaker and repair the circuit to the ignition switch as required. 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power window switch from the door trim panel. Unplug the wire harness connector from the switch. 4. Test the power window switch continuity. See the Power Window Switch Continuity chart to determine if the continuity is correct in the Neutral, Up and Down switch positions. If OK, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The driver and front passenger side power window switch is included in the window/lock switch. See: Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame/Power Door Lock Switch/Service and Repair/Removal for the service procedures. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal. 3. Remove switch from door trim panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1265 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The driver and front passenger side power window switch is included in the window/lock switch. See: Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame/Power Door Lock Switch/Service and Repair/Installation. 1. Install the switch to the door trim panel. 2. Install the door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Trim Panel - Installation. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Wheel Alignment - Description Alignment: Description and Operation Wheel Alignment - Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Suspension components with rubber/urethane bushings should be tightened with the vehicle at normal ride height. It is important to have the springs supporting the weight of the vehicle when the fasteners are torqued. If springs are not at their normal ride position, vehicle ride comfort could be affected and premature bushing wear may occur. Wheel alignment involves the correct positioning of the wheels in relation to the vehicle. The positioning is accomplished through suspension and steering linkage adjustments. An alignment is considered essential for efficient steering, good directional stability and to minimize tire wear. The most important measurements of an alignment are caster, camber and toe. CAUTION: Never attempt to modify suspension or steering components by heating or bending. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Wheel Alignment - Description > Page 1271 Alignment: Description and Operation Wheel Alignment - Operation OPERATION - CASTER (1) is the forward or rearward tilt of the steering knuckle from vertical. Tilting the top of the knuckle forward provides less positive caster. Tilting the top of the knuckle rearward provides more positive caster. Positive caster promotes directional stability. This angle enables the front wheels to return to a straight ahead position after turns. - CAMBER (2) is the inward or outward tilt of the wheel relative to the center of the vehicle. Tilting the top of the wheel inward provides negative camber. Tilting the top of the wheel outward provides positive camber. Incorrect camber will cause wear on the inside or outside edge of the tire. - TOE (4) is the difference between the leading inside edges and trailing inside edges of the front tires. Wheel toe position out of specification cause's unstable steering, uneven tire wear and steering wheel off- center. The wheel toe position is the final front wheel alignment adjustment. THRUST ANGLE (3) is the angle of the rear axle relative to the centerline of the vehicle. Incorrect thrust angle can cause off-center steering and excessive tire wear. Off-center steering, lead or pull and Minimal adjustment (clearance between spring seat hole and leaf spring pin) can be made by loosening the U-Bolts and moving one side forward and the other rearward. All damaged component(s) must be replaced to correct the thrust angle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 1272 Alignment: Testing and Inspection PRE-ALIGNMENT INSPECTION Before starting wheel alignment, the following inspection and necessary corrections must be completed. Refer to Suspension and Steering System Diagnosis Chart below for additional information. 1. Inspect tires for size, air pressure and tread wear. 2. Inspect front wheel bearings for wear. 3. Inspect front wheels for excessive radial or lateral runout and balance. 4. Inspect ball studs, linkage pivot points and steering gear for looseness, roughness or binding. 5. Check intermediate shaft for excessive loosness or binding. 6. Inspect suspension components for wear and noise. 7. Check suspension ride height, per the recommended proceedure for variation side to side, in front and rear. 8. Road test the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber, Caster and Toe Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber, Caster and Toe Adjustment CAMBER, CASTER AND TOE ADJUSTMENT Camber and caster angle adjustments involve changing the position of the lower control arm with the slots in the frame brackets to move the lower control arm inwards or outwards for proper adjustment. This can be achieved by using a socket on the head of the cam bolt and turning clockwise or counterclockwise to achieve the proper specification. NOTE: Both front and rear lower control arm cam bolts are adjustable. NOTE: Camber and caster adjustments must be made at the lower control arm The upper control arm is not adjustable. NOTE: When the lower control arm cam bolts are loosened the lower control arm will normally go outwards automatically with the weight of the vehicle. CASTER Moving the rear position of the lower control arm at the frame in or out, will change the caster angle significantly and camber angle only slightly. To maintain the camber angle while adjusting caster, move the rear of the lower control arm in or out. Then move the front of the lower control arm slightly in the opposite direction. CAMBER Move both the front and rear of the lower control arm together in or out. This will change the camber angle significantly and caster angle slightly. After adjustment is made tighten the lower control arm bolt & nuts to 142 Nm (105 ft. lbs.). TOE ADJUSTMENT The wheel toe position adjustment is the final adjustment. 1. Start the engine and turn wheels both ways before straightening the wheels. Secure the steering wheel with the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Loosen the tie rod jam nuts (3). NOTE: Each front wheel should be adjusted for one-half of the total toe position specification. This will ensure the steering wheel will be centered when the wheels are positioned straight-ahead. 3. Adjust the wheel toe position by turning the inner tie rod (4) as necessary. 4. Tighten the tie rod jam nut (3) to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 5. Verify the specifications. 6. Turn off engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber, Caster and Toe Adjustment > Page 1275 Alignment: Service and Repair Curb Height Measurement CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT The wheel alignment is to be checked and all alignment adjustments made with the vehicle at its required curb height specification. Vehicle height is to be checked with the vehicle on a flat, level surface, preferably a vehicle alignment rack. The tires are to be inflated to the recommended pressure. All tires are to be the same size as standard equipment. Vehicle height is checked with the fuel tank full of fuel, and no passenger or luggage compartment load. Inspect the vehicle for bent or weak suspension components. Compare the parts tag on the suspect coil spring(s) to the parts book and the vehicle sales code, checking for a match. Once removed from the vehicle, compare the coil spring height to a correct new or known good coil spring. The heights should vary if the suspect spring is weak. 1. Front - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the center of the rear lower control arm bolt (1) to the ground (2) Record the measurement. Next measure the distance from the spindle center (3) to the ground (4) Record the measurement. 2. Take the two measurements and subract them to get the ride height specification. 3. Rear - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the axle tube (1) to the jounce bumper flange (2). 4. Compare the measurements to the specifications listed in the following Curb Height Specifications chart. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE 58 psi +/- 2 psi Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Delivery Check *CHECKING THE FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM For a complete wiring diagram Consult Diagrams/Electrical. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 1282 Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP OPERATION Ignition on, engine not running. With a scan tool, actuate the Fuel System test. NOTE: It may be necessary to use a mechanics stethoscope in the next step. Listen for fuel pump operation at the fuel tank. Does the Fuel Pump operate? Yes - Go To 2 No - Go To 5 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 2. FUEL PRESSURE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install a fuel pressure gauge at the engine. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Choose a conclusion that best matches your fuel pressure reading. Below Specification - Go To 3 Within Specification - Test Complete. Above Specification - Replace the fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 3. RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure even with the engine off. Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Turn the ignition off. Raise vehicle on hoist, and disconnect the fuel pressure line at the fuel pump module. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631(3/8") fuel line adapter and the fuel pressure gauge between the fuel supply line and the fuel pump module. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Is the fuel pressure within specification now? Yes Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 1283 - Repair/replace fuel supply line as necessary. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 4 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 4. CHECKING FUEL INLET STRAINER WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Module and inspect the Fuel Inlet Strainer. Is the Fuel Inlet Strainer plugged? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Inlet Strainer. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Replace the Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test 5. (N1) FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Relay from the IPM. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit from the relay connector to the fuel pump module connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 1284 - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Repair the open in the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 1285 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Leak Down Test *FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN For a complete wiring diagram Consult Diagrams/Electrical. Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP MODULE NOTE: Before continuing visually and physically inspect the fuel delivery system for external leaks or damage. Repair/replace as necessary. WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631 (3/8") fuel line adapter. Install the fuel pressure gauge. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Using special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, pinch the rubber fuel line between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 kPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 2 2. FUEL INJECTOR(S) WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Remove special tool #C4390. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Move special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, from between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine to between the fuel pressure gauge and fuel pump module. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 kPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 1286 - Replace the leaking fuel injectors. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Test Complete. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by manufacturer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Loosen clamp and disconnect air duct at air cleaner cover. 2. Pry over 4 spring clips (5) from housing cover (3) (spring clips retain cover to housing). 3. Release housing cover (3) from locating tabs on housing and remove cover. 4. Remove air cleaner element (filter) from housing. 5. Clean inside of housing before replacing element. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1295 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install filter element into housing. 2. Position housing cover into housing locating tabs. 3. Pry up 4 spring clips (6) and lock cover to housing. 4. Install air duct to air cleaner cover and tighten hose clamp to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.) torque. 5. If any other hose clamps were removed from air intake system, tighten them to 3.4 Nm (30 in. lbs.) torque. 6. If any bolts were removed from air resonator housing or air intake tubing, tighten them to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Firing Order: Electrical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 4.7L ENGINE DESCRIPTION Fig. 1 The 4.7 liter (287 CID) eight-cylinder engine is an 90° single overhead camshaft engine. The cast iron cylinder block is made up of two different components; the first component is the cylinder bore and upper block, the second component is the bedplate that comprises the lower portion of the cylinder block and houses the lower half of the crankshaft main bearings. The cylinders are numbered from front to rear with the left bank being numbered 1,3,5 and 7, and the right bank being numbered 2,4,6 and 8. The firing order is 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2. The engine serial number is located at the Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 1304 right front side of the engine block (Fig. 1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 1305 Firing Order: Mechanical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications IGNITION TIMING Ignition timing is not adjustable on any engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUGS 3.7L TORQUE ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 27 Nm (20 Ft. Lbs) 4.7L New plugs ............................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 27 +/- 3 Nm (20 Ft. Lbs.) Used plugs ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 22 +/- 3 Nm (16 Ft. Lbs) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1312 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUGS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. Remove necessary air filter tubing and air intake components at top of engine and at throttle body. 2. To remove the upper row of plugs (5), each individual ignition coil (2) must first be removed. See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil - Removal Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head. 3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign material from entering combustion chamber. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between UPPER row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. 4. Inspect spark plug condition. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 1315 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Installation INSTALLATION - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Never use a motorized wire wheel brush to clean spark plugs. Metallic deposits will remain on spark plug insulator and will cause plug misfire. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. To aid in coil installation, apply silicone based grease such as Mopar(R) Dielectric Grease # J8126688 into spark plug end of rubber boots (4) and (7). Also apply this grease to the tops of spark plugs (5) and (6). 2. Check and adjust spark plug gap with a gap gauging tool (1). Refer to the Spark Plug Specification for plug gap. Two different gaps are used. See: Specifications 3. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading. Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between upper row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 1316 Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Certain engines use torque sensitive spark plugs. It is a good practice to always tighten spark plugs to a specific torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the spark plug gap, or a cracked porcelain insulator. See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Specifications 4. Install ignition coil(s). See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil - Installation 5. Install necessary air filter tubing and air intake components to top of engine and to throttle body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications MAX VARIATION Max variation between cylinders ......................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 25% Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1320 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE The results of a cylinder compression pressure test can be utilized to diagnose several engine malfunctions. Ensure the battery is completely charged and the engine starter motor is in good operating condition. Otherwise the indicated compression pressures may not be valid for diagnosis purposes. 1. Clean the spark plug recesses with compressed air. 2. Remove the spark plugs. 3. Disable the fuel system. 4. Remove the ASD relay. 5. Insert a compression pressure gauge and rotate the engine with the engine starter motor for three revolutions. 6. Record the compression pressure on the 3rd revolution. Continue the test for the remaining cylinders. 7. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Engine Specifications. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation Drive Belt: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The accessory drive belt is a serpentine type belt. Satisfactory performance of these belts depends on belt condition and proper belt tension. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1324 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT VISUAL DIAGNOSIS When diagnosing serpentine accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the belt from rib to rib , are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace the belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also replace the belt if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing. Refer to ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS CHART for further belt diagnosis. NOISE DIAGNOSIS Noises generated by the accessory drive belt are most noticeable at idle. Before replacing a belt to resolve a noise condition, inspect all of the accessory drive pulleys for alignment, glazing, or excessive end play. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1325 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Drive Belt: Procedures CLEANING Clean all foreign debris from belt pulley grooves. The belt pulleys must be free of oil, grease, and coolants before installing the drive belt. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1328 Drive Belt: Removal and Replacement Accessory Drive Belt - Removal REMOVAL - 3.7L/4.7L CAUTION: Do not let tensioner arm snap back to the freearm position, severe damage may occur to the tensioner. Belt tension is not adjustable. Belt adjustment is maintained by an accessory drive belt tensioner. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery. 2. Rotate belt tensioner (6) until it contacts the stop. Remove belt (2), then slowly rotate the tensioner (6) into the freearm position. Accessory Drive Belt - Installation INSTALLATION - 3.7L/4.7L 1. Check condition of all pulleys. CAUTION: When installing the serpentine accessory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. If not, the engine may overheat due to the water pump rotating in the wrong direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1329 2. Install new belt. Route the belt around all pulleys except the idler pulley (5). Rotate the tensioner arm until it contacts it's stop position. Route the belt around the idler (5) and slowly let the tensioner rotate into the belt. Make sure the belt is seated onto all pulleys. 3. With the drive belt installed, inspect the belt wear indicator. On 4.7L Engines only, the gap between the tang and the housing stop must not exceed 24 mm (.94 inches). If the measurement exceeds this specification replace the serpentine accessory drive belt. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Loosen clamp and disconnect air duct at air cleaner cover. 2. Pry over 4 spring clips (5) from housing cover (3) (spring clips retain cover to housing). 3. Release housing cover (3) from locating tabs on housing and remove cover. 4. Remove air cleaner element (filter) from housing. 5. Clean inside of housing before replacing element. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1336 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install filter element into housing. 2. Position housing cover into housing locating tabs. 3. Pry up 4 spring clips (6) and lock cover to housing. 4. Install air duct to air cleaner cover and tighten hose clamp to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.) torque. 5. If any other hose clamps were removed from air intake system, tighten them to 3.4 Nm (30 in. lbs.) torque. 6. If any bolts were removed from air resonator housing or air intake tubing, tighten them to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair This vehicle is not equipped with a Cabin Air Filter. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: . REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to Fluid - A/T Testing and Inspection. See: Fluids/Fluid - A/T/Testing and Inspection CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1343 CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with Installer 6960-A or another suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer etc.). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Pickup Filter: Locations The module assembly (5) contains the following components: An internal fuel filter See: Fuel Filter/Description and Operation/Fuel Filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Oil Filter: Procedures ENGINE OIL SERVICE The engine oil level indicator is located at the right rear of the engine on the 4.7L engines. CRANKCASE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION CAUTION: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, pressure loss or oil foaming can result. Inspect engine oil level approximately every 800 kilometers (500 miles). Unless the engine has exhibited loss of oil pressure, run the engine for about five minutes before checking oil level. Checking engine oil level on a cold engine is not accurate. To ensure proper lubrication of an engine, the engine oil must be maintained at an acceptable level. The acceptable levels are indicated between the ADD and SAFE marks on the engine oil dipstick. 1. Position vehicle on level surface. 2. With engine OFF, allow approximately ten minutes for oil to settle to bottom of crankcase, remove engine oil dipstick. 3. Wipe dipstick clean. 4. Install dipstick and verify it is seated in the tube. 5. Remove dipstick, with handle held above the tip, take oil level reading. 6. Add oil only if level is below the ADD mark on dipstick. ENGINE OIL CHANGE Change engine oil at mileage and time intervals described in Maintenance Schedules. Run engine until achieving normal operating temperature. 1. Position the vehicle on a level surface and turn engine off. 2. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 3. Remove oil fill cap. 4. Place a suitable drain pan under crankcase drain. 5. Remove drain plug from crankcase and allow oil to drain into pan. Inspect drain plug threads for stretching or other damage. Replace drain plug if damaged. 6. Install drain plug in crankcase. 7. Lower vehicle and fill crankcase with specified type and amount of engine oil described. 8. Install oil fill cap. 9. Start engine and inspect for leaks. 10. Stop engine and inspect oil level. NOTE: Care should be exercised when disposing used engine oil after it has been drained from a vehicle engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1355 Oil Filter: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL All engines are equipped with a high quality full-flow, disposable type oil filter. DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends a Mopar(R) or equivalent oil filter be used. 1. Position a drain pan under the oil filter. 2. Using a suitable oil filter wrench loosen filter. 3. Rotate the oil filter counterclockwise to remove it from the cylinder block oil filter boss. 4. When filter separates from cylinder block oil filter boss, tip gasket end upward to minimize oil spill. Remove filter from vehicle. NOTE: Make sure filter gasket was removed with filter. 5. With a wiping cloth, clean the gasket sealing surface of oil and grime. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Lightly lubricate oil filter gasket (2) with engine oil. 2. Thread filter (3) onto adapter nipple. When gasket makes contact with sealing surface, hand tighten filter one full turn, do not over tighten. 3. Add oil, verify crankcase oil level and start engine. Inspect for oil leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING 1. Partially drain cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair. 2. Loosen both bypass hose clamps and position to center of hose. Remove hose from vehicle. WITH AIR CONDITIONING If equipped with A/C, the generator and A/C compressor along with their common mounting bracket must be partially removed. Removing generator or A/C compressor from their mounting bracket is not necessary. Also, discharging A/C system is not necessary. Do not remove any refrigerant lines from A/C compressor. WARNING: THE A/C SYSTEM IS UNDER PRESSURE EVEN WITH ENGINE OFF. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Partially drain cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair. 3. Remove upper radiator hose clamp and hose at radiator. 4. Unplug wiring harness from A/C compressor. 5. Remove air cleaner assembly. 6. Remove accessory drive belt See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal. 7. Remove bracket-to-intake manifold bolts. 8. The drive belt idler pulley must be removed to gain access to one of A/C compressor/generator bracket mounting bolts (3). Remove idler pulley bolt and remove idler pulley. 9. Remove oil dipstick tube mounting bolt (3) at side of A/C-generator mounting bracket. 10. Disconnect throttle body cables. 11. Remove heater hose clamp and heater hose from heater hose coolant return tube. 12. Remove heater hose coolant return tube mounting bolt and remove tube (4) from engine. Discard the old tube O-ring. 13. Remove six bracket bolts. 14. Lift and position generator and A/C compressor (along with their common mounting bracket) to gain access to bypass hose. A block of wood may be used to hold assembly in position. 15. Loosen and position both hose clamps to center of bypass hose. Remove hose from vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1361 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING 1. Position bypass hose clamps to center of hose. 2. Install bypass hose to engine. 3. Secure both hose clamps. 4. Fill cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair. 5. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. WITH AIR CONDITIONING 1. Position bypass hose clamps to center of hose. 2. Install bypass hose to engine. 3. Secure both hose clamps. 4. Install generator-A/C mounting bracket assembly to engine. Tighten bolts to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) torque. Tighten bolts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Install a new O-ring to the heater hose coolant return tube (4). Coat the new O-ring with antifreeze before installation. 6. Install coolant return tube and its mounting bolt to engine. 7. Connect throttle body control cables. 8. Install oil dipstick mounting bolt. 9. Install idler pulley. Tighten bolt to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque. 10. Install drive belt See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation. 11. Install air cleaner assembly. 12. Install upper radiator hose to radiator. 13. Connect wiring harness to A/C compressor. 14. Connect battery negative cable. 15. Fill cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair. 16. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Discharge Line Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Discharge Line DESCRIPTION The A/C discharge line is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C compressor to the A/C condenser. The A/C discharge line has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals and gaskets. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C discharge line is removed, NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C discharge line has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals and gaskets. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C discharge line is removed, The A/C discharge line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Discharge Line > Page 1366 Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Liquid Line DESCRIPTION The A/C liquid line is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C condenser to the A/C evaporator. The A/C liquid line uses a spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler with three O-rings to connect and seal it to the A/C evaporator See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/Description and Operation/Description. The A/C liquid line includes the high-side service port, the fixed A/C orifice tube and a fitting for the A/C pressure transducer See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Port HVAC/Description and Operation, See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Expansion Block/Orifice Tube/Description and Operation/Description and See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch/Description and Operation/Description. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C liquid line has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals, gasket, A/C pressure transducer, high-side service port valve and cap and the secondary retaining clip. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C liquid line is removed. The A/C liquid line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Discharge Line > Page 1367 Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Suction Line DESCRIPTION The A/C suction line is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C accumulator to the A/C compressor. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C suction line has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals and gaskets. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C suction line is removed. The A/C suction line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Line - Removal Discharge Line REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning and See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. 3. Remove the nut (3) that secures the A/C discharge line (2) to the A/C condenser (4). 4. Disconnect the A/C discharge line from the A/C condenser and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 5. Remove the nut (1) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. 6. Disconnect the A/C discharge line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 7. Install plugs in, or tape over the discharge line fittings and the condenser and compressor ports. 8. Remove the A/C discharge line from the engine compartment. Liquid Line REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning and See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 1370 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the A/C pressure transducer (8). 4. Remove the air filter housing. 5. Remove the nut (6) that secures the A/C liquid line (1) to the condenser outlet port (7). 6. Disconnect the A/C liquid line from the A/C condenser and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 7. Disengage the A/C liquid line from the body retaining clips (5). 8. Remove the secondary retaining clip (4) from the spring-lock coupler that secures the A/C liquid line to evaporator inlet tube (3). 9. Using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent), disconnect the A/C liquid line from the evaporator inlet tube and remove and discard the O-ring seals See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal. 10. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened liquid line fittings and the condenser and evaporator ports. 11. Remove the A/C liquid line from the engine compartment. 12. If required , remove the A/C pressure transducer from the A/C liquid line See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch/Service and Repair/Removal. Suction Line REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning and See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. 3. Remove the resonator from the engine. 4. Remove the nut (1) that secures the A/C suction line (5) to the A/C accumulator (6). 5. Disconnect the A/C suction line from the A/C accumulator and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 6. Remove the nut that secures the A/C suction line to the A/C compressor. 7. Disconnect the A/C suction line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 8. Install plugs in, or tape over the suction line fittings and the accumulator and compressor ports. 9. Remove the A/C suction line from the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 1371 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Line - Installation Discharge Line INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant systemSee: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. Position the A/C discharge line (2) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened discharge line fittings and the condenser and compressor ports 3. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them and new gaskets onto the discharge line fittings. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. 5. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the A/C discharge line to the A/C condenser (4). 7. Install the nut (3) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 8. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 9. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. 10. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. 11. Charge the refrigerant systemSee: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge. Liquid Line INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant systemSee: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 1372 1. If removed, install the A/C pressure transducer (8) onto the A/C liquid line (1). 2. Position the A/C liquid line into the engine compartment. 3. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened liquid line fittings and the condenser and evaporator ports. 4. Lubricate new O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the liquid line spring-lock coupler fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 5. Connect the A/C liquid line to the evaporator inlet tube (3) See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation. 6. Install the secondary retaining clip (4) onto the spring-lock coupler that secures the A/C liquid line to the evaporator inlet tube. 7. Engage the A/C liquid line into the body retaining clips (5). 8. Lubricate a new O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the liquid line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seal as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 9. Connect the A/C liquid line to the condenser outlet port (7). 10. Install the nut (6) that secures the A/C liquid line to the condenser outlet port. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the air filter housing. 12. Connect the wire harness connector (2) to the A/C pressure transducer. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 14. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. 15. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. 16. Charge the refrigerant systemSee: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge. Suction Line INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant systemSee: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 1373 1. Position the A/C suction line (5) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened suction line fittings and the accumulator and compressor ports. 3. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them and new gaskets onto the suction line fittings. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the A/C suction line to the A/C compressor. 5. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C suction line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the A/C suction line to the A/C accumulator (6). 7. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C suction line to the A/C accumulator. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the resonator onto the engine. 9. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 10. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. 11. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. 12. Charge the refrigerant systemSee: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications TORQUE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1377 Power Steering Line/Hose: Testing and Inspection POWER STEERING PUMP AND HOSES NOTE: This information is designed to be used in conjunction with the Steering diagnostic charts. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Testing and Inspection CHECKING FOR WEAR OF POWER STEERING PUMP INTERNAL COMPONENTS 1. Place gear selector in PARK (or NEUTRAL) with wheels chalked. 2. With the engine idling, have a helper turn the steering wheel. 3. Using an electronic listening tool, determine if noise is coming from the pump. 4. Increase the engine speed and have a helper turn the steering wheel. Does the noise change with load? 5. Replace the power steering pump if excessive noise is present. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Power Steering Pump - Removal CHECKING FOR POWER STEERING HOSES TOUCHING BODY OR FRAME OF VEHICLE Check hoses and hose tubes as following: - Inspect hoses and hose tubes for witness marks. If witness marks are present, adjust hose(s) to the proper position by loosening, repositioning and tightening attachments to the specified torque See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Specifications. Do not bend tubing to adjust. Replace the hose assembly if damaged. - Check fastener torque of hose mounting brackets and tube nuts. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Specifications - Have a helper bump the steering gear off of the stops to induce pressure fluctuations which may move the hose. If hose contact is made, adjust hose(s) to the proper position by loosening, repositioning and tightening attachments to the specified torque See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Specifications. Do not bend tubing to adjust. Replace the hose assembly if damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses - Removal Return Hose - Without Cooler RETURN HOSE - WITHOUT COOLER 1. Siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the return hose (4) at the gear (6). 4. Disconnect the return hose (4) at the reservoir (2). 5. Remove the return hose from the vehicle. Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE 1. Siphon the power steering system. 2. Remove the pressure hose (2) at the pump (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 1380 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the pressure hose (2) at the gear (4). 5. Remove the pressure hose from the vehicle. Return Hose - Gear To Cooler RETURN HOSE - GEAR TO COOLER 1. Siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the return hose (6) at the gear (7). 4. Disconnect the return hose (6) at the cooler (1). 5. Remove the return hose from the vehicle. Return Hose - Cooler To Reservoir RETRUN HOSE - COOLER TO RESERVOIR Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 1381 1. Siphon the power steering system. 2. Disconnect the return hose (4) at the reservoir (2). 3. Disconnect the return hose (4) at the cooler (1). 4. Remove the return hose from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 1382 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses - Installation Return Hose - Without Cooler RETURN HOSE - WITHOUT COOLER 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose (4) at the reservoir (2). 3. Reconnect the return hose (4) at the gear (6). Tighten the tube nut to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 4. Route the return hose and secure. 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Refill the power steering system,See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair. Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE 1. Install the pressure hose (2) to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the pressure hose (2) at the gear (4). Tighten the tube nut to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 3. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 1383 4. Reconnect the pressure hose (2) at the pump (4). Tighten the tube nut to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 5. Refill the power steering system,See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair. Return Hose - Gear To Cooler RETURN HOSE - GEAR TO COOLER 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose (6) at the cooler (1) with hose clamps. 3. Reconnect the return hose (6) at the gear (7). Tighten the tube nut to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 4. Route the return hose and secure. 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Refill the power steering system,See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair. Return Hose - Cooler To Reservoir RETURN HOSE - COOLER TO RESERVOIR Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 1384 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose (4) at the cooler (1). 3. Reconnect the return hose (4) at the reservoir (2) with hose clamp. 4. Refill the power steering system,See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Brake Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1390 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1391 Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid Type Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1392 Brake Fluid: Description and Operation BRAKE FLUID The brake fluid used in this vehicle must conform to DOT 3 specifications and SAE J1703 standards. No other type of brake fluid is recommended or approved for usage in the vehicle brake system. Use only Mopar brake fluid or an equivalent from a tightly sealed container. CAUTION: Never use reclaimed brake fluid or fluid from a container which has been left open. An open container of brake fluid will absorb moisture from the air and contaminate the fluid. CAUTION: Never use any type of a petroleum-based fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Use of such type fluids will result in seal damage of the vehicle brake hydraulic system causing a failure of the vehicle brake system. Petroleum based fluids would be items such as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid, etc. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1393 Brake Fluid: Testing and Inspection BRAKE FLUID CONTAMINATION Indications of fluid contamination are swollen or deteriorated rubber parts. Swollen rubber parts indicate the presence of petroleum in the brake fluid. To test for contamination, put a small amount of drained brake fluid in clear glass jar. If fluid separates into layers, there is mineral oil or other fluid contamination of the brake fluid. If brake fluid is contaminated, drain and thoroughly flush system. Replace master cylinder, proportioning valve, caliper seals, wheel cylinder seals, Antilock Brakes hydraulic unit and all hydraulic fluid hoses. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1394 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Always clean the master cylinder reservoir (2) and cap before checking fluid level. If not cleaned, dirt could enter the fluid. The fluid fill level is indicated on the side of the master cylinder reservoir (2). The correct fluid level is to the MAX indicator on the side of the reservoir. If necessary, add fluid to the proper level. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Clutch Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1399 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1400 Clutch Fluid: Specifications NOTE: The hydraulic linkage is serviced as a complete assembly only. The individual components must not be serviced separately. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1405 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity Engine Coolant .................................................................................................................................... ................................... 13.3 Quarts ( 12.5 Liters ) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1408 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Coolant Type Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) P/N 5022764AB or equivalent. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coolant - Description Coolant: Description and Operation Coolant - Description HOAT COOLANT WARNING: Antifreeze is an ethylene-glycol base coolant and is harmful if swallowed or inhaled. If swallowed, drink two glasses of water and induce vomiting. If inhaled, move to fresh air area. Seek medical attention immediately. Do not store in open or unmarked containers. Wash skin and clothing thoroughly after coming in contact with ethylene-glycol. Keep out of reach of children. Dispose of glycol based coolant properly, contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Do not open a cooling system when the engine is at operating temperature or hot under pressure, personal injury can result. Avoid radiator cooling fan when engine compartment related service is performed, personal injury can result. CAUTION: Use of Propylene-Glycol based coolants is not recommended, as they provide less freeze protection and less corrosion protection. The cooling system is designed around the coolant. The coolant must accept heat from engine metal, in the cylinder head area near the exhaust valves and engine block. Then coolant carries the heat to the radiator where the tube/fin radiator can transfer the heat to the air. The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads, and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769), or the equivalent ethylene-glycol base coolant with organic corrosion inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37°C (-35°F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh properly mixed coolant solution. CAUTION: Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769) may not be mixed with any other type of antifreeze. Mixing of coolants other than specified (non-HOAT or other HOAT) may result in engine damage that may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and decreased corrosion protection. COOLANT PERFORMANCE The required ethylene-glycol and water mixture depends upon climate and vehicle operating conditions. The coolant performance of various mixtures follows: Pure Water- Water can absorb more heat than a mixture of water and ethylene-glycol. This is for purpose of heat transfer only. Water also freezes at a higher temperature and allows corrosion. 100 percent Ethylene-Glycol - The corrosion inhibiting additives in ethylene-glycol need the presence of water to dissolve. Without water, additives form deposits in system. These act as insulation causing temperature to rise to as high as 149°C (300°F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic. The increased temperature can result in severe engine damage. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at -22°C (-8°F). 50/50 Ethylene-Glycol and Water - Is the recommended mixture, it provides protection against freezing to -37°C (-34°F). The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If percentage is lower, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a 68 percent antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7°C (-90°F). A higher percentage will freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water. CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be measured with normal field equipment and can cause problems associated with 100 percent ethylene-glycol. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coolant - Description > Page 1411 Coolant: Description and Operation Coolant - Operation OPERATION Coolant flows through the engine block, cylinder head, absorbing the heat from the engine, then flows to the radiator where the cooling fins in the radiator transfers the heat from the coolant to the atmosphere. During cold weather the ethylene-glycol or propylene-glycol coolant prevents water present in the cooling system from freezing within temperatures indicated by mixture ratio of coolant to water. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1412 Coolant: Testing and Inspection COOLANT CONCENTRATION TESTING Coolant concentration should be checked when any additional coolant was added to system or after a coolant drain, flush and refill. The coolant mixture offers optimum engine cooling and protection against corrosion when mixed to a freeze point of -37°C (-34°F) to -46°C (-50°F). The use of a hydrometer or Tool 8266, refractometer can be used to test coolant concentration. A hydrometer will test the amount of glycol in a mixture by measuring the specific gravity of the mixture. The higher the concentration of ethylene glycol, the larger the number of balls that will float, and higher the freeze protection (up to a maximum of 60% by volume glycol). A Refractometer Tool 8286 will test the amount of glycol in a coolant mixture by measuring the amount a beam of light bends as it passes through the fluid. Some coolant manufactures use other types of glycols into their coolant formulations. Propylene glycol is the most common new coolant. However, propylene glycol based coolants do not provide the same freezing protection and corrosion protection and are not recommended. CAUTION: Do not mix types of coolant - corrosion protection will be severely reduced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1417 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1422 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1427 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Differential Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1432 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1437 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid Capacities 42RLE Service Fill ............................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... 3.8L (4.0 Qt) Overhaul Fill ......................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... 8.3L (17.6 pts.)* 545RFE 2WD Service Fill .................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 5.2L (11 pts.) 4WD Service Fill ................................. ............................................................................................................................................................. 6.2L (13 pts.) Overhaul Fill .................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... 13.33L (28.0 pts.)* * Dry fill capacity. Depending on type and size of internal cooler, length and inside diameter of cooler lines, or use of an auxiliary cooler, these figures may vary Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1440 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Type .................................................................................................... ........................................................... Mopar ATF+4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Automatic Transmission Fluid Fluid - A/T: Description and Operation Description - Automatic Transmission Fluid AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID NOTE: Refer to Service Procedures for fluid level checking procedures. See: Service and Repair Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid is the recommended fluid for DaimlerChrysler automatic transmissions. Dexron II fluid IS NOT recommended. Clutch chatter can result from the use of improper fluid. Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid when new is red in color. The ATF is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, the ATF will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. This is normal. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. FLUID ADDITIVES DaimlerChrysler strongly recommends against the addition of any fluids to the transmission, other than those automatic transmission fluids listed above. Exceptions to this policy are the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. Various "special" additives and supplements exist that claim to improve shift feel and/or quality. These additives and others also claim to improve converter clutch operation and inhibit overheating, oxidation, varnish, and sludge. These claims have not been supported to the satisfaction of DaimlerChrysler and these additives must not be used. The use of transmission "sealers" should also be avoided, since they may adversely affect the integrity of transmission seals. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Automatic Transmission Fluid > Page 1443 Fluid - A/T: Description and Operation Operation - Automatic Transmission Fluid OPERATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID The automatic transmission fluid is selected based upon several qualities. The fluid must provide a high level of protection for the internal components by providing a lubricating film between adjacent metal components. The fluid must also be thermally stable so that it can maintain a consistent viscosity through a large temperature range. If the viscosity stays constant through the temperature range of operation, transmission operation and shift feel will remain consistent. Transmission fluid must also be a good conductor of heat. The fluid must absorb heat from the internal transmission components and transfer that heat to the transmission case. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level > Page 1446 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has three primary causes. 1. Internal clutch slippage, usually caused by low line pressure, inadequate clutch apply pressure, or clutch seal failure. 2. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of a faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and lines caused by debris or kinked lines. 3. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level > Page 1447 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid. - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level. - engine coolant entering the fluid. - internal failure that generates debris. - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown). - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair. The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Fluid Level Check - 545RFE FLUID LEVEL CHECK Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. As in any hydraulic system, air bubbles make the fluid spongy, therefore, pressures will be low and build up slowly. Improper filling can also raise the fluid level too high. When the transmssion has too much fluid, the geartrain churns up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with a low fluid level. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating and fluid oxidation, and varnishing. This can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and accumulator operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transmission vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. The transmission has a dipstick to check oil level. It is located on the right side of the engine. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. The torque converter fills in both the P (PARK) and N (NEUTRAL) positions. Place the selector lever in P (PARK) to be sure that the fluid level check is accurate. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. At normal operating temperature (approximately 82° C. or 180° F), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region (cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluid level will be approximately at the upper COLD hole of the dipstick at 21° C (70° F) fluid temperature. FILL TUBE EQUIPPED WITH INDICATOR 545RFE Fluid Fill NAFTA 545 RFE FLUID TEMPERATURE NOTE: Engine and Transmission should be at normal operating temperature before performing this procedure. After the fluid has been checked, seat the dipstick fully to seal out water and dirt. 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into DRIVE for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Shift the transmission into REVERSE for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Shift the transmission into PARK. 5. Hook up scan tool and select transmission. 6. Select sensors. 7. Read the transmission temperature value. 8. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 9. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart (shown above). NOTE: After adding any fluid to the transmission, wait a minimum of 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain from the fill tube into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 10. Check transmission for leaks. CAPPED FILL TUBE 1. Verify that the vehicle is parked on a level surface. 2. Remove the dipstick tube cap. WARNING: There is a risk of accident from vehicle starting off by itself when engine is running. There is a risk of injury from contusions Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 1450 and burns if you insert your hands into the engine when it is started or when it is running. Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving off by itself. Wear properly fastened and close-fitting work clothes. Do not touch hot or rotating parts. 3. Actuate the service brake. Start engine and let it run at idle speed in selector lever position "P". 4. Shift through the transmission modes several times with the vehicle stationary and the engine idling. 5. Warm up the transmission, wait at least 2 minutes and check the oil level with the engine running. Push the Oil Dipstick 9336 into transmission fill tube until the dipstick tip contacts the oil pan and pull out again, read off oil level, repeat if necessary. NOTE: The dipstick will protrude from the fill tube when installed. 545RFE Fluid Fill 6. Check transmission oil temperature using the appropriate scan tool. NOTE: The true transmission oil temperature can only be read by a scan tool in REVERSE or any forward gear position. 7. The transmission Oil Dipstick 9336 has indicator marks every 10 mm. Determine the height of the oil level on the dipstick and using the height, the transmission temperature, and the Transmission Fluid Graph, determine if the transmission oil level is correct. 8. Add or remove oil as necessary and recheck the oil level. 9. Once the oil level is correct, install the dipstick tube cap. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 1451 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Fluid And Filter Replacement FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: . REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to Fluid - A/T Testing and Inspection. See: Testing and Inspection CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 1452 CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with Installer 6960-A or another suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer etc.). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 1453 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fill TRANSMISSION FILL To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) ATF +4 to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 10 pints (5 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled and the torque converter was replaced or drained, add 24 pints (12 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. 3. Check the transmission fluid See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Procedures/Fluid Level Check - 545RFE and adjust as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1458 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1463 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1464 Fluid - M/T: Specifications Getrag 238 Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 2.2L (4.65 pts.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - Differential: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1469 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Front Axle C205F .................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 1.6L (56 oz.) Rear Axle 8 1/4 in. ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................ 2.1L (72 oz.)* 9 1/4 in. ............................................................ ................................................................................................................................................ 2.1L (72 oz.)* *Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Limited Slip Additive with Trac-Lok Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1472 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Front Axle Fluid Front Axle (C205F) ..................................................................................................... SAE 75W-90 Multipurpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant (MS-9763). Rear Axle Fluid Rear Axle (81/4 & 9 1/4) .................................................................................................................... SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant (MS-8985). Limited-slip rear axles require Mopar limited-slip additive (MS-10111). Four ounces (118 ml) should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1477 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Transfer Case Fluid Capacity NV233 .................................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 1.18L (2.5 pts.) NV244 .............................................................. ........................................................................................................................................... 1.35L (2.85 pts.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1480 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transfer Case - NV232 Fluid - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Transfer Case - NV232 TRANSFER CASE - NV233 Recommended lubricant for the NV233 transfer case is Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transfer Case - NV232 > Page 1483 Fluid - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Transfer Case - NV244 TRANSFER CASE - NV244 Recommended lubricant for the NV244 transfer case is Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV233 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1486 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1487 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV244 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 1488 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL NOTE: The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. 3. Remove drain (3) and fill (2) plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug (3). Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug (2) to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1493 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil with Filter ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................ 5.7L (6.0 Qt) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1496 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type ................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... SAE 5W-20 API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1497 Engine Oil: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL WARNING: New or used engine oil can be irritating to the skin. Avoid prolonged or repeated skin contact with engine oil. Contaminants in used engine oil, caused by internal combustion, can be hazardous to your health. Thoroughly wash exposed skin with soap and water. Do not wash skin with gasoline, diesel fuel, thinner, or solvents, health problems can result. Do not pollute, dispose of used engine oil properly. Contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. When service is required, Chrysler Corporation recommends that only Mopar (R) brand parts, lubricants and chemicals be used. Mopar (R) provides the best engineered products for servicing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles. Only lubricants bearing designations defined by the following organization should be used. - Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) - American Petroleum Institute (API) - National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) - Association des Constructeurs Europeans d' Automobiles (European Automobile Manufacturers Association) (ACEA) API SERVICE GRADE CERTIFIED Use an engine oil that is API Certified. MOPAR (R) provides engine oils, that meet or exceed this requirement. SAE VISCOSITY An SAE viscosity grade is used to specify the viscosity of engine oil. Use only engine oils with multiple viscosities such as 5W-20 or 5W-30. These are specified with a dual SAE viscosity grade which indicates the cold-to-hot temperature viscosity range. Select an engine oil that is best suited to your particular temperature range. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils that meet the requirements of ACEA A1/B1, A2/B2, or A3/B3. ENERGY CONSERVING OIL An Energy Conserving type oil is recommended for gasoline engines. The designation of ENERGY CONSERVING is located on the label of an engine oil container. CONTAINER IDENTIFICATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1498 Standard engine oil identification notations have been adopted to aid in the proper selection of engine oil. The identifying notations are located on the front label of engine oil plastic bottles and the top of engine oil cans. This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Chrysler only recommend API Certified engine oils. Use Mopar (R) engine oil or equivalent. SYNTHETIC ENGINE OILS There are a number of engine oils being promoted as either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use such a product, use only those oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) and SAE viscosity standard. Follow the service schedule that describes your driving type. ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES/SUPPLEMENTS The manufacturer does not recommend the addition of any engine oil additives/supplements to the specified engine oil. Engine oil additives/supplements should not be used to enhance engine oil performance. Engine oil additives/supplements should not be used to extend engine oil change intervals. No additive is known to be safe for engine durability and can degrade emission components. Additives can contain undesirable materials that harm the long term durability of engines by: - Doubling the level of phosphorus in the engine oil. The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standard Approval Committee) GF-2 and GF-3 standards require that engine oil contain no more than 0.10% phosphorus to protect the vehicles emissions performance. Addition of engine oil additives/supplements can poison, from the added sulfur and phosphorus, catalysts and hinder efforts to guarantee emissions performance to 80,000 miles. - Altering the viscosity characteristics of the engine oil so that it no longer meets the requirements of the specified viscosity grade. - Creating potential for an undesirable additive compatibility interaction in the engine crankcase. Generally it is not desirable to mix additive packages from different suppliers in the crankcase; there have been reports of low temperature engine failures caused by additive package incompatibility with such mixtures. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1499 Engine Oil: Service and Repair ENGINE OIL SERVICE The engine oil level indicator is located at the right rear of the engine on the 4.7L engines. CRANKCASE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION CAUTION: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, pressure loss or oil foaming can result. Inspect engine oil level approximately every 800 kilometers (500 miles). Unless the engine has exhibited loss of oil pressure, run the engine for about five minutes before checking oil level. Checking engine oil level on a cold engine is not accurate. To ensure proper lubrication of an engine, the engine oil must be maintained at an acceptable level. The acceptable levels are indicated between the ADD and SAFE marks on the engine oil dipstick. 1. Position vehicle on level surface. 2. With engine OFF, allow approximately ten minutes for oil to settle to bottom of crankcase, remove engine oil dipstick. 3. Wipe dipstick clean. 4. Install dipstick and verify it is seated in the tube. 5. Remove dipstick, with handle held above the tip, take oil level reading. 6. Add oil only if level is below the ADD mark on dipstick. ENGINE OIL CHANGE Change engine oil at mileage and time intervals described in Maintenance Schedules. Run engine until achieving normal operating temperature. 1. Position the vehicle on a level surface and turn engine off. 2. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 3. Remove oil fill cap. 4. Place a suitable drain pan under crankcase drain. 5. Remove drain plug from crankcase and allow oil to drain into pan. Inspect drain plug threads for stretching or other damage. Replace drain plug if damaged. 6. Install drain plug in crankcase. 7. Lower vehicle and fill crankcase with specified type and amount of engine oil described. 8. Install oil fill cap. 9. Start engine and inspect for leaks. 10. Stop engine and inspect oil level. NOTE: Care should be exercised when disposing used engine oil after it has been drained from a vehicle engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1504 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Power steering fluid capacities are dependent on engine/chassis options as well as steering gear/cooler options. Depending on type and size of internal cooler, length and inside diameter of cooler lines, or use of an auxiliary cooler, these capacities may vary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1507 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Power Steering Reservoir .............................................................................................................................. Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Fluid Power Steering Fluid: Description and Operation Power Steering Fluid POWER STEERING FLUID Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid is required in the power steering system. Substitute fluids can induce power steering system failure. Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid when new is red in color. The ATF is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, the ATF will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. This is normal. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Fluid > Page 1510 Power Steering Fluid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The recommended fluid for the power steering system is Mopar(R) ATF +4. Mopar(R) ATF+4, when new is red in color. The ATF+4 is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition, As the vehicle is driven, the ATF+4 will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. THIS IS NORMAL. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1511 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL CHECKING WARNING: FLUID LEVEL SHOULD BE CHECKED WITH THE ENGINE OFF TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY FROM MOVING PARTS. CAUTION: MOPAR(R) ATF+4 is to be used in the power steering system. No other power steering or automatic transmission fluid is to be used in the system. Damage may result to the power steering pump and system if any other fluid is used, Do not overfill. The power steering fluid level can be viewed on the dipstick attached to the filler cap. There are two ranges listed on the dipstick, ADD line and FULL line. Before opening power steering system, wipe the reservoir filler cap free of dirt and debris. Remove the cap and check the fluid level on its dipstick. When the fluid is at normal ambient temperature, approximately 21°C to 27°C (70°F to 80°F), the fluid level should read between the minimum and maximum area of the cold range. When the fluid is hot, fluid level is allowed to read up to the highest end of the HOT range. Only add fluid when the vehicle is cold. Fluid may read low on the dipstick at extremely low temperatures. Use only Mopar(R) ATF+4 Do not overfill the power steering system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT CHARGE LEVEL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1516 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications REFRIGERANT TYPE Refrigerant type ................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... R 134a Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Refrigerant Refrigerant: Description and Operation A/C Refrigerant A/C REFRIGERANT The refrigerant used in this air conditioning system is a HydroFluoroCarbon (HFC), type R-134a. Unlike R-12, which is a ChloroFluoroCarbon (CFC), R-134a refrigerant does not contain ozone-depleting chlorine. R-134a refrigerant is a non-toxic, non-flammable, clear and colorless liquefied gas. CAUTION: R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12 refrigerant in an A/C system. Even a small amount of R-12 refrigerant added to an R-134a refrigerant system will cause A/C compressor failure. The A/C refrigerant system is filled-for-life at the factory and requires no regular maintenance. Although not required at specific intervals, the charge level should be checked if system performance deteriorates or if a noise or leak is suspected See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Refrigerant System Leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Refrigerant > Page 1519 Refrigerant: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The refrigerant used in this air conditioning system is a HydroFluoroCarbon (HFC), type R-134a. Unlike R-12, which is a ChloroFluoroCarbon (CFC), R-134a refrigerant does not contain ozone-depleting chlorine. R-134a refrigerant is a non-toxic, non-flammable, clear, and colorless liquefied gas. Even though R-134a does not contain chlorine, it must be reclaimed and recycled just like CFC-type refrigerants. This is because R-134a is a greenhouse gas and can contribute to global warming See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Refrigerant > Page 1520 Refrigerant: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12 refrigerant in an A/C system. Even a small amount of R-12 refrigerant added to an R-134a refrigerant system will cause A/C compressor failure, refrigerant oil sludge or poor A/C system performance. In addition, the polyalkylene glycol (PAG) synthetic refrigerant oils used in an R-134a refrigerant system are not compatible with the mineral-based refrigerant oils used in an R-12 refrigerant system. R-134a refrigerant system service ports, service tool couplers and refrigerant dispensing bottles have all been designed with unique fittings to ensure that an R-134a refrigerant system is not accidentally contaminated with the wrong refrigerant (R-12). There are also labels posted in the engine compartment of the vehicle and on the A/C compressor to identify that the A/C system is equipped with R-134a refrigerant. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1521 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection REFRIGERANT SYSTEM LEAKS WARNING: R-134a service equipment or vehicle A/C system should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air. Mixture of air and R-134a can be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures are potentially dangerous and may result in fire or explosion causing property damage, personal injury or death. Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Use only approved service equipment meeting SAE requirements to discharge R-134a system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. If the refrigerant system is empty or low in refrigerant charge, a leak at any line fitting or component seal is likely. A review of the fittings, lines and components for oily residue is an indication of the leak location. If the A/C liquid line pressure is found to be less than 345 kPa (50 psi), proceed to the System Empty procedure below. If liquid line pressure is found to be greater than 345 kPa (50 psi), proceed to the System Low procedure. If the A/C system is not cooling properly, determine if the refrigerant system is fully charged with R-134a. This is accomplished by completely evacuating and recharging the A/C system. To detect a leak in the refrigerant system, perform one of the following procedures as indicated by the symptoms. SYSTEM EMPTY 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system to the lowest degree of vacuum possible (approximately 28 in Hg.) See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. Determine if the system holds a vacuum for 15 minutes. If vacuum is held, a leak is probably not present. If system will not maintain vacuum level, proceed to STEP 2. 2. Prepare and dispense 0.284 kilograms (10 ounces) of R-134a refrigerant into the evacuated refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge and proceed to STEP 1 of the System Low procedure. SYSTEM LOW 3. Position the vehicle in a wind free work area. This will aid in detecting small leaks. 4. Operate the heating-A/C system with the engine at idle under the following conditions for at least five minutes. - Doors or windows open - Transmission in Park or Neutral with the parking brake set (depending on application) - A/C-heater controls set to outside air, full cool, panel mode, high blower and with A/C compressor engaged CAUTION: A leak detector only designed for R-12 refrigerant will not detect leaks in a R-134a refrigerant system. 5. Shut the vehicle Off and wait 2-7 minutes. Then use an electronic leak detector that is designed to detect R-134a refrigerant and search for leaks. Fittings, lines or components that appear to be oily usually indicate a refrigerant leak. To inspect the A/C evaporator for leaks, insert the leak detector probe into the drain tube opening or an air outlet. A dye for R-134a is available to aid in leak detection. Use only DaimlerChrysler approved refrigerant dye. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System Recovery Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Recovery REFRIGERANT SYSTEM RECOVERY WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning and See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. An R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (1) that meets SAE standard J2210 must be used to recover the refrigerant from the R-134a refrigerant system. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for the proper care and use of this equipment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System Recovery > Page 1524 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Evacuate REFRIGERANT SYSTEM EVACUATE NOTE: Special effort must be used to prevent moisture from entering the A/C system oil. Moisture in the oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. If an A/C compressor designed to use R-134a refrigerant is left open to the atmosphere for an extended period of time. It is recommended that the refrigerant oil be drained and replaced with new oil or a new A/C compressor be used. This will eliminate the possibility of contaminating the refrigerant system. If the refrigerant system has been open to the atmosphere, it must be evacuated before the system can be filled. Moisture and air mixed with the refrigerant will raise the compressor head pressure above acceptable operating levels. This will reduce the performance of the A/C system and damage the A/C compressor. Moisture will boil at near room temperature when exposed to vacuum. To evacuate the refrigerant system: NOTE: When connecting the service equipment coupling to the line fitting, verify that the valve of the coupling is fully closed. This will reduce the amount of effort required to make the connection. 1. Recover the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. 2. Connect a suitable charging station, refrigerant recovery machine or a manifold gauge set with vacuum pump and refrigerant recovery equipment See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Tools and Equipment/Refrigerant System Service Equipment. 3. Open the suction and discharge valves and start the vacuum pump. The vacuum pump should run a minimum of 45 minutes prior to charge to eliminate all moisture in system. When the suction gauge reads to the lowest degree of vacuum possible (approximately -88 kPa (- 26 in. Hg) or greater) for 30 minutes, close all valves and turn off vacuum pump. If the system fails to reach specified vacuum, the refrigerant system likely has a leak that must be corrected. If the refrigerant system maintains specified vacuum for at least 30 minutes, start the vacuum pump, open the suction and discharge valves. Then allow the system to evacuate an additional 10 minutes. 4. Close all valves. Turn off and disconnect the vacuum pump. 5. Charge the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System Recovery > Page 1525 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Charge REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning and See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. NOTE: The Underhood HVAC Specification Label contains the refrigerant fill specification of the vehicle being serviced. After all refrigerant system leaks have been repaired and the refrigerant system has been evacuated, a refrigerant charge can be injected into the system or the Underhood HVAC Specification Label for the proper amount of the refrigerant charge.See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Specifications/Capacity Specifications. An R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE Standard J2210 must be used to charge the refrigerant system with R-134a refrigerant. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. CHARGING PROCEDURE CAUTION: A small amount of refrigerant oil is removed from the A/C system each time the refrigerant system is recovered and evacuated. Before charging the A/C system, you MUST replenish any oil lost during the recovery process. Refer the equipment manufacturer instructions for more information. 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. 2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE standard J2210 to the refrigerant system. 3. Refer to A/C SPECIFICATIONS See: Specifications/Capacity Specifications or the Underhood HVAC Specification Label for the proper amount of the refrigerant charge. 4. Measure the proper amount of refrigerant and heat it to 52° C (125° F) with the charging station. See the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper use of this equipment. 5. Open both the suction and discharge valves, then open the charge valve to allow the heated refrigerant to flow into the system. 6. When the transfer of refrigerant has stopped, close both the suction and discharge valves. 7. If all of the refrigerant charge did not transfer from the dispensing device, open all of the windows in the vehicle and set the heating-A/C system controls so that the A/C compressor is engaged and the blower motor is operating at its lowest speed setting. Run the engine at a steady high idle (about 1400 rpm). If the A/C compressor does not engage, test the compressor clutch circuits and repair as required. WARNING: Take care not to open the discharge (high pressure) valve at this time. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious or fatal injury. 8. Open the low-side valve to allow the remaining refrigerant to transfer to the refrigerant system. 9. Disconnect the charging station from the refrigerant system service ports. 10. Reinstall the caps onto the refrigerant system service ports. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1526 Refrigerant: Tools and Equipment REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE EQUIPMENT WARNING: Eye protection must be worn when servicing an A/C refrigerant system. Turn all valves off (rotate clockwise) on the equipment being used before connecting or disconnecting service equipment from the refrigerant system. Failure to observe these warnings may result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning and See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. When servicing the A/C system, a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE standard J2210 must be used (1). Contact an automotive service equipment supplier for refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging equipment. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. A manifold gauge set (1) may be needed with some recovery/recycling/charging equipment. The manifold gauge set should have manual shut-off valves (2 and 6), or automatic back-flow valves located at the service port connector end of the manifold gauge set hoses (4 and 5). This will prevent refrigerant from being released into the atmosphere. MANIFOLD GAUGE SET CONNECTIONS CAUTION: Do not use an R-12 manifold gauge set on an R-134a system. The refrigerants are not compatible and system damage will result. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1527 - RECOVERY/RECYCLING/EVACUATION/CHARGING HOSE - The center manifold hose (Yellow, or White, with Black stripe) (3) is used to recover, evacuate, and charge the refrigerant system. When the low or high pressure valves on the manifold gauge set are opened, the refrigerant in the system will escape through this hose. - HIGH PRESSURE GAUGE HOSE - The high pressure hose (Red with Black stripe) (4) attaches to the high side service port. This service port is located on the A/C liquid line near the radiator cap. On this model, an A/C pressure transducer is also installed on the liquid line. A/C high-side pressures can be read using a scan tool. - LOW PRESSURE GAUGE HOSE - The low pressure hose (Blue with Black stripe) (5) attaches to the low side service port. This service port is located on the accumulator. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITY It will not be necessary to check the oil level in the A/C compressor or to add oil, unless there has been an oil loss. An oil loss may occur due to a rupture or leak from a refrigerant line, a connector fitting, a component, or a component seal. If a leak occurs, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system after the repair has been made. Refrigerant oil loss will be evident at the leak point by the presence of a wet, shiny surface around the leak. Refrigerant oil must be added when an A/C accumulator, A/C condenser or A/C evaporator is replaced (see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart). The refrigerant oil level in a new A/C compressor must first be adjusted prior to compressor installation. Refrigerant Oil Capacities Chart Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1532 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL TYPE Refrigerant oil ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ ND-8 PAG Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Oil: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The refrigerant oil used in R-134a refrigerant systems is a synthetic-based, polyalkylene glycol (PAG), wax-free lubricant. Mineral-based R-12 refrigerant oils are not compatible with PAG oils, and should never be introduced to an R-134a refrigerant system. There are different PAG oils available, and each contains a different additive package. The A/C compressor used in this vehicle is designed to use ND-8 PAG refrigerant oil. Use only this type of refrigerant oil in the refrigerant system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1535 Refrigerant Oil: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION After performing any refrigerant recovery or recycling operation, always replenish the refrigerant system with the same amount of the recommended refrigerant oil as was removed. Too little refrigerant oil can cause A/C compressor damage, and too much can reduce A/C system performance. PAG refrigerant oil is more hygroscopic than mineral oil, and will absorb any moisture it comes into contact with, even moisture in the air. The PAG oil container should always be kept tightly capped until it is ready to be used. After use, recap the oil container immediately to prevent moisture contamination. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1536 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT OIL LEVEL When an A/C system is assembled at the factory, all components except the A/C compressor are refrigerant oil free. After the refrigerant system has been charged and operated, the refrigerant oil in the A/C compressor is dispersed throughout the refrigerant system. The A/C accumulator, A/C condenser, A/C evaporator and the A/C compressor will each retain a significant amount of the needed refrigerant oil. It is important to have the correct amount of refrigerant oil in the A/C system. This ensures proper lubrication of the A/C compressor. Too little oil will result in damage to the A/C compressor, while too much oil will reduce the cooling capacity of the A/C system and consequently result in higher discharge air temperatures. CAUTION: The oil used in the A/C compressor is ND-8 PAG R-134a refrigerant oil. Only refrigerant oil of the same type should be used to service the A/C system. Do not use any other refrigerant oil. The oil container should be kept tightly capped until it is ready for use and then tightly capped after use to prevent contamination from dirt and moisture. Refrigerant oil will quickly absorb any moisture it comes in contact with, therefore, special effort must be used to keep all R-134a system components moisture-free. Moisture in the refrigerant oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. NOTE: Most reclaim/recycling equipment will measure the lubricant being removed during recovery. This amount of lubricant should be added back into the system. Refer to the reclaim/recycling equipment manufacturers instructions. It will not be necessary to check the oil level in the A/C compressor or to add oil, unless there has been an oil loss. An oil loss may occur due to a rupture or leak from a refrigerant line, a connector fitting, a component, or a component seal. If a leak occurs, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system after the repair has been made. Refrigerant oil loss will be evident at the leak point by the presence of a wet, shiny surface around the leak. Refrigerant oil must be added when an A/C accumulator, A/C condenser or A/C evaporator is replaced (see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart). The refrigerant oil level in a new A/C compressor must first be adjusted prior to compressor installation (refer to COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE shown below). Refrigerant Oil Capacities Chart COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant system oil level when replacing an A/C compressor. Failure to properly drain and measure the refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor can prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and cause serious compressor damage. The A/C compressor is filled with refrigerant oil from the factory. Use the following procedure to drain and measure refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor. 1. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the old A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 2. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the new A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 3. Refill the new A/C compressor with the same amount of refrigerant oil that was drained out of the old compressor. Use only clean refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the new A/C compressor onto the engine See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Compressor Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bleeding MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING A new master cylinder should be bled before installation on the vehicle. Required bleeding tools include bleed tubes and a wood dowel to stroke the pistons. Bleed tubes can be fabricated from brake line. 1. Mount master cylinder in vise. 2. Attach bleed tubes to cylinder outlet ports (1). Then position each tube end into reservoir (2). 3. Fill reservoir with fresh brake fluid. 4. Press cylinder pistons inward with wood dowel. Then release pistons and allow them to return under spring pressure. Continue bleeding operations until air bubbles are no longer visible in fluid. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 1541 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Brake Bleeding ABS BRAKE BLEEDING ABS system bleeding requires conventional bleeding methods plus use of the scan tool. The procedure involves performing a base brake bleeding, followed by use of the scan tool to cycle and bleed the HCU pump and solenoids. A second base brake bleeding procedure is then required to remove any air remaining in the system. 1. Perform base brake bleeding,. See: Base Brakes - Manual Bleeding See: Base Brakes - Pressure Bleeding 2. Connect scan tool to the Data Link Connector. 3. Select ANTILOCK BRAKES, followed by MISCELLANEOUS, then ABS BRAKES. Follow the instructions displayed. When scan tool displays TEST COMPLETE, disconnect scan tool and proceed. 4. Perform base brake bleeding a second time,. See: Base Brakes - Manual Bleeding See: Base Brakes - Pressure Bleeding 5. Top off master cylinder fluid level and verify proper brake operation before moving vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 1542 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Base Brakes - Manual Bleeding MANUAL BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. 1. Remove reservoir filler caps and fill reservoir. 2. If calipers were overhauled, open all caliper bleed screws. Then close each bleed screw as fluid starts to drip from it. Top off master cylinder reservoir once more before proceeding. 3. Attach one end of bleed hose (1) to bleed screw and insert opposite end in glass container (2) partially filled with brake fluid. Be sure end of bleed hose is immersed in fluid. NOTE: Bleed procedure should be in this order (1) Right rear (2) Left rear (3) Right front (4) Left front. 4. Open up bleeder, then have a helper press down the brake pedal. Once the pedal is down close the bleeder. Repeat bleeding until fluid stream is clear and free of bubbles. Then move to the next wheel. 5. Before moving the vehicle verify the pedal is firm and not mushy. 6. Top off the brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 1543 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Base Brakes - Pressure Bleeding PRESSURE BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. Follow the manufacturers instructions carefully when using pressure equipment. Do not exceed the tank manufacturers pressure recommendations. Generally, a tank pressure of 15-20 psi is sufficient for bleeding. Fill the bleeder tank with recommended fluid and purge air from the tank lines before bleeding. Do not pressure bleed without a proper master cylinder adapter. The wrong adapter can lead to leakage, or drawing air back into the system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Locations Circuit Breaker: Locations Component ID: 39 Component : CIRCUIT BREAKER-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK Connector: Name : CIRCUIT BREAKER-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Locations > Page 1548 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Locations > Page 1549 Circuit Breaker: Diagrams Component ID: 39 Component : CIRCUIT BREAKER-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK Connector: Name : CIRCUIT BREAKER-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Locations > Page 1550 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations Fuse: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1554 Fuse: Diagrams Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1555 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1556 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1557 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1558 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1559 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1560 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1561 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1562 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1563 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1564 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1565 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1566 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1567 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1568 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1569 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1570 Fuse: Application and ID Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1571 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1572 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1573 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 1574 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuse: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with an Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse that is disconnected within the Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Dealer personnel are to reconnect the IOD fuse in the Integrated Power Module as part of the preparation procedures performed just prior to new vehicle delivery. The IOD fuse can be removed to avoid discharging the battery by disconnecting non-essential, low-current memory functions that are normally on at all times. A detent on the IOD fuse holder allows it to be stored in its normal cavity but out of contact. The holder is pushed into place to restore power to the systems it supplies. The following circuits are protected by the IOD fuse: - Cluster (CCN) - Diagnostic Connector - Map Lamps - Glove Box Lamp - Courtesy Lamps - Radio - Underhood Lamp Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1577 Fuse: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The term ignition-off draw identifies a normal condition where power is being drained from the battery with the ignition switch in the Off position. The IOD fuse feeds the memory and sleep mode functions for some of the electronic modules in the vehicle as well as various other accessories that require battery current when the ignition switch is in the Off position. The only reason the IOD fuse is disconnected is to reduce the normal IOD of the vehicle electrical system during new vehicle transportation and pre-delivery storage to reduce battery depletion, while still allowing vehicle operation so that the vehicle can be loaded, unloaded and moved as needed. The IOD fuse is disconnected from Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant. Dealer personnel must reconnect the IOD fuse when the vehicle is being prepared for delivery in order to restore full electrical system operation. Once the vehicle is prepared for delivery, the IOD function of this fuse becomes transparent and the fuse that has been assigned the IOD designation becomes another Fused B(+) circuit fuse. The IOD fuse can be used by the vehicle owner as a convenient means of reducing battery depletion when a vehicle is to be stored for periods not to exceed about thirty days. However, it must be remembered that disconnecting the IOD fuse will not eliminate IOD, but only reduce this normal condition. If a vehicle will be stored for more than about thirty days, the battery negative cable should be disconnected to eliminate normal IOD; and, the battery should be tested and recharged at regular intervals during the vehicle storage period to prevent the battery from becoming discharged or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations Fuse Block: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1583 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1584 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1585 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1586 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1587 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts reference the figure numbers of the illustrations. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1588 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1589 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1590 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1591 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in Connector Replacement. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure)See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing. 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1592 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1593 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1594 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1595 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1596 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1597 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1598 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1599 Fuse Block: Connector Views Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1600 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1601 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1602 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1603 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1604 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1605 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1606 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1607 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1608 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1609 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1610 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1611 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1612 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1613 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1614 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1615 Fuse Block: Application and ID Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1616 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1617 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1618 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1619 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations Relay Box: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module Relay Box: Diagrams Integrated Power Module Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1625 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1626 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1627 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1628 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1629 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1630 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1631 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1632 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1633 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1634 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1635 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1636 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1637 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1638 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1639 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1640 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Ignition Run Component ID: 180 Component : RELAY-IGNITION RUN Connector: Name : RELAY-IGNITION RUN Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 87 F921 12PK/WT IGNITION RUN OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1641 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Ignition Run-ACC Component ID: 181 Component : RELAY-IGNITION RUN-ACC Connector: Name : RELAY-IGNITION RUN-ACC Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 87 F984 12PK/YL IGNITION RUN-ACC RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 1642 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run/Start Component ID: 184 Component : RELAY-RUN/START Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN/START Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 87 F941 18PK/LG RUN/START RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1643 Relay Box: Application and ID Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1644 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1645 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1646 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1647 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional TPM, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the speedometer dial face to the left of the speedometer needle hub in the instrument cluster overlay. The TPM indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of an icon that represents a cross-section of a tire with a centered exclamation point in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The TPM indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1653 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the TPM system. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TPM indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the TPM indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM sends an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message to the cluster to illuminate the TPM indicator for about three seconds as a bulb test. - TPM Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message from the SKREEM, the TPM indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the SKREEM or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no TPM lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the SKREEM for six consecutive seconds, the TPM indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message is received from the SKREEM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the TPM indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The SKREEM performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to decide whether the TPM system is in good operating condition and whether the tire inflation pressures are too high or too low. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the TPM indicator after the bulb test, it indicates that the inflation pressure of a tire is too low or that a malfunction has occurred and the TPM system is ineffective. For proper diagnosis of the TPM system, the SKREEM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to TPM indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair DaimlerChrysler provides no information regarding a Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area to the left of the speedometer needle hub. The MIL consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The MIL is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1661 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) emissions-related circuit or component malfunction. The MIL is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the PCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The MIL Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the MIL for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the indicator is illuminated for about 15 seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - MIL Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic MIL lamp-ON message from the PCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM message. For some DTCs, if a problem does not recur, the PCM will send a lamp-OFF message automatically. Other DTCs may require that a fault be repaired and the PCM be reset before a lamp-OFF message will be sent. For more information on the PCM, and the DTC set and reset parameters, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM for 10 consecutive message cycles, the MIL is illuminated by the instrument cluster to indicate a loss of bus communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the MIL indicator will be turned ON during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the fuel and emissions system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the MIL or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection If the EMIC turns ON the MIL after the bulb test, it may indicate that a malfunction has occurred and that the fuel and emissions systems may require service. For proper diagnosis of the fuel and emissions systems, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to MIL operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Customer Interest Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator NUMBER: 18-005-08 REV. B GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: August 20, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-005-08 REV. A, DATED JUNE 13, 2008, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.05 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: FLASH: Turn Off Oil Change Indicator Message OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). MODELS: **2008 (DR) Ram Truck (International Markets)** **2008 (HB) Durango (International Markets)** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler (International Markets)** **2007 (JK) wrangler** **2008 (KA) Nitro (International Markets)** **2008 (ND) Dakota (International Markets)** 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to: - **2007 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) after June 17, 2008 (MDH 0617XX)** - **2008 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) before April 28, 2008 (MDH 0428XX)** - **2008 DR/HB/ND vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE )** - WK/WH vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built before January 25, 2008 (0125XXMDH) - KA vehicles equipped with a 4.0L engine (sales code EGS) built before July 8.2008 (MDH 0708XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some international vehicle's may experience message on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or in the Odometer that tells the driver an oil change is necessary after 3000 miles. This message should not be displayed for these international vehicles and this PCM flash will turn this feature off. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If no DTC's are present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 1670 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.05 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 1671 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator Oil Change Reminder Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator NUMBER: 18-005-08 REV. B GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: August 20, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-005-08 REV. A, DATED JUNE 13, 2008, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.05 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: FLASH: Turn Off Oil Change Indicator Message OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). MODELS: **2008 (DR) Ram Truck (International Markets)** **2008 (HB) Durango (International Markets)** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler (International Markets)** **2007 (JK) wrangler** **2008 (KA) Nitro (International Markets)** **2008 (ND) Dakota (International Markets)** 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to: - **2007 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) after June 17, 2008 (MDH 0617XX)** - **2008 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) before April 28, 2008 (MDH 0428XX)** - **2008 DR/HB/ND vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE )** - WK/WH vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built before January 25, 2008 (0125XXMDH) - KA vehicles equipped with a 4.0L engine (sales code EGS) built before July 8.2008 (MDH 0708XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some international vehicle's may experience message on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or in the Odometer that tells the driver an oil change is necessary after 3000 miles. This message should not be displayed for these international vehicles and this PCM flash will turn this feature off. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If no DTC's are present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 1677 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.05 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 1678 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A change oil indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles manufactured for export markets, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located within the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The change oil indicator consists of cycling textual CHAngE and OIL messages which appear in place of the odometer/trip odometer information in the odometer VFD unit. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the tachometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The change oil textual messages appear in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information when they are illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The change oil indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD in the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1681 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The change oil indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when a duty-cycle algorithm contained within the software of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) determines that a recommended oil change interval has been attained. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the PCM. The change oil indicator function of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the VFD change oil indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the change oil indicator for the following reasons: - Change Oil Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and the cluster receives an electronic change oil indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that a duty-cycle based recommended oil change interval has been attained, the change oil indicator will be illuminated for about three seconds, until the trip odometer reset switch button is depressed, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Change Oil Indicator Reset Procedure - Once an engine oil change has been completed, the PCM duty cycle counters can be reset using the following procedure. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but DO NOT start the engine. Slowly depress and release the accelerator pedal fully three times within ten seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. If the change oil indicator illuminates the next time the engine is started, repeat this procedure. The PCM continually monitors numerous sensor inputs to determine the duty-cycles to which the engine is being subjected. A pre-programmed algorithm within the PCM then determines when to send the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For proper diagnosis of the change oil indicator, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to change oil indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1682 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair OIL CHANGE INDICATOR - RESET To reset the "Oil Change Required" indicator (after performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start engine). 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. NOTE: If the indicator message illumination when you start the vehicle, the "Oil Change Required" indicator did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - HOISTING RECOMMENDATIONS WARNING: The hoisting and jack lifting points provided are for a complete vehicle. When a chassis or drivetrain component is removed from a vehicle, the center of gravity is altered making some hoisting conditions unstable. Properly support or secure vehicle to hoisting device when these conditions exist. FLOOR JACK LIFT POINTS CAUTION: Do not attempt to lift a vehicle with a floor jack positioned under: - An axle tube. - Aluminum differential. - A body side sill. - A steering linkage component. - A drive shaft. - The engine or transmission oil pan. - The fuel tank. - A front suspension arm. When properly positioned, a floor jack can be used to lift a Dakota vehicle. Support the vehicle in the raised position with jack stands at the front and rear ends of the frame rails. HOIST A vehicle can be lifted with: - A single-post, frame-contact hoist. - A twin-post, chassis hoist. - A ramp-type, drive-on hoist. NOTE: When a frame-contact type hoist is used, verify that the lifting pads are positioned properly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1693 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1696 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1697 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: A new TPM sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new TPM sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activation the TPM sensor. If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional TPM, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the speedometer dial face to the left of the speedometer needle hub in the instrument cluster overlay. The TPM indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of an icon that represents a cross-section of a tire with a centered exclamation point in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The TPM indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1703 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the TPM system. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TPM indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the TPM indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM sends an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message to the cluster to illuminate the TPM indicator for about three seconds as a bulb test. - TPM Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message from the SKREEM, the TPM indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the SKREEM or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no TPM lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the SKREEM for six consecutive seconds, the TPM indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message is received from the SKREEM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the TPM indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The SKREEM performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to decide whether the TPM system is in good operating condition and whether the tire inflation pressures are too high or too low. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the TPM indicator after the bulb test, it indicates that the inflation pressure of a tire is too low or that a malfunction has occurred and the TPM system is ineffective. For proper diagnosis of the TPM system, the SKREEM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to TPM indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1709 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1712 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1713 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: A new TPM sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new TPM sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activation the TPM sensor. If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications Tires: Specifications TIRE REVOLUTIONS PER MILE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Pressure Gauges Tires: Description and Operation Pressure Gauges PRESSURE GAUGES A quality air pressure gauge is recommended to check tire pressure. After checking the air pressure, replace valve cap finger tight. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Pressure Gauges > Page 1719 Tires: Description and Operation Tires - Description Tires TIRES Tires are designed and engineered for each specific vehicle. They provide the best overall performance for normal operation. The ride and handling characteristics match the vehicle's requirements. With proper care they will give excellent reliability, traction, skid resistance, and tread life. Driving habits have more effect on tire life than any other factor. Careful drivers will obtain in most cases, much greater mileage than severe use or careless drivers. A few of the driving habits which will shorten the life of any tire are: - Rapid acceleration - Severe brake applications - High speed driving - Excessive speeds on turns - Striking curbs and other obstacles Radial-ply tires are more prone to irregular tread wear. It is important to follow the tire rotation interval See: Service and Repair/Procedures. This will help to achieve a greater tread life. TIRE IDENTIFICATION Tire type, size, aspect ratio and speed rating are encoded in the letters and numbers imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Refer to the chart to decipher the tire identification code. Performance tires have a speed rating letter after the aspect ratio number. The speed rating is not always printed on the tire sidewall. These ratings are: - Q up to 99 mph - S up to 112 mph - T up to 118 mph - U up to 124 mph - H up to 130 mph V up to 149 mph W (consult the tire manufacturer for the specific speed rating) - Z more than 149 mph (consult the tire manufacturer for the specific speed rating) An All Season type tire will have either M + S, M & S or M-S (indicating mud and snow traction) imprinted on the side wall. TIRE CHAINS Tire snow chains may be used on certain models. Refer to the Owner's Manual for more information. Radial-Ply Tires RADIAL-PLY TIRES Radial-ply tires improve handling, tread life and ride quality, and decrease rolling resistance. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Pressure Gauges > Page 1720 Radial-ply tires must always be used in sets of four. Under no circumstances should they be used on the front only. They may be mixed with temporary spare tires when necessary. A maximum speed of 80 KPH (50 MPH) is recommended while a temporary spare is in use. Radial-ply tires have the same load-carrying capacity as other types of tires of the same size. They also use the same recommended inflation pressures. The use of oversized tires, either in the front or rear of the vehicle, can cause vehicle drive train failure. This could also cause inaccurate wheel speed signals when the vehicle is equipped with Anti-Lock Brakes. The use of tires from different manufactures on the same vehicle is NOT recommended. The proper tire pressure should be maintained on all four tires. Tire Inflation Pressures TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES WARNING: Over or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and tread wear. This may cause the tire to fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Under inflation will cause rapid shoulder wear (1), tire flexing, and possible tire failure. Over inflation will cause rapid center wear (1) reduction in the tire's ability to cushion shocks. Improper inflation can cause: - Uneven wear patterns Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Pressure Gauges > Page 1721 - Reduced tread life - Reduced fuel economy - Unsatisfactory ride - Vehicle drift For proper tire pressure specification refer to the tire label placard usually located on the drivers door latch pillar. Spare / Temporary Tire SPARE / TEMPORARY TIRE The temporary spare tire is designed for emergency use only. The original tire should be repaired or replaced at the first opportunity, then reinstalled. Do not exceed speeds of 80 KMH (50 MPH). when using the temporary spare tire. Refer to Owner's Manual for complete details. Full Size, Spare Wheel With Matching Tire FULL SIZE, SPARE WHEEL WITH MATCHING TIRE The spare is a full usage wheel with a matching tire. It can be used within the (posted legal) speed limits or distance limitations as of the rest of the vehicles four tires. Replacement Tires REPLACEMENT TIRES The original equipment tires provide a proper balance of many characteristics such as: - Ride - Noise - Handling - Durability - Tread life - Traction - Rolling resistance - Speed capability It is recommended that tires equivalent to the original equipment tires be used when replacement is needed. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety and handling of the vehicle. The use of oversize tires may cause interference with vehicle components. Under extremes of suspension and steering travel, interference with vehicle components may cause tire damage. WARNING: Failure to equip the vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators Tires: Testing and Inspection Tread Wear Indicators TREAD WEAR INDICATORS Tread wear indicators (3) are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. When tread depth is 1.6 mm (1/16 in.), the tread wear indicators (3) will appear as a 13 mm (1/2 in.) band. Tire replacement is necessary when indicators appear in two or more grooves or if localized balding occurs. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators > Page 1724 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Wear Patterns TIRE WEAR PATTERNS Under inflation will cause wear on the shoulders of tire. Over inflation will cause wear at the center of tire. Excessive camber causes the tire to run at an angle to the road. One side of tread is then worn more than the other. Excessive toe-in or toe-out causes wear on the tread edges and a feathered effect across the tread. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators > Page 1725 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Noise Or Vibration TIRE NOISE OR VIBRATION Radial-ply tires are sensitive to force impulses caused by improper mounting, vibration, wheel defects, or possibly tire imbalance. To find out if tires are causing the noise or vibration, drive the vehicle over a smooth road at varying speeds. Note the noise level during acceleration and deceleration. The engine, differential and exhaust noises will change as speed varies, while the tire noise will usually remain constant. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators > Page 1726 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire / Vehicle Lead TIRE/VEHICLE LEAD Use the following Vehicle Lead Diagnosis And Correction Chart to diagnose and correct a vehicle lead or drift problem. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Tires: Procedures TIRES Remove the protective coating on the tires before delivery of a vehicle. This coating may cause deterioration of the tires. To remove the protective coating, apply warm water and let it soak for a few minutes. Afterwards, scrub the coating away with a soft bristle brush. Steam cleaning may also be used to remove the coating. NOTE: DO NOT use gasoline, mineral oil, oil-based solvent or a wire brush for cleaning. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1729 Tires: Removal and Replacement TIRE REPAIR AREA For proper repairing, a radial tire must be removed from the wheel. Repairs should only be made if the defect, or puncture, is in the tread area (1). The tire should be replaced if the puncture is located in the sidewall. Deflate tire completely before removing the tire from the wheel. Use lubrication such as a mild soap solution when dismounting or mounting tire. Use tools free of burrs or sharp edges which could damage the tire or wheel rim. Before mounting tire on wheel, make sure all rust is removed from the rim bead and repaint if necessary. Install wheel on vehicle, and tighten to proper torque specification. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information NUMBER: 22-002-09 GROUP: Wheels/Tires DATE: July 29, 2009 SUBJECT: Chrome Clad Wheel Adapters For Proper Balancing OVERVIEW: This bulletin describes the use of proper wheel adapters when mounting Chrome Clad wheels to wheel balancing equipment. MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2007 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2004 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2009-2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2008 - 2010 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2010 (JS41) Sebring/Avenger 2007-2010 (KA) Nitro 2002-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005-2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2001 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2001 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 - 2010 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information > Page 1734 2008 - 2010 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander NOTE: This information applies to any model equipped with Chrome Clad Wheels. DISCUSSION: Models equipped with Chrome Clad wheels require specific piloting on balance equipment to properly center the wheel and prevent damage to the chrome clad surface. The chrome cladding is not removable or replaceable and has cladding tabs that extend into the wheel bore. Traditional high-taper cones will come into contact with the cladding tabs rather than properly seat on the hub bore chamfer. Many modern aluminum wheel designs cannot be mounted with traditional cones. Direct-Fit Collets should be used to properly mount clad wheels on balance equipment (Fig 1). SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: NOTE: This kit includes the adapters for all Dodge, Chrysler & Jeep models with clad wheels. Individual adapters for specific wheel sizes can be ordered separately. To order a kit or individual adapters, contact Pentastar Service Equipment @ 1-800-223-5623. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1735 Wheels: Description and Operation WHEEL DESIGN The rim size is on the vehicle safety certification label located on the drivers door shut face. Original equipment wheels/rims are designed for operation up to the specified maximum vehicle capacity. All models use stamped steel, cast aluminum or forged aluminum wheels. Every wheel has raised sections between the rim flanges (1) and rim drop well (3) called safety humps. Initial inflation of the tire forces the bead over these raised sections. In case of rapid loss of air pressure, the raised sections help hold the tire on the wheel. The wheel studs and nuts are designed for specific applications. All aluminum and some steel wheels have wheel stud nuts with an enlarged nose. This enlarged nose is necessary to ensure proper retention of the wheels. Do not use replacement studs or nuts with a different design or lesser quality. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1736 Wheels: Testing and Inspection WHEEL INSPECTION Inspect wheels for: - Excessive run out - Dents or cracks - Damaged wheel lug nut holes - Air Leaks from any area or surface of the rim NOTE: Do not attempt to repair a wheel by hammering, heating or welding. If a wheel is damaged an original equipment replacement wheel should be used. When obtaining replacement wheels, they should be equivalent in load carrying capacity. The diameter, width, offset, pilot hole and bolt circle of the wheel should be the same as the original wheel. WARNING: Failure to use equivalent replacement wheels may adversely affect the safety and handling of the vehicle. Used wheels are not recommended. The service history of the wheel may have included severe treatment or very high mileage. The rim could fail without warning. WARNING: Daimlerchrysler corporation does not recommend that customers use "reconditioned" wheels (wheels that have been damaged and repaired) because they can result in a sudden catastrophic wheel failure which could cause loss of control and result in injury or death. For Clarification: - Cosmetic refinishing for the purpose of repairing a superficial flaw is an acceptable procedure providing it is limited to paint or clear coat only, the wheel is not modified in any way, and there is no exposure to paint curing heat over 200 degrees Fahrenheit. - Damaged wheels are those which have been bent, broken, cracked or sustained some other physical damage which may have compromised the wheel structure - Repaired indicates that the wheel has been modified through bending, welding, heating, straightening, or material removal to rectify damage. - Re-plating of chrome plated wheels is not an acceptable procedure nor is chrome plating of original equipment painted or polished wheels, as this may alter mechanical properties and affect fatigue life. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1737 Wheels: Tools and Equipment WHEELS Remover C-4150A Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Mopar Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper and rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal. 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal. 5. Remove the halfshaft nut 4X4 only. NOTE: Do not strike the knuckle with a hammer to remove the tie rod end or the ball joint. Damage to the steering knuckle will occur. 6. Pull down on the steering knuckle to separate the halfshaft from the hub/bearing. 4X4 only 7. Remove the three hub/bearing mounting bolts (3) from the steering knuckle (4). 8. Slide the hub/bearing (1) out of the steering knuckle (4). 9. Remove the brake dust shield (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 1743 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the brake dust shield (5). 2. Install the hub/bearing (1) into the steering knuckle (4) and tighten the bolts (3) to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation. 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor (2) if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation. 5. Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) 4X4 only. 6. Install the wheel and tire assembly See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 7. Remove the support and lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications HALFSHAFT NUT TORQUE Halfshaft nut ........................................................................................................................................ ................................................. 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications TORQUE CAUTION: DO NOT USE CHROME PLATED LUG NUTS WITH CHROME PLATED WHEELS. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Studs - Removal Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Studs - Removal REMOVAL FRONT WHEEL STUDS 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, caliper adapter and rotor, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal. 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor from the hub. 5. Press the stud (2) from the hub using special tool C-4150A (1). REAR WHEEL STUDS 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake drum. 3. Press the stud (2) from the hub using special tool C-4150A (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Studs - Removal > Page 1753 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Studs - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new stud into the hub flange. 2. Install three proper sized washers onto the stud, then install lug nut with the flat side of the nut against the washers. 3. Tighten the lug nut until the stud is pulled into the hub flange. Verify that the stud is properly seated into the flange. 4. Remove the lug nut and washers. 5. Install the brake rotor, caliper adapter, and caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation. 6. Install the brake drum. 7. Install the wheel and tire assembly, use new lug nut on the stud or studs that were replaced. 8. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Jump Starting > System Information > Service and Repair Jump Starting: Service and Repair JUMP STARTING WARNING: Review all safety precautions and warnings in the battery system. See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery Charging - Do not jump start a frozen battery, personal injury can result. - If equipped, do not jump start when maintenance free battery indicator dot is yellow or bright color. - Do not jump start a vehicle when the battery fluid is below the top of lead plates. - Do not allow jumper cable clamps to touch each other when connected to a booster source. - Do not use open flame near battery. - Remove metallic jewelry worn on hands or wrists to avoid injury by accidental arcing of battery current. - When using a high output boosting device, do not allow battery voltage to exceed 16 volts. Refer to instructions provided with device being used. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: When using another vehicle as a booster, do not allow vehicles to touch. Electrical systems can be damaged on either vehicle. TO JUMP START A DISABLED VEHICLE: 1. Raise hood on disabled vehicle and visually inspect engine compartment for: - Battery cable clamp condition, clean if necessary. - Frozen battery. - Yellow or bright color test indicator, if equipped. - Low battery fluid level. - Generator drive belt condition and tension. - Fuel fumes or leakage, correct if necessary. CAUTION: If the cause of starting problem on disabled vehicle is severe, damage to booster vehicle charging system can result. 2. When using another vehicle as a booster source, park the booster vehicle within cable reach. Turn off all accessories, set the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in PARK or the manual transmission in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition OFF. 3. On disabled vehicle, place gear selector in park or neutral and set park brake. Turn off all accessories. 4. Connect jumper cables to booster battery. RED clamp (4) to positive terminal (+). BLACK clamp (2) to negative (3) terminal (-). DO NOT allow clamps at opposite end of cables to touch, electrical arc will result. Review all warnings in this procedure. 5. On disabled vehicle, connect RED jumper cable (4) clamp to positive (+) terminal. Connect BLACK jumper cable clamp to engine ground (1) as close to the ground cable attaching point as possible. 6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. CAUTION: Do not crank starter motor on disabled vehicle for more than 15 seconds, starter will overheat and could fail. 7. Allow battery in disabled vehicle to charge to at least 12.4 volts (75% charge) before attempting to start engine. If engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking engine and allow starter to cool (15 min.), before cranking again. DISCONNECT CABLE CLAMPS AS FOLLOWS: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Jump Starting > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 1757 - Disconnect BLACK cable clamp (2) from engine ground (1) on disabled vehicle. - When using a booster vehicle, disconnect BLACK cable clamp (2) from battery negative terminal (3). Disconnect RED cable clamp (4) from battery positive terminal (5). - Disconnect RED cable clamp (4) from battery positive terminal (4) on disabled vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations Towing Information: Service and Repair Towing Recommendations TOWING RECOMMENDATIONS A vehicle equipped with SAE approved wheel lift-type towing equipment can be used to tow all vehicles. When towing a 4WD vehicle using a wheel-lift towing device, use tow dollies under the opposite end of the vehicle. A vehicle with flatbed device can also be used to transport a disabled vehicle. Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly. Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) and the distance must not exceed 15 miles (25 km). If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km ), it must be towed on a flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground, or with the front end raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly. NOTE: Towing the vehicle at more than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more than 15 miles (25 km ) can cause severe transmission damage. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION: The following safety precautions must be observed when towing a vehicle: - Secure loose and protruding parts. - Always use a safety chain system that is independent of the lifting and towing equipment. - Do not allow towing equipment to contact the disabled vehicle's fuel tank. - Do not allow anyone under the disabled vehicle while it is lifted by the towing device. - Do not allow passengers to ride in a vehicle being towed. - Always observe state and local laws regarding towing regulations. - Do not tow a vehicle in a manner that could jeopardize the safety of the operator, pedestrians or other motorists. - Do not attach tow chains, T-hooks, or J-hooks to a bumper, steering linkage, drive shafts or a non-reinforced frame hole. - Do not tow a heavily loaded vehicle. Use a flatbed device to transport a loaded vehicle. GROUND CLEARANCE CAUTION: If vehicle is towed with wheels removed, install lug nuts to retain brake drums or rotors. A towed vehicle should be raised until lifted wheels are a minimum 100 mm (4 in) from the ground. Be sure there is adequate ground clearance at the opposite end of the vehicle, especially when towing over rough terrain or steep rises in the road. RAMP ANGLE If a vehicle with flatbed towing equipment is used, the approach ramp angle should not exceed 15 degrees. TOWING WHEN KEYS ARE NOT AVAILABLE When the vehicle is locked and keys are not available, use a flat bed hauler. A wheel-lift device can be used on 4WD vehicles provided all the wheels are lifted off the ground using tow dollies. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 1762 Towing Information: Service and Repair Trailer Towing - NAFTA TRAILER TOWING - NAFTA In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a driver). Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. WARNING: It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Tongue Weight (TW) The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle. Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer. TSC (Trailer Sway Control) - If Equipped Trailer Sway Control - Electronic: TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize a swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system will reduce engine power and apply individual brakes that will counter act the sway of the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once the swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. TSC can not stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations. Even if your vehicle is equipped with electronic trailer sway control, mechanical sway control is recommended when appropriate for the size of your trailer. Trailer Sway Control - Mechanical: The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they're commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers. Weight-Distributing Hitch Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 1763 A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturers' directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements. WARNING: An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, and braking performance, and could result in an accident. Weight-Distributing Systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational vehicle dealer for additional information. Fifth-Wheel Hitch A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. Connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin. Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed. Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package content. The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to "Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)" for the website address that contains the necessary information for your specific drivetrain. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 1764 All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain. NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses: - http:// www.dodge.com/towing. - http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada). NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: - The tongue weight of the trailer. - The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle. - The weight of the driver and all passengers. NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information Section. Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended: CAUTION: - Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle. - During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h). When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings. WARNING: Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 1765 Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident. - When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires. - Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. - Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels. - GCWR must not be exceeded. - Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded: - GVWR - GTW - GAWR - Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight). Towing Requirements - Tires - Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire. - Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. - Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage. - Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to the See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Testing and Inspection - Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure. - When replacing tires refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Description and Operation/Tires Description - Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits. Towing Requirements - Trailer Brakes - Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury. - An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required. - Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg). CAUTION: If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. WARNING: Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident. Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Towing Requirements - Trailer Lights & Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness. The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 1766 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic. If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage. Towing Tips - Automatic Transmission The "D" range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the "TOW HAUL" or "OD/OFF" range should be selected. NOTE: Using the "TOW HAUL" or "OD/OFF" range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking. The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule "B" for transmission fluid change intervals. NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing. Towing Tips - Tow/Haul (If Equipped) To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, turn the "TOW HAUL OD/OFF" feature ON when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades. Towing Tips - Electronic Speed Control (If Equipped) - Don't use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. - When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed. - Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. Towing Tips - Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions: - City Driving - When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed. - Highway Driving - Reduce speed. - Air Conditioning - Turn off temporarily. - refer to Cooling System Operating information for more information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 1767 Towing Information: Service and Repair Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, etc.) RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) OF 4X4 VEHICLES WARNING: You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. CAUTION: Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing. NOTE: Because of the design of the transfer cases only vehicles equipped with a NV 244 Generation II transfer case should be used for recreational towing. NOTE: The NV 244 Generation II transfer case must be shifted into Neutral (N) for recreational towing. The Neutral (N) selection button is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case Neutral (N) can take place with the selector switch in any mode position. NOTE: If the vehicle is to be towed for multiple days or one day for an eight hour or above duration, disconnect and isolate the battery to prevent discharge do to the illumination of the odometer and PRNDL light. After the battery negative cable is reinstalled the radio clock and stations will need to be reset. Shifting into Neutral (N) Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing. CAUTION: It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts. - Bring vehicle to a complete stop. - Shut engine OFF. - Place ignition key in the ON position. - Depress brake pedal. - Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress clutch on manual transmission. - Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object, depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for 4 seconds. - After shift is completed and the Neutral (N) light comes on release Neutral (N) button. - Start engine. - Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R). - Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement. - Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive (D). - Shut engine OFF and place ignition key to the unlocked OFF position. - Shift automatic transmission into Park (P). - Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar. NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button, and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elapses and the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met during the 4 second timer, then the Neutral (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released. NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the key in not ON, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met. CAUTION: Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into Park (P) with the transfer case in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With the transfer case in Neutral (N) ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park (P). Shifting OUT of Neutral (N) Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage. - Bring vehicle to a complete stop. - Shut engine OFF. - Place ignition key in the ON position. - Depress brake pedal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 1768 - Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress clutch on manual transmission. - Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object, depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for 1 second. - After the Neutral (N) indicator light turns off release the Neutral (N) button. - After the Neutral (N) button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the selector switch. - Shift automatic transmission into Drive (D), release the clutch on manual transmission. NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button, and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements (with the exception of 3 - key ON) are not met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met during the 1 second time, then all of the mode position indicator lights will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released. NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met. CAUTION: - Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged. - Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage internal parts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 1769 Towing Information: Service and Repair Four Wheel Drive Towing FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TOWING Chrysler Corporation recommends that a vehicle be transported on a flat-bed device. A Wheel-lift device can be used provided all the wheels are lifted off the ground using tow dollies. WARNING: When towing a disabled vehicle and the drive wheels are secured in a wheel lift or tow dollies, ensure the transmission is in the park position. CAUTION: Many vehicles are equipped with air dams, spoilers, and/or ground effect panels. To avoid component damage, a wheel-lift towing vehicle or a flat-bed hauling vehicle is recommended. FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TOWING - REAR END LIFTED WARNING: Ensure vehicle is on a level surface or the wheels are blocked to prevent vehicle from rolling. 1. Attach wheel lift device to front wheels. 2. Place the transmission in neutral. 3. Raise the front of the vehicle off the ground and install tow dollies under front wheels. 4. Attach wheel lift device to rear wheels and raise vehicle to towing position. 5. Attach safety chains to frame rails. Route chains so not to interfere with tail pipe when vehicle is lifted. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position to unlock the steering wheel. CAUTION: Do not use steering column lock to secure steering wheel during towing operation. 7. Secure steering wheel in straight ahead position with a clamp device designed for towing. 8. Place the transmission in park. FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TOWING - FRONT END LIFTED WARNING: Ensure vehicle is on a level surface or the wheels are blocked to prevent vehicle from rolling. 1. Attach wheel lift device to rear wheels. 2. Place the transmission in neutral. 3. Raise the rear of the vehicle off the ground and install tow dollies under rear wheels. 4. Attach wheel lift device to front wheels and raise vehicle to towing position. 5. Attach the safety chains. CAUTION: Do not use steering column lock to secure steering wheel during towing operation. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position to unlock the steering wheel. 7. Secure steering wheel in straight ahead position with a clamp device designed for towing. 8. Place the transmission in park. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - HOISTING RECOMMENDATIONS WARNING: The hoisting and jack lifting points provided are for a complete vehicle. When a chassis or drivetrain component is removed from a vehicle, the center of gravity is altered making some hoisting conditions unstable. Properly support or secure vehicle to hoisting device when these conditions exist. FLOOR JACK LIFT POINTS CAUTION: Do not attempt to lift a vehicle with a floor jack positioned under: - An axle tube. - Aluminum differential. - A body side sill. - A steering linkage component. - A drive shaft. - The engine or transmission oil pan. - The fuel tank. - A front suspension arm. When properly positioned, a floor jack can be used to lift a Dakota vehicle. Support the vehicle in the raised position with jack stands at the front and rear ends of the frame rails. HOIST A vehicle can be lifted with: - A single-post, frame-contact hoist. - A twin-post, chassis hoist. - A ramp-type, drive-on hoist. NOTE: When a frame-contact type hoist is used, verify that the lifting pads are positioned properly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications MAX VARIATION Max variation between cylinders ......................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 25% Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 1778 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE The results of a cylinder compression pressure test can be utilized to diagnose several engine malfunctions. Ensure the battery is completely charged and the engine starter motor is in good operating condition. Otherwise the indicated compression pressures may not be valid for diagnosis purposes. 1. Clean the spark plug recesses with compressed air. 2. Remove the spark plugs. 3. Disable the fuel system. 4. Remove the ASD relay. 5. Insert a compression pressure gauge and rotate the engine with the engine starter motor for three revolutions. 6. Record the compression pressure on the 3rd revolution. Continue the test for the remaining cylinders. 7. See: Specifications/Engine Specifications. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications CAMSHAFT BEARING CAP TORQUE AND SEQUENCE NOTE: Position the left side camshaft so that the camshaft sprocket dowel is near the 1 o'clock position, This will place the camshaft at the neutral position easing the installation of the camshaft bearing caps. 1. Install the camshaft bearing caps, hand tighten the retaining bolts. 2. Working in 1/2 turn increments, tighten the bearing cap retaining bolts following the torque sequence. 3. Tighten the camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts to 11 Nm (100 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications CAMSHAFT GEAR/SPROCKET CAUTION: Remove excess oil from camshaft sprocket bolt. Failure to do so can cause bolt over-torque resulting in bolt failure. 1. Remove excess oil from bolt, then install the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt and hand tighten. 2. Remove Locking Wedge Tool 9867 timing chain wedge (4). 3. Using Spanner Wrench 6958 (4) with adapter pins 8346, tighten the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt (2) to 122 Nm (90 ft. lbs.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft: Specifications CAMSHAFT BEARING CAP TORQUE AND SEQUENCE NOTE: Position the left side camshaft so that the camshaft sprocket dowel is near the 1 o'clock position, This will place the camshaft at the neutral position easing the installation of the camshaft bearing caps. 1. Install the camshaft bearing caps, hand tighten the retaining bolts. 2. Working in 1/2 turn increments, tighten the bearing cap retaining bolts following the torque sequence. 3. Tighten the camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts to 11 Nm (100 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation > Left Camshaft Camshaft: Description and Operation Left Camshaft DESCRIPTION The camshafts consist of powdered metal steel lobes which are sinter-bonded to a steel tube. A steel post or nose piece is friction-welded to the steel camshaft tube. Five bearing journals are machined into the camshaft, four on the steel tube and one on the steel nose piece. Camshaft end play is controlled by two thrust walls that border the nose piece journal. Engine oil enters the hollow camshafts at the third journal and lubricates every intake lobe rocker through a drilled passage in the intake lobe. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation > Left Camshaft > Page 1791 Camshaft: Description and Operation Right Camshaft DESCRIPTION The camshafts consist of powdered metal steel lobes which are sinter-bonded to a steel tube. A steel post or nose piece is friction-welded to the steel camshaft tube. Five bearing journals are machined into the camshaft, four on the steel tube and one on the steel nose piece. Camshaft end play is controlled by two thrust walls that border the nose piece journal. Engine oil enters the hollow camshafts at the third journal and lubricates every intake lobe rocker through a drilled passage in the intake lobe. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft - Removal Camshaft - Left REMOVAL 1. Remove cylinder head cover (1)See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover Removal. CAUTION: When the timing chain is removed and the cylinder heads are still installed, DO NOT forcefully rotate the camshafts or crankshaft independently of each other. Severe valve and/or piston damage can occur. CAUTION: When removing the cam sprocket, timing chains or camshaft, Failure to use Special Tool 8350 will result in hydraulic tensioner ratchet over extension, requiring timing chain cover removal to reset the tensioner ratchet. 2. Set engine to TDC cylinder #1, camshaft sprocket V8 marks at the 12 o'clock position. 3. Mark one link on the secondary timing chain on both sides of the V8 mark on the camshaft sprocket to aid in installation. CAUTION: Do not hold or pry on the camshaft target wheel (Located on the right side camshaft sprocket) for any reason, Severe damage will occur to the target wheel resulting in a vehicle no start condition. 4. Loosen but DO NOT remove the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt. Leave the bolt snug against the sprocket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 1794 NOTE: The timing chain tensioners must be secured prior to removing the camshaft sprockets. Failure to secure tensioners will allow the tensioners to extend, requiring timing chain cover removal in order to reset tensioners. CAUTION: Do not force wedge past the narrowest point between the chain strands. Damage to the tensioners may occur. 5. Position Locking Wedge Tool 9867 (4) timing chain wedge between the timing chain strands, tap the tool to securely wedge the timing chain against the tensioner arm and guide. NOTE: When gripping the camshaft, place the pliers on the tube portion of the camshaft only. Do not grip the lobes or the sprocket areas. 6. Hold the camshaft (3) with adjustable pliers (2) while removing the camshaft sprocket bolt and sprocket (1). 7. Using the pliers, gently allow the camshaft to rotate 15° clockwise until the camshaft is in the neutral position (no valve load). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 1795 8. Starting at the outside working inward, loosen the camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts 1/2 turn at a time. Repeat until all load is off the bearing caps. CAUTION: DO NOT STAMP OR STRIKE THE CAMSHAFT BEARING CAPS. SEVERE DAMAGE WILL OCCUR TO THE BEARING CAPS. NOTE: When the camshaft is removed the rocker arms may slide downward, mark the rocker arms before removing camshaft. 9. Remove the camshaft bearing caps and the camshaft. Camshaft - Right REMOVAL CAUTION: When the timing chain is removed and the cylinder heads are still installed, DO NOT forcefully rotate the camshafts or crankshaft independently of each other. Severe valve and/or piston damage can occur. CAUTION: When removing the cam sprocket, timing chains or camshaft, Failure to use special tool 9867 will result in hydraulic tensioner ratchet over extension, Requiring timing chain cover removal to re-set the tensioner ratchet. 1. Remove the cylinder head covers See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal. 2. Set engine to TDC cylinder #1, camshaft sprocket V8 marks at the 12 o'clock position. 3. Mark one link on the secondary timing chain on both sides of the V8 mark on the camshaft sprocket to aid in installation. CAUTION: Do not hold or pry on the camshaft target wheel for any reason, Severe damage will occur to the target wheel. A damaged target wheel could cause a vehicle no start condition. 4. Loosen but DO NOT remove the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt. Leave bolt snug against sprocket. NOTE: The timing chain tensioners must be secured prior to removing the camshaft sprockets. Failure to secure tensioners will allow the tensioners to extend, requiring timing chain cover removal in order to reset tensioners. CAUTION: Do not force wedge past the narrowest point between the chain strands. Damage to the tensioners may occur. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 1796 5. Position Special Tool 9867 timing chain wedge between the timing chain strands. Tap the tool to securely wedge the timing chain against the tensioner arm and guide. 6. Remove the camshaft position sensor. NOTE: When gripping the camshaft, place the pliers on the tube portion of the camshaft only. Do not grip the lobes or the sprocket areas. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 1797 7. Hold the camshaft with adjustable pliers while removing the camshaft sprocket bolt and sprocket. 8. Using the pliers, gently allow the camshaft to rotate 45° counter-clockwise until the camshaft is in the neutral position (no valve load). 9. Starting at the outside working inward, loosen the camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts 1/2 turn at a time. Repeat until all load is off the bearing caps. CAUTION: DO NOT STAMP OR STRIKE THE CAMSHAFT BEARING CAPS. SEVERE DAMAGE WILL OCCUR TO THE BEARING CAPS. NOTE: When the camshaft is removed the rocker arms may slide downward, mark the rocker arms before removing camshaft. 10. Remove the camshaft bearing caps and the camshaft. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 1798 Camshaft: Service and Repair Camshaft - Installation Camshaft - Left INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate camshaft journals with clean engine oil. NOTE: Position the left side camshaft so that the camshaft sprocket dowel is near the 1 o'clock position, This will place the camshaft at the neutral position easing the installation of the camshaft bearing caps. 2. Position the camshaft into the cylinder head. 3. Install the camshaft bearing caps, hand tighten the retaining bolts. 4. Working in 1/2 turn increments, tighten the bearing cap retaining bolts following the torque sequence. 5. Tighten the camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts to 11 Nm (100 in. lbs.). 6. Position the camshaft drive gear into the timing chain aligning the V8 mark between the two marked chain links (Two links marked during removal) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 1799 NOTE: When gripping the camshaft, place the pliers on the tube portion of the camshaft only. Do not grip the lobes or the sprocket areas. 7. Using the adjustable pliers (1), rotate the camshaft until the camshaft sprocket dowel (2) is aligned with the slot in the camshaft sprocket. Install the sprocket onto the camshaft. CAUTION: Remove excess oil from camshaft sprocket bolt. Failure to do so can cause bolt over-torque resulting in bolt failure. 8. Remove excess oil from bolt, then install the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt and hand tighten. 9. Remove Locking Wedge Tool 9867 timing chain wedge (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 1800 10. Using Spanner Wrench 6958 (4) with adapter pins 8346, tighten the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt (2) to 122 Nm (90 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the cylinder head cover (1). Camshaft - Right INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate camshaft journals with clean engine oil. NOTE: Position the right side camshaft so that the camshaft sprocket dowel is near the 10 o'clock position, This will place the camshaft at the neutral position easing the installation of the camshaft bearing caps. 2. Position the camshaft into the cylinder head. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 1801 3. Install the camshaft bearing caps, hand tighten the retaining bolts. 4. Working in 1/2 turn increments, tighten the bearing cap retaining bolts starting with the middle cap working outward. 5. Torque the camshaft bearing cap retaining bolts to 11 Nm (100 in. lbs.). 6. Position the camshaft drive gear into the timing chain aligning the V8 mark between the two marked chain links (Two links marked during removal). NOTE: When gripping the camshaft, place the pliers on the tube portion of the camshaft only. Do not grip the lobes or the sprocket areas. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft - Removal > Page 1802 7. Using the adjustable pliers, rotate the camshaft until the camshaft sprocket dowel is aligned with the slot in the camshaft sprocket. Install the sprocket onto the camshaft. CAUTION: Remove excess oil from camshaft sprocket bolt. Failure to do so can cause bolt over-torque resulting in bolt failure. 8. Remove excess oil from camshaft sprocket bolt, then install the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt and hand tighten. 9. Remove timing chain wedge special tool 9867. 10. Using Special Tool 6958 spanner wrench with adapter pins 8346, torque the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt to 122 Nm (90 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the camshaft position sensor. 12. Install the cylinder head cover See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - HYDRAULIC LASH ADJUSTER A tappet-like noise may be produced from several items. Check the following items. 1. Engine oil level too high or too low. This may cause aerated oil to enter the adjusters and cause them to be spongy. 2. Insufficient running time after rebuilding cylinder head. Low speed running up to 1 hour may be required. 3. Turn engine off and let set for a few minutes before restarting. Repeat this several times after engine has reached normal operating temperature. 4. Low oil pressure. 5. The oil restrictor in cylinder head gasket or the oil passage to the cylinder head is plugged with debris. 6. Air ingested into oil due to broken or cracked oil pump pick up. 7. Worn valve guides. 8. Rocker arm ears contacting valve spring retainer. 9. Rocker arm loose, adjuster stuck or at maximum extension and still leaves lash in the system. 10. Oil leak or excessive cam bore wear in cylinder head. 11. Faulty lash adjuster. - Check lash adjusters for sponginess while installed in cylinder head and cam on camshaft at base circle. Depress part of rocker arm over adjuster. Normal adjusters should feel very firm. Spongy adjusters can be bottomed out easily. - Remove suspected lash adjusters, and replace. - Before installation, make sure adjusters are at least partially full of oil. This can be verified by little or no plunger travel when lash adjuster is depressed. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Description and Operation Rocker Arm Assembly: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The rocker arms are steel stampings with an integral roller bearing. The rocker arms incorporate an 0.5 mm (0.019 inch) oil hole in the ball socket for roller and camshaft lubrication. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Disconnect the battery negative cable to prevent accidental starter engagement. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover Removal. 2. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 3 and 5 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC exhaust stroke. 3. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 2 and 8 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC compression stroke. 4. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 4 and 6 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #3 is at TDC compression stroke. 5. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 1 and 7 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #2 is at TDC compression stroke. 6. Using special tool 8516 Rocker Arm Remover (2), press downward on the valve spring, remove rocker arm. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1811 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Make sure the rocker arms are installed with the concave pocket over the lash adjusters. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the rocker arms and/or lash adjusters. NOTE: Coat the rocker arms with clean engine oil prior to installation. 1. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 3 and 5 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC exhaust stroke. 2. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 2 and 8 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC compression stroke. 3. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 4 and 6 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #3 is at TDC compression stroke. 4. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 1 and 7 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #2 is at TDC compression stroke. 5. Using valve spring compressor 10102 press downward on the valve spring, install rocker arm. 6. Install the cylinder head cover See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Idler Shaft - Removal Balance Shaft: Service and Repair Idler Shaft - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the primary and secondary timing chains and sprockets See: Timing Components/Timing Chain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Timing Chain & Sprockets - Removal. NOTE: To remove the idler shaft, it is necessary to tap threads into the shaft, to install the removal tool. 2. Using a 12 mm X 1.75 tap, cut threads in the idler shaft center bore. 3. Cover the radiator core with a suitable cover. CAUTION: Use care when removing the idler shaft, Do not strike the radiator cooling fins with the slide hammer. 4. Using Special Tool 8517 Slide Hammer, remove the idler shaft. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Idler Shaft - Removal > Page 1817 Balance Shaft: Service and Repair Idler Shaft - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Thoroughly clean the idler shaft bore. 2. Position the idler shaft in the bore. NOTE: The two lubrication holes in the idler shaft do not require any special alignment. NOTE: Before using the retaining bolt to install the idler shaft, coat the threads and the pilot on the idler shaft, with clean engine oil. 3. Using the primary idler sprocket retaining bolt and washer, carefully draw the idler shaft into the bore until fully seated. 4. Coat the idler shaft with clean engine oil. 5. Install the timing chains and sprockets See: Timing Components/Timing Chain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Timing Chain & Sprockets - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications CONNECTING RODS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1821 Connecting Rod Bearing: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - CONNECTING ROD BEARING FITTING Inspect the connecting rod bearings for scoring. Check the bearings for normal wear patterns, scoring, grooving, fatigue and pitting. Replace any bearing that shows abnormal wear. Inspect the connecting rod journals for signs of scoring, nicks and burrs. Misaligned or bent connecting rods can cause abnormal wear on pistons, piston rings, cylinder walls, connecting rod bearings and crankshaft connecting rod journals. If wear patterns or damage to any of these components indicate the probability of a misaligned connecting rod, inspect it for correct rod alignment. Replace misaligned, bent or twisted connecting rods. 1. Wipe the oil from the connecting rod journal. 2. Lubricate the upper bearing insert (2) and install in connecting rod (1). Center bearing insert (2) in connecting rod. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1822 3. Use piston ring compressor (3) and Guide Pins Special Tool 8507 (4) to install the rod and piston assemblies. The oil slinger slots in the rods must face front of the engine. The "F"'s near the piston wrist pin bore should point to the front of the engine. 4. Install the lower bearing insert in the bearing cap Center bearing insert (2) in connecting rod (1).. The lower insert must be dry. Place strip of Plastigage across full width of the lower insert at the center of bearing cap. Plastigage must not crumble in use. If brittle, obtain fresh stock. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1823 5. Install bearing cap and connecting rod on the journal and tighten bolts to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) plus a 90° turn. DO NOT rotate crankshaft. Plastigage will smear, resulting in inaccurate indication. 6. Remove the bearing cap and determine amount of bearing-to-journal clearance by measuring the width of compressed Plastigage (2). Refer to Engine Specifications for the proper clearance. Plastigage should indicate the same clearance across the entire width of the insert. If the clearance varies, it may be caused by either a tapered journal, bent connecting rod or foreign material trapped between the insert and cap or rod. 7. If the correct clearance is indicated, replacement of the bearing inserts is not necessary. Remove the Plastigage (2) from crankshaft journal and bearing insert. Proceed with installation. 8. If bearing-to-journal clearance exceeds the specification, determine which service bearing set to use, using the chart above. CAUTION: Connecting Rod Bolts are Torque to Yield Bolts and Must Not Be Reused. Always replace the Rod Bolts whenever they are loosened or removed. 9. Repeat the Plastigage measurement to verify your bearing selection prior to final assembly. 10. Once you have selected the proper insert, install the insert and cap. Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) plus a 90° turn. Slide snug-fitting feeler gauge between the connecting rod and crankshaft journal flange. Refer to Engine Specifications for the proper clearance. Replace the connecting rod if the side clearance is not within specification. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications CONNECTING RODS ROD BEARING CAP TORQUE CAUTION: Connecting Rod Bolts are Torque to Yield Bolts and Must Not Be Reused. Always replace the Rod Bolts whenever they are loosened or removed. Lubricate rod bolts and bearing surfaces with engine oil. Install connecting rod cap and bearing. Tighten bolts to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) plus 90°. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1827 Connecting Rod: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Do not use a metal stamp to mark connecting rods as damage may result, instead use ink or a scratch awl. The pistons are made of a high strength aluminum alloy. The anodized top ring groove and crown has been replaced with a coated top ring that is blue in color on the bottom surface. Piston skirts are coated with a solid lubricant (Molykote) to reduce friction and provide scuff resistance. The connecting rods are made of forged powdered metal, with a "fractured cap" design. A pressed fit piston pin is used to attach the piston and connecting rod. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Connecting Rod: Procedures Piston and Connecting Rod - Cleaning CLEANING CAUTION: DO NOT use a wire wheel or other abrasive cleaning devise to clean the pistons or connecting rods. The pistons have a Moly coating, this coating must not be damaged. 1. Using a suitable cleaning solvent clean the pistons in warm water and towel dry. 2. Use a wood or plastic scraper to clean the ring land grooves. CAUTION: DO NOT remove the piston pin from the piston and connecting rod assembly. Piston and Connecting Rod - Inspection INSPECTION Check the connecting rod journal for excessive wear, taper and scoring See: Connecting Rod Bearing/Service and Repair. Check the connecting rod for signs of twist or bending. Check the piston for taper and elliptical shape before it is fitted into the cylinder bore See: Piston/Service and Repair/Procedures/Piston Fitting. Check the piston for scoring, or scraping marks in the piston skirts. Check the ring lands for cracks and/or deterioration. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1830 Connecting Rod: Removal and Replacement Piston and Connecting Rod - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the following components: - Oil pan and gasket/windage tray See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Pan - Removal. - Cylinder head covers See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal and See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal. - Timing chain cover See: Timing Components/Timing Cover/Service and Repair/Timing Cover Removal. - Cylinder head(s) See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head - Removal and See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head - Removal. 3. If necessary, remove top ridge of cylinder bores with a reliable ridge reamer before removing pistons from cylinder block. Be sure to keep tops of pistons covered during this operation. Pistons and connecting rods must be removed from top of cylinder block. When removing piston and connecting rod assemblies from the engine, rotate crankshaft so the each connecting rod is centered in cylinder bore. CAUTION: DO NOT use a number stamp or a punch to mark connecting rods or caps, as damage to connecting rods could occur NOTE: Connecting rods and bearing caps are not interchangeable and should be marked before removing to ensure correct reassembly. 4. Mark connecting rod and bearing cap positions using a permanent ink marker or scribe tool. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to damage the fractured rod and cap joint face surfaces, as engine damage may occur. 5. Remove connecting rod cap. Install Special Tool 8507 Connecting Rod Guides into the connecting rod being removed. Remove piston from cylinder bore. Repeat this procedure for each piston being removed. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to nick crankshaft journals, as engine damage may occur 6. Immediately after piston and connecting rod removal, install bearing cap on the mating connecting rod to prevent damage to the fractured cap and rod surfaces. 7. Carefully remove piston rings from piston(s), starting from the top ring down. Piston and Connecting Rod - Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1831 1. Before installing piston and connecting rod assemblies into the bore, install the piston rings. 2. Immerse the piston head and rings in clean engine oil. Position a ring compressor (3) over the piston and rings. Tighten ring compressor. Ensure position of rings do not change during this operation. 3. Position bearing onto connecting rod. Ensure that hole in bearing shell aligns with hole in connecting rod. Lubricate bearing surface with clean engine oil. 4. Install Special Tool 8507 Connecting Rod Guides (4) into connecting rod bolt threads. 5. The pistons are marked on the piston pin bore surface with an raised "F" indicating installation position (1). This mark must be pointing toward the front of engine on both cylinder banks. The connecting rod oil slinger slot faces the front of the engine. 6. Wipe cylinder bore clean and lubricate with engine oil. 7. Rotate crankshaft until connecting rod journal is on the center of cylinder bore. Insert rod and piston into cylinder bore and carefully position connecting rod guides over crankshaft journal. 8. Tap piston down in cylinder bore using a hammer handle. While at the same time, guide connecting rod into position on rod journal. CAUTION: Connecting Rod Bolts are Torque to Yield Bolts and Must Not Be Reused. Always replace the Rod Bolts whenever they are loosened or removed. 9. Lubricate rod bolts and bearing surfaces with engine oil. Install connecting rod cap and bearing. Tighten bolts to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) plus 90°. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1832 10. Install the following components: - Cylinder head(s). See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head - Installation. - Timing chain and cover. See: Timing Components/Timing Cover/Service and Repair/Timing Cover - Installation. - Cylinder head covers See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Installation. - Oil pan and gasket/windage tray. See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Pan - Installation. 11. Fill crankcase with proper engine oil to correct level. 12. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING TORQUE AND SEQUENCE NOTE: Lubricate the bedplate retaining bolts with clean engine oil prior to installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1836 Install the bedplate retaining bolts, making sure to place the stud bolts in the correct location, Torque the bolts in the sequence shown. - Tighten bolts A - L to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) - Tighten bolts 1-10 to 2.8 Nm (25 in. lbs.) - Turn bolts 1-10 an additional 90°. - Tighten bolts A1- A6 to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING SELECTION The main bearings are "select fit" to achieve proper oil clearances. For main bearing selection, the crankshaft position sensor target wheel has grade identification marks stamped into it (3). These marks are read from left to right, corresponding with journal number 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5. The crankshaft position sensor target wheel (2) is mounted to the number 8 counter weight (1) on the crankshaft. NOTE: Service main bearings are coded. These codes identify what size (grade) the bearing is. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Fitting Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Fitting STANDARD PROCEDURE - CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING - FITTING MAIN BEARING JOURNAL DIAMETER (CRANKSHAFT REMOVED) Crankshaft removed from the cylinder block. Clean the oil off the main bearing journal. Determine the maximum diameter of the journal with a micrometer. Measure at two locations 90° apart at each end of the journal. The maximum allowable taper is 0.008mm (0.0004 inch.) and maximum out of round is 0.005mm (0.002 inch). Compare the measured diameter with the journal diameter specification (Main Bearing Fitting Chart). Select inserts required to obtain the specified bearing-to-journal clearance. CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING SELECTION The main bearings are "select fit" to achieve proper oil clearances. For main bearing selection, the crankshaft position sensor target wheel has grade identification marks stamped into it (3). These marks are read from left to right, corresponding with journal number 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5. The crankshaft position sensor target wheel (2) is mounted to the number 8 counter weight (1) on the crankshaft. NOTE: Service main bearings are coded. These codes identify what size (grade) the bearing is. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Fitting > Page 1839 Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Inspection INSPECTION Wipe the inserts clean and inspect for abnormal wear patterns and for metal or other foreign material imbedded in the lining. Normal main bearing insert wear patterns are illustrated. NOTE: If any of the crankshaft journals are scored, the crankshaft must be repaired or replaced. Inspect the back of the inserts for fractures, scrapings or irregular wear patterns. Inspect the upper insert locking tabs for damage. Replace all damaged or worn bearing inserts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications CRANKSHAFT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1843 Crankshaft: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The crankshaft is constructed of nodular cast iron. The crankshaft is a cross-shaped four throw design with eight counterweights for balancing purposes. The crankshaft is supported by five select fit main bearings with the number three serving as the thrust washer location. The main journals of the crankshaft are cross drilled to improve rod bearing lubrication. The number eight counterweight has provisions for crankshaft position sensor target wheel mounting. The select fit main bearing markings are located on the rear side of the target wheel. The crankshaft oil seals are one piece design. The front oil seal is retained in the timing chain cover, and the rear seal is pressed in to a bore formed by the cylinder block and the bedplate assembly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Crankshaft: Procedures INSPECTION NOTE: Thoroughly inspect the connecting rod bearing bores and main bearing bores for scoring, blueing or severe scratches. Further disassembly may be required. If connecting rod bearing bores show damage, the cylinder heads must be removed to service the piston and rod assemblies. If the bedplate or the cylinder block main bearing bores show damage the engine must be replaced. 1. If required, remove the main bearing halves from the cylinder block and bedplate. 2. Thoroughly clean the bedplate to cylinder block sealing surfaces and main bearing bores. Remove all oil and sealant residue. 3. Inspect the bedplate main bearing bores for cracks, scoring or severe blueing. If either condition exists the engine must be replaced. 4. Inspect the crankshaft thrust washers for scoring, scratches, wear or blueing. If either condition exist replace the thrust washer. 5. Inspect the oil pan gasket/windage tray for splits, tears or cracks in the gasket sealing surfaces. Replace gasket as necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1846 Crankshaft: Removal and Replacement Crankshaft - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: To remove the crankshaft from the engine, the engine must be removed from the vehicle. 1. Remove the engine. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine - Removal. 2. Remove the engine oil pump.See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pump/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Oil Pump - Removal. CAUTION: DO NOT pry on the oil pan gasket when removing the oil pan, The oil pan gasket is mounted to the cylinder block in three locations and will remain attached to block when removing oil pan. Gasket can not be removed with oil pan. 3. Remove oil pan. See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Pan - Removal. 4. Remove the oil pump pickup tube and oil pan gasket /windage tray. 5. Remove the bedplate mounting bolts. Note the location of the three stud bolts for installation. 6. Remove the connecting rods from the crankshaft. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1847 CAUTION: The bedplate to cylinder block mating surface is a critical sealing surface. Do not pry on or damage this surface in any way. NOTE: The bedplate contains the lower main bearing halves. Use care when handling bedplate as not to drop or damage bearing halves. Installing main bearing halves in the wrong position will cause sever damage to the crankshaft. NOTE: The bedplate has pry points cast into it. Use these points only. The pry points are on both the left and right sides, only the left side is shown. 7. Carefully pry on the pry points (3) to loosen the bedplate (2) then remove the bedplate. CAUTION: When removing the crankshaft, use care not to damage bearing surfaces on the crankshaft. 8. Remove the crankshaft. Crankshaft - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Main bearings are select fit. Refer to Main bearings for proper bearing selections. 1. Lubricate upper main bearing halves with clean engine oil. CAUTION: When installing crankshaft, use care not to damage bearing surfaces on the crankshaft. 2. Position crankshaft in cylinder block. 3. Install the thrust washers (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1848 CAUTION: The bedplate to cylinder block mateing surface must be coated with sealant prior to installation. Failure to do so will cause severe oil leaks. NOTE: The parts must assembled and tightened within 10 after applying sealer. NOTE: Make sure that the bedplate and cylinder block sealing surfaces are clean and free of oil or other contaminants. Contaminants on the sealing surfaces may cause main bearing distortion and/or oil leaks. 4. Apply a 2.5 mm (0.100 inch) bead of Mopar(R) Gen II Silicone Rubber Adhesive sealant (2) to the cylinder block-to-bedplate mating surface (1) as shown. 5. Coat the crankshaft main bearing journals with clean engine oil and position the bedplate onto the cylinder block. NOTE: Lubricate the bedplate retaining bolts with clean engine oil prior to installation. 6. Install the bedplate retaining bolts, making sure to place the stud bolts in the correct location, Torque the bolts in the sequence shown. - Tighten bolts A - L to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) - Tighten bolts 1-10 to 2.8 Nm (25 in. lbs.) - Turn bolts 1-10 an additional 90°. - Tighten bolts A1- A6 to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) 7. Measure crankshaft end play. See: Specifications/Engine Specifications. 8. Install the connecting rods and measure side clearance. See: Connecting Rod Bearing/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1849 9. Position the oil pan gasket/windage tray, using a new o-ring, install the oil pickup tube. Tighten the bolt to 28 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) torque the nuts to 28 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 10. Install the oil pan. Tighten the retaining bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) in the sequence shown. 11. Install the engine See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Block Heater - Description Engine Block Heater: Description and Operation Engine Block Heater - Description DESCRIPTION WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE ENGINE UNLESS BLOCK HEATER CORD HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM POWER SOURCE AND SECURED IN PLACE. THE POWER CORD MUST BE SECURED IN ITS RETAINING CLIPS AND ROUTED AWAY FROM EXHAUST MANIFOLDS AND MOVING PARTS. An optional engine block heater is available on all models. The heater is equipped with a power cord. The heater is mounted in a core hole of the engine cylinder block (1) (in place of a freeze plug) with the heating element immersed in engine coolant. The cord is attached to an engine compartment component with tie-straps. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Engine Block Heater - Description > Page 1854 Engine Block Heater: Description and Operation Engine Block Heater - Operation OPERATION The heater warms the engine coolant providing easier engine starting and faster warm-up in low temperatures. Connecting the power cord to a grounded 110-120 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord provides the electricity needed to heat the element. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1855 Engine Block Heater: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING If the unit does not operate, possible causes can be either the power cord or the heater element. Test the power cord for continuity with a 110-volt voltmeter or 110-volt test light. Test heater element continuity with an ohmmeter or a 12-volt test light. CAUTION: To prevent damage, the power cord must be secured in its retainer clips and away from any components that may cause abrasion or damage, such as linkages, exhaust components, etc. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Block Heater - Removal Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Engine Block Heater - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery. 2. Drain coolant from radiator See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 3. Raise vehicle. 4. Remove engine cylinder block drain plug(s) (1) located on the sides of cylinder block above the oil pan rail. 5. Remove power cord from block heater. 6. Loosen screw at center of block heater. Remove heater assembly (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Block Heater - Removal > Page 1858 Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Engine Block Heater - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install block drain plugs. 2. Thoroughly clean cylinder block core hole and block heater seat. 3. Insert block heater assembly with element loop pointing at twelve o'clock. 4. With block heater fully seated, tighten center screw to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.) torque. 5. Refill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 6. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Expansion/Freeze Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Core Plug - Removal Expansion/Freeze Plug: Service and Repair Core Plug - Removal REMOVAL 1. Drain the cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 2. Using a blunt tool such as a drift or a screw driver and a hammer, strike the bottom edge of the cup plug (5). 3. Using a suitable pair of pliers, grasp the core plug (5) and remove. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Expansion/Freeze Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Core Plug - Removal > Page 1863 Expansion/Freeze Plug: Service and Repair Core Plug - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Thoroughly clean core plug bore, remove all of the old sealer. 1. Coat the edges of the engine core plug and the core plug bore with Mopar Gasket Maker, or equivalent. NOTE: It is not necessary to wait for the sealant to cure on the core plugs. The cooling system can be filled and the vehicle returned to service immediately. 2. Using proper plug driver, drive core plug into the core plug bore. The sharp edge of the core plug should be at least 0.50 mm (0.020 in.) inside the lead in chamfer. 3. Refill the cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications HARMONIC BALANCER TORQUE CAUTION: Special Tool 8512-A, is assembled in a specific sequence. Failure to assemble this tool in this sequence can result in tool failure and severe damage to either the tool or the crankshaft. 1. Assemble Special Tool 8512-A as follows, The nut (2) is threaded onto the shaft first. Then the roller bearing (1) is placed onto the threaded rod (3) (The hardened bearing surface of the bearing (1) MUST face the nut (2). Then the hardened washer (5) slides onto the threaded rod. Once assembled coat the threaded rod's threads with MOPAR (R) Nickel Anti-Seize or equivalent. 2. Using Special Tool 8512-A, press damper onto crankshaft (1). 3. Install then tighten vibration damper bolt to 175 Nm (130 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vibration Damper - Removal Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Vibration Damper - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove accessory drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal. 3. Drain cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 4. Remove radiator upper hose. 5. Remove upper fan shroud. 6. Using Special Tools 6958 Spanner with Adapter Pins 8346 (1), loosen fan and viscous assembly from water pump. 7. Remove fan and viscous assembly. 8. Disconnect electrical connector for fan mounted inside radiator shroud. NOTE: Transmission cooler line snaps into shroud lower right hand corner. 9. Remove vibration damper bolt. 10. Remove damper using Special Tools 8513 Insert and 1026 Three Jaw Puller (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vibration Damper - Removal > Page 1869 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Vibration Damper - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: To prevent severe damage to the Crankshaft, Damper or Special Tool 8512-A, thoroughly clean the damper bore and the crankshaft nose before installing Damper. 1. Align vibration damper slot with key in crankshaft. Slide damper onto crankshaft slightly. CAUTION: Special Tool 8512-A, is assembled in a specific sequence. Failure to assemble this tool in this sequence can result in tool failure and severe damage to either the tool or the crankshaft. 2. Assemble Special Tool 8512-A as follows, The nut (2) is threaded onto the shaft first. Then the roller bearing (1) is placed onto the threaded rod (3) (The hardened bearing surface of the bearing (1) MUST face the nut (2). Then the hardened washer (5) slides onto the threaded rod. Once assembled coat the threaded rod's threads with MOPAR (R) Nickel Anti-Seize or equivalent. 3. Using Special Tool 8512-A, press damper onto crankshaft (1). 4. Install then tighten vibration damper bolt to 175 Nm (130 ft. lbs.). 5. Install cooling fan assembly. 6. Install radiator upper shroud and tighten fasteners to 11 Nm (95 in. lbs.). 7. Connect electrical connector for shroud fan. 8. Install radiator upper hose. 9. Install accessory drive belt. 10. Refill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 11. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications PISTONS PISTON PINS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1873 Piston: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Do not use a metal stamp to mark connecting rods as damage may result, instead use ink or a scratch awl. The pistons are made of a high strength aluminum alloy. The anodized top ring groove and crown has been replaced with a coated top ring that is blue in color on the bottom surface. Piston skirts are coated with a solid lubricant (Molykote) to reduce friction and provide scuff resistance. The connecting rods are made of forged powdered metal, with a "fractured cap" design. A pressed fit piston pin is used to attach the piston and connecting rod. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Piston: Procedures Piston and Connecting Rod - Cleaning CLEANING CAUTION: DO NOT use a wire wheel or other abrasive cleaning devise to clean the pistons or connecting rods. The pistons have a Moly coating, this coating must not be damaged. 1. Using a suitable cleaning solvent clean the pistons in warm water and towel dry. 2. Use a wood or plastic scraper to clean the ring land grooves. CAUTION: DO NOT remove the piston pin from the piston and connecting rod assembly. Piston and Connecting Rod - Inspection INSPECTION Check the connecting rod journal for excessive wear, taper and scoring See: Connecting Rod Bearing/Service and Repair. Check the connecting rod for signs of twist or bending. Check the piston for taper and elliptical shape before it is fitted into the cylinder bore See: Piston Fitting. Check the piston for scoring, or scraping marks in the piston skirts. Check the ring lands for cracks and/or deterioration. Piston Fitting STANDARD PROCEDURE - PISTON FITTING 1. To correctly select the proper size piston, a cylinder bore gauge, capable of reading in 0.003 mm (.0001 in.) INCREMENTS is required. If a bore gauge is not available, do not use an inside micrometer. 2. Measure the inside diameter of the cylinder bore at a point 38.0 mm (1.5 inches) below top of bore. Start perpendicular (across or at 90 degrees) to the axis of the crankshaft at point A and then take an additional bore reading 90 degrees to that at point B. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1876 3. The coated pistons will be serviced with the piston pin and connecting rod pre-assembled. 4. The coating material is applied to the piston after the final piston machining process. Measuring the outside diameter of a coated piston will not provide accurate results. Therefore measuring the inside diameter of the cylinder bore with a dial Bore Gauge is MANDATORY. To correctly select the proper size piston, a cylinder bore gauge capable of reading in 0.003 mm (.0001 in.) increments is required. 5. Piston installation into the cylinder bore requires slightly more pressure than that required for non-coated pistons. The bonded coating on the piston will give the appearance of a line-to-line fit with the cylinder bore. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1877 Piston: Removal and Replacement Piston and Connecting Rod - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the following components: - Oil pan and gasket/windage tray See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Pan - Removal. - Cylinder head covers See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal and See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal. - Timing chain cover See: Timing Components/Timing Cover/Service and Repair/Timing Cover Removal. - Cylinder head(s) See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head - Removal and See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head - Removal. 3. If necessary, remove top ridge of cylinder bores with a reliable ridge reamer before removing pistons from cylinder block. Be sure to keep tops of pistons covered during this operation. Pistons and connecting rods must be removed from top of cylinder block. When removing piston and connecting rod assemblies from the engine, rotate crankshaft so the each connecting rod is centered in cylinder bore. CAUTION: DO NOT use a number stamp or a punch to mark connecting rods or caps, as damage to connecting rods could occur NOTE: Connecting rods and bearing caps are not interchangeable and should be marked before removing to ensure correct reassembly. 4. Mark connecting rod and bearing cap positions using a permanent ink marker or scribe tool. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to damage the fractured rod and cap joint face surfaces, as engine damage may occur. 5. Remove connecting rod cap. Install Special Tool 8507 Connecting Rod Guides into the connecting rod being removed. Remove piston from cylinder bore. Repeat this procedure for each piston being removed. CAUTION: Care must be taken not to nick crankshaft journals, as engine damage may occur 6. Immediately after piston and connecting rod removal, install bearing cap on the mating connecting rod to prevent damage to the fractured cap and rod surfaces. 7. Carefully remove piston rings from piston(s), starting from the top ring down. Piston and Connecting Rod - Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1878 1. Before installing piston and connecting rod assemblies into the bore, install the piston rings. 2. Immerse the piston head and rings in clean engine oil. Position a ring compressor (3) over the piston and rings. Tighten ring compressor. Ensure position of rings do not change during this operation. 3. Position bearing onto connecting rod. Ensure that hole in bearing shell aligns with hole in connecting rod. Lubricate bearing surface with clean engine oil. 4. Install Special Tool 8507 Connecting Rod Guides (4) into connecting rod bolt threads. 5. The pistons are marked on the piston pin bore surface with an raised "F" indicating installation position (1). This mark must be pointing toward the front of engine on both cylinder banks. The connecting rod oil slinger slot faces the front of the engine. 6. Wipe cylinder bore clean and lubricate with engine oil. 7. Rotate crankshaft until connecting rod journal is on the center of cylinder bore. Insert rod and piston into cylinder bore and carefully position connecting rod guides over crankshaft journal. 8. Tap piston down in cylinder bore using a hammer handle. While at the same time, guide connecting rod into position on rod journal. CAUTION: Connecting Rod Bolts are Torque to Yield Bolts and Must Not Be Reused. Always replace the Rod Bolts whenever they are loosened or removed. 9. Lubricate rod bolts and bearing surfaces with engine oil. Install connecting rod cap and bearing. Tighten bolts to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.) plus 90°. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1879 10. Install the following components: - Cylinder head(s). See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head - Installation. - Timing chainhain and cover. See: Timing Components/Timing Cover/Service and Repair/Timing Cover - Installation. - Cylinder head covers See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Installation. - Oil pan and gasket/windage tray. See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Engine Oil Pan - Installation. 11. Fill crankcase with proper engine oil to correct level. 12. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications PISTON RINGS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1883 Piston Ring: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - PISTON RING FITTING Before reinstalling used rings or installing new rings, the ring clearances must be checked. 1. Wipe the cylinder bore clean. 2. Insert the ring in the cylinder bore. NOTE: The ring gap measurement must be made with the ring positioned at least 12mm (0.50 inch.) from bottom of cylinder bore. 3. Using a piston, to ensure that the ring is squared in the cylinder bore, slide the ring downward into the cylinder. 4. Using a feeler gauge (1) check the ring end gap. Replace any rings not within specification. PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE NOTE: Make sure the piston ring grooves are clean and free of nicks and burrs. 5. Measure the ring side clearance as shown make sure the feeler gauge (1) fits snugly between the ring land and the ring. Replace any ring not within specification. 6. Rotate the ring around the piston, the ring must rotate in the groove with out binding. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1884 7. The No. 1 and No. 2 piston rings have a different cross section. Ensure No. 2 ring is installed with manufacturers I.D. mark (Dot) facing up, towards top of the piston. NOTE: Piston rings are installed in the following order: - Oil ring expander. - Upper oil ring side rail. - Lower oil ring side rail. - No. 2 Intermediate piston ring. - No. 1 Upper piston ring. 8. Install the oil ring expander. 9. Install upper side rail (1) by placing one end between the piston ring groove and the expander ring. Hold end firmly and press down the portion to be installed until side rail is in position. Repeat this step for the lower side rail. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1885 10. Install No. 2 intermediate piston ring using a piston ring installer. 11. Install No. 1 upper piston ring using a piston ring installer. 12. Position piston ring end gaps as shown. It is important that expander ring gap (5) is at least 45° from the side rail gaps, but not on the piston pin center or on the thrust direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Description and Operation Rocker Arm Assembly: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The rocker arms are steel stampings with an integral roller bearing. The rocker arms incorporate an 0.5 mm (0.019 inch) oil hole in the ball socket for roller and camshaft lubrication. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Disconnect the battery negative cable to prevent accidental starter engagement. 1. Remove the cylinder head cover See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal. 2. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 3 and 5 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC exhaust stroke. 3. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 2 and 8 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC compression stroke. 4. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 4 and 6 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #3 is at TDC compression stroke. 5. For rocker arm removal on cylinders 1 and 7 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #2 is at TDC compression stroke. 6. Using special tool 8516 Rocker Arm Remover (2), press downward on the valve spring, remove rocker arm. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 1895 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Make sure the rocker arms are installed with the concave pocket over the lash adjusters. Failure to do so may cause severe damage to the rocker arms and/or lash adjusters. NOTE: Coat the rocker arms with clean engine oil prior to installation. 1. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 3 and 5 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC exhaust stroke. 2. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 2 and 8 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #1 is at TDC compression stroke. 3. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 4 and 6 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #3 is at TDC compression stroke. 4. For rocker arm installation on cylinders 1 and 7 Rotate the crankshaft until cylinder #2 is at TDC compression stroke. 5. Using valve spring compressor 10102 press downward on the valve spring, install rocker arm. 6. Install the cylinder head cover See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Description and Operation Valve Cover: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The cylinder head covers are made of injection molded thermo-set plastic, and are not interchangeable from side-to-side. It is imperative that nothing rest on the cylinder head covers. Prolonged contact with other items may wear a hole in the cylinder head cover. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Valve Cover: Procedures CLEANING Clean cylinder head cover gasket surface. Clean head rail, if necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1901 Valve Cover: Removal and Replacement Left LEFT SIDE 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove the resonator assemble and air inlet hose. 3. Remove the spark plug wires (3). 4. Route injector harness in front of cylinder head cover. 5. Disconnect the left side breather tube and remove the breather tube. 6. Remove the cylinder head cover mounting bolts. 7. Remove cylinder head cover and gasket. NOTE: The gasket may be used again, provided no cuts, tears, or deformation has occurred. Right RIGHT SIDE 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Remove air cleaner assembly, resonator assembly and air inlet hose. 3. Drain cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 4. Remove accessory drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal. 5. Remove air conditioning compressor retaining bolts and move compressor to the left. 6. Remove heater hoses. 7. Disconnect and remove positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) hose. 8. Remove oil fill tube. 9. Remove spark plug wires (3). 10. Remove right rear breather tube and filter assembly. 11. Remove cylinder head cover retaining bolts. 12. Remove cylinder head cover. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1902 NOTE: The gasket may be used again, provided no cuts, tears, or deformation has occurred. Left LEFT SIDE CAUTION: Do not use harsh cleaners to clean the cylinder head covers. Severe damage to covers may occur. 1. Clean cylinder head cover and both sealing surfaces. Inspect and replace gasket as necessary. 2. Install cylinder head cover and hand start all fasteners. Verify that all studs are in the correct location as shown. 3. Tighten cylinder head cover bolts and double ended studs to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). 4. Install left side breather and connect breather tube. 5. Install the spark plug wires (3). 6. Install the resonator and air inlet hose. 7. Connect negative cable to battery. Right RIGHT SIDE CAUTION: Do not use harsh cleaners to clean the cylinder head covers. Severe damage to covers may occur. 1. Clean cylinder head cover and both sealing surfaces. Inspect and replace gasket as necessary. 2. Install cylinder head cover and hand start all fasteners. 3. Tighten cylinder head cover bolts and double ended studs to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs). 4. Install right rear breather tube and filter assembly. 5. Install spark plug wires (3). 6. Install the oil fill tube. 7. Install PCV hose. 8. Install heater hoses. 9. Install air conditioning compressor retaining bolts. 10. Install accessory drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation. 11. Fill Cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1903 12. Install air cleaner assembly, resonator assembly and air inlet hose. 13. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Description and Operation Valve Spring: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The valve springs are made from high strength chrome silicon steel. The springs are common for intake and exhaust applications. The valve spring seat is integral with the valve stem seal, which is a positive type seal to control lubrication. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Springs - Removal Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Springs - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the cylinder head cover See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal. 2. Using Valve Spring Compressor 10102 (2), remove the rocker arms and the hydraulic lash adjusters. 3. Remove the spark plug for the cylinder the valve spring and seal are to be removed from. 4. Apply shop air to the cylinder to hold the valves in place when the spring is removed NOTE: All eight valve springs and seals are removed in the same manner; this procedure only covers one valve seal and valve spring. 5. Using Valve Spring Compressor 10102, compress the valve spring. NOTE: It may be necessary to tap the top of the valve spring to loosen the spring retainers locks enough to be removed. 6. Remove the two spring retainer lock halves. NOTE: the valve spring is under tension use care when releasing the valve spring compressor. 7. Remove the valve spring compressor. 8. Remove the spring retainer, and the spring. 9. Remove the valve stem seal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Springs - Removal > Page 1909 Valve Spring: Service and Repair Valve Springs - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Coat the valve stem with clean engine oil and install the valve stem seal. Make sure the seal is fully seated and that the garter spring at the top of the seal is intact. 2. Install the spring (6) and the spring retainer (2). 3. Using Valve Spring Compressor 10102, compress the spring and install the two valve spring retainer halves. 4. Release the valve spring compressor and make sure the two spring retainer halves and the spring retainer are fully seated. 5. Position the hydraulic lash adjusters and rocker arms. 6. Install the cylinder head cover See: Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Installation. 7. Install spark plugs and plug wires. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Description and Operation Valve: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The valves are made of heat resistant steel and have chrome plated stems to prevent scuffing. Each valve is actuated by a roller rocker arm which pivots on a stationary lash adjuster. All valves use three bead lock keepers to retain the springs and promote valve rotation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1913 Valve: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - REFACING NOTE: Valve seats that are worn or burned can be reworked, provided that correct angle and seat width are maintained. Otherwise the cylinder head must be replaced. NOTE: When refacing valves (4) and valve seats, it is important that the correct size valve guide pilot be used for reseating stones. A true and complete surface must be obtained. 1. Using a suitable dial indicator measure the center of the valve seat. Total run out must not exceed 0.051 mm (0.002 in). 2. Apply a small amount of Prussian blue to the valve seat, insert the valve into the cylinder head, while applying light pressure on the valve rotate the valve. Remove the valve and examine the valve face. If the blue is transferred below the top edge of the valve face, lower the valve seat using a 15 degree stone. If the blue is transferred to the bottom edge of the valve face, raise the valve seat using a 65 degree stone. 3. When the seat is properly positioned the width of the intake seat must be 1.75 - 2.36 mm (0.0689 - 0.0928 in.) and the exhaust seat must be 1.71 - 2.32 mm (0.0673 - 0.0911 in.). 4. Check the valve spring (6) installed height after refacing the valve and seat. The installed height for both intake and exhaust valve springs must not exceed 40.74 mm (1.6039 in.) 5. The valve seat and valve face must maintain a face angle of 44.5 - 45 ° angle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation Drive Belt: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The accessory drive belt is a serpentine type belt. Satisfactory performance of these belts depends on belt condition and proper belt tension. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1918 Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT VISUAL DIAGNOSIS When diagnosing serpentine accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the belt from rib to rib , are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace the belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also replace the belt if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing. Refer to ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS CHART for further belt diagnosis. NOISE DIAGNOSIS Noises generated by the accessory drive belt are most noticeable at idle. Before replacing a belt to resolve a noise condition, inspect all of the accessory drive pulleys for alignment, glazing, or excessive end play. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1919 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Drive Belt: Procedures CLEANING Clean all foreign debris from belt pulley grooves. The belt pulleys must be free of oil, grease, and coolants before installing the drive belt. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1922 Drive Belt: Removal and Replacement Accessory Drive Belt - Removal REMOVAL - 3.7L/4.7L CAUTION: Do not let tensioner arm snap back to the freearm position, severe damage may occur to the tensioner. Belt tension is not adjustable. Belt adjustment is maintained by an accessory drive belt tensioner. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery. 2. Rotate belt tensioner (6) until it contacts the stop. Remove belt (2), then slowly rotate the tensioner (6) into the freearm position. Accessory Drive Belt - Installation INSTALLATION - 3.7L/4.7L 1. Check condition of all pulleys. CAUTION: When installing the serpentine accessory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. If not, the engine may overheat due to the water pump rotating in the wrong direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1923 2. Install new belt. Route the belt around all pulleys except the idler pulley (5). Rotate the tensioner arm until it contacts it's stop position. Route the belt around the idler (5) and slowly let the tensioner rotate into the belt. Make sure the belt is seated onto all pulleys. 3. With the drive belt installed, inspect the belt wear indicator. On 4.7L Engines only, the gap between the tang and the housing stop must not exceed 24 mm (.94 inches). If the measurement exceeds this specification replace the serpentine accessory drive belt. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Drive Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Correct drive belt tension is required to ensure optimum performance of the belt driven engine accessories. If specified tension is not maintained, belt slippage may cause; engine overheating, lack of power steering assist, loss of air conditioning capacity, reduced generator output rate, and greatly reduced belt life. It is not necessary to adjust belt tension on the 3.7L and 4.7L engines. These engines are equipped with an automatic belt tensioner (1). The tensioner maintains correct belt tension at all times. Due to use of this belt tensioner, do not attempt to use a belt tension gauge on these engines. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1928 Drive Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The automatic belt tensioner maintains belt tension by using internal spring pressure, a pivoting arm and pulley to press against the drive belt. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - Removal Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE On 4.7L engines, the tensioner (3) is equipped with an indexing tang on back of tensioner and an indexing stop on tensioner housing. If a new belt is being installed, tang must be within approximately 24 mm (.94 inches) of indexing stop. Belt is considered new if it has been used 15 minutes or less. If the above specification cannot be met, check for: - The wrong belt being installed (incorrect length/width) - Worn bearings on an engine accessory (A/C compressor, power steering pump, water pump, idler pulley or generator) - A pulley on an engine accessory being loose - Misalignment of an engine accessory - Belt incorrectly routed. NOTE: A used belt should be replaced if tensioner indexing arrow has moved to the minimum tension indicator. Tensioner travel stops at this point. 1. Remove accessory drive belt See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal. 2. Remove tensioner assembly from mounting bracket (1). WARNING: Because of high spring pressure, do not attempt to disassemble automatic tensioner. Unit is serviced as an assembly except for pulley on tensioner. 3. Remove pulley bolt. Remove pulley from tensioner. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - Removal > Page 1931 Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner - Installation 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE 1. Install pulley and pulley bolt to tensioner. Tighten bolt to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) torque. 2. An indexing slot is located on back of tensioner. Align this slot to the head of the bolt on the front cover. Install the mounting bolt. Tighten bolt to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 3. Install accessory drive belt See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation. 4. Check belt indexing marks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount - Removal Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount - Removal Front Engine Mount REMOVAL 2WD 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. CAUTION: Remove the viscous fan before raising engine. Failure to do so may cause damage to the fan blade, fan clutch and fan shroud. 2. Remove the cooling fan. 3. Raise the vehicle. 4. Remove the engine oil filter. 5. Remove the oil drain trough. 6. Support the engine with a suitable jack and a block of wood across the full width of the engine oil pan. 7. Support the front axle with a suitable jack. 8. Remove the bolts that attach the engine mounts to the front axle. 9. Remove the bolts that attach the front axle to the left engine bracket. 10. Lower the front axle. 11. Remove the through bolts 12. Raise the engine far enough to be able to remove the left and right engine mounts. 13. Remove the mount to engine attaching bolts 14. Remove the engine mounts. 4WD 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Remove the viscous fan. 3. Raise the vehicle. 4. Remove the skid plate. 5. Remove the front crossmember. 6. Remove the engine oil filter. 7. Remove the oil drain trough. 8. Support the engine with a suitable jack and a block of wood across the full width of the engine oil pan. 9. Support the front axle with a suitable jack. 10. Remove the bolts that attach the engine mounts to the front axle. 11. Remove the bolts that attach the front axle to the left engine bracket. 12. Lower the front axle. 13. Remove the through bolts CAUTION: Remove the viscous fan before raising engine. Failure to do so may cause damage to the fan blade, fan clutch and fan shroud. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount - Removal > Page 1936 14. Remove the cooling fan. 15. Raise the engine far enough to be able to remove the left and right engine mounts (2). 16. Remove the engine mount bolts (1), and the mounts (2). Rear Engine Mount REMOVAL 1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. 2. Using a suitable jack, support transmission. 3. Remove the nuts from the transmission mount (1). 4. Remove the two bolts that attach the transmission mount to the engine bracket. 5. Raise the transmission enough to remove the mount from the crossmember (2). 6. Remove the mount (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount - Removal > Page 1937 Engine Mount: Service and Repair Engine Mount - Installation Front Engine Mount INSTALLATION 2WD NOTE: For mount to engine block and left engine bracket to front axle bolts, apply Mopar(R) Lock and Seal Adhesive, Medium Strength Thread locker. 1. Install the right and left side engine mounts to the engine block bolts. Torque bolts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 2. Insert the through bolts into the right and left side engine mounts and loose assemble the two nuts onto the through bolts. 3. Lower the engine until the through bolts rest onto the slots in the frame brackets. 4. Tighten the through bolt nuts to 94 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the oil drain trough. 6. Install the engine oil filter. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Install the cooling fan. 9. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 4WD NOTE: For mount to engine block and left engine bracket to front axle bolts, apply Mopar(R) Lock and Seal Adhesive, Medium Strength Thread locker. 1. Install the right and left side engine mount brackets (2) to the engine. 2. Install the right and left side engine mounts to the front axle. Torque nuts to 94 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 3. Raise the front axle into the frame and install the left and right side through bolts. Torque nuts to 94 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 4. Insert the two upper through bolts into the right and left side engine mounts and loose assemble the two nuts onto the through bolts. 5. Lower the engine until the left and right side engine brackets rest on the through bolts, and the lower engine bracket through holes align with the engine mounts, and the left engine bracket holes align with the front axle slots. 6. Loose assemble the bolts that attach the front axle to the left engine bracket. 7. Loose assemble the lower through bolts. 8. Torque the nuts for the through bolts to 101 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 9. Torque the bolts that attach the front axle to the left engine bracket to 101 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 10. Install the oil drain trough. 11. Install the engine oil filter. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Install the cooling fan. 14. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Rear Engine Mount Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Mount - Removal > Page 1938 INSTALLATION NOTE: Thread locking compound must be applied to the bolts before installation. 1. Install the two bolts that attach the transmission mount to the transmission bracket. 2. Torque the bolts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) torque. 3. Lower the transmission so the transmission mount rests on the crossmember, and the studs of the transmission mount are aligned in the slots in the crossmember. 4. Install the nuts onto the transmission mount studs through the crossmember access slot. 5. Torque the nuts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications OIL PRESSURE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > 09-002-08 > Jun > 08 > Engine - Oil Level Incorrect Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Customer Interest Engine - Oil Level Incorrect NUMBER: 09-002-08 GROUP: Engine DATE: June 20, 2008 SUBJECT: Engine Oil Level Incorrect OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves inspecting the part number on the current engine oil dipstick. If necessary, the dealer is to replace the dipstick with one that is correctly calibrated, and verify that the engine oil is at the correct level. MODELS: 2008 (ND) Dakota NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built from February 17, 2008 (MDH0217XX) and built before April 25, 2008 (MDH0425XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may state engine oil capacity on their 4.7L engine is greater than 6 quarts (5.7 Liters liquid). If engine is filled with the proper amount, (6 quarts) of oil, indicator (dipstick) may read up to 2 quarts low. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. 2. With the engine off, raise hood. 3. Remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick) from the engine. 4. Read and record the part number on the WRO that is on the engine oil level indicator. 5. Is the engine oil level indicator part number 53032936AE (or higher i.e. AF, AG, etc.), then verify that the engine oil level is in the "safe zone. Install the engine oil level indicator to the engine and close hood. No further action is required. 6. If the engine oil level indicator part number is earlier than 53032936AE (i.e. AA, AB, AC, or AD), then the engine oil level indicator will require replacement and the engine oil level may require adjustment. Proceed to the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Install the correct engine oil level indicator, p/n 53032936AE, to the engine. 2. Verify that the engine oil level is in the "safe" zone. 3. If the engine oil level is correct, then STOP. No further action is required. 4. If the engine oil level is incorrect, then CAREFULLY remove any excess engine oil from the engine until the engine oil level is correct. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > 09-002-08 > Jun > 08 > Engine - Oil Level Incorrect > Page 1951 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > 09-002-08 > Jun > 08 > Engine - Oil Level Incorrect Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Level Incorrect NUMBER: 09-002-08 GROUP: Engine DATE: June 20, 2008 SUBJECT: Engine Oil Level Incorrect OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves inspecting the part number on the current engine oil dipstick. If necessary, the dealer is to replace the dipstick with one that is correctly calibrated, and verify that the engine oil is at the correct level. MODELS: 2008 (ND) Dakota NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built from February 17, 2008 (MDH0217XX) and built before April 25, 2008 (MDH0425XX). SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The customer may state engine oil capacity on their 4.7L engine is greater than 6 quarts (5.7 Liters liquid). If engine is filled with the proper amount, (6 quarts) of oil, indicator (dipstick) may read up to 2 quarts low. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Place the vehicle on a level surface. 2. With the engine off, raise hood. 3. Remove the engine oil level indicator (dipstick) from the engine. 4. Read and record the part number on the WRO that is on the engine oil level indicator. 5. Is the engine oil level indicator part number 53032936AE (or higher i.e. AF, AG, etc.), then verify that the engine oil level is in the "safe zone. Install the engine oil level indicator to the engine and close hood. No further action is required. 6. If the engine oil level indicator part number is earlier than 53032936AE (i.e. AA, AB, AC, or AD), then the engine oil level indicator will require replacement and the engine oil level may require adjustment. Proceed to the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Install the correct engine oil level indicator, p/n 53032936AE, to the engine. 2. Verify that the engine oil level is in the "safe" zone. 3. If the engine oil level is correct, then STOP. No further action is required. 4. If the engine oil level is incorrect, then CAREFULLY remove any excess engine oil from the engine until the engine oil level is correct. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > 09-002-08 > Jun > 08 > Engine - Oil Level Incorrect > Page 1957 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 1962 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil with Filter ............................................................................................................................ ............................................................ 5.7L (6.0 Qt) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1965 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Type ................................................................................................................................... ............................................................... SAE 5W-20 API Certified, meeting material standard MS-6395 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1966 Engine Oil: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL WARNING: New or used engine oil can be irritating to the skin. Avoid prolonged or repeated skin contact with engine oil. Contaminants in used engine oil, caused by internal combustion, can be hazardous to your health. Thoroughly wash exposed skin with soap and water. Do not wash skin with gasoline, diesel fuel, thinner, or solvents, health problems can result. Do not pollute, dispose of used engine oil properly. Contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. When service is required, Chrysler Corporation recommends that only Mopar (R) brand parts, lubricants and chemicals be used. Mopar (R) provides the best engineered products for servicing DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles. Only lubricants bearing designations defined by the following organization should be used. - Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) - American Petroleum Institute (API) - National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) - Association des Constructeurs Europeans d' Automobiles (European Automobile Manufacturers Association) (ACEA) API SERVICE GRADE CERTIFIED Use an engine oil that is API Certified. MOPAR (R) provides engine oils, that meet or exceed this requirement. SAE VISCOSITY An SAE viscosity grade is used to specify the viscosity of engine oil. Use only engine oils with multiple viscosities such as 5W-20 or 5W-30. These are specified with a dual SAE viscosity grade which indicates the cold-to-hot temperature viscosity range. Select an engine oil that is best suited to your particular temperature range. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. ACEA Categories For countries that use the ACEA European Oil Categories for Service Fill Oils, use engine oils that meet the requirements of ACEA A1/B1, A2/B2, or A3/B3. ENERGY CONSERVING OIL An Energy Conserving type oil is recommended for gasoline engines. The designation of ENERGY CONSERVING is located on the label of an engine oil container. CONTAINER IDENTIFICATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1967 Standard engine oil identification notations have been adopted to aid in the proper selection of engine oil. The identifying notations are located on the front label of engine oil plastic bottles and the top of engine oil cans. This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Chrysler only recommend API Certified engine oils. Use Mopar (R) engine oil or equivalent. SYNTHETIC ENGINE OILS There are a number of engine oils being promoted as either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use such a product, use only those oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) and SAE viscosity standard. Follow the service schedule that describes your driving type. ENGINE OIL ADDITIVES/SUPPLEMENTS The manufacturer does not recommend the addition of any engine oil additives/supplements to the specified engine oil. Engine oil additives/supplements should not be used to enhance engine oil performance. Engine oil additives/supplements should not be used to extend engine oil change intervals. No additive is known to be safe for engine durability and can degrade emission components. Additives can contain undesirable materials that harm the long term durability of engines by: - Doubling the level of phosphorus in the engine oil. The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standard Approval Committee) GF-2 and GF-3 standards require that engine oil contain no more than 0.10% phosphorus to protect the vehicles emissions performance. Addition of engine oil additives/supplements can poison, from the added sulfur and phosphorus, catalysts and hinder efforts to guarantee emissions performance to 80,000 miles. - Altering the viscosity characteristics of the engine oil so that it no longer meets the requirements of the specified viscosity grade. - Creating potential for an undesirable additive compatibility interaction in the engine crankcase. Generally it is not desirable to mix additive packages from different suppliers in the crankcase; there have been reports of low temperature engine failures caused by additive package incompatibility with such mixtures. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1968 Engine Oil: Service and Repair ENGINE OIL SERVICE The engine oil level indicator is located at the right rear of the engine on the 4.7L engines. CRANKCASE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION CAUTION: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, pressure loss or oil foaming can result. Inspect engine oil level approximately every 800 kilometers (500 miles). Unless the engine has exhibited loss of oil pressure, run the engine for about five minutes before checking oil level. Checking engine oil level on a cold engine is not accurate. To ensure proper lubrication of an engine, the engine oil must be maintained at an acceptable level. The acceptable levels are indicated between the ADD and SAFE marks on the engine oil dipstick. 1. Position vehicle on level surface. 2. With engine OFF, allow approximately ten minutes for oil to settle to bottom of crankcase, remove engine oil dipstick. 3. Wipe dipstick clean. 4. Install dipstick and verify it is seated in the tube. 5. Remove dipstick, with handle held above the tip, take oil level reading. 6. Add oil only if level is below the ADD mark on dipstick. ENGINE OIL CHANGE Change engine oil at mileage and time intervals described in Maintenance Schedules. Run engine until achieving normal operating temperature. 1. Position the vehicle on a level surface and turn engine off. 2. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 3. Remove oil fill cap. 4. Place a suitable drain pan under crankcase drain. 5. Remove drain plug from crankcase and allow oil to drain into pan. Inspect drain plug threads for stretching or other damage. Replace drain plug if damaged. 6. Install drain plug in crankcase. 7. Lower vehicle and fill crankcase with specified type and amount of engine oil described. 8. Install oil fill cap. 9. Start engine and inspect for leaks. 10. Stop engine and inspect oil level. NOTE: Care should be exercised when disposing used engine oil after it has been drained from a vehicle engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Oil Filter: Procedures ENGINE OIL SERVICE The engine oil level indicator is located at the right rear of the engine on the 4.7L engines. CRANKCASE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION CAUTION: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, pressure loss or oil foaming can result. Inspect engine oil level approximately every 800 kilometers (500 miles). Unless the engine has exhibited loss of oil pressure, run the engine for about five minutes before checking oil level. Checking engine oil level on a cold engine is not accurate. To ensure proper lubrication of an engine, the engine oil must be maintained at an acceptable level. The acceptable levels are indicated between the ADD and SAFE marks on the engine oil dipstick. 1. Position vehicle on level surface. 2. With engine OFF, allow approximately ten minutes for oil to settle to bottom of crankcase, remove engine oil dipstick. 3. Wipe dipstick clean. 4. Install dipstick and verify it is seated in the tube. 5. Remove dipstick, with handle held above the tip, take oil level reading. 6. Add oil only if level is below the ADD mark on dipstick. ENGINE OIL CHANGE Change engine oil at mileage and time intervals described in Maintenance Schedules. Run engine until achieving normal operating temperature. 1. Position the vehicle on a level surface and turn engine off. 2. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 3. Remove oil fill cap. 4. Place a suitable drain pan under crankcase drain. 5. Remove drain plug from crankcase and allow oil to drain into pan. Inspect drain plug threads for stretching or other damage. Replace drain plug if damaged. 6. Install drain plug in crankcase. 7. Lower vehicle and fill crankcase with specified type and amount of engine oil described. 8. Install oil fill cap. 9. Start engine and inspect for leaks. 10. Stop engine and inspect oil level. NOTE: Care should be exercised when disposing used engine oil after it has been drained from a vehicle engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1973 Oil Filter: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL All engines are equipped with a high quality full-flow, disposable type oil filter. DaimlerChrysler Corporation recommends a Mopar(R) or equivalent oil filter be used. 1. Position a drain pan under the oil filter. 2. Using a suitable oil filter wrench loosen filter. 3. Rotate the oil filter counterclockwise to remove it from the cylinder block oil filter boss. 4. When filter separates from cylinder block oil filter boss, tip gasket end upward to minimize oil spill. Remove filter from vehicle. NOTE: Make sure filter gasket was removed with filter. 5. With a wiping cloth, clean the gasket sealing surface of oil and grime. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Lightly lubricate oil filter gasket (2) with engine oil. 2. Thread filter (3) onto adapter nipple. When gasket makes contact with sealing surface, hand tighten filter one full turn, do not over tighten. 3. Add oil, verify crankcase oil level and start engine. Inspect for oil leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications OIL PAN TORQUE AND SEQUENCE Position the oil pan and install the mounting bolts. Tighten the mounting bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) in the sequence shown. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pan - Removal Oil Pan: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pan - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Install engine support fixture (1) special tool # 8534. Do not raise engine at this time. 3. Remove both left and right side engine mount through bolts. 4. Remove the structural dust cover. 5. Drain engine oil. CAUTION: Only raise the engine enough to provide clearance for oil pan removal. Check for proper clearance at fan shroud to fan and cowl to intake manifold. 6. Raise engine using special tool (1) # 8534 to provide clearance to remove oil pan. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pan - Removal > Page 1979 NOTE: On 4WD vehicles, the front axle must be lowered, to provide clearance for oil pan removal. It is not necessary to remove the front axle from the vehicle, or remove the axle shafts. 7. For 4WD Vehicles Remove the pinion bracket. 8. For 4WD Vehicles Disconnect the front driveshaft at the front axle. 9. For 4WD Vehicles Remove the front axle mounting bolts. 10. For 4WD Vehicles Lower axle using suitable jack enough to provide clearance to remove oil pan. NOTE: Do not pry on oil pan or oil pan gasket. Gasket is integral to engine windage tray and does not come out with oil pan. 11. Remove the oil pan mounting bolts and oil pan. 12. Unbolt oil pump pickup tube and remove tube. 13. Inspect the integral windage tray and gasket and replace as needed. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pan - Removal > Page 1980 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pan - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean the oil pan gasket mating surface of the bedplate and oil pan. 2. Position the oil pan gasket and pickup tube with new o-ring. Install the mounting bolt and nuts. Tighten bolt and nuts to 28 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 3. Position the oil pan and install the mounting bolts. Tighten the mounting bolts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.) in the sequence shown. 4. Lower the engine into mounts using special tool (1) # 8534. 5. Install both the left and right side engine mount through bolts. Tighten the bolts to 68 Nm (50 ft. lbs.). 6. Remove special tool # 8534. 7. Install structural dust cover. NOTE: On 4WD vehicles, the front axle must be lowered, to provide clearance for oil pan removal. It is not necessary to remove the front axle from the vehicle, or remove the axle shafts. 8. For 4WD Vehicles Raise axle using suitable jack. 9. For 4WD Vehicles Install the front axle mounting bolts. 10. For 4WD Vehicles Install the pinion bracket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pan - Removal > Page 1981 11. For 4WD Vehicles Install the front driveshaft to the front axle. 12. Fill engine oil. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 14. Start engine and check for leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Component ID: 307 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1985 Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1986 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1987 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Component ID: 307 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1988 Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1989 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The oil pressure switch is a pressure sensitive switch that is activated by the engine's oil pressure (in the main oil gallery). The switch is a two terminal device (one terminal is provided to the wiring harness and the other terminal is the switch's metal housing that screws into the engine block). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 1992 Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The oil pressure switch is normally "Closed." The switch changes from a "Closed" circuit to an "Open" circuit, on increasing pressure of 7 psig. The oil pressure switch changes from an "Open" circuit to a "Closed" circuit, on decreasing pressure, between 2 psig and 4 psig. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install oil pressure sender. 2. Connect oil pressure sender wire. 3. Install front splash shield. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation > Page 1995 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Raise vehicle on hoist. 3. Remove front splash shield. 4. Disconnect oil pressure sender wire (4). 5. Remove the pressure sender (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A low oil pressure indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The low oil pressure indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Oil in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the icon to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The low oil pressure indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2000 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The low oil pressure indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine oil pressure reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The low oil pressure indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the low oil pressure indicator for the following reasons: - Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine oil pressure message from the PCM indicating the pressure is about 6.9 kPa (1 psi) or lower, the low oil pressure indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the pressure is above about 6.9 kPa (1 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The cluster will only turn the indicator ON in response to low engine oil pressure if the engine speed is greater than zero. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low oil pressure indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the low oil pressure indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier - Testing and Inspection See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection. For proper diagnosis of the engine oil pressure sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to low oil pressure indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications OIL PRESSURE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications INTAKE MANIFOLD TORQUE AND SEQUENCE Install the ignition coils (1,2) and manifold retaining bolts and torque from the center bolts, moving front to back in a crisscross pattern to 12 Nm (106 in. lbs.). THROTTLE BODY TORQUE AND SEQUENCE CAUTION: The throttle body mounting bolts MUST be torqued to specifications. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN MOUNTING BOLTS. Over tightening can cause damage to the throttle body, throttle plate, gaskets, bolts and/or the intake manifold. Proper torque of the mounting bolts is critical to normal operation. Obtain a torque wrench. Tighten mounting bolts (as shown) in a mandatory torque crisscross-cross pattern sequence to 7.5 Nm (65 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2008 Intake Manifold: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The intake manifold is made of a composite material and features long runners which maximizes low end torque. The intake manifold uses single plane sealing which consist of eight individual press in place port gaskets to prevent leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2009 Intake Manifold: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - INTAKE MANIFOLD LEAKAGE An intake manifold air leak is characterized by lower than normal manifold vacuum. Also, one or more cylinders may not be functioning. WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN THE ENGINE IS OPERATING. DO NOT STAND IN A DIRECT LINE WITH THE FAN. DO NOT PUT YOUR HANDS NEAR THE PULLEYS, BELTS OR THE FAN. DO NOT WEAR LOOSE CLOTHING. 1. Start the engine. 2. Spray a small stream of water at the suspected leak area. 3. If a change in RPM is observed the area of the suspected leak has been found. 4. Repair as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Intake Manifold: Procedures Intake Manifold - Cleaning CLEANING NOTE: There is NO approved repair procedure for the intake manifold. If severe damage is found during inspection, the intake manifold must be replaced. Before installing the intake manifold thoroughly clean the mating surfaces. Use a suitable cleaning solvent, then air dry. Intake Manifold - Inspection INSPECTION 1. Inspect the intake sealing surface for cracks, nicks and distortion. 2. Inspect the intake manifold vacuum hose fittings for looseness or blockage. 3. Inspect the manifold to throttle body mating surface for cracks, nicks and distortion. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2012 Intake Manifold: Removal and Replacement Intake Manifold - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove resonator assembly and air inlet hose. 2. Bleed fuel system See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 4. Remove the wiper module See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Wiper Module - Removal. 5. Disconnect electrical connectors for the following components: - Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) (2) - Coolant Temperature (CTS) Sensor 6. remove spark plug wires (3). 7. Disconnect generator electrical connections. 8. Disconnect and remove ignition coils (1,2) and manifold retaining bolts. 9. Remove top oil dipstick tube retaining bolt and ground strap. 10. Remove fuel rail See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Rail/Service and Repair/Fuel Rail - Removal. 11. Remove intake manifold. Intake Manifold - Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2013 1. Install intake manifold gaskets. 2. Position intake manifold. 3. Install the ignition coils (1,2) and manifold retaining bolts and torque from the center bolts, moving front to back in a crisscross pattern to 12 Nm (106 in. lbs.). 4. Install throttle body assembly (3), if removed. 5. Install fuel rail See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Rail/Service and Repair/Fuel Rail - Installation. 6. Connect electrical connectors for the following components: - Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor - Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) (2) - Coolant Temperature (CTS) Sensor - Ignition coil - Fuel injectors 7. Install top oil dipstick tube retaining bolt and ground strap. 8. Install spark plug wires (3). 9. Connect generator electrical connections. 10. Install the wiper module See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Wiper Module - Installation. 11. Install resonator assembly and air inlet hose. 12. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A low oil pressure indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The low oil pressure indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Oil in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the icon to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The low oil pressure indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Lamps and Indicators - Engine > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2019 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The low oil pressure indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine oil pressure reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The low oil pressure indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the low oil pressure indicator for the following reasons: - Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine oil pressure message from the PCM indicating the pressure is about 6.9 kPa (1 psi) or lower, the low oil pressure indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the pressure is above about 6.9 kPa (1 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The cluster will only turn the indicator ON in response to low engine oil pressure if the engine speed is greater than zero. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low oil pressure indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the low oil pressure indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier - Testing and Inspection See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection. For proper diagnosis of the engine oil pressure sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to low oil pressure indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Testing and Inspection REAR SEAL AREA LEAKS Since it is sometimes difficult to determine the source of an oil leak in the rear seal area of the engine, a more involved inspection is necessary. The following steps should be followed to help pinpoint the source of the leak. If the leakage occurs at the crankshaft rear oil seal area: 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Raise the vehicle. 3. Remove torque converter or clutch housing cover and inspect rear of block for evidence of oil. Use a black light to check for the oil leak: a. Circular spray pattern generally indicates seal leakage or crankshaft damage. b. Where leakage tends to run straight down, possible causes are a porous block, oil galley pipe plugs, oil filter runoff, and main bearing cap to cylinder block mating surfaces. See Engine, for proper repair procedures of these items. 4. If no leaks are detected, pressurized the crankcase as outlined in, Inspection (Engine oil Leaks in general)See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Engine Oil Leak Inspection CAUTION: Do not exceed 20.6 kPa (3 psi). 5. If the leak is not detected, very slowly turn the crankshaft and watch for leakage. If a leak is detected between the crankshaft and seal while slowly turning the crankshaft, it is possible the crankshaft seal surface is damaged. The seal area on the crankshaft could have minor nicks or scratches that can be polished out with emery cloth. CAUTION: Use extreme caution when crankshaft polishing is necessary to remove minor nicks or scratches. The crankshaft seal flange is specially machined to complement the function of the rear oil seal. 6. For bubbles that remain steady with shaft rotation, no further inspection can be done until disassembled. Refer to Engine - Testing and Inspection., under the Oil Leak row, for components inspections on possible causes and corrections. 7. After the oil leak root cause and appropriate corrective action have been identified, See: Service and Repair/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: This procedure can be performed in vehicle. 1. If being performed in vehicle, remove the transmission. 2. Remove the flexplate See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and Repair/Removal. NOTE: The crankshaft oil seal CAN NOT be reused after removal. NOTE: The crankshaft rear oil seal remover 8506 must be installed deeply into the seal. Continue to tighten the removal tool into the seal until the tool can not be turned farther. Failure to install tool correctly the first time will cause tool to pull free of seal without removing seal from engine. 3. Using Seal Remover 8506 (2), remove the crankshaft rear oil seal (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2026 Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate the crankshaft flange with engine oil. 2. Position the magnetic seal guide 8349-2 onto the crankshaft rear face. Then position the crankshaft rear oil seal (1) onto the guide (2). 3. Using Crankshaft Rear Oil Seal Installer 8349 (2) and Driver Handle C-4171 (3), with a hammer, tap the seal (1) into place. Continue to tap on the driver handle until the seal installer seats against the cylinder block crankshaft bore. 4. Install the flexplate. 5. Install the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove accessory drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal. 3. Remove A/C compressor mounting fasteners and set compressor aside. 4. Drain cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 5. Remove upper radiator hose. 6. Disconnect electrical connector for fan mounted inside radiator shroud. 7. Remove radiator shroud attaching fasteners. NOTE: Transmission cooler line snaps into shroud lower right hand corner. 8. Remove radiator cooling fan and shroud See: Cooling System/Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Radiator Fan Removal. 9. Remove crankshaft damper bolt. 10. Remove damper using Crankshaft Insert 8513 (1) and 1026 Three Jaw Puller (2). 11. Using Crankshaft Front Seal Remover 8511 (1), remove crankshaft front seal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2031 Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: To prevent severe damage to the Crankshaft, Damper or Special Tool 8512, thoroughly clean the damper bore and the crankshaft nose before installing Damper. 1. Using Special Tool 8348 and 8512 (2,3), install crankshaft front seal. 2. Install vibration damper See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Vibration Damper Installation. 3. Install radiator cooling fan and shroud See: Cooling System/Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Radiator Fan Installation. 4. Install upper radiator hose. 5. Install A/C compressor and tighten fasteners to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 6. Install accessory drive belt refer See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation. 7. Refill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 8. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal > Component Information > Description and Operation Valve Guide Seal: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The valve stem seals are made of rubber and incorporate an integral steel valve spring seat. The integral garter spring maintains consistent lubrication control to the valve stems. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Component ID: 307 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2039 Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2040 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2041 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Component ID: 307 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2042 Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 2043 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The oil pressure switch is a pressure sensitive switch that is activated by the engine's oil pressure (in the main oil gallery). The switch is a two terminal device (one terminal is provided to the wiring harness and the other terminal is the switch's metal housing that screws into the engine block). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2046 Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The oil pressure switch is normally "Closed." The switch changes from a "Closed" circuit to an "Open" circuit, on increasing pressure of 7 psig. The oil pressure switch changes from an "Open" circuit to a "Closed" circuit, on decreasing pressure, between 2 psig and 4 psig. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install oil pressure sender. 2. Connect oil pressure sender wire. 3. Install front splash shield. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation > Page 2049 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Raise vehicle on hoist. 3. Remove front splash shield. 4. Disconnect oil pressure sender wire (4). 5. Remove the pressure sender (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Idler Shaft - Removal Balance Shaft: Service and Repair Idler Shaft - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the primary and secondary timing chains and sprockets See: Timing Chain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Timing Chain & Sprockets - Removal. NOTE: To remove the idler shaft, it is necessary to tap threads into the shaft, to install the removal tool. 2. Using a 12 mm X 1.75 tap, cut threads in the idler shaft center bore. 3. Cover the radiator core with a suitable cover. CAUTION: Use care when removing the idler shaft, Do not strike the radiator cooling fins with the slide hammer. 4. Using Special Tool 8517 Slide Hammer, remove the idler shaft. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Idler Shaft - Removal > Page 2055 Balance Shaft: Service and Repair Idler Shaft - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Thoroughly clean the idler shaft bore. 2. Position the idler shaft in the bore. NOTE: The two lubrication holes in the idler shaft do not require any special alignment. NOTE: Before using the retaining bolt to install the idler shaft, coat the threads and the pilot on the idler shaft, with clean engine oil. 3. Using the primary idler sprocket retaining bolt and washer, carefully draw the idler shaft into the bore until fully seated. 4. Coat the idler shaft with clean engine oil. 5. Install the timing chains and sprockets See: Timing Chain/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Timing Chain & Sprockets - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications CAMSHAFT GEAR/SPROCKET CAUTION: Remove excess oil from camshaft sprocket bolt. Failure to do so can cause bolt over-torque resulting in bolt failure. 1. Remove excess oil from bolt, then install the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt and hand tighten. 2. Remove Locking Wedge Tool 9867 timing chain wedge (4). 3. Using Spanner Wrench 6958 (4) with adapter pins 8346, tighten the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt (2) to 122 Nm (90 ft. lbs.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Timing Chain: Procedures INSPECTION Inspect the following components: - Sprockets for excessive tooth wear. Some tooth markings are normal and not a cause for sprocket replacement. - Idler sprocket assembly bushing and shaft for excessive wear. - Idler sprocket assembly spline joint. The joint should be tight with no backlash or axial movement. - Chain guides and tensioner arms. Replace these parts if grooving in plastic face is more than 1 mm (0.039 in.) deep. If plastic face is severely grooved or melted, the tensioner lube jet may be clogged. The tensioner should be replaced. - Secondary chain tensioner piston and ratcheting device. Inspect for evidence of heavy contact between tensioner piston and tensioner arm. If this condition exist the tensioner and tensioner arm should be replaced. - Primary chain tensioner plastic faces. Replace as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2063 Timing Chain: Removal and Replacement Timing Chain & Sprockets - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Drain cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 3. Remove right and left cylinder head covers See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover - Removal. 4. Remove radiator fan shroud. 5. Rotate engine until timing mark (2) on crankshaft damper aligns with TDC mark on timing chain cover (2) (#1 cylinder exhaust stroke) and the camshaft sprocket "V8" marks are at the 12 o'clock position (1,2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2064 6. Remove power steering pump See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Power Steering Pump - Removal. 7. Remove access plugs (1,2) from left and right cylinder heads for access to chain guide fasteners. 8. Remove the oil fill housing to gain access to the right side tensioner arm fastener. 9. Remove crankshaft damper See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Vibration Damper Removal and timing chain cover See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair/Timing Cover - Removal. 10. Collapse and pin primary chain tensioner (1). CAUTION: Plate behind left secondary chain tensioner could fall into oil pan. Therefore, cover pan opening. 11. Remove secondary chain tensioners. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2065 12. Remove camshaft position sensor (1) from right cylinder head. CAUTION: Care should be taken not to damage camshaft target wheel. Do not hold target wheel while loosening or tightening camshaft sprocket. Do not place the target wheel near a magnetic source of any kind. A damaged or magnetized target wheel could cause a vehicle no Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2066 start condition. CAUTION: Do not forcefully rotate the camshafts or crankshaft independently of each other. Damaging intake valve to piston contact will occur. Ensure negative battery cable is disconnected to guard against accidental starter engagement. 13. Remove left and right camshaft sprocket bolts. 14. While holding the left camshaft steel tube with adjustable pliers (1), remove the left camshaft sprocket. Slowly rotate the camshaft approximately 15 degrees clockwise to a neutral position. 15. While holding the right camshaft steel tube with adjustable pliers (1), remove the right camshaft sprocket. Slowly rotate the camshaft approximately 45 degrees counterclockwise to a neutral position. 16. Remove idler sprocket assembly bolt. 17. Slide the idler sprocket assembly and crank sprocket forward simultaneously to remove the primary and secondary chains. 18. Remove both pivoting tensioner arms and chain guides. 19. Remove chain tensioner. Timing Chain & Sprockets - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Using a vise, lightly compress the secondary chain tensioner piston until the piston step is flush with the tensioner body. Using a pin or suitable tool, release ratchet pawl by pulling pawl back against spring force through access hole on side of tensioner. While continuing to hold pawl back, Push ratchet device to approximately 2 mm from the tensioner body. Install Special Tool 8514 lock pin (3) into hole on front of tensioner (2). Slowly open vise to transfer piston spring force to lock pin. 2. Position primary chain tensioner over oil pump and insert bolts into lower two holes on tensioner bracket. Tighten bolts to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). 3. Install right side chain tensioner arm. Apply Mopar(R) Lock N, Seal to torx(R) bolt, tighten bolt to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). NOTE: The silver bolts retain the guides to the cylinder heads and the black bolts retain the guides to the engine block. 4. Install the left side chain guide. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Overtightening the tensioner arm torx(R) bolt can cause severe damage to the cylinder head. Tighten torx(R) bolt to specified torque only. 5. Install left side chain tensioner arm. Apply Mopar(R) Lock N, Seal to torx(R) bolt, tighten bolt to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). 6. Install the right side chain guide. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2067 7. Install both secondary chains onto the idler sprocket. Align two plated links on the secondary chains to be visible through the two lower openings on the idler sprocket (4 o'clock and 8 o'clock). Once the secondary timing chains are installed, position special tool 8429 (6) to hold chains in place for installation. 8. Align primary chain double plated links with the timing mark at 12 o'clock (1) on the idler sprocket. Align the primary chain single plated link with the timing mark at 6 o'clock on the crankshaft sprocket (3). 9. Lubricate idler shaft and bushings with clean engine oil. 10. Install all chains, crankshaft sprocket, and idler sprocket as an assembly. After guiding both secondary chains through the block and cylinder head openings, affix chains with a elastic strap or the equivalent, This will maintain tension on chains to aid in installation. NOTE: It will be necessary to slightly rotate camshafts for sprocket installation. 11. Align left camshaft sprocket "L" dot to plated link on chain. 12. Align right camshaft sprocket "R" dot to plated link on chain. CAUTION: Remove excess oil from the camshaft sprocket bolt. Failure to do so can result in over-torque of bolt resulting in bolt failure. 13. Remove Special Tool 8429, then attach both sprockets to camshafts. Remove excess oil from bolts, then Install sprocket bolts, but do not tighten at this time. 14. Verify that all plated links are aligned with the marks on all sprockets and the "V8" marks on camshaft sprockets are at the 12 o'clock position. CAUTION: Ensure the plate between the left secondary chain tensioner and block is correctly installed. 15. Install both secondary chain tensioners. Tighten bolts to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). NOTE: Left and right secondary chain tensioners are not common. 16. Before installing idler sprocket bolt, lubricate washer with oil, and tighten idler sprocket assembly retaining bolt to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). 17. Remove all locking pins from tensioners. CAUTION: After pulling locking pins out of each tensioner, DO NOT manually extend the tensioner(s) ratchet. Doing so will over tension the chains, resulting in noise and/or high timing chain loads. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2068 18. Using Special Tool 6958, Spanner with Adaptor Pins 8346, tighten left (3) and right (4), camshaft sprocket bolts to 122 Nm (90 ft. lbs.). 19. Rotate engine two full revolutions. Verify timing marks are at the follow locations: - primary chain idler sprocket dot is at 12 o'clock - primary chain crankshaft sprocket dot is at 6 o'clock - secondary chain camshaft sprockets "V8" marks are at 12 o'clock 20. Lubricate all three chains with engine oil. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2069 21. After installing all chains, it is recommended that the idler gear (1) end play be checked. The end play must be within 0.10-0.25 mm (0.004-0.010 in.). If not within specification, the idler gear must be replaced. 22. Install timing chain cover See: Timing Cover/Service and Repair/Timing Cover - Installation and crankshaft damper See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Vibration Damper Installation. 23. Install cylinder head covers See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cylinder Head Cover Installation. NOTE: Before installing threaded plug in right cylinder head, the plug must be coated with sealant to prevent leaks. 24. Coat the large threaded access plug with Mopar(R) Thread Sealant with Teflon , then install into the right cylinder head and tighten to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). 25. Install the oil fill housing. 26. Install access plug in left cylinder head. 27. Install power steering pump See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Power Steering Pump - Installation. 28. Install radiator fan shroud. 29. Fill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 30. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER TORQUE Timing chain tensioner ........................................................................................................................ ................................................... 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications TIMING CHAIN COVER TORQUE AND SEQUENCE Timing chain cover in sequence as shown ............................................................................................................................................... 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.). . Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Cover - Removal Timing Cover: Service and Repair Timing Cover - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Drain cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect both heater hoses at timing cover. 4. Disconnect lower radiator hose at engine. 5. Remove crankshaft damper See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Vibration Damper Removal. 6. Remove accessory drive belt tensioner assembly (1). 7. Remove the generator and A/C compressor. CAUTION: The 4.7L engine uses an RTV sealer instead of a gasket to seal the front cover to the engine block, from the factory. For service, Mopar(R) Grey Engine RTV sealant must be substituted. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the water pump for timing cover removal. 8. Remove the bolts holding the timing cover to engine block. 9. Remove cover. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Timing Cover - Removal > Page 2078 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Timing Cover - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not use oil based liquids to clean timing cover or block surfaces. Use only rubbing alcohol, along with plastic or wooden scrapers. Use no wire brushes or abrasive wheels or metal scrapers, or damage to surfaces could result. 1. Clean timing chain cover and block surface using rubbing alcohol. CAUTION: The 4.7L can use a special RTV sealer instead of a carrier gasket to seal the timing cover to the engine block, from the factory. For service repairs, Mopar(R) Grey Engine RTV must be used as a substitute, if RTV is present. If the front cover being used has no provisions for the water passage o-rings, then Mopar(R) Grey Engine RTV must be applied around the water passages. 2. Inspect the water passage o-rings, if equipped for any damage, and replace as necessary. 3. Apply Mopar(R) Grey Engine RTV sealer to the front cover following the path above, using a 3 to 4mm thick bead. 4. Install cover. Tighten flange head fasteners in sequence as shown in to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the A/C compressor and generator. 6. Install crankshaft damper See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair/Vibration Damper Installation. 7. Install accessory drive belt tensioner assembly. Tighten fastener to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 8. Install lower radiator hose. 9. Install both heater hoses. 10. Fill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 11. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE 58 psi +/- 2 psi Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Delivery Check *CHECKING THE FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM For a complete wiring diagram Consult Diagrams/Electrical. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 2085 Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP OPERATION Ignition on, engine not running. With a scan tool, actuate the Fuel System test. NOTE: It may be necessary to use a mechanics stethoscope in the next step. Listen for fuel pump operation at the fuel tank. Does the Fuel Pump operate? Yes - Go To 2 No - Go To 5 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 2. FUEL PRESSURE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install a fuel pressure gauge at the engine. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Choose a conclusion that best matches your fuel pressure reading. Below Specification - Go To 3 Within Specification - Test Complete. Above Specification - Replace the fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 3. RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure even with the engine off. Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Turn the ignition off. Raise vehicle on hoist, and disconnect the fuel pressure line at the fuel pump module. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631(3/8") fuel line adapter and the fuel pressure gauge between the fuel supply line and the fuel pump module. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Is the fuel pressure within specification now? Yes Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 2086 - Repair/replace fuel supply line as necessary. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 4 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 4. CHECKING FUEL INLET STRAINER WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Module and inspect the Fuel Inlet Strainer. Is the Fuel Inlet Strainer plugged? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Inlet Strainer. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Replace the Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test 5. (N1) FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Relay from the IPM. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit from the relay connector to the fuel pump module connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 2087 - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Repair the open in the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 2088 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Leak Down Test *FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN For a complete wiring diagram Consult Diagrams/Electrical. Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP MODULE NOTE: Before continuing visually and physically inspect the fuel delivery system for external leaks or damage. Repair/replace as necessary. WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631 (3/8") fuel line adapter. Install the fuel pressure gauge. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Using special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, pinch the rubber fuel line between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 kPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 2 2. FUEL INJECTOR(S) WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Remove special tool #C4390. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Move special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, from between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine to between the fuel pressure gauge and fuel pump module. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 kPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 2089 - Replace the leaking fuel injectors. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Test Complete. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by manufacturer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Loosen clamp and disconnect air duct at air cleaner cover. 2. Pry over 4 spring clips (5) from housing cover (3) (spring clips retain cover to housing). 3. Release housing cover (3) from locating tabs on housing and remove cover. 4. Remove air cleaner element (filter) from housing. 5. Clean inside of housing before replacing element. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2098 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install filter element into housing. 2. Position housing cover into housing locating tabs. 3. Pry up 4 spring clips (6) and lock cover to housing. 4. Install air duct to air cleaner cover and tighten hose clamp to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.) torque. 5. If any other hose clamps were removed from air intake system, tighten them to 3.4 Nm (30 in. lbs.) torque. 6. If any bolts were removed from air resonator housing or air intake tubing, tighten them to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Firing Order: Electrical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 4.7L ENGINE DESCRIPTION Fig. 1 The 4.7 liter (287 CID) eight-cylinder engine is an 90° single overhead camshaft engine. The cast iron cylinder block is made up of two different components; the first component is the cylinder bore and upper block, the second component is the bedplate that comprises the lower portion of the cylinder block and houses the lower half of the crankshaft main bearings. The cylinders are numbered from front to rear with the left bank being numbered 1,3,5 and 7, and the right bank being numbered 2,4,6 and 8. The firing order is 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2. The engine serial number is located at the Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2107 right front side of the engine block (Fig. 1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2108 Firing Order: Mechanical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications IGNITION TIMING Ignition timing is not adjustable on any engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUGS 3.7L TORQUE ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 27 Nm (20 Ft. Lbs) 4.7L New plugs ............................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 27 +/- 3 Nm (20 Ft. Lbs.) Used plugs ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 22 +/- 3 Nm (16 Ft. Lbs) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2115 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUGS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. Remove necessary air filter tubing and air intake components at top of engine and at throttle body. 2. To remove the upper row of plugs (5), each individual ignition coil (2) must first be removed. See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil - Removal Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head. 3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign material from entering combustion chamber. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between UPPER row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. 4. Inspect spark plug condition. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 2118 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Installation INSTALLATION - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Never use a motorized wire wheel brush to clean spark plugs. Metallic deposits will remain on spark plug insulator and will cause plug misfire. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. To aid in coil installation, apply silicone based grease such as Mopar(R) Dielectric Grease # J8126688 into spark plug end of rubber boots (4) and (7). Also apply this grease to the tops of spark plugs (5) and (6). 2. Check and adjust spark plug gap with a gap gauging tool (1). Refer to the Spark Plug Specification for plug gap. Two different gaps are used. See: Specifications 3. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading. Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between upper row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 2119 Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Certain engines use torque sensitive spark plugs. It is a good practice to always tighten spark plugs to a specific torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the spark plug gap, or a cracked porcelain insulator. See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Specifications 4. Install ignition coil(s). See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil - Installation 5. Install necessary air filter tubing and air intake components to top of engine and to throttle body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications MAX VARIATION Max variation between cylinders ......................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 25% Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2123 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE The results of a cylinder compression pressure test can be utilized to diagnose several engine malfunctions. Ensure the battery is completely charged and the engine starter motor is in good operating condition. Otherwise the indicated compression pressures may not be valid for diagnosis purposes. 1. Clean the spark plug recesses with compressed air. 2. Remove the spark plugs. 3. Disable the fuel system. 4. Remove the ASD relay. 5. Insert a compression pressure gauge and rotate the engine with the engine starter motor for three revolutions. 6. Record the compression pressure on the 3rd revolution. Continue the test for the remaining cylinders. 7. See: Specifications/Engine Specifications. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications WATER PUMP TORQUE AND SEQUENCE Using a new gasket, position water pump (1) and install mounting bolts as shown. Tighten water pump mounting bolts to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.) torque. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Water Pump: Description and Operation Description Water Pump WATER PUMP A centrifugal water pump (1) circulates coolant through the water jackets, passages, intake manifold, radiator core, cooling system hoses and heater core. The pump is driven from the engine crankshaft by a single serpentine drive belt that drives the water pump pulley (1). The water pump impeller is pressed onto the rear of a shaft that rotates in bearings pressed into the housing. The housing has two small holes to allow seepage to escape. The water pump seals are lubricated by the antifreeze in the coolant mixture. No additional lubrication is necessary. Both heater hoses are connected to fittings on the timing chain front cover. The water pump is also mounted directly to the timing chain cover and is equipped with a non serviceable integral pulley. Water Pump Bypass - 4.7L WATER PUMP BYPASS - 4.7L Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2129 The 4.7L engine uses an internal water/coolant bypass system. The design uses galleries in the timing chain cover to circulate coolant during engine warm-up preventing the coolant from flowing through the radiator. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2130 Water Pump: Description and Operation Operation Water Pump WATER PUMP A centrifugal water pump circulates coolant through the water jackets, passages, intake manifold, radiator core, cooling system hoses and heater core, this coolant absorbs the heat generated when the engine is running. The pump is driven by the engine crankshaft via a drive belt. Water Pump Bypass - 4.7L Engine WATER PUMP BYPASS - 4.7L ENGINE When the thermostat is in the closed position the bypass gallery is not obstructed allowing 100% flow. When the thermostat is in the open position the pill partially covers the bypass hole, reducing the amount of bypass flow. This design allows the coolant to reach operating temperature quickly when cold, while adding extra cooling during normal temperature operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Water Pump: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Clean the gasket mating surface. Use caution not to damage the gasket sealing surface. Inspection INSPECTION Inspect the water pump assembly for cracks in the housing, water leaks from shaft seal, worn bearing or impeller rubbing either the pump body or timing chain case/cover. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2133 Water Pump: Removal and Replacement Water Pump - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE The water pump on 3.7L/4.7L engines is bolted directly to the engine timing chain case cover. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Drain cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 3. Remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from water pump See: Cooling System/Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Radiator Fan - Removal. Do not attempt to remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from vehicle at this time. 4. If water pump is being replaced, do not unbolt fan blade assembly from thermal viscous fan drive. 5. Remove two fan shroud-to-radiator screws. 6. Remove fan shroud and fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly from vehicle. 7. After removing fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly, do not place thermal viscous fan drive in horizontal position. If stored horizontally, silicone fluid in viscous fan drive could drain into its bearing assembly and contaminate lubricant. 8. Remove accessory drive belt from the water pump pulley (2) See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal. 9. Remove upper radiator hose clamp and remove upper hose at water pump. 10. Remove seven water pump mounting bolts and one stud bolt. CAUTION: Do not pry water pump at timing chain case/cover. The machined surfaces may be damaged resulting in leaks. 11. Remove water pump and gasket. Discard gasket. Water Pump - Installation 3.7/4.7L ENGINE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2134 1. Clean gasket mating surfaces. 2. Using a new gasket, position water pump (1) and install mounting bolts as shown. Tighten water pump mounting bolts to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.) torque. 3. Spin water pump to be sure that pump impeller does not rub against timing chain case/cover. 4. Connect radiator upper hose to water pump. 5. Install accessory drive belt See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation. 6. Position fan shroud and fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly. 7. Install two fan shroud-to-radiator screws. 8. Be sure of at least 25 mm (1.0 inches) between tips of fan blades and fan shroud. 9. Install fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly to water pump shaft See: Cooling System/Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Radiator Fan - Installation. 10. Fill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 11. Connect negative battery cable. 12. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 2140 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity Engine Coolant .................................................................................................................................... ................................... 13.3 Quarts ( 12.5 Liters ) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 2143 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Coolant Type Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) P/N 5022764AB or equivalent. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coolant - Description Coolant: Description and Operation Coolant - Description HOAT COOLANT WARNING: Antifreeze is an ethylene-glycol base coolant and is harmful if swallowed or inhaled. If swallowed, drink two glasses of water and induce vomiting. If inhaled, move to fresh air area. Seek medical attention immediately. Do not store in open or unmarked containers. Wash skin and clothing thoroughly after coming in contact with ethylene-glycol. Keep out of reach of children. Dispose of glycol based coolant properly, contact your dealer or government agency for location of collection center in your area. Do not open a cooling system when the engine is at operating temperature or hot under pressure, personal injury can result. Avoid radiator cooling fan when engine compartment related service is performed, personal injury can result. CAUTION: Use of Propylene-Glycol based coolants is not recommended, as they provide less freeze protection and less corrosion protection. The cooling system is designed around the coolant. The coolant must accept heat from engine metal, in the cylinder head area near the exhaust valves and engine block. Then coolant carries the heat to the radiator where the tube/fin radiator can transfer the heat to the air. The use of aluminum cylinder blocks, cylinder heads, and water pumps requires special corrosion protection. Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769), or the equivalent ethylene-glycol base coolant with organic corrosion inhibitors (called HOAT, for Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) is recommended. This coolant offers the best engine cooling without corrosion when mixed with 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% distilled water to obtain a freeze point of -37°C (-35°F). If it loses color or becomes contaminated, drain, flush, and replace with fresh properly mixed coolant solution. CAUTION: Mopar(R) Antifreeze/Coolant, 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula (MS-9769) may not be mixed with any other type of antifreeze. Mixing of coolants other than specified (non-HOAT or other HOAT) may result in engine damage that may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty, and decreased corrosion protection. COOLANT PERFORMANCE The required ethylene-glycol and water mixture depends upon climate and vehicle operating conditions. The coolant performance of various mixtures follows: Pure Water- Water can absorb more heat than a mixture of water and ethylene-glycol. This is for purpose of heat transfer only. Water also freezes at a higher temperature and allows corrosion. 100 percent Ethylene-Glycol - The corrosion inhibiting additives in ethylene-glycol need the presence of water to dissolve. Without water, additives form deposits in system. These act as insulation causing temperature to rise to as high as 149°C (300°F). This temperature is hot enough to melt plastic. The increased temperature can result in severe engine damage. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at -22°C (-8°F). 50/50 Ethylene-Glycol and Water - Is the recommended mixture, it provides protection against freezing to -37°C (-34°F). The antifreeze concentration must always be a minimum of 44 percent, year-round in all climates. If percentage is lower, engine parts may be eroded by cavitation. Maximum protection against freezing is provided with a 68 percent antifreeze concentration, which prevents freezing down to -67.7°C (-90°F). A higher percentage will freeze at a warmer temperature. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the engine to overheat because specific heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water. CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be measured with normal field equipment and can cause problems associated with 100 percent ethylene-glycol. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Coolant - Description > Page 2146 Coolant: Description and Operation Coolant - Operation OPERATION Coolant flows through the engine block, cylinder head, absorbing the heat from the engine, then flows to the radiator where the cooling fins in the radiator transfers the heat from the coolant to the atmosphere. During cold weather the ethylene-glycol or propylene-glycol coolant prevents water present in the cooling system from freezing within temperatures indicated by mixture ratio of coolant to water. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2147 Coolant: Testing and Inspection COOLANT CONCENTRATION TESTING Coolant concentration should be checked when any additional coolant was added to system or after a coolant drain, flush and refill. The coolant mixture offers optimum engine cooling and protection against corrosion when mixed to a freeze point of -37°C (-34°F) to -46°C (-50°F). The use of a hydrometer or Tool 8266, refractometer can be used to test coolant concentration. A hydrometer will test the amount of glycol in a mixture by measuring the specific gravity of the mixture. The higher the concentration of ethylene glycol, the larger the number of balls that will float, and higher the freeze protection (up to a maximum of 60% by volume glycol). A Refractometer Tool 8286 will test the amount of glycol in a coolant mixture by measuring the amount a beam of light bends as it passes through the fluid. Some coolant manufactures use other types of glycols into their coolant formulations. Propylene glycol is the most common new coolant. However, propylene glycol based coolants do not provide the same freezing protection and corrosion protection and are not recommended. CAUTION: Do not mix types of coolant - corrosion protection will be severely reduced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING 1. Partially drain cooling system See: Service and Repair. 2. Loosen both bypass hose clamps and position to center of hose. Remove hose from vehicle. WITH AIR CONDITIONING If equipped with A/C, the generator and A/C compressor along with their common mounting bracket must be partially removed. Removing generator or A/C compressor from their mounting bracket is not necessary. Also, discharging A/C system is not necessary. Do not remove any refrigerant lines from A/C compressor. WARNING: THE A/C SYSTEM IS UNDER PRESSURE EVEN WITH ENGINE OFF. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Warning 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Partially drain cooling system See: Service and Repair. 3. Remove upper radiator hose clamp and hose at radiator. 4. Unplug wiring harness from A/C compressor. 5. Remove air cleaner assembly. 6. Remove accessory drive belt See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal. 7. Remove bracket-to-intake manifold bolts. 8. The drive belt idler pulley must be removed to gain access to one of A/C compressor/generator bracket mounting bolts (3). Remove idler pulley bolt and remove idler pulley. 9. Remove oil dipstick tube mounting bolt (3) at side of A/C-generator mounting bracket. 10. Disconnect throttle body cables. 11. Remove heater hose clamp and heater hose from heater hose coolant return tube. 12. Remove heater hose coolant return tube mounting bolt and remove tube (4) from engine. Discard the old tube O-ring. 13. Remove six bracket bolts. 14. Lift and position generator and A/C compressor (along with their common mounting bracket) to gain access to bypass hose. A block of wood may be used to hold assembly in position. 15. Loosen and position both hose clamps to center of bypass hose. Remove hose from vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2152 Coolant Line/Hose: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WITHOUT AIR CONDITIONING 1. Position bypass hose clamps to center of hose. 2. Install bypass hose to engine. 3. Secure both hose clamps. 4. Fill cooling system See: Service and Repair. 5. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. WITH AIR CONDITIONING 1. Position bypass hose clamps to center of hose. 2. Install bypass hose to engine. 3. Secure both hose clamps. 4. Install generator-A/C mounting bracket assembly to engine. Tighten bolts to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) torque. Tighten bolts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Install a new O-ring to the heater hose coolant return tube (4). Coat the new O-ring with antifreeze before installation. 6. Install coolant return tube and its mounting bolt to engine. 7. Connect throttle body control cables. 8. Install oil dipstick mounting bolt. 9. Install idler pulley. Tighten bolt to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.) torque. 10. Install drive belt See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation. 11. Install air cleaner assembly. 12. Install upper radiator hose to radiator. 13. Connect wiring harness to A/C compressor. 14. Connect battery negative cable. 15. Fill cooling system See: Service and Repair. 16. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Coolant Reservoir: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The coolant recovery container is attached to the upper fan shroud assembly and is made of high temperature plastic. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2157 Coolant Reservoir: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The coolant recovery container works in conjunction with the radiator pressure cap. It utilizes thermal expansion and contraction of coolant to keep coolant free of trapped air. It provides a volume for expansion and contraction of coolant. It also provides a convenient and safe method for checking coolant level and adjusting level at atmospheric pressure. This is done without removing the radiator pressure cap. The system also provides some reserve coolant to the radiator to cover minor leaks and evaporation or boiling losses. As the engine cools, a vacuum is formed in the cooling system of both the radiator and engine. Coolant will then be drawn from the coolant tank and returned to a proper level in the radiator. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Recovery Container - Removal Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Coolant Recovery Container - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove RH radiator seal. 2. Remove coolant recovery container hose (2). 3. Disconnect washer pump electrical connector (3). 4. Remove coolant recovery container mounting bolts (4) and clip. 5. Remove coolant recovery container (1) from vehicle Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Coolant Recovery Container - Removal > Page 2160 Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Coolant Recovery Container - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position coolant recovery container (1) in vehicle. 2. Install coolant recovery container mounting bolts and clip. Tighten bolts to 8 Nm (70 in. lbs.). 3. Connect washer pump electrical connector (3). 4. Connect coolant recover container hose (2) to radiator. 5. Fill coolant recover container with windshield washer fluid and with coolant See: Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > System Information > Description and Operation > Operation Radiator Cooling Fan: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > System Information > Description and Operation > Operation > Page 2165 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > System Information > Description and Operation > Operation > Page 2166 Radiator Cooling Fan: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The thermal viscous fan drive (3) is a silicone fluid filled coupling used to connect the fan blades to the water pump shaft (4). The coupling allows the fan to be driven in a normal manner. This is done at low engine speeds while limiting the top speed of the fan to a predetermined maximum level at higher engine speeds. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 2167 Radiator Cooling Fan: Testing and Inspection RADIATOR VISCOUS FAN NOISE NOTE: It is normal for fan noise to be louder (roaring) when: - The underhood temperature is above the engagement point for the viscous drive coupling. This may occur when ambient (outside air temperature) is very high. - Engine loads and temperatures are high such as when towing a trailer. - Cool silicone fluid within the fan drive unit is being redistributed back to its normal disengaged (warm) position. This can occur during the first 15 seconds to one minute after engine start-up on a cold engine. LEAKS Viscous fan drive operation is not affected by small oil stains near the drive bearing. If leakage appears excessive, replace the fan drive unit. VISCOUS DRIVE If the fan assembly free-wheels without drag (the fan blades will revolve more than five turns when spun by hand), replace the fan drive. This spin test must be performed when the engine is cool. For the following test, the cooling system must be in good condition. It also will ensure against excessively high coolant temperature. WARNING: Be sure that there is adequate fan blade clearance before drilling. 1. Drill a 1/8-in diameter hole in the top center of the fan shroud. 2. Obtain a dial thermometer with an 8 inch stem (or equivalent). It should have a range of -18°-to-105°C (0°-to-220° F). Insert thermometer through the hole in the shroud. Be sure that there is adequate clearance from the fan blades. 3. Connect a tachometer and an engine ignition timing light. The timing light is to be used as a strobe light. 4. Block the air flow through the radiator. Secure a sheet of plastic in front of the radiator. Use tape at the top to secure the plastic and be sure that the air flow is blocked. 5. Be sure that the air conditioner (if equipped) and blow fan is turned off. WARNING: Use extreme caution when the engine is operating. Do not stand in a direct line with the fan. Do not put your hands near the pulleys, belts or fan. Do not wear loose clothing. 6. Start the engine and operate at 2400 rpm. Within ten minutes the air temperature (indicated on the dial thermometer) should be up to 88° C (190° F). Fan drive engagement should start to occur at/between: 3.7L - 90° C - 96°C (194° F - 205° F) - 4.7L - 93° - 98.8° C (200° - 210° F) - 5.7L - 96.6 - 102.2 °C (206°F - 216°F) - Engagement is distinguishable by a definite increase in fan flow noise (roaring). The timing light also will indicate an increase in the speed of the fan. 7. When viscous drive engagement is verified, remove the plastic sheet. Fan drive disengagement should start to occur at or between: - 3.7L - 76°C - 81°C (168° F - 178° F) - 4.7L - 67°C - 73°C (153° F - 163° F) - 5.7L - 56°C - 62°C (133° F - 143° F) A definite decrease of fan flow noise (roaring) should be noticed. If not, replace the defective viscous fan drive unit. CAUTION: Some engines equipped with serpentine drive belts have reverse rotating fans and viscous fan drives. They are marked with the word REVERSE to designate their usage. Installation of the wrong fan or viscous fan drive can result in engine overheating. CAUTION: If the viscous fan drive is replaced because of mechanical damage, the cooling fan blades should also be inspected. Inspect for fatigue cracks, loose blades, or loose rivets that could have resulted from excessive vibration. Replace fan blade assembly if any of these conditions are found. Also inspect water pump bearing and shaft assembly for any related damage due to a viscous fan drive malfunction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Radiator Cooling Fan: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Clean the fan blades using a mild soap and water. Do not use an abrasive to clean the blades. Inspection INSPECTION WARNING: Do not attempt to bend or straighten fan blades if fan is not within specifications. CAUTION: If fan blade assembly is replaced because of mechanical damage, water pump and viscous fan drive should also be inspected. These components could have been damaged due to excessive vibration. 1. Remove fan blade assembly from viscous fan drive unit (four bolts). 2. Lay fan on a flat surface with leading edge facing down. With tip of blade touching flat surface, replace fan if clearance between opposite blade and surface is greater than 2.0 mm (.090 inch). Rocking motion of opposite blades should not exceed 2.0 mm (.090 inch). Test all blades in this manner. 3. Inspect fan assembly for cracks, bends, loose rivets or broken welds. Replace fan if any damage is found. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2170 Radiator Cooling Fan: Removal and Replacement Radiator Fan - Removal REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the cooling system See: Service and Repair. 2. Remove the upper radiator hose. 3. Remove the air filter housing assemblySee: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Air Filter Element/Service and Repair/Removal. 4. Using Tool 6958 and adapter pins 8346 (1), remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from water pump. Do not attempt to remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from vehicle at this time. 5. Position the fan/fan drive assembly in the radiator shroud. 6. Remove the two shroud mounting screws. 7. Remove the radiator shroud and fan drive assembly. 8. After removing fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly, do not place viscous fan drive in horizontal position. If stored horizontally, silicone fluid in the viscous fan drive could drain into its bearing assembly and contaminate lubricant. 9. Remove four bolts securing fan blade assembly to viscous fan drive. Radiator Fan - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install fan blade assembly to viscous fan drive. Tighten bolts to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) torque. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2171 2. Position fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly into the radiator shroud. 3. Install the radiator shroud and fan drive assembly into the vehicle. 4. Install fan shroud retaining screws. Tighten screws to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.) 5. Install fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly to water pump shaft. 6. Install the upper radiator hose. 7. Fill cooling system See: Service and Repair. 8. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2176 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2177 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2178 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heater Core: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The heater core (1) is located in the HVAC housing, behind the instrument panel. The heater core is a heat exchanger made of rows of tubes with fins. The heater core tubes (2) are attached to the side of the heater core and are secured to the HVAC housing by a removable flange (3). The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the heater core. The HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle to service the heater core. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2183 Heater Core: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Engine coolant is circulated through the heater hoses to the heater core at all times. As the coolant flows through the heater core, heat is removed from the engine and is transferred to the heater core tubes and fins. Air directed through the heater core picks up the heat from the heater core fins. The blend-air door allows control of the heater output air temperature by regulating the amount of air flowing through the heater core. The blower motor speed controls the volume of air flowing through the HVAC housing. The heater core cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation Heater Core: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the heater core. The heater core tubes should not be repositioned, loosened or removed from the heater core. Failure to follow this warning could result in a coolant leak and possible personal injury or death. 1. If removed, install the rubber flange (3) over the heater core tubes (4). NOTE: Make sure that the foam seal and the rubber flange are properly positioned in the HVAC housing. 2. Carefully install the heater core (1) into the lower half of the HVAC housing (2). 3. Assemble the HVAC housing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Assembly. NOTE: If the heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system See: Service and Repair. 4. Install the HVAC housing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 2186 Heater Core: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. WARNING: The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the heater core. The heater core tubes should not be repositioned, loosened or removed from the heater core. Failure to follow this warning could result in a coolant leak and possible personal injury or death. 1. Remove the HVAC housing and place it on a workbench See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Removal. 2. Disassemble the HVAC housing See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly. NOTE: If the foam seal around the heater core is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. 3. Carefully lift the heater core (1) out of the lower half of the HVAC housing (2). NOTE: If the rubber flange around the heater core tubes is deformed or damaged, the flange must be replaced. 4. If required, remove the rubber flange (3) from around the heater core tubes (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine coolant temperature gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This gauge is part of the minor gauge set with the fuel gauge located on the left side of the instrument cluster, just left of the speedometer. The gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree gauge scale on the cluster overlay that reads bottom-to-top from C (or Cold) to H (or Hot). An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the bottom end of the scale. The engine coolant temperature gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the high end of the gauge scale, making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the white gauge dial face appears blue-green with the black graphics silhouetted against the illuminated background and the red graphics and the red gauge needle still appear red. Gauge illumination is provided by an integral electro-luminescent lamp that is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. The engine coolant temperature gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2192 Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine coolant temperature gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine coolant temperature. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine coolant temperature gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Temperature Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is between the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F)] and the high end of normal [about 122 °C (252 °F)], the gauge needle is moved to the actual relative temperature position on the gauge scale. - Engine Temperature Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is below the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F)], the gauge needle is held at the C increment at the low end of the gauge scale. The gauge needle remains at the low end of the gauge scale until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is above about 54 °C (130 °F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is above about 122 °C (252 °F), the gauge needle is moved to the red zone at the high end of the gauge scale, the engine temperature indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The gauge needle remains in the red zone and the engine temperature indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is below about 122 °C (252 °F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine temperature message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about five seconds or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After five seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine coolant temperature gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, Refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier Testing and Inspection See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection. If the instrument cluster turns ON the engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine coolant temperature gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The engine temperature indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The engine temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The engine temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Lamps and Indicators - Cooling System > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2197 Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine temperature gauge reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the engine temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the engine temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is above about 122 °C (252 °F), the engine temperature indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is below about 119 °C (246 °F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled OFF, then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the engine temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier Testing and Inspection See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection. If the instrument cluster turns ON the engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Radiator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The radiator (2) is an aluminum vertical flow design with vertical tubes through the radiator core and plastic tanks on top and bottom. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2202 Radiator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The radiator supplies sufficient heat transfer using the cooling fins interlaced between the horizontal tubes in the radiator core to cool the engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2203 Radiator: Testing and Inspection RADIATOR COOLANT FLOW Use the following procedure to determine if coolant is flowing through cooling system. 1. Idle engine until operating temperature is reached. If upper radiator hose is warm to the touch, thermostat is opening and coolant is flowing to radiator. WARNING: Hot, pressurized coolant can cause injury by scalding. Using a rag to cover radiator pressure cap, open radiator cap slowly to first stop. Allow any built-up pressure to vent to the reserve/overflow tank. After pressure build-up has been released, remove cap from filler neck. 2. Drain a small amount of coolant from radiator until ends of radiator tubes are visible through filler neck. Idle engine at normal operating temperature. If coolant is flowing past exposed tubes, coolant is circulating. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Radiator: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Clean radiator fins with the engine cold, apply cold water and compressed air to the back (engine side) of the radiator to flush the radiator and/or A/C condenser of debris. Inspection INSPECTION The radiator cooling fins should be checked for damage or deterioration. Inspect cooling fins to make sure they are not bent or crushed, these areas result in reduced heat exchange capacity causing the cooling system to operate at higher temperatures. Inspect the plastic end tanks for cracks, damage or leaks. Inspect the radiator neck for damage or distortion. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2206 Radiator: Removal and Replacement Radiator - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Drain cooling system See: Service and Repair 3. Remove pushpins and the upper condenser/radiator seal (1). 4. Remove upper radiator hose. 5. Disconnect power steering hoses from power steering fluid cooler. 6. If equipped, disconnect transmission oil cooler lines. 7. Remove overflow tube. 8. Remove radiator fan shroud from the radiator and position over the radiator fan. 9. Raise vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2207 10. Disconnect the power steering cooler lines (2). 11. Remove the lower radiator hose. 12. Lower vehicle. 13. Remove upper radiator mounting bolts. 14. Remove radiator. 15. Remove power steering fluid oil cooler from the radiator, if necessary. 16. Remove A/C condenser from radiator. Radiator - Installation INSTALLATION The radiator has two isolator pins on bottom of both tanks. These fit into alignment holes in radiator lower support. 1. Install A/C condenser, if removed. 2. Install power steering cooler, if removed. 3. Install transmission oil cooler if removed. 4. Install the upper radiator mount 5. Position isolator pins into alignment holes in radiator lower support. 6. Install upper radiator support. Tighten bolts to 23 Nm (200 in. lbs.) 7. Install LH and RH radiator side seals. 8. Install upper radiator hose. 9. Install overflow tube. 10. Install radiator shroud. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2208 11. Install power steering cooler lines. 12. If equipped, install transmission cooler lines. 13. Install lower radiator hose. 14. Lower vehicle. 15. Fill radiator See: Service and Repair. 16. Connect battery negative cable. 17. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation > Radiator Pressure Cap - Description Radiator Cap: Description and Operation Radiator Pressure Cap - Description DESCRIPTION All cooling systems are equipped with a pressure cap on the radiator. This cap releases pressure at some point within a range of 96.5 - 124 kPa (14 - 18 psi). The pressure relief point (in pounds) is engraved on top of the cap (3). The cooling system will operate at pressures slightly above atmospheric pressure. This results in a higher coolant boiling point allowing increased radiator cooling capacity. The cap contains a spring-loaded pressure relief valve (4). This valve opens when system pressure reaches the release range of 96.5 - 124 kPa (14 - 18 psi). A rubber gasket (2) seals the radiator filler neck. This is done to maintain vacuum during coolant cool-down and to prevent leakage when system is under pressure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation > Radiator Pressure Cap - Description > Page 2213 Radiator Cap: Description and Operation Radiator Pressure Cap - Operation OPERATION A vent valve in the center of the cap will remain shut as long as the cooling system is pressurized. As the coolant cools, it contracts and creates a vacuum in cooling system. This causes the vacuum valve to open and coolant in reserve/overflow tank to be drawn through connecting hose into radiator. If the vacuum valve is stuck shut, or overflow hose is kinked, radiator hoses will collapse on cool-down. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Radiator Cap Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection Radiator Cap RADIATOR CAP Remove cap (1) from radiator. Be sure that sealing surfaces are clean. Moisten rubber gasket with water and install cap (1) on pressure tester 7700 (2) or an equivalent. Operate tester pump to bring pressure to 138 kPa (20 psi) on gauge. If pressure cap (1) fails to hold pressure of at least 131 kPa (19 psi) replace cap. Refer to the following CAUTION. The pressure cap may test properly while positioned on tool 7700 (or equivalent). It may not hold pressure or vacuum when installed on radiator. If so, inspect radiator filler neck and cap's top gasket for damage. Also inspect for dirt or distortion that may prevent cap from sealing properly. CAUTION: Radiator pressure testing tools are very sensitive to small air leaks, which will not cause cooling system problems. A pressure cap that does not have a history of coolant loss should not be replaced just because it leaks slowly when tested with this tool. Add water to tool. Turn tool upside down and recheck pressure cap to confirm that cap needs replacement. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Radiator Cap > Page 2216 Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection Radiator Cap To Filler Neck Seal RADIATOR CAP-TO-FILLER NECK SEAL The pressure cap upper gasket (seal) pressure relief can be tested by removing overflow hose from radiator filler neck nipple. Attach hose of pressure tester tool 7700 (or equivalent) to nipple. It will be necessary to disconnect hose from its adapter for filler neck. Pump air into radiator. The pressure cap upper gasket should relieve at 131 kPa (21 psi) and hold pressure at a minimum of 130 kPa (18.8 psi). WARNING: The warning words "do not open hot" on radiator pressure cap, are a safety precaution. When hot, pressure builds up in cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, radiator cap should not be removed while system is hot and/or under pressure. Do not remove radiator cap at any time except for the following purposes: 1. Check and adjust antifreeze freeze point. 2. Refill system with new antifreeze. 3. Conducting service procedures. 4. Checking for vacuum leaks. WARNING: If vehicle has been run recently, wait at least 15 minutes before removing radiator cap. With a rag, squeeze radiator upper hose to check if system is under pressure. Place a rag over cap and without pushing cap down, rotate it counter-clockwise to first stop. Allow fluid to escape through the coolant reserve/overflow hose into reserve/overflow tank. Squeeze radiator upper hose to determine when pressure has been released. When coolant and steam stop being pushed into tank and system pressure drops, remove radiator cap completely. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cleaning Radiator Cap: Service and Repair Cleaning CLEANING Use only a mild soap and water to clean the radiator cap. Using any type solvent may cause damage to the seal in the radiator cap. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cap > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cleaning > Page 2219 Radiator Cap: Service and Repair Inspection INSPECTION Hold cap at eye level, right side up. The vent valve at bottom of cap should open. If rubber gasket has swollen and prevents vent valve from opening, replace cap. Hold cap at eye level, upside down. If any light can be seen between vent valve and rubber gasket, replace cap. Do not use a replacement cap that has a spring to hold vent shut. A replacement cap must be the type designed for a coolant reserve/overflow system with a completely sealed diaphragm spring and a rubber gasket. This gasket is used to seal to radiator filler neck top surface. Use of proper cap will allow coolant return to radiator. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2225 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2226 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2227 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine coolant temperature gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This gauge is part of the minor gauge set with the fuel gauge located on the left side of the instrument cluster, just left of the speedometer. The gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree gauge scale on the cluster overlay that reads bottom-to-top from C (or Cold) to H (or Hot). An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the bottom end of the scale. The engine coolant temperature gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the high end of the gauge scale, making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the white gauge dial face appears blue-green with the black graphics silhouetted against the illuminated background and the red graphics and the red gauge needle still appear red. Gauge illumination is provided by an integral electro-luminescent lamp that is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. The engine coolant temperature gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2232 Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine coolant temperature gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine coolant temperature. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine coolant temperature gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Temperature Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is between the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F)] and the high end of normal [about 122 °C (252 °F)], the gauge needle is moved to the actual relative temperature position on the gauge scale. - Engine Temperature Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is below the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F)], the gauge needle is held at the C increment at the low end of the gauge scale. The gauge needle remains at the low end of the gauge scale until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is above about 54 °C (130 °F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is above about 122 °C (252 °F), the gauge needle is moved to the red zone at the high end of the gauge scale, the engine temperature indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The gauge needle remains in the red zone and the engine temperature indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is below about 122 °C (252 °F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine temperature message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about five seconds or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After five seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine coolant temperature gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, Refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier Testing and Inspection See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection. If the instrument cluster turns ON the engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine coolant temperature gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The engine temperature indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The engine temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The engine temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2237 Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine temperature gauge reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the engine temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the engine temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is above about 122 °C (252 °F), the engine temperature indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is below about 119 °C (246 °F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled OFF, then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the engine temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier Testing and Inspection See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection. If the instrument cluster turns ON the engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Thermostat: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Do not operate an engine without a thermostat, except for servicing or testing. The same thermostat is used for winter and summer seasons. An engine should not be operated without a thermostat, except for servicing or testing. Operating without a thermostat causes longer engine warmup time, unreliable warmup performance, increased exhaust emissions and crankcase condensation that can result in sludge formation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2242 Thermostat: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The wax pellet is located in a sealed container at the spring end of the thermostat. When heated, the pellet expands, overcoming closing spring tension and water pump pressure to force the valve to open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2243 Thermostat: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS All engines are equipped with On-Board Diagnostics for certain cooling system components. Refer to On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) in Computers and Control Systems for additional information. If the powertrain control module (PCM) detects low engine coolant temperature, it will record a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in the PCM memory. Do not change a thermostat for lack of heat as indicated by the instrument panel gauge or by poor heater performance unless a DTC is present. For other DTCs, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Emissions Control - Description The DTC can also be accessed through the DRB scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Coolant Thermostat - Removal Thermostat: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Thermostat - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE If thermostat is being replaced, be sure that replacement is specified thermostat for vehicle model and engine type. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable at battery. 2. Drain cooling system See: Service and Repair 3. Raise vehicle on hoist. 4. Remove splash shield. (4.7L Only). 5. Remove lower radiator hose clamp and lower radiator hose at thermostat housing. 6. Remove thermostat housing mounting bolts , thermostat housing (1) and thermostat (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Coolant Thermostat - Removal > Page 2246 Thermostat: Service and Repair Engine Coolant Thermostat - Installation 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE 1. Clean mating areas of timing chain cover and thermostat housing. 2. Install thermostat (spring side down) into recessed machined groove on timing chain cover. 3. Position thermostat housing on timing chain cover. 4. Install two housing-to-timing chain cover bolts. Tighten bolts to 13 Nm (112 in. lbs.) torque. CAUTION: Housing must be tightened evenly and thermostat must be centered into recessed groove in timing chain cover. If not, it may result in a cracked housing, damaged timing chain cover threads or coolant leaks. 5. Install lower radiator hose on thermostat housing. 6. Install splash shield. 7. Lower vehicle. 8. Fill cooling system See: Service and Repair. 9. Connect negative battery cable to battery. 10. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications WATER PUMP TORQUE AND SEQUENCE Using a new gasket, position water pump (1) and install mounting bolts as shown. Tighten water pump mounting bolts to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.) torque. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Water Pump: Description and Operation Description Water Pump WATER PUMP A centrifugal water pump (1) circulates coolant through the water jackets, passages, intake manifold, radiator core, cooling system hoses and heater core. The pump is driven from the engine crankshaft by a single serpentine drive belt that drives the water pump pulley (1). The water pump impeller is pressed onto the rear of a shaft that rotates in bearings pressed into the housing. The housing has two small holes to allow seepage to escape. The water pump seals are lubricated by the antifreeze in the coolant mixture. No additional lubrication is necessary. Both heater hoses are connected to fittings on the timing chain front cover. The water pump is also mounted directly to the timing chain cover and is equipped with a non serviceable integral pulley. Water Pump Bypass - 4.7L WATER PUMP BYPASS - 4.7L Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2252 The 4.7L engine uses an internal water/coolant bypass system. The design uses galleries in the timing chain cover to circulate coolant during engine warm-up preventing the coolant from flowing through the radiator. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2253 Water Pump: Description and Operation Operation Water Pump WATER PUMP A centrifugal water pump circulates coolant through the water jackets, passages, intake manifold, radiator core, cooling system hoses and heater core, this coolant absorbs the heat generated when the engine is running. The pump is driven by the engine crankshaft via a drive belt. Water Pump Bypass - 4.7L Engine WATER PUMP BYPASS - 4.7L ENGINE When the thermostat is in the closed position the bypass gallery is not obstructed allowing 100% flow. When the thermostat is in the open position the pill partially covers the bypass hole, reducing the amount of bypass flow. This design allows the coolant to reach operating temperature quickly when cold, while adding extra cooling during normal temperature operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Water Pump: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Clean the gasket mating surface. Use caution not to damage the gasket sealing surface. Inspection INSPECTION Inspect the water pump assembly for cracks in the housing, water leaks from shaft seal, worn bearing or impeller rubbing either the pump body or timing chain case/cover. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2256 Water Pump: Removal and Replacement Water Pump - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE The water pump on 3.7L/4.7L engines is bolted directly to the engine timing chain case cover. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Drain cooling system See: Service and Repair. 3. Remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from water pump See: Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Radiator Fan Removal. Do not attempt to remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly from vehicle at this time. 4. If water pump is being replaced, do not unbolt fan blade assembly from thermal viscous fan drive. 5. Remove two fan shroud-to-radiator screws. 6. Remove fan shroud and fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly from vehicle. 7. After removing fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly, do not place thermal viscous fan drive in horizontal position. If stored horizontally, silicone fluid in viscous fan drive could drain into its bearing assembly and contaminate lubricant. 8. Remove accessory drive belt from the water pump pulley (2) See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal. 9. Remove upper radiator hose clamp and remove upper hose at water pump. 10. Remove seven water pump mounting bolts and one stud bolt. CAUTION: Do not pry water pump at timing chain case/cover. The machined surfaces may be damaged resulting in leaks. 11. Remove water pump and gasket. Discard gasket. Water Pump - Installation 3.7/4.7L ENGINE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2257 1. Clean gasket mating surfaces. 2. Using a new gasket, position water pump (1) and install mounting bolts as shown. Tighten water pump mounting bolts to 58 Nm (43 ft. lbs.) torque. 3. Spin water pump to be sure that pump impeller does not rub against timing chain case/cover. 4. Connect radiator upper hose to water pump. 5. Install accessory drive belt See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation. 6. Position fan shroud and fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly. 7. Install two fan shroud-to-radiator screws. 8. Be sure of at least 25 mm (1.0 inches) between tips of fan blades and fan shroud. 9. Install fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly to water pump shaft See: Radiator Cooling Fan/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Radiator Fan - Installation. 10. Fill cooling system See: Service and Repair. 11. Connect negative battery cable. 12. Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION WARNING: THE NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF THE EXHAUST SYSTEM IS VERY HIGH. THEREFORE, NEVER WORK AROUND OR ATTEMPT TO SERVICE ANY PART OF THE EXHAUST SYSTEM UNTIL IT IS COOLED. SPECIAL CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN WORKING NEAR THE CATALYTIC CONVERTER. THE TEMPERATURE OF THE CONVERTER RISES TO A HIGH LEVEL AFTER A SHORT PERIOD OF ENGINE OPERATION TIME. CAUTION: Avoid application of rust prevention compounds or undercoating materials to exhaust system floor pan heat shields. Light overspray near the edges is permitted. Application of coating will result in excessive floor pan temperatures and objectionable fumes. The exhaust system uses a single muffler with a welded tailpipe. The 50 State Emissions vehicles use two mini catalytic converters inline with the exhaust pipe below the exhaust manifolds. The exhaust manifolds are equipped with ball flange outlets to assure a tight seal and strain free connections. The exhaust system must be properly aligned to prevent stress, leakage and body contact. If the system contacts any body panel, it may amplify objectionable noises originating from the engine or body. When inspecting an exhaust system, critically inspect for cracked or loose joints, stripped screw or bolt threads, corrosion damage and worn, cracked or broken hangers. Replace all components that are badly corroded or damaged. DO NOT attempt to repair. When replacement is required, use original equipment parts (or their equivalent). This will assure proper alignment and provide acceptable exhaust noise levels. The basic exhaust system consists of exhaust manifold(s), exhaust pipe with oxygen sensors, catalytic converter(s), heat shield(s), muffler and tailpipe. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2263 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The catalytic converter captures and burns any unburned fuel mixture exiting the combustion chambers during the exhaust stroke of the engine. This process aids in reducing emissions output. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Catalytic Converter: Procedures INSPECTION Look at the stainless steel body of the converter, inspect for bulging or other distortion that could be a result of overheating. If the converter has a heat shield attached make sure it is not bent or loose. If you suspect internal damage to the catalyst, tapping the bottom of the catalyst with a rubber mallet may indicate a damaged core. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2266 Catalytic Converter: Removal and Replacement Catalytic Converter - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE CAUTION: When servicing or replacing exhaust system components, disconnect the oxygen sensor connector(s). Allowing the exhaust to hang by the oxygen sensor wires will damage the harness and/or sensor. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Saturate all exhaust bolts and nuts with Mopar(R) Rust Penetrant. Allow 5 minutes for penetration. 3. Disconnect the oxygen senor electrical connectors. 4. Remove the catalytic converter-to-manifold bolts (5). 5. Remove the catalytic converter to the exhaust pipe clamp (1). 6. If present, grind tack weld. 7. Remove the catalytic converter. You may have to loosen up other sections of the exhaust system. Catalytic Converter - Installation 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE CAUTION: When servicing or replacing exhaust system components, disconnect the oxygen sensor connector(s). Allowing the exhaust to hang by the oxygen sensor wires will damage the harness and/or sensor. NOTE: The band clamps are not reusable. After removal, they must be replaced with new one. 1. Make sure the catalytic converter pipe is free of burrs. 2. Insert the catalytic converter into the exhaust pipe. 3. Make sure the alignment tang is fully seated in the alignment slot. 4. If other sections of the exhaust system where loosened in removal, refer to that information for the tightening procedures. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2267 5. At the catalytic converter-to-extension pipe connection, install new clamp and nuts. Tighten the clamp nuts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) torque. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Start the engine, inspect for exhaust leaks. Repair exhaust leaks as necessary. 8. Check the exhaust system for contact with the body panels. Make the necessary adjustments, if necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Exhaust Manifold: Specifications EXHAUST MANIFOLD TORQUE AND SEQUENCE Tighten all manifold bolts starting at center and working outward to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2271 Exhaust Manifold: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The exhaust manifolds are log style with a patented flow enhancing design to maximize performance. The exhaust manifolds are made of high silicon molybdenum cast iron. A perforated core graphite exhaust manifold gasket is used to improve sealing to the cylinder head. The exhaust manifolds are covered by a three layer laminated heat shield for thermal protection and noise reduction. The heat shields are fastened with a torque prevailing nut that is backed off slightly to allow for the thermal expansion of the exhaust manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Exhaust Manifold: Procedures Exhaust Manifold - Cleaning CLEANING 1. Clean the exhaust manifold using a suitable cleaning solvent, then allow to air dry. 2. Clean all gasket residue from the manifold mating surface. Exhaust Manifold - Inspection INSPECTION 1. Inspect the exhaust manifold for cracks in the mating surface and at every mounting bolt hole. 2. Using a straight edge and a feeler gauge, check the mating surface for warp and twist. 3. Inspect the manifold to exhaust pipe mating surface for cracks, gouges, or other damage that would prevent sealing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2274 Exhaust Manifold: Removal and Replacement Exhaust Manifold - Removal REMOVAL RIGHT EXHAUST MANIFOLD 1. Disconnect negative cable for battery. 2. Remove air cleaner assembly, resonator assembly and air inlet hose. 3. Remove accessory drive belt See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal. 4. Remove A/C compressor See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Compressor - Removal. 5. Remove A/C accumulator support bracket fastener. 6. Drain coolant below heater hose level See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. 7. Remove heater hoses at engine. 8. Remove fasteners attaching exhaust manifold heat shield. 9. Remove heat shield. 10. Remove upper exhaust manifold attaching fasteners. 11. Raise vehicle on hoist. 12. Disconnect exhaust pipe from manifold. 13. Remove fasteners attaching starter. Move starter aside. 14. Remove lower exhaust manifold attaching fasteners. 15. Remove exhaust manifold and gasket. Manifold is removed from below the engine compartment. LEFT EXHAUST MANIFOLD 1. Disconnect negative cable for battery. 2. Hoist vehicle. 3. Disconnect exhaust pipe at manifold. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Remove the front two exhaust heat shield retaining fasteners. Raise vehicle and remove the fasteners at rear of heat shield. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2275 6. Remove heat shield. 7. Lower vehicle and remove the upper exhaust manifold retaining bolts. 8. Raise vehicle and remove the lower exhaust manifold retaining bolts. 9. Remove exhaust manifold and gasket. Manifold is removed from below the engine compartment. Exhaust Manifold - Installation INSTALLATION RIGHT EXHAUST MANIFOLD 1. Install exhaust manifold and gasket from below engine compartment. 2. Install lower exhaust manifold fasteners. DO NOT tighten until all fasteners are in place. 3. Lower vehicle and install upper exhaust manifold fasteners. Tighten all manifold bolts starting at center and working outward to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). CAUTION: Over tightening heat shield fasteners, may cause shield to distort and/or crack. 4. Install exhaust manifold heat shield. Tighten fasteners to 8 Nm (72 in. lbs.), then loosen 45 degrees. 5. Install starter and fasteners. 6. Connect exhaust pipe to manifold. 7. Connect heater hoses at engine. 8. Install fastener attaching A/C accumulator. 9. Install A/C compressor and fasteners. 10. Install accessory drive belt See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation. 11. Install air cleaner assembly, resonator assembly and air inlet hose. 12. Install battery and connect cables. 13. Fill cooling system See: Cooling System/Service and Repair. LEFT EXHAUST MANIFOLD 1. Install exhaust manifold and gasket from below engine compartment. 2. Install lower exhaust manifold fasteners. DO NOT tighten until all fasteners are in place. 3. Lower vehicle and install upper exhaust manifold fasteners. Tighten all manifold bolts starting at center and working outward to 25 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2276 CAUTION: Over tightening heat shield fasteners, may cause shield to distort and/or crack. 4. Install exhaust manifold heat shield. Tighten fasteners to 8 Nm (72 in. lbs.), then loosen 45 degrees. 5. Connect exhaust pipe to manifold. 6. Connect negative cable to battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Exhaust Pipe: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The tailpipe is made of stainless steel and attaches to the muffler. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2281 Exhaust Pipe: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The tailpipe channels the exhaust out of the muffler and out from under the vehicle to control noise and prevent exhaust gas fumes from entering the passenger compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: If torches are used when working on the exhaust system, wear protective eye covering and do not allow the flame near the fuel lines. CAUTION: When servicing or replacing exhaust system components, be sure to disconnect all oxygen sensor connectors. Allowing the exhaust system to hang by the harness will damage the wiring and/or sensor. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Saturate the bolts and nuts with Mopar(R) Rust Penetrant. Allow 5 minutes for penetration. 3. Remove the exhaust pipe-to-muffler clamp (3). 4. Grind any tack weld, if present. 5. Remove the exhaust pipe insulators (1). 6. Remove the rear muffler insulators (5) if necessary. 7. If necessary, heat connection with an oxygen/acetylene torch and twist tailpipe out of muffler. 8. Remove the exhaust pipe (2) from the muffler (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2284 Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Inspection INSPECTION Discard rusted clamps, broken or worn supports and attaching parts. Replace a component with original equipment parts, or equivalent. This will assure proper alignment with other parts in the system and provide acceptable exhaust noise levels. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2285 Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The band clamps are not reusable. After removal, they must be replaced. 1. Remove any burrs from the exhaust pipe (2). 2. Connect the exhaust pipe (2) to the muffler (4). 3. Make sure that the alignment tang is seated in the alignment slot. 4. Install the muffler-to-exhaust pipe clamp. Do not tighten at this time. 5. Install the rear muffler insulators (5), if removed. 6. Install the tail pipe insulators (1) 7. Check the exhaust system for contact with the body panels. Make the necessary adjustments, if necessary. 8. Tighten muffler-to-exhaust pipe clamp to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Start the engine, inspect for exhaust leaks. Repair exhaust leaks as necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heat Shield: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION There are two types of heat shields (1) used. One is stamped steel the other is molded foil sheets. The shields attach to the vehicle around the exhaust system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2290 Heat Shield: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The heat shields prevent heat from the exhaust system from entering the passenger area and other areas where the heat can cause damage to other components. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Heat Shield: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Disconnect oxygen sensor electrical connectors. 3. Remove the screws and nuts holding the heat shields (1) to the frame and floor pan. 4. Slide the heat shield (1) out around the exhaust system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Heat Shield, Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2293 Heat Shield: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the heat shields (1) to the floor pan or the frame and install the screws and nuts. 2. Tighten the screws/nuts to 7 Nm (60 in. lbs.) torque. Tighten the muffler hangers (2) to 23 Nm (200 in. lbs.) 3. Lower the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Muffler: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All engines use a stainless steel muffler (5) to control exhaust noise levels and exhaust back pressure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2298 Muffler: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The muffler is designed to muffle the sound of the exhaust as it leaves the engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Muffler - Removal Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove the tail pipe See: Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Removal. 3. Remove the muffler-to-catalytic converter clamp (3). 4. Remove the muffler isolators (1 and 4). 5. Remove the muffler (5) from the catalytic converter. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Muffler - Removal > Page 2301 Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: The band clamps are not reusable. After removal, they must be replaced. 1. Install muffler to the catalytic converter (1). 2. Make sure the alignment tang seats in the alignment slot. 3. Install new exhaust clamp (4). Do not tighten at this time. 4. Install muffler isolators. 5. Install tail pipe See: Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Installation. 6. Align muffler and exhaust pipe. Tighten exhaust clamp nuts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). 7. Check the exhaust system for contact with the body panels. A minimum of 25 mm (1.0 in.) is required between the exhaust system components and body/frame parts. Make the necessary adjustments, if needed. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Start engine and check for exhaust leaks. Repair exhaust leaks as necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Body Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Front Control Module (FCM) (2) is a micro controller based module located in the left front corner of the engine compartment. The FCM mates to the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) to form the Integrated Power Module (IPM). The IPM connects directly to the battery and provides the primary means of circuit protection and power distribution for all vehicle electrical systems. The front control module controls power to some of these vehicle systems electrical and electromechanical loads based on inputs received from hard wired switch inputs and data received on the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2309 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION As messages are sent over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit, the Front Control Module (FCM) reads these messages and controls power to some of the vehicles electrical systems by completing the circuit to ground (low side driver) or completing the circuit to 12 volt power (high side driver). The following functions are controlled by the FCM: - Front turn signals - Stop, turn signal and tail lamps - Front and rear hazard warning lamps - Headlamps - Fog Lamps - Daytime running lamps - if equipped - Horn - Windshield and liftgate wiper and washer systems - Transfer case shifting - Trailer tow wiring output - Rear window defroster power and timing The FCM provides the following features for the above function: - It operates the electric transfer case mechanism, replacing a stand-alone module. - It flashes lamps in response to turn signal, Remote Keyless Entry and Vehicle Theft Security Alarm inputs. - It sounds the horn in response to Remote Keyless Entry and Vehicle Theft Security Alarm inputs. - It turns off the horn in the event of excessively long operation that could otherwise damage the horn. - It minimized voltage variations to the headlamps to extend bulb life and to equalize the light output from the lamps, which might otherwise differ due to variations in wiring resistance. - If the headlamps are left on, it automatically turns them off after eight minutes to protect the battery from discharge. - It monitors battery voltage and turns off non-essential functions such as the fog lamps, rear window defogger and heated seats if necessary to conserve battery power. - It operates the high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity by pulse-width modulation of the power supply to provide the daytime running lamps. - It provides the variable delay intermittent windshield and liftgate wiper time delay features, and the vehicle speed sensitive windshield wiper delay variation. - It acts as a gateway between the CAN-C network for critical powertrain and anti-lock brake systems and the CAN-B network for body and interior modules. For example it collects battery temperature data and relays it to the PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Body Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) from the engine compartment, See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Removal. 3. Remove the four fasteners (2) securing the Front Control Module (FCM) (1) to the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (3). 4. Separate the FCM from the PDC by pulling the two straight away from each other to disengage the electrical connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2312 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (3) to the Front Control Module (FCM) by lining up the electrical connector and pushing the two together. 2. Install the four fasteners (2) securing the FCM (1) to the PDC (3). 3. Install the Integrated Power Module (IPM), See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Installation. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID: 161 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-- 8-9 Z913 16BK GROUND 10 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z937 16BK GROUND 19 - 20 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 20 G6 18VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A803 18GY/RD GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 - 29 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 30 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2316 36 - 37 - 38 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2317 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2318 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20PK/GY TP SENSOR RETURN 16 - 17 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2319 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2320 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2321 7-8-9 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 18VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V72 18VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 22 - 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 - 28 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 - 34 V71 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SWITCH SIGNAL 36 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2322 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2323 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3-4 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2324 6 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 7-8 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 16BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 20YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/VT 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 20YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2325 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2326 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3-4-5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2327 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 7-8-9-10 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 14BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 - 21 - 22 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/PK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 18YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2328 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2329 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2330 Engine Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 161 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-- 8-9 Z913 16BK GROUND 10 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z937 16BK GROUND 19 - 20 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 20 G6 18VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A803 18GY/RD GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 - 29 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 30 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2331 36 - 37 - 38 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2332 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2333 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20PK/GY TP SENSOR RETURN 16 - 17 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2334 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2335 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2336 7-8-9 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 18VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V72 18VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 22 - 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 - 28 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 - 34 V71 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SWITCH SIGNAL 36 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2337 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2338 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3-4 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2339 6 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 7-8 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 16BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 20YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/VT 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 20YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2340 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2341 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3-4-5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2342 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 7-8-9-10 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 14BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 - 21 - 22 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/PK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 18YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2343 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2344 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Description Description DESCRIPTION The PCM (1) is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. Description - Modes Of Operation DESCRIPTION - MODES OF OPERATION As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output devices. The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop. During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM programming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes. During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1 part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance. The fuel injection system has the following modes of operation: - Ignition switch ON - Engine start-up (crank) - Engine warm-up - Idle - Cruise - Acceleration - Deceleration - Wide open throttle (WOT) - Ignition switch OFF The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed Loop modes. IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur: - The PCM pre-positions the idle air control (IAC) motor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2347 - The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy. - The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this input. - Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored. - Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored. - The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds. - The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approximately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. - The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the ASD relay. The O2S sensor input is not used by the PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation. ENGINE START-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged. The PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Starter motor relay - Camshaft position sensor signal The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal within 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system. The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay. Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor. ENGINE WARM-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Based on these inputs the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. - When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation. IDLE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2348 - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Battery voltage - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. CRUISE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen (O2S) sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. ACCELERATION MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response to increased throttle opening. DECELERATION MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Vehicle speed sensor Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2349 If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the oxygen sensor input signal. The PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue injection. Based on the above inputs, the PCM will adjust engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done by adjusting injector pulse width. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and fuel pump relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2350 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Operation OPERATION The PCM is a pre-programmed, microprocessor digital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to meet changing operating conditions. The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs. The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmission), vehicle speed and the brake switch. The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed, transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch switch and brake switch. Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation. NOTE: PCM Inputs: - Accelerator pedal position sensor (if equipped) - A/C request (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C select (if equipped with factory A/C) - Auto shutdown (ASD) sense - Battery temperature - Battery voltage - Brake switch - CAN bus (+) circuits - CAN bus (-) circuits - Camshaft position sensor signal - Clutch Interlock Switch (if equipped) - Crankshaft position sensor - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - EGR position sensor (if equipped) - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Fuel level - Generator (battery voltage) output - Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position) - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Knock sensor(s) (if equipped) - Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped) - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Oil pressure sensor - Output shaft speed sensor - Overdrive/override switch - Oxygen sensors - Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only) - Power ground - Power steering pressure switch (if equipped) - Sensor return - Signal ground - Speed control multiplexed single wire input - Throttle position sensor - Transmission governor pressure sensor - Transmission output speed sensor - Transmission temperature sensor - Vehicle speed inputs from ABS or RWAL system NOTE: PCM Outputs: - A/C clutch relay Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2351 - Auto shutdown (ASD) relay - CAN bus (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and speed control warn. lamp - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - Double start override (if equipped) - EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped) - Electronic throttle control - EVAP canister purge solenoid - Five volt sensor supply (primary) - Five volt sensor supply (secondary) - Fuel injectors - Fuel pump relay - Generator field driver (-) - Generator field driver (+) - Generator lamp (if equipped) - Idle air control (IAC) motor - Ignition coil(s) - CAN bus circuits - Leak detection pump (if equipped) - Natural Vacuum Leak Detection (NVLD) pump (if equipped) - Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Overdrive indicator lamp (if equipped) - Radiator cooling fan (if equipped) - Speed control vacuum solenoid - Speed control vent solenoid - Starter relay - Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Transmission convertor clutch circuit - Transmission 3-4 shift solenoid - Transmission relay - Transmission temperature lamp (if equipped) - Transmission variable force solenoid Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM Programming SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, and the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: NOTE: If the PCM and the SKREEM are replaced at the same time, program the PCM VIN into the PCM first. 1. If applicable first replace the PCM/ECM with the original WCM still connected to the vehicle. 2. Program the new PCM/ECM. (This will ensure the Secret Key Transfer from the original WCM into the new PCM/ECM). 3. Now replace and program the WCM. This will retain the Secret Key from the PCM/ECM back into the new WCM. 4. With the scan tool, select Miscellaneous Functions, WCM/Wireless Control Module. Then select the desired procedure and follow the display on the scan tool. 5. If the vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System program the Placard Pressure Values into the WCM/SKREEM. 6. Ensure all the customer's keys have been programmed into the new module if necessary. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED , ECM REPLACED , WCM REPLACED , or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. NOTE: Before replacing the ECU for a failed driver, control circuit or ground circuit, be sure to check the related component/circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most ECM driver/control circuit failures are caused by internal component failures (i.e. relay and solenoids) and shorted circuits (i.e. pull-ups, drivers and switched circuits). These failures are difficult to detect when a double fault has occurred and only one DTC has set. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When a ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When an ECM (Bosch) and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM (Bosch) 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING THE SKIM CAUTION: Read all notes and cautions for programming procedures. 1. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle. 2. Connect the StarSCAN(R). CAUTION: If the ECM/PCM and SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, the ECM/PCM MUST be programmed before the SKREEM/WCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2354 3. Select "ECU View". 4. Select "WCM Wireless Control Module". 5. Select "Miscellaneous Functions". 6. Select WCM replaced. 7. Enter the PIN when prompted. 8. Verify the correct information. NOTE: If the ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle keys will need to be replaced and programmed to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: - PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2355 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection PCM/ECM Reprogramming 1 PCM / TCM Flash Procedure PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS PCM / TCM FLASH REPROGRAMING This procedure will need to be done when one or more of the following situations are true: 1. A vehicle's Powertrain control module (PCM) has been replaced. 2. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set "P1602 - PCM Not Programmed." 3. An updated calibration or software release is available for either the PCM or TCM ECUs. This procedure assumes that the StarSCAN and StarMOBILE devices are configured to your dealership's network with either a wired or wireless connection. The StarSCAN and StarMOBILE must also be running at the latest operating system and software release level. For more help on how to network your StarSCAN or StarMOBILE reference the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation or at www.dcctools.com, under the Download Center. Table Of Contents 1. SECTION 1 PCM / TCM FLASH PROCEDURE: (below) 2. REQUIRED TOOLS/EQUIPMENT: See: 2 Required Tools / Equipment 3. TECH TIPS and INFORMATION: See: 3 Tech Tips and Information 4. PARTS REQUIRED: See: 4 Parts Required SECTION 1 - PCM / TCM FLASH PROCEDURE If using StarSCAN or StarMOBILE Desktop Client. Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE Using StarSCAN or StarMOBILE Desktop Client (immediately below) If using StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode. Go To REPAIR PROCEDURE Using StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode REPAIR PROCEDURE Using StarSCAN or StarMOBILE Desktop Client NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood of the vehicle and install a battery charger. Verify that the charging rate provides a continuous charge of 13.2 - 13.5 volts. 2. Connect the StarSCAN or StarMOBILE to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 3. Power on the StarSCAN or StarMOBILE. If the StarMOBILE is being used, launch the StarMOBILE Desktop Client and connect to the appropriate StarMOBILE device. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. From the tool's Home screen, a. Select "ECU View" b. Select "PCM" c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the Flash PCM screen for later reference. 5. Program the ECU as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE at the Home screen, select "ECU View" b. Select "PCM" c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New File" and follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 4e, or by using Year/Model/Engine and appropriate emissions selection for the vehicle being worked on. NOTE: If you are not connected to the vehicle, you may also search for flash files by selecting the "Flash Download" button from the Home screen. g. Select "Download to Scantool" h. Once the download is complete, select "Close" and then "Back" i. Highlight the listed calibration, select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. j. When the PCM update is complete, select "OK" k. Verify that the part number at the top of the Flash PCM screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2356 6. Continue to SECTION 2 - ADDITIONAL PCM / TCM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES to complete the process if the ECU has been replaced. 7. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" (p/n 04275086AB) and attach near the VECI label (See SECTION 3 - AUTHORIZED MODIFCATION LABEL (shown below) for details). REPAIR PROCEDURE - Using StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode NOTE: StarMOBILE« Standalone Mode is an efficient way to flash ECUs without having direct access to a network connection. It involves first copying the flash file to the StarMOBILE device which DOES require a network connection. Once the file has been copied to the StarMOBILE device, it can be used in a Standalone mode to flash the ECU WITHOUT a network connection. NOTE: StarMOBILE« does not need to be connected to a vehicle when retrieving a flash file for Standalone Mode. 1. Power on the StarMOBILE. Launch the StarMOBILE Desktop Client and connect to the tool. 2. At the Home screen, select "ECU View" a. Select "PCM" b. Select "More Options' c. Select "ECU Flash" d. Select "Browse for New File" and follow the on screen instructions. e. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the current ECU part number, or by using Year/Model/Engine and appropriate emissions selection for the vehicle being worked on. NOTE: If you are not connected to the vehicle, you may also search for flash files by selecting the "Flash Download" button from the Home screen. 3. From the Flash File List, select the appropriate calibration for the PCM and select "Download to Client" 4. Once the download is complete, hit "OK" and then "Manage Files" Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2357 5. In the Manage Files screen, highlight the downloaded flash file and select "Copy to SM Device". A green checkmark should now appear in the On SM Device column. 6. Exit the StarMOBILE« Desktop Client application. 7. Open the hood of the vehicle and install a battery charger. Verify that the charging rate provides a continuous charge of 13.2 - 13.5 volts. 8. Connect the StarMOBILE to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 9. On the StarMOBILE device, select "Enter Standalone Diagnostic Mode" (use the right function key). NOTE: If a StarMOBILE« Desktop Client is still associated with the device, you will receive the following error: "Your StarMOBILE« device is currently locked by a pc named 'xxxxxxxx' on your network. To remove the lock, close its Desktop Client or reboot this device". 10. Program the ECU as follows: a. Select "ECU View" b. Select "PCM" c. Select "Flash ECU" Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2358 d. Record the ECU part number at the very top of the screen for later reference. e. Highlight the flash file that you want to use. Hit "SELECT" and then "OK". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Once the flash is complete, verify that the part number at the top of the Flash PCM screen has updated to the new part number. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2359 NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. 11. Continue to SECTION 2 - ADDITIONAL PCM / TCM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES to complete the process if the ECU has been replaced. 12. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" (p/n 04275086AB) and attach near the VECI label (See SECTION 3 - AUTHORIZED MODIFCATION LABEL for details). SECTION 2 - ADDITIONAL PCM / TCM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES Find the PCM/TCM Type for the vehicle (below), read and write down the steps, and then go to the step by step instructions (immediately following) for additional information on how to perform these procedures. If a NGC3 or NGC4 PCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. PCM Replaced - if WCM equipped 2. Learn ETC - if ETC equipped 3. Check PCM Odometer 4. Check PCM VIN - if NOT WCM equipped 5. Quicklearn - if EATX equipped If a GPEC PCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. If the vehicle is equipped with a CVT, ensure that the TCM has the latest software calibration available (if the vehicle is not equipped with a CVT, skip to Step 3). 2. PCM Replaced - if WCM equipped 3. Learn ETC 4. Check PCM Odometer 5. Check PCM VIN if NOT WCM equipped 6. TCM Quicklearn - if EATX equipped If a CVT TCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. Initialize CVT If an EGS TCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. Initialize EGS STEP-BY-STEP INSTRUCTIONS Check PCM Odometer From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View". - Select "PCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Check PCM Odometer" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish". Check PCM VIN From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "PCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Check PCM VIN" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Initialize CVT From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "TCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Initialize CVT" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Initialize EGS From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "TCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Initialize EGS" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Learn ETC From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "PCM" Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2360 - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Learn ETC" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" PCM Replaced The vehicle pin (Personal Identification Number) will be required to complete the routine. This information may be obtained in three ways: 1. The original selling invoice 2. DealerCONNECT > Parts > Key Codes 3. Contacting the District Manager. From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "WCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "PCM Replaced" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Quicklearn From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "PCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Quicklearn" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Update CVT TCM From the "Home" screen: - Select "ECU View" - Select "TCM" - Select "More Options" - Select "ECU Flash" - Select "Browse for New File" and follow the on screen instructions. - Highlight the appropriate calibration. - Select "Download to Scantool" - Once the download is complete, select "Close" and then "Back" - Highlight the listed calibration, select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. - When the TCM update is complete, select "OK" - Verify that the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen has updated to the latest level. SECTION 3 - AUTHORIZED MODIFCATION LABEL NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach near the VECI label. 1. Powertrain Control / Transmission Control Module Part Numbers (Insert P/Ns) Used 2. Change Authority: TSB XX--XX 3. Dealer Code: XXXXX 4. Date: XX-XX-XX 2 Required Tools / Equipment PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS REQUIRED TOOLS/EQUIPMENT: PART NUMBER StarSCAN .............................................................................................................................................. PART NUMBER StarMOBILE NPN Battery Charger ..................................................................................... .................................................................................... NPN Battery Charger CH9401 StarSCAN Tool Kit ............................................................................................................................................... CH9801 StarMOBIL Tool Kit Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2361 CH9404 StarSCAN Vehicle Cable ............................................................................................................................ CH9804 StarMOBILE Vehicle Cable ................................................................................................................. ....................................................................... TechCONNECT PC or equivalent 3 Tech Tips and Information PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS TECH TIPS and INFORMATION: 1. StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode is an efficient way to flash ECUs without having direct access to a network connection. It involves first copying the flash file to the StarMOBILE device which DOES require a network connection. Once the file has been copied to the StarMOBILE device, it can be used in a Standalone mode to flash the ECU WITHOUT a network connection. 2. To use the StarMOBILE in Pass-Through Mode requires that your StarMOBILE is connected to the dealerships network via a wired or wireless connection. For more information on how to use the StarMOBILE in Pass-Through Mode see the StarMOBILE training tutorials available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Training Aids' link or at www.dcctools.com, under the Training Aids' link. 3. StarMOBILE does not need to be connected to a vehicle when retrieving a flash file for Standalone Mode. 4. Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The ECU can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. 5. If the flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. 6. Due to the PCM / TCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other ECUs within the vehicle. Some DTCs may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. 7. When replacing a GPEC PCM for a vehicle that is equipped with a CVT, it is extremely important that the PCM and TCM both have the latest software calibrations. 8. Do not allow the battery charger to time out or the charging rate to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 9. The StarSCAN« and StarMOBILE« diagnostic tools fully support Internet connectivity and must be configured for your dealership's network. For help on setting up your StarSCAN / StarMOBILE« for the dealership's network, refer to the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation or at www.dcctools.com, under the download center. 10. The operating software in the StarSCAN and StarMOBILE must be programmed with the latest software release level. The software level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Desktop Client screens. For instructions on how to update your scan tool, refer to the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE Software Update guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation or at www.dcctools.com, under the download center. 4 Parts Required PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS PARTS REQUIRED Qty ....................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. 1 Part Number ................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... 04275086AB DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................. ................................................................ Authorized Modification Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a diagnostic scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use a diagnostic scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. The PCM (1) is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM connectors. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Carefully unplug the four 38-way connectors (2) from PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal > Page 2364 3. Remove three PCM mounting bolts (2), and position ground strap (4). Remove PCM from vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal > Page 2365 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a diagnostic scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use a diagnostic scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 1. Position PCM (3) to vehicle. 2. Install three PCM mounting bolts (2). 3. Tighten bolts to 3-5 Nm (30-40 in. lbs.). 4. Be sure ground strap (4) is secured both at bottom of PCM, and at inner-fender. 5. Check pin connectors in the PCM. Also check the four 38-way connectors (2) for corrosion or damage. Repair as necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal > Page 2366 6. Install the four 38-way connectors (2) to PCM. 7. Connect negative battery cable. 8. Use the diagnostic scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Automatic Shut Down Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2370 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 175 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A A955 ASD RELAY OUTPUT B INTERNAL FUSED B(+) C-D K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 2373 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2376 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuel Pump Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2381 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 178 Component : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 5-pin, 12-volt, fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the label on the PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2384 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the electric fuel pump through the fuel pump relay. The fuel pump relay is energized by first applying battery voltage to it when the ignition key is turned ON, and then applying a ground signal to the relay from the PCM. Whenever the ignition key is turned ON, the electric fuel pump will operate. But, the PCM will shut-down the ground circuit to the fuel pump relay in approximately 1-3 seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2387 Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Automatic Shut Down Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2391 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 175 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A A955 ASD RELAY OUTPUT B INTERNAL FUSED B(+) C-D K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 2394 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2397 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 2403 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2406 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2412 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2413 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2414 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2418 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2419 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2420 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2421 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2422 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2425 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 2428 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to o-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (3), be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs). 5. Connect electrical connector (4) to sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2432 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2433 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2434 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2438 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2439 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2440 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2441 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2442 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2443 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2444 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2445 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2446 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2449 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor (3) is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 4.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 2452 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (2) , be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations The module assembly (5) contains the following components: An internal fuel filter See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Filter/Description and Operation/Fuel Filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2456 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2457 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Removal 2. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 3. Position Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 4. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 5. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring. 6. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 7. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal > Page 2460 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Whenever the fuel pump module is serviced, the rubber seal (gasket) must be replaced. 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Install fuel tank. See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Component Locations 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2465 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations Component ID: 269 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2466 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2467 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2468 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 269 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2469 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2470 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2471 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The IAT sensor provides an input voltage to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating the density of the air entering the intake manifold based upon intake manifold temperature. At key-on, a 5-volt power circuit is supplied to the sensor from the PCM. The sensor is grounded at the PCM through a low-noise, sensor-return circuit. The PCM uses this input to calculate the following: - Injector pulse-width - Adjustment of spark timing (to help prevent spark knock with high intake manifold air-charge temperatures) The resistance values of the IAT sensor is the same as for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from IAT sensor. 2. Clean dirt from sensor base. 3. Gently lift on small plastic release tab (3) and rotate sensor about 1/4 turn counter-clockwise for removal. 4. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2474 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). 2. Clean sensor mounting hole. 3. Position sensor (1) into base and rotate clockwise until past release tab (3). 4. Install electrical connector (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2479 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2480 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2481 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2482 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2485 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2486 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2487 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2488 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2491 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors from engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2494 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts (2) will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock senor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft.lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Sensor-MAP Component ID: 273 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 2499 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 2500 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Manifold Air Pressure (MAP) Sensor The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor (7) is mounted into the front of the intake manifold (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2501 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 273 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2502 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2503 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The MAP sensor is used as an input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It contains a silicon based sensing unit to provide data on the manifold vacuum that draws the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The PCM requires this information to determine injector pulse width and spark advance. When manifold absolute pressure (MAP) equals Barometric pressure, the pulse width will be at maximum. A 5 volt reference is supplied from the PCM and returns a voltage signal to the PCM that reflects manifold pressure. The zero pressure reading is 0.5V and full scale is 4.5V. For a pressure swing of 0-15 psi, the voltage changes 4.0V. To operate the sensor, it is supplied a regulated 4.8 to 5.1 volts. Ground is provided through the low-noise, sensor return circuit at the PCM. The MAP sensor input is the number one contributor to fuel injector pulse width. The most important function of the MAP sensor is to determine barometric pressure. The PCM needs to know if the vehicle is at sea level or at a higher altitude, because the air density changes with altitude. It will also help to correct for varying barometric pressure. Barometric pressure and altitude have a direct inverse correlation; as altitude goes up, barometric goes down. At key-on, the PCM powers up and looks at MAP voltage, and based upon the voltage it sees, it knows the current barometric pressure (relative to altitude). Once the engine starts, the PCM looks at the voltage again, continuously every 12 milliseconds, and compares the current voltage to what it was at key-on. The difference between current voltage and what it was at key-on, is manifold vacuum. During key-on (engine not running) the sensor reads (updates) barometric pressure. A normal range can be obtained by monitoring a known good sensor. As the altitude increases, the air becomes thinner (less oxygen). If a vehicle is started and driven to a very different altitude than where it was at key-on, the barometric pressure needs to be updated. Any time the PCM sees Wide Open Throttle (WOT), based upon Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) angle and RPM, it will update barometric pressure in the MAP memory cell. With periodic updates, the PCM can make its calculations more effectively. The PCM uses the MAP sensor input to aid in calculating the following: - Manifold pressure - Barometric pressure - Engine load - Injector pulse-width - Spark-advance programs - Shift-point strategies (certain automatic transmissions only) - Idle speed - Decel fuel shutoff The MAP sensor signal is provided from a single piezoresistive element located in the center of a diaphragm. The element and diaphragm are both made of silicone. As manifold pressure changes, the diaphragm moves causing the element to deflect, which stresses the silicone. When silicone is exposed to stress, its resistance changes. As manifold vacuum increases, the MAP sensor input voltage decreases proportionally. The sensor also contains electronics that condition the signal and provide temperature compensation. The PCM recognizes a decrease in manifold pressure by monitoring a decrease in voltage from the reading stored in the barometric pressure memory cell. The MAP sensor is a linear sensor; meaning as pressure changes, voltage changes proportionately. The range of voltage output from the sensor is usually between 4.6 volts at sea level to as low as 0.3 volts at 26 in. of Hg. Barometric pressure is the pressure exerted by the atmosphere upon an object. At sea level on a standard day, no storm, barometric pressure is approximately 29.92 in Hg. For every 100 feet of altitude, barometric pressure drops 0.10 in. Hg. If a storm goes through, it can change barometric pressure from what should be present for that altitude. You should know what the average pressure and corresponding barometric pressure is for your area. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 3.7L/4.7L The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor (7) is mounted into the front of the intake manifold (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) at sensor. 2. Clean area around MAP sensor. 3. Remove one sensor mounting screw (8). 4. Remove MAP sensor from intake manifold by slipping it from locating pin (6). 5. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2506 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 3.7L/4.7L 1. Clean MAP sensor mounting hole at intake manifold. 2. Check MAP sensor o-ring seal (2) for cuts or tears. 3. Position MAP sensor into manifold by sliding sensor over locating pin (6). 4. Install mounting bolt (8). Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2511 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front Component ID: 275 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z43 18BK/LB GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2512 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2513 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2514 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Rear Component ID: 276 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z42 18BK/LG GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 18DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2515 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2516 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2517 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2518 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Front Component ID: 277 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 18BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2519 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2520 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2521 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2522 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Rear Component ID: 278 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 18BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2523 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2524 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2525 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Component ID: 275 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z43 18BK/LB GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2528 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2529 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2530 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear Component ID: 276 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z42 18BK/LG GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 18DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2531 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2532 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2533 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2534 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front Component ID: 277 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 18BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2535 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2536 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2537 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2538 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear Component ID: 278 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 18BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2539 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2540 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2541 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2542 Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID - Cylinder bank number one is the bank that contains number one cylinder. See: Ignition System/Firing Order Cylinder #1 on left side. Cylinder #1 on right side. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2. - A third oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 would be numbered O2 Sensor 1/3. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 2/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - If a V-6 or V-8 vehicle only uses one downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) it is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2, even if it uses two upstream HO2S. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2543 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. CAUTION: Never apply any type of grease to the oxygen sensor electrical connector, or attempt any soldering of the sensor wiring harness. WARNING: The exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes and catalytic converter become very hot during engine operation. Allow engine to cool before removing oxygen sensor. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. 4-Sensor System If removing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, remove the right-front tire/wheel, and then remove the plastic inner fender liner. 3. Disconnect wire connector from O2S sensor. CAUTION: When disconnecting sensor electrical connector, do not pull directly on wire going into sensor. 4. Remove O2S sensor with an oxygen sensor removal and installation tool. 5. Clean threads in exhaust pipe using appropriate tap. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2546 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Threads of new oxygen sensors are factory coated with anti-seize compound to aid in removal.DO NOT add any additional anti-seize compound to threads of a new oxygen sensor. 1. Install O2S sensor. Tighten to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) torque. 2. Connect O2S sensor wire connector. 3. 4-Sensor System: If installing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, install plastic inner fender liner, and right-front tire/wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 2551 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 2552 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 2553 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 2556 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 2557 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 2558 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2561 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2566 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2567 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2568 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2573 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2574 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2575 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2576 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2577 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2580 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 2583 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to o-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (3), be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs). 5. Connect electrical connector (4) to sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2587 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2588 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2589 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2590 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2591 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2592 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2593 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2594 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2595 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2598 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor (3) is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 4.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 2601 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (2) , be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder Removal REMOVAL The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly (2). a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 2607 The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (2) with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (2) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 2608 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key/Lock Cylinder - Removal REMOVAL The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly (2). a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 2609 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key/Lock Cylinder - Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (2) with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (2) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2614 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2615 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2616 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2617 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2620 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2621 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2622 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2623 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2626 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors from engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2629 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts (2) will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock senor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft.lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE 58 psi +/- 2 psi Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Delivery Check *CHECKING THE FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM For a complete wiring diagram Consult Diagrams/Electrical. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 2636 Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP OPERATION Ignition on, engine not running. With a scan tool, actuate the Fuel System test. NOTE: It may be necessary to use a mechanics stethoscope in the next step. Listen for fuel pump operation at the fuel tank. Does the Fuel Pump operate? Yes - Go To 2 No - Go To 5 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 2. FUEL PRESSURE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install a fuel pressure gauge at the engine. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Choose a conclusion that best matches your fuel pressure reading. Below Specification - Go To 3 Within Specification - Test Complete. Above Specification - Replace the fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 3. RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure even with the engine off. Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Turn the ignition off. Raise vehicle on hoist, and disconnect the fuel pressure line at the fuel pump module. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631(3/8") fuel line adapter and the fuel pressure gauge between the fuel supply line and the fuel pump module. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Is the fuel pressure within specification now? Yes Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 2637 - Repair/replace fuel supply line as necessary. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 4 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 4. CHECKING FUEL INLET STRAINER WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Module and inspect the Fuel Inlet Strainer. Is the Fuel Inlet Strainer plugged? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Inlet Strainer. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Replace the Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test 5. (N1) FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Relay from the IPM. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit from the relay connector to the fuel pump module connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 2638 - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Repair the open in the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 2639 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Leak Down Test *FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN For a complete wiring diagram Consult Diagrams/Electrical. Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP MODULE NOTE: Before continuing visually and physically inspect the fuel delivery system for external leaks or damage. Repair/replace as necessary. WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631 (3/8") fuel line adapter. Install the fuel pressure gauge. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Using special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, pinch the rubber fuel line between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 kPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 2 2. FUEL INJECTOR(S) WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Remove special tool #C4390. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Move special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, from between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine to between the fuel pressure gauge and fuel pump module. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 kPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 2640 - Replace the leaking fuel injectors. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Test Complete. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by manufacturer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Loosen clamp and disconnect air duct at air cleaner cover. 2. Pry over 4 spring clips (5) from housing cover (3) (spring clips retain cover to housing). 3. Release housing cover (3) from locating tabs on housing and remove cover. 4. Remove air cleaner element (filter) from housing. 5. Clean inside of housing before replacing element. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2649 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install filter element into housing. 2. Position housing cover into housing locating tabs. 3. Pry up 4 spring clips (6) and lock cover to housing. 4. Install air duct to air cleaner cover and tighten hose clamp to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.) torque. 5. If any other hose clamps were removed from air intake system, tighten them to 3.4 Nm (30 in. lbs.) torque. 6. If any bolts were removed from air resonator housing or air intake tubing, tighten them to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Firing Order: Electrical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 4.7L ENGINE DESCRIPTION Fig. 1 The 4.7 liter (287 CID) eight-cylinder engine is an 90° single overhead camshaft engine. The cast iron cylinder block is made up of two different components; the first component is the cylinder bore and upper block, the second component is the bedplate that comprises the lower portion of the cylinder block and houses the lower half of the crankshaft main bearings. The cylinders are numbered from front to rear with the left bank being numbered 1,3,5 and 7, and the right bank being numbered 2,4,6 and 8. The firing order is 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2. The engine serial number is located at the Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2658 right front side of the engine block (Fig. 1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2659 Firing Order: Mechanical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications IGNITION TIMING Ignition timing is not adjustable on any engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUGS 3.7L TORQUE ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 27 Nm (20 Ft. Lbs) 4.7L New plugs ............................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 27 +/- 3 Nm (20 Ft. Lbs.) Used plugs ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 22 +/- 3 Nm (16 Ft. Lbs) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2666 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUGS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. Remove necessary air filter tubing and air intake components at top of engine and at throttle body. 2. To remove the upper row of plugs (5), each individual ignition coil (2) must first be removed. See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Removal Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head. 3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign material from entering combustion chamber. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between UPPER row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. 4. Inspect spark plug condition. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 2669 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Installation INSTALLATION - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Never use a motorized wire wheel brush to clean spark plugs. Metallic deposits will remain on spark plug insulator and will cause plug misfire. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. To aid in coil installation, apply silicone based grease such as Mopar(R) Dielectric Grease # J8126688 into spark plug end of rubber boots (4) and (7). Also apply this grease to the tops of spark plugs (5) and (6). 2. Check and adjust spark plug gap with a gap gauging tool (1). Refer to the Spark Plug Specification for plug gap. Two different gaps are used. See: Specifications 3. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading. Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between upper row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 2670 Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Certain engines use torque sensitive spark plugs. It is a good practice to always tighten spark plugs to a specific torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the spark plug gap, or a cracked porcelain insulator. See: Specifications 4. Install ignition coil(s). See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil - Installation 5. Install necessary air filter tubing and air intake components to top of engine and to throttle body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications MAX VARIATION Max variation between cylinders ......................................................................................................... ........................................................................... 25% Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications > Page 2674 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE The results of a cylinder compression pressure test can be utilized to diagnose several engine malfunctions. Ensure the battery is completely charged and the engine starter motor is in good operating condition. Otherwise the indicated compression pressures may not be valid for diagnosis purposes. 1. Clean the spark plug recesses with compressed air. 2. Remove the spark plugs. 3. Disable the fuel system. 4. Remove the ASD relay. 5. Insert a compression pressure gauge and rotate the engine with the engine starter motor for three revolutions. 6. Record the compression pressure on the 3rd revolution. Continue the test for the remaining cylinders. 7. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Specifications/Engine Specifications. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2679 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2680 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2681 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Component Locations 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2686 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations Component ID: 269 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2687 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 2688 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2689 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 269 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2690 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2691 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2692 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The IAT sensor provides an input voltage to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating the density of the air entering the intake manifold based upon intake manifold temperature. At key-on, a 5-volt power circuit is supplied to the sensor from the PCM. The sensor is grounded at the PCM through a low-noise, sensor-return circuit. The PCM uses this input to calculate the following: - Injector pulse-width - Adjustment of spark timing (to help prevent spark knock with high intake manifold air-charge temperatures) The resistance values of the IAT sensor is the same as for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from IAT sensor. 2. Clean dirt from sensor base. 3. Gently lift on small plastic release tab (3) and rotate sensor about 1/4 turn counter-clockwise for removal. 4. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2695 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). 2. Clean sensor mounting hole. 3. Position sensor (1) into base and rotate clockwise until past release tab (3). 4. Install electrical connector (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Body Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Front Control Module (FCM) (2) is a micro controller based module located in the left front corner of the engine compartment. The FCM mates to the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) to form the Integrated Power Module (IPM). The IPM connects directly to the battery and provides the primary means of circuit protection and power distribution for all vehicle electrical systems. The front control module controls power to some of these vehicle systems electrical and electromechanical loads based on inputs received from hard wired switch inputs and data received on the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2700 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION As messages are sent over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit, the Front Control Module (FCM) reads these messages and controls power to some of the vehicles electrical systems by completing the circuit to ground (low side driver) or completing the circuit to 12 volt power (high side driver). The following functions are controlled by the FCM: - Front turn signals - Stop, turn signal and tail lamps - Front and rear hazard warning lamps - Headlamps - Fog Lamps - Daytime running lamps - if equipped - Horn - Windshield and liftgate wiper and washer systems - Transfer case shifting - Trailer tow wiring output - Rear window defroster power and timing The FCM provides the following features for the above function: - It operates the electric transfer case mechanism, replacing a stand-alone module. - It flashes lamps in response to turn signal, Remote Keyless Entry and Vehicle Theft Security Alarm inputs. - It sounds the horn in response to Remote Keyless Entry and Vehicle Theft Security Alarm inputs. - It turns off the horn in the event of excessively long operation that could otherwise damage the horn. - It minimized voltage variations to the headlamps to extend bulb life and to equalize the light output from the lamps, which might otherwise differ due to variations in wiring resistance. - If the headlamps are left on, it automatically turns them off after eight minutes to protect the battery from discharge. - It monitors battery voltage and turns off non-essential functions such as the fog lamps, rear window defogger and heated seats if necessary to conserve battery power. - It operates the high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity by pulse-width modulation of the power supply to provide the daytime running lamps. - It provides the variable delay intermittent windshield and liftgate wiper time delay features, and the vehicle speed sensitive windshield wiper delay variation. - It acts as a gateway between the CAN-C network for critical powertrain and anti-lock brake systems and the CAN-B network for body and interior modules. For example it collects battery temperature data and relays it to the PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Body Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) from the engine compartment, See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Removal. 3. Remove the four fasteners (2) securing the Front Control Module (FCM) (1) to the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (3). 4. Separate the FCM from the PDC by pulling the two straight away from each other to disengage the electrical connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2703 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (3) to the Front Control Module (FCM) by lining up the electrical connector and pushing the two together. 2. Install the four fasteners (2) securing the FCM (1) to the PDC (3). 3. Install the Integrated Power Module (IPM), See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Installation. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2707 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2708 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2709 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2710 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2711 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2714 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 2717 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to o-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (3), be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs). 5. Connect electrical connector (4) to sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2721 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2722 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2723 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2727 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2728 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2729 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2730 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2731 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2732 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2733 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2734 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2735 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2738 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor (3) is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 4.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 2741 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (2) , be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations Data Link Connector: Locations Component ID: 52 Component : DATA LINK CONNECTOR Connector: Name : DATA LINK CONNECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4 Z11 18BK/LG GROUND 5 Z111 18BK/WT GROUND 6 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 7-- 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 D51 20PK/RD DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 15 - 16 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 2745 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 2746 Data Link Connector: Diagrams Component ID: 52 Component : DATA LINK CONNECTOR Connector: Name : DATA LINK CONNECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4 Z11 18BK/LG GROUND 5 Z111 18BK/WT GROUND 6 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (+) 7-- 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 D51 20PK/RD DIAGNOSTIC CAN C (-) 15 - 16 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 2747 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Data Link Connector: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Data Link Connector (DLC) (2) is a 16-way molded plastic connector insulator on a dedicated take out of the instrument panel wire harness. This connector is located at the lower edge of the instrument panel, outboard of the steering column. The connector insulator is retained by integral snap features within a rectangular cutout in the stamped metal lower instrument panel reinforcement, just below the lower edge of the instrument panel steering column opening cover and inboard of the park brake release (1) and inside hood release (3) handles. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2750 Data Link Connector: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Data Link Connector (DLC) is an industry-standard 16-way connector that permits the connection of a diagnostic scan tool to the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus for interfacing with, configuring, and retrieving Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) data from the electronic modules that reside on the data bus network of the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Throttle Control Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with ETC, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The ETC indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Electronic Throttle Control in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ETC indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2755 Electronic Throttle Control Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the ETC system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. The ETC indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ETC indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ETC indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ETC indicator is illuminated for about 15 seconds. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - ETC Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ETC indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM, the ETC indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM message. The indicator remains illuminated solid or continues to flash for about 12 seconds or until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, whichever is longer. If the indicator is illuminated solid with the engine running the vehicle will usually remain drivable. If the indicator is flashing with the engine running the vehicle may require towing. A flashing indicator means the ETC system requires immediate service. The indicator will be extinguished when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM for three consecutive seconds, the ETC indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single lamp-OFF message from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the ETC indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The actuator test illumination of the ETC indicator is a function of the PCM. The PCM continually monitors the ETC system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the PCM sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the PCM has detected an ETC system malfunction or that the ETC system is ineffective. The PCM will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the ETC indicator fails to illuminate due to an open or short in the cluster ETC indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the PCM of the condition, then the instrument cluster and the PCM will each store a DTC. For proper diagnosis of the ETC system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ETC indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID: 161 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-- 8-9 Z913 16BK GROUND 10 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z937 16BK GROUND 19 - 20 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 20 G6 18VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A803 18GY/RD GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 - 29 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 30 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2759 36 - 37 - 38 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2760 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2761 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20PK/GY TP SENSOR RETURN 16 - 17 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2762 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2763 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2764 7-8-9 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 18VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V72 18VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 22 - 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 - 28 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 - 34 V71 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SWITCH SIGNAL 36 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2765 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2766 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3-4 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2767 6 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 7-8 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 16BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 20YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/VT 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 20YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2768 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2769 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3-4-5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2770 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 7-8-9-10 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 14BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 - 21 - 22 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/PK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 18YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2771 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2772 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2773 Engine Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 161 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-- 8-9 Z913 16BK GROUND 10 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z937 16BK GROUND 19 - 20 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 20 G6 18VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A803 18GY/RD GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 - 29 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 30 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2774 36 - 37 - 38 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2775 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2776 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20PK/GY TP SENSOR RETURN 16 - 17 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2777 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2778 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2779 7-8-9 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 18VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V72 18VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 22 - 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 - 28 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 - 34 V71 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SWITCH SIGNAL 36 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2780 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2781 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3-4 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2782 6 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 7-8 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 16BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 20YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/VT 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 20YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2783 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2784 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3-4-5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2785 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 7-8-9-10 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 14BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 - 21 - 22 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/PK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 18YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2786 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2787 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Description Description DESCRIPTION The PCM (1) is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. Description - Modes Of Operation DESCRIPTION - MODES OF OPERATION As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output devices. The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop. During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM programming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes. During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1 part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance. The fuel injection system has the following modes of operation: - Ignition switch ON - Engine start-up (crank) - Engine warm-up - Idle - Cruise - Acceleration - Deceleration - Wide open throttle (WOT) - Ignition switch OFF The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed Loop modes. IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur: - The PCM pre-positions the idle air control (IAC) motor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2790 - The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy. - The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this input. - Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored. - Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored. - The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds. - The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approximately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. - The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the ASD relay. The O2S sensor input is not used by the PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation. ENGINE START-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged. The PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Starter motor relay - Camshaft position sensor signal The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal within 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system. The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay. Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor. ENGINE WARM-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Based on these inputs the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. - When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation. IDLE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2791 - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Battery voltage - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. CRUISE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen (O2S) sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. ACCELERATION MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response to increased throttle opening. DECELERATION MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Vehicle speed sensor Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2792 If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the oxygen sensor input signal. The PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue injection. Based on the above inputs, the PCM will adjust engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done by adjusting injector pulse width. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and fuel pump relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2793 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Operation OPERATION The PCM is a pre-programmed, microprocessor digital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to meet changing operating conditions. The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs. The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmission), vehicle speed and the brake switch. The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed, transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch switch and brake switch. Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation. NOTE: PCM Inputs: - Accelerator pedal position sensor (if equipped) - A/C request (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C select (if equipped with factory A/C) - Auto shutdown (ASD) sense - Battery temperature - Battery voltage - Brake switch - CAN bus (+) circuits - CAN bus (-) circuits - Camshaft position sensor signal - Clutch Interlock Switch (if equipped) - Crankshaft position sensor - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - EGR position sensor (if equipped) - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Fuel level - Generator (battery voltage) output - Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position) - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Knock sensor(s) (if equipped) - Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped) - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Oil pressure sensor - Output shaft speed sensor - Overdrive/override switch - Oxygen sensors - Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only) - Power ground - Power steering pressure switch (if equipped) - Sensor return - Signal ground - Speed control multiplexed single wire input - Throttle position sensor - Transmission governor pressure sensor - Transmission output speed sensor - Transmission temperature sensor - Vehicle speed inputs from ABS or RWAL system NOTE: PCM Outputs: - A/C clutch relay Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2794 - Auto shutdown (ASD) relay - CAN bus (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and speed control warn. lamp - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - Double start override (if equipped) - EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped) - Electronic throttle control - EVAP canister purge solenoid - Five volt sensor supply (primary) - Five volt sensor supply (secondary) - Fuel injectors - Fuel pump relay - Generator field driver (-) - Generator field driver (+) - Generator lamp (if equipped) - Idle air control (IAC) motor - Ignition coil(s) - CAN bus circuits - Leak detection pump (if equipped) - Natural Vacuum Leak Detection (NVLD) pump (if equipped) - Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Overdrive indicator lamp (if equipped) - Radiator cooling fan (if equipped) - Speed control vacuum solenoid - Speed control vent solenoid - Starter relay - Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Transmission convertor clutch circuit - Transmission 3-4 shift solenoid - Transmission relay - Transmission temperature lamp (if equipped) - Transmission variable force solenoid Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM Programming SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, and the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: NOTE: If the PCM and the SKREEM are replaced at the same time, program the PCM VIN into the PCM first. 1. If applicable first replace the PCM/ECM with the original WCM still connected to the vehicle. 2. Program the new PCM/ECM. (This will ensure the Secret Key Transfer from the original WCM into the new PCM/ECM). 3. Now replace and program the WCM. This will retain the Secret Key from the PCM/ECM back into the new WCM. 4. With the scan tool, select Miscellaneous Functions, WCM/Wireless Control Module. Then select the desired procedure and follow the display on the scan tool. 5. If the vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System program the Placard Pressure Values into the WCM/SKREEM. 6. Ensure all the customer's keys have been programmed into the new module if necessary. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED , ECM REPLACED , WCM REPLACED , or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. NOTE: Before replacing the ECU for a failed driver, control circuit or ground circuit, be sure to check the related component/circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most ECM driver/control circuit failures are caused by internal component failures (i.e. relay and solenoids) and shorted circuits (i.e. pull-ups, drivers and switched circuits). These failures are difficult to detect when a double fault has occurred and only one DTC has set. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When a ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When an ECM (Bosch) and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM (Bosch) 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING THE SKIM CAUTION: Read all notes and cautions for programming procedures. 1. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle. 2. Connect the StarSCAN(R). CAUTION: If the ECM/PCM and SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, the ECM/PCM MUST be programmed before the SKREEM/WCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2797 3. Select "ECU View". 4. Select "WCM Wireless Control Module". 5. Select "Miscellaneous Functions". 6. Select WCM replaced. 7. Enter the PIN when prompted. 8. Verify the correct information. NOTE: If the ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle keys will need to be replaced and programmed to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: - PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2798 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection PCM/ECM Reprogramming 1 PCM / TCM Flash Procedure PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS PCM / TCM FLASH REPROGRAMING This procedure will need to be done when one or more of the following situations are true: 1. A vehicle's Powertrain control module (PCM) has been replaced. 2. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set "P1602 - PCM Not Programmed." 3. An updated calibration or software release is available for either the PCM or TCM ECUs. This procedure assumes that the StarSCAN and StarMOBILE devices are configured to your dealership's network with either a wired or wireless connection. The StarSCAN and StarMOBILE must also be running at the latest operating system and software release level. For more help on how to network your StarSCAN or StarMOBILE reference the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation or at www.dcctools.com, under the Download Center. Table Of Contents 1. SECTION 1 PCM / TCM FLASH PROCEDURE: (below) 2. REQUIRED TOOLS/EQUIPMENT: See: 2 Required Tools / Equipment 3. TECH TIPS and INFORMATION: See: 3 Tech Tips and Information 4. PARTS REQUIRED: See: 4 Parts Required SECTION 1 - PCM / TCM FLASH PROCEDURE If using StarSCAN or StarMOBILE Desktop Client. Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE Using StarSCAN or StarMOBILE Desktop Client (immediately below) If using StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode. Go To REPAIR PROCEDURE Using StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode REPAIR PROCEDURE Using StarSCAN or StarMOBILE Desktop Client NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood of the vehicle and install a battery charger. Verify that the charging rate provides a continuous charge of 13.2 - 13.5 volts. 2. Connect the StarSCAN or StarMOBILE to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 3. Power on the StarSCAN or StarMOBILE. If the StarMOBILE is being used, launch the StarMOBILE Desktop Client and connect to the appropriate StarMOBILE device. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. From the tool's Home screen, a. Select "ECU View" b. Select "PCM" c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the Flash PCM screen for later reference. 5. Program the ECU as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE at the Home screen, select "ECU View" b. Select "PCM" c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New File" and follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 4e, or by using Year/Model/Engine and appropriate emissions selection for the vehicle being worked on. NOTE: If you are not connected to the vehicle, you may also search for flash files by selecting the "Flash Download" button from the Home screen. g. Select "Download to Scantool" h. Once the download is complete, select "Close" and then "Back" i. Highlight the listed calibration, select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. j. When the PCM update is complete, select "OK" k. Verify that the part number at the top of the Flash PCM screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2799 6. Continue to SECTION 2 - ADDITIONAL PCM / TCM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES to complete the process if the ECU has been replaced. 7. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" (p/n 04275086AB) and attach near the VECI label (See SECTION 3 - AUTHORIZED MODIFCATION LABEL (shown below) for details). REPAIR PROCEDURE - Using StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode NOTE: StarMOBILE« Standalone Mode is an efficient way to flash ECUs without having direct access to a network connection. It involves first copying the flash file to the StarMOBILE device which DOES require a network connection. Once the file has been copied to the StarMOBILE device, it can be used in a Standalone mode to flash the ECU WITHOUT a network connection. NOTE: StarMOBILE« does not need to be connected to a vehicle when retrieving a flash file for Standalone Mode. 1. Power on the StarMOBILE. Launch the StarMOBILE Desktop Client and connect to the tool. 2. At the Home screen, select "ECU View" a. Select "PCM" b. Select "More Options' c. Select "ECU Flash" d. Select "Browse for New File" and follow the on screen instructions. e. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the current ECU part number, or by using Year/Model/Engine and appropriate emissions selection for the vehicle being worked on. NOTE: If you are not connected to the vehicle, you may also search for flash files by selecting the "Flash Download" button from the Home screen. 3. From the Flash File List, select the appropriate calibration for the PCM and select "Download to Client" 4. Once the download is complete, hit "OK" and then "Manage Files" Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2800 5. In the Manage Files screen, highlight the downloaded flash file and select "Copy to SM Device". A green checkmark should now appear in the On SM Device column. 6. Exit the StarMOBILE« Desktop Client application. 7. Open the hood of the vehicle and install a battery charger. Verify that the charging rate provides a continuous charge of 13.2 - 13.5 volts. 8. Connect the StarMOBILE to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 9. On the StarMOBILE device, select "Enter Standalone Diagnostic Mode" (use the right function key). NOTE: If a StarMOBILE« Desktop Client is still associated with the device, you will receive the following error: "Your StarMOBILE« device is currently locked by a pc named 'xxxxxxxx' on your network. To remove the lock, close its Desktop Client or reboot this device". 10. Program the ECU as follows: a. Select "ECU View" b. Select "PCM" c. Select "Flash ECU" Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2801 d. Record the ECU part number at the very top of the screen for later reference. e. Highlight the flash file that you want to use. Hit "SELECT" and then "OK". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Once the flash is complete, verify that the part number at the top of the Flash PCM screen has updated to the new part number. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2802 NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. 11. Continue to SECTION 2 - ADDITIONAL PCM / TCM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES to complete the process if the ECU has been replaced. 12. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" (p/n 04275086AB) and attach near the VECI label (See SECTION 3 - AUTHORIZED MODIFCATION LABEL for details). SECTION 2 - ADDITIONAL PCM / TCM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES Find the PCM/TCM Type for the vehicle (below), read and write down the steps, and then go to the step by step instructions (immediately following) for additional information on how to perform these procedures. If a NGC3 or NGC4 PCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. PCM Replaced - if WCM equipped 2. Learn ETC - if ETC equipped 3. Check PCM Odometer 4. Check PCM VIN - if NOT WCM equipped 5. Quicklearn - if EATX equipped If a GPEC PCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. If the vehicle is equipped with a CVT, ensure that the TCM has the latest software calibration available (if the vehicle is not equipped with a CVT, skip to Step 3). 2. PCM Replaced - if WCM equipped 3. Learn ETC 4. Check PCM Odometer 5. Check PCM VIN if NOT WCM equipped 6. TCM Quicklearn - if EATX equipped If a CVT TCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. Initialize CVT If an EGS TCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. Initialize EGS STEP-BY-STEP INSTRUCTIONS Check PCM Odometer From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View". - Select "PCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Check PCM Odometer" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish". Check PCM VIN From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "PCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Check PCM VIN" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Initialize CVT From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "TCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Initialize CVT" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Initialize EGS From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "TCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Initialize EGS" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Learn ETC From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "PCM" Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2803 - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Learn ETC" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" PCM Replaced The vehicle pin (Personal Identification Number) will be required to complete the routine. This information may be obtained in three ways: 1. The original selling invoice 2. DealerCONNECT > Parts > Key Codes 3. Contacting the District Manager. From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "WCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "PCM Replaced" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Quicklearn From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "PCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Quicklearn" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Update CVT TCM From the "Home" screen: - Select "ECU View" - Select "TCM" - Select "More Options" - Select "ECU Flash" - Select "Browse for New File" and follow the on screen instructions. - Highlight the appropriate calibration. - Select "Download to Scantool" - Once the download is complete, select "Close" and then "Back" - Highlight the listed calibration, select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. - When the TCM update is complete, select "OK" - Verify that the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen has updated to the latest level. SECTION 3 - AUTHORIZED MODIFCATION LABEL NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach near the VECI label. 1. Powertrain Control / Transmission Control Module Part Numbers (Insert P/Ns) Used 2. Change Authority: TSB XX--XX 3. Dealer Code: XXXXX 4. Date: XX-XX-XX 2 Required Tools / Equipment PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS REQUIRED TOOLS/EQUIPMENT: PART NUMBER StarSCAN .............................................................................................................................................. PART NUMBER StarMOBILE NPN Battery Charger ..................................................................................... .................................................................................... NPN Battery Charger CH9401 StarSCAN Tool Kit ............................................................................................................................................... CH9801 StarMOBIL Tool Kit Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2804 CH9404 StarSCAN Vehicle Cable ............................................................................................................................ CH9804 StarMOBILE Vehicle Cable ................................................................................................................. ....................................................................... TechCONNECT PC or equivalent 3 Tech Tips and Information PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS TECH TIPS and INFORMATION: 1. StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode is an efficient way to flash ECUs without having direct access to a network connection. It involves first copying the flash file to the StarMOBILE device which DOES require a network connection. Once the file has been copied to the StarMOBILE device, it can be used in a Standalone mode to flash the ECU WITHOUT a network connection. 2. To use the StarMOBILE in Pass-Through Mode requires that your StarMOBILE is connected to the dealerships network via a wired or wireless connection. For more information on how to use the StarMOBILE in Pass-Through Mode see the StarMOBILE training tutorials available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Training Aids' link or at www.dcctools.com, under the Training Aids' link. 3. StarMOBILE does not need to be connected to a vehicle when retrieving a flash file for Standalone Mode. 4. Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The ECU can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. 5. If the flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. 6. Due to the PCM / TCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other ECUs within the vehicle. Some DTCs may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. 7. When replacing a GPEC PCM for a vehicle that is equipped with a CVT, it is extremely important that the PCM and TCM both have the latest software calibrations. 8. Do not allow the battery charger to time out or the charging rate to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 9. The StarSCAN« and StarMOBILE« diagnostic tools fully support Internet connectivity and must be configured for your dealership's network. For help on setting up your StarSCAN / StarMOBILE« for the dealership's network, refer to the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation or at www.dcctools.com, under the download center. 10. The operating software in the StarSCAN and StarMOBILE must be programmed with the latest software release level. The software level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Desktop Client screens. For instructions on how to update your scan tool, refer to the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE Software Update guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation or at www.dcctools.com, under the download center. 4 Parts Required PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS PARTS REQUIRED Qty ....................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. 1 Part Number ................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... 04275086AB DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................. ................................................................ Authorized Modification Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a diagnostic scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use a diagnostic scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. The PCM (1) is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM connectors. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Carefully unplug the four 38-way connectors (2) from PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal > Page 2807 3. Remove three PCM mounting bolts (2), and position ground strap (4). Remove PCM from vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal > Page 2808 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a diagnostic scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use a diagnostic scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 1. Position PCM (3) to vehicle. 2. Install three PCM mounting bolts (2). 3. Tighten bolts to 3-5 Nm (30-40 in. lbs.). 4. Be sure ground strap (4) is secured both at bottom of PCM, and at inner-fender. 5. Check pin connectors in the PCM. Also check the four 38-way connectors (2) for corrosion or damage. Repair as necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal > Page 2809 6. Install the four 38-way connectors (2) to PCM. 7. Connect negative battery cable. 8. Use the diagnostic scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations The module assembly (5) contains the following components: An internal fuel filter See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Filter/Description and Operation/Fuel Filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2813 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2814 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Removal 2. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 3. Position Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 4. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 5. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring. 6. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 7. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal > Page 2817 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Whenever the fuel pump module is serviced, the rubber seal (gasket) must be replaced. 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Install fuel tank. See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2822 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2823 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2824 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2825 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2826 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts reference the figure numbers of the illustrations. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2827 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2828 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2829 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2830 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in Connector Replacement. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure)See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing. 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2831 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2832 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2833 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2834 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2835 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2836 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2837 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2838 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-18-02 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2839 8w-18-03 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2840 8w-18-04 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2841 8w-18-05 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2846 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2847 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2848 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2849 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2852 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2853 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2854 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 2855 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2858 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors from engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2861 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts (2) will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock senor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft.lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Automatic Shut Down Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2865 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 175 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A A955 ASD RELAY OUTPUT B INTERNAL FUSED B(+) C-D K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 2868 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2871 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area to the left of the speedometer needle hub. The MIL consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The MIL is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2876 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) emissions-related circuit or component malfunction. The MIL is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the PCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The MIL Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the MIL for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the indicator is illuminated for about 15 seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - MIL Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic MIL lamp-ON message from the PCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM message. For some DTCs, if a problem does not recur, the PCM will send a lamp-OFF message automatically. Other DTCs may require that a fault be repaired and the PCM be reset before a lamp-OFF message will be sent. For more information on the PCM, and the DTC set and reset parameters, See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM for 10 consecutive message cycles, the MIL is illuminated by the instrument cluster to indicate a loss of bus communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the MIL indicator will be turned ON during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the fuel and emissions system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the MIL or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection If the EMIC turns ON the MIL after the bulb test, it may indicate that a malfunction has occurred and that the fuel and emissions systems may require service. For proper diagnosis of the fuel and emissions systems, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to MIL operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Sensor-MAP Component ID: 273 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 2881 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 2882 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Manifold Air Pressure (MAP) Sensor The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor (7) is mounted into the front of the intake manifold (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2883 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 273 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2884 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2885 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The MAP sensor is used as an input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It contains a silicon based sensing unit to provide data on the manifold vacuum that draws the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The PCM requires this information to determine injector pulse width and spark advance. When manifold absolute pressure (MAP) equals Barometric pressure, the pulse width will be at maximum. A 5 volt reference is supplied from the PCM and returns a voltage signal to the PCM that reflects manifold pressure. The zero pressure reading is 0.5V and full scale is 4.5V. For a pressure swing of 0-15 psi, the voltage changes 4.0V. To operate the sensor, it is supplied a regulated 4.8 to 5.1 volts. Ground is provided through the low-noise, sensor return circuit at the PCM. The MAP sensor input is the number one contributor to fuel injector pulse width. The most important function of the MAP sensor is to determine barometric pressure. The PCM needs to know if the vehicle is at sea level or at a higher altitude, because the air density changes with altitude. It will also help to correct for varying barometric pressure. Barometric pressure and altitude have a direct inverse correlation; as altitude goes up, barometric goes down. At key-on, the PCM powers up and looks at MAP voltage, and based upon the voltage it sees, it knows the current barometric pressure (relative to altitude). Once the engine starts, the PCM looks at the voltage again, continuously every 12 milliseconds, and compares the current voltage to what it was at key-on. The difference between current voltage and what it was at key-on, is manifold vacuum. During key-on (engine not running) the sensor reads (updates) barometric pressure. A normal range can be obtained by monitoring a known good sensor. As the altitude increases, the air becomes thinner (less oxygen). If a vehicle is started and driven to a very different altitude than where it was at key-on, the barometric pressure needs to be updated. Any time the PCM sees Wide Open Throttle (WOT), based upon Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) angle and RPM, it will update barometric pressure in the MAP memory cell. With periodic updates, the PCM can make its calculations more effectively. The PCM uses the MAP sensor input to aid in calculating the following: - Manifold pressure - Barometric pressure - Engine load - Injector pulse-width - Spark-advance programs - Shift-point strategies (certain automatic transmissions only) - Idle speed - Decel fuel shutoff The MAP sensor signal is provided from a single piezoresistive element located in the center of a diaphragm. The element and diaphragm are both made of silicone. As manifold pressure changes, the diaphragm moves causing the element to deflect, which stresses the silicone. When silicone is exposed to stress, its resistance changes. As manifold vacuum increases, the MAP sensor input voltage decreases proportionally. The sensor also contains electronics that condition the signal and provide temperature compensation. The PCM recognizes a decrease in manifold pressure by monitoring a decrease in voltage from the reading stored in the barometric pressure memory cell. The MAP sensor is a linear sensor; meaning as pressure changes, voltage changes proportionately. The range of voltage output from the sensor is usually between 4.6 volts at sea level to as low as 0.3 volts at 26 in. of Hg. Barometric pressure is the pressure exerted by the atmosphere upon an object. At sea level on a standard day, no storm, barometric pressure is approximately 29.92 in Hg. For every 100 feet of altitude, barometric pressure drops 0.10 in. Hg. If a storm goes through, it can change barometric pressure from what should be present for that altitude. You should know what the average pressure and corresponding barometric pressure is for your area. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 3.7L/4.7L The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor (7) is mounted into the front of the intake manifold (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) at sensor. 2. Clean area around MAP sensor. 3. Remove one sensor mounting screw (8). 4. Remove MAP sensor from intake manifold by slipping it from locating pin (6). 5. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2888 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 3.7L/4.7L 1. Clean MAP sensor mounting hole at intake manifold. 2. Check MAP sensor o-ring seal (2) for cuts or tears. 3. Position MAP sensor into manifold by sliding sensor over locating pin (6). 4. Install mounting bolt (8). Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2893 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front Component ID: 275 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z43 18BK/LB GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2894 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2895 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2896 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Rear Component ID: 276 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z42 18BK/LG GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 18DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2897 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2898 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2899 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2900 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Front Component ID: 277 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 18BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2901 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2902 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2903 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2904 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Rear Component ID: 278 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 18BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2905 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2906 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 2907 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Component ID: 275 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z43 18BK/LB GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2910 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2911 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2912 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear Component ID: 276 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z42 18BK/LG GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 18DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2913 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2914 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2915 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2916 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front Component ID: 277 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 18BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2917 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2918 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2919 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2920 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear Component ID: 278 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 18BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2921 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2922 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 2923 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2924 Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID - Cylinder bank number one is the bank that contains number one cylinder. See: Ignition System/Firing Order Cylinder #1 on left side. Cylinder #1 on right side. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2. - A third oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 would be numbered O2 Sensor 1/3. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 2/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - If a V-6 or V-8 vehicle only uses one downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) it is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2, even if it uses two upstream HO2S. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2925 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. CAUTION: Never apply any type of grease to the oxygen sensor electrical connector, or attempt any soldering of the sensor wiring harness. WARNING: The exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes and catalytic converter become very hot during engine operation. Allow engine to cool before removing oxygen sensor. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. 4-Sensor System If removing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, remove the right-front tire/wheel, and then remove the plastic inner fender liner. 3. Disconnect wire connector from O2S sensor. CAUTION: When disconnecting sensor electrical connector, do not pull directly on wire going into sensor. 4. Remove O2S sensor with an oxygen sensor removal and installation tool. 5. Clean threads in exhaust pipe using appropriate tap. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2928 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Threads of new oxygen sensors are factory coated with anti-seize compound to aid in removal.DO NOT add any additional anti-seize compound to threads of a new oxygen sensor. 1. Install O2S sensor. Tighten to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) torque. 2. Connect O2S sensor wire connector. 3. 4-Sensor System: If installing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, install plastic inner fender liner, and right-front tire/wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Body Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Front Control Module (FCM) (2) is a micro controller based module located in the left front corner of the engine compartment. The FCM mates to the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) to form the Integrated Power Module (IPM). The IPM connects directly to the battery and provides the primary means of circuit protection and power distribution for all vehicle electrical systems. The front control module controls power to some of these vehicle systems electrical and electromechanical loads based on inputs received from hard wired switch inputs and data received on the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 2934 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION As messages are sent over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit, the Front Control Module (FCM) reads these messages and controls power to some of the vehicles electrical systems by completing the circuit to ground (low side driver) or completing the circuit to 12 volt power (high side driver). The following functions are controlled by the FCM: - Front turn signals - Stop, turn signal and tail lamps - Front and rear hazard warning lamps - Headlamps - Fog Lamps - Daytime running lamps - if equipped - Horn - Windshield and liftgate wiper and washer systems - Transfer case shifting - Trailer tow wiring output - Rear window defroster power and timing The FCM provides the following features for the above function: - It operates the electric transfer case mechanism, replacing a stand-alone module. - It flashes lamps in response to turn signal, Remote Keyless Entry and Vehicle Theft Security Alarm inputs. - It sounds the horn in response to Remote Keyless Entry and Vehicle Theft Security Alarm inputs. - It turns off the horn in the event of excessively long operation that could otherwise damage the horn. - It minimized voltage variations to the headlamps to extend bulb life and to equalize the light output from the lamps, which might otherwise differ due to variations in wiring resistance. - If the headlamps are left on, it automatically turns them off after eight minutes to protect the battery from discharge. - It monitors battery voltage and turns off non-essential functions such as the fog lamps, rear window defogger and heated seats if necessary to conserve battery power. - It operates the high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity by pulse-width modulation of the power supply to provide the daytime running lamps. - It provides the variable delay intermittent windshield and liftgate wiper time delay features, and the vehicle speed sensitive windshield wiper delay variation. - It acts as a gateway between the CAN-C network for critical powertrain and anti-lock brake systems and the CAN-B network for body and interior modules. For example it collects battery temperature data and relays it to the PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Body Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) from the engine compartment, See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Removal. 3. Remove the four fasteners (2) securing the Front Control Module (FCM) (1) to the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (3). 4. Separate the FCM from the PDC by pulling the two straight away from each other to disengage the electrical connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 2937 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (3) to the Front Control Module (FCM) by lining up the electrical connector and pushing the two together. 2. Install the four fasteners (2) securing the FCM (1) to the PDC (3). 3. Install the Integrated Power Module (IPM), See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Installation. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations Engine Control Module: Locations Component ID: 161 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-- 8-9 Z913 16BK GROUND 10 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z937 16BK GROUND 19 - 20 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 20 G6 18VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A803 18GY/RD GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 - 29 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 30 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2941 36 - 37 - 38 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2942 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2943 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20PK/GY TP SENSOR RETURN 16 - 17 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2944 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2945 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2946 7-8-9 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 18VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V72 18VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 22 - 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 - 28 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 - 34 V71 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SWITCH SIGNAL 36 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2947 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2948 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3-4 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2949 6 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 7-8 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 16BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 20YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/VT 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 20YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2950 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2951 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3-4-5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2952 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 7-8-9-10 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 14BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 - 21 - 22 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/PK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 18YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2953 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2954 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2955 Engine Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 161 Component : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C1 Color : BLACK/BLACK # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2-3 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 4 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 5 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 6-7-- 8-9 Z913 16BK GROUND 10 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 11 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 12 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 Z937 16BK GROUND 19 - 20 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 20 G6 18VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 A803 18GY/RD GEN SENSE 25 - 26 - 27 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 28 - 29 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 30 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 31 K141 20DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL 32 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 33 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL 34 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 35 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2956 36 - 37 - 38 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2957 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK/ORANGE # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 3 K15 18DB COIL CONTROL NO. 4 4 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 5 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 6 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2958 7 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 8 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL 9 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 10 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 11 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 12 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 13 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 14 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 15 K922 20PK/GY TP SENSOR RETURN 16 - 17 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 18 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 19 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 20 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 21 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL 22 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 23 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 24 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN 25 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 28 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 29 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 30 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 31 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL 32 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 33 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL 34 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL 35 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 36 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN 38 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2959 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2960 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C3 Color : BLACK/NATURAL # of pins : 38 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2961 7-8-9 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 10 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 11 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 15 V937 18VT/BR S/C SWITCH RETURN 16 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 17 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 18 V72 18VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 19 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 20 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL 21 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 22 - 23 B29 20DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 24 - 25 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 26 - 27 - 28 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 29 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 30 - 31 - 32 - 33 - 34 V71 20VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 35 K107 20VT/WT ESM SWITCH SIGNAL 36 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 37 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL 38 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2962 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2963 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 3-4 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2964 6 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 7-8 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 9-10 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 16BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 20YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 20YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 T48 20BR/VT 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 21 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 22 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 20YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2965 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2966 Connector: Name : MODULE-POWERTRAIN CONTROL C4 Color : BLACK/GREEN # of pins : 38 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3-4-5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2967 6 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 7-8-9-10 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 11 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 12 Z908 16BK GROUND 13 Z977 14BK GROUND 14 Z904 20BK GROUND 15 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 16 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 17 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 18 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 19 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 20 - 21 - 22 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 29 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 30 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 31 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 32 T14 20YL/PK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 33 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 34 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND 35 T54 18YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 36 - - 37 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 38 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2968 Component Location - 9 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2969 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Description Description DESCRIPTION The PCM (1) is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. Description - Modes Of Operation DESCRIPTION - MODES OF OPERATION As input signals to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the output devices. The PCM will operate in two different modes: Open Loop and Closed Loop. During Open Loop modes, the PCM receives input signals and responds only according to preset PCM programming. Input from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored during Open Loop modes. During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates to the PCM whether or not the calculated injector pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1 part fuel. By monitoring the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, the PCM can fine tune the injector pulse width. This is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined with low emission engine performance. The fuel injection system has the following modes of operation: - Ignition switch ON - Engine start-up (crank) - Engine warm-up - Idle - Cruise - Acceleration - Deceleration - Wide open throttle (WOT) - Ignition switch OFF The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide open throttle modes are Open Loop modes. The idle and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating temperature) are Closed Loop modes. IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system is activated by the ignition switch, the following actions occur: - The PCM pre-positions the idle air control (IAC) motor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2972 - The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel strategy. - The PCM monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy based on this input. - Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is monitored. - Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored. - The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by the PCM for approximately three seconds. - The fuel pump is energized through the fuel pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate for approximately three seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. - The O2S sensor heater element is energized via the ASD relay. The O2S sensor input is not used by the PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode of operation. ENGINE START-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions occur when the starter motor is engaged. The PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Starter motor relay - Camshaft position sensor signal The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor. If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position sensor signal within 3 seconds of cranking the engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system. The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through the fuel pump relay. Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM determines the proper ignition timing according to input received from the crankshaft position sensor. ENGINE WARM-UP MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm-up, the PCM receives inputs from: - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Based on these inputs the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition timing. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This is done if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. - When engine has reached operating temperature, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode and go into closed loop operation. IDLE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2973 - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Battery voltage - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing and decreasing spark advance. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. CRUISE MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the PCM receives inputs from: - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Oxygen (O2S) sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust the injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. - The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and adjusts air-fuel ratio. It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. - The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and requested by the A/C thermostat. ACCELERATION MODE This is an Open Loop mode. The PCM recognizes an abrupt increase in throttle position or MAP pressure as a demand for increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The PCM increases injector pulse width in response to increased throttle opening. DECELERATION MODE When the engine is at operating temperature, this is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) - Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) - Battery voltage - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Crankshaft position sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal - Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal-auto. trans. only) - Vehicle speed sensor Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2974 If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM will ignore the oxygen sensor input signal. The PCM will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not supply a ground to the injectors. If a hard deceleration does not exist, the PCM will determine the proper injector pulse width and continue injection. Based on the above inputs, the PCM will adjust engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open throttle operation, the PCM receives the following inputs. - Battery voltage - Crankshaft position sensor - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Throttle position sensor (TPS) - Camshaft position sensor signal During wide open throttle conditions, the following occurs: - Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control the injection sequence and injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit to each individual injector on and off. The PCM ignores the oxygen sensor input signal and provides a predetermined amount of additional fuel. This is done by adjusting injector pulse width. - The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the ground path to the coil on and off. IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE When ignition switch is turned to OFF position, the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil, ASD relay and fuel pump relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2975 Engine Control Module: Description and Operation Powertrain Control Module - Operation OPERATION The PCM is a pre-programmed, microprocessor digital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel ratio, emission control devices, charging system, certain transmission features, speed control, air conditioning compressor clutch engagement and idle speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to meet changing operating conditions. The PCM receives input signals from various switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the PCM regulates various engine and vehicle operations through different system components. These components are referred to as Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that provide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Inputs. The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine rpm, manifold absolute pressure, engine coolant temperature, throttle position, transmission gear selection (automatic transmission), vehicle speed and the brake switch. The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, vehicle speed, transmission gear selection, engine coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from the air conditioning clutch switch and brake switch. Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the generator charge rate through control of the generator field and provides speed control operation. NOTE: PCM Inputs: - Accelerator pedal position sensor (if equipped) - A/C request (if equipped with factory A/C) - A/C select (if equipped with factory A/C) - Auto shutdown (ASD) sense - Battery temperature - Battery voltage - Brake switch - CAN bus (+) circuits - CAN bus (-) circuits - Camshaft position sensor signal - Clutch Interlock Switch (if equipped) - Crankshaft position sensor - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - EGR position sensor (if equipped) - Engine coolant temperature sensor - Fuel level - Generator (battery voltage) output - Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/crank/run position) - Intake manifold air temperature sensor - Knock sensor(s) (if equipped) - Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped) - Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor - Oil pressure sensor - Output shaft speed sensor - Overdrive/override switch - Oxygen sensors - Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only) - Power ground - Power steering pressure switch (if equipped) - Sensor return - Signal ground - Speed control multiplexed single wire input - Throttle position sensor - Transmission governor pressure sensor - Transmission output speed sensor - Transmission temperature sensor - Vehicle speed inputs from ABS or RWAL system NOTE: PCM Outputs: - A/C clutch relay Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Powertrain Control Module - Description > Page 2976 - Auto shutdown (ASD) relay - CAN bus (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltmeter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp. gauge and speed control warn. lamp - Data link connection for diagnostic scan tool - Double start override (if equipped) - EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped) - Electronic throttle control - EVAP canister purge solenoid - Five volt sensor supply (primary) - Five volt sensor supply (secondary) - Fuel injectors - Fuel pump relay - Generator field driver (-) - Generator field driver (+) - Generator lamp (if equipped) - Idle air control (IAC) motor - Ignition coil(s) - CAN bus circuits - Leak detection pump (if equipped) - Natural Vacuum Leak Detection (NVLD) pump (if equipped) - Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Overdrive indicator lamp (if equipped) - Radiator cooling fan (if equipped) - Speed control vacuum solenoid - Speed control vent solenoid - Starter relay - Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through CAN bus circuits. - Transmission convertor clutch circuit - Transmission 3-4 shift solenoid - Transmission relay - Transmission temperature lamp (if equipped) - Transmission variable force solenoid Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection SKREEM Programming SKREEM PROGRAMMING When a Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for a gasoline engine, and the Sentry Key Remote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Wireless Control Module/WCM) on vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) are replaced at the same time, perform the following steps in order: NOTE: If the PCM and the SKREEM are replaced at the same time, program the PCM VIN into the PCM first. 1. If applicable first replace the PCM/ECM with the original WCM still connected to the vehicle. 2. Program the new PCM/ECM. (This will ensure the Secret Key Transfer from the original WCM into the new PCM/ECM). 3. Now replace and program the WCM. This will retain the Secret Key from the PCM/ECM back into the new WCM. 4. With the scan tool, select Miscellaneous Functions, WCM/Wireless Control Module. Then select the desired procedure and follow the display on the scan tool. 5. If the vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System program the Placard Pressure Values into the WCM/SKREEM. 6. Ensure all the customer's keys have been programmed into the new module if necessary. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. PROGRAMMING THE SKREEM The SKIS Secret Key is an ID code that is unique to each SKREEM/WCM. This code is programmed and stored in the SKREEM/WCM, the PCM/ECM, and each ignition key transponder chip. When the PCM/ECM or SKREEM/WCM is replaced, it is necessary to program the Secret Key into the new module using a diagnostic scan tool. Follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PCM REPLACED , ECM REPLACED , WCM REPLACED , or GATEWAY REPLACED under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item as appropriate. NOTE: Programming the PCM/ECM or SKREEM is done using a diagnostic scan tool and a PIN to enter secure access mode. If three attempts are made to enter secure access mode using an incorrect PIN, secure access mode will be locked out for one hour. To exit this lockout mode, turn the ignition to the RUN position for one hour then enter the correct PIN. Be certain that all accessories are turned OFF. Also monitor the battery state and connect a battery charger if necessary. NOTE: Before replacing the ECU for a failed driver, control circuit or ground circuit, be sure to check the related component/circuit integrity for failures not detected due to a double fault in the circuit. Most ECM driver/control circuit failures are caused by internal component failures (i.e. relay and solenoids) and shorted circuits (i.e. pull-ups, drivers and switched circuits). These failures are difficult to detect when a double fault has occurred and only one DTC has set. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When a ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. ECM/SKIM/WCM PROGRAMMING When an ECM (Bosch) and the SKIM are replaced at the same time perform the following steps in order: 1. Program the new SKIM 2. Program the new ECM (Bosch) 3. Replace all ignition keys and program them to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING THE SKIM CAUTION: Read all notes and cautions for programming procedures. 1. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle. 2. Connect the StarSCAN(R). CAUTION: If the ECM/PCM and SKREEM/WCM are replaced at the same time, the ECM/PCM MUST be programmed before the SKREEM/WCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2979 3. Select "ECU View". 4. Select "WCM Wireless Control Module". 5. Select "Miscellaneous Functions". 6. Select WCM replaced. 7. Enter the PIN when prompted. 8. Verify the correct information. NOTE: If the ECM and the SKIM are replaced at the same time, all vehicle keys will need to be replaced and programmed to the new SKIM. PROGRAMMING IGNITION KEYS TO THE SKREEM Each ignition key transponder also has a unique ID code that is assigned at the time the key is manufactured. When a key is programmed into the SKREEM/WCM, the transponder ID code is learned by the module and the transponder acquires the unique Secret Key ID code from the SKREEM/WCM. To program ignition keys into the SKREEM/WCM, follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic scan tool for PROGRAM IGNITION KEYS OR KEY FOBS under MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTIONS for the WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE/WCM menu item. NOTE: If the original keys do not successfully program to the new SKREEM after the proper procedures are followed correctly, programming new keys will be necessary. NOTE: A maximum of eight keys can be learned to each SKREEM. Once a key is learned to a SKREEM, that key has acquired the Secret Key for that SKREEM and cannot be transferred to any other SKREEM or vehicle. If ignition key programming is unsuccessful, the scan tool will display one of the following error messages: - PROGRAMMING NOT ATTEMPTED - The scan tool attempts to read the programmed key status and there are no keys programmed into SKREEM memory. - PROGRAMMING KEY FAILED (POSSIBLE USED KEY FROM WRONG VEHICLE) - SKREEM is unable to program an ignition key transponder due to one of the following: - The ignition key transponder is ineffective. - The ignition key transponder is or has been already programmed to another vehicle. - 8 KEYS ALREADY LEARNED, PROGRAMMING NOT DONE - The SKREEM transponder ID memory is full. - LEARNED KEY IN IGNITION - The ID for the ignition key transponder currently in the ignition lock cylinder is already programmed into SKREEM memory. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2980 Engine Control Module: Testing and Inspection PCM/ECM Reprogramming 1 PCM / TCM Flash Procedure PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS PCM / TCM FLASH REPROGRAMING This procedure will need to be done when one or more of the following situations are true: 1. A vehicle's Powertrain control module (PCM) has been replaced. 2. A diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set "P1602 - PCM Not Programmed." 3. An updated calibration or software release is available for either the PCM or TCM ECUs. This procedure assumes that the StarSCAN and StarMOBILE devices are configured to your dealership's network with either a wired or wireless connection. The StarSCAN and StarMOBILE must also be running at the latest operating system and software release level. For more help on how to network your StarSCAN or StarMOBILE reference the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation or at www.dcctools.com, under the Download Center. Table Of Contents 1. SECTION 1 PCM / TCM FLASH PROCEDURE: (below) 2. REQUIRED TOOLS/EQUIPMENT: See: 2 Required Tools / Equipment 3. TECH TIPS and INFORMATION: See: 3 Tech Tips and Information 4. PARTS REQUIRED: See: 4 Parts Required SECTION 1 - PCM / TCM FLASH PROCEDURE If using StarSCAN or StarMOBILE Desktop Client. Go to REPAIR PROCEDURE Using StarSCAN or StarMOBILE Desktop Client (immediately below) If using StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode. Go To REPAIR PROCEDURE Using StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode REPAIR PROCEDURE Using StarSCAN or StarMOBILE Desktop Client NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood of the vehicle and install a battery charger. Verify that the charging rate provides a continuous charge of 13.2 - 13.5 volts. 2. Connect the StarSCAN or StarMOBILE to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 3. Power on the StarSCAN or StarMOBILE. If the StarMOBILE is being used, launch the StarMOBILE Desktop Client and connect to the appropriate StarMOBILE device. 4. Retrieve the old ECU part number. From the tool's Home screen, a. Select "ECU View" b. Select "PCM" c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Record the part number at the top of the Flash PCM screen for later reference. 5. Program the ECU as follows: a. Using the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE at the Home screen, select "ECU View" b. Select "PCM" c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash" e. Select "Browse for New File" and follow the on screen instructions. f. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the part number recorded in Step 4e, or by using Year/Model/Engine and appropriate emissions selection for the vehicle being worked on. NOTE: If you are not connected to the vehicle, you may also search for flash files by selecting the "Flash Download" button from the Home screen. g. Select "Download to Scantool" h. Once the download is complete, select "Close" and then "Back" i. Highlight the listed calibration, select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. j. When the PCM update is complete, select "OK" k. Verify that the part number at the top of the Flash PCM screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2981 6. Continue to SECTION 2 - ADDITIONAL PCM / TCM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES to complete the process if the ECU has been replaced. 7. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" (p/n 04275086AB) and attach near the VECI label (See SECTION 3 - AUTHORIZED MODIFCATION LABEL (shown below) for details). REPAIR PROCEDURE - Using StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode NOTE: StarMOBILE« Standalone Mode is an efficient way to flash ECUs without having direct access to a network connection. It involves first copying the flash file to the StarMOBILE device which DOES require a network connection. Once the file has been copied to the StarMOBILE device, it can be used in a Standalone mode to flash the ECU WITHOUT a network connection. NOTE: StarMOBILE« does not need to be connected to a vehicle when retrieving a flash file for Standalone Mode. 1. Power on the StarMOBILE. Launch the StarMOBILE Desktop Client and connect to the tool. 2. At the Home screen, select "ECU View" a. Select "PCM" b. Select "More Options' c. Select "ECU Flash" d. Select "Browse for New File" and follow the on screen instructions. e. Highlight the appropriate calibration based on the current ECU part number, or by using Year/Model/Engine and appropriate emissions selection for the vehicle being worked on. NOTE: If you are not connected to the vehicle, you may also search for flash files by selecting the "Flash Download" button from the Home screen. 3. From the Flash File List, select the appropriate calibration for the PCM and select "Download to Client" 4. Once the download is complete, hit "OK" and then "Manage Files" Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2982 5. In the Manage Files screen, highlight the downloaded flash file and select "Copy to SM Device". A green checkmark should now appear in the On SM Device column. 6. Exit the StarMOBILE« Desktop Client application. 7. Open the hood of the vehicle and install a battery charger. Verify that the charging rate provides a continuous charge of 13.2 - 13.5 volts. 8. Connect the StarMOBILE to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 9. On the StarMOBILE device, select "Enter Standalone Diagnostic Mode" (use the right function key). NOTE: If a StarMOBILE« Desktop Client is still associated with the device, you will receive the following error: "Your StarMOBILE« device is currently locked by a pc named 'xxxxxxxx' on your network. To remove the lock, close its Desktop Client or reboot this device". 10. Program the ECU as follows: a. Select "ECU View" b. Select "PCM" c. Select "Flash ECU" Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2983 d. Record the ECU part number at the very top of the screen for later reference. e. Highlight the flash file that you want to use. Hit "SELECT" and then "OK". Follow the on screen instructions. f. Once the flash is complete, verify that the part number at the top of the Flash PCM screen has updated to the new part number. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2984 NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. 11. Continue to SECTION 2 - ADDITIONAL PCM / TCM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES to complete the process if the ECU has been replaced. 12. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" (p/n 04275086AB) and attach near the VECI label (See SECTION 3 - AUTHORIZED MODIFCATION LABEL for details). SECTION 2 - ADDITIONAL PCM / TCM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES Find the PCM/TCM Type for the vehicle (below), read and write down the steps, and then go to the step by step instructions (immediately following) for additional information on how to perform these procedures. If a NGC3 or NGC4 PCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. PCM Replaced - if WCM equipped 2. Learn ETC - if ETC equipped 3. Check PCM Odometer 4. Check PCM VIN - if NOT WCM equipped 5. Quicklearn - if EATX equipped If a GPEC PCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. If the vehicle is equipped with a CVT, ensure that the TCM has the latest software calibration available (if the vehicle is not equipped with a CVT, skip to Step 3). 2. PCM Replaced - if WCM equipped 3. Learn ETC 4. Check PCM Odometer 5. Check PCM VIN if NOT WCM equipped 6. TCM Quicklearn - if EATX equipped If a CVT TCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. Initialize CVT If an EGS TCM was replaced, perform the following additional steps and/or routines: 1. Initialize EGS STEP-BY-STEP INSTRUCTIONS Check PCM Odometer From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View". - Select "PCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Check PCM Odometer" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish". Check PCM VIN From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "PCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Check PCM VIN" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Initialize CVT From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "TCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Initialize CVT" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Initialize EGS From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "TCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Initialize EGS" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Learn ETC From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "PCM" Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2985 - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Learn ETC" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" PCM Replaced The vehicle pin (Personal Identification Number) will be required to complete the routine. This information may be obtained in three ways: 1. The original selling invoice 2. DealerCONNECT > Parts > Key Codes 3. Contacting the District Manager. From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "WCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "PCM Replaced" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Quicklearn From the "Home" screen, select "ECU View" - Select "PCM" - Select "Misc. Functions" - Select "Quicklearn" and follow the on screen instructions. - When complete, select "Finish" Update CVT TCM From the "Home" screen: - Select "ECU View" - Select "TCM" - Select "More Options" - Select "ECU Flash" - Select "Browse for New File" and follow the on screen instructions. - Highlight the appropriate calibration. - Select "Download to Scantool" - Once the download is complete, select "Close" and then "Back" - Highlight the listed calibration, select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. - When the TCM update is complete, select "OK" - Verify that the part number at the top of the "Flash TCM" screen has updated to the latest level. SECTION 3 - AUTHORIZED MODIFCATION LABEL NOTE: The following step is required by law when reprogramming a PCM and/or TCM. Type the necessary information on the "Authorized Modification Label" and attach near the VECI label. 1. Powertrain Control / Transmission Control Module Part Numbers (Insert P/Ns) Used 2. Change Authority: TSB XX--XX 3. Dealer Code: XXXXX 4. Date: XX-XX-XX 2 Required Tools / Equipment PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS REQUIRED TOOLS/EQUIPMENT: PART NUMBER StarSCAN .............................................................................................................................................. PART NUMBER StarMOBILE NPN Battery Charger ..................................................................................... .................................................................................... NPN Battery Charger CH9401 StarSCAN Tool Kit ............................................................................................................................................... CH9801 StarMOBIL Tool Kit Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > SKREEM Programming > Page 2986 CH9404 StarSCAN Vehicle Cable ............................................................................................................................ CH9804 StarMOBILE Vehicle Cable ................................................................................................................. ....................................................................... TechCONNECT PC or equivalent 3 Tech Tips and Information PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS TECH TIPS and INFORMATION: 1. StarMOBILE Standalone Diagnostic Mode is an efficient way to flash ECUs without having direct access to a network connection. It involves first copying the flash file to the StarMOBILE device which DOES require a network connection. Once the file has been copied to the StarMOBILE device, it can be used in a Standalone mode to flash the ECU WITHOUT a network connection. 2. To use the StarMOBILE in Pass-Through Mode requires that your StarMOBILE is connected to the dealerships network via a wired or wireless connection. For more information on how to use the StarMOBILE in Pass-Through Mode see the StarMOBILE training tutorials available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Training Aids' link or at www.dcctools.com, under the Training Aids' link. 3. StarMOBILE does not need to be connected to a vehicle when retrieving a flash file for Standalone Mode. 4. Extreme care must be taken when programming a calibration into a generic PCM. Do not randomly select a calibration. Once a calibration is selected and programmed, the controller cannot be reprogrammed to a different calibration. The ECU can only be reprogrammed to a more recent version of that calibration. 5. If the flash process is interrupted or aborted, the flash should be restarted. 6. Due to the PCM / TCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other ECUs within the vehicle. Some DTCs may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. 7. When replacing a GPEC PCM for a vehicle that is equipped with a CVT, it is extremely important that the PCM and TCM both have the latest software calibrations. 8. Do not allow the battery charger to time out or the charging rate to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 9. The StarSCAN« and StarMOBILE« diagnostic tools fully support Internet connectivity and must be configured for your dealership's network. For help on setting up your StarSCAN / StarMOBILE« for the dealership's network, refer to the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE Quick Start Networking Guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation or at www.dcctools.com, under the download center. 10. The operating software in the StarSCAN and StarMOBILE must be programmed with the latest software release level. The software level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Desktop Client screens. For instructions on how to update your scan tool, refer to the StarSCAN / StarMOBILE Software Update guide available on DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE Tools > Online Documentation or at www.dcctools.com, under the download center. 4 Parts Required PCM/ECM REPROGRAMMING - GAS PARTS REQUIRED Qty ....................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................. 1 Part Number ................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... 04275086AB DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................. ................................................................ Authorized Modification Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a diagnostic scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use a diagnostic scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. The PCM (1) is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM connectors. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Carefully unplug the four 38-way connectors (2) from PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal > Page 2989 3. Remove three PCM mounting bolts (2), and position ground strap (4). Remove PCM from vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal > Page 2990 Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Powertrain Control Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Certain ABS systems rely on having the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) broadcast the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) over the bus network. To prevent problems of DTCs and other items related to the VIN broadcast, it is recommend that you disconnect the ABS CAB (controller) temporarily when replacing the PCM. Once the PCM is replaced, write the VIN to the PCM using a diagnostic scan tool. This is done from the engine main menu. Arrow over to the second page to "1. Miscellaneous". Select "Check VIN" from the choices. Make sure it has the correct VIN entered before continuing. When the VIN is complete, turn off the ignition key and reconnect the ABS module connector. This will prevent the setting of DTCs and other items associated with the lack of a VIN detected when you turn the key ON after replacing the PCM. CAUTION: Use a diagnostic scan tool to reprogram the new PCM with the vehicles original identification number (VIN) and the vehicles original mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 1. Position PCM (3) to vehicle. 2. Install three PCM mounting bolts (2). 3. Tighten bolts to 3-5 Nm (30-40 in. lbs.). 4. Be sure ground strap (4) is secured both at bottom of PCM, and at inner-fender. 5. Check pin connectors in the PCM. Also check the four 38-way connectors (2) for corrosion or damage. Repair as necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Powertrain Control Module - Removal > Page 2991 6. Install the four 38-way connectors (2) to PCM. 7. Connect negative battery cable. 8. Use the diagnostic scan tool to reprogram new PCM with vehicles original Identification Number (VIN) and original vehicle mileage. If this step is not done, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Automatic Shut Down Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2995 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 175 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A A955 ASD RELAY OUTPUT B INTERNAL FUSED B(+) C-D K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 2998 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3001 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3006 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3007 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3008 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3012 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3013 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3014 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3015 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3016 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3019 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 3022 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to o-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (3), be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs). 5. Connect electrical connector (4) to sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Locations Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3026 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3027 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Diagrams Component ID: 264 Component : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K2 20VT/OR ECT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3028 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3032 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3033 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3034 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3035 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3036 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3037 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3038 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3039 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3040 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3043 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor (3) is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 4.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 3046 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (2) , be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Level Sensor: Locations The module assembly (5) contains the following components: An internal fuel filter See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Filter/Description and Operation/Fuel Filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3050 Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3051 procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Removal 2. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 3. Position Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 4. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 5. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring. 6. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 7. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal > Page 3054 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Whenever the fuel pump module is serviced, the rubber seal (gasket) must be replaced. 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Install fuel tank. See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Component Locations 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3059 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Connector Locations Component ID: 269 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3060 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Component Locations > Page 3061 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3062 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 269 Component : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K21 20BR/WT IAT SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3063 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3064 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3065 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The IAT sensor provides an input voltage to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating the density of the air entering the intake manifold based upon intake manifold temperature. At key-on, a 5-volt power circuit is supplied to the sensor from the PCM. The sensor is grounded at the PCM through a low-noise, sensor-return circuit. The PCM uses this input to calculate the following: - Injector pulse-width - Adjustment of spark timing (to help prevent spark knock with high intake manifold air-charge temperatures) The resistance values of the IAT sensor is the same as for the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L V-8 The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor (1) is located near the throttle body. 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from IAT sensor. 2. Clean dirt from sensor base. 3. Gently lift on small plastic release tab (3) and rotate sensor about 1/4 turn counter-clockwise for removal. 4. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3068 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2). 2. Clean sensor mounting hole. 3. Position sensor (1) into base and rotate clockwise until past release tab (3). 4. Install electrical connector (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3073 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3074 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3075 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3076 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3079 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3080 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3081 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3082 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3085 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors from engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3088 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts (2) will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock senor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft.lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Sensor-MAP Component ID: 273 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 3093 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-MAP > Page 3094 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations Manifold Air Pressure (MAP) Sensor The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor (7) is mounted into the front of the intake manifold (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3095 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 273 Component : SENSOR-MAP Connector: Name : SENSOR-MAP Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K1 20VT/BR MAP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3096 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3097 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The MAP sensor is used as an input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It contains a silicon based sensing unit to provide data on the manifold vacuum that draws the air/fuel mixture into the combustion chamber. The PCM requires this information to determine injector pulse width and spark advance. When manifold absolute pressure (MAP) equals Barometric pressure, the pulse width will be at maximum. A 5 volt reference is supplied from the PCM and returns a voltage signal to the PCM that reflects manifold pressure. The zero pressure reading is 0.5V and full scale is 4.5V. For a pressure swing of 0-15 psi, the voltage changes 4.0V. To operate the sensor, it is supplied a regulated 4.8 to 5.1 volts. Ground is provided through the low-noise, sensor return circuit at the PCM. The MAP sensor input is the number one contributor to fuel injector pulse width. The most important function of the MAP sensor is to determine barometric pressure. The PCM needs to know if the vehicle is at sea level or at a higher altitude, because the air density changes with altitude. It will also help to correct for varying barometric pressure. Barometric pressure and altitude have a direct inverse correlation; as altitude goes up, barometric goes down. At key-on, the PCM powers up and looks at MAP voltage, and based upon the voltage it sees, it knows the current barometric pressure (relative to altitude). Once the engine starts, the PCM looks at the voltage again, continuously every 12 milliseconds, and compares the current voltage to what it was at key-on. The difference between current voltage and what it was at key-on, is manifold vacuum. During key-on (engine not running) the sensor reads (updates) barometric pressure. A normal range can be obtained by monitoring a known good sensor. As the altitude increases, the air becomes thinner (less oxygen). If a vehicle is started and driven to a very different altitude than where it was at key-on, the barometric pressure needs to be updated. Any time the PCM sees Wide Open Throttle (WOT), based upon Throttle Position Sensor (TPS) angle and RPM, it will update barometric pressure in the MAP memory cell. With periodic updates, the PCM can make its calculations more effectively. The PCM uses the MAP sensor input to aid in calculating the following: - Manifold pressure - Barometric pressure - Engine load - Injector pulse-width - Spark-advance programs - Shift-point strategies (certain automatic transmissions only) - Idle speed - Decel fuel shutoff The MAP sensor signal is provided from a single piezoresistive element located in the center of a diaphragm. The element and diaphragm are both made of silicone. As manifold pressure changes, the diaphragm moves causing the element to deflect, which stresses the silicone. When silicone is exposed to stress, its resistance changes. As manifold vacuum increases, the MAP sensor input voltage decreases proportionally. The sensor also contains electronics that condition the signal and provide temperature compensation. The PCM recognizes a decrease in manifold pressure by monitoring a decrease in voltage from the reading stored in the barometric pressure memory cell. The MAP sensor is a linear sensor; meaning as pressure changes, voltage changes proportionately. The range of voltage output from the sensor is usually between 4.6 volts at sea level to as low as 0.3 volts at 26 in. of Hg. Barometric pressure is the pressure exerted by the atmosphere upon an object. At sea level on a standard day, no storm, barometric pressure is approximately 29.92 in Hg. For every 100 feet of altitude, barometric pressure drops 0.10 in. Hg. If a storm goes through, it can change barometric pressure from what should be present for that altitude. You should know what the average pressure and corresponding barometric pressure is for your area. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 3.7L/4.7L The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor (7) is mounted into the front of the intake manifold (1). 1. Disconnect electrical connector (2) at sensor. 2. Clean area around MAP sensor. 3. Remove one sensor mounting screw (8). 4. Remove MAP sensor from intake manifold by slipping it from locating pin (6). 5. Check condition of sensor o-ring (2) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3100 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 3.7L/4.7L 1. Clean MAP sensor mounting hole at intake manifold. 2. Check MAP sensor o-ring seal (2) for cuts or tears. 3. Position MAP sensor into manifold by sliding sensor over locating pin (6). 4. Install mounting bolt (8). Tighten to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3105 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Front Component ID: 275 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z43 18BK/LB GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3106 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3107 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3108 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Left Rear Component ID: 276 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z42 18BK/LG GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 18DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3109 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3110 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3111 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3112 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Front Component ID: 277 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 18BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3113 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3114 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3115 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3116 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Sensor - Oxygen-Right Rear Component ID: 278 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 18BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3117 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3118 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor - Oxygen > Page 3119 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front Component ID: 275 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K99 18BR/TN O2 1/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z43 18BK/LB GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K41 20DB/LB O2 1/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3122 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3123 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3124 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Left Rear Component ID: 276 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-LEFT REAR Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K299 18BR/OR O2 1/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z42 18BK/LG GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K141 18DB/YL O2 1/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3125 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3126 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3127 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3128 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Front Component ID: 277 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K199 18BR/VT O2 2/1 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z934 18BK GROUND 3 K902 20BR/DG O2 RETURN (UPSTREAM) 4 K43 20DB/LG O2 2/1 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3129 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3130 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3131 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3132 Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Oxygen-Right Rear Component ID: 278 Component : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-OXYGEN-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 K399 18BR/GY O2 2/2 HEATER CONTROL 2 Z992 18BK GROUND 3 K904 20DB/DG O2 RETURN (DOWNSTREAM) 4 K243 20BR O2 2/2 SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3133 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3134 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Oxygen-Left Front > Page 3135 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3136 Oxygen Sensor: Application and ID - Cylinder bank number one is the bank that contains number one cylinder. See: Ignition System/Firing Order Cylinder #1 on left side. Cylinder #1 on right side. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2. - A third oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 1 would be numbered O2 Sensor 1/3. - The first oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 2/1. - The second oxygen sensor in cylinder bank # 2 is numbered O2 Sensor 1/1. - If a V-6 or V-8 vehicle only uses one downstream Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) it is numbered O2 Sensor 1/2, even if it uses two upstream HO2S. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3137 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are attached to, and protrude into the vehicle exhaust system. Depending on the engine or emission package, the vehicle may use a total of either 2 or 4 sensors. Federal Emission Packages : Two sensors are used: upstream (referred to as 1/1) and downstream (referred to as 1/2). With this emission package, the upstream sensor (1/1) is located just before the main catalytic convertor. The downstream sensor (1/2) is located just after the main catalytic convertor. California Emission Packages: On this emissions package, 4 sensors are used: 2 upstream (referred to as 1/1 and 2/1) and 2 downstream (referred to as 1/2 and 2/2). With this emission package, the right upstream sensor (2/1) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The left upstream sensor (1/1) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just before the mini-catalytic convertor. The right downstream sensor (2/2) is located in the right exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. The left downstream sensor (1/2) is located in the left exhaust downpipe just after the mini-catalytic convertor, and before the main catalytic convertor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with four oxygen sensors. Refer to graphic for typical O2S (oxygen sensor) locations if equipped with two oxygen sensors. CAUTION: Never apply any type of grease to the oxygen sensor electrical connector, or attempt any soldering of the sensor wiring harness. WARNING: The exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes and catalytic converter become very hot during engine operation. Allow engine to cool before removing oxygen sensor. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. 4-Sensor System If removing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, remove the right-front tire/wheel, and then remove the plastic inner fender liner. 3. Disconnect wire connector from O2S sensor. CAUTION: When disconnecting sensor electrical connector, do not pull directly on wire going into sensor. 4. Remove O2S sensor with an oxygen sensor removal and installation tool. 5. Clean threads in exhaust pipe using appropriate tap. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3140 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Threads of new oxygen sensors are factory coated with anti-seize compound to aid in removal.DO NOT add any additional anti-seize compound to threads of a new oxygen sensor. 1. Install O2S sensor. Tighten to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.) torque. 2. Connect O2S sensor wire connector. 3. 4-Sensor System: If installing the right-upstream (2/1) sensor, install plastic inner fender liner, and right-front tire/wheel. 4. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3145 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3146 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3147 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3150 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3151 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3152 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3155 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3160 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3161 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3162 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3165 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3166 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3167 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3170 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION WARNING: THE NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE OF THE EXHAUST SYSTEM IS VERY HIGH. THEREFORE, NEVER WORK AROUND OR ATTEMPT TO SERVICE ANY PART OF THE EXHAUST SYSTEM UNTIL IT IS COOLED. SPECIAL CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN WORKING NEAR THE CATALYTIC CONVERTER. THE TEMPERATURE OF THE CONVERTER RISES TO A HIGH LEVEL AFTER A SHORT PERIOD OF ENGINE OPERATION TIME. CAUTION: Avoid application of rust prevention compounds or undercoating materials to exhaust system floor pan heat shields. Light overspray near the edges is permitted. Application of coating will result in excessive floor pan temperatures and objectionable fumes. The exhaust system uses a single muffler with a welded tailpipe. The 50 State Emissions vehicles use two mini catalytic converters inline with the exhaust pipe below the exhaust manifolds. The exhaust manifolds are equipped with ball flange outlets to assure a tight seal and strain free connections. The exhaust system must be properly aligned to prevent stress, leakage and body contact. If the system contacts any body panel, it may amplify objectionable noises originating from the engine or body. When inspecting an exhaust system, critically inspect for cracked or loose joints, stripped screw or bolt threads, corrosion damage and worn, cracked or broken hangers. Replace all components that are badly corroded or damaged. DO NOT attempt to repair. When replacement is required, use original equipment parts (or their equivalent). This will assure proper alignment and provide acceptable exhaust noise levels. The basic exhaust system consists of exhaust manifold(s), exhaust pipe with oxygen sensors, catalytic converter(s), heat shield(s), muffler and tailpipe. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3176 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The catalytic converter captures and burns any unburned fuel mixture exiting the combustion chambers during the exhaust stroke of the engine. This process aids in reducing emissions output. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Catalytic Converter: Procedures INSPECTION Look at the stainless steel body of the converter, inspect for bulging or other distortion that could be a result of overheating. If the converter has a heat shield attached make sure it is not bent or loose. If you suspect internal damage to the catalyst, tapping the bottom of the catalyst with a rubber mallet may indicate a damaged core. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3179 Catalytic Converter: Removal and Replacement Catalytic Converter - Removal 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE CAUTION: When servicing or replacing exhaust system components, disconnect the oxygen sensor connector(s). Allowing the exhaust to hang by the oxygen sensor wires will damage the harness and/or sensor. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Saturate all exhaust bolts and nuts with Mopar(R) Rust Penetrant. Allow 5 minutes for penetration. 3. Disconnect the oxygen senor electrical connectors. 4. Remove the catalytic converter-to-manifold bolts (5). 5. Remove the catalytic converter to the exhaust pipe clamp (1). 6. If present, grind tack weld. 7. Remove the catalytic converter. You may have to loosen up other sections of the exhaust system. Catalytic Converter - Installation 3.7L/4.7L ENGINE CAUTION: When servicing or replacing exhaust system components, disconnect the oxygen sensor connector(s). Allowing the exhaust to hang by the oxygen sensor wires will damage the harness and/or sensor. NOTE: The band clamps are not reusable. After removal, they must be replaced with new one. 1. Make sure the catalytic converter pipe is free of burrs. 2. Insert the catalytic converter into the exhaust pipe. 3. Make sure the alignment tang is fully seated in the alignment slot. 4. If other sections of the exhaust system where loosened in removal, refer to that information for the tightening procedures. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3180 5. At the catalytic converter-to-extension pipe connection, install new clamp and nuts. Tighten the clamp nuts to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) torque. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Start the engine, inspect for exhaust leaks. Repair exhaust leaks as necessary. 8. Check the exhaust system for contact with the body panels. Make the necessary adjustments, if necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Solenoid-EVAP/Purge Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations Solenoid-EVAP/Purge Component ID: 288 Component : SOLENOID-EVAP/PURGE Connector: Name : SOLENOID-EVAP/PURGE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 2 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Solenoid-EVAP/Purge > Page 3186 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Solenoid-EVAP/Purge > Page 3187 Canister Purge Solenoid: Locations EVAP Purge Solenoid The solenoid (2) is attached to a bracket (1) near the brake power booster (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3188 Canister Purge Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 288 Component : SOLENOID-EVAP/PURGE Connector: Name : SOLENOID-EVAP/PURGE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K70 20DB/BR EVAP PURGE SOL SIGNAL 2 K52 20DB/WT EVAP PURGE SOL CONTROL Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3189 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3190 Canister Purge Solenoid: Description and Operation OPERATION The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) operates the solenoid. During the cold start warm-up period and the hot start time delay, the PCM does not energize the solenoid. When de-energized, no vapors are purged. The PCM de-energizes the solenoid during open loop operation. The engine enters closed loop operation after it reaches a specified temperature and the time delay ends. During closed loop operation, the PCM energizes and de-energizes the solenoid 5 or 10 times per second, depending upon operating conditions. The PCM varies the vapor flow rate by changing solenoid pulse width. Pulse width is the amount of time the solenoid energizes. The PCM adjusts solenoid pulse width based on engine operating condition. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > EVAP Purge Solenoid - Removal Canister Purge Solenoid: Service and Repair EVAP Purge Solenoid - Removal REMOVAL The duty-cycle EVAP canister purge solenoid (1) is located in the engine compartment. The solenoid (2) is attached to a bracket (1) near the brake power booster (4). 1. Disconnect electrical wiring connector (3) at solenoid. 2. Disconnect vacuum lines (5) and (6) at solenoid. 3. Remove solenoid straight up from mounting bracket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > EVAP Purge Solenoid - Removal > Page 3193 Canister Purge Solenoid: Service and Repair EVAP Purge Solenoid - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install solenoid assembly (2) to mounting bracket (1). 2. Connect vacuum lines (5) and (6). 3. Connect electrical connector (3). 4. The vapor/vacuum lines and hoses must be firmly connected. Check the vapor/vacuum lines at the ESIM switch, pump filter and EVAP canister purge solenoid for damage or leaks. If a leak is present, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Evaporative Check Valve: Customer Interest Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3202 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3203 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Evaporative Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3209 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Check Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Check Valve: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3210 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Locations Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Locations DESCRIPTION The maintenance free, EVAP canister (2) is mounted to the top of the fuel tank (6). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The maintenance free, EVAP canister (2) is mounted to the top of the fuel tank (6). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3216 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The EVAP canister is filled with granules of an activated carbon mixture. Fuel vapors entering the EVAP canister are absorbed by the charcoal granules. Fuel tank pressure vents into the EVAP canister. Fuel vapors are temporarily held in the canister until they can be drawn into the intake manifold. The duty cycle EVAP canister purge solenoid allows the EVAP canister to be purged at predetermined times and at certain engine operating conditions. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vapor Canister - Removal Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair Vapor Canister - Removal Removal - Club Cab REMOVAL - CLUB CAB The EVAP canister (2) is mounted to the top of the fuel tank. Both the EVAP canister (2) and ESIM switch (8) can be removed without removing the fuel tank. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove left-rear tire. 3. Remove plastic shield in front of left-rear tire. Access to both the EVAP canister (2) and ESIM switch (8) can be achieved from the area in front of the removed tire and plastic shield. 4. Remove vapor hose at ESIM switch. 5. Remove vapor line (5) from EVAP canister (3) by pressing on both tabs (2) simultaneously. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vapor Canister - Removal > Page 3219 6. Using a screwdriver (7), pry up and remove plastic mounting clip (6) and remove canister (2) from top of fuel tank. Note: The opposite end of the canister is supported by two plastic legs. Removal - 4 Door Quad Cab REMOVAL - 4 DOOR QUAD CAB On 4-door Quad Cab models, the fuel tank must be lowered for canister removal. 1. Lower the fuel tank. The EVAP canister (2) is mounted to the top of the fuel tank. 2. Remove vapor hose at ESIM switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vapor Canister - Removal > Page 3220 3. Remove vapor line (5) from EVAP canister (3) by pressing on both tabs (2) simultaneously. 4. Using a screwdriver (7), pry up and remove plastic mounting clip (6) and remove canister (2) from top of fuel tank. Note: The opposite end of the canister is supported by two plastic legs. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Vapor Canister - Removal > Page 3221 Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair Vapor Canister - Installation Installation - Club Cab INSTALLATION - CLUB CAB 1. Guide the two plastic canister locating legs into the top of fuel tank. 2. Install pin (6) and press down. 3. Install electrical connector ESIM switch. 4. Install all vapor hoses and lines to both the EVAP canister and ESIM switch. 5. The vapor/vacuum lines and hoses must be firmly connected. Also check the vapor/vacuum lines at the ESIM switch, filter and EVAP canister purge solenoid for damage or leaks. If a leak is present, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 6. Install plastic shield in front of left-rear tire. 7. Install left-rear tire. Installation - 4 Door Quad Cab INSTALLATION - 4 DOOR QUAD CAB 1. Guide the two plastic canister locating legs into the top of fuel tank. 2. Install pin (6) and press down. 3. Raise fuel tank. 4. Install electrical connector ESIM switch. 5. Install all vapor hoses and lines to both the EVAP canister and ESIM switch. 6. The vapor/vacuum lines and hoses must be firmly connected. Also check the vapor/vacuum lines at the ESIM switch, filter and EVAP canister purge solenoid for damage or leaks. If a leak is present, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. 7. Install fuel tank. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Evaporative Emissions Hose: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3230 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3231 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Evaporative Emissions Hose: Customer Interest Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3237 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporative Emissions Hose: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3238 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3239 Evaporative Emissions Hose: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION A vacuum schematic for emission related items can be found on the vehicles VECI label. Refer to Vehicle Emission Control Information (VECI) Label for label location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations Leak Detector: Locations Component ID: 300 Component : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z910 18BK GROUND 2 K107 20VT/WT ESM SWITCH SIGNAL Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3243 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3244 Leak Detector: Diagrams Component ID: 300 Component : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-EVAP SYSTEM MONITOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z910 18BK GROUND 2 K107 20VT/WT ESM SWITCH SIGNAL Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detector, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3245 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Pump, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations Leak Detection Pump: Locations The ESIM (Evaporative System Integrity Monitor) is very similar to the NVLD. However, the design of the ESIM has been simplified and unlike the NVLD the ESIM does not require a solenoid. The ESIM mounts directly to the canister, eliminating the need for a mounting bracket. It is critical that the ESIM is mounted vertically. On vehicles where the canister is mounted on an angle, the ESIM requires an adaptor to maintain a vertical position. When the ESIM is installed vertically, the electrical connector is in the 3 o'clock position. The EVAP canister (2) is mounted to the top of the fuel tank. Both the EVAP canister (2) and ESIM switch (8) can be removed without removing the fuel tank. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Pump, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3249 Leak Detection Pump: Description and Operation OPERATION SYSTEM The ESIM (Evaporative System Integrity Monitor) is very similar to the NVLD. However, the design of the ESIM has been simplified and unlike the NVLD the ESIM does not require a solenoid. The ESIM mounts directly to the canister, eliminating the need for a mounting bracket. It is critical that the ESIM is mounted vertically. On vehicles where the canister is mounted on an angle, the ESIM requires an adaptor to maintain a vertical position. When the ESIM is installed vertically, the electrical connector is in the 3 o'clock position. EXPLODED VIEW The ESIM assembly consists of a housing, a small weight and a large weight that serve as check valves, a diaphragm, a switch and a cover. There is one large weight and one small weight check valve in the ESIM assembly. A seal is attached at the end of each weighted check valve. The large weight check valve seals for pressure. The small weight check valve seals for vacuum. The weighted check valves are contained within the ESIM housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Pump, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3250 CUT AWAY OF MODULE The ESIM (Evaporative System Integrity Monitor), while physically different than the NVLD system, performs the same basic function as the NVLD does - controlling evaporative emissions. The ESIM has been simplified because the solenoid used on the NVLD is not used on the ESIM. The ESIM consists of housing, two check valves (sometimes referred to as weights), a diaphragm, a switch and a cover. The larger check valve seals for pressure and the smaller one seals for vacuum. During refueling, pressure is built up in the evaporative system. When pressure reaches approximately.5 inches of water, the large check valve unseats and pressure vents to the fresh air filter. Conversely, when the system cools, and the resulting vacuum lifts the small check valve from its seat and allows fresh air to enter the system and relieves the vacuum condition. When a calibrated amount of vacuum is achieved in the evaporative system, the diaphragm is pulled inward, pushing on the spring and closing the contacts. The ESIM conducts test on the evaporative system as follows: An engine off, non-intrusive test for small leaks and an engine running, intrusive test for medium/large leaks. The ESIM weights seal the evap. system during engine off conditions. If the evap. system is sealed, it will be pulled into a vacuum, either due to the cool down from operating temperature or diurnal ambient temperature cycling. When the vacuum in the system exceeds about 1" H20, the vacuum switch closes. The switch closure sends a signal to the PCM. In order to pass the non-intrusive small leak test, the ESIM switch must close within a calculated amount of time and within a specified amount of key-off events. If the ESIM switch does not close as specified, the test is considered inconclusive and the intrusive engine running test will be run during the next key-on cycle. This intrusive test will run on the next cold engine running condition. Conditions for running the intrusive test are: - After the vehicle is started, the engine coolant temperature must be within 50°F (10°C) of ambient to indicate a cold start. - The fuel level must be between 12% and 88%. - The engine must be in closed loop. - Manifold vacuum must be greater than a minimum specified value. - Ambient temperature must be between 39°F and 98°F (4°C and 37°C) and the elevation level must be below 8500 feet (2591 meters). The test is accomplished by the PCM activating the purge solenoid to create a vacuum in the evaporative system. The PCM then measures the amount of time it takes for the vacuum to dissipate. This is known as the vacuum decay method. If the switch opens quickly a large leak is recorded. If the switch opens after a predetermined amount of time, then the small leak matures. If the switch does not close, then a general evaporative failure is recorded. The purge monitor tests the integrity of the hose attached between the purge valve and throttle body/intake. The purge monitor is a two stage test and it runs only after the evaporative system passes the small leak test. Even when all of the thresholds are met, a small leak won't be recorded until after the medium/large leak monitor has been run. This is accomplished by the PCM activating the purge solenoid to create a vacuum in the evaporative system. The PCM then measures the amount of time it takes for the vacuum to dissipate. This is known as the vacuum decay method. If the switch opens quickly a large leak is recorded. If the switch opens after a predetermined amount of time, then the small leak matures. If the medium/large leak test runs and the ESIM switch doesn't close, a general evaporative test is run. The purge solenoid is activated for approximately 10 seconds, increasing the amount of vacuum in the system. If the ESIM switch closes after the extended Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Pump, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3251 purge activation, a large leak fault is generated. If the switch doesn't close, a general evaporative system fault is generated. The purge monitor tests the integrity of the hose attached between the purge valve and throttle body/intake. The purge monitor is a two stage test and it runs only after the evaporative system passes the small leak test. Stage one of the purge monitor is non-intrusive. The PCM monitors the purge vapor ratio. If the ratio is above a calibrated specification, the monitor passes. Stage two is an intrusive test and it runs only if stage one fails. During the stage two test, the PCM commands the purge solenoid to flow at a specified rate to force the purge vapor ratio to update. The vapor ratio is compared to a calibrated specification and if it is less than specified, a one-trip failure is recorded. The ESIM switch stuck closed monitor checks to see if the switch is stuck closed. This is a power down test that runs at key-off; when the PCM sees 0 rpm's, the purge solenoid is energized for a maximum of 30 seconds, venting any vacuum trapped in the evaporative system. If the switch opens or was open before the test began, the monitor passes. If the switch doesn't open, the monitor fails. This is a two-trip MIL. The star scan tool can be used to force the ESIM switch stick closed monitor to run. The PCM also uses the ESIM to detect a loose or missing gas cap. The PCM controller looks for a change in the fuel level (25% minimum) and then gas cap is loose or missing. If a medium/large leak is detected, a loose gas cap light illuminates and a pending one-trip fault code is set. On the PCM, this is a three-trip fault before the code matures Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > System Information > Description and Operation > Description Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ORVR (On-Board Refueling Vapor Recovery) system consists of a unique fuel tank, flow management valve, fluid control valve, one-way check valve and vapor canister. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Refueling Vapor Recovery System > System Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3256 Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ORVR (On-Board Refueling Vapor Recovery) system is used to remove excess fuel tank vapors. This is done while the vehicle is being refueled. Fuel flowing into the fuel filler tube (approx. 1" I.D.) creates an aspiration effect drawing air into the fuel fill tube. During refueling, the fuel tank is vented to the EVAP canister to capture escaping vapors. With air flowing into the filler tube, there are no fuel vapors escaping to the atmosphere. Once the refueling vapors are captured by the EVAP canister, the vehicle's computer controlled purge system draws vapor out of the canister for the engine to burn. The vapor flow is metered by the purge solenoid so that there is no, or minimal impact on driveability or tailpipe emissions. As fuel starts to flow through the fuel fill tube, it opens the normally closed check valve and enters the fuel tank. Vapor or air is expelled from the tank through the control valve and on to the vapor canister. Vapor is absorbed in the EVAP canister until vapor flow in the lines stops. This stoppage occurs following fuel shut-off, or by having the fuel level in the tank rise high enough to close the control valve. This control valve contains a float that rises to seal the large diameter vent path to the EVAP canister. At this point in the refueling process, fuel tank pressure increases, the check valve closes (preventing liquid fuel from spiting back at the operator), and fuel then rises up the fuel filler tube to shut off the dispensing nozzle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Control Solenoid > Component Information > Locations EGR Control Solenoid: Locations The electronic EGR valve and solenoid assembly (4) is attached to the rear of the left cylinder head. An exhaust gas routing tube (3) connects the EGR valve to the intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Control Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal EGR Control Solenoid: Service and Repair EGR Valve - Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L The electronic EGR valve and solenoid assembly (4) is attached to the rear of the left cylinder head. An exhaust gas routing tube (3) connects the EGR valve to the intake manifold. 1. Use a diagnostic scan tool to record any DTC's (Diagnostic Trouble Codes). 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 3. Remove EVAP solenoid (2). See: Evaporative Emissions System/Canister Purge Solenoid/Service and Repair Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Control Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 3263 4. Remove electrical connector (5) at top of EGR valve solenoid. 5. Remove tube mounting bolt (1) at intake manifold. 6. Remove two bolts (4) connecting EGR tube (1) to valve assembly. 7. Remove gasket located between EGR tube flange and EGR valve assembly. 8. Remove two EGR valve mounting bolts (5). 9. Separate valve assembly (3) from engine. 10. Remove and discard metal gasket located between cylinder head and valve assembly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Control Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 3264 EGR Control Solenoid: Service and Repair EGR Valve - Installation INSTALLATION - 4.7L 1. Clean area at rear of left cylinder head where it joins base of EGR valve. 2. Clean EGR tube where it joins EGR valve. 3. Position new gasket between EGR valve and cylinder head. 4. Position EGR valve to cylinder head. Install and tighten two bolts (5). Torque to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 5. Position new gasket between EGR tube flange and EGR valve assembly. 6. Position EGR tube (1) to side of EGR valve and into intake manifold. Install two bolts (4) finger tight (temporarily). 7. Install EGR tube flange bolt (1) at intake manifold. Torque to 11 Nm (8.5 ft. lbs.). 8. Connect electrical connector (5) to top of EGR valve solenoid (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Control Solenoid > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 3265 9. Do a final tightening of two EGR tube bolts (4). Torque to 11 Nm (8.5 ft. lbs.). 10. Install EVAP solenoid (2). See: Evaporative Emissions System/Canister Purge Solenoid/Service and Repair 11. Connect negative battery cable. 12. Using a diagnostic scan tool, erase any previously recorded DTC's (Diagnostic Trouble Codes). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-EGR Valve EGR Valve: Locations Assembly-EGR Valve Component ID: 12 Component : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 Z958 20BK GROUND 5-6 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-EGR Valve > Page 3270 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-EGR Valve > Page 3271 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-EGR Valve > Page 3272 EGR Valve: Locations EGR Valve The electronic EGR valve and solenoid assembly (4) is attached to the rear of the left cylinder head. An exhaust gas routing tube (3) connects the EGR valve to the intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3273 EGR Valve: Diagrams Component ID: 12 Component : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-EGR VALVE Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 K34 20DB/LG EGR SIGNAL 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 Z958 20BK GROUND 5-6 K35 20DB/VT EGR SOL CONTROL Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3274 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 3275 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal EGR Valve: Service and Repair EGR Valve - Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L The electronic EGR valve and solenoid assembly (4) is attached to the rear of the left cylinder head. An exhaust gas routing tube (3) connects the EGR valve to the intake manifold. 1. Use a diagnostic scan tool to record any DTC's (Diagnostic Trouble Codes). 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 3. Remove EVAP solenoid (2). See: Evaporative Emissions System/Canister Purge Solenoid/Service and Repair Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 3278 4. Remove electrical connector (5) at top of EGR valve solenoid. 5. Remove tube mounting bolt (1) at intake manifold. 6. Remove two bolts (4) connecting EGR tube (1) to valve assembly. 7. Remove gasket located between EGR tube flange and EGR valve assembly. 8. Remove two EGR valve mounting bolts (5). 9. Separate valve assembly (3) from engine. 10. Remove and discard metal gasket located between cylinder head and valve assembly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 3279 EGR Valve: Service and Repair EGR Valve - Installation INSTALLATION - 4.7L 1. Clean area at rear of left cylinder head where it joins base of EGR valve. 2. Clean EGR tube where it joins EGR valve. 3. Position new gasket between EGR valve and cylinder head. 4. Position EGR valve to cylinder head. Install and tighten two bolts (5). Torque to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 5. Position new gasket between EGR tube flange and EGR valve assembly. 6. Position EGR tube (1) to side of EGR valve and into intake manifold. Install two bolts (4) finger tight (temporarily). 7. Install EGR tube flange bolt (1) at intake manifold. Torque to 11 Nm (8.5 ft. lbs.). 8. Connect electrical connector (5) to top of EGR valve solenoid (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > EGR Valve - Removal > Page 3280 9. Do a final tightening of two EGR tube bolts (4). Torque to 11 Nm (8.5 ft. lbs.). 10. Install EVAP solenoid (2). See: Evaporative Emissions System/Canister Purge Solenoid/Service and Repair 11. Connect negative battery cable. 12. Using a diagnostic scan tool, erase any previously recorded DTC's (Diagnostic Trouble Codes). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Locations Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Locations The PCV valve (6) is located on the oil filler tube (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L V-8 The PCV valve (2) is mounted into the top/rear of the left valve cover. 1. Disconnect plastic line (1) from end of PCV valve. 2. Use a small screwdriver to disengage PCV valve from valve cover. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3287 Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION - 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out PCV valve opening at valve cover. 2. Check condition of PCV valve o-ring. 3. Apply engine oil to o-ring. 4. Place PCV valve (2) into valve cover. 5. Attach plastic line (1) to valve. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE 58 psi +/- 2 psi Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Delivery Check *CHECKING THE FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM For a complete wiring diagram Consult Diagrams/Electrical. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 3294 Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP OPERATION Ignition on, engine not running. With a scan tool, actuate the Fuel System test. NOTE: It may be necessary to use a mechanics stethoscope in the next step. Listen for fuel pump operation at the fuel tank. Does the Fuel Pump operate? Yes - Go To 2 No - Go To 5 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 2. FUEL PRESSURE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install a fuel pressure gauge at the engine. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Choose a conclusion that best matches your fuel pressure reading. Below Specification - Go To 3 Within Specification - Test Complete. Above Specification - Replace the fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 3. RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure even with the engine off. Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Turn the ignition off. Raise vehicle on hoist, and disconnect the fuel pressure line at the fuel pump module. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631(3/8") fuel line adapter and the fuel pressure gauge between the fuel supply line and the fuel pump module. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Is the fuel pressure within specification now? Yes Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 3295 - Repair/replace fuel supply line as necessary. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 4 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 4. CHECKING FUEL INLET STRAINER WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Module and inspect the Fuel Inlet Strainer. Is the Fuel Inlet Strainer plugged? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Inlet Strainer. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Replace the Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test 5. (N1) FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Relay from the IPM. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit from the relay connector to the fuel pump module connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 3296 - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Repair the open in the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 3297 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Leak Down Test *FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN For a complete wiring diagram Consult Diagrams/Electrical. Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP MODULE NOTE: Before continuing visually and physically inspect the fuel delivery system for external leaks or damage. Repair/replace as necessary. WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631 (3/8") fuel line adapter. Install the fuel pressure gauge. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Using special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, pinch the rubber fuel line between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 kPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 2 2. FUEL INJECTOR(S) WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Remove special tool #C4390. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Move special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, from between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine to between the fuel pressure gauge and fuel pump module. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 kPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 3298 - Replace the leaking fuel injectors. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Test Complete. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Information not supplied by manufacturer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Pedal - Removal Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal - Removal REMOVAL The accelerator pedal is serviced as a complete assembly (8) including the bracket. The accelerator cable (4) is connected to the upper part of the accelerator pedal arm by a plastic retainer (clip) (2). This plastic retainer snaps into the top of the accelerator pedal arm. 1. From inside the vehicle, hold up accelerator pedal. Remove plastic cable retainer (clip) (2) and throttle cable core wire from upper end of accelerator pedal arm. Plastic cable retainer (clip) snaps into pedal arm. 2. Remove two accelerator pedal mounting bracket nuts (7). Remove accelerator pedal assembly (8). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accelerator Pedal - Removal > Page 3309 Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal - Installation INSTALLATION The accelerator pedal is serviced as a complete assembly (8) including the bracket. The accelerator cable is connected to the upper part of the accelerator pedal arm by a plastic retainer (clip) (7). This plastic retainer snaps into the top of the accelerator pedal arm. 1. Place accelerator pedal assembly (8) over two mounting studs (6). 2. Install and tighten two mounting nuts (7). See: Specifications 3. Slide throttle cable (1) into opening slot in top of pedal arm. 4. Push plastic cable retainer (clip) (2) into accelerator pedal arm opening until it snaps into place. 5. Before starting engine, operate accelerator pedal to check for any binding. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3313 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3314 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3315 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Loosen clamp and disconnect air duct at air cleaner cover. 2. Pry over 4 spring clips (5) from housing cover (3) (spring clips retain cover to housing). 3. Release housing cover (3) from locating tabs on housing and remove cover. 4. Remove air cleaner element (filter) from housing. 5. Clean inside of housing before replacing element. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3321 Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install filter element into housing. 2. Position housing cover into housing locating tabs. 3. Pry up 4 spring clips (6) and lock cover to housing. 4. Install air duct to air cleaner cover and tighten hose clamp to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.) torque. 5. If any other hose clamps were removed from air intake system, tighten them to 3.4 Nm (30 in. lbs.) torque. 6. If any bolts were removed from air resonator housing or air intake tubing, tighten them to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel: Description and Operation FUEL REQUIREMENTS Your engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded "regular" gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The routine use of premium gasoline is not recommended. Under normal conditions the use of premium fuel will not provide a benefit over high quality regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Engine damage resulting from operation with a heavy spark knock may not be covered by the new vehicle warranty. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. Over 40 auto manufacturers world-wide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance and durability for your vehicle. We recommend the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available. REFORMULATED GASOLINE Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "reformulated" gasoline. Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. We strongly support the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components. GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle. CAUTION: DO NOT use gasoline containing METHANOL. Gasoline containing methanol may damage critical fuel system components. MMT IN GASOLINE MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provide no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles. We recommend that gasolines free of MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not his/her gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. SULFUR IN GASOLINE If you live in the northeast United States, your vehicle may have been designed to meet California low emission standards with Cleaner-Burning California reformulated gasoline with low sulfur. If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emission standards, your vehicles will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be adversely affected. Gasoline sold outside of California is permitted to have higher sulfur levels which may affect the performance of the vehicle's catalytic converter. This may cause the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL), Check Engine or Service Engine Soon light to illuminate. We recommend that you try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the problem is fuel related prior to returning your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service. CAUTION: If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL), Check Engine or Service Engine Soon light is flashing, immediate service is required. MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL All gasoline sold in the United States and Canada are required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions. FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS CAUTION: Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle's performance: - The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance, damage the emission control system, and could result in loss of warranty coverage. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3325 - An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your dealer for service assistance. - When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the temperature is high, use a premium unleaded fuel to help prevent spark knock. If spark knock persists, lighten the load, or engine piston damage may result. - The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of DaimlerChrysler Corporation and may not be covered under the new vehicle warranty. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The plastic fuel tank filler tube cap is threaded onto the end of the fuel fill tube. Certain models are equipped with a 1/4 turn cap. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3330 Fuel Filler Cap: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The loss of any fuel or vapor out of fuel filler tube is prevented by the use of a pressure-vacuum fuel fill cap. Relief valves inside the cap will release fuel tank pressure at predetermined pressures. Fuel tank vacuum will also be released at predetermined values. This cap must be replaced by a similar unit if replacement is necessary. This is in order for the system to remain effective. CAUTION: Remove fill cap before servicing any fuel system component to relieve tank pressure. If equipped with an ORVR system and an ESIM switch, the cap must be tightened securely. If cap is left loose, a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) may be set. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A gas cap indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The gas cap indication appears within the odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The gas cap indicator consists of a textual gASCAP message which appears in place of the odometer/trip odometer information in the display. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the tachometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gas cap textual message appears in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer/trip odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The gas cap indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD in the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3335 Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The gas cap indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when there is a gross leak detected in the on-board fuel vapor recovery system. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The gas cap indicator function of the odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the VFD gas cap indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the gas cap indicator for the following reasons: - Gas Cap Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic gas cap indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating there is a gross leak in the vapor recovery system, the gas cap indicator will be illuminated. If the ignition switch is in the ON position and the vehicle is not moving when the message is received, the VFD will repeatedly and sequentially cycle the gas cap indication in two second intervals with the odometer/trip odometer information and any other active textual warnings. If the vehicle is moving, or once the cluster of a non-moving vehicle receives an electronic vehicle speed message from the PCM indicating a speed greater than zero, the warning sequence will consist of three complete display cycles with an audible single chime tone accompanying each cycle, then revert to only the visual gas cap indication and odometer/trip odometer display cycling until the cluster receives a message indicating there is no gross leak in the vapor recovery system, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The VFD can be reverted to the odometer display and any currently displayed textual messages suspended by momentarily depressing and releasing the odometer/trip odometer reset switch button on the front of the cluster. The PCM continually monitors the on board vapor recovery system to determine whether there are air leaks in the system. The PCM then sends the proper electronic messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the EMIC turns ON the gas cap indicator due to a monitored gross leak in the vapor recovery system, it may indicate that the gas cap has been removed or is improperly installed. For proper diagnosis of the on board vapor recovery system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gas cap indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Use following procedure if the fuel injector rail is, or is not equipped with a fuel pressure test port. 1. Remove fuel fill cap. 2. Remove fuel pump relay from Power Distribution Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label on underside of PDC cover. 3. Start and run engine until it stalls. 4. Attempt restarting engine until it will no longer run. 5. Turn ignition key to OFF position. CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do not attempt to use following steps to relieve this pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cylinder chamber. 6. Unplug connector from any fuel injector. 7. Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal. 8. Connect other end of jumper wire to positive side of battery. 9. Connect one end of a second jumper wire to remaining injector terminal. CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few seconds will permanently damage the injector. 10. Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire to negative terminal of battery for no more than a few seconds. 11. Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. 12. Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail. See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair 13. Return fuel pump relay to PDC. 14. One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC's) may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel pump relay removal. A diagnostic scan tool must be used to erase a DTC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications Fuel Injector: Specifications FUEL PRESSURE DROP The pressure should not fall below .............................................................................................................................................................. 241 kPa (35 psi) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel-No. 1 Component ID: 123 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3345 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3346 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3347 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel-No. 2 Component ID: 124 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3348 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3349 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3350 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel-No. 3 Component ID: 125 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3351 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3352 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3353 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel-No. 4 Component ID: 126 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3354 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3355 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3356 Fuel Injector: Locations Injector-Fuel-No. 1 Component ID: 123 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3357 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3358 Injector-Fuel-No. 2 Component ID: 124 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3359 Pin Circuit Description 1 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 17 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3360 Injector-Fuel-No. 3 Component ID: 125 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3361 Pin Circuit Description 1 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 11 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3362 Injector-Fuel-No. 4 Component ID: 126 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3363 Pin Circuit Description 1 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 17 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3364 Injector-Fuel-No. 5 Component ID: 127 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 5 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3365 Pin Circuit Description 1 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 11 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3366 Injector-Fuel-No. 6 Component ID: 128 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 6 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 6 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3367 Pin Circuit Description 1 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 17 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3368 Injector-Fuel-No. 7 Component ID: 129 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 7 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 7 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (4.7L) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3369 Pin Circuit Description 1 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 11 Injector-Fuel-No. 8 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3370 Component ID: 130 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 8 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 8 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Locations > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3371 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel-No. 1 Component ID: 123 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3374 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3375 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3376 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel-No. 2 Component ID: 124 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3377 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3378 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3379 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel-No. 3 Component ID: 125 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3380 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3381 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3382 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel-No. 4 Component ID: 126 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3383 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3384 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3385 Fuel Injector: Diagrams Injector-Fuel-No. 1 Component ID: 123 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K11 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 1 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3386 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3387 Injector-Fuel-No. 2 Component ID: 124 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3388 Pin Circuit Description 1 K12 18BR/DB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 2 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 17 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3389 Injector-Fuel-No. 3 Component ID: 125 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3390 Pin Circuit Description 1 K13 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 3 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 11 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3391 Injector-Fuel-No. 4 Component ID: 126 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3392 Pin Circuit Description 1 K14 18BR/TN INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 4 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 17 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3393 Injector-Fuel-No. 5 Component ID: 127 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 5 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3394 Pin Circuit Description 1 K38 18BR/OR INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 5 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 11 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3395 Injector-Fuel-No. 6 Component ID: 128 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 6 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 6 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3396 Pin Circuit Description 1 K58 18BR/VT INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 6 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 17 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3397 Injector-Fuel-No. 7 Component ID: 129 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 7 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 7 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (4.7L) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3398 Pin Circuit Description 1 K26 18BR/YL INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 7 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 11 Injector-Fuel-No. 8 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3399 Component ID: 130 Component : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 8 Connector: Name : INJECTOR-FUEL-NO. 8 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K28 18BR/LB INJECTOR CONTROL NO. 8 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Injector-Fuel-No. 1 > Page 3400 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Injector - Description Fuel Injector: Description and Operation Fuel Injector - Description DESCRIPTION An individual fuel injector (1) is used for each individual cylinder. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Injector - Description > Page 3403 Fuel Injector: Description and Operation Fuel Injector - Operation OPERATION The top (fuel entry) end of the injector (3) is attached into an opening on the fuel rail. The fuel injectors are electrical solenoids. The injector contains a pintle that closes off an orifice at the nozzle end. When electric current is supplied to the injector, the armature and needle move a short distance against a spring, allowing fuel to flow out the orifice. Because the fuel is under high pressure, a fine spray is developed in the shape of a pencil stream. The spraying action atomizes the fuel, adding it to the air entering the combustion chamber. The nozzle (outlet) ends of the injectors (2) are positioned into openings in the intake manifold just above the intake valve ports of the cylinder head. The engine wiring harness connector for each fuel injector is equipped with an attached numerical tag (INJ 1, INJ 2 etc.). This is used to identify each fuel injector. The injectors are energized individually in a sequential order by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM will adjust injector pulse width by switching the ground path to each individual injector on and off. Injector pulse width is the period of time that the injector is energized. The PCM will adjust injector pulse width based on various inputs it receives. Battery voltage is supplied to the injectors through the ASD relay. The PCM determines injector pulse width based on various inputs. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Injector - Installation Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Fuel Injector - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install fuel injector(s) (3) into fuel rail assembly (4) and install retaining clip(s) (2). 2. If same injector(s) is being reinstalled, install new o-ring(s). 3. Apply a small amount of clean engine oil to each injector o-ring. This will aid in installation. 4. Install fuel rail. See: Fuel Rail/Service and Repair/Fuel Rail - Installation 5. Start engine and check for fuel leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Line Coupler: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Different types of quick-connect fittings are used to attach various fuel system components, lines and tubes. These are: a single-tab type, a two-tab type or a plastic retainer ring type. Some are equipped with safety latch clips. Some may require the use of a special tool for disconnection and removal. See: Service and Repair CAUTION: The interior components (o-rings, clips) of quick-connect fittings are not serviced separately, but new plastic spacers are available for some types. If service parts are not available, do not attempt to repair the damaged fitting or fuel line (tube). If repair is necessary, replace the complete fuel line (tube) assembly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3409 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS Different types of quick-connect fittings are used to attach the various fuel system components, lines and tubes. These are: a single-button type, a two-button type, a pinch type, a single-tab type, a two-tab type or a plastic retainer ring type. Some are equipped with safety latch clips. Some may require the use of a special tool for disconnection and removal. DISCONNECTING WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with engine off). Before servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, fuel system pressure must be released. See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair CAUTION: Before separating a quick-connect fitting, pay attention to what type of fitting is being used by referring to Quick-Connect Fitting Removal. This will prevent unnecessary fitting or fitting latch breakage. CAUTION: The interior components (O-rings, clips) of quick-connect fittings are not serviced separately, but new plastic spacers and latches are available for some types. If service parts are not available, do not attempt to repair the damaged fitting or fuel line (tube). If repair is necessary, replace the complete fuel line (tube) assembly. 1. Perform fuel pressure release procedure. See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair 2. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery. 3. Clean fitting of any foreign material before disassembly. 4. Single-Button Type Fitting: This type of fitting is equipped with a single push-button (2) located on the quick-connect fitting. 5. The push-button is attached to two internal latches (1). To disconnect, press on push-button with your thumb and unlatch fitting from fuel line. Special tools are not required for disconnection. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRY OR PULL UP ON PUSH-BUTTON. LATCHES WILL BE BROKEN. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3410 6. Perform fuel pressure release procedure. See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair 7. Disconnect negative battery cable from battery. 8. Clean fitting of any foreign material before disassembly. 9. 2-Button Type Fitting: This type of fitting (1) is equipped with a push-button located on each side of quick-connect fitting (2). Press on both buttons simultaneously for removal. Special tools are not required for disconnection. 10. Pinch-Type Fitting: This fitting (1) is equipped with two finger tabs (2). Pinch both tabs together while removing fitting. Special tools are not required for disconnection. 11. Single-Tab Type Fitting: This type of fitting (3) is equipped with a single pull tab (1). The tab is removable. After tab is removed, quick-connect fitting can be separated from fuel system component. Special tools are not required for disconnection. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3411 12. Press release tab on side of fitting to release pull tab (1). If release tab is not pressed prior to releasing pull tab, pull tab will be damaged. 13. While pressing release tab on side of fitting, use screwdriver (2) to pry up pull tab. 14. Raise pull tab until it separates from quick-connect fitting. 15. Two-Tab Type Fitting: This type of fitting (2) is equipped with tabs located on both sides of fitting (1). The tabs are supplied for disconnecting quick-connect fitting from component being serviced. a. To disconnect quick-connect fitting, squeeze plastic retainer tabs (1) against sides of quick-connect fitting with your fingers. Tool use is not required for removal and may damage plastic retainer. b. Pull fitting from fuel system component being serviced. c. The plastic retainer will remain on component being serviced after fitting is disconnected. The O-rings and spacer will remain in quick-connect fitting connector body. 16. Plastic Retainer Ring Type Fitting: This type of fitting can be identified by the use of a full-round plastic retainer ring (4) usually black in color. a. To release fuel system component from quick-connect fitting, firmly push fitting towards component being serviced while firmly pushing Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3412 plastic retainer ring into fitting (6). With plastic ring depressed, pull fitting from component. The plastic retainer ring must be pressed squarely into fitting body. If this retainer is cocked during removal, it may be difficult to disconnect fitting. Use an open-end wrench on shoulder of plastic retainer ring to aid in disconnection. b. After disconnection, plastic retainer ring will remain with quick-connect fitting connector body. c. Inspect fitting connector body, plastic retainer ring and fuel system component for damage. Replace as necessary. 17. Latch Clips - Type 1: Depending on vehicle model and engine, 2 different types of safety latch clips are used. Type-1 (4) is tethered to fuel line and type-2 is not. A special tool will be necessary to disconnect fuel line after latch clip is removed. The latch clip may be used on certain fuel line/fuel rail connection, or to join fuel lines together. 18. Pry up on latch clip with a screwdriver (3). 19. Slide latch clip toward fuel rail while lifting with screwdriver. 20. Insert special fuel line removal tool (Snap-On number FIH 9055-1 or equivalent) into fuel line (1). Use tool to release locking fingers in end of line. 21. With special tool still inserted, pull fuel line from fuel rail. 22. After disconnection, locking fingers will remain within quick-connect fitting at end of fuel line. 23. Disconnect quick-connect fitting from fuel system component being serviced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3413 24. Latch Clips - Type 2: Depending on vehicle model and engine, 2 different types of safety latch clips are used. Type-1 is tethered to fuel line and type-2 is not. A special tool will be necessary to disconnect fuel line after latch clip is removed. The latch clip may be used on certain fuel line/fuel rail connection, or to join fuel lines together. 25. Type 2: Separate and unlatch small arms on end of clip and swing away from fuel line. 26. Slide latch clip toward fuel rail while lifting with screwdriver. 27. Insert special fuel line removal tool (Snap-On number FIH 9055-1 or equivalent) into fuel line (1). Use tool to release locking fingers in end of line. 28. With special tool still inserted, pull fuel line from fuel rail. 29. After disconnection, locking fingers will remain within quick-connect fitting at end of fuel line. 30. Disconnect quick-connect fitting from fuel system component being serviced. 31. Wing Type: A special tool will not be necessary to disconnect this type of fitting (2). This line is used on different fuel and emission components. The graphic shows the fitting used on an EVAP canister. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3414 32. Use two fingers to push on fitting wings (2) 33. Pull and disconnect fitting while holding wings. 34. After disconnection, locking fingers will remain within quick-connect fitting. CONNECTING 1. Inspect quick-connect fitting body and fuel system component for damage. Replace as necessary. 2. Prior to connecting quick-connect fitting to component being serviced, check condition of fitting and component. Clean parts with a lint-free cloth. Lubricate with clean engine oil. 3. Insert quick-connect fitting into fuel tube or fuel system component until built-on stop on fuel tube or component rests against back of fitting. 4. Continue pushing until a click is felt. 5. Single-tab type fitting: Push new tab down until it locks into place in quick-connect fitting. 6. Verify a locked condition by firmly pulling on fuel tube and fitting (15-30 lbs.). 7. Latch Clip Equipped: Install latch clip (snaps into position). If latch clip will not fit, this indicates fuel line is not properly installed to fuel rail (or other fuel line). Recheck fuel line connection. 8. Connect negative cable to battery. 9. Start engine and check for leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Regulator: Locations The module assembly (5) contains the following components: An internal fuel filter See: Fuel Filter/Description and Operation/Fuel Filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Operation Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The fuel system uses a nonadjustable pressure regulator that maintains fuel system pressure at approximately 400 ±34 kPa (58 ±5 psi). The fuel pressure regulator contains a diaphragm, calibrated spring and a fuel return valve. The spring pushes down on the diaphragm and closes off the fuel return port. System fuel pressure reflects the amount of fuel pressure required to open the return port. The pressure regulator is a mechanical device that is NOT controlled by the PCM or engine vacuum. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Operation > Page 3420 Fuel Pressure Regulator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The fuel pressure regulator contains a diaphragm, calibrated spring and a fuel return valve. The regulator is mounted in the fuel pump module. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE 58 psi +/- 2 psi Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Delivery Check *CHECKING THE FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM For a complete wiring diagram Consult Diagrams/Electrical. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 3427 Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP OPERATION Ignition on, engine not running. With a scan tool, actuate the Fuel System test. NOTE: It may be necessary to use a mechanics stethoscope in the next step. Listen for fuel pump operation at the fuel tank. Does the Fuel Pump operate? Yes - Go To 2 No - Go To 5 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 2. FUEL PRESSURE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install a fuel pressure gauge at the engine. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Choose a conclusion that best matches your fuel pressure reading. Below Specification - Go To 3 Within Specification - Test Complete. Above Specification - Replace the fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 3. RESTRICTED FUEL SUPPLY LINE WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure even with the engine off. Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Turn the ignition off. Raise vehicle on hoist, and disconnect the fuel pressure line at the fuel pump module. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631(3/8") fuel line adapter and the fuel pressure gauge between the fuel supply line and the fuel pump module. Ignition on, engine not running. With the scan tool, actuate the ASD Fuel System test and observe the fuel pressure gauge. NOTE: Fuel pressure specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Is the fuel pressure within specification now? Yes Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 3428 - Repair/replace fuel supply line as necessary. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 4 CAUTION: Stop All Actuations. 4. CHECKING FUEL INLET STRAINER WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Module and inspect the Fuel Inlet Strainer. Is the Fuel Inlet Strainer plugged? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Inlet Strainer. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Replace the Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test 5. (N1) FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT CIRCUIT OPEN Turn the ignition off. Remove the Fuel Pump Relay from the IPM. Disconnect the Fuel Pump Module harness connector. Measure the resistance of the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit from the relay connector to the fuel pump module connector. Is the resistance below 5.0 ohms? Yes - Replace the Fuel Pump Relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 3429 - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Repair the open in the (N1) Fuel Pump Relay Output circuit. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 3430 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection Fuel Pressure Leak Down Test *FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN For a complete wiring diagram Consult Diagrams/Electrical. Diagnostic Test 1. FUEL PUMP MODULE NOTE: Before continuing visually and physically inspect the fuel delivery system for external leaks or damage. Repair/replace as necessary. WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Turn the ignition off. Install special tool #6539 (5/16") or #6631 (3/8") fuel line adapter. Install the fuel pressure gauge. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Using special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, pinch the rubber fuel line between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 kPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes - Replace Fuel Pump Module. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Go To 2 2. FUEL INJECTOR(S) WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before testing or servicing any fuel system hose, fitting or line, the fuel system pressure must be released. Failure to follow these instructions can result in personal injury or death. Remove special tool #C4390. Start the engine and allow the fuel system to reach maximum pressure. Turn the ignition off. NOTE: Fuel specification is 407 kPa +/- 34 kPa (59 psi +/- 5 psi). Move special tool #C4390, Hose Clamp Pliers, from between the fuel pressure gauge and the engine to between the fuel pressure gauge and fuel pump module. Monitor the fuel pressure gauge for a minimum of 5 minutes. NOTE: The pressure should not fall below 241 kPa (35 psi) Does the fuel pressure drop? Yes Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > System Diagnosis > Fuel Delivery Check > Page 3431 - Replace the leaking fuel injectors. - Perform the POWERTRAIN VERIFICATION TEST. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Powertrain Verification Test No - Test Complete. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuel Pump Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3435 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 178 Component : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 5-pin, 12-volt, fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the label on the PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3438 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the electric fuel pump through the fuel pump relay. The fuel pump relay is energized by first applying battery voltage to it when the ignition key is turned ON, and then applying a ground signal to the relay from the PCM. Whenever the ignition key is turned ON, the electric fuel pump will operate. But, the PCM will shut-down the ground circuit to the fuel pump relay in approximately 1-3 seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3441 Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Pickup Filter > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Pickup Filter: Locations The module assembly (5) contains the following components: An internal fuel filter See: Fuel Filter/Description and Operation/Fuel Filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Rail: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The fuel injector rail is used to mount the fuel injectors to the engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3449 Fuel Rail: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION High pressure from the fuel pump is routed to the fuel rail. The fuel rail then supplies the necessary fuel to each individual fuel injector. A quick-connect fitting with a safety latch clip is used to attach the fuel line to the fuel rail. The fuel rail is not repairable. CAUTION: The left and right sections of the fuel rail are connected with either a flexible connecting hose, or joints. Do not attempt to separate the rail halves at these connecting hose or joints. Due to the design of the connecting hose or joint, it does not use any clamps. Never attempt to install a clamping device of any kind to the hose or joint. When removing the fuel rail assembly for any reason, be careful not to bend or kink the connecting hose or joint. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail - Removal Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail - Removal 4.7L V-8 WARNING: The fuel system is under constant pressure even with engine off. Before servicing fuel rail, fuel system pressure must be released. CAUTION: The left and right fuel rails are replaced as an assembly. Do not attempt to separate rail halves at connector tubes. Due to design of tubes, it does not use any clamps. Never attempt to install a clamping device of any kind to tubes. When removing fuel rail assembly for any reason, be careful not to bend or kink tubes. 1. Remove fuel tank filler tube cap. 2. Perform Fuel System Pressure Release Procedure. See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair 3. Remove negative battery cable at battery. 4. Remove air duct at throttle body air box. 5. Remove air box at throttle body. 6. Remove air resonator mounting bracket at front of throttle body (2 bolts). 7. Disconnect fuel line latch clip and fuel line at fuel rail. A tool may be necessary for fuel line disconnection. See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair 8. Remove necessary vacuum lines at throttle body. 9. Disconnect electrical connectors at all 8 fuel injectors. Refer to graphic. Push red colored slider away from injector (1). While pushing slider, depress tab (2) and remove connector (3) from injector. The factory fuel injection wiring harness is numerically tagged (INJ 1, INJ 2, etc.) for injector position identification. If harness is not tagged, note wiring location before removal. 10. Disconnect electrical connectors at all throttle body sensors. 11. Remove 8 ignition coils. See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil - Removal Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail - Removal > Page 3452 12. Remove 4 fuel rail mounting bolts (1). 13. Gently rock and pull left side of fuel rail until fuel injectors just start to clear machined holes in cylinder head. Gently rock and pull right side of rail until injectors just start to clear cylinder head holes. Repeat this procedure (left/right) until all injectors have cleared cylinder head holes. 14. Remove fuel rail (with injectors attached) from engine. 15. If fuel injectors are to be removed. See: Fuel Injector/Service and Repair/Fuel Injector - Removal Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail - Removal > Page 3453 Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. If fuel injectors are to be installed. See: Fuel Injector/Service and Repair/Fuel Injector Installation 2. Clean out fuel injector machined bores in intake manifold. 3. Apply a small amount of engine oil to each fuel injector o-ring. This will help in fuel rail installation. 4. Position fuel rail/fuel injector assembly to machined injector openings in cylinder head. 5. Guide each injector into cylinder head. Be careful not to tear injector o-rings. 6. Push right side of fuel rail down until fuel injectors have bottomed on cylinder head shoulder. Push left fuel rail down until injectors have bottomed on cylinder head shoulder. 7. Install four fuel rail mounting bolts (1) and tighten. See: Specifications 8. Install 8 ignition coils. See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil - Installation 9. Connect electrical connectors to throttle body. 10. Connect electrical connectors at all fuel injectors. Refer to graphic. Push connector onto injector (1) and then push and lock red colored slider (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Rail - Removal > Page 3454 Verify connector is locked to injector by lightly tugging on connector. 11. Connect necessary vacuum lines to throttle body. 12. Install air resonator mounting bracket near front of throttle body (2 bolts). 13. Connect fuel line latch clip and fuel line to fuel rail. See: Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair 14. Install air box to throttle body. 15. Install air duct to air box. 16. Connect battery cable to battery. 17. Start engine and check for leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Supply Line: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Also See: Fuel Line Coupler/Description and Operation WARNING: The fuel system may be under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing any fuel system hoses, fittings, lines, or most components, fuel system pressure must be released. See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair The lines/tubes/hoses used on fuel injected vehicles are of a special construction. This is due to the higher fuel pressures and the possibility of contaminated fuel in this system. If it is necessary to replace these lines/tubes/hoses, only those marked EFM/EFI may be used. If equipped: The hose clamps used to secure rubber hoses on fuel injected vehicles are of a special rolled edge construction. This construction is used to prevent the edge of the clamp from cutting into the hose. Only these rolled edge type clamps may be used in this system. All other types of clamps may cut into the hoses and cause high-pressure fuel leaks. Use new original equipment type hose clamps. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Fuel Filler Neck: Customer Interest Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3467 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3468 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Fuel Filler Neck: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3474 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Neck > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Filler Neck: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3475 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations The module assembly (5) contains the following components: An internal fuel filter See: Fuel Filter/Description and Operation/Fuel Filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor Description DESCRIPTION The fuel gauge level sending unit is attached to the side of fuel pump module. The level sensor is a variable resistor. Operation OPERATION Its resistance changes with the amount of fuel in the tank. The float arm attached to the sensor moves as the fuel level changes. The fuel level input is used as an input for OBD II. If the fuel level is below 15% or above 85% of total tank capacity several monitors are disabled. There are diagnostics for the level circuit open and shorted. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor > Page 3481 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor > Page 3482 Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. See: Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Removal 2. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 3. Position Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 4. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 5. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring. 6. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 7. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal > Page 3485 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Whenever the fuel pump module is serviced, the rubber seal (gasket) must be replaced. 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Install fuel tank. See: Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Fuel Tank Vent: Customer Interest Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3494 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3495 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off Fuel Tank Vent: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off NUMBER: 14-001-09 REV. A GROUP: Fuel DATE: September 1, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 14-001-09, DATED APRIL 15, 2009, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Hard To Fill With Fuel Or Fuel Nozzle Shuts Off Repeatedly MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2009 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2007 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2009 (DR) Ram Truck (1500 / 2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2005 - 2009 (ND) Dakota 2009 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2009 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2009 (J1) Sebring (China CKD) 2007 - 2009 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger 2006 - 2009 (K1) Cherokee (CKD) 2007 - 2009 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2009 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2009 (KK) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 (L2) 300 (China) 2008 - 2009 (LC) Challenger 2004 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2007 (R2) Caravan/Voyager(CKD) 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2003 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3501 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2009 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2009 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2009 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2009 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2009 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to all vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine. DISCUSSION: Customer may report that the vehicle is hard to fill with fuel or that the fuel pump nozzle shuts off repeatedly while trying to fill vehicle. This customer complaint can occur due to a number of different causes. The fuel tank is the least likely cause of this condition. The following Diagnostic procedure can be used to diagnose the issues. DIAGNOSIS: 1. Is the vehicle a LX/LE/LC/L2? a. Yes >> proceed to Step # 2 b. No >> proceed to Step # 4 2. Idle the vehicle 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping. 3. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> proceed to Step # 4 b. Yes >> Inform the customer to idle the vehicle for 60 to 90 seconds upon stopping if vehicle was driven aggressively. This is due to the fact that on the LX/LE/LC/L2 the fuel tank is a unique saddle tank design and needs 30 to 60 seconds while the engine is running to level the fuel in both half's of the fuel tank. Allowing the vehicle to idle for this amount of time will let the fuel pump transfer fuel to the left side tank, opening the control valve and allowing normal fuel filling. 4. Disconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 5. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 6. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Proceed to Step # 7 b. No >> Proceed to Step # 11. 7. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 8. Disconnect the other end of the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel filler tube. 9. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 10. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Replace fuel filler tube. b. No >> Replace the vapor recirculation tube. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 14-001-09A > Sep > 09 > Fuel System - Difficult Fuel Fill/Nozzle Shuts Off > Page 3502 11. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 12. Reconnect the vapor recirculation tube at the fuel tank. 13. Does tank refill properly? a. No >> Replace Fuel Tank. b. Yes >> Proceed to 14. Reconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the fuel tank. 15. Disconnect the control valve to EVAP canister tube at the EVAP canister. 16. Attempt to refill fuel tank. 17. Does tank refill properly? a. Yes >> Blockage is in the EVAP Canister, or ESIM, or Clean air hose (ESIM vent hose), or filter. Diagnose appropriately. b. No >> Replace the control valve to EVAP canister tube. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Automatic Shut Down Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3506 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 175 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A A955 ASD RELAY OUTPUT B INTERNAL FUSED B(+) C-D K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 3509 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3512 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Fuel Pump Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 3517 Fuel Pump Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 178 Component : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FUEL PUMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The 5-pin, 12-volt, fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the label on the PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3520 Fuel Pump Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) energizes the electric fuel pump through the fuel pump relay. The fuel pump relay is energized by first applying battery voltage to it when the ignition key is turned ON, and then applying a ground signal to the relay from the PCM. Whenever the ignition key is turned ON, the electric fuel pump will operate. But, the PCM will shut-down the ground circuit to the fuel pump relay in approximately 1-3 seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter motor is engaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3523 Fuel Pump Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Automatic Shut Down Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3527 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Diagrams Component ID: 175 Component : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Connector: Name : RELAY-AUTO SHUT DOWN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A A955 ASD RELAY OUTPUT B INTERNAL FUSED B(+) C-D K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 3530 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3533 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3538 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3539 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 259 Component : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K23 18BR/WT APPS NO. 1 SIGNAL 3 K4 18BR/LB APPS NO. 1 RETURN 4 K400 18BR/VT APPS NO. 2 RETURN 5 K29 18PK/RD APPS NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 23 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3540 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations Throttle Body: Locations Component ID: 325 Component : THROTTLE BODY Connector: Name : THROTTLE BODY Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 2 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K922 20PK/GY TP SENSOR RETURN 4 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) 5 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 3544 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 3545 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 3546 Throttle Body: Diagrams Component ID: 325 Component : THROTTLE BODY Connector: Name : THROTTLE BODY Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 K447 20TN/YL ETC MOTOR (+) 2 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 K922 20PK/GY TP SENSOR RETURN 4 K448 20TN/OR ETC MOTOR (-) 5 K122 20BR/DG TP NO. 2 SIGNAL 6 K22 20BR/OR TP NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 3547 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 3548 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Locations > Page 3549 Throttle Body: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The throttle body is located on the intake manifold. Fuel does not enter the intake manifold through the throttle body. Fuel is sprayed into the manifold by the fuel injectors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body - Removal Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body - Removal 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: Using a diagnostic scan tool, record any previous DTC's (Diagnostic Trouble Codes). CAUTION: Never have the ignition key in the ON position when/if checking the throttle body shaft for a binding condition. This may set DTC's. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable at battery. 2. Remove air duct and air resonator box at throttle body (3). 3. Disconnect throttle body electrical connector (2). 4. Disconnect necessary vacuum lines at throttle body. 5. Remove four throttle body mounting bolts (1). 6. Remove throttle body from intake manifold. 7. Check condition of old throttle body-to-intake manifold o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Throttle Body - Removal > Page 3552 Throttle Body: Service and Repair Throttle Body - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Check condition of throttle body-to-intake manifold O-ring. Replace as necessary. 2. Clean mating surfaces of throttle body and intake manifold. 3. Install throttle body-to-intake manifold O-ring. 4. Install all throttle body mounting bolts (1) finger tight. CAUTION: The throttle body mounting bolts MUST be torqued to specifications. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN MOUNTING BOLTS. Over tightening can cause damage to the throttle body, throttle plate, gaskets, bolts and/or the intake manifold. Proper torque of the mounting bolts is critical to normal operation. 5. Obtain a torque wrench. Tighten mounting bolts (as shown) in a mandatory torque criss-cross pattern sequence to 7.5 Nm (65 in. lbs.). 6. Install electrical connector (2). 7. Install necessary vacuum lines. 8. Install air cleaner duct and plenum at throttle body. 9. Connect negative battery cable. 10. Using the diagnostic scan tool, erase all previous DTC's and perform the ETC Relearn function. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Firing Order: Electrical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 4.7L ENGINE DESCRIPTION Fig. 1 The 4.7 liter (287 CID) eight-cylinder engine is an 90° single overhead camshaft engine. The cast iron cylinder block is made up of two different components; the first component is the cylinder bore and upper block, the second component is the bedplate that comprises the lower portion of the cylinder block and houses the lower half of the crankshaft main bearings. The cylinders are numbered from front to rear with the left bank being numbered 1,3,5 and 7, and the right bank being numbered 2,4,6 and 8. The firing order is 1-8-4-3-6-5-7-2. The engine serial number is located at the Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 3558 right front side of the engine block (Fig. 1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 3559 Firing Order: Mechanical Specifications ENGINE FIRING ORDER - 4.7L V-8 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Timing > System Information > Specifications Ignition Timing: Specifications IGNITION TIMING Ignition timing is not adjustable on any engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3566 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3567 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3568 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3569 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3570 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3573 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 3576 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to o-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (3), be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs). 5. Connect electrical connector (4) to sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3580 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3581 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3582 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3583 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3584 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3585 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3586 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3587 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3588 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3591 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor (3) is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 4.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 3594 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (2) , be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Specifications Ignition Coil: Specifications IGNITION COIL RESISTANCE - 4.7L V-8 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 Ignition Coil: Locations Coil-Ignition-No. 1 Component ID: 43 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3600 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3601 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3602 Ignition Coil: Locations Coil-Ignition-No. 2 Component ID: 44 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3603 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3604 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3605 Ignition Coil: Locations Coil-Ignition-No. 3 Component ID: 45 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3606 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3607 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3608 Ignition Coil: Locations Coil-Ignition-No. 4 Component ID: 46 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 4 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K15 18DB COIL CONTROL NO. 4 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3609 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3610 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3611 Ignition Coil: Locations Coil-Ignition-No. 1 Component ID: 43 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3612 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3613 Coil-Ignition-No. 2 Component ID: 44 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3614 Pin Circuit Description 1 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 17 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3615 Coil-Ignition-No. 3 Component ID: 45 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3616 Pin Circuit Description 1 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 11 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3617 Coil-Ignition-No. 4 Component ID: 46 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 4 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3618 Pin Circuit Description 1 K15 18DB COIL CONTROL NO. 4 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 17 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3619 Coil-Ignition-No. 5 Component ID: 47 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 5 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3620 Pin Circuit Description 1 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 11 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3621 Coil-Ignition-No. 6 Component ID: 48 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 6 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 6 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3622 Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 17 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3623 Coil-Ignition-No. 7 Component ID: 49 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 7 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 7 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3624 Pin Circuit Description 1 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 11 Coil-Ignition-No. 8 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3625 Component ID: 50 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 8 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 8 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Locations > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3626 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil-Ignition-No. 1 Component ID: 43 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3629 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3630 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3631 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil-Ignition-No. 2 Component ID: 44 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3632 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3633 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3634 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil-Ignition-No. 3 Component ID: 45 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3635 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3636 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3637 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil-Ignition-No. 4 Component ID: 46 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 4 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K15 18DB COIL CONTROL NO. 4 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3638 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3639 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3640 Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil-Ignition-No. 1 Component ID: 43 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 K19 18DB/DG COIL CONTROL NO. 1 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3641 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3642 Coil-Ignition-No. 2 Component ID: 44 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3643 Pin Circuit Description 1 K17 18DB/TN COIL CONTROL NO. 2 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 17 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3644 Coil-Ignition-No. 3 Component ID: 45 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3645 Pin Circuit Description 1 K18 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 3 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 11 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3646 Coil-Ignition-No. 4 Component ID: 46 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 4 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3647 Pin Circuit Description 1 K15 18DB COIL CONTROL NO. 4 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 17 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3648 Coil-Ignition-No. 5 Component ID: 47 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 5 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 5 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3649 Pin Circuit Description 1 K16 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 5 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 11 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3650 Coil-Ignition-No. 6 Component ID: 48 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 6 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 6 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3651 Pin Circuit Description 1 K10 18DB/OR COIL CONTROL NO. 6 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 17 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3652 Coil-Ignition-No. 7 Component ID: 49 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 7 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 7 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3653 Pin Circuit Description 1 K97 18BR COIL CONTROL NO. 7 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 11 Coil-Ignition-No. 8 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3654 Component ID: 50 Component : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 8 Connector: Name : COIL-IGNITION-NO. 8 Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K98 18DB/YL COIL CONTROL NO. 8 2 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 3-Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil-Ignition-No. 1 > Page 3655 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil - Removal Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil - Removal 4.7L V-8 An individual ignition coil (1) is used for each pair of spark plugs. Each coil attaches directly to the top of the eight upper bank of spark plugs. Secondary cables (3) connect each coil to the eight lower bank of spark plugs. The coils themselves fit into machined holes in the cylinder head. Each coil also has its own individual electrical connector (2). Note: The bolt used to mount the ignition coil is also the same bolt used to mount the intake manifold. If replacing either one, or, all eight coils, check and re-torque all eight bolts. A mounting bolt (3) secures each coil to the top of the intake manifold. The bottom of the coil is equipped with a rubber boot (4) to seal the spark plug (5) to the coil. Inside each rubber boot is a spring. The spring is used for a mechanical contact between the coil and the top of the upper bank of spark plugs. These rubber boots and springs are a permanent part of the coil and are not serviced separately. The rubber boot (4) is also used to seal the coil at the opening into the cylinder head. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil - Removal > Page 3658 1. Depending on which coil is being removed, the throttle body air intake tube or intake box may need to be removed to gain access to coil. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (2) from coil by pushing downward on release lock on top of connector and pull connector from coil. 3. Disconnect secondary cable (3) at coil. 4. Clean area at base of coil with compressed air before removal. 5. Remove coil mounting bolt (3). 6. Carefully pull up coil assembly (2) from cylinder head opening with a slight twisting action. This will help to disengage rubber boot (4) from spark plug (5). 7. Remove coil from engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Coil - Removal > Page 3659 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Using compressed air, blow out any dirt or contaminants from around top of spark plug. 2. Check condition of coil rubber boot (4). To aid in coil installation, apply silicone based grease such as Mopar(R) Dielectric Grease # J8126688 into spark plug end of rubber boot (4). Also apply this grease to the top of spark plug (5). 3. Position ignition coil into cylinder head opening and using a twisting action, push onto spark plug. 4. Tighten coil mounting bolt (3) to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs.) torque. Note: The bolt used to mount the ignition coil is also the same bolt used to mount the intake manifold. If replacing either one, or, all eight coils, check and re-torque all eight bolts. 5. Connect electrical connector (2) to coil by snapping into position. 6. Connect secondary cable (3) to coil (1). 7. If necessary, install throttle body air intake tube, or intake air box. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 3664 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3667 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3672 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3673 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3674 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3675 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3678 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3679 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3680 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3681 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3684 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors from engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3687 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts (2) will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock senor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft.lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 3693 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Relays and Modules - Ignition System > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3696 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3701 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3702 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3703 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 262 Component : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CAMSHAFT POSITION Color : # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 K44 20DB/GY CMP SIGNAL Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3704 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3705 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) is bolted to the right-front side of the right cylinder head. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3708 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L The CMP sensor contains a hall effect device called a sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. This sync signal generator detects notches located on a tonewheel. The tonewheel (4) is located at the front of the camshaft for the right cylinder head (2). As the tonewheel rotates, the notches (1) pass through the sync signal generator. The pattern of the notches (viewed counter-clockwise from front of engine) is: 1 notch, 2 notches, 3 notches, 3 notches, 2 notches 1 notch, 3 notches and 1 notch. The signal from the CMP sensor is used in conjunction with the crankshaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel injection and spark events. It is also used to synchronize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L The Camshaft Position Sensor (CMP) (2) is bolted to the front/top of the right cylinder head (1). 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Disconnect electrical connector (4) at CMP sensor. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolt (3). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder head. 5. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Camshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 3711 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Camshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L 1. Clean out machined hole in cylinder head. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (2) into cylinder head with a slight rocking action. Do not twist sensor into position as damage to o-ring may result. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (3), be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder head. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (3) and tighten to 12 Nm (106 in.lbs). 5. Connect electrical connector (4) to sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3715 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3716 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3717 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3718 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3719 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 263 Component : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (3.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3720 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3721 Connector: Name : SENSOR-CRANKSHAFT POSITION Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (4.7L) Pin Circuit Description 1 K24 20BR/LB CKP SIGNAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3722 2 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 3 F855 20PK/YL 5 VOLT SUPPLY Component Location - 18 Component Location - 12 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3723 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is mounted into the right rear side of the cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3726 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation 4.7L V-8 Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor generates pulses that are the input sent to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets the sensor input to determine the crankshaft position. The PCM then uses this position, along with other inputs, to determine injector sequence and ignition timing. The sensor (3) is a hall effect device combined with an internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a certain distance from it. On the 4.7L V-8 engine, a tonewheel (1) is bolted to the engine crankshaft. This tonewheel has sets of notches (2) at its outer edge. The notches cause a pulse to be generated when they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input to the PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal 4.7L V-8 The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) is located at the right-rear side of the engine cylinder block. It is positioned and bolted into a machined hole in the engine block. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Disconnect CKP electrical connector at sensor. 3. Remove CKP mounting bolt (2). 4. Carefully twist sensor from cylinder block. 5. Remove sensor from vehicle. 6. Check condition of sensor o-ring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Position Sensor - Removal > Page 3729 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair Crankshaft Position Sensor - Installation 4.7L V-8 1. Clean out machined hole in engine block. 2. Apply a small amount of engine oil to sensor o-ring. 3. Install sensor (1) into engine block with a slight rocking and twisting action. CAUTION: Before tightening sensor mounting bolt (2) , be sure sensor is completely flush to cylinder block. If sensor is not flush, damage to sensor mounting tang may result. 4. Install mounting bolt (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) torque. 5. Connect electrical connector to sensor. 6. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder Removal REMOVAL The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly (2). a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 3735 The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (2) with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (2) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 3736 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key/Lock Cylinder - Removal REMOVAL The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly (2). a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 3737 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key/Lock Cylinder - Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (2) with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (2) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3742 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3743 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3744 Knock Sensor: Locations Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3745 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 1 Component ID: 270 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K42 20DB/OR KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 SIGNAL 2 K942 20BR/LG KNOCK SENSOR NO. 1 RETURN Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3748 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3749 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3750 Knock Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Knock No. 2 Component ID: 271 Component : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Connector: Name : SENSOR-KNOCK NO. 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K242 20BR/WT KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 SIGNAL 2 K924 20PK/RD KNOCK SENSOR NO. 2 RETURN Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Knock No. 1 > Page 3751 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The two knock sensors are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3754 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Two knock sensors are used; one for each cylinder bank. When the knock sensor detects a knock in one of the cylinders on the corresponding bank, it sends an input signal to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). In response, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders by a scheduled amount. Knock sensors contain a piezoelectric material which constantly vibrates and sends an input voltage (signal) to the PCM while the engine operates. As the intensity of the crystal's vibration increases, the knock sensor output voltage also increases. The voltage signal produced by the knock sensor increases with the amplitude of vibration. The PCM receives the knock sensor voltage signal as an input. If the signal rises above a predetermined level, the PCM will store that value in memory and retard ignition timing to reduce engine knock. If the knock sensor voltage exceeds a preset value, the PCM retards ignition timing for all cylinders. It is not a selective cylinder retard. The PCM ignores knock sensor input during engine idle conditions. Once the engine speed exceeds a specified value, knock retard is allowed. Knock retard uses its own short term and long term memory program. Long term memory stores previous detonation information in its battery-backed RAM. The maximum authority that long term memory has over timing retard can be calibrated. Short term memory is allowed to retard timing up to a preset amount under all operating conditions (as long as rpm is above the minimum rpm) except at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The PCM, using short term memory, can respond quickly to retard timing when engine knock is detected. Short term memory is lost any time the ignition key is turned off. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Removal 4.7L The two knock sensors (1) are bolted into the cylinder block under the intake manifold (3). NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Disconnect knock sensor dual pigtail harness from engine wiring harness. This connection is made near rear of engine. 2. Remove intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 3. Remove sensor mounting bolts (2). Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 4. Remove sensors from engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3757 Knock Sensor: Service and Repair Installation 4.7L NOTE: The left sensor is identified by an identification tag (LEFT). It is also identified by a larger bolt head. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) must have and know the correct sensor left/right positions. Do not mix the sensor locations. 1. Thoroughly clean knock sensor mounting holes. 2. Install sensors (1) into cylinder block. NOTE: Over or under tightening the sensor mounting bolts (2) will affect knock sensor performance, possibly causing improper spark control. Always use the specified torque when installing the knock sensors. The torque for the knock senor bolt is relatively light for an 8 mm bolt. NOTE: Note foam strip on bolt threads. This foam is used only to retain the bolts to sensors for plant assembly. It is not used as a sealant. Do not apply any adhesive, sealant or thread locking compound to these bolts. 3. Install and tighten mounting bolts. Tighten to 15 +/- 2 ft.lbs. (20 Nm) (176 in.lbs). 4. Install intake manifold See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Intake Manifold - Installation. 5. Connect knock sensor wiring harness to engine harness at rear of intake manifold. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications SPARK PLUGS 3.7L TORQUE ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 27 Nm (20 Ft. Lbs) 4.7L New plugs ............................................................................................................................................ .......................................... 27 +/- 3 Nm (20 Ft. Lbs.) Used plugs ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 22 +/- 3 Nm (16 Ft. Lbs) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3761 Spark Plug: Application and ID SPARK PLUGS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Removal REMOVAL - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. Remove necessary air filter tubing and air intake components at top of engine and at throttle body. 2. To remove the upper row of plugs (5), each individual ignition coil (2) must first be removed. See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil Removal Prior to removing ignition coil, spray compressed air around coil base at cylinder head. 3. Prior to removing spark plug, spray compressed air into cylinder head opening. This will help prevent foreign material from entering combustion chamber. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between UPPER row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. 4. Inspect spark plug condition. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 3764 Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plug - Installation INSTALLATION - 4.7L V-8 CAUTION: This engine uses TWO DIFFERENT types of spark plugs. A total of 16 plugs is used. The plugs are mounted in two rows (banks). The upper row (5) is used on the intake valve side of the cylinder head. The lower row (6) is used on the exhaust valve side of the cylinder head. The upper row (5) uses Bosch Nickel Yttrium plugs #05149050AB. The lower row (6) uses Bosch Iridium plugs #05149888AA. DO NOT INTERCHANGE THESE PLUGS. CAUTION: Never use a motorized wire wheel brush to clean spark plugs. Metallic deposits will remain on spark plug insulator and will cause plug misfire. CAUTION: Do not attempt to clean any of the spark plugs. Replace only. 1. To aid in coil installation, apply silicone based grease such as Mopar(R) Dielectric Grease # J8126688 into spark plug end of rubber boots (4) and (7). Also apply this grease to the tops of spark plugs (5) and (6). 2. Check and adjust spark plug gap with a gap gauging tool (1). Refer to the Spark Plug Specification for plug gap. Two different gaps are used. See: Specifications 3. Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by hand to avoid cross threading. Special care should be taken when installing spark plugs into the cylinder head spark plug wells. Be sure the plugs do not drop into the plug wells as electrodes can be damaged. CAUTION: Due to tight clearances between upper row of plugs (5) and cylinder head, a conventional deep, thick-wall spark plug socket will not fit. Use a deep, THIN-WALL 5/8" spark plug socket for plug removal and installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spark Plug - Removal > Page 3765 Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque. Certain engines use torque sensitive spark plugs. It is a good practice to always tighten spark plugs to a specific torque. Over tightening can cause distortion resulting in a change in the spark plug gap, or a cracked porcelain insulator. See: Specifications 4. Install ignition coil(s). See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil - Installation 5. Install necessary air filter tubing and air intake components to top of engine and to throttle body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3773 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules A/T/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3776 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 3781 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 3782 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 3783 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 3786 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 3787 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 3788 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3791 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules A/T/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3794 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 287 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B30 20DG/OR BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 20BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3798 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3799 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3800 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 287 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B30 20DG/OR BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 20BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3801 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 3802 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 3807 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 3808 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 3809 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 3812 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 3813 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 3814 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3817 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules A/T/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3820 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3825 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules A/T/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3828 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3833 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3834 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3835 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3836 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3837 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3838 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3839 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4HI, 2WD, N (neutral), and 4Low). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 3842 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 3843 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 3844 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4HI, 2WD, N (neutral), and 4Low). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV233 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 3847 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 3848 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 3849 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3856 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135 °C (275 °F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An electronic automatic transmission gear selector indicator is standard factory-installed equipment on this vehicle. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gear selector indicator information is displayed in an electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located below the tachometer in the lower right area of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gear selector indicator displays the following characters from left to right: P , R , N , D , 2 , and 1. Each character appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information. Respectively, these characters represent the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, second gear, and first gear positions of the transmission gear selector lever on the steering column. The indicator also illuminates a rectangular box around the character that represents the currently selected lever position. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the gear selector indicator is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the indicator lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the indicator to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The gear selector indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3861 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The electronic gear selector indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The gear selector indicator information is displayed by the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the gear selector indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission type that is in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry operates the gear selector indicator to provide the following features: - Selected Gear Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic selected gear message from the PCM, a box will be illuminated around the appropriate character in the gear selector indicator. The box will remain illuminated until the cluster receives a different selected gear message, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a selected gear message from the PCM within three seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will display all gear selector positions boxed (selected) until a valid selected gear message is received or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer/trip odometer VFD will display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors a hard wired multiplex input from the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS), then sends the proper message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the gear selector indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls this function, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the TRS, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gear selector indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR A 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4WD Low Indicator 4WD LOW INDICATOR A 4WD low indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD low indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The 4WD low indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4LOW in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD low indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD low indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3867 Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR The 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into a 4WD mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD mode is engaged. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. 4WD Low Indicator 4WD LOW INDICATOR The 4WD low indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD low mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD low indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD low indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Low Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD low indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD low indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the LED portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD low mode is engaged. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD low indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD low indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A service 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The service 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text SVC 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The service 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3872 Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The service 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an electronic transfer case circuit or component malfunction. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the FCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The service 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the service 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the service 4WD indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Service 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic service 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the service 4WD indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the FCM for 10 seconds, the service 4WD indicator is illuminated by the cluster to indicate a loss of FCM communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the FCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the service 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case control circuits and transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine the condition of the system. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the service 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to service 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (1). The PCM is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 3879 Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Operation OPERATION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. See: Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 3880 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 3881 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn Control Module: Service and Repair TCM Quick Learn TCM QUICK LEARN The quick learn procedure requires the use of the scan tool. This program allows the electronic transmission system to recalibrate itself. This will provide the proper transmission operation. The quick learn procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed: - Transmission Assembly Replacement - Transmission Control Module Replacement - Solenoid Pack Replacement - Clutch Plate and/or Seal Replacement - Valve Body Replacement or Recondition To perform the Quick Learn Procedure, the following conditions must be met: - The brakes must be applied - The engine speed must be above 500 rpm - The throttle angle (TPS) must be less than 3 degrees - The shift lever position must stay in PARK until prompted to shift to overdrive - The shift lever position must stay in overdrive after the Shift to Overdrive prompt until the scan tool indicates the procedure is complete. - The calculated oil temperature must be above 60° and below 200° Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn > Page 3884 Control Module: Service and Repair TCM Drive Learn DRIVE LEARN When a transmission is repaired and a Quick Learn procedure has been performed on the Transmission Control Module (TCM), the following Drive Learn procedure can be performed to fine tune any shifts which are particularly objectionable. NOTE: It is not necessary to perform the complete Drive Learn procedure every time the TCM is Quick Learned. Perform only the portions which target the objectionable shift. LEARN A SMOOTH 1ST NEUTRAL TO DRIVE SHIFT Perform this procedure only if the complaint is for a delayed or harsh shift the first time the transmission is put into gear after the vehicle is allowed to set with the engine not running for at least 10 minutes. Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 1st N-D UD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be between 27-43° C (80-110° F). 1. Start the engine only when the engine and ignition have been off for at least ten (10) minutes. 2. With the vehicle at a stop and the service brake applied, record the 1st N-D UD CVI while performing a Neutral to Drive shift. The 1st N-D UD CVI accounts for air entrapment in the UD clutch that may occur after the engine has been off for a period of time. 3. Repeat STEP 1 and STEP 2 until the recorded 1st N-D UD CVI value stabilizes. NOTE: It is important that this procedure be performed when the transmission temperature is between 27-43° C (80-110° F). If this procedure takes too long to complete fully for the allowed transmission oil temperature, the vehicle may be returned to the customer with an explanation that the shift will improve daily during normal vehicle usage. The TCM also learns at higher oil temperatures, but these values (line pressure correction values) are not available for viewing on the scan tool. LEARN A SMOOTH NEUTRAL TO DRIVE GARAGE SHIFT Perform this procedure if the complaint is for a delayed or harsh shift when the transmission is put into gear after the vehicle has had its first shift. Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the Norm N-D UD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be between 27-43° C (80-110° F) to learn the UD CVI. Additional learning occurs at temperatures as low as -18° C (0° F) and as high as 93° C (200° F). This procedure may be performed at any temperature that experiences poor shift quality. Although the UD CVI may not change, shift quality should improve. 1. Start the vehicle engine and shift to drive. 2. Move the vehicle forward to a speed of at least 16 km/h (10 MPH) and come to a stop. This ensures no air is present in the UD hydraulic circuit. 3. Perform repeated N-D shifts at a stop while pausing in Neutral for at least 2-3 seconds and monitor Norm N-D UD CVI volume until the value stabilizes. The value will change during the N-D shift. This is normal since the UD value is different for the N-D shift then the normal value shown which is used for 4-3 coastdown and kickdowns. Perform repeated shifts in this temperature range until the Norm N-D UD CVI value stabilizes and the N-D shifts become smooth. LEARN THE 1ST 2-3 SHIFT AFTER A RESTART OR SHIFT TO REVERSE Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 1st 2-3 shift OD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 27° C (80° F). 1. With the vehicle engine running, select reverse gear for over 2 seconds. 2. Shift the transmission to Drive and accelerate the vehicle from a stop at a steady 15 degree throttle opening and perform a 2-3 shift while noting the 1st 2-3 OD CVI. 3. Repeat STEP 1 and STEP 2 until the 1st 2-3 upshift becomes smooth and the 1st 2-3 OD CVI stabilizes. LEARN A SMOOTH 2-3 AND 3-4 UPSHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the OD and 4C CVI's. 1. Accelerate the vehicle from a stop at a steady 15 degree throttle opening and perform multiple 1-2, 2-3, and 3-4 upshifts. The 2nd 2-3 shift following a restart or shift to reverse will be shown during the shift as a value between the 1st 2-3 OD CVI and the normal OD CVI. Updates to the normal OD CVI will occur after the 2nd shift into 3rd gear, following a restart or shift to reverse. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 2-3 and 3-4 shifts become smooth and the OD and 4C CVI become stable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn > Page 3885 LEARN A SMOOTH 4-3 COASTDOWN AND PART THROTTLE 4-3 KICKDOWN NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the UD shift volume. 1. At a vehicle speed between 64-97 km/h (40-60 MPH), perform repeated 4-3 kickdown shifts. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the UD volume becomes somewhat stable and the shift becomes smooth. LEARN A SMOOTH 1-2 UPSHIFT AND 3-2 KICKDOWN Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 2C shift volume. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). 1. With a vehicle speed below 48 km/h (30 MPH) and the transmission in 3rd gear, perform multiple 3-2 kickdowns. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 3-2 kickdowns become smooth and the 2C CVI becomes stable. LEARN A SMOOTH MANUAL 2-1 PULLDOWN SHIFT AS WELL AS A NEUTRAL TO REVERSE SHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the LR volume. 1. With the vehicle speed around 40-48 km/h (25-30 MPH) in Manual 2nd, perform manual pulldowns to Low or 1st gear at closed throttle. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the LR CVI becomes stable and the manual 2-1 becomes smooth. LEARN A SMOOTH NEUTRAL TO REVERSE SHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). 1. With the vehicle at a stop, perform Neutral to Reverse shifts until the shift is smooth. An unlearned Neutral to Reverse shift may be harsh or exhibit a double bump. 2. If any of the shifts are still not smooth after the clutch volume stabilizes, an internal transmission problem may be present. LEARN A SMOOTH 4-5 UPSHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the Alt 2C CVI. 1. Accelerate the vehicle through 88 km/h (55 mph) at a steady 10-15 degree throttle opening and perform multiple 4-5 upshifts. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 4-5 shift become smooth and the Alt 2C CVI become stable. There is a separate 2C volume used and learned for 4-5 shifts, 2CA. It is independent of the 2C CVI learned on 3-2 kickdowns. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Transmission Control Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3889 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 188 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 Z915 20BK GROUND 86 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 87 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay. The relay is supplied fused B+ voltage, energized by the TCM, and is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when the transmission is in normal operating mode. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3892 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay. When the relay is "off", no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in "limp-in" mode. After a controller reset, the TCM energizes the relay. Prior to this, the TCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking for no voltage at the switched battery terminals. After this is verified, the voltage at the solenoid pack pressure switches is checked. After the relay is energized, the TCM monitors the terminals to verify that the voltage is greater than 3 volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3898 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: f‘~ STACK: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3899 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Front Control Module (FCM) utilizes the input from the transfer case mounted mode sensor, the instrument panel mounted selector switch, and the following information from the vehicle's CAN bus to determine if a shift is allowed. - Engine RPM and Vehicle Speed - Diagnostic Requests - Manual Transmission Clutch Switch - Brake Applied - PRNDL - Ignition Status - ABS Messages Once the FCM determines that a requested shift is allowed, it actuates the bi-directional shift motor as necessary to achieve the desired transfer case operating mode. The FCM also monitors the mode sensor while controlling the shift motor to determine the status of the shift attempt. Several items can cause the requested shift not to be completed. If the FCM has recognized a fault (DTC) of some variety, it will begin operation in one of four Functionality Levels. These levels are: - Level Zero - Normal Operation. - Level One - Only Mode Shifts Are Allowed. - Level Two - Only Mode Shifts and Shifts Into LOW Are Allowed (No Neutral Shifts Are Allowed). - Level Three - No Shifts Are Allowed The FCM can also be operating in one of three possible power modes. These power modes are: - Full Power Mode is the normal operational mode of the module. This mode is achieved by normal CAN bus traffic being present and the ignition being in the RUN position. Reduced Power Mode will be entered when the ignition has been powered off. In this state, the module will shut down power supplied to external devices, and to electronic interface inputs and outputs. From this state the module can enter either Sleep Mode or Full Power Mode. To enter this mode, the module must receive an ignition message denoting that the ignition is off, or not receive any messages for 5 ±0.5 seconds. To exit this mode, the module must receive one ignition message that denotes that the ignition is in the RUN position. - Sleep Mode will be entered, from the Reduced Power Mode, when no CAN traffic has been sensed for 20 ±1 seconds. If during Sleep Mode the module detects CAN bus traffic, it will revert to the Reduced Power mode while monitoring for ignition messages. It will remain in this state as long as there is traffic other than run or start messages, and will return to Sleep mode if the bus goes without traffic for 20 ±1 seconds. SHIFT REQUIREMENTS If the FCM is in full power mode and at functionality level zero, it uses the following criteria to determine if a shift is allowed. If any of the driver controllable conditions are not met once the shift request is recognized, the FCM may illuminate one or more of the 4WD system message icons in the instrument cluster display. Mode shifts will be allowed regardless of transmission gear or vehicle speed, whenever the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - A change in the Selector switch state indicates that a mode shift has been requested. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. Range shifts will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - A change in the Selector Switch state indicating a range shift has been requested. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal must be recognized for at least 1.5 seconds ±100 msec. (Automatic transmissions only) - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Clutch signal is recognized for 500 msec ± 50 msec (Manual transmissions only). - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3900 - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. A shift into transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position, engine off. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 4.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. A shift out of transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. LAMP STRATEGY The following strategy for the FCM controlled transfer case system uses the instrument cluster VF display's 4LOCK, 4LO, Service 4WD, and Mode Switch Transfer Case Neutral LED. Flashing any of the lamps or LED is accomplished at a 2Hz rate. NOTE: There is no lamp for the 2WD or AWD position. If no 4WD system message icons are illuminated in the instrument cluster, the operator is to assume that the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD position. - 2WD or AWD to 4LO - Successful shifts will flash 4LO during a shift, then after the 4LO position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 2WD or AWD to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will flash 4LOCK during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LOCK lamp is flashing. - 4LOCK to 4LO - Successful shifts will turn off the 4LOCK lamp and flash 4LO during a shift, then after the 4LO position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In the blocked condition, turn off 4LOCK and flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, the 4LOCK lamp remains illuminated solid and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 4LOCK to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts will flash the 4LOCK lamp during a shift, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, turn off the 4LOCK lamp. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LOCK lamp is flashing. - 4LO to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts will flash the 4LO lamp during a shift, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, turn off the 4LO lamp. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 4LO to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will turn off the 4LO lamp and flash 4LOCK during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In the blocked condition, turn off 4LO and flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, the 4LO lamp remains illuminated solid and 4LOCK is flashing. - 2WD or AWD to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is depressed. - 4LOCK to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp is illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3901 depressed. - 4LO to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp is illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is depressed. - NEUTRAL to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, no lamps are illuminated. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, Phase 2 shifting will continue until the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, no lamp is illuminated, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while the push button is depressed, - Neutral to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will flash the 4LOCK lamp during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In a blocked condition, the 4LOCK lamp will flash during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, continue to flash the 4LOCK, Phase 2 shifting will continue until the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, turn off the 4LOCK lamp, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while the push button is depressed. - NEUTRAL to 4LO - Successful shifts will flash the 4LO lamp during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In a blocked condition, the 4LO lamp will flash during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, continue to flash 4LO, Phase 2 shifting will continue until transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, turn off the 4LO lamp, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp solid. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while push the button is depressed. SHIFT SEQUENCES (PHASE 1 SHIFTS) Once all the driver controllable conditions for the requested shift have been met, the FCM begins a shift timer with a maximum duration of 1 second per mode sensor target segment. If the shift timer expires before the FCM recognizes to correct mode sensor position, the shift is considered to have been blocked. The blocked shift will increment the blocked shift counter by one. The FCM strategy for handling blocked shifts will be described later. The process the FCM performs for the various shifts will be described first. RANGE AND MODE SHIFTS The process for performing all the range and mode shifts are the same. The following steps describe the process. - Allow time for Selector Switch debounce; 250 msec ±50 msec. - Activate/deactivate the 4WD system message icons in the instrument cluster as necessary. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec per mode sensor target segment in the destination gear's direction while monitoring the mode sensor. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor position is recognized. - Solidly illuminate the achieved position's instrument panel icon, unless the target is 2WD or AWD. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor position is not reached after the shift timer expires (i.e.: a blocked shift motor or other condition exists), the FCM will stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. per mode sensor target segment. The FCM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. The exception to the preceding sequence is when a shift from 4LO to 2WD or AWD is requested. If 2WD or AWD is requested from the 4LO position, the transfer case is first driven to the 4LOCK position. If the 4LOCK position is reached, the transfer case is then driven back to the 2WD or AWD position and the shift is considered complete. SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL The following steps describe the process for a shift out of NEUTRAL. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec toward the transfer case 4LOCK mode position while monitoring the mode sensor position. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor position is recognized. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor position is not received after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The FCM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. - When the Neutral button is released, if the 4LOCK position is the desired position, the shift is complete. Illuminate the 4LOCK message icon. - Otherwise when the Neutral button is released, if all of the shift requirements are being met then engage the shift motor towards the desired position for 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel. (if requirements for shifting are not met, illuminate the 4LOCK message icon and flash the destination message icon as an indication to the driver that all of the driver controllable shift conditions are not being met). If this requires another range or mode shift, begin the range/mode shift process. - If the desired mode sensor position is not achieved after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), refer to the section on Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3902 Blocked Shift Strategy, also known as Phase 2 shifts (below). NEUTRAL BLOCKED SHIFT STRATEGY (PHASE 2 SHIFTS) When a shift is commanded out of neutral, the shift motor will be driven towards its destination position, except in the case of shifting out of NEUTRAL if 4LO was selected (the transfer case will shift to the 4LOCK position first, before proceeding to 4LO). If the shift is blocked on the way to the destination, the FCM may attempt to drive the motor back to the original position. This process will be allowed to occur 5 times. If the transfer case has reached a non-NEUTRAL position during the shift re-attempts, the message icon for the achieved gear position is illuminated and the shift attempts are stopped. To re-attempt the desired shift, the selector switch will need to be rotated to the current position until the switch debounce timer expires then a shift will need to be requested again. At the end of the 5th blocked attempt, the shift motor is driven towards the last known mode sensor position. If this motor drive allows the transfer case to reach the 2WD or AWD position, the shift is considered complete and the shift attempts are ended. If the mode sensor is in the NEUTRAL region at the expiration of the shift timer, the FCM will continue to make the shift attempts according to the blocked shift strategy independent of whether or not the driver controlled conditions are met. For shifts from NEUTRAL, if all 5 attempts fail to reach the desired position (which by default is 4LOCK), the motor will be driven to stall in the direction of 4LOCK or 4LO, depending on the achieved position. Otherwise, the transfer case will be driven in the direction opposite the last attempt with the desired target being 4LOCK or 4LO. If the transfer case reaches the 2WD or AWD position when being driven in the 4LOCK direction, then one final 1.0 second drive toward 4LOCK is attempted. If the transfer case then reaches the 4LOCK position, the shift is considered complete and the 4LOCK message icon is illuminated. If the transfer case is still the 2WD or AWD position, the shift is considered complete and all message icons are extinguished. NEUTRAL DRIFT SHIFT STRATEGY (PHASE 3 SHIFTS) NOTE: If after the 5th blocked shift and reversal attempt, if the transfer case position is in the NEUTRAL or other undesired region, shift attempts will continue until a non-NEUTRAL or a desired position is reached. Phase 3 is a series of shifts whose intent is to escape from an undesired position that has been reached outside of a shift. A perceived drift of the transfer case into a non-target region without the FCM driving the shift motor will initiate a phase 3 shift. Phase 3 will be initiated by any non-target region with the exception of a position greater then encoder_4LO_min or less then encoder_4LOCK_max. Whenever these encoder readings have been seen for defined period of time, Phase 3 shifting will begin. The shifts in a given Phase 3 shifting event are always in a single-direction, toward the target region from which the drift occurred. These shifts are performed without regard to shift conditions. The timing of each shift should follow the outline of the Phase 1 forward attempts, allowing the shift timer to reach the target. Between each attempt, there is a calibrated delay. After each attempt the shift counter and the Phase 3 max shifts counter will be updated. SHIFT REVERSAL TARGETS If the shift timer expires (1.0 seconds per mode sensor position) and the transfer case has not reached the desired position, all shifts will attempt to return to their original position with the exceptions of: - If the intended shift is going to the High rail from Low and can't make it, but it can make the 2WD or AWD position, the motor stops at that position. The FCM will not attempt to cross back over NEUTRAL if it does not have to. This means that there was a block on the first attempt to go to 4LOCK and the transfer case has made it through NEUTRAL to a known good position, then the motor will go back only to the 2WD or AWD position and execute the remainder of the attempts from there. - For shifts out of NEUTRAL, any time a shift is commanded out of NEUTRAL, the system needs to get out. The FCM should never go to NEUTRAL unless the driver is commanding it and all required conditions are being met. ENCODER DRIFT CORRECTION Whenever a shift is completed, the FCM stores the position in memory as the transfer case's intended position. The FCM continuously monitors the mode sensor and if the mode sensor drifts toward into a NEUTRAL region sensor position for 2.0 seconds, the FCM will perform a motor drive to correct the drift. The transfer case will be driven toward the intended position for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. The FCM will wait for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeat the attempt to shift to the desired position. This will continue until the intended position is reached. SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL The FCM will have the ability to vary the speed of the transfer case motor through pulse width modulation (PWM). It is PWM from 0 to 100% at 100Hz. The PWM will function as follows: - Apply an initial duty cycle (APPROXIMATELY 94%) to shift motor control wires. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3903 - Control the acceleration of the shift motor by increasing the applied duty cycle at a specified rate. - Control the deceleration of the shift motor by updating the applied duty cycle to the shift motor control wires at a specified rate based upon the difference between the desired position and the current position. SHIFT ATTEMPT LIMIT To protect the transfer case system, the FCM will impose a limit on the number of shifts that can occur over a calibrated time period. The system will monitor the number of mode sensor position changes that occur in any 25 second time period. If the number of changes is 10 or greater, the system will go into a default mode. The default mode of operation for shifting is that the number of allowed changes permitted to occur will be 3 over each 15 second ±100 msec calibrated window of time. After 5 minutes ±100 msec, the motor can be assumed to have cooled down and the system will revert to normal operation. The following rules also apply to the shift limit: - The attempt limit will not prevent shifts coming out of NEUTRAL, they will be allowed regardless of the counter/timer. - Any shift that is in progress when the counter reaches a maximum count in time will be allowed to complete before the default mode is entered. Position changes during this period will not be counted towards the default mode limit. - A block, regardless of the direction, whether towards destination or back towards reversal target (shift timer expiring), will count as a value of 2 position changes towards the 10 position changes to go into default mode as defined above. Current attempt limit values are 10 transitions in 25 seconds and default mode values are 1 transition every 10 seconds for 5 minutes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 13 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 3910 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 3911 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 3912 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 3913 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 272 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 3914 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 13 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 3917 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 3918 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 3919 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 3920 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 272 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 3921 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3924 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3927 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 321 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 2 Z953 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3931 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3932 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 321 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 2 Z953 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3933 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3936 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3941 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules A/T/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 3944 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3949 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3950 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3951 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3954 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3955 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 3956 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3959 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 268 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 3964 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 3965 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 3966 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 274 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 3967 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 3968 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 268 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 3971 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 3972 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 3973 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 274 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 3974 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 3975 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Input Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 3978 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Output Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Input Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 3981 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission temperature sensor is a thermistor that is integral to the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 3986 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission temperature sensor is used by the TCM to sense the temperature of the fluid in the sump. Since fluid temperature can affect transmission shift quality and convertor lock up, the TCM requires this information to determine which shift schedule to operate in. Calculated Temperature A failure in the temperature sensor or circuit will result in calculated temperature being substituted for actual temperature. Calculated temperature is a predicted fluid temperature which is calculated from a combination of inputs: - Battery (ambient) temperature - Engine coolant temperature - In-gear run time since start-up Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Component ID: 322 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT 5 VOLT SELECTOR SWITCH SUPPLY 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 5 Z973 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR 4WD NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3991 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3992 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3993 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 322 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT 5 VOLT SELECTOR SWITCH SUPPLY 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 5 Z973 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR 4WD NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3994 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3995 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 3998 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 3999 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4000 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4001 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4005 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4006 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4007 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4008 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4009 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4010 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4011 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift selector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4HI TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4HI if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4HI_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4HI_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - 2WD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 2WD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_2WD_max Volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4014 - 2WD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV233 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4015 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4LOCK TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LOCK if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LOCK_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LOCK_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - AWD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered AWD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_AWD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_AWD_max Volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4016 - AWD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_AWD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV244 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4017 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4HI TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4HI if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4HI_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4HI_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - 2WD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 2WD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_2WD_max Volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4018 - 2WD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV233 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4019 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION (first image below) for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES (second image below) for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4020 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator NUMBER: 18-005-08 REV. B GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: August 20, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-005-08 REV. A, DATED JUNE 13, 2008, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.05 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: FLASH: Turn Off Oil Change Indicator Message OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). MODELS: **2008 (DR) Ram Truck (International Markets)** **2008 (HB) Durango (International Markets)** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler (International Markets)** **2007 (JK) wrangler** **2008 (KA) Nitro (International Markets)** **2008 (ND) Dakota (International Markets)** 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to: - **2007 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) after June 17, 2008 (MDH 0617XX)** - **2008 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) before April 28, 2008 (MDH 0428XX)** - **2008 DR/HB/ND vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE )** - WK/WH vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built before January 25, 2008 (0125XXMDH) - KA vehicles equipped with a 4.0L engine (sales code EGS) built before July 8.2008 (MDH 0708XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some international vehicle's may experience message on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or in the Odometer that tells the driver an oil change is necessary after 3000 miles. This message should not be displayed for these international vehicles and this PCM flash will turn this feature off. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If no DTC's are present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 4029 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.05 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 4030 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls False Oil Change Indicator NUMBER: 18-005-08 REV. B GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: August 20, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-005-08 REV. A, DATED JUNE 13, 2008, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.05 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: FLASH: Turn Off Oil Change Indicator Message OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). MODELS: **2008 (DR) Ram Truck (International Markets)** **2008 (HB) Durango (International Markets)** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler (International Markets)** **2007 (JK) wrangler** **2008 (KA) Nitro (International Markets)** **2008 (ND) Dakota (International Markets)** 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to: - **2007 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) after June 17, 2008 (MDH 0617XX)** - **2008 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) before April 28, 2008 (MDH 0428XX)** - **2008 DR/HB/ND vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE )** - WK/WH vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built before January 25, 2008 (0125XXMDH) - KA vehicles equipped with a 4.0L engine (sales code EGS) built before July 8.2008 (MDH 0708XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some international vehicle's may experience message on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or in the Odometer that tells the driver an oil change is necessary after 3000 miles. This message should not be displayed for these international vehicles and this PCM flash will turn this feature off. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If no DTC's are present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 4036 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.05 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 4037 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4045 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4048 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4053 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4054 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4055 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4058 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4059 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4060 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4063 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4066 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 287 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B30 20DG/OR BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 20BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4070 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4071 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4072 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 287 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B30 20DG/OR BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 20BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4073 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4074 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4079 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4080 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4081 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4084 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4085 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4086 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4089 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4092 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4097 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4100 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4105 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4106 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4107 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4108 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4109 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4110 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4111 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4HI, 2WD, N (neutral), and 4Low). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4114 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4115 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4116 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4HI, 2WD, N (neutral), and 4Low). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV233 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4119 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4120 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4121 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4128 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4131 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4136 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4137 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4138 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4141 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4142 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4143 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4146 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4149 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 287 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B30 20DG/OR BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 20BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4153 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4154 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4155 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 287 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B30 20DG/OR BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 20BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4156 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4157 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4162 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4163 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4164 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4167 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4168 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4169 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4172 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4175 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4180 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4183 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (1). The PCM is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 4188 Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Operation OPERATION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. See: Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 4189 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 4190 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn Control Module: Service and Repair TCM Quick Learn TCM QUICK LEARN The quick learn procedure requires the use of the scan tool. This program allows the electronic transmission system to recalibrate itself. This will provide the proper transmission operation. The quick learn procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed: - Transmission Assembly Replacement - Transmission Control Module Replacement - Solenoid Pack Replacement - Clutch Plate and/or Seal Replacement - Valve Body Replacement or Recondition To perform the Quick Learn Procedure, the following conditions must be met: - The brakes must be applied - The engine speed must be above 500 rpm - The throttle angle (TPS) must be less than 3 degrees - The shift lever position must stay in PARK until prompted to shift to overdrive - The shift lever position must stay in overdrive after the Shift to Overdrive prompt until the scan tool indicates the procedure is complete. - The calculated oil temperature must be above 60° and below 200° Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn > Page 4193 Control Module: Service and Repair TCM Drive Learn DRIVE LEARN When a transmission is repaired and a Quick Learn procedure has been performed on the Transmission Control Module (TCM), the following Drive Learn procedure can be performed to fine tune any shifts which are particularly objectionable. NOTE: It is not necessary to perform the complete Drive Learn procedure every time the TCM is Quick Learned. Perform only the portions which target the objectionable shift. LEARN A SMOOTH 1ST NEUTRAL TO DRIVE SHIFT Perform this procedure only if the complaint is for a delayed or harsh shift the first time the transmission is put into gear after the vehicle is allowed to set with the engine not running for at least 10 minutes. Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 1st N-D UD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be between 27-43° C (80-110° F). 1. Start the engine only when the engine and ignition have been off for at least ten (10) minutes. 2. With the vehicle at a stop and the service brake applied, record the 1st N-D UD CVI while performing a Neutral to Drive shift. The 1st N-D UD CVI accounts for air entrapment in the UD clutch that may occur after the engine has been off for a period of time. 3. Repeat STEP 1 and STEP 2 until the recorded 1st N-D UD CVI value stabilizes. NOTE: It is important that this procedure be performed when the transmission temperature is between 27-43° C (80-110° F). If this procedure takes too long to complete fully for the allowed transmission oil temperature, the vehicle may be returned to the customer with an explanation that the shift will improve daily during normal vehicle usage. The TCM also learns at higher oil temperatures, but these values (line pressure correction values) are not available for viewing on the scan tool. LEARN A SMOOTH NEUTRAL TO DRIVE GARAGE SHIFT Perform this procedure if the complaint is for a delayed or harsh shift when the transmission is put into gear after the vehicle has had its first shift. Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the Norm N-D UD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be between 27-43° C (80-110° F) to learn the UD CVI. Additional learning occurs at temperatures as low as -18° C (0° F) and as high as 93° C (200° F). This procedure may be performed at any temperature that experiences poor shift quality. Although the UD CVI may not change, shift quality should improve. 1. Start the vehicle engine and shift to drive. 2. Move the vehicle forward to a speed of at least 16 km/h (10 MPH) and come to a stop. This ensures no air is present in the UD hydraulic circuit. 3. Perform repeated N-D shifts at a stop while pausing in Neutral for at least 2-3 seconds and monitor Norm N-D UD CVI volume until the value stabilizes. The value will change during the N-D shift. This is normal since the UD value is different for the N-D shift then the normal value shown which is used for 4-3 coastdown and kickdowns. Perform repeated shifts in this temperature range until the Norm N-D UD CVI value stabilizes and the N-D shifts become smooth. LEARN THE 1ST 2-3 SHIFT AFTER A RESTART OR SHIFT TO REVERSE Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 1st 2-3 shift OD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 27° C (80° F). 1. With the vehicle engine running, select reverse gear for over 2 seconds. 2. Shift the transmission to Drive and accelerate the vehicle from a stop at a steady 15 degree throttle opening and perform a 2-3 shift while noting the 1st 2-3 OD CVI. 3. Repeat STEP 1 and STEP 2 until the 1st 2-3 upshift becomes smooth and the 1st 2-3 OD CVI stabilizes. LEARN A SMOOTH 2-3 AND 3-4 UPSHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the OD and 4C CVI's. 1. Accelerate the vehicle from a stop at a steady 15 degree throttle opening and perform multiple 1-2, 2-3, and 3-4 upshifts. The 2nd 2-3 shift following a restart or shift to reverse will be shown during the shift as a value between the 1st 2-3 OD CVI and the normal OD CVI. Updates to the normal OD CVI will occur after the 2nd shift into 3rd gear, following a restart or shift to reverse. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 2-3 and 3-4 shifts become smooth and the OD and 4C CVI become stable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn > Page 4194 LEARN A SMOOTH 4-3 COASTDOWN AND PART THROTTLE 4-3 KICKDOWN NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the UD shift volume. 1. At a vehicle speed between 64-97 km/h (40-60 MPH), perform repeated 4-3 kickdown shifts. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the UD volume becomes somewhat stable and the shift becomes smooth. LEARN A SMOOTH 1-2 UPSHIFT AND 3-2 KICKDOWN Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 2C shift volume. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). 1. With a vehicle speed below 48 km/h (30 MPH) and the transmission in 3rd gear, perform multiple 3-2 kickdowns. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 3-2 kickdowns become smooth and the 2C CVI becomes stable. LEARN A SMOOTH MANUAL 2-1 PULLDOWN SHIFT AS WELL AS A NEUTRAL TO REVERSE SHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the LR volume. 1. With the vehicle speed around 40-48 km/h (25-30 MPH) in Manual 2nd, perform manual pulldowns to Low or 1st gear at closed throttle. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the LR CVI becomes stable and the manual 2-1 becomes smooth. LEARN A SMOOTH NEUTRAL TO REVERSE SHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). 1. With the vehicle at a stop, perform Neutral to Reverse shifts until the shift is smooth. An unlearned Neutral to Reverse shift may be harsh or exhibit a double bump. 2. If any of the shifts are still not smooth after the clutch volume stabilizes, an internal transmission problem may be present. LEARN A SMOOTH 4-5 UPSHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the Alt 2C CVI. 1. Accelerate the vehicle through 88 km/h (55 mph) at a steady 10-15 degree throttle opening and perform multiple 4-5 upshifts. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 4-5 shift become smooth and the Alt 2C CVI become stable. There is a separate 2C volume used and learned for 4-5 shifts, 2CA. It is independent of the 2C CVI learned on 3-2 kickdowns. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Automatic Transaxle > Differential Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 4200 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 4205 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Transmission Fluid Capacities 42RLE Service Fill ............................................................................................................................... ......................................................................... 3.8L (4.0 Qt) Overhaul Fill ......................................... ....................................................................................................................................................... 8.3L (17.6 pts.)* 545RFE 2WD Service Fill .................................................................................................................... .......................................................................... 5.2L (11 pts.) 4WD Service Fill ................................. ............................................................................................................................................................. 6.2L (13 pts.) Overhaul Fill .................................................................................................................. .......................................................................... 13.33L (28.0 pts.)* * Dry fill capacity. Depending on type and size of internal cooler, length and inside diameter of cooler lines, or use of an auxiliary cooler, these figures may vary Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4208 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Automatic Transmission Fluid Type .................................................................................................... ........................................................... Mopar ATF+4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Automatic Transmission Fluid Fluid - A/T: Description and Operation Description - Automatic Transmission Fluid AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID NOTE: Refer to Service Procedures for fluid level checking procedures. See: Service and Repair Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid is the recommended fluid for DaimlerChrysler automatic transmissions. Dexron II fluid IS NOT recommended. Clutch chatter can result from the use of improper fluid. Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid when new is red in color. The ATF is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, the ATF will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. This is normal. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. FLUID ADDITIVES DaimlerChrysler strongly recommends against the addition of any fluids to the transmission, other than those automatic transmission fluids listed above. Exceptions to this policy are the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. Various "special" additives and supplements exist that claim to improve shift feel and/or quality. These additives and others also claim to improve converter clutch operation and inhibit overheating, oxidation, varnish, and sludge. These claims have not been supported to the satisfaction of DaimlerChrysler and these additives must not be used. The use of transmission "sealers" should also be avoided, since they may adversely affect the integrity of transmission seals. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - Automatic Transmission Fluid > Page 4211 Fluid - A/T: Description and Operation Operation - Automatic Transmission Fluid OPERATION - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID The automatic transmission fluid is selected based upon several qualities. The fluid must provide a high level of protection for the internal components by providing a lubricating film between adjacent metal components. The fluid must also be thermally stable so that it can maintain a consistent viscosity through a large temperature range. If the viscosity stays constant through the temperature range of operation, transmission operation and shift feel will remain consistent. Transmission fluid must also be a good conductor of heat. The fluid must absorb heat from the internal transmission components and transfer that heat to the transmission case. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level EFFECTS OF INCORRECT FLUID LEVEL A low fluid level allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. Air in the fluid will cause fluid pressures to be low and develop slower than normal. If the transmission is overfilled, the gears churn the fluid into foam. This aerates the fluid and causing the same conditions occurring with a low level. In either case, air bubbles cause fluid overheating, oxidation, and varnish buildup which interferes with valve and clutch operation. Foaming also causes fluid expansion which can result in fluid overflow from the transmission vent or fill tube. Fluid overflow can easily be mistaken for a leak if inspection is not careful. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level > Page 4214 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Causes Of Burnt Fluid CAUSES OF BURNT FLUID Burnt, discolored fluid is a result of overheating which has three primary causes. 1. Internal clutch slippage, usually caused by low line pressure, inadequate clutch apply pressure, or clutch seal failure. 2. A result of restricted fluid flow through the main and auxiliary cooler. This condition is usually the result of a faulty or improperly installed drainback valve, a damaged oil cooler, or severe restrictions in the coolers and lines caused by debris or kinked lines. 3. Heavy duty operation with a vehicle not properly equipped for this type of operation. Trailer towing or similar high load operation will overheat the transmission fluid if the vehicle is improperly equipped. Such vehicles should have an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler, a heavy duty cooling system, and the engine/axle ratio combination needed to handle heavy loads. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Effects Of Incorrect Fluid Level > Page 4215 Fluid - A/T: Testing and Inspection Fluid Contamination FLUID CONTAMINATION Transmission fluid contamination is generally a result of: - adding incorrect fluid. - failure to clean dipstick and fill tube when checking level. - engine coolant entering the fluid. - internal failure that generates debris. - overheat that generates sludge (fluid breakdown). - failure to replace contaminated converter after repair. The use of non-recommended fluids can result in transmission failure. The usual results are erratic shifts, slippage, abnormal wear and eventual failure due to fluid breakdown and sludge formation. Avoid this condition by using recommended fluids only. The dipstick cap and fill tube should be wiped clean before checking fluid level. Dirt, grease and other foreign material on the cap and tube could fall into the tube if not removed beforehand. Take the time to wipe the cap and tube clean before withdrawing the dipstick. Engine coolant in the transmission fluid is generally caused by a cooler malfunction. The only remedy is to replace the radiator as the cooler in the radiator is not a serviceable part. If coolant has circulated through the transmission, an overhaul is necessary. The torque converter should be replaced whenever a failure generates sludge and debris. This is necessary because normal converter flushing procedures will not remove all contaminants. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Fluid Level Check - 545RFE FLUID LEVEL CHECK Low fluid level can cause a variety of conditions because it allows the pump to take in air along with the fluid. As in any hydraulic system, air bubbles make the fluid spongy, therefore, pressures will be low and build up slowly. Improper filling can also raise the fluid level too high. When the transmssion has too much fluid, the geartrain churns up foam and cause the same conditions which occur with a low fluid level. In either case, air bubbles can cause overheating and fluid oxidation, and varnishing. This can interfere with normal valve, clutch, and accumulator operation. Foaming can also result in fluid escaping from the transmission vent where it may be mistaken for a leak. The transmission has a dipstick to check oil level. It is located on the right side of the engine. Be sure to wipe all dirt from dipstick handle before removing. The torque converter fills in both the P (PARK) and N (NEUTRAL) positions. Place the selector lever in P (PARK) to be sure that the fluid level check is accurate. The engine should be running at idle speed for at least one minute, with the vehicle on level ground. At normal operating temperature (approximately 82° C. or 180° F), the fluid level is correct if it is in the HOT region (cross-hatched area) on the oil level indicator. The fluid level will be approximately at the upper COLD hole of the dipstick at 21° C (70° F) fluid temperature. FILL TUBE EQUIPPED WITH INDICATOR 545RFE Fluid Fill NAFTA 545 RFE FLUID TEMPERATURE NOTE: Engine and Transmission should be at normal operating temperature before performing this procedure. After the fluid has been checked, seat the dipstick fully to seal out water and dirt. 1. Start engine and apply parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission into DRIVE for approximately 2 seconds. 3. Shift the transmission into REVERSE for approximately 2 seconds. 4. Shift the transmission into PARK. 5. Hook up scan tool and select transmission. 6. Select sensors. 7. Read the transmission temperature value. 8. Compare the fluid temperature value with the chart. 9. Adjust transmission fluid level shown on the dipstick according to the Transmission Fluid Temperature Chart (shown above). NOTE: After adding any fluid to the transmission, wait a minimum of 2 minutes for the oil to fully drain from the fill tube into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. 10. Check transmission for leaks. CAPPED FILL TUBE 1. Verify that the vehicle is parked on a level surface. 2. Remove the dipstick tube cap. WARNING: There is a risk of accident from vehicle starting off by itself when engine is running. There is a risk of injury from contusions Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 4218 and burns if you insert your hands into the engine when it is started or when it is running. Secure vehicle to prevent it from moving off by itself. Wear properly fastened and close-fitting work clothes. Do not touch hot or rotating parts. 3. Actuate the service brake. Start engine and let it run at idle speed in selector lever position "P". 4. Shift through the transmission modes several times with the vehicle stationary and the engine idling. 5. Warm up the transmission, wait at least 2 minutes and check the oil level with the engine running. Push the Oil Dipstick 9336 into transmission fill tube until the dipstick tip contacts the oil pan and pull out again, read off oil level, repeat if necessary. NOTE: The dipstick will protrude from the fill tube when installed. 545RFE Fluid Fill 6. Check transmission oil temperature using the appropriate scan tool. NOTE: The true transmission oil temperature can only be read by a scan tool in REVERSE or any forward gear position. 7. The transmission Oil Dipstick 9336 has indicator marks every 10 mm. Determine the height of the oil level on the dipstick and using the height, the transmission temperature, and the Transmission Fluid Graph, determine if the transmission oil level is correct. 8. Add or remove oil as necessary and recheck the oil level. 9. Once the oil level is correct, install the dipstick tube cap. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 4219 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Fluid And Filter Replacement FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: Maintenance. REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to Fluid - A/T Testing and Inspection. See: Testing and Inspection CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 4220 CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with Installer 6960-A or another suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer etc.). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fluid Level Check - 545RFE > Page 4221 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fill TRANSMISSION FILL To avoid overfilling transmission after a fluid change or overhaul, perform the following procedure: 1. Remove dipstick and insert clean funnel in transmission fill tube. 2. Add following initial quantity of Mopar(R) ATF +4 to transmission: a. If only fluid and filter were changed, add 10 pints (5 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. b. If transmission was completely overhauled and the torque converter was replaced or drained, add 24 pints (12 quarts) of ATF +4 to transmission. 3. Check the transmission fluid See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Fluid Level Check - 545RFE and adjust as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Filter - A/T: Service and Repair FLUID AND FILTER REPLACEMENT For proper service intervals See: Maintenance. REMOVAL 1. Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. 2. Place a large diameter shallow drain pan beneath the transmission pan. 3. Remove bolts holding front and sides of pan to transmission. 4. Loosen bolts holding rear of pan to transmission. 5. Slowly separate front of pan away from transmission allowing the fluid to drain into drain pan. 6. Hold up pan and remove remaining bolts holding pan to transmission. 7. While holding pan level, lower pan away from transmission. 8. Pour remaining fluid in pan into drain pan. 9. Remove the screw holding the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. 10. Separate filter from valve body and oil pump and pour fluid in filter into drain pan. 11. Inspect the oil filter seal in the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is not installed completely in the oil pump, or is otherwise damaged, then remove and discard the oil filter seal from the bottom of the oil pump. If the seal is installed correctly and is in good condition, it can be reused. 12. If replacing the cooler return filter (2), use Oil Filter Wrench 8321 to remove the filter from the transmission. 13. Dispose of used trans fluid and filter(s) properly. INSPECTION Inspect bottom of pan and magnet for excessive amounts of metal. A light coating of clutch material on the bottom of the pan does not indicate a problem unless accompanied by a slipping condition or shift lag. If fluid and pan are contaminated with excessive amounts of debris, refer to Fluid - A/T Testing and Inspection. See: Fluid - A/T/Testing and Inspection CLEANING 1. Using a suitable solvent, clean pan and magnet. 2. Using a suitable gasket scraper, clean original sealing material from surface of transmission case and the transmission pan. INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Filter - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4225 CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 1. If necessary, install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with Installer 6960-A or another suitable tool (appropriately sized drift or socket, the butt end of a hammer etc.). 2. Place replacement filter in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 3. Install screw to hold the primary oil filter (1) to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 4. Install new cooler return filter (2) onto the transmission, if necessary. Torque the filter to 9.5 Nm (84 in.lbs.). 5. Place bead of Mopar(R) RTV sealant onto the transmission case sealing surface. 6. Place pan in position on transmission. 7. Install bolts to hold pan to transmission. Tighten bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with MOPAR(R) ATF +4. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications TRANSMISSION OIL PAN TORQUE Oil pan ................................................................................................................................................. ................................................. 12 Nm (105 In. Lbs.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 13 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4233 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4234 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4235 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4236 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 272 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4237 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 13 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4240 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4241 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4242 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4243 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 272 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4244 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4247 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4250 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4256 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135 °C (275 °F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An electronic automatic transmission gear selector indicator is standard factory-installed equipment on this vehicle. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gear selector indicator information is displayed in an electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located below the tachometer in the lower right area of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gear selector indicator displays the following characters from left to right: P , R , N , D , 2 , and 1. Each character appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information. Respectively, these characters represent the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, second gear, and first gear positions of the transmission gear selector lever on the steering column. The indicator also illuminates a rectangular box around the character that represents the currently selected lever position. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the gear selector indicator is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the indicator lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the indicator to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The gear selector indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4261 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The electronic gear selector indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The gear selector indicator information is displayed by the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the gear selector indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission type that is in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry operates the gear selector indicator to provide the following features: - Selected Gear Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic selected gear message from the PCM, a box will be illuminated around the appropriate character in the gear selector indicator. The box will remain illuminated until the cluster receives a different selected gear message, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a selected gear message from the PCM within three seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will display all gear selector positions boxed (selected) until a valid selected gear message is received or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer/trip odometer VFD will display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors a hard wired multiplex input from the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS), then sends the proper message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the gear selector indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls this function, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the TRS, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gear selector indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4267 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Assembly, A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4270 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 321 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 2 Z953 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4274 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4275 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 321 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 2 Z953 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4276 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4279 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4284 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4285 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4286 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4289 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4290 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4291 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4294 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4297 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (1). The PCM is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 4303 Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Operation OPERATION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. See: Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 4304 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 4305 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn Control Module: Service and Repair TCM Quick Learn TCM QUICK LEARN The quick learn procedure requires the use of the scan tool. This program allows the electronic transmission system to recalibrate itself. This will provide the proper transmission operation. The quick learn procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed: - Transmission Assembly Replacement - Transmission Control Module Replacement - Solenoid Pack Replacement - Clutch Plate and/or Seal Replacement - Valve Body Replacement or Recondition To perform the Quick Learn Procedure, the following conditions must be met: - The brakes must be applied - The engine speed must be above 500 rpm - The throttle angle (TPS) must be less than 3 degrees - The shift lever position must stay in PARK until prompted to shift to overdrive - The shift lever position must stay in overdrive after the Shift to Overdrive prompt until the scan tool indicates the procedure is complete. - The calculated oil temperature must be above 60° and below 200° Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn > Page 4308 Control Module: Service and Repair TCM Drive Learn DRIVE LEARN When a transmission is repaired and a Quick Learn procedure has been performed on the Transmission Control Module (TCM), the following Drive Learn procedure can be performed to fine tune any shifts which are particularly objectionable. NOTE: It is not necessary to perform the complete Drive Learn procedure every time the TCM is Quick Learned. Perform only the portions which target the objectionable shift. LEARN A SMOOTH 1ST NEUTRAL TO DRIVE SHIFT Perform this procedure only if the complaint is for a delayed or harsh shift the first time the transmission is put into gear after the vehicle is allowed to set with the engine not running for at least 10 minutes. Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 1st N-D UD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be between 27-43° C (80-110° F). 1. Start the engine only when the engine and ignition have been off for at least ten (10) minutes. 2. With the vehicle at a stop and the service brake applied, record the 1st N-D UD CVI while performing a Neutral to Drive shift. The 1st N-D UD CVI accounts for air entrapment in the UD clutch that may occur after the engine has been off for a period of time. 3. Repeat STEP 1 and STEP 2 until the recorded 1st N-D UD CVI value stabilizes. NOTE: It is important that this procedure be performed when the transmission temperature is between 27-43° C (80-110° F). If this procedure takes too long to complete fully for the allowed transmission oil temperature, the vehicle may be returned to the customer with an explanation that the shift will improve daily during normal vehicle usage. The TCM also learns at higher oil temperatures, but these values (line pressure correction values) are not available for viewing on the scan tool. LEARN A SMOOTH NEUTRAL TO DRIVE GARAGE SHIFT Perform this procedure if the complaint is for a delayed or harsh shift when the transmission is put into gear after the vehicle has had its first shift. Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the Norm N-D UD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be between 27-43° C (80-110° F) to learn the UD CVI. Additional learning occurs at temperatures as low as -18° C (0° F) and as high as 93° C (200° F). This procedure may be performed at any temperature that experiences poor shift quality. Although the UD CVI may not change, shift quality should improve. 1. Start the vehicle engine and shift to drive. 2. Move the vehicle forward to a speed of at least 16 km/h (10 MPH) and come to a stop. This ensures no air is present in the UD hydraulic circuit. 3. Perform repeated N-D shifts at a stop while pausing in Neutral for at least 2-3 seconds and monitor Norm N-D UD CVI volume until the value stabilizes. The value will change during the N-D shift. This is normal since the UD value is different for the N-D shift then the normal value shown which is used for 4-3 coastdown and kickdowns. Perform repeated shifts in this temperature range until the Norm N-D UD CVI value stabilizes and the N-D shifts become smooth. LEARN THE 1ST 2-3 SHIFT AFTER A RESTART OR SHIFT TO REVERSE Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 1st 2-3 shift OD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 27° C (80° F). 1. With the vehicle engine running, select reverse gear for over 2 seconds. 2. Shift the transmission to Drive and accelerate the vehicle from a stop at a steady 15 degree throttle opening and perform a 2-3 shift while noting the 1st 2-3 OD CVI. 3. Repeat STEP 1 and STEP 2 until the 1st 2-3 upshift becomes smooth and the 1st 2-3 OD CVI stabilizes. LEARN A SMOOTH 2-3 AND 3-4 UPSHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the OD and 4C CVI's. 1. Accelerate the vehicle from a stop at a steady 15 degree throttle opening and perform multiple 1-2, 2-3, and 3-4 upshifts. The 2nd 2-3 shift following a restart or shift to reverse will be shown during the shift as a value between the 1st 2-3 OD CVI and the normal OD CVI. Updates to the normal OD CVI will occur after the 2nd shift into 3rd gear, following a restart or shift to reverse. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 2-3 and 3-4 shifts become smooth and the OD and 4C CVI become stable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn > Page 4309 LEARN A SMOOTH 4-3 COASTDOWN AND PART THROTTLE 4-3 KICKDOWN NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the UD shift volume. 1. At a vehicle speed between 64-97 km/h (40-60 MPH), perform repeated 4-3 kickdown shifts. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the UD volume becomes somewhat stable and the shift becomes smooth. LEARN A SMOOTH 1-2 UPSHIFT AND 3-2 KICKDOWN Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 2C shift volume. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). 1. With a vehicle speed below 48 km/h (30 MPH) and the transmission in 3rd gear, perform multiple 3-2 kickdowns. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 3-2 kickdowns become smooth and the 2C CVI becomes stable. LEARN A SMOOTH MANUAL 2-1 PULLDOWN SHIFT AS WELL AS A NEUTRAL TO REVERSE SHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the LR volume. 1. With the vehicle speed around 40-48 km/h (25-30 MPH) in Manual 2nd, perform manual pulldowns to Low or 1st gear at closed throttle. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the LR CVI becomes stable and the manual 2-1 becomes smooth. LEARN A SMOOTH NEUTRAL TO REVERSE SHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). 1. With the vehicle at a stop, perform Neutral to Reverse shifts until the shift is smooth. An unlearned Neutral to Reverse shift may be harsh or exhibit a double bump. 2. If any of the shifts are still not smooth after the clutch volume stabilizes, an internal transmission problem may be present. LEARN A SMOOTH 4-5 UPSHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the Alt 2C CVI. 1. Accelerate the vehicle through 88 km/h (55 mph) at a steady 10-15 degree throttle opening and perform multiple 4-5 upshifts. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 4-5 shift become smooth and the Alt 2C CVI become stable. There is a separate 2C volume used and learned for 4-5 shifts, 2CA. It is independent of the 2C CVI learned on 3-2 kickdowns. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Transmission Control Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4313 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 188 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 Z915 20BK GROUND 86 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 87 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay. The relay is supplied fused B+ voltage, energized by the TCM, and is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when the transmission is in normal operating mode. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4316 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay. When the relay is "off", no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in "limp-in" mode. After a controller reset, the TCM energizes the relay. Prior to this, the TCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking for no voltage at the switched battery terminals. After this is verified, the voltage at the solenoid pack pressure switches is checked. After the relay is energized, the TCM monitors the terminals to verify that the voltage is greater than 3 volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the transfer case from the transmission. 2. Using a screw mounted on a slide hammer, remove the adapter housing seal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4321 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean the adapter seal bore in the adapter housing of any residue or particles remaining from the original seal. 2. Install new oil seal in the adapter housing using Seal Installer C-3860-A (1). A properly installed seal is flush to the face of the seal bore. 3. Install the transfer case onto the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 13 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4327 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4328 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4329 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4330 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 272 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4331 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 13 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4334 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4335 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4336 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4337 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 272 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4338 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4341 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4344 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 321 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 2 Z953 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4348 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4349 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 321 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 2 Z953 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4350 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4353 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4358 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4361 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4366 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4367 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4368 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4371 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4372 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4373 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4376 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 268 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4381 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4382 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4383 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 274 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4384 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4385 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 268 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4388 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4389 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4390 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 274 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4391 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4392 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Input Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4395 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Output Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Input Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4398 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission temperature sensor is a thermistor that is integral to the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4403 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission temperature sensor is used by the TCM to sense the temperature of the fluid in the sump. Since fluid temperature can affect transmission shift quality and convertor lock up, the TCM requires this information to determine which shift schedule to operate in. Calculated Temperature A failure in the temperature sensor or circuit will result in calculated temperature being substituted for actual temperature. Calculated temperature is a predicted fluid temperature which is calculated from a combination of inputs: - Battery (ambient) temperature - Engine coolant temperature - In-gear run time since start-up Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 287 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B30 20DG/OR BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 20BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4408 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4409 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4410 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 287 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B30 20DG/OR BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 20BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4411 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 4412 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4417 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4418 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4419 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4422 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4423 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 4424 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4427 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4430 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shifter A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The gear shift mechanism provides six shift positions which are: - Park (P) - Reverse (R) - Neutral (N) - Drive (D) - Manual second (2) - Manual low (1) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4435 Shifter A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION MANUAL LOW (1) range provides FIRST gear only. Overrun braking is also provided in this range. MANUAL SECOND (2) range provides FIRST and SECOND gear only. DRIVE range provides FIRST, SECOND, THIRD and OVERDRIVE FOURTH and FIFTH gear ranges. The shift into OVERDRIVE FOURTH and FIFTH gear range occurs only after the transmission has completed the shift into D THIRD gear range. No further movement of the shift mechanism is required to complete the 3-4 or 4-5 shifts. The FOURTH and FIFTH gear upshifts occurs automatically when the overdrive selector switch is in the ON position. An upshift to FOURTH and FIFTH gears may not occur or may be delayed in some of the possible shift schedules. See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Transmission Control Module - Operation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Shift Cable: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - GEARSHIFT CABLE 1. Engine starts must be possible with shift lever in PARK or NEUTRAL positions only. Engine starts must not be possible in any other gear position. 2. With the shift lever in the: a. PARK position - Apply upward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. b. PARK position - Apply downward force on the shift arm and remove pressure. Engine starts must be possible. c. NEUTRAL position - Normal position. Engine starts must be possible. d. NEUTRAL position - Engine running and brakes applied, apply upward force on the shift arm. Transmission shall not be able to shift from neutral to reverse. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4440 Shift Cable: Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS - GEARSHIFT CABLE NOTE: Always run the shift lever test using the scan tool to help diagnose a potential TRS problem Check adjustment by starting the engine in PARK and NEUTRAL. Adjustment is CORRECT if the engine starts only in these positions. Adjustment is INCORRECT if the engine starts in one but not both positions. If the engine starts in any position other than PARK or NEUTRAL, or if the engine will not start at all, the transmission range sensor may be faulty. Gearshift Adjustment Procedure 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Release cable adjuster lock tab (3) (underneath the steering column) to unlock cable. 3. Raise vehicle. 4. Disengage the cable eyelet from the transmission manual shift lever. 5. Verify transmission shift lever is in PARK detent by moving lever fully rearward. Last rearward detent is PARK position. 6. Verify positive engagement of transmission park lock by attempting to rotate propeller shaft. Shaft will not rotate when park lock is engaged. 7. Snap the cable eyelet onto the transmission manual shift lever. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Lock shift cable by pressing cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 10. Check engine starting. Engine should start only in PARK and NEUTRAL. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Cable: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Disengage cable (1) eyelet at transmission manual shift lever (3) and pull cable adjuster out of mounting bracket, RFE transmission equipped vehicles. 4. Disengage cable (1) eyelet at transmission manual shift lever (3) and pull cable adjuster out of mounting bracket (2), RLE transmission equipped vehicles. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4443 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Remove the dash panel insulation pad as necessary to access the gearshift cable grommet (2). 7. Remove grommet (2) from the dash panel. 8. Remove any steering column (1) trim necessary to access the gearshift cable (2) and BTSI mechanism. 9. Disconnect the BTSI wiring connector (5). 10. Disconnect cable at lower column bracket and shift lever pin and pull the cable through the dash panel opening into the vehicle. 11. Remove gearshift cable (2) from vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4444 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Route the transmission end of the gearshift cable (1) through the opening in the dash panel. 2. Seat the cable grommet (2) into the dash panel opening. 3. Snap the cable into the steering column (1) bracket so the retaining ears are engaged and snap the cable eyelet onto the shift lever ball stud. 4. Raise the vehicle. 5. Place the transmission manual shift lever in the "PARK" detent (rearmost) position and rotate prop shaft to ensure transmission is in PARK. 6. Route the gearshift cable (1) through the transmission mounting bracket (2) and secure the cable by snapping the cable retaining ears into the transmission bracket and snapping the cable eyelet on the manual shift lever (3) ball stud, RLE transmission equipped vehicles. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4445 7. Route the gearshift cable (1) through the transmission mounting bracket and secure the cable by snapping the cable retaining ears into the transmission bracket and snapping the cable eyelet on the manual shift lever (3) ball stud, RFE transmission equipped vehicles. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. Lock the shift cable adjustment by pressing the cable adjuster lock tab (3) downward until it snaps into place. 10. Check for proper operation of the transmission range sensor. 11. Adjust the gearshift cable as necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4450 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4453 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4458 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135 °C (275 °F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torque Converter: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The torque converter is a hydraulic device that couples the engine crankshaft to the transmission. The torque converter consists of an outer shell with an internal turbine (1), a stator (2), an overrunning clutch, an impeller (5), and an electronically applied converter clutch (6). The converter clutch provides reduced engine speed and greater fuel economy when engaged. Clutch engagement also provides reduced transmission fluid temperatures. The torque converter hub (3) drives the transmission oil (fluid) pump and contains an o-ring seal (4) to better control oil flow. The torque converter is a sealed, welded unit that is not repairable and is serviced as an assembly. CAUTION: The torque converter must be replaced if a transmission failure resulted in large amounts of metal or fiber contamination in the fluid. IMPELLER Impeller Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4463 The impeller is an integral part of the converter housing. The impeller consists of curved blades placed radially along the inside of the housing on the transmission side of the converter. As the converter housing is rotated by the engine, so is the impeller, because they are one and the same and are the driving members of the system. TURBINE Turbine The turbine is the output, or driven, member of the converter. The turbine is mounted within the housing opposite the impeller, but is not attached to the housing. The input shaft is inserted through the center of the impeller and splined into the turbine. The design of the turbine is similar to the impeller, except the blades of the turbine are curved in the opposite direction. STATOR Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4464 The stator assembly is mounted on a stationary shaft which is an integral part of the oil pump. The stator (1) is located between the impeller (2) and the turbine (4) within the torque converter case. The stator contains an over-running clutch (1-4), which allows the stator to rotate only in a clockwise direction. When the stator is locked against the over-running clutch, the torque multiplication feature of the torque converter is operational. TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4465 The TCC was installed to improve the efficiency of the torque converter that is lost to the slippage of the fluid coupling. Although the fluid coupling provides smooth, shock-free power transfer, it is natural for all fluid couplings to slip. If the impeller (3) and turbine (5) were mechanically locked together, a zero slippage condition could be obtained. A hydraulic piston (6) with friction material (7) was added to the turbine assembly (5) to provide this mechanical lock-up. In order to reduce heat build-up in the transmission and buffer the powertrain against torsional vibrations, the TCM can duty cycle the L/R-CC Solenoid to achieve a smooth application of the torque converter clutch. This function, referred to as Electronically Modulated Converter Clutch (EMCC) can occur at various times depending on the following variables: - Shift lever position - Current gear range - Transmission fluid temperature - Engine coolant temperature - Input speed - Throttle angle - Engine speed Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4466 Torque Converter: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Torque Converter Fluid Operation - Typical The converter impeller (driving member), which is integral to the converter housing and bolted to the engine drive plate, rotates at engine speed. The converter turbine (driven member), which reacts from fluid pressure generated by the impeller, rotates and turns the transmission input shaft. TURBINE As the fluid that was put into motion by the impeller blades strikes the blades of the turbine, some of the energy and rotational force is transferred into the turbine and the input shaft. This causes both of them (turbine and input shaft) to rotate in a clockwise direction following the impeller. As the fluid is leaving the trailing edges of the turbine's blades it continues in a "hindering" direction back toward the impeller. If the fluid is not redirected before it strikes the impeller, it will strike the impeller in such a direction that it would tend to slow it down. STATOR Torque multiplication is achieved by locking the stator's over-running clutch to its shaft. Under stall conditions (the turbine is stationary), the oil leaving the turbine blades strikes the face of the stator blades and tries to rotate them in a counterclockwise direction. When this happens the over-running clutch Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4467 of the stator locks and holds the stator from rotating. With the stator locked, the oil strikes the stator blades and is redirected into a "helping" direction before it enters the impeller. This circulation of oil from impeller to turbine, turbine to stator, and stator to impeller, can produce a maximum torque multiplication of about 2.4:1. As the turbine begins to match the speed of the impeller, the fluid that was hitting the stator in such as way as to cause it to lock-up is no longer doing so. In this condition of operation, the stator begins to free wheel and the converter acts as a fluid coupling. TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) In a standard torque converter, the impeller and turbine are rotating at about the same speed and the stator is freewheeling, providing no torque multiplication. By applying the turbine's piston and friction material to the front cover, a total converter engagement can be obtained. The result of this engagement is a direct 1:1 mechanical link between the engine and the transmission. The clutch can be engaged in second, third, and fourth gear ranges depending on overdrive control switch position. If the overdrive control switch is in the normal ON position, the clutch will engage after the shift to fourth gear. If the control switch is in the OFF position, the clutch will engage after the shift to third gear. The TCM controls the torque converter by way of internal logic software. The programming of the software provides the TCM with control over the L/R-CC Solenoid. There are four output logic states that can be applied as follows: - No EMCC - Partial EMCC - Full EMCC - Gradual-to-no EMCC NO EMCC Under No EMCC conditions, the L/R Solenoid is OFF. There are several conditions that can result in NO EMCC operations. No EMCC can be initiated due to a fault in the transmission or because the TCM does not see the need for EMCC under current driving conditions. PARTIAL EMCC Partial EMCC operation modulates the L/R Solenoid (duty cycle) to obtain partial torque converter clutch application. Partial EMCC operation is maintained until Full EMCC is called for and actuated. During Partial EMCC some slip does occur. Partial EMCC will usually occur at low speeds, low load and light throttle situations. FULL EMCC During Full EMCC operation, the TCM increases the L/R Solenoid duty cycle to full ON after Partial EMCC control brings the engine speed within the desired slip range of transmission input speed relative to engine rpm. GRADUAL-TO-NO EMCC This operation is to soften the change from Full or Partial EMCC to No EMCC. This is done at mid-throttle by decreasing the L/R Solenoid duty cycle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Torque Converter: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove transmission and torque converter from vehicle.See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Place a suitable drain pan under the converter housing end of the transmission. CAUTION: Verify that transmission is secure on the lifting device or work surface, the center of gravity of the transmission will shift when the torque converter is removed creating an unstable condition. The torque converter is a heavy unit. Use caution when separating the torque converter from the transmission. 3. Pull the torque converter forward until the center hub clears the oil pump seal. 4. Separate the torque converter from the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4470 Torque Converter: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Check converter hub and drive flats for sharp edges, burrs, scratches, or nicks. Polish the hub and flats with 320/400 grit paper or crocus cloth if necessary. Verify that the converter hub o-ring is properly installed and is free from debris. The hub must be smooth to avoid damaging the pump seal at installation. 1. Lubricate oil pump seal lip with transmission fluid. 2. Place torque converter in position on transmission. CAUTION: Do not damage oil pump seal or converter hub o-ring while inserting torque converter into the front of the transmission. 3. Align torque converter to oil pump seal opening. 4. Insert torque converter hub into oil pump. 5. While pushing torque converter inward, rotate converter until converter is fully seated in the oil pump gears. 6. Check converter seating with a scale (1) and straightedge (2). Surface of converter lugs should be at least 13 mm (1/2 in.) to rear of straightedge when converter is fully seated. 7. If necessary, temporarily secure converter with C-clamp attached to the converter housing. 8. Install the transmission in the vehicle. 9. Fill the transmission with the recommended fluid. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4475 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4478 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Transmission Control Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4482 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 188 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 Z915 20BK GROUND 86 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 87 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay. The relay is supplied fused B+ voltage, energized by the TCM, and is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when the transmission is in normal operating mode. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4485 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay. When the relay is "off", no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in "limp-in" mode. After a controller reset, the TCM energizes the relay. Prior to this, the TCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking for no voltage at the switched battery terminals. After this is verified, the voltage at the solenoid pack pressure switches is checked. After the relay is energized, the TCM monitors the terminals to verify that the voltage is greater than 3 volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION CAUTION: On in-radiator type oil coolers, if transmission oil cooler is leaking, engine coolant may enter cooler, or transmission oil may enter engine cooling system. Both engine cooling system and transmission oil circuit should be drained, flushed, and inspected. There are two types of transmission oil coolers used. One type of cooler is the in-radiator type or oil to coolant type. This type oil cooler is not serviceable. The second type used is a remote type auxiliary oil cooler or oil to air cooler. The oil to air type cooler (3) is located in front of the radiator, and is serviceable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Transmission Cooler: Procedures TRANSMISSION COOLER LINE QUICK CONNECT FITTING DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY DISCONNECT 1. Remove dust cap by pulling it straight back off of quick connect fitting 2. Place disconnect tool Special Tool 8875A onto transmission cooler line with the fingers of the tool facing the quick connect fitting. 3. Slide disconnect tool down the transmission line and engage the fingers of the tool into the retaining clip. When properly engaged in the clip, the tool will fit flush against the quick connect fitting. 4. Rotate the disconnect tool 60° to expand the retaining clip. 5. While holding the disconnect tool against the quick connect fitting, pull back on the transmission cooler line to remove. CONNECT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4491 1. Align transmission cooler line with quick connect fitting while pushing straight into the fitting. 2. Push in on transmission cooler line until a "click" is heard or felt. 3. Slide dust cap down the transmission cooler line and snap it over the quick connect fitting until it is fully seated and rotates freely. Dust cap will only snap over quick connect fitting when the transmission cooler line is properly installed. NOTE: If dust cap will not snap into place, repeat assembly step 2. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4492 Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement Transmission Oil Cooler - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove pushpins (1) and the upper condenser/radiator seal (2). 2. Remove upper radiator support. 3. Remove upper transmission cooler mounting bolt. 4. Raise vehicle. 5. Disconnect the transmission cooler lines (1) See: Procedures 6. Remove lower transmission cooler mounting bolts. 7. Remove transmission cooler from vehicle. Transmission Oil Cooler - Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4493 1. Position tramsmission cooler in vehicle. 2. Install lower transmission cooler mounting bolt. Tighten to 10 nA■·Nm (90 in. lbs.) 3. Connect transmission cooler lines (1). 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Install upper transmission cooler mounting bolt. Tighten bolt to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 6. Install upper condenser/radiator seal. 7. Check transmission fluid level See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Fluid Level Check - 545RFE. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An electronic automatic transmission gear selector indicator is standard factory-installed equipment on this vehicle. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gear selector indicator information is displayed in an electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located below the tachometer in the lower right area of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gear selector indicator displays the following characters from left to right: P , R , N , D , 2 , and 1. Each character appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information. Respectively, these characters represent the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, second gear, and first gear positions of the transmission gear selector lever on the steering column. The indicator also illuminates a rectangular box around the character that represents the currently selected lever position. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the gear selector indicator is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the indicator lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the indicator to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The gear selector indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4498 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The electronic gear selector indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The gear selector indicator information is displayed by the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the gear selector indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission type that is in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry operates the gear selector indicator to provide the following features: - Selected Gear Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic selected gear message from the PCM, a box will be illuminated around the appropriate character in the gear selector indicator. The box will remain illuminated until the cluster receives a different selected gear message, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a selected gear message from the PCM within three seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will display all gear selector positions boxed (selected) until a valid selected gear message is received or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer/trip odometer VFD will display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors a hard wired multiplex input from the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS), then sends the proper message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the gear selector indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls this function, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the TRS, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gear selector indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4503 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4504 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4505 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4508 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4509 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4510 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4513 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 268 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4518 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4519 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4520 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 274 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4521 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4522 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 268 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4525 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4526 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4527 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 274 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4528 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4529 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Input Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4532 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Output Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Input Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4535 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission temperature sensor is a thermistor that is integral to the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4540 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission temperature sensor is used by the TCM to sense the temperature of the fluid in the sump. Since fluid temperature can affect transmission shift quality and convertor lock up, the TCM requires this information to determine which shift schedule to operate in. Calculated Temperature A failure in the temperature sensor or circuit will result in calculated temperature being substituted for actual temperature. Calculated temperature is a predicted fluid temperature which is calculated from a combination of inputs: - Battery (ambient) temperature - Engine coolant temperature - In-gear run time since start-up Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Valve Body: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Valve Body Components The valve body consists of a cast aluminum valve body, a separator plate, and a transfer plate. The valve body contains valves and check balls that control fluid delivery to the torque converter clutch and frictional clutches. The valve body contains the following components: - Solenoid switch valve - Manual valve - Low/reverse shuttle valve - 5 Accumulators - 7 check balls Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4545 Valve Body: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: Refer to the Hydraulic Schematics for a visual aid in determining valve location, operation and design.See: Diagrams SOLENOID SWITCH VALVE The Solenoid Switch Valve (SSV) controls the direction of the transmission fluid when the L/R-TCC solenoid is energized. The Solenoid Switch Valve controls line pressure from the LR-TCC solenoid. In 1st gear, the SSV will be in the downshifted position, thus directing fluid to the L/R clutch circuit. In 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and fifth gears, the solenoid switch valve will be in the upshifted position and directs the fluid into the torque converter clutch (TCC) circuit. When shifting into 1st gear, a special hydraulic sequence is performed to ensure SSV movement into the downshifted position. The L/R pressure switch is monitored to confirm SSV movement. If the movement is not confirmed (the L/R pressure switch does not close), 2nd gear is substituted for 1st. A DTC will be set after three unsuccessful attempts are made to get into 1st gear in one given key start. MANUAL VALVE The manual valve is a relay valve. The purpose of the manual valve is to direct fluid to the correct circuit needed for a specific gear or driving range. The manual valve, as the name implies, is manually operated by the driver with a lever located on the top of the valve body. The valve is connected mechanically by a cable to the gearshift mechanism. The valve is held in each of its positions by a roller detent spring (2) that engages the roostercomb of the TRS selector plate (1). LOW/REVERSE SWITCH VALVE The low/reverse switch valve allows the low/reverse clutch to be operated by either the LR/CC solenoid or the MS solenoid. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Valve Body: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Valve Body Components Clean the valve housings, valves, plugs, springs, and separator plate with a standard parts cleaning solution only. Do not use gasoline, kerosene, or any type of caustic solution. Do not immerse any of the electrical components in cleaning solution. Clean the electrical components by wiping them off with dry shop towels only. Dry all except the electrical parts with compressed air. Make sure all passages are clean and free from obstructions. Do not use rags or shop towels to dry or wipe off valve body components. Lint from these materials can stick to valve body parts, interfere with valve operation, and clog filters and fluid passages. Inspection INSPECTION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4548 Valve Body Components NOTE: Only the INNER accumulator seal ring actually seals the pressure in the bore. The outer seal ring only serves to guide the piston in the bore. Gouges which do not extend past the inner seal ring (and have no raised edges, which could damage the guide ring) are acceptable. The machined accumulator bores often have a tiger-striped appearance. This is NORMAL and does NOT require replacement, as long as the bores are smooth in the inner seal ring area. Inspect all of the valve body mating surfaces for scratches, nicks, burrs, or distortion. Use a straightedge to check surface flatness. Minor scratches may be removed with crocus cloth using only very light pressure. Minor distortion of a valve body mating surface may be corrected by smoothing the surface with a sheet of crocus cloth. Position the crocus cloth on a surface plate, sheet of plate glass or equally flat surface. If distortion is severe or any surfaces are heavily scored, the valve body will have to be replaced. Inspect the valves and plugs for scratches, burrs, nicks, or scores. Minor surface scratches on steel valves and plugs can be removed with crocus cloth but do not round off the edges of the valve or plug lands. Maintaining sharpness of these edges is vitally important. The edges prevent foreign matter from lodging between the valves and plugs and the bore. Inspect all the valve and plug bores in the valve body. Use a penlight to view the bore interiors. Replace the valve body if any bores are distorted or scored. Inspect all of the valve body springs. The springs must be free of distortion, warpage or broken coils. Trial fit each valve and plug in its bore to check freedom of operation. When clean and dry, the valves and plugs should drop freely into the bores. Valve body bores do not change dimensionally with use. If the valve body functioned correctly when new, it will continue to operate properly after cleaning and inspection. It should not be necessary to replace a valve body assembly unless it is damaged in handling. Inspect all the accumulator bores in the valve body. Use a penlight to view the bore interiors. Replace the valve body if any bores are distorted or scored. Inspect all of the accumulator springs. The springs must be free of distortion, warpage or broken coils. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4549 Inspect all the fluid seals on the valve body. Replace any seals that are cracked, distorted, or damaged in any way. These seals pass fluid pressure directly to the clutches. Any pressure leak at these points, may cause transmission performance problems. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4550 Valve Body: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The valve body can be removed for service without having to remove the transmission assembly. The valve body can be disassembled for cleaning and inspection of the individual components. See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Overhaul (Subassemblies)/Valve Body/Disassembly 1. Shift transmission into PARK. 2. Raise vehicle. 3. Disconnect wires at the solenoid and pressure switch assembly 23 pin electrical connector. 4. Position drain pan under transmission oil pan. 5. Remove transmission oil pan. 6. Remove the primary oil filter (1) from valve body. 7. Remove bolts (1) attaching valve body to transmission case. 8. Lower the valve body and work the electrical connector out of transmission case. 9. Separate the valve body from the transmission. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4551 1. Check condition of seals on valve body and the solenoid and pressure switch assembly. Replace seals if cut or worn. 2. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 3. Place the transmission in the PARK position. 4. Lubricate seal on the solenoid and pressure switch assembly connector with petroleum jelly. 5. Position valve body in transmission and align the manual lever on the valve body to the pin on the transmission manual shift lever. 6. Seat valve body in case and install one or two bolts to hold valve body in place. 7. Tighten valve body bolts alternately and evenly to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 8. Operate the external manual shift lever and ensure that the TRS selector plate moves correctly into all gear range positions. CAUTION: The primary oil filter seal MUST be fully installed flush against the oil pump body. DO NOT install the seal onto the filter neck and attempt to install the filter and seal as an assembly. Damage to the transmission will result. 9. Install a new primary oil filter seal in the oil pump inlet bore. Seat the seal in the bore with the butt end of a hammer, or other suitable tool. 10. Place replacement filter (1) in position on valve body and into the oil pump. 11. Install screw to hold filter to valve body. Tighten screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.) torque. 12. Connect the solenoid and pressure switch 23 pin electrical assembly connector. 13. Install oil pan using silicone gasket sealer. Tighten pan bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) torque. 14. Lower vehicle and fill transmission with Mopar(R) ATF +4. 15. Check and adjust gearshift cable, if necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4552 Valve Body: Overhaul Disassembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove the bolts (1) holding the solenoid and pressure switch assembly to the valve body. Do not remove the screws on the top of the solenoid and pressure switch assembly. 2. Separate the solenoid and pressure switch assembly from the valve body. 3. Remove the screw holding the detent spring (2) onto the valve body. 4. Remove the detent spring (2) from the valve body. 5. Remove the TRS selector plate (1) from the valve body and the manual valve. 6. Remove the clutch passage seals (3) from the valve body, if necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4553 Valve Body Components 7. Remove the screws holding the accumulator cover onto the valve body. 8. Remove the accumulator springs and pistons (1, 6-9) from the valve body. Note which accumulator piston and spring belong in each location. 9. Place the valve body on the bench with the transfer plate upward. NOTE: The valve body contains seven check balls. The transfer plate must be placed upward to prevent losing the check balls when the transfer plate is removed from the valve body. 10. Remove the screws holding the valve body to the valve body transfer plate. 11. Remove the transfer plate from the valve body. Note the location of all check balls. 12. Remove the check balls from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4554 Valve Body Components 13. Remove the retainer securing the solenoid switch valve (5) from the valve body. Remove the solenoid switch valve and plugs (5), the manual valve (4) and low reverse shuttle valve and plug (2). Tag each valve and plug combination with location information to aid in assembly. Assembly ASSEMBLY Valve Body Components Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4555 1. Lubricate valves and the housing valve bores with clean transmission fluid. 2. Install solenoid switch valve and plugs (5) and manual valve (4) into the valve body. 3. Install the retainers to hold each valve into the valve body. 4. Install the valve body check balls into their proper locations. 5. Position the separator and transfer plate onto the valve body. 6. Install the screws to hold the transfer plate to the valve body. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.).A■ Valve Body Components 7. Install the accumulator pistons (1, 6-9) and springs into the valve body in the location from which they were removed. Note that all accumulators Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4556 except the overdrive have two springs. The overdrive accumulator piston (6) has only one spring. 8. Install the Low / Reverse shuttle valve, plug and retainer (2) into the valve body housing. 9. Position the accumulator cover onto the valve body. 10. Install the screws to hold the accumulator cover onto the valve body. Tighten the screws to 7 Nm (60 in. lbs.). 11. Install the TRS selector plate (1) onto the valve body and the manual valve. 12. Position the detent spring (2) onto the valve body. 13. Install the screw to hold the detent spring (2) onto the valve body. Tighten the screw to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.). 14. Install new clutch passage seals (3) onto the valve body, if necessary. 15. Install the solenoid and pressure switch assembly onto the valve body. 16. Install the bolts (1) to hold the solenoid and pressure switch assembly onto the valve body. Tighten the bolts to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). Tighten the bolts adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the transfer plate first. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Clutch Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 4563 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4564 Clutch Fluid: Specifications NOTE: The hydraulic linkage is serviced as a complete assembly only. The individual components must not be serviced separately. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4568 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4569 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4570 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Differential, CVT > Differential Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Differential, CVT > Differential Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 4577 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 4582 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Differential Cover: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove vent hose. 3. Remove differential cover (1) bolts (2). 4. Remove cover and drain lubricant. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4588 Differential Cover: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Apply a bead of orange Mopar(TM) Axle RTV Sealant (1) or equivalent to the housing cover (2). CAUTION: If cover is not installed within three to five minutes, the cover must be cleaned and new RTV applied. Failure to follow these instructions will compromise adhesion quality. 2. Install cover and tighten bolts in a criss-cross pattern to 22.5 Nm (16.5 ft. lbs.). 3. Fill differential with lubricant to specifications. 4. Install fill plug and tighten to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - Differential: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 4593 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Front Axle C205F .................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 1.6L (56 oz.) Rear Axle 8 1/4 in. ................................................................................................................................................ ............................................................ 2.1L (72 oz.)* 9 1/4 in. ............................................................ ................................................................................................................................................ 2.1L (72 oz.)* *Add 118 ml (4 oz.) of Limited Slip Additive with Trac-Lok Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4596 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Front Axle Fluid Front Axle (C205F) ..................................................................................................... SAE 75W-90 Multipurpose Type, GL-5 Gear Lubricant (MS-9763). Rear Axle Fluid Rear Axle (81/4 & 9 1/4) .................................................................................................................... SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant (MS-8985). Limited-slip rear axles require Mopar limited-slip additive (MS-10111). Four ounces (118 ml) should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is made. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Axle - C205F Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle (1) with Remove 8420A (2) (3) (4) and Slide Hammer C-3752. 2. Remove axle shaft seal with a seal pick. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Wipe axle shaft tube bore clean. 2. Install new axle shaft seal with Installer 8402 (1). 3. Install axle shaft and half shaft. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4601 1. Remove both half shafts. 2. Mark (4) propeller shaft (2) and pinion flange (1) for installation reference. 3. Remove front propeller shaft. 4. Rotate pinion flange (1) three to four times, to verify pinion rotates smoothly. 5. Record pinion torque to rotating with an inch pound torque wrench (2) for installation reference. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4602 6. Hold flange with Holder 6719A and four bolts and washers. 7. Remove pinion nut. 8. Mark a line across pinion shaft and flange for installation reference. 9. Remove flange (1) with Puller C-452 (2). 10. Remove pinion seal with a seal pick. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the lip of pinion seal. 2. Install seal with Installer C-3972-A (2) and Handle C-4171 (1). 3. Position flange on pinion shaft with reference marks aligned. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4603 4. Install flange with Installer C-3718 and holder. 5. Hold companion flange with Holder 6719A (2). 6. Install new pinion nut and tighten pinion nut to 271 Nm (200 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Do not exceed minimum tightening torque 271 Nm (200 ft. lbs.) when tighten pinion nut at this point. 7. Record pinion torque to rotate (1), with a torque wrench (2). Pinion torque to rotating should be equal to recorded reading plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 in. lbs.). If pinion torque to rotating is low, tighten pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until pinion torque to rotate is achieved. CAUTION: Never loosen pinion nut to decrease pinion bearing rotating torque. If pinion torque to rotating or maximum tightening torque 474 Nm (350 ft. lbs.) is exceeded a new collapsible spacer must be installed. Failure to follow these instruction will result in damage to the axle. 8. Install propeller shaft with reference marks aligned. 9. Install half shafts. 10. Add gear lubricant to differential housing if necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4604 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 8 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft. 2. Remove axle shaft seal (1) from axle tube (2) with a seal pick. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove any old sealer/burrs from axle tube. 2. Coat new seal lip with axle lubricant and install seal with Installer C-4198 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). 3. Install axle shaft. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4605 1. With vehicle in neutral, position on hoist. 2. Mark (3) companion flange (2) and pinion shaft (1) for installation reference. 3. Remove propeller shaft. 4. Remove rear brake components to prevent any drag. 5. Rotate pinion flange three or four times and verify flange rotates smoothly. 6. Measure pinion torque to rotate (1) with a inch pound torque wrench (2) and record reading for installation reference. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4606 7. Install bolts into two of the threaded holes in the companion flange 180° apart. 8. Position Holder 6719A against the companion flange and install a bolt and washer into one of the remaining threaded holes. Tighten the bolts so the Holder 6719A is held to the flange. 9. Remove the pinion nut and washer. 10. Mark a line across the pinion shaft and flange for installation reference. 11. Remove companion flange (1) with Puller C-452 (2). 12. Remove pinion seal with seal puller. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the lip of pinion seal. 2. Install new pinion seal with Installer C-4076-B (1) and Handle C-4735 (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4607 3. Position flange on pinion shaft with reference marks aligned. 4. Install bolts into two of the threaded holes in the companion flange 180° apart. 5. Position Holder 6719A (2) against the companion flange and install a bolt and washer into one of the remaining threaded holes. Tighten the bolts so Holder 6719A is held to the flange. 6. Install pinion flange with Installer C-3718 and Holder 6719A. 7. Install pinion washer and a new pinion nut. The convex side of the washer must face outward. 8. Hold companion flange with Holder 6719A (2) and tighten the pinion nut to 285 Nm (210 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Do not exceed the minimum torque 285 Nm (210 ft. lbs.) when installing the pinion nut at this point. 9. Rotate pinion several times to ensure bearings are seated. 10. Measure pinion torque to rotate (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2). Pinion torque to rotate should be equal to recorded reading plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 in. lbs.). If pinion torque to rotate is low, tighten pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until pinion torque to rotating is achieved. CAUTION: Never loosen pinion nut to decrease pinion bearing rotating torque. If pinion torque to rotating is exceeded, a new collapsible spacer must be installed. Failure to follow these instructions will result in damage to the axle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4608 11. Install propeller shaft (1) with reference marks (4) aligned. 12. Install rear brake rotors components. 13. Add gear lubricant if necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4609 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 9 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove axle shaft. 2. Remove axle shaft seal (1) from axle tube (2) with a seal pick. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove any old sealer/burrs from axle tube. 2. Coat new seal lip with axle lubricant and install seal with Installer C-4198 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). 3. Install axle shaft. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4610 1. With vehicle in neutral, position on hoist. 2. Remove propeller shaft. 3. Remove rear brake components to prevent any drag. 4. Rotate pinion several times to verify flange rotates smoothly. 5. Record pinion torque to rotate (1) with a inch pound torque wrench (2) and for installation reference. 6. Install two bolts into the companion flange threaded holes, 180° apart. Position Holder 6719A against the companion flange and install and tighten two bolts and washers into the remaining holes. 7. Hold the companion flange with Holder 6719A and remove pinion nut and washer. 8. Mark a line across the pinion shaft and flange for installation reference. 9. Remove companion flange (1) with Puller C-452 (2). 10. Remove pinion seal with seal puller. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4611 1. Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the lip of pinion seal. 2. Install new pinion seal with Installer C-4076-B (3) and Handle C-4735 (1). 3. Install companion flange on the end of the shaft with the reference marks aligned. 4. Install two bolts into the threaded holes in the companion flange, 180° apart. 5. Position Holder 6719A (2) against the companion flange and install a bolt and washer into one of the remaining threaded holes. Tighten the bolts so holder is held to the flange. 6. Install companion flange on pinion shaft with Installer C-3718 and Holder 6719A. 7. Install pinion washer and a new pinion nut. The convex side of the washer must face outward. 8. Hold companion flange with Holder 6719A (2) and tighten pinion nut with a torque wrench (3) to 285 Nm (210 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Do not exceed the minimum torque 285 Nm (210 ft. lbs.) when installing the pinion nut at this point. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4612 9. Rotate pinion several times to ensure pinion bearings are seated. 10. Measure pinion torque to rotate (1) with an inch pound torque wrench (2). Pinion torque to rotate should be equal to recorded reading plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 in. lbs.). If pinion torque to rotate is low, tighten pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments until pinion torque to rotating is achieved. CAUTION: Never loosen pinion nut to decrease pinion bearing rotating torque. If pinion torque to rotating is exceeded, a new collapsible spacer must be installed. Failure to follow these instructions will result in damage to the axle. 11. Install propeller shaft. 12. Install rear brake rotors components. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Front Axle - C205F Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove half shaft, axle shaft and seal. 2. Install axle shaft bearing Remover C-4660-A (3) in the bearing (1). Then tighten the nut (2) to spread the remover in the bearing. 3. Install bearing remove cup (1) bearing (2) and nut (3). Tighten nut to draw bearing out. 4. Inspect axle shaft tube bore for roughness and burrs. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Wipe the axle shaft tube bore clean. 2. Install axle shaft bearing with Installer 5063 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4618 3. Install new axle shaft seal with Installer 8402 (1). 4. Install axle shaft and half shaft. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4619 Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 8 1/4 Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Remove bearing with Bearing Remover 6310 and Foot 6310-9. 1. Remove axle shaft. 2. Remove axle seal with seal pick. 3. Position bearing receiver (1) on axle tube. 4. Insert bearing remover foot (3) through receiver (2) and bearing (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4620 5. Tighten nut (1) to pull bearing (2) into the receiver (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove any old sealer/burrs from axle tube. 2. Install axle shaft bearing with Installer C-4198 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). Drive bearing with the bearing part number against the installer until tool contacts the axle tube. 3. Coat new axle seal lip with axle lubricant and install with Installer C-4198 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). 4. Install axle shaft. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4621 Axle Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 9 1/4 Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Remove bearing with Bearing Remover 6310 and Foot 6310-9. 1. Remove axle shaft. 2. Remove axle seal with seal pick. 3. Position bearing receiver (1) on axle tube. 4. Insert bearing remover foot (3) through receiver (2) and bearing (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4622 5. Tighten nut (1) to pull bearing (2) into the receiver (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove any old sealer/burrs from axle tube. 2. Install axle shaft bearing with Installer C-4198 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). Drive bearing with the bearing part number against the installer until tool contacts the axle tube. 3. Coat new axle seal lip with axle lubricant and install with Installer C-4198 (1) and Handle C-4171 (2). 4. Install axle shaft. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Front Axle - C205F Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove half shaft from vehicle. 2. Clean axle seal area. 3. Remove snap ring and O-ring from the axle shaft. 4. Remove axle (1) with Remover 8420A (2) (3) (4) and Slide Hammer C-3752. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Lubricate bearing bore and seal lip with gear lubricant. 2. Install axle shaft and engage shaft into side gear. Push firmly on axle shaft to engage snap-ring. 3. Install O-ring (1) and snap-ring (2) on shaft (3). 4. Check the differential fluid level and add fluid if necessary. 5. Install half shaft. 6. Install skid plate, if necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4628 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 8 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position on hoist. 2. Remove rear brake components. 3. Remove differential housing cover and drain lubricant. 4. Rotate differential case so pinion mate shaft (1) lock screw (4) is accessible. Remove lock screw and pinion mate shaft from differential case. 5. Push axle shaft inward and remove C-lock (1) from the axle shaft (2). 6. Remove axle shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4629 1. Lubricate bearing bore and seal lip with gear lubricant. 2. Install axle shaft through seal, bearing and engage into side gear (3) splines. NOTE: Do not damaging axle shaft seal during axle installation. 3. Install C-lock (1) in axle shaft (2), then push axle shaft outward to seat C-lock in side gear. 4. Install pinion shaft into differential case and through thrust washers and differential pinions. 5. Align hole in shaft (1) with hole in the differential case and install lock screw (4) with Loctite(R) on the threads. Tighten lock screw to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.). 6. Install differential cover and fill with gear lubricant. 7. Install rear brake components. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4630 Axle Shaft: Service and Repair Rear Axle - 9 1/4 Removal REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position on hoist. 2. Remove rear brake components. 3. Remove differential housing cover and drain lubricant. 4. Rotate differential case so pinion mate shaft (1) lock screw (4) is accessible. Remove lock screw and pinion mate shaft from differential case. 5. Push axle shaft inward and remove C-lock (1) from the axle shaft (2). 6. Remove axle shaft. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Axle Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Axle - C205F > Page 4631 1. Lubricate bearing bore and seal lip with gear lubricant. 2. Install axle shaft through seal, bearing and engage into side gear (3) splines. NOTE: Do not damaging axle shaft seal during axle installation. 3. Install C-lock (1) in axle shaft (2), then push axle shaft outward to seat C-lock in side gear. 4. Install pinion shaft into differential case and through thrust washers and differential pinions. 5. Align hole in shaft (1) with hole in the differential case and install lock screw (4) with Loctite(R) on the threads. Tighten lock screw to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.). 6. Install differential cover and fill with gear lubricant. 7. Install rear brake components. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > C/V Joint/Boot-Outer Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair C/V Joint/Boot-Outer Removal REMOVAL 1. Place shaft in vise with soft jaws and support C/V joint. CAUTION: Do not damage C/V housing or half shaft. 2. Remove clamps (2) (4) with a cut-off wheel or grinder. 3. Slide the boot down the shaft. 4. Remove lubricant to expose the C/V joint snap ring. 5. Spread snap ring (1) and slide the joint off the shaft. 6. Slide boot off the shaft and discard old boot. 7. Mark alignment marks (1) on the inner race/hub (2), bearing cage (3) and housing with dabs of paint. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > C/V Joint/Boot-Outer > Page 4636 8. Clamp C/V joint in a vertical position in a soft jawed vise. 9. Press down one side of the bearing cage (3) to gain access to the ball at the opposite side. NOTE: If joint is tight, use a hammer and brass drift to loosen the bearing hub. Do not contact the bearing cage with the drift. 10. Remove ball (4) from the bearing cage (3). 11. Repeat step above until all six balls are removed from the bearing cage. 12. Lift cage and inner race (2) upward and out from the housing (1). 13. Turn inner race 90° in the cage and rotate the inner race/hub out of the cage. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > C/V Joint/Boot-Outer > Page 4637 1. Apply a light coat of grease to the C/V joint components before assembling them. 2. Align inner race, cage and housing according to the alignment reference marks. 3. Insert inner race (1) into the cage (2) and rotate race into the cage. 4. Rotate inner race/hub in the cage (1). 5. Insert cage into the housing (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > C/V Joint/Boot-Outer > Page 4638 6. Rotate cage 90° into the housing (1). 7. Apply lubricant included with replacement boot/joint to the ball races. Spread lubricant equally between all the races. 8. Tilt inner race/hub (2) and cage (3) and install the balls (4). 9. Place new clamps onto new boot and slide boot onto the shaft to its original position. 10. Apply the rest of lubricant to the C/V joint and boot. 11. Push the joint onto the shaft until the snap ring (1) seats in the groove (3). Pull on the joint to verify the span ring has engaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > C/V Joint/Boot-Outer > Page 4639 12. Position boot on the joint in its original position. Ensure boot is not twisted and remove any excess air. 13. Secure both boot clamps (2) (4) with Clamp Installer C-4975A. Place tool on clamp bridge and tighten tool until the jaws of the tool are closed. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > C/V Joint/Boot-Outer > Page 4640 Constant Velocity Joint Boot: Service and Repair C/V Joint/Boot-Inner Removal REMOVAL 1. Place shaft in vise with soft jaws and support C/V joint. 2. Remove clamps (2) (4) with a cut-off wheel or grinder. NOTE: Do not damage C/V housing or half shaft with cut-off wheel or grinder. 3. Remove housing (2) from the half shaft and slide boot (1) down shaft. 4. Remove housing bushing from the housing. 5. Remove tripod (2) snap ring (1). 6. Remove tripod and boot from the half shaft. 7. Clean and inspect C/V components for excessive wear and damage. Replace the tripod as a unit only if necessary. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Constant Velocity Joint Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair > C/V Joint/Boot-Outer > Page 4641 INSTALLATION 1. Slide new boot down the half shaft. 2. Install tripod (1) and tripod snap ring on the half shaft. 3. Pack grease supplied with the joint/boot into the housing and boot. 4. Coat tripod with supplied grease. 5. Install new bushing (1) onto the housing (2). 6. Insert tripod and shaft in the housing. 7. Position boot (2) on the joint in its original position. NOTE: Verify boot is not twisted and remove any excess air. 8. Secure both boot clamps with Clamp Installer C-4975A. Place tool on clamp bridge and tighten tool until the jaws of the tool are closed. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Mopar Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper and rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal. 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal. 5. Remove the halfshaft nut 4X4 only. NOTE: Do not strike the knuckle with a hammer to remove the tie rod end or the ball joint. Damage to the steering knuckle will occur. 6. Pull down on the steering knuckle to separate the halfshaft from the hub/bearing. 4X4 only 7. Remove the three hub/bearing mounting bolts (3) from the steering knuckle (4). 8. Slide the hub/bearing (1) out of the steering knuckle (4). 9. Remove the brake dust shield (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 4647 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the brake dust shield (5). 2. Install the hub/bearing (1) into the steering knuckle (4) and tighten the bolts (3) to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation. 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor (2) if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation. 5. Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) 4X4 only. 6. Install the wheel and tire assembly See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 7. Remove the support and lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications HALFSHAFT NUT TORQUE Halfshaft nut ........................................................................................................................................ ................................................. 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Adjustments Center Support: Adjustments BEARING CENTER Launch shudder is a vibration that occurs at first acceleration from a stop. Shudder vibration usually peaks at the engines highest torque output. Shudder is a symptom associated with vehicles using a two-piece propeller shaft. To decrease shudder, lower the center bearing in 3.0 mm (0.125 in.) increments. Use shim stock or fabricated plates. Do not use washers. Replace the original bolts with the appropriate increased length bolts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Center Support: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Make installation reference marks on the shaft (1) and slip yoke (2). 3. Remove slip joint boot (1) clamp (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4658 4. Slide boot (1) off boot collar (2) and separate the two shafts. 5. Position Bearing Splitter Tool 1130 (2) between slinger and center bearing (1). 6. Install Bridge 938 (3) on the splitter (2) and remove center bearing (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4659 Center Support: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install new slinger on shaft if removed and drive into position with appropriate installer tool. 2. Install new center bearing (1) and boot collar (2) on shaft. 3. Install bearing (1) and boot collar (2) on shaft with Installer 6052 (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4660 4. Clean shaft splines and apply a coat of multi-purpose grease. 5. Align master splines and slide front and rear half-shafts together. 6. Position slip yoke boot (1) on boot collar and install clamp (2). 7. Install propeller shaft in vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications PROPELLER SHAFT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4664 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection PROPELLER SHAFT PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION Out-of-round tires or wheels that are out of balance, will cause a low frequency vibration. Driveline vibration can also be caused by loose or damaged engine mounts. Propeller shaft vibration increases with vehicle speed. A vibration that occurs at a specific speed range, is not usually caused by an out of balance propeller shaft. Defective universal joints or an incorrect propeller shaft angle are usually the cause of such a vibration. PROPELLER SHAFT BALANCE If propeller shaft is suspected of being out of balance, use the following procedure. NOTE: Indexing propeller shaft 180 degrees relative to the yoke may eliminate some vibrations. 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Clean all foreign material from the propeller shaft and universal joints. 3. Inspect propeller shaft for missing balance weights, broken welds and bent areas. If propeller shaft is bent, it must be replaced. 4. Inspect universal joints for wear and properly installed. 5. Check propeller shaft bolt torques. 6. Remove wheels and install lug nuts to retain brake rotors. 7. Mark and number the shaft six inches from the pinion yoke end at four positions 90 degrees apart. 8. Run and accelerate vehicle until vibration occurs. Note the intensity and speed the vibration occurred. Stop the engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4665 9. Install a screw clamp at position (1). 10. Start engine and check vibration. If there is little or no change move the clamp to the next positions. Repeat the vibration test. NOTE: If there is no difference in vibration at this positions, the vibration may not be the propeller shaft. 11. If vibration decreased, install a second clamp (1) and repeat the test. 12. If additional clamp causes an additional vibration, separate the clamps 1/2 inch (1) above and below the mark. Repeat the vibration test. 13. Increase distance between the clamp screws (1) (2) and repeat test, until the least amount of vibration is noticed. Bend the slack end of the clamps so screws will not loosen. 14. If vibration remains unacceptable, repeat the procedure to the front end of the propeller shaft. 15. Install wheels and lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Drive/Propeller Shaft: Procedures PROPELLER SHAFT ANGLE ONE PIECE PROPELLER SHAFT This procedure applies to front and rear propeller shafts. NOTE: To obtain output angle (A) on the front propeller shaft equipped with a C/V joint, place inclinometer on machined surface of the C/V joint. 1. Raise vehicle and support the axles as level as possible, allowing the wheels and propeller shaft to turn. 2. Remove universal joint snap rings if equipped, so inclinometer base sits flat. 3. Rotate shaft until transmission/transfer case output yoke bearing is facing downward. NOTE: Always take measurements from front to rear and on the same side of the vehicle. 4. Place Inclinometer 7663 on yoke bearing cap or pinion flange ring parallel to the shaft. Center bubble in sight glass and record measurement (A). This measurement will give you the transmission yoke Output Angle (A). 5. Rotate propeller shaft 90 degrees and place Inclinometer on yoke bearing parallel to the shaft. Center bubble in sight glass and record measurement. This measurement can also be taken at the rear end of the shaft. This measurement will give you the Propeller Shaft Angle (C). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4668 6. Rotate propeller shaft 90 degrees and place inclinometer on companion flange yoke bearing parallel to the shaft. Center bubble in sight glass and record measurement. This measurement will give you the pinion Companion Flange Input Angle (B). 7. Subtract smaller figure from larger (C minus A) to obtain Transmission/Transfer Case Output Operating Angle. 8. Subtract smaller figure from larger (C minus B) to obtain axle Input Operating Angle. Refer to rules and example for additional information. RULES - Good cancellation of U-joint operating angles should be within 1 degree. - Operating angles should be less than 3 degrees. - Operating angles less than 10 degrees for double cardan U-joint. - At least 1/2 of one degree continuous operating propeller shaft angle. TWO PIECE PROPELLER SHAFT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4669 Two piece propeller shaft angles measurement is the same as a one-piece propeller shaft. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4670 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove skid plate if equipped. 3. Mark a reference line (3) across propeller shaft flange and pinion flange (2). 4. Remove exhaust crossover bolts from exhaust manifolds and lower crossover. 5. Remove boot clamp (3) from CV joint (1). 6. Remove propeller shaft (1) flange bolts (2). 7. Slide propeller shaft off the transfer case and remove shaft. CAUTION: Failure to follow these instructions may result in a driveline vibration. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4671 INSTALLATION 1. Slide propeller shaft (1) onto transfer case (4). 2. Install CV boot clamp (3). 3. Align propeller shaft (1) and pinion flange (2) reference marks (3). 4. Install new propeller shaft flange bolts (2) and tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.). NOTE: Flange bolts incorporate a Loctite(R) patch, new bolts should be used. If bolts are not available, clean bolts and apply Mopar(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive or equivalent to the threads. CAUTION: Failure to follow these instruction may result in a driveline vibration. 5. Install skid plate, if equipped. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4672 1. With vehicle in neutral, position vehicle on hoist. 2. Mark propeller shaft (1) pinion flange (2) and propeller shaft flange (4) with installation reference marks (3). 3. If equipped with manual transmission, mark manual transmission flange (1) and propeller shaft (2) flange for installation reference. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4673 4. If equipped with a center bearing (1) mark an outline of the center bearing (1) on the center bearing bracket for installation reference. Then support propeller shaft and remove mounting bolts (2). 5. Remove pinion flange (1) bolts from propeller shaft (2). 6. Slide propeller shaft back off automatic transmission/transfer case output shaft, then mark propeller shaft (1) and transmission/transfer case output shaft (2) for installation reference. 7. If equipped with manual transmission remove flange (1) bolts (2). 8. Remove propeller shaft from vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4674 CAUTION: Failure to follow these instructions may result in a driveline vibration. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Clean bolts and apply Mopar(R) Lock & Seal Adhesive or equivalent to the threads before installation. 1. Slide slip yoke (1) onto automatic transmission/transfer case output shaft (2) with reference marks aligned. 2. If equipped with manual transmission, align transmission flange (1) and propeller shaft reference marks. Install new flange bolts (2) and tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4675 3. If two piece propeller shaft, align center bearing (1) with reference marks on center bearing bracket and tighten bolts (2) to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 4. Align reference marks on propeller shaft and pinion flange. Install new companion flange (1) bolts and tighten to 115 Nm (85 ft. lbs.) CAUTION: Failure to follow these instructions may result in a driveline vibration. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4676 Drive/Propeller Shaft: Tools and Equipment PROPELLER SHAFT SPLITTER 1130 INSTALLER 6052 INCLINOMETER 7663 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4677 BRIDGE 938 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly Universal Joint: Service and Repair Disassembly Disassembly - With Snap Rings DISASSEMBLY - WITH SNAP RINGS NOTE: This procedure describes a propeller shaft equipped with a cardan joint in the tube yoke. For propeller shafts equipped with a companion/slip yoke, repeat the steps to remove the remaining cardan joint. 1. Tap outside of bearing cap with a drift to loosen snap ring. 2. Remove snap rings (1) from both sides of yoke. 3. Position yoke with the grease fitting if equipped, pointing up. 4. Position a socket with a inside diameter large enough to receive the bearing cap, beneath the yoke on a press. 5. Place another socket with an outside diameter smaller than bearing cap on the upper bearing cap and press (1) the lower cap through the yoke. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 4682 NOTE: If the bearing cap will not pull out of the yoke by hand after pressing, tap the yoke ear near the bearing cap to dislodge the cap. 6. Pull bearing cap of the yoke. 7. Turn yoke over in the press and straighten the cross (1). Press the cross until the remaining bearing cap (2) can be removed. CAUTION: If cross or bearing cap are not straight during removal, the bearing cap will score the walls of the yoke bore and damage can occur. Disassembly - With Injected Rings DISASSEMBLY - WITH INJECTED RINGS 1. Place shaft yoke in vise. 2. Position U-joint press (1) with receiver (2) on propeller shaft yoke. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 4683 3. Pressed U-joint bearing caps (1) out of shaft yoke (2). 4. Remove lower bearing cap from shaft yoke. 5. Turn shaft over and position press (1) with receiver (2) on shaft yoke. 6. Press remaining U-joint bearing cap out of shaft yoke. 7. Remove flange (1) with U-joint out of shaft yoke (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 4684 8. Position U-joint press (2) with receiver (1) on flange. 9. Press U-joint bearing caps (1) out of flange (2). 10. Remove bearing cap on the outside of the flange. 11. Position U-joint press (2) with receiver (1) on flange. 12. Press remaining U-joint bearing cap out of flange. 13. Remove U-joint from flange. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 4685 Universal Joint: Service and Repair Assembly Assembly - With Snap Rings ASSEMBLY - WITH SNAP RINGS NOTE: This procedure describes a propeller shaft equipped a cardan joint in the tube yoke. For propeller shafts equipped with a companion/slip yoke, repeat the steps to remove the remaining cardan joint. 1. Apply (EP) N.L.G.I. Grade 1 or 2 grease to inside of yoke bores. 2. Position cross (1) in yoke with lube fitting pointing up, if equipped. 3. Place a bearing cap (1) over the cross end (2) and align cap with yoke bore. 4. Press bearing cap into the yoke bore enough to clear snap ring groove. 5. Repeat STEP 3 and STEP 4 to install the opposite bearing cap. NOTE: If joint is stiff or binding, strike the yoke with a soft hammer to seat the needle bearings. 6. Add grease to lube fitting, if equipped. Assembly - With Injected Rings ASSEMBLY - WITH INJECTED RINGS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 4686 NOTE: Replacement joint has internal snap rings. 1. Place joint in flange with one bearing cap. 2. Position press (3) with receiver (1) on flange and bearing cap (2). 3. Press bearing cap until snap ring groove (1) is through the flange (2). 4. Install snap ring (2) on bearing (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 4687 5. Position press (3) with receiver (2) on remaining bearing cap (1) and flange. 6. Press bearing cap until snap ring groove is through the flange. 7. Install snap ring (1) on bearing cap (2). 8. Install flange (1) with U-joint in yoke (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 4688 9. Position press (2) with receiver (1) and lower bearing cap (3) on yoke. 10. Press bearing cap until snap ring groove is through the yoke. 11. Install snap ring (2) on bearing cap (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint, Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Disassembly > Page 4689 12. Position press (2) with receiver (3) on remaining bearing cap (1) and yoke. 13. Press remaining bearing cap until snap ring groove is through the yoke. 14. Install snap ring (2) on bearing cap (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications FLEX PLATE TORQUE AND SEQUENCE 1. Position the flexplate onto the crankshaft and install the bolts hand tight. 2. Tighten the flexplate retaining bolts to 60 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) in the sequence shown. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation Flex Plate: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the flexplate onto the crankshaft and install the bolts hand tight. 2. Tighten the flexplate retaining bolts to 60 Nm (45 ft. lbs.) in the sequence shown. 3. Install the transmission. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair Flywheel: Service and Repair Removal 1. Remove the transmission. Note: Vehicle with Dual Mass Flywheel use an adapter plate between the flywheel and crank. This plate does not need to be removed. 2. Remove the dust cover bolts (1) and the dust cover (2). 3. Using the access hole, remove each flexplate-to-flywheel bolt (1). Use Barring tool 7471B to rotate the engine and flywheel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4698 4. Remove the assembly place the flywheel (1), clutch disc (2), and pressure plate (3) assembly on a workbench. 5. Loosen pressure plate bolts (1-8) evenly, a few threads at a time and in a diagonal pattern to prevent warping the plate. 6. Remove the eight pressure plate bolts (1-8) completely and remove pressure plate and disc. 7. Remove the flywheel. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4699 1. Install flywheel on the crankshaft or adapter plate if vehicle has Dual Mass flywheel. 2. Install flywheel bolts and tighten evenly in sequence to 95 Nm (70 ft lbs). Vehicles with Dual Mass Flywheel, tighten adapter plate bolts to 55 Nm (40 ft lbs). 3. Install clutch. 4. Install transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4706 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135 °C (275 °F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An electronic automatic transmission gear selector indicator is standard factory-installed equipment on this vehicle. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gear selector indicator information is displayed in an electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located below the tachometer in the lower right area of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gear selector indicator displays the following characters from left to right: P , R , N , D , 2 , and 1. Each character appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information. Respectively, these characters represent the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, second gear, and first gear positions of the transmission gear selector lever on the steering column. The indicator also illuminates a rectangular box around the character that represents the currently selected lever position. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the gear selector indicator is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the indicator lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the indicator to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The gear selector indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4711 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The electronic gear selector indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The gear selector indicator information is displayed by the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the gear selector indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission type that is in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry operates the gear selector indicator to provide the following features: - Selected Gear Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic selected gear message from the PCM, a box will be illuminated around the appropriate character in the gear selector indicator. The box will remain illuminated until the cluster receives a different selected gear message, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a selected gear message from the PCM within three seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will display all gear selector positions boxed (selected) until a valid selected gear message is received or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer/trip odometer VFD will display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors a hard wired multiplex input from the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS), then sends the proper message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the gear selector indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls this function, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the TRS, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gear selector indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR A 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4WD Low Indicator 4WD LOW INDICATOR A 4WD low indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD low indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The 4WD low indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4LOW in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD low indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD low indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4717 Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR The 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into a 4WD mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD mode is engaged. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. 4WD Low Indicator 4WD LOW INDICATOR The 4WD low indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD low mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD low indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD low indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Low Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD low indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD low indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the LED portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD low mode is engaged. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD low indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD low indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A service 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The service 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text SVC 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The service 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4722 Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The service 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an electronic transfer case circuit or component malfunction. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the FCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The service 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the service 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the service 4WD indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Service 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic service 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the service 4WD indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the FCM for 10 seconds, the service 4WD indicator is illuminated by the cluster to indicate a loss of FCM communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the FCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the service 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case control circuits and transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine the condition of the system. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the service 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to service 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Differential, Manual Transaxle > Differential Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 4729 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 4734 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4735 Fluid - M/T: Specifications Getrag 238 Manual Transmission Fluid Capacity ...................................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 2.2L (4.65 pts.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (1). The PCM is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 4742 Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Operation OPERATION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. See: Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 4743 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 4744 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn Control Module: Service and Repair TCM Quick Learn TCM QUICK LEARN The quick learn procedure requires the use of the scan tool. This program allows the electronic transmission system to recalibrate itself. This will provide the proper transmission operation. The quick learn procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed: - Transmission Assembly Replacement - Transmission Control Module Replacement - Solenoid Pack Replacement - Clutch Plate and/or Seal Replacement - Valve Body Replacement or Recondition To perform the Quick Learn Procedure, the following conditions must be met: - The brakes must be applied - The engine speed must be above 500 rpm - The throttle angle (TPS) must be less than 3 degrees - The shift lever position must stay in PARK until prompted to shift to overdrive - The shift lever position must stay in overdrive after the Shift to Overdrive prompt until the scan tool indicates the procedure is complete. - The calculated oil temperature must be above 60° and below 200° Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn > Page 4747 Control Module: Service and Repair TCM Drive Learn DRIVE LEARN When a transmission is repaired and a Quick Learn procedure has been performed on the Transmission Control Module (TCM), the following Drive Learn procedure can be performed to fine tune any shifts which are particularly objectionable. NOTE: It is not necessary to perform the complete Drive Learn procedure every time the TCM is Quick Learned. Perform only the portions which target the objectionable shift. LEARN A SMOOTH 1ST NEUTRAL TO DRIVE SHIFT Perform this procedure only if the complaint is for a delayed or harsh shift the first time the transmission is put into gear after the vehicle is allowed to set with the engine not running for at least 10 minutes. Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 1st N-D UD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be between 27-43° C (80-110° F). 1. Start the engine only when the engine and ignition have been off for at least ten (10) minutes. 2. With the vehicle at a stop and the service brake applied, record the 1st N-D UD CVI while performing a Neutral to Drive shift. The 1st N-D UD CVI accounts for air entrapment in the UD clutch that may occur after the engine has been off for a period of time. 3. Repeat STEP 1 and STEP 2 until the recorded 1st N-D UD CVI value stabilizes. NOTE: It is important that this procedure be performed when the transmission temperature is between 27-43° C (80-110° F). If this procedure takes too long to complete fully for the allowed transmission oil temperature, the vehicle may be returned to the customer with an explanation that the shift will improve daily during normal vehicle usage. The TCM also learns at higher oil temperatures, but these values (line pressure correction values) are not available for viewing on the scan tool. LEARN A SMOOTH NEUTRAL TO DRIVE GARAGE SHIFT Perform this procedure if the complaint is for a delayed or harsh shift when the transmission is put into gear after the vehicle has had its first shift. Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the Norm N-D UD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be between 27-43° C (80-110° F) to learn the UD CVI. Additional learning occurs at temperatures as low as -18° C (0° F) and as high as 93° C (200° F). This procedure may be performed at any temperature that experiences poor shift quality. Although the UD CVI may not change, shift quality should improve. 1. Start the vehicle engine and shift to drive. 2. Move the vehicle forward to a speed of at least 16 km/h (10 MPH) and come to a stop. This ensures no air is present in the UD hydraulic circuit. 3. Perform repeated N-D shifts at a stop while pausing in Neutral for at least 2-3 seconds and monitor Norm N-D UD CVI volume until the value stabilizes. The value will change during the N-D shift. This is normal since the UD value is different for the N-D shift then the normal value shown which is used for 4-3 coastdown and kickdowns. Perform repeated shifts in this temperature range until the Norm N-D UD CVI value stabilizes and the N-D shifts become smooth. LEARN THE 1ST 2-3 SHIFT AFTER A RESTART OR SHIFT TO REVERSE Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 1st 2-3 shift OD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 27° C (80° F). 1. With the vehicle engine running, select reverse gear for over 2 seconds. 2. Shift the transmission to Drive and accelerate the vehicle from a stop at a steady 15 degree throttle opening and perform a 2-3 shift while noting the 1st 2-3 OD CVI. 3. Repeat STEP 1 and STEP 2 until the 1st 2-3 upshift becomes smooth and the 1st 2-3 OD CVI stabilizes. LEARN A SMOOTH 2-3 AND 3-4 UPSHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the OD and 4C CVI's. 1. Accelerate the vehicle from a stop at a steady 15 degree throttle opening and perform multiple 1-2, 2-3, and 3-4 upshifts. The 2nd 2-3 shift following a restart or shift to reverse will be shown during the shift as a value between the 1st 2-3 OD CVI and the normal OD CVI. Updates to the normal OD CVI will occur after the 2nd shift into 3rd gear, following a restart or shift to reverse. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 2-3 and 3-4 shifts become smooth and the OD and 4C CVI become stable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn > Page 4748 LEARN A SMOOTH 4-3 COASTDOWN AND PART THROTTLE 4-3 KICKDOWN NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the UD shift volume. 1. At a vehicle speed between 64-97 km/h (40-60 MPH), perform repeated 4-3 kickdown shifts. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the UD volume becomes somewhat stable and the shift becomes smooth. LEARN A SMOOTH 1-2 UPSHIFT AND 3-2 KICKDOWN Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 2C shift volume. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). 1. With a vehicle speed below 48 km/h (30 MPH) and the transmission in 3rd gear, perform multiple 3-2 kickdowns. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 3-2 kickdowns become smooth and the 2C CVI becomes stable. LEARN A SMOOTH MANUAL 2-1 PULLDOWN SHIFT AS WELL AS A NEUTRAL TO REVERSE SHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the LR volume. 1. With the vehicle speed around 40-48 km/h (25-30 MPH) in Manual 2nd, perform manual pulldowns to Low or 1st gear at closed throttle. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the LR CVI becomes stable and the manual 2-1 becomes smooth. LEARN A SMOOTH NEUTRAL TO REVERSE SHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). 1. With the vehicle at a stop, perform Neutral to Reverse shifts until the shift is smooth. An unlearned Neutral to Reverse shift may be harsh or exhibit a double bump. 2. If any of the shifts are still not smooth after the clutch volume stabilizes, an internal transmission problem may be present. LEARN A SMOOTH 4-5 UPSHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the Alt 2C CVI. 1. Accelerate the vehicle through 88 km/h (55 mph) at a steady 10-15 degree throttle opening and perform multiple 4-5 upshifts. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 4-5 shift become smooth and the Alt 2C CVI become stable. There is a separate 2C volume used and learned for 4-5 shifts, 2CA. It is independent of the 2C CVI learned on 3-2 kickdowns. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Transmission Control Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4752 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 188 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 Z915 20BK GROUND 86 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 87 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay. The relay is supplied fused B+ voltage, energized by the TCM, and is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when the transmission is in normal operating mode. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4755 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay. When the relay is "off", no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in "limp-in" mode. After a controller reset, the TCM energizes the relay. Prior to this, the TCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking for no voltage at the switched battery terminals. After this is verified, the voltage at the solenoid pack pressure switches is checked. After the relay is energized, the TCM monitors the terminals to verify that the voltage is greater than 3 volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4761 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: f‘~ STACK: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4762 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Front Control Module (FCM) utilizes the input from the transfer case mounted mode sensor, the instrument panel mounted selector switch, and the following information from the vehicle's CAN bus to determine if a shift is allowed. - Engine RPM and Vehicle Speed - Diagnostic Requests - Manual Transmission Clutch Switch - Brake Applied - PRNDL - Ignition Status - ABS Messages Once the FCM determines that a requested shift is allowed, it actuates the bi-directional shift motor as necessary to achieve the desired transfer case operating mode. The FCM also monitors the mode sensor while controlling the shift motor to determine the status of the shift attempt. Several items can cause the requested shift not to be completed. If the FCM has recognized a fault (DTC) of some variety, it will begin operation in one of four Functionality Levels. These levels are: - Level Zero - Normal Operation. - Level One - Only Mode Shifts Are Allowed. - Level Two - Only Mode Shifts and Shifts Into LOW Are Allowed (No Neutral Shifts Are Allowed). - Level Three - No Shifts Are Allowed The FCM can also be operating in one of three possible power modes. These power modes are: - Full Power Mode is the normal operational mode of the module. This mode is achieved by normal CAN bus traffic being present and the ignition being in the RUN position. Reduced Power Mode will be entered when the ignition has been powered off. In this state, the module will shut down power supplied to external devices, and to electronic interface inputs and outputs. From this state the module can enter either Sleep Mode or Full Power Mode. To enter this mode, the module must receive an ignition message denoting that the ignition is off, or not receive any messages for 5 ±0.5 seconds. To exit this mode, the module must receive one ignition message that denotes that the ignition is in the RUN position. - Sleep Mode will be entered, from the Reduced Power Mode, when no CAN traffic has been sensed for 20 ±1 seconds. If during Sleep Mode the module detects CAN bus traffic, it will revert to the Reduced Power mode while monitoring for ignition messages. It will remain in this state as long as there is traffic other than run or start messages, and will return to Sleep mode if the bus goes without traffic for 20 ±1 seconds. SHIFT REQUIREMENTS If the FCM is in full power mode and at functionality level zero, it uses the following criteria to determine if a shift is allowed. If any of the driver controllable conditions are not met once the shift request is recognized, the FCM may illuminate one or more of the 4WD system message icons in the instrument cluster display. Mode shifts will be allowed regardless of transmission gear or vehicle speed, whenever the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - A change in the Selector switch state indicates that a mode shift has been requested. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. Range shifts will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - A change in the Selector Switch state indicating a range shift has been requested. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal must be recognized for at least 1.5 seconds ±100 msec. (Automatic transmissions only) - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Clutch signal is recognized for 500 msec ± 50 msec (Manual transmissions only). - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4763 - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. A shift into transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position, engine off. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 4.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. A shift out of transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. LAMP STRATEGY The following strategy for the FCM controlled transfer case system uses the instrument cluster VF display's 4LOCK, 4LO, Service 4WD, and Mode Switch Transfer Case Neutral LED. Flashing any of the lamps or LED is accomplished at a 2Hz rate. NOTE: There is no lamp for the 2WD or AWD position. If no 4WD system message icons are illuminated in the instrument cluster, the operator is to assume that the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD position. - 2WD or AWD to 4LO - Successful shifts will flash 4LO during a shift, then after the 4LO position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 2WD or AWD to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will flash 4LOCK during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LOCK lamp is flashing. - 4LOCK to 4LO - Successful shifts will turn off the 4LOCK lamp and flash 4LO during a shift, then after the 4LO position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In the blocked condition, turn off 4LOCK and flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, the 4LOCK lamp remains illuminated solid and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 4LOCK to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts will flash the 4LOCK lamp during a shift, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, turn off the 4LOCK lamp. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LOCK lamp is flashing. - 4LO to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts will flash the 4LO lamp during a shift, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, turn off the 4LO lamp. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 4LO to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will turn off the 4LO lamp and flash 4LOCK during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In the blocked condition, turn off 4LO and flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, the 4LO lamp remains illuminated solid and 4LOCK is flashing. - 2WD or AWD to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is depressed. - 4LOCK to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp is illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4764 depressed. - 4LO to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp is illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is depressed. - NEUTRAL to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, no lamps are illuminated. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, Phase 2 shifting will continue until the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, no lamp is illuminated, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while the push button is depressed, - Neutral to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will flash the 4LOCK lamp during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In a blocked condition, the 4LOCK lamp will flash during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, continue to flash the 4LOCK, Phase 2 shifting will continue until the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, turn off the 4LOCK lamp, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while the push button is depressed. - NEUTRAL to 4LO - Successful shifts will flash the 4LO lamp during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In a blocked condition, the 4LO lamp will flash during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, continue to flash 4LO, Phase 2 shifting will continue until transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, turn off the 4LO lamp, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp solid. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while push the button is depressed. SHIFT SEQUENCES (PHASE 1 SHIFTS) Once all the driver controllable conditions for the requested shift have been met, the FCM begins a shift timer with a maximum duration of 1 second per mode sensor target segment. If the shift timer expires before the FCM recognizes to correct mode sensor position, the shift is considered to have been blocked. The blocked shift will increment the blocked shift counter by one. The FCM strategy for handling blocked shifts will be described later. The process the FCM performs for the various shifts will be described first. RANGE AND MODE SHIFTS The process for performing all the range and mode shifts are the same. The following steps describe the process. - Allow time for Selector Switch debounce; 250 msec ±50 msec. - Activate/deactivate the 4WD system message icons in the instrument cluster as necessary. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec per mode sensor target segment in the destination gear's direction while monitoring the mode sensor. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor position is recognized. - Solidly illuminate the achieved position's instrument panel icon, unless the target is 2WD or AWD. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor position is not reached after the shift timer expires (i.e.: a blocked shift motor or other condition exists), the FCM will stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. per mode sensor target segment. The FCM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. The exception to the preceding sequence is when a shift from 4LO to 2WD or AWD is requested. If 2WD or AWD is requested from the 4LO position, the transfer case is first driven to the 4LOCK position. If the 4LOCK position is reached, the transfer case is then driven back to the 2WD or AWD position and the shift is considered complete. SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL The following steps describe the process for a shift out of NEUTRAL. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec toward the transfer case 4LOCK mode position while monitoring the mode sensor position. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor position is recognized. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor position is not received after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The FCM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. - When the Neutral button is released, if the 4LOCK position is the desired position, the shift is complete. Illuminate the 4LOCK message icon. - Otherwise when the Neutral button is released, if all of the shift requirements are being met then engage the shift motor towards the desired position for 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel. (if requirements for shifting are not met, illuminate the 4LOCK message icon and flash the destination message icon as an indication to the driver that all of the driver controllable shift conditions are not being met). If this requires another range or mode shift, begin the range/mode shift process. - If the desired mode sensor position is not achieved after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), refer to the section on Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4765 Blocked Shift Strategy, also known as Phase 2 shifts (below). NEUTRAL BLOCKED SHIFT STRATEGY (PHASE 2 SHIFTS) When a shift is commanded out of neutral, the shift motor will be driven towards its destination position, except in the case of shifting out of NEUTRAL if 4LO was selected (the transfer case will shift to the 4LOCK position first, before proceeding to 4LO). If the shift is blocked on the way to the destination, the FCM may attempt to drive the motor back to the original position. This process will be allowed to occur 5 times. If the transfer case has reached a non-NEUTRAL position during the shift re-attempts, the message icon for the achieved gear position is illuminated and the shift attempts are stopped. To re-attempt the desired shift, the selector switch will need to be rotated to the current position until the switch debounce timer expires then a shift will need to be requested again. At the end of the 5th blocked attempt, the shift motor is driven towards the last known mode sensor position. If this motor drive allows the transfer case to reach the 2WD or AWD position, the shift is considered complete and the shift attempts are ended. If the mode sensor is in the NEUTRAL region at the expiration of the shift timer, the FCM will continue to make the shift attempts according to the blocked shift strategy independent of whether or not the driver controlled conditions are met. For shifts from NEUTRAL, if all 5 attempts fail to reach the desired position (which by default is 4LOCK), the motor will be driven to stall in the direction of 4LOCK or 4LO, depending on the achieved position. Otherwise, the transfer case will be driven in the direction opposite the last attempt with the desired target being 4LOCK or 4LO. If the transfer case reaches the 2WD or AWD position when being driven in the 4LOCK direction, then one final 1.0 second drive toward 4LOCK is attempted. If the transfer case then reaches the 4LOCK position, the shift is considered complete and the 4LOCK message icon is illuminated. If the transfer case is still the 2WD or AWD position, the shift is considered complete and all message icons are extinguished. NEUTRAL DRIFT SHIFT STRATEGY (PHASE 3 SHIFTS) NOTE: If after the 5th blocked shift and reversal attempt, if the transfer case position is in the NEUTRAL or other undesired region, shift attempts will continue until a non-NEUTRAL or a desired position is reached. Phase 3 is a series of shifts whose intent is to escape from an undesired position that has been reached outside of a shift. A perceived drift of the transfer case into a non-target region without the FCM driving the shift motor will initiate a phase 3 shift. Phase 3 will be initiated by any non-target region with the exception of a position greater then encoder_4LO_min or less then encoder_4LOCK_max. Whenever these encoder readings have been seen for defined period of time, Phase 3 shifting will begin. The shifts in a given Phase 3 shifting event are always in a single-direction, toward the target region from which the drift occurred. These shifts are performed without regard to shift conditions. The timing of each shift should follow the outline of the Phase 1 forward attempts, allowing the shift timer to reach the target. Between each attempt, there is a calibrated delay. After each attempt the shift counter and the Phase 3 max shifts counter will be updated. SHIFT REVERSAL TARGETS If the shift timer expires (1.0 seconds per mode sensor position) and the transfer case has not reached the desired position, all shifts will attempt to return to their original position with the exceptions of: - If the intended shift is going to the High rail from Low and can't make it, but it can make the 2WD or AWD position, the motor stops at that position. The FCM will not attempt to cross back over NEUTRAL if it does not have to. This means that there was a block on the first attempt to go to 4LOCK and the transfer case has made it through NEUTRAL to a known good position, then the motor will go back only to the 2WD or AWD position and execute the remainder of the attempts from there. - For shifts out of NEUTRAL, any time a shift is commanded out of NEUTRAL, the system needs to get out. The FCM should never go to NEUTRAL unless the driver is commanding it and all required conditions are being met. ENCODER DRIFT CORRECTION Whenever a shift is completed, the FCM stores the position in memory as the transfer case's intended position. The FCM continuously monitors the mode sensor and if the mode sensor drifts toward into a NEUTRAL region sensor position for 2.0 seconds, the FCM will perform a motor drive to correct the drift. The transfer case will be driven toward the intended position for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. The FCM will wait for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeat the attempt to shift to the desired position. This will continue until the intended position is reached. SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL The FCM will have the ability to vary the speed of the transfer case motor through pulse width modulation (PWM). It is PWM from 0 to 100% at 100Hz. The PWM will function as follows: - Apply an initial duty cycle (APPROXIMATELY 94%) to shift motor control wires. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4766 - Control the acceleration of the shift motor by increasing the applied duty cycle at a specified rate. - Control the deceleration of the shift motor by updating the applied duty cycle to the shift motor control wires at a specified rate based upon the difference between the desired position and the current position. SHIFT ATTEMPT LIMIT To protect the transfer case system, the FCM will impose a limit on the number of shifts that can occur over a calibrated time period. The system will monitor the number of mode sensor position changes that occur in any 25 second time period. If the number of changes is 10 or greater, the system will go into a default mode. The default mode of operation for shifting is that the number of allowed changes permitted to occur will be 3 over each 15 second ±100 msec calibrated window of time. After 5 minutes ±100 msec, the motor can be assumed to have cooled down and the system will revert to normal operation. The following rules also apply to the shift limit: - The attempt limit will not prevent shifts coming out of NEUTRAL, they will be allowed regardless of the counter/timer. - Any shift that is in progress when the counter reaches a maximum count in time will be allowed to complete before the default mode is entered. Position changes during this period will not be counted towards the default mode limit. - A block, regardless of the direction, whether towards destination or back towards reversal target (shift timer expiring), will count as a value of 2 position changes towards the 10 position changes to go into default mode as defined above. Current attempt limit values are 10 transitions in 25 seconds and default mode values are 1 transition every 10 seconds for 5 minutes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 13 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4773 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4774 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4775 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4776 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 272 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4777 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 13 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4780 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4781 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4782 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4783 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 272 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 4784 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4787 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4790 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 321 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 2 Z953 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4794 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4795 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 321 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 2 Z953 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 4796 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4799 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4804 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4807 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4812 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4813 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4814 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4817 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4818 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 4819 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4822 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 268 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4827 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4828 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4829 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 274 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4830 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4831 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 268 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4834 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4835 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4836 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 274 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4837 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4838 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Input Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4841 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Output Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Input Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 4844 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission temperature sensor is a thermistor that is integral to the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4849 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission temperature sensor is used by the TCM to sense the temperature of the fluid in the sump. Since fluid temperature can affect transmission shift quality and convertor lock up, the TCM requires this information to determine which shift schedule to operate in. Calculated Temperature A failure in the temperature sensor or circuit will result in calculated temperature being substituted for actual temperature. Calculated temperature is a predicted fluid temperature which is calculated from a combination of inputs: - Battery (ambient) temperature - Engine coolant temperature - In-gear run time since start-up Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Component ID: 322 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT 5 VOLT SELECTOR SWITCH SUPPLY 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 5 Z973 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR 4WD NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4854 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4855 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4856 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 322 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT 5 VOLT SELECTOR SWITCH SUPPLY 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 5 Z973 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR 4WD NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4857 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4858 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4861 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4862 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4863 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4864 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4868 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4869 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4870 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4871 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4872 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4873 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4874 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift selector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4HI TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4HI if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4HI_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4HI_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - 2WD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 2WD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_2WD_max Volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4877 - 2WD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV233 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4878 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4LOCK TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LOCK if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LOCK_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LOCK_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - AWD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered AWD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_AWD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_AWD_max Volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4879 - AWD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_AWD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV244 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4880 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4HI TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4HI if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4HI_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4HI_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - 2WD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 2WD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_2WD_max Volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4881 - 2WD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV233 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4882 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION (first image below) for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES (second image below) for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4883 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4889 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4890 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4891 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4892 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4893 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4894 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4895 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4HI, 2WD, N (neutral), and 4Low). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4898 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4899 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4900 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4HI, 2WD, N (neutral), and 4Low). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV233 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4903 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4904 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4905 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4910 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: ‘~ STACK: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4911 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Front Control Module (FCM) utilizes the input from the transfer case mounted mode sensor, the instrument panel mounted selector switch, and the following information from the vehicle's CAN bus to determine if a shift is allowed. - Engine RPM and Vehicle Speed - Diagnostic Requests - Manual Transmission Clutch Switch - Brake Applied - PRNDL - Ignition Status - ABS Messages Once the FCM determines that a requested shift is allowed, it actuates the bi-directional shift motor as necessary to achieve the desired transfer case operating mode. The FCM also monitors the mode sensor while controlling the shift motor to determine the status of the shift attempt. Several items can cause the requested shift not to be completed. If the FCM has recognized a fault (DTC) of some variety, it will begin operation in one of four Functionality Levels. These levels are: - Level Zero - Normal Operation. - Level One - Only Mode Shifts Are Allowed. - Level Two - Only Mode Shifts and Shifts Into LOW Are Allowed (No Neutral Shifts Are Allowed). - Level Three - No Shifts Are Allowed The FCM can also be operating in one of three possible power modes. These power modes are: - Full Power Mode is the normal operational mode of the module. This mode is achieved by normal CAN bus traffic being present and the ignition being in the RUN position. Reduced Power Mode will be entered when the ignition has been powered off. In this state, the module will shut down power supplied to external devices, and to electronic interface inputs and outputs. From this state the module can enter either Sleep Mode or Full Power Mode. To enter this mode, the module must receive an ignition message denoting that the ignition is off, or not receive any messages for 5 ±0.5 seconds. To exit this mode, the module must receive one ignition message that denotes that the ignition is in the RUN position. - Sleep Mode will be entered, from the Reduced Power Mode, when no CAN traffic has been sensed for 20 ±1 seconds. If during Sleep Mode the module detects CAN bus traffic, it will revert to the Reduced Power mode while monitoring for ignition messages. It will remain in this state as long as there is traffic other than run or start messages, and will return to Sleep mode if the bus goes without traffic for 20 ±1 seconds. SHIFT REQUIREMENTS If the FCM is in full power mode and at functionality level zero, it uses the following criteria to determine if a shift is allowed. If any of the driver controllable conditions are not met once the shift request is recognized, the FCM may illuminate one or more of the 4WD system message icons in the instrument cluster display. Mode shifts will be allowed regardless of transmission gear or vehicle speed, whenever the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - A change in the Selector switch state indicates that a mode shift has been requested. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. Range shifts will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - A change in the Selector Switch state indicating a range shift has been requested. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal must be recognized for at least 1.5 seconds ±100 msec. (Automatic transmissions only) - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Clutch signal is recognized for 500 msec ± 50 msec (Manual transmissions only). - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4912 - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. A shift into transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position, engine off. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 4.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. A shift out of transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. LAMP STRATEGY The following strategy for the FCM controlled transfer case system uses the instrument cluster VF display's 4LOCK, 4LO, Service 4WD, and Mode Switch Transfer Case Neutral LED. Flashing any of the lamps or LED is accomplished at a 2Hz rate. NOTE: There is no lamp for the 2WD or AWD position. If no 4WD system message icons are illuminated in the instrument cluster, the operator is to assume that the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD position. - 2WD or AWD to 4LO - Successful shifts will flash 4LO during a shift, then after the 4LO position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 2WD or AWD to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will flash 4LOCK during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LOCK lamp is flashing. - 4LOCK to 4LO - Successful shifts will turn off the 4LOCK lamp and flash 4LO during a shift, then after the 4LO position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In the blocked condition, turn off 4LOCK and flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, the 4LOCK lamp remains illuminated solid and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 4LOCK to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts will flash the 4LOCK lamp during a shift, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, turn off the 4LOCK lamp. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LOCK lamp is flashing. - 4LO to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts will flash the 4LO lamp during a shift, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, turn off the 4LO lamp. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 4LO to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will turn off the 4LO lamp and flash 4LOCK during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In the blocked condition, turn off 4LO and flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, the 4LO lamp remains illuminated solid and 4LOCK is flashing. - 2WD or AWD to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is depressed. - 4LOCK to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp is illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4913 depressed. - 4LO to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp is illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is depressed. - NEUTRAL to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, no lamps are illuminated. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, Phase 2 shifting will continue until the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, no lamp is illuminated, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while the push button is depressed, - Neutral to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will flash the 4LOCK lamp during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In a blocked condition, the 4LOCK lamp will flash during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, continue to flash the 4LOCK, Phase 2 shifting will continue until the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, turn off the 4LOCK lamp, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while the push button is depressed. - NEUTRAL to 4LO - Successful shifts will flash the 4LO lamp during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In a blocked condition, the 4LO lamp will flash during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, continue to flash 4LO, Phase 2 shifting will continue until transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, turn off the 4LO lamp, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp solid. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while push the button is depressed. SHIFT SEQUENCES (PHASE 1 SHIFTS) Once all the driver controllable conditions for the requested shift have been met, the FCM begins a shift timer with a maximum duration of 1 second per mode sensor target segment. If the shift timer expires before the FCM recognizes to correct mode sensor position, the shift is considered to have been blocked. The blocked shift will increment the blocked shift counter by one. The FCM strategy for handling blocked shifts will be described later. The process the FCM performs for the various shifts will be described first. RANGE AND MODE SHIFTS The process for performing all the range and mode shifts are the same. The following steps describe the process. - Allow time for Selector Switch debounce; 250 msec ±50 msec. - Activate/deactivate the 4WD system message icons in the instrument cluster as necessary. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec per mode sensor target segment in the destination gear's direction while monitoring the mode sensor. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor position is recognized. - Solidly illuminate the achieved position's instrument panel icon, unless the target is 2WD or AWD. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor position is not reached after the shift timer expires (i.e.: a blocked shift motor or other condition exists), the FCM will stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. per mode sensor target segment. The FCM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. The exception to the preceding sequence is when a shift from 4LO to 2WD or AWD is requested. If 2WD or AWD is requested from the 4LO position, the transfer case is first driven to the 4LOCK position. If the 4LOCK position is reached, the transfer case is then driven back to the 2WD or AWD position and the shift is considered complete. SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL The following steps describe the process for a shift out of NEUTRAL. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec toward the transfer case 4LOCK mode position while monitoring the mode sensor position. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor position is recognized. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor position is not received after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The FCM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. - When the Neutral button is released, if the 4LOCK position is the desired position, the shift is complete. Illuminate the 4LOCK message icon. - Otherwise when the Neutral button is released, if all of the shift requirements are being met then engage the shift motor towards the desired position for 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel. (if requirements for shifting are not met, illuminate the 4LOCK message icon and flash the destination message icon as an indication to the driver that all of the driver controllable shift conditions are not being met). If this requires another range or mode shift, begin the range/mode shift process. - If the desired mode sensor position is not achieved after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), refer to the section on Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4914 Blocked Shift Strategy, also known as Phase 2 shifts (below). NEUTRAL BLOCKED SHIFT STRATEGY (PHASE 2 SHIFTS) When a shift is commanded out of neutral, the shift motor will be driven towards its destination position, except in the case of shifting out of NEUTRAL if 4LO was selected (the transfer case will shift to the 4LOCK position first, before proceeding to 4LO). If the shift is blocked on the way to the destination, the FCM may attempt to drive the motor back to the original position. This process will be allowed to occur 5 times. If the transfer case has reached a non-NEUTRAL position during the shift re-attempts, the message icon for the achieved gear position is illuminated and the shift attempts are stopped. To re-attempt the desired shift, the selector switch will need to be rotated to the current position until the switch debounce timer expires then a shift will need to be requested again. At the end of the 5th blocked attempt, the shift motor is driven towards the last known mode sensor position. If this motor drive allows the transfer case to reach the 2WD or AWD position, the shift is considered complete and the shift attempts are ended. If the mode sensor is in the NEUTRAL region at the expiration of the shift timer, the FCM will continue to make the shift attempts according to the blocked shift strategy independent of whether or not the driver controlled conditions are met. For shifts from NEUTRAL, if all 5 attempts fail to reach the desired position (which by default is 4LOCK), the motor will be driven to stall in the direction of 4LOCK or 4LO, depending on the achieved position. Otherwise, the transfer case will be driven in the direction opposite the last attempt with the desired target being 4LOCK or 4LO. If the transfer case reaches the 2WD or AWD position when being driven in the 4LOCK direction, then one final 1.0 second drive toward 4LOCK is attempted. If the transfer case then reaches the 4LOCK position, the shift is considered complete and the 4LOCK message icon is illuminated. If the transfer case is still the 2WD or AWD position, the shift is considered complete and all message icons are extinguished. NEUTRAL DRIFT SHIFT STRATEGY (PHASE 3 SHIFTS) NOTE: If after the 5th blocked shift and reversal attempt, if the transfer case position is in the NEUTRAL or other undesired region, shift attempts will continue until a non-NEUTRAL or a desired position is reached. Phase 3 is a series of shifts whose intent is to escape from an undesired position that has been reached outside of a shift. A perceived drift of the transfer case into a non-target region without the FCM driving the shift motor will initiate a phase 3 shift. Phase 3 will be initiated by any non-target region with the exception of a position greater then encoder_4LO_min or less then encoder_4LOCK_max. Whenever these encoder readings have been seen for defined period of time, Phase 3 shifting will begin. The shifts in a given Phase 3 shifting event are always in a single-direction, toward the target region from which the drift occurred. These shifts are performed without regard to shift conditions. The timing of each shift should follow the outline of the Phase 1 forward attempts, allowing the shift timer to reach the target. Between each attempt, there is a calibrated delay. After each attempt the shift counter and the Phase 3 max shifts counter will be updated. SHIFT REVERSAL TARGETS If the shift timer expires (1.0 seconds per mode sensor position) and the transfer case has not reached the desired position, all shifts will attempt to return to their original position with the exceptions of: - If the intended shift is going to the High rail from Low and can't make it, but it can make the 2WD or AWD position, the motor stops at that position. The FCM will not attempt to cross back over NEUTRAL if it does not have to. This means that there was a block on the first attempt to go to 4LOCK and the transfer case has made it through NEUTRAL to a known good position, then the motor will go back only to the 2WD or AWD position and execute the remainder of the attempts from there. - For shifts out of NEUTRAL, any time a shift is commanded out of NEUTRAL, the system needs to get out. The FCM should never go to NEUTRAL unless the driver is commanding it and all required conditions are being met. ENCODER DRIFT CORRECTION Whenever a shift is completed, the FCM stores the position in memory as the transfer case's intended position. The FCM continuously monitors the mode sensor and if the mode sensor drifts toward into a NEUTRAL region sensor position for 2.0 seconds, the FCM will perform a motor drive to correct the drift. The transfer case will be driven toward the intended position for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. The FCM will wait for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeat the attempt to shift to the desired position. This will continue until the intended position is reached. SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL The FCM will have the ability to vary the speed of the transfer case motor through pulse width modulation (PWM). It is PWM from 0 to 100% at 100Hz. The PWM will function as follows: - Apply an initial duty cycle (APPROXIMATELY 94%) to shift motor control wires. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4915 - Control the acceleration of the shift motor by increasing the applied duty cycle at a specified rate. - Control the deceleration of the shift motor by updating the applied duty cycle to the shift motor control wires at a specified rate based upon the difference between the desired position and the current position. SHIFT ATTEMPT LIMIT To protect the transfer case system, the FCM will impose a limit on the number of shifts that can occur over a calibrated time period. The system will monitor the number of mode sensor position changes that occur in any 25 second time period. If the number of changes is 10 or greater, the system will go into a default mode. The default mode of operation for shifting is that the number of allowed changes permitted to occur will be 3 over each 15 second ±100 msec calibrated window of time. After 5 minutes ±100 msec, the motor can be assumed to have cooled down and the system will revert to normal operation. The following rules also apply to the shift limit: - The attempt limit will not prevent shifts coming out of NEUTRAL, they will be allowed regardless of the counter/timer. - Any shift that is in progress when the counter reaches a maximum count in time will be allowed to complete before the default mode is entered. Position changes during this period will not be counted towards the default mode limit. - A block, regardless of the direction, whether towards destination or back towards reversal target (shift timer expiring), will count as a value of 2 position changes towards the 10 position changes to go into default mode as defined above. Current attempt limit values are 10 transitions in 25 seconds and default mode values are 1 transition every 10 seconds for 5 minutes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Differential, Transfer Case > Differential Fluid Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Differential Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Differential, Transfer Case > Differential Fluid Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 4921 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Fluid - Transfer Case: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 4926 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Transfer Case Fluid Capacity NV233 .................................................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 1.18L (2.5 pts.) NV244 .............................................................. ........................................................................................................................................... 1.35L (2.85 pts.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4929 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Fluid Type ..................................................................................................................................................... Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transfer Case - NV232 Fluid - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Transfer Case - NV232 TRANSFER CASE - NV233 Recommended lubricant for the NV233 transfer case is Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transfer Case - NV232 > Page 4932 Fluid - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Transfer Case - NV244 TRANSFER CASE - NV244 Recommended lubricant for the NV244 transfer case is Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV233 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4935 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4936 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV244 Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. 3. Remove drain and fill plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug. Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4937 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case STANDARD PROCEDURE - FLUID DRAIN AND REFILL NOTE: The fill (2) and drain (3) plugs are both in the rear case. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Position drain pan under transfer case. NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the exhaust y-pipe at the exhaust manifold to properly access the fill and drain plugs. Lowering the exhaust will allow the plugs to be accessed for torquing during installation. 3. Remove drain (3) and fill (2) plugs and drain lubricant completely. 4. Install drain plug (3). Tighten plug to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove drain pan. 6. Fill transfer case to bottom edge of fill plug opening with Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission fluid. 7. Install and tighten fill plug (2) to 20-34 Nm (15-25 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the exhaust y-pipe to the exhaust manifold, if removed. 9. Wipe any excess fluid that may have spilled onto the exhaust. 10. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR A 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4WD Low Indicator 4WD LOW INDICATOR A 4WD low indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD low indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The 4WD low indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4LOW in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD low indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD low indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4942 Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR The 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into a 4WD mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD mode is engaged. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. 4WD Low Indicator 4WD LOW INDICATOR The 4WD low indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD low mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD low indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD low indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Low Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD low indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD low indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the LED portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD low mode is engaged. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD low indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD low indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Component ID: 322 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT 5 VOLT SELECTOR SWITCH SUPPLY 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 5 Z973 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR 4WD NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4946 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4947 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4948 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 322 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT 5 VOLT SELECTOR SWITCH SUPPLY 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 5 Z973 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR 4WD NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4949 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4950 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4953 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4954 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4955 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4956 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4960 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4961 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4962 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4963 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4964 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4965 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4966 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift selector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4HI TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4HI if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4HI_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4HI_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - 2WD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 2WD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_2WD_max Volts. - 2WD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4969 encoder_2WD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV233 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4970 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4LOCK TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LOCK if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LOCK_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LOCK_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - AWD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered AWD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_AWD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_AWD_max Volts. - AWD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4971 encoder_AWD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV244 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4972 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4HI TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4HI if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4HI_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4HI_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - 2WD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 2WD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_2WD_max Volts. - 2WD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4973 encoder_2WD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV233 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4974 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION (first image below) for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES (second image below) for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 4975 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR A 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4WD Low Indicator 4WD LOW INDICATOR A 4WD low indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD low indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The 4WD low indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4LOW in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD low indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD low indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4981 Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR The 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into a 4WD mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD mode is engaged. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. 4WD Low Indicator 4WD LOW INDICATOR The 4WD low indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD low mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD low indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD low indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Low Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD low indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD low indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the LED portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD low mode is engaged. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD low indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD low indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A service 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The service 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text SVC 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The service 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4986 Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The service 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an electronic transfer case circuit or component malfunction. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the FCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The service 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the service 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the service 4WD indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Service 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic service 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the service 4WD indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the FCM for 10 seconds, the service 4WD indicator is illuminated by the cluster to indicate a loss of FCM communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the FCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the service 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case control circuits and transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine the condition of the system. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the service 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to service 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A service 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The service 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text SVC 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The service 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4991 Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The service 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an electronic transfer case circuit or component malfunction. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the FCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The service 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the service 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the service 4WD indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Service 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic service 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the service 4WD indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the FCM for 10 seconds, the service 4WD indicator is illuminated by the cluster to indicate a loss of FCM communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the FCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the service 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case control circuits and transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine the condition of the system. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the service 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to service 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4997 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: ‘~ STACK: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4998 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Front Control Module (FCM) utilizes the input from the transfer case mounted mode sensor, the instrument panel mounted selector switch, and the following information from the vehicle's CAN bus to determine if a shift is allowed. - Engine RPM and Vehicle Speed - Diagnostic Requests - Manual Transmission Clutch Switch - Brake Applied - PRNDL - Ignition Status - ABS Messages Once the FCM determines that a requested shift is allowed, it actuates the bi-directional shift motor as necessary to achieve the desired transfer case operating mode. The FCM also monitors the mode sensor while controlling the shift motor to determine the status of the shift attempt. Several items can cause the requested shift not to be completed. If the FCM has recognized a fault (DTC) of some variety, it will begin operation in one of four Functionality Levels. These levels are: - Level Zero - Normal Operation. - Level One - Only Mode Shifts Are Allowed. - Level Two - Only Mode Shifts and Shifts Into LOW Are Allowed (No Neutral Shifts Are Allowed). - Level Three - No Shifts Are Allowed The FCM can also be operating in one of three possible power modes. These power modes are: - Full Power Mode is the normal operational mode of the module. This mode is achieved by normal CAN bus traffic being present and the ignition being in the RUN position. Reduced Power Mode will be entered when the ignition has been powered off. In this state, the module will shut down power supplied to external devices, and to electronic interface inputs and outputs. From this state the module can enter either Sleep Mode or Full Power Mode. To enter this mode, the module must receive an ignition message denoting that the ignition is off, or not receive any messages for 5 ±0.5 seconds. To exit this mode, the module must receive one ignition message that denotes that the ignition is in the RUN position. - Sleep Mode will be entered, from the Reduced Power Mode, when no CAN traffic has been sensed for 20 ±1 seconds. If during Sleep Mode the module detects CAN bus traffic, it will revert to the Reduced Power mode while monitoring for ignition messages. It will remain in this state as long as there is traffic other than run or start messages, and will return to Sleep mode if the bus goes without traffic for 20 ±1 seconds. SHIFT REQUIREMENTS If the FCM is in full power mode and at functionality level zero, it uses the following criteria to determine if a shift is allowed. If any of the driver controllable conditions are not met once the shift request is recognized, the FCM may illuminate one or more of the 4WD system message icons in the instrument cluster display. Mode shifts will be allowed regardless of transmission gear or vehicle speed, whenever the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - A change in the Selector switch state indicates that a mode shift has been requested. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. Range shifts will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - A change in the Selector Switch state indicating a range shift has been requested. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal must be recognized for at least 1.5 seconds ±100 msec. (Automatic transmissions only) - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Clutch signal is recognized for 500 msec ± 50 msec (Manual transmissions only). - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 4999 - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. A shift into transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position, engine off. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 4.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. A shift out of transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. LAMP STRATEGY The following strategy for the FCM controlled transfer case system uses the instrument cluster VF display's 4LOCK, 4LO, Service 4WD, and Mode Switch Transfer Case Neutral LED. Flashing any of the lamps or LED is accomplished at a 2Hz rate. NOTE: There is no lamp for the 2WD or AWD position. If no 4WD system message icons are illuminated in the instrument cluster, the operator is to assume that the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD position. - 2WD or AWD to 4LO - Successful shifts will flash 4LO during a shift, then after the 4LO position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 2WD or AWD to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will flash 4LOCK during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LOCK lamp is flashing. - 4LOCK to 4LO - Successful shifts will turn off the 4LOCK lamp and flash 4LO during a shift, then after the 4LO position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In the blocked condition, turn off 4LOCK and flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, the 4LOCK lamp remains illuminated solid and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 4LOCK to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts will flash the 4LOCK lamp during a shift, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, turn off the 4LOCK lamp. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LOCK lamp is flashing. - 4LO to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts will flash the 4LO lamp during a shift, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, turn off the 4LO lamp. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 4LO to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will turn off the 4LO lamp and flash 4LOCK during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In the blocked condition, turn off 4LO and flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, the 4LO lamp remains illuminated solid and 4LOCK is flashing. - 2WD or AWD to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is depressed. - 4LOCK to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp is illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5000 depressed. - 4LO to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp is illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is depressed. - NEUTRAL to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, no lamps are illuminated. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, Phase 2 shifting will continue until the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, no lamp is illuminated, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while the push button is depressed, - Neutral to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will flash the 4LOCK lamp during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In a blocked condition, the 4LOCK lamp will flash during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, continue to flash the 4LOCK, Phase 2 shifting will continue until the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, turn off the 4LOCK lamp, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while the push button is depressed. - NEUTRAL to 4LO - Successful shifts will flash the 4LO lamp during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In a blocked condition, the 4LO lamp will flash during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, continue to flash 4LO, Phase 2 shifting will continue until transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, turn off the 4LO lamp, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp solid. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while push the button is depressed. SHIFT SEQUENCES (PHASE 1 SHIFTS) Once all the driver controllable conditions for the requested shift have been met, the FCM begins a shift timer with a maximum duration of 1 second per mode sensor target segment. If the shift timer expires before the FCM recognizes to correct mode sensor position, the shift is considered to have been blocked. The blocked shift will increment the blocked shift counter by one. The FCM strategy for handling blocked shifts will be described later. The process the FCM performs for the various shifts will be described first. RANGE AND MODE SHIFTS The process for performing all the range and mode shifts are the same. The following steps describe the process. - Allow time for Selector Switch debounce; 250 msec ±50 msec. - Activate/deactivate the 4WD system message icons in the instrument cluster as necessary. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec per mode sensor target segment in the destination gear's direction while monitoring the mode sensor. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor position is recognized. - Solidly illuminate the achieved position's instrument panel icon, unless the target is 2WD or AWD. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor position is not reached after the shift timer expires (i.e.: a blocked shift motor or other condition exists), the FCM will stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. per mode sensor target segment. The FCM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. The exception to the preceding sequence is when a shift from 4LO to 2WD or AWD is requested. If 2WD or AWD is requested from the 4LO position, the transfer case is first driven to the 4LOCK position. If the 4LOCK position is reached, the transfer case is then driven back to the 2WD or AWD position and the shift is considered complete. SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL The following steps describe the process for a shift out of NEUTRAL. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec toward the transfer case 4LOCK mode position while monitoring the mode sensor position. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor position is recognized. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor position is not received after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The FCM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. - When the Neutral button is released, if the 4LOCK position is the desired position, the shift is complete. Illuminate the 4LOCK message icon. - Otherwise when the Neutral button is released, if all of the shift requirements are being met then engage the shift motor towards the desired position for 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel. (if requirements for shifting are not met, illuminate the 4LOCK message icon and flash the destination message icon as an indication to the driver that all of the driver controllable shift conditions are not being met). If this requires another range or mode shift, begin the range/mode shift process. - If the desired mode sensor position is not achieved after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), refer to the section on Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5001 Blocked Shift Strategy, also known as Phase 2 shifts (below). NEUTRAL BLOCKED SHIFT STRATEGY (PHASE 2 SHIFTS) When a shift is commanded out of neutral, the shift motor will be driven towards its destination position, except in the case of shifting out of NEUTRAL if 4LO was selected (the transfer case will shift to the 4LOCK position first, before proceeding to 4LO). If the shift is blocked on the way to the destination, the FCM may attempt to drive the motor back to the original position. This process will be allowed to occur 5 times. If the transfer case has reached a non-NEUTRAL position during the shift re-attempts, the message icon for the achieved gear position is illuminated and the shift attempts are stopped. To re-attempt the desired shift, the selector switch will need to be rotated to the current position until the switch debounce timer expires then a shift will need to be requested again. At the end of the 5th blocked attempt, the shift motor is driven towards the last known mode sensor position. If this motor drive allows the transfer case to reach the 2WD or AWD position, the shift is considered complete and the shift attempts are ended. If the mode sensor is in the NEUTRAL region at the expiration of the shift timer, the FCM will continue to make the shift attempts according to the blocked shift strategy independent of whether or not the driver controlled conditions are met. For shifts from NEUTRAL, if all 5 attempts fail to reach the desired position (which by default is 4LOCK), the motor will be driven to stall in the direction of 4LOCK or 4LO, depending on the achieved position. Otherwise, the transfer case will be driven in the direction opposite the last attempt with the desired target being 4LOCK or 4LO. If the transfer case reaches the 2WD or AWD position when being driven in the 4LOCK direction, then one final 1.0 second drive toward 4LOCK is attempted. If the transfer case then reaches the 4LOCK position, the shift is considered complete and the 4LOCK message icon is illuminated. If the transfer case is still the 2WD or AWD position, the shift is considered complete and all message icons are extinguished. NEUTRAL DRIFT SHIFT STRATEGY (PHASE 3 SHIFTS) NOTE: If after the 5th blocked shift and reversal attempt, if the transfer case position is in the NEUTRAL or other undesired region, shift attempts will continue until a non-NEUTRAL or a desired position is reached. Phase 3 is a series of shifts whose intent is to escape from an undesired position that has been reached outside of a shift. A perceived drift of the transfer case into a non-target region without the FCM driving the shift motor will initiate a phase 3 shift. Phase 3 will be initiated by any non-target region with the exception of a position greater then encoder_4LO_min or less then encoder_4LOCK_max. Whenever these encoder readings have been seen for defined period of time, Phase 3 shifting will begin. The shifts in a given Phase 3 shifting event are always in a single-direction, toward the target region from which the drift occurred. These shifts are performed without regard to shift conditions. The timing of each shift should follow the outline of the Phase 1 forward attempts, allowing the shift timer to reach the target. Between each attempt, there is a calibrated delay. After each attempt the shift counter and the Phase 3 max shifts counter will be updated. SHIFT REVERSAL TARGETS If the shift timer expires (1.0 seconds per mode sensor position) and the transfer case has not reached the desired position, all shifts will attempt to return to their original position with the exceptions of: - If the intended shift is going to the High rail from Low and can't make it, but it can make the 2WD or AWD position, the motor stops at that position. The FCM will not attempt to cross back over NEUTRAL if it does not have to. This means that there was a block on the first attempt to go to 4LOCK and the transfer case has made it through NEUTRAL to a known good position, then the motor will go back only to the 2WD or AWD position and execute the remainder of the attempts from there. - For shifts out of NEUTRAL, any time a shift is commanded out of NEUTRAL, the system needs to get out. The FCM should never go to NEUTRAL unless the driver is commanding it and all required conditions are being met. ENCODER DRIFT CORRECTION Whenever a shift is completed, the FCM stores the position in memory as the transfer case's intended position. The FCM continuously monitors the mode sensor and if the mode sensor drifts toward into a NEUTRAL region sensor position for 2.0 seconds, the FCM will perform a motor drive to correct the drift. The transfer case will be driven toward the intended position for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. The FCM will wait for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeat the attempt to shift to the desired position. This will continue until the intended position is reached. SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL The FCM will have the ability to vary the speed of the transfer case motor through pulse width modulation (PWM). It is PWM from 0 to 100% at 100Hz. The PWM will function as follows: - Apply an initial duty cycle (APPROXIMATELY 94%) to shift motor control wires. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5002 - Control the acceleration of the shift motor by increasing the applied duty cycle at a specified rate. - Control the deceleration of the shift motor by updating the applied duty cycle to the shift motor control wires at a specified rate based upon the difference between the desired position and the current position. SHIFT ATTEMPT LIMIT To protect the transfer case system, the FCM will impose a limit on the number of shifts that can occur over a calibrated time period. The system will monitor the number of mode sensor position changes that occur in any 25 second time period. If the number of changes is 10 or greater, the system will go into a default mode. The default mode of operation for shifting is that the number of allowed changes permitted to occur will be 3 over each 15 second ±100 msec calibrated window of time. After 5 minutes ±100 msec, the motor can be assumed to have cooled down and the system will revert to normal operation. The following rules also apply to the shift limit: - The attempt limit will not prevent shifts coming out of NEUTRAL, they will be allowed regardless of the counter/timer. - Any shift that is in progress when the counter reaches a maximum count in time will be allowed to complete before the default mode is entered. Position changes during this period will not be counted towards the default mode limit. - A block, regardless of the direction, whether towards destination or back towards reversal target (shift timer expiring), will count as a value of 2 position changes towards the 10 position changes to go into default mode as defined above. Current attempt limit values are 10 transitions in 25 seconds and default mode values are 1 transition every 10 seconds for 5 minutes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair NV233 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1) retaining clamp (2). 4. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (2) from the front output shaft seal slinger (3). 5. Using a suitable hammer and chisel, strike the seal slinger (2) with the chisel as shown in three, equally spaced locations. NOTE: The indentations (2) should appear as shown here. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5007 6. Remove the seal slinger (1) from the front output shaft. 7. Remove the front output shaft seal slinger (1) from the output shaft (2). 8. Remove the front output shaft seal (1) from the transfer case bore (2) using a suitable tool or a screw mounted in a slide hammer. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Lubricate all seals with MOPAR(R) ATF+4 prior to installation. 1. Install the new front output shaft seal (1) into position in the transfer case bore (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5008 2. Install the new front output shaft seal with Installer 10117 (1). 3. Install the new front output shaft seal slinger (1) into position on the output shaft (2). 4. Install the front output shaft seal slinger with Installer 10117. 5. Install the seal boot (2) onto the seal slinger (3) 6. Install a new seal boot clamp onto the seal boot, at the seal slinger, and tighten the clamp with Crimp Tool C-4975-A. 7. Install the front propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear 8. Check the transfer case fluid level and correct as necessary.See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Transfer Case Fluid Drain and Refill Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the transfer case from the vehicleSee: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transfer Case - Removal. 2. Using a suitable pry tool or a screw mounted in a slide hammer, remove the input shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Lubricate all seals with MOPAR(R) ATF+4 prior to installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5009 1. Using Installer 10118 (1) and Handle C-4171, install the front input shaft seal. 2. Install the transfer case into the vehicleSee: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transfer Case Installation Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear 3. Using a suitable pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw, remove the rear case extension seal. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Lubricate all seals with MOPAR(R) ATF+4 prior to installation. 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Using Installer D-163 (2) and Handle C-4171 (1), install the new seal into the rear case extension. 3. Install the rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear 4. Verify proper fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5010 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear 3. Using a suitable pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw, remove the rear retainer seal. 4. Using Bushing Remover 8158 (1), remove the bushing from rear retainer. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Position replacement bushing in rear retainer with fluid port in bushing aligned with slot in retainer. 3. Using Bushing Installer 8157 (2), drive bushing (1) into retainer until installer seats against case. 4. Using Seal Installer D-163 (2), install seal in rear retainer. 5. Install the rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear 6. Verify proper fluid level. 7. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5011 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear 3. Using a suitable pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw, remove the extension housing seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Using Seal Installer D-163 (2) and Universal Handle C-4171 (1), install seal in extension housing. 3. Install propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear 4. Verify proper transfer case fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear. 2. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1) retaining clamp (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5012 3. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1). 4. Remove the front output shaft seal slinger (1) by bending (2) the slinger ears away from the transfer case. 5. Using a suitable pry tool (2), remove the slinger (1) from the output shaft using care not to damage the shaft. 6. Using a screw and a slide hammer, remove the front output shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new front output shaft seal with Seal Installer MB991168A. 2. Install the front output shaft seal slinger with Oil Slinger Installer 8840. Install the slinger onto the shaft until the tool contacts the rear of the output shaft. 3. Install a new seal boot clamp onto the seal boot. 4. Install the seal boot and clamp onto the slinger hub and tighten the clamp with Axle Clamp Installer C-4975A. 5. Install front propeller shaftSee: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5013 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear 3. Using a suitable pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw, remove the extension housing seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Using Seal Installer D-163 (2) and Universal Handle C-4171 (1), install seal in extension housing. 3. Install propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear 4. Verify proper transfer case fluid level. 5. Lower vehicle. Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear. 2. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot retaining clamp (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5014 3. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1) from the front output shaft seal slinger (2). 4. Remove the front output shaft seal slinger (1) by bending the slinger away (2) from the transfer case. 5. Using a suitable pry tool, remove the slinger from the output shaft using care not to damage the shaft. 6. Using a screw and a slide hammer, remove the front output shaft seal. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new front output shaft seal with Seal Installer MB991168A. 2. Install the front output shaft seal slinger with Oil Slinger Installer 8840. Install the slinger onto the shaft until the tool contacts the rear of the output shaft. 3. Install a new seal boot clamp onto the seal boot. 4. Install the seal boot and clamp onto the slinger hub and tighten the clamp with Axle Clamp Installer C-4975A. 5. Install front propeller shaftSee: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5015 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair NV244 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Remove the front propeller shaft See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear. 3. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (1) retaining clamp (2). 4. Remove the front propeller shaft seal boot (2) from the front output shaft seal slinger (3). 5. Using a suitable hammer and chisel, strike the seal slinger (2) with the chisel as shown in three, equally spaced locations. NOTE: The indentations (2) should appear as shown here. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5016 6. Remove the seal slinger (1) from the front output shaft. 7. Remove the front output shaft seal slinger (1) from the output shaft (2). 8. Remove the front output shaft seal (1) from the transfer case bore (2) using a suitable tool or a screw mounted in a slide hammer. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Lubricate all seals with MOPAR(R) ATF+4 prior to installation. 1. Install the new front output shaft seal (1) into position in the transfer case bore (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5017 2. Install the new front output shaft seal with Installer 10117 (1). 3. Install the new front output shaft seal slinger (1) into position on the output shaft (2). 4. Install the front output shaft seal slinger with Installer 10117. 5. Install the seal boot (2) onto the seal slinger (3) 6. Install a new seal boot clamp onto the seal boot, at the seal slinger, and tighten the clamp with Crimp Tool C-4975-A. 7. Install the front propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear 8. Check the transfer case fluid level and correct as necessary.See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Transfer Case Fluid Drain and Refill Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5018 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear 3. Using a suitable pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw, remove the rear retainer seal. 4. Using Bushing Remover 8158 (1), remove the bushing from rear retainer. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean fluid residue from sealing surface and inspect for defects. 2. Position replacement bushing in rear retainer with fluid port in bushing aligned with slot in retainer. 3. Using Bushing Installer 8157 (2), drive bushing (1) into retainer until installer seats against case. 4. Using Seal Installer D-163 (2), install seal in rear retainer. 5. Install the rear propeller shaft. See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear 6. Verify proper fluid level. 7. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Component ID: 322 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT 5 VOLT SELECTOR SWITCH SUPPLY 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 5 Z973 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR 4WD NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5023 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5024 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5025 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 322 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT 5 VOLT SELECTOR SWITCH SUPPLY 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 5 Z973 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR 4WD NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5026 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5027 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5030 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5031 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5032 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5033 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5037 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5038 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5039 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5040 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5041 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5042 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5043 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift selector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4HI TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4HI if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4HI_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4HI_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - 2WD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 2WD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_2WD_max Volts. - 2WD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5046 encoder_2WD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV233 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5047 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4LOCK TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LOCK if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LOCK_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LOCK_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - AWD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered AWD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_AWD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_AWD_max Volts. - AWD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5048 encoder_AWD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV244 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5049 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4HI TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4HI if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4HI_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4HI_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - 2WD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 2WD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_2WD_max Volts. - 2WD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5050 encoder_2WD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV233 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5051 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION (first image below) for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES (second image below) for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5052 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5056 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5057 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5058 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5059 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5060 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5061 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5062 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4HI, 2WD, N (neutral), and 4Low). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5065 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5066 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5067 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4HI, 2WD, N (neutral), and 4Low). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV233 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5070 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5071 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5072 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5080 Overdrive Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules A/T/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Overdrive Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5083 Overdrive Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5088 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5089 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5090 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5093 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5094 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5095 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5098 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules A/T/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5101 Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations Shift Interlock Solenoid: Locations Component ID: 287 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B30 20DG/OR BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 20BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5105 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5106 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5107 Shift Interlock Solenoid: Diagrams Component ID: 287 Component : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Connector: Name : SOLENOID-BRAKE TRANSMISSION SHIFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B30 20DG/OR BTSI SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z101 20BK/VT GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5108 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Interlock Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 5109 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5114 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5115 Shift Solenoid: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5116 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5119 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5120 Shift Solenoid: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch > Page 5121 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5124 Shift Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules A/T/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5127 Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5132 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules A/T/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5135 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations Transfer Case Actuator: Locations Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5140 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5141 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5142 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5143 Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5144 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5145 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 5146 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4HI, 2WD, N (neutral), and 4Low). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5149 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5150 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4LOCK, AWD, N (neutral), and 4LO). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5151 Transfer Case Actuator: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The shift motor (2) is an electromechanical device consisting of a DC permanent magnet motor, gear train, and an analog position sensor. The shift motors' overall function is to move and lock a gear that moves the mode and range forks found in the transfer case. This allows the transfer case to be shifted electrically to multiple operating positions (4HI, 2WD, N (neutral), and 4Low). The operating current of the shift motor under stall conditions is 30 amps maximum at 72° F with 13.5 volts, at the motor leads. Operation OPERATION Shifting in the transfer case occurs when a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) voltage is supplied to the shift motor by the Front Control Module (FCM). A linear analog position sensor located inside the shift motor, provides the FCM with the motors' angular, rotational position. With this information, the FCM continuously knows the motors' position, and therefore allows it to accurately control the motors' operation, including voltage polarity which is used to control motor direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV233 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5154 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV243 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5155 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 GENII Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Service and Repair > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5156 Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair NV244 Transfer Case Removal REMOVAL NOTE: New shift motor assemblies are shipped in the 2WD/AWD position. If a new shift motor assembly must be installed, it will be necessary to shift the transfer case to the 2WD/AWD position prior to motor installation. 1. Raise the vehicle on a suitable hoist. 2. Disengage the wiring connector from the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 3. Remove the bolts (3) holding the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Separate the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) from the transfer case (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the shift motor o-ring is clean and properly positioned inside the machined o-ring groove of the shift motor. 2. Add high temperature grease between the actuator and the transfer case mating surface for sealing purposes. NOTE: Verify that the shift motor position and sector shaft orientation are aligned. It may be necessary to manually shift the transfer case if the shift motor and sector shaft are not aligned. 3. Position the shift motor and mode sensor assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). 4. Install the bolts (3) to hold the assembly (2) onto the transfer case (1). Tighten the bolts to 16-24 Nm (12-18 ft.lbs.). CAUTION: If the original shift motor and mode sensor assembly bolts are reused, be sure to use Mopar(R) Lock & Seal or Loctite(TM) 242 to replenish the lock patch material originally found on the bolts. 5. Engage the wiring connector to the shift motor and mode sensor assembly. 6. Refill the transfer case as necessary. 7. Lower vehicle and verify transfer case operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5163 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135 °C (275 °F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An electronic automatic transmission gear selector indicator is standard factory-installed equipment on this vehicle. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gear selector indicator information is displayed in an electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located below the tachometer in the lower right area of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gear selector indicator displays the following characters from left to right: P , R , N , D , 2 , and 1. Each character appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information. Respectively, these characters represent the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, second gear, and first gear positions of the transmission gear selector lever on the steering column. The indicator also illuminates a rectangular box around the character that represents the currently selected lever position. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the gear selector indicator is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the indicator lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the indicator to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The gear selector indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5168 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The electronic gear selector indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The gear selector indicator information is displayed by the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the gear selector indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission type that is in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry operates the gear selector indicator to provide the following features: - Selected Gear Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic selected gear message from the PCM, a box will be illuminated around the appropriate character in the gear selector indicator. The box will remain illuminated until the cluster receives a different selected gear message, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a selected gear message from the PCM within three seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will display all gear selector positions boxed (selected) until a valid selected gear message is received or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer/trip odometer VFD will display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors a hard wired multiplex input from the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS), then sends the proper message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the gear selector indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls this function, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the TRS, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gear selector indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR A 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4WD Low Indicator 4WD LOW INDICATOR A 4WD low indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD low indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The 4WD low indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4LOW in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD low indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD low indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5174 Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR The 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into a 4WD mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD mode is engaged. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. 4WD Low Indicator 4WD LOW INDICATOR The 4WD low indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD low mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD low indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD low indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Low Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD low indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD low indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the LED portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD low mode is engaged. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD low indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD low indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A service 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The service 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text SVC 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The service 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transfer Case > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5179 Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The service 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an electronic transfer case circuit or component malfunction. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the FCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The service 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the service 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the service 4WD indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Service 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic service 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the service 4WD indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the FCM for 10 seconds, the service 4WD indicator is illuminated by the cluster to indicate a loss of FCM communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the FCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the service 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case control circuits and transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine the condition of the system. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the service 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to service 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is a sub-module within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (1). The PCM is attached to the right-inner corner of the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 5186 Control Module: Description and Operation Transmission Control Module - Operation OPERATION The Transmission Control Module (TCM) controls all electronic operations of the transmission. The TCM receives information regarding vehicle operation from both direct and indirect inputs, and selects the operational mode of the transmission. Direct inputs are hard wired to, and used specifically by the TCM. Indirect inputs are shared with the TCM via the vehicle communication bus. Some examples of direct inputs to the TCM are: - Battery (B+) voltage - Ignition "ON" voltage - Transmission Control Relay (Switched B+) (if equipped) - Throttle Position Sensor - Crankshaft Position Sensor - Transmission Range Sensor - Pressure Switches - Transmission Temperature Sensor - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - Line Pressure Sensor Some examples of indirect inputs to the TCM are: - Engine/Body Identification - Manifold Pressure - Target Idle - Torque Reduction Confirmation - Engine Coolant Temperature - Ambient/Battery Temperature - Scan Tool Communication Based on the information received from these various inputs, the TCM determines the appropriate shift schedule and shift points, depending on the present operating conditions and driver demand. This is possible through the control of various direct and indirect outputs. Some examples of TCM direct outputs are: - Transmission Control Relay - Solenoids - Torque Reduction Request Some examples of TCM indirect outputs are: - Transmission Temperature (to PCM) - PRNDL Position (to cluster/CCN) In addition to monitoring inputs and controlling outputs, the TCM has other important responsibilities and functions: - Storing and maintaining Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI) - Storing and selecting appropriate Shift Schedules - System self-diagnostics - Diagnostic capabilities (with scan tool) NOTE: If the TCM has been replaced, the "Quick Learn Procedure" must be performed. See: Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn BATTERY FEED A fused, direct battery feed to the TCM is used for continuous power. This battery voltage is necessary to retain memory in the TCM. When the battery (B+) is disconnected, this memory is lost. When the battery (B+) is restored, this memory loss is detected by the TCM and a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is set. CLUTCH VOLUME INDEXES (CVI) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 5187 An important function of the TCM is to monitor Clutch Volume Indexes (CVI). CVIs represent the volume of fluid needed to compress a clutch pack. The TCM monitors gear ratio changes by monitoring the Input and Output Speed Sensors. The Input, or Turbine Speed Sensor sends an electrical signal to the TCM that represents input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor provides the TCM with output shaft speed information. By comparing the two inputs, the TCM can determine transmission gear position. This is important to the CVI calculation because the TCM determines CVIs by monitoring how long it takes for a gear change to occur. Gear ratios can be determined by using the Scan Tool and reading the Input/Output Speed Sensor values in the "Monitors" display. Gear ratio can be obtained by dividing the Input Speed Sensor value by the Output Speed Sensor value. For example, if the input shaft is rotating at 1000 rpm and the output shaft is rotating at 500 rpm, then the TCM can determine that the gear ratio is 2:1. In direct drive (3rd gear), the gear ratio changes to 1:1. The gear ratio changes as clutches are applied and released. By monitoring the length of time it takes for the gear ratio to change following a shift request, the TCM can determine the volume of fluid used to apply or release a friction element. The volume of transmission fluid needed to apply the friction elements are continuously updated for adaptive controls. As friction material wears, the volume of fluid need to apply the element increases. Certain mechanical problems within the input clutch assembly can cause inadequate or out-of-range element volumes. Also, defective Input/Output Speed Sensors and wiring can cause these conditions. The following charts identifies the appropriate clutch volumes and when they are monitored/updated: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Transmission Control Module - Description > Page 5188 SHIFT SCHEDULES As mentioned earlier, the TCM has programming that allows it to select a variety of shift schedules. Shift schedule selection is dependent on the following: - Shift lever position - Throttle position - Engine load - Fluid temperature - Software level As driving conditions change, the TCM appropriately adjusts the shift schedule. Refer to the following chart to determine the appropriate operation expected, depending on driving conditions. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn Control Module: Service and Repair TCM Quick Learn TCM QUICK LEARN The quick learn procedure requires the use of the scan tool. This program allows the electronic transmission system to recalibrate itself. This will provide the proper transmission operation. The quick learn procedure should be performed if any of the following procedures are performed: - Transmission Assembly Replacement - Transmission Control Module Replacement - Solenoid Pack Replacement - Clutch Plate and/or Seal Replacement - Valve Body Replacement or Recondition To perform the Quick Learn Procedure, the following conditions must be met: - The brakes must be applied - The engine speed must be above 500 rpm - The throttle angle (TPS) must be less than 3 degrees - The shift lever position must stay in PARK until prompted to shift to overdrive - The shift lever position must stay in overdrive after the Shift to Overdrive prompt until the scan tool indicates the procedure is complete. - The calculated oil temperature must be above 60° and below 200° Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn > Page 5191 Control Module: Service and Repair TCM Drive Learn DRIVE LEARN When a transmission is repaired and a Quick Learn procedure has been performed on the Transmission Control Module (TCM), the following Drive Learn procedure can be performed to fine tune any shifts which are particularly objectionable. NOTE: It is not necessary to perform the complete Drive Learn procedure every time the TCM is Quick Learned. Perform only the portions which target the objectionable shift. LEARN A SMOOTH 1ST NEUTRAL TO DRIVE SHIFT Perform this procedure only if the complaint is for a delayed or harsh shift the first time the transmission is put into gear after the vehicle is allowed to set with the engine not running for at least 10 minutes. Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 1st N-D UD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be between 27-43° C (80-110° F). 1. Start the engine only when the engine and ignition have been off for at least ten (10) minutes. 2. With the vehicle at a stop and the service brake applied, record the 1st N-D UD CVI while performing a Neutral to Drive shift. The 1st N-D UD CVI accounts for air entrapment in the UD clutch that may occur after the engine has been off for a period of time. 3. Repeat STEP 1 and STEP 2 until the recorded 1st N-D UD CVI value stabilizes. NOTE: It is important that this procedure be performed when the transmission temperature is between 27-43° C (80-110° F). If this procedure takes too long to complete fully for the allowed transmission oil temperature, the vehicle may be returned to the customer with an explanation that the shift will improve daily during normal vehicle usage. The TCM also learns at higher oil temperatures, but these values (line pressure correction values) are not available for viewing on the scan tool. LEARN A SMOOTH NEUTRAL TO DRIVE GARAGE SHIFT Perform this procedure if the complaint is for a delayed or harsh shift when the transmission is put into gear after the vehicle has had its first shift. Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the Norm N-D UD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be between 27-43° C (80-110° F) to learn the UD CVI. Additional learning occurs at temperatures as low as -18° C (0° F) and as high as 93° C (200° F). This procedure may be performed at any temperature that experiences poor shift quality. Although the UD CVI may not change, shift quality should improve. 1. Start the vehicle engine and shift to drive. 2. Move the vehicle forward to a speed of at least 16 km/h (10 MPH) and come to a stop. This ensures no air is present in the UD hydraulic circuit. 3. Perform repeated N-D shifts at a stop while pausing in Neutral for at least 2-3 seconds and monitor Norm N-D UD CVI volume until the value stabilizes. The value will change during the N-D shift. This is normal since the UD value is different for the N-D shift then the normal value shown which is used for 4-3 coastdown and kickdowns. Perform repeated shifts in this temperature range until the Norm N-D UD CVI value stabilizes and the N-D shifts become smooth. LEARN THE 1ST 2-3 SHIFT AFTER A RESTART OR SHIFT TO REVERSE Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 1st 2-3 shift OD CVI. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 27° C (80° F). 1. With the vehicle engine running, select reverse gear for over 2 seconds. 2. Shift the transmission to Drive and accelerate the vehicle from a stop at a steady 15 degree throttle opening and perform a 2-3 shift while noting the 1st 2-3 OD CVI. 3. Repeat STEP 1 and STEP 2 until the 1st 2-3 upshift becomes smooth and the 1st 2-3 OD CVI stabilizes. LEARN A SMOOTH 2-3 AND 3-4 UPSHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the OD and 4C CVI's. 1. Accelerate the vehicle from a stop at a steady 15 degree throttle opening and perform multiple 1-2, 2-3, and 3-4 upshifts. The 2nd 2-3 shift following a restart or shift to reverse will be shown during the shift as a value between the 1st 2-3 OD CVI and the normal OD CVI. Updates to the normal OD CVI will occur after the 2nd shift into 3rd gear, following a restart or shift to reverse. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 2-3 and 3-4 shifts become smooth and the OD and 4C CVI become stable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Control Module, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > TCM Quick Learn > Page 5192 LEARN A SMOOTH 4-3 COASTDOWN AND PART THROTTLE 4-3 KICKDOWN NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the UD shift volume. 1. At a vehicle speed between 64-97 km/h (40-60 MPH), perform repeated 4-3 kickdown shifts. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the UD volume becomes somewhat stable and the shift becomes smooth. LEARN A SMOOTH 1-2 UPSHIFT AND 3-2 KICKDOWN Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the 2C shift volume. NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). 1. With a vehicle speed below 48 km/h (30 MPH) and the transmission in 3rd gear, perform multiple 3-2 kickdowns. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 3-2 kickdowns become smooth and the 2C CVI becomes stable. LEARN A SMOOTH MANUAL 2-1 PULLDOWN SHIFT AS WELL AS A NEUTRAL TO REVERSE SHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the LR volume. 1. With the vehicle speed around 40-48 km/h (25-30 MPH) in Manual 2nd, perform manual pulldowns to Low or 1st gear at closed throttle. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the LR CVI becomes stable and the manual 2-1 becomes smooth. LEARN A SMOOTH NEUTRAL TO REVERSE SHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). 1. With the vehicle at a stop, perform Neutral to Reverse shifts until the shift is smooth. An unlearned Neutral to Reverse shift may be harsh or exhibit a double bump. 2. If any of the shifts are still not smooth after the clutch volume stabilizes, an internal transmission problem may be present. LEARN A SMOOTH 4-5 UPSHIFT NOTE: The transmission oil temperature must be above 43° C (110° F). Use the following steps to have the TCM learn the Alt 2C CVI. 1. Accelerate the vehicle through 88 km/h (55 mph) at a steady 10-15 degree throttle opening and perform multiple 4-5 upshifts. 2. Repeat STEP 1 until the 4-5 shift become smooth and the Alt 2C CVI become stable. There is a separate 2C volume used and learned for 4-5 shifts, 2CA. It is independent of the 2C CVI learned on 3-2 kickdowns. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Control System Relay: Locations Transmission Control Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5196 Transmission Control System Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 188 Component : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Connector: Name : RELAY-TRANSMISSION CONTROL Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 Z915 20BK GROUND 86 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 87 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay. The relay is supplied fused B+ voltage, energized by the TCM, and is used to supply power to the solenoid pack when the transmission is in normal operating mode. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - A/T > Transmission Control System Relay, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5199 Transmission Control System Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: Due to different power control configurations, the Transmission Control Relay (if equipped) may be referred to as a PCM relay. When the relay is "off", no power is supplied to the solenoid pack and the transmission is in "limp-in" mode. After a controller reset, the TCM energizes the relay. Prior to this, the TCM verifies that the contacts are open by checking for no voltage at the switched battery terminals. After this is verified, the voltage at the solenoid pack pressure switches is checked. After the relay is energized, the TCM monitors the terminals to verify that the voltage is greater than 3 volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5205 ERROR: undefined OFFENDING COMMAND: f‘~ STACK: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5206 Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Front Control Module (FCM) utilizes the input from the transfer case mounted mode sensor, the instrument panel mounted selector switch, and the following information from the vehicle's CAN bus to determine if a shift is allowed. - Engine RPM and Vehicle Speed - Diagnostic Requests - Manual Transmission Clutch Switch - Brake Applied - PRNDL - Ignition Status - ABS Messages Once the FCM determines that a requested shift is allowed, it actuates the bi-directional shift motor as necessary to achieve the desired transfer case operating mode. The FCM also monitors the mode sensor while controlling the shift motor to determine the status of the shift attempt. Several items can cause the requested shift not to be completed. If the FCM has recognized a fault (DTC) of some variety, it will begin operation in one of four Functionality Levels. These levels are: - Level Zero - Normal Operation. - Level One - Only Mode Shifts Are Allowed. - Level Two - Only Mode Shifts and Shifts Into LOW Are Allowed (No Neutral Shifts Are Allowed). - Level Three - No Shifts Are Allowed The FCM can also be operating in one of three possible power modes. These power modes are: - Full Power Mode is the normal operational mode of the module. This mode is achieved by normal CAN bus traffic being present and the ignition being in the RUN position. Reduced Power Mode will be entered when the ignition has been powered off. In this state, the module will shut down power supplied to external devices, and to electronic interface inputs and outputs. From this state the module can enter either Sleep Mode or Full Power Mode. To enter this mode, the module must receive an ignition message denoting that the ignition is off, or not receive any messages for 5 ±0.5 seconds. To exit this mode, the module must receive one ignition message that denotes that the ignition is in the RUN position. - Sleep Mode will be entered, from the Reduced Power Mode, when no CAN traffic has been sensed for 20 ±1 seconds. If during Sleep Mode the module detects CAN bus traffic, it will revert to the Reduced Power mode while monitoring for ignition messages. It will remain in this state as long as there is traffic other than run or start messages, and will return to Sleep mode if the bus goes without traffic for 20 ±1 seconds. SHIFT REQUIREMENTS If the FCM is in full power mode and at functionality level zero, it uses the following criteria to determine if a shift is allowed. If any of the driver controllable conditions are not met once the shift request is recognized, the FCM may illuminate one or more of the 4WD system message icons in the instrument cluster display. Mode shifts will be allowed regardless of transmission gear or vehicle speed, whenever the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - A change in the Selector switch state indicates that a mode shift has been requested. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. Range shifts will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - A change in the Selector Switch state indicating a range shift has been requested. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal must be recognized for at least 1.5 seconds ±100 msec. (Automatic transmissions only) - Proper transmit/receive messages are occurring on the CAN bus. - Clutch signal is recognized for 500 msec ± 50 msec (Manual transmissions only). - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5207 - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. A shift into transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position, engine off. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 4.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - Foot Brake is applied. - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. A shift out of transfer case Neutral will be allowed only if all of the following conditions are met: - Ignition key switch is in the RUN position. - Front and rear wheel speed are within 21 km/hr (13 mph). - The recessed Neutral Selection switch has been depressed continuously for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec while all shift conditions have been continuously met. - Transmission in NEUTRAL signal recognized from the bus. (Automatic transmissions only) - Clutch signal is recognized from the bus (Manual transmissions only). - Proper message transmissions/receptions are occurring on the CAN bus. - Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 4.8 km/hr (3 miles per hour). - A valid mode sensor signal is being sensed by the FCM. - An Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) event is not in progress. LAMP STRATEGY The following strategy for the FCM controlled transfer case system uses the instrument cluster VF display's 4LOCK, 4LO, Service 4WD, and Mode Switch Transfer Case Neutral LED. Flashing any of the lamps or LED is accomplished at a 2Hz rate. NOTE: There is no lamp for the 2WD or AWD position. If no 4WD system message icons are illuminated in the instrument cluster, the operator is to assume that the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD position. - 2WD or AWD to 4LO - Successful shifts will flash 4LO during a shift, then after the 4LO position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 2WD or AWD to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will flash 4LOCK during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LOCK lamp is flashing. - 4LOCK to 4LO - Successful shifts will turn off the 4LOCK lamp and flash 4LO during a shift, then after the 4LO position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In the blocked condition, turn off 4LOCK and flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, the 4LOCK lamp remains illuminated solid and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 4LOCK to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts will flash the 4LOCK lamp during a shift, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, turn off the 4LOCK lamp. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LOCK lamp is flashing. - 4LO to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts will flash the 4LO lamp during a shift, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, turn off the 4LO lamp. In the blocked condition, flash the 4LO lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, no shift attempts are made and the 4LO lamp is flashing. - 4LO to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will turn off the 4LO lamp and flash 4LOCK during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In the blocked condition, turn off 4LO and flash the 4LOCK lamp during the 5 Phase 1 shift attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp turns on solid. When shift conditions are not met, the 4LO lamp remains illuminated solid and 4LOCK is flashing. - 2WD or AWD to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 2WD or AWD and no lamps are illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is depressed. - 4LOCK to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LOCK and the 4LOCK lamp is illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5208 depressed. - 4LO to NEUTRAL - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the NEUTRAL position has been met, display the NEUTRAL LED solid. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, the transfer case remains in 4LO and the 4LO lamp is illuminated. When shift conditions are not met, flash the NEUTRAL lamp while the push button is depressed. - NEUTRAL to 2WD or AWD - Successful shifts have no lamps illuminated, then after the 2WD or AWD position has been met, no lamps are illuminated. In the blocked condition, no lamps are illuminated during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, Phase 2 shifting will continue until the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, no lamp is illuminated, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while the push button is depressed, - Neutral to 4LOCK - Successful shifts will flash the 4LOCK lamp during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LOCK lamp solid. In a blocked condition, the 4LOCK lamp will flash during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, continue to flash the 4LOCK, Phase 2 shifting will continue until the transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, turn off the 4LOCK lamp, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while the push button is depressed. - NEUTRAL to 4LO - Successful shifts will flash the 4LO lamp during a shift, then after the 4LOCK position has been met, display the 4LO lamp solid. In a blocked condition, the 4LO lamp will flash during the 5 Phase 1 attempts. After 5 unsuccessful attempts, continue to flash 4LO, Phase 2 shifting will continue until transfer case is in the 2WD or AWD or 4LO position. If the final position is 2WD or AWD, turn off the 4LO lamp, if the final position is 4LO, illuminate the 4LO lamp solid. When shift conditions are not met, flash the 4LOCK and 4LO lamps and the NEUTRAL LED remains solid while push the button is depressed. SHIFT SEQUENCES (PHASE 1 SHIFTS) Once all the driver controllable conditions for the requested shift have been met, the FCM begins a shift timer with a maximum duration of 1 second per mode sensor target segment. If the shift timer expires before the FCM recognizes to correct mode sensor position, the shift is considered to have been blocked. The blocked shift will increment the blocked shift counter by one. The FCM strategy for handling blocked shifts will be described later. The process the FCM performs for the various shifts will be described first. RANGE AND MODE SHIFTS The process for performing all the range and mode shifts are the same. The following steps describe the process. - Allow time for Selector Switch debounce; 250 msec ±50 msec. - Activate/deactivate the 4WD system message icons in the instrument cluster as necessary. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec per mode sensor target segment in the destination gear's direction while monitoring the mode sensor. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor position is recognized. - Solidly illuminate the achieved position's instrument panel icon, unless the target is 2WD or AWD. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor position is not reached after the shift timer expires (i.e.: a blocked shift motor or other condition exists), the FCM will stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. per mode sensor target segment. The FCM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. The exception to the preceding sequence is when a shift from 4LO to 2WD or AWD is requested. If 2WD or AWD is requested from the 4LO position, the transfer case is first driven to the 4LOCK position. If the 4LOCK position is reached, the transfer case is then driven back to the 2WD or AWD position and the shift is considered complete. SHIFT OUT OF NEUTRAL The following steps describe the process for a shift out of NEUTRAL. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Engage the shift motor for a maximum of 1 second ±100 msec toward the transfer case 4LOCK mode position while monitoring the mode sensor position. - Disengage the shift motor when the correct mode sensor position is recognized. - Extinguish the Neutral LED. - Transmit a bus message that the transfer case shift is complete. - If the desired mode sensor position is not received after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), stop driving the motor and wait for 200 msec ±50 msec. The shift motor is then reversed in the direction back toward the source gear for up to 1.0 seconds 100 msec. The FCM waits for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeats the attempt to shift to the desired position. - When the Neutral button is released, if the 4LOCK position is the desired position, the shift is complete. Illuminate the 4LOCK message icon. - Otherwise when the Neutral button is released, if all of the shift requirements are being met then engage the shift motor towards the desired position for 1 second ±100 msec per 'D' channel. (if requirements for shifting are not met, illuminate the 4LOCK message icon and flash the destination message icon as an indication to the driver that all of the driver controllable shift conditions are not being met). If this requires another range or mode shift, begin the range/mode shift process. - If the desired mode sensor position is not achieved after the shift timer expires (i.e. a blocked or other condition exists), refer to the section on Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5209 Blocked Shift Strategy, also known as Phase 2 shifts (below). NEUTRAL BLOCKED SHIFT STRATEGY (PHASE 2 SHIFTS) When a shift is commanded out of neutral, the shift motor will be driven towards its destination position, except in the case of shifting out of NEUTRAL if 4LO was selected (the transfer case will shift to the 4LOCK position first, before proceeding to 4LO). If the shift is blocked on the way to the destination, the FCM may attempt to drive the motor back to the original position. This process will be allowed to occur 5 times. If the transfer case has reached a non-NEUTRAL position during the shift re-attempts, the message icon for the achieved gear position is illuminated and the shift attempts are stopped. To re-attempt the desired shift, the selector switch will need to be rotated to the current position until the switch debounce timer expires then a shift will need to be requested again. At the end of the 5th blocked attempt, the shift motor is driven towards the last known mode sensor position. If this motor drive allows the transfer case to reach the 2WD or AWD position, the shift is considered complete and the shift attempts are ended. If the mode sensor is in the NEUTRAL region at the expiration of the shift timer, the FCM will continue to make the shift attempts according to the blocked shift strategy independent of whether or not the driver controlled conditions are met. For shifts from NEUTRAL, if all 5 attempts fail to reach the desired position (which by default is 4LOCK), the motor will be driven to stall in the direction of 4LOCK or 4LO, depending on the achieved position. Otherwise, the transfer case will be driven in the direction opposite the last attempt with the desired target being 4LOCK or 4LO. If the transfer case reaches the 2WD or AWD position when being driven in the 4LOCK direction, then one final 1.0 second drive toward 4LOCK is attempted. If the transfer case then reaches the 4LOCK position, the shift is considered complete and the 4LOCK message icon is illuminated. If the transfer case is still the 2WD or AWD position, the shift is considered complete and all message icons are extinguished. NEUTRAL DRIFT SHIFT STRATEGY (PHASE 3 SHIFTS) NOTE: If after the 5th blocked shift and reversal attempt, if the transfer case position is in the NEUTRAL or other undesired region, shift attempts will continue until a non-NEUTRAL or a desired position is reached. Phase 3 is a series of shifts whose intent is to escape from an undesired position that has been reached outside of a shift. A perceived drift of the transfer case into a non-target region without the FCM driving the shift motor will initiate a phase 3 shift. Phase 3 will be initiated by any non-target region with the exception of a position greater then encoder_4LO_min or less then encoder_4LOCK_max. Whenever these encoder readings have been seen for defined period of time, Phase 3 shifting will begin. The shifts in a given Phase 3 shifting event are always in a single-direction, toward the target region from which the drift occurred. These shifts are performed without regard to shift conditions. The timing of each shift should follow the outline of the Phase 1 forward attempts, allowing the shift timer to reach the target. Between each attempt, there is a calibrated delay. After each attempt the shift counter and the Phase 3 max shifts counter will be updated. SHIFT REVERSAL TARGETS If the shift timer expires (1.0 seconds per mode sensor position) and the transfer case has not reached the desired position, all shifts will attempt to return to their original position with the exceptions of: - If the intended shift is going to the High rail from Low and can't make it, but it can make the 2WD or AWD position, the motor stops at that position. The FCM will not attempt to cross back over NEUTRAL if it does not have to. This means that there was a block on the first attempt to go to 4LOCK and the transfer case has made it through NEUTRAL to a known good position, then the motor will go back only to the 2WD or AWD position and execute the remainder of the attempts from there. - For shifts out of NEUTRAL, any time a shift is commanded out of NEUTRAL, the system needs to get out. The FCM should never go to NEUTRAL unless the driver is commanding it and all required conditions are being met. ENCODER DRIFT CORRECTION Whenever a shift is completed, the FCM stores the position in memory as the transfer case's intended position. The FCM continuously monitors the mode sensor and if the mode sensor drifts toward into a NEUTRAL region sensor position for 2.0 seconds, the FCM will perform a motor drive to correct the drift. The transfer case will be driven toward the intended position for 1.0 seconds ±100 msec. The FCM will wait for 2.0 seconds ±50 msec. and repeat the attempt to shift to the desired position. This will continue until the intended position is reached. SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL The FCM will have the ability to vary the speed of the transfer case motor through pulse width modulation (PWM). It is PWM from 0 to 100% at 100Hz. The PWM will function as follows: - Apply an initial duty cycle (APPROXIMATELY 94%) to shift motor control wires. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5210 - Control the acceleration of the shift motor by increasing the applied duty cycle at a specified rate. - Control the deceleration of the shift motor by updating the applied duty cycle to the shift motor control wires at a specified rate based upon the difference between the desired position and the current position. SHIFT ATTEMPT LIMIT To protect the transfer case system, the FCM will impose a limit on the number of shifts that can occur over a calibrated time period. The system will monitor the number of mode sensor position changes that occur in any 25 second time period. If the number of changes is 10 or greater, the system will go into a default mode. The default mode of operation for shifting is that the number of allowed changes permitted to occur will be 3 over each 15 second ±100 msec calibrated window of time. After 5 minutes ±100 msec, the motor can be assumed to have cooled down and the system will revert to normal operation. The following rules also apply to the shift limit: - The attempt limit will not prevent shifts coming out of NEUTRAL, they will be allowed regardless of the counter/timer. - Any shift that is in progress when the counter reaches a maximum count in time will be allowed to complete before the default mode is entered. Position changes during this period will not be counted towards the default mode limit. - A block, regardless of the direction, whether towards destination or back towards reversal target (shift timer expiring), will count as a value of 2 position changes towards the 10 position changes to go into default mode as defined above. Current attempt limit values are 10 transitions in 25 seconds and default mode values are 1 transition every 10 seconds for 5 minutes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 13 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5217 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5218 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5219 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5220 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 272 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5221 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid Component ID: 13 Component : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-LINE PRESSURE SENSOR/VARIABLE FORCE SOLENOID Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 5 T16 18YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 6 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5224 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5225 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/Pressure Switch Component ID: 16 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/PRESSURE SWITCH Color : LT. BROWN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T60 18YL/RD OD CONTROL 2 T59 18VT/PK UD CONTROL 3 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 4 T19 18YL/DB 2/4 CONTROL 5 T47 18YL/DG 2/4 PRESSURE SIGNAL 6 T9 18DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 7 T20 18DG/WT L/R CONTROL 8-9-10 T50 18VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5226 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5227 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Sensor-Line Pressure Component ID: 272 Component : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-LINE PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 2 F856 20YL/PK 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 T38 20YL/BR LINE PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Assembly-Line Pressure Sensor/Variable Force Solenoid > Page 5228 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The TCM utilizes a closed-loop system to control transmission line pressure. The system contains a variable force style solenoid, the Pressure Control Solenoid, which is part of the pressure switch assembly. The solenoid is duty cycle controlled by the TCM to vent the unnecessary line pressure supplied by the oil pump back to the pump inlet. The system contains a Line Pressure Sensor, which is a direct input to the TCM. The line pressure sensor monitors the transmission line pressure and completes the feedback loop to the TCM. The TCM uses this information to adjust its control of the pressure control solenoid to achieve the desired line pressure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5231 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The TCM calculates the desired line pressure based upon inputs from the transmission and engine. The TCM calculates the torque input to the transmission and uses that information as the primary input to the calculation. The line pressure is set to a predetermined value during shifts, to ensure consistent shift quality. During all other operation, the desired line pressure value is adjusted based on torque level and other transmission requirements. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Remove the bolt holding the line pressure sensor (2) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the line pressure sensor (2) from the transmission case. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5234 Fluid Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the line pressure sensor (2) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the line pressure sensor (2). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations Overdrive Switch: Locations Component ID: 321 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 2 Z953 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5238 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5239 Overdrive Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 321 Component : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Connector: Name : SWITCH-TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF Color : NATURAL # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T6 20DG TOW/HAUL OVERDRIVE OFF SWITCH SIGNAL 2 Z953 20BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 5240 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a plastic trim tool, remove the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer (2) from the shift lever (1). 2. Pull the switch (2) outwards to release it from the connector in the lever (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Overdrive Switch, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5243 Overdrive Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: There is enough slack in the wire to pull out the connector from the lever. 1. Pull the connector (2) out of the lever (1) just enough to grasp it. CAUTION: Be careful not to bend the pins on the tow/haul overdrive off switch. Use care when installing the switch, as it is not indexed, and can be accidentally installed incorrectly. 2. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) into the connector (2). 3. Push the tow/haul overdrive off switch (3) and wiring into the shift lever (1). 4. Install the tow/haul overdrive off switch retainer onto the shift lever. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission solenoid/TRS assembly is internal to the transmission and mounted on the valve body assembly. The assembly consists of six solenoids that control hydraulic pressure to the six friction elements (transmission clutches), and the torque converter clutch. The pressure control solenoid is located on the side of the solenoid/TRS assembly. The solenoid/TRS assembly also contains the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) and five pressure switches that feed information to the TCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5248 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SOLENOIDS Solenoids are used to control the L/R, 2C, 4C, OD, and UD friction elements. The reverse clutch is controlled by line pressure and the position of the manual valve in the valve body. All the solenoids are contained within the Solenoid and Pressure Switch Assembly. The solenoid and pressure switch assembly contains one additional solenoid, Multi-Select (MS), which serves primarily to provide 2nd and 3rd gear limp-in operation. The solenoids receive electrical power from the Transmission Control Relay through a single wire. The TCM energizes or operates the solenoids individually by grounding the return wire of the solenoid as necessary. When a solenoid is energized, the solenoid valve shifts, and a fluid passage is opened or closed (vented or applied), depending on its default operating state. The result is an apply or release of a frictional element. The MS and UD solenoids are normally applied to allow transmission limp-in in the event of an electrical failure. The continuity of the solenoids and circuits are periodically tested. Each solenoid is turned on or off depending on its current state. An inductive spike should be detected by the TCM during this test. If no spike is detected, the circuit is tested again to verify the failure. In addition to the periodic testing, the solenoid circuits are tested if a speed ratio or pressure switch error occurs. PRESSURE SWITCHES The TCM relies on five pressure switches to monitor fluid pressure in the L/R, 2C, 4C, UD, and OD hydraulic circuits. The primary purpose of these switches is to help the TCM detect when clutch circuit hydraulic failures occur. The switches close at approximately 23 psi and open at approximately 11 psi, and simply indicate whether or not pressure exists. The switches are continuously monitored by the TCM for the correct states (open or closed) in each gear as shown in the following chart: A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set if the TCM senses any switch open or closed at the wrong time in a given gear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the Transmission Solenoid/TRS Assembly is being replaced, the Quick Learn Procedure must be performed. See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules A/T/Control Module/Service and Repair/TCM Quick Learn 1. Remove the valve body from the transmission.See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 2. Remove the bolts (1) holding the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 3. Separate the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly from the valve body. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5251 Shift Solenoid Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place TRS selector plate in the PARK position. 2. Position the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. Be sure that both alignment dowels are fully seated in the valve body and that the TRS switch contacts are properly positioned in the selector plate 3. Install the bolts (1) to hold the transmission solenoid/TRS assembly onto the valve body. 4. Tighten the solenoid assembly screws adjacent to the arrows cast into the bottom of the valve body first. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 5. Tighten the remainder of the solenoid assembly screws to 6 Nm (50 in.lbs.). 6. Install the valve body into the transmission. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5256 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5257 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5258 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Transmission Range Component ID: 283 Component : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Connector: Name : SENSOR-TRANSMISSION RANGE Color : LT. GREEN # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (RLE) Pin Circuit Description 1 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 2-3 K900 18DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 4 T54 18YL/PK TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL 5-6-- 7 T1 18YL/BR TRS T1 SIGNAL 8 T3 18YL/LG TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T42 18YL/OR TRS T42 SIGNAL 10 T41 18YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5261 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5262 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagrams Assembly-Transmission Solenoid/TRS Component ID: 17 Component : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-TRANSMISSION SOLENOID/TRS Color : BLACK # of pins : 23 Qualifier : (RFE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 T20 20DG/WT L/R CONTROL 3-4 T41 20YL/DB TRS T41 SIGNAL (P/N SIGNAL) 5 T42 20YL/PK TRS T42 SIGNAL 6-- 7 T60 20YL/RD OD CONTROL 8 T3 20YL/PK TRS T3 SIGNAL 9 T1 20YL/PK TRS T1 SIGNAL 10 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 11 T48 20BR/YL 4C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 T118 20DG LP VFS CONTROL 13 T4 20BR/LB TRS T2 SIGNAL 14 T50 20VT/RD L/R PRESSURE SIGNAL 15 T147 20BR/LG 2C PRESSURE SIGNAL 16 T9 20DG/TN OD PRESSURE SIGNAL 17 T59 20VT/PK UD CONTROL 18 T29 20LB/RD UD PRESSURE SIGNAL 19 T259 20YL/DG 4C CONTROL 20 T219 20DG/YL 2C CONTROL 21 T140 20BR/YL MS CONTROL 22 K900 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 23 T54 20YL/DB TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SIGNAL Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Transmission Range > Page 5263 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) is part of the solenoid module, which is mounted to the top of the valve body inside the transmission. The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) has five switch contact pins that: - Determine shift lever position - Supply ground to the Starter Relay in Park and Neutral only. - Supply +12 V to the backup lamps in Reverse only. The TRS also has an integrated temperature sensor (thermistor) that communicates transmission temperature to the TCM and PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5266 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) communicates shift lever position to the TCM as a combination of open and closed switches. Each shift lever position has an assigned combination of switch states (open/closed) that the TCM receives from four sense circuits. The TCM interprets this information and determines the appropriate transmission gear position and shift schedule. There are many possible combinations of open and closed switches (codes). Seven of these possible codes are related to gear position and five are recognized as "between gear" codes. This results in many codes which should never occur. These are called "invalid" codes. An invalid code will result in a DTC, and the TCM will then determine the shift lever position based on pressure switch data. This allows reasonably normal transmission operation with a TRS failure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 268 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5271 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5272 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5273 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 274 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5274 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5275 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Input Speed Component ID: 268 Component : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-INPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T52 20YL/WT INPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5278 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5279 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5280 Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Output Speed Component ID: 274 Component : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Connector: Name : SENSOR-OUTPUT SPEED Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (A/T) Pin Circuit Description 1 T14 20YL/BK OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL 2 T13 20DG/VT SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5281 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5282 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Input Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5285 Transmission Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Sensor-Output Speed Description DESCRIPTION The Input and Output Speed Sensors are two-wire magnetic pickup devices that generate AC signals as rotation occurs. They are mounted in the left side of the transmission case and are considered primary inputs to the Transmission Control Module (TCM). Operation OPERATION The Input Speed Sensor provides information on how fast the input shaft is rotating. As the teeth of the input clutch hub pass by the sensor coil, an AC voltage is generated and sent to the TCM. The TCM interprets this information as input shaft rpm. The Output Speed Sensor generates an AC signal in a similar fashion, though its coil is excited by rotation of the park gear teeth. The TCM interprets this information as output shaft rpm. The TCM compares the input and output speed signals to determine the following: - Transmission gear ratio - Speed ratio error detection - CVI calculation The TCM also compares the input speed signal and the engine speed signal to determine the following: - Torque converter clutch slippage - Torque converter element speed ratio Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Input Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the input speed sensor (3). 4. Remove the bolt holding the input speed sensor to the transmission case. 5. Remove the input speed sensor (3) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the input speed sensor (3) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the input speed sensor. 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sensor-Input Speed > Page 5288 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Sensor-Output Speed Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Place a suitable fluid catch pan under the transmission. 3. Remove the wiring connector from the output speed sensor (1). 4. Remove the bolt holding the output speed sensor (1) to the transmission case. 5. Remove the output speed sensor (1) from the transmission case. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. 2. Install the bolt to hold the output speed sensor (1) into the transmission case. Tighten the bolt to 12 Nm (105 in.lbs.). 3. Install the wiring connector onto the output speed sensor (1). 4. Verify the transmission fluid level. Add fluid as necessary. 5. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The transmission temperature sensor is a thermistor that is integral to the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5293 Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission temperature sensor is used by the TCM to sense the temperature of the fluid in the sump. Since fluid temperature can affect transmission shift quality and convertor lock up, the TCM requires this information to determine which shift schedule to operate in. Calculated Temperature A failure in the temperature sensor or circuit will result in calculated temperature being substituted for actual temperature. Calculated temperature is a predicted fluid temperature which is calculated from a combination of inputs: - Battery (ambient) temperature - Engine coolant temperature - In-gear run time since start-up Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations Component ID: 322 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT 5 VOLT SELECTOR SWITCH SUPPLY 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 5 Z973 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR 4WD NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5298 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5299 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5300 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 322 Component : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Connector: Name : SWITCH-TRANSFER CASE SELECTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 K77 20BR/WT 5 VOLT SELECTOR SWITCH SUPPLY 2-3 K977 20BR/WT MODE SELECT 4 E11 20OR/DB PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 5 Z973 20BK GROUND 6 G95 20VT/BR 4WD NEUTRAL INDICATOR 7 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5301 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5302 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5305 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5306 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the left side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. The selector switch also contains four light emitting diode's (LED's) to indicate the transfer case position and whether a shift is in progress. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: For resistances between the ranges B-E shown for each valid position (T-Case NEUTRAL, 4LO, 4HI, 2WD), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - either of the neighboring valid positions. - as an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges E and F shown for 2WD and in-between positions, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the 2WD position. - an invalid fault position. - a valid in-between position. For resistances between the ranges F and G shown for in-between positions and fault condition (open), the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5307 - a valid in-between position. - an invalid fault position. For resistances between the ranges A and B shown for the fault condition (short) and T-Case NEUTRAL, the TCCM may interpret the resistance as: - the T-Case NEUTRAL position. - an invalid fault position. The LED's in the selector assembly are illuminated/flashed in the following manner to indicate a particular condition or state. - A solidly illuminated LED indicates a successfully completed shift and the current operating mode of the transfer case. While a shift has been requested but not yet completed, the LED for the desired transfer case position is flashed. - A flashing operating mode LED for the desired gear indicates that a shift to that position has been requested, but all of the driver controllable conditions have not been met. This is in an attempt to notify the driver that the transmission needs to be put into NEUTRAL, the vehicle speed is too great, or some other condition outlined (other than a diagnostic failure that would prevent this shift) elsewhere See: Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation is not met. Note that this flashing will continue indefinitely until the conditions are eventually met, or the selector switch position is changed, or if diagnostic routines no longer allow the requested shift. - If the driver attempts to make a shift into transfer case NEUTRAL, and any of the driver controllable conditions are not met, the request will be ignored until all of the conditions are met or until the NEUTRAL select button is released. Additionally the neutral lamp will flash, or begin to flash while the button is depressed and operator controllable conditions are not being met. All of the LED's except the Neutral will flash if any of the operator controllable conditions for shifting are not met while the Neutral button is depressed. This "toggle" type of feature is necessary because the TCCM would interpret another request immediately after the shift into transfer case NEUTRAL has completed. - No LED's illuminated indicate a fault in the transfer case control system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5308 Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The selector switch assembly is mounted in the right side of the vehicle's Instrument Panel (IP) and consists of a rotary knob connected to a resistive network for the mode and range shift selections. Also located in this assembly is a recessed, normally open momentary switch for making shifts into and out of transfer case NEUTRAL. A pen, or similar instrument, is used to make a NEUTRAL shift selection, thus reducing the likelihood of an inadvertent shift request. Operation OPERATION As the position of the selector switch varies, the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output will vary. Hardware, software, and calibrations within the Front Control Module (FCM) are provided that interpret the selector switch resistance as given in the table below: The internal structure and function of the selector switch is such that the connection is made to the Open/Diagnostic resistor before the connection to the individual position resistors is broken. Because of this characteristic, if the resistance between the Mode Sensor supply voltage pin and the Mode Sensor output pin is >19k ohms, the position resistor is open. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations Gear Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5312 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5313 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5314 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5315 Gear Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 15 Component : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SHIFT MOTOR/MODE SENSOR Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 8 Qualifier : (4WD) Pin Circuit Description 1 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 2 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 3 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 4 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 5 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 6-- 7-8-Component Location - 14 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5316 Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5317 Component Location - 18 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 5318 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV233 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift selector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4HI TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4HI if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4HI_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4HI_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - 2WD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 2WD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_2WD_max Volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5321 - 2WD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV233 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5322 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4LOCK TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LOCK if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LOCK_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LOCK_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - AWD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered AWD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_AWD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_AWD_max Volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5323 - AWD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_AWD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV244 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5324 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV244 GENII Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) provides the Front Control Module (FCM) feedback about the position of the transfer case. The sensor consists of a linear analog position sensor that converts the motor output shaft position into a DC signal. The FCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor whenever the FCM is not in sleep mode and monitor the shift motor position. The sensor position is monitored when the ignition is in the RUN position and for 10 seconds after the ignition is shifted to the OFF position. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which allows the transfer case to shift. The mode sensor will draw less than 20 mA of current during operation. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Front Control Module (FCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 2 milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary or active. Refer to the following chart for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. NOTE: All the parameter voltages referred to in the following information are calibrated items in the controller software and are subject to change. NOTE: For a further explanation of Phase 1 through 3 shifting, See: Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Description and Operation/Operation. The following information describes the different mode sensor positions: - 4LO TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4LO if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4LO_max Volts. - 4LO SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is less than or equal to encoder_4LO_min Volts has been reached. - 4HI TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 4HI if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_4HI_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_4HI_max Volts. - NEUTRAL TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered NEUTRAL if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_Neutral_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_Neutral_max Volts. - 2WD TARGET REGION - The position shall be considered 2WD if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts and it is also less than or equal to encoder_2WD_max Volts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5325 - 2WD SHIFT LIMIT - During Phase 2 and Phase 3 shifting, shifts may become unidirectional when a voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_2WD_min Volts has been reached. The mode sensor position will be considered invalid by the FCM if the voltage is greater than or equal to encoder_High_Range_Limit Volts or if it is less than or equal to encoder_Low_Range_Limit Volts. Refer to MODE SENSOR VOLTAGES - NV233 table (shown below) for the mode sensor voltages. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5326 Gear Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation NV243 Transfer Case Description DESCRIPTION The transfer case mode sensor (1) is an electronic device whose output can be interpreted to indicate the shift motor shaft's rotary position. The sensor consists of a magnetic ring and four Hall Effect Transistors to create a 4 channel digital device (non-contacting) whose output converts the motor shaft position into a coded signal. The TCCM must supply 5VDC (+/- 0.5v) to the sensor and monitor the shift motor position. The four channels are denoted A, B, C, and D. The sensor is mechanically linked to the shaft of the cam which causes the transfer case shifting. The mode sensor draws less than 53 mA. Operation OPERATION During normal vehicle operation, the Transfer Case Control Module (TCCM) monitors the mode sensor outputs at least every 250 (+/-50) milliseconds when the shift motor is stationary and 400 microseconds when the shift motor is active. A mode sensor signal between 3.8 Volts and 0.8 Volts is considered to be undefined. Refer to SECTOR ANGLES vs.TRANSFER CASE POSITION (first image below) for the relative angles of the transfer case shift sector versus the interpreted transfer case gear operating mode. Refer to MODE SENSOR CHANNEL STATES (second image below) for the sensor codes returned to the TCCM for each transfer case mode sensor position. The various between gears positions can also be referred as the transfer case's coarse position. These coarse positions come into play during shift attempts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transfer Case > Gear Sensor/Switch, Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > NV233 Transfer Case > Page 5327 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description ABS Light: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator serves both the standard equipment Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) and optional equipment 4-Wheel Anti-Lock (4WAL) brake systems. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The ABS indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Failure of Anti-lock Braking System in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ABS indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5334 ABS Light: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ABS indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the ABS system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ABS indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ABS indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ABS indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - ABS Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ABS indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB, the ABS indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the CAB for five consecutive message cycles, the ABS indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a valid message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the ABS indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. - ABS Diagnostic Test - The ABS indicator is blinked ON and OFF by lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the CAB during the performance of the ABS diagnostic tests. The CAB continually monitors the ABS circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the CAB sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a system malfunction or that the ABS system has become ineffective. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the ABS indicator fails to light due to an open or short in the cluster ABS indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the CAB of the condition, then the instrument cluster and the CAB will each store a DTC. For proper diagnosis of the antilock brake system, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ABS indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 154 Component : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 46 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 4-5-6-- 7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 13 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 14 - 15 - 16 Z923 18BK GROUND 17 - 18 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 27 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) 32 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5338 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - 41 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 42 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 43 - 44 - 45 Z107 12BK/DG GROUND 46 - - Component Location - 6 Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (RWAL) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5339 Pin Circuit Description 1 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 2 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 3 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 5 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 6 Z107 12BK/DG GROUND 7 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 8 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 9-10 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5340 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5341 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 154 Component : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 46 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 4-5-6-- 7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 13 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 14 - 15 - 16 Z923 18BK GROUND 17 - 18 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 27 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) 32 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5342 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - 41 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 42 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 43 - 44 - 45 Z107 12BK/DG GROUND 46 - - Component Location - 6 Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (RWAL) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5343 Pin Circuit Description 1 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 2 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 3 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 5 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 6 Z107 12BK/DG GROUND 7 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 8 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 9-10 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5344 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Antilock Brake Module (ABM) is a microprocessor which handles testing, monitoring and controlling the ABS brake system operation. The ABM is mounted on the top of the hydraulic control unit (HCU). The ABM operates the ABS system and is separate from other vehicle electrical circuits. ABM voltage source is through CKT A111 (fused B+). NOTE: If the ABM needs to be replaced, the rear axle type and tire revolutions per mile must be programed into the new ABM. For axle type refer to Differential See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications. For tire revolutions per mile,See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Specifications. To program the ABM refer to the Appropriate Diagnostic Information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5347 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SYSTEM SELF-TEST When the ignition switch is turned-on the microprocessor is tested. If an error occurs during the test, a DTC will be set into the memory. However it is possible the DTC will not be stored in memory if the error has occurred in the module were the DTC's are stored. The ABM contains a self check program that illuminates the ABS warning light when a system fault is detected. Faults are stored in memory and are accessible with the scan tool. ABS faults remain in memory until cleared, or until after the vehicle is started approximately 50 times. Stored faults are not erased if the battery is disconnected. ABM INPUTS The ABM continuously monitors the speed of the vehicle by monitoring signals generated by the wheel speed sensors. The ABM determines a wheel locking tendency when it recognizes the axle is decelerating too rapidly. The ABM monitors the following inputs to determine when a wheel locking tendency may exists: - Wheel Speed Sensors - Brake Lamp Switch - Brake Fluid Level Sensor - G-Sensor - 4WD Switch (If equipped) ABM OUTPUTS The ABM requests the following outputs for antilock braking and brake warning information from the CCN via CAN C Bus: - ABS Warning Lamp - Brake Warning Lamp Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the ABM needs to be replaced, the rear axle type and tire revolutions per mile must be programed into the new ABM. For axle type refer to Differential See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications. For tire revolutions per mile,See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Specifications. To program the ABM refer to the Appropriate Diagnostic Information. 1. Disconnect the pump electrical connector (3) from the HCU (2). 2. Remove the module mounting screws (1). 3. Remove the module (1) from the HCU (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5350 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the ABM needs to be replaced, the rear axle type and tire revolutions per mile must be programed into the new ABM. For axle type refer to Differential See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications. For tire revolutions per mile See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Specifications. To program the ABM refer to the Appropriate Diagnostic Information. 1. Position the module (1) on the HCU (2). 2. Install the mounting screws (1) and tighten to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs). 3. Install the pump electrical connector (3) to the module (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The HCU consists of a valve body, pump motor, low pressure accumulators, inlet valves, outlet valves and noise attenuators. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5355 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Accumulators in the valve body store extra fluid released to the system for ABS mode operation. The pump provides the fluid volume needed and is operated by a DC type motor. The motor is controlled by the ABM. The valves modulate brake pressure during antilock braking and are controlled by the ABM. The HCU provides three channel ABS or four channel With Traction Control pressure control to the front and rear brakes. One channel controls the rear wheel brakes in tandem ABS. The two remaining channels control the front wheel brakes individually. During antilock braking, the solenoid valves are opened and closed as needed. During normal braking, the HCU solenoid valves and pump are not activated. The master cylinder and power booster operate the same as a vehicle without an ABS brake system. NOTE: The three modes mentioned below do occur but not necessarily in the order listed everytime. During antilock braking, solenoid valve pressure modulation occurs in three stages, pressure increase, pressure hold, and pressure decrease. The valves are all contained in the valve body portion of the HCU. PRESSURE DECREASE The outlet valve is opened and the inlet valve is closed during the pressure decrease cycle. A pressure decrease cycle is initiated when speed sensor signals indicate high wheel slip at one or more wheels. At this point, the ABM closes the inlet then opens the outlet valve, which also opens the return circuit to the accumulators. Fluid pressure is allowed to bleed off (decrease) as needed to prevent wheel lock. Once the period of high wheel slip has ended, the ABM closes the outlet valve and begins a pressure increase or hold cycle as needed. PRESSURE HOLD Both solenoid valves are closed in the pressure hold cycle but only the inlet valve is energized. Fluid apply pressure in the control channel is maintained at a constant rate. The ABM maintains the hold cycle until sensor inputs indicate a pressure change is necessary. PRESSURE INCREASE The inlet valve is open and the outlet valve is closed during the pressure increase cycle. The pressure increase cycle is used to reapply thew brakes. This cycle controls re-application of fluid apply pressure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) - Installation Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the ABM is being replaced with a new ABM it must be reprogrammed with the use of a scantool. 1. Reinstall the HCU assembly (5) to the vehicle. 2. Install HCU assembly (5) on the battery tray (2) and Tighten the nuts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake lines (3) to the HCU (1) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 4. Install the electrical harness connector (4) to the ABM (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) - Installation > Page 5358 5. Install the battery cables to the battery. 6. Bleed ABS brake system See: Brake Bleeding. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) - Installation > Page 5359 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cables from the battery. 2. Disconnect the brake lines (3) to the HCU (1). 3. Disconnect the electrical harness connector (4). 4. Remove HCU assembly (5) mounting bolts (1&6). 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Lift the HCU assembly (5) off the battery tray (2). 7. Remove the HCU assembly (5) from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Description and Operation Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The G-sensor is located inside the ABS controller. The sensor is not a separate serviceable part from the controller. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Traction Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A traction control indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional Traction Control System (TCS), this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The traction control indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Stability - Anti-Spin in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The traction control indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5367 Traction Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The traction control indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic Traction Control System (TCS) has been activated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The traction control indicator is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the indicator will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The indicator only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the traction control indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the traction control indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - Traction Control Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic traction control indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB indicating that the TCS has been activated, the traction control indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the traction control indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The CAB continually monitors the status of the inputs to the TCS system to determine the proper outputs to the components of the Antilock Brake System (ABS). The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the traction control indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the TCS, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to traction control indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 284 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5372 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5373 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Component ID: 285 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5374 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5375 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 286 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5376 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 284 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5379 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5380 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Component ID: 285 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5381 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5382 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 286 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5383 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5384 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The Wheel Speed Sensor consists of a magnet (1) surrounded by windings from a single strand of wire (5). The sensor sends a small AC signal to the ABM. This signal is generated by magnetic induction. The magnetic induction is created when a toothed sensor ring (exciter ring or tone wheel) (4) passes the stationary magnetic WSS. When the ring gear is rotated, the exciter ring (4) passes the tip of the WSS. As the exciter ring tooth approaches the tip of the WSS, the magnetic lines of force expand, causing the magnetic field to cut across the sensor's windings (5). This, in turn causes current to flow through the WSS circuit in one direction. When the exciter ring tooth moves away from the sensor tip, the magnetic lines of force collapse cutting the winding in the opposite direction. This causes the current to flow in the opposite direction. Every time a tooth of the exciter ring passes the tip of the WSS, an AC signal is generated current. Each AC signal (positive to negative signal or squarewave) is interpreted by the ABM. It then compares the frequency of the sinewave to a time value to calculate vehicle speed. The ABM continues to monitor the frequency to determine a deceleration rate that would indicate a possible wheel-locking tendency. The signal strength of any magnetic induction sensor is directly affected by: - Magnetic field strength; the stronger the magnetic field, the stronger the signal - Number of windings in the sensor; more windings provide a stronger signal - Exciter ring speed; the faster the exciter ring/tone wheel rotates, the stronger the signal will be - Distance (3) "air gap" between the exciter ring teeth and WSS; the closer the WSS is to the exciter ring/tone wheel, the stronger the signal will be. The WSS is not adjustable. A clearance specification has been established for manufacturing tolerances. If the clearance is not within these specifications, then either the WSS or other components may be damaged. The clearance between the WSS and the exciter ring is 0.005 0.050 in. The assembly plant performs a "Rolls Test" on every vehicle that leaves the assembly plant. One of the test performed is a test of the WSS. To properly test the sensor, the assembly plant connects test equipment to the Data Link Connector (DLC). This connector is located to the right of the steering column and attached to the lower portion of the instrument panel. The rolls test terminal is spliced to the WSS circuit. The vehicle is then driven on a set of rollers and the WSS output is monitored for proper operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front rotor and caliper adapter.See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) from the hub (3). 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) from the hub (3). 5. Remove the wiring from the clips and disconnect the electrical connector (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 5387 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the wiring to the clips and Reconnect the electrical connector (1). 2. Install the wheel speed sensor (2) to the hub (3). 3. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) to the hub (3). Tighten the bolt to 21 Nm (190 in. lbs.). 4. Install the front rotor and brake caliper assembly See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 5388 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove brake line mounting nut (4) and remove the brake line (3) from the sensor stud. 3. Remove the park brake cable (2) and bracket (1) from the sensor stud. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (6). 5. Remove mounting stud (2) from the sensor (5). 6. Remove sensor (1) from differential housing (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 5389 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect harness to sensor (1). Be sure seal is securely in place between sensor and wiring connector. 2. Install O-ring on sensor (if removed). 3. Insert sensor (1) in differential housing (3). 4. Install the sensor mounting stud and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the electrical connector (6). 6. Install the brake line (3) on the sensor stud. 7. Install the park brake cable (2) and bracket (1) to the stud and install the nut (4). 8. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Yaw Rate Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The G-sensor is located inside the ABS controller. The sensor is not a separate serviceable part from the controller. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bleeding MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING A new master cylinder should be bled before installation on the vehicle. Required bleeding tools include bleed tubes and a wood dowel to stroke the pistons. Bleed tubes can be fabricated from brake line. 1. Mount master cylinder in vise. 2. Attach bleed tubes to cylinder outlet ports (1). Then position each tube end into reservoir (2). 3. Fill reservoir with fresh brake fluid. 4. Press cylinder pistons inward with wood dowel. Then release pistons and allow them to return under spring pressure. Continue bleeding operations until air bubbles are no longer visible in fluid. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 5397 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Brake Bleeding ABS BRAKE BLEEDING ABS system bleeding requires conventional bleeding methods plus use of the scan tool. The procedure involves performing a base brake bleeding, followed by use of the scan tool to cycle and bleed the HCU pump and solenoids. A second base brake bleeding procedure is then required to remove any air remaining in the system. 1. Perform base brake bleeding,. See: Base Brakes - Manual Bleeding See: Base Brakes - Pressure Bleeding 2. Connect scan tool to the Data Link Connector. 3. Select ANTILOCK BRAKES, followed by MISCELLANEOUS, then ABS BRAKES. Follow the instructions displayed. When scan tool displays TEST COMPLETE, disconnect scan tool and proceed. 4. Perform base brake bleeding a second time,. See: Base Brakes - Manual Bleeding See: Base Brakes - Pressure Bleeding 5. Top off master cylinder fluid level and verify proper brake operation before moving vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 5398 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Base Brakes - Manual Bleeding MANUAL BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. 1. Remove reservoir filler caps and fill reservoir. 2. If calipers were overhauled, open all caliper bleed screws. Then close each bleed screw as fluid starts to drip from it. Top off master cylinder reservoir once more before proceeding. 3. Attach one end of bleed hose (1) to bleed screw and insert opposite end in glass container (2) partially filled with brake fluid. Be sure end of bleed hose is immersed in fluid. NOTE: Bleed procedure should be in this order (1) Right rear (2) Left rear (3) Right front (4) Left front. 4. Open up bleeder, then have a helper press down the brake pedal. Once the pedal is down close the bleeder. Repeat bleeding until fluid stream is clear and free of bubbles. Then move to the next wheel. 5. Before moving the vehicle verify the pedal is firm and not mushy. 6. Top off the brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 5399 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Base Brakes - Pressure Bleeding PRESSURE BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. Follow the manufacturers instructions carefully when using pressure equipment. Do not exceed the tank manufacturers pressure recommendations. Generally, a tank pressure of 15-20 psi is sufficient for bleeding. Fill the bleeder tank with recommended fluid and purge air from the tank lines before bleeding. Do not pressure bleed without a proper master cylinder adapter. The wrong adapter can lead to leakage, or drawing air back into the system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Pedal Assy: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The brake pedal is serviced as a complete assembly including the bracket. A suspended-type brake pedal (5) is used. The pedal is attached to the pedal support bracket (1) with a pivot shaft pin (2), bushings (3) and clips (4). If the bushings (3) become dry a spray lubricant can be used to eliminate noises. The booster push rod is attached to the pedal with a clip. The pedal (5), bushings (3), pivot pin (2) and support bracket (1) are not serviceable components. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5404 Brake Pedal Assy: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake pedal is attached to the booster push rod. When the pedal is depressed, the primary booster push rod is depressed which move the booster secondary rod. The booster secondary rod depress the master cylinder piston. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Before servicing the steering column the airbag system must be disarmed. Failure to do so may result in accidental deployment of the airbag and possible personal injury. NOTE: The brake pedal is serviced as a complete assembly including accelerator pedal and the bracket. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable to disable the airbag system. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the steering column opening coverSee: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Opening Cover - Removal. 3. Remove the steering column opening cover reinforcement. 4. Remove stop lamp switch. See: Lighting and Horns/Brake Light Switch/Service and Repair/Removal. 5. Remove clip securing booster push rod (6) to brake pedal (5). 6. Remove pedal pivot pin C-clip (4) and slide pin out of support bracket (1) and pedal (5). 7. Remove pedal and bushings (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5407 Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Replace bushings (3) if worn or damaged. 2. Lubricate pedal bushings (3) and pivot pin (2) with Mopar multi mileage grease, Lubriplate, or a silicone grease. 3. Install bushings (3) in pedal and position pedal (5) in support (1). 4. Insert pivot pin (2) through support (1) and pedal bushings and install C-clip (4). 5. Install booster push rod (6) on brake pedal and install push rod retainer clip. 6. Install a new brake lamp switchSee: Lighting and Horns/Brake Light Switch/Service and Repair/Removal. 7. Install the steering column opening coverSee: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Opening Cover - Removal. 8. Install the steering column opening cover reinforcement. 9. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A brake indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area below and right of the speedometer needle hub. The brake indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the word BRAKE (all clusters with a miles-per-hour primary speedometer scale), or the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Brake Failure (all clusters with a kilometers-per-hour primary scale) in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The brake indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5412 Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the parking brake is applied, when there are certain brake hydraulic system malfunctions as indicated by a low brake hydraulic fluid level condition, or when the brake fluid level switch is disconnected. The brake indicator can also give an indication when certain faults are detected in the Antilock Brake System (ABS). This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming, electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and a hard wired input from the park brake switch. The brake indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the brake indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the brake indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - Brake Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic brake indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB, the brake indicator will be illuminated. The CAB may also send lamp-ON messages as feedback during ABS diagnostic procedures. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Park Brake Switch Input - Each time the cluster detects ground on the park brake switch sense circuit (park brake switch closed = park brake applied or not fully released) while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the brake indicator flashes ON and OFF. The indicator continues to flash until the park brake switch sense input to the cluster is an open circuit (park brake switch open = park brake fully released), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the brake indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The park brake switch on the park brake pedal mechanism provides a hard wired ground input to the instrument cluster circuitry through the park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied or not fully released. The CAB continually monitors the ABS system circuits and sensors, including the brake fluid level switch on the brake master cylinder reservoir, to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the CAB sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a brake hydraulic system malfunction or that the ABS system has become ineffective. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. For further diagnosis of the brake indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection The hard wired park brake switch input to the instrument cluster may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. For proper diagnosis of the brake fluid level switch, the ABS, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to brake indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5413 Brake Warning Indicator: Testing and Inspection BRAKE INDICATOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. The hard wired park brake switch input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the EMIC, the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB), the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, or the electronic message inputs also used by the EMIC to provide brake indicator operation. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the EMIC, the CAB, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to brake indicator operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only Non-Petroleum based grease. The calipers are a dual piston type. The calipers are free to slide laterally, this allows continuous compensation for lining wear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5419 Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the brakes are applied fluid pressure is exerted against the caliper piston (2). The fluid pressure is exerted equally and in all directions. This means pressure exerted against the caliper piston and within the caliper bore will be equal. Fluid pressure applied to the piston is transmitted directly to the inboard brake pad (5). This forces the pad lining against the inner surface of the disc brake rotor. At the same time, fluid pressure within the piston bore forces the caliper to slide inward on the mounting bolts. This action brings the outboard brake pad lining (6) into contact with the outer surface of the disc brake rotor. In summary, fluid pressure acting simultaneously on both piston and caliper, produces a strong clamping action. When sufficient force is applied, friction will attempt to stop the rotors from turning and bring the vehicle to a stop. Application and release of the brake pedal generates only a very slight movement of the caliper and piston. Upon release of the pedal, the caliper and piston return to a rest position. The brake pads do not retract an appreciable distance from the rotor. In fact, clearance is usually at, or close to zero. The reasons for this are to keep road debris from getting between the rotor and lining and in wiping the rotor surface clear each revolution. The caliper piston seal (4) controls the amount of piston (2) extension needed to compensate for normal lining wear. During brake application, the seal is deflected outward by fluid pressure and piston movement(6). When the brakes (and fluid pressure) are released, the seal relaxes and retracts the piston (3). The amount of piston retraction is determined by the amount of seal deflection. Generally the amount is just enough to maintain contact between the piston and inboard brake pad. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Caliper: Procedures INSPECTION The piston is made from a steel material and should be smooth and clean. The piston must be replaced if cracked or scored. Do not attempt to restore a scored piston surface by sanding or polishing. CAUTION: If the caliper piston is replaced, install the same type of piston in the caliper. Never interchange phenolic resin and steel caliper pistons. The pistons, seals, seal grooves, caliper bore and piston tolerances are different. The bore can be lightly polished with a brake hone (3) to remove very minor surface imperfections. The caliper should be replaced if the bore is severely corroded, rusted, scored, or if polishing would increase bore diameter more than 0.025 mm (0.001 inch). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5422 Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement Disc Brake Caliper - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose with result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Compress the disc brake caliper (6). 4. Remove the banjo bolt (4) and discard the copper washers. 5. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5423 6. Remove the disc brake caliper (1) from the caliper adapter (2). 7. Remove the caliper slide pins from the adapter. Disc Brake Caliper - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only Non-Petroleum based grease. NOTE: Clean slide pin bores thoroughly to remove any old grease. NOTE: Use grease packets included with kit or Dow Corning-807(R) grease. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5424 1. Thoroughly coat the new slide pins (3) on all working surfaces. 2. Install the boot (2) onto the slide pin (3) and then insert into the adapter (1). 3. Push the pin (3) all the way into the adapter (1) and carefully expel the trapped air by gently pushing on the boot (2) near the slide pin head (3). NOTE: Install a new copper washers on the banjo bolt when installing 4. Install the disc brake caliper (1) to the brake caliper adapter (2). 5. Install the banjo bolt (4) with new copper washers to the caliper (6). Tighten to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.) 6. Install the caliper slide pin bolts (2). Tighten to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) 7. Bleed the base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding. 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 9. Lower the vehicle. Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5425 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts (4)See: Disc Brake Caliper - Removal. 4. Remove the disc brake caliper (1) from the adapter (2). CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 5. Remove the inboard (4) and outboard (2) brake pads. See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Pads - Removal. 6. Remove the caliper adapter mounting bolts (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5426 7. Remove the caliper slide pins from the adapter. Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only a Non-Petroleum based grease, such as Dow Corning-807(R) grease. NOTE: Clean slide pin bores thoroughly to remove any old grease. NOTE: Use grease packets included with kit or Dow Corning-807(R) grease. 1. Thoroughly coat the new slide pins (3) on all working surfaces. 2. Install the boot (2) onto the slide pin (3) and then insert into the adapter (1). 3. Push the pin (3) all the way into the adapter (1) and carefully expel the trapped air by gently pushing on the boot (2) near the slide pin head (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5427 4. Install the caliper adapter mounting bolts (5). Tighten the mounting bolts to 176 Nm (130 ft.lbs). 5. Install the inboard (4) and outboard (2) pads. See: Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Pads - Installation. 6. Install the caliper (2) and the caliper slide pin bolts (4) See: Disc Brake Caliper - Installation. 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5428 Brake Caliper: Overhaul Disc Brake Caliper - Disassembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Drain the brake fluid from caliper. 2. C-clamp (2) a block of wood (1) over one piston. 3. Take another piece of wood and pad it with one-inch thickness of shop towels (2). Place this piece in the outboard shoe side of the caliper in front of the other piston. This will cushion and protect caliper piston during removal. 4. To remove the caliper piston direct short bursts of low pressure air with a blow gun through the caliper brake hose port. Use only enough air pressure to ease the piston out. CAUTION: Do not blow the piston out of the bore with sustained air pressure. This could result in a cracked piston. WARNING: Never attempt to catch the piston as it leaves the bore. This could result in personal injury. 5. Remove the C-clamp and block of wood from the caliper and clamp it over the dust boot of the first piston removed. This will seal the empty piston bore. 6. Move the padded piece of wood in front of the other piston. 7. Remove the second piston using the same procedure with short bursts of low pressure air. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5429 8. Remove piston dust boots (2) by hand. CAUTION: Do not scratch piston bore while removing the seals. 9. Remove the lip seal from the groove (4) with a pick tool (3). 10. Remove piston seals (2) from caliper (1) by hand. Disc Brake Caliper - Assembly ASSEMBLY Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5430 CAUTION: Dirt, oil, and solvents can damage caliper seals. Insure assembly area is clean and dry. 1. Lubricate caliper pistons, piston seals and piston bores with clean, fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Verify seal is fully seated and not twisted. 2. Install new piston seals (2) into caliper bores (1). 3. Leave boot (1) dry and slip onto end of piston (2). NOTE: The dust boot lip must be inserted before the piston 4. Slightly pull out lip portion of piston boot (3) so it protrudes past the bottom of the piston (2) and work lip into outermost groove on caliper housing (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5431 5. Carefully press the lip (3) into the groove with a suitable tool (4) Avoid using sharp-edged tools This will ensure that the lip is nested into the groove all around before pushing the piston into the bore. 6. Press the piston fully into the bore using special tool C3716-A seal installer (3) with C-4171 Handle (1). 7. Once the piston is pressed into the bottom of the bore, Check to see that the dust boot bellows are not inflated with air. If needed, push in between the dust boot and piston to expel any trapped air. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Pad: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Drum brakes consist of dual shoes usually Leading (1) and Trailing (4), with wheel cylinders (3), an automatic self adjusting mechanism (2), springs (5 &7) and hold down clips (6) to hold the brake shoes against the dust shield (8). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5436 Brake Pad: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the brake pedal is depressed hydraulic pressure pushes the rear wheel cylinder pistons outward. The wheel cylinder push rods then push the brake shoes outward against the brake drum. When the brake pedal is released return springs attached to the brake shoes pull the shoes back to there original position. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Pad: Procedures CLEANING Clean the individual brake components, including the support plate and wheel cylinder exterior, with a water dampened cloth or with brake cleaner. Do not use any other cleaning agents. Remove light rust and scale from the brake shoe contact pads on the support plate with fine sandpaper. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5439 Brake Pad: Removal and Replacement Brake Pads - Removal FRONT PADS 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Compress the caliper (2). 4. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts (4), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal. 5. Remove the caliper (1) from the caliper adapter (2). NOTE: Do not allow brake hose to support caliper assembly. 6. Support and hang the caliper. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5440 7. Remove the inboard brake pad (4) from the caliper adapter (1). 8. Remove the outboard brake pad (2) from the caliper adapter (1). 9. Remove the anti-rattle clips (1) from the pad (2). Brake Pads - Installation FRONT PADS 1. Bottom pistons in caliper bore with C-clamp. Place an old brake shoe between a C-clamp and caliper piston. 2. Clean caliper mounting adapter. 3. Install new anti-rattle clips (1) to the brake pads (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5441 4. Install inboard brake pad (4) in adapter (1). 5. Install outboard brake pad (2) in adapter (1). 6. Install the caliper (1) over rotor, Then push the caliper onto the adapter (2). 7. Install caliper slide pin bolts (4), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Installation. 8. Install wheel and tire assemblies and lower vehicle, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 9. Apply brakes several times to seat caliper pistons and brake shoes and obtain firm pedal. 10. Top off master cylinder fluid level. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications BASE BRAKE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5445 Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection FRONT ROTOR MINIMUM THICKNESS Rotor minimum usable thickness is 28.5 mm (1.122 in.). Do not resurface a rotor if machining would cause thickness to fall below this limit. Measure rotor thickness at the center of the brake shoe contact surface. Replace the rotor if worn below minimum thickness, or if refinishing would reduce thickness below the allowable minimum. FRONT ROTOR THICKNESS VARIATION Variations in rotor thickness will cause pedal pulsation, noise and shudder. Measure rotor thickness a minimum of six points around the rotor face. Position the micrometer approximately 19 mm (3/4 in.) from the rotor outer circumference for each measurement. Thickness should not vary by more than 0.0127 mm (0.0005 in.) from point to point on the rotor. Refinish or replace the rotor if necessary. NOTE: A hub mounted on-vehicle lathe is recommended. This type of lathe trues the rotor to the vehicles hub/bearing. Front rotors and hub/bearings are matched mounted for minimum lateral runout. Before removing the rotor, mark the rotor and hub/bearing to maintain original orientation. FRONT ROTOR LATERAL RUNOUT Check rotor lateral runout whenever pedal pulsation, or rapid, uneven brake lining wear has occurred. The rotor must be securely clamped to the hub to ensure an accurate runout measurement. Secure the rotor with a minimum of 3 lug nuts and large diameter flat washers on each stud. Use a dial indicator to check lateral runout. Maximum allowable rotor lateral runout is 0.05 mm (0.002 in.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5446 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures STANDARD PROCEDURE NOTE: A hub mounted on-vehicle lathe is highly recommended. This type of lathe trues the rotor to the vehicles hub/bearing. The disc brake rotor can be machined if scored or worn. The on-vehicle lathe must machine both sides of the rotor simultaneously with dual cutter heads. The rotor mounting surface must be clean before placing on the on-vehicle lathe. Equipment capable of machining only one side at a time may produce a tapered rotor This type of rotor machining is not recommended. NOTE: Proper wheel torque is also critical to help prevent any warping of the disc brake rotor. CAUTION: Brake rotors that do not meet minimum thickness specifications before or after machining must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5449 Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement Brake Rotor - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the caliper (1) with the adaptor bolts (5) from the steering knuckle (4), See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Removal and remove caliper adapter assembly (1). NOTE: Do not allow brake hose to support caliper adapter assembly (1). 4. Remove the rotor (2) from the hub/bearing (3). Brake Rotor - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the rotor (2) onto the hub/bearing (3). 2. Install the caliper adapter assembly (1),See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Disc Brake Caliper - Installation and tighten adapter bolts (5) to 176 Nm (130 ft.lbs.). 3. Install the wheel and tire assembly, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement and lower the vehicle. 4. Apply the brakes several times to seat brake pads. Be sure to obtain firm pedal before moving vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Backing Plate: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire assembly and brake drum. 2. Remove the parking brake cable (2) from the parking brake lever (1) in the rear of the support plate. See: Parking Brake System/Parking Brake Cable/Service and Repair/Parking Brake Cable - Removal. 3. Disconnect the brake line (4) at the wheel cylinder (2). 4. Remove the wheel cylinder (2) from the support plate (1). See: Wheel Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal. 5. Remove the axle shaft, See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Rear Axle - 8 1/4/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5455 6. Remove the nuts (1) attaching the support plate (2) to the axle and remove the support plate (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5456 Backing Plate: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install support plate (2) on axle flange. Tighten attaching nuts (1) to 68 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 2. Install wheel cylinder (2). See: Wheel Cylinder/Service and Repair/Installation. 3. Install brake line (4) in wheel cylinder (2). 4. Reassemble the brake shoe assembly and insert the lever (1) into the support plate. 5. Install the park brake cable (2) to the lever (1). 6. Install axle shaft, See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Axle Shaft/Service and Repair/Rear Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5457 Axle - 8 1/4/Installation. 7. Adjust brake shoes to drum with brake gauge. 8. Install brake drum and wheel and tire assembly. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 9. Bleed brake system. See: Brake Bleeding. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications Brake Drum: Specifications BASE BRAKE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5461 Brake Drum: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - BRAKE DRUM The maximum allowable diameter of the drum braking surface is indicated on the drum outer edge. Generally, a drum can be machined to a maximum of 1.52 mm (0.060 in.) oversize. Always replace the drum if machining would cause drum diameter to exceed the size limit indicated on the drum. BRAKE DRUM RUNOUT Measure drum diameter and runout with an accurate gauge. The most accurate method of measurement involves mounting the drum in a brake lathe and checking variation and runout with a dial indicator. Variations in drum diameter should not exceed 0.03 mm (0.0012 in.). Drum runout should not exceed 0.06 mm (0.0024 in.) out of round. Machine the drum if runout or variation exceed these values. Replace the drum if machining causes the drum to exceed the maximum allowable diameter. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5462 Brake Drum: Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS - REAR DRUM BRAKE The rear drum brakes are equipped with a self-adjusting mechanism. Under normal circumstances, the only time adjustment is required is when the shoes are replaced, removed for access to other parts, or when one or both drums are replaced. Adjustment can be made with a standard brake gauge or with adjusting tool. Adjustment is performed with the complete brake assembly installed on the backing plate. ADJUSTMENT WITH BRAKE GAUGE 1. Be sure parking brakes are fully released. 2. Raise rear of vehicle and remove wheels and brake drums. 3. Verify that left and right automatic adjuster levers and cables are properly connected. 4. Insert brake gauge in drum. Expand gauge until gauge inner legs contact drum braking surface. Then lock gauge in position. 5. Reverse gauge and install it on brake shoes. Position gauge legs at shoe centers as shown. If gauge does not fit (too loose/too tight), adjust shoes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5463 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Drum: Procedures Cleaning CLEANING Clean the individual brake components, including the support plate and wheel cylinder exterior, with a water dampened cloth or with brake cleaner. Do not use any other cleaning agents. Remove light rust and scale from the brake shoe contact pads on the support plate with fine sandpaper. Inspection INSPECTION As a general rule, riveted brake shoes should be replaced when worn to within 0.78 mm (1/32 in.) of the rivet heads. Bonded lining should be replaced when worn to a thickness of 1.6 mm (1/16 in.). Examine the lining contact pattern to determine if the shoes are bent or the drum is tapered. The lining should exhibit contact across its entire width. Shoes exhibiting contact only on one side should be replaced and the drum checked for runout or taper. Inspect the adjuster screw assembly. Replace the assembly if the star wheel or threads are damaged, or the components are severely rusted or corroded. Discard the brake springs and retainer components if worn, distorted or collapsed. Also replace the springs if a brake drag condition had occurred. Overheating will distort and weaken the springs. Inspect the brake shoe contact pads on the support plate, replace the support plate if any of the pads are worn or rusted through. Also replace the plate if it is bent or distorted . Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5466 Brake Drum: Removal and Replacement STANDARD PROCEDURE - BRAKE DRUM MACHINING The brake drums can be machined on a drum lathe when necessary. Initial machining cuts should be limited to 0.12 - 0.20 mm (0.005 - 0.008 in.) at a time as heavier feed rates can produce taper and surface variation. Final finish cuts of 0.025 to 0.038 mm (0.001 to 0.0015 in.) are recommended and will generally provide the best surface finish. Be sure the drum is securely mounted in the lathe before machining operations. A damper strap should always be used around the drum to reduce vibration and avoid chatter marks. The maximum allowable diameter of the drum braking surface is stamped or cast into the drum outer edge. CAUTION: Replace the drum if machining will cause the drum to exceed the maximum allowable diameter. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Adjustments Brake Shoe: Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS - REAR DRUM BRAKE The rear drum brakes are equipped with a self-adjusting mechanism. Under normal circumstances, the only time adjustment is required is when the shoes are replaced, removed for access to other parts, or when one or both drums are replaced. Adjustment can be made with a standard brake gauge or with adjusting tool. Adjustment is performed with the complete brake assembly installed on the backing plate. ADJUSTMENT WITH BRAKE GAUGE 1. Be sure parking brakes are fully released. 2. Raise rear of vehicle and remove wheels and brake drums. 3. Verify that left and right automatic adjuster levers and cables are properly connected. 4. Insert brake gauge in drum. Expand gauge until gauge inner legs contact drum braking surface. Then lock gauge in position. 5. Reverse gauge and install it on brake shoes. Position gauge legs at shoe centers as shown. If gauge does not fit (too loose/too tight), adjust shoes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 5470 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Shoes - Removal Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Brake Shoes - Removal REAR SHOES 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove clip nuts securing brake drum to wheel studs. 4. Remove drum. If drum is difficult to remove, remove rear plug from access hole in support plate. Back-off self adjusting by inserting a thin screwdriver into access hole and push lever away from adjuster star wheel. Then insert an adjuster tool into brake adjusting hole rotate adjuster star wheel to retract brake shoes. 5. Vacuum brake components to remove brake lining dust. 6. Remove shoe return spring (3) with brake spring plier tool. 7. Remove adjuster spring and lever (5). Disengage lever from spring by sliding lever forward to clear pivot and work lever out from under spring. 8. Disengage and remove shoe return spring (1) from brake shoes (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Shoes - Removal > Page 5473 9. Remove brake shoe hold down clips (6). 10. Remove rear brake shoe (7) from support plate (9). 11. Remove front brake shoe (8) from support plate (9). 12. Remove park brake lever (2) from the brake shoe. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Shoes - Removal > Page 5474 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Brake Shoes - Installation REAR SHOES 1. Clean and inspect individual brake components. 2. Lubricate where the brake shoe contacts the support plate with high temperature grease or Lubriplate. 3. Lubricate adjuster screw socket, nut, button and screw thread surfaces with grease or Lubriplate. 4. Install parking brake lever (2) to the rear shoe (7) and install the hold down clip (6). 5. Install the adjuster strut (5) onto the shoes and park brake lever (2). 6. Install the front shoe (8) on support plate (9), and install the hold down clip (6). 7. Install the adjuster spring and lever (4) in the slot in the adjuster strut (7). 8. Install the lower return spring (1) to the shoes (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Shoes - Removal > Page 5475 9. Verify adjuster operation. Pull both shoes outward to move the adjuster lever (4) to rotate the star wheel. Be sure adjuster lever properly engages star wheel teeth. 10. Adjust brake shoes to drum with brake gauge. 11. Install wheel and tire assembly. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove brake drum. 3. Remove brake shoe return spring (3) and move shoes out of engagement with cylinder (1). 4. Disconnect wheel cylinder brake line (4). 5. Remove cylinder (2) attaching bolts (3) and remove cylinder from support plate (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5480 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install cylinder (2) and the mounting bolts (3) and tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 2. Connect brake line (4) to cylinder (2). 3. Install brake shoe return spring (3). 4. Install brake drum. 5. Install wheel and tire assembly. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 6. Bleed base brake system. See: Brake Bleeding. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Master Cylinder Bleeding MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING A new master cylinder should be bled before installation on the vehicle. Required bleeding tools include bleed tubes and a wood dowel to stroke the pistons. Bleed tubes can be fabricated from brake line. 1. Mount master cylinder in vise. 2. Attach bleed tubes to cylinder outlet ports (1). Then position each tube end into reservoir (2). 3. Fill reservoir with fresh brake fluid. 4. Press cylinder pistons inward with wood dowel. Then release pistons and allow them to return under spring pressure. Continue bleeding operations until air bubbles are no longer visible in fluid. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 5486 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair ABS Brake Bleeding ABS BRAKE BLEEDING ABS system bleeding requires conventional bleeding methods plus use of the scan tool. The procedure involves performing a base brake bleeding, followed by use of the scan tool to cycle and bleed the HCU pump and solenoids. A second base brake bleeding procedure is then required to remove any air remaining in the system. 1. Perform base brake bleeding,. See: Base Brakes - Manual Bleeding See: Base Brakes - Pressure Bleeding 2. Connect scan tool to the Data Link Connector. 3. Select ANTILOCK BRAKES, followed by MISCELLANEOUS, then ABS BRAKES. Follow the instructions displayed. When scan tool displays TEST COMPLETE, disconnect scan tool and proceed. 4. Perform base brake bleeding a second time,. See: Base Brakes - Manual Bleeding See: Base Brakes - Pressure Bleeding 5. Top off master cylinder fluid level and verify proper brake operation before moving vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 5487 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Base Brakes - Manual Bleeding MANUAL BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. 1. Remove reservoir filler caps and fill reservoir. 2. If calipers were overhauled, open all caliper bleed screws. Then close each bleed screw as fluid starts to drip from it. Top off master cylinder reservoir once more before proceeding. 3. Attach one end of bleed hose (1) to bleed screw and insert opposite end in glass container (2) partially filled with brake fluid. Be sure end of bleed hose is immersed in fluid. NOTE: Bleed procedure should be in this order (1) Right rear (2) Left rear (3) Right front (4) Left front. 4. Open up bleeder, then have a helper press down the brake pedal. Once the pedal is down close the bleeder. Repeat bleeding until fluid stream is clear and free of bubbles. Then move to the next wheel. 5. Before moving the vehicle verify the pedal is firm and not mushy. 6. Top off the brake fluid and install the reservoir cap. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Master Cylinder Bleeding > Page 5488 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Base Brakes - Pressure Bleeding PRESSURE BLEEDING Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at all times. Follow the manufacturers instructions carefully when using pressure equipment. Do not exceed the tank manufacturers pressure recommendations. Generally, a tank pressure of 15-20 psi is sufficient for bleeding. Fill the bleeder tank with recommended fluid and purge air from the tank lines before bleeding. Do not pressure bleed without a proper master cylinder adapter. The wrong adapter can lead to leakage, or drawing air back into the system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only Non-Petroleum based grease. The calipers are a dual piston type. The calipers are free to slide laterally, this allows continuous compensation for lining wear. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5493 Brake Caliper: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the brakes are applied fluid pressure is exerted against the caliper piston (2). The fluid pressure is exerted equally and in all directions. This means pressure exerted against the caliper piston and within the caliper bore will be equal. Fluid pressure applied to the piston is transmitted directly to the inboard brake pad (5). This forces the pad lining against the inner surface of the disc brake rotor. At the same time, fluid pressure within the piston bore forces the caliper to slide inward on the mounting bolts. This action brings the outboard brake pad lining (6) into contact with the outer surface of the disc brake rotor. In summary, fluid pressure acting simultaneously on both piston and caliper, produces a strong clamping action. When sufficient force is applied, friction will attempt to stop the rotors from turning and bring the vehicle to a stop. Application and release of the brake pedal generates only a very slight movement of the caliper and piston. Upon release of the pedal, the caliper and piston return to a rest position. The brake pads do not retract an appreciable distance from the rotor. In fact, clearance is usually at, or close to zero. The reasons for this are to keep road debris from getting between the rotor and lining and in wiping the rotor surface clear each revolution. The caliper piston seal (4) controls the amount of piston (2) extension needed to compensate for normal lining wear. During brake application, the seal is deflected outward by fluid pressure and piston movement(6). When the brakes (and fluid pressure) are released, the seal relaxes and retracts the piston (3). The amount of piston retraction is determined by the amount of seal deflection. Generally the amount is just enough to maintain contact between the piston and inboard brake pad. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Caliper: Procedures INSPECTION The piston is made from a steel material and should be smooth and clean. The piston must be replaced if cracked or scored. Do not attempt to restore a scored piston surface by sanding or polishing. CAUTION: If the caliper piston is replaced, install the same type of piston in the caliper. Never interchange phenolic resin and steel caliper pistons. The pistons, seals, seal grooves, caliper bore and piston tolerances are different. The bore can be lightly polished with a brake hone (3) to remove very minor surface imperfections. The caliper should be replaced if the bore is severely corroded, rusted, scored, or if polishing would increase bore diameter more than 0.025 mm (0.001 inch). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5496 Brake Caliper: Removal and Replacement Disc Brake Caliper - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose with result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Compress the disc brake caliper (6). 4. Remove the banjo bolt (4) and discard the copper washers. 5. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5497 6. Remove the disc brake caliper (1) from the caliper adapter (2). 7. Remove the caliper slide pins from the adapter. Disc Brake Caliper - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only Non-Petroleum based grease. NOTE: Clean slide pin bores thoroughly to remove any old grease. NOTE: Use grease packets included with kit or Dow Corning-807(R) grease. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5498 1. Thoroughly coat the new slide pins (3) on all working surfaces. 2. Install the boot (2) onto the slide pin (3) and then insert into the adapter (1). 3. Push the pin (3) all the way into the adapter (1) and carefully expel the trapped air by gently pushing on the boot (2) near the slide pin head (3). NOTE: Install a new copper washers on the banjo bolt when installing 4. Install the disc brake caliper (1) to the brake caliper adapter (2). 5. Install the banjo bolt (4) with new copper washers to the caliper (6). Tighten to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.) 6. Install the caliper slide pin bolts (2). Tighten to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) 7. Bleed the base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding. 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly, See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 9. Lower the vehicle. Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5499 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the caliper slide pin bolts (4)See: Disc Brake Caliper - Removal. 4. Remove the disc brake caliper (1) from the adapter (2). CAUTION: Never allow the disc brake caliper to hang from the brake hose. Damage to the brake hose will result. Provide a suitable support to hang the caliper securely. 5. Remove the inboard (4) and outboard (2) brake pads. See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Pads - Removal. 6. Remove the caliper adapter mounting bolts (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5500 7. Remove the caliper slide pins from the adapter. Disc Brake Caliper Adapter - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Petroleum based grease should not be used on any of the rubber components of the caliper, Use only a Non-Petroleum based grease, such as Dow Corning-807(R) grease. NOTE: Clean slide pin bores thoroughly to remove any old grease. NOTE: Use grease packets included with kit or Dow Corning-807(R) grease. 1. Thoroughly coat the new slide pins (3) on all working surfaces. 2. Install the boot (2) onto the slide pin (3) and then insert into the adapter (1). 3. Push the pin (3) all the way into the adapter (1) and carefully expel the trapped air by gently pushing on the boot (2) near the slide pin head (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5501 4. Install the caliper adapter mounting bolts (5). Tighten the mounting bolts to 176 Nm (130 ft.lbs). 5. Install the inboard (4) and outboard (2) pads. See: Disc Brake System/Brake Pad/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Pads Installation. 6. Install the caliper (2) and the caliper slide pin bolts (4) See: Disc Brake Caliper - Installation. 7. Install the tire and wheel assembly. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5502 Brake Caliper: Overhaul Disc Brake Caliper - Disassembly DISASSEMBLY 1. Drain the brake fluid from caliper. 2. C-clamp (2) a block of wood (1) over one piston. 3. Take another piece of wood and pad it with one-inch thickness of shop towels (2). Place this piece in the outboard shoe side of the caliper in front of the other piston. This will cushion and protect caliper piston during removal. 4. To remove the caliper piston direct short bursts of low pressure air with a blow gun through the caliper brake hose port. Use only enough air pressure to ease the piston out. CAUTION: Do not blow the piston out of the bore with sustained air pressure. This could result in a cracked piston. WARNING: Never attempt to catch the piston as it leaves the bore. This could result in personal injury. 5. Remove the C-clamp and block of wood from the caliper and clamp it over the dust boot of the first piston removed. This will seal the empty piston bore. 6. Move the padded piece of wood in front of the other piston. 7. Remove the second piston using the same procedure with short bursts of low pressure air. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5503 8. Remove piston dust boots (2) by hand. CAUTION: Do not scratch piston bore while removing the seals. 9. Remove the lip seal from the groove (4) with a pick tool (3). 10. Remove piston seals (2) from caliper (1) by hand. Disc Brake Caliper - Assembly ASSEMBLY Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5504 CAUTION: Dirt, oil, and solvents can damage caliper seals. Insure assembly area is clean and dry. 1. Lubricate caliper pistons, piston seals and piston bores with clean, fresh brake fluid. NOTE: Verify seal is fully seated and not twisted. 2. Install new piston seals (2) into caliper bores (1). 3. Leave boot (1) dry and slip onto end of piston (2). NOTE: The dust boot lip must be inserted before the piston 4. Slightly pull out lip portion of piston boot (3) so it protrudes past the bottom of the piston (2) and work lip into outermost groove on caliper housing (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5505 5. Carefully press the lip (3) into the groove with a suitable tool (4) Avoid using sharp-edged tools This will ensure that the lip is nested into the groove all around before pushing the piston into the bore. 6. Press the piston fully into the bore using special tool C3716-A seal installer (3) with C-4171 Handle (1). 7. Once the piston is pressed into the bottom of the bore, Check to see that the dust boot bellows are not inflated with air. If needed, push in between the dust boot and piston to expel any trapped air. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Brake Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 5510 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5511 Brake Fluid: Specifications Brake Fluid Type Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5512 Brake Fluid: Description and Operation BRAKE FLUID The brake fluid used in this vehicle must conform to DOT 3 specifications and SAE J1703 standards. No other type of brake fluid is recommended or approved for usage in the vehicle brake system. Use only Mopar brake fluid or an equivalent from a tightly sealed container. CAUTION: Never use reclaimed brake fluid or fluid from a container which has been left open. An open container of brake fluid will absorb moisture from the air and contaminate the fluid. CAUTION: Never use any type of a petroleum-based fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Use of such type fluids will result in seal damage of the vehicle brake hydraulic system causing a failure of the vehicle brake system. Petroleum based fluids would be items such as engine oil, transmission fluid, power steering fluid, etc. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5513 Brake Fluid: Testing and Inspection BRAKE FLUID CONTAMINATION Indications of fluid contamination are swollen or deteriorated rubber parts. Swollen rubber parts indicate the presence of petroleum in the brake fluid. To test for contamination, put a small amount of drained brake fluid in clear glass jar. If fluid separates into layers, there is mineral oil or other fluid contamination of the brake fluid. If brake fluid is contaminated, drain and thoroughly flush system. Replace master cylinder, proportioning valve, caliper seals, wheel cylinder seals, Antilock Brakes hydraulic unit and all hydraulic fluid hoses. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5514 Brake Fluid: Service and Repair BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Always clean the master cylinder reservoir (2) and cap before checking fluid level. If not cleaned, dirt could enter the fluid. The fluid fill level is indicated on the side of the master cylinder reservoir (2). The correct fluid level is to the MAX indicator on the side of the reservoir. If necessary, add fluid to the proper level. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 261 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 2 Z420 20BK/OR GROUND Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5518 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5519 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 261 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 2 Z420 20BK/OR GROUND Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5520 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Hose/Line: Procedures ISO FLARING A preformed metal brake tube is recommended and preferred for all repairs. However, double-wall steel tube can be used for emergency repair when factory replacement parts are not readily available. To make a ISO flare use an ISO flaring tool kit. 1. Cut off damaged tube with Tubing Cutter. 2. Remove any burrs from the inside of the tube. 3. Install tube nut on the tube. 4. Position the tube in the flaring tool flush with the top of the tool bar (6). Then tighten the tool bar on the tube. 5. Install the correct size adaptor (1) on the flaring tool yoke screw. 6. Lubricate the adaptor (2). 7. Align the adaptor and yoke screw over the tube. 8. Turn the yoke screw in until the adaptor is squarely seated on the tool bar. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5525 Brake Hose/Line: Removal and Replacement Rear Brake Lines - Brake Hose At Axle To Wheel Cylinders REAR BRAKE LINES - BRAKE HOSE AT AXLE TO WHEEL CYLINDERS 1. Raise and support the vehicle. NOTE: If brake line (3) is being replaced 2. Remove the brake line (3) from the brake hose (2) at the axle. 3. Remove the brake line from the clip on the spring bracket. 4. Remove the other end of the line (1) at the wheel cylinder (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5526 NOTE: If brake line (1) is being replaced 5. Remove the brake line (1) from the brake hose (2) at the axle. 6. Remove the other end of the line (1) at the wheel cylinder (2). 7. Remove the line being replaced. Rear Brake Hose - Axle To Frame REAR BRAKE HOSE - AXLE TO FRAME NOTE: The axle should be supported in the normal curb position for rear brake hose change. 1. Raise and support the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5527 2. Remove the brake lines (1&3) going into the brake hose (2). 3. Remove the brake line (2) from the brake hose (3). 4. Remove the mounting clip (1) for the brake hose (3) at the frame. 5. Remove the hose (3). Front Caliper Hose FRONT CALIPER HOSE 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 3. Remove the brake line (1) from the brake hose (6) at the frame. 4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (3) from the frame. 5. Remove the brake line (1) from the junction block (2) If necessary. 6. Remove the brake hose banjo bolt (4) at the caliper Discard the copper washers (5). 7. Remove the hose (6). Rear Brake Lines - Brake Hose At Axle To Wheel Cylinders REAR BRAKE LINES - BRAKE HOSE AT AXLE TO WHEEL CYLINDERS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5528 1. Install the line into the bend over tab at axle and then bend over the tab. 2. Install the brake line to the clip on the spring hanger. NOTE: If brake line (3) was replaced 3. Install the brake line (3) at the brake hose (2) located at the axle. 4. Install the brake line (1) at the wheel cylinder (2). NOTE: If brake line (1) was replaced 5. Install the line into the bend over tab at axle and then bend over the tab. 6. Install the brake line to the clip on the spring hanger. 7. Install the brake line (1) at the brake hose (2) located at the axle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5529 8. Install the brake line (1) at the wheel cylinder (2). 9. Lower the vehicle and remove the support. 10. Bleed the brake system See: Brake Bleeding. Rear Brake Hose - Axle To Frame REAR BRAKE HOSE - AXLE TO FRAME 1. Install the brake hose (3) to the bracket and then install the clip (1). 2. Tighten the brake line (2) into the brake hose. Tighten to 16 Nm (21 ft.lbs.). 3. Install the brake line (2) to the axle stud. 4. Install the brake lines (1&3) into the brake hose (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5530 5. Lower the vehicle and remove the support. 6. Bleed the brake system See: Brake Bleeding. Front Caliper Hose FRONT CALIPER HOSE 1. Install the brake hose (6) in position. 2. Install the mounting bracket bolt (3) at the frame, tighten to 14 Nm (125 in.lbs). 3. Install the brake line (1) into the junction block (2) and tighten to 14 Nm (125 in.lbs) If removed. 4. Install the brake line (1) into the brake hose (6) and tighten to 14 Nm (125 in.lbs). 5. Install the brake hose banjo bolt (4) Use new copper washers (5) at the caliper and tighten to 28 Nm (250 in.lbs). 6. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 7. Bleed the brake system See: Brake Bleeding. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The HCU consists of a valve body, pump motor, low pressure accumulators, inlet valves, outlet valves and noise attenuators. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5535 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Accumulators in the valve body store extra fluid released to the system for ABS mode operation. The pump provides the fluid volume needed and is operated by a DC type motor. The motor is controlled by the ABM. The valves modulate brake pressure during antilock braking and are controlled by the ABM. The HCU provides three channel ABS or four channel With Traction Control pressure control to the front and rear brakes. One channel controls the rear wheel brakes in tandem ABS. The two remaining channels control the front wheel brakes individually. During antilock braking, the solenoid valves are opened and closed as needed. During normal braking, the HCU solenoid valves and pump are not activated. The master cylinder and power booster operate the same as a vehicle without an ABS brake system. NOTE: The three modes mentioned below do occur but not necessarily in the order listed everytime. During antilock braking, solenoid valve pressure modulation occurs in three stages, pressure increase, pressure hold, and pressure decrease. The valves are all contained in the valve body portion of the HCU. PRESSURE DECREASE The outlet valve is opened and the inlet valve is closed during the pressure decrease cycle. A pressure decrease cycle is initiated when speed sensor signals indicate high wheel slip at one or more wheels. At this point, the ABM closes the inlet then opens the outlet valve, which also opens the return circuit to the accumulators. Fluid pressure is allowed to bleed off (decrease) as needed to prevent wheel lock. Once the period of high wheel slip has ended, the ABM closes the outlet valve and begins a pressure increase or hold cycle as needed. PRESSURE HOLD Both solenoid valves are closed in the pressure hold cycle but only the inlet valve is energized. Fluid apply pressure in the control channel is maintained at a constant rate. The ABM maintains the hold cycle until sensor inputs indicate a pressure change is necessary. PRESSURE INCREASE The inlet valve is open and the outlet valve is closed during the pressure increase cycle. The pressure increase cycle is used to reapply thew brakes. This cycle controls re-application of fluid apply pressure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) - Installation Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the ABM is being replaced with a new ABM it must be reprogrammed with the use of a scantool. 1. Reinstall the HCU assembly (5) to the vehicle. 2. Install HCU assembly (5) on the battery tray (2) and Tighten the nuts to 15 Nm (11 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake lines (3) to the HCU (1) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 4. Install the electrical harness connector (4) to the ABM (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) - Installation > Page 5538 5. Install the battery cables to the battery. 6. Bleed ABS brake system See: Brake Bleeding. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) - Installation > Page 5539 Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control unit (HCU) Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cables from the battery. 2. Disconnect the brake lines (3) to the HCU (1). 3. Disconnect the electrical harness connector (4). 4. Remove HCU assembly (5) mounting bolts (1&6). 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Lift the HCU assembly (5) off the battery tray (2). 7. Remove the HCU assembly (5) from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic System Junction Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hydraulic System Junction Block: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the brake lines (1) going into the side of the junction block (2). 2. Remove the brake lines from the top of the junction block (4). 3. Remove the junction block (4) mounting bolt and remove the junction block. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic System Junction Block > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5544 Hydraulic System Junction Block: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the junction block (4) and install the mounting bolt. Tighten the mounting bolt to 14 Nm (125 in. lbs.). 2. Install the brake lines into the top of the junction block (4) and tighten to 14 Nm (125 in. lbs.). 3. Install the brake lines (1) into the side of the junction block (2) and tighten to 14 Nm (125 in. lbs.). 4. Bleed the base brake system, See: Brake Bleeding. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Master Cylinder: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A two-piece master cylinder is used on all models. The cylinder body containing the primary and secondary pistons is made of aluminum. The removable fluid reservoir is made of nylon reinforced with glass fiber. The reservoir stores reserve brake fluid for the hydraulic brake circuits and has a switch for indicating low fluid levels. The reservoir is the only serviceable component. The fluid compartments of the nylon reservoir are interconnected to permit fluid level equalization. However, the equalization feature does not affect circuit separation in the event of a front or rear brake malfunction. The reservoir compartments will retain enough fluid to operate the functioning hydraulic circuit. Care must be exercised when removing/installing the master cylinder connecting lines. The threads in the cylinder fluid ports can be damaged if care is not exercised. Start all brake line fittings by hand to avoid cross threading. The cylinder reservoir can be replaced when necessary. However, the aluminum body section of the master cylinder is not a repairable component. NOTE: If diagnosis indicates that an internal malfunction has occurred, the aluminum body section must be replaced as an assembly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5549 Brake Master Cylinder: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The master cylinder bore contains a primary and secondary piston. The primary piston supplies hydraulic pressure to the front brakes. The secondary piston supplies hydraulic pressure to the rear brakes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5550 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection MASTER CYLINDER/POWER BOOSTER 1. Start engine and check booster vacuum hose connections. A hissing noise indicates vacuum leak. Correct any vacuum leak before proceeding. 2. Stop engine and shift transmission into Neutral. 3. Pump brake pedal until all vacuum reserve in booster is depleted. 4. Press and hold brake pedal under light foot pressure. The pedal should hold firm, if the pedal falls away master cylinder is faulty (internal leakage). 5. Start engine and note pedal action. It should fall away slightly under light foot pressure then hold firm. If no pedal action is discernible, power booster, vacuum supply, or vacuum check valve is faulty. Proceed to the POWER BOOSTER VACUUM TEST. 6. If the POWER BOOSTER VACUUM TEST passes, rebuild booster vacuum reserve as follows: Release brake pedal. Increase engine speed to 1500 rpm, close the throttle and immediately turn off ignition to stop engine. 7. Wait a minimum of 90 seconds and try brake action again. Booster should provide two or more vacuum assisted pedal applications. If vacuum assist is not provided, booster is faulty. POWER BOOSTER VACUUM TEST 1. Connect vacuum gauge (6) to booster check valve (4) with short length of hose (3) and T-fitting (2). 2. Start and run engine at curb idle speed for one minute. 3. Observe the vacuum supply. If vacuum supply is not adequate, repair vacuum supply. 4. Clamp (1) hose (7) shut between intake vacuum source (5) and check valve (4). 5. Stop engine and observe vacuum gauge (6). 6. If vacuum drops more than one inch HG (33 millibars) within 15 seconds, booster diaphragm or check valve is faulty. POWER BOOSTER CHECK VALVE TEST 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from check valve (1). 2. Remove check valve (1) and valve seal (2) from booster (3). 3. Use a hand operated vacuum pump for test. 4. Apply 15-20 inches vacuum at large end of check valve. 5. Plug off the small end to prevent vacuum leakage. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5551 6. Vacuum should hold steady. If gauge on pump indicates vacuum loss, check valve is faulty and should be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Master Cylinder: Procedures MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING A new master cylinder should be bled before installation on the vehicle. Required bleeding tools include bleed tubes and a wood dowel to stroke the pistons. Bleed tubes can be fabricated from brake line. 1. Mount master cylinder in vise. 2. Attach bleed tubes to cylinder outlet ports (1). Then position each tube end into reservoir (2). 3. Fill reservoir with fresh brake fluid. 4. Press cylinder pistons inward with wood dowel. Then release pistons and allow them to return under spring pressure. Continue bleeding operations until air bubbles are no longer visible in fluid. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5554 Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL 1. Install the prop rod on the brake pedal to keep pressure on the brake system. 2. Remove the reservoir cap and siphon fluid into a drain container. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the fluid level switch in the reservoir (2). 4. Remove the two reservoir mounting screws. 5. Remove the reservoir (2) from the master cylinder. 6. Remove old seals from the cylinder body. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not use any type of tool to install the seals. Tools may cut, or tear the seals creating a leak problem after installation. Install the seals using finger pressure only. 1. Lubricate the new seals with clean brake fluid and Install new seals in cylinder body. Use finger pressure to install and seat seals. 2. Start the reservoir (2) in the seals. Then rock the reservoir back and forth while pressing downward to seat it into the seals. 3. Install the two mounting screws for the reservoir to the master cylinder. 4. Reconnect the electrical connector to the fluid reservoir level switch. 5. Remove the prop rod from the vehicle. 6. Fill and bleed base brake system,See: Brake Bleeding. Master Cylinder - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5555 1. Depress the brake pedal five times to deplete any vacuum that may remain in the booster unit. 2. Siphon and drain the fluid from the reservoir. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector for the low fluid level. NOTE: Place a towel or rag under the master cylinder outlet port area to protect the vehicle from brake fluid damage. 4. Remove the brake lines (3) from the master cylinder (4). 5. Remove the four mounting nuts (5) from the master cylinder (4). 6. Remove the master cylinder (4). NOTE: Gently ease the master cylinder & reservoir assembly away from the booster. During removal the master cylinder should be kept as perpendicular to the front of the booster as possible to avoid excess interference with the booster output rod and in order not to dislodge the output rod from its seat inside the booster. Master Cylinder - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If master cylinder is replaced bleed cylinder before installation. NOTE: Make sure the output rod of the brake booster is in position and retained by a output rod retaining ring, by looking into the boosters master cylinder mounting hole. This position will enable the output rod to enter inside of the master cylinder plunger sleeve during installation. Proper position is obtained when the output rod is centered perpendicular to the master cylinder mounting hole. NOTE: Prior to installing the master cylinder assembly check that there is a vacuum seal present at the shoulder of the master cylinder flange and its neck. A square seal must be present to ensure vacuum integrity with the booster. 1. Gently install the master cylinder (4) on the booster mounting studs (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5556 NOTE: Take precautions to locate the master cylinder plunger over the booster output rod, before installing the master cylinder. If correctly fitted the master cylinder should slide easily onto the booster output rod before the mounting studs are engaged in the flange holes of the master cylinder. 2. Install new mounting nuts (5) and tighten to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.) 3. Install the brake lines (3) and tighten to 19 Nm (170 in. lbs.). 4. Reconnect the electrical connector for the low fluid level switch. 5. Fill and bleed the base brake system. See: Brake Bleeding. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove brake drum. 3. Remove brake shoe return spring (3) and move shoes out of engagement with cylinder (1). 4. Disconnect wheel cylinder brake line (4). 5. Remove cylinder (2) attaching bolts (3) and remove cylinder from support plate (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5561 Wheel Cylinder: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install cylinder (2) and the mounting bolts (3) and tighten to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 2. Connect brake line (4) to cylinder (2). 3. Install brake shoe return spring (3). 4. Install brake drum. 5. Install wheel and tire assembly. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 6. Bleed base brake system. See: Brake Bleeding. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Adjustments > Parking Brake Cable - Adjustments Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments Parking Brake Cable - Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS - PARK BRAKE CABLE TENSIONER NOTE: Tensioner adjustment is only necessary when the tensioner, or a cable has been replaced or disconnected for service. When adjustment is necessary, perform adjustment only as described in the following procedure. This is necessary to avoid faulty park brake operation. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Back off cable tensioner adjusting nut at equalizer to create slack in cables. 3. Remove rear wheel/tire assemblies. Then remove brake drums. 4. Verify brakes are in good condition and operating properly. 5. Verify park brake cables operate freely and are not binding, or seized. 6. Check rear brake shoe adjustment with standard brake gauge. 7. Install drums and verify that drums rotate freely without drag. 8. Reinstall wheel/tire assemblies after brake shoe adjustment is complete. 9. Lower vehicle enough for access to park brake foot pedal. Then fully apply park brakes. NOTE: Leave park brakes applied until adjustment is complete. 10. Raise vehicle again. 11. Mark tensioner rod 6.35 mm (1/4 in.)(3) from edge of tensioner bracket. 12. Tighten adjusting nut (2) at equalizer until mark on tensioner rod moves into alignment with tensioner bracket. CAUTION: Do not loosen, or tighten the tensioner adjusting nut for any reason after completing adjustment. 13. Lower vehicle until rear wheels are 15-20 cm (6-8 in.) off shop floor. 14. Release park brake foot pedal and verify that rear wheels rotate freely without drag. Then lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Adjustments > Parking Brake Cable - Adjustments > Page 5567 Parking Brake Cable: Adjustments Cable Tensioner - Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS - PARK BRAKE CABLE TENSIONER NOTE: Tensioner adjustment is only necessary when the tensioner, or a cable has been replaced or disconnected for service. When adjustment is necessary, perform adjustment only as described in the following procedure. This is necessary to avoid faulty park brake operation. 1. Raise vehicle. 2. Back off cable tensioner adjusting nut (2) at equalizer to create slack in cables. 3. Remove rear wheel/tire assemblies. Then remove brake drums. 4. Verify brakes are in good condition and operating properly. 5. Verify park brake cables operate freely and are not binding, or seized. 6. Check rear brake shoe adjustment with standard brake gauge. 7. Install drums and verify that drums rotate freely without drag. 8. Reinstall wheel/tire assemblies after brake shoe adjustment is complete. 9. Lower vehicle enough for access to park brake foot pedal. Then fully apply park brakes. NOTE: Leave park brakes applied until adjustment is complete. 10. Raise vehicle again. 11. Mark tensioner rod 6.35 mm (1/4 in.) (3) from edge of tensioner bracket. 12. Tighten adjusting nut (2) at equalizer until mark on tensioner rod moves into alignment with tensioner bracket. CAUTION: Do not loosen, or tighten the tensioner adjusting nut for any reason after completing adjustment. 13. Lower vehicle until rear wheels are 15-20 cm (6-8 in.) off shop floor. 14. Release park brake foot pedal and verify that rear wheels rotate freely without drag. Then lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Removal Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable - Removal Front Parking Brake Cable FRONT PARKING BRAKE CABLE 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Lockout the parking brake cable (2). 3. Loosen adjusting nut to create slack in front cable (2). 4. Remove the front cable from the cable adjuster. 5. Compress cable end fitting at underbody bracket (5) and remove the cable (1) from the bracket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Removal > Page 5570 6. Pull up on the cable (2) and remove the cable with the body grommet (1). 7. Lower vehicle. 8. Push ball end of cable out (4) of pedal clevis with small screwdriver. 9. Compress cable end fitting (4) at the pedal bracket (5) and remove the cable (4). 10. Remove the left cowl trim and sill plate. 11. Pull up the carpet and remove the cable from the body clip. Rear Park Brake Cable REAR PARK BRAKE CABLE 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Lockout the parking brake cable (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Removal > Page 5571 3. Loosen cable adjuster nut (2). 4. Remove the rear park brake cable from the intermediate park brake cable. 5. Compress tabs (2) on cable end fitting on the rear park brake cable to the frame mount bracket. Then pull the cable through the bracket. 6. Disengage the park brake cable (1) from the lever (3). 7. Compress cable tabs on each cable end fitting at the brake cable support plate (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Removal > Page 5572 8. Remove the cables(4) from the brake cable supports (2&3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Removal > Page 5573 Parking Brake Cable: Service and Repair Parking Brake Cable - Installation Front Parking Brake Cable FRONT PARKING BRAKE CABLE 1. From inside the vehicle, insert the cable end fitting (4) into the hole in the pedal assembly (5). 2. Seat the cable retainer in the pedal assembly (4). 3. Engage the cable ball end in clevis on the pedal assembly. 4. Route the cable (2) through the floorpan and install the body grommet (1). 5. Place the carpet down and install the left cowl trim and sill plate. 6. Raise and support the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Removal > Page 5574 7. Route the cable (5) through the underbody bracket and seat the cable end fitting in the bracket. 8. Connect the cable (1) to the cable adjuster (4). 9. Perform the park brake adjustment procedure, See: Adjustments/Parking Brake Cable - Adjustments. 10. Lower the vehicle. Rear Park Brake Cable REAR PARK BRAKE CABLE 1. Push each cable end through the brake cable support plate hole (2) until the cable end fitting tabs lock into place. NOTE: Pull on the cable to ensure it is locked into place. 2. Install the rear cables (1) into the park brake lever behind the rear of the brake assembly (3). 3. Install the hold down brackets for the park brake cable (2&3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Parking Brake Cable - Removal > Page 5575 4. Install the cable (3) to the intermediate cable connector (4). 5. Release and remove the lock out device. 6. Perform the park brake adjustment procedure, See: Adjustments/Parking Brake Cable Adjustments. 7. Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Pedal: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Release the parking brake. 2. Raise the vehicle. 3. Loosen the cable tensioner nut at the equalizer (2) to create slack in the front cable. 4. Lower the vehicle. 5. Disconnect the brake lamp wire from the switch (1) on the pedal assembly (5). 6. Roll the carpet back, loosen the front cable grommet (1) from the floor pan and the cable retainer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5580 7. Disengage the release rod (6) from the arm on the pedal assembly (5) 8. Remove the bolt (7) & nuts (3) from the pedal assembly (5) and remove the assembly. 9. Disconnect the park brake cable (4) from the pedal assembly (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5581 Parking Brake Pedal: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the front cable (4) to the arm on the pedal assembly (5). 2. Position the replacement pedal assembly (5) on the dash and cowl. 3. Install the bolt (7)& nuts (3) and tighten to 14 Nm (125 in. lbs.). 4. Tighten the front cable grommet (1) to the floor pan and the cable retainer, roll the carpet back. 5. Connect the wires (1) to the brake lamp switch. 6. Install the park brake release rod (6). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Pedal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5582 7. Raise the vehicle. 8. Adjust the parking brake cable tensioner (2) See: Parking Brake Cable/Adjustments/Parking Brake Cable - Adjustments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 308 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 33 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5586 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5587 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 308 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 33 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5588 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5591 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5592 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. Refer to appropriate testing. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5595 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All models use a tandem diaphragm, power brake booster. NOTE: The power brake booster is not a repairable component. The booster must be replaced as an assembly if diagnosis indicates a malfunction has occurred. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5601 Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The booster unit consists of a single housing divided into two by a tandem diaphragm. The outer edge of the diaphragm is secured to the housing. A spacer block is located in between the cowl and the booster housing. The booster push rod, connects the booster to the brake pedal and master cylinder, is attached to the center of the diaphragm. A check valve is used in the booster outlet connected to the engine intake manifold. Power assist is generated by utilizing a combination of vacuum and atmospheric pressure to boost brake assist. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Brake Booster - Removal Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Power Brake Booster - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove master cylinder (4). See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Removal. 2. Disconnect vacuum line (6) at booster. 3. Remove clip (1) securing booster push rod (3) to brake pedal See: Brake Pedal Assy/Service and Repair/Removal. 4. Remove nuts (4) from booster mounting studs. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Brake Booster - Removal > Page 5604 5. Remove booster (3), spacer and gaskets from front cowl panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Brake Booster - Removal > Page 5605 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Power Brake Booster - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position spacer and gaskets on booster studs. 2. Guide booster studs (4) into cowl panel holes and seat booster (3) on panel. 3. Install and tighten booster attaching nuts (4) to 28 Nm (250 in. lbs.). 4. Install booster push rod (3) on brake pedal and install clip (1). See: Brake Pedal Assy/Service and Repair/Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Brake Booster - Removal > Page 5606 5. Connect vacuum hose to check valve (6). 6. Install master cylinder (4). See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Master Cylinder Installation. 7. Fill and bleed brake system. See: Brake Bleeding. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brakes > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Trailer Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 155 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 3 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z911 14BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brakes > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5611 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brakes > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5612 Trailer Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 155 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 3 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z911 14BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brakes > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5613 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 154 Component : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 46 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 4-5-6-- 7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 13 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 14 - 15 - 16 Z923 18BK GROUND 17 - 18 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 27 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) 32 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5618 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - 41 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 42 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 43 - 44 - 45 Z107 12BK/DG GROUND 46 - - Component Location - 6 Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (RWAL) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5619 Pin Circuit Description 1 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 2 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 3 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 5 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 6 Z107 12BK/DG GROUND 7 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 8 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 9-10 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5620 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5621 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 154 Component : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : # of pins : 46 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 3 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 4-5-6-- 7-8-9-10 - 11 - 12 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 13 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 14 - 15 - 16 Z923 18BK GROUND 17 - 18 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 27 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) 32 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5622 36 - 37 - 38 - 39 - 40 - 41 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 42 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 43 - 44 - 45 Z107 12BK/DG GROUND 46 - - Component Location - 6 Connector: Name : MODULE-ANTI-LOCK BRAKES Color : BLACK # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (RWAL) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5623 Pin Circuit Description 1 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 2 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS (+) 3 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS (-) 4 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 5 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY 6 Z107 12BK/DG GROUND 7 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 8 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 9-10 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - - Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5624 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Antilock Brake Module (ABM) is a microprocessor which handles testing, monitoring and controlling the ABS brake system operation. The ABM is mounted on the top of the hydraulic control unit (HCU). The ABM operates the ABS system and is separate from other vehicle electrical circuits. ABM voltage source is through CKT A111 (fused B+). NOTE: If the ABM needs to be replaced, the rear axle type and tire revolutions per mile must be programed into the new ABM. For axle type refer to Differential See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications. For tire revolutions per mile,See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Specifications. To program the ABM refer to the Appropriate Diagnostic Information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5627 Electronic Brake Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION SYSTEM SELF-TEST When the ignition switch is turned-on the microprocessor is tested. If an error occurs during the test, a DTC will be set into the memory. However it is possible the DTC will not be stored in memory if the error has occurred in the module were the DTC's are stored. The ABM contains a self check program that illuminates the ABS warning light when a system fault is detected. Faults are stored in memory and are accessible with the scan tool. ABS faults remain in memory until cleared, or until after the vehicle is started approximately 50 times. Stored faults are not erased if the battery is disconnected. ABM INPUTS The ABM continuously monitors the speed of the vehicle by monitoring signals generated by the wheel speed sensors. The ABM determines a wheel locking tendency when it recognizes the axle is decelerating too rapidly. The ABM monitors the following inputs to determine when a wheel locking tendency may exists: - Wheel Speed Sensors - Brake Lamp Switch - Brake Fluid Level Sensor - G-Sensor - 4WD Switch (If equipped) ABM OUTPUTS The ABM requests the following outputs for antilock braking and brake warning information from the CCN via CAN C Bus: - ABS Warning Lamp - Brake Warning Lamp Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If the ABM needs to be replaced, the rear axle type and tire revolutions per mile must be programed into the new ABM. For axle type refer to Differential See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications. For tire revolutions per mile,See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Specifications. To program the ABM refer to the Appropriate Diagnostic Information. 1. Disconnect the pump electrical connector (3) from the HCU (2). 2. Remove the module mounting screws (1). 3. Remove the module (1) from the HCU (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5630 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: If the ABM needs to be replaced, the rear axle type and tire revolutions per mile must be programed into the new ABM. For axle type refer to Differential See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Specifications/Mechanical Specifications. For tire revolutions per mile See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Specifications. To program the ABM refer to the Appropriate Diagnostic Information. 1. Position the module (1) on the HCU (2). 2. Install the mounting screws (1) and tighten to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs). 3. Install the pump electrical connector (3) to the module (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Trailer Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 155 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 3 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z911 14BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5634 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5635 Trailer Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 155 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 3 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z911 14BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5636 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 261 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 2 Z420 20BK/OR GROUND Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5641 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5642 Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 261 Component : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Connector: Name : SENSOR-BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 2 Z420 20BK/OR GROUND Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5643 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Description and Operation Lateral Accelerometer: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The G-sensor is located inside the ABS controller. The sensor is not a separate serviceable part from the controller. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 308 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 33 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5650 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5651 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 308 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 33 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5652 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5655 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5656 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. Refer to appropriate testing. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5659 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 284 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5664 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5665 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Component ID: 285 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5666 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5667 Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 286 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5668 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front Component ID: 284 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B8 20DG/TN LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B9 20DG/LG LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5671 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5672 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Rear Component ID: 285 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 B22 20DG/YL REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B222 20DG/WT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5673 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5674 Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Right Front Component ID: 286 Component : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SENSOR-WHEEL SPEED-ABS-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (AWAL) Pin Circuit Description 1 B6 20DG/WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL 2 B7 20DG/VT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR SUPPLY Component Location - 3 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Wheel Speed-ABS-Left Front > Page 5675 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5676 Wheel Speed Sensor: Description and Operation OPERATION The Wheel Speed Sensor consists of a magnet (1) surrounded by windings from a single strand of wire (5). The sensor sends a small AC signal to the ABM. This signal is generated by magnetic induction. The magnetic induction is created when a toothed sensor ring (exciter ring or tone wheel) (4) passes the stationary magnetic WSS. When the ring gear is rotated, the exciter ring (4) passes the tip of the WSS. As the exciter ring tooth approaches the tip of the WSS, the magnetic lines of force expand, causing the magnetic field to cut across the sensor's windings (5). This, in turn causes current to flow through the WSS circuit in one direction. When the exciter ring tooth moves away from the sensor tip, the magnetic lines of force collapse cutting the winding in the opposite direction. This causes the current to flow in the opposite direction. Every time a tooth of the exciter ring passes the tip of the WSS, an AC signal is generated current. Each AC signal (positive to negative signal or squarewave) is interpreted by the ABM. It then compares the frequency of the sinewave to a time value to calculate vehicle speed. The ABM continues to monitor the frequency to determine a deceleration rate that would indicate a possible wheel-locking tendency. The signal strength of any magnetic induction sensor is directly affected by: - Magnetic field strength; the stronger the magnetic field, the stronger the signal - Number of windings in the sensor; more windings provide a stronger signal - Exciter ring speed; the faster the exciter ring/tone wheel rotates, the stronger the signal will be - Distance (3) "air gap" between the exciter ring teeth and WSS; the closer the WSS is to the exciter ring/tone wheel, the stronger the signal will be. The WSS is not adjustable. A clearance specification has been established for manufacturing tolerances. If the clearance is not within these specifications, then either the WSS or other components may be damaged. The clearance between the WSS and the exciter ring is 0.005 0.050 in. The assembly plant performs a "Rolls Test" on every vehicle that leaves the assembly plant. One of the test performed is a test of the WSS. To properly test the sensor, the assembly plant connects test equipment to the Data Link Connector (DLC). This connector is located to the right of the steering column and attached to the lower portion of the instrument panel. The rolls test terminal is spliced to the WSS circuit. The vehicle is then driven on a set of rollers and the WSS output is monitored for proper operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the front rotor and caliper adapter.See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal. 3. Remove the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) from the hub (3). 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor (2) from the hub (3). 5. Remove the wiring from the clips and disconnect the electrical connector (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 5679 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the wiring to the clips and Reconnect the electrical connector (1). 2. Install the wheel speed sensor (2) to the hub (3). 3. Install the wheel speed sensor mounting bolt (1) to the hub (3). Tighten the bolt to 21 Nm (190 in. lbs.). 4. Install the front rotor and brake caliper assembly See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 5680 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle on hoist. 2. Remove brake line mounting nut (4) and remove the brake line (3) from the sensor stud. 3. Remove the park brake cable (2) and bracket (1) from the sensor stud. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (6). 5. Remove mounting stud (2) from the sensor (5). 6. Remove sensor (1) from differential housing (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal > Page 5681 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect harness to sensor (1). Be sure seal is securely in place between sensor and wiring connector. 2. Install O-ring on sensor (if removed). 3. Insert sensor (1) in differential housing (3). 4. Install the sensor mounting stud and tighten to 24 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 5. Reconnect the electrical connector (6). 6. Install the brake line (3) on the sensor stud. 7. Install the park brake cable (2) and bracket (1) to the stud and install the nut (4). 8. Lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Yaw Rate Sensor: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The G-sensor is located inside the ABS controller. The sensor is not a separate serviceable part from the controller. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5690 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5691 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5692 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder Removal REMOVAL The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly (2). a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 5698 The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (2) with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (2) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 5699 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key/Lock Cylinder - Removal REMOVAL The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly (2). a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 5700 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key/Lock Cylinder - Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (2) with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (2) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5704 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5705 Neutral Safety Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5706 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Starter Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5711 Starter Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 185 Component : RELAY-STARTER Connector: Name : RELAY-STARTER Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT B INTERNAL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) C-D T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Starter Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The starter relay is an electromechanical device that switches battery current to the pull-in coil of the starter solenoid when the ignition switch is turned to the Start position. The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment. See the PDC cover for relay identification and location. The starter relay is a International Standards Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. The starter relay cannot be repaired or adjusted. If faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5714 Starter Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ISO relay consists of an electromagnetic coil, a resistor or diode, and three (two fixed and one movable) electrical contacts. The movable (common feed) relay contact is held against one of the fixed contacts (normally closed) by spring pressure. When electromagnetic coil is energized, it draws the movable contact away from normally closed fixed contact, and holds it against the other (normally open) fixed contact. When electromagnetic coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns movable contact to normally closed position. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with electromagnetic coil within relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes produced when coil is de-energized. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Starter Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove cover from Power Distribution Center (PDC) for relay identification and location. 3. Remove starter relay from PDC. 4. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 5. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5717 Starter Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Push down firmly on starter relay until terminals are fully seated into PDC receptacle. 2. Install PDC cover. 3. Connect battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Jump Starting > System Information > Service and Repair Jump Starting: Service and Repair JUMP STARTING WARNING: Review all safety precautions and warnings in the battery system. See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery Charging - Do not jump start a frozen battery, personal injury can result. If equipped, do not jump start when maintenance free battery indicator dot is yellow or bright color. - Do not jump start a vehicle when the battery fluid is below the top of lead plates. - Do not allow jumper cable clamps to touch each other when connected to a booster source. - Do not use open flame near battery. - Remove metallic jewelry worn on hands or wrists to avoid injury by accidental arcing of battery current. - When using a high output boosting device, do not allow battery voltage to exceed 16 volts. Refer to instructions provided with device being used. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: When using another vehicle as a booster, do not allow vehicles to touch. Electrical systems can be damaged on either vehicle. TO JUMP START A DISABLED VEHICLE: 1. Raise hood on disabled vehicle and visually inspect engine compartment for: - Battery cable clamp condition, clean if necessary. - Frozen battery. - Yellow or bright color test indicator, if equipped. - Low battery fluid level. - Generator drive belt condition and tension. - Fuel fumes or leakage, correct if necessary. CAUTION: If the cause of starting problem on disabled vehicle is severe, damage to booster vehicle charging system can result. 2. When using another vehicle as a booster source, park the booster vehicle within cable reach. Turn off all accessories, set the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in PARK or the manual transmission in NEUTRAL and turn the ignition OFF. 3. On disabled vehicle, place gear selector in park or neutral and set park brake. Turn off all accessories. 4. Connect jumper cables to booster battery. RED clamp (4) to positive terminal (+). BLACK clamp (2) to negative (3) terminal (-). DO NOT allow clamps at opposite end of cables to touch, electrical arc will result. Review all warnings in this procedure. 5. On disabled vehicle, connect RED jumper cable (4) clamp to positive (+) terminal. Connect BLACK jumper cable clamp to engine ground (1) as close to the ground cable attaching point as possible. 6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. CAUTION: Do not crank starter motor on disabled vehicle for more than 15 seconds, starter will overheat and could fail. 7. Allow battery in disabled vehicle to charge to at least 12.4 volts (75% charge) before attempting to start engine. If engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking engine and allow starter to cool (15 min.), before cranking again. DISCONNECT CABLE CLAMPS AS FOLLOWS: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Jump Starting > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 5722 - Disconnect BLACK cable clamp (2) from engine ground (1) on disabled vehicle. - When using a booster vehicle, disconnect BLACK cable clamp (2) from battery negative terminal (3). Disconnect RED cable clamp (4) from battery positive terminal (5). - Disconnect RED cable clamp (4) from battery positive terminal (4) on disabled vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Cables - Description Battery Cable: Description and Operation Battery Cables - Description DESCRIPTION The battery cables (2) and (4) are large gauge, stranded copper wires sheathed within a heavy plastic or synthetic rubber insulating jacket. The wire used in the battery cables combines excellent flexibility and reliability with high electrical current carrying capacity. The battery cables feature a stamped brass clamping type female battery terminal crimped onto one end of the battery cable wire and then solder-dipped. A square headed pinch-bolt and hex nut are installed at the open end of the female battery terminal clamp. Large eyelet type terminals are crimped onto the opposite end of the battery cable wire and then solder-dipped. The battery positive cable wires (2) have a red insulating jacket to provide visual identification and feature a larger female battery terminal clamp to allow connection to the larger battery positive terminal post. The battery negative cable wires (4) have a black insulating jacket and a smaller female battery terminal clamp. The battery cables cannot be repaired and, if damaged or faulty they must be replaced. Both the battery positive and negative cables are available for service replacement. The replacement parts may include portions of the wiring circuits for the generator and other components on some models. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for the location of the proper battery cable wire harness diagrams. The wiring information also includes proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Battery Cables - Description > Page 5727 Battery Cable: Description and Operation Battery Cables - Operation OPERATION The battery cables connect the battery terminal posts to the vehicle electrical system. These cables also provide a return path for electrical current generated by the charging system for restoring the voltage potential of the battery. The female battery terminal clamps on the ends of the battery cable wires provide a strong and reliable connection of the battery cable to the battery terminal posts. The terminal pinch bolts allow the female terminal clamps to be tightened around the male terminal posts on the top of the battery. The eyelet terminals secured to the ends of the battery cable wires opposite the female battery terminal clamps provide secure and reliable connection of the battery to the vehicle electrical system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5728 Battery Cable: Testing and Inspection BATTERY CABLES A voltage drop test will determine if there is excessive resistance in the battery cable terminal connections or the battery cables. If excessive resistance is found in the battery cable connections, the connection point should be disassembled, cleaned of all corrosion or foreign material, then reassembled. Following reassembly, check the voltage drop for the battery cable connection and the battery cable again to confirm repair. When performing the voltage drop test, it is important to remember that the voltage drop is giving an indication of the resistance between the two points at which the voltmeter probes are attached. EXAMPLE: When testing the resistance of the battery positive cable, touch the voltmeter leads to the battery positive cable terminal clamp and to the battery positive cable eyelet terminal at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud. If you probe the battery positive terminal post and the battery positive cable eyelet terminal at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud, you are reading the combined voltage drop in the battery positive cable terminal clamp-to-terminal post connection and the battery positive cable. TESTING VOLTAGE DROP TEST WARNING: If the battery shows signs of freezing, leaking, loose posts, or low electrolyte level, do not test, assist-boost, or charge. The battery may arc internally and explode. Personal injury and/or vehicle damage may result. WARNING: Explosive hydrogen gas forms in and around the battery. Do not smoke, use flame, or create sparks near the battery. Personal injury and/or vehicle damage may result. WARNING: Explosive hydrogen gas forms in and around the battery. Do not smoke, use flame, or create sparks near the battery. Personal injury and/or vehicle damage may result. WARNING: If the battery is equipped with removable cell caps, be certain that each of the cell caps is in place and tight before the battery is returned to service. Personal injury and/or vehicle damage may result from loose or missing cell caps. The following operation will require a voltmeter accurate to 1/10 (0.10) volt. Before performing this test, be certain that the following procedures are accomplished: - The battery is fully-charged and tested, See: Testing and Inspection/Micro 420 Battery Tester. - Fully engage the parking brake. - If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Park position. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Neutral position and block the clutch pedal in the fully depressed position. - Verify that all lamps and accessories are turned off. - To prevent a gasoline engine from starting, remove the Automatic ShutDown (ASD) relay. The ASD relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM), in the engine compartment. See the fuse and relay layout label on the underside of the IPM cover for ASD relay identification and location. 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter (1) to the battery negative terminal post. Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter (1) to the battery negative cable terminal clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If voltage is detected, correct the poor connection between the battery negative cable terminal clamp and the battery negative terminal post. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5729 2. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter (1) to the battery positive terminal post. Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter to the battery positive cable terminal clamp. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If voltage is detected, correct the poor connection between the battery positive cable terminal clamp and the battery positive terminal post. 3. Connect the voltmeter (2) to measure between the battery positive cable terminal clamp (1) and the starter solenoid (3) B(+) terminal stud. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery positive cable eyelet terminal connection at the starter solenoid B(+) terminal stud. Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2 volt, replace the faulty battery positive cable. 4. Connect the voltmeter (1) to measure between the battery (2) negative cable terminal clamp and a good clean ground (3) on the engine block. Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and tighten the battery negative cable eyelet terminal connection to the engine block. Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2 volt, replace the faulty battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal Battery Cable: Service and Repair Battery Cables - Removal REMOVAL NEGATIVE 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Be certain that all electrical accessories are turned off. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable terminal clamp (4). 3. Remove the bolt (2) securing the negative cable eyelet (3) to the left front fender. 4. One at a time, trace the battery cable retaining pushpins (5) , fasteners and routing clips until the cable is free from the vehicle. 5. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance 6. Remove the bolt (3) securing the negative cable (1) to the engine (2). 7. Separate the cable from the engine harness conduit. 8. Remove the battery negative cable from the vehicle. POSITIVE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 5732 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Be certain that all electrical accessories are turned off. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. Loosen the band clamp (2) on the air inlet tube (1) and remove the bolts (3) from the air intake resonator (4). Remove the resonator from the vehicle. 4. Disconnect the battery positive cable terminal clamp (8). 5. Remove the nut (5) securing the cable to the Integrated Power Module (IPM) (7) stud (6). 6. Lift the terminal cap and remove the nut (3) securing the cable (4) to the alternator. 7. Disconnect the starter solenoid wire harness connector (1). 8. Disconnect the battery cable retaining pushpin (5) securing the cable to the left frame rail (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 5733 9. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance. 10. Remove the nut (2) securing the cable (1) to the starter solenoid (3). 11. Disconnect the battery cable retaining pushpin (6) securing the cable to the engine block. 12. Lower the vehicle. 13. Remove the battery positive cable from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 5734 Battery Cable: Service and Repair Battery Cables - Installation INSTALLATION NEGATIVE 1. Position the battery negative cable (4) in the vehicle and into the engine harness conduit. 2. One at a time, install the battery cable retaining pushpins (5) , fasteners and routing clips until the cable is secure in the vehicle. 3. Install the bolt (2) securing the negative cable eyelet (3) to the left front fender. Tighten the bolt to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 4. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance. 5. Install the bolt (3) securing the negative cable (1) to the engine block (2). Tighten the bolt to 16.5 Nm (145 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 5735 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Connect the battery negative cable terminal clamp (4). Tighten the battery terminal clamp pinch-bolt hex nut to 5 NmM (45 in. Lbs.). 8. Check the vehicle for normal operation. POSITIVE 1. Position the battery positive cable (4 and 8) in the vehicle. 2. Install the nut (5) securing the cable to the Integrated Power Module (IPM) (7) stud (6). Tighten the nut to 11.5 Nm (105 in. lbs.). 3. Install the nut (3) securing the cable (4) to the alternator. Tighten the nut to 14 Nm (125 in. lbs.). 4. Install the cable pushpin (5) into the left frame rail (4). 5. Connect the starter solenoid wire harness connector (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Cables - Removal > Page 5736 6. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance. 7. Install the nut (2) securing the cable (1) to the starter solenoid (3). Tighten the nut to 13 Nm (115 in. lbs.). 8. Connect the battery cable retaining pushpin (6) securing the cable to the engine block. 9. Lower the vehicle. 10. Connect the battery positive cable terminal clamp (8). Tighten the battery terminal clamp pinch-bolt hex nut to 5 NmM (45 in. Lbs.). 11. Position the resonator (4) into the vehicle. Install the bolts (3) into the air intake resonator (4) and tighten the band clamp (2) on the air inlet tube (1). 12. Connect the battery negative cable terminal clamp. Tighten the battery terminal clamp pinch-bolt hex nut to 5 NmM (45 in. Lbs.). 13. Check the vehicle for normal operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Description and Operation Battery Tray: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The molded plastic battery tray (3) is located in the left front corner of the engine compartment. On this vehicle, the battery tray also provides an anchor point for the anti-lock brake controller (4) and the Integrated Power Module (IPM) (1). The battery hold down hardware is contained within the battery tray. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Tray - Removal Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Tray - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the battery, See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery - Removal. 3. Remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) (1), See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Removal. 4. Remove the Antilock Brake System (ABS) Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (3) bolts (2) from the battery tray (1). 5. Remove the battery negative cable retaining pushpins (5) from the battery tray. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Tray - Removal > Page 5742 6. Remove the engine compartment wire harness retaining pushpins (3) from the battery tray (2). 7. Remove the left headlamp assembly, See: Lighting and Horns/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Removal. 8. Remove the battery tray bolts. 9. Remove the six upper battery tray bolts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Tray - Removal > Page 5743 10. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance 11. Remove the left front fender liner. See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair/Removal NOTE: The middle bolt hole is to remain open for a front fender liner fastener (1). 12. Remove the lower battery tray mounting bolts (2). 13. Lower the vehicle. 14. Remove the battery tray (2) from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Tray - Removal > Page 5744 Battery Tray: Service and Repair Battery Tray - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean and inspect the battery tray, See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Battery Cleaning and Inspection. 2. Position the battery tray into the vehicle. 3. Install the six upper battery tray bolts hand tight. 4. Install the two front battery tray bolts hand tight. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Tray - Removal > Page 5745 5. Raise the vehicle on a hoist, See: Maintenance NOTE: The middle bolt hole is to remain open for a front fender liner fastener (1). 6. Install the two lower battery tray bolts (2). Tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 7. Install the left front fender liner, See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and Repair/Installation 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Tighten the upper battery tray bolts to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 10. Tighten the two front battery tray bolts to 8.5 Nm (75 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Tray - Removal > Page 5746 11. Install the engine compartment wire harness retaining pushpins (3) to the battery tray (2). 12. Install the battery negative cable retaining pushpins (5) to the battery tray. 13. Install the Antilock Brake System (ABS) Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) (3) bolts (2) into the battery tray (1). Tighten the bolts to 18 Nm (160 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Tray > Component Information > Service and Repair > Battery Tray - Removal > Page 5747 14. Install the Integrated Power Module (IPM) (1), See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Installation. 15. Install the battery, See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Battery - Installation. 16. Verify proper vehicle operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications Alternator: Specifications GENERATOR RATINGS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5752 Alternator: Locations Component ID: 116 Component : GENERATOR Connector: Name : GENERATOR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 2 A803 18GY/RD GEN SENSE Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5753 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5754 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5755 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5756 Alternator: Diagrams Component ID: 116 Component : GENERATOR Connector: Name : GENERATOR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 K20 18BR/GY GEN FIELD CONTROL 2 A803 18GY/RD GEN SENSE Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5757 Component Location - 11 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5758 Component Location - 16 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5759 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Alternator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The generator is belt-driven by the engine using a serpentine type drive belt. It is serviced only as a complete assembly. If the generator fails for any reason, the entire assembly must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5762 Alternator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION As the energized rotor begins to rotate within the generator, the spinning magnetic field induces a current into the windings of the stator coil. Once the generator begins producing sufficient current, it also provides the current needed to energize the rotor. The stator winding connections deliver the induced alternating current to 3 positive and 3 negative diodes for rectification. From the diodes, rectified direct current is delivered to the vehicle electrical system through the generator battery terminal. Although the generators appear the same externally, different generators with different output ratings are used on this vehicle. Be certain that the replacement generator has the same output rating and part number as the original unit. Refer to Generator Ratings for amperage ratings and part numbers. See: Specifications/Electrical Specifications Noise emitting from the generator may be caused by: worn, loose or defective bearings; a loose or defective drive pulley; incorrect, worn, damaged or misadjusted fan drive belt; loose mounting bolts; a misaligned drive pulley or a defective stator or diode. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator - Removal Alternator: Service and Repair Generator - Removal REMOVAL 3.7L / 4.7L WARNING: DISCONNECT NEGATIVE CABLE FROM BATTERY BEFORE REMOVING BATTERY OUTPUT WIRE (B+ WIRE) FROM GENERATOR. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. 1. Disconnect negative battery cable at battery. 2. Remove generator drive belt. 3. Unsnap plastic insulator cap (3) from B+ output terminal. 4. Remove B+ terminal mounting nut (2) at rear of generator. Disconnect terminal from generator. 5. Disconnect field wire connector (4) at rear of generator by pushing on connector tab. 6. Remove 1 rear vertical generator mounting bolt (2). 7. Remove 2 front horizontal generator mounting bolts (1). 8. Remove generator from vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator - Removal > Page 5765 Alternator: Service and Repair Generator - Installation INSTALLATION 3.7L / 4.7L 1. Position generator (3) to engine and install 2 horizontal bolts (1) and 1 vertical bolt (2). 2. Tighten all 3 bolts. See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications 3. Snap field wire connector (4) into rear of generator. 4. Install B+ terminal eyelet to generator output stud. Tighten mounting nut (2). See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications CAUTION: Never force a belt over a pulley rim using a screwdriver. The synthetic fiber of the belt can be damaged. CAUTION: When installing a serpentine accessory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. The water pump may be rotating in the wrong direction if the belt is installed incorrectly, causing the engine to overheat. Refer to belt routing label in engine compartment, or refer to Drive Belt Schematics in Engine. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Generator - Removal > Page 5766 5. Install generator drive belt. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation 6. Install negative battery cable to battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Voltage Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Voltage Regulator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) is not a separate component. It is actually a voltage regulating circuit located within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The EVR is not serviced separately. If replacement is necessary, the PCM must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Voltage Regulator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5771 Voltage Regulator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The amount of DC current produced by the generator is controlled by EVR circuitry contained within the PCM. This circuitry is connected in series with the generators second rotor field terminal and its ground. Voltage is regulated by cycling the ground path to control the strength of the rotor magnetic field. The EVR circuitry monitors system line voltage (B+) and battery temperature. It then determines a target charging voltage. If sensed battery voltage is 0.5 volts or lower than the target voltage, the PCM grounds the field winding until sensed battery voltage is 0.5 volts above target voltage. A circuit in the PCM cycles the ground side of the generator field up to 100 times per second (100Hz), but has the capability to ground the field control wire 100% of the time (full field) to achieve the target voltage. If the charging rate cannot be monitored (limp-in), a duty cycle of 25% is used by the PCM in order to have some generator output. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations Clutch Switch: Locations Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5776 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5777 Clutch Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5778 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder Removal REMOVAL The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly (2). a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 5784 The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (2) with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (2) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 5785 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key/Lock Cylinder - Removal REMOVAL The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder removal. 1. Disconnect negative cable from battery. 2. Remove upper and lower covers (shrouds) from steering column. 3. Place shifter in PARK position. 4. A retaining pin is located at side of key cylinder assembly (2). a. Rotate key to RUN position. b. Press in on retaining pin while pulling key cylinder (1) from ignition switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Key / Lock Cylinder > Page 5786 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Key/Lock Cylinder - Installation INSTALLATION The ignition key (1) must be in the key cylinder (2) for cylinder installation. 1. Install the key cylinder into the housing using care to align the end of the key cylinder (2) with the ignition switch. 2. Push the key cylinder (2) in until it clicks. 3. Replace the upper and lower shrouds. 4. Reconnect the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Description and Operation Keyless Start Antenna: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). The control module (3) is located under the instrument panel cover (2). The module electrical connector plugs into the WCM/SKREEM at the right side of the steering column. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 3. Remove steering column shrouds. 4. Remove left instrument panel (IP) end cap. 5. Remove IP cluster bezel. 6. Remove IP cluster and its three connectors. 7. Remove left A-pillar trim. 8. Unclip upper IP bezel (defroster). 9. Remove two module mounting screws (4) from module (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5793 10. Disconnect coax cable retainers (3) and (4) from IP. 11. Remove two WCM/SKREEM mounting screws at steering column (1). 12. Remove WCM/SKREEM from steering column (1). 13. Disconnect coax cable electrical connector (2) at WCM/SKREEM. 14. Remove module (2) from top of instrument panel while fishing coax cable (1) through openings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5794 Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). 1. Fish coax cable (1) through openings on top of instrument panel. Position module (2) to top of instrument panel. 2. Install two module mounting screws (4) to module (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5795 3. Connect coax cable retainers (3) and (4) to instrument panel. 4. Connect coax cable electrical connector (2) to WCM/SKREEM. 5. Install WCM/SKREEM to steering column (1). 6. Clip upper instrument panel (IP) bezel (defroster). 7. Install left A-pillar trim. 8. Install IP cluster and its three connectors. 9. Install IP cluster bezel. 10. Install left IP end cap. 11. Install steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 12. Install steering column shrouds. 13. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5799 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5800 Neutral Safety Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 299 Component : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Connector: Name : SWITCH-CLUTCH INTERLOCK Color : GREEN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z905 20BK GROUND 2 T141 20YL/DB TRS T141 SENSE (P/N SENSE) Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5801 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations Starter Motor: Locations Component ID: 297 Component : STARTER Connector: Name : STARTER Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5805 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5806 Starter Motor: Diagrams Component ID: 297 Component : STARTER Connector: Name : STARTER Color : # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5807 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5808 Starter Motor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - STARTER MOTOR Correct starter motor operation can be confirmed by performing the following free running bench test. This test can only be performed with starter motor removed from vehicle. Refer to Specifications for starter motor specifications. See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications 1. Remove starter motor from vehicle. Refer to Starter Motor Removal and Installation. 2. Mount starter motor securely in a soft-jawed bench vise. The vise jaws should be clamped on the mounting flange of starter motor. Never clamp on starter motor by field frame. 3. Connect a suitable volt-ampere tester and a 12-volt battery to starter motor in series, and set ammeter to 100 ampere scale. See instructions provided by manufacturer of volt-ampere tester being used. 4. Install jumper wire from solenoid terminal to solenoid battery terminal. The starter motor should operate. If starter motor fails to operate, replace faulty starter motor assembly. 5. Adjust carbon pile load of tester to obtain free running test voltage. Refer to Specifications for starter motor free running test voltage specifications. 6. Note reading on ammeter and compare reading to free running test maximum amperage draw. Refer to Specifications for starter motor free running test maximum amperage draw specifications. 7. If ammeter reading exceeds maximum amperage draw specification, replace faulty starter motor assembly. STARTER SOLENOID Certain vehicles with certain engines may require starter motor removal for the following test. 1. If necessary, remove starter motor from vehicle. Refer to Starter Motor Removal and Installation. 2. Disconnect solenoid connector wiring from starter motor. 3. Check for continuity between solenoid terminal (2) and solenoid case (3). There should be continuity. If not OK, replace faulty starter motor assembly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Starter Motor - Removal Starter Motor: Service and Repair Starter Motor - Removal REMOVAL 3.7L / 4.7L With Manual Trans. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Note: If equipped with 4WD and certain transmissions, a support bracket is used between front axle and side of transmission. Remove 2 support bracket bolts at transmission. Pry support bracket slightly to gain access to lower starter mounting bolt. 4. Remove one bolt (9) and one nut (8) if equipped with a manual transmission. 5. Move starter motor (5) towards front of vehicle far enough for nose of starter pinion housing to clear housing. Always support starter motor during this process, do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 6. Tilt nose downwards and lower starter motor far enough to access and remove nut (2) that secures battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet to solenoid battery terminal stud. Do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 7. Remove battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet (1) from solenoid battery terminal stud. 8. Disconnect battery positive cable wire harness connector (7) from solenoid terminal connector receptacle. 9. Remove starter motor. 3.7L / 4.7L With Auto. Trans. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Raise and support vehicle. 3. Note: If equipped with 4WD and certain transmissions, a support bracket is used between front axle and side of transmission. Remove 2 support bracket bolts at transmission. Pry support bracket slightly to gain access to lower starter mounting bolt. 4. Remove two bolts (3) if equipped with an automatic transmission. 5. Move starter motor (4) towards front of vehicle far enough for nose of starter pinion housing to clear housing. Always support starter motor during this process, do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 6. Tilt nose downwards and lower starter motor far enough to access and remove nut (2) that secures battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet (1) to solenoid battery terminal stud. Do not let starter motor hang from wire harness. 7. Remove battery positive cable wire harness connector eyelet (5) from solenoid battery terminal stud. 8. Disconnect battery positive cable wire harness connector from solenoid terminal connector receptacle. 9. Remove starter motor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Starter Motor - Removal > Page 5811 Starter Motor: Service and Repair Starter Motor - Installation INSTALLATION 3.7L / 4.7L With Manual Trans. 1. Connect solenoid wire to starter motor (snaps on). 2. Position battery cable (1) to solenoid stud. Install and tighten battery cable eyelet nut (2). Refer to Torque Specifications. See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications Do not allow starter motor to hang from wire harness. 3. Position starter motor (5) to transmission. 4. Install and tighten lockwasher (6) nut (8) and bolt (9). Refer to Torque Specifications. See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications 5. Lower vehicle. 6. Connect negative battery cable. 3.7L / 4.7L With Auto. Trans. 1. Connect solenoid wire to starter motor (snaps on). 2. Position battery cable (1) to solenoid stud. Install and tighten battery cable eyelet nut (2). Refer to Torque Specifications. Do not allow starter motor to hang from wire harness. See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications 3. Position starter motor (4) to transmission. 4. If equipped with automatic transmission, slide cooler tube bracket into position. 5. Install and tighten both bolts (3). Refer to Torque Specifications. See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications 6. Lower vehicle. 7. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Starter Relay: Locations Starter Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5815 Starter Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 185 Component : RELAY-STARTER Connector: Name : RELAY-STARTER Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT B INTERNAL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) C-D T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Starter Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The starter relay is an electromechanical device that switches battery current to the pull-in coil of the starter solenoid when the ignition switch is turned to the Start position. The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment. See the PDC cover for relay identification and location. The starter relay is a International Standards Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. The starter relay cannot be repaired or adjusted. If faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5818 Starter Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ISO relay consists of an electromagnetic coil, a resistor or diode, and three (two fixed and one movable) electrical contacts. The movable (common feed) relay contact is held against one of the fixed contacts (normally closed) by spring pressure. When electromagnetic coil is energized, it draws the movable contact away from normally closed fixed contact, and holds it against the other (normally open) fixed contact. When electromagnetic coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns movable contact to normally closed position. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with electromagnetic coil within relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes produced when coil is de-energized. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Starter Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The starter relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove cover from Power Distribution Center (PDC) for relay identification and location. 3. Remove starter relay from PDC. 4. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 5. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5821 Starter Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Push down firmly on starter relay until terminals are fully seated into PDC receptacle. 2. Install PDC cover. 3. Connect battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Component ID: 171 Component : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Color : # of pins : 3 Gender : FEMALE Pin Circuit Description 1 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 2-3 Z959 18BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Page 5826 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Page 5827 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5830 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5831 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5832 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5833 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5834 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts reference the figure numbers of the illustrations. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5835 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5836 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5837 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5838 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in Connector Replacement. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure)See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing. 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5839 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5840 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5841 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5842 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5843 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5844 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5845 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5846 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Power Outlet-Console Component ID: 170 Component : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 18RD/BR FUSED B(+) 2-3 18BK GROUND Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Component ID: 171 Component : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Color : # of pins : 3 Gender : FEMALE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5847 Pin Circuit Description 1 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 2-3 Z959 18BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5848 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5849 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-41-02 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5850 Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Pull the cigar lighter knob and element (1) out of the cigar lighter receptacle base (6), or unsnap the protective cap from the power outlet receptacle base (6). 3. Look inside the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and note the position of the rectangular retaining bosses (3) of the mount that secures the receptacle base to the panel (4). 4. Insert a pair of external snap ring pliers (5) into the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and engage the tips of the pliers with the retaining bosses of the mount. 5. Squeeze the pliers to disengage the mount retaining bosses from the receptacle base and, using a gentle rocking motion, pull the pliers and the receptacle base out of the mount. 6. Pull the receptacle base away from the instrument panel far enough to access the instrument panel wire harness connector (2). 7. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (2) from the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base (6). 8. Remove the cigar lighter or power outlet mount from the instrument panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5853 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the instrument panel wire harness connector to the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle. 2. Install the cigar lighter or power outlet mount into the instrument panel. 3. Align the splines on the outside of the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle with the grooves on the inside of the mount. 4. Press firmly on the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base until the retaining bosses of the mount are fully engaged in their receptacles. 5. Install the cigar lighter knob and element into the cigar lighter receptacle base, or the protective cap into the power outlet receptacle base. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Locations Circuit Breaker: Locations Component ID: 39 Component : CIRCUIT BREAKER-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK Connector: Name : CIRCUIT BREAKER-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Locations > Page 5857 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Locations > Page 5858 Circuit Breaker: Diagrams Component ID: 39 Component : CIRCUIT BREAKER-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK Connector: Name : CIRCUIT BREAKER-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Locations > Page 5859 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations Fuse: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5863 Fuse: Diagrams Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5864 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5865 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5866 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5867 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5868 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5869 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5870 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5871 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5872 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5873 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5874 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5875 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5876 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5877 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5878 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5879 Fuse: Application and ID Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5880 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5881 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5882 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 5883 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuse: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with an Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse that is disconnected within the Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Dealer personnel are to reconnect the IOD fuse in the Integrated Power Module as part of the preparation procedures performed just prior to new vehicle delivery. The IOD fuse can be removed to avoid discharging the battery by disconnecting non-essential, low-current memory functions that are normally on at all times. A detent on the IOD fuse holder allows it to be stored in its normal cavity but out of contact. The holder is pushed into place to restore power to the systems it supplies. The following circuits are protected by the IOD fuse: - Cluster (CCN) - Diagnostic Connector - Map Lamps - Glove Box Lamp - Courtesy Lamps - Radio - Underhood Lamp Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5886 Fuse: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The term ignition-off draw identifies a normal condition where power is being drained from the battery with the ignition switch in the Off position. The IOD fuse feeds the memory and sleep mode functions for some of the electronic modules in the vehicle as well as various other accessories that require battery current when the ignition switch is in the Off position. The only reason the IOD fuse is disconnected is to reduce the normal IOD of the vehicle electrical system during new vehicle transportation and pre-delivery storage to reduce battery depletion, while still allowing vehicle operation so that the vehicle can be loaded, unloaded and moved as needed. The IOD fuse is disconnected from Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant. Dealer personnel must reconnect the IOD fuse when the vehicle is being prepared for delivery in order to restore full electrical system operation. Once the vehicle is prepared for delivery, the IOD function of this fuse becomes transparent and the fuse that has been assigned the IOD designation becomes another Fused B(+) circuit fuse. The IOD fuse can be used by the vehicle owner as a convenient means of reducing battery depletion when a vehicle is to be stored for periods not to exceed about thirty days. However, it must be remembered that disconnecting the IOD fuse will not eliminate IOD, but only reduce this normal condition. If a vehicle will be stored for more than about thirty days, the battery negative cable should be disconnected to eliminate normal IOD; and, the battery should be tested and recharged at regular intervals during the vehicle storage period to prevent the battery from becoming discharged or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations Fuse Block: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5892 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5893 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5894 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5895 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5896 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts reference the figure numbers of the illustrations. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5897 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5898 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5899 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5900 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in Connector Replacement. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure)See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing. 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5901 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5902 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5903 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5904 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5905 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5906 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5907 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5908 Fuse Block: Connector Views Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5909 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5910 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5911 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5912 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5913 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5914 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5915 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5916 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5917 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5918 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5919 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5920 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5921 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5922 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5923 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5924 Fuse Block: Application and ID Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5925 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5926 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5927 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5928 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration Technical Service Bulletin # H20 Date: 080701 Campaign - Front Module Configuration July 2008 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification H20 Reconfigure Front Control Module Models 2008 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This notification applies only to the above vehicles that are NOT equipped with the Trailer Tow Group (sales code AHC) built through May 21, 2008 (MDH 052118). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The 4-way electrical connector for trailer lights on about 20,600 of the above vehicles may not function properly due to an improperly configured Front Control Module (FCM). Repair The Front Control Module must be reconfigured. Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The existing special tools are required to perform this repair shown. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 5937 Use the labor operation number and time allowance shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive one copy of this dealer notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure Reconfigure the Front Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 8.05 or later. If the reconfigure procedure for the FCM is aborted or interrupted, repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 5938 Use an accurate stand alone voltmeter. The battery charger volt meter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarSCAN to the data link connector on the vehicle and the dealership network. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Power "ON" the StarSCAN." 5. Starting at the StarSCAN "HOME" screen, select "ECU View". 6. Select "FCMCGW Central Gateway" from the list. 7. Select "Misc Functions". 8. Select "Restore Vehicle Configurations" from the list and press the blue "START" button in the upper right corner of the screen. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the reconfiguration process. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN from the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the battery charger. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 5939 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration Technical Service Bulletin # H20 Date: 080701 Campaign - Front Module Configuration July 2008 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification H20 Reconfigure Front Control Module Models 2008 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This notification applies only to the above vehicles that are NOT equipped with the Trailer Tow Group (sales code AHC) built through May 21, 2008 (MDH 052118). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The 4-way electrical connector for trailer lights on about 20,600 of the above vehicles may not function properly due to an improperly configured Front Control Module (FCM). Repair The Front Control Module must be reconfigured. Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The existing special tools are required to perform this repair shown. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 5945 Use the labor operation number and time allowance shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive one copy of this dealer notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure Reconfigure the Front Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 8.05 or later. If the reconfigure procedure for the FCM is aborted or interrupted, repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 5946 Use an accurate stand alone voltmeter. The battery charger volt meter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarSCAN to the data link connector on the vehicle and the dealership network. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Power "ON" the StarSCAN." 5. Starting at the StarSCAN "HOME" screen, select "ECU View". 6. Select "FCMCGW Central Gateway" from the list. 7. Select "Misc Functions". 8. Select "Restore Vehicle Configurations" from the list and press the blue "START" button in the upper right corner of the screen. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the reconfiguration process. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN from the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the battery charger. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 5947 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5948 Power Distribution Module: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Front Control Component ID: 157 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 24 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z116 18BK/VT GROUND 2 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 3 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 4 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 5 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C(+) 6 D51 20PK/RD DIAGNOSTIC CAN C(-) 7-- 8 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS(-) 10 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 11 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 17 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 18 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 19 - 20 - 21 L50 18WT/LB BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 22 Z117 18BK/WT GROUND 23 - 24 Z965 18BK GROUND Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5951 Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5952 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 L44 18WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 2-3-4 G31 20VT/OR AAT SIGNAL 5 G931 20VT/BR SENSOR GROUND 6 L43 18WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5953 7 L33 18WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 8 L60 18WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 9-10 L61 18WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 11 Z947 18BK GROUND 12 L34 18WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER Component Location - 5 Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5954 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5955 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5956 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5957 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5958 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5959 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5960 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5961 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5962 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5963 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5964 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5965 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5966 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5967 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5968 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5969 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 5970 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is a combination of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) and the Front Control Module (FCM) (2). The PDC mates directly with the FCM to form the IPM. The PDC is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses and relays, while the FCM contains the electronics controlling the IPM and other functions. The IPM connects directly to the battery positive via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The IPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. The IPM (2) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. It is secured to the battery tray (4) with two locating slots (5) and two pushpin style fasteners (1). The PDC portion of the IPM cannot be repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged, See: Service and Repair/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 5973 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the integrated power module via a stud on the top of the module. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) cover and remove the nut (5) from the IPM B+ terminal stud (6). 3. Remove the battery positive cable (4). 4. Remove the IPM (2) pushpin fasteners (1) from the battery tray (4). 5. Move the IPM (1) forward and up to disengage the locking tabs (2) from the battery tray locating slots (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5976 6. Lift the IPM up to access and disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the Power Distribution Center (1) and Front Control Module (2). 7. Remove the IPM assembly from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5977 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the wiring harness connectors to the Power Distribution Center (1) and the Front Control Module (2). 2. Position the Integrated Power Module (IPM) (1) into the battery tray. Move the IPM down and rearward to engage the locking tabs (2) into the battery tray locating slots (4). 3. Install the IPM (2) pushpin fasteners (1) into the battery tray (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 5978 4. Position the battery positive cable (4) and install the nut (5) onto the IPM B+ terminal stud (6). Install the IPM cover. 5. Connect the battery negative cable. 6. Confirm proper vehicle operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration Technical Service Bulletin # H20 Date: 080701 Campaign - Front Module Configuration July 2008 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification H20 Reconfigure Front Control Module Models 2008 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This notification applies only to the above vehicles that are NOT equipped with the Trailer Tow Group (sales code AHC) built through May 21, 2008 (MDH 052118). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The 4-way electrical connector for trailer lights on about 20,600 of the above vehicles may not function properly due to an improperly configured Front Control Module (FCM). Repair The Front Control Module must be reconfigured. Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The existing special tools are required to perform this repair shown. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 5988 Use the labor operation number and time allowance shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive one copy of this dealer notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure Reconfigure the Front Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 8.05 or later. If the reconfigure procedure for the FCM is aborted or interrupted, repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 5989 Use an accurate stand alone voltmeter. The battery charger volt meter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarSCAN to the data link connector on the vehicle and the dealership network. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Power "ON" the StarSCAN." 5. Starting at the StarSCAN "HOME" screen, select "ECU View". 6. Select "FCMCGW Central Gateway" from the list. 7. Select "Misc Functions". 8. Select "Restore Vehicle Configurations" from the list and press the blue "START" button in the upper right corner of the screen. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the reconfiguration process. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN from the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the battery charger. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 5990 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration Technical Service Bulletin # H20 Date: 080701 Campaign - Front Module Configuration July 2008 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification H20 Reconfigure Front Control Module Models 2008 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This notification applies only to the above vehicles that are NOT equipped with the Trailer Tow Group (sales code AHC) built through May 21, 2008 (MDH 052118). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The 4-way electrical connector for trailer lights on about 20,600 of the above vehicles may not function properly due to an improperly configured Front Control Module (FCM). Repair The Front Control Module must be reconfigured. Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The existing special tools are required to perform this repair shown. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 5996 Use the labor operation number and time allowance shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive one copy of this dealer notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure Reconfigure the Front Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 8.05 or later. If the reconfigure procedure for the FCM is aborted or interrupted, repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 5997 Use an accurate stand alone voltmeter. The battery charger volt meter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarSCAN to the data link connector on the vehicle and the dealership network. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Power "ON" the StarSCAN." 5. Starting at the StarSCAN "HOME" screen, select "ECU View". 6. Select "FCMCGW Central Gateway" from the list. 7. Select "Misc Functions". 8. Select "Restore Vehicle Configurations" from the list and press the blue "START" button in the upper right corner of the screen. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the reconfiguration process. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN from the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the battery charger. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 5998 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5999 Power Distribution Module: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Front Control Component ID: 157 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 24 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z116 18BK/VT GROUND 2 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 3 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 4 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 5 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C(+) 6 D51 20PK/RD DIAGNOSTIC CAN C(-) 7-- 8 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS(-) 10 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 11 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 17 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 18 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 19 - 20 - 21 L50 18WT/LB BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 22 Z117 18BK/WT GROUND 23 - 24 Z965 18BK GROUND Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6002 Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6003 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 L44 18WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 2-3-4 G31 20VT/OR AAT SIGNAL 5 G931 20VT/BR SENSOR GROUND 6 L43 18WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6004 7 L33 18WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 8 L60 18WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 9-10 L61 18WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 11 Z947 18BK GROUND 12 L34 18WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER Component Location - 5 Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6005 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6006 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6007 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6008 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6009 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6010 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6011 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - 38 - - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6012 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6013 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6014 7-- 8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - 38 - - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6015 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6016 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6017 7-- 8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6018 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6019 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6020 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6021 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is a combination of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) and the Front Control Module (FCM) (2). The PDC mates directly with the FCM to form the IPM. The PDC is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses and relays, while the FCM contains the electronics controlling the IPM and other functions. The IPM connects directly to the battery positive via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The IPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. The IPM (2) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. It is secured to the battery tray (4) with two locating slots (5) and two pushpin style fasteners (1). The PDC portion of the IPM cannot be repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged, See: Service and Repair/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6024 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the integrated power module via a stud on the top of the module. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) cover and remove the nut (5) from the IPM B+ terminal stud (6). 3. Remove the battery positive cable (4). 4. Remove the IPM (2) pushpin fasteners (1) from the battery tray (4). 5. Move the IPM (1) forward and up to disengage the locking tabs (2) from the battery tray locating slots (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6027 6. Lift the IPM up to access and disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the Power Distribution Center (1) and Front Control Module (2). 7. Remove the IPM assembly from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6028 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the wiring harness connectors to the Power Distribution Center (1) and the Front Control Module (2). 2. Position the Integrated Power Module (IPM) (1) into the battery tray. Move the IPM down and rearward to engage the locking tabs (2) into the battery tray locating slots (4). 3. Install the IPM (2) pushpin fasteners (1) into the battery tray (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6029 4. Position the battery positive cable (4) and install the nut (5) onto the IPM B+ terminal stud (6). Install the IPM cover. 5. Connect the battery negative cable. 6. Confirm proper vehicle operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations Relay Box: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module Relay Box: Diagrams Integrated Power Module Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6035 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6036 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6037 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6038 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6039 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6040 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6041 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6042 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6043 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6044 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6045 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6046 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6047 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6048 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6049 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6050 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Ignition Run Component ID: 180 Component : RELAY-IGNITION RUN Connector: Name : RELAY-IGNITION RUN Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 87 F921 12PK/WT IGNITION RUN OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6051 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Ignition Run-ACC Component ID: 181 Component : RELAY-IGNITION RUN-ACC Connector: Name : RELAY-IGNITION RUN-ACC Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 87 F984 12PK/YL IGNITION RUN-ACC RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6052 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run/Start Component ID: 184 Component : RELAY-RUN/START Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN/START Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 87 F941 18PK/LG RUN/START RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6053 Relay Box: Application and ID Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6054 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6055 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6056 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6057 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations Relay Box: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module Relay Box: Diagrams Integrated Power Module Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6063 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6064 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6065 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6066 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6067 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6068 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6069 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6070 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6071 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6072 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6073 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6074 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6075 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6076 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6077 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6078 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Ignition Run Component ID: 180 Component : RELAY-IGNITION RUN Connector: Name : RELAY-IGNITION RUN Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 87 F921 12PK/WT IGNITION RUN OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6079 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Ignition Run-ACC Component ID: 181 Component : RELAY-IGNITION RUN-ACC Connector: Name : RELAY-IGNITION RUN-ACC Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 87 F984 12PK/YL IGNITION RUN-ACC RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6080 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run/Start Component ID: 184 Component : RELAY-RUN/START Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN/START Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 87 F941 18PK/LG RUN/START RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6081 Relay Box: Application and ID Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6082 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6083 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6084 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6085 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations Auxiliary Power Outlet: Locations Component ID: 171 Component : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Color : # of pins : 3 Gender : FEMALE Pin Circuit Description 1 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 2-3 Z959 18BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Page 6090 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Locations > Page 6091 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6094 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6095 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6096 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6097 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6098 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts reference the figure numbers of the illustrations. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6099 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6100 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6101 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6102 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in Connector Replacement. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure)See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing. 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6103 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6104 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6105 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6106 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6107 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6108 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6109 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6110 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Connector Views Power Outlet-Console Component ID: 170 Component : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-CONSOLE Color : GRAY # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 18RD/BR FUSED B(+) 2-3 18BK GROUND Power Outlet-Instrument Panel Component ID: 171 Component : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Connector: Name : POWER OUTLET-INSTRUMENT PANEL Color : # of pins : 3 Gender : FEMALE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6111 Pin Circuit Description 1 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 2-3 Z959 18BK GROUND Component Location - 22 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6112 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6113 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-41-02 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6114 Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Pull the cigar lighter knob and element (1) out of the cigar lighter receptacle base (6), or unsnap the protective cap from the power outlet receptacle base (6). 3. Look inside the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and note the position of the rectangular retaining bosses (3) of the mount that secures the receptacle base to the panel (4). 4. Insert a pair of external snap ring pliers (5) into the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base and engage the tips of the pliers with the retaining bosses of the mount. 5. Squeeze the pliers to disengage the mount retaining bosses from the receptacle base and, using a gentle rocking motion, pull the pliers and the receptacle base out of the mount. 6. Pull the receptacle base away from the instrument panel far enough to access the instrument panel wire harness connector (2). 7. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (2) from the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base (6). 8. Remove the cigar lighter or power outlet mount from the instrument panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6117 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the instrument panel wire harness connector to the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle. 2. Install the cigar lighter or power outlet mount into the instrument panel. 3. Align the splines on the outside of the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base connector receptacle with the grooves on the inside of the mount. 4. Press firmly on the cigar lighter or power outlet receptacle base until the retaining bosses of the mount are fully engaged in their receptacles. 5. Install the cigar lighter knob and element into the cigar lighter receptacle base, or the protective cap into the power outlet receptacle base. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Locations Circuit Breaker: Locations Component ID: 39 Component : CIRCUIT BREAKER-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK Connector: Name : CIRCUIT BREAKER-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Locations > Page 6121 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Locations > Page 6122 Circuit Breaker: Diagrams Component ID: 39 Component : CIRCUIT BREAKER-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK Connector: Name : CIRCUIT BREAKER-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK Color : GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Circuit Breaker > Component Information > Locations > Page 6123 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations Fuse: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6127 Fuse: Diagrams Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6128 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6129 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6130 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6131 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6132 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6133 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6134 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6135 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6136 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6137 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6138 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6139 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6140 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6141 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6142 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6143 Fuse: Application and ID Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6144 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6145 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6146 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Page 6147 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuse: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION All vehicles are equipped with an Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse that is disconnected within the Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Dealer personnel are to reconnect the IOD fuse in the Integrated Power Module as part of the preparation procedures performed just prior to new vehicle delivery. The IOD fuse can be removed to avoid discharging the battery by disconnecting non-essential, low-current memory functions that are normally on at all times. A detent on the IOD fuse holder allows it to be stored in its normal cavity but out of contact. The holder is pushed into place to restore power to the systems it supplies. The following circuits are protected by the IOD fuse: - Cluster (CCN) - Diagnostic Connector - Map Lamps - Glove Box Lamp - Courtesy Lamps - Radio - Underhood Lamp Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6150 Fuse: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The term ignition-off draw identifies a normal condition where power is being drained from the battery with the ignition switch in the Off position. The IOD fuse feeds the memory and sleep mode functions for some of the electronic modules in the vehicle as well as various other accessories that require battery current when the ignition switch is in the Off position. The only reason the IOD fuse is disconnected is to reduce the normal IOD of the vehicle electrical system during new vehicle transportation and pre-delivery storage to reduce battery depletion, while still allowing vehicle operation so that the vehicle can be loaded, unloaded and moved as needed. The IOD fuse is disconnected from Integrated Power Module when the vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant. Dealer personnel must reconnect the IOD fuse when the vehicle is being prepared for delivery in order to restore full electrical system operation. Once the vehicle is prepared for delivery, the IOD function of this fuse becomes transparent and the fuse that has been assigned the IOD designation becomes another Fused B(+) circuit fuse. The IOD fuse can be used by the vehicle owner as a convenient means of reducing battery depletion when a vehicle is to be stored for periods not to exceed about thirty days. However, it must be remembered that disconnecting the IOD fuse will not eliminate IOD, but only reduce this normal condition. If a vehicle will be stored for more than about thirty days, the battery negative cable should be disconnected to eliminate normal IOD; and, the battery should be tested and recharged at regular intervals during the vehicle storage period to prevent the battery from becoming discharged or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations Fuse Block: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6156 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6157 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6158 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6159 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6160 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts reference the figure numbers of the illustrations. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6161 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6162 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6163 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6164 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in Connector Replacement. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure)See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing. 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6165 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6166 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6167 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6168 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6169 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6170 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6171 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6172 Fuse Block: Connector Views Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6173 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6174 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6175 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6176 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6177 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6178 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6179 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6180 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6181 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6182 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6183 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6184 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6185 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6186 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6187 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6188 Fuse Block: Application and ID Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6189 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6190 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6191 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6192 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration Technical Service Bulletin # H20 Date: 080701 Campaign - Front Module Configuration July 2008 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification H20 Reconfigure Front Control Module Models 2008 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This notification applies only to the above vehicles that are NOT equipped with the Trailer Tow Group (sales code AHC) built through May 21, 2008 (MDH 052118). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The 4-way electrical connector for trailer lights on about 20,600 of the above vehicles may not function properly due to an improperly configured Front Control Module (FCM). Repair The Front Control Module must be reconfigured. Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The existing special tools are required to perform this repair shown. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 6201 Use the labor operation number and time allowance shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive one copy of this dealer notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure Reconfigure the Front Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 8.05 or later. If the reconfigure procedure for the FCM is aborted or interrupted, repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 6202 Use an accurate stand alone voltmeter. The battery charger volt meter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarSCAN to the data link connector on the vehicle and the dealership network. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Power "ON" the StarSCAN." 5. Starting at the StarSCAN "HOME" screen, select "ECU View". 6. Select "FCMCGW Central Gateway" from the list. 7. Select "Misc Functions". 8. Select "Restore Vehicle Configurations" from the list and press the blue "START" button in the upper right corner of the screen. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the reconfiguration process. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN from the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the battery charger. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 6203 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign Front Module Configuration Technical Service Bulletin # H20 Date: 080701 Campaign - Front Module Configuration July 2008 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification H20 Reconfigure Front Control Module Models 2008 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This notification applies only to the above vehicles that are NOT equipped with the Trailer Tow Group (sales code AHC) built through May 21, 2008 (MDH 052118). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The 4-way electrical connector for trailer lights on about 20,600 of the above vehicles may not function properly due to an improperly configured Front Control Module (FCM). Repair The Front Control Module must be reconfigured. Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The existing special tools are required to perform this repair shown. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign Front Module Configuration > Page 6209 Use the labor operation number and time allowance shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive one copy of this dealer notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure Reconfigure the Front Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 8.05 or later. If the reconfigure procedure for the FCM is aborted or interrupted, repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign Front Module Configuration > Page 6210 Use an accurate stand alone voltmeter. The battery charger volt meter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarSCAN to the data link connector on the vehicle and the dealership network. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Power "ON" the StarSCAN." 5. Starting at the StarSCAN "HOME" screen, select "ECU View". 6. Select "FCMCGW Central Gateway" from the list. 7. Select "Misc Functions". 8. Select "Restore Vehicle Configurations" from the list and press the blue "START" button in the upper right corner of the screen. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the reconfiguration process. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN from the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the battery charger. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign Front Module Configuration > Page 6211 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6212 Power Distribution Module: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Front Control Component ID: 157 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 24 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z116 18BK/VT GROUND 2 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 3 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 4 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 5 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C(+) 6 D51 20PK/RD DIAGNOSTIC CAN C(-) 7-- 8 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS(-) 10 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 11 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 17 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 18 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 19 - 20 - 21 L50 18WT/LB BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 22 Z117 18BK/WT GROUND 23 - 24 Z965 18BK GROUND Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6215 Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6216 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 L44 18WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 2-3-4 G31 20VT/OR AAT SIGNAL 5 G931 20VT/BR SENSOR GROUND 6 L43 18WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6217 7 L33 18WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 8 L60 18WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 9-10 L61 18WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 11 Z947 18BK GROUND 12 L34 18WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER Component Location - 5 Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6218 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6219 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6220 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6221 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6222 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6223 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6224 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6225 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6226 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6227 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6228 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6229 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6230 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6231 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6232 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6233 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6234 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is a combination of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) and the Front Control Module (FCM) (2). The PDC mates directly with the FCM to form the IPM. The PDC is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses and relays, while the FCM contains the electronics controlling the IPM and other functions. The IPM connects directly to the battery positive via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The IPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. The IPM (2) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. It is secured to the battery tray (4) with two locating slots (5) and two pushpin style fasteners (1). The PDC portion of the IPM cannot be repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged, See: Service and Repair/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6237 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the integrated power module via a stud on the top of the module. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) cover and remove the nut (5) from the IPM B+ terminal stud (6). 3. Remove the battery positive cable (4). 4. Remove the IPM (2) pushpin fasteners (1) from the battery tray (4). 5. Move the IPM (1) forward and up to disengage the locking tabs (2) from the battery tray locating slots (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6240 6. Lift the IPM up to access and disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the Power Distribution Center (1) and Front Control Module (2). 7. Remove the IPM assembly from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6241 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the wiring harness connectors to the Power Distribution Center (1) and the Front Control Module (2). 2. Position the Integrated Power Module (IPM) (1) into the battery tray. Move the IPM down and rearward to engage the locking tabs (2) into the battery tray locating slots (4). 3. Install the IPM (2) pushpin fasteners (1) into the battery tray (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6242 4. Position the battery positive cable (4) and install the nut (5) onto the IPM B+ terminal stud (6). Install the IPM cover. 5. Connect the battery negative cable. 6. Confirm proper vehicle operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration Technical Service Bulletin # H20 Date: 080701 Campaign - Front Module Configuration July 2008 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification H20 Reconfigure Front Control Module Models 2008 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This notification applies only to the above vehicles that are NOT equipped with the Trailer Tow Group (sales code AHC) built through May 21, 2008 (MDH 052118). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The 4-way electrical connector for trailer lights on about 20,600 of the above vehicles may not function properly due to an improperly configured Front Control Module (FCM). Repair The Front Control Module must be reconfigured. Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The existing special tools are required to perform this repair shown. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 6252 Use the labor operation number and time allowance shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive one copy of this dealer notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure Reconfigure the Front Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 8.05 or later. If the reconfigure procedure for the FCM is aborted or interrupted, repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 6253 Use an accurate stand alone voltmeter. The battery charger volt meter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarSCAN to the data link connector on the vehicle and the dealership network. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Power "ON" the StarSCAN." 5. Starting at the StarSCAN "HOME" screen, select "ECU View". 6. Select "FCMCGW Central Gateway" from the list. 7. Select "Misc Functions". 8. Select "Restore Vehicle Configurations" from the list and press the blue "START" button in the upper right corner of the screen. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the reconfiguration process. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN from the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the battery charger. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 6254 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration Technical Service Bulletin # H20 Date: 080701 Campaign - Front Module Configuration July 2008 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification H20 Reconfigure Front Control Module Models 2008 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This notification applies only to the above vehicles that are NOT equipped with the Trailer Tow Group (sales code AHC) built through May 21, 2008 (MDH 052118). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The 4-way electrical connector for trailer lights on about 20,600 of the above vehicles may not function properly due to an improperly configured Front Control Module (FCM). Repair The Front Control Module must be reconfigured. Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The existing special tools are required to perform this repair shown. Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 6260 Use the labor operation number and time allowance shown. Dealer Notification All dealers will receive one copy of this dealer notification letter by mail. To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System." Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Service Procedure Reconfigure the Front Control Module NOTE: This procedure must be performed with release 8.05 or later. If the reconfigure procedure for the FCM is aborted or interrupted, repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.0 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 6261 Use an accurate stand alone voltmeter. The battery charger volt meter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarSCAN to the data link connector on the vehicle and the dealership network. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Power "ON" the StarSCAN." 5. Starting at the StarSCAN "HOME" screen, select "ECU View". 6. Select "FCMCGW Central Gateway" from the list. 7. Select "Misc Functions". 8. Select "Restore Vehicle Configurations" from the list and press the blue "START" button in the upper right corner of the screen. 9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the reconfiguration process. 10. Disconnect the StarSCAN from the vehicle. 11. Disconnect the battery charger. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > H20 > Jul > 08 > Campaign - Front Module Configuration > Page 6262 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6263 Power Distribution Module: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Front Control Component ID: 157 Component : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C1 Color : # of pins : 24 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z116 18BK/VT GROUND 2 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 3 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 4 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 5 D52 20WT/LB DIAGNOSTIC CAN C(+) 6 D51 20PK/RD DIAGNOSTIC CAN C(-) 7-- 8 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 9 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS(-) 10 B20 20DG/OR BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 11 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 17 D201 20WT/DG MODE SENSOR A 18 W1 20BR/TN WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH SENSE 19 - 20 - 21 L50 18WT/LB BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 22 Z117 18BK/WT GROUND 23 - 24 Z965 18BK GROUND Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6266 Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6267 Connector: Name : MODULE-FRONT CONTROL C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 L44 18WT/TN RIGHT LOW BEAM DRIVER 2-3-4 G31 20VT/OR AAT SIGNAL 5 G931 20VT/BR SENSOR GROUND 6 L43 18WT/DB LEFT LOW BEAM DRIVER Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6268 7 L33 18WT/LG LEFT HIGH BEAM DRIVER 8 L60 18WT/TN RIGHT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 9-10 L61 18WT/LG LEFT FRONT TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 11 Z947 18BK GROUND 12 L34 18WT/GY RIGHT HIGH BEAM DRIVER Component Location - 5 Component Location - 6 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6269 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6270 Power Distribution Module: Diagrams Module-Integrated Power Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6271 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6272 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6273 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6274 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6275 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6276 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6277 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6278 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6279 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6280 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6281 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6282 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6283 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6284 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Module-Front Control > Page 6285 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is a combination of the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) and the Front Control Module (FCM) (2). The PDC mates directly with the FCM to form the IPM. The PDC is a printed circuit board based module that contains fuses and relays, while the FCM contains the electronics controlling the IPM and other functions. The IPM connects directly to the battery positive via a stud located on top of the unit. The ground connection is via electrical connectors. The IPM provides the primary means of voltage distribution and protection for the entire vehicle. The IPM (2) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. It is secured to the battery tray (4) with two locating slots (5) and two pushpin style fasteners (1). The PDC portion of the IPM cannot be repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged, See: Service and Repair/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6288 Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All of the current from the battery and the generator output enters the integrated power module via a stud on the top of the module. Internal connections of all of the power distribution center circuits is accomplished by a combination of bus bars and a printed circuit board. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) cover and remove the nut (5) from the IPM B+ terminal stud (6). 3. Remove the battery positive cable (4). 4. Remove the IPM (2) pushpin fasteners (1) from the battery tray (4). 5. Move the IPM (1) forward and up to disengage the locking tabs (2) from the battery tray locating slots (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6291 6. Lift the IPM up to access and disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the Power Distribution Center (1) and Front Control Module (2). 7. Remove the IPM assembly from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6292 Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the wiring harness connectors to the Power Distribution Center (1) and the Front Control Module (2). 2. Position the Integrated Power Module (IPM) (1) into the battery tray. Move the IPM down and rearward to engage the locking tabs (2) into the battery tray locating slots (4). 3. Install the IPM (2) pushpin fasteners (1) into the battery tray (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6293 4. Position the battery positive cable (4) and install the nut (5) onto the IPM B+ terminal stud (6). Install the IPM cover. 5. Connect the battery negative cable. 6. Confirm proper vehicle operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations Relay Box: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module Relay Box: Diagrams Integrated Power Module Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6299 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6300 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6301 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6302 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6303 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6304 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6305 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6306 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6307 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6308 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6309 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6310 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6311 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6312 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6313 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6314 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Ignition Run Component ID: 180 Component : RELAY-IGNITION RUN Connector: Name : RELAY-IGNITION RUN Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 87 F921 12PK/WT IGNITION RUN OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6315 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Ignition Run-ACC Component ID: 181 Component : RELAY-IGNITION RUN-ACC Connector: Name : RELAY-IGNITION RUN-ACC Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 87 F984 12PK/YL IGNITION RUN-ACC RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6316 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run/Start Component ID: 184 Component : RELAY-RUN/START Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN/START Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 87 F941 18PK/LG RUN/START RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6317 Relay Box: Application and ID Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6318 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6319 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6320 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6321 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations Relay Box: Locations Integrated Power Module Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module Relay Box: Diagrams Integrated Power Module Component ID: 159 Component : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C1 Color : # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 F20 20PK/WT IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 5 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 T752 20DG/OR STARTER RELAY CONTROL 12 - 13 - 14 K51 20BR/GY ASD RELAY CONTROL 15 - 16 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6327 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6328 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 20 Pin Circuit Description 1 F202 20PK/GY FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 2-3-4-5 F924 20PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 6 K31 20BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6329 7 T15 20YL/BK TRANSMISSION CONTROL 8-9-10 Z915 20BK GROUND 11 - 12 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 13 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 14 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 15 L77 20PK/RD PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 17 L78 20WT/OR FUSED PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT (RIGHT) 18 - 19 - 20 - Component Location - 5 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6330 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3-4-5 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 6 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6331 7 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 8 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 9 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 10 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A111 18DG/RD FUSED B(+) 12 A117 20RD/DG FUSED B(+) (I.O.D.) 13 - 14 - 15 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 16 A918 18RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 - 26 A940 18RD FUSED B(+) 27 A901 18RD FUSED B(+) 28 A103 20GY/RD FUSED B(+) 29 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 30 - 31 A924 18RD FUSED B(+) 32 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 33 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 34 L89 18WT/YL FRONT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 35 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 36 F21 20PK/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START) 37 - - 38 - 39 C15 12DB/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 40 A107 12TN/RD FUSED B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6332 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6333 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C4 Color : GRAY # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY 2 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 3-4-5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6334 7-8-9 A920 18RD/BK FUSED B(+) 10 - 11 - 12 F941 18PK/LG IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 13 F306 18DB/PK FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 N1 18DB/OR FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT 16 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 - 25 A955 16RD ASD RELAY OUTPUT 26 - 27 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 28 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 29 T16 16YL/OR TRANSMISSION CONTROL OUTPUT 30 A919 18RD FUSED B(+) 31 A106 18LB/RD FUSED B(+) 32 - 33 - 34 - 35 L62 18WT/OR RIGHT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 36 - 37 - - 38 - 39 Z921 14BK GROUND 40 - Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6335 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6336 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER C5 Color : BROWN # of pins : 40 Pin Circuit Description 1 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2-3-4 C16 20DB/GY FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT 5-6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6337 7-8 F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 9 T750 14YL/GY STARTER RELAY OUTPUT 10 F525 18TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 11 - 12 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 Z902 14BK GROUND 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 F500 20DG/PK FUSED RUN RELAY OUTPUT 25 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 26 Z909 20BK GROUND 27 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 28 T315 14YL/BR SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL A 29 T316 14YL/GY SHIFT MOTOR CONTROL B 30 F1 20PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK-RUN-START) 31 F984 12PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 32 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 33 - 34 - 35 - 36 - 37 L63 18WT/DG LEFT REAR TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 38 - 39 Z118 18BK/YL GROUND 40 F921 12PK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6338 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6339 Connector: Name : MODULE-INTEGRATED POWER EYELET Color : # of pins : 1 L1 A1 04RD B(+) L1 A1 06LB B(+) Component Location - 5 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6340 Component Location - 10 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6341 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6342 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Ignition Run Component ID: 180 Component : RELAY-IGNITION RUN Connector: Name : RELAY-IGNITION RUN Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 87 F921 12PK/WT IGNITION RUN OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6343 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Ignition Run-ACC Component ID: 181 Component : RELAY-IGNITION RUN-ACC Connector: Name : RELAY-IGNITION RUN-ACC Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 87 F984 12PK/YL IGNITION RUN-ACC RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Integrated Power Module > Page 6344 Relay Box: Diagrams Relay-Run/Start Component ID: 184 Component : RELAY-RUN/START Connector: Name : RELAY-RUN/START Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 87 F941 18PK/LG RUN/START RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6345 Relay Box: Application and ID Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6346 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6347 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6348 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6349 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Wheel Alignment - Description Alignment: Description and Operation Wheel Alignment - Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Suspension components with rubber/urethane bushings should be tightened with the vehicle at normal ride height. It is important to have the springs supporting the weight of the vehicle when the fasteners are torqued. If springs are not at their normal ride position, vehicle ride comfort could be affected and premature bushing wear may occur. Wheel alignment involves the correct positioning of the wheels in relation to the vehicle. The positioning is accomplished through suspension and steering linkage adjustments. An alignment is considered essential for efficient steering, good directional stability and to minimize tire wear. The most important measurements of an alignment are caster, camber and toe. CAUTION: Never attempt to modify suspension or steering components by heating or bending. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Wheel Alignment - Description > Page 6355 Alignment: Description and Operation Wheel Alignment - Operation OPERATION - CASTER (1) is the forward or rearward tilt of the steering knuckle from vertical. Tilting the top of the knuckle forward provides less positive caster. Tilting the top of the knuckle rearward provides more positive caster. Positive caster promotes directional stability. This angle enables the front wheels to return to a straight ahead position after turns. - CAMBER (2) is the inward or outward tilt of the wheel relative to the center of the vehicle. Tilting the top of the wheel inward provides negative camber. Tilting the top of the wheel outward provides positive camber. Incorrect camber will cause wear on the inside or outside edge of the tire. - TOE (4) is the difference between the leading inside edges and trailing inside edges of the front tires. Wheel toe position out of specification cause's unstable steering, uneven tire wear and steering wheel off- center. The wheel toe position is the final front wheel alignment adjustment. THRUST ANGLE (3) is the angle of the rear axle relative to the centerline of the vehicle. Incorrect thrust angle can cause off-center steering and excessive tire wear. Off-center steering, lead or pull and Minimal adjustment (clearance between spring seat hole and leaf spring pin) can be made by loosening the U-Bolts and moving one side forward and the other rearward. All damaged component(s) must be replaced to correct the thrust angle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Page 6356 Alignment: Testing and Inspection PRE-ALIGNMENT INSPECTION Before starting wheel alignment, the following inspection and necessary corrections must be completed. Refer to Suspension and Steering System Diagnosis Chart below for additional information. 1. Inspect tires for size, air pressure and tread wear. 2. Inspect front wheel bearings for wear. 3. Inspect front wheels for excessive radial or lateral runout and balance. 4. Inspect ball studs, linkage pivot points and steering gear for looseness, roughness or binding. 5. Check intermediate shaft for excessive loosness or binding. 6. Inspect suspension components for wear and noise. 7. Check suspension ride height, per the recommended proceedure for variation side to side, in front and rear. 8. Road test the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber, Caster and Toe Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber, Caster and Toe Adjustment CAMBER, CASTER AND TOE ADJUSTMENT Camber and caster angle adjustments involve changing the position of the lower control arm with the slots in the frame brackets to move the lower control arm inwards or outwards for proper adjustment. This can be achieved by using a socket on the head of the cam bolt and turning clockwise or counterclockwise to achieve the proper specification. NOTE: Both front and rear lower control arm cam bolts are adjustable. NOTE: Camber and caster adjustments must be made at the lower control arm The upper control arm is not adjustable. NOTE: When the lower control arm cam bolts are loosened the lower control arm will normally go outwards automatically with the weight of the vehicle. CASTER Moving the rear position of the lower control arm at the frame in or out, will change the caster angle significantly and camber angle only slightly. To maintain the camber angle while adjusting caster, move the rear of the lower control arm in or out. Then move the front of the lower control arm slightly in the opposite direction. CAMBER Move both the front and rear of the lower control arm together in or out. This will change the camber angle significantly and caster angle slightly. After adjustment is made tighten the lower control arm bolt & nuts to 142 Nm (105 ft. lbs.). TOE ADJUSTMENT The wheel toe position adjustment is the final adjustment. 1. Start the engine and turn wheels both ways before straightening the wheels. Secure the steering wheel with the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Loosen the tie rod jam nuts (3). NOTE: Each front wheel should be adjusted for one-half of the total toe position specification. This will ensure the steering wheel will be centered when the wheels are positioned straight-ahead. 3. Adjust the wheel toe position by turning the inner tie rod (4) as necessary. 4. Tighten the tie rod jam nut (3) to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 5. Verify the specifications. 6. Turn off engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber, Caster and Toe Adjustment > Page 6359 Alignment: Service and Repair Curb Height Measurement CURB HEIGHT MEASUREMENT The wheel alignment is to be checked and all alignment adjustments made with the vehicle at its required curb height specification. Vehicle height is to be checked with the vehicle on a flat, level surface, preferably a vehicle alignment rack. The tires are to be inflated to the recommended pressure. All tires are to be the same size as standard equipment. Vehicle height is checked with the fuel tank full of fuel, and no passenger or luggage compartment load. Inspect the vehicle for bent or weak suspension components. Compare the parts tag on the suspect coil spring(s) to the parts book and the vehicle sales code, checking for a match. Once removed from the vehicle, compare the coil spring height to a correct new or known good coil spring. The heights should vary if the suspect spring is weak. 1. Front - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance from the center of the rear lower control arm bolt (1) to the ground (2) Record the measurement. Next measure the distance from the spindle center (3) to the ground (4) Record the measurement. 2. Take the two measurements and subract them to get the ride height specification. 3. Rear - On each side of the vehicle, measure the distance at the axle tube (1) to the jounce bumper flange (2). 4. Compare the measurements to the specifications listed in the following Curb Height Specifications chart. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6367 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6370 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6371 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: A new TPM sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new TPM sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activation the TPM sensor. If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Front Steering Knuckle: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The knuckle is a single casting with legs machined for the upper and lower ball joints. The knuckle also has machined mounting locations for the front brake calipers and hub bearing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6377 Front Steering Knuckle: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The steering knuckle pivot between the upper and lower ball joint. Steering linkage attached to the knuckle allows the vehicle to be steered. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal, shield and ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal. 4. Remove the front halfshaft nut 4X4 only. 5. Remove the tie rod end nut (1). 6. Separate the tie rod (2) from the knuckle with puller C-3894-A (1). CAUTION: When installing puller 8677 to separate the ball joint, be careful not to damage the ball joint seal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 6380 7. Remove the upper ball joint nut (1). 8. Separate the ball joint (1) from the knuckle (3) with puller 8677 (2). 9. Install an hydraulic jack to support the lower control arm. 10. Remove the lower ball joint nut (6). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 6381 11. Separate the ball joint (3) from the knuckle (1) with puller 8677 (2) and remove the knuckle (1). 12. Remove the hub/bearing bolts (2) from the knuckle (1). 13. Remove the hub/bearing from the steering knuckle (1) See: Suspension/Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Hub / Bearing Removal. 14. Remove the steering knuckle (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 6382 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: The ball joint stud tapers must be CLEAN and DRY before installing the knuckle. Clean the stud tapers with mineral spirits to remove dirt and grease. 1. Install the hub/bearing to the steering knuckle and tighten the bolts (1) to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the knuckle (7) onto the upper (2) and lower ball joints (5). 3. Install the upper (1) ball joint nut. Tighten the nut to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the lower ball joint nut (6). Tighten the nut to 129 Nm (95 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove the hydraulic jack from the lower control arm (4). 6. Install the tie rod end (2) and tighten the nut (1) to 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 6383 7. Install the front halfshaft (2) into the hub/bearing 4X4 only. 8. Install the the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) 4X4 only. 9. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation and brake shield, rotor and caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation. 10. Install the wheel and tire assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 11. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 12. Perform a wheel alignment See: Alignment/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair POWER STEERING SYSTEM BLEEDING WARNING: The fluid level should be checked with engine off to prevent injury from moving components. CAUTION: Mopar(R) Power Steering Fluid + 4 or Mopar(R) ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid is to be used in the power steering system. Both Fluids have the same material standard specifications (MS-9602). No other power steering or automatic transmission fluid is to be used in the system. Damage may result to the power steering pump and system if another fluid is used. Do not overfill the system. CAUTION: If the air is not purged from the power steering system correctly, pump failure could result. NOTE: Be sure the vacuum tool used in the following procedure is clean and free of any fluids. 1. Check the fluid level. As measured on the side of the reservoir, the level should indicate between MAX and MIN when the fluid is at normal ambient temperature. Adjust the fluid level as necessary.See: Power Steering Fluid/Testing and Inspection 2. Tightly insert Power Steering Cap Adapter (4), Special Tool 9688, into the mouth of the reservoir (3). CAUTION: Failure to use a the vacuum pump reservoir (1) may allow power steering fluid to be sucked into the hand vacuum pump. 3. Attach Hand Vacuum Pump (2), Special Tool C-4207 or equivalent, with reservoir (1) attached, to the Power Steering Cap Adapter (4). CAUTION: Do not run the engine while vacuum is applied to the power steering system. Damage to the power steering pump can occur. NOTE: When performing the following step make sure the vacuum level is maintained during the entire time period. 4. Using Hand Vacuum Pump (2), apply 68-85 kPa (20-25 in. Hg) of vacuum to the system for a minimum of three minutes. 5. Slowly release the vacuum and remove the special tools. 6. Adjust the fluid level as necessary. Refer to STEP 1. 7. Repeat STEP 1 through STEP 6 until the fluid no longer drops when vacuum is applied. 8. Start the engine and cycle the steering wheel lock-to-lock three times. NOTE: Do not hold the steering wheel at the stops. 9. Stop the engine and check for leaks at all connections. 10. Check for any signs of air in the reservoir and check the fluid level. If air is present, repeat the procedure as necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information Power Steering Fluid: Technical Service Bulletins Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information NUMBER: 26-001-09 GROUP: Miscellaneous DATE: September 24, 2009 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 26-003-07, DATED MARCH 30, 2007, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Fluid Flushing Requirements MODELS: 2005 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (D2) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 (DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2008 (DR) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2005 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2009 (HG) Aspen 2009 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (JR) Sebring Sedan & Convertible/Stratus Sedan 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2005 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2005 - 2006 (PL) Neon 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2005 - 2010 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Maintenance - Fluid Flushing Information > Page 6392 2005 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2009 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2005 - 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - 2006 (VA) Sprinter 2007 - 2010 (VB) Sprinter 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander 2005 - 2010 (ZB) Viper 2005 - 2007 (ZH) Crossfire DISCUSSION: Chrysler Group vehicle fluid systems do NOT require regular flushing. These systems include: engine oil, transmission oil, axle lube, brake fluid, power steering fluid, and refrigerant. The only exception to this requirement are published in the vehicle maintenance schedules, e.g. engine coolant. Exceptions to this recommendation include only those instances where a failure has occurred and/or the system has become compromised, contaminated or overheated beyond the normal operating range. Chrysler Group does NOT recommend aftermarket chemicals to flush the engine, transmission, brake or steering systems. Chemicals contained in these products can damage the system elastomeric components, and contaminate the component fluid, leading to loss of system/component durability and service life. When necessary, only the original approved system fluid should be used to flush these components using teamPSE(R) approved equipment. If the engine coolant contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with Mopar Cooling System Flush, p/n 04856977, or equivalent. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Refill with a minimum of a 50% mixture of the specified coolant and distilled water. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Capacity Specifications Power steering fluid capacities are dependent on engine/chassis options as well as steering gear/cooler options. Depending on type and size of internal cooler, length and inside diameter of cooler lines, or use of an auxiliary cooler, these capacities may vary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6395 Power Steering Fluid: Fluid Type Specifications Power Steering Reservoir .............................................................................................................................. Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Fluid Power Steering Fluid: Description and Operation Power Steering Fluid POWER STEERING FLUID Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid is required in the power steering system. Substitute fluids can induce power steering system failure. Mopar(R) ATF +4, Automatic Transmission Fluid when new is red in color. The ATF is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition. As the vehicle is driven, the ATF will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. This is normal. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Fluid > Page 6398 Power Steering Fluid: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The recommended fluid for the power steering system is Mopar(R) ATF +4. Mopar(R) ATF+4, when new is red in color. The ATF+4 is dyed red so it can be identified from other fluids used in the vehicle such as engine oil or antifreeze. The red color is not permanent and is not an indicator of fluid condition, As the vehicle is driven, the ATF+4 will begin to look darker in color and may eventually become brown. THIS IS NORMAL. ATF+4 also has a unique odor that may change with age. Consequently, odor and color cannot be used to indicate the fluid condition or the need for a fluid change. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6399 Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL CHECKING WARNING: FLUID LEVEL SHOULD BE CHECKED WITH THE ENGINE OFF TO PREVENT PERSONAL INJURY FROM MOVING PARTS. CAUTION: MOPAR(R) ATF+4 is to be used in the power steering system. No other power steering or automatic transmission fluid is to be used in the system. Damage may result to the power steering pump and system if any other fluid is used, Do not overfill. The power steering fluid level can be viewed on the dipstick attached to the filler cap. There are two ranges listed on the dipstick, ADD line and FULL line. Before opening power steering system, wipe the reservoir filler cap free of dirt and debris. Remove the cap and check the fluid level on its dipstick. When the fluid is at normal ambient temperature, approximately 21°C to 27°C (70°F to 80°F), the fluid level should read between the minimum and maximum area of the cold range. When the fluid is hot, fluid level is allowed to read up to the highest end of the HOT range. Only add fluid when the vehicle is cold. Fluid may read low on the dipstick at extremely low temperatures. Use only Mopar(R) ATF+4 Do not overfill the power steering system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooler - Removal Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Cooler - Removal REMOVAL 1. Siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the hose clamps (2). 4. Disconnect the hoses (1) at the cooler. 5. Remove the cooler mounting bolts (1). 6. Remove the cooler (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid Cooler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Fluid Cooler - Removal > Page 6404 Power Steering Fluid Cooler: Service and Repair Power Steering Fluid Cooler - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the cooler (2) to the vehicle. 2. Install the cooler mounting nuts (1). 3. Reconnect the hoses (1) at the cooler (3). 4. Reconnect the hose clamps (2). 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Refill the power steering system,See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Line/Hose: Specifications TORQUE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6408 Power Steering Line/Hose: Testing and Inspection POWER STEERING PUMP AND HOSES NOTE: This information is designed to be used in conjunction with the Steering diagnostic charts. See: Testing and Inspection CHECKING FOR WEAR OF POWER STEERING PUMP INTERNAL COMPONENTS 1. Place gear selector in PARK (or NEUTRAL) with wheels chalked. 2. With the engine idling, have a helper turn the steering wheel. 3. Using an electronic listening tool, determine if noise is coming from the pump. 4. Increase the engine speed and have a helper turn the steering wheel. Does the noise change with load? 5. Replace the power steering pump if excessive noise is present. See: Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Power Steering Pump - Removal CHECKING FOR POWER STEERING HOSES TOUCHING BODY OR FRAME OF VEHICLE Check hoses and hose tubes as following: - Inspect hoses and hose tubes for witness marks. If witness marks are present, adjust hose(s) to the proper position by loosening, repositioning and tightening attachments to the specified torque See: Power Steering Pump/Specifications. Do not bend tubing to adjust. Replace the hose assembly if damaged. - Check fastener torque of hose mounting brackets and tube nuts. See: Power Steering Pump/Specifications - Have a helper bump the steering gear off of the stops to induce pressure fluctuations which may move the hose. If hose contact is made, adjust hose(s) to the proper position by loosening, repositioning and tightening attachments to the specified torque See: Power Steering Pump/Specifications. Do not bend tubing to adjust. Replace the hose assembly if damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses - Removal Return Hose - Without Cooler RETURN HOSE - WITHOUT COOLER 1. Siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the return hose (4) at the gear (6). 4. Disconnect the return hose (4) at the reservoir (2). 5. Remove the return hose from the vehicle. Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE 1. Siphon the power steering system. 2. Remove the pressure hose (2) at the pump (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 6411 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the pressure hose (2) at the gear (4). 5. Remove the pressure hose from the vehicle. Return Hose - Gear To Cooler RETURN HOSE - GEAR TO COOLER 1. Siphon the power steering system. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Disconnect the return hose (6) at the gear (7). 4. Disconnect the return hose (6) at the cooler (1). 5. Remove the return hose from the vehicle. Return Hose - Cooler To Reservoir RETRUN HOSE - COOLER TO RESERVOIR Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 6412 1. Siphon the power steering system. 2. Disconnect the return hose (4) at the reservoir (2). 3. Disconnect the return hose (4) at the cooler (1). 4. Remove the return hose from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 6413 Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair Power Steering Hoses - Installation Return Hose - Without Cooler RETURN HOSE - WITHOUT COOLER 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose (4) at the reservoir (2). 3. Reconnect the return hose (4) at the gear (6). Tighten the tube nut to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 4. Route the return hose and secure. 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Refill the power steering system,See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair. Pressure Hose PRESSURE HOSE 1. Install the pressure hose (2) to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the pressure hose (2) at the gear (4). Tighten the tube nut to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 3. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 6414 4. Reconnect the pressure hose (2) at the pump (4). Tighten the tube nut to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 5. Refill the power steering system,See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair. Return Hose - Gear To Cooler RETURN HOSE - GEAR TO COOLER 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose (6) at the cooler (1) with hose clamps. 3. Reconnect the return hose (6) at the gear (7). Tighten the tube nut to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). 4. Route the return hose and secure. 5. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 6. Refill the power steering system,See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair. Return Hose - Cooler To Reservoir RETURN HOSE - COOLER TO RESERVOIR Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Line/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Hoses - Removal > Page 6415 1. Install the return hose to the vehicle. 2. Reconnect the return hose (4) at the cooler (1). 3. Reconnect the return hose (4) at the reservoir (2) with hose clamp. 4. Refill the power steering system,See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Pump: Specifications TORQUE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pump - Description Power Steering Pump: Description and Operation Power Steering Pump - Description DESCRIPTION The pump is connected to the steering gear via the pressure hose and the return hoses. The pump shaft has a pressed-on pulley that is belt driven by the crankshaft pulley. The power steering oil cooler is mounted to the front lower part of the radiator. NOTE: Power steering pumps are not interchangeable with pumps installed on other vehicles. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pump - Description > Page 6421 Power Steering Pump: Description and Operation Power Steering Pump - Operation OPERATION Hydraulic pressure is provided for the power steering gear by the belt driven power steering pump. The power steering pumps are constant flow rate and displacement, vane-type pumps. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis and Testing - Pump Leakage Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis and Testing - Pump Leakage PUMP LEAKAGE The pump is serviced as an assembly and should not be disassembled. Check for leaks in the following areas: - Pump shaft seal behind the pulley - Pump to reservoir O-ring - Reservoir cap - Pressure and return lines - Flow control valve fitting Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Diagnosis and Testing - Pump Leakage > Page 6424 Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis and Testing - Power Steering Pump and Hoses POWER STEERING PUMP AND HOSES NOTE: This information is designed to be used in conjunction with the Steering diagnostic charts. See: Testing and Inspection CHECKING FOR WEAR OF POWER STEERING PUMP INTERNAL COMPONENTS 1. Place gear selector in PARK (or NEUTRAL) with wheels chalked. 2. With the engine idling, have a helper turn the steering wheel. 3. Using an electronic listening tool, determine if noise is coming from the pump. 4. Increase the engine speed and have a helper turn the steering wheel. Does the noise change with load? 5. Replace the power steering pump if excessive noise is present. See: Service and Repair/Power Steering Pump - Removal CHECKING FOR POWER STEERING HOSES TOUCHING BODY OR FRAME OF VEHICLE Check hoses and hose tubes as following: - Inspect hoses and hose tubes for witness marks. If witness marks are present, adjust hose(s) to the proper position by loosening, repositioning and tightening attachments to the specified torque See: Specifications. Do not bend tubing to adjust. Replace the hose assembly if damaged. - Check fastener torque of hose mounting brackets and tube nuts. See: Specifications - Have a helper bump the steering gear off of the stops to induce pressure fluctuations which may move the hose. If hose contact is made, adjust hose(s) to the proper position by loosening, repositioning and tightening attachments to the specified torque See: Specifications. Do not bend tubing to adjust. Replace the hose assembly if damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump - Removal Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump - Removal REMOVAL 1. Drain and siphon the power steering fluid from the pump. 2. Remove the serpentine drive belt,See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal. 3. Remove the reservoir return hose (3) at the reservoir (1). 4. Remove the pressure hose (2) from the pump. 5. Remove 3 pump mounting bolts through pulley (1) access holes. 6. Remove the pump (4) from the engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump - Removal > Page 6427 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Align the pump (4) with the mounting holes on the engine. 2. Install 3 pump mounting bolts through the pulley access holes (1). Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the pressure hose (2) to the pump (4). Tighten the tube nut to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.). 4. Install reservoir return hose (3) to the reservoir (1). 5. Install the serpentine drive belt,See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation. 6. Fill the power steering pump,See: Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump - Removal > Page 6428 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Pulley - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not reuse the old power steering pump pulley it is not intended for reuse. A new pulley must be installed if removed. 1. Remove the power steering pump assembly, See: Power Steering Pump - Removal. 2. Remove the pulley (2) from the pump (1) using (OTC(R) 7185) power steering pulley removal tool (3) or equivalent. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Steering Pump - Removal > Page 6429 Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Power Steering Pump Pulley - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not reuse the old power steering pump pulley it is not intended for reuse. A new pulley must be installed if removed. 1. Replace the pulley if it's bent, cracked, or loose. 2. Install the pulley (2) on the pump (1) using (OTC(R) 7771) power steering pulley installation tool (3) or equivalent making sure it is flush with the end of the shaft. Ensure the tool and pulley remain aligned with the pump shaft. 3. Install the power steering pump assembly, See: Power Steering Pump - Installation. 4. Run engine until warm (5 min.) and note any belt chirp. If chirp exists, move pulley outward approximately 0.5 mm (0.020 in.). If noise increases, press on 1.0 mm (0.040 in.). Be careful that pulley does not contact mounting bolts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Tilt Wheel Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tilt Wheel Handle: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the tilt lever handle. 2. Remove the steering column opening cover See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Opening Cover - Removal. 3. Remove the lower shroud. NOTE: Use special care not to pry on the clockspring electrical connector when removing or installing the mounting screw located next to the clockspring. 4. Remove the two mounting screws (3) from the tilt lever knob release bracket (1). 5. Disconnect the electrical harness plastic mounting tab (2) from the bracket (1). 6. Unsnap the cable (2) from the bracket (1). 7. Remove the end of the cable (2) from the tilt lever knob release bracket (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Tilt Wheel Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6435 Tilt Wheel Handle: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Route the cable (2) into the tilt lever release knob bracket (1). 2. Snap the cable end (2) into the bracket (1). NOTE: Use special care not to pry on the clockspring electrical connector when removing or installing the mounting screw located next to the clockspring. NOTE: New screws should be used when installing the tilt lever release knob bracket to the column. 3. Install the tilt lever release knob bracket (1) to the column and install the two new mounting screws (3) Tighten the two new screws to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.). 4. Install the electrical harness plastic mounting tab (2) to the bracket (1). 5. Install the lower shroud. 6. Install the steering column opening cover See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Steering Column Opening Cover - Installation. 7. Install the tilt lever handle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Specifications Steering Gear: Specifications TORQUE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Steering Gear: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A rack and pinion steering gears is made up of two main components, the pinon shaft and the rack. Other components are the outer tie rod ends (3&5), inner tie rods (1&2), Mounting Bushings and the boots (4). The gear cannot be adjusted or internally serviced. If a malfunction or a fluid leak occurs, the gear must be replaced as an assembly. The only serviceable component on the steering gear is the outer tie rod ends (3&5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6441 Steering Gear: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The steering column shaft is attached to the gear pinion. The rotation of the pinion moves the gear rack from side-to-side. This lateral action of the rack pushes and pulls the tie rods to change the direction of the front wheels. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear - Removal Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear - Removal REMOVAL 1. Siphon out as much power steering fluid as possible from the pump. 2. Lock the steering wheel. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Remove the front tires. 5. Remove the nuts (1) from the tie rod ends (4). 6. Separate tie rod ends (2) from the knuckles with Puller C3894-A (1)See: Tie Rod/Tie Rod End/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Tie Rod End - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear - Removal > Page 6444 7. Remove the steering gear pinch bolt (1). 8. Remove the lower steering coupling (2) from the steering gear (3). 9. Turn the steering gear to the full right position. NOTE: Protect the end of hoses to prevent contamination to the system and damage to the o-rings. 10. Remove the power steering lines (2&3) from the gear (4). See: Power Steering/Power Steering Line/Hose/Service and Repair/Power Steering Hoses - Removal. 11. Remove the steering gear mounting bolts (2) and nuts (5). 12. Tip the gear (6) forward to allow clearance and move to the right then tip the gear downward on the left side to remove from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear - Removal > Page 6445 Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before installing gear inspect bushings and replace if worn or damaged. 1. Install gear (6) to the vehicle and tighten mounting nuts (5) and bolts (2) to 258 Nm (190 ft. lbs.). 2. Install power steering lines (2&3) to steering gear (4) and tighten the pressure hose to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.) and tighten the return hose to 37 Nm (27 ft. lbs.). See: Power Steering/Power Steering Line/Hose/Service and Repair/Power Steering Hoses - Installation. 3. Slide the shaft coupler (1) onto gear (4). Install new bolt (1) and tighten to 57 Nm (42 ft. lbs.). 4. Clean tie rod end studs and knuckle tapers (5). 5. Install tie rod ends (2) into the steering knuckles (5) and tighten the nuts (1) to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). See: Tie Rod/Tie Rod End/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Tie Rod End - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Gear - Removal > Page 6446 6. Install the front tires. 7. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 8. Unlock the steering wheel. 9. Fill system with fluid, See: Power Steering/Power Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair. 10. Adjust the toe position. See: Alignment/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling Shaft Steering Shaft Coupler: Service and Repair Steering Coupling Shaft Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Lock the steering wheel with the tire in the straight position. 3. Remove and discard the upper pinch bolt (2) from the upper coupling at the column (1). 4. Lower the steering coupler shaft (3) from the column (1). 5. Remove the toe plate (5) nuts (6). 6. Remove and discard the lower coupler pinch bolt (4) from the lower steering coupling shaft (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling Shaft > Page 6451 7. Remove the steering coupling shaft (3) from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the upper steering coupling shaft (3) to the vehicle. NOTE: A new steering coupling shaft pinch bolt for the upper and lower shafts must be used. 2. Install the upper coupling (7) to the column (1). 3. Install the upper pinch bolt (2) use a new bolt and tighten to 57 N.m (42 ft.lbs). 4. Install the toe plate (5) nuts (6) and tighten to 12 N.m (105 in.lbs). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling Shaft > Page 6452 5. Install the shaft (1) to the lower coupling (2). 6. Install the lower pinch bolt (4) use new bolt and tighten to 57 N.m (42 ft.lbs). 7. Unlock the steering wheel. 8. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling Shaft > Page 6453 Steering Shaft Coupler: Service and Repair Steering Coupling - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Lock the steering wheel with the tire in the straight position. 4. Remove and discard the lower coupling (2) upper pinch bolt (4). 5. Remove and discard the lower coupling (2) pinch bolt (1). 6. Remove the lower steering shaft coupling (2) from the steering gear (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Steering Coupling Shaft > Page 6454 Steering Shaft Coupler: Service and Repair Steering Coupling - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the coupling (2) to the steering gear (3). 2. Install the lower pinch bolt (1) and tighten to 57 Nm (42 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the other end of the coupling (2) to the steering shaft (1). NOTE: New pinch bolts must be used for reinstallation. 4. Install the upper pinch bolt (4) and tighten to 57 Nm (42 ft. lbs.). 5. Lower the vehicle. 6. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 7. Unlock the steering wheel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disable and remove the driver's side airbag (3).See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal. 2. Partially remove the steering wheel bolt (2) and leave the bolt in the column. 3. Install puller CJ98-1(2) or equivalent using the top of the bolt to push on. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6459 4. Remove and discard the steering wheel bolt (4). 5. Remove the steering wheel (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6460 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Do not reuse the old steering wheel bolt (4) (a new bolt must be used) NOTE: Make sure to align the spline on the steering wheel hub to the column shaft. 1. Install steering wheel (3) to the column (6). NOTE: Be certain that the steering wheel mounting bolt is tightened to the proper torque specification to ensure proper clockspring operation. 2. Install the new steering wheel bolt (4). Tighten the bolt to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the driver's side air bag (3) to the steering wheel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Tie Rod End: Testing and Inspection TIE ROD Tie rod free-play can be measured using the following hand methods: NOTE: When checking free-play, DO NOT rotate the tie rod. Just because a tie rod rotates easily, it is not necessarily faulty. NOTE: Always check and repair (if necessary) outer tie rod free-play before checking inner tie rod free-play. False results can otherwise be obtained. OUTER TIE ROD Grasp the outer tie rod near the ball stud and attempt to move the tie rod straight up and down. If any free-play is felt, replace the outer tie rod See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Tie Rod End - Removal. If no free-play is felt at the outer tie rod, attempt to move the inner tie rod in the same manner. Refer to the following procedure. INNER TIE ROD Grasp the inner tie rod near the steering gear bellows and attempt to move the tie rod straight up and down. If any free-play is felt, replace the inner tie rod end See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Tie Rod End - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Tie Rod End: Removal and Replacement Outer Tie Rod End OUTER TIE ROD END NOTE: Do not twist the boot anytime during removal or installation. 1. Loosen the jam nut (3). 2. Remove the outer tie rod end (2) nut (1) from the ball stud. 3. Separate the outer tie rod end (2) from the knuckle with Remover C3894-A (1). 4. Unthread the outer tie rod end (2) from the inner tie rod (3). Count the number of turns when removing the tie rod end, This will give a good starting point when reassembiling and toe adjustment. Inner Tie Rod End INNER TIE ROD END Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6467 1. Remove the outer tie rod end (2) with special tool C-3894-A or equivalentCount the number of turns when removing, this will aid in setting the toe after installation. See: Tie Rod End - Removal. 2. Remove the jam nut. 3. Remove the clamps (1) for the inner tie rod boot (2). 4. Remove the boot (2). 5. Install the special tool # 10087-3 socket (1) and # 10087-2 Tube (2) and remove the inner tie rod end. Outer Tie Rod End OUTER TIE ROD END Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6468 NOTE: Do not twist the boot at anytime during removal or installation. 1. Thread the outer tie rod end (2) onto the inner tie rod (4), to it's original position. 2. Install the outer tie rod end into the steering knuckle (5). 3. Tighten the ball stud nut (1) on the ball stud to 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.). 4. Set wheel toe pattern, See: Alignment/Service and Repair. 5. Tighten jam nut (3) to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). Inner Tie Rod End INNER TIE ROD END 1. Thread the inner tie rod to the rack & pinion. 2. Tighten the inner tie rod end using special tool # 10087-3 socket (1) and # 10087-2 tube (2) to 169 Nm (125 ft.lbs.). 3. Install the inner tie rod end boot (2) and reclamp (1) to the tie rod (3) and rack. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod End > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6469 4. Install the jam nut (1) to the inner tie rod end (2). 5. Install the outer tie rod (3) the same number of turns when removed See: Tie Rod End - Installation. 6. Install the front wheels. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Perform toe adjustment. 9. Tighten the jam nut (1) after toe adjustment. Tighten to 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications BALL JOINT WEAR LIMIT Max travel ............................................................................................................................................ .................................................... 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Upper Ball Joint Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Front Upper Ball Joint UPPER BALL JOINT 1. Raise the front of the vehicle. Place safety floor stands under both lower control arms as far outboard as possible. Lower the vehicle to allow the stands to support some or all of the vehicle weight. 2. Remove the front tires. 3. Mount a dial indicator (1) solidly to the frame and then zero the dial indicator. 4. Position dial indicator plunger on the topside of the upper ball joint (5). NOTE: The dial indicator plunger must be perpendicular to the machined surface of the ball joint. NOTE: Use care not to pry or tear the ball joint boot, when checking the free play. 5. Position a pry bar (3) between the steering knuckle (4) and the upper control arm (2). Pry upwards on the upper control arm. 6. If the travel exceeds 0.5 mm (0.020 in.), replace the upper control arm since the upper ball joint is integral to the arm See: Control Arm/Service and Repair/Front Upper Control Arm - Removal. 7. If the upper ball joint is within specs reinstall the front tires See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Front Upper Ball Joint > Page 6476 Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Front Lower Ball Joint LOWER BALL JOINT NOTE: If the ball joint is equipped with a lubrication fitting, grease the joint then road test the vehicle before performing test. 1. Raise the front of the vehicle. Place safety floor stands under both lower control arms as far outboard as possible. Lower the vehicle to allow the stands to support some or all of the vehicle weight. 2. Mount a dial indicator solidly to the topside of the lower control arm and then zero the dial indicator. 3. Position the indicator plunger against the bottom surface of the steering knuckle. NOTE: The dial indicator plunger must be perpendicular to the machined surface of the steering knuckle. 4. Position a pry bar under the tire assembly. Pry upwards on the tire assembly. 5. If the travel exceeds 0.5 mm (0.020 in.), replace the lower ball joint See: Service and Repair/Front Lower Ball Joint - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lower Ball Joint - Removal Ball Joint: Service and Repair Front Lower Ball Joint - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 2. Remove the brake caliper and rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal. 3. Remove the outer tie rod retaining nut (1) from the knuckle (5). 4. Separate the tie rod (2) from the steering knuckle using puller C-3894-A (1)See: Steering/Tie Rod/Tie Rod End/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Tie Rod End - Removal. 5. Remove the upper ball joint nut, then separate the upper ball joint (1) from the knuckle (3) using puller 8677 (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lower Ball Joint - Removal > Page 6479 6. Remove the lower ball joint nut, then separate the lower ball joint (3) from the steering knuckle (1) using puller 8677 (2). 7. Remove the steering knuckle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Steering Knuckle - Removal. 8. Move the halfshaft to the side and support the halfshaft out of the way 4X4 only. 9. Remove the snap ring (3) from the ball joint flange (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lower Ball Joint - Removal > Page 6480 NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 10. Press the ball joint (3) from the lower control arm (4) using special tools C-4212-F (PRESS) (1), 8445-3 (Driver) (2) and 9604 (Receiver) (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lower Ball Joint - Removal > Page 6481 Ball Joint: Service and Repair Front Lower Ball Joint - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 1. Install the ball joint (3) into the control arm and press in using special tools C-4212-F (press) (1), 8441-4 (Receiver) (2) and 9654-1 (Driver) (4). 2. Install the snap ring (3) around the ball joint flange (2). 3. Remove the support for the halfshaft and install into position 4X4 only. 4. Install the steering knuckle See: Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair/Front Steering Knuckle - Installation. 5. Install the tie rod end (2) into the steering knuckle (5), then install the retaining nut (1) and tighten to 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.)See: Steering/Tie Rod/Tie Rod End/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Tie Rod End - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Lower Ball Joint - Removal > Page 6482 6. Install and tighten the halfshaft nut to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.). (If Equipped). 7. Install the brake caliper and rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation. 8. Install the tire and wheel assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 9. Check the vehicle ride height See: Alignment/Service and Repair. 10. Perform a wheel alignment See: Alignment/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Removal Lower Control Arm Bushing LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING 1. Remove the lower control arm (6)See: Service and Repair/Front Lower Control Arm - Removal. 2. Secure the control arm in a vise. NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 3. Install special tools C-4212-F (press) (1), 9334-5 (Receiver) (2), 9603-3 (Driver) (5) to press the bushing out of the lower control arm. Upper Control Arm Bushing UPPER CONTROL ARM BUSHING Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6488 1. Remove the upper control arm (4) See: Service and Repair/Front Upper Control Arm - Removal. 2. Secure the control arm in a vise (7). NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 3. Install special tools C-4212-F (press) (6), 6761(Receiver) (1), 9601-2 (Reaction Plate) (2), 9601-1 (Driver) (5) to press the bushing (3) out of the upper control arm (4). Lower Control Arm Shock Bushing LOWER CONTROL ARM SHOCK BUSHING Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6489 1. Remove the shock See: Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Front Strut / Shock/Removal. NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. 2. Install special tools to press the bushing (3) out of the lower control arm (4) using special tools C-4212-F (Press) (1), 9653-1 (driver) (4) and 9653-2 (Receiver) (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6490 Control Arm Bushing: Service and Repair Installation Lower Control Arm Bushing LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING 1. Install the new bushing (4) into the lower control arm (3) using tools C-4212-F (Press) (1), 9603-2 (Depth Gauge) (2), 9603-1 (Driver) (5). 2. Remove the control arm from the vise. 3. Install the lower control arm (6) See: Service and Repair/Front Lower Control Arm - Installation. 4. Reset the vehicle ride height See: Alignment/Service and Repair. 5. Perform a wheel alignment See: Alignment/Service and Repair. Upper Control Arm Bushing UPPER CONTROL ARM BUSHING Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6491 1. Install the new bushing (2) into the lower control (3) arm using tools C-4212-F (Press) (5), 9601-3 (Depth Gauge) (4), 9601-4 (Driver) (1). 2. Remove the control arm from the vise (6). 3. Install the upper control arm (4) See: Service and Repair/Front Upper Control Arm - Installation. 4. Reset the vehicle ride height See: Alignment/Service and Repair. 5. Perform a wheel alignment See: Alignment/Service and Repair. Lower Control Arm Shock Bushing LOWER CONTROL ARM SHOCK BUSHING NOTE: Extreme pressure lubrication must be used on the threaded portions of the tool. This will increase the longevity of the tool and insure proper operation during the removal and installation process. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6492 1. Install the new shock bushing (4) into the lower control arm (3) using tools C-4212-F (Press) (1), 9653-3 (driver) (5), 9602 (Depth gauge) (2) the depth gauge will automatically set the depth of the bushing (4) in the control arm (3). 2. Install the shock See: Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Front Strut / Shock/Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crossmember - Removal Cross-Member: Service and Repair Crossmember - Removal REMOVAL 1. Lift and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the four bolts (2) and nuts (1), and remove the crossmember. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crossmember - Removal > Page 6497 Cross-Member: Service and Repair Crossmember - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the crossmember (3) and install the bolts (2) and nuts (1). 2. Tighten the bolts and nuts to 102 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Front Steering Knuckle: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The knuckle is a single casting with legs machined for the upper and lower ball joints. The knuckle also has machined mounting locations for the front brake calipers and hub bearing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6502 Front Steering Knuckle: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The steering knuckle pivot between the upper and lower ball joint. Steering linkage attached to the knuckle allows the vehicle to be steered. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal, shield and ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal. 4. Remove the front halfshaft nut 4X4 only. 5. Remove the tie rod end nut (1). 6. Separate the tie rod (2) from the knuckle with puller C-3894-A (1). CAUTION: When installing puller 8677 to separate the ball joint, be careful not to damage the ball joint seal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 6505 7. Remove the upper ball joint nut (1). 8. Separate the ball joint (1) from the knuckle (3) with puller 8677 (2). 9. Install an hydraulic jack to support the lower control arm. 10. Remove the lower ball joint nut (6). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 6506 11. Separate the ball joint (3) from the knuckle (1) with puller 8677 (2) and remove the knuckle (1). 12. Remove the hub/bearing bolts (2) from the knuckle (1). 13. Remove the hub/bearing from the steering knuckle (1) See: Wheel Bearing/Service and Repair/Front Hub / Bearing - Removal. 14. Remove the steering knuckle (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 6507 Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: The ball joint stud tapers must be CLEAN and DRY before installing the knuckle. Clean the stud tapers with mineral spirits to remove dirt and grease. 1. Install the hub/bearing to the steering knuckle and tighten the bolts (1) to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 2. Install the knuckle (7) onto the upper (2) and lower ball joints (5). 3. Install the upper (1) ball joint nut. Tighten the nut to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the lower ball joint nut (6). Tighten the nut to 129 Nm (95 ft. lbs.). 5. Remove the hydraulic jack from the lower control arm (4). 6. Install the tie rod end (2) and tighten the nut (1) to 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Steering Knuckle - Removal > Page 6508 7. Install the front halfshaft (2) into the hub/bearing 4X4 only. 8. Install the the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) 4X4 only. 9. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation and brake shield, rotor and caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation. 10. Install the wheel and tire assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 11. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. 12. Perform a wheel alignment See: Alignment/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Link - Removal Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Stabilizer Link - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the lower nut (5). 3. Remove the upper nut, retainers and grommets from the stabilizer bar (3). 4. Remove the stabilizer link (1) from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Stabilizer Link - Removal > Page 6514 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Front Stabilizer Link - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the stabilizer link (1) to the vehicle. 2. Install the retainers, grommets and upper nut to the stabilizer bar (3) and Tighten to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the lower nut (5) and Tighten to 102 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). 4. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Front Suspension Front Spring - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the shock See: Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Front Strut / Shock/Removal. 2. Install the shock assembly in the Branick 7200(R) spring removal/installation tool or equivalent (1). 3. Compress the spring (2). 4. Position shock nut wrench 9362 (2), on shock shaft retaining nut. Next, insert 8 mm socket though Wrench onto hex located on end of shock shaft. While holding shock shaft from turning, remove nut from shock shaft using Wrench. 5. Remove the upper shock nut. 6. Remove the shock. 7. Remove the shock upper mounting plate. 8. Remove and inspect the upper and lower spring isolators. Front Spring - Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6519 1. Install the lower isolator. 2. Install the upper isolator. 3. Position the shock into the coil spring. 4. Install the upper shock mounting plate. 5. Install shock nut wrench 9362 (2) (on end of a torque wrench), on shock shaft retaining nut. Next, insert 8 mm socket though Wrench onto hex located on end of shock shaft. While holding shock shaft from turning, tighten nut using Wrench to 45 Nm (33 ft. lbs.) torque. 6. Install the shock upper mounting nut. 7. Decompress the spring (2). 8. Remove the shock assembly from the spring compressor tool (1) or equivalent. 9. Install the shock assembly See: Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Front Strut / Shock/Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6520 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Service and Repair Rear Suspension Rear Spring - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: The rear of the vehicle must be lifted only with a jack or hoist. The lift must be placed under the frame rail crossmember located aft of the rear axle. Use care to avoid bending the side rail flange. 1. Raise the vehicle at the frame. 2. Use a hydraulic jack to relieve the axle weight. 3. Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. 4. Remove the nuts (2), the U-bolts (1) and spring plate (4) from the axle. 5. Loosen and remove the bolt (1) and then remove the flag nut through the access hole (3) in the bracket from the spring front eye (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6521 6. Remove the nut and bolt (3) that attaches the spring shackle (5) to the rear frame bracket (4). 7. Remove the spring (6) from the vehicle. 8. Remove the shackle (2) from the spring (6). Rear Spring - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: The rear of the vehicle must be lifted only with a jack or hoist. The lift must be placed under the frame rail crossmember located aft of the rear axle. Use care to avoid bending the side rail flange. 1. Install the spring shackle (2) on the spring (6) finger tight. 2. Position the spring (6) on the rear axle pad. Make sure the spring center bolt is inserted in the pad locating hole. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6522 3. Align front spring eye (2) with the bolt hole in the front frame bracket. Install the spring eye bolt (1) and flag nut through the access hole in the frame (3) and tighten the bolt (1) finger-tight. 4. Align spring shackle eye with the bolt hole in the rear frame bracket (4). Install the bolt (3) and nut and tighten the spring shackle eye nut finger-tight. 5. Install the U-bolts (1), spring plate (4) and nuts (2). 6. Tighten the U-bolt nuts (2) to 149 Nm (110 ft. lbs.). 7. Install the wheel and tire assemblies. See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 8. Remove the support stands from under the frame rails. Lower the vehicle until the springs are supporting the weight of the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6523 9. Tighten the front spring eye bolt (1) and flagnut to 170 Nm (125 ft. lbs.). 10. Tighten the rear spring eye to shackle bolt and nut (2) and the shackle to frame bolt (3) and nut to 170 Nm (125 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Testing and Inspection SHOCK A knocking or rattling noise from a shock absorber may be caused by movement between mounting bushings and metal brackets or attaching components. These noises can usually be stopped by tightening the attaching nuts. If the noise persists, inspect for damaged and worn bushings, and attaching components. Repair as necessary if any of these conditions exist. A squeal noise from the shock absorber may be caused by the hydraulic valving and may be intermittent. This condition is not repairable and the shock absorber must be replaced. A squeak or creak noise coming from the shock area may be related to any of the suspension components or mounts, but not necessarily the shock. NOTE: When inspecting the shock absorber, do not clamp the body or the piston rod. NOTE: Monotube shock absorber compression forces will be much higher than standard shock absorbers. The shock absorbers are not refillable or adjustable. If a malfunction occurs, the shock absorber must be replaced. To check a shock absorber, grasp the tube and invert the shock so the piston rod touches the ground, then compress the shock four or five times. The action throughout each stroke should be smooth and even, and the piston rod should extend from the shock on its own. The shock absorber bushings do not require any type of lubrication. Do not attempt to stop bushing noise by lubricating them. Grease and mineral oil-base lubricants will deteriorate the bushing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Front Strut / Shock Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the upper shock nuts (1). 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove the tire and wheel assembly. 4. Remove the disc brake caliper mounting bolts. 5. Remove the wheel speed sensor routing clip. 6. Remove the upper ball joint nut and separate the ball joint (1) from the knuckle (3) using special tool 8677 (2). 7. Support the lower control arm outboard end. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock > Page 6529 8. Remove the stabilizer link lower nut (5) and then separate the stabilizer link (1) from the lower control arm (6) to gain access to the lower shock nut (3) See: Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and Repair/Front Stabilizer Link - Removal. 9. Remove the lower shock bolt (4) and nut (3). 10. Remove the shock (2). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: All suspension components should be tighten with the weight of the vehicle on them (curb height). 1. Install the upper part of the shock (2) into the frame bracket. 2. Install the upper shock module nuts (1). Tighten to 61 Nm (45 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock > Page 6530 3. Install the lower part of the shock module (2) into the lower control arm shock bushing. 4. Position shock module (2) to lower control (6). Install bolt (4) so head of bolt is facing rear of vehicle and hand start nut (3). Tighten the bolt (4) & nut (3) to 210 Nm (155 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the stabilizer link lower nut (5) to the lower control arm (6). Tighten the nut to 102 Nm (75 ft. lbs.).See: Stabilizer Bar/Stabilizer Link/Service and Repair/Front Stabilizer Link - Installation. 6. Insert ball joint (6) in steering knuckle (7) and tighten ball joint nut to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 7. Reposition the wheel speed wire (5) into the retaining brackets (3). 8. Install the caliper slide pin bolts (2). Tighten to 32 Nm (24 ft. lbs.) 9. Remove the support from the lower control arm outboard end. 10. Install the tire and wheel assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 11. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock > Page 6531 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Service and Repair Rear Shock Absorber Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise vehicle and support the axle. 2. Remove the upper shock bolt (1) and nut (2). 3. Remove the lower shock bolt (1) and nut (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock > Page 6532 4. Remove the rear shock absorber (6) from the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the shock absorber (6) to the vehicle. 2. Install the bolt (1) through the frame bracket and the shock (3). Install the nut (2) to the top bolt (1). Tighten to 95 N.m (70 ft. lbs.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Strut / Shock > Page 6533 3. Install the bolt (1) through the axle bracket and the shock (3). Install the nut (2) to the bolt (1). Tighten to 95 N.m (70 ft. lbs.) 4. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Suspension Travel Bumper: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the bolts (2) securing the jounce bumper (1). 3. Remove the jounce bumper (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Travel Bumper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6538 Suspension Travel Bumper: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the jounce bumper (1) and bolts (2). Tighten to 61 Nm (45 ft.lbs.). 2. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Mopar Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper and rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal. 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal. 5. Remove the halfshaft nut 4X4 only. NOTE: Do not strike the knuckle with a hammer to remove the tie rod end or the ball joint. Damage to the steering knuckle will occur. 6. Pull down on the steering knuckle to separate the halfshaft from the hub/bearing. 4X4 only 7. Remove the three hub/bearing mounting bolts (3) from the steering knuckle (4). 8. Slide the hub/bearing (1) out of the steering knuckle (4). 9. Remove the brake dust shield (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 6544 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the brake dust shield (5). 2. Install the hub/bearing (1) into the steering knuckle (4) and tighten the bolts (3) to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation. 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor (2) if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation. 5. Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) 4X4 only. 6. Install the wheel and tire assembly See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 7. Remove the support and lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications HALFSHAFT NUT TORQUE Halfshaft nut ........................................................................................................................................ ................................................. 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair STANDARD PROCEDURE - HOISTING RECOMMENDATIONS WARNING: The hoisting and jack lifting points provided are for a complete vehicle. When a chassis or drivetrain component is removed from a vehicle, the center of gravity is altered making some hoisting conditions unstable. Properly support or secure vehicle to hoisting device when these conditions exist. FLOOR JACK LIFT POINTS CAUTION: Do not attempt to lift a vehicle with a floor jack positioned under: - An axle tube. - Aluminum differential. - A body side sill. - A steering linkage component. - A drive shaft. - The engine or transmission oil pan. - The fuel tank. - A front suspension arm. When properly positioned, a floor jack can be used to lift a Dakota vehicle. Support the vehicle in the raised position with jack stands at the front and rear ends of the frame rails. HOIST A vehicle can be lifted with: - A single-post, frame-contact hoist. - A twin-post, chassis hoist. - A ramp-type, drive-on hoist. NOTE: When a frame-contact type hoist is used, verify that the lifting pads are positioned properly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6559 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6562 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6563 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: A new TPM sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new TPM sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activation the TPM sensor. If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional TPM, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the speedometer dial face to the left of the speedometer needle hub in the instrument cluster overlay. The TPM indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of an icon that represents a cross-section of a tire with a centered exclamation point in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The TPM indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6569 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the TPM system. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TPM indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the TPM indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM sends an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message to the cluster to illuminate the TPM indicator for about three seconds as a bulb test. - TPM Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message from the SKREEM, the TPM indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the SKREEM or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no TPM lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the SKREEM for six consecutive seconds, the TPM indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message is received from the SKREEM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the TPM indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The SKREEM performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to decide whether the TPM system is in good operating condition and whether the tire inflation pressures are too high or too low. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the TPM indicator after the bulb test, it indicates that the inflation pressure of a tire is too low or that a malfunction has occurred and the TPM system is ineffective. For proper diagnosis of the TPM system, the SKREEM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to TPM indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6575 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6578 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6579 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: A new TPM sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new TPM sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activation the TPM sensor. If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Specifications Tires: Specifications TIRE REVOLUTIONS PER MILE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Pressure Gauges Tires: Description and Operation Pressure Gauges PRESSURE GAUGES A quality air pressure gauge is recommended to check tire pressure. After checking the air pressure, replace valve cap finger tight. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Pressure Gauges > Page 6585 Tires: Description and Operation Tires - Description Tires TIRES Tires are designed and engineered for each specific vehicle. They provide the best overall performance for normal operation. The ride and handling characteristics match the vehicle's requirements. With proper care they will give excellent reliability, traction, skid resistance, and tread life. Driving habits have more effect on tire life than any other factor. Careful drivers will obtain in most cases, much greater mileage than severe use or careless drivers. A few of the driving habits which will shorten the life of any tire are: - Rapid acceleration - Severe brake applications - High speed driving - Excessive speeds on turns - Striking curbs and other obstacles Radial-ply tires are more prone to irregular tread wear. It is important to follow the tire rotation interval See: Service and Repair/Procedures. This will help to achieve a greater tread life. TIRE IDENTIFICATION Tire type, size, aspect ratio and speed rating are encoded in the letters and numbers imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Refer to the chart to decipher the tire identification code. Performance tires have a speed rating letter after the aspect ratio number. The speed rating is not always printed on the tire sidewall. These ratings are: - Q up to 99 mph - S up to 112 mph - T up to 118 mph - U up to 124 mph - H up to 130 mph V up to 149 mph W (consult the tire manufacturer for the specific speed rating) - Z more than 149 mph (consult the tire manufacturer for the specific speed rating) An All Season type tire will have either M + S, M & S or M-S (indicating mud and snow traction) imprinted on the side wall. TIRE CHAINS Tire snow chains may be used on certain models. Refer to the Owner's Manual for more information. Radial-Ply Tires RADIAL-PLY TIRES Radial-ply tires improve handling, tread life and ride quality, and decrease rolling resistance. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Pressure Gauges > Page 6586 Radial-ply tires must always be used in sets of four. Under no circumstances should they be used on the front only. They may be mixed with temporary spare tires when necessary. A maximum speed of 80 KPH (50 MPH) is recommended while a temporary spare is in use. Radial-ply tires have the same load-carrying capacity as other types of tires of the same size. They also use the same recommended inflation pressures. The use of oversized tires, either in the front or rear of the vehicle, can cause vehicle drive train failure. This could also cause inaccurate wheel speed signals when the vehicle is equipped with Anti-Lock Brakes. The use of tires from different manufactures on the same vehicle is NOT recommended. The proper tire pressure should be maintained on all four tires. Tire Inflation Pressures TIRE INFLATION PRESSURES WARNING: Over or under inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and tread wear. This may cause the tire to fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Under inflation will cause rapid shoulder wear (1), tire flexing, and possible tire failure. Over inflation will cause rapid center wear (1) reduction in the tire's ability to cushion shocks. Improper inflation can cause: - Uneven wear patterns Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Description and Operation > Pressure Gauges > Page 6587 - Reduced tread life - Reduced fuel economy - Unsatisfactory ride - Vehicle drift For proper tire pressure specification refer to the tire label placard usually located on the drivers door latch pillar. Spare / Temporary Tire SPARE / TEMPORARY TIRE The temporary spare tire is designed for emergency use only. The original tire should be repaired or replaced at the first opportunity, then reinstalled. Do not exceed speeds of 80 KMH (50 MPH). when using the temporary spare tire. Refer to Owner's Manual for complete details. Full Size, Spare Wheel With Matching Tire FULL SIZE, SPARE WHEEL WITH MATCHING TIRE The spare is a full usage wheel with a matching tire. It can be used within the (posted legal) speed limits or distance limitations as of the rest of the vehicles four tires. Replacement Tires REPLACEMENT TIRES The original equipment tires provide a proper balance of many characteristics such as: - Ride - Noise - Handling - Durability - Tread life - Traction - Rolling resistance - Speed capability It is recommended that tires equivalent to the original equipment tires be used when replacement is needed. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety and handling of the vehicle. The use of oversize tires may cause interference with vehicle components. Under extremes of suspension and steering travel, interference with vehicle components may cause tire damage. WARNING: Failure to equip the vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators Tires: Testing and Inspection Tread Wear Indicators TREAD WEAR INDICATORS Tread wear indicators (3) are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. When tread depth is 1.6 mm (1/16 in.), the tread wear indicators (3) will appear as a 13 mm (1/2 in.) band. Tire replacement is necessary when indicators appear in two or more grooves or if localized balding occurs. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators > Page 6590 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Wear Patterns TIRE WEAR PATTERNS Under inflation will cause wear on the shoulders of tire. Over inflation will cause wear at the center of tire. Excessive camber causes the tire to run at an angle to the road. One side of tread is then worn more than the other. Excessive toe-in or toe-out causes wear on the tread edges and a feathered effect across the tread. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators > Page 6591 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire Noise Or Vibration TIRE NOISE OR VIBRATION Radial-ply tires are sensitive to force impulses caused by improper mounting, vibration, wheel defects, or possibly tire imbalance. To find out if tires are causing the noise or vibration, drive the vehicle over a smooth road at varying speeds. Note the noise level during acceleration and deceleration. The engine, differential and exhaust noises will change as speed varies, while the tire noise will usually remain constant. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tread Wear Indicators > Page 6592 Tires: Testing and Inspection Tire / Vehicle Lead TIRE/VEHICLE LEAD Use the following Vehicle Lead Diagnosis And Correction Chart to diagnose and correct a vehicle lead or drift problem. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Tires: Procedures TIRES Remove the protective coating on the tires before delivery of a vehicle. This coating may cause deterioration of the tires. To remove the protective coating, apply warm water and let it soak for a few minutes. Afterwards, scrub the coating away with a soft bristle brush. Steam cleaning may also be used to remove the coating. NOTE: DO NOT use gasoline, mineral oil, oil-based solvent or a wire brush for cleaning. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tires > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6595 Tires: Removal and Replacement TIRE REPAIR AREA For proper repairing, a radial tire must be removed from the wheel. Repairs should only be made if the defect, or puncture, is in the tread area (1). The tire should be replaced if the puncture is located in the sidewall. Deflate tire completely before removing the tire from the wheel. Use lubrication such as a mild soap solution when dismounting or mounting tire. Use tools free of burrs or sharp edges which could damage the tire or wheel rim. Before mounting tire on wheel, make sure all rust is removed from the rim bead and repaint if necessary. Install wheel on vehicle, and tighten to proper torque specification. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information NUMBER: 22-002-09 GROUP: Wheels/Tires DATE: July 29, 2009 SUBJECT: Chrome Clad Wheel Adapters For Proper Balancing OVERVIEW: This bulletin describes the use of proper wheel adapters when mounting Chrome Clad wheels to wheel balancing equipment. MODELS: 2004-2008 (CS) Pacifica 2007 - 2009 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2007 - 2010 DC) Ram Truck (3500 Chassis Cab) 2005 - 2009 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2004 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2007-2009 (HG) Aspen 2009-2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2008 - 2010 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2010 (JS41) Sebring/Avenger 2007-2010 (KA) Nitro 2002-2007 (KJ) Liberty 2002 - 2007 (KJ) Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2009 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2005 - 2010 (LE) 300C/300C Touring (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005-2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2001 (PM) Caliber 2001 - 2009 (PT) Chrysler PT Cruiser 2001 - 2007 (RG) Chrysler Voyager (International Markets) 2001 - 2007 (RS) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 - 2010 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Wheels/Tires - Chrome Clad Wheel Balancing Information > Page 6600 2008 - 2010 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005-2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (XH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander NOTE: This information applies to any model equipped with Chrome Clad Wheels. DISCUSSION: Models equipped with Chrome Clad wheels require specific piloting on balance equipment to properly center the wheel and prevent damage to the chrome clad surface. The chrome cladding is not removable or replaceable and has cladding tabs that extend into the wheel bore. Traditional high-taper cones will come into contact with the cladding tabs rather than properly seat on the hub bore chamfer. Many modern aluminum wheel designs cannot be mounted with traditional cones. Direct-Fit Collets should be used to properly mount clad wheels on balance equipment (Fig 1). SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: NOTE: This kit includes the adapters for all Dodge, Chrysler & Jeep models with clad wheels. Individual adapters for specific wheel sizes can be ordered separately. To order a kit or individual adapters, contact Pentastar Service Equipment @ 1-800-223-5623. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6601 Wheels: Description and Operation WHEEL DESIGN The rim size is on the vehicle safety certification label located on the drivers door shut face. Original equipment wheels/rims are designed for operation up to the specified maximum vehicle capacity. All models use stamped steel, cast aluminum or forged aluminum wheels. Every wheel has raised sections between the rim flanges (1) and rim drop well (3) called safety humps. Initial inflation of the tire forces the bead over these raised sections. In case of rapid loss of air pressure, the raised sections help hold the tire on the wheel. The wheel studs and nuts are designed for specific applications. All aluminum and some steel wheels have wheel stud nuts with an enlarged nose. This enlarged nose is necessary to ensure proper retention of the wheels. Do not use replacement studs or nuts with a different design or lesser quality. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6602 Wheels: Testing and Inspection WHEEL INSPECTION Inspect wheels for: - Excessive run out - Dents or cracks - Damaged wheel lug nut holes - Air Leaks from any area or surface of the rim NOTE: Do not attempt to repair a wheel by hammering, heating or welding. If a wheel is damaged an original equipment replacement wheel should be used. When obtaining replacement wheels, they should be equivalent in load carrying capacity. The diameter, width, offset, pilot hole and bolt circle of the wheel should be the same as the original wheel. WARNING: Failure to use equivalent replacement wheels may adversely affect the safety and handling of the vehicle. Used wheels are not recommended. The service history of the wheel may have included severe treatment or very high mileage. The rim could fail without warning. WARNING: Daimlerchrysler corporation does not recommend that customers use "reconditioned" wheels (wheels that have been damaged and repaired) because they can result in a sudden catastrophic wheel failure which could cause loss of control and result in injury or death. For Clarification: - Cosmetic refinishing for the purpose of repairing a superficial flaw is an acceptable procedure providing it is limited to paint or clear coat only, the wheel is not modified in any way, and there is no exposure to paint curing heat over 200 degrees Fahrenheit. - Damaged wheels are those which have been bent, broken, cracked or sustained some other physical damage which may have compromised the wheel structure - Repaired indicates that the wheel has been modified through bending, welding, heating, straightening, or material removal to rectify damage. - Re-plating of chrome plated wheels is not an acceptable procedure nor is chrome plating of original equipment painted or polished wheels, as this may alter mechanical properties and affect fatigue life. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6603 Wheels: Tools and Equipment WHEELS Remover C-4150A Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Bearing: Specifications Mopar Multi-Purpose Lube NLGI Grade 2 EP, GC-LB Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper and rotor See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal. 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor if equipped, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Removal. 5. Remove the halfshaft nut 4X4 only. NOTE: Do not strike the knuckle with a hammer to remove the tie rod end or the ball joint. Damage to the steering knuckle will occur. 6. Pull down on the steering knuckle to separate the halfshaft from the hub/bearing. 4X4 only 7. Remove the three hub/bearing mounting bolts (3) from the steering knuckle (4). 8. Slide the hub/bearing (1) out of the steering knuckle (4). 9. Remove the brake dust shield (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Hub / Bearing - Removal > Page 6609 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Hub / Bearing - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the brake dust shield (5). 2. Install the hub/bearing (1) into the steering knuckle (4) and tighten the bolts (3) to 163 Nm (120 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the brake rotor and caliper See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation. 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor (2) if equipped See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Installation. 5. Install the halfshaft nut and tighten to 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) 4X4 only. 6. Install the wheel and tire assembly See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 7. Remove the support and lower vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications Axle Nut: Specifications HALFSHAFT NUT TORQUE Halfshaft nut ........................................................................................................................................ ................................................. 251 Nm (185 ft. lbs.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications TORQUE CAUTION: DO NOT USE CHROME PLATED LUG NUTS WITH CHROME PLATED WHEELS. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Studs - Removal Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Studs - Removal REMOVAL FRONT WHEEL STUDS 1. Raise and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the brake caliper, caliper adapter and rotor, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Removal. 4. Remove the wheel speed sensor from the hub. 5. Press the stud (2) from the hub using special tool C-4150A (1). REAR WHEEL STUDS 1. Remove the wheel and tire assembly. 2. Remove the brake drum. 3. Press the stud (2) from the hub using special tool C-4150A (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Studs - Removal > Page 6619 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Studs - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the new stud into the hub flange. 2. Install three proper sized washers onto the stud, then install lug nut with the flat side of the nut against the washers. 3. Tighten the lug nut until the stud is pulled into the hub flange. Verify that the stud is properly seated into the flange. 4. Remove the lug nut and washers. 5. Install the brake rotor, caliper adapter, and caliper, See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Brake Rotor - Installation. 6. Install the brake drum. 7. Install the wheel and tire assembly, use new lug nut on the stud or studs that were replaced. 8. Remove the support and lower the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Accumulator HVAC: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C accumulator (1) is mounted in the engine compartment between the evaporator outlet tube (4) and the A/C suction line. A/C accumulator includes the low- side service port (5). An integral mounting bracket secures the A/C accumulator to the dash panel bracket (3). A spring-lock type quick-connect fitting with three O-rings is used to connect the A/C accumulator to the evaporator outlet tube. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6625 Accumulator HVAC: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION NOTE: Typical A/C accumulator shown. Refrigerant enters the A/C accumulator (1) mostly as a low pressure vapor through the inlet tube (2). Any liquid, oil-laden refrigerant falls to the bottom of the canister, which acts as a separator. A desiccant bag (3) is mounted inside the accumulator canister to absorb any moisture which may have entered and become trapped within the refrigerant system. A filter (4) is also mounted inside the canister to trap any foreign material that may have entered the refrigerant system during assembly. The low pressure vapor exits the A/C accumulator through the outlet tube (5). NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C accumulator has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals and gaskets. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C accumulator is removed and installed. The A/C accumulator cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged, or if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Accumulator HVAC: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Review the warnings and cautions before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. 3. Remove the air filter housing to gain access to the A/C accumulator (1). 4. Disconnect the A/C suction line from the A/C accumulator and remove and discard the O-ring and gasket See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Removal. 5. Remove the secondary retaining clip (2) from the spring-lock coupler that secures the accumulator inlet tube to the evaporator outlet tube (5). 6. Loosen the bolts (6) that secure the A/C accumulator to the mounting bracket (4). 7. Using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent), disconnect the accumulator inlet tube from the evaporator outlet tube See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and remove and discard the O-ring seals. 8. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened refrigerant system connections. 9. If required, remove the nuts (3) that secure the accumulator mounting bracket to the dash panel and remove the bracket from the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Accumulator HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6628 Accumulator HVAC: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. CAUTION: The A/C accumulator must be replaced if an internal failure of the A/C compressor has occurred. Failure to replace the A/C accumulator can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant systemSee: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: If only the A/C accumulator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. If removed, install the accumulator mounting bracket (4) and retaining nuts (3). Tighten the nuts to 6.8 Nm (60 in. lbs.). 2. Position the A/C accumulator (1) onto the mounting bracket. Do not tighten the accumulator bracket bolts (6) at this time. 3. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened refrigerant system connections. 4. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the accumulator spring-lock coupler fitting. Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 5. Connect the spring-lock coupler to the evaporator outlet tube (5) and install the secondary retaining clip (3) See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation. 6. Tighten the accumulator bracket bolts to 6.8 Nm (60 in. lbs.). 7. Connect the A/C suction line to the A/C accumulator See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Installation/Suction Line. 8. Install the air filter housing. 9. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 10. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. 11. If the A/C accumulator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 12. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Actuator-Blend Door Component ID: 1 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 C61 DB/LG BLEND DOOR DRIVER 2-3-4-5-6 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6634 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6635 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Actuator-Mode Door-Floor To Defrost Component ID: 2 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO DEFROST Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO DEFROST Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 C801 20DB/OR MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER 2-3-4-5-6 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6636 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6637 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Actuator-Mode Door-Floor To Panel Component ID: 3 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO PANEL Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO PANEL Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 C29 20LG/YL MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER 2-3-4-5-6 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6638 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6639 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Actuator-Recirculation Door Component ID: 4 Component : ACTUATOR-RECIRCULATION DOOR Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-RECIRCULATION DOOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 C32 20DB/TN RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER 2-3-4-5-6 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6640 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Blend Door Component ID: 1 Component : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-BLEND DOOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 C61 DB/LG BLEND DOOR DRIVER 2-3-4-5-6 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6643 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6644 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Mode Door-Floor To Defrost Component ID: 2 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO DEFROST Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO DEFROST Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 C801 20DB/OR MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER 2-3-4-5-6 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6645 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6646 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Mode Door-Floor To Panel Component ID: 3 Component : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO PANEL Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-MODE DOOR-FLOOR TO PANEL Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 C29 20LG/YL MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER 2-3-4-5-6 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6647 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6648 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Actuator-Recirculation Door Component ID: 4 Component : ACTUATOR-RECIRCULATION DOOR Connector: Name : ACTUATOR-RECIRCULATION DOOR Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 C32 20DB/TN RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER 2-3-4-5-6 C34 20DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Actuator-Blend Door > Page 6649 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Blend Door Actuator Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Blend Door Actuator Description DESCRIPTION The blend door actuator (1) is a reversible, 12 volt direct current (DC), servo motor. The blend door actuator is located on the top of the HVAC housing. The blend door actuator is interchangeable with the actuators for the mode-air and recirculation-air doors. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle (2). Each actuator also has an identical output shaft with splines (3) that connects it to its respective door linkage and three integral mounting tabs (4) that allow the actuator to be secured to the HVAC housing. The blend door actuator does not require mechanical indexing to the blend-air doors, as it is electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. The blend door actuator can be accessed for serviced by removing the instrument panel. Operation OPERATION The blend door actuator is connected to the A/C-heater control through the vehicle electrical system by a dedicated two-wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The blend door actuator can move the blend-air doors in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of the motor connection high and the other connection low, the blend-air doors will move in one direction. When the A/C-heater control reverses the polarity of the voltage to the motor, the blend-air doors moves in the opposite direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the blend-air doors stop and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of the blend door actuator and the blend-air doors. The A/C-heater control learns the blend-air doors stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the blend door actuator circuit. The blend door actuator is diagnosed using a scan tool. The blend door actuator cannot be adjusted or repaired must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Blend Door Actuator > Page 6652 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Mode Door Actuator Description DESCRIPTION The two mode door actuators (1) are reversible, 12-volt direct current (DC), servo motors. The mode door actuators are located on the driver side of the HVAC housing. The mode door actuators are mechanically connected to the floor/defrost and the panel-air doors. The mode door actuators are interchangeable with the actuators for the blend-air doors and the recirculation-air door. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle (2). Each actuator also has an identical output shaft with splines (3) that connects it to its respective door linkage and three integral mounting tabs (4) that allow the actuator to be secured to the HVAC housing. The mode door actuators do not require mechanical indexing to the mode-air doors, as they are electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. The two mode door actuators can be serviced from underneath the drivers side of the instrument panel. Operation OPERATION Both the floor/defrost actuator and the panel door actuator (mode door actuators) are connected to the A/C-heater control through the vehicle electrical system by dedicated two-wire leads and connectors of the HVAC wire harness. Each mode door actuator can move the floor/defrost or the panel-air doors in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of an actuator motor connection high and the other connection low, the respective mode-air door will move in one direction. When the A/C-heater control reverses the polarity of the voltage to the motor, the mode-air door moves in the opposite direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the respective mode-air door stops and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of both mode door actuators and the mode-air doors. The A/C-heater control learns the mode-air door stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the mode door actuator circuits. The mode door actuators are diagnosed using a scan tool. The mode door actuators cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Blend Door Actuator > Page 6653 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Description and Operation Recirculation Door Actuator Description DESCRIPTION The recirculation door actuator (1) is a reversible, 12 volt direct current (DC), servo motor. The recirculation door actuator is located on the left side of the HVAC air inlet housing. The recirculation door actuator is interchangeable with the actuators for the blend-air doors and the mode-air doors. Each actuator is contained within an identical black molded plastic housing with an integral wire connector receptacle (2). Each actuator also has an identical output shaft with splines (3) that connects it to its door linkage and three integral mounting tabs (4) that allow the actuator to be secured to the air inlet housing. The recirculation door actuator does not require mechanical indexing to the recirculation-air door, as it is electronically calibrated by the A/C-heater control. The recirculation door actuator can be accessed for serviced by removing the air inlet housing. Operation OPERATION The recirculation door actuator is connected to the A/C-heater control through the vehicle electrical system by a dedicated two-wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The recirculation door actuator can move the recirculation-air door in two directions. When the A/C-heater control pulls the voltage on one side of the motor connection high and the other connection low, the recirculation-air door will move in one direction. When the A/C-heater control reverses the polarity of the voltage to the motor, the recirculation-air door moves in the opposite direction. When the A/C-heater control makes the voltage to both connections high or both connections low, the recirculation-air door stops and will not move. The A/C-heater control uses a pulse-count positioning system to monitor the operation and relative position of the recirculation door actuator and the recirculation-air door. The A/C-heater control learns the recirculation-air door stop positions during the calibration procedure and will store a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for any problems it detects in the recirculation door actuator circuits. The recirculation door actuator is diagnosed using a scan tool. The recirculation door actuator cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Blend Door Actuator - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage during this service procedure. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Removal. 3. Remove the three screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3). 4. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the blend door actuator. 5. Remove the blend door actuator from the HVAC housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 6656 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Blend Door Actuator - Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 6657 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 6658 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Actuator - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: This heater-A/C system is equipped with two mode door actuators. One for the floor/defrost-air door and one for the panel-air door. FLOOR/DEFROST DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the three screws (1) that secure the floor/defrost door actuator (2) to the driver side end of the HVAC housing (3). 3. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the floor/defrost door actuator. 4. Remove the floor/defrost door actuator from the HVAC housing. PANEL DOOR ACTUATOR 5. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 6. Remove the three screws (1) that secure the panel door actuator (2) to the driver side end of the HVAC housing (3). 7. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the panel door actuator. 8. Remove the panel door actuator from the HVAC housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 6659 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Actuator - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: This heater-A/C system is equipped with two mode door actuators. One for the floor/defrost-air door and one for the panel-air door. FLOOR/DEFROST DOOR ACTUATOR 1. Position the floor/defrost door actuator (1) onto the driver side end of the HVAC housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (3) with those on the floor/defrost door pivot shaft (4). 2. Install the three screws (1) that secure the floor/defrost door actuator (2) to the HVAC housing (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) to the floor/defrost door actuator. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 5. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. PANEL DOOR ACTUATOR Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 6660 6. Position the panel door actuator (1) onto the driver side end of the HVAC housing (2). If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft (3) with those on the panel door pivot shaft (4). 7. Install the three screws (1) that secure the panel door actuator (2) to the HVAC housing (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 8. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) to the panel door actuator. 9. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 10. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 6661 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Blend Door Actuator - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage during this service procedure. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Removal. 3. Remove the three screws (1) that secure the blend door actuator (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3). 4. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (4) from the blend door actuator. 5. Remove the blend door actuator from the HVAC housing. Blend Door Actuator - Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Blend Door Actuator - Removal > Page 6662 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts - Removal Air Duct: Service and Repair Defroster Ducts - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage during this service procedure. 1. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal. 2. Remove the screws (1) that secure the defroster duct (2) to the instrument panel (3) and remove the duct. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts - Removal > Page 6667 Air Duct: Service and Repair Defroster Ducts - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the defroster duct (2) into the instrument panel (3). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the defroster duct to the instrument panel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts - Removal > Page 6668 Air Duct: Service and Repair Floor Ducts - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Illustration shown with HVAC housing removed for clarity. 1. Remove the screws (1) that secure the floor distribution duct (2) to the bottom of the HVAC housing (3). 2. Remove the floor distribution duct from the HVAC housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts - Removal > Page 6669 Air Duct: Service and Repair Floor Ducts - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Illustration shown with HVAC housing removed for clarity. 1. Position the floor distribution duct (2) onto the bottom of the HVAC housing (3). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the floor distribution duct to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts - Removal > Page 6670 Air Duct: Service and Repair Defroster Ducts - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage during this service procedure. 1. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal. 2. Remove the screws (1) that secure the defroster duct (2) to the instrument panel (3) and remove the duct. Defroster Ducts - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the defroster duct (2) into the instrument panel (3). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the defroster duct to the instrument panel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation. Floor Ducts - Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts - Removal > Page 6671 NOTE: Illustration shown with HVAC housing removed for clarity. 1. Remove the screws (1) that secure the floor distribution duct (2) to the bottom of the HVAC housing (3). 2. Remove the floor distribution duct from the HVAC housing. Floor Ducts - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Illustration shown with HVAC housing removed for clarity. 1. Position the floor distribution duct (2) onto the bottom of the HVAC housing (3). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the floor distribution duct to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). Instrument Panel Ducts - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage during this service procedure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts - Removal > Page 6672 1. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal. 2. Remove the instrument cluster See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Cluster - Removal. 3. Remove the defroster duct (4) See: Defroster Ducts - Removal. 4. Remove the wire harness (2) from the center distribution duct (8) and position the wire harness out of the way. 5. Remove the radio coaxial cable (9) from the center distribution duct and the passenger side instrument panel duct (10) and position the coaxial cable out of the way. 6. Remove the screws that secure the passenger side instrument panel duct, center distribution duct and the center instrument panel duct (3) to the instrument panel and support assembly (7). 7. Disconnect the passenger side instrument panel duct from the center distribution duct and remove the instrument panel duct from the instrument panel. 8. Disconnect the center distribution duct from the passenger side demister duct (1). 9. Disconnect the center distribution duct from the center instrument panel duct. 10. Disconnect the center distribution duct from the driver side demister duct (5) and the driver side instrument panel duct (6) and the remove the center distribution duct from the instrument panel. 11. Remove the center instrument panel duct from the instrument panel. 12. Remove the screws that secure the driver side instrument panel duct to the instrument panel and remove the duct through the instrument cluster opening. Instrument Panel Ducts - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the driver side instrument panel duct (6) into the instrument panel through the instrument cluster opening. 2. Install the screws that secure the driver side instrument panel duct to the instrument panel and support assembly (7). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts - Removal > Page 6673 3. Position the center instrument panel duct (3) into the instrument panel. 4. Position the center distribution duct (8) into the instrument panel and connect it to the driver side instrument panel duct (6) and the driver side demister duct (5). 5. Connect the center distribution duct to the instrument panel duct. 6. Connect the center distribution duct to the passenger side demister duct (1). 7. Position the passenger side instrument panel duct (10) into the instrument panel and connect it to the center distribution duct. 8. Install the screws that secure the ducts to the instrument panel and support. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 9. Install the wire harness (2) onto the center distribution duct. 10. Install the radio coaxial cable (9) onto the center distribution duct and the passenger side instrument panel duct. 11. Install the defroster duct (4) See: Defroster Ducts - Installation. 12. Install the instrument cluster See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Cluster - Installation. 13. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation. Instrument Panel Demister Ducts - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage during this service procedure. 1. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal. 2. Remove the instrument panel ducts See: Instrument Panel Ducts - Removal. 3. Remove the screws that secure the passenger side demister duct (1) and the driver side demister duct (5) to the instrument panel and support assembly (7). 4. Remove the ducts from the instrument panel and support assembly. Instrument Panel Demister Ducts - Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Defroster Ducts - Removal > Page 6674 1. Position the passenger side demister duct (1) and the driver side demister duct (5) into the instrument panel and support assembly (7). 2. Install the screws that secure the demister ducts to the instrument panel and support assembly. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Install the instrument panel ducts See: Instrument Panel Ducts - Installation. 4. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Register: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION There is one defroster air outlet located in the defroster grille on the top of the instrument panel. The airflow from the defroster outlet is directed by fixed vanes in the defroster grille and cannot be adjusted. The defroster air outlet is not serviceable from the defroster grille. There are two side window demister air outlets (1). One located near each end of the instrument panel near the A-pillar area. The airflow from the side window demister air outlets is directed by fixed vanes in the outlets and cannot be adjusted. The driver side window demister air outlet is serviced with the instrument cluster bezel and the passenger side demister outlet is serviced is serviced separately from the instrument panel cover. There are four instrument panel air outlets (2). One air outlet is located near the end of the instrument panel facing the rear of the vehicle and two outlets are located on the instrument panel center bezel. Each of the instrument panel air outlets contain a grille with movable vanes that are used to direct or shut off the flow of the conditioned air leaving the instrument panel outlets. The driver side instrument panel air outlet is serviced with the instrument cluster bezel. The passenger side instrument panel air outlet is serviced separately from the instrument panel cover and the two center air outlets are serviced with the center bezel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlets - Removal Air Register: Service and Repair Air Outlets - Removal REMOVAL-PASSENGER AIR OUTLET WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in an accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the instrument panel from cosmetic damage. 1. Remove the instrument panel and place it on a workbench See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal. 2. Remove the instrument panel cover from the instrument panel support See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair. CAUTION: Use care when removing the heads from the heat stakes located on the back of the instrument panel cover. Remove only enough material from the heat stakes to allow removal of the instrument panel air outlet from the cover. 3. Using an 11 mm (7/16 in.) drill bit, carefully remove the heads from the four heat stakes (1) that secure the passenger side air outlet (2) to the back of the instrument panel cover (3). CAUTION: Use care when removing the air outlet from the instrument panel cover to prevent damage to the remaining portion of the heat stakes. 4. Carefully remove the air outlet from the instrument panel cover. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air Outlets - Removal > Page 6680 Air Register: Service and Repair Air Outlets - Installation INSTALLATION-PASSENGER AIR OUTLET 1. Position the passenger side instrument panel air outlet (2) onto the back of the instrument panel cover (3). CAUTION: Always use the retaining screws supplied with the replacement air outlet. Do not use screws longer then 10 mm. Failure to follow this caution may result in damage to the instrument panel cover. CAUTION: Use care when installing the air outlet retaining screws. To prevent damage to the instrument panel cover, do not overtighten the screws. 2. Install four M 4.2 x 9.5 mm screws (1) to secure the air outlet to the instrument panel cover. Carefully tighten the screws securely. 3. Install the instrument panel cover See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair. 4. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Component ID: 260 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/OR AAT SIGNAL 2 G931 20VT/BR SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 7 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6684 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6685 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Component ID: 260 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/OR AAT SIGNAL 2 G931 20VT/BR SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 7 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6686 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that monitors the air temperature outside of the vehicle. The ambient air temperature sensor is mounted onto the inside of the front bumper beam and its data is used by the heating-A/C system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6689 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit sent by the front control module (FCM) through a two-wire lead and connector of the vehicle wire harness. The ambient air temperature sensor changes its internal resistance in response to changes in the outside air temperature, which either increases or decreases the reference signal voltage read by the FCM. The FCM converts and broadcasts the sensor data over the controller area network (CAN) B bus, where it is read by the manual temperature control (MTC) A/C-heater control and other various vehicle control modules. The ambient air temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The ambient air temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the ambient air temperature sensor (2). 3. Remove the bolt (3) that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the front bumper beam (4) and remove the sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6692 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the ambient air temperature sensor (2) to the front bumper beam (4). 2. Install the bolt (3) that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the front bumper beam. Tighten the bolt securely. 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the ambient air temperature sensor. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6697 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6698 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6699 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6700 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6701 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts reference the figure numbers of the illustrations. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6702 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6703 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6704 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6705 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in Connector Replacement. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure)See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing. 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6706 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6707 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6708 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6709 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6710 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6711 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6712 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6713 Blower Motor: Connector Views Component ID: 163 Component : MOTOR-BLOWER Connector: Name : MOTOR-BLOWER Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C70 12DB/YL BLOWER MOTOR DRIVER 2 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR SUPPLY Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Blower Motor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The blower motor (1) is a 12-volt, direct current (DC) motor mounted within a plastic housing with an integral wire harness connector (2) and squirrel cage-type blower wheel (3) that is secured to the blower motor shaft (4). The blower motor wheel is located in the air inlet housing at the passenger side end of the HVAC housing. The blower motor can be accessed for service from underneath the instrument panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6716 Blower Motor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The blower motor is used to control the velocity of air moving through the HVAC housing by spinning the blower wheel within the housing at the selected speed whenever the ignition switch is in the On position and the blower control switch is in any position except Off. The blower motor receives battery current whenever the ignition switch is in the Run position. Blower motor speed is controlled by regulating the path to ground through the blower motor speed control and the blower motor resistor. The blower motor circuit is protected by a fuse located in the integrated power module (IPM), which is in the engine compartment. The blower motor and blower wheel are factory balanced and cannot be adjusted or repaired and the blower motor and wheel must be replaced as an assembly if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6717 Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection BLOWER MOTOR WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. OPERATION Possible causes of an inoperative blower motor include: - Open fuse - Inoperative blower motor resistor - Inoperative blower motor switch - Inoperative blower motor relay - Inoperative blower motor - Inoperative mode control switch - Inoperative blower motor circuit wiring or wire harness connectors NOISE To determine if the blower motor is the source of the noise, simply switch the blower motor from Off to On. To verify that the blower motor is the source of the noise, unplug the blower motor wire harness connector and operate the heater-A/C system. If the noise goes away, possible causes include: - Foreign material on fresh air inlet screen - Foreign material in blower wheel - Foreign material in HVAC housing - Improper blower motor mounting - Deformed or damaged blower wheel - Worn blower motor bearings or brushes VIBRATION Possible causes of a blower motor vibration include: - Improper blower motor mounting - Foreign material in blower wheel - Deformed or damaged blower wheel - Worn blower motor bearings Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Blower Motor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the blower motor (2). 3. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the blower motor to the HVAC housing (4). 4. Remove the blower motor from the HVAC housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6720 Blower Motor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the blower motor (2) into the HVAC housing (4). 2. Install the three screws (3) that secure the blower motor to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the blower motor. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Blower Motor Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6724 Blower Motor Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 176 Component : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR Connector: Name : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 87 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The blower motor relay (1) for the heating-A/C system is a standard size International Standards Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal function and patterns (2). The blower motor relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current from a fuse in the power distribution center (PDC) directly to the blower motor. The blower motor relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a ground path by the control circuitry within the front control module (FCM). The blower motor relay is located in the integrated power module (IPM) in the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6727 Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The blower motor relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the battery to control the high current output to the blower motor. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the blower motor. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The blower motor relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the integrated power module (IPM). The inputs and outputs of the blower motor relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground circuit through the front control module (FCM). - The coil battery terminal (86) receives fused battery current at all times. - The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current output to the blower motor only when the blower motor relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the blower motor relay coil is de-energized. The blower motor relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Open the cover of the integrated power module (IPM) (1) located in the engine compartment. NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the IPM cover for blower motor relay identification and location. 3. Remove the blower motor relay (2) from the IPM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6730 Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the integrated power module (IPM) cover for blower motor relay identification and location. 1. Position the blower motor relay (2) into the proper receptacle of the IPM (1). 2. Align the blower motor relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the IPM receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the cover of the IPM. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Resistor: Locations Component ID: 191 Component : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR Connector: Name : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR Color : # of pins : 5 Pin Circuit Description 1 C75 12DB/GY BLOWER MOTOR HIGH SPEED 2 C70 12DB/YL BLOWER MOTOR DRIVER 3 C73 14DB/VT BLOWER MOTOR M2 SPEED 4 C72 14DB/OR BLOWER MOTOR M1 SPEED 5 C71 16DB/BR BLOWER MOTOR LOW SPEED Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6734 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6735 Blower Motor Resistor: Diagrams Component ID: 191 Component : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR Connector: Name : RESISTOR-BLOWER MOTOR Color : # of pins : 5 Pin Circuit Description 1 C75 12DB/GY BLOWER MOTOR HIGH SPEED 2 C70 12DB/YL BLOWER MOTOR DRIVER 3 C73 14DB/VT BLOWER MOTOR M2 SPEED 4 C72 14DB/OR BLOWER MOTOR M1 SPEED 5 C71 16DB/BR BLOWER MOTOR LOW SPEED Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6736 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The blower motor resistor is mounted to the HVAC air inlet housing, directly behind the glove box. The blower motor resistor consists of a molded plastic mounting plate (1) with an integral wire connector receptacle (2). Concealed behind the mounting plate are coiled resistor wires contained within a ceramic heat sink (3). The blower motor resistor is accessed for service by removing the glove box from the instrument panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6739 Blower Motor Resistor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The blower motor resistor has multiple resistor wires, each of which will reduce the current flow through the blower motor to change the blower motor speed. The blower motor resistor is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. The blower motor speed control in the MTC heating-A/C system directs the ground path for the blower motor through the correct resistor wire to obtain the selected speed. With the blower motor speed control in the lowest speed position, the ground path for the blower motor is applied through all of the resistor wires. Each higher speed selected with the blower motor speed control applies the ground path through fewer of the resistor wires, increasing the speed of the blower motor. The blower motor resistor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged (such as a cracked ceramic heat sink). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6740 Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to - WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the blower motor resistor See: Service and Repair/Removal. 3. Using an ohmmeter, check for continuity between all of the blower motor resistor terminals. In each case there should be continuity. If OK, repair the wire harness circuits between the blower motor speed control and the blower motor resistor or blower motor as required. If not OK, replace the inoperative blower motor resistor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. WARNING: The blower motor resistor may get very hot during normal operation. If the blower motor was turned on prior to servicing the blower motor resistor, wait five minutes to allow the resistor to cool before performing diagnosis or service. Failure to take this precaution can result in personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the glove box See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box Removal. 3. Disengage the wire harness connector locking tab and disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the blower motor resistor (2). 4. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the blower motor resistor to the HVAC housing (4). 5. Remove the blower motor resistor from the HVAC housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6743 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the blower motor resistor (2) into the HVAC housing (4). 2. Install the two screws (3) that secure the blower motor resistor to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the blower motor resistor and engage the wire harness connector locking tab. 4. Install the glove box See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box Installation. 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair This vehicle is not equipped with a Cabin Air Filter. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Cab back trim panel for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. 1. Remove the cab back trim panel, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal. 2. Disengage the four locking tabs that secure the body vent (1) to the sheet metal and remove the vent. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6751 Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the bottom edge of the body vent (1) to the bottom flange of the opening in the sheet metal. Applying even pressure, roll the vent upward and engage the four locking tabs that secure the vent to the sheet metal. Verify that all four of the locking tabs lock on to the sheet metal. NOTE: Cab back trim panel for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. 2. Install the cab back trim panel, See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications Compressor Clutch: Specifications COMPRESSOR CLUTCH AIR GAP Compressor clutch air gap ............................................................................................................................................... 0.35 0.60 mm (0.014 - 0.024 in.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6756 Compressor Clutch: Locations Component ID: 42 Component : CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR Connector: Name : CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 2 Z153 20BK/GY GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6757 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6758 Compressor Clutch: Diagrams Component ID: 42 Component : CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR Connector: Name : CLUTCH-A/C COMPRESSOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 2 Z153 20BK/GY GROUND Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 6759 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: Typical A/C clutch assembly shown. The A/C compressor clutch assembly consists of a stationary electromagnetic A/C clutch field coil (4), pulley bearing and pulley assembly (3), clutch plate (2) and shims (7). These components provide the means to engage and disengage the A/C compressor from the engine accessory drive belt. The A/C clutch field coil and the pulley bearing and pulley assembly are both retained on the nose of the A/C compressor with snap rings (5 and 6). The clutch plate is splined to the compressor shaft and secured with a bolt (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6762 Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C compressor clutch components provide the means to engage and disengage the A/C compressor from the engine accessory drive belt. When the electromagnetic A/C clutch field coil is energized, it magnetically draws the clutch plate into contact with the clutch pulley and drives the compressor shaft. When the coil is not energized, the pulley freewheels on the clutch hub bearing, which is part of the pulley assembly. A/C compressor clutch engagement is controlled by the powertrain control module (PCM) in the engine compartment. The A/C compressor clutch components cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6763 Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH COIL The A/C compressor clutch coil electrical circuit is controlled by the powertrain control module (PCM) through the A/C clutch relay. The A/C clutch coil can be tested by either measuring clutch field coil resistance or by measuring current draw. Begin testing of a suspected compressor clutch coil problem by performing the preliminary checks. PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. If the A/C compressor clutch will not engage, perform the A/C System Performance Test, which is found within the HVAC System Test. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/HVAC System Test If no diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are found in the A/C-heater control or the PCM, go to STEP 2. If any DTCs are found, repair as required. 2. If the A/C compressor clutch still will not engage, verify the refrigerant charge level See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Refrigerant System Leaks. If the refrigerant charge level is OK, go to COIL RESISTANCE TEST and/or COIL CURRENT DRAW TEST. If the refrigerant charge level is not OK, adjust the refrigerant charge as required. COIL RESISTANCE TEST 3. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the A/C clutch field coil connector. 5. Use an ohm meter and measure the resistance of the clutch field coil at the field coil connector terminals. 6. Refer to the A/C Clutch Field Coil Specifications chart for the acceptable A/C clutch coil resistance. Specifications apply for a work area temperature of 21° C (70° F). a. If the A/C clutch coil reading is below specifications, the coil is shorted and must be replaced. b. If the A/C clutch coil reading is above specifications, the coil is open and must be replaced. COIL CURRENT DRAW TEST 7. Verify the battery state of charge See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Battery. 8. Connect an ammeter (0 to 10 ampere scale selected) in series with the clutch field coil feed terminal. Connect a voltmeter (0 to 20 volt scale selected) to measure voltage across the battery and the clutch coil. 9. With the A/C-heater control in the A/C mode and the blower motor at low speed, start the engine and allow it to run at a normal idle speed. 10. The A/C clutch should engage immediately, and the clutch field coil supply voltage should be within two volts of the battery voltage. If the field coil supply voltage is OK, go to STEP 5. If the field coil supply voltage is not within two volts of battery voltage, test the clutch field coil feed circuit for excessive voltage drop and repair as necessary. 11. Refer to the A/C Clutch Field Coil Specifications chart for the acceptable A/C clutch field coil current draw. Specifications apply for a work area temperature of 21° C (70° F). If voltage is more than 12.5 volts, add electrical loads by turning on electrical accessories until voltage reads below 12.5 volts. a. If the A/C clutch field coil current reading is zero, the coil is open and must be replaced. b. If the A/C clutch field coil current reading is above specifications, the coil is shorted and must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Compressor Clutch: Procedures A/C Clutch Plate Inspection A/C CLUTCH PLATE INSPECTION NOTE: The A/C clutch can be serviced in the vehicle. The refrigerant system can remain fully-charged during compressor clutch, pulley and bearing assembly, or coil replacement. Examine the friction surfaces of the pulley and the clutch plate (2) for wear. The pulley and clutch plate should be replaced if there is excessive wear or scoring. If the friction surfaces are oily, inspect the shaft and nose area of the A/C compressor (1) for refrigerant oil. If refrigerant oil is found, the compressor shaft seal is leaking and the A/C compressor must be replaced. Check the pulley bearing for roughness or excessive leakage of grease. Replace the pulley and bearing assembly, if required. A/C Clutch Break-In A/C CLUTCH BREAK-IN After a new A/C compressor clutch has been installed, cycle the compressor clutch approximately 20 times (5 seconds on, then 5 seconds off). During this procedure, set the A/C-heater controls to the A/C Recirculation Mode, the blower motor in the highest speed position, and the engine speed at 1500 to 2000 rpm. This procedure (burnishing) will seat the opposing friction surfaces and provide a higher compressor clutch torque capability. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6766 Compressor Clutch: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The compressor clutch assembly can be serviced with the refrigerant system fully-charged. NOTE: Typical A/C compressor and clutch assembly shown in illustrations. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the accessory drive belt See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Removal. 3. Disconnect the engine wire harness from the compressor clutch field coil connector (1) located on the top of the A/C compressor (5). 4. Remove the bolts that secure the A/C compressor to the engine and support the A/C compressor. 5. Carefully remove the compressor clutch field coil connector and wire lead from the connector bracket (2). 6. Remove the compressor shaft bolt (3). A band-type oil filter wrench or a strap wrench may be used to hold the clutch plate (4) from rotating during bolt removal. CAUTION: Do not pry between the clutch plate and the pulley and bearing assembly to remove the clutch plate from the compressor shaft as this may damage the clutch plate. NOTE: Use care not to lose any clutch shim(s) during removal of the clutch plate, as they may be reused during the clutch plate installation process. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6767 7. Tap the clutch plate (2) lightly with a plastic mallet to release it from the splines on the compressor shaft (1) and remove the clutch plate and shim(s) (3). 8. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), remove the snap ring (2) that secures the pulley and bearing assembly (3) to the front of the A/C compressor and remove the pulley and bearing assembly. 9. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), remove the snap ring (4) that secures the compressor clutch field coil (2) to the front of the A/C compressor (3) and remove the field coil. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Typical A/C compressor and clutch assembly shown in illustrations. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6768 1. Align the dowel pin on the back of the compressor clutch field coil (2) with the hole in the front of the A/C compressor (3) and position the field coil onto the compressor. Be certain that the compressor clutch field coil wire lead is properly routed so that it is not pinched between the A/C compressor and the field coil. CAUTION: The snap ring must be fully and properly seated in the groove or it will vibrate out, resulting in a clutch failure and severe damage to the A/C compressor. NOTE: A new snap ring must be used to secure the compressor clutch field coil to the A/C compressor. The bevel side of the snap ring must face outward and both snap ring eyelets must be oriented to the right or to the left of the field coil dowel pin location on the A/C compressor. 2. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), install the snap ring (4) that secures the compressor clutch field coil to the front of the A/C compressor. Be certain that the snap ring is fully and properly seated in the groove and oriented correctly. CAUTION: Be certain to position the compressor clutch field coil wire lead so that it is not damaged during A/C compressor pulley and bearing installation. CAUTION: When installing the pulley and bearing assembly, DO NOT mar the friction surfaces of the pulley or premature failure of the clutch will result. 3. Install the pulley and bearing assembly (1) onto the front of the A/C compressor. If necessary, tap the pulley gently with a block of wood (2) placed on the pulley friction surface. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6769 CAUTION: The snap ring must be fully and properly seated in the groove or it will vibrate out, resulting in a clutch failure and severe damage to the A/C compressor. NOTE: A new snap ring must be used to secure the pulley and bearing assembly to the A/C compressor. The bevel side of the snap ring must face outward. 4. Using Snap Ring Pliers 9764 or equivalent (1), install the snap ring (2) that secures the pulley and bearing assembly (3) to the front of the A/C compressor. Be certain that the snap ring is fully and properly seated in the groove. 5. If the original clutch plate (2) and pulley and bearing assembly are to be reused, reinstall the original shim(s) (3) onto the compressor shaft (1). If a new clutch plate and pulley and bearing assembly are being used, install a trial stack of shims 2.54 mm (0.010 in.) thick onto the compressor shaft. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6770 6. Install the clutch plate (4) onto the front of the A/C compressor (5). 7. Install the compressor shaft bolt (3). Tighten the bolt to 19 Nm (168 in. lbs.). NOTE: The shims may compress after tightening the shaft bolt. Check the air gap in four or more places to verify the air gap is correct. Spin the pulley before performing a final check of the air gap. NOTE: On models with the clutch plate recessed into the pulley, use a 90° wire gap gauge to measure the clutch air gap. On other models, use a blade type feeler gauge to measure the air gap. 8. With the clutch plate assembled tight against the shim(s), measure the air gap between the clutch plate and the pulley and bearing assembly. The air gap should be between 0.35 - 0.60 mm (0.014 - 0.024 in.). If the air gap is not between specifications, add or subtract shims as needed until the correct air gap is obtained. CAUTION: Be certain that the compressor clutch field coil wire harness is properly routed so that it is not pinched between the A/C compressor and the field coil connector bracket. 9. Carefully route the compressor clutch field coil wire lead behind the connector bracket (2). 10. Install the compressor clutch field coil connector (1) onto the connector bracket. 11. Position the A/C compressor to the engine and install the retaining bolts See: Service and Repair/A/C Compressor - Installation. 12. Connect the engine wire harness to the compressor clutch field coil connector. 13. Install the accessory drive belt See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Accessory Drive Belt - Installation. 14. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations A/C Compressor Clutch Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6774 Compressor Clutch Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 174 Component : RELAY-A/C CLUTCH Connector: Name : RELAY-A/C CLUTCH Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C clutch relay (1) is a International Standards Organization (ISO) mini-relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal functions and patterns (2). The ISO mini-relay terminal functions are the same as a conventional size ISO relay. However, the ISO mini-relay terminal pattern (or footprint) is different, the current capacity is lower, and the physical dimensions are smaller than those of the conventional size ISO relay. The A/C clutch relay is located in the integrated power module (IPM) in the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6777 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C clutch relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input controlled by the powertrain control module (PCM) to control the high current output to the A/C clutch field coil. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the A/C clutch field coil. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The A/C clutch relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the integrated power module (IPM). The inputs and outputs of the A/C clutch relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current through a B(+) circuit at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground input from the PCM through the A/C clutch control circuit only when the PCM electronically pulls the control circuit to ground. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives fused battery current through the ignition switch circuit only when the switch is in RUN. - The normally open terminal (87) provides a battery current output to the A/C clutch coil through the A/C clutch relay output circuit only when the compressor clutch relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the A/C clutch relay coil is de-energized. The A/C clutch relay cannot be repaired must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Compressor Clutch Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Open the cover of the integrated power module (IPM) (1) located in the engine compartment. NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the IPM cover for A/C clutch relay identification and location. 3. Remove the A/C clutch relay (2) from the IPM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6780 Compressor Clutch Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the integrated power module (IPM) cover for A/C clutch relay identification and location. 1. Position the A/C clutch relay (2) into the proper receptacle of the IPM (1). 2. Align the A/C clutch relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the IPM receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the cover of the IPM. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C condenser (1) is located in the front of the engine compartment behind the grille. The A/C condenser is a heat exchanger that allows the high-pressure refrigerant gas being discharged by the A/C compressor to give up its heat to the air passing over the condenser fins, which causes the refrigerant to cool and change to a liquid state. The A/C condenser is equipped with tapping blocks for the A/C discharge line and the A/C liquid line (2) and mounting provisions for the power steering cooler (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6785 Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When air passes through the fins of the A/C condenser, the high-pressure refrigerant gas within the A/C condenser gives up its heat. The refrigerant then condenses as it leaves the A/C condenser and becomes a high-pressure liquid. The volume of air flowing over the condenser fins is critical to the proper cooling performance of the A/C system. Therefore, it is important that there are no objects placed in front of the radiator grille openings at the front of the vehicle or foreign material on the condenser fins that might obstruct proper air flow. Also, any factory-installed air seals or shrouds must be properly reinstalled following radiator or A/C condenser service. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C condenser has no serviceable parts. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever a refrigerant line is removed from the A/C condenser. The A/C condenser cannot be repaired and must be replaced if leaking or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Condenser - Removal Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Condenser - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the hood latch from the upper radiator support when servicing the A/C condenser. 3. Remove the upper radiator support and position it out of the way See: Body and Frame/Radiator Support/Service and Repair/Radiator Upper Crossmember - Removal. 4. Disconnect the A/C discharge line and the A/C liquid line from the tapping blocks (1) located on the right end of the A/C condenser (2) See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Removal and See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Removal. 5. Remove the screws that secure the power steering cooler (3) to the A/C condenser and position the cooler out of the way. 6. Remove the four bolts (4) that secure the A/C condenser to the radiator (5). 7. Carefully push the radiator rearward and lift the A/C condenser out of the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Condenser - Removal > Page 6788 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Condenser - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant systemSee: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: If only the A/C condenser is being replaced, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. Carefully push the radiator (5) rearward and position the A/C condenser (2) into the engine compartment. 2. Install the four bolts (4) that secure the A/C condenser to the radiator. Tighten the bolts to 4.5 Nm (40 in. lbs.). 3. Position the power steering cooler (3) onto the A/C condenser and install the retaining screws. Tighten the screws securely. 4. Connect the A/C discharge line and the A/C liquid line to the A/C condenserSee: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line Installation and See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Installation. NOTE: Make sure that the cable for the hood latch is correctly routed. 5. Install the upper radiator support See: Body and Frame/Radiator Support/Service and Repair/Radiator Upper Crossmember - Installation. 6. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 7. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. 8. If the A/C condenser is being replaced, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 9. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Control Assembly: Locations Component ID: 51 Component : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 22GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 Z24 22BK/OR GROUND 3-4-5-6 C21 22DB/LG EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 7 C121 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 8 E12 22OR/GY PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 9 C61 22DB/LG BLEND DOOR DRIVER 10 C29 22DB MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER 11 C32 22DB/TN RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER 12 C801 22DB/OR MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER 13 C34 22DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 14 - 15 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 16 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6792 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6793 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 C71 16DB/BR BLOWER MOTOR LOW SPEED 3 C73 12DB/VT BLOWER MOTOR M2 SPEED 4-5 Z961 12BK GROUND 6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6794 7 C72 14DB/OR BLOWER MOTOR M1 SPEED 8-9-10 C75 12DB/GY BLOWER MOTOR HIGH SPEED Component Location - 22 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6795 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6796 Control Assembly: Diagrams Component ID: 51 Component : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 16 Pin Circuit Description 1 F504 22GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 2 Z24 22BK/OR GROUND 3-4-5-6 C21 22DB/LG EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 7 C121 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND 8 E12 22OR/GY PANEL LAMPS DRIVER 9 C61 22DB/LG BLEND DOOR DRIVER 10 C29 22DB MODE DOOR 1 DRIVER 11 C32 22DB/TN RECIRCULATION DOOR DRIVER 12 C801 22DB/OR MODE DOOR 2 DRIVER 13 C34 22DB/LB COMMON DOOR DRIVER 14 - 15 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 16 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6797 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6798 Connector: Name : CONTROL-A/C-HEATER C2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 C71 16DB/BR BLOWER MOTOR LOW SPEED 3 C73 12DB/VT BLOWER MOTOR M2 SPEED 4-5 Z961 12BK GROUND 6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6799 7 C72 14DB/OR BLOWER MOTOR M1 SPEED 8-9-10 C75 12DB/GY BLOWER MOTOR HIGH SPEED Component Location - 22 Component Location - 26 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6800 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6801 Control Assembly: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The A/C-heater control (1) for the manual temperature control (MTC) single zone heating-A/C system allows one temperature setting for the entire vehicle. All controls are identified by ISO graphic symbols. The A/C-heater control and integral computer is located in the instrument panel and contains: - a push button A/C on/off control (2). The Snowflake button contains an LED that illuminates when the A/C system is in operation. - a push button rear window defogger on/off control (3). The defogger button contains an LED that illuminates when the rear window defogger (EBL) system is in operation. - a rotary control knob for recirculation and mode control of the discharged air (4). - a rotary control knob for temperature control of the discharged air (5). - a rotary control knob for fan speed selection and turning the heating-A/C system off (6). The A/C-heater control cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. The illumination lamps for the A/C-heater control are available for service replacement Refer to appropriate testing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Heater Control - Removal Control Assembly: Service and Repair A/C Heater Control - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in an accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the center bezel from the instrument panel and disconnect the wire harness connectors (3 and 4) from the A/C-heater control (1)See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Removal. 3. Place the center bezel on a workbench and remove the screws (2) that secure the A/C-heater control to the center bezel. 4. Remove the A/C-heater control from the center bezel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Heater Control - Removal > Page 6804 Control Assembly: Service and Repair A/C Heater Control - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the A/C-heater control (1) into the instrument panel center bezel. 2. Install the screws (2) that secure the A/C-heater control to the center bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connectors (3 and 4) to the back of the A/C-heater control and install the instrument panel center bezel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Installation. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Spring-lock type refrigerant line couplers are used to connect the A/C accumulator and the A/C liquid line to the A/C evaporator. Secondary retaining clips are installed over the connected couplers for added protection. The spring-lock refrigerant line couplers require A/C Line Disconnect Tools 7193 for disengaging the two coupler halves. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6809 Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler is held together by a garter spring (6) inside a circular cage (7) on the male half of the fitting (1). When the two coupler halves are connected, the flared end of the female fitting (2) slips behind the garter spring inside the cage on the male fitting. The garter spring and cage prevent the flared end of the female fitting from pulling out of the cage. Some applications use a connection indicator ring (4) to help indicate when the two coupler halves are fully connected. O-rings (8) are used to seal the coupler connections. These O-rings are compatible with R-134a refrigerant and must be replaced with O-rings made of the same material. A secondary retaining clip (3) is installed over the connected coupler (5) for added protection. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. 2. Remove the secondary retaining clip from the spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler. 3. Fit the proper size A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent) over the coupler cage (1). 4. Close the two halves of the A/C line disconnect tool around the coupler (2). NOTE: The garter spring may not release if the A/C line disconnect tool is cocked while pushing it into the coupler cage opening. 5. Push the A/C line disconnect tool into the open side of the coupler cage to expand the garter spring (3). Once the garter spring is expanded, pull on the refrigerant line attached to the female half of the coupler until the flange on the female fitting is separated from the garter spring and cage on the male fitting. 6. Open and remove the A/C line disconnect tool from the refrigerant line coupler (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6812 Coupler HVAC: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean any dirt or foreign material from the spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler. 2. Check to make sure that the garter spring (6) is located within the cage (7) of the male half of the refrigerant line coupler (1), and that the garter spring is not damaged. a. If the garter spring is missing, install a new spring by pushing it into the coupler cage opening. b. If the garter spring is damaged, remove it from the coupler cage with a small hook (DO NOT use a screwdriver) and install a new garter spring. CAUTION: Use only the specified O-rings as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. The use of any other O-rings may allow the connection to leak. 3. Install new O-rings (8) on the male half of the refrigerant line coupler. 4. Lubricate the O-rings, and the inside of the female half of the refrigerant line coupler (2) with clean R-134a refrigerant oil. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 5. Position the female half of the coupler over the male half of the coupler. 6. Push together firmly on the two halves of the refrigerant line coupler until the garter spring in the cage on the male half of the coupler snaps over the flanged end on the female half of the coupler. 7. Make sure that the refrigerant line coupler is fully engaged by firmly pulling the refrigerant lines away from each other on both sides of the coupler. 8. Install the secondary retaining clip (3) over connected coupler cage (5). 9. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. 10. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Evaporator Core: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C evaporator (1) for the heating-A/C system is located within the HVAC housing, behind the instrument panel. The A/C evaporator is positioned in the HVAC housing so that all air entering the housing must pass over the evaporator fins before it is distributed through the heating-A/C system ducts and outlets. However, air passing over the evaporator fins will only be conditioned when the A/C compressor is engaged and circulating refrigerant through the A/C evaporator. The evaporator tubes (2) are attached to the side of the A/C evaporator and are secured to the HVAC housing by a removable flange (3). The A/C evaporator can be serviced by removing and disassembling the HVAC housing assembly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6817 Evaporator Core: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Refrigerant enters the A/C evaporator through the A/C orifice tube as a low-temperature, low-pressure mixture of liquid and gas. As air flows over the fins of the A/C evaporator, the humidity in the air condenses on the fins, and the heat from the air is absorbed by the refrigerant. Heat absorption causes the refrigerant to boil and vaporize. The refrigerant becomes a low-pressure gas when it leaves the A/C evaporator. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C evaporator has no serviceable parts. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals must be replaced whenever a refrigerant line is removed from the A/C evaporator. The A/C evaporator cannot be repaired and must be replaced if leaking or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the HVAC housing and place it on a workbench See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Removal. 2. Disassemble the HVAC housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly. NOTE: Inspect the evaporator seal located in the upper half of the HVAC housing. If the seal is damaged or deformed, the seal must be replaced. 3. Carefully lift the A/C evaporator (1) out of the lower half of the HVAC housing (2). NOTE: If the rubber flange around the evaporator tubes is deformed or damaged, the flange must be replaced. 4. If required, remove the rubber flange (3) from around the evaporator tubes (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6820 Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant systemSee: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: If only the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. If removed, install the rubber flange (3) over the evaporator tubes (4). NOTE: Make sure that the evaporator drain is clean and unrestricted and that the rubber seal and the rubber flange are properly positioned in the HVAC housings. 2. Carefully install the A/C evaporator (1) into the lower half of the HVAC housing (2). 3. Assemble the HVAC housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Assembly. 4. Install the HVAC housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Installation. 5. If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 265 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C21 20VT/OR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 2 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6824 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6825 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 265 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C21 20VT/OR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 2 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6826 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The evaporator temperature sensor (1) is an electrical thermistor located within a molded plastic case that is inserted into the HVAC housing (2) to measure the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator (3). Two terminals within the connector receptacle connect the sensor to the vehicle electrical system through a wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. NOTE: Cutaway of typical HVAC housing shown for clarity in illustration. The external location of the evaporator temperature sensor allows the sensor to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6829 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator and supplies an input signal to the A/C-heater control. The A/C-heater control uses the evaporator temperature sensor input signal to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor will change its internal resistance in response to the temperatures it monitors and is connected to the A/C-heater control through sensor ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit. As the temperature of the A/C evaporator decreases, the internal resistance of the evaporator temperature sensor decreases. The A/C-heater control uses the monitored voltage reading as an indication of evaporator temperature and that conditions are correct to broadcast an A/C request message on the controller area network (CAN) B bus, where it is read by the front control module (FCM). The FCM then requests the powertrain control module (PCM) to cycle the A/C compressor clutch as necessary over the CAN C bus. The evaporator temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The evaporator temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage during this service procedure. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel assembly See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal. 3. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) from the evaporator temperature sensor (2) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3) near the blend door actuator (4). 4. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the HVAC housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6832 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the evaporator temperature sensor (2) into the opening in the HVAC housing (3) near the blend door actuator (4). 2. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) to the evaporator temperature sensor. 3. Install the instrument panel assembly See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Installation. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The fixed A/C orifice tube is installed in the A/C liquid line and provides a restriction in the liquid refrigerant line between the A/C condenser and the A/C evaporator. This restriction established the pressure differential between the high and low-pressure sides of the A/C system. The A/C orifice tube includes a diffuser screen (1), O-ring seals (2) to seal it to the inner wall of the A/C liquid line, an inlet filter screen (3) and the fixed orifice (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6837 Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Testing and Inspection A/C ORIFICE TUBE WARNING: The A/C liquid line between the A/C condenser and the A/C orifice tube can become hot enough to burn the skin. Use extreme caution when performing the following test to prevent possible personal injury. NOTE: The A/C orifice tube can be checked for proper operation using the following procedure. However, the A/C orifice tube is only serviced as a part of the A/C liquid line. If the results of this test indicate that the A/C orifice tube is obstructed or missing, the A/C liquid line must be replaced. 1. Confirm that the refrigerant system is properly charged See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/A/C Performance Test. 2. Start the engine. Turn on the A/C system and confirm that the compressor clutch is engaged. 3. Allow the A/C system to operate for five minutes. 4. Lightly and cautiously touch the A/C liquid line near the condenser outlet at the front of the engine compartment. The A/C liquid line should be hot to the touch. 5. Touch the A/C liquid line near the evaporator inlet at the rear of the engine compartment. The A/C liquid line should be cold to the touch. 6. If there is a distinct temperature differential between the two ends of the A/C liquid line, the A/C orifice tube is in good condition. If there is little or no detectable temperature differential between the two ends of the A/C liquid line, the A/C orifice tube is obstructed or missing and the A/C liquid line must be replaced See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heater Core: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The heater core (1) is located in the HVAC housing, behind the instrument panel. The heater core is a heat exchanger made of rows of tubes with fins. The heater core tubes (2) are attached to the side of the heater core and are secured to the HVAC housing by a removable flange (3). The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the heater core. The HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle to service the heater core. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6842 Heater Core: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Engine coolant is circulated through the heater hoses to the heater core at all times. As the coolant flows through the heater core, heat is removed from the engine and is transferred to the heater core tubes and fins. Air directed through the heater core picks up the heat from the heater core fins. The blend-air door allows control of the heater output air temperature by regulating the amount of air flowing through the heater core. The blower motor speed controls the volume of air flowing through the HVAC housing. The heater core cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation Heater Core: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the heater core. The heater core tubes should not be repositioned, loosened or removed from the heater core. Failure to follow this warning could result in a coolant leak and possible personal injury or death. 1. If removed, install the rubber flange (3) over the heater core tubes (4). NOTE: Make sure that the foam seal and the rubber flange are properly positioned in the HVAC housing. 2. Carefully install the heater core (1) into the lower half of the HVAC housing (2). 3. Assemble the HVAC housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Assembly. NOTE: If the heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair. 4. Install the HVAC housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation > Page 6845 Heater Core: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. WARNING: The heater core tubes are not serviced separately from the heater core. The heater core tubes should not be repositioned, loosened or removed from the heater core. Failure to follow this warning could result in a coolant leak and possible personal injury or death. 1. Remove the HVAC housing and place it on a workbench See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Removal. 2. Disassemble the HVAC housing See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly. NOTE: If the foam seal around the heater core is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. 3. Carefully lift the heater core (1) out of the lower half of the HVAC housing (2). NOTE: If the rubber flange around the heater core tubes is deformed or damaged, the flange must be replaced. 4. If required, remove the rubber flange (3) from around the heater core tubes (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Compressor - Operation High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Description and Operation A/C Compressor - Operation HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE The high pressure relief valve vents refrigerant from the A/C system when a discharge pressure of 3445 to 4135 kPa (500 to 600 psi) or above is reached. The high pressure relief valve closes with a minimum discharge pressure of 2756 kPa (400 psi) is reached. The high pressure relief valve vents only enough refrigerant to reduce the A/C system pressure, and then re-seats itself. The majority of the refrigerant is conserved in the A/C system. If the high pressure relief valve vents refrigerant, it does not mean the valve is inoperative. The high pressure relief valve is factory-calibrated and cannot be adjusted or repaired, and must not be removed or otherwise disturbed. The valve is only serviced as a part of the A/C compressor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Discharge Line Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Discharge Line DESCRIPTION The A/C discharge line is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C compressor to the A/C condenser. The A/C discharge line has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals and gaskets. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C discharge line is removed, NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C discharge line has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals and gaskets. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C discharge line is removed, The A/C discharge line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Discharge Line > Page 6854 Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Liquid Line DESCRIPTION The A/C liquid line is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C condenser to the A/C evaporator. The A/C liquid line uses a spring-lock type refrigerant line coupler with three O-rings to connect and seal it to the A/C evaporator See: Coupler HVAC/Description and Operation/Description. The A/C liquid line includes the high-side service port, the fixed A/C orifice tube and a fitting for the A/C pressure transducer See: Service Port HVAC/Description and Operation, See: Expansion Block/Orifice Tube/Description and Operation/Description and See: Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch/Description and Operation/Description. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C liquid line has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals, gasket, A/C pressure transducer, high-side service port valve and cap and the secondary retaining clip. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C liquid line is removed. The A/C liquid line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Discharge Line > Page 6855 Hose/Line HVAC: Description and Operation Suction Line DESCRIPTION The A/C suction line is the refrigerant line that carries refrigerant from the A/C accumulator to the A/C compressor. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. The A/C suction line has no serviceable parts except for the O-ring seals and gaskets. The O-ring seals used on the connections are made from a special type of rubber not affected by R-134a refrigerant. The O-ring seals and gaskets must be replaced whenever the A/C suction line is removed. The A/C suction line cannot be repaired and must be replaced if found to be leaking or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Line - Removal Discharge Line REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. 3. Remove the nut (3) that secures the A/C discharge line (2) to the A/C condenser (4). 4. Disconnect the A/C discharge line from the A/C condenser and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 5. Remove the nut (1) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. 6. Disconnect the A/C discharge line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 7. Install plugs in, or tape over the discharge line fittings and the condenser and compressor ports. 8. Remove the A/C discharge line from the engine compartment. Liquid Line REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 6858 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the A/C pressure transducer (8). 4. Remove the air filter housing. 5. Remove the nut (6) that secures the A/C liquid line (1) to the condenser outlet port (7). 6. Disconnect the A/C liquid line from the A/C condenser and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 7. Disengage the A/C liquid line from the body retaining clips (5). 8. Remove the secondary retaining clip (4) from the spring-lock coupler that secures the A/C liquid line to evaporator inlet tube (3). 9. Using the proper A/C line disconnect tool (Special Tool Kit 7193 or equivalent), disconnect the A/C liquid line from the evaporator inlet tube and remove and discard the O-ring seals See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal. 10. Install plugs in, or tape over the opened liquid line fittings and the condenser and evaporator ports. 11. Remove the A/C liquid line from the engine compartment. 12. If required , remove the A/C pressure transducer from the A/C liquid line See: Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch/Service and Repair/Removal. Suction Line REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. 3. Remove the resonator from the engine. 4. Remove the nut (1) that secures the A/C suction line (5) to the A/C accumulator (6). 5. Disconnect the A/C suction line from the A/C accumulator and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 6. Remove the nut that secures the A/C suction line to the A/C compressor. 7. Disconnect the A/C suction line from the A/C compressor and remove and discard the O-ring seal and gasket. 8. Install plugs in, or tape over the suction line fittings and the accumulator and compressor ports. 9. Remove the A/C suction line from the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 6859 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair A/C Line - Installation Discharge Line INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant systemSee: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. 1. Position the A/C discharge line (2) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened discharge line fittings and the condenser and compressor ports 3. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them and new gaskets onto the discharge line fittings. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. 5. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the A/C discharge line to the A/C condenser (4). 7. Install the nut (3) that secures the A/C discharge line to the A/C condenser. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 8. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 9. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. 10. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. 11. Charge the refrigerant systemSee: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge. Liquid Line INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant systemSee: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 6860 1. If removed, install the A/C pressure transducer (8) onto the A/C liquid line (1). 2. Position the A/C liquid line into the engine compartment. 3. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened liquid line fittings and the condenser and evaporator ports. 4. Lubricate new O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them onto the liquid line spring-lock coupler fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seals as they are made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 5. Connect the A/C liquid line to the evaporator inlet tube (3) See: Coupler HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation. 6. Install the secondary retaining clip (4) onto the spring-lock coupler that secures the A/C liquid line to the evaporator inlet tube. 7. Engage the A/C liquid line into the body retaining clips (5). 8. Lubricate a new O-ring seal with clean refrigerant oil and install it and a new gasket onto the liquid line fitting. Use only the specified O-ring seal as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 9. Connect the A/C liquid line to the condenser outlet port (7). 10. Install the nut (6) that secures the A/C liquid line to the condenser outlet port. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 11. Install the air filter housing. 12. Connect the wire harness connector (2) to the A/C pressure transducer. 13. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 14. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. 15. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. 16. Charge the refrigerant systemSee: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge. Suction Line INSTALLATION CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant systemSee: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: Replacement of the refrigerant line O-ring seals and gaskets is required anytime a refrigerant line is opened. Failure to replace the rubber O-ring seals and metal gaskets could result in a refrigerant system leak. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > A/C Line - Removal > Page 6861 1. Position the A/C suction line (5) into the engine compartment. 2. Remove the tape or plugs from the opened suction line fittings and the accumulator and compressor ports. 3. Lubricate new rubber O-ring seals with clean refrigerant oil and install them and new gaskets onto the suction line fittings. Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of a special material for the R-134a system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the A/C suction line to the A/C compressor. 5. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C suction line to the A/C compressor. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 6. Install the A/C suction line to the A/C accumulator (6). 7. Install the nut (1) that secures the A/C suction line to the A/C accumulator. Tighten the nut to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 8. Install the resonator onto the engine. 9. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 10. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. 11. Adjust the refrigerant oil level See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. 12. Charge the refrigerant systemSee: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Housing Assembly HVAC: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION All models are equipped with a common HVAC housing assembly (1) that combines A/C and heating capabilities into a single unit mounted within the passenger compartment. The HVAC housing consists of the following: - HVAC housing - The HVAC housing consists of an upper housing and a lower housing that are attached together by screws and metal retaining clips and is mounted to the dash panel behind the instrument panel. The HVAC housing contains the heater core (2), blend-air doors and actuator (3), A/C evaporator (4), blower motor (7), evaporator temperature sensor (8), mode-air doors and actuators (9), floor distribution duct, foam seals and the HVAC wire harness. - Air inlet housing - The air inlet housing is mounted to the right end of the HVAC housing and contains the blower motor resistor (5) and the recirculation-air door and actuator (6). The heating-A/C system is a blend-air type system. The two blend-air doors control the amount of conditioned air that is allowed to flow through, or around, the heater core. This single zone heating-A/C system uses only one blend door actuator. The A/C system is designed for the use of a non-CFC, R-134a refrigerant and uses an A/C evaporator to cool and dehumidify the incoming air prior to blending it with the heated air. A temperature control determines the discharge air temperature by operating the blend door actuator, which moves the blend-air doors. This allows an almost immediate control of the output air temperature of the system. The two mode door actuators operate the mode-air doors which direct the flow of the conditioned air out the various air outlets, depending on the mode selected. The recirculation door actuator operates the recirculation-air door which closes off the fresh air intake and recirculates the air already inside the vehicle. The electric door actuators are connected to the vehicle electrical system by the HVAC wire harness. The blower motor controls the velocity of air flowing through the HVAC housing assembly by spinning the blower wheel within the HVAC housings at the selected speed by use of the blower motor resistor. The HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the heater core, A/C evaporator, blend-air and mode-air doors. The air inlet housing must be removed from HVAC housing for service of the recirculation door actuator and the recirculation-air door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Housing Assembly HVAC: Removal and Replacement Air Inlet Housing Removal AIR INLET HOUSING WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The air inlet housing must be removed from HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the recirculation-air door. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the HVAC housing (6) and place it on a workbench See: HVAC Housing - Removal. 3. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness (5) from the recirculation door actuator (1) and the blower motor resistor (3). 4. Remove the four screws (4) that secure the air inlet housing to the top of the HVAC housing and remove the air inlet housing. NOTE: If the foam seal on the air inlet housing is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. 5. If required, disassemble the air inlet housing See: Overhaul/Disassembly. Air Inlet Housing Installation AIR INLET HOUSING NOTE: The air inlet housing must be removed from HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the recirculation-air door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6867 1. Position the air inlet housing (2) onto the top of the HVAC housing (6). 2. Install the four screws (4) that secure the air inlet housing to the top of the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the HVAC wire harness (5) to the blower motor resistor (3) and the recirculation door actuator (1). NOTE: If the foam seal on the air inlet housing is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. 4. Install the HVAC housing See: HVAC Housing - Installation. 5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. HVAC Housing - Removal HVAC HOUSING WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: The HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the heater core, A/C evaporator, mode-air and blend-air doors. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. 3. Drain the engine cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair. 4. Remove the instrument panel from the passenger compartment See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal. 5. Remove the two bolts (1) that secure the HVAC housing (2) to the passenger compartment side of the dash panel (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6868 6. Disconnect the A/C liquid line and the A/C accumulator from the A/C evaporator and install plugs into or caps over the fittings and evaporator tubes See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Removal and See: Accumulator HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal. 7. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core tubes and install plugs into or caps over the heater core tubes. 8. Remove the three nuts (1) that secure the HVAC housing (2) and the fresh air inlet screen (3) to the engine compartment side of the dash panel (4). 9. Pull the HVAC housing assembly rearward so that the mounting studs and condensate drain tube clear the dash panel and remove the HVAC housing from the passenger compartment. 10. If required, remove the fresh air inlet screen from the dash panel. HVAC Housing - Installation HVAC HOUSING NOTE: The HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the heater core, A/C evaporator, mode-air and blend-air doors. 1. If removed, install the fresh air screen (3) onto the dash panel (4). 2. Position the HVAC housing (2) into the passenger compartment with the mounting studs and the condensate drain tube in their proper locations in the dash panel. 3. Loosely install the three nuts (1) that secure the HVAC housing to the engine compartment side of the dash panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6869 4. Loosely install the two bolts (1) that secure the HVAC housing to the passenger compartment side of the dash panel. 5. Tighten the three nuts that secure the HVAC housing to the engine compartment side of the dash panel to 7 Nm (62 in. lbs.). 6. Tighten the two bolts that secure the HVAC housing to the passenger compartment side of the dash panel to 3 Nm (26 in. lbs.). 7. Install the instrument panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Installation. 8. Remove the previously installed plugs or caps and connect the heater hoses to the heater core tubes. 9. Remove the previously installed plugs or caps and connect the A/C liquid line and the A/C accumulator to the A/C evaporator See: Hose/Line HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Line - Installation and See: Accumulator HVAC/Service and Repair/Installation. 10. Reconnect the negative battery cable. 11. If the heater core is being replaced, flush the cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair. 12. Refill the engine cooling system See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Service and Repair. 13. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. 14. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge. 15. Initiate the Actuator Calibration function using a scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6870 Housing Assembly HVAC: Overhaul Air Inlet Housing AIR INLET HOUSING NOTE: The air inlet housing must be removed from HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the recirculation-air door. 1. Remove the air inlet housing (1) from the HVAC housing and place it on a workbench See: Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Removal 2. Remove the recirculation door actuator from the air inlet housing See: Air Door/Air Door Actuator / Motor/Service and Repair/Recirculation Door Actuator - Removal. 3. Remove the blower motor resistor from the air inlet housing See: Blower Motor Resistor/Service and Repair/Removal. NOTE: If the foam seal on the air inlet housing is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. 4. Carefully cut the foam seal (2) along the parting line (3) of the two halves of the air distribution housing. 5. Remove the four screws (4) that secure the two halves of the air distribution housing together and separate the housing. NOTE: If the seal on the air door is deformed or damaged, the air door must be replaced. 6. Remove the recirculation-air door (5) from the air inlet housing. HVAC Housing HVAC HOUSING NOTE: The HVAC housing must be removed from the vehicle and disassembled for service of the heater core, A/C evaporator, mode-air and blend-air doors. 1. Remove the HVAC housing (1) and place it on a workbench See: Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6871 2. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness (2) from the mode door actuators (3 and 4) located on the driver side end of the HVAC housing. 3. Remove the screws (5) that secure the mode door actuators to the HVAC housing and remove the actuators. 4. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness (1) from the evaporator temperature sensor (2) and the blend door actuator (3) located on the top of the HVAC housing (4). 5. Remove the screws (5) that secure the blend door actuator to the HVAC housing and remove the actuator. 6. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the HVAC housing. 7. Remove the lever and linkage rod (1) from the blend door pivot shaft (2) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3). 8. Carefully disconnect the lever and linkage rod from the blend door pivot lever (4). 9. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness (1) from the blower motor resistor (2), recirculation door actuator (3), and the blower motor (4). 10. Remove the three screws (5) that secure the blower motor to the HVAC housing (6) and remove the blower motor. 11. Remove the HVAC wiring harness from the HVAC housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6872 12. Remove the four screws (1) that secure the air inlet housing (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3) and remove the air inlet housing. NOTE: If the foam seal on the air inlet housing is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. 13. If required, disassemble the air inlet housing See: Disassembly. NOTE: If the foam seal on the panel/defrost outlet is deformed or damaged, it must be replaced. 14. Remove the foam seal (1) from the panel/defrost outlet (2) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3). 15. Remove the six screws (1) that secure the panel/defrost outlet (2) to the top of the HVAC housing (3) and remove the outlet. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6873 NOTE: If the seal on the air door is deformed or damaged, the air door must be replaced. 16. Remove the panel-air door (1) from the opening located at the top of the HVAC housing (2). 17. Remove the three screws (1) that secure the floor distribution duct (2) to the bottom of the HVAC housing (3) and remove the duct. NOTE: If any of the foam seals are deformed or damaged, the seal(s) must be replaced. 18. Remove the three foam seals (1 , 2 and 3) from the HVAC housing (4). 19. Remove the two metal clips (5) eleven screws (6) that secure the upper and lower HVAC housing halves together and separate the housing halves. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6874 NOTE: If the foam seal around the heater core is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. 20. Carefully lift the heater core (1) out of the lower half of the HVAC housing (2). NOTE: If the rubber flange around the heater core tubes is deformed or damaged, the flange must be replaced. 21. If required, remove the rubber flange (3) from around the heater core tubes (4). 22. Carefully lift the A/C evaporator (1) out of the lower half of the HVAC housing (2). NOTE: If the rubber flange around the evaporator tubes is deformed or damaged, the flange must be replaced. 23. If required, remove the rubber flange (3) from around the evaporator tubes (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6875 24. To remove the blend-air door (1) from the inside of the HVAC housing (2), first carefully release the retaining tab of the blend door pivot lever (3) from the pivot shaft of the blend door, using a small pick-type tool. 25. Pull the blend door pivot lever out of the pivot shaft of the blend-air door. 26. Remove the air vane (1) from the upper half of the HVAC housing (2). NOTE: If the rubber evaporator core seal is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. 27. Remove the rubber evaporator core seal (3) from the HVAC housing. NOTE: If the seal on any air door is deformed or damaged, the air door must be replaced. 28. Remove both blend-air doors (4) and the defrost/floor-air door (5) from the HVAC housing. Air Inlet Housing AIR INLET HOUSING NOTE: The air inlet housing must be removed from HVAC housing and disassembled for service of the recirculation-air door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6876 1. Position the recirculation-air door (5) into the air inlet housing (1). CAUTION: Make sure that the recirculation-air door pivot shaft is properly seated in the pivot holes located in the two halves of the air inlet housing. NOTE: If the seal on the air door is deformed or damaged, the air door must be replaced. 2. Install the four screws (4) that secure the two halves of the air inlet housing together. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Install the blower motor resistor onto the air inlet housing See: Blower Motor Resistor/Service and Repair/Installation. 4. Install the recirculation door actuator onto the air inlet housing See: Air Door/Air Door Actuator / Motor/Service and Repair/Recirculation Door Actuator - Installation. 5. Install the air inlet housing onto the HVAC housing See: Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing - Installation. HVAC Housing HVAC HOUSING CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant oil level when servicing the A/C refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Failure to properly adjust the refrigerant oil level will prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and can cause serious A/C compressor damage. NOTE: When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant systemSee: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. NOTE: If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 1. Install the air vane (1) into the upper half of the HVAC housing (2). NOTE: If the rubber evaporator core seal is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. 2. Install the rubber evaporator core seal (3) into the HVAC housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6877 NOTE: If the seal on any air door is deformed or damaged, the air door must be replaced. 3. Install both blend-air doors (4) and the defrost/floor-air door (5) into the HVAC housing. 4. If removed, install the rubber flange (3) over the evaporator tubes (4). NOTE: Make sure that the evaporator drain is clean and unrestricted and that the rubber seal and the rubber flange are properly positioned in the HVAC housings. NOTE: If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 5. Carefully install the A/C evaporator (1) into the lower half of the HVAC housing (2). 6. If removed, install the rubber flange (3) over the heater core tubes (4). NOTE: If the foam seal around the heater core is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. NOTE: Make sure that the foam seal and the rubber flange are properly positioned in the HVAC housing. 7. Carefully install the heater core (1) into the lower half of the HVAC housing (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6878 8. Align the air door pivot shafts with the pivot holes in the HVAC housing and install the two halves of the housing together (4). 9. Install the eleven screws (6) and the two metal clips (5) that secure the two housing halves together. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). NOTE: If any of the foam seals are deformed or damaged, the seal(s) must be replaced. 10. Install the foam seals (1, 2 and 3) onto the HVAC housing. 11. Position the floor distribution duct (2) onto the bottom of the HVAC housing (3). 12. Install the screws (1) that secure the floor distribution duct to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). NOTE: If the seal on the air door is deformed or damaged, the air door must be replaced. 13. Align the pivot shaft of the panel-air door (1) with the pivot hole in the top of the HVAC housing (2) and install the panel-air door into the housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6879 14. Install the panel/defrost outlet (2) onto the top of the HVAC housing (3). 15. Install the six screws (1) that secure the panel/defrost outlet to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). NOTE: If the seal for the panel/defrost outlet is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. 16. Install the foam seal (1) onto the panel/defrost outlet (2) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3). 17. Position the air inlet housing (2) onto the top of the HVAC housing (3). NOTE: If the foam seal on the air inlet housing is deformed or damaged, the seal must be replaced. 18. Install the four screws (1) that secure the air inlet housing to the top of the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6880 19. Position the blower motor (4) into the HVAC housing (6). 20. Install the three screws (5) that secure the blower motor to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). NOTE: Make sure that all HVAC wire harness leads are correctly routed through the wiring retainers. 21. Install the HVAC wire harness (1) onto the HVAC housing. 22. Connect the HVAC wire harness to the blower motor resistor (2), recirculation door actuator (3) and the blower motor. 23. Align the blend door pivot lever (1) with the blend-air door pivot shaft (2) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3). NOTE: Make sure that the pivot lever retaining tab is fully engaged to the blend-air door pivot shaft. 24. Install the blend door pivot lever into the blend-air door pivot shaft. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6881 25. Connect the lever and linkage rod (1) to the blend door pivot lever (4) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3). 26. Install the lever and linkage rod onto the blend door pivot shaft (2). 27. Install the evaporator temperature sensor (2) into the opening located at the top of the HVAC housing (4). 28. Position the blend door actuator (3) onto the HVAC housing. If necessary, rotate the actuator slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shaft with those on the blend-air door linkage See: Air Door/Air Door Actuator / Motor/Service and Repair/Blend Door Actuator - Installation. 29. Install the three screws (5) that secure the blend door actuator to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 30. Connect the HVAC wire harness (1) to the evaporator temperature sensor and the blend door actuator. 31. Position the mode door actuators (3 and 4) onto the driver side end of the HVAC housing (1). If necessary, rotate the actuators slightly to align the splines on the actuator output shafts with those on the mode-air doors See: Air Door/Air Door Actuator / Motor/Service and Repair/Mode Door Actuator - Installation. 32. Install the three screws (5) that secure the mode door actuators to the HVAC housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 33. Connect the HVAC wire harness (2) to the mode door actuator. 34. Install the HVAC housing assembly See: Removal and Replacement/HVAC Housing Installation. 35. If the A/C evaporator is being replaced, add 60 milliliters (2 fluid ounces) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. When replacing multiple A/C system components, refer to the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart to determine how much oil should be added to the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Level. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT CHARGE LEVEL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6886 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications REFRIGERANT TYPE Refrigerant type ................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... R 134a Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Refrigerant Refrigerant: Description and Operation A/C Refrigerant A/C REFRIGERANT The refrigerant used in this air conditioning system is a HydroFluoroCarbon (HFC), type R-134a. Unlike R-12, which is a ChloroFluoroCarbon (CFC), R-134a refrigerant does not contain ozone-depleting chlorine. R-134a refrigerant is a non-toxic, non-flammable, clear and colorless liquefied gas. CAUTION: R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12 refrigerant in an A/C system. Even a small amount of R-12 refrigerant added to an R-134a refrigerant system will cause A/C compressor failure. The A/C refrigerant system is filled-for-life at the factory and requires no regular maintenance. Although not required at specific intervals, the charge level should be checked if system performance deteriorates or if a noise or leak is suspected See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Refrigerant System Leaks. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Refrigerant > Page 6889 Refrigerant: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The refrigerant used in this air conditioning system is a HydroFluoroCarbon (HFC), type R-134a. Unlike R-12, which is a ChloroFluoroCarbon (CFC), R-134a refrigerant does not contain ozone-depleting chlorine. R-134a refrigerant is a non-toxic, non-flammable, clear, and colorless liquefied gas. Even though R-134a does not contain chlorine, it must be reclaimed and recycled just like CFC-type refrigerants. This is because R-134a is a greenhouse gas and can contribute to global warming See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > A/C Refrigerant > Page 6890 Refrigerant: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION R-134a refrigerant is not compatible with R-12 refrigerant in an A/C system. Even a small amount of R-12 refrigerant added to an R-134a refrigerant system will cause A/C compressor failure, refrigerant oil sludge or poor A/C system performance. In addition, the polyalkylene glycol (PAG) synthetic refrigerant oils used in an R-134a refrigerant system are not compatible with the mineral-based refrigerant oils used in an R-12 refrigerant system. R-134a refrigerant system service ports, service tool couplers and refrigerant dispensing bottles have all been designed with unique fittings to ensure that an R-134a refrigerant system is not accidentally contaminated with the wrong refrigerant (R-12). There are also labels posted in the engine compartment of the vehicle and on the A/C compressor to identify that the A/C system is equipped with R-134a refrigerant. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6891 Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection REFRIGERANT SYSTEM LEAKS WARNING: R-134a service equipment or vehicle A/C system should not be pressure tested or leak tested with compressed air. Mixture of air and R-134a can be combustible at elevated pressures. These mixtures are potentially dangerous and may result in fire or explosion causing property damage, personal injury or death. Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and lubricant vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and throat. Use only approved service equipment meeting SAE requirements to discharge R-134a system. If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work area before resuming service. If the refrigerant system is empty or low in refrigerant charge, a leak at any line fitting or component seal is likely. A review of the fittings, lines and components for oily residue is an indication of the leak location. If the A/C liquid line pressure is found to be less than 345 kPa (50 psi), proceed to the System Empty procedure below. If liquid line pressure is found to be greater than 345 kPa (50 psi), proceed to the System Low procedure. If the A/C system is not cooling properly, determine if the refrigerant system is fully charged with R-134a. This is accomplished by completely evacuating and recharging the A/C system. To detect a leak in the refrigerant system, perform one of the following procedures as indicated by the symptoms. SYSTEM EMPTY 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system to the lowest degree of vacuum possible (approximately 28 in Hg.) See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. Determine if the system holds a vacuum for 15 minutes. If vacuum is held, a leak is probably not present. If system will not maintain vacuum level, proceed to STEP 2. 2. Prepare and dispense 0.284 kilograms (10 ounces) of R-134a refrigerant into the evacuated refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge and proceed to STEP 1 of the System Low procedure. SYSTEM LOW 3. Position the vehicle in a wind free work area. This will aid in detecting small leaks. 4. Operate the heating-A/C system with the engine at idle under the following conditions for at least five minutes. - Doors or windows open - Transmission in Park or Neutral with the parking brake set (depending on application) - A/C-heater controls set to outside air, full cool, panel mode, high blower and with A/C compressor engaged CAUTION: A leak detector only designed for R-12 refrigerant will not detect leaks in a R-134a refrigerant system. 5. Shut the vehicle Off and wait 2-7 minutes. Then use an electronic leak detector that is designed to detect R-134a refrigerant and search for leaks. Fittings, lines or components that appear to be oily usually indicate a refrigerant leak. To inspect the A/C evaporator for leaks, insert the leak detector probe into the drain tube opening or an air outlet. A dye for R-134a is available to aid in leak detection. Use only DaimlerChrysler approved refrigerant dye. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System Recovery Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Recovery REFRIGERANT SYSTEM RECOVERY WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. An R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station (1) that meets SAE standard J2210 must be used to recover the refrigerant from the R-134a refrigerant system. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for the proper care and use of this equipment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System Recovery > Page 6894 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Evacuate REFRIGERANT SYSTEM EVACUATE NOTE: Special effort must be used to prevent moisture from entering the A/C system oil. Moisture in the oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. If an A/C compressor designed to use R-134a refrigerant is left open to the atmosphere for an extended period of time. It is recommended that the refrigerant oil be drained and replaced with new oil or a new A/C compressor be used. This will eliminate the possibility of contaminating the refrigerant system. If the refrigerant system has been open to the atmosphere, it must be evacuated before the system can be filled. Moisture and air mixed with the refrigerant will raise the compressor head pressure above acceptable operating levels. This will reduce the performance of the A/C system and damage the A/C compressor. Moisture will boil at near room temperature when exposed to vacuum. To evacuate the refrigerant system: NOTE: When connecting the service equipment coupling to the line fitting, verify that the valve of the coupling is fully closed. This will reduce the amount of effort required to make the connection. 1. Recover the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. 2. Connect a suitable charging station, refrigerant recovery machine or a manifold gauge set with vacuum pump and refrigerant recovery equipment See: Tools and Equipment/Refrigerant System Service Equipment. 3. Open the suction and discharge valves and start the vacuum pump. The vacuum pump should run a minimum of 45 minutes prior to charge to eliminate all moisture in system. When the suction gauge reads to the lowest degree of vacuum possible (approximately -88 kPa (- 26 in. Hg) or greater) for 30 minutes, close all valves and turn off vacuum pump. If the system fails to reach specified vacuum, the refrigerant system likely has a leak that must be corrected. If the refrigerant system maintains specified vacuum for at least 30 minutes, start the vacuum pump, open the suction and discharge valves. Then allow the system to evacuate an additional 10 minutes. 4. Close all valves. Turn off and disconnect the vacuum pump. 5. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Refrigerant System Recovery > Page 6895 Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Charge REFRIGERANT SYSTEM CHARGE WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. NOTE: The Underhood HVAC Specification Label contains the refrigerant fill specification of the vehicle being serviced. After all refrigerant system leaks have been repaired and the refrigerant system has been evacuated, a refrigerant charge can be injected into the system or the Underhood HVAC Specification Label for the proper amount of the refrigerant charge.See: Specifications/Capacity Specifications. An R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE Standard J2210 must be used to charge the refrigerant system with R-134a refrigerant. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. CHARGING PROCEDURE CAUTION: A small amount of refrigerant oil is removed from the A/C system each time the refrigerant system is recovered and evacuated. Before charging the A/C system, you MUST replenish any oil lost during the recovery process. Refer the equipment manufacturer instructions for more information. 1. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. 2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE standard J2210 to the refrigerant system. 3. Refer to A/C SPECIFICATIONS See: Specifications/Capacity Specifications or the Underhood HVAC Specification Label for the proper amount of the refrigerant charge. 4. Measure the proper amount of refrigerant and heat it to 52° C (125° F) with the charging station. See the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper use of this equipment. 5. Open both the suction and discharge valves, then open the charge valve to allow the heated refrigerant to flow into the system. 6. When the transfer of refrigerant has stopped, close both the suction and discharge valves. 7. If all of the refrigerant charge did not transfer from the dispensing device, open all of the windows in the vehicle and set the heating-A/C system controls so that the A/C compressor is engaged and the blower motor is operating at its lowest speed setting. Run the engine at a steady high idle (about 1400 rpm). If the A/C compressor does not engage, test the compressor clutch circuits and repair as required. WARNING: Take care not to open the discharge (high pressure) valve at this time. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious or fatal injury. 8. Open the low-side valve to allow the remaining refrigerant to transfer to the refrigerant system. 9. Disconnect the charging station from the refrigerant system service ports. 10. Reinstall the caps onto the refrigerant system service ports. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6896 Refrigerant: Tools and Equipment REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE EQUIPMENT WARNING: Eye protection must be worn when servicing an A/C refrigerant system. Turn all valves off (rotate clockwise) on the equipment being used before connecting or disconnecting service equipment from the refrigerant system. Failure to observe these warnings may result in personal injury or death. WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions could result in possible personal injury or death. When servicing the A/C system, a R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station that meets SAE standard J2210 must be used (1). Contact an automotive service equipment supplier for refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging equipment. Refer to the operating instructions supplied by the equipment manufacturer for proper care and use of this equipment. A manifold gauge set (1) may be needed with some recovery/recycling/charging equipment. The manifold gauge set should have manual shut-off valves (2 and 6), or automatic back-flow valves located at the service port connector end of the manifold gauge set hoses (4 and 5). This will prevent refrigerant from being released into the atmosphere. MANIFOLD GAUGE SET CONNECTIONS CAUTION: Do not use an R-12 manifold gauge set on an R-134a system. The refrigerants are not compatible and system damage will result. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6897 - RECOVERY/RECYCLING/EVACUATION/CHARGING HOSE - The center manifold hose (Yellow, or White, with Black stripe) (3) is used to recover, evacuate, and charge the refrigerant system. When the low or high pressure valves on the manifold gauge set are opened, the refrigerant in the system will escape through this hose. - HIGH PRESSURE GAUGE HOSE - The high pressure hose (Red with Black stripe) (4) attaches to the high side service port. This service port is located on the A/C liquid line near the radiator cap. On this model, an A/C pressure transducer is also installed on the liquid line. A/C high-side pressures can be read using a scan tool. - LOW PRESSURE GAUGE HOSE - The low pressure hose (Blue with Black stripe) (5) attaches to the low side service port. This service port is located on the accumulator. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL CAPACITY It will not be necessary to check the oil level in the A/C compressor or to add oil, unless there has been an oil loss. An oil loss may occur due to a rupture or leak from a refrigerant line, a connector fitting, a component, or a component seal. If a leak occurs, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system after the repair has been made. Refrigerant oil loss will be evident at the leak point by the presence of a wet, shiny surface around the leak. Refrigerant oil must be added when an A/C accumulator, A/C condenser or A/C evaporator is replaced (see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart). The refrigerant oil level in a new A/C compressor must first be adjusted prior to compressor installation. Refrigerant Oil Capacities Chart Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 6902 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications REFRIGERANT OIL TYPE Refrigerant oil ...................................................................................................................................... ................................................................ ND-8 PAG Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Oil: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The refrigerant oil used in R-134a refrigerant systems is a synthetic-based, polyalkylene glycol (PAG), wax-free lubricant. Mineral-based R-12 refrigerant oils are not compatible with PAG oils, and should never be introduced to an R-134a refrigerant system. There are different PAG oils available, and each contains a different additive package. The A/C compressor used in this vehicle is designed to use ND-8 PAG refrigerant oil. Use only this type of refrigerant oil in the refrigerant system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6905 Refrigerant Oil: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION After performing any refrigerant recovery or recycling operation, always replenish the refrigerant system with the same amount of the recommended refrigerant oil as was removed. Too little refrigerant oil can cause A/C compressor damage, and too much can reduce A/C system performance. PAG refrigerant oil is more hygroscopic than mineral oil, and will absorb any moisture it comes into contact with, even moisture in the air. The PAG oil container should always be kept tightly capped until it is ready to be used. After use, recap the oil container immediately to prevent moisture contamination. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6906 Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair REFRIGERANT OIL LEVEL When an A/C system is assembled at the factory, all components except the A/C compressor are refrigerant oil free. After the refrigerant system has been charged and operated, the refrigerant oil in the A/C compressor is dispersed throughout the refrigerant system. The A/C accumulator, A/C condenser, A/C evaporator and the A/C compressor will each retain a significant amount of the needed refrigerant oil. It is important to have the correct amount of refrigerant oil in the A/C system. This ensures proper lubrication of the A/C compressor. Too little oil will result in damage to the A/C compressor, while too much oil will reduce the cooling capacity of the A/C system and consequently result in higher discharge air temperatures. CAUTION: The oil used in the A/C compressor is ND-8 PAG R-134a refrigerant oil. Only refrigerant oil of the same type should be used to service the A/C system. Do not use any other refrigerant oil. The oil container should be kept tightly capped until it is ready for use and then tightly capped after use to prevent contamination from dirt and moisture. Refrigerant oil will quickly absorb any moisture it comes in contact with, therefore, special effort must be used to keep all R-134a system components moisture-free. Moisture in the refrigerant oil is very difficult to remove and will cause a reliability problem with the A/C compressor. NOTE: Most reclaim/recycling equipment will measure the lubricant being removed during recovery. This amount of lubricant should be added back into the system. Refer to the reclaim/recycling equipment manufacturers instructions. It will not be necessary to check the oil level in the A/C compressor or to add oil, unless there has been an oil loss. An oil loss may occur due to a rupture or leak from a refrigerant line, a connector fitting, a component, or a component seal. If a leak occurs, add 30 milliliters (1 fluid ounce) of refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system after the repair has been made. Refrigerant oil loss will be evident at the leak point by the presence of a wet, shiny surface around the leak. Refrigerant oil must be added when an A/C accumulator, A/C condenser or A/C evaporator is replaced (see the Refrigerant Oil Capacities chart). The refrigerant oil level in a new A/C compressor must first be adjusted prior to compressor installation (refer to COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE shown below). Refrigerant Oil Capacities Chart COMPRESSOR OIL DRAIN PROCEDURE CAUTION: Be certain to adjust the refrigerant system oil level when replacing an A/C compressor. Failure to properly drain and measure the refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor can prevent the A/C system from operating as designed and cause serious compressor damage. The A/C compressor is filled with refrigerant oil from the factory. Use the following procedure to drain and measure refrigerant oil from the A/C compressor. 1. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the old A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 2. Drain all of the refrigerant oil from the new A/C compressor into a clean measured container. 3. Refill the new A/C compressor with the same amount of refrigerant oil that was drained out of the old compressor. Use only clean refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 4. Install the new A/C compressor onto the engine See: Compressor HVAC/Service and Repair/A/C Compressor - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 326 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 2 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6910 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6911 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 326 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 2 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6912 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C pressure transducer (1) is a switch that is installed on a fitting located on the A/C liquid line. An internally threaded fitting on the A/C pressure transducer connects it to the externally threaded Schrader-type fitting on the A/C liquid line. A rubber O-ring seals the connection between the A/C pressure transducer and the liquid line fitting. The A/C pressure transducer is connected to the vehicle electrical system by a molded plastic connector with three terminals. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6915 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C pressure transducer monitors the pressures in the high side of the refrigerant system through its connection to a fitting on the A/C liquid line. The A/C pressure transducer will change its internal resistance in response to the pressures it monitors. A Schrader-type valve in the liquid line fitting permits the A/C pressure transducer to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. The front control module (FCM) provides a five volt reference signal to the A/C pressure transducer, then monitors the output voltage of the A/C pressure transducer on a sensor return circuit to determine refrigerant pressure. The FCM broadcasts a refrigerant pressure message to the PCM, which is programmed to respond to the A/C pressure transducer and other sensor inputs by controlling the operation of the A/C compressor clutch to help optimize A/C system performance and to protect the system components from damage. The PCM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch when high side pressure rises above 3172 kPa (460 psi) and re-engage the clutch when high side pressure drops below 1999 kPa (290 psi). The A/C pressure transducer will also disengage the A/C compressor clutch if the high side pressure drops below 193 kPa (28 psi) and will re-engage the clutch when the high side pressure rises above 234 kPa (34 psi). The A/C pressure transducer message to the PCM will also prevent the A/C compressor clutch from engaging when ambient temperatures are below about 4.5° C (40° F) due to the pressure/temperature relationship of the refrigerant. The A/C pressure transducer is diagnosed using a scan tool. The A/C pressure transducer cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6916 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER The A/C pressure transducer is diagnosed using a scan tool. Before testing the A/C pressure transducer, be certain that the transducer wire harness connection is clean of corrosion and properly connected. For the A/C to operate, an A/C pressure transducer voltage reading between 0.451 and 4.519 volts is required. Voltages outside this range indicate a low or high refrigerant system pressure condition to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM is programmed to respond to a low or high refrigerant system pressure by suppressing operation of the A/C compressor. Refer to the A/C Pressure Transducer Voltage chart (below) for the possible conditions indicated by the transducer voltage reading. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to replace the A/C pressure transducer. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the A/C pressure transducer (2). 3. Remove the A/C pressure transducer from the A/C liquid line (3). 4. Remove the O-ring seal (4) from the liquid line fitting and discard. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6919 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of special material for R-134a. Use only refrigerant oil of the type required for the A/C compressor. 1. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal (4) with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the liquid line fitting (3). 2. Install the A/C pressure transducer (2) onto the A/C liquid line. Tighten the A/C pressure transducer securely. 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the A/C pressure transducer. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Blower Motor Relay: Locations Blower Motor Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6924 Blower Motor Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 176 Component : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR Connector: Name : RELAY-BLOWER MOTOR Color : # of pins : 0 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 86 INTERNAL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 87 C7 12DB BLOWER MOTOR RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The blower motor relay (1) for the heating-A/C system is a standard size International Standards Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal function and patterns (2). The blower motor relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current from a fuse in the power distribution center (PDC) directly to the blower motor. The blower motor relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a ground path by the control circuitry within the front control module (FCM). The blower motor relay is located in the integrated power module (IPM) in the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6927 Blower Motor Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The blower motor relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the battery to control the high current output to the blower motor. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the blower motor. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The blower motor relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the integrated power module (IPM). The inputs and outputs of the blower motor relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground circuit through the front control module (FCM). - The coil battery terminal (86) receives fused battery current at all times. - The normally open terminal (87) provides battery current output to the blower motor only when the blower motor relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the blower motor relay coil is de-energized. The blower motor relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Open the cover of the integrated power module (IPM) (1) located in the engine compartment. NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the IPM cover for blower motor relay identification and location. 3. Remove the blower motor relay (2) from the IPM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6930 Blower Motor Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the integrated power module (IPM) cover for blower motor relay identification and location. 1. Position the blower motor relay (2) into the proper receptacle of the IPM (1). 2. Align the blower motor relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the IPM receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the cover of the IPM. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations A/C Compressor Clutch Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6934 Compressor Clutch Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 174 Component : RELAY-A/C CLUTCH Connector: Name : RELAY-A/C CLUTCH Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 C13 20LB/OR A/C CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 C3 20DB/YL A/C CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C clutch relay (1) is a International Standards Organization (ISO) mini-relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal functions and patterns (2). The ISO mini-relay terminal functions are the same as a conventional size ISO relay. However, the ISO mini-relay terminal pattern (or footprint) is different, the current capacity is lower, and the physical dimensions are smaller than those of the conventional size ISO relay. The A/C clutch relay is located in the integrated power module (IPM) in the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6937 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C clutch relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input controlled by the powertrain control module (PCM) to control the high current output to the A/C clutch field coil. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the A/C clutch field coil. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The A/C clutch relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the integrated power module (IPM). The inputs and outputs of the A/C clutch relay include: - The common feed terminal (30) receives fused battery current through a B(+) circuit at all times. - The coil ground terminal (85) receives a ground input from the PCM through the A/C clutch control circuit only when the PCM electronically pulls the control circuit to ground. - The coil battery terminal (86) receives fused battery current through the ignition switch circuit only when the switch is in RUN. - The normally open terminal (87) provides a battery current output to the A/C clutch coil through the A/C clutch relay output circuit only when the compressor clutch relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (87A) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the A/C clutch relay coil is de-energized. The A/C clutch relay cannot be repaired must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard relay and for complete HVAC wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Compressor Clutch Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Open the cover of the integrated power module (IPM) (1) located in the engine compartment. NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the IPM cover for A/C clutch relay identification and location. 3. Remove the A/C clutch relay (2) from the IPM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6940 Compressor Clutch Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the integrated power module (IPM) cover for A/C clutch relay identification and location. 1. Position the A/C clutch relay (2) into the proper receptacle of the IPM (1). 2. Align the A/C clutch relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the IPM receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the cover of the IPM. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations Component ID: 260 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/OR AAT SIGNAL 2 G931 20VT/BR SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 7 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6945 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6946 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams Component ID: 260 Component : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G31 20VT/OR AAT SIGNAL 2 G931 20VT/BR SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 7 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6947 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that monitors the air temperature outside of the vehicle. The ambient air temperature sensor is mounted onto the inside of the front bumper beam and its data is used by the heating-A/C system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6950 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ambient air temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit sent by the front control module (FCM) through a two-wire lead and connector of the vehicle wire harness. The ambient air temperature sensor changes its internal resistance in response to changes in the outside air temperature, which either increases or decreases the reference signal voltage read by the FCM. The FCM converts and broadcasts the sensor data over the controller area network (CAN) B bus, where it is read by the manual temperature control (MTC) A/C-heater control and other various vehicle control modules. The ambient air temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The ambient air temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the ambient air temperature sensor (2). 3. Remove the bolt (3) that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the front bumper beam (4) and remove the sensor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6953 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the ambient air temperature sensor (2) to the front bumper beam (4). 2. Install the bolt (3) that secures the ambient air temperature sensor to the front bumper beam. Tighten the bolt securely. 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the ambient air temperature sensor. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 265 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C21 20VT/OR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 2 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6957 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6958 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 265 Component : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Connector: Name : SENSOR-EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 C21 20VT/OR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL 2 C121 20DB/DG SENSOR GROUND Component Location - 19 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6959 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The evaporator temperature sensor (1) is an electrical thermistor located within a molded plastic case that is inserted into the HVAC housing (2) to measure the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator (3). Two terminals within the connector receptacle connect the sensor to the vehicle electrical system through a wire lead and connector of the HVAC wire harness. NOTE: Cutaway of typical HVAC housing shown for clarity in illustration. The external location of the evaporator temperature sensor allows the sensor to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6962 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The evaporator temperature sensor monitors the temperature of the conditioned air downstream of the A/C evaporator and supplies an input signal to the A/C-heater control. The A/C-heater control uses the evaporator temperature sensor input signal to optimize A/C system performance and to protect the A/C system from evaporator freezing. The evaporator temperature sensor will change its internal resistance in response to the temperatures it monitors and is connected to the A/C-heater control through sensor ground circuit and a 5-volt reference signal circuit. As the temperature of the A/C evaporator decreases, the internal resistance of the evaporator temperature sensor decreases. The A/C-heater control uses the monitored voltage reading as an indication of evaporator temperature and that conditions are correct to broadcast an A/C request message on the controller area network (CAN) B bus, where it is read by the front control module (FCM). The FCM then requests the powertrain control module (PCM) to cycle the A/C compressor clutch as necessary over the CAN C bus. The evaporator temperature sensor is diagnosed using a scan tool. The evaporator temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury or death. NOTE: Take the proper precautions to protect the front face of the instrument panel from cosmetic damage during this service procedure. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the instrument panel assembly See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Removal. 3. Disconnect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) from the evaporator temperature sensor (2) located on the top of the HVAC housing (3) near the blend door actuator (4). 4. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the HVAC housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6965 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the evaporator temperature sensor (2) into the opening in the HVAC housing (3) near the blend door actuator (4). 2. Connect the HVAC wire harness connector (1) to the evaporator temperature sensor. 3. Install the instrument panel assembly See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel - Installation. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Component ID: 326 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 2 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6969 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6970 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 326 Component : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Connector: Name : TRANSDUCER-A/C PRESSURE Color : GRAY # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G180 20VT/YL FCM SENSOR RETURN 2 T103 20YL/OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY 3 C18 20LB/BR A/C PRESSURE SIGNAL 4-Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6971 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The A/C pressure transducer (1) is a switch that is installed on a fitting located on the A/C liquid line. An internally threaded fitting on the A/C pressure transducer connects it to the externally threaded Schrader-type fitting on the A/C liquid line. A rubber O-ring seals the connection between the A/C pressure transducer and the liquid line fitting. The A/C pressure transducer is connected to the vehicle electrical system by a molded plastic connector with three terminals. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 6974 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The A/C pressure transducer monitors the pressures in the high side of the refrigerant system through its connection to a fitting on the A/C liquid line. The A/C pressure transducer will change its internal resistance in response to the pressures it monitors. A Schrader-type valve in the liquid line fitting permits the A/C pressure transducer to be removed or installed without disturbing the refrigerant in the A/C system. The front control module (FCM) provides a five volt reference signal to the A/C pressure transducer, then monitors the output voltage of the A/C pressure transducer on a sensor return circuit to determine refrigerant pressure. The FCM broadcasts a refrigerant pressure message to the PCM, which is programmed to respond to the A/C pressure transducer and other sensor inputs by controlling the operation of the A/C compressor clutch to help optimize A/C system performance and to protect the system components from damage. The PCM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch when high side pressure rises above 3172 kPa (460 psi) and re-engage the clutch when high side pressure drops below 1999 kPa (290 psi). The A/C pressure transducer will also disengage the A/C compressor clutch if the high side pressure drops below 193 kPa (28 psi) and will re-engage the clutch when the high side pressure rises above 234 kPa (34 psi). The A/C pressure transducer message to the PCM will also prevent the A/C compressor clutch from engaging when ambient temperatures are below about 4.5° C (40° F) due to the pressure/temperature relationship of the refrigerant. The A/C pressure transducer is diagnosed using a scan tool. The A/C pressure transducer cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if found inoperative or damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6975 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection A/C PRESSURE TRANSDUCER The A/C pressure transducer is diagnosed using a scan tool. Before testing the A/C pressure transducer, be certain that the transducer wire harness connection is clean of corrosion and properly connected. For the A/C to operate, an A/C pressure transducer voltage reading between 0.451 and 4.519 volts is required. Voltages outside this range indicate a low or high refrigerant system pressure condition to the powertrain control module (PCM). The PCM is programmed to respond to a low or high refrigerant system pressure by suppressing operation of the A/C compressor. Refer to the A/C Pressure Transducer Voltage chart (below) for the possible conditions indicated by the transducer voltage reading. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to discharge the refrigerant system to replace the A/C pressure transducer. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the A/C pressure transducer (2). 3. Remove the A/C pressure transducer from the A/C liquid line (3). 4. Remove the O-ring seal (4) from the liquid line fitting and discard. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6978 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Use only the specified O-ring as it is made of special material for R-134a. Use only refrigerant oil of the type required for the A/C compressor. 1. Lubricate a new rubber O-ring seal (4) with clean refrigerant oil and install it onto the liquid line fitting (3). 2. Install the A/C pressure transducer (2) onto the A/C liquid line. Tighten the A/C pressure transducer securely. 3. Connect the wire harness connector (1) to the A/C pressure transducer. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Solar Sensor: Locations Component ID: 282 Component : SENSOR-SUN Connector: Name : SENSOR-SUN Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (HIGHLINE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 G939 22VT/DB SUN SENSOR RETURN 4 G39 22VT/LB SUN SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 27 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6982 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6983 Solar Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 282 Component : SENSOR-SUN Connector: Name : SENSOR-SUN Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (HIGHLINE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 G939 22VT/DB SUN SENSOR RETURN 4 G39 22VT/LB SUN SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 27 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6984 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION Two refrigerant system service ports are used to recover/recycle/evacuate/charge and test the A/C refrigerant system. Unique sizes are used on the service ports for the R-134a refrigerant system to ensure the system is not accidentally contaminated with R-12 refrigerant or service equipment used for R-12 refrigerant. The high side service port is located on the A/C liquid line, near the front of the engine compartment. The low side service port is located on the A/C accumulator at the rear of the engine compartment. Both the high side and low side A/C service port valve cores are serviceable. Each of the service ports has a threaded plastic protective cap installed over it from the factory. After servicing the refrigerant system, always reinstall both of the service port caps. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Service Port HVAC: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Refer to the applicable warnings and cautions for this system before performing the following operation See: Service Precautions/Warning and See: Service Precautions/Caution. Failure to follow the warnings and cautions may result in serious or fatal injury. NOTE: Typical A/C service port shown. 1. Remove the protective cap (1) from the service port (2). 2. Recover the refrigerant from the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Recovery. 3. Using a Schrader-type valve core tool, remove the valve core (3) from the service port. 4. Install a plug in, or tape over the opened service port(s). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 6990 Service Port HVAC: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Typical A/C service port shown. 1. Lubricate the valve core (3) with clean refrigerant oil prior to installation. Use only refrigerant oil of the type recommended for the A/C compressor in the vehicle. 2. Remove the tape or plug from the service port (2). CAUTION: A valve core that is not fully seated in the A/C service port can result in damage to the valve during refrigerant system evacuation and charge. Such damage may result in a loss of system refrigerant while uncoupling the charge adapters. 3. Using a Schrader-type valve core tool, install and tighten the valve core into the service port(s). 4. Evacuate the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Evacuate. 5. Charge the refrigerant system See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant System Charge. NOTE: The protective cap helps aid in service port sealing and helps protect the refrigerant system from contamination. Remember to always reinstall the protective cap onto the service port when refrigerant system service is complete. 6. Install the protective cap (1) onto the service port. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations Solar Sensor: Locations Component ID: 282 Component : SENSOR-SUN Connector: Name : SENSOR-SUN Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (HIGHLINE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 G939 22VT/DB SUN SENSOR RETURN 4 G39 22VT/LB SUN SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 27 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6994 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6995 Solar Sensor: Diagrams Component ID: 282 Component : SENSOR-SUN Connector: Name : SENSOR-SUN Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (HIGHLINE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 G939 22VT/DB SUN SENSOR RETURN 4 G39 22VT/LB SUN SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 27 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6996 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair SERVICE AFTER A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT DEPLOYMENT Any vehicle which is to be returned to use following a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component deployment, must have the deployed restraints replaced. In addition, if the driver airbag has been deployed, the clockspring must be replaced. If the passenger airbag is deployed, the passenger airbag door must be replaced. The seat belt tensioners are deployed by the same signal that deploys the driver and passenger airbags and must also be replaced if either front airbag has been deployed. If a side curtain airbag has been deployed, the complete airbag unit, the headliner, as well as the upper A, B, and C-pillar trim must be replaced. These components are not intended for reuse and will be damaged or weakened as a result of a SRS component deployment, which may or may not be obvious during a visual inspection. On vehicles with an optional sunroof, the sunroof drain tubes and hoses must be closely inspected following a side curtain airbag deployment. It is also critical that the mounting surfaces and mounting brackets for the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), front impact sensors and side impact sensors be closely inspected and restored to their original conditions following any vehicle impact damage. Because the ORC and each impact sensor are used by the SRS to monitor or confirm the direction and severity of a vehicle impact, improper orientation or insecure fastening of these components may cause airbags not to deploy when required, or to deploy when not required. Never attempt to repair the electrically conductive circuits or wiring components related to the SRS. Such repairs can compromise the conductivity and current carrying capacity of those critical electrical circuits, which may cause SRS components not to deploy when required, or to deploy when not required. Any wire harness containing broken, cut, burned or otherwise damaged electrically conductive SRS wiring, terminals or connector components must be removed and replaced with an entire new wire harness. Only minor cuts or abrasions of wire and terminal insulation where the conductive material has not been damaged, or connector insulators where the integrity of the latching and locking mechanisms have not been compromised may be repaired using appropriate methods. All other vehicle components should be closely inspected following any SRS component deployment, but are to be replaced only as required by the extent of the visible damage incurred. AIRBAG SQUIB STATUS Multistage airbags with multiple initiators (squibs) must be checked to determine that all squibs were used during the deployment event. The driver and passenger airbags in this vehicle are deployed by electrical signals generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) through the driver or passenger squib 1 and squib 2 circuits to the two initiators in the airbag inflators. Typically, both initiators are used and all potentially hazardous chemicals are burned during an airbag deployment event. However, it is possible for only one initiator to be used due to an airbag system fault; therefore, it is always necessary to confirm that both initiators have been used in order to avoid the improper handling or disposal of potentially live pyrotechnic or hazardous materials. The following procedure should be performed using a diagnostic scan tool to verify the status of both airbag squibs before either deployed airbag is removed from the vehicle for disposal. CAUTION: Deployed front airbags having two initiators (squibs) in the airbag inflator may or may not have live pyrotechnic material within the inflator. Do not dispose of these airbags unless you are certain of complete deployment. Refer to the Hazardous Substance Control System for information regarding the potentially hazardous properties of the subject component and the proper safe handling procedures. Then dispose of all non-deployed and deployed airbags and seat belt tensioners in a manner consistent with state, provincial, local and federal regulations. 1. Be certain that the diagnostic scan tool contains the latest version of the proper diagnostic software. Connect the scan tool to the 16-way Data Link Connector (DLC). The DLC is located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel, outboard of the steering column. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 3. Using the scan tool, read and record the active (current) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) data. Using the active DTC information, refer to the Airbag Squib Status table (below) to determine the status of both the driver and passenger airbag squibs. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7001 NOTE: If none of the Driver or Passenger Squib 1 or 2 open are active codes, the status of the airbag squibs is unknown. In this case the airbag should be handled and disposed of as if the squibs were both live. CLEANUP PROCEDURE Following a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component deployment, the vehicle interior will contain a powdery residue. This residue consists primarily of harmless particulate by-products of the small pyrotechnic charge that initiates the propellant used to deploy a SRS component. However, this residue may also contain traces of sodium hydroxide powder, a chemical by-product of the propellant material that is used to generate the inert gas that inflates the airbag. Since sodium hydroxide powder can irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat, be certain to wear safety glasses, rubber gloves, and a long-sleeved shirt during cleanup. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, if you experience skin irritation during cleanup, run cool water over the affected area. Also, if you experience irritation of the nose or throat, exit the vehicle for fresh air until the irritation ceases. If irritation continues, see a physician. 1. Begin the cleanup by using a vacuum cleaner to remove any residual powder from the vehicle interior. Clean from outside the vehicle and work Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7002 your way inside, so that you avoid kneeling or sitting on a non-cleaned area. 2. Be certain to vacuum the heater and air conditioning outlets as well. Run the heater and air conditioner blower on the lowest speed setting and vacuum any powder expelled from the outlets. CAUTION: Deployed front airbags having two initiators (squibs) in the airbag inflator may or may not have live pyrotechnic material within the inflator. Do not dispose of these airbags unless you are certain of complete deployment. Refer to AIRBAG SQUIB STATUS. All damaged, ineffective, or non-deployed Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components which are replaced on vehicles are to be handled and disposed of properly. If an airbag or seat belt tensioner unit is ineffective or damaged and non-deployed, refer to the Hazardous Substance Control System for information regarding the potentially hazardous properties of the subject component and the proper safe handling procedures. Then dispose of all non-deployed and deployed airbags and seat belt tensioners in a manner consistent with state, provincial, local and federal regulations. 3. Next, remove the deployed SRS components from the vehicle. Refer to the appropriate service removal procedures. 4. You may need to vacuum the interior of the vehicle a second time to recover all of the powder. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Side Curtain-Right Component ID: 9 Component : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT Connector: Name : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 Component Location - 42 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7008 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7009 Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Driver Squib 1 Component ID: 5 Component : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 Connector: Name : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 Color : BROWN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R45 20BK/BL DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 2 R43 20OR/BL DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7010 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7011 Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Driver Squib 2 Component ID: 6 Component : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 Connector: Name : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R63 20OR/BL DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R61 20BR/BL DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7012 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7013 Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Passenger Squib Component ID: 7 Component : AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB Connector: Name : AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 2 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 3 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 4 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 21 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7014 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7015 Air Bag: Locations Airbag-Side Curtain-Left Component ID: 8 Component : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT Connector: Name : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R1 20LB/BR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 Component Location - 42 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7016 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Side Curtain-Right Component ID: 9 Component : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT Connector: Name : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-RIGHT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 Component Location - 42 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7019 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7020 Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Driver Squib 1 Component ID: 5 Component : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 Connector: Name : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 1 Color : BROWN # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R45 20BK/BL DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 2 R43 20OR/BL DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7021 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7022 Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Driver Squib 2 Component ID: 6 Component : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 Connector: Name : AIRBAG-DRIVER SQUIB 2 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R63 20OR/BL DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 2 R61 20BR/BL DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7023 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7024 Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Passenger Squib Component ID: 7 Component : AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB Connector: Name : AIRBAG-PASSENGER SQUIB Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 2 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 3 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 4 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 Component Location - 21 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7025 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7026 Air Bag: Diagrams Airbag-Side Curtain-Left Component ID: 8 Component : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT Connector: Name : AIRBAG-SIDE CURTAIN-LEFT Color : YELLOW # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R1 20LB/BR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 Component Location - 42 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Airbag-Side Curtain-Right > Page 7027 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Driver Airbag Air Bag: Description and Operation Driver Airbag Description DESCRIPTION The color-keyed, injection molded, thermoplastic driver airbag protective trim cover (2) is the most visible part of the driver airbag. The driver airbag is located in the center of the steering wheel (1), where it is secured with two screws to the armature of the four-spoke steering wheel. All vehicles have a chrome Dodge Ram emblem in the center of the trim cover. Concealed beneath the driver airbag trim cover are the horn switch, the folded airbag cushion, the airbag cushion retainer, the airbag housing, the airbag inflator, and the retainers that secure the inflator to the airbag housing. The airbag cushion, housing (5), and inflator (3) are secured within an integral receptacle molded into the back of the trim cover (4). The four vertical walls of this receptacle have a total of 12 small windows with blocking tabs that are engaged by 12 hook formations around the perimeter of the airbag housing. Each hook is inserted through one of the windows and the blocking tab in each window keeps the hook properly engaged with the trim cover, locking the trim cover securely into place on the airbag housing. The resistive membrane-type horn switch is secured with heat stakes to the inside surface of the driver airbag trim cover, between the trim cover and the folded airbag cushion. The horn switch ground pigtail wire (2) has an eyelet terminal connector that is captured beneath a flanged nut on the upper right inflator mounting stud on the back of the housing. The horn switch feed pigtail wire has a black, molded plastic insulator (1) that is secured by an integral retainer in a locator hole near the upper right corner of the airbag housing and is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the steering wheel wire harness. Both horn switch wires are routed through an integral notch in the center of the upper edge of the airbag housing stamping. The airbag used in this vehicle is a multistage, Next Generation-type that complies with revised federal airbag standards to deploy with less force than those used in some prior vehicles. A 71 centimeter (28 inch) diameter, radial deploying fabric cushion with internal tethers is used. The airbag inflator is a dual-initiator, non-azide, pyrotechnic-type unit with four mounting studs and is secured to the stamped metal airbag housing by four flanged hex nuts. Two keyed and color-coded connector receptacles on the driver airbag inflator connect the two inflator initiators to the vehicle electrical system through two yellow-jacketed, two-wire pigtail harnesses of the clockspring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Driver Airbag > Page 7030 The driver airbag unit cannot be repaired, and must be replaced if ineffective, deployed or in any way damaged. The driver airbag trim cover and horn switch unit may be disassembled from the driver airbag unit, and is available for separate service replacement. Operation OPERATION The multistage driver airbag is deployed by electrical signals generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) through the driver airbag squib 1 and squib 2 circuits to the two initiators in the airbag inflator. By using two initiators, the airbag can be deployed at multiple levels of force. The force level is controlled by the ORC to suit the monitored impact conditions by providing one of three delay intervals between the electrical signals provided to the two initiators. The longer the delay between these signals, the less forcefully the airbag will deploy. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to each initiator, the electrical energy generates enough heat to initiate a small pyrotechnic charge which, in turn ignites chemical pellets within the inflator. Once ignited, these chemical pellets burn rapidly and produce a large quantity of inert gas. The inflator is sealed to the back of the airbag housing and a diffuser in the inflator directs all of the inert gas into the airbag cushion, causing the cushion to inflate. As the cushion inflates, the driver airbag trim cover will split at predetermined breakout lines, then fold back out of the way along with the horn switch unit. Following an airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly deflates by venting the inert gas towards the instrument panel through vent holes within the fabric used to construct the back (steering wheel side) panel of the airbag cushion. Some of the chemicals used to create the inert gas may be considered hazardous while in their solid state before they are burned, but they are securely sealed within the airbag inflator. Typically, both initiators are used and all potentially hazardous chemicals are burned during an airbag deployment event. However, it is possible for only one initiator to be used during a deployment due to an airbag system fault; therefore, it is necessary to always confirm that both initiators have been used in order to avoid the improper disposal of potentially live pyrotechnic or hazardous materials. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. The inert gas that is produced when the chemicals are burned is harmless. However, a small amount of residue from the burned chemicals may cause some temporary discomfort if it contacts the skin, eyes, or breathing passages. If skin or eye irritation is noted, rinse the affected area with plenty of cool, clean water. If breathing passages are irritated, move to another area where there is plenty of clean, fresh air to breath. If the irritation is not alleviated by these actions, contact a physician. Proper diagnosis of the driver airbag inflator and squib circuits requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Driver Airbag > Page 7031 Air Bag: Description and Operation Passenger Airbag Description DESCRIPTION The horizontal surface of the injection molded, thermoplastic passenger airbag door (1) is the most visible part of the passenger airbag. The passenger airbag door is located above the glove box opening on the top of the instrument panel (2) in front of the front seat passenger seating position. The outboard edges of the airbag door are secured with integral snap features (3) to the instrument panel base trim. Located below the passenger airbag door (2) within the instrument panel is the passenger airbag unit. The passenger airbag housing fits into a molded receptacle on the back of the airbag door, where 12 stamped hook formations on the forward and rearward edges of the airbag housing are engaged in mating small window openings on the forward and rearward flanges of the receptacle to secure the airbag door to the airbag housing. These airbag door fasteners and mounting provisions are all concealed beneath the instrument panel base trim. The passenger airbag unit is secured by two screws through a stamped mounting bracket (5) to the instrument panel structural support. The passenger airbag unit used in this vehicle is a multistage, Next Generation-type that complies with revised federal airbag standards to deploy with less force than those used in some prior vehicles. The passenger airbag unit consists of a stamped and welded metal housing, the airbag cushion, the airbag inflator, and a stamped metal airbag cushion retainer plate that is secured to the airbag housing with four studs and nuts. The airbag housing contains the airbag inflator and the folded airbag cushion. An approximately 80 centimeter (31.5 inch) wide by 90 centimeter (35.5 inch) high rectangular fabric cushion is used. The airbag inflator (4) is a non-azide, pyrotechnic-type unit that is secured to and sealed within the airbag housing. A short four-wire pigtail harness with a keyed, yellow connector insulator (1) connects the two inflator initiators to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The passenger airbag includes the airbag door. This unit cannot be repaired, and must be replaced if deployed, ineffective, or in any way damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Driver Airbag > Page 7032 Operation OPERATION The multistage passenger airbag is deployed by electrical signals generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) through the passenger airbag squib 1 and squib 2 circuits to the two initiators in the airbag inflator. By using two initiators, the airbag can be deployed at multiple levels of force. The force level is controlled by the ORC to suit the monitored impact conditions by providing one of three delay intervals between the electrical signals provided to the two initiators. The longer the delay between these signals, the less forcefully the airbag will deploy. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to each initiator, the electrical energy generates enough heat to initiate a small pyrotechnic charge which, in turn ignites chemical pellets within the inflator. Once ignited, these chemical pellets burn rapidly and produce a large quantity of inert gas. The inflator is sealed to the airbag cushion and a diffuser in the inflator directs all of the inert gas into the airbag cushion, causing the cushion to inflate. As the cushion inflates, the passenger airbag door will split at predetermined tear seam lines concealed on the inside surface of the door, then the door will pivot up over the top of the instrument panel and out of the way. Following an airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly deflates by venting the inert gas through a vent hole in each fabric side panel of the airbag cushion. Typically, both initiators are used during an airbag deployment event. However, it is possible for only one initiator to be used during a deployment due to an airbag system fault; therefore, it is necessary to always confirm that both initiators have been used in order to avoid the improper disposal of potentially live pyrotechnic materials. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. Proper diagnosis of the passenger airbag inflator and the passenger airbag squib circuits requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Driver Airbag > Page 7033 Air Bag: Description and Operation Side Curtain Airbag Description DESCRIPTION Optional side curtain airbags are available for this vehicle when it is also equipped with dual front airbags. These airbags are passive, inflatable, Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components, and vehicles with this equipment can be readily identified by a molded identification trim button with the SRS - AIRBAG logo located on the headliner over the roof side rail (club cab) or near the top of each upper B-pillar trim panel (quad cab). This system is designed to reduce injuries to the vehicle occupants in the event of a side impact collision. Vehicles equipped with side curtain airbags have two individually controlled curtain airbag units. These airbag units are concealed and mounted above the headliner where they are each secured to one of the roof side rails. Each folded airbag cushion is contained within a long extruded plastic channel (9) that extends along the roof rail from the A-pillar at the front of the vehicle to the pillar at the rear of the vehicle. The channel is initially secured during installation with two plastic push-in fasteners (8) to the roof rail. A long tether (2) extends down the A-pillar from the front of the airbag cushion, where it is retained to the pillar with plastic push-in routing clips (10) and it is secured to the base of the A-pillar near the belt line with a metal clip (1). A short tether (6) is secured by a second metal clip to the header over the glass at the back of the cab. The hybrid-type inflator (4) for each airbag is secured to the roof rail at the front of the airbag unit above the front door opening, and is connected to the airbag cushion by a long tubular manifold (5). The entire assembly is secured to six U-nuts spaced along the inside of the roof rail with six screws (7). A two-wire takeout and connector of the body wire harness is connected directly to the connector receptacle of the initiator (3) near the front of the airbag inflator. The body wire harness connects each curtain airbag unit to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The side curtain airbag unit cannot be adjusted or repaired and must be replaced if deployed, ineffective, or in any way damaged. Once a side curtain airbag has been deployed, the complete airbag unit, the headliner, the upper A, B, and C-pillar trim, and all other visibly damaged components must be replaced. Operation OPERATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Driver Airbag > Page 7034 Each side curtain airbag is deployed individually by an electrical signal generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) to which it is connected through left or right curtain airbag line 1 and line 2 (or squib) circuits. The hybrid-type inflator assembly for each airbag contains a small canister of highly compressed inert gas. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signal to the airbag inflator, the electrical energy creates enough heat to ignite chemical pellets within the inflator. Once ignited, these chemicals burn rapidly and produce the pressure necessary to rupture a containment disk in the inert gas canister. The inflator and inert gas canister are sealed and connected to a tubular manifold so that all of the released gas is directed into the folded curtain airbag cushion, causing the cushion to inflate. As the airbag cushion inflates it will drop down from the roof rail between the edge of the headliner and the side glass/body pillars to form a curtain-like cushion to protect the vehicle occupants during a side impact collision. The front and rear tethers keep the side airbag cushion taut to the side of the vehicle, thus ensuring that the bag will deploy in the proper position. Following the airbag deployment, the airbag cushion quickly deflates by venting the inert gas through the loose weave of the cushion fabric, and the deflated cushion hangs down loosely from the roof rail. Proper diagnosis of the side curtain airbag inflator and the curtain airbag squib circuits requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Air Bag: Removal and Replacement Side Curtain Airbag - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when removing a deployed airbag, rubber gloves, eye protection, and a long-sleeved shirt should be worn. There may be deposits on the airbag unit and other interior surfaces. In large doses, these deposits may cause irritation to the skin and eyes. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the side curtain airbag, or becoming entrapped between the side curtain airbag cushion and the headliner. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged side curtain airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Service and Repair. If the side curtain airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. If the side curtain airbag is being replaced due to a deployment, the headliner must be removed from the vehicle and replaced with a new unit. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Removal. 3. If the side curtain airbag is being replaced for any reason other than a deployment, the headliner must be lowered from the inner roof panel and rested upon the seat backs, but is not removed from the vehicle interior. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Removal. 4. Disengage the metal clip (5) that secures the side curtain airbag rear tether to the cab roof rear header (4) above the rear window opening. 5. Disengage the two plastic retainers (9), then the metal clip (10) that secure the side curtain airbag front tether to the inner A-pillar (1). 6. Remove the six screws (6) that secure the side curtain airbag to the U-nuts (3) in the inner roof rail (8). 7. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) for the side curtain airbag from the connector receptacle at the front of the inflator. 8. Disengage the two plastic retainers (7) from the inner roof rail. 9. Remove the side curtain airbag from the vehicle as a unit. Side Curtain Airbag - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when removing a deployed airbag, rubber gloves, eye protection, and a long-sleeved shirt should Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7037 be worn. There may be deposits on the airbag unit and other interior surfaces. In large doses, these deposits may cause irritation to the skin and eyes. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the side curtain airbag, or becoming entrapped between the side curtain airbag cushion and the headliner. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged side curtain airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Service and Repair. If the side curtain airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Check to be certain that the six U-nuts (2) are properly installed in the inner roof rail (1) and that they are in good condition. 2. Position the side curtain airbag into the vehicle as a unit. 3. Align each of the two plastic push-in fasteners (7) on the airbag channel with their holes in the inner roof side rail and push them straight in until they are fully seated. 4. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) for the side curtain airbag to the connector receptacle at the front of the inflator. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7038 5. Loosely install the six screws (6) that secure the side curtain airbag to the U-nuts (3) in the inner roof rail (8). 6. Working from front to back, tighten each of the six screws. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 7. Engage the metal clip (5) that secures the side curtain airbag rear tether to the cab roof rear header (4) above the rear window opening. 8. Engage the metal clip (10), then the two plastic retainers (9) that secure the side curtain airbag front tether to the inner A-pillar (1). 9. If the side curtain airbag was replaced due to a deployment, install the new headliner into the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation. 10. If the side curtain airbag was replaced for any reason other than a deployment, reinstall the headliner onto the inner roof panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation. WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE. PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF THE SYSTEM TEST IS NOT PERFORMED FIRST. FOR THE SYSTEM TEST, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Supplemental Restraints Verification Test Driver Airbag - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when removing a deployed airbag, rubber gloves, eye protection, and a long-sleeved shirt should be worn. There may be deposits on the airbag cushion and other interior surfaces. In large doses, these deposits may cause irritation to the skin and eyes. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged driver airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Service and Repair. If the driver airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. From the underside of the steering wheel, remove the two screws (3) that secure the driver airbag (1) to the steering wheel armature (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7039 CAUTION: Do not pull on the horn switch feed pigtail wire to disengage the connector from the driver airbag housing or to disconnect the horn switch to steering wheel wire harness connection. Improper pulling on this pigtail wire or connection can result in damage to the horn switch membrane or feed circuit. 3. Pull the driver airbag (1) away from the steering wheel far enough to access the three electrical connections on the back of the airbag housing. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector for the horn switch (2) from the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector (4), which is located on the back of the driver airbag housing. CAUTION: Do not pull on the clockspring pigtail wires or pry on the connector insulator to disengage the connector from the driver airbag inflator connector receptacle. Improper removal of these pigtail wires and their connector insulators can result in damage to the airbag circuits or connector insulators. 5. The clockspring driver airbag pigtail wire connectors (3) are secured by integral latches to the airbag inflator connector receptacles, which are located on the back of the driver airbag housing. Depress the latches on each side of the connector insulator and pull the insulators straight out from the airbag inflator to disconnect them from the connector receptacles. 6. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. 7. If the driver airbag has been deployed, the clockspring must be replaced. See: Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal. Driver Airbag - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the driver airbag, or becoming entrapped between the driver airbag cushion and the driver airbag trim cover. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, the driver airbag trim cover must never be painted. Replacement airbags are serviced with trim covers in the original colors. Paint may change the way in which the material of the trim cover responds to an airbag deployment. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged driver airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Service and Repair. If the driver airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7040 1. Position the driver airbag (1) close enough to the steering wheel to reconnect the three electrical connections on the back of the airbag housing. 2. When installing the driver airbag, reconnect the two clockspring driver airbag pigtail wire connectors (3) to the airbag inflator connector receptacles by pressing straight in on the connector. Be certain to engage each keyed and color-coded connector to the matching connector receptacle. You can be certain that each connector is fully engaged in its receptacle by listening carefully for a distinct, audible click as the connector latches snap into place. 3. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector (2) for the horn switch to the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector (4), which is located on the back of the driver airbag housing. 4. Carefully position the driver airbag (1) in the steering wheel (2). Be certain that the clockspring pigtail wires and the steering wheel wire harness in the steering wheel hub area are not pinched between the driver airbag and the steering wheel armature. 5. From the underside of the steering wheel, install and tighten the two screws (3) that secure the driver airbag to the steering wheel armature. Tighten the screws to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE. PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF THE SYSTEM TEST IS NOT PERFORMED FIRST. FOR THE SYSTEM TEST, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Supplemental Restraints Verification Test Passenger Airbag - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury when removing a deployed airbag, rubber gloves, eye protection, and a long-sleeved shirt should be worn. There may be deposits on the airbag unit and other interior surfaces. In large doses, these deposits may cause irritation to the skin and eyes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7041 NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged passenger airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Service and Repair. If the passenger airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the defroster grille from the top of the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Defroster Grille/Removal. 3. Remove the glove box from the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal. 4. Reach up into the instrument panel between the upper glove box opening reinforcement (2) and the cross car beam (1) to access and remove the two screws that secure the passenger airbag lower bracket to the instrument panel support structure. 5. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the edges of the passenger airbag door away from the top of the instrument panel far enough to disengage the snap features on the door from the receptacles in the instrument panel base trim. 6. Pull the passenger airbag out of the instrument panel far enough to access and disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector from the airbag inflator pigtail wire connector on the right side of the airbag lower mounting bracket. To disconnect the connector: a. Slide the red Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock on the top of the connector toward the side of the connector. b. Depress the connector latch tab and pull the two halves of the connector straight away from each other. 7. Remove the passenger airbag from the instrument panel as a unit. Passenger Airbag - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the passenger airbag, or becoming entrapped between the passenger airbag cushion and the passenger airbag door. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, the passenger airbag door must never be painted. Replacement passenger airbags are serviced with doors in the original colors. Paint may change the way in which the material of the airbag door responds to an airbag deployment. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged passenger airbag. If the airbag is ineffective or damaged, but not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Service and Repair. If the passenger airbag has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the airbag from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7042 1. Position the passenger airbag unit onto the instrument panel. 2. Reconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector for the airbag to the passenger airbag inflator pigtail wire connector on the right side of the airbag lower mounting bracket. Be certain that the latch on the connector and the red Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock are each fully engaged. 3. Carefully lower the passenger airbag unit into the instrument panel, being certain that the airbag lower mounting bracket is properly positioned to the instrument panel support structure. 4. Reach up into the instrument panel between the upper glove box opening reinforcement (2) and the cross car beam (1) to install and tighten the two screws that secure the passenger airbag lower mounting bracket to the instrument panel support structure. Tighten the screws to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 5. Using hand pressure, push down on the passenger airbag door over each snap feature until it snaps into its receptacle in the instrument panel base trim. 6. Reinstall the glove box into the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box - Installation. 7. Reinstall the defroster grille onto the top of the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Defroster Grille/Installation. WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE. PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF THE SYSTEM TEST IS NOT PERFORMED FIRST. FOR THE SYSTEM TEST, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Supplemental Restraints Verification Test Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7043 Air Bag: Overhaul Disassembly DISASSEMBLY WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, service of this unit should be performed only by DaimlerChrysler-trained and authorized dealer service technicians. Failure to take the proper precautions or to follow the proper procedures could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper airbag deployment and possible occupant injuries. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the driver airbag, or becoming entrapped between the driver airbag cushion and the driver airbag trim cover. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, the driver airbag trim cover must never be painted. Replacement trim covers are serviced in the original colors. Paint may change the way in which the material of the trim cover responds to an airbag deployment. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedures can be used to replace the driver airbag trim cover and horn switch unit for service. If the driver airbag is ineffective or deployed, the entire driver airbag, trim cover and horn switch must be replaced as a unit. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel See: Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal. 3. Place the driver airbag on a suitable clean and dry work surface with the trim cover facing down. If the trim cover will be reused, be certain to take the proper precautions to prevent the trim cover from receiving cosmetic damage during the following procedures. 4. Carefully pry the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector (1) away from the back of the driver airbag housing (3) far enough to disengage the integral connector retainer from the locator hole just above the upper right inflator mounting stud. 5. Remove the nut that secures the horn switch ground pigtail wire eyelet terminal (2) to the upper right inflator stud on the back of the driver airbag housing. 6. Remove the horn switch ground pigtail wire eyelet terminal from the upper right inflator stud on the back of the driver airbag housing. 7. Disengage each of the twelve hooks (5 and 6) of the airbag housing from the twelve windows in the vertical walls of the trim cover (4), one wall at a time. Start by disengaging the upper wall, then do each of the two side walls, and finish with the lower wall. To disengage the hooks, use hand pressure to push the adjacent edge of the airbag housing firmly and evenly downward into the trim cover receptacle, while at the same time pushing outward on the upper edge of the receptacle wall. 8. With all of the hooks disengaged, lift the housing, inflator, and cushion as a unit from the receptacle on the back of the driver airbag trim cover. Assembly ASSEMBLY WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7044 Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, service of this unit should be performed only by DaimlerChrysler-trained and authorized dealer service technicians. Failure to take the proper precautions or to follow the proper procedures could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper airbag deployment and possible occupant injuries. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, use extreme care to prevent any foreign material from entering the driver airbag, or becoming entrapped between the driver airbag cushion and the driver airbag trim cover. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, the driver airbag trim cover must never be painted. Replacement trim covers are serviced in the original colors. Paint may change the way in which the material of the trim cover responds to an airbag deployment. Failure to observe this warning could result in occupant injuries upon airbag deployment. NOTE: The following procedures can be used to replace the driver airbag trim cover and horn switch unit for service. If the driver airbag is ineffective or deployed, the entire driver airbag, trim cover and horn switch must be replaced as a unit. 1. Place the driver airbag on a suitable work surface with the airbag cushion facing up. 2. Fold the two flaps (1) of cushion material up around the sides and over the top of the airbag cushion retainer strap (2). 3. Position the new driver airbag trim cover over the airbag cushion, then push the receptacle of the trim cover down evenly over the cushion. Be certain that the cushion material flaps remain oriented over the cushion retainer strap as they were in STEP 2. 4. Turn the driver airbag and the new driver airbag trim cover over as a unit, and place the unit on a suitable clean and dry work surface with the airbag cushion facing down. Be certain to take the proper precautions to prevent the trim cover from receiving cosmetic damage during the following procedures. 5. Be certain that the horn switch feed and ground pigtail wires are routed through the clearance notch at the top of the airbag housing (3), between the housing and the upper vertical wall of the trim cover receptacle. 6. Work around the perimeter of the unit engaging each of the twelve hooks (5 and 6) on the driver airbag housing through the windows in the walls of the trim cover receptacle. 7. Install the horn switch ground pigtail wire eyelet terminal (2) over the upper right inflator stud on the back of the driver airbag housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 7045 8. Install and tighten the nut that secures the horn switch ground pigtail wire eyelet terminal to the upper right inflator stud on the back of the driver airbag housing. Tighten the nut to 7 Nm (65 in. lbs.). 9. Using hand pressure, push the integral retainer of the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector (1) into the locator hole just above the upper right inflator mounting stud on the back of the airbag housing. 10. After the driver airbag has been assembled, try pulling the trim cover and the airbag housing away from each other. This action will fully seat the edges of the windows into the cradles of the hooks. 11. Before reinstalling the airbag onto the steering wheel, check that the blocking tab (1) in each of the trim cover windows is oriented over the airbag housing hook (4) as shown. 12. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel See: Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation. WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT THE BATTERY NEGATIVE CABLE. PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH MAY RESULT IF THE SYSTEM TEST IS NOT PERFORMED FIRST. FOR THE SYSTEM TEST, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests/Supplemental Restraints Verification Test Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update Technical Service Bulletin # K29 Date: 101012 Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update October 2010 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification K29 Reprogram Occupant Restraint Controller Module Models 2008 - 2010 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles equipped with side airbag inflatable curtains (sales code CGS or CJ3) built through February 23, 2010 (MDH 022300). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) on about 4,800 of the above vehicles may not deploy during an Insurance Institute of Highway Safety side impact test. Repair The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module must be reprogrammed (flashed). Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The special tools are required to perform this repair: Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7054 Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System". Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Group LLC Service Procedure Use one of the two scan tools below to perform this service procedure. A. Reprogram the ORC using wiTECH The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module is "abort - recovery" supported. If this flash process is interrupted/aborted repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7055 NOTE: Use an accurate stand-alone voltmeter. The battery charger voltmeter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the wiPOD to the vehicle data link connector. 3. Place the ignition key in the "Run" position. 4. Launch the wiTECH diagnostic application. 5. Select "ORC" from the vehicle view screen. 6. Select the "FLASH" tab. 7. Select the flash file from the list. 8. Select the "UPDATE ECU" button and follow the screen prompts. If the flash was interrupted or failed, repeat the reprogramming procedure. 9. Clear all DTC's. NOTE: Due to the ORC programming procedure, DTC(s) may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, ABS, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. 10. Place the ignition in the "OFF" position, remove the wiPOD from the data link connector and disconnect the battery charger. B. Reprogram the ORC Using StarMOBILE CAUTION: The StarMOBILE operating software must be at release 10.02 or higher to perform this service procedure. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module is "abort - recovery" supported. If this flash process is interrupted/aborted repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Use an accurate stand-alone voltmeter. The battery charger voltmeter may not be accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarMOBILE scan tool to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 3. Connect the CH9410 StarMOBILE scan tool ethernet cable to the StarMOBILE and the dealer's network drop. 4. Power ON the StarMOBILE scan tool. 5. From the desktop, launch the "StarMOBILE Desktop Client" software. 6. Establish a connection with the StarMOBILE scan tool. 7. Retrieve the old ORC software part number. With the StarMOBILE on the "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select "ORC Occupant Restraint" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7056 e. Record the "Part Number" displayed at the end of the "Restraint flash file for" statement near the top of "Flash ORC" screen for later reference. 8. Download the flash file from the internet to the StarMOBILE. With the StarMOBILE on the "Flash ORC" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. b. Enter your "User id" and "Password", then select "OK". c. If the newly downloaded flash file "Part Number" description: > is the same as the number recorded in Step 7e, then the ORC is up to date. Continue with Step 11. > is different than the number recorded in Step 7e, then the ORC requires an update. Continue with Step 8d. d. Highlight the listed calibration on the StarMOBILE screen. e. Select "Download to Client". f. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select the "Back" arrow. g. Highlight the listed calibration. h. Select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. i. When the update is completed, select "OK". 9. Retrieve the ORC software part number. With the StarMOBILE on "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select "ORC Occupant Restraint" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Verify the "Part Number" (displayed at the end of the "Resident flash file for" statement) has been updated to the new part number. If it has updated, then the flash has been completed successfully. If the flash was interrupted or failed, repeat the reprogramming procedure. 10. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) as follows: NOTE: Due to the CCN programming procedure, DTC(s) may be set in other modules (TCM, ABS, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. a. From the "Home" screen select "System View". b. Select "All DTC's". c. "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. 11. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position and remove the StarMOBILE vehicle cable, and battery charger from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7057 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update Technical Service Bulletin # K29 Date: 101012 Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update October 2010 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification K29 Reprogram Occupant Restraint Controller Module Models 2008 - 2010 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles equipped with side airbag inflatable curtains (sales code CGS or CJ3) built through February 23, 2010 (MDH 022300). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) on about 4,800 of the above vehicles may not deploy during an Insurance Institute of Highway Safety side impact test. Repair The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module must be reprogrammed (flashed). Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The special tools are required to perform this repair: Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7063 Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System". Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Group LLC Service Procedure Use one of the two scan tools below to perform this service procedure. A. Reprogram the ORC using wiTECH The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module is "abort - recovery" supported. If this flash process is interrupted/aborted repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7064 NOTE: Use an accurate stand-alone voltmeter. The battery charger voltmeter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the wiPOD to the vehicle data link connector. 3. Place the ignition key in the "Run" position. 4. Launch the wiTECH diagnostic application. 5. Select "ORC" from the vehicle view screen. 6. Select the "FLASH" tab. 7. Select the flash file from the list. 8. Select the "UPDATE ECU" button and follow the screen prompts. If the flash was interrupted or failed, repeat the reprogramming procedure. 9. Clear all DTC's. NOTE: Due to the ORC programming procedure, DTC(s) may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, ABS, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. 10. Place the ignition in the "OFF" position, remove the wiPOD from the data link connector and disconnect the battery charger. B. Reprogram the ORC Using StarMOBILE CAUTION: The StarMOBILE operating software must be at release 10.02 or higher to perform this service procedure. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module is "abort - recovery" supported. If this flash process is interrupted/aborted repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Use an accurate stand-alone voltmeter. The battery charger voltmeter may not be accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarMOBILE scan tool to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 3. Connect the CH9410 StarMOBILE scan tool ethernet cable to the StarMOBILE and the dealer's network drop. 4. Power ON the StarMOBILE scan tool. 5. From the desktop, launch the "StarMOBILE Desktop Client" software. 6. Establish a connection with the StarMOBILE scan tool. 7. Retrieve the old ORC software part number. With the StarMOBILE on the "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select "ORC Occupant Restraint" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7065 e. Record the "Part Number" displayed at the end of the "Restraint flash file for" statement near the top of "Flash ORC" screen for later reference. 8. Download the flash file from the internet to the StarMOBILE. With the StarMOBILE on the "Flash ORC" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. b. Enter your "User id" and "Password", then select "OK". c. If the newly downloaded flash file "Part Number" description: > is the same as the number recorded in Step 7e, then the ORC is up to date. Continue with Step 11. > is different than the number recorded in Step 7e, then the ORC requires an update. Continue with Step 8d. d. Highlight the listed calibration on the StarMOBILE screen. e. Select "Download to Client". f. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select the "Back" arrow. g. Highlight the listed calibration. h. Select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. i. When the update is completed, select "OK". 9. Retrieve the ORC software part number. With the StarMOBILE on "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select "ORC Occupant Restraint" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Verify the "Part Number" (displayed at the end of the "Resident flash file for" statement) has been updated to the new part number. If it has updated, then the flash has been completed successfully. If the flash was interrupted or failed, repeat the reprogramming procedure. 10. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) as follows: NOTE: Due to the CCN programming procedure, DTC(s) may be set in other modules (TCM, ABS, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. a. From the "Home" screen select "System View". b. Select "All DTC's". c. "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. 11. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position and remove the StarMOBILE vehicle cable, and battery charger from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7066 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7067 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Component ID: 160 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 2 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 3 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 4 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 5-6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 14 - 15 R13 20LG/VT LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 16 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 17 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE 18 - 19 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 R1 20LB/BR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 30 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 31 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 32 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7068 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7069 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7070 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 4 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 5 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 6 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7071 7 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 8 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 9 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 10 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 11 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 12 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 13 - 14 - 15 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 16 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 17 - - 18 - 19 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 20 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 21 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 22 Z104 20BK/LG GROUND 23 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS(-) 24 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 - 32 - Component Location - 22 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7072 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7073 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7074 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 160 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 2 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 3 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 4 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 5-6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 14 - 15 R13 20LG/VT LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 16 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 17 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE 18 - 19 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 R1 20LB/BR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 30 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 31 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 32 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7075 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7076 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7077 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 4 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 5 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 6 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7078 7 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 8 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 9 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 10 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 11 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 12 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 13 - 14 - 15 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 16 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 17 - - 18 - 19 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 20 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 21 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 22 Z104 20BK/LG GROUND 23 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS(-) 24 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 - 32 - Component Location - 22 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7079 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7080 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Locations Component ID: 40 Component : CLOCKSPRING Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 20VT/OR SWITCH MUX RETURN 3 V72 20OR/VT S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V71 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7084 Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7085 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7086 Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7087 Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7088 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7089 Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7090 Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7091 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7092 Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22VT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22VT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7093 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7094 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7095 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7096 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams Component ID: 40 Component : CLOCKSPRING Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 20GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 20VT/OR SWITCH MUX RETURN 3 V72 20OR/VT S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 4 V71 20VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 5 V937 20DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 6 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7097 Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7098 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7099 Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 2 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 3 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 4 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7100 Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7101 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7102 Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C3 Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE 2 V937 22DB/DG S/C SWITCH RETURN 3 V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL 4 V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7103 Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7104 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7105 Connector: Name : CLOCKSPRING C4 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22VT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN Pin Circuit Description 1 G902 22VT/BR SWITCH MUX RETURN 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7106 Component Location - 22 Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7107 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 7108 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The clockspring assembly is secured with two screws onto the multi-function switch mounting housing near the top of the steering column behind the steering wheel. The clockspring consists of a flat, round molded plastic case (8) with a stubby tail that hangs below the steering column. The tail contains two connector receptacles that face toward the instrument panel. Within the plastic case is a spool-like molded plastic rotor (10) with a large exposed hub. The upper surface of the rotor hub has a large center hole, two large flats, an engagement dowel with a yellow rubber boot (7), two short pigtail wires with connectors (1), and two connector receptacles (5) that face toward the steering wheel. The lower surface of the rotor hub has a molded plastic turn signal cancel cam (3) with two lobes that is keyed to the rotor and is secured there with four integral snap features. Within the plastic case and wound around the rotor spool is a long ribbon-like tape that consists of several thin copper wire leads sandwiched between two thin plastic membranes. The outer end of the tape terminates at the connector receptacles (4) that face the instrument panel, while the inner end of the tape terminates at the pigtail wires and connector receptacles on the hub of the clockspring rotor that face the steering wheel. Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-centered and with a molded plastic locking pin (1) that snaps into a receptacle on the rotor and is engaged between two tabs on the upper surface of the rotor case. The locking pin secures the centered clockspring rotor to the clockspring case during shipment and handling, but must be removed from the clockspring after it is installed on the steering column. See: Service and Repair/Procedures. The clockspring cannot be repaired. If the clockspring is ineffective, damaged, or if the driver airbag has been deployed, the clockspring must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7111 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The clockspring is a mechanical electrical circuit component that is used to provide continuous electrical continuity between the fixed instrument panel wire harness and the electrical components mounted on or in the rotating steering wheel. On this vehicle the rotating electrical components include the driver airbag, the horn switch, the speed control switches, and the remote radio switches, if the vehicle is so equipped. The clockspring case is positioned and secured to the multi-function switch mounting housing near the top of the steering column. The connector receptacles on the tail of the fixed clockspring case connect the clockspring to the vehicle electrical system through two take outs with connectors from the instrument panel wire harness. The clockspring rotor is movable and is keyed by an engagement dowel that is molded onto the rotor hub between two fins that are cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature. A yellow rubber boot is installed over the engagement dowel to eliminate contact noise between the dowel and the steering wheel. The two lobes on the turn signal cancel cam on the lower surface of the clockspring rotor hub contact a turn signal cancel actuator of the multi-function switch to provide automatic turn signal cancellation. Two short, yellow-sleeved pigtail wires on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor connect the clockspring to the multistage driver airbag, while a steering wheel wire harness connects the two connector receptacles on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor to the horn switch feed pigtail wire connector and, if the vehicle is so equipped, to the optional speed control and remote radio switches on the steering wheel. Like the clockspring in a timepiece, the clockspring tape has travel limits and can be damaged by being wound too tightly during full stop-to-stop steering wheel rotation. To prevent this from occurring, the clockspring is centered when it is installed on the steering column. Centering the clockspring indexes the clockspring tape to the movable steering components so that the tape can operate within its designed travel limits. However, if the clockspring is removed from the steering column or if the steering shaft is disconnected from the steering gear, the clockspring spool can change position relative to the movable steering components. The clockspring must be re-centered following completion of this service or the tape may be damaged. Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-centered and with a plastic locking pin installed. This locking pin should not be removed until the clockspring has been installed on the steering column. If the locking pin is removed before the clockspring is installed on a steering column, the clockspring centering procedure must be performed. See: Service and Repair/Procedures. The clockspring as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the clockspring may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Procedures CLOCKSPRING CENTERING WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain to turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position. 1. Place the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the clockspring from the steering column. See: Removal and Replacement/Removal. 3. Rotate the clockspring rotor (10) clockwise to the end of its travel. Do not apply excessive torque. 4. From the end of the clockwise travel, rotate the rotor about two and one-half turns counterclockwise. The engagement dowel and yellow rubber boot (7) should end up at the bottom, and the arrows on the clockspring rotor and case (9) should be in alignment. 5. The clockspring is now centered. Secure the clockspring rotor to the clockspring case to maintain clockspring centering until it is reinstalled on the steering column. 6. The front wheels should still be in the straight-ahead position. Reinstall the clockspring onto the steering column. See: Removal and Replacement/Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7114 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain to turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position. 1. Place the front wheels in the straight ahead position. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors from the upper clockspring connector receptacles. CAUTION: Be certain that the screws that secure the steering wheel puller to the steering wheel are fully engaged in the steering wheel armature without passing through the steering wheel and damaging the clockspring. 5. Remove the steering wheel from the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Removal. 6. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 7. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 8. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 9. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 10. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7115 11. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. 12. Disconnect the two instrument panel wire harness connectors from the two connector receptacles located below the steering column on the back of the clockspring housing. 13. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the clockspring to the multi-function switch mounting housing. 14. Remove the clockspring from the multi-function switch mounting housing. The clockspring cannot be repaired. It must be replaced if ineffective or damaged, or if the driver airbag has been deployed. 15. If the removed clockspring is to be reused, be certain to secure the clockspring rotor to the clockspring case to maintain clockspring centering until it is reinstalled on the steering column. If clockspring centering is not maintained, the clockspring must be centered again before it is reinstalled. See: Procedures. Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: If the clockspring is not properly centered in relation to the steering wheel, steering shaft and steering gear, it may be damaged. See: Procedures. Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-centered and with a locking pin installed. This locking pin should not be removed until the clockspring has been installed on the steering column. If the locking pin is removed before the clockspring is installed on a steering column, the clockspring centering procedure must be performed. NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain that the front wheels are still in the straight-ahead position. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7116 1. While holding the centered clockspring rotor and case stationary in relation to each other, carefully slide the clockspring down over the steering column upper shaft. 2. Align and seat the hole in the locating tab (2) on the clockspring case over the locating pin on the multi-function switch mounting housing. 3. Install and tighten the two screws (3) that secure the clockspring to the multi-function switch mounting housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 4. Reconnect the two instrument panel wire harness connectors to the two connector receptacles located below the steering column on the back of the clockspring housing. 5. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 6. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. Be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 8. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 9. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7117 10. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. If a new clockspring has been installed, remove the plastic locking pin that is securing the clockspring rotor to the clockspring case to maintain clockspring centering. NOTE: When reinstalling the steering wheel, be certain to index the yellow rubber booted engagement dowel on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor between the two fins cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature hub. 12. Reinstall the steering wheel onto the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Installation. 13. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors to the upper clockspring connector receptacles. Be certain that the steering wheel wire harness is routed between the steering wheel back trim cover and the steering wheel armature. 14. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel. See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation. 15. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 266 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 7 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7122 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7123 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 267 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7124 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7125 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 280 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 2 R13 20LG/VT LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7126 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7127 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7128 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 281 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 2 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7129 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7130 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 266 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 7 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7133 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7134 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 267 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7135 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7136 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 280 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 2 R13 20LG/VT LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7137 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7138 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7139 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 281 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 2 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7140 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7141 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Description Front FRONT Two front impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each front sensor is secured with two screws to the backs of the right and left vertical members of the radiator support within the engine compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (2), an integral anti-rotation pin (3), and two integral mounting holes (4) with metal sleeves to provide crush protection. The right and left front impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A label on the sensor is imprinted with an arrow, which should always be pointed forward in the vehicle. A cavity in the center of the molded plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity and a stamped cover (5) is crimped over the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The front impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Side SIDE Two side impact sensors (2) are used on this vehicle when it is equipped with the optional side curtain airbags, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each side sensor is secured with two screws to the floor panel beneath the outboard seat adjuster riser within the passenger compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (3), an integral anti-rotation pin (4), and two integral mounting holes (1) with metal sleeves to provide crush protection. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7144 The right and left side impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity and a stamped cover (5) is crimped over the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The side impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7145 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Operation Front FRONT The front impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through dedicated left and right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the front impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to front impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Side SIDE The side impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the side passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through left or right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the side impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to side impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the right or left front impact sensor (1) to the back of the right or left radiator support vertical member (4). 3. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (3) from the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the right or left front impact sensor from the engine compartment. Side SIDE WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side supplemental restraint deployment. NOTE: Side impact sensors are used only on vehicles equipped with the optional side curtain airbags. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7148 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the scuff plate trim from the right or left front door opening sill (5). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate - Removal. 3. Lift the floor carpet upward from the sill far enough to access the side impact sensor on the floor panel (4) below the right or left outboard front seat adjuster riser. 4. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the side impact sensor (3) to the floor panel. 5. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (1) from the sensor connector receptacle. 6. Remove the sensor from the floor panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7149 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Position the right or left front impact sensor (1) into the engine compartment. 2. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (3) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Carefully position the sensor onto the back of the right or left radiator support vertical member (4). Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the center clearance hole of the radiator support and the arrow on the sensor label is pointed forward in the vehicle. 4. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the sensor to the back of the support vertical member. Tighten the screws to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Side SIDE WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side supplemental restraint deployment. NOTE: Side impact sensors are used only on vehicles equipped with the optional side curtain airbags. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7150 1. Position the side impact sensor (3) near the floor panel (4) below the right or left outboard front seat adjuster riser. 2. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (1) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Carefully position the sensor onto the floor panel. Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the center clearance hole of the floor panel and the arrow on the sensor label is pointed toward the outboard side of the vehicle. 4. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the sensor to the inner B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 8 Nm (75 in. lbs.). 5. Restore the floor carpet over the side impact sensor on the floor panel to the right or left front door opening sill (5). 6. Reinstall the scuff plate trim onto the right or left front door opening sill. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate - Installation. 7. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) is located below the instrument panel center stack in the passenger compartment of the vehicle, where it is secured by three nuts to three studs on a stamped steel mounting bracket welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel just forward of the instrument panel center support bracket. Concealed within a hollow in the center of the die cast aluminum ORC housing is the electronic circuitry of the ORC which includes a microprocessor, an electronic impact sensor, an electronic safing sensor, and an energy storage capacitor. A stamped metal cover plate is secured to the bottom of the ORC housing with screws to enclose and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. An arrow (2) printed on the label on the top of the ORC housing provides a visual verification of the proper orientation of the unit, and should always be pointed toward the front of the vehicle. The ORC housing has three integral flanges with mounting holes. Two are on the corners oriented towards the rear of the vehicle, and one is near the center of the side facing the front of the vehicle. A molded plastic electrical connector (3) with two receptacles, each containing up to 32 terminal pins, exits the left facing side of the ORC housing. These terminal pins connect the ORC to the vehicle electrical system through two dedicated take outs and connectors, one each from the instrument panel and the body wire harnesses. The impact sensor and safing sensor internal to the ORC are calibrated for the specific vehicle, and are only serviced as a unit with the ORC. In addition, there are unique versions of the ORC for vehicles with or without the optional side curtain airbags. The ORC cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7155 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) contains the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) logic circuits and controls all of the SRS components. The ORC uses On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used for control of the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) and for SRS diagnosis and testing through the 16-way data link connector located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel. See: Malfunction Lamp / Indicator/Description and Operation/Operation. The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the SRS electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets an active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends electronic messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to turn ON the airbag indicator. An active fault only remains for the duration of the fault, or in some cases for the duration of the current ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault causes a DTC to be stored in memory by the ORC. For some DTCs, if a fault does not recur for a number of ignition cycles, the ORC will automatically erase the stored DTC. For other internal faults, the stored DTC is latched forever. The ORC receives battery current through two circuits; a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit through a fuse in the Junction Block (JB), and a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit through a second fuse in the JB. The ORC receives ground through a ground circuit and take out of the instrument panel wire harness. This take out has a single eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a ground screw to the left side of the floor panel transmission tunnel near the center of the instrument panel center support. These connections allow the ORC to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. The ORC also contains an energy-storage capacitor. When the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions, this capacitor is continually being charged with enough electrical energy to deploy the SRS components for up to one second following a battery disconnect or failure. The purpose of the capacitor is to provide backup SRS protection in case there is a loss of battery current supply to the ORC during an impact. Two sensors are contained within the ORC, an electronic impact sensor and a safing sensor. The ORC also monitors inputs from two remote front impact sensors located on the back of the right and left vertical members of the radiator support near the front of the vehicle. The electronic impact sensors are accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. On vehicles equipped with optional side curtain airbags the ORC also monitors inputs from two additional remote impact sensors located on the floor panel just behind the front seat crossmember beneath the outboard side of the left and right front seats to control deployment of the side curtain airbag units. The safing sensor is an electronic accelerometer sensor within the ORC that provides an additional logic input to the ORC microprocessor. The safing sensor is used to verify the need for a SRS component deployment by detecting impact energy of a lesser magnitude than that of the primary electronic impact sensors, and must exceed a safing threshold in order for the airbags to deploy. Vehicles equipped with optional side curtain airbags, feature a second safing sensor within the ORC to provide confirmation to the ORC microprocessor of side impact forces. This second safing sensor is a bi-directional unit that detects impact forces from either side of the vehicle. Pre-programmed decision algorithms in the ORC microprocessor determine when the deceleration rate as signaled by the impact sensors and the safing sensors indicate an impact that is severe enough to require SRS protection and, based upon the severity of the monitored impact, determines the level of front airbag deployment force required for each front seating position. When the programmed conditions are met, the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to deploy the dual multistage front airbags at the programmed force levels, the front seat belt tensioners and, if the vehicle is so equipped, either side curtain airbag unit. The hard wired inputs and outputs for the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the ORC or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the SRS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the ORC or the electronic controls and communication related to ORC operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The ORC contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an ORC is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper SRS component deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the floor distribution duct from the bottom of the heater-air conditioner housing. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair/Floor Ducts - Removal. 3. Disconnect the instrument panel (1) (C1) and body (3) (C2) wire harness connectors from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2) connector receptacles located on the left facing side of the module. To disconnect the connectors from the ORC: a. Slide the red Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock on the top of the connector toward the left side of the vehicle. b. Depress the edge of the CPA lock closest to the ORC to release the connector latch tab and pull the connector straight away from the ORC connector receptacle. 4. Remove the three nuts (2) that secure the ORC (1) to the studs of the ORC mount (4) welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel (3). 5. Remove the ORC from the ORC mount. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal > Page 7158 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The ORC contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an ORC is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper SRS component deployment. 1. Carefully position the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) onto the studs of the ORC mount (4) on the floor panel transmission tunnel. When the ORC is correctly positioned, the arrow on the ORC label will be pointed forward in the vehicle and the ORC connector receptacles will be facing the left side of the vehicle. 2. Install and tighten the three nuts (2) that secure the ORC to the studs of the ORC mount that is welded onto the floor panel transmission tunnel. Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the instrument panel (1) (C1) and body (3) (C2) wire harness connectors to the ORC (2) connector receptacles located on the left facing side of the module. Be certain that the latches and the red CPA locks on both connectors are each fully engaged. 4. Reinstall the floor distribution duct onto the bottom of the heater-air conditioner housing. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair/Floor Ducts - Installation. 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat track position sensor (1) is a Hall Effect-type sensor. This sensor consists of a Hall Effect Integrated Circuit (IC) chip encased in potting material within a cavity of the molded plastic sensor housing. The sensor housing has two integral snap features (3) and snaps into a stamped metal bracket located on the inboard side of one of the seat adjuster tracks on the front seat of vehicles so equipped. A molded connector receptacle (2) integral to the sensor housing is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector and take out of the seat wire harness beneath the front seat cushion frame. The seat track position sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire sensor must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7163 Seat Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat track position sensor is designed to provide a seat position data input to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) indicating whether the driver side front seat is in a full forward or a not full forward position. The ORC uses this data as an additional logic input for use in determining the appropriate deployment force to be used when deploying the multistage driver side front airbag. The seat track position sensor receives a nominal five volt supply from the ORC. The sensor communicates the seat position by modulating the voltage returned to the ORC on a sensor data circuit. The ORC also monitors the condition of the sensor circuits and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected. The ORC then sends messages over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to control the illumination of the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The hard wired circuits between the seat track position sensor and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the seat track position sensor or the electronic controls and communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the seat track position sensor or the electronic controls and communication related to seat track position sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Reach under the front seat cushion to access the seat track position sensor (4) in a bracket (1) located on the inboard side of either the inner or outer, driver or passenger seat track (5). 3. Disconnect the seat wire harness connector (3) from the sensor connector receptacle located on the end of the sensor. 4. Using a small screwdriver, depress the snap feature (2) and pull the connector end of the sensor out of the bracket. 5. Remove the sensor from under the front seat. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7166 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the front seat cushion to position the seat track position sensor (4) to the open end of the bracket (1) located on the inboard side of either the inner or outer, driver or passenger seat track (5). 2. Push the sensor firmly into the bracket until the snap feature (2) locks into place. 3. Reconnect the seat wire harness connector (3) to the sensor connector receptacle located on the end of the sensor. Be certain that the latch on the connector is fully engaged. 4. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An airbag indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, the instrument cluster can be programmed to disable this indicator on vehicles that are not equipped with the airbag system, which is not available in some markets. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and left of the speedometer needle hub. The airbag indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Airbag in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The airbag indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Malfunction Lamp / Indicator, Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7171 Malfunction Lamp / Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The airbag indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the airbag system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. The airbag indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The airbag indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the airbag indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the airbag indicator is illuminated for about six to eight seconds. The entire bulb test is a function of the ORC. - Airbag Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic airbag indicator lamp-ON message from the ORC, the airbag indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated for about twelve seconds or until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the ORC, whichever is longer. This indicator will also be extinguished when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the ORC for 10 consecutive message cycles, the airbag indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single lamp-OFF message from the ORC. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the airbag indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The actuator test illumination of the airbag indicator is a function of the instrument cluster. The ORC continually monitors the airbag system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The ORC then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the ORC sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the ORC has detected a system malfunction or that the airbags and seat belt tensioners may not deploy when required, or may deploy when not required. The ORC will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the airbag indicator fails to illuminate due to an open or short in the cluster airbag indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the ORC of the condition, the instrument cluster and the ORC will each store a DTC, and the cluster will flash the seatbelt indicator ON and OFF as a backup to notify the vehicle operator. For proper diagnosis of the airbag system, the ORC, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to airbag indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update Technical Service Bulletin # K29 Date: 101012 Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update October 2010 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification K29 Reprogram Occupant Restraint Controller Module Models 2008 - 2010 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles equipped with side airbag inflatable curtains (sales code CGS or CJ3) built through February 23, 2010 (MDH 022300). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) on about 4,800 of the above vehicles may not deploy during an Insurance Institute of Highway Safety side impact test. Repair The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module must be reprogrammed (flashed). Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The special tools are required to perform this repair: Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7181 Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System". Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Group LLC Service Procedure Use one of the two scan tools below to perform this service procedure. A. Reprogram the ORC using wiTECH The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module is "abort - recovery" supported. If this flash process is interrupted/aborted repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7182 NOTE: Use an accurate stand-alone voltmeter. The battery charger voltmeter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the wiPOD to the vehicle data link connector. 3. Place the ignition key in the "Run" position. 4. Launch the wiTECH diagnostic application. 5. Select "ORC" from the vehicle view screen. 6. Select the "FLASH" tab. 7. Select the flash file from the list. 8. Select the "UPDATE ECU" button and follow the screen prompts. If the flash was interrupted or failed, repeat the reprogramming procedure. 9. Clear all DTC's. NOTE: Due to the ORC programming procedure, DTC(s) may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, ABS, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. 10. Place the ignition in the "OFF" position, remove the wiPOD from the data link connector and disconnect the battery charger. B. Reprogram the ORC Using StarMOBILE CAUTION: The StarMOBILE operating software must be at release 10.02 or higher to perform this service procedure. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module is "abort - recovery" supported. If this flash process is interrupted/aborted repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Use an accurate stand-alone voltmeter. The battery charger voltmeter may not be accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarMOBILE scan tool to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 3. Connect the CH9410 StarMOBILE scan tool ethernet cable to the StarMOBILE and the dealer's network drop. 4. Power ON the StarMOBILE scan tool. 5. From the desktop, launch the "StarMOBILE Desktop Client" software. 6. Establish a connection with the StarMOBILE scan tool. 7. Retrieve the old ORC software part number. With the StarMOBILE on the "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select "ORC Occupant Restraint" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7183 e. Record the "Part Number" displayed at the end of the "Restraint flash file for" statement near the top of "Flash ORC" screen for later reference. 8. Download the flash file from the internet to the StarMOBILE. With the StarMOBILE on the "Flash ORC" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. b. Enter your "User id" and "Password", then select "OK". c. If the newly downloaded flash file "Part Number" description: > is the same as the number recorded in Step 7e, then the ORC is up to date. Continue with Step 11. > is different than the number recorded in Step 7e, then the ORC requires an update. Continue with Step 8d. d. Highlight the listed calibration on the StarMOBILE screen. e. Select "Download to Client". f. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select the "Back" arrow. g. Highlight the listed calibration. h. Select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. i. When the update is completed, select "OK". 9. Retrieve the ORC software part number. With the StarMOBILE on "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select "ORC Occupant Restraint" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Verify the "Part Number" (displayed at the end of the "Resident flash file for" statement) has been updated to the new part number. If it has updated, then the flash has been completed successfully. If the flash was interrupted or failed, repeat the reprogramming procedure. 10. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) as follows: NOTE: Due to the CCN programming procedure, DTC(s) may be set in other modules (TCM, ABS, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. a. From the "Home" screen select "System View". b. Select "All DTC's". c. "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. 11. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position and remove the StarMOBILE vehicle cable, and battery charger from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7184 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update Technical Service Bulletin # K29 Date: 101012 Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update October 2010 Dealer Service Instructions for: Customer Satisfaction Notification K29 Reprogram Occupant Restraint Controller Module Models 2008 - 2010 (ND) Dodge Dakota NOTE: This recall applies only to the above vehicles equipped with side airbag inflatable curtains (sales code CGS or CJ3) built through February 23, 2010 (MDH 022300). IMPORTANT: Some of the involved vehicles may be in dealer vehicle inventory. Dealers should complete this repair on these vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also perform this repair on vehicles in for service. Involved vehicles can be determined by using the VIP inquiry process. Subject The Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) on about 4,800 of the above vehicles may not deploy during an Insurance Institute of Highway Safety side impact test. Repair The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module must be reprogrammed (flashed). Parts Information No parts are required to perform this service procedure. Special Tools The special tools are required to perform this repair: Completion Reporting and Reimbursement Claims for vehicles that have been serviced must be submitted on the DealerCONNECT Claim Entry Screen located on the Service tab. Claims submitted will be used by Chrysler to record Customer Satisfaction Notification service completions and provide dealer payments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7190 Use one of the labor operation numbers and time allowances shown. Add the cost of the parts package plus applicable dealer allowance to your claim. NOTE: See the Warranty Administration Manual, Recall Claim Processing Section, for complete claim processing instructions. Dealer Notification To view this notification on DealerCONNECT, select "Global Recall System" on the Service tab, then click on the description of this notification. Owner Notification and Service Scheduling All involved vehicle owners known to Chrysler are being notified of the service requirement by mail. They are requested to schedule appointments for this service with their dealers. A generic copy of the owner letter is included. Enclosed with each owner letter is an Owner Notification postcard to allow owners to update our records if applicable. Dealers are encouraged to consider alternative scheduling and servicing approaches for this notification. This repair does not require hoists or other full service facility special equipment and is a Chrysler Mobile Service approved repair. Vehicle Lists, Global Recall System, VIP and Dealer Follow Up All involved vehicles have been entered into the DealerCONNECT Global Recall System (GRS) and Vehicle Information Plus (VIP) for dealer inquiry as needed. GRS provides involved dealers with an updated VIN list of their incomplete vehicles. The owner's name, address and phone number are listed if known. Completed vehicles are removed from GRS within several days of repair claim submission. To use this system, click on the "Service" tab and then click on "Global Recall System". Your dealer's VIN list for each recall displayed can be sorted by: those vehicles that were unsold at recall launch, those with a phone number, city, zip code, or VIN sequence. Dealers should perform this repair on all unsold vehicles before retail delivery. Dealers should also use the VIN list to follow up with all owners to schedule appointments for this repair. VIN lists may contain confidential, restricted owner name and address information that was obtained from the Department of Motor Vehicles of various states. Use of this information is permitted for this notification only and is strictly prohibited from all other use. Additional Information If you have any questions or need assistance in completing this action, please contact your Service and Parts District Manager. Customer Services Field Operations Chrysler Group LLC Service Procedure Use one of the two scan tools below to perform this service procedure. A. Reprogram the ORC using wiTECH The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module is "abort - recovery" supported. If this flash process is interrupted/aborted repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7191 NOTE: Use an accurate stand-alone voltmeter. The battery charger voltmeter may not be sufficiently accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the wiPOD to the vehicle data link connector. 3. Place the ignition key in the "Run" position. 4. Launch the wiTECH diagnostic application. 5. Select "ORC" from the vehicle view screen. 6. Select the "FLASH" tab. 7. Select the flash file from the list. 8. Select the "UPDATE ECU" button and follow the screen prompts. If the flash was interrupted or failed, repeat the reprogramming procedure. 9. Clear all DTC's. NOTE: Due to the ORC programming procedure, DTC(s) may be set in other modules (PCM, TCM, ABS, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. 10. Place the ignition in the "OFF" position, remove the wiPOD from the data link connector and disconnect the battery charger. B. Reprogram the ORC Using StarMOBILE CAUTION: The StarMOBILE operating software must be at release 10.02 or higher to perform this service procedure. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) module is "abort - recovery" supported. If this flash process is interrupted/aborted repeat the procedure. 1. Open the hood. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 to 13.5 volts. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Set the battery charger timer (if so equipped) to continuous charge. NOTE: Use an accurate stand-alone voltmeter. The battery charger voltmeter may not be accurate. Voltages outside of the specified range will cause an unsuccessful flash. If voltage reading is too high, apply an electrical load by activating the park or headlamps and/or HVAC blower motor to lower the voltage. 2. Connect the StarMOBILE scan tool to the vehicle data link connector located under the steering column and turn the ignition key to the "RUN" position. 3. Connect the CH9410 StarMOBILE scan tool ethernet cable to the StarMOBILE and the dealer's network drop. 4. Power ON the StarMOBILE scan tool. 5. From the desktop, launch the "StarMOBILE Desktop Client" software. 6. Establish a connection with the StarMOBILE scan tool. 7. Retrieve the old ORC software part number. With the StarMOBILE on the "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select "ORC Occupant Restraint" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7192 e. Record the "Part Number" displayed at the end of the "Restraint flash file for" statement near the top of "Flash ORC" screen for later reference. 8. Download the flash file from the internet to the StarMOBILE. With the StarMOBILE on the "Flash ORC" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. b. Enter your "User id" and "Password", then select "OK". c. If the newly downloaded flash file "Part Number" description: > is the same as the number recorded in Step 7e, then the ORC is up to date. Continue with Step 11. > is different than the number recorded in Step 7e, then the ORC requires an update. Continue with Step 8d. d. Highlight the listed calibration on the StarMOBILE screen. e. Select "Download to Client". f. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select the "Back" arrow. g. Highlight the listed calibration. h. Select "Update Controller" and follow the on screen instructions. i. When the update is completed, select "OK". 9. Retrieve the ORC software part number. With the StarMOBILE on "Home" screen, follow the procedure below: a. Select "ECU View". b. Select "ORC Occupant Restraint" in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options". d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Verify the "Part Number" (displayed at the end of the "Resident flash file for" statement) has been updated to the new part number. If it has updated, then the flash has been completed successfully. If the flash was interrupted or failed, repeat the reprogramming procedure. 10. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) as follows: NOTE: Due to the CCN programming procedure, DTC(s) may be set in other modules (TCM, ABS, BCM, MIC, WCM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. a. From the "Home" screen select "System View". b. Select "All DTC's". c. "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. 11. Turn the ignition key to the "OFF" position and remove the StarMOBILE vehicle cable, and battery charger from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Bag Control Module: > K29 > Oct > 10 > Campaign - Occupant Restraint Controller Module Update > Page 7193 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7194 Air Bag Control Module: Locations Component ID: 160 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 2 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 3 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 4 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 5-6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 14 - 15 R13 20LG/VT LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 16 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 17 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE 18 - 19 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 R1 20LB/BR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 30 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 31 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 32 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7195 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7196 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7197 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 4 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 5 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 6 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7198 7 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 8 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 9 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 10 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 11 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 12 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 13 - 14 - 15 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 16 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 17 - - 18 - 19 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 20 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 21 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 22 Z104 20BK/LG GROUND 23 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS(-) 24 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 - 32 - Component Location - 22 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7199 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7200 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7201 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 160 Component : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C1 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 2 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 3 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 4 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 5-6-7-- 8-9-10 - 11 - 12 - 13 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 14 - 15 R13 20LG/VT LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 16 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 17 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE 18 - 19 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 20 - 21 - 22 - 23 - 24 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 R1 20LB/BR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 30 R3 20LB/OR LEFT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 31 R4 20OR/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 1 32 R2 20WT/LB RIGHT CURTAIN SQUIB 1 LINE 2 Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7202 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7203 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7204 Connector: Name : MODULE-OCCUPANT RESTRAINT CONTROLLER C2 Color : YELLOW # of pins : 32 Pin Circuit Description 1 R43 20LG/BR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 2 R45 20LG/OR DRIVER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 3 R63 20LG/WT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 4 R61 20LG/VT DRIVER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 5 R42 20LB/BR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 2 6 R44 20LB/OR PASSENGER SQUIB 1 LINE 1 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7205 7 R64 20LB/WT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 1 8 R62 20LB/VT PASSENGER SQUIB 2 LINE 2 9 G104 20VT/GY PASSENGER AIRBAG INDICATOR DRIVER 10 R104 20LB/LG PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH RETURN 11 R106 20LG/LB PASSENGER AIRBAG MUX SWITCH SENSE 12 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 13 - 14 - 15 D65 20WT/LG CAN C BUS(+) 16 F201 20PK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-START) 17 - - 18 - 19 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 20 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 21 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL 22 Z104 20BK/LG GROUND 23 D64 20WT/LB CAN C BUS(-) 24 F100 20PK/VT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 25 - 26 - 27 - 28 - 29 - 30 - 31 - 32 - Component Location - 22 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7206 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7207 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) is located below the instrument panel center stack in the passenger compartment of the vehicle, where it is secured by three nuts to three studs on a stamped steel mounting bracket welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel just forward of the instrument panel center support bracket. Concealed within a hollow in the center of the die cast aluminum ORC housing is the electronic circuitry of the ORC which includes a microprocessor, an electronic impact sensor, an electronic safing sensor, and an energy storage capacitor. A stamped metal cover plate is secured to the bottom of the ORC housing with screws to enclose and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. An arrow (2) printed on the label on the top of the ORC housing provides a visual verification of the proper orientation of the unit, and should always be pointed toward the front of the vehicle. The ORC housing has three integral flanges with mounting holes. Two are on the corners oriented towards the rear of the vehicle, and one is near the center of the side facing the front of the vehicle. A molded plastic electrical connector (3) with two receptacles, each containing up to 32 terminal pins, exits the left facing side of the ORC housing. These terminal pins connect the ORC to the vehicle electrical system through two dedicated take outs and connectors, one each from the instrument panel and the body wire harnesses. The impact sensor and safing sensor internal to the ORC are calibrated for the specific vehicle, and are only serviced as a unit with the ORC. In addition, there are unique versions of the ORC for vehicles with or without the optional side curtain airbags. The ORC cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7212 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) contains the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) logic circuits and controls all of the SRS components. The ORC uses On-Board Diagnostics (OBD) and can communicate with other electronic modules in the vehicle as well as with the diagnostic scan tool using the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. This method of communication is used for control of the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) and for SRS diagnosis and testing through the 16-way data link connector located on the driver side lower edge of the instrument panel. See: Air Bag Systems/Malfunction Lamp / Indicator/Description and Operation/Operation. The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the SRS electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets an active and stored Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and sends electronic messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to turn ON the airbag indicator. An active fault only remains for the duration of the fault, or in some cases for the duration of the current ignition switch cycle, while a stored fault causes a DTC to be stored in memory by the ORC. For some DTCs, if a fault does not recur for a number of ignition cycles, the ORC will automatically erase the stored DTC. For other internal faults, the stored DTC is latched forever. The ORC receives battery current through two circuits; a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit through a fuse in the Junction Block (JB), and a fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit through a second fuse in the JB. The ORC receives ground through a ground circuit and take out of the instrument panel wire harness. This take out has a single eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a ground screw to the left side of the floor panel transmission tunnel near the center of the instrument panel center support. These connections allow the ORC to be operational whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. The ORC also contains an energy-storage capacitor. When the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions, this capacitor is continually being charged with enough electrical energy to deploy the SRS components for up to one second following a battery disconnect or failure. The purpose of the capacitor is to provide backup SRS protection in case there is a loss of battery current supply to the ORC during an impact. Two sensors are contained within the ORC, an electronic impact sensor and a safing sensor. The ORC also monitors inputs from two remote front impact sensors located on the back of the right and left vertical members of the radiator support near the front of the vehicle. The electronic impact sensors are accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. On vehicles equipped with optional side curtain airbags the ORC also monitors inputs from two additional remote impact sensors located on the floor panel just behind the front seat crossmember beneath the outboard side of the left and right front seats to control deployment of the side curtain airbag units. The safing sensor is an electronic accelerometer sensor within the ORC that provides an additional logic input to the ORC microprocessor. The safing sensor is used to verify the need for a SRS component deployment by detecting impact energy of a lesser magnitude than that of the primary electronic impact sensors, and must exceed a safing threshold in order for the airbags to deploy. Vehicles equipped with optional side curtain airbags, feature a second safing sensor within the ORC to provide confirmation to the ORC microprocessor of side impact forces. This second safing sensor is a bi-directional unit that detects impact forces from either side of the vehicle. Pre-programmed decision algorithms in the ORC microprocessor determine when the deceleration rate as signaled by the impact sensors and the safing sensors indicate an impact that is severe enough to require SRS protection and, based upon the severity of the monitored impact, determines the level of front airbag deployment force required for each front seating position. When the programmed conditions are met, the ORC sends the proper electrical signals to deploy the dual multistage front airbags at the programmed force levels, the front seat belt tensioners and, if the vehicle is so equipped, either side curtain airbag unit. The hard wired inputs and outputs for the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the ORC or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the SRS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the ORC or the electronic controls and communication related to ORC operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The ORC contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an ORC is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper SRS component deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the floor distribution duct from the bottom of the heater-air conditioner housing. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair/Floor Ducts - Removal. 3. Disconnect the instrument panel (1) (C1) and body (3) (C2) wire harness connectors from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (2) connector receptacles located on the left facing side of the module. To disconnect the connectors from the ORC: a. Slide the red Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock on the top of the connector toward the left side of the vehicle. b. Depress the edge of the CPA lock closest to the ORC to release the connector latch tab and pull the connector straight away from the ORC connector receptacle. 4. Remove the three nuts (2) that secure the ORC (1) to the studs of the ORC mount (4) welded onto the top of the floor panel transmission tunnel (3). 5. Remove the ORC from the ORC mount. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Removal > Page 7215 Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Module - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The ORC contains the impact sensor, which enables the system to deploy the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) components. If an ORC is accidentally dropped during service, the module must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper SRS component deployment. 1. Carefully position the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) (1) onto the studs of the ORC mount (4) on the floor panel transmission tunnel. When the ORC is correctly positioned, the arrow on the ORC label will be pointed forward in the vehicle and the ORC connector receptacles will be facing the left side of the vehicle. 2. Install and tighten the three nuts (2) that secure the ORC to the studs of the ORC mount that is welded onto the floor panel transmission tunnel. Tighten the nuts to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the instrument panel (1) (C1) and body (3) (C2) wire harness connectors to the ORC (2) connector receptacles located on the left facing side of the module. Be certain that the latches and the red CPA locks on both connectors are each fully engaged. 4. Reinstall the floor distribution duct onto the bottom of the heater-air conditioner housing. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair/Floor Ducts - Installation. 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle is equipped with a Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren, or LATCH child restraint anchorage system. The LATCH system provides for the installation of suitable child restraints in certain seating positions without using the standard equipment seat belt provided for that seating position. The outboard front passenger seat of all club cab vehicles is equipped with a fixed-position child restraint upper tether anchor (2) and child restraint lower anchors (1). On club cab vehicles with optional rear seats, a right outboard upper tether strap and a center anchor (4) are located on the back of the cab even though only two child seats can be installed. Only the passenger side outboard rear seat has lower anchors (3). On club cabs without a rear seat, the center anchor remains on the cab back for anchoring a child seat from the front center seating position. Quad cab vehicles are equipped with a fixed-position child restraint upper tether anchor strap for the rear center and both rear outboard seating positions (2), and child restraint lower anchors for both rear outboard seating positions (1). All front seat child restraint anchors are deleted on quad cab vehicles. The club cab right outboard front seat upper tether anchor (3) is integral to the front seat cushion (2) frame. This anchor is constructed from round steel bar stock that is formed into a loop, then securely welded at each end to the seat cushion frame. It is accessed from behind the front seat, just below the seat back (1). This anchor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced as a unit with the seat cushion frame. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7222 The club cab right outboard front seat lower anchors (2) are also integral to the front seat cushion frame. These lower anchors are each constructed from round steel bar stock that is formed into a loop, then securely welded at each end to the seat cushion frame. They are each accessed from the front of the seat, at each side where the seat back (1) meets the seat cushion (3). These lower anchors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, they must be replaced as a unit with the seat cushion frame. The right outboard rear seat upper tether strap and center anchor for club cab vehicles are secured to the upper cab back panel reinforcement with screws and are concealed behind the cab back trim (3). The outboard tether strap is accessed by folding down the right upper rear seat back pad (1), while a hinged access door (2) is opened to access the center anchor. This upper tether strap and the anchor are available for individual service replacement. The three upper tether anchor straps (2) for quad cab vehicles are secured to the upper cab back panel reinforcement with screws. These anchor straps are concealed behind the upright rear seat back (3) and the outboard rear seat headrests (1). The upper tether anchor straps are available for individual service replacement. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7223 The two lower anchors (1) for the passenger side rear outboard seating position of club cab vehicles are integral to a mounting bracket that is secured to the cab back panel and the rear floor panel with screws. They are each accessed from the front of the seat, at each side where the seat back (2) meets the seat cushion (3). These lower anchors and their bracket are available for individual service replacement. The lower anchors (2) for the rear seat of quad cab vehicles are also integral to their respective seat cushion frame. These anchors are also constructed from a heavy-gauge steel wire loop that is securely welded to the seat cushion frame. They are each accessed from the front of their respective seats, at each side where the seat back (1) meets the seat cushion (3). These lower anchors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, they must be replaced as a unit with the second row seat cushion frame unit. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7224 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION All vehicles manufactured for sale in the United States and Canada are required to be equipped with a Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren, or LATCH child restraint anchorage system. With LATCH, child seats are secured by direct attachment to the vehicle seat structure, rather than by the seat belts. With LATCH-compatible child seats, lower anchors attach to the seat structure through heavy-gauge wire loops located at the intersection between the seat cushion and the seat back surfaces. Upper tether anchors are also present to secure the top tether strap of child seats equipped with this feature. These upper tether anchors work with both LATCH-compatible and other child seats equipped with a top tether strap. The owner's information packet in the vehicle glove box contains details and suggestions on the proper use of all of the factory-installed child restraint anchors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Removal Rear Seat Lower Anchor Bracket - Club Cab REAR SEAT LOWER ANCHOR BRACKET - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure applies only to the lower anchor bracket used in the right rear seating position of club cab vehicles. 1. Fold the rear seat cushion up against the cab back panel (2). 2. Pull the floor carpet under the rear seat cushion away from the base of the cab back panel far enough to access the lower anchor bracket (4). 3. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the bracket to the floor panel. 4. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the bracket to the cab back panel. 5. Remove the bracket from the vehicle. Tether Anchor - Club Cab TETHER ANCHOR - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure applies only to the center upper child tether anchor used on all club cab vehicles. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7227 1. Unlatch and open the access door (4) on the cab back trim panel (2) to access the tether anchor (1). 2. Remove the screw (5) that secures the child tether anchor to the upper cab back panel reinforcement (3). 3. Remove the child tether anchor from the cab back. Tether Strap - Club Cab TETHER STRAP - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure applies only to the right outboard rear seat upper child tether strap used on club cab vehicles equipped with optional rear seats. 1. Fold down the right outboard rear seat upper back pad (4) from the cab back trim panel (2) to access the tether strap (1). 2. Remove the screw (5) that secures the child tether strap to the upper cab back panel reinforcement (3). 3. Remove the child tether strap from the cab back. Tether Strap - Quad Cab TETHER STRAP - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7228 ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure applies only to the rear seat upper child tether straps used on quad cab vehicles. 1. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Removal. 2. Remove the screw (4) that secures the child tether strap (1) to the upper cab back panel reinforcement (3). 3. Remove the child tether strap from the cab back trim panel (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7229 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Installation Rear Seat Lower Anchor Bracket - Club Cab REAR SEAT LOWER ANCHOR BRACKET - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure applies only to the lower anchor bracket used in the right rear seating position of club cab vehicles. 1. Position the lower anchor bracket (4) to the floor panel and the cab back panel (2) under the right rear seat cushion. 2. Loosely install the two screws (3) that secure the bracket to the cab back panel. 3. Install and tighten the two screws (1) that secure the bracket to the floor panel. Tighten the screws to 3 Nm (30 in. lbs.). 4. Tighten the two screws that secure the bracket to the cab back panel. Tighten the screws to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 5. Restore the floor carpet under the rear seat cushion to the base of the cab back panel. Tether Anchor - Club Cab TETHER ANCHOR - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure applies only to the center upper child tether anchor used on all club cab vehicles. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7230 1. Position the child tether anchor (1) through the access hole in the cab back trim panel (2) onto the upper cab back panel reinforcement (3). 2. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the child tether anchor to the cab back. Tighten the screw to 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.). 3. Fold the access door (4) back against the cab back trim panel to conceal the tether anchor. Tether Strap - Club Cab TETHER STRAP - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure applies only to the right outboard rear seat upper child tether strap used on club cab vehicles equipped with optional rear seats. 1. Position the child tether strap (1) through the access hole in the cab back trim panel (2) onto the upper cab back panel reinforcement (3). 2. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the child tether strap to the cab back. Tighten the screw to 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.). 3. Fold the right outboard rear seat upper back pad (4) back against the cab back trim panel to conceal the tether strap. Tether Strap - Quad Cab TETHER STRAP - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7231 ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure applies only to the rear seat upper child tether straps used on quad cab vehicles. 1. Position the child tether strap (1) onto the cab back trim panel (2). 2. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the child tether strap to the upper cab back panel reinforcement (3). Tighten the screw to 14 Nm (10 ft. lbs.). 3. Reinstall the rear seat into the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat belt retractors used in all seating positions equipped with three-point seat belts include an inertia-type, emergency locking mechanism as standard equipment. However, the retractor locking mechanisms for all seating positions except the driver side front position are mechanically switchable from an emergency locking retractor to an automatic locking retractor. The primary function of this feature is to securely accommodate a child seat in any seating position of the vehicle without the need for a self-cinching seat belt tip half latch plate unit or another supplemental device that would be required to prevent the seat belt webbing from unwinding freely from the retractor spool of an inertia-type emergency locking retractor mechanism. The automatic locking mechanism is integral to the seat belt and retractor unit and is concealed beneath a molded plastic cover located on one side of the retractor spool. The automatic locking mechanism cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire passenger side front seat belt and retractor unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7236 Seat Belt: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The locked mode of the automatic locking retractor is engaged and the retractor is switched from operating as a standard inertia-type emergency locking retractor by first buckling the combination lap and shoulder belt buckle. Then grasp the shoulder belt and pull all of the webbing out of the retractor. Once all of the belt webbing is extracted from the spool, the retractor will automatically become engaged in the pre-locked automatic locking mode and will make a light, audible clicking or ratcheting sound as the shoulder belt is allowed to retract to confirm that the automatic locking mode is now engaged. Once the automatic locking mode is engaged, the retractor will remain locked and the belt will remain tight around whatever it is restraining. The retractor is returned to standard emergency locking (inertia) mode by unbuckling the combination lap and shoulder belt buckle and allowing the belt webbing to be almost fully retracted onto the retractor spool. The emergency locking mode is confirmed by the absence of the light, audible clicking or ratcheting sound as the belt webbing retracts. This mode will allow the belt to unwind from and wind onto the retractor spool freely unless and until a predetermined inertia load is sensed, or until the retractor is again switched to the automatic locking mode. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Seat Belt: Service and Repair Seat Belt Removal - Front Center REMOVAL - FRONT CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Move the right front outboard seat (3) to its most forward position for easiest access to the front center seat belt lower anchor screw (4). 2. From behind the front seat, remove the screw that secures the seat belt lower anchor to the center seat support bracket. 3. From the front of the front seat, disengage the loose end and the tip of the front center seat belt (1) from the elastic strap (2) on the side of the center seat cushion. 4. Remove the seat belt and lower anchor through the opening in the side of the front center seat cushion trim (5). Installation - Front Center INSTALLATION - FRONT CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7239 1. From the front of the front seat, insert the front center seat belt (1) lower anchor through the opening in the trim (5) on the side of the center seat cushion. 2. Engage the loose end and the tip of the front center seat belt through the elastic strap (2) on the side of the center seat cushion. 3. From behind the front seat, position the seat belt lower anchor to the center seat support bracket. Be certain to engage the anti-rotation tab on the anchor into the corresponding hole in the center seat support bracket. 4. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the lower anchor to the center seat support bracket. Tighten the screw to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Move the adjacent right front outboard seat (3) back to its rearward position. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7240 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal Front Outboard - Club Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. The front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the front seat belt (1) lower anchor and the retractor (2). 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the screw (4) that secures the lower anchor to the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7241 4. Remove the two plastic push-pin retainers (2) that secure the trim cover (1) to the retractor (3) on the floor panel near the door sill. 5. Raise the trim cover up off of the retractor far enough to disengage the two locator pins in the top of the inboard cover half from the locator holes in the top of the retractor. 6. Spread apart the lower end of the inboard (1) and outboard (3) trim cover halves far enough to release the snap features that secure the tops of the two halves to each other. 7. Remove the trim cover halves from around the seat belt and retractor (2). 8. Loosen and move aside the front (5) and rear (4) scuff plates from the door sill far enough to access the retractor mounting bracket. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate - Removal. 9. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (3) from the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor (1). 10. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the retractor mounting bracket to the floor panel inboard of the door sill (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7242 11. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the edges of the upper door striker trim cover (3) away from the headliner (2) far enough to disengage the two snap clips that secure it to the upper roof rail (1). 12. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster (3) bracket to the upper roof rail (1). 13. Remove the front seat belt and retractor from the vehicle as a unit. Front Outboard - Quad Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. The front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7243 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the front seat belt (1) lower anchor and the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame (2). 4. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (4) from the front seat belt turning loop and disengage the tab on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. 5. Remove the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the height adjuster (2) on the upper B-pillar (1). 6. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 7. Remove the upper trim (3) from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7244 8. Remove the lower trim (3) from the inside of the B-pillar (1). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 9. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (6) from the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor (7). 10. Disengage the two clips that secure the belt web guide (2) to the B-pillar. 11. Remove the screw (4) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 12. Remove the screw (5) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 13. Disengage the tabs on the retractor bracket from the holes in the inner B-pillar. 14. Remove the front seat belt and retractor from the B-pillar as a unit. Rear Center - Quad Cab REAR CENTER - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The right side of the rear center seat belt and retractor mounting bracket and the unique, keyed center seat belt lower anchor buckle/right outboard occupant buckle unit are secured to the rear floor by a common screw, but the lower anchor buckle and the right outboard occupant buckle can be removed from the mounting bracket and are serviced separately from the seat belt and retractor. The center anchor buckle and the right outboard occupant buckle are serviced as a unit with their anchor brackets. See: Seat Belt Buckle/Service and Repair/Seat Belt Buckle - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7245 1. Lift upward on the forward edge of the rear center seat belt bezel (2) at the top of the cab back panel to release the snap features that secure the bezel to the belt bracket (3). 2. Disengage the seat belt webbing (1) from the bezel by weaving it through the slot in the front of the bezel. 3. Tilt the bezel rearward and toward the back glass to remove it from the back of the belt bracket. 4. Disengage the head of the right outboard seat belt buckle from the elastic strap on the rear edge of the right rear seat cushion. 5. Lift the right rear seat cushion far enough to reach between the rear seat cushion and the rear seat back to access and unbuckle the rear center seat belt lower anchor latch plate (6) from the unique, keyed lower anchor center buckle. Use an ignition key or a small screwdriver to depress the small white release button on the anchor buckle. 6. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Removal. 7. Disengage the two integral retaining clips of the belt web guide (7) from the holes in the cab back panel. 8. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the belt bracket (2) to the cab back bracket. 9. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the retractor (3) mounting bracket and the buckle unit (5) anchor brackets to the rear floor panel. 10. Remove the buckle unit from the retractor mounting bracket. 11. Remove the rear center seat belt and retractor unit from the vehicle. Rear Outboard - Club Cab REAR OUTBOARD - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7246 anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (4) from the rear outboard seat belt turning loop (3) and disengage the tab on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. 2. Remove the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the upper C-pillar (1). 3. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the C-pillar. 4. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 5. Loosen and move the lower trim (7) away from the inside of the C-pillar far enough to access the lower seat belt anchor. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 6. Remove the screw (6) that secures the lower anchor to the floor panel near the base of the C-pillar. 7. Disengage the seat belt, lower anchor, latch plate and turning loop from the clearance holes in the lower C-pillar trim and set the lower C-pillar trim aside. 8. Remove the screw (2) that secures the retractor (1) to the inner C-pillar (3). 9. Lift the retractor upward far enough to disengage the tab on the back of the retractor from the T-slot in the inner C-pillar. 10. Remove the rear seat belt and retractor from the vehicle as a unit. Rear Outboard - Quad Cab REAR OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7247 buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (5) from the rear outboard seat belt turning loop (4) and disengage the tab on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. 2. Remove the screw (6) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the upper C-pillar (1). 3. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the C-pillar. 4. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 5. Loosen and move the lower trim (3) away from the inside of the C-pillar far enough to access the lower seat belt anchor. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 6. Remove the screw (8) that secures the lower anchor near the base of the inner C-pillar. 7. Disengage the seat belt, lower anchor, latch plate (7) and turning loop from the clearance holes in the lower C-pillar trim and set the lower C-pillar trim aside. 8. Remove the screw (3) that secures the retractor (2) to the inner C-pillar (1). 9. Lift the retractor upward far enough to disengage the tab on the back of the retractor from the T-slot in the inner C-pillar. 10. Remove the rear seat belt and retractor from the vehicle as a unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7248 Seat Belt: Service and Repair Seat Belt and Retractor - Installation Front Outboard - Club Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. The front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Position the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster (3) bracket to the mounting holes in the upper roof rail (1). 2. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster bracket to the upper roof rail. Tighten the screws to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7249 3. Position the trim cover (3) to the headliner (2) opening around the door striker and the seat belt turning loop adjuster bracket on the upper roof rail (1). 4. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the trim cover until the two snap clips that secure it to the upper roof rail snap into place. 5. Position the retractor (1) mounting bracket to the mounting holes in the floor panel inboard of the door sill (4). Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the retractor and the turning loop is not twisted. 6. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the retractor bracket to the floor panel. Tighten the screws to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 7. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (3) to the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor. 8. Restore the front (5) and rear (4) scuff plates to the door sill over the retractor mounting bracket. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate - Installation. 9. Position the inboard (1) and outboard (3) trim cover halves around the seat belt and retractor (2) with the lower end spread open far enough to engage the snap features that secure the tops of the two halves to each other. 10. Close the lower ends of the trim cover halves together. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7250 11. Using hand pressure, push the trim cover (1) down over the retractor (3) far enough to engage the two locator pins in the top of the inboard cover half with the locator holes in the top of the retractor. 12. Reinstall the two plastic push-pin retainers (2) that secure the trim cover to the retractor. 13. Position the seat belt (1) lower anchor to the mounting hole on the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame (3). Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the turning loop and the lower anchor is not twisted. 14. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the lower anchor to the seat. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 15. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Front Outboard - Quad Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. The front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7251 recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Position the front seat belt and retractor (7) to the inner B-pillar (1) as a unit. Be certain to engage the tabs on the retractor bracket into the holes in the B-pillar. 2. Loosely install the screw (5) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 3. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 4. Tighten the screw that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Position the belt web guide (2) to the B-pillar and use hand pressure to press it firmly and evenly until the two clips that secure it snap into place. 6. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (6) to the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor. 7. Reinstall the lower trim (3) onto the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 8. Reinstall the upper trim (3) onto the inside of the B-pillar (1). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 9. Position the seat belt (6) turning loop onto the height adjuster (2) on the upper B-pillar. 10. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Engage the tab on the lower edge of the trim cover (4) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop. Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7252 12. Position the seat belt (1) lower anchor to the mounting hole on the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame (2). Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the turning loop and the lower anchor is not twisted. 13. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the seat. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 14. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Rear Center - Quad Cab REAR CENTER - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The right side of the rear center seat belt and retractor mounting bracket and the unique, keyed center seat belt lower anchor buckle/right outboard occupant buckle unit are secured to the rear floor by a common screw, but the lower anchor buckle and the right outboard occupant buckle can be removed from the mounting bracket and are serviced separately from the seat belt and retractor. The center anchor buckle and the right outboard occupant buckle are serviced as a unit with their anchor brackets. See: Seat Belt Buckle/Service and Repair/Seat Belt Buckle Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7253 1. Position the mounting bracket of the rear center seat belt retractor (3) to the rear floor panel near the base of the cab back panel. 2. Align and loosely install a screw (4) through the left side of the retractor mounting bracket. 3. Position and align the buckle unit (5) onto the right side of the retractor mounting bracket. 4. Install and tighten the screw that secures the buckle unit anchor brackets and the right side of the retractor mounting bracket to the rear floor panel. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Tighten the screw that secures the left side of the retractor mounting bracket to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 6. Position the belt bracket (2) onto the cab back bracket. Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the retractor and the top of the cab back bracket is not twisted. 7. Loosely install the two screws (1) that secure the belt bracket to the cab back bracket. 8. Tighten the screws that secure the belt bracket to the cab back bracket to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 9. Engage the two integral retaining clips of the belt web guide (7) into the holes in the cab back panel. 10. Reinstall the rear seat into the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Installation. 11. Engage the head of the right outboard seat belt buckle through the elastic strap on the rear edge of the right rear seat cushion. 12. Reach between the rear seat cushion and the rear seat back to engage the rear center seat belt lower anchor latch plate (6) to the unique, keyed lower anchor center buckle. Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the top of the seat back and the anchor buckle and the webbing between the anchor buckle and the retractor mounting bracket is not twisted. 13. Lower the right rear seat cushion to its normal seating position. 14. Lift the seat belt webbing (1) up off the top of the belt bracket (3) and weave it through the slot in the front of the belt bezel (2). 15. Position the bezel over the belt bracket with the rear edge tilted toward the back glass. 16. Lower the rear edge of the bezel over the back of the belt bracket far enough to engage the two clips within the bezel with the rear edge of the bracket. 17. Roll the bezel forward until the front edge is seated against the belt bracket, then press the front downward to engage the two clips within the bezel Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7254 with the front edge of the bracket. Rear Outboard - Club Cab REAR OUTBOARD - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Position the rear seat belt and retractor (1) to the inner C-pillar (3). 2. Engage the tab on the back of the retractor into the T-slot in the inner C-pillar. 3. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the retractor to the inner C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 4. Route the seat belt, lower anchor, latch plate and turning loop (3) through the clearance holes in the lower C-pillar trim (7). Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the retractor and the lower anchor is not twisted. 5. Position the seat belt lower anchor to the mounting hole in the floor panel near the base of the C-pillar. 6. Install and tighten the screw (6) that secures the lower anchor to the floor panel. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 7. Reinstall the lower trim onto the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7255 8. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 9. Position the seat belt turning loop to the mounting hole in the upper C-pillar. 10. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Engage the tab on the lower edge of the trim cover (4) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop. Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. Rear Outboard - Quad Cab REAR OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Position the rear seat belt and retractor (2) to the inner C-pillar (1). 2. Engage the tab on the back of the retractor into the T-slot in the inner C-pillar. 3. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the retractor to the inner C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 4. Route the seat belt, lower anchor, latch plate (7) and turning loop (4) through the clearance holes in the lower C-pillar trim (3). Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the retractor and the lower anchor is not twisted. 5. Position the seat belt lower anchor to the mounting hole near the base of the inner C-pillar (1). 6. Install and tighten the screw (8) that secures the lower anchor to the inner C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 7. Reinstall the lower trim onto the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt > Page 7256 8. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 9. Position the seat belt turning loop to the mounting hole in the upper C-pillar. 10. Install and tighten the screw (6) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Engage the tab on the lower edge of the trim cover (5) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop. Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Seat Belt Buckle - Removal Front Center FRONT CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Move the left front outboard seat (1) to its most forward position for easiest access to the front center seat belt buckle lower anchor screw (5). 2. From behind the front seat, remove the screw that secures the seat belt buckle lower anchor to the center seat support bracket. 3. From the front of the front seat, disengage the front center seat belt buckle (3) from the elastic strap (2) on the side of the center seat cushion. 4. Remove the seat belt buckle and lower anchor through the opening in the side of the front center seat cushion trim (4). Front Outboard FRONT OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A traveling front outboard seat belt buckle is located on the inboard side of each front outboard seat section (40 percent) used on all vehicles. The seat belt buckle on the driver side front seat for all vehicles also includes a seat belt switch. See: Seat Belt Buckle Switch/Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 7261 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. From behind the front seat on the driver side only, disconnect the seat belt switch pigtail wire connector (2) from the seat wire harness take out and connector for the switch (3) located below the rear of the driver side seat cushion (1). 3. Move the right or left front outboard seat section to its most rearward position and tilt the seat back forward for easiest access to the front outboard seat belt buckle lower anchor screw (1). 4. On the driver side only of vehicles with an optional 40/20/40 split front bench seat, remove the fasteners that secure the driver side front seat to the floor panel. 5. On the driver side only of vehicles with an optional 40/20/40 split front bench seat, tip the driver side front seat rearward to access and remove the fasteners securing the center seat cushion to the brackets on the driver side inboard seat track. 6. On the driver side only, disengage the disconnected seat belt switch pigtail wire (2) from under the seat cushion and the inboard seat track. 7. Remove the screw that secures the outboard front seat belt buckle (3) anchor near the back of the inboard side of the outboard seat cushion frame. 8. From the front of the front seat, disengage the seat belt buckle from the elastic strap on the inboard side of the outboard seat cushion. 9. Remove the buckle from the seat. Rear Center Anchor and Right Outboard - Quad Cab REAR CENTER ANCHOR AND RIGHT OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The unique, keyed center seat belt lower anchor buckle and the right outboard occupant buckle are serviced as a unit with their anchor brackets. These buckles are secured to the rear floor along with the right side of the rear center seat belt retractor mounting bracket by a common screw, but can be removed from the mounting bracket and serviced separately from the seat belt and retractor. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 7262 1. Disengage the head of the right outboard seat belt buckle from the elastic strap on the rear edge of the right rear seat cushion (1). 2. Lift the right rear seat cushion far enough to reach between the rear seat cushion and the rear seat back to access and unbuckle the rear center seat belt lower anchor latch plate (2) from the unique, keyed lower anchor center buckle. Use an ignition key or a small screwdriver to depress the small white release button on the anchor buckle. 3. Reach under the raised rear seat cushion to access and remove the scissors jack from the storage bracket on the floor panel under the rear seat. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the rear center anchor/right outboard buckle and anchor plate unit (5) and the right side of the rear center seat belt retractor mounting bracket (4) to the rear floor panel near the cab back panel. 5. Remove the rear center anchor/right outboard buckle and anchor plate unit from under the rear seat. Rear Center and Left Outboard - Quad Cab REAR CENTER AND LEFT OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Disengage the center or the left outboard occupant buckle unit (2) from the elastic loop on the back of the rear seat cushion (1) and push the buckle back through the crevice between the cushion and the rear seat back. 2. Lift up the seat cushion into its stowed position against the seat back. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 7263 3. Remove the nut (3) that secures the buckle unit to the stud (4) on the rear floor panel (5) near the base of the cab back panel. The stud and nut that secures the buckle also secures the inboard rear seat mounting bracket to the rear floor panel. 4. Remove the buckle from the stud and the inboard rear seat mounting bracket. Rear - Club Cab REAR - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Fold the rear seat cushions up against the cab back panel (1). 2. Remove the screw (3) that secures the rear seat belt buckle anchor (2) to the rear floor panel (4). 3. Remove the buckle from the rear floor. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 7264 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Seat Belt Buckle - Installation Front Center FRONT CENTER WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. From the front of the front seat, insert the front center seat belt buckle (3) lower anchor through the opening in the trim (4) on the side of the center seat cushion. 2. Engage the front center seat belt buckle through the elastic strap (2) on the side of the center seat cushion. 3. From behind the front seat, position the seat belt buckle lower anchor to the center seat support bracket. Be certain to engage the anti-rotation tab on the anchor into the corresponding hole in the center seat support bracket. 4. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the lower anchor to the center seat support bracket. Tighten the screw to 40 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Move the adjacent left front outboard seat (1) back to its rearward position. Front Outboard FRONT OUTBOARD WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A traveling front outboard seat belt buckle is located on the inboard side of each front outboard seat section (40 percent) used on all vehicles. The seat belt buckle on the driver side front seat for all vehicles also includes a seat belt switch. See: Seat Belt Buckle Switch/Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 7265 1. Engage the seat belt buckle (3) through the elastic strap on the inboard side of the outboard seat cushion. 2. Position the seat belt buckle lower anchor to the mounting hole near the rear of the inboard side of the outboard seat cushion frame. Be certain the notch at the base of the anchor engages the anti-rotation tab on the frame. 3. Install and tighten the screw (1) that secures the anchor to the frame. Tighten the screw to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.). 4. On the driver side only, route the seat belt switch pigtail wire (2) under the inboard seat track and the seat cushion. 5. On the driver side only of vehicles with an optional 40/20/40 split front bench seat, reinstall the fasteners securing the center seat cushion to the brackets on the driver side inboard seat track. 6. On the driver side only of vehicles with an optional 40/20/40 split front bench seat, reinstall the driver side front seat onto the floor panel. 7. On the driver side only, move the front seat to its most forward position and tilt the seat back forward for easiest access to the seat belt switch pigtail wire connection. 8. From behind the front seat on the driver side only, reconnect the seat belt switch pigtail wire connector (2) to the seat wire harness take out and connector for the switch (3) located below the rear of the driver side seat cushion (1). 9. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Rear Center Anchor and Right Outboard - Quad Cab REAR CENTER ANCHOR AND RIGHT OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The unique, keyed center seat belt lower anchor buckle and the right outboard occupant buckle are serviced as a unit with their anchor brackets. These buckles are secured to the rear floor along with the right side of the rear center seat belt retractor mounting bracket by a common screw, but can be removed from the mounting bracket and serviced separately from the seat belt and retractor. See: Seat Belt Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 7266 Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor - Installation. 1. Position the rear center anchor and right outboard buckle and anchor plate unit (5) to the right side of the rear center seat belt retractor mounting bracket (4) under the right rear seat cushion (1) on the rear floor panel near the cab back panel. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the rear center anchor/right outboard buckle and anchor plate unit and the retractor mounting bracket to the rear floor panel. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Engage the head of the right outboard seat belt buckle through the elastic strap on the rear edge of the right rear seat cushion. 4. Reach between the rear seat cushion and the rear seat back to engage the rear center seat belt lower anchor latch plate (2) to the unique, keyed lower anchor center buckle. Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the top of the seat back and the anchor buckle and the webbing between the anchor buckle and the retractor mounting bracket is not twisted. 5. Reach under the raised rear seat cushion to access and reinstall the scissors jack into the storage bracket on the floor panel under the rear seat. 6. Lower the right rear seat cushion to its normal seating position. Rear Center and Left Outboard - Quad Cab REAR CENTER AND LEFT OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt Buckle - Removal > Page 7267 1. Position the center or the left outboard occupant buckle unit (2) onto the stud (4) near the base of the cab back panel that secures the inboard rear seat mounting bracket to the rear floor panel (5). 2. Install and tighten the nut (3) that secures the buckle unit to the stud. Tighten the nut to 41 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). Be certain to hold the buckle in its properly oriented position while tightening the nut. 3. Push the buckle up through the crevice between the rear seat cushion and the rear seat back. 4. Lower the rear seat cushion back to its normal seating position. 5. Engage the buckle through the elastic loop at the back of the seat cushion. Rear - Club Cab REAR - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Position the lower anchor of the rear seat belt buckle (2) to the rear floor panel (4). 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the buckle anchor to the floor panel. Tighten the screw to 46 Nm (34 ft. lbs.). 3. Fold down the rear seat cushion from the cab back panel (1) to the seating position. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Component ID: 313 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z949 20BK GROUND 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7271 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7272 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 313 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z949 20BK GROUND 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7273 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat belt switch is a small, normally open, single pole, single throw, leaf contact, momentary switch. Only one seat belt switch is installed in the vehicle, and it is integral to the buckle of the driver side front seat belt buckle-half (3), located on the inboard side of the driver side front seat cushion frame. The seat belt switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a two-wire pigtail wire (2) and connector on the seat belt buckle-half, which is connected to a wire harness connector and take out of the seat wire harness routed beneath the driver side front seat cushion in the passenger compartment. The seat belt switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire driver side front seat belt buckle-half unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7276 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat belt switch is designed to control a path to ground for the seat belt switch sense input of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). When the driver side front seat belt tip-half is inserted into the seat belt buckle, the switch closes the path to ground; and, when the driver side front seat belt tip-half is removed from the seat belt buckle, the switch opens the ground path. The switch is actuated by the latch mechanism within the seat belt buckle. The seat belt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt switch sense input of the instrument cluster. The seat belt switch receives ground at all times through its pigtail wire connection to the seat wire harness from a take out of the body wire harness. An eyelet terminal connector on the body wire harness ground take out is secured beneath a ground screw on the left cowl side inner panel, beneath the instrument panel. The seat belt switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7277 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Testing and Inspection SEAT BELT SWITCH Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the seat belt switch pigtail wire connector from the seat wire harness connector for the seat belt switch beneath the driver side front seat cushion forward of the seat belt buckle-half anchor. Check for continuity between the seat belt switch sense circuit and the ground circuit cavities of the seat belt switch pigtail wire connector. There should be continuity with the seat belt buckled, and no continuity with the seat belt unbuckled. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective front seat belt buckle-half assembly. 2. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity in the seat wire harness connector for the seat belt switch and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit to ground (G301) as required. 3. Remove the instrument cluster from the instrument panel. Check for continuity between the seat belt switch sense circuit cavity of the seat wire harness connector for the seat belt switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, repair the shorted seat belt switch sense circuit between the seat belt switch and the instrument cluster as required. 4. Check for continuity between the seat belt switch sense circuit cavities of the seat wire harness connector for the seat belt switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If OK, test and replace the ineffective instrument cluster as required. Refer to appropriate testing. If not OK, repair the open seat belt switch sense circuit between the seat belt switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A seat belt turning loop adjuster is used for both front outboard seating positions on all vehicles; however, the following procedure applies only to the B-pillar mounted adjuster used on quad cabs. The telescoping roof rail mounted adjuster used on club cabs is integral to the front outboard seat belt and retractor assembly. 1. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (1) from the front seat belt turning loop (2) and disengage the tab (3) on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. 2. Remove the screw (6) that secures the seat belt turning loop (5) to the height adjuster (3) on the upper B-pillar (1). 3. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 4. Remove the upper trim (4) from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 5. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the height adjuster to the inside of the B-pillar. 6. Remove the adjuster from the B-pillar. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7282 Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: A seat belt turning loop adjuster is used for both front outboard seating positions on all vehicles; however, the following procedure applies only to the B-pillar mounted adjuster used on quad cabs. The telescoping roof rail mounted adjuster used on club cabs is integral to the front outboard seat belt and retractor assembly. 1. Position the seat belt turning loop adjuster (3) to the inside of the B-pillar (1). 2. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the adjuster to the B-pillar. Tighten the screws to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Reinstall the upper trim (4) onto the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 4. Position the seat belt turning loop (5) onto the height adjuster on the upper B-pillar. 5. Install and tighten the screw (6) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 6. Engage the tab (3) on the lower edge of the trim cover (1) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop (2). Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A seatbelt indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The seatbelt indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Seat Belt in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The seatbelt indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7287 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seatbelt indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the driver side front seatbelt. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input from the seatbelt switch in the driver side front seatbelt retractor through the seat belt indicator driver circuit. The seatbelt indicator also includes a programmable enhanced seatbelt reminder or BELTMINDER feature that is enabled when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. This BELTMINDER feature can be disabled and enabled by the customer using a specific programming event sequence, or by the dealer using a diagnostic scan tool. The seatbelt indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the seatbelt indicator for the following reasons: Seatbelt Reminder Function - Each time the cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit, the indicator will be illuminated as a seatbelt reminder for about six seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. This reminder function will occur regardless of the status of the seatbelt switch input to the cluster. - Driver Side Front Seatbelt Not Buckled - Beltminder Active - Following the seatbelt reminder function, each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seatbelt switch open = seatbelt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the START or ON positions, the indicator will be illuminated. In addition, if the driver side front seat belt remains unbuckled about 60 seconds after the conclusion of the seatbelt reminder function with the vehicle speed greater than about 8 kilometers-per-hour (5 miles-per-hour), the seatbelt indicator will begin to cycle between flashing ON and OFF for 3 seconds, then lighting solid for 2 seconds. The seatbelt indicator will continue to cycle between flashing and solid illumination for 13 complete cycles, until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seatbelt switch closed = seatbelt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Driver Side Front Seatbelt Not Buckled - Beltminder Inactive - Following the seatbelt reminder function, each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seatbelt switch open = seatbelt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the START or ON positions, the indicator will be illuminated. The seatbelt indicator remains illuminated until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seatbelt switch closed = seatbelt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Airbag Indicator Backup - If the instrument cluster detects a fault in the airbag indicator circuit it will send an electronic message indicating the fault to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), then flash the seatbelt indicator ON and OFF. The cluster will continue to flash the indicator until the airbag indicator circuit fault is resolved, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the seatbelt indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The seatbelt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt indicator driver input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The hard wired seatbelt switch input to the EMIC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat belt retractors used in all seating positions equipped with three-point seat belts include an inertia-type, emergency locking mechanism as standard equipment. However, the retractor locking mechanisms for all seating positions except the driver side front position are mechanically switchable from an emergency locking retractor to an automatic locking retractor. The primary function of this feature is to securely accommodate a child seat in any seating position of the vehicle without the need for a self-cinching seat belt tip half latch plate unit or another supplemental device that would be required to prevent the seat belt webbing from unwinding freely from the retractor spool of an inertia-type emergency locking retractor mechanism. The automatic locking mechanism is integral to the seat belt and retractor unit and is concealed beneath a molded plastic cover located on one side of the retractor spool. The automatic locking mechanism cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire passenger side front seat belt and retractor unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7292 Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The locked mode of the automatic locking retractor is engaged and the retractor is switched from operating as a standard inertia-type emergency locking retractor by first buckling the combination lap and shoulder belt buckle. Then grasp the shoulder belt and pull all of the webbing out of the retractor. Once all of the belt webbing is extracted from the spool, the retractor will automatically become engaged in the pre-locked automatic locking mode and will make a light, audible clicking or ratcheting sound as the shoulder belt is allowed to retract to confirm that the automatic locking mode is now engaged. Once the automatic locking mode is engaged, the retractor will remain locked and the belt will remain tight around whatever it is restraining. The retractor is returned to standard emergency locking (inertia) mode by unbuckling the combination lap and shoulder belt buckle and allowing the belt webbing to be almost fully retracted onto the retractor spool. The emergency locking mode is confirmed by the absence of the light, audible clicking or ratcheting sound as the belt webbing retracts. This mode will allow the belt to unwind from and wind onto the retractor spool freely unless and until a predetermined inertia load is sensed, or until the retractor is again switched to the automatic locking mode. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal Front Outboard - Club Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. The front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the front seat belt (1) lower anchor and the retractor (2). 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the screw (4) that secures the lower anchor to the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7295 4. Remove the two plastic push-pin retainers (2) that secure the trim cover (1) to the retractor (3) on the floor panel near the door sill. 5. Raise the trim cover up off of the retractor far enough to disengage the two locator pins in the top of the inboard cover half from the locator holes in the top of the retractor. 6. Spread apart the lower end of the inboard (1) and outboard (3) trim cover halves far enough to release the snap features that secure the tops of the two halves to each other. 7. Remove the trim cover halves from around the seat belt and retractor (2). 8. Loosen and move aside the front (5) and rear (4) scuff plates from the door sill far enough to access the retractor mounting bracket. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate - Removal. 9. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (3) from the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor (1). 10. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the retractor mounting bracket to the floor panel inboard of the door sill (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7296 11. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the edges of the upper door striker trim cover (3) away from the headliner (2) far enough to disengage the two snap clips that secure it to the upper roof rail (1). 12. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster (3) bracket to the upper roof rail (1). 13. Remove the front seat belt and retractor from the vehicle as a unit. Front Outboard - Quad Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. The front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7297 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position for easiest access to the front seat belt (1) lower anchor and the B-pillar trim. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 3. Remove the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame (2). 4. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (4) from the front seat belt turning loop and disengage the tab on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. 5. Remove the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the height adjuster (2) on the upper B-pillar (1). 6. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 7. Remove the upper trim (3) from the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7298 8. Remove the lower trim (3) from the inside of the B-pillar (1). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 9. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (6) from the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor (7). 10. Disengage the two clips that secure the belt web guide (2) to the B-pillar. 11. Remove the screw (4) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 12. Remove the screw (5) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 13. Disengage the tabs on the retractor bracket from the holes in the inner B-pillar. 14. Remove the front seat belt and retractor from the B-pillar as a unit. Rear Center - Quad Cab REAR CENTER - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The right side of the rear center seat belt and retractor mounting bracket and the unique, keyed center seat belt lower anchor buckle/right outboard occupant buckle unit are secured to the rear floor by a common screw, but the lower anchor buckle and the right outboard occupant buckle can be removed from the mounting bracket and are serviced separately from the seat belt and retractor. The center anchor buckle and the right outboard occupant buckle are serviced as a unit with their anchor brackets. See: Seat Belt Buckle/Service and Repair/Seat Belt Buckle - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7299 1. Lift upward on the forward edge of the rear center seat belt bezel (2) at the top of the cab back panel to release the snap features that secure the bezel to the belt bracket (3). 2. Disengage the seat belt webbing (1) from the bezel by weaving it through the slot in the front of the bezel. 3. Tilt the bezel rearward and toward the back glass to remove it from the back of the belt bracket. 4. Disengage the head of the right outboard seat belt buckle from the elastic strap on the rear edge of the right rear seat cushion. 5. Lift the right rear seat cushion far enough to reach between the rear seat cushion and the rear seat back to access and unbuckle the rear center seat belt lower anchor latch plate (6) from the unique, keyed lower anchor center buckle. Use an ignition key or a small screwdriver to depress the small white release button on the anchor buckle. 6. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Removal. 7. Disengage the two integral retaining clips of the belt web guide (7) from the holes in the cab back panel. 8. Remove the two screws (1) that secure the belt bracket (2) to the cab back bracket. 9. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the retractor (3) mounting bracket and the buckle unit (5) anchor brackets to the rear floor panel. 10. Remove the buckle unit from the retractor mounting bracket. 11. Remove the rear center seat belt and retractor unit from the vehicle. Rear Outboard - Club Cab REAR OUTBOARD - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7300 anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (4) from the rear outboard seat belt turning loop (3) and disengage the tab on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. 2. Remove the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the upper C-pillar (1). 3. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the C-pillar. 4. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 5. Loosen and move the lower trim (7) away from the inside of the C-pillar far enough to access the lower seat belt anchor. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 6. Remove the screw (6) that secures the lower anchor to the floor panel near the base of the C-pillar. 7. Disengage the seat belt, lower anchor, latch plate and turning loop from the clearance holes in the lower C-pillar trim and set the lower C-pillar trim aside. 8. Remove the screw (2) that secures the retractor (1) to the inner C-pillar (3). 9. Lift the retractor upward far enough to disengage the tab on the back of the retractor from the T-slot in the inner C-pillar. 10. Remove the rear seat belt and retractor from the vehicle as a unit. Rear Outboard - Quad Cab REAR OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7301 buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Unsnap the upper edge of the trim cover (5) from the rear outboard seat belt turning loop (4) and disengage the tab on the lower edge of the cover to access the turning loop screw. 2. Remove the screw (6) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the upper C-pillar (1). 3. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the C-pillar. 4. Remove the upper trim (2) from the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 5. Loosen and move the lower trim (3) away from the inside of the C-pillar far enough to access the lower seat belt anchor. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 6. Remove the screw (8) that secures the lower anchor near the base of the inner C-pillar. 7. Disengage the seat belt, lower anchor, latch plate (7) and turning loop from the clearance holes in the lower C-pillar trim and set the lower C-pillar trim aside. 8. Remove the screw (3) that secures the retractor (2) to the inner C-pillar (1). 9. Lift the retractor upward far enough to disengage the tab on the back of the retractor from the T-slot in the inner C-pillar. 10. Remove the rear seat belt and retractor from the vehicle as a unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7302 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Seat Belt and Retractor - Installation Front Outboard - Club Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. The front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Position the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster (3) bracket to the mounting holes in the upper roof rail (1). 2. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster bracket to the upper roof rail. Tighten the screws to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7303 3. Position the trim cover (3) to the headliner (2) opening around the door striker and the seat belt turning loop adjuster bracket on the upper roof rail (1). 4. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the trim cover until the two snap clips that secure it to the upper roof rail snap into place. 5. Position the retractor (1) mounting bracket to the mounting holes in the floor panel inboard of the door sill (4). Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the retractor and the turning loop is not twisted. 6. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the retractor bracket to the floor panel. Tighten the screws to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 7. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (3) to the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor. 8. Restore the front (5) and rear (4) scuff plates to the door sill over the retractor mounting bracket. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate - Installation. 9. Position the inboard (1) and outboard (3) trim cover halves around the seat belt and retractor (2) with the lower end spread open far enough to engage the snap features that secure the tops of the two halves to each other. 10. Close the lower ends of the trim cover halves together. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7304 11. Using hand pressure, push the trim cover (1) down over the retractor (3) far enough to engage the two locator pins in the top of the inboard cover half with the locator holes in the top of the retractor. 12. Reinstall the two plastic push-pin retainers (2) that secure the trim cover to the retractor. 13. Position the seat belt (1) lower anchor to the mounting hole on the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame (3). Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the turning loop and the lower anchor is not twisted. 14. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the lower anchor to the seat. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 15. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Front Outboard - Quad Cab FRONT OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The following procedure is for replacement of an ineffective or damaged seat belt and retractor unit. The front retractor also includes a seat belt tensioner. If the front seat belt or retractor is ineffective or damaged, but the seat belt tensioner is not deployed, review the Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7305 recommended procedures for handling non-deployed supplemental restraints. See: Air Bag Systems/Service and Repair. If the seat belt tensioner has been deployed, review the recommended procedures for service after a supplemental restraint deployment before removing the unit from the vehicle. See: Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision/Service and Repair. 1. Position the front seat belt and retractor (7) to the inner B-pillar (1) as a unit. Be certain to engage the tabs on the retractor bracket into the holes in the B-pillar. 2. Loosely install the screw (5) that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. 3. Install and tighten the screw (4) that secures the upper retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (25 in. lbs.). 4. Tighten the screw that secures the lower retractor bracket to the B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Position the belt web guide (2) to the B-pillar and use hand pressure to press it firmly and evenly until the two clips that secure it snap into place. 6. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (6) to the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor. 7. Reinstall the lower trim (3) onto the inside of the B-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 8. Reinstall the upper trim (3) onto the inside of the B-pillar (1). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 9. Position the seat belt (6) turning loop onto the height adjuster (2) on the upper B-pillar. 10. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Engage the tab on the lower edge of the trim cover (4) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop. Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7306 12. Position the seat belt (1) lower anchor to the mounting hole on the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame (2). Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the turning loop and the lower anchor is not twisted. 13. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the seat. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 14. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Rear Center - Quad Cab REAR CENTER - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: The right side of the rear center seat belt and retractor mounting bracket and the unique, keyed center seat belt lower anchor buckle/right outboard occupant buckle unit are secured to the rear floor by a common screw, but the lower anchor buckle and the right outboard occupant buckle can be removed from the mounting bracket and are serviced separately from the seat belt and retractor. The center anchor buckle and the right outboard occupant buckle are serviced as a unit with their anchor brackets. See: Seat Belt Buckle/Service and Repair/Seat Belt Buckle Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7307 1. Position the mounting bracket of the rear center seat belt retractor (3) to the rear floor panel near the base of the cab back panel. 2. Align and loosely install a screw (4) through the left side of the retractor mounting bracket. 3. Position and align the buckle unit (5) onto the right side of the retractor mounting bracket. 4. Install and tighten the screw that secures the buckle unit anchor brackets and the right side of the retractor mounting bracket to the rear floor panel. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 5. Tighten the screw that secures the left side of the retractor mounting bracket to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 6. Position the belt bracket (2) onto the cab back bracket. Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the retractor and the top of the cab back bracket is not twisted. 7. Loosely install the two screws (1) that secure the belt bracket to the cab back bracket. 8. Tighten the screws that secure the belt bracket to the cab back bracket to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). 9. Engage the two integral retaining clips of the belt web guide (7) into the holes in the cab back panel. 10. Reinstall the rear seat into the vehicle. See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat Installation. 11. Engage the head of the right outboard seat belt buckle through the elastic strap on the rear edge of the right rear seat cushion. 12. Reach between the rear seat cushion and the rear seat back to engage the rear center seat belt lower anchor latch plate (6) to the unique, keyed lower anchor center buckle. Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the top of the seat back and the anchor buckle and the webbing between the anchor buckle and the retractor mounting bracket is not twisted. 13. Lower the right rear seat cushion to its normal seating position. 14. Lift the seat belt webbing (1) up off the top of the belt bracket (3) and weave it through the slot in the front of the belt bezel (2). 15. Position the bezel over the belt bracket with the rear edge tilted toward the back glass. 16. Lower the rear edge of the bezel over the back of the belt bracket far enough to engage the two clips within the bezel with the rear edge of the bracket. 17. Roll the bezel forward until the front edge is seated against the belt bracket, then press the front downward to engage the two clips within the bezel Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7308 with the front edge of the bracket. Rear Outboard - Club Cab REAR OUTBOARD - CLUB CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Position the rear seat belt and retractor (1) to the inner C-pillar (3). 2. Engage the tab on the back of the retractor into the T-slot in the inner C-pillar. 3. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the retractor to the inner C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 4. Route the seat belt, lower anchor, latch plate and turning loop (3) through the clearance holes in the lower C-pillar trim (7). Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the retractor and the lower anchor is not twisted. 5. Position the seat belt lower anchor to the mounting hole in the floor panel near the base of the C-pillar. 6. Install and tighten the screw (6) that secures the lower anchor to the floor panel. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 7. Reinstall the lower trim onto the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7309 8. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 9. Position the seat belt turning loop to the mounting hole in the upper C-pillar. 10. Install and tighten the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Engage the tab on the lower edge of the trim cover (4) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop. Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. Rear Outboard - Quad Cab REAR OUTBOARD - QUAD CAB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or ineffective buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or ineffective seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Position the rear seat belt and retractor (2) to the inner C-pillar (1). 2. Engage the tab on the back of the retractor into the T-slot in the inner C-pillar. 3. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the retractor to the inner C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 4. Route the seat belt, lower anchor, latch plate (7) and turning loop (4) through the clearance holes in the lower C-pillar trim (3). Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the retractor and the lower anchor is not twisted. 5. Position the seat belt lower anchor to the mounting hole near the base of the inner C-pillar (1). 6. Install and tighten the screw (8) that secures the lower anchor to the inner C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 7. Reinstall the lower trim onto the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Belt and Retractor - Removal > Page 7310 8. Reinstall the upper trim (2) onto the inside of the C-pillar. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 9. Position the seat belt turning loop to the mounting hole in the upper C-pillar. 10. Install and tighten the screw (6) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Engage the tab on the lower edge of the trim cover (5) in the slot below the screw in the turning loop. Then press the upper edge of the trim cover over the top of the turning loop until it snaps into place. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver Seat Belt Tensioner: Locations Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver Component ID: 257 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 2 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 7315 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 7316 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 7317 Seat Belt Tensioner: Locations Seat Belt-Tensioner-Passenger Component ID: 258 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 2 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 7318 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 7319 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver Component ID: 257 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R53 20LG/YL DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 2 R55 20LG/DG DRIVER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 7322 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 7323 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 7324 Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Seat Belt-Tensioner-Passenger Component ID: 258 Component : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SEAT BELT-TENSIONER-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R54 20LB/YL PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 2 2 R56 20LB/DG PASSENGER SEAT BELT TENSIONER LINE 1 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 7325 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Seat Belt-Tensioner-Driver > Page 7326 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Seat belt tensioners supplement the dual front airbags for this vehicle. The seat belt tensioners are integral to the front seat belt retractor units, which are secured to the floor panel (club cab) or the inner B-pillar (quad cab) on the right and left sides of the vehicle. On club cab vehicles, the retractor is concealed beneath a clam shell-like trim cover on the floor panel behind the front seat near the door opening sill. On quad cab vehicles, the retractor is concealed beneath the molded plastic inner B-pillar trim. The seat belt tensioner consists primarily of a sprocket/pinion, a steel tube, a cast metal housing, numerous steel balls, a stamped metal ball trap, a torsion bar and a small pyrotechnically activated gas generator with a connector receptacle. All of these components are located on one side of the retractor spool on the outside of the retractor housing except for the torsion bar, which serves as the spindle upon which the retractor spool rides. The seat belt tensioners are controlled by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) and are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the body wire harness by a keyed and latching yellow molded plastic connector insulator to ensure a secure connection. The seat belt tensioners cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire front seat belt and retractor unit must be replaced. If the front airbags have been deployed, the seat belt tensioners have also been deployed. The seat belt tensioners are not intended for reuse and must be replaced following any front airbag deployment. A growling or grinding sound while attempting to operate the seat belt retractor is a sure indication that the seat belt tensioner has been deployed and requires replacement. See: Seat Belt Retractor/Service and Repair/Seat Belt and Retractor Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7329 Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat belt tensioners are deployed in conjunction with the dual front airbags by a signal generated by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) through the driver or passenger seat belt tensioner line 1 and line 2 (or squib) circuits. When the ORC sends the proper electrical signal to the tensioners, the electrical energy generates enough heat to initiate a small pyrotechnic gas generator. The gas generator is installed in one end of a steel tube that contains numerous steel balls. As the gas expands, it pushes the steel balls through the tube into a cast metal housing, where a ball guide directs the balls into engagement with the teeth of a sprocket that is geared to one end of the retractor spool. As the balls drive past the sprocket, the sprocket turns and drives the seat belt retractor spool causing the slack to be removed from the front seat belts. The ball trap captures the balls as they leave the sprocket and are expelled from the housing. Removing excess slack from the front seat belts not only keeps the occupants properly positioned for an airbag deployment following a frontal impact of the vehicle, but also helps to reduce injuries that the occupant might experience in these situations as a result of harmful contact with the steering wheel, steering column, instrument panel or windshield. Also, the seat belt tensioner torsion bar that the retractor spool rides upon is designed to deform in order to control the loading being applied to the occupants by the seat belts during a frontal impact, further reducing the potential for occupant injuries. The ORC monitors the condition of the seat belt tensioners through circuit resistance, and will illuminate the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) and store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected. Proper diagnosis of the seat belt tensioner gas generator and the seat belt tensioner squib circuits requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 279 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 2 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7333 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7334 Seat Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 279 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 2 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7335 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 266 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 7 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7341 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7342 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 267 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7343 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7344 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 280 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 2 R13 20LG/VT LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7345 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7346 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7347 Impact Sensor: Locations Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 281 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 2 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7348 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7349 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Left Component ID: 266 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-LEFT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R81 20LB/WT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R79 20LB/VT LEFT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 7 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7352 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7353 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Front Impact-Right Component ID: 267 Component : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Connector: Name : SENSOR-FRONT IMPACT-RIGHT Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R82 20WT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR GROUND 2 R80 20VT/LB RIGHT FRONT IMPACT SENSOR SIGNAL Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7354 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7355 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Left 1 Component ID: 280 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-LEFT 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R15 20LG/BR LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 2 R13 20LG/VT LEFT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7356 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7357 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7358 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Sensor-Side Impact-Right 1 Component ID: 281 Component : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Connector: Name : SENSOR-SIDE IMPACT-RIGHT 1 Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R16 20BR/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 GROUND 2 R14 20TN/LG RIGHT SIDE IMPACT SENSOR 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7359 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Sensor-Front Impact-Left > Page 7360 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Description Front FRONT Two front impact sensors (1) are used on this vehicle, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each front sensor is secured with two screws to the backs of the right and left vertical members of the radiator support within the engine compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (2), an integral anti-rotation pin (3), and two integral mounting holes (4) with metal sleeves to provide crush protection. The right and left front impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A label on the sensor is imprinted with an arrow, which should always be pointed forward in the vehicle. A cavity in the center of the molded plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity and a stamped cover (5) is crimped over the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The front impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Side SIDE Two side impact sensors (2) are used on this vehicle when it is equipped with the optional side curtain airbags, one each for the left and right sides of the vehicle. These sensors are mounted remotely from the impact sensor that is internal to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Each side sensor is secured with two screws to the floor panel beneath the outboard seat adjuster riser within the passenger compartment. The sensor housing has an integral connector receptacle (3), an integral anti-rotation pin (4), and two integral mounting holes (1) with metal sleeves to provide crush protection. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7363 The right and left side impact sensors are identical in construction and calibration. A cavity in the center of the molded plastic impact sensor housing contains the electronic circuitry of the sensor which includes an electronic communication chip and an electronic impact sensor. Potting material fills the cavity and a stamped cover (5) is crimped over the cavity to seal and protect the internal electronic circuitry and components. The side impact sensors are each connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The impact sensors cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if damaged or ineffective, they must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7364 Impact Sensor: Description and Operation Operation Front FRONT The front impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through dedicated left and right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the front impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to front impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Side SIDE The side impact sensors are electronic accelerometers that sense the rate of vehicle deceleration, which provides verification of the direction and severity of an impact. Each sensor also contains an electronic communication chip that allows the unit to communicate the sensor status as well as sensor fault information to the microprocessor in the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). The ORC microprocessor continuously monitors all of the side passive restraint system electrical circuits to determine the system readiness. If the ORC detects a monitored system fault, it sets a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and controls the airbag indicator operation accordingly. The impact sensors each receive battery current and ground through left or right sensor plus and minus circuits from the ORC. The impact sensors and the ORC communicate by modulating the voltage in the sensor plus circuit. The hard wired circuits between the side impact sensors and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the impact sensors or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the supplemental restraint system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the impact sensors or the electronic controls and communication related to side impact sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Removal Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the right or left front impact sensor (1) to the back of the right or left radiator support vertical member (4). 3. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (3) from the sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the right or left front impact sensor from the engine compartment. Side SIDE WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side supplemental restraint deployment. NOTE: Side impact sensors are used only on vehicles equipped with the optional side curtain airbags. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7367 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the scuff plate trim from the right or left front door opening sill (5). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate - Removal. 3. Lift the floor carpet upward from the sill far enough to access the side impact sensor on the floor panel (4) below the right or left outboard front seat adjuster riser. 4. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the side impact sensor (3) to the floor panel. 5. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (1) from the sensor connector receptacle. 6. Remove the sensor from the floor panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7368 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Installation Front FRONT WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the front impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The front impact sensor enables the system to deploy the front supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper front supplemental restraint deployment. 1. Position the right or left front impact sensor (1) into the engine compartment. 2. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (3) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Carefully position the sensor onto the back of the right or left radiator support vertical member (4). Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the center clearance hole of the radiator support and the arrow on the sensor label is pointed forward in the vehicle. 4. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the sensor to the back of the support vertical member. Tighten the screws to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 5. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Side SIDE WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury, never strike or drop the side impact sensor, as it can damage the impact sensor or affect its calibration. The side impact sensor enables the system to deploy the side curtain supplemental restraints. If an impact sensor is accidentally dropped during service, the sensor must be scrapped and replaced with a new unit. Failure to observe this warning could result in accidental, incomplete, or improper side supplemental restraint deployment. NOTE: Side impact sensors are used only on vehicles equipped with the optional side curtain airbags. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7369 1. Position the side impact sensor (3) near the floor panel (4) below the right or left outboard front seat adjuster riser. 2. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (1) to the sensor connector receptacle. 3. Carefully position the sensor onto the floor panel. Be certain that the anti-rotation pin on the back of the sensor is engaged in the center clearance hole of the floor panel and the arrow on the sensor label is pointed toward the outboard side of the vehicle. 4. Install and tighten the two screws (2) that secure the sensor to the inner B-pillar. Tighten the screw to 8 Nm (75 in. lbs.). 5. Restore the floor carpet over the side impact sensor on the floor panel to the right or left front door opening sill (5). 6. Reinstall the scuff plate trim onto the right or left front door opening sill. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate - Installation. 7. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Component ID: 313 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z949 20BK GROUND 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7373 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7374 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 313 Component : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT BELT-DRIVER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z949 20BK GROUND 2 R57 20LG/GY DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7375 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat belt switch is a small, normally open, single pole, single throw, leaf contact, momentary switch. Only one seat belt switch is installed in the vehicle, and it is integral to the buckle of the driver side front seat belt buckle-half (3), located on the inboard side of the driver side front seat cushion frame. The seat belt switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a two-wire pigtail wire (2) and connector on the seat belt buckle-half, which is connected to a wire harness connector and take out of the seat wire harness routed beneath the driver side front seat cushion in the passenger compartment. The seat belt switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire driver side front seat belt buckle-half unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7378 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat belt switch is designed to control a path to ground for the seat belt switch sense input of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). When the driver side front seat belt tip-half is inserted into the seat belt buckle, the switch closes the path to ground; and, when the driver side front seat belt tip-half is removed from the seat belt buckle, the switch opens the ground path. The switch is actuated by the latch mechanism within the seat belt buckle. The seat belt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt switch sense input of the instrument cluster. The seat belt switch receives ground at all times through its pigtail wire connection to the seat wire harness from a take out of the body wire harness. An eyelet terminal connector on the body wire harness ground take out is secured beneath a ground screw on the left cowl side inner panel, beneath the instrument panel. The seat belt switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7379 Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Testing and Inspection SEAT BELT SWITCH Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the seat belt switch pigtail wire connector from the seat wire harness connector for the seat belt switch beneath the driver side front seat cushion forward of the seat belt buckle-half anchor. Check for continuity between the seat belt switch sense circuit and the ground circuit cavities of the seat belt switch pigtail wire connector. There should be continuity with the seat belt buckled, and no continuity with the seat belt unbuckled. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective front seat belt buckle-half assembly. 2. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity in the seat wire harness connector for the seat belt switch and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit to ground (G301) as required. 3. Remove the instrument cluster from the instrument panel. Check for continuity between the seat belt switch sense circuit cavity of the seat wire harness connector for the seat belt switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, repair the shorted seat belt switch sense circuit between the seat belt switch and the instrument cluster as required. 4. Check for continuity between the seat belt switch sense circuit cavities of the seat wire harness connector for the seat belt switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If OK, test and replace the ineffective instrument cluster as required. Refer to appropriate testing. If not OK, repair the open seat belt switch sense circuit between the seat belt switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Position Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The seat track position sensor (1) is a Hall Effect-type sensor. This sensor consists of a Hall Effect Integrated Circuit (IC) chip encased in potting material within a cavity of the molded plastic sensor housing. The sensor housing has two integral snap features (3) and snaps into a stamped metal bracket located on the inboard side of one of the seat adjuster tracks on the front seat of vehicles so equipped. A molded connector receptacle (2) integral to the sensor housing is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector and take out of the seat wire harness beneath the front seat cushion frame. The seat track position sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire sensor must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7384 Seat Position Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seat track position sensor is designed to provide a seat position data input to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) indicating whether the driver side front seat is in a full forward or a not full forward position. The ORC uses this data as an additional logic input for use in determining the appropriate deployment force to be used when deploying the multistage driver side front airbag. The seat track position sensor receives a nominal five volt supply from the ORC. The sensor communicates the seat position by modulating the voltage returned to the ORC on a sensor data circuit. The ORC also monitors the condition of the sensor circuits and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that is detected. The ORC then sends messages over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to control the illumination of the airbag indicator in the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The hard wired circuits between the seat track position sensor and the ORC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the seat track position sensor or the electronic controls and communication between other modules and devices that provide features of the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the seat track position sensor or the electronic controls and communication related to seat track position sensor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Reach under the front seat cushion to access the seat track position sensor (4) in a bracket (1) located on the inboard side of either the inner or outer, driver or passenger seat track (5). 3. Disconnect the seat wire harness connector (3) from the sensor connector receptacle located on the end of the sensor. 4. Using a small screwdriver, depress the snap feature (2) and pull the connector end of the sensor out of the bracket. 5. Remove the sensor from under the front seat. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7387 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the front seat cushion to position the seat track position sensor (4) to the open end of the bracket (1) located on the inboard side of either the inner or outer, driver or passenger seat track (5). 2. Push the sensor firmly into the bracket until the snap feature (2) locks into place. 3. Reconnect the seat wire harness connector (3) to the sensor connector receptacle located on the end of the sensor. Be certain that the latch on the connector is fully engaged. 4. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) verification test procedure should be performed following service of any SRS component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Seat Sensor/Switch: Locations Component ID: 279 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 2 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7391 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7392 Seat Sensor/Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 279 Component : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Connector: Name : SENSOR-SEAT TRACK POSITION-DRIVER Color : DK. GRAY # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 R261 20LB/WT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR DATA 2 R263 20LB/VT DRIVER SEAT POSITION SENSOR VOLTAGE Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7393 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Description and Operation Keyless Start Antenna: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). The control module (3) is located under the instrument panel cover (2). The module electrical connector plugs into the WCM/SKREEM at the right side of the steering column. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 3. Remove steering column shrouds. 4. Remove left instrument panel (IP) end cap. 5. Remove IP cluster bezel. 6. Remove IP cluster and its three connectors. 7. Remove left A-pillar trim. 8. Unclip upper IP bezel (defroster). 9. Remove two module mounting screws (4) from module (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7401 10. Disconnect coax cable retainers (3) and (4) from IP. 11. Remove two WCM/SKREEM mounting screws at steering column (1). 12. Remove WCM/SKREEM from steering column (1). 13. Disconnect coax cable electrical connector (2) at WCM/SKREEM. 14. Remove module (2) from top of instrument panel while fishing coax cable (1) through openings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7402 Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). 1. Fish coax cable (1) through openings on top of instrument panel. Position module (2) to top of instrument panel. 2. Install two module mounting screws (4) to module (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7403 3. Connect coax cable retainers (3) and (4) to instrument panel. 4. Connect coax cable electrical connector (2) to WCM/SKREEM. 5. Install WCM/SKREEM to steering column (1). 6. Clip upper instrument panel (IP) bezel (defroster). 7. Install left A-pillar trim. 8. Install IP cluster and its three connectors. 9. Install IP cluster bezel. 10. Install left IP end cap. 11. Install steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 12. Install steering column shrouds. 13. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the right cowl side trim panel. 3. Reach under the instrument panel outboard of the glove box to access and disconnect the antenna coaxial cable connector. Disconnect the connector by pulling it apart while twisting the metal connector halves. Do not pull on the cable. 4. Disengage the instrument panel antenna cable from the retainer clips on the glove box opening and instrument panel support. 5. Remove the radio (1) See: Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal. CAUTION: Pulling the antenna cable straight out of the radio without pulling on the locking antenna connector could damage the cable or radio. 6. Disconnect the antenna cable by pulling the locking antenna connector (2) away from the radio. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7409 7. Pull the antenna cable out through the radio opening in the instrument panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7410 Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Insert cable through radio opening. Route behind glove box and attach to retainers. 2. Connect antenna cable (2) to radio (1). 3. Install the radio. 4. Reach under the instrument panel outboard of the glove box to access and connect the antenna coaxial cable connector. 5. Install right cowl side trim panel. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Alarm System Transponder: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Each ignition key (2) used in the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) has a transponder chip included on the circuit board (4) beneath the cover (1) of the integral Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter (3). In addition to having to be cut to match the mechanical coding of the ignition lock cylinder and programmed for operation of the RKE system, each new Sentry Key has a unique transponder identification code that is permanently programmed into it by the manufacturer, and which must be programmed into the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) to be recognized by the SKIS as a valid key. The Sentry Key transponder cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire key and RKE transmitter unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7416 Alarm System Transponder: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) communicates through its antenna with the Sentry Key transponder using a Radio Frequency (RF) signal. The SKREEM then listens for a RF response from the transponder through the same antenna. The Sentry Key transponder chip is within the range of the SKREEM transceiver antenna ring when it is inserted into the ignition lock cylinder. The SKREEM determines whether a valid key is present in the ignition lock cylinder based upon the response from the transponder. If a valid key is detected, that fact is communicated by the SKREEM to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and the PCM allows the engine to continue running. If the PCM receives an invalid key message, or receives no message from the SKREEM over the CAN data bus, the engine will be disabled after about two seconds of operation. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) will also respond to the invalid key message on the CAN data bus by flashing the security indicator ON and OFF. Each Sentry Key has a unique transponder identification code permanently programmed into it by the manufacturer. Likewise, the SKREEM has a unique Secret Key code programmed into it by the manufacturer. When a Sentry Key is programmed into the memory of the SKREEM, the SKREEM stores the transponder identification code from the Sentry Key, and the Sentry Key learns the Secret Key code from the SKREEM. Once the Sentry Key learns the Secret Key code of the SKREEM, it is permanently stored in the memory of the transponder. Therefore, once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a particular vehicle, it cannot be used on any other vehicle. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store key-related fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a Sentry Key transponder problem is detected. The Sentry Key transponder chip can be diagnosed, and any stored DTC can be retrieved using a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID: 302 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z384 20BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7420 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7421 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID: 302 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z384 20BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7422 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic market vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the left side of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel below the left rear corner of the inner hood panel reinforcement. The underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7425 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export market vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic market vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kOhm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the FCM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the FCM. The FCM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export market vehicle theft or domestic market remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch - Removal Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the left outboard end of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel, squeeze the two hood ajar switch latch tabs (2) together and pull the switch upward out of the mounting hole (1). 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the mounting hole far enough to access and disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the switch connector receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch - Removal > Page 7428 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the hood ajar switch (2) near the mounting hole (1) in the left outboard end of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the switch connector receptacle. 3. Insert the switch into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description - PCM Output > Page 7433 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7436 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 162 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 18VT/BR IGNITION RUN/START SWITCH SENSE 2-3 F20 20PK/GY IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 8-Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7441 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7442 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7443 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 162 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 18VT/BR IGNITION RUN/START SWITCH SENSE 2-3 F20 20PK/GY IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 8-Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7444 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7445 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and is also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Several unique SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS, and another version has an additional coaxial connector receptacle that allows it to receive inputs from the optional remote start antenna module. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7448 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver and may receive RF inputs either directly through an internal antenna from the RKE key fob transmitter or, on vehicles equipped with an optional remote start system, indirectly through the external remote start antenna module. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Description and Operation/Description. The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM using the diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM over the CAN data bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM. The PCM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM is an invalid key ; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends electronic security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or if the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 7451 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, disconnect the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. 10. Remove the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column housing. 11. Disengage the antenna ring (3) from around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4) and remove the SKREEM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 7452 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column with the antenna ring (3) oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4). 2. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, reconnect the coaxial cable to the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 7453 5. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 6. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 8. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 9. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), if the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated.See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Description and Operation Keyless Start Antenna: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). The control module (3) is located under the instrument panel cover (2). The module electrical connector plugs into the WCM/SKREEM at the right side of the steering column. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 3. Remove steering column shrouds. 4. Remove left instrument panel (IP) end cap. 5. Remove IP cluster bezel. 6. Remove IP cluster and its three connectors. 7. Remove left A-pillar trim. 8. Unclip upper IP bezel (defroster). 9. Remove two module mounting screws (4) from module (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7460 10. Disconnect coax cable retainers (3) and (4) from IP. 11. Remove two WCM/SKREEM mounting screws at steering column (1). 12. Remove WCM/SKREEM from steering column (1). 13. Disconnect coax cable electrical connector (2) at WCM/SKREEM. 14. Remove module (2) from top of instrument panel while fishing coax cable (1) through openings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7461 Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). 1. Fish coax cable (1) through openings on top of instrument panel. Position module (2) to top of instrument panel. 2. Install two module mounting screws (4) to module (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7462 3. Connect coax cable retainers (3) and (4) to instrument panel. 4. Connect coax cable electrical connector (2) to WCM/SKREEM. 5. Install WCM/SKREEM to steering column (1). 6. Clip upper instrument panel (IP) bezel (defroster). 7. Install left A-pillar trim. 8. Install IP cluster and its three connectors. 9. Install IP cluster bezel. 10. Install left IP end cap. 11. Install steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 12. Install steering column shrouds. 13. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER BATTERIES The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter case snaps open and shut for battery access. To replace the RKE transmitter batteries: 1. Using a trim stick or a thin coin, gently pry at the notch in the center seam of the RKE transmitter case halves until the two halves unsnap. 2. Lift the back half of the transmitter case off of the RKE transmitter. 3. Remove the two batteries from the RKE transmitter. 4. Replace the battery with a new CR2032. Be certain that the battery is installed with the polarity correctly oriented. 5. Align the two RKE transmitter case halves with each other, and squeeze them firmly and evenly together using hand pressure until they snap back into place. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Security Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Security Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A security indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS), this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The security indicator consists of a small round cutout in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The security indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Security Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7471 Security Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The security indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Vehicle Theft Security System (VTSS) is arming or is armed. On vehicles equipped with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), the security indicator also gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the SKIS. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming, hard wired inputs to the cluster from the various security system components, and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The security indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. Depending upon the programmed condition the indicator can be illuminated solid, flashed at a slow rate (0.5 Hertz, 12.5 percent duty cycle), or flashed at a fast rate (1 Hertz, 50 percent duty cycle). The instrument cluster will turn ON the security indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the security indicator illuminates for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the SKREEM. VTSS Indication - During the 16 second VTSS arming function, the cluster will flash the security indicator ON and OFF repeatedly at a steady, fast rate to indicate that the VTSS is in the process of arming. Following successful VTSS arming, the cluster flashes the security indicator ON and OFF continuously at a slower rate to indicate that the VTSS is armed. The security indicator continues flashing at the slower rate until the VTSS is disarmed or triggered. If the VTSS has alarmed and rearmed, the cluster will flash the security indicator at a steady, slow rate for about 30 seconds after the VTSS is disarmed. - SKIS Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic SKIS indicator lamp-ON message from the SKREEM, the security indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated solid or continues to flash until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the SKREEM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. For more information on the SKIS and the security indicator control parameters, See: Description and Operation/Vehicle Theft Security - Operation. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the SKREEM for 10 consecutive message cycles, the security indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message is received from the SKREEM. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the security indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the security indicator whenever the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the VTSS is arming, armed, or alarming. Whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions, the SKREEM performs a self-test to decide whether the SKIS is in good operating condition and whether a valid key is present in the ignition lock cylinder. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the cluster flashes the security indicator upon ignition ON, or turns ON the security indicator solid after the bulb test, it indicates that a SKIS malfunction has occurred or that the SKIS is ineffective. For proper diagnosis of the VTSS, the SKIS, the SKREEM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to security indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cellular Phone: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION TELECOMMUNICATIONS The hands-free cellular system uses Bluetooth(TM) technology to provide wireless communication between the operator's compatible cellular telephone and the vehicle's on-board receiver that is integral to the radio. The system uses voice recognition technology to control operation. The incoming voice is broadcast through the vehicle's radio speakers, automatically overriding any other audio signals on the front speakers when the hands-free system is in use. A microphone in the rear view mirror picks up vehicle occupant's voices. If a call is in progress when the ignition is switched off, the hands-free system will continue to operate for up to 45 seconds as part of the Accessory Relay Delay function. Thereafter, the call can continue on the hand-held telephone. The system will communicate with a telephone that is anywhere within the vehicle. However, covering the hand held phone or the hands-free phone module with a metal object may block the signal. The system will recognize up to seven telephones, each of which is given a spoken identification by the user during the setup process. The system includes Spanish and French voice recognition in addition to English. Two buttons on the radio, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A "phone" button turns the system on and off; a "voice recognition" (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice command. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7476 Cellular Phone: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION TELECOMMUNICATION Two buttons on the radio, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A "phone" button turns the system on and off; a "voice recognition" (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice command. The system includes the following features: - Phonebook - Stores telephone numbers for later recall by name or other verbal identification, called a voice tag, and memory location. - Four memory locations - Home, Work, Cellular and Pager. A maximum of 32 unique names or voice tags may be stored at the same time, with a different number in each of the four memory locations. - Voice tag dialing - Dials the number associated with a voice tag and memory location. - Digit dialing - Dials the telephone number by recognizing the names of the digits as they are spoken. - Receiving calls - A voice prompt notifies the user of an incoming call. A voice response accepts or rejects the call without manual intervention. - Privacy Mode - Switches the call to the handheld telephone and the hands-free system and back again using the "voice recognition" (or "voice command") button and a voice command, if desired. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7477 Cellular Phone: Testing and Inspection TELECOMMUNICATION Any diagnosis of the Telecommunication system should begin with the use of scan tool. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: On vehicles equipped with airbags, refer to Restraint Systems before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7478 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7479 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7484 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7485 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7486 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7487 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7488 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts reference the figure numbers of the illustrations. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7489 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7490 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7491 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7492 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in Connector Replacement. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure)See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing. 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7493 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7494 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7495 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7496 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7497 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7498 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7499 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7500 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Connector Views Component ID: 156 Component : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Connector: Name : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 5 Z993 18BK GROUND 6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7501 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-49-02 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7502 8w-49-03 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Entertainment System - Disabling Front Seat Video Source DVD Player: Technical Service Bulletins Entertainment System - Disabling Front Seat Video Source NUMBER: 08-004-10 GROUP: Electrical DATE: March 2, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES SERVICE BULLETIN 08-002-2007 DATED FEBRUARY 6, 2007. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Radio Video Disable Update MODELS: 2010 (D1) Ram Truck (3500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500) 2008 - 2009 (HB) Durango 2008-2009 (HG) Aspen 2008-2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JK) Wrangler 2007 - 2010 (JS) Sebring/Avenger/Sebring Convertible 2007-2010 (KA) Nitro 2008-2010 (KK) Liberty 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2008 - 2010 (LX) 300/ 300C, Charger 2009-2010 (MK) Patriot 2008-2010 (ND) Dakota 2008-2010 (PM) Caliber 2008 - 2010 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2008 - 2010 (XK) Commander NOTE: This bulletin applies to vehicles equipped with a Hard Drive Radio (sales code REN, RER, REU, RBZ, RHR). NOTE: Refer to Warranty Bulletin D-07-04 for additional information and a listing of affected states. DISCUSSION: Due to certain state regulations, a function for disabling the front seat video option has been incorporated into the vehicle. This function will enable or disable the radio's ability to play video in the front seat. If enabled, the radio will play video when the vehicle is in Park (Automatic Transmission) or when the parking brake is set and vehicle speed is zero (Manual Transmission). If disabled the radio will NOT play video in the front seat in any operating mode. If it becomes necessary to disable the front seat video option, use the following procedure. NOTE: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > DVD Player > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Entertainment System - Disabling Front Seat Video Source > Page 7508 Using the wiTECH Diagnostic Application for flashing an ECU is made available through the wiTECH Diagnostic Application. For instructions select the "HELP" tab on upper portion of the wiTECH window, then "HELP CONTENTS." This will open the Welcome to wiTECH Help screen were help topics can now selected. 1. Connect the wiTech 2. From the Home Screen select Radio 3. Select "Misc. Functions" 4. Select "Enable/Disable Front Seat Video" 5. Select "Enable" or "Disable" as required by your state laws. 6. Select finish to exit. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) is sometimes referred to as the Electronic Overhead Modules (EOM) for the purposes of scan tool and diagnostic information naming. Please treat the CMTC and EOM as one and the same when diagnosing the vehicle. The HomeLink(R) transceiver is integral to the CMTC module. The only visible component of the HomeLink(R) transceiver are the three push buttons (3). The buttons are marked with one, two or three dots, respectively, for identification of each channel. Each of the three HomeLink(R) transceiver push buttons controls an independent radio transmitter channel. Each of these three channels can be trained to transmit a different radio frequency signal for the remote operation of garage door openers, motorized gate openers, home or office lighting, security systems or just about any other device that can be equipped with a radio receiver in the 286 to 399 MegaHertz (MHz) frequency range for remote operation. The HomeLink(R) transceiver is capable of operating systems using either rolling code or non-rolling code technology. The HomeLink(R) transceiver cannot be repaired, and is available for service only as part of the CMTC module. This unit includes the push button switches for both the HomeLink(R) transceiver and CMTC, The Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) and the plastic module case. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7513 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The HomeLink(R) transceiver receives battery feed through the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse circuit of the vehicle. It operates on a non-switched source of battery current so the unit will remain functional, regardless of the ignition switch position. It can learn and store three separate transmitter radio frequency codes to operate garage door openers, security gates and security lighting. The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) display provides visual feedback to the driver, showing which HomeLink(R) transmitter button is pressed. The system will not send operating signals if the vehicle theft security alarm is armed. This prevents a perpetrator from breaking into a vehicle parked outside a home and using the HomeLink(R) transmitter system to enter the home. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Component Tests and General Diagnostics HOMELINK(R) TRANSMITTER If both the HomeLink(R) Transmitter and the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) display are inoperative, See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Testing and Inspection for further diagnosis. If the HomeLink(R) Transmitter is inoperative, but the CMTC display is operating normally, See: Programming and Relearning for instructions on training the HomeLink(R) Transmitter. Retrain the HomeLink(R) Transmitter with a known good hand held transmitter as instructed and test the HomeLink(R) Transmitter operation again. If the unit is still inoperative, test the HomeLink(R) transmitter with the Radio Frequency Detector special tool 9001 or equivalent as described below: 1. Turn the Radio Frequency (RF) Detector ON. A "chirp" will sound and the green power LED will light. If the green LED does not light, replace the battery. 2. Hold the RF detector within one inch of the TRAINED HomeLink(R) transmitter and press any of the transmitters buttons. 3. The red signal detection LEDs will light and the tool will beep if a radio signal is detected. Repeat this test for each button. If any button is inoperative, replace the HomeLink(R) transmitter assembly, See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Compass/Mini-Trip Computer - Removal. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 7516 Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Programming and Relearning Erasing Homelink(R) Transmitter Codes ERASING HOMELINK(R) TRANSMITTER CODES NOTE: Individual channels cannot be erased. Erasing the HomeLink(R) transmitter codes will erase ALL programmed codes. To erase programming from the three buttons (individual buttons cannot be erased but can be "reprogrammed"), follow the step noted: - Press and hold the two outer HomeLink(R) buttons until the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds. HomeLink(R) is now in the train (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with "Programming" See: Programming Homelink(R) Transceiver Codes Programming Homelink(R) Transceiver Codes PROGRAMMING HOMELINK(R) TRANSCEIVER CODES Programming Common HomeLink(R) Transmitter Codes WARNING: Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle's exhaust while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. WARNING: Your motorized door or gate may open and close while you are training the HomeLink(R) Transceiver if the vehicle is in range of the motorized device. Do not train the HomeLink(R) transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects. NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside the garage. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink(R) for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. NOTE: If programing the HomeLink(R) transceiver is unsuccessful using the following procedure, refer to the Owner's Manual for the current customer assistance phone number. - Press and hold the two outer HomeLink(R) buttons, and release only when the indicator light begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat step one to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink(R) buttons. - Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 3-8 cm (1-3 inches) away from the HomeLink(R) buttons while keeping the indicator light in view. - Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink(R) buttons that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter button. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Programming Step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section. - The HomeLink(R) indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink(R) successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from the slow to the rapid flash. - Press and hold the just trained HomeLink(R) button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink(R) button is pressed and released. NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink(R) buttons, begin with "Programming" step 2. Do not repeat step 1. If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with "Programming" steps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener). - At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. - Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 8. - Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink(R) button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming. HomeLink(R) should now activate your rolling code equipped device. NOTE: To program the remaining two HomeLink(R) buttons, begin with "Programming" step 2. Do not repeat step 1. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 7517 Canadian Programming/Gate Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink(R) to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the "Programming" procedures (regardless of where you live), replace "Programming HomeLink(R)" step 3 with the following: NOTE: When programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device or move the vehicle out of range during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating. - 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink(R) button while you press and release every two seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted by HomeLink(R). (The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) Proceed with "Programming" step 4 to complete. Reprogramming Homelink(R) Transmitter Codes REPROGRAMMING HOMELINK(R) TRANSMITTER CODES Reprogramming Basic HomeLink(R) Transmitter Codes WARNING: Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run the vehicle's exhaust while training the HomeLink(R) transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. WARNING: Your motorized door or gate may open and close while you are training the HomeLink(R) Transceiver if the vehicle is in range of the motorized device. Do not train the HomeLink(R) transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can cause serious injury or death to people and pets or damage to objects. NOTE: If programing the HomeLink(R) transceiver is unsuccessful using the following procedure, refer to the Owner's Manual for the current customer assistance phone number. To program a device to the HomeLink(R) transceiver using a button previously trained, follow these steps: - Press and hold the desired HomeLink(R) transceiver button. DO NOT release the button. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink(R) transceiver button, proceed to step 2. - Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 3-8 cm (1-3 inches) away from the HomeLink(R) transceiver button while keeping the indicator light in view. - Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink(R) transceiver button that you want to train and the hand-held transmitter buttons. Do not release the buttons until step 4 has been completed. NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace this Reprogramming Step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate Operator/Canadian Programming" section. - The HomeLink(R) transceiver indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after it successfully receives the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from the slow to the rapid flash. - Press and hold the just trained HomeLink(R) transceiver button and observe the indicator light. If the indicator light stays on constantly, reprogramming is complete and your device should activate when the button is pressed and released. NOTE: If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with "Reprogramming" steps 6-8 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener). - At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit. - Firmly press and release the "learn" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.) NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step 8. - Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and release the reprogrammed HomeLink(R) transceiver button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the reprogramming. The HomeLink(R) transceiver should now activate your rolling code equipped device. Canadian Programming/Gate Programming Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Component Tests and General Diagnostics > Page 7518 Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to "time-out" (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink(R) to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to "time-out" in the same manner. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator by using the "Programming" procedures (regardless of where you live), replace "Programming HomeLink(R)" step 3 with the following: NOTE: When programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the device or move the vehicle out of range during the "cycling" process to prevent possible overheating. - 3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink(R) button while you press and release every two seconds ("cycle") your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has successfully been accepted by HomeLink(R). (The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly.) Proceed with "Programming" step 4 to complete. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Navigation System: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION TELECOMMUNICATIONS The hands-free cellular system uses Bluetooth(TM) technology to provide wireless communication between the operator's compatible cellular telephone and the vehicle's on-board receiver that is integral to the radio. The system uses voice recognition technology to control operation. The incoming voice is broadcast through the vehicle's radio speakers, automatically overriding any other audio signals on the front speakers when the hands-free system is in use. A microphone in the rear view mirror picks up vehicle occupant's voices. If a call is in progress when the ignition is switched off, the hands-free system will continue to operate for up to 45 seconds as part of the Accessory Relay Delay function. Thereafter, the call can continue on the hand-held telephone. The system will communicate with a telephone that is anywhere within the vehicle. However, covering the hand held phone or the hands-free phone module with a metal object may block the signal. The system will recognize up to seven telephones, each of which is given a spoken identification by the user during the setup process. The system includes Spanish and French voice recognition in addition to English. Two buttons on the radio, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A "phone" button turns the system on and off; a "voice recognition" (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice command. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7523 Navigation System: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION TELECOMMUNICATION Two buttons on the radio, identified with ISO icons, control the system: A "phone" button turns the system on and off; a "voice recognition" (or voice command) button prompts the hands-free system to listen for a voice command. The system includes the following features: - Phonebook - Stores telephone numbers for later recall by name or other verbal identification, called a voice tag, and memory location. - Four memory locations - Home, Work, Cellular and Pager. A maximum of 32 unique names or voice tags may be stored at the same time, with a different number in each of the four memory locations. - Voice tag dialing - Dials the number associated with a voice tag and memory location. - Digit dialing - Dials the telephone number by recognizing the names of the digits as they are spoken. - Receiving calls - A voice prompt notifies the user of an incoming call. A voice response accepts or rejects the call without manual intervention. - Privacy Mode - Switches the call to the handheld telephone and the hands-free system and back again using the "voice recognition" (or "voice command") button and a voice command, if desired. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Amplifier-Radio Amplifier: Locations Amplifier-Radio Component ID: 10 Component : AMPLIFIER-RADIO Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-RADIO C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 X201 16GY/VT AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (+) 2 X202 16DG/VT AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (+) 3 X205 18GY/LG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+) 4 X206 20DG/LG AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+) 5 X209 16GY/OR AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) 6 X208 20GY/DG AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) 7 X291 16GY/YL AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (-) 8 X292 16DG/YL AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (-) 9 X295 18GY/DG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-) 10 - 11 - 12 X296 20LG/GY AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-) 13 X299 16GY/YL AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) 14 X298 20GY/LG AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 21 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7529 Component Location - 24 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7530 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7531 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7532 Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-RADIO C2 Color : WHITE # of pins : 20 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 X300 18GY/BR AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) 2 X301 18GY/WT AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (+) 3-4 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7533 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 X51 18DG/DB RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (+) 8 X52 18GY/DB RADIO RIGHT REAR AUDIO (+) 9 Z513 16BK GROUND 10 X390 18DG/BR AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) 11 X391 18DG/WT AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (-) 12 - 13 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 - 16 - - 17 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 18 X57 18DG/OR RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (-) 19 X58 18GY/OR RADIO RIGHT REAR AUDIO (-) 20 Z980 16BK GROUND Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7534 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7535 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7536 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7537 Amplifier: Locations Amplifier-Subwoofer Component ID: 11 Component : AMPLIFIER-SUBWOOFER Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-SUBWOOFER Color : # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 X300 18GY/BR AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) 2 X301 18GY/WT AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (+) 3 Z963 16BK GROUND 4 Z962 16BK GROUND 5 Z963 16BK GROUND 6 X390 18DG/BR AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) 7 X391 18DG/WT AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (-) 8910 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 12 F30 16PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7538 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Locations > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7539 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Amplifier-Radio Amplifier: Diagrams Amplifier-Radio Component ID: 10 Component : AMPLIFIER-RADIO Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-RADIO C1 Color : WHITE # of pins : 14 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 X201 16GY/VT AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (+) 2 X202 16DG/VT AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (+) 3 X205 18GY/LG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+) 4 X206 20DG/LG AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+) 5 X209 16GY/OR AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) 6 X208 20GY/DG AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) 7 X291 16GY/YL AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (-) 8 X292 16DG/YL AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (-) 9 X295 18GY/DG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-) 10 - 11 - 12 X296 20LG/GY AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-) 13 X299 16GY/YL AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) 14 X298 20GY/LG AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 21 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7542 Component Location - 24 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7543 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7544 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7545 Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-RADIO C2 Color : WHITE # of pins : 20 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Pin Circuit Description 1 X300 18GY/BR AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) 2 X301 18GY/WT AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (+) 3-4 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 5-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7546 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS (+) 7 X51 18DG/DB RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (+) 8 X52 18GY/DB RADIO RIGHT REAR AUDIO (+) 9 Z513 16BK GROUND 10 X390 18DG/BR AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) 11 X391 18DG/WT AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (-) 12 - 13 A116 16YL/RD FUSED B(+) 14 - 15 - 16 - - 17 D54 20WT CAN B BUS (-) 18 X57 18DG/OR RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (-) 19 X58 18GY/OR RADIO RIGHT REAR AUDIO (-) 20 Z980 16BK GROUND Component Location - 21 Component Location - 24 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7547 Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7548 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7549 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7550 Amplifier: Diagrams Amplifier-Subwoofer Component ID: 11 Component : AMPLIFIER-SUBWOOFER Connector: Name : AMPLIFIER-SUBWOOFER Color : # of pins : 12 Pin Circuit Description 1 X300 18GY/BR AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (+) 2 X301 18GY/WT AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (+) 3 Z963 16BK GROUND 4 Z962 16BK GROUND 5 Z963 16BK GROUND 6 X390 18DG/BR AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 1 (-) 7 X391 18DG/WT AMPLIFIED SUBWOOFER 2 (-) 8910 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 11 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 12 F30 16PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7551 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Amplifier-Radio > Page 7552 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Amplifier: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The amplifier is a six channel unit rated at 288 watts. The amplifier is mounted to the cowl side panel under the passenger side of the instrument panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7555 Amplifier: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The amplifier receives fused battery current from a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) at all times. The internal circuitry of the amplifier switches the amplifier on based upon a CAN bus message that is received from the radio receiver whenever the radio is turned on. The amplifier receives the sound signal inputs from the left and right rear outputs of the radio, then sends the amplified speaker outputs for each of those channels to the speakers. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Amplifier - Removal Amplifier: Service and Repair Radio Amplifier - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the right cowl side trim panel. 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors. 4. Remove mounting fasteners and amplifier. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radio Amplifier - Removal > Page 7558 Amplifier: Service and Repair Radio Amplifier - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place amplifier into position 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Connect wire harness connectors to amplifier. 4. Install right cowl side trim panel. 5. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Receiver > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Radio Receiver: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The satellite receiver module on the club cab is located below the left rear passenger seat. It is mounted to the underside of the seat support with three mounting fasteners. The satellite receiver module on the quad cab is located in the left rear corner of the cab, under the rear seat. It is mounted to the floor panel with three mounting fasteners. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Receiver > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7564 Radio Receiver: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The satellite receiver module receives signals from the roof mounted antenna and processes this information before it is sent to the radio. The module operates on both battery feed circuits and CAN bus messages. It will operate with the ignition key in the run or accessory position only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Receiver > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Radio Receiver: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL CLUB CAB 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the left side door scuff plate. 3. Raise carpet to access receiver. 4. Remove the mounting fasteners. 5. Disconnect the antenna and electrical harness connectors. Remove the module. QUAD CAB Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Receiver > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7567 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Raise the left rear seat. 3. Remove the mounting fasteners. 4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical harness connectors. Remove the module. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Receiver > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7568 Radio Receiver: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CLUB CAB 1. Connect antenna and electrical harness connector to module. 2. Position module and install mounting fasteners. Tighten fasteners. 3. Lower carpet into position. 4. Install the left side door scuff plate. 5. Connect battery negative cable. QUAD CAB Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio Receiver > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7569 1. Connect antenna and electrical harness connector to module. 2. Position module and install mounting fasteners. Tighten fasteners. 3. Lower the left rear seat. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Radio noise suppression devices are installed on this vehicle. Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) can be produced by any on-board or external source of electromagnetic energy. These electromagnetic energy sources can radiate electromagnetic signals through the air, or conduct them through the vehicle electrical system. When the audio system converts RFI or EMI to an audible acoustic wave form, it is referred to as radio noise. This undesirable radio noise is generally manifested in the form of "buzzing," "hissing," "popping," "clicking," "crackling," and/or "whirring" sounds. In most cases, RFI and EMI radio noise can be suppressed using a combination of vehicle and component grounding, filtering and shielding techniques. This vehicle is equipped with radio noise suppression devices that were designed to minimize exposure to typical sources of RFI and EMI; thereby, minimizing radio noise complaints. Radio noise suppression is accomplished primarily through circuitry or devices that are integral to the radios, audio power amplifiers and other on-board electrical components such as generators, wiper motors, blower motors, and fuel pumps that have been found to be potential sources of RFI or EMI. External radio noise suppression devices that are used on this vehicle to control RFI or EMI, and can be serviced, include the following: - Engine-to-bulkhead ground strap - This length of braided ground strap has an eyelet terminal connector crimped to each end. One end is secured to the engine cylinder heads. The other is secured to the bulkhead. - Resistor-type spark plugs - This type of spark plug has an internal resistor connected in series between the spark plug terminal and the center electrode to help reduce the production of electromagnetic radiation that can result in radio noise. - Exhaust-to-frame ground strap - This length of braided ground strap has an eyelet terminal connector crimped to each end. One end is secured to the exhaust pipe. The other is secured to the frame. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7574 Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION There are two common strategies that can be used to suppress Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) radio noise. The first suppression strategy involves preventing the production of RFI and EMI electromagnetic signals at their sources. The second suppression strategy involves preventing the reception of RFI and EMI electromagnetic signals by the audio system components. The use of braided ground straps in key locations is part of the RFI and EMI prevention strategy. These ground straps ensure adequate ground paths, particularly for high current components such as many of those found in the starting, charging, ignition, engine control and transmission control systems. An insufficient ground path for any of these high current components may result in radio noise caused by induced voltages created as the high current seeks alternative ground paths through components or circuits intended for use by, or in close proximity to the audio system components or circuits. Preventing the reception of RFI and EMI is accomplished by ensuring that the audio system components are correctly installed in the vehicle. Loose, corroded or improperly soldered wire harness connections, improperly routed wiring and inadequate audio system component grounding can all contribute to the reception of RFI and EMI. A properly grounded antenna body and radio chassis, as well as a shielded antenna coaxial cable with clean and tight connections will each help reduce the potential for reception of RFI and EMI. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL ENGINE GROUND STRAP 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the mounting fasteners from the engine cylinder heads. 3. Remove mounting fastener from bulkhead and remove strap. EXHAUST GROUND STRAP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7577 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove mounting fastener from exhaust pipe. 3. Remove mounting fastener from frame and remove ground strap. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7578 Radio/Stereo Noise Filter: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION ENGINE GROUND STRAP 1. Position ground strap to engine and install mounting fasteners. 2. Tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Position ground strap to bulkhead and install mounting fastener. 4. Tighten mounting fastener. 5. Connect battery negative cable. EXHAUST GROUND STRAP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Radio/Stereo Noise Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7579 1. Position ground strap to exhaust pipe and install mounting fastener. 2. Tighten mounting fastener. 3. Position ground strap to frame and install mounting fastener. 4. Tighten mounting fastener. 5. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 311 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22VT/BR MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 7584 Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 312 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22VT/BR MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Remote Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two rocker-type switches are mounted in the sides of the rear (instrument panel side) steering wheel trim cover. The switch on the left spoke is the seek switch and has seek up, seek down, and preset station advance functions. The switch on the right spoke is the volume control switch and has volume up, and volume down functions. The switch on the right spoke also includes a "mode" control that allows the driver to sequentially select AM radio, FM radio, cassette player, CD player or satellite radio. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7587 Remote Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The six switches in the two remote radio switch units are normally open, resistor multiplexed momentary switches that are hard wired to the Instrument cluster through the clockspring. The instrument cluster sends a five volt reference signal to both switch units on one circuit, and senses the status of all of the switches by reading the voltage drop on a second circuit. When the instrument cluster senses an input (voltage drop) from any one of the remote radio switches, it sends the proper switch status messages on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to the radio. The electronic circuitry within the radio is programmed to respond to these remote radio switch status messages by adjusting the radio settings as requested. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7588 Remote Switch: Testing and Inspection REMOTE SWITCHES Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Remove the remote radio switch(es) (1) and (2) from the steering wheel See: Service and Repair/Removal. 2. Use an ohmmeter to check the switch resistances as shown in the Remote Radio Switch test table. If the remote radio switch resistances are not as indicated, replace the inoperative switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Remote Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver side airbag (5) from the steering wheel (1) See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal. 3. Remove the speed control switch (3) or (6) located on the same side of the steering wheel as the remote radio switch that is being serviced See: Cruise Control/Cruise Control Switch/Service and Repair/Removal. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector from the connector receptacle of the remote radio switch. 5. Disengage the four remote radio switch latches that secure the switch to the inside of the mounting hole in the steering wheel rear trim cover. 6. From the outside of the steering wheel rear trim cover, remove the remote radio switch (2) from the trim cover. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7591 Remote Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the remote radio switch (2) to the mounting hole on the outside of the steering wheel rear trim cover. Be certain that the connector receptacle is oriented toward the bottom of the switch and pointed toward the center of the steering wheel. 2. Press firmly and evenly on the remote radio switch until each of the switch latches is fully engaged in the mounting hole of the steering wheel rear trim cover. 3. Connect the steering wheel wire harness connector to the connector receptacle of the remote radio switch. 4. Install the speed control switch (3) or (6) onto the steering wheel See: Cruise Control/Cruise Control Switch/Service and Repair/Installation. 5. Install the driver side airbag (5) to the steering wheel See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door Speaker: Locations Speaker-Left Front Door Component ID: 289 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 X53 16DG RADIO LEFT FRONT AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X201 16GY/VT AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X55 16DG/BR RADIO LEFT FRONT AUDIO (-) 3 X291 16GY/YL AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7596 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7597 Speaker: Locations Speaker-Left Rear Component ID: 290 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (EXTENDED CAB) Pin Circuit Description 1 X51 18DG/DB RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X205 18GY/LG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X57 18DG/OR RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (-) 3 X295 18GY/DG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 41 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7598 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7599 Speaker: Locations Speaker-Left Rear Door Component ID: 291 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (CREW CAB) Pin Circuit Description 1 X51 18DG/DB RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X205 18GY/LG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X57 18DG/OR RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (-) 3 X295 18GY/DG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7600 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7601 Speaker: Locations Speaker-Right Front Door Component ID: 292 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 X54 16GY RADIO RIGHT FRONT AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X202 16DG/VT AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X56 16DG/BR RADIO RIGHT FRONT AUDIO (-) 3 X292 16DG/YL AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7602 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7603 Speaker: Locations Speaker-Left Front Door Component ID: 289 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 X53 16DG RADIO LEFT FRONT AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X201 16GY/VT AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X55 16DG/BR RADIO LEFT FRONT AUDIO (-) 3 X291 16GY/YL AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7604 Speaker-Left Rear Component ID: 290 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (EXTENDED CAB) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7605 Pin Circuit Description 1 X51 18DG/DB RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X205 18GY/LG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X57 18DG/OR RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (-) 3 X295 18GY/DG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 41 Speaker-Left Rear Door Component ID: 291 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (CREW CAB) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7606 Pin Circuit Description 1 X51 18DG/DB RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X205 18GY/LG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X57 18DG/OR RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (-) 3 X295 18GY/DG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 40 Speaker-Right Front Door Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7607 Component ID: 292 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 X54 16GY RADIO RIGHT FRONT AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X202 16DG/VT AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X56 16DG/BR RADIO RIGHT FRONT AUDIO (-) 3 X292 16DG/YL AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7608 Speaker-Right Rear Component ID: 293 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (EXTENDED CAB) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7609 Pin Circuit Description 1 X52 16GY/DB RADIO RIGHT REAR AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X206 20DG/LG AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X58 16GY/OR RADIO RIGHT REAR AUDIO (-) 3 X296 20LG/GY AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 31 Speaker-Right Rear Door Component ID: 294 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (EXTENDED CAB) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7610 Pin Circuit Description 1 X52 16GY/DB RADIO RIGHT REAR AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X206 20DG/LG AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X206 16DG/LG AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X58 16GY/OR RADIO RIGHT REAR AUDIO (-) 3 X296 16LG/GY AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) 3 X296 20LG/GY AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7611 Speaker-Tweeter-Left Front Component ID: 295 Component : SPEAKER-TWEETER-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-TWEETER-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7612 Pin Circuit Description 1 X209 18GY/OR AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X299 18GY/YL AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 39 Speaker-Tweeter-Right Front Component ID: 296 Component : SPEAKER-TWEETER-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-TWEETER-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Locations > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7613 Pin Circuit Description 1 X208 20GY/DG AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X298 20GY/LG AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Left Front Door Component ID: 289 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 X53 16DG RADIO LEFT FRONT AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X201 16GY/VT AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X55 16DG/BR RADIO LEFT FRONT AUDIO (-) 3 X291 16GY/YL AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7616 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7617 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Left Rear Component ID: 290 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (EXTENDED CAB) Pin Circuit Description 1 X51 18DG/DB RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X205 18GY/LG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X57 18DG/OR RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (-) 3 X295 18GY/DG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 41 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7618 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7619 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Left Rear Door Component ID: 291 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (CREW CAB) Pin Circuit Description 1 X51 18DG/DB RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X205 18GY/LG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X57 18DG/OR RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (-) 3 X295 18GY/DG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7620 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7621 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Right Front Door Component ID: 292 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 X54 16GY RADIO RIGHT FRONT AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X202 16DG/VT AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X56 16DG/BR RADIO RIGHT FRONT AUDIO (-) 3 X292 16DG/YL AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7622 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7623 Speaker: Diagrams Speaker-Left Front Door Component ID: 289 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 X53 16DG RADIO LEFT FRONT AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X201 16GY/VT AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X55 16DG/BR RADIO LEFT FRONT AUDIO (-) 3 X291 16GY/YL AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7624 Speaker-Left Rear Component ID: 290 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (EXTENDED CAB) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7625 Pin Circuit Description 1 X51 18DG/DB RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X205 18GY/LG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X57 18DG/OR RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (-) 3 X295 18GY/DG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 41 Speaker-Left Rear Door Component ID: 291 Component : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-LEFT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (CREW CAB) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7626 Pin Circuit Description 1 X51 18DG/DB RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X205 18GY/LG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X57 18DG/OR RADIO LEFT REAR AUDIO (-) 3 X295 18GY/DG AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 40 Speaker-Right Front Door Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7627 Component ID: 292 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT FRONT DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Pin Circuit Description 1 X54 16GY RADIO RIGHT FRONT AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X202 16DG/VT AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X56 16DG/BR RADIO RIGHT FRONT AUDIO (-) 3 X292 16DG/YL AMPLIFIED RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7628 Speaker-Right Rear Component ID: 293 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (EXTENDED CAB) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7629 Pin Circuit Description 1 X52 16GY/DB RADIO RIGHT REAR AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X206 20DG/LG AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X58 16GY/OR RADIO RIGHT REAR AUDIO (-) 3 X296 20LG/GY AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 31 Speaker-Right Rear Door Component ID: 294 Component : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR DOOR Connector: Name : SPEAKER-RIGHT REAR DOOR Color : WHITE # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (EXTENDED CAB) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7630 Pin Circuit Description 1 X52 16GY/DB RADIO RIGHT REAR AUDIO (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X206 20DG/LG AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) Pin Circuit Description 1 X206 16DG/LG AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X58 16GY/OR RADIO RIGHT REAR AUDIO (-) 3 X296 16LG/GY AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) 3 X296 20LG/GY AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR DOOR SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7631 Speaker-Tweeter-Left Front Component ID: 295 Component : SPEAKER-TWEETER-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-TWEETER-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7632 Pin Circuit Description 1 X209 18GY/OR AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X299 18GY/YL AMPLIFIED LEFT I/P SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 39 Speaker-Tweeter-Right Front Component ID: 296 Component : SPEAKER-TWEETER-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : SPEAKER-TWEETER-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 Qualifier : (PREMIUM) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker-Left Front Door > Page 7633 Pin Circuit Description 1 X208 20GY/DG AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (+) 2-3 X298 20GY/LG AMPLIFIED RIGHT I/P SPEAKER (-) Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7634 Speaker: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION STANDARD The standard equipment speaker system includes speakers in four locations. One 16.5 centimeter (6.5 inch) diameter speaker is located in each front door. One 16.5 centimeter (6.5 inch) diameter speaker is located in each rear door on quad cab vehicles. One 16.5 centimeter (6.5 inch) diameter speaker is located in each C-pillar on club cab vehicles. INFINITY The infinity speaker system includes speakers in six locations. One 16.5 centimeter (6.5 inch) diameter speaker is located in each front door. One 16.5 centimeter (6.5 inch) diameter speaker located in each rear door on quad cab vehicles. One 16.5 centimeter (6.5 inch) diameter speaker is located in each C-pillar on club cab vehicles. A 19 millimeter tweeter is mounted high in each front door trim panel. The infinity speaker system includes an amplifier located on the right side cowl panel. The total available power of the infinity speaker system is 288 watts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7635 Speaker: Testing and Inspection SPEAKER Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. CAUTION: The speaker output of the radio is a "floating ground" system. Do not allow any speaker lead to short to ground, as damage to the radio may result. 1. If all speakers are inoperative, check the radio fuses in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse. 2. Check the amplifier fuse (if equipped) in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the faulty fuse. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Turn the radio receiver ON. Adjust the balance and fader control controls to check the performance of each individual speaker. Note the speaker locations that are not performing correctly. Go to Step 4. 4. Turn the radio OFF. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. If vehicle is not equipped with a amplifier, remove the radio receiver. If the vehicle is equipped with an amplifier, disconnect the two wire harness connectors. Go to Step 5. 5. Check both the speaker feed (+) circuit and return (-) circuit cavities for the inoperative speaker at the wire harness connector for continuity to ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to Step 6. If not OK, repair the shorted speaker feed (+) and/or return (-) circuits(s) to the speaker as required. 6. Disconnect wire harness connector at the inoperative speaker. Check for continuity between the speaker feed (+) circuit cavities of the radio receiver wire harness connector or if equipped, the amplifier wire harness connector and the speaker wire harness connector. Repeat the check between the speaker return (-) circuit cavities of the radio receiver wire harness connector and the speaker wire harness connector. In each case, there should be continuity. If OK, replace the faulty speaker. If not OK, repair the open speaker feed (+) and/or return (-) circuits(s) as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker - Removal Speaker: Service and Repair Speaker - Removal REMOVAL SPEAKER - FRONT DOOR 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Removal. 3. Remove the mounting fasteners. 4. Remove speaker and disconnect the electrical harness connector. SPEAKER - REAR CLUB CAB Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker - Removal > Page 7638 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the C - pillar trim panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 3. Remove the mounting fasteners. 4. Remove speaker and disconnect the electrical harness connector. SPEAKER - REAR DOOR 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal. 3. Remove the mounting fasteners. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker - Removal > Page 7639 4. Remove speaker and disconnect the electrical harness connector. SPEAKER - FRONT DOOR TWEETER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Removal. 3. Disconnect the electrical harness connector (1) and remove tweeter (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker - Removal > Page 7640 Speaker: Service and Repair Speaker - Installation INSTALLATION SPEAKER - FRONT DOOR 1. Connect electrical harness connector and position speaker to door. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation. 4. Connect battery negative cable. SPEAKER - REAR DOOR Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker - Removal > Page 7641 1. Connect electrical harness connector and position speaker to door. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Trim Panel - Installation. 4. Connect battery negative cable. SPEAKER - FRONT DOOR TWEETER 1. Connect electrical harness connector and position speaker to door trim panel. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Installation. 4. Connect battery negative cable. SPEAKER - REAR CLUB CAB Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker - Removal > Page 7642 1. Connect electrical harness connector and position speaker C-pillar. 2. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 3. Install C- pillar trim panel See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description PCM Output Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Description - PCM Output DESCRIPTION - PCM OUTPUT The 5-pin, 12-volt, Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description PCM Output > Page 7648 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Description and Operation Operation PCM Output PCM OUTPUT The ASD relay supplies battery voltage (12+ volts) to the fuel injectors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions packages it also supplies 12-volts to the oxygen sensor heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil within the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM operates the ASD relay by switching its ground circuit on and off. The ASD relay will be shut-down, meaning the 12-volt power supply to the ASD relay will be de-activated by the PCM if: - the ignition key is left in the ON position. This is if the engine has not been running for approximately 1.8 seconds. - there is a crankshaft position sensor signal to the PCM that is lower than pre-determined values. ASD Sense - PCM Input ASD SENSE - PCM INPUT A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM that the ASD has been activated. The relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater element, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + power supply. This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay is energized. If the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD should be activated, it will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The ASD relay is located in the engine compartment within the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Remove PDC cover. 2. Remove relay from PDC. 3. Check condition of relay terminals and PDC connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair if necessary before installing relay. 4. Check for pin height (pin height should be the same for all terminals within the PDC connector). Repair if necessary before installing relay. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7651 Ignition Shut Down Relay (For Antitheft): Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. 1. Install relay to PDC. 2. Install cover to PDC. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 162 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 18VT/BR IGNITION RUN/START SWITCH SENSE 2-3 F20 20PK/GY IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 8-Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7655 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7656 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7657 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 162 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 18VT/BR IGNITION RUN/START SWITCH SENSE 2-3 F20 20PK/GY IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 8-Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7658 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7659 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and is also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Several unique SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS, and another version has an additional coaxial connector receptacle that allows it to receive inputs from the optional remote start antenna module. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7662 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver and may receive RF inputs either directly through an internal antenna from the RKE key fob transmitter or, on vehicles equipped with an optional remote start system, indirectly through the external remote start antenna module. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Description and Operation/Description. The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM using the diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM over the CAN data bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM. The PCM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM is an invalid key ; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends electronic security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or if the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Removal Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Removal > Page 7665 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, disconnect the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. 10. Remove the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column housing. 11. Disengage the antenna ring (3) from around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4) and remove the SKREEM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Removal > Page 7666 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column with the antenna ring (3) oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4). 2. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, reconnect the coaxial cable to the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module Removal > Page 7667 5. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 6. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 8. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 9. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), if the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated.See: Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID: 302 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z384 20BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7672 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7673 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID: 302 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z384 20BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 7674 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic market vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the left side of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel below the left rear corner of the inner hood panel reinforcement. The underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7677 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export market vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic market vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kOhm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the FCM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the FCM. The FCM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export market vehicle theft or domestic market remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Removal Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the left outboard end of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel, squeeze the two hood ajar switch latch tabs (2) together and pull the switch upward out of the mounting hole (1). 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the mounting hole far enough to access and disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the switch connector receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch Removal > Page 7680 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the hood ajar switch (2) near the mounting hole (1) in the left outboard end of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the switch connector receptacle. 3. Insert the switch into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Left Component ID: 311 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22VT/BR MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Remote Radio-Left > Page 7685 Remote Switch: Diagrams Switch-Remote Radio-Right Component ID: 312 Component : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-REMOTE RADIO-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 X20 22GY/WT RADIO CONTROL MUX 2 G902 22VT/BR MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH MUX RETURN Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Remote Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two rocker-type switches are mounted in the sides of the rear (instrument panel side) steering wheel trim cover. The switch on the left spoke is the seek switch and has seek up, seek down, and preset station advance functions. The switch on the right spoke is the volume control switch and has volume up, and volume down functions. The switch on the right spoke also includes a "mode" control that allows the driver to sequentially select AM radio, FM radio, cassette player, CD player or satellite radio. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7688 Remote Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The six switches in the two remote radio switch units are normally open, resistor multiplexed momentary switches that are hard wired to the Instrument cluster through the clockspring. The instrument cluster sends a five volt reference signal to both switch units on one circuit, and senses the status of all of the switches by reading the voltage drop on a second circuit. When the instrument cluster senses an input (voltage drop) from any one of the remote radio switches, it sends the proper switch status messages on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to the radio. The electronic circuitry within the radio is programmed to respond to these remote radio switch status messages by adjusting the radio settings as requested. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7689 Remote Switch: Testing and Inspection REMOTE SWITCHES Any diagnosis of the Audio system should begin with the use of a scan tool. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Remove the remote radio switch(es) (1) and (2) from the steering wheel See: Service and Repair/Removal. 2. Use an ohmmeter to check the switch resistances as shown in the Remote Radio Switch test table. If the remote radio switch resistances are not as indicated, replace the inoperative switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Remote Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver side airbag (5) from the steering wheel (1) See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal. 3. Remove the speed control switch (3) or (6) located on the same side of the steering wheel as the remote radio switch that is being serviced See: Cruise Control/Cruise Control Switch/Service and Repair/Removal. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connector from the connector receptacle of the remote radio switch. 5. Disengage the four remote radio switch latches that secure the switch to the inside of the mounting hole in the steering wheel rear trim cover. 6. From the outside of the steering wheel rear trim cover, remove the remote radio switch (2) from the trim cover. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Remote Switch, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7692 Remote Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the remote radio switch (2) to the mounting hole on the outside of the steering wheel rear trim cover. Be certain that the connector receptacle is oriented toward the bottom of the switch and pointed toward the center of the steering wheel. 2. Press firmly and evenly on the remote radio switch until each of the switch latches is fully engaged in the mounting hole of the steering wheel rear trim cover. 3. Connect the steering wheel wire harness connector to the connector receptacle of the remote radio switch. 4. Install the speed control switch (3) or (6) onto the steering wheel See: Cruise Control/Cruise Control Switch/Service and Repair/Installation. 5. Install the driver side airbag (5) to the steering wheel See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations Towing Information: Service and Repair Towing Recommendations TOWING RECOMMENDATIONS A vehicle equipped with SAE approved wheel lift-type towing equipment can be used to tow all vehicles. When towing a 4WD vehicle using a wheel-lift towing device, use tow dollies under the opposite end of the vehicle. A vehicle with flatbed device can also be used to transport a disabled vehicle. Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly. Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles Provided that the transmission is operable, tow with the transmission in Neutral and the ignition key in the OFF position along with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on the ground. The speed must not exceed 30 mph (50 km/h) and the distance must not exceed 15 miles (25 km). If the vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (25 km ), it must be towed on a flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground, or with the front end raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly. NOTE: Towing the vehicle at more than 30 mph (50 km/h) or for more than 15 miles (25 km ) can cause severe transmission damage. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION: The following safety precautions must be observed when towing a vehicle: - Secure loose and protruding parts. - Always use a safety chain system that is independent of the lifting and towing equipment. - Do not allow towing equipment to contact the disabled vehicle's fuel tank. - Do not allow anyone under the disabled vehicle while it is lifted by the towing device. - Do not allow passengers to ride in a vehicle being towed. - Always observe state and local laws regarding towing regulations. - Do not tow a vehicle in a manner that could jeopardize the safety of the operator, pedestrians or other motorists. - Do not attach tow chains, T-hooks, or J-hooks to a bumper, steering linkage, drive shafts or a non-reinforced frame hole. - Do not tow a heavily loaded vehicle. Use a flatbed device to transport a loaded vehicle. GROUND CLEARANCE CAUTION: If vehicle is towed with wheels removed, install lug nuts to retain brake drums or rotors. A towed vehicle should be raised until lifted wheels are a minimum 100 mm (4 in) from the ground. Be sure there is adequate ground clearance at the opposite end of the vehicle, especially when towing over rough terrain or steep rises in the road. RAMP ANGLE If a vehicle with flatbed towing equipment is used, the approach ramp angle should not exceed 15 degrees. TOWING WHEN KEYS ARE NOT AVAILABLE When the vehicle is locked and keys are not available, use a flat bed hauler. A wheel-lift device can be used on 4WD vehicles provided all the wheels are lifted off the ground using tow dollies. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 7698 Towing Information: Service and Repair Trailer Towing - NAFTA TRAILER TOWING - NAFTA In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a driver). Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. WARNING: It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident. Tongue Weight (TW) The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle. Frontal Area The maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer. TSC (Trailer Sway Control) - If Equipped Trailer Sway Control - Electronic: TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize a swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system will reduce engine power and apply individual brakes that will counter act the sway of the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once the swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. TSC can not stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations. Even if your vehicle is equipped with electronic trailer sway control, mechanical sway control is recommended when appropriate for the size of your trailer. Trailer Sway Control - Mechanical: The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they're commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers. Weight-Distributing Hitch Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 7699 A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturers' directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration / loading to comply with gross axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements. WARNING: An improperly adjusted Weight-Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling, stability, and braking performance, and could result in an accident. Weight-Distributing Systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational vehicle dealer for additional information. Fifth-Wheel Hitch A special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. Connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin. Gooseneck Hitch The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed. Trailer Hitch Classification The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) without added equipment or alterations to the standard equipment. Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your dealer for package content. The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to "Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)" for the website address that contains the necessary information for your specific drivetrain. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 7700 All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain. NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses: - http:// www.dodge.com/towing. - http:// www.dodge.ca (Canada). NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents. Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch. Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: - The tongue weight of the trailer. - The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle. - The weight of the driver and all passengers. NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the Tire Safety Information Section. Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended: CAUTION: - Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle. - During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h). When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings. WARNING: Improper towing can lead to an injury accident. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 7701 Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident. - When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires. - Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. - Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in P for Park. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels. - GCWR must not be exceeded. - Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded: - GVWR - GTW - GAWR - Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight). Towing Requirements - Tires - Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire. - Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. - Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage. - Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to the See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Testing and Inspection - Tread Wear Indicators for the proper inspection procedure. - When replacing tires refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Tires/Description and Operation/Tires - Description - Replacement Tires for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits. Towing Requirements - Trailer Brakes - Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury. - An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required. - Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg). CAUTION: If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. WARNING: Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident. Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. Towing Requirements - Trailer Lights & Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 and 7 pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector. NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness. The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 7702 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic. If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage. Towing Tips - Automatic Transmission The "D" range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the "TOW HAUL" or "OD/OFF" range should be selected. NOTE: Using the "TOW HAUL" or "OD/OFF" range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking. The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule "B" for transmission fluid change intervals. NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing. Towing Tips - Tow/Haul (If Equipped) To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, turn the "TOW HAUL OD/OFF" feature ON when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to Drive position 2 on more severe grades. Towing Tips - Electronic Speed Control (If Equipped) - Don't use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. - When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed. - Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. Towing Tips - Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions: - City Driving - When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission in neutral and increase engine idle speed. - Highway Driving - Reduce speed. - Air Conditioning - Turn off temporarily. - refer to Cooling System Operating information for more information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 7703 Towing Information: Service and Repair Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, etc.) RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) OF 4X4 VEHICLES WARNING: You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the Neutral (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case Neutral (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move despite the transmission position. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. CAUTION: Internal damage to the transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing. NOTE: Because of the design of the transfer cases only vehicles equipped with a NV 244 Generation II transfer case should be used for recreational towing. NOTE: The NV 244 Generation II transfer case must be shifted into Neutral (N) for recreational towing. The Neutral (N) selection button is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case Neutral (N) can take place with the selector switch in any mode position. NOTE: If the vehicle is to be towed for multiple days or one day for an eight hour or above duration, disconnect and isolate the battery to prevent discharge do to the illumination of the odometer and PRNDL light. After the battery negative cable is reinstalled the radio clock and stations will need to be reset. Shifting into Neutral (N) Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing. CAUTION: It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in Neutral (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts. - Bring vehicle to a complete stop. - Shut engine OFF. - Place ignition key in the ON position. - Depress brake pedal. - Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress clutch on manual transmission. - Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object, depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for 4 seconds. - After shift is completed and the Neutral (N) light comes on release Neutral (N) button. - Start engine. - Shift automatic transmission into Reverse (R). - Release brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement. - Repeat steps 9 and 10 with the transmission in Drive (D). - Shut engine OFF and place ignition key to the unlocked OFF position. - Shift automatic transmission into Park (P). - Attach vehicle to tow vehicle with tow bar. NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button, and must continue to be met until the 4 seconds elapses and the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements (with the exception of 3 - Key ON) are not met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met during the 4 second timer, then the Neutral (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released. NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the key in not ON, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met. CAUTION: Damage to the transmission may occur if the transmission is shifted into Park (P) with the transfer case in Neutral (N) and the engine RUNNING. With the transfer case in Neutral (N) ensure that the engine is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into Park (P). Shifting OUT of Neutral (N) Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage. - Bring vehicle to a complete stop. - Shut engine OFF. - Place ignition key in the ON position. - Depress brake pedal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 7704 - Shift automatic transmission to Neutral (N) or depress clutch on manual transmission. - Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object, depress the recessed transfer case Neutral (N) button for 1 second. - After the Neutral (N) indicator light turns off release the Neutral (N) button. - After the Neutral (N) button has been released the transfer case will shift to the position identified by the selector switch. - Shift automatic transmission into Drive (D), release the clutch on manual transmission. NOTE: Items 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) selection button, and must continue to be met until 1 second elapses and the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements (with the exception of 3 - key ON) are not met prior to depressing the Neutral (N) button or are no longer met during the 1 second time, then all of the mode position indicator lights will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the Neutral (N) button is released. NOTE: The ignition key must be ON for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the key is not ON, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. NOTE: Flashing neutral (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met. CAUTION: - Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged. - Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case and damage internal parts. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System Information > Service and Repair > Towing Recommendations > Page 7705 Towing Information: Service and Repair Four Wheel Drive Towing FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TOWING Chrysler Corporation recommends that a vehicle be transported on a flat-bed device. A Wheel-lift device can be used provided all the wheels are lifted off the ground using tow dollies. WARNING: When towing a disabled vehicle and the drive wheels are secured in a wheel lift or tow dollies, ensure the transmission is in the park position. CAUTION: Many vehicles are equipped with air dams, spoilers, and/or ground effect panels. To avoid component damage, a wheel-lift towing vehicle or a flat-bed hauling vehicle is recommended. FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TOWING - REAR END LIFTED WARNING: Ensure vehicle is on a level surface or the wheels are blocked to prevent vehicle from rolling. 1. Attach wheel lift device to front wheels. 2. Place the transmission in neutral. 3. Raise the front of the vehicle off the ground and install tow dollies under front wheels. 4. Attach wheel lift device to rear wheels and raise vehicle to towing position. 5. Attach safety chains to frame rails. Route chains so not to interfere with tail pipe when vehicle is lifted. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position to unlock the steering wheel. CAUTION: Do not use steering column lock to secure steering wheel during towing operation. 7. Secure steering wheel in straight ahead position with a clamp device designed for towing. 8. Place the transmission in park. FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TOWING - FRONT END LIFTED WARNING: Ensure vehicle is on a level surface or the wheels are blocked to prevent vehicle from rolling. 1. Attach wheel lift device to rear wheels. 2. Place the transmission in neutral. 3. Raise the rear of the vehicle off the ground and install tow dollies under rear wheels. 4. Attach wheel lift device to front wheels and raise vehicle to towing position. 5. Attach the safety chains. CAUTION: Do not use steering column lock to secure steering wheel during towing operation. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position to unlock the steering wheel. 7. Secure steering wheel in straight ahead position with a clamp device designed for towing. 8. Place the transmission in park. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the Front End Sheet Metal (FESM) mounting bolt (3). 2. Remove the two lower fascia support nuts (1) and remove the tow hook assembly (5). 3. Remove the nuts (3) and remove the brackets (1 & 2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7710 Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the brackets (1 & 2) and install the nuts (3). 2. Tighten the nuts to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the hook assembly (5) and install the FESM bolt (3). 4. Install the fascia support nuts (1). 5. Tighten the FESM Bolt (3) to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 6. Tighten the fascia support nuts (1) to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations Trailer Brake Control Module: Locations Component ID: 155 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 3 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z911 14BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7714 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7715 Trailer Brake Control Module: Diagrams Component ID: 155 Component : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Connector: Name : MODULE-BRAKE PROVISION Color : BLUE # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 A400 14TN/RD FUSED B(+) 2 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 3 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 4 Z911 14BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7716 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way Trailer Connector: Locations Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way Component ID: 327 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z976 12BK GROUND 2 L76 20PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 3 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 4 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way > Page 7721 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way > Page 7722 Trailer Connector: Locations Wiring-Trailer Tow 7-Way Component ID: 328 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 3 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 4 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 5 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 6-7 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 8 Z976 12BK GROUND 9 Z976 12BK GROUND 10 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way > Page 7723 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7726 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7727 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7728 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7729 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7730 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts reference the figure numbers of the illustrations. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7731 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7732 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7733 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7734 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in Connector Replacement. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure)See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing. 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7735 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7736 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7737 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7738 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7739 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7740 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7741 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7742 Trailer Connector: Connector Views Trailer Tow Wiring 10 Way (Chassis) 10 Way Component ID: 328 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 3 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 4 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 5 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 6-- 7 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 8 Z976 12BK GROUND 9 Z976 12BK GROUND 10 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7743 Trailer Tow Wiring 4 Way (Chassis) 4 Way Component ID: 327 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7744 1 Z976 12BK GROUND 2 L76 20PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 3 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 4 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7745 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-54-02 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7746 8w-54-03 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7747 8w-54-04 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7748 8w-54-05 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the bumper. See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair/Removal 2. Disconnect the trailer wiring electrical connectors. 3. Remove the bolts (1) and remove the hitch (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7753 Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the hitch (2) and install the bolts (1). 2. Tighten the bolts to 170 Nm (125 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the trailer wiring electrical connectors. 4. Install the bumper. See: Body and Frame/Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Description and Operation > Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation Trailer Tow Relay Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with an optional factory-installed trailer towing package have two trailer tow relays, one for the trailer right turn and brake lamps and the other for the trailer left turn and brake lamps. The trailer tow relays are conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relays. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. Each relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The trailer tow relays are located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. A trailer tow relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The trailer tow relays are electromechanical switches that use a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to trailer brake and turn signal lamps. Within each relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the trailer tow relays include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a right or left trailer tow turn relay control circuit. The FCM controls trailer brake and turn lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the trailer lamps through a right or left trailer tow turn relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the right or left trailer brake and turn lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The trailer tow relays as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relays may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Description and Operation > Trailer Tow Relay > Page 7758 Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation Trailer Tow Wiring Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a factory-installed trailer tow package include an electric trailer brake wiring provision that terminates at a connector located on top of the large body harness connection under the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal, as well as an electric trailer brake pigtail harness and an instruction card (2) that are stored in the glove box (1) when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Operation OPERATION If an aftermarket electric brake controller is used, the electric brake pigtail harness supplied will make installation easier. The connection (blue 4-way connector) for the harness is located under the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal on top of the large body harness connection. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The battery line of this harness may be used to charge the trailer battery. However, a battery isolation unit is not supplied and the trailer battery may discharge the truck battery when the engine is not running. The battery line is protected by a fuse or a circuit breaker. Refer to the owner's manual in the vehicle glove box for type, location, and ampere rating. The trailer tow connectors as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the connectors may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trailer Lamps: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach behind the bracket (4) on the trailer hitch receiver (2) to access and disconnect the connector (3) of the body wire harness from the 7-way trailer tow connector (1), or to disengage the 4-way trailer tow connector (5) from the bracket. 3. Remove the four screws (6) that secure the 7-way trailer tow connector to the bracket. 4. Remove the 7-way trailer tow connector from the bracket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7761 Trailer Lamps: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the 7-way trailer tow connector (1) into the bracket (4) on the trailer hitch receiver (2). 2. Install and tighten the four screws (6) that secure the 7-way trailer tow connector to the bracket. Tighten the screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). 3. Reach behind the bracket to access and reconnect the connector (3) of the body wire harness to the 7-way trailer tow connector, or to engage the 4-way trailer tow connector (5) to the bracket. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Left Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay > Page 7766 Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Right Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Right Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 186 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) > Page 7769 Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Right Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 187 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Towing Relay: Locations Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Left Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay > Page 7774 Trailer Towing Relay: Locations Right Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Right Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 186 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) > Page 7777 Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Right Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 187 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way Trailer Connector: Locations Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way Component ID: 327 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z976 12BK GROUND 2 L76 20PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 3 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 4 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way > Page 7782 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way > Page 7783 Trailer Connector: Locations Wiring-Trailer Tow 7-Way Component ID: 328 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 3 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 4 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 5 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 6-7 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 8 Z976 12BK GROUND 9 Z976 12BK GROUND 10 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Locations > Wiring-Trailer Tow 4-Way > Page 7784 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7787 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7788 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7789 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7790 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7791 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts reference the figure numbers of the illustrations. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7792 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7793 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7794 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7795 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in Connector Replacement. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure)See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing. 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7796 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7797 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7798 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7799 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7800 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7801 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7802 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7803 Trailer Connector: Connector Views Trailer Tow Wiring 10 Way (Chassis) 10 Way Component ID: 328 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 7-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 3 L1 18WT/LG BACKUP LAMP FEED 4 A100 12RD/VT FUSED B(+) 5 L76 18PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 6-- 7 B400 12DG TRAILER TOW ELECTRIC BRAKE OUTPUT 8 Z976 12BK GROUND 9 Z976 12BK GROUND 10 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7804 Trailer Tow Wiring 4 Way (Chassis) 4 Way Component ID: 327 Component : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Connector: Name : WIRING-TRAILER TOW 4-WAY Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7805 1 Z976 12BK GROUND 2 L76 20PK/RD TRAILER TOW RELAY OUTPUT 3 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 4 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Component Location - 37 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7806 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-54-02 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7807 8w-54-03 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7808 8w-54-04 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7809 8w-54-05 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Trip Computer: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) module is sometimes referred to as Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) for the purposes of scan tool and diagnostic information naming. Please treat the CMTC and EOM as one and the same when diagnosing the vehicle. The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) is located in the overhead console and consists of the following components: - HomeLink(R) transceiver (3) - if equipped - Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) (6) - Push button function switches (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5) - Replaceable light bulbs to illuminate the push button function switches The CMTC contains a central processing unit and interfaces with other electronic modules in the vehicle on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The CAN data bus allows the sharing of sensor information. This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, reduce internal controller hardware, and reduce component sensor current loads. At the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many new feature capabilities. The individual components of the CMTC module are not serviced separately and if damaged or inoperative, must be replaced as a unit. The CMTC provides several electronic functions and features. Some of the functions and features that the CMTC supports and/or controls, include the following display options: - Compass and Temperature - provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. - Trip Odometer (ODO) - shows the distance travelled since the last trip computer reset up to 6000 miles. - Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) - shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Average fuel economy is a running average of the amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle has traveled. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will momentarily blank. Then, the display will show the same value as before the rest. The reset value is based on a minimal amount of fuel used and the distance traveled from the previous drive cycle. The display may take several miles for this value to change dependent upon driving habits. - Distance To Empty (DTE) - shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. This is not resettable. Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to an alternating test display of "LO" and "FUEL". This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the "LO FUEL" text and a new DTE value will be displayed, based on the current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel tank level. Elapsed time (ET) - shows the accumulated ignition-on time since the last trip computer reset. - Blank screen - the compass mini-trip computer VFD is turned off or in Blank Screen Mode. COMPASS NOTE: If the compass functions, but accuracy is suspect, it may be necessary to perform a variance adjustment. This procedure allows the compass unit to accommodate variances in the earth's magnetic field strength, based on geographic location. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment CMTC for the appropriate procedure. While in the compass/temperature mode, the compass will display the direction in which the vehicle is pointed using the eight major compass headings (Examples: north is N, northeast is NE). The auto-calibrating compass unit requires no manual adjusting in normal use. The only calibration that may prove necessary is to drive the vehicle in one or two complete circles, on level ground, not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). This will reorient the compass unit Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7814 to its vehicle. The compass unit also will compensate for vehicle magnetism acquired during normal use. However, avoid placing anything magnetic directly on the roof of the vehicle. Magnetic mounts for an antenna, a repair order hat, or a funeral procession flag can exceed the compensating ability of the compass unit if placed on the roof panel. Magnetic bit drivers used on the fasteners that hold the overhead console assembly to the roof header can also affect compass operation. If the vehicle roof should become magnetized, See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Demagnetizing - CMTC to restore proper compass operation. TEMPERATURE NOTE: The displayed temperature is not an instant reading of conditions, but an average temperature. It may take the temperature display several minutes to respond to a major temperature change, such as driving out of a heated garage into winter temperatures. The temperature displays the outside ambient temperature in whole degrees. The temperature display can be toggled from Fahrenheit to Celsius using the U.S./Metric push button. Displayed temperature reading stays in the temperature unit memory. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, the temperature will display the memory temperature if the engine OFF time is less than 255 minutes. If the engine OFF time is more than 255 minutes, the temperature will display the actual temperature sensed by the ambient temperature sensor. The temperature display update interval varies with the vehicle speed. The temperature function is supported by an ambient temperature sensor. This sensor is mounted outside the passenger compartment near the front and center of the vehicle, and is hard wired to the Front Control Module (FCM). The instrument cluster, also known as the Cab Compartment Node (CCN) averages and filters the ambient temperature signal and supplies it to other modules on the CAN data bus. Data input for all other compass mini-trip computer functions, including VFD dimming level, is received through CAN data bus messages. The maximum temperature displayed is 66°C (140° F). It could take several miles for the accurate temperature to be displayed as the CCN filters out heat from the engine compartment. The CMTC uses its internal programming and all of these inputs to calculate and display the requested data. If the data displayed is incorrect, perform the self-diagnostic tests, as described in Testing and Inspection. If these tests prove inconclusive, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information are recommended for further testing of the CMTC and the CAN data bus. NOTE: The CMTC will display min and max temperatures of -40° C (-40° F) and 66°C (140° F). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7815 Trip Computer: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) only operates with the ignition switch in the On position and the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse functioning and in place. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, all of the segments in the CMTC Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) will be turned off for one second, then the display will return to the last function being displayed before the ignition was turned to the Off position. With the ignition switch in the On position, momentarily depressing and releasing the STEP push button (4) will cause the CMTC to change its mode of operation. Momentarily depressing and releasing the U.S./M push button (1) will cause the unit to toggle between U.S. and Metric measurements. Momentarily depressing and releasing the C/T (compass/temperature) push button (5) will cause the CMTC to return to the compass/temperature display mode from any other mode. Pressing the RESET push button (2) for more than one second with the ignition switch in the On position will reset the following CMTC functions: - Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) - Trip Odometer (ODO) - Elapsed Time (ET) However, the reset will only occur if the function currently displayed is a function that can be reset. If the RESET push button is pressed twice within two seconds while in any of the three resettable functions (AVG ECO, ODO, ET), all three of these functions will be reset. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7816 Trip Computer: Testing and Inspection COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER NOTE: The temperature, fuel economy, distance to empty and trip odometer are calculated in the Cab Compartment Node (CCN) and transferred to the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) for display. If the CMTC and Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) test OK, testing of the CCN and Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus circuit may be necessary. Refer to the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to test the CCN and CAN data bus circuit. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Manufacturer Code Charts If the problem with the CMTC is an inaccurate or scrambled display, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST (below). If the problem with the CMTC is incorrect Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) dimming levels, use a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to test for the correct dimming message inputs being received from the Cab Compartment Node (CCN) or Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus circuit. If the problem is a no-display condition, use the following procedure. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console Removal. 2. Inspect the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If the IOD fuse is OK and in place, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open IOD fuse circuit as required. 3. Check for battery voltage at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, Check for battery voltage at the appropriate B(+) fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), repair the open fused B(+) circuit as required. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check the fused ignition switch output circuit(s) at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open or shorted circuit as required. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the overhead console electrical connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST (below) for further diagnosis of the CMTC module and the CAN data bus circuit. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit as required. SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST NOTE: The CMTC self - test can also be performed using a scan tool. Navigate to the Auto Self Test screen under System Tests of the scan tool and initiate the CMTC self - test. A self-diagnostic test is used to determine that the CMTC is operating properly electrically. Initiate the self-diagnostic test as follows: 1. With the ignition switch in the Off position, simultaneously depress and hold the STEP and RESET buttons while rotating the ignition switch to the Run/On position. 2. Continue to hold both buttons depressed until the CMTC enters the display segment test. In this test, all of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) segments are lighted while the CMTC performs the following checks: Non-Volatile Memory Status (NVM) - RAM Status - ROM Status - ASIC Communication Status - Compass Status - DC Status - CAN Data Bus Communications Status NOTE: If the CMTC module is equipped with the Universal Transmitter (also known as HomeLink(R)), the module also checks "HomeLink(R) Communication Test Status". 3. Following completion of these tests, the CMTC will display one of two messages: "FAIL" or "PASS." Press the RESET or STEP button to exit and enter normal mode. Respond to these test results as follows: If no test result message is displayed, but CMTC operation is still improper, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information are required for further diagnosis. - If the "FAIL" message is displayed, the CMTC is inoperative and must be replaced. - If the "PASS" message is displayed, the CMTC is OK, no faults are present. - If any VFD segment does not light during the display segment test, the CMTC is inoperative and must be replaced. If the first seven tests pass, the CMTC shall verify that all the required CAN bus messages are present on the CAN bus. If all required messages are present on the CAN bus, the CMTC will automatically return to normal operation after sixty seconds. The CMTC can also be returned to normal operation any time during the test by pressing the STEP , CT , RESET or US/M buttons. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7817 NOTE: Pressing the STEP or RESET buttons during any portion of the CMTC Self - Diagnostic Test Procedure will cause the CMTC to exit diagnostics and return to compass/temperature mode. NOTE: If the compass functions, but accuracy is suspect, it may be necessary to perform a variance adjustment. This procedure allows the compass unit to accommodate variations in the earth's magnetic field strength, based on geographic location. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment CMTC NOTE: If the compass reading has blanked out, and only "CAL" appears in the display, demagnetizing may be necessary to remove excessive residual magnetic fields from the vehicle. Check for stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and follow the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information as needed. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Trip Computer: Procedures Manual Compass Calibration - CMTC MANUAL COMPASS CALIBRATION CAUTION: Do not place any external magnets, such as magnetic roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of the overhead console. Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the overhead console. NOTE: Whenever the compass is calibrated manually, the variance number must also be reset. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC for the appropriate procedure. The electronic compass unit features a self-calibrating design, which simplifies the calibration procedure. This feature automatically updates the compass calibration while the vehicle is being driven. This allows the compass unit to compensate for small changes in the residual magnetism that the vehicle may acquire during normal use. If the compass readings appear to be erratic or out of calibration, perform the following calibration procedure. Also, new service replacement Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) modules must have their compass calibrated using this procedure. Do not attempt to calibrate the compass near large metal objects such as other vehicles, large buildings, or bridges; or, near overhead or underground power lines. Calibrate the compass manually as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. If the compass/temperature data is not currently being displayed, momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to return to the compass/temperature display. 2. Depress and hold the RESET push button (2). Hold the push button down until "CAL" appears in the display. This takes about ten seconds. 3. Slowly drive the vehicle on a level surface, away from large metal objects and power lines, through one or two complete circles not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). The "CAL" message will disappear from the display to indicate that the compass is now calibrated. NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that vehicle degaussing (demagnetizing) may be necessary. NOTE: If the "CAL" message remains in the display, either there is excessive magnetism near the compass, or the CMTC is inoperative. Attempt the calibration procedure at least one more time before performing CMTC diagnosis. NOTE: If the wrong direction is still indicated in the compass display, the area selected for calibration may be too close to a strong magnetic field. Repeat the calibration procedure in another location. Compass Demagnetizing - CMTC COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7820 A degaussing tool (Special Tool 6029) is used to demagnetize, or degauss, the overhead console forward mounting screw and the roof panel above the overhead console. Equivalent units must be rated as continuous duty for 110/115 volts and 60 Hz. They must also have a field strength of over 350 gauss at 7 millimeters (0.25 inch) beyond the tip of the probe. To demagnetize the roof panel and the overhead console forward mounting screw, proceed as follows: 1. Be certain that the ignition switch is in the Off position, before you begin the demagnetizing procedure. 2. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 3. Slowly approach the head of the overhead console forward mounting screw with the degaussing tool connected. 4. Contact the head of the screw with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool for about two seconds. 5. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the screw. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the screw head, disconnect the tool. 6. Place a piece of paper approximately 22 by 28 centimeters (8.5 by 11 inches), oriented on the vehicle lengthwise from front to rear, on the center line of the roof at the windshield header. The purpose of the paper is to protect the roof panel from scratches, and to define the area to be demagnetized. 7. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 8. Slowly approach the center line of the roof panel at the windshield header, with the degaussing tool connected. 9. Contact the roof panel with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool. Be sure that the template is in place to avoid scratching the roof panel. Using a slow, back-and-forth sweeping motion, and allowing 13 millimeters (0.50 inch) between passes, move the tool at least 11 centimeters (4 inches) to each side of the roof center line, and 28 centimeters (11 inches) back from the windshield header. 10. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the roof panel. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the roof panel, disconnect the tool. 11. Calibrate the compass, See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Manual Compass Calibration - CMTC and adjust the compass variance, See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC. Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7821 COMPASS VARIANCE ADJUSTMENT Compass variance, also known as magnetic declination, is the difference in angle between magnetic north and true geographic north. In some geographic locations, the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this problem occurs, the compass variance must be set. NOTE: If the vehicle is taken on long trips into a new variance zone the compass function may be effected. Compass variance may need to be adjusted to the new zone number to function properly. NOTE: The default for the compass variance from the factory is 8. To set the compass variance: 1. Using the Variance Settings Map, find your geographic location and note the zone number. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. If the compass/temperature data is not currently being displayed, momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to return to the compass/temperature display. 3. Press and hold the RESET push button (2) down for approximately five seconds. The last variance zone number will be displayed. 4. Momentarily depress and release the STEP push button (4) to toggle through the zone numbers (1-15), until the zone number for your geographic location appears in the display. 5. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (2) to enter the displayed zone number into the compass unit memory. 6. Confirm that the correct directions are now indicated by the compass. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7822 Trip Computer: Removal and Replacement Compass Mini - Trip Computer COMPASS MINI - TRIP COMPUTER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (3) from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 3. Remove the screws (1) that secure the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC) (4) to the overhead console housing (3). 4. Remove the CMTC (4) from the overhead console housing (3). Bulb - CMTC Control BULB - CMTC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There are provisions for up to three bulb/bulb holder units on the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the CMTC push buttons, while the center bulb illuminates the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb location is only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (1) from the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7823 Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) unit (2) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Compass Mini - Trip Computer COMPASS MINI - TRIP COMPUTER NOTE: If a new Compass Mini - Trip Computer has been installed, the compass will have to be calibrated and the variance set. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Manual Compass Calibration - CMTC and See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC for the appropriate procedures. 1. Position the CMTC (4) onto the overhead console housing (3). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the CMTC (4) to the overhead console housing (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Install the overhead console (3) onto the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Installation. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - CMTC Control BULB - CMTC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are provisions for up to three bulb/bulb holder units on the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the CMTC push buttons, while the center bulb illuminates the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb location is only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trip Computer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7824 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the overhead console (1) onto the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Installation. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Voice Activation System: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7829 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7830 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7831 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7832 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7833 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts reference the figure numbers of the illustrations. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7834 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7835 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7836 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7837 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in Connector Replacement. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure)See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing. 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7838 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7839 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7840 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7841 Voice Activation System: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7842 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7843 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7844 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7845 Voice Activation System: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-55-02 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Voice Activation System > System Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7846 Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Body Control Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Front Control Module (FCM) (2) is a micro controller based module located in the left front corner of the engine compartment. The FCM mates to the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (1) to form the Integrated Power Module (IPM). The IPM connects directly to the battery and provides the primary means of circuit protection and power distribution for all vehicle electrical systems. The front control module controls power to some of these vehicle systems electrical and electromechanical loads based on inputs received from hard wired switch inputs and data received on the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 7853 Body Control Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION As messages are sent over the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus circuit, the Front Control Module (FCM) reads these messages and controls power to some of the vehicles electrical systems by completing the circuit to ground (low side driver) or completing the circuit to 12 volt power (high side driver). The following functions are controlled by the FCM: - Front turn signals - Stop, turn signal and tail lamps - Front and rear hazard warning lamps - Headlamps - Fog Lamps - Daytime running lamps - if equipped - Horn - Windshield and liftgate wiper and washer systems - Transfer case shifting - Trailer tow wiring output - Rear window defroster power and timing The FCM provides the following features for the above function: - It operates the electric transfer case mechanism, replacing a stand-alone module. - It flashes lamps in response to turn signal, Remote Keyless Entry and Vehicle Theft Security Alarm inputs. - It sounds the horn in response to Remote Keyless Entry and Vehicle Theft Security Alarm inputs. - It turns off the horn in the event of excessively long operation that could otherwise damage the horn. - It minimized voltage variations to the headlamps to extend bulb life and to equalize the light output from the lamps, which might otherwise differ due to variations in wiring resistance. - If the headlamps are left on, it automatically turns them off after eight minutes to protect the battery from discharge. - It monitors battery voltage and turns off non-essential functions such as the fog lamps, rear window defogger and heated seats if necessary to conserve battery power. - It operates the high-beam headlamps at reduced intensity by pulse-width modulation of the power supply to provide the daytime running lamps. - It provides the variable delay intermittent windshield and liftgate wiper time delay features, and the vehicle speed sensitive windshield wiper delay variation. - It acts as a gateway between the CAN-C network for critical powertrain and anti-lock brake systems and the CAN-B network for body and interior modules. For example it collects battery temperature data and relays it to the PCM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Body Control Module: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the Integrated Power Module (IPM) from the engine compartment, See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Removal. 3. Remove the four fasteners (2) securing the Front Control Module (FCM) (1) to the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (3). 4. Separate the FCM from the PDC by pulling the two straight away from each other to disengage the electrical connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7856 Body Control Module: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the Power Distribution Center (PDC) (3) to the Front Control Module (FCM) by lining up the electrical connector and pushing the two together. 2. Install the four fasteners (2) securing the FCM (1) to the PDC (3). 3. Install the Integrated Power Module (IPM), See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair/Installation. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Fascia - Removal Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Fascia - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel well screws (2) on each side of the vehicle. 2. Remove the upper three screws (2). 3. Remove the two push pins on the lower edge and remove the fascia (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Fascia - Removal > Page 7863 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Service and Repair Front Fascia - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the fascia (3) onto the support bracket (1). 2. Install the three upper screws (2). 3. Install the two lower edge push pin fasteners. 4. Install the three screws (2) at each wheel well. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Support Bracket Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Fascia Support Bracket Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the fascia. See: Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Fascia Removal 2. Remove the three screws on the top of the bracket (2). 3. Remove the six screws (3) and separate the bracket (2) from the fascia support (1). 4. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connector (2). 5. Remove the fog lamp (3) from the bracket (4). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Support Bracket > Page 7868 1. Install the fog lamps (3) onto the bracket (4) and position the bracket onto the vehicle (1). 2. Connect the fog lamp electrical connector (2). 3. Install the three screws on the top of the bracket (2). 4. Install the three screws (3) on each side of the bracket (2). 5. Install the fascia. See: Front Bumper Cover / Fascia/Service and Repair/Front Fascia - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Fascia Support Bracket > Page 7869 Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Front Fascia Support Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the support bracket. See: Fascia Support Bracket/Removal 2. Remove the four nuts (1 and 3) securing the fascia support (4) to the frame tips (2). 3. Remove the support (4). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the fascia support (4) and install the right (1) and left (3) nuts. 2. Tighten the nuts to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the fascia support bracket. See: Fascia Support Bracket/Installation 4. Check front fascia gap and flush positioning. 5. Loosen the nuts (1 and 3) and adjust the front fascia to specifications. 6. Tighten the nuts to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rear Bumper: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the license plate lamp electrical connectors and separate the wire harness from the bumper (2). 2. Support the bumper (2). 3. Remove the four nuts (4) attaching the bumper (2) to the hitch (3). 4. Remove the bumper. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7874 Rear Bumper: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Verify that the stud plates (1) are in place and install the bumper (2) onto the trailer hitch (3) brackets. 2. Install the nuts (4) and adjust the bumper gap to specifications. 3. Tighten the nuts to 54 Nm (40 ft. lbs.). 4. Position the license plate light wire harness back onto the bumper and connect the electrical connectors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Cab back trim panel for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. 1. Remove the cab back trim panel, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal. 2. Disengage the four locking tabs that secure the body vent (1) to the sheet metal and remove the vent. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cabin Ventilation Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7879 Cabin Ventilation Grille: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the bottom edge of the body vent (1) to the bottom flange of the opening in the sheet metal. Applying even pressure, roll the vent upward and engage the four locking tabs that secure the vent to the sheet metal. Verify that all four of the locking tabs lock on to the sheet metal. NOTE: Cab back trim panel for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. 2. Install the cab back trim panel, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Cowl Top Panel - Removal Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Top Panel - Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the hood and remove the wiper arm nuts and wiper arms. See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms Removal 2. Remove the four rear nuts and the two front pins. 3. Remove the cowl grille. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Exterior Handle - Installation Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Exterior Handle - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the lock cylinder (1), if equipped. See: Locks/Door Locks/Door Lock Cylinder/Service and Repair/Installation 2. Install the links (2) into the clips on the handle. 3. Connect the electrical connector, if equipped, install the nuts (3) and tighten to 4 Nm (38 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the outside handle (3) and lock cylinder (2) links to the latch (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Exterior Handle - Installation > Page 7893 5. Install the watershield. See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Installation See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Installation 6. Adjust the latch as needed. See: Front Door Latch/Adjustments Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Exterior Handle - Installation > Page 7894 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Exterior Handle - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Removal 2. Separate the clips (1) and disconnect the lock cylinder (2) and exterior handle (3) links from the latch (4). 3. Remove the nuts (3), the handle (1) and disconnect the electrical connector, if equipped. 4. Separate the clips and remove the links (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Exterior Handle - Installation > Page 7895 5. Remove the lock cylinder (1), if equipped. See: Locks/Door Locks/Door Lock Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises Front Door Hinge: Customer Interest Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 7904 This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 7905 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises Front Door Hinge: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 7911 This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 7912 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 7913 Front Door Hinge: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 23-018-10 Date: 101021 Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 7914 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 7915 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Technical Service Bulletin # 23-018-10 Date: 101021 Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 7916 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Hinge: > Page 7917 CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Hinge - Removal Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Front Door Hinge - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 1. Remove the door. See: Service and Repair/Front Door - Removal 2. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the outline of the door hinges on a-pillar end to aid installation. 3. Remove the bolts (2) and remove the hinge (1 or 3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Hinge - Removal > Page 7920 Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Front Door Hinge - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 1. If necessary, paint replacement door hinge before installation. 2. Position door hinge (1 or 3) on hinge pillar using the marks made during removal and install the bolts (2). 3. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the door. See: Service and Repair/Front Door - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Latch: Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 1. Locate access hole (3) and remove the trim plug covering it. 2. Insert a 5/32-inch hex-wrench through hole and into adjustment screw. Loosen screw. 3. Operate outside handle several times to release any restriction because of mis-alignment. 4. Tighten adjustment screw to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). 5. Test handle for proper operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Latch - Removal Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Front Door Latch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Removal Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Latch - Removal > Page 7926 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: begin STACK: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Latch - Removal > Page 7927 Front Door Latch: Service and Repair Front Door Latch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the latch (2) into the door. 2. Connect the electrical connectors (3). 3. Install the screws (1) and tighten to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the outside handle (3) and lock cylinder (2) links. 5. Connect the lock knob (1) and the inside handle (2) links. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Latch - Removal > Page 7928 6. Install the watershield. See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Installation See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Installation 7. Adjust the latch as needed. See: Adjustments Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Watershield Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Door Watershield Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front door trim panel See: Front Door Trim Panel - Removal. 3. Remove the pull cup bracket bolts and bracket. 4. Remove the speaker mounting fasteners. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Watershield > Page 7933 5. Remove speaker and disconnect the electrical harness connector. CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 6. Carefully remove the watershield from around the perimeter of the door. 7. Separate the watershield from the interior handle actuator rod and the door wire harness (if equipped) and remove the watershield. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Watershield > Page 7934 CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 1. Position the wire harness and actuator rods through the holes in the watershield. 2. Secure the watershield to the inner door panel. 3. Connect electrical harness connector and position speaker to door. 4. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Watershield > Page 7935 5. Install the door pull cup bracket and install the bolts. 6. Install door trim panel See: Front Door Trim Panel - Installation. 7. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Watershield > Page 7936 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Door Trim Panel - Removal REMOVAL 1. If equipped, remove the manual window crank (2) using a window crank removal tool (1). 2. Disconnect and isolate battery negative cable. 3. Remove the screw (2) at the interior handle. 4. Remove the screw (4) from the pull cup. 5. Remove the lower screws (5). CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not pull the door trim panel directly off of the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 6. Lift the door trim panel straight upward to disconnect the molded plastic retaining clips (6) from the door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Watershield > Page 7937 7. Disconnect the interior handle (3) actuator rod (1) from the handle (2). 8. Disconnect the electrical connectors (2) for the window switch assembly (3), if equipped. 9. Disconnect the trim panel speaker electrical connector (1), if equipped. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Watershield > Page 7938 Front Door Panel: Service and Repair Front Door Trim Panel - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the trim panel speaker electrical connector (1), if equipped. 2. Connect the electrical connectors (2) for the window switch assembly (3), if equipped. 3. Connect the interior handle (3) actuator rod (1) to the handle (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Watershield > Page 7939 CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not pull the door trim panel directly off of the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 4. Position the door trim panel (3) and align the molded plastic retaining clips (6) to the door. 5. Lift the trim panel up and onto the lock rod (1) and attachment hooks (6). 6. Push the door trim panel straight downward until all of the retaining clips are fully engaged to the door. 7. Install the lower screws (5). 8. Install the screw (4) from the pull cup. 9. Install the screw (2) at the interior handle. 10. Install the manual window crank handle (2), if equipped. 11. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments ADJUSTMENT 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the striker (1) to aid in adjustment. 2. Loosen the striker bolts (3). 3. Change the striker position to adjust the rear gap and flush measurement. 4. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Door Striker: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL Club Cab 1. Remove the cargo door trim panel (1). See: Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Cargo (Club Cab)/Panel-Trim/Removal CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 2. Position aside the watershield. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7945 3. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the striker (2). 4. Remove the bolts (3) and remove the striker. Quad Cab 1. Remove the lower b-pillar trim (4). See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim 2. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the striker (1). 3. Remove the bolts (3) and remove the striker. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7946 Front Door Striker: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION Club Cab 1. Position the tapping plate into the rear cargo door (1). 2. Install the striker and install the bolts. 3. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 4. Adjust the striker if needed. See: Adjustments CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 5. Position the watershield back into place. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 7947 6. Install the cargo door trim panel. See: Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door Cargo (Club Cab)/Panel-Trim/Installation Quad Cab 1. Position the tapping plate (2) into the b-pillar. 2. Install the striker (1) and install the bolts (3). 3. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). Install the lower b-pillar trim (4). See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim 4. Adjust the striker if needed. See: Adjustments Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Locations > Club Door Sealing System Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Locations > Club Door Sealing System > Page 7952 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass - Removal Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Front Door Glass - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Removal 2. Temporarily install the window switch or window handle and position the glass (1) to gain access to the glass clamp screws (2). 3. Loosen the glass clamp screws (2) and carefully remove the glass (1) from the door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass - Removal > Page 7957 Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Front Door Glass - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the glass into the door and position the glass (1) into the glass clamps. 2. Temporarily install the window crank handle or window switches and raise the glass into the full up position. 3. Tighten the glass clamp screws (2) securely. 4. Remove the manual window crank or window switches, and install the watershield. See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator - Removal Power REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Removal 2. Temporarily install the window switch and position the glass (1) to gain access to the glass clamp screws (2). 3. Loosen the glass clamp screws (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 7962 4. Raise the glass into the full up position and secure into place with tape or equivalent. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector (6). 6. Remove the two lower regulator bolts (5). 7. Remove the one bolt at the motor. 8. Loosen the remaining three regulator bolts (3 and 4) located at the keyhole slots. 9. Lift regulator up and out of the keyhole slots and remove from door. Manual REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Removal 2. Reinstall the manual window crank and raise the door glass to the position shown (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 7963 3. Loosen the glass clamp screws (2). 4. Raise the glass into the full up position and secure into place with tape or equivalent. 5. Remove the two lower regulator bolts (5). 6. Remove the one bolt (1) at the crank mechanism (4). 7. Loosen the remaining three regulator bolts (3) located at the keyhole slots. 8. Lift regulator up and out of the keyhole slots and remove from door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 7964 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator - Installation Power INSTALLATION 1. Place the regulator into the door and engage the bolts (3 and 4) into the keyhole slots in the door (1). 2. Install the one bolt at the motor. 3. Install the two lower bolts (5). 4. Tighten all the regulator bolts to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 5. Connect the electrical connector (6). 6. Remove the tape used to secure the glass during removal and position the glass (1) into the glass clamps. 7. Temporarily install the window switch and raise the glass into the full up position. 8. Tighten the glass clamp screws (2) securely. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 7965 9. Remove the window switch and install the watershield. See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Installation Manual INSTALLATION 1. Place the regulator into the door and engage the bolts (5 and 3) into the keyhole slots in the door. 2. Install the regulator mechanism bolt (1). 3. Install the two lower bolts (5). 4. Tighten all the regulator bolts to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 5. Remove the tape used to secure the glass during removal and position the glass (1) into the glass clamps. 6. Temporarily install the window crank handle and raise the glass into the full up position. 7. Tighten the glass clamp screws (2) securely. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 7966 8. Remove the manual window crank and install the watershield. See: Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the two screws (2) and separate the handle (1) from the door. 2. Disconnect the upper and lower cables (1) from the handle (2) and remove the handle. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 7973 1. Connect the upper and lower cable ends (1) to the handle arms (2). 2. Install the handle (1) and install the screws (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 7974 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door - Rear (Quad Cab) Removal REMOVAL 1. Partially remove the watershield as necessary. See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Removal 2. Remove the nuts (3) and separate the exterior handle (1). 3. Disconnect the latch link (2) and remove the handle. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 7975 1. Position the handle (1) and connect the latch link (2). 2. Install the handle and install the nuts (3). 3. Tighten the nuts too 4. Install the watershield. See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises Rear Door Hinge: Customer Interest Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 7984 This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 7985 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises Rear Door Hinge: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 7991 This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > 23-018-10 > Oct > 10 > Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises > Page 7992 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 7993 Rear Door Hinge: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 23-018-10 Date: 101021 Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 7994 SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 7995 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Technical Service Bulletin # 23-018-10 Date: 101021 Body - Lower Door Hinge Popping Groaning Noises NUMBER: 23-018-10 GROUP: Body DATE: October 21, 2010 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-016-06, DATED MARCH 18, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Lower Door Hinges Make Popping or Groan When Opened Or Closed OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves spraying white lithium grease between the roller and roller pin while avoiding getting grease on the. This needs to be done to all lower door hinges. CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. MODELS: 2009 - 2010 (DS) Ram Truck (1500 Pick Up) 2005 - 2010 (DH) Ram Truck (1500/2500 Pick Up) 2010 (DJ) Ram Truck (2500 Pick Up) 2004 - 2010 (HB) Durango 2007 - 2010 (HG) Aspen 2007 - 2010 (JC) Journey 2007 - 2010 (JS) Avenger/Sebring 2007 - 2010 (KK) Liberty 2007 - 2010 (KA) Nitro 2008 - 2010 (LC) Challenger 2006 - 2010 (LE) Chrysler 300C (International Markets) 2007 - 2010 (LX) 300/Charger/Magnum Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 7996 2007 - 2010 (MK) Compass/Patriot 2005 - 2010 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2010 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2010 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2005 - 2010 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2010 (WH) Commander (International Markets) 2006 - 2010 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: The lower door hinges make a moderate to loud popping/groan sound when the door is opened or closed. This is due to the roller axle not being properly maintained with grease. DIAGNOSIS: Open the doors and listen for the popping or groan sound from the lower hinge, if the sound is present perform the Repair Procedure. PARTS REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE: 1. Open door. 2. With straw installed on the lithium grease spray can (p/n 04318066AB), spray a very small amount of grease between the roller pin and inside roller surface (axle). (Fig. 1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Hinge: > Page 7997 CAUTION: Be careful not to spray grease on the outside of the roller or roller cam. If grease is allowed to get on the outside of the roller or roller cam it must be cleaned off using a clean shop towel. Grease left on the outside of the roller and roller cam may also cause a noise. 3. Open and close the door 10 times to work the grease onto the roller axle. 4. Wipe away any excess grease in the sprayed area. 5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for every door. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Rear Door Hinge: Service and Repair Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door. See: Service and Repair/Door - Cargo (Club Cab)/Removal Upper Hinge NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 1. Remove the lower c-pillar trim (1). See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8000 2. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the location of the hinges on the pillar to aid installation. 3. Remove the two upper hinge inner bolts (3). 4. Remove the two outer bolts (1) and remove the hinge (2). Lower Hinge NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 1. Remove the four hinge bolts (5) and remove the hinge (4). Installation INSTALLATION Upper Hinge Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8001 NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 1. Install the hinge (2) and align with the marks made during removal. 2. Install the two outer bolts (1) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the two inner bolts (3) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the door and adjust the door position if required. See: Adjustments/Door - Cargo (Club Cab) 5. Install the lower c-pillar trim. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation Lower Hinge Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8002 NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 1. Install the hinge (4) and align with the marks made during removal. 2. Install the three hinge bolts (5) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the door and adjust the door position if required. See: Adjustments/Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8003 Rear Door Hinge: Service and Repair Door - Rear (Quad Cab) Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the door to replace the hinges if they are replaced one at a time. NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 1. Open the front door. 2. Remove the lower b-pillar trim (4), See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 3. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the location of the door hinges on the door. NOTE: The epoxy bonded washers do not need to be separated from the hinges. If the washers are removed, the door may need to be re-adjusted. 4. Support the door with a suitable lifting device and remove the two nuts (2) and two bolts (1) that secure the door to the hinges. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8004 5. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the hinge on the door and b-pillar to aid installation. 6. Remove the two exterior bolts (3) per hinge. 7. From the inside of the vehicle remove the remaining bolt (2) attaching the hinge (1 or 4) to the b-pillar and remove the hinge. NOTE: When installing a door it will be necessary to replace the shouldered door studs (1) with service studs without the shoulder in order to achieve correct door position adjustments. Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: When adjusting a door with the door to hinge fasteners, it will be necessary to replace the shouldered door studs (1) with service studs without the shoulder in order to achieve correct door position adjustments. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8005 1. If required, install the service studs (1) and tighten to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). NOTE: A suitable body sealant should be used when removing or moving the hinges. 2. If necessary, paint replacement door hinge before installation. 3. Position door hinge (1 or 4) on the b-pillar using the marks made during removal and install the bolts (3). 4. Tighten the bolts (3) to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the inner bolt (2) and tighten to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). NOTE: If the epoxy bonded washers are separated from the hinges, the door may need to be adjusted. 6. If removed, install the epoxy bonded washers. 7. Loosely install the two nuts (2) and the two bolts (1) that secure the door to the hinges. 8. Align the door to the hinges using the reference marks made during the removal procedure and tighten the nuts and bolts to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) using the sequence shown. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8006 9. Adjust the door if needed. See: Adjustments/Door - Cargo (Club Cab) 10. Install the lower b-pillar trim (4), See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 1. Remove the watershield. See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Cargo (Club Cab)/Watershield/Removal Upper Latch Cable NOTE: The upper latch cable is serviced as an assembly with the upper latch. 1. Remove the upper latch bolts (1). 2. Separate the cable support clips (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8011 3. Disconnect the cable end (1) from the shut face handle (2) and remove the latch/cable assembly. Lower Latch Cable NOTE: Upper cable end shown, lower cable end similar. 1. Disconnect the lower cable end (1) from the shut face handle (2). 2. Disconnect the lower cable end (3) and the cable (2) from the lower latch and remove the cable. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8012 Upper Latch Cable NOTE: The upper latch cable is serviced as an assembly with the upper latch. 1. Connect the cable housing to the shut face handle and connect the cable end (1). 2. Install the cable support clips (3). 3. Install the latch assembly (2) and install the bolts (1). 4. Tighten the bolts to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). Lower Latch Cable 1. Install the lower cable and attach the cable housing (2) to the latch assembly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8013 2. Connect the cable end (3) to the latch arm. NOTE: Upper cable end shown, lower cable end similar. 3. Connect the cable housing to the shut face handle and connect the cable end (1). CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 4. Install the watershield. See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Cargo (Club Cab)/Watershield/Installation Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8014 1. Remove the trim panel (1). See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Cargo (Club Cab)/Panel-Trim/Removal 2. Remove the nuts (1) and separate the latch (4) from the door. 3. Disconnect the cable end (3) and disconnect the cable housing (2) from the latch. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the cable housing (2) to the latch and connect the cable end (3). 2. Install the latch (4) and install the nuts (1). 3. Tighten the nuts (1) to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8015 4. Install the trip panel (1). See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Cargo (Club Cab)/Panel-Trim/Installation Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the trim panel (1). See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Cargo (Club Cab)/Panel-Trim/Removal 2. Remove the screws (2) and separate the door handle (1) from the door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8016 3. Disconnect the upper cable (1) from the door handle (2). 4. Separate the push pin hangers (3) from the door and separate the cable. 5. Remove the four screws (1) and remove the latch assembly (2) from the door. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the latch assembly (2) and install the screws (1). 2. Tighten the screws to 12 Nm (105 in. lbs.). 3. Install the cable hanger push pins (3) and seat fully. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8017 4. Connect the cable (1) to the door handle (2). 5. Install the door handle (1) and install the screws (2). 6. Install the door trim panel (1). See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Cargo (Club Cab)/Panel-Trim/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8018 Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair Door - Rear (Quad Cab) Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Removal 2. Disconnect the latch actuator rods (3, 4 and 6). 3. Remove the screws (1) and remove the latch (2). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector (5). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8019 1. Position the latch (2) into the door and connect the electrical connector (5). 2. Install the latch and install the screws (1). 3. Tighten the screws to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the actuator rods (3, 4 and 6). 5. Install the watershield. See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Rear Door Limiter: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the door and remove the body bolts (2) connecting the check (1) to the pillar. 2. Remove the door trim panel. See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Cargo (Club Cab)/Panel-Trim/Removal CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8024 If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 3. Partially separate the watershield to gain access to the inner door. 4. Remove the nuts (1) and remove the door check (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8025 Rear Door Limiter: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the check (2) into the door and install the nuts (1). 2. Tighten the nuts to 23 Nm (200 in. lbs.). 3. Attach the check (1) to the pillar and install the bolts (2). 4. Tighten the bolts to 23 Nm (200 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Limiter > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8026 Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 5. Secure the watershield to the inner door panel. 6. Install the door trim panel (1). See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Cargo (Club Cab)/Panel-Trim/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the two lower screws (4). 2. Remove the two screws in the pull cup (3). 3. Remove the two upper screws (2). 4. Using a trim tool C-4829-A or equivalent, separate the support clips and remove the trim panel (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the trim panel (1) and seat the support clips fully. 2. Install the two upper screws (2). 3. Install the two screws at the pull handle (3). 4. Install the two lower screws (4). Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8031 CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 1. Remove the trim panel. See: Panel-Trim/Removal 2. Separate the watershield from the inner door panel and remove. Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 1. Secure the watershield to the inner door panel. 2. Install the door trim panel. See: Panel-Trim/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8032 Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Door - Rear (Quad Cab) Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate battery negative cable. 2. If equipped, remove the manual window crank (2) using a window crank removal tool (1). 3. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, separate and remove the close out panel (2). 4. Remove the screw (4) at the interior handle. 5. Remove the screw (5) from the pull cup. 6. Remove the lower screws (6). CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not pull the door trim panel directly off of the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 7. Lift the door trim panel straight upward to disconnect the molded plastic retaining clips (6) from the door. 8. Disconnect the interior handle actuator rod (9) from the handle. 9. Disconnect the electrical connector (8) for the window switch assembly, if equipped. Rear Door Trim Panel - Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8033 1. Position the trim panel (3) and connect the inside handle actuator rod (9). 2. Connect the electrical connectors (6). 3. Lift the trim panel up and onto the lock rod (1) and attachment hooks (7). 4. Install the lower screws (6). 5. Install the screw (5) from the pull cup. 6. Install the screw (4) at the interior handle. 7. Position the close out panel (2) and seat the fastener clips fully. 8. Install the manual window crank handle (2), if equipped. 9. Connect battery negative cable. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear door trim panel (3). See: Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal 3. Remove the pull cup bracket bolts and bracket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8034 4. Remove the speaker mounting fasteners. 5. Remove speaker and disconnect the electrical harness connector. CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 6. Carefully remove the watershield from around the perimeter of the door. 7. Separate the watershield from the interior handle actuator rod and the door wire harness (if equipped) and remove the watershield. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8035 INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not allow the watershield or adhesive to become contaminated with dirt or other foreign substances. Do not damage the watershield during removal and installation. If the watershield becomes contaminated or damaged, replace the watershield. 1. Position the wire harness and actuator rods through the holes in the watershield. 2. Secure the watershield to the inner door panel. 3. Connect electrical harness connector and position speaker to door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8036 4. Install and tighten mounting fasteners. 5. Install the door pull cup bracket and install the bolts. 6. Install door trim panel (3). See: Rear Door Trim Panel - Installation 7. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Rear Door Striker: Adjustments Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Striker-Lower Latch ADJUSTMENTS 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the location of the door latch striker (1) on floor sill to aid in adjustment. 2. Loosen the two bolts (2) that secure the door latch striker to the floor sill. 3. To adjust the lower front gap and flush measurement, change the position of the door latch striker and then tighten the two bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) . 4. Verify correct door and latch position. Striker-Upper Latch ADJUSTMENTS 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the location of the door latch striker (1) on roof rail to aid in adjustment. 2. Loosen the two bolts (2) that secure the door latch striker to the roof rail. 3. To adjust the upper front gap and flush measurement, change the position of the door latch striker and then tighten the two bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.) . 4. Verify correct door and latch position. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8041 Rear Door Striker: Adjustments Door - Rear (Quad Cab) ADJUSTMENT 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the striker (2) to aid in adjustment. 2. Loosen the striker bolts (3). 3. Change the striker position to adjust the rear gap and flush measurement. 4. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Rear Door Striker: Service and Repair Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the striker to aid installation. 2. Remove the screws (2) and remove the striker (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the door latch striker (1) onto the vehicle and loosely install the two screws (2). 2. Align the door latch striker using the reference marks made during the removal procedure and tighten the screws to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. If necessary, adjust the door latch striker. See: Adjustments/Door Cargo (Club Cab)/Striker-Lower Latch Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8044 1. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the striker to aid installation. 2. Remove the screws (2) and remove the striker (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the door latch striker (1) onto the vehicle and loosely install the two screws (2). 2. Align the door latch striker using the reference marks made during the removal procedure and tighten the screws to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 3. If necessary, adjust the door latch striker. See: Adjustments/Door Cargo (Club Cab)/Striker-Upper Latch Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8045 Rear Door Striker: Service and Repair Door - Rear (Quad Cab) Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower c-pillar trim (7). See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal 2. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark the position of the striker (2). 3. Remove the bolts (3) and remove the striker. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Striker > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8046 1. Position the tapping plate (1) into the b-pillar. 2. Install the striker (2) and install the bolts (3). 3. Tighten the bolts to 28 Nm (21 ft. lbs.). 4. Adjust the striker if needed. See: Adjustments/Door - Rear (Quad Cab) 5. Install the lower c-pillar trim (7). See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel (1). See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Cargo (Club Cab)/Panel-Trim/Removal 2. Remove the six nuts (2) holding the glass (4) onto the door fence line (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8051 3. Using an adhesive cutting wire (4) or equivalent separate the glass adhesive (2) and remove the glass. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean the old glass sealer from the glass fence line. 2. Install new butel sealer around the edge of the glass if necessary. 3. Install the glass (1) and install the six nuts (2). 4. Tighten the nuts (2) to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). 5. Install the trim panel. See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Cargo (Club Cab)/Panel-Trim/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8052 Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Door - Rear (Quad Cab) Rear Door Glass - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear glass run channel (1). See: Windows and Glass/Windows/Window Track/Service and Repair/Rear Door Channel-Glass/Removal 2. Temporarily install the window switch or window handle and position the glass (1) to gain access to the glass clamp screws (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 8053 3. Pull rear of run channel weatherstrip out of channel. 4. Loosen the glass clamp screws (2) and carefully remove the glass (1) from the door. Rear Door Glass - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the glass into the door and position the glass (1) into the glass clamps. 2. Temporarily install the window crank handle or window switches and raise the glass into the full up position. 3. Tighten the glass clamp screws (2) securely. 4. Remove the manual window crank or window switches, and install the rear glass run channel (1). See: Windows and Glass/Windows/Window Track/Service and Repair/Rear Door Channel-Glass/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal Manual REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Removal 2. Reinstall the manual window crank and raise the door glass to the position shown (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 8058 3. Loosen the glass clamp screws (2). 4. Raise the glass into the full up position and secure into place with tape or equivalent. 5. Remove the two lower regulator bolts (3). 6. Remove the one bolt at the crank mechanism. 7. Loosen the remaining three regulator bolts (2) located at the keyhole slots. 8. Lift regulator up and out of the keyhole slots and remove from door. Power REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Removal Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 8059 2. Temporarily install the window switch and position the glass (1) to gain access to the glass clamp screws (2). 3. Loosen the glass clamp screws (2). 4. Raise the glass (1) into the full up position and secure into place with tape or equivalent. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector (3). 6. Remove the two lower regulator bolts and the one bolt at the motor (4). 7. Loosen the remaining three regulator bolts (2) located at the keyhole slots. 8. Lift regulator (1) up and out of the keyhole slots and remove from door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 8060 Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator - Installation Manual INSTALLATION 1. Place the regulator into the door and engage the bolts into the keyhole slots in the door. 2. Install the regulator lift mechanism bolt. 3. Install the two lower bolts (3). 4. Tighten all the regulator bolts to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 5. Remove the tape used to secure the glass during removal and position the glass (1) into the glass clamps. 6. Temporarily install the window crank handle and raise the glass into the full up position. 7. Tighten the glass clamp screws (2) securely. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 8061 8. Remove the manual window crank and install the watershield. See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Installation Power INSTALLATION 1. Place the regulator into the door and engage the bolts (2) into the keyhole slots in the door. 2. Install the one bolt at the motor and the two lower bolts (4). 3. Tighten all the regulator bolts to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the tape used to secure the glass during removal and position the glass (1) into the glass clamps. 6. Temporarily install the window switch and raise the glass into the full up position. 7. Tighten the glass clamp screws (2) securely. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 8062 8. Remove the window switch and install the watershield. See: Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hood Hinge: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the hood to replace one or both hinges. The hinges can be replaced one at a time. 1. Open hood and support the side that requires hinge replacement. 2. Mark all bolt and hinge attachment locations using a grease pencil or equivalent, to provide reference marks for installation. 3. Remove support cylinder from the upper hinge (1) See: Hood Shock / Support/Service and Repair/Removal. 4. Remove the nuts (2) attaching the hinge (1) to the hood. 5. From inside the engine compartment, remove the two hinge bolts (2). 6. Slide the hinge (1) forward and remove from the fender rail. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Hinge > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8068 Hood Hinge: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the hinge (1), slide back into position on the fender rail and align all marks. 2. From inside the engine compartment, install the two hinge bolts (2). 3. Tighten the rear bolt to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) 4. Tighten the front bolt to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.) 5. Install the nuts (2) attaching the hinge (1) to the hood and tighten the nuts to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.) 6. Install support cylinder See: Hood Shock / Support/Service and Repair/Installation. 7. Check hood fit and adjust if required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Adjustments Hood Latch: Adjustments ADJUSTMENTS 1. Check and adjust the hood if required. See: Adjustments 2. Remove the push pin fasteners and remove the upper radiator shroud. 3. Loosen the hood latch bolts. 4. Move the latch to the correct location and lightly tighten the bolts. 5. Close the hood slowly and observe the latching operation. 6. If necessary, adjust the latch position and tighten the bolts to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Release Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove hood latch (3). See: Hood Latch - Removal 2. Detach the release cable (1) and the retainer clips (2) in the engine compartment. 3. Separate the release cable grommet (3) from the dash panel hole. 4. From the inside of the vehicle, remove the screws (4) attaching the hood release handle to the bottom of the instrument panel (1). 5. Pull/route the hood release cable (2) through the dash panel hole and remove it from the inside of the vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Release > Page 8074 NOTE: If replacement hood latch is also being installed, ensure that it is thoroughly lubricated. 1. From inside the vehicle, pull/route the hood release cable (2) through the dash panel hole and into the engine compartment. 2. Install the hood release handle (1) and install the screws (4). 3. Install the cable grommet (3) in the dash panel hole. 4. Attach the retainer clips (2) to the release cable and install them into the holes in the engine compartment. 5. Install hood latch (3). See: Hood Latch - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Release > Page 8075 Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the push pin fasteners and remove the upper radiator shroud. 2. Using a grease pencil or equivalent, mark latch position for installation alignment. 3. Remove bolts (2) attaching hood latch (1) to upper radiator crossmember. 4. Separate hood latch (1) from crossmember and disconnect the release cable (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Release > Page 8076 Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect release cable (2) to the hood latch (1). 2. Install the latch (1) lining up the marks made previously and install the bolts (2). 3. Tighten the bolts to 11 Nm (8 ft. lbs.). 4. Close hood and adjust latch as necessary. See: Adjustments Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch Release > Page 8077 Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch Striker Removal REMOVAL 1. Mark all bolt and striker attachment locations using a grease pencil or equivalent, to provide reference marks for installation. 2. Remove mounting bolts and striker (1). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the striker (1), slide back into position and align all marks. 2. From inside the engine compartment, install the two bolts (2). 3. Tighten the bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hood Shock / Support: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The hood support cylinders can be replaced one at a time. 1. Open and support the hood. CAUTION: Do not pull on the hood support cylinders at the middle of the support cylinder during removal. Failure to follow this caution can result in damage to the hood support cylinders. 2. Using a small flat bladed tool, or equivalent (3), release the retaining clip (2) at each end of the support cylinder while carefully pulling the ball socket (1) away from the ball stud (4). NOTE: Lift the clips (1) only enough to release the ball studs (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8082 3. Disconnect the hood support cylinder (5) from the hood (1) and the fender rail (3). 4. If required, remove the upper ball stud (2) from hood and the lower ball stud (4) from the fender rail. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8083 Hood Shock / Support: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. If removed, install the upper ball stud (2) onto the hood (1) and the lower ball stud (4) onto the fender rail (3). Install the ball studs securely. CAUTION: Do not push on the hood support cylinders at the middle of the support cylinder during installation. Failure to follow this caution can result in damage to the hood support cylinders. NOTE: Install the hood support cylinders with the cylinder end connected to the hood as shown. NOTE: If required, only release each retaining clip enough to install the ball socket onto the ball stud. 2. Install the hood support cylinder (5) over the upper and lower ball studs and fully engage the retaining clips. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Striker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Hood Striker: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Mark all bolt and striker attachment locations using a grease pencil or equivalent, to provide reference marks for installation. 2. Remove mounting bolts and striker (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Striker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8088 Hood Striker: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the striker (1), slide back into position and align all marks. 2. From inside the engine compartment, install the two bolts (2). 3. Tighten the bolts to 20 Nm (15 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID: 302 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z384 20BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8093 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8094 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID: 302 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z384 20BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8095 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic market vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the left side of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel below the left rear corner of the inner hood panel reinforcement. The underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8098 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export market vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic market vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kOhm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the FCM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the FCM. The FCM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export market vehicle theft or domestic market remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch - Removal Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the left outboard end of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel, squeeze the two hood ajar switch latch tabs (2) together and pull the switch upward out of the mounting hole (1). 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the mounting hole far enough to access and disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the switch connector receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch - Removal > Page 8101 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the hood ajar switch (2) near the mounting hole (1) in the left outboard end of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the switch connector receptacle. 3. Insert the switch into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Body Emblem: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Exterior nameplates are attached to body panels with adhesive tape. 1. Apply a length of masking tape on the body, parallel to the top edge of the nameplate to use as a guide, if necessary. 2. If temperature is below 21°C (70°F) warm emblem with a heat lamp or gun. Do not exceed 52°C (120°F) when heating emblem. 3. Insert a plastic trim stick or a hard wood wedge behind the emblem to separate the adhesive backing from the body. 4. Clean adhesive residue from body with MOPAR(R) Super Clean solvent or equivalent. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Body Emblem > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8107 Body Emblem: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove carrier from adhesive tape on back of emblem. 2. Position emblem properly on body. 3. Press emblem firmly to body with palm of hand. 4. If temperature is below 21°C (70°F) warm emblem with a heat lamp or gun to assure adhesion. Do not exceed 52°C (120°F) when heating emblem. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Cowl Top Panel - Removal Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Top Panel - Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the hood and remove the wiper arm nuts and wiper arms. See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms Removal 2. Remove the four rear nuts and the two front pins. 3. Remove the cowl grille. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Lower Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Lower Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Apply a length of masking tape on the body, parallel to the top edge of the molding to use as a guide, if necessary. 2. Warm the effected adhesive type molding and body metal to approximately 38°C (100°F) using a suitable heat lamp or heat gun. 3. Pull stick-on molding from painted surface. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Lower Side Moulding / Trim > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8116 Lower Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean body surface with MOPAR(R) Super Kleen solvent or equivalent. Wipe surface dry with lint free cloth. 2. Remove protective cover from tape on back of molding. Apply molding to body below the masking tape guide. 3. Remove masking tape guide and firmly press molding to body surface to assure adhesion. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. If required, remove wheel. 2. Remove push pins. 3. Remove the rivets. 4. Remove liner. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8123 Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install liner. 2. Install push pins and rivets. 3. Install wheel if removed. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove all cab to frame mounting bolts (4) and rebound cushions (3). 2. Remove the front end sheet metal mounting bolt (5) and rebound cushion (6). 3. Using a floor jack and block of wood under the cab sill, lift the body to gain access to the isolators. 4. Remove the cab isolators (2) and the front end sheet metal mounting isolator (1). 5. Install new isolators and repeat steps one through 4, for the opposite side. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8129 Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Whenever a body isolator bolt requires servicing or tightening, it is necessary to remove the bolt and install new thread locker compound to the threads. 1. Install the isolators (2) rebound cushions (3), and bolts (4). 2. Install the front end sheet metal mounting isolators (1 & 6) and install the bolt (5). 3. Tighten the bolts to 81 Nm (60 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crossmember - Removal Cross-Member: Service and Repair Crossmember - Removal REMOVAL 1. Lift and support the vehicle. 2. Remove the four bolts (2) and nuts (1), and remove the crossmember. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Cross-Member > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crossmember - Removal > Page 8134 Cross-Member: Service and Repair Crossmember - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the crossmember (3) and install the bolts (2) and nuts (1). 2. Tighten the bolts and nuts to 102 Nm (75 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Hitch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Installation Trailer Hitch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the hitch (2) and install the bolts (1). 2. Tighten the bolts to 170 Nm (125 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the trailer wiring electrical connectors. 4. Install the bumper. See: Bumper/Rear Bumper/Service and Repair/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Towing Relay: Locations Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Left Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay > Page 8143 Trailer Towing Relay: Locations Right Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Right Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 186 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) > Page 8146 Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Right Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 187 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Grille - Removal Grille: Service and Repair Grille - Removal REMOVAL 1. Open hood. 2. Remove the 12 screws and nuts and remove the grille from bracket. 3. Remove the screws and the grille bracket from hood. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Grille - Removal > Page 8151 Grille: Service and Repair Grille - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the grille bracket and loose install the screws. 2. Tighten the screws to 3.2 Nm (29 ins. lbs.) using the sequence shown. 3. Install the grille to bracket and loose install the screws. 4. Tighten the screws to 3.2 Nm (29 ins. lbs.) using the sequence shown. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal Carpet: Service and Repair Carpet - Removal REMOVAL Club Cab, Without Rear Jumper Seats WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, occupant classification system, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or inoperative buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or faulty seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the outer front seat belt retractor covers, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cover-Outer Front Seat Belt Retractor/Removal. NOTE: Cowl trim panel for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. 3. Remove the cowl trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8157 4. Remove the rear door sill scuff plates, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Removal. 5. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (3) from the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor (1). 6. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the retractor mounting bracket to the floor panel inboard of the door sill (4) and position the retractor aside. NOTE: Electric front seats shown. Other seats similar. 7. Remove the front seats, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8158 NOTE: Mini floor console shown. Full floor console different. 8. Remove the floor console, See: Console/Service and Repair/Floor Console - Removal. 9. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 10. Remove the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. NOTE: Cab back trim panel with jumper seats shown. Trim panel without similar. 11. Remove the cab back trim panel, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8159 12. Remove the jack storage compartment cover. NOTE: Carpet for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. 13. Remove the carpet (1) from the vehicle. Club Cab, With Rear Jumper Seats WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, occupant classification system, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or inoperative buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or faulty seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before further service. 2. Remove the outer front seat belt retractor covers, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cover-Outer Front Seat Belt Retractor/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8160 NOTE: Cowl trim panel for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. 3. Remove the cowl trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim Removal. 4. Remove the rear door sill scuff plates, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Removal. 5. Disconnect the body wire harness connector (3) from the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor (1). 6. Remove the two screws (2) that secure the retractor mounting bracket to the floor panel inboard of the door sill (4) and position the retractor aside. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8161 NOTE: Electric front seats shown. Other seats similar. 7. Remove the front seats, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal. NOTE: Mini floor console shown. Full floor console different. 8. Remove the floor console, See: Console/Service and Repair/Floor Console - Removal. 9. Remove the rear jumper seat cushions, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8162 10. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 11. Remove the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 12. Remove the cab back trim panel, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel Removal. 13. Remove the jack storage compartment cover. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8163 NOTE: Carpet for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. 14. Remove the carpet (1) from the vehicle. Quad Cab NOTE: Bucket seats shown. Bench seat similar. 1. Remove the front seats, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal. NOTE: Full floor console shown. Mini floor console different. 2. Remove the floor console, See: Console/Service and Repair/Floor Console - Removal. 3. Remove the rear cup holder. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8164 4. Remove the cowl trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim Removal. 5. Remove the rear door sill scuff plates, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Removal 6. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8165 8. Remove the rear seat, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal. 9. Remove the jack. 10. If equipped, remove the satellite receiver module, See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Radio Receiver/Service and Repair/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8166 11. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 12. Remove the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 13. Remove the cab back trim panel, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel Removal. 14. Remove the carpet (1) from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8167 Carpet: Service and Repair Carpet - Installation INSTALLATION Club Cab, Without Rear Jumper Seats WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, occupant classification system, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or inoperative buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or faulty seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: Carpet for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. 1. For vehicles equipped with a manual shift transmission, remove the cutout (2) from the carpet for the shifter assembly. 2. Position the carpet (1) in the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8168 NOTE: Cab back trim panel with jumper seats shown. Trim panel without similar. 3. Install the cab back trim panel, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel Installation. 4. Install the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 5. Install the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 6. Install the jack storage compartment cover. NOTE: Mini floor console shown. Full floor console different. 7. Install the floor console, See: Console/Service and Repair/Floor Console - Installation. NOTE: Electric front seats shown. Other seats similar. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8169 8. Install the front seats, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation. 9. Position the retractor (1) mounting bracket to the mounting holes in the floor panel inboard of the door sill (4). Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the retractor and the turning loop is not twisted. 10. Install the two screws (2) that secure the retractor bracket to the floor panel. Tighten the screws to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 11. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (3) to the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor. 12. Install the rear door sill scuff plates, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Installation. NOTE: Cowl trim panel for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8170 13. Install the cowl trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim Installation. 14. Install the outer front seat belt retractor covers, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cover-Outer Front Seat Belt Retractor/Installation. 15. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Club Cab, With Rear Jumper Seats WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the supplemental restraint system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, occupant classification system, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the supplemental restraint system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. WARNING: To avoid personal injury or death, during and following any seat belt or child restraint anchor service, carefully inspect all seat belts, buckles, mounting hardware, retractors, tether straps, and anchors for proper installation, operation, or damage. Replace any belt that is cut, frayed, or torn. Straighten any belt that is twisted. Tighten any loose fasteners. Replace any belt that has a damaged or inoperative buckle or retractor. Replace any belt that has a bent or damaged latch plate or anchor plate. Replace any child restraint anchor or the unit to which the anchor is integral that has been bent or damaged. Never attempt to repair a seat belt or child restraint component. Always replace damaged or faulty seat belt and child restraint components with the correct, new and unused replacement parts listed in the DaimlerChrysler Mopar(R) Parts Catalog. NOTE: Carpet for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. 1. For vehicles equipped with a manual shift transmission, remove the cutout (2) from the carpet for the shifter assembly. 2. Position the carpet (1) in the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8171 3. Install the cab back trim panel, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel Installation. 4. Install the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 5. Install the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8172 6. Install the rear jumper seat cushions, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation. 7. Install the jack storage compartment cover. NOTE: Mini floor console shown. Full floor console different. 8. Install the floor console, See: Console/Service and Repair/Floor Console - Installation. NOTE: Electric front seats shown. Other seats similar. 9. Install the front seats, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8173 10. Position the retractor (1) mounting bracket to the mounting holes in the floor panel inboard of the door sill (4). Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the retractor and the turning loop is not twisted. 11. Install the two screws (2) that secure the retractor bracket to the floor panel. Tighten the screws to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 12. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (3) to the seat belt tensioner initiator on the retractor. 13. Install the rear door sill scuff plates, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Installation. NOTE: Cowl trim panel for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. 14. Install the cowl trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8174 15. Install the outer front seat belt retractor covers, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cover-Outer Front Seat Belt Retractor/Installation. 16. Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at this time. The supplemental restraint system verification test procedure should be performed following service of any supplemental restraint system component. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Verification Tests. Quad Cab NOTE: Bucket seats shown. Bench seat similar. 1. For vehicles equipped with a manual shift transmission, remove the cutout (2) from the carpet for the shifter assembly. 2. Position the carpet (1) in the vehicle. 3. Install the cab back trim panel, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8175 4. Install the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 5. Install the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 6. Install the rear seat, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation. 7. If equipped, install the satellite receiver module, See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Radio/Stereo/Radio Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8176 Receiver/Service and Repair/Installation. 8. Install the jack. 9. Install the lower B-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 10. Install the upper B-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. NOTE: Full floor console shown. Mini console different. 11. Install the floor console, See: Console/Service and Repair/Floor Console - Installation. 12. Install the rear cup holder. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Carpet > Component Information > Service and Repair > Carpet - Removal > Page 8177 NOTE: Bucket seats shown. Bench seat similar. 13. Install the front seats, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation. 14. Install the rear door sill scuff plates, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Installation. 15. Install the cowl trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Description and Operation Console: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION NOTE: The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) is sometimes referred to as the Electronic Overhead Modules (EOM) for the purposes of scan tool and diagnostic information naming. Please treat the CMTC and EOM as one and the same when diagnosing the vehicle. NOTE: The overhead console reading lamp switches, bulb holders and wiring harness are serviced only as a unit and are not available individually for service. An overhead console (1) is available on this vehicle and includes the following components: - Front map/reading lamps (2) - A vacuum-fluorescent display screen (4) - if equipped with CMTC - HomeLink(R) transceiver (3) - if equipped - CMTC Module - if equipped - Power Sunroof Switch - if equipped The overhead console assembly is mounted by two snap clips and a screw securing it to a molded plastic retainer bracket located above the headliner. The CMTC module is accessed by removing the overhead console from the bracket and pulling it away from the headliner. The CMTC module consist of the vacuum-fluorescent display screen, HomeLink(R) transceiver and four function buttons. The individual components of the CMTC module are not serviced separately and if damaged or inoperative, must be replaced as a unit. For additional information on the CMTC module and system, See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Compass/Description and Operation/Description. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console - Removal Console: Service and Repair Overhead Console - Removal OVERHEAD CONSOLE 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console retaining screw (2), located in the front of console near the windshield. 3. Using your fingertips, grasp the sides of the overhead console (1) and pull straight down evenly to disengage the two snap clips at the rear of the unit. 4. Lower the overhead console from the headliner far enough to access the wire harness connectors. 5. Disconnect the reading lamp wire harness connector (2). 6. If equipped, disconnect the sunroof switch wire harness connector (1). 7. If equipped, disconnect the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) module wire harness connector (3). 8. Remove the overhead console from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console - Removal > Page 8183 Console: Service and Repair Overhead Console - Installation OVERHEAD CONSOLE 1. Position the overhead console near the mounting location on the headliner. 2. Connect the reading lamp wire harness connector (2). 3. If equipped, connect the sunroof switch wire harness connector (1). 4. If equipped, connect the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) module wire harness connector (3). 5. Align the snap clips on the overhead console housing with their receptacles (3) in the overhead console bracket. 6. Push upward firmly and evenly on the sides of the overhead console housing over the snap clip locations until the snap clips are fully engaged with the receptacles in the overhead console bracket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console - Removal > Page 8184 7. Install the overhead console retaining screw (2), located in the front of console (1) near the windshield. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console - Removal > Page 8185 Console: Service and Repair Floor Console - Removal REMOVAL MINI FLOOR CONSOLE 1. If equipped, remove the shift boot (2), . 2. Remove the rubber liners (1). 3. Remove the screws (2) that secure the floor console (3) to the floor panel and remove the floor console. FULL FLOOR CONSOLE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console - Removal > Page 8186 1. Remove the rubber liner (1). 2. Remove the cup holder (3). 3. Remove the tray (4). 4. Remove the screws (2) (5) that secure the floor console (7) to the floor panel. 5. Disconnect the console assembly wire harness connector (6) located underneath the floor console and remove the floor console from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console - Removal > Page 8187 Console: Service and Repair Floor Console - Installation INSTALLATION MINI FLOOR CONSOLE 1. Position the floor console (3) in the vehicle and install the screws (2) that secure the console to the floor panel. 2. Install the rubber liners (1). 3. If equipped, install the shift boot (2), . FULL FLOOR CONSOLE Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console - Removal > Page 8188 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Overhead Console - Removal > Page 8189 ERROR: stackunderflow OFFENDING COMMAND: ~ STACK: Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the glove box and squeeze the stop tabs inward. 2. Lower the glove box and release the hinges (1) using a twisting motion and remove the glove box. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Glove Compartment > Component Information > Service and Repair > Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal > Page 8194 Glove Compartment: Service and Repair Instrument Panel Glove Box - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the glove box and twist the box tabs (2) onto the hinges (1) using a twisting motion as indicated. 2. Close the box and squeeze the stop tabs inward and engage into the instrument panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal Headliner: Service and Repair Headliner - Removal REMOVAL Club Cab, Without Rear Jumper Seats 1. Pull the top of each door seal downward slightly. 2. Remove the upper door striker trim covers (3) as follows: - Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the edges of the upper door striker trim cover (3) away from the headliner (2) far enough to disengage the two snap clips that secure the cover to the upper roof rail (1). 3. Determine which side of the vehicle the headliner will be removed from and disconnect the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster (3) from the upper roof rail (1) on that side of the vehicle as follows: Remove the two screws (2) that secure the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster bracket (3) to the upper roof rail (1) and position it aside. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal > Page 8199 4. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 5. Remove the A-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/A-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. NOTE: Headliner for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. 6. Disconnect the wire harness connector (5) located at the right A-pillar. 7. If equipped, disconnect the headliner wire harness connector (2) from the inside rear view mirror. 8. If equipped, remove the overhead console, See: Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 9. Remove the sun visors (4), See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor - Removal. 10. Remove the sun visor supports (3), See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor Support Removal. 11. If equipped, remove the front dome lamp, See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Removal. 12. If equipped, remove the rear dome lamp, See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Removal. 13. Remove the two coat hooks, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Coat Hook - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal > Page 8200 14. Remove the front seat headrests. 15. Lower the rear of the headliner (7) and disconnect the headliner wire harness connector (1) from the center high mounted stop lamp. 16. Recline the front seats. CAUTION: Be careful not to crease the headliner. 17. Lower the front of the headliner and remove the headliner through the door opening where the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster was disconnected from the upper roof rail. Club Cab, With Rear Jumper Seats 1. Pull the top of each door seal downward slightly. 2. Remove the upper door striker trim covers (3) as follows: - Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the edges of the upper door striker trim cover (3) away from the headliner (2) far enough to disengage the two snap clips that secure the cover to the upper roof rail (1). 3. Determine which side of the vehicle the headliner will be removed from and disconnect the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster (3) from the upper roof rail (1) on that side of the vehicle as follows: Remove the two screws (2) that secure the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster bracket (3) to the upper roof rail (1) and position it aside. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal > Page 8201 4. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 5. Remove the A-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/A-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. NOTE: Headliner for Quad Cab models shown. Club Cab similar. 6. Disconnect the wire harness connector (5) located at the right A-pillar. 7. If equipped, disconnect the headliner wire harness connector (2) from the inside rear view mirror. 8. If equipped, remove the overhead console, See: Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal > Page 8202 9. Remove the sun visors (4), See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor - Removal. 10. Remove the sun visor supports (3), See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor Support Removal. 11. If equipped, remove the front dome lamp, See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Removal. 12. If equipped, remove the rear dome lamp, See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Removal. 13. Remove the two coat hooks, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Coat Hook - Removal. 14. Remove the front seat headrests. 15. Remove the cab back trim panel, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal. 16. Remove the rear jumper seat headrests. 17. Remove the rear jumper seat headrest sleeves from the headliner. 18. Lower the rear of the headliner (7) and disconnect the headliner wire harness connector (1) from the center high mounted stop lamp. 19. Recline the front seats. CAUTION: Be careful not to crease the headliner. 20. Lower the front of the headliner and remove the headliner through the door opening where the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster was disconnected from the upper roof rail. Quad Cab 1. Pull the top of each door seal downward slightly. 2. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal > Page 8203 3. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 4. Remove the A-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/A-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector (5) located at the right A-pillar. 6. If equipped, disconnect the headliner wire harness connector (2) from the inside rear view mirror. 7. If equipped, remove the overhead console, See: Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 8. Remove the sun visors (4), See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor - Removal. 9. Remove the sun visor supports (3), See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor Support - Removal. 10. If equipped, remove the front dome lamp, See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Removal. 11. If equipped, remove the rear dome lamp, See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Removal. 12. Remove the two coat hooks, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Coat Hook - Removal. 13. Remove the right front seat headrest. 14. Recline the right front seat. 15. Remove the left front seat, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal. 16. Lower the rear of the headliner (7) and disconnect the headliner wire harness connector (1) from the center high mounted stop lamp. CAUTION: Be careful not to crease the headliner. 17. Lower the front of the headliner and remove the headliner through the left door opening. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal > Page 8204 Headliner: Service and Repair Headliner - Installation INSTALLATION Club Cab, Without Rear Jumper Seats CAUTION: Be careful not to crease the headliner. NOTE: Headliner for Quad Cab model shown. Club Cab similar. 1. Position the headliner (6) in the vehicle through the door opening from which it was removed. 2. Connect the headliner wire harness connector (1) to the center high mounted stop lamp. 3. Raise the rear of the headliner (7) to the roof panel and install the two coat hooks, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Coat Hook - Installation. 4. Raise the front of the headliner to the roof panel and install the sun visor supports (3), See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor Support Installation. 5. Connect the wire harness connector (5) located at the right A-pillar. 6. If equipped, connect the headliner wire harness connector (2) to the inside rear view mirror. 7. If equipped, install the overhead console, See: Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Installation. 8. Install the sun visors (4), See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor - Installation. 9. If equipped, install the front dome lamp, See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp Installation. 10. Install the A-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/A-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 11. If equipped, install the rear dome lamp, See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal > Page 8205 12. Install the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 13. Position the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster (3) bracket to the mounting holes in the upper roof rail (1) and install the two screws (2) that secure the bracket to the roof rail. Tighten the screws to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 14. Install the upper door striker trim covers (3) as follows: - Position the trim cover (3) to the headliner (2) opening around the door striker and engage the retaining tabs that secure the cover to the roof rail. 15. Install the front seat headrests. 16. Seat the top of each of door seal to the door opening. Club Cab, With Rear Jumper Seats Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal > Page 8206 NOTE: Headliner for Quad Cab model shown. Club Cab similar. CAUTION: Be careful not to crease the headliner. 1. Position the headliner (6) in the vehicle through the door opening from which it was removed. 2. Connect the headliner wire harness connector (1) to the center high mounted stop lamp. 3. Raise the rear of the headliner (7) to the roof panel and install the two coat hooks, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Coat Hook - Installation. 4. Raise the front of the headliner to the roof panel and install the sun visor supports (3), See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor Support Installation. 5. Connect the wire harness connector (5) located at the right A-pillar. 6. If equipped, connect the headliner wire harness connector (2) to the inside rear view mirror. 7. If equipped, install the overhead console, See: Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Installation. 8. Install the sun visors (4), See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor - Installation. 9. If equipped, install the front dome lamp, See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp Installation. 10. Install the A-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/A-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 11. If equipped, install the rear dome lamp, See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Installation. 12. Install the rear jumper seat headrest sleeves in the headliner. 13. Install the rear jumper seat headrests. 14. Install the cab back trim panel, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal > Page 8207 15. Install the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 16. Position the seat belt turning loop and height adjuster (3) bracket to the mounting holes in the upper roof rail (1) and install the two screws (2) that secure the bracket to the roof rail. Tighten the screws to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 17. Install the upper door striker trim covers (3) as follows: - Position the trim cover (3) to the headliner (2) opening around the door striker and engage the retaining tabs that secure the cover to the roof rail. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal > Page 8208 18. Install the front seat headrests. 19. Seat the top of each of door seal to the door opening. Quad Cab CAUTION: Be careful not to crease the headliner. 1. Position the headliner in the vehicle through the left door opening. 2. Connect the headliner wire harness connector (1) to the center high mounted stop lamp. 3. Raise the rear of the headliner (7) to the roof panel and install the two coat hooks, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Coat Hook Installation. 4. Raise the front of the headliner to the roof panel and install the sun visor supports (3), See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor Support Installation. 5. Install the left front seat, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation. 6. Install the right front seat headrest. 7. Connect the wire harness connector (5) located at the right A-pillar. 8. If equipped, connect the headliner wire harness connector (2) to the inside rear view mirror. 9. If equipped, install the overhead console, See: Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console Installation. 10. Install the sun visors (4), See: Sun Visor/Service and Repair/Sun Visor - Installation. 11. If equipped, install the front dome lamp, See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Installation. 12. Install the A-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/A-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 13. If equipped, install the rear dome lamp, See: Lighting and Horns/Dome Lamp/Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headliner - Removal > Page 8209 14. Install the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 15. Install the upper B-pillar trim panels, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 16. Seat the top of each of door seal to the door opening. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Sill Scuff Plate - Removal Scuff Plate: Service and Repair Door Sill Scuff Plate - Removal REMOVAL Club Cab 1. Remove the outer front seat belt retractor cover, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cover-Outer Front Seat Belt Retractor/Removal. 2. To access the rear door sill scuff plate for removal, use a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent to disengage enough of the retaining tabs (2) that secure the door sill scuff plate end of the cowl trim panel to the retaining clips in the front door sill. 3. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs (2) that secure the rear door sill scuff plate (1) to the retaining clips in the Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Sill Scuff Plate - Removal > Page 8214 rear door sill and remove the scuff plate. Quad Cab 1. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs (2) that secure the rear door sill scuff plate (1) to the retaining clips in the rear door sill and remove the scuff plate. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Sill Scuff Plate - Removal > Page 8215 Scuff Plate: Service and Repair Door Sill Scuff Plate - Installation INSTALLATION Club Cab 1. Align the retaining tabs (2) on the rear door sill scuff plate (1) with the retaining clips in the rear door sill and engage the retaining tabs that secure the scuff plate to the door sill. 2. Align the retaining tabs (2) on the door sill scuff plate end of the cowl trim panel with the retaining clips in the front door sill and engage the retaining tabs that secure the trim panel to the door sill. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Scuff Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Sill Scuff Plate - Removal > Page 8216 3. Install the outer front seat belt retractor cover, See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cover-Outer Front Seat Belt Retractor/Installation. Quad Cab 1. Align the retaining tabs (2) on the rear door sill scuff plate (1) with the retaining clips in the rear door sill and engage the retaining tabs that secure the scuff plate to the door sill. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sun Visor - Removal Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sun Visor - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disengage the sun visor (2) from the sun visor support. 2. Remove the two screws that secure the sun visor to the roof panel and remove the sun visor from the headliner (1). 3. If equipped, disconnect the illuminated vanity mirror wire harness connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sun Visor - Removal > Page 8221 Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sun Visor - Installation INSTALLATION 1. If equipped, connect the illuminated vanity mirror wire harness connector. 2. Position the sun visor (2) on the headliner (1) and install the two screws that secure the sun visor to the roof panel. 3. Engage the sun visor and sun visor support. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sun Visor - Removal > Page 8222 Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sun Visor Support - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disengage the sun visor (1) from the sun visor support (2). 2. Remove the screw that secures the support to the roof panel and remove the support from the headliner (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Sun Visor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sun Visor - Removal > Page 8223 Sun Visor: Service and Repair Sun Visor Support - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the sun visor support (2) on the headliner (3) and install the screw that secures the support to the roof panel. 2. Engage the sun visor (1) and sun visor support. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal Trim Panel: Service and Repair Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal REMOVAL Club Cab, Without Rear Jumper Seats 1. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 2. Remove the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. NOTE: Cab back trim panel with jumper seats shown. Trim panel without similar. 3. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining clips (2) that secure the cab back trim panel (1) to the cab and remove the trim panel. Club Cab, With Rear Jumper Seats Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8228 1. Remove the rear jumper seat cushions, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal. 2. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 3. Remove the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8229 4. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining clips (2) that secure the cab back trim panel (1) to the cab and remove the trim panel. Quad Cab 1. Remove the rear seats, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8230 2. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 3. Remove the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 4. Remove the three fasteners (2) that secure the cab back trim panel (1) to the cab. 5. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining clips that secure the cab back trim panel to the cab and remove the trim panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8231 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Cab Back Trim Panel - Installation INSTALLATION Club Cab, Without Rear Jumper Seats NOTE: Cab back trim panel with jumper seats shown. Trim panel without seats similar. 1. Position the cab back trim panel (1) in the vehicle. 2. Using hand pressure, engage the clips (2) that secure the cab back trim panel to the cab. 3. Install the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 4. Install the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. Club Cab, With Rear Jumper Seats Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8232 1. Position the cab back trim panel (1) in the vehicle. 2. Using hand pressure, engage the clips (2) that secure the cab back trim panel to the cab. 3. Install the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 4. Install the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8233 5. Install the rear jumper seat cushions, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation. Quad Cab 1. Position the cab back trim panel (1) in the vehicle. 2. Using hand pressure, engage the clips that secure the cab back trim panel to the cab. 3. Install the three fasteners (2) that secure the cab back trim panel to the cab. 4. Install the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8234 5. Install the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 6. Install the rear seats, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8235 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Coat Hook - Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the release clip (2) as shown and remove the coat hook (1) from the headliner (3) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8236 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Coat Hook - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the coat hook (1) through the headliner (3) and fully seat the base of the support to the roof panel. 2. Engage the release clip (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8237 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal REMOVAL Club Cab, Without Rear Jumper Seats 1. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 2. Remove the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. NOTE: Cab back trim panel with jumper seats shown. Trim panel without similar. 3. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining clips (2) that secure the cab back trim panel (1) to the cab and remove the trim panel. Club Cab, With Rear Jumper Seats Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8238 1. Remove the rear jumper seat cushions, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal. 2. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 3. Remove the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8239 4. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining clips (2) that secure the cab back trim panel (1) to the cab and remove the trim panel. Quad Cab 1. Remove the rear seats, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8240 2. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 3. Remove the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 4. Remove the three fasteners (2) that secure the cab back trim panel (1) to the cab. 5. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining clips that secure the cab back trim panel to the cab and remove the trim panel. Cab Back Trim Panel - Installation INSTALLATION Club Cab, Without Rear Jumper Seats Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8241 NOTE: Cab back trim panel with jumper seats shown. Trim panel without seats similar. 1. Position the cab back trim panel (1) in the vehicle. 2. Using hand pressure, engage the clips (2) that secure the cab back trim panel to the cab. 3. Install the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 4. Install the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. Club Cab, With Rear Jumper Seats Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8242 1. Position the cab back trim panel (1) in the vehicle. 2. Using hand pressure, engage the clips (2) that secure the cab back trim panel to the cab. 3. Install the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 4. Install the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8243 5. Install the rear jumper seat cushions, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation. Quad Cab 1. Position the cab back trim panel (1) in the vehicle. 2. Using hand pressure, engage the clips that secure the cab back trim panel to the cab. 3. Install the three fasteners (2) that secure the cab back trim panel to the cab. 4. Install the lower C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8244 5. Install the upper C-pillar trim panels, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 6. Install the rear seats, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation. Coat Hook - Removal REMOVAL 1. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the release clip (2) as shown and remove the coat hook (1) from the headliner (3) Coat Hook - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the coat hook (1) through the headliner (3) and fully seat the base of the support to the roof panel. 2. Engage the release clip (2). Removal Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8245 REMOVAL 1. Remove the two plastic push-pin retainers (2) that secure the outer front seat belt retractor cover (1) to the outer front seat belt retractor (3). 2. Raise the retractor cover upward to disengage the two locator pins on the inside top of the inboard retractor cover from the locator holes in the top of the retractor. 3. Spread the bottom of the inboard (1) and outboard (3) retractor cover halves apart and disengage the snaps located at the top of the cover halves and remove the cover halves. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the inboard (1) and outboard (3) outer seat belt retractor cover halves around the seat belt (2) with the top of each half angled toward the Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8246 other and engage the snaps that secure the two halves together. Then, close the cover around the seat belt. 2. Using hand pressure, push the retractor cover (1) downward over the retractor (3) far enough to engage the two locator pins in the top of the inboard cover half with the locator holes in the top of the retractor. 3. Install the two plastic push-pin retainers (2) that secure the retractor cover to the retractor. Cowl Trim - Removal REMOVAL Club Cab 1. Remove the outer front seat belt retractor cover, See: Cover-Outer Front Seat Belt Retractor/Removal. 2. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs (2) that secure the door sill scuff plate end of the cowl trim panel to the Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8247 retaining clips in the front door sill. 3. Pull the door sill scuff plate end of the cowl trim panel upward to disengage the retaining tabs that secure the trim panel (1) to the cowl and remove the trim panel. Quad Cab 1. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the door sill scuff plate (1) end of the cowl trim panel to the retaining clips (2) in the front door sill (3). 2. Pull the door sill scuff plate end of the cowl trim panel upward to disengage the retaining tabs that secure the trim panel to the cowl and remove the trim panel. Cowl Trim - Installation INSTALLATION Club Cab 1. Position the cowl trim panel (1) in the vehicle with the door sill scuff plate end (2) of the trim panel angled upward. Seat the upper outer end of the trim panel underneath the dash panel and engage the retaining tabs that secure the trim panel to the cowl. 2. Align the retaining tabs on the door sill scuff plate end of the trim panel with the retaining clips in the front door sill and engage the retaining tabs that secure the trim panel to the door sill. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8248 3. Install the outer front seat belt retractor cover, See: Cover-Outer Front Seat Belt Retractor/Installation. Quad Cab 1. Position the cowl trim panel in the vehicle with the door sill scuff plate end (1) of the trim panel angled upward. Seat the upper outer end of the trim panel underneath the dash panel and engage the retaining tabs that secure the trim panel to the cowl. 2. Align the retaining tabs on the door sill scuff plate end of the trim panel with the retaining clips (2) in the front door sill (3) and engage the retaining tabs that secure the trim panel to the door sill. Front Door Trim Panel - Removal REMOVAL 1. If equipped, remove the manual window crank (2) using a window crank removal tool (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8249 2. Disconnect and isolate battery negative cable. 3. Remove the screw (2) at the interior handle. 4. Remove the screw (4) from the pull cup. 5. Remove the lower screws (5). CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not pull the door trim panel directly off of the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 6. Lift the door trim panel straight upward to disconnect the molded plastic retaining clips (6) from the door. 7. Disconnect the interior handle (3) actuator rod (1) from the handle (2). 8. Disconnect the electrical connectors (2) for the window switch assembly (3), if equipped. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8250 9. Disconnect the trim panel speaker electrical connector (1), if equipped. Front Door Trim Panel - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the trim panel speaker electrical connector (1), if equipped. 2. Connect the electrical connectors (2) for the window switch assembly (3), if equipped. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8251 3. Connect the interior handle (3) actuator rod (1) to the handle (2). CAUTION: The door trim panel is attached to the door by molded plastic retaining clips that are integral to the door trim panel. Do not pull the door trim panel directly off of the door or damage to the trim panel and/or the power switch assembly will occur. 4. Position the door trim panel (3) and align the molded plastic retaining clips (6) to the door. 5. Lift the trim panel up and onto the lock rod (1) and attachment hooks (6). 6. Push the door trim panel straight downward until all of the retaining clips are fully engaged to the door. 7. Install the lower screws (5). 8. Install the screw (4) from the pull cup. 9. Install the screw (2) at the interior handle. 10. Install the manual window crank handle (2), if equipped. 11. Connect battery negative cable. A-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8252 1. Using a small flat bladed tool or equivalent, carefully open the two fastener covers in the A-pillar trim panel (1). 2. Remove the two bolts (2) that secure the A-pillar trim panel to the A-pillar and remove the trim panel. A-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the locating tabs (3) of the A-pillar trim panel into the slots located in the top of the instrument panel and install the trim panel (1) onto the A-pillar. 2. Install the two bolts (2) that secure the A-pillar trim panel to the A-pillar. Tighten the bolts to 6 Nm (55 in. lbs.). 3. Close the two fastener covers in the A-pillar trim panel. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8253 1. Remove the cowl trim panel, See: Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Removal. 2. Remove the rear door sill scuff plate, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Removal. 3. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position. 4. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel, See: Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8254 5. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs (2) (3) that secure the lower B-pillar trim panel (4) to the B-pillar. 6. Remove the seat belt (1) from the lower B-pillar trim panel through the slot provided and remove the trim panel. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the lower B-pillar trim panel (4) in the vehicle. 2. Route the seat belt (1) through the slot provided in the lower B-pillar trim panel. 3. Position the lower B-pillar trim panel to the B-pillar and engage the retaining tabs (2) (3) that secure the trim panel to the B-pillar. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8255 4. Install the upper B-pillar trim panel, See: Pillar Trim/B-Pillar Trim. 5. Install the rear door sill scuff plate, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Installation. 6. Install the cowl trim panel, See: Cowl Trim/Cowl Trim - Installation. Removal REMOVAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8256 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position. 2. Remove the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame (2). 3. Unsnap the trim cover (4) from the front seat belt (6) turning loop. 4. Remove the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the height adjuster (2) on the upper B-pillar. 5. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the height adjuster. 6. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the upper B-pillar trim panel (3) to the B-pillar (1) and remove the trim panel. Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8257 1. Slide the upper retaining tab of the upper B-pillar trim panel (3) into the hole in the B-pillar (1) and engage the retaining tabs that secure the trim panel to the B-pillar. 2. Position the seat belt (6) turning loop onto the height adjuster (2) on the upper B-pillar. 3. Install the screw (5) that secures the turning loop to the height adjuster. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 4. Engage the upper edge of a trim cover (4) over the top of the turning loop. Then, squeeze the lower end of the trim cover and the turning loop together firmly and evenly until the engagement tabs of the trim cover snap into the slots of the turning loop. 5. Position the seat belt (1) lower anchor to the mounting hole on the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame (2). Be certain that the seat belt webbing between the turning loop and the lower anchor is not twisted. 6. Install the screw (3) that secures the lower anchor to the outboard side of the front seat cushion frame. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). Lower REMOVAL Club Cab, Without Rear Jumper Seats 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8258 2. Remove the outer front seat belt retractor cover, See: Cover-Outer Front Seat Belt Retractor/Removal. 3. Remove the rear door sill scuff plate, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Removal. CAUTION: Keep the inner bottom end of the upper C-pillar trim panel away from the cab back trim panel when removing the upper C-pillar trim panel to prevent scratching the back trim panel. 4. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panel, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 5. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the lower C-pillar trim panel (4) to the C-pillar and remove the trim panel. Club Cab, With Rear Jumper Seats 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8259 2. Fold up the rear jumper seat. 3. Remove the outer front seat belt retractor cover, See: Cover-Outer Front Seat Belt Retractor/Removal. 4. Remove the rear door sill scuff plate, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Removal. CAUTION: Keep the inner bottom end of the upper C-pillar trim panel away from the cab back trim panel when removing the upper C-pillar trim panel to prevent scratching the back trim panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8260 5. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panel, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 6. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the lower C-pillar trim panel (7) to the C-pillar (1). 7. Remove the screw (6) that secures the lower anchor to the floor panel near the base of the C-pillar. 8. Remove the seat belt (3) from the lower C-pillar trim panel through the slots provided and remove the trim panel. Quad Cab 1. Remove the rear door sill scuff plate, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Removal. 2. Remove the rear seat, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Removal. 3. Remove the upper C-pillar trim panel, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal. 4. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the lower C-pillar trim panel (7) to the C-pillar (1). 5. Remove the screw (6) that secures the lower anchor to the floor panel near the base of the C-pillar. 6. Remove the seat belt (3) from the lower C-pillar trim panel through the slots provided and remove the trim panel. Upper REMOVAL Club Cab, Without Rear Jumper Seats 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8261 2. CAUTION: Keep the inner bottom end of the upper C-pillar trim panel away from the cab back trim panel when removing the upper C-pillar trim panel to prevent scratching the back trim panel. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs (3) that secure the upper C-pillar trim panel (2) to the C-pillar. Pull the outer bottom end of the trim panel outward toward the door opening so that the inner bottom end of the trim panel doesn't touch the cab back trim panel. While maintaining the outward pressure, pull the trim panel away from the C-pillar and remove the trim panel. Club Cab, With Rear Jumper Seats 1. Adjust the front seat to its most forward position. 2. Unsnap the trim cover (4) from the rear seat belt turning loop (3). 3. Remove the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the upper C-pillar (1). 4. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the C-pillar. 5. CAUTION: Keep the inner bottom end of the upper C-pillar trim panel away from the cab back trim panel when removing the upper C-pillar trim panel to prevent scratching the back trim panel. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the upper C-pillar trim panel (2) to the C-pillar. Pull the outer bottom end of the trim panel outward toward the door opening so that the inner bottom end of the trim panel doesn't touch the cab back trim panel. While maintaining the outward pressure, pull the trim panel away from the C-pillar and remove the trim panel. Quad Cab Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8262 1. Unsnap the trim cover (4) from the rear seat belt turning loop (3). 2. Remove the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the upper C-pillar (1). 3. Remove the seat belt turning loop from the C-pillar. 4. Using a trim stick C-4755 or equivalent, disengage the retaining tabs that secure the upper C-pillar trim panel (2) to the C-pillar and then pull the trim panel away from the C-pillar and remove the trim panel. Lower INSTALLATION Club Cab, Without Rear Jumper Seats 1. Position the lower C-pillar trim panel (4) to the C-pillar and engage the retaining tabs that secure the trim panel to the C-pillar. CAUTION: Keep the inner bottom end of the upper C-pillar trim panel away from the cab back trim panel when installing the upper C-pillar trim panel to prevent scratching the back trim panel. 2. Install the upper C-pillar trim panel, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8263 3. Install the rear door sill scuff plate, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Installation. 4. Install the outer front seat belt retractor cover, See: Cover-Outer Front Seat Belt Retractor/Installation. Club Cab, With Rear Jumper Seats 1. Position the lower C-pillar trim panel (7) in the vehicle. 2. Route the seat belt, lower anchor, latch plate and turning loop (3) through the slots provided in the lower C-pillar trim panel. Verify that the seat belt webbing between the retractor and the lower anchor is not twisted. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8264 3. Position the seat belt lower anchor to the mounting hole in the floor panel near the base of the C-pillar and Install the screw (6) that secures the lower anchor to the floor panel. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 4. Position the lower C-pillar trim panel to the C-pillar (1) and engage the retaining tabs that secure the trim panel to the C-pillar. CAUTION: Keep the inner bottom end of the upper C-pillar trim panel away from the cab back trim panel when installing the upper C-pillar trim panel to prevent scratching the back trim panel. 5. Install the upper C-pillar trim panel, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 6. Install the rear door sill scuff plate, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Installation. 7. Install the outer front seat belt retractor cover, See: Cover-Outer Front Seat Belt Retractor/Installation. Quad Cab Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8265 1. Position the lower C-pillar trim panel (7) in the vehicle. 2. Route the seat belt, lower anchor, latch plate and turning loop (3) through the slots provided in the lower C-pillar trim panel. Verify that the seat belt webbing between the retractor and the lower anchor is not twisted. 3. Position the seat belt lower anchor to the mounting hole in the floor panel near the base of the C-pillar and Install the screw (6) that secures the lower anchor to the floor panel. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 4. Position the lower C-pillar trim panel to the C-pillar (1) and engage the retaining tabs that secure the trim panel to the C-pillar. 5. Install the upper C-pillar trim panel, See: Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 6. Install the rear seat, See: Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Installation. 7. Install the rear door sill scuff plate, See: Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate Installation. Upper INSTALLATION Club Cab, Without Rear Jumper Seats Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8266 1. CAUTION: Keep the inner bottom end of the upper C-pillar trim panel away from the cab back trim panel when installing the upper C-pillar trim panel to prevent scratching the back trim panel. Keeping the inner bottom end of the upper C-pillar trim panel (2) away from the cab back trim panel, slide the upper retaining tab (1) of the trim panel into the hole in the C-pillar and engage the retaining tabs (3) that secure the trim panel to the C-pillar. Club Cab, With Rear Jumper Seats 1. CAUTION: Keep the inner bottom end of the upper C-pillar trim panel away from the cab back trim panel when installing the upper C-pillar trim panel to prevent scratching the back trim panel. Keeping the inner bottom end of the upper C-pillar trim panel (2) away from the cab back trim panel, slide the upper retaining tab of the trim panel into the hole in the C-pillar and engage the retaining tabs that secure the trim panel to the C-pillar. 2. Position the seat belt turning loop (3) to the mounting hole in the upper C-pillar trim panel and install the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Engage the upper edge of the trim cover (4) over the top of the turning loop. Then, squeeze the lower end of the trim cover and the turning loop together firmly and evenly until the engagement tabs of the trim cover snap into the slots of the turning loop. Quad Cab Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal > Page 8267 1. Slide the upper retaining tab of the upper C-pillar trim panel (2) into the hole in the C-pillar and engage the retaining tabs that secure the trim panel to the C-pillar. 2. Position the seat belt turning loop (3) to the mounting hole in the upper C-pillar trim panel and install the screw (5) that secures the seat belt turning loop to the C-pillar. Tighten the screw to 39 Nm (29 ft. lbs.). 3. Engage the upper edge of the trim cover (4) over the top of the turning loop. Then, squeeze the lower end of the trim cover and the turning loop together firmly and evenly until the engagement tabs of the trim cover snap into the slots of the turning loop. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 162 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 18VT/BR IGNITION RUN/START SWITCH SENSE 2-3 F20 20PK/GY IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 8-Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8273 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8274 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8275 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 162 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 18VT/BR IGNITION RUN/START SWITCH SENSE 2-3 F20 20PK/GY IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 8-Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8276 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8277 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and is also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Several unique SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS, and another version has an additional coaxial connector receptacle that allows it to receive inputs from the optional remote start antenna module. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8280 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver and may receive RF inputs either directly through an internal antenna from the RKE key fob transmitter or, on vehicles equipped with an optional remote start system, indirectly through the external remote start antenna module. See: Power Locks/Description and Operation/Description. The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM using the diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM over the CAN data bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM. The PCM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM is an invalid key ; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends electronic security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or if the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 8283 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, disconnect the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. 10. Remove the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column housing. 11. Disengage the antenna ring (3) from around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4) and remove the SKREEM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 8284 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column with the antenna ring (3) oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4). 2. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, reconnect the coaxial cable to the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 8285 5. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 6. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 8. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 9. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), if the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated.See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Description and Operation Keyless Start Antenna: Description and Operation DESCRIPTION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). The control module (3) is located under the instrument panel cover (2). The module electrical connector plugs into the WCM/SKREEM at the right side of the steering column. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 2. Remove steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 3. Remove steering column shrouds. 4. Remove left instrument panel (IP) end cap. 5. Remove IP cluster bezel. 6. Remove IP cluster and its three connectors. 7. Remove left A-pillar trim. 8. Unclip upper IP bezel (defroster). 9. Remove two module mounting screws (4) from module (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8292 10. Disconnect coax cable retainers (3) and (4) from IP. 11. Remove two WCM/SKREEM mounting screws at steering column (1). 12. Remove WCM/SKREEM from steering column (1). 13. Disconnect coax cable electrical connector (2) at WCM/SKREEM. 14. Remove module (2) from top of instrument panel while fishing coax cable (1) through openings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8293 Keyless Start Antenna: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The Remote Start Antenna Module Assembly consists of an electrical connection to the WCM/SKREEM (1), a length of coax cable (2), two mounting clips (3) and (4), and a control module/antenna (5). 1. Fish coax cable (1) through openings on top of instrument panel. Position module (2) to top of instrument panel. 2. Install two module mounting screws (4) to module (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Starting System > Keyless Start Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8294 3. Connect coax cable retainers (3) and (4) to instrument panel. 4. Connect coax cable electrical connector (2) to WCM/SKREEM. 5. Install WCM/SKREEM to steering column (1). 6. Clip upper instrument panel (IP) bezel (defroster). 7. Install left A-pillar trim. 8. Install IP cluster and its three connectors. 9. Install IP cluster bezel. 10. Install left IP end cap. 11. Install steering column trim panel (knee blocker). 12. Install steering column shrouds. 13. Connect negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery > Component Information > Service and Repair Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Service and Repair REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER BATTERIES The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter case snaps open and shut for battery access. To replace the RKE transmitter batteries: 1. Using a trim stick or a thin coin, gently pry at the notch in the center seam of the RKE transmitter case halves until the two halves unsnap. 2. Lift the back half of the transmitter case off of the RKE transmitter. 3. Remove the two batteries from the RKE transmitter. 4. Replace the battery with a new CR2032. Be certain that the battery is installed with the polarity correctly oriented. 5. Align the two RKE transmitter case halves with each other, and squeeze them firmly and evenly together using hand pressure until they snap back into place. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Latch-Door-Left Front Component ID: 147 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G75 20VT DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8304 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G75 20VT DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z940 20BK GROUND 3 P1 18TN/LG DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT FRONT 4 P393 18LG DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8305 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8306 Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Latch-Door-Left Rear Component ID: 148 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (CREW CAB BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G77 20VT/GY LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8307 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (CREW CAB POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G77 20VT/GY LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z941 20BK GROUND 3 P5 18TN/OR DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT REAR 4 P393 18LG DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8308 Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8309 Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Latch-Door-Right Front Component ID: 149 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G74 20VT/WT PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8310 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G74 20VT/WT PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z944 20BK/LG GROUND 3 G778 18VT/BK DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS 4 P392 18LG/DB DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8311 Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8312 Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Latch-Door-Right Rear Component ID: 150 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (CREW CAB BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G76 20VT/YL RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8313 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (CREW CAB POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G76 20VT/YL RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z927 20BK GROUND 3 G778 18VT/BK DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS 4 P392 18LG/DB DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8314 Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Latch-Door-Left Front Component ID: 147 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G75 20VT DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8317 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G75 20VT DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z940 20BK GROUND 3 P1 18TN/LG DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT FRONT 4 P393 18LG DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8318 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8319 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Latch-Door-Left Rear Component ID: 148 Component : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (CREW CAB BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G77 20VT/GY LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8320 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (CREW CAB POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G77 20VT/GY LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z941 20BK GROUND 3 P5 18TN/OR DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER LEFT REAR 4 P393 18LG DOOR LOCK DRIVER LEFT DOORS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8321 Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8322 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Latch-Door-Right Front Component ID: 149 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G74 20VT/WT PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8323 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G74 20VT/WT PASSENGER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z944 20BK/LG GROUND 3 G778 18VT/BK DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS 4 P392 18LG/DB DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8324 Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8325 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Latch-Door-Right Rear Component ID: 150 Component : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (CREW CAB BASE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G76 20VT/YL RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z917 20BK GROUND Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8326 Connector: Name : LATCH-DOOR-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Qualifier : (CREW CAB POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 G76 20VT/YL RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z927 20BK GROUND 3 G778 18VT/BK DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS 4 P392 18LG/DB DOOR LOCK DRIVER RIGHT DOORS Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Latch-Door-Left Front > Page 8327 Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Door Lock Actuator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The lock mechanisms are actuated by a reversible electric motor mounted within each door. The power lock motors are integral to the door latch units. The power lock motors cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8330 Power Door Lock Actuator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door lock motors are controlled by the instrument cluster. A positive and negative battery connection to the two motor terminals will cause the motor to move in one direction. Reversing the current will cause the motor to move in the opposite direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8331 Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection POWER LOCK MOTOR The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the power lock system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Component ID: 323 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 3 Z940 20BK GROUND 4 Z13 16BK/WT GROUND 5 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 7 Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP 8 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8336 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 2 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 3 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 4 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 5 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8337 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8338 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 324 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 2 Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 3 Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP 4 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 5 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 6 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 7 Z974 20BK/OR GROUND 8 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8339 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Component ID: 323 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 3 Z940 20BK GROUND 4 Z13 16BK/WT GROUND 5 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 7 Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP 8 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8342 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 2 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 3 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 4 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 5 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8343 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8344 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 324 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 2 Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 3 Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP 4 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 5 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 6 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 7 Z974 20BK/OR GROUND 8 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8345 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A window/lock switch located in each front door trim panel. The driver's side window/lock switch includes the following: - Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock out the window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be operated only from the drivers door switch. - Window Switches - A two-way, momentary window switch for the driver side front door also has a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side front door window. In addition to the window switch for its own door, the window/lock switch houses individual switches for each passenger door window. The passenger side window/lock switch includes the following: - Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the lock system. - Window Switch - A two-way, momentary window switch for the passenger side front door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8348 Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The driver side window/lock switch combines a lock switch, a driver window switch with an Auto-down feature, master switches for each passenger door window, and a window lockout switch. Lock Switch The lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the instrument cluster. Each lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to the instrument cluster input, which allows the instrument cluster to sense the switch position. Based upon the lock switch input, the instrument cluster controls the battery and ground feed outputs to the individual lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the lock switch is connected to battery current through the window circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Window Switches The window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the windows will operate whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger window switch in the window/lock switch provides battery current and ground to the individual window switches on each passenger door so that the window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respective window motor. The switch for the driver side front door window includes an auto-down feature. When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door window is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position window lockout switch in the window/lock switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current feed to each of the individual passenger window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power windows can only be operated from the switches in the window/lock switch. The window lockout switch also controls the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger window switch so that the switch will not be illuminated when it is locked out. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8349 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the window/lock switch window and lock switches receive battery current through the circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If only one LED in the switch is inoperative, replace the switch. If the driver side front door window operates in a normal manner, but the Auto-Down feature is inoperative, replace the window/lock switch. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the window/lock switch from the door trim panel See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Removal. 3. Disconnect the door wire harness connectors from the switch. 4. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switches in each switch position. If not OK, replace the window/lock switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using a trim stick, start at the rear of the switch and pry up to remove from door trim panel. 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors from switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8352 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to switch. 2. Insert front end of switch into door trim panel opening. Press into place. 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Component ID: 305 Component : SWITCH-MIRROR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MIRROR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 P76 20TN/RD MIRROR COMMON DRIVER 4 Z13 20BK/WT GROUND 5 A940 16RD FUSED B(+) 6 P72 20TN/DG PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER 7 P71 20DB DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER 8 P74 20TN/YL PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER 9 P75 20TN/LG DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER 10 - Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8357 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8358 Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 305 Component : SWITCH-MIRROR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MIRROR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 P76 20TN/RD MIRROR COMMON DRIVER 4 Z13 20BK/WT GROUND 5 A940 16RD FUSED B(+) 6 P72 20TN/DG PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER 7 P71 20DB DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER 8 P74 20TN/YL PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER 9 P75 20TN/LG DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER 10 - Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8359 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Mirror Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A power mirror switch is located on the driver's door trim panel, attached to the window/lock switch. The power mirror switch includes the following: - Power Mirror Selector Switch - A three-position rotary joystick switch selects the right or left power mirror for adjustment, or turns the power mirror system Off in the center position. - Power Mirror Adjustment Switch - A momentary joystick directional switch allows the driver to adjust the selected power mirror in the Up, Down, Right or Left directions. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8362 Power Mirror Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The power mirror switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a fuse in the IPM on a fused B(+) circuit so that the power mirrors remain operational regardless of the ignition switch position. A rotary joystick selector switch has three positions, one to select the right mirror, one to select the left mirror, and a center Off position. After the right or left mirror is selected, the joystick is moved to move the selected mirror Up, Down, Right or Left. The power mirror switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to each of the four (two in each mirror head) power mirror motors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8363 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection SWITCH - MIRROR 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power mirror switch See: Service and Repair/Removal. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch. 4. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switch in each switch position. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the window/lock switch See: Locks/Power Locks/Power Door Lock Switch/Service and Repair/Removal. 3. Remove the mirror switch from the window/lock switch assembly by twisting switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8366 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install mirror switch to window/lock switch assembly. 2. Connect wire harness connectors to switches. 3. Install window/lock switch assembly See: Locks/Power Locks/Power Door Lock Switch/Service and Repair/Installation. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching Paint: Customer Interest Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching NUMBER: 23-046-07 GROUP: Body DATE: October 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-003-06, DATED JANUARY 19, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Paint Repair - Etching OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves evaluating the paint condition on all horizontal panels for etching and using the procedures listed in the Paint Condition Deck p/n 81-316-0507 or using the information listed in this bulletin MODELS: 2006 - (CS) Pacifica **2008** 2006 - (DR/D1/DC/DH) Ram Truck **2008** 2006 - (HB) Durango **2008** **2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen** 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan **2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler** **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2006- (KJ) Liberty **2007** **2008 (KK) Liberty 2006 - (LX) 300/Magnum/**Charger** **2008** **2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot** 2006- (ND) Dakota **2008** **2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - (RS) Town & Country/Caravan **2007** **2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan** 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - (WK) Grand Cherokee **2008** 2006 - (XK) Commander Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 8376 **2008** DIAGNOSIS: Inspect the vehicle horizontal panels for the appearance of an etched surface (picture available in "PAINT CONDITION DECK" - publication number 81-316-0507 - see "INSECT ETCH" graphic). Two procedures are available depending on the severity of the condition. Repair Procedure "A" is for conditions that do not show through to primer and Repair Procedure "B" is for conditions that show primer within the etch area. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE "A" FINESSE: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. Measure and record paint film thickness in areas to be sanded using an electronic mil gauge (PSE). 5. Use 2000 grit sand paper mounted to a ridged backer to remove all etching. 6. If you remove more than 0.5 mil of clear coat you will need to refinish using repair procedure "B" refinish. 7. If refinishing is not required polish sanded areas using Mopar Compound Power Cleaner # BSMM8432. 8. Remove swirl marks using Mopar Swirl Free polish # BSMM8232. 9. Detail vehicle as required. REPAIR PROCEDURE "B" REFINISH: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. DA surface with 600 grit sand paper. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 8377 5. Clean with appropriate solvent per paint supplier recommendations. 6. Feather edge the damaged areas. 7. Apply corrosion resistant primer to bare metal spots if they exist. 8. Spot prime with primer surfacer. 9. Block sand the primer surfacer. 10. Final sand per paint suppliers recommendations. 11. Clean with appropriate solvent. 12. Tack off the repair area. 13. Apply basecoat with appropriate hardener per paint supplier recommendations. 14. Allow flash time per paint suppliers recommendations and tack off area. 15. Apply clear coat per paint suppliers recommendations. 16. Detail vehicle as required. NOTE: No clear coat spot Repair should be performed on class "A" surfaces. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 8378 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching Paint: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching NUMBER: 23-046-07 GROUP: Body DATE: October 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-003-06, DATED JANUARY 19, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Paint Repair - Etching OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves evaluating the paint condition on all horizontal panels for etching and using the procedures listed in the Paint Condition Deck p/n 81-316-0507 or using the information listed in this bulletin MODELS: 2006 - (CS) Pacifica **2008** 2006 - (DR/D1/DC/DH) Ram Truck **2008** 2006 - (HB) Durango **2008** **2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen** 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan **2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler** **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2006- (KJ) Liberty **2007** **2008 (KK) Liberty 2006 - (LX) 300/Magnum/**Charger** **2008** **2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot** 2006- (ND) Dakota **2008** **2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - (RS) Town & Country/Caravan **2007** **2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan** 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - (WK) Grand Cherokee **2008** 2006 - (XK) Commander Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 8384 **2008** DIAGNOSIS: Inspect the vehicle horizontal panels for the appearance of an etched surface (picture available in "PAINT CONDITION DECK" - publication number 81-316-0507 - see "INSECT ETCH" graphic). Two procedures are available depending on the severity of the condition. Repair Procedure "A" is for conditions that do not show through to primer and Repair Procedure "B" is for conditions that show primer within the etch area. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE "A" FINESSE: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. Measure and record paint film thickness in areas to be sanded using an electronic mil gauge (PSE). 5. Use 2000 grit sand paper mounted to a ridged backer to remove all etching. 6. If you remove more than 0.5 mil of clear coat you will need to refinish using repair procedure "B" refinish. 7. If refinishing is not required polish sanded areas using Mopar Compound Power Cleaner # BSMM8432. 8. Remove swirl marks using Mopar Swirl Free polish # BSMM8232. 9. Detail vehicle as required. REPAIR PROCEDURE "B" REFINISH: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. DA surface with 600 grit sand paper. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 8385 5. Clean with appropriate solvent per paint supplier recommendations. 6. Feather edge the damaged areas. 7. Apply corrosion resistant primer to bare metal spots if they exist. 8. Spot prime with primer surfacer. 9. Block sand the primer surfacer. 10. Final sand per paint suppliers recommendations. 11. Clean with appropriate solvent. 12. Tack off the repair area. 13. Apply basecoat with appropriate hardener per paint supplier recommendations. 14. Allow flash time per paint suppliers recommendations and tack off area. 15. Apply clear coat per paint suppliers recommendations. 16. Detail vehicle as required. NOTE: No clear coat spot Repair should be performed on class "A" surfaces. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > 23-046-07 > Oct > 07 > Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching > Page 8386 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8387 Paint: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 23-046-07 Date: 071030 Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching NUMBER: 23-046-07 GROUP: Body DATE: October 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-003-06, DATED JANUARY 19, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. SUBJECT: Paint Repair - Etching OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves evaluating the paint condition on all horizontal panels for etching and using the procedures listed in the Paint Condition Deck p/n 81-316-0507 or using the information listed in this bulletin MODELS: 2006 - (CS) Pacifica **2008** 2006 - (DR/D1/DC/DH) Ram Truck **2008** 2006 - (HB) Durango **2008** **2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen** 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan **2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler** **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2006- (KJ) Liberty **2007** **2008 (KK) Liberty 2006 - (LX) 300/Magnum/**Charger** **2008** **2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot** 2006- (ND) Dakota **2008** **2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - (RS) Town & Country/Caravan **2007** **2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan** 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - (WK) Grand Cherokee Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8388 **2008** 2006 - (XK) Commander **2008** DIAGNOSIS: Inspect the vehicle horizontal panels for the appearance of an etched surface (picture available in "PAINT CONDITION DECK" - publication number 81-316-0507 - see "INSECT ETCH" graphic). Two procedures are available depending on the severity of the condition. Repair Procedure "A" is for conditions that do not show through to primer and Repair Procedure "B" is for conditions that show primer within the etch area. PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE "A" FINESSE: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. Measure and record paint film thickness in areas to be sanded using an electronic mil gauge (PSE). 5. Use 2000 grit sand paper mounted to a ridged backer to remove all etching. 6. If you remove more than 0.5 mil of clear coat you will need to refinish using repair procedure "B" refinish. 7. If refinishing is not required polish sanded areas using Mopar Compound Power Cleaner # BSMM8432. 8. Remove swirl marks using Mopar Swirl Free polish # BSMM8232. 9. Detail vehicle as required. REPAIR PROCEDURE "B" REFINISH: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8389 4. DA surface with 600 grit sand paper. 5. Clean with appropriate solvent per paint supplier recommendations. 6. Feather edge the damaged areas. 7. Apply corrosion resistant primer to bare metal spots if they exist. 8. Spot prime with primer surfacer. 9. Block sand the primer surfacer. 10. Final sand per paint suppliers recommendations. 11. Clean with appropriate solvent. 12. Tack off the repair area. 13. Apply basecoat with appropriate hardener per paint supplier recommendations. 14. Allow flash time per paint suppliers recommendations and tack off area. 15. Apply clear coat per paint suppliers recommendations. 16. Detail vehicle as required. NOTE: No clear coat spot Repair should be performed on class "A" surfaces. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8390 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Technical Service Bulletin # 23-046-07 Date: 071030 Body - Horizontal Paint Surface Etching NUMBER: 23-046-07 GROUP: Body DATE: October 30, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-003-06, DATED JANUARY 19, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL YEARS AND MODELS. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8391 SUBJECT: Paint Repair - Etching OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves evaluating the paint condition on all horizontal panels for etching and using the procedures listed in the Paint Condition Deck p/n 81-316-0507 or using the information listed in this bulletin MODELS: 2006 - (CS) Pacifica **2008** 2006 - (DR/D1/DC/DH) Ram Truck **2008** 2006 - (HB) Durango **2008** **2007 - 2008 (HG) Aspen** 2006 (JR) Sebring Convertible/Sebring Sedan/Stratus Sedan **2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Sebring Convertible/Avenger** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler** **2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro** 2006- (KJ) Liberty **2007** **2008 (KK) Liberty 2006 - (LX) 300/Magnum/**Charger** **2008** **2007 - 2008 (MK) Compass/Patriot** 2006- (ND) Dakota **2008** **2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber** 2006 - (RS) Town & Country/Caravan **2007** **2008 (RI) Town & Country/Grand Caravan** 2006 (TJ) Wrangler 2005 - (WK) Grand Cherokee **2008** 2006 - (XK) Commander **2008** DIAGNOSIS: Inspect the vehicle horizontal panels for the appearance of an etched surface (picture available in "PAINT CONDITION DECK" - publication number 81-316-0507 - see "INSECT ETCH" graphic). Two procedures are available depending on the severity of the condition. Repair Procedure "A" is for conditions that do not show through to primer and Repair Procedure "B" is for conditions that show primer within the etch area. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8392 PARTS REQUIRED: SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE "A" FINESSE: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. Measure and record paint film thickness in areas to be sanded using an electronic mil gauge (PSE). 5. Use 2000 grit sand paper mounted to a ridged backer to remove all etching. 6. If you remove more than 0.5 mil of clear coat you will need to refinish using repair procedure "B" refinish. 7. If refinishing is not required polish sanded areas using Mopar Compound Power Cleaner # BSMM8432. 8. Remove swirl marks using Mopar Swirl Free polish # BSMM8232. 9. Detail vehicle as required. REPAIR PROCEDURE "B" REFINISH: 1. Clean with Mopar Car Wash Concentrate, and water. 2. Wipe with an alcohol based cleaner 3. Evaluate the paint condition. 4. DA surface with 600 grit sand paper. 5. Clean with appropriate solvent per paint supplier recommendations. 6. Feather edge the damaged areas. 7. Apply corrosion resistant primer to bare metal spots if they exist. 8. Spot prime with primer surfacer. 9. Block sand the primer surfacer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8393 10. Final sand per paint suppliers recommendations. 11. Clean with appropriate solvent. 12. Tack off the repair area. 13. Apply basecoat with appropriate hardener per paint supplier recommendations. 14. Allow flash time per paint suppliers recommendations and tack off area. 15. Apply clear coat per paint suppliers recommendations. 16. Detail vehicle as required. NOTE: No clear coat spot Repair should be performed on class "A" surfaces. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Paint: > Page 8394 TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Description and Operation > Basecoat/Clearcoat Finish - Description Paint: Description and Operation Basecoat/Clearcoat Finish - Description DESCRIPTION The original equipment paint finish is a multi step process that involves cleaning, applying electro de-position (E-coat), anti-chip primer, basecoat, and clearcoat steps. CAUTION: Do not use abrasive chemicals, abrasive compounds or harsh alkaline based cleaning solvents on the painted surfaces of a vehicle. Failure to follow this caution can result in damage to vehicle finish. On most vehicles a two-part paint application (basecoat/clearcoat) is used. Color paint that is applied to primer is called basecoat. A clear coat paint is then applied to protect the basecoat from ultraviolet light and to provide a durable high-gloss finish. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Description and Operation > Basecoat/Clearcoat Finish - Description > Page 8397 Paint: Description and Operation Paint Touch-up - Description DESCRIPTION When a painted metal surface has been scratched or chipped, it should be touched-up as soon as possible to avoid corrosion. For best results, use MOPAR(R) Scratch Filler/Primer, Touch-Up Paints and Clear Top Coat. WARNING: Use an OSHA approved respirator and safety glasses when spraying paint or solvents in a confined area. Personal injury can result. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Paint Touch-Up Paint: Service and Repair Paint Touch-Up STANDARD PROCEDURE 1. Scrape loose paint and corrosion from inside scratch or chip. 2. Clean affected area with MOPAR(R) Tar/Road Oil Remover or equivalent, and allow to dry. 3. Fill the inside of the scratch or chip with a coat of filler/primer. Do not overlap primer onto good surface finish. The applicator brush should be wet enough to puddle-fill the scratch or chip without running. Do not stroke brush applicator on body surface. Allow the filler/primer to dry hard. 4. Cover the filler/primer with color touch-up paint. Do not overlap touch-up color onto the original color coat around the scratch or chip. Butt the new color to the original color, if possible. Do not stroke applicator brush on body surface. Allow touch-up paint to dry hard. 5. On vehicles without clearcoat, the touch-up color can be lightly finesse sanded (1500 grit) and polished with rubbing compound. 6. On vehicles with clearcoat, apply clear top coat to touch-up paint with the same technique as described in STEP 4. Allow clear top coat to dry hard. If desired, STEP 5 can be performed on clear top coat. WARNING: Avoid prolonged skin contact with petroleum or alcohol - based cleaning solvents. Personal injury can result. Avoid prolonged skin contact with petroleum or alcohol - based cleaning solvents. Personal injury can result. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Service and Repair > Paint Touch-Up > Page 8400 Paint: Service and Repair Finesse Sanding, Buffing, And Polishing - Description DESCRIPTION CAUTION: Do not remove more than 0.5 mils of clearcoat finish when sanding, hand buffing or polishing. Basecoat paint must retain clearcoat for durability. CAUTION: If the finish has been finesse sanded in the past, it cannot be repeated. Failure to follow this caution can result in damage to vehicle finish. NOTE: Finesse sanding should only be performed by a trained automotive paint technician. Minor acid etching, orange peel, or smudging in a clearcoat or single-stage finish can be reduced with light finesse sanding, hand buffing and polishing. Use a Paint Thickness Gauge #PR-ETG-2X or equivalent to determine clearcoat or single-stage paint thickness before and after the repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Upper Crossmember - Installation Radiator Support: Service and Repair Radiator Upper Crossmember - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install upper crossmember. 2. Install outer mounting bolts and tighten. 3. Install nuts attaching latch to radiator crossmember support. Tighten nuts to 31 Nm (23 ft. lbs.) torque. 4. Check hood fit and adjust if required. 5. Install hood seal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Radiator Upper Crossmember - Installation > Page 8405 Radiator Support: Service and Repair Radiator Upper Crossmember - Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise hood. 2. Remove the front hood seal. 3. Remove the center brace mounting nuts and remove hood latch. 4. Remove the crossmember mounting bolts. 5. Remove crossmember. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations Keyless Entry Module: Locations Component ID: 162 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 18VT/BR IGNITION RUN/START SWITCH SENSE 2-3 F20 20PK/GY IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 8-Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8410 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8411 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8412 Keyless Entry Module: Diagrams Component ID: 162 Component : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Connector: Name : MODULE-SENTRY KEY REMOTE ENTRY/WCM Color : BLACK # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 G20 18VT/BR IGNITION RUN/START SWITCH SENSE 2-3 F20 20PK/GY IGNITION SWITCH SENSE INPUT 4 Z109 20BK/GY GROUND 5 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 6 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 7 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 8-Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8413 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 8414 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) is sometimes referred to as the Wireless Control Module (WCM), and is also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM). The SKREEM is the primary component of the Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS). It is also the receiver for the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system. The SKREEM is located on the right side of the steering column, near the ignition lock cylinder housing and is concealed beneath the steering column shrouds. The molded black plastic housing for the SKREEM has an integral molded plastic halo-like antenna ring (4) that extends from the bottom. When the SKREEM is properly installed on the steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder housing. A single integral connector receptacle (3) is located just behind the antenna ring on the bottom of the SKREEM housing. An integral molded plastic mounting tab (2) on the rear corner of the SKREEM housing has a hole in the center through which a screw passes to secure the unit to the steering column. The SKREEM is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. Several unique SKREEM modules are used: one for vehicles equipped with RKE only, one for vehicles equipped with RKE and SKIS, and another version has an additional coaxial connector receptacle that allows it to receive inputs from the optional remote start antenna module. The SKREEM cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire SKREEM unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8417 Keyless Entry Module: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) contains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a microprocessor. The SKREEM transmits RF signals to, and receives RF signals from the Sentry Key transponder through a tuned antenna enclosed within the molded plastic antenna ring integral to the SKREEM housing. If this antenna ring is not mounted properly around the ignition lock cylinder housing, communication problems between the SKREEM and the transponder may arise. These communication problems will result in Sentry Key transponder-related faults. The SKREEM also serves as the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) RF receiver and may receive RF inputs either directly through an internal antenna from the RKE key fob transmitter or, on vehicles equipped with an optional remote start system, indirectly through the external remote start antenna module. See: Locks/Power Locks/Description and Operation/Description. The SKREEM communicates over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus with the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN), the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), or the diagnostic scan tool. The SKREEM and the PCM both use software that includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures security by preventing an override of the SKIS through the unauthorized substitution of the SKREEM or the PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means that replacement of either the SKREEM or the PCM units will require a system initialization procedure to restore system operation. The SKREEM retains in memory the ID numbers of any Sentry Key transponder that is programmed into it. A maximum of eight Sentry Key transponders can be programmed into the SKREEM. For added system security, each SKREEM is programmed with a unique Secret Key code. This code is stored in memory, sent over the CAN data bus to the PCM, and is encoded to the transponder of every Sentry Key that is programmed into the SKREEM. Therefore, the Secret Key code is a common element that is found in every component of the SKIS. Another security code, called a PIN, is used to gain access to the SKREEM Secured Access Mode. The Secured Access Mode is required during service to perform the SKIS initialization and Sentry Key transponder programming procedures. The SKREEM also stores the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in its memory, which it learns through a CAN data bus message from the PCM during SKIS initialization. In the event that a SKREEM replacement is required, the Secret Key code can be transferred to the new SKREEM from the PCM using the diagnostic scan tool and the SKIS initialization procedure. Proper completion of the SKIS initialization will allow the existing Sentry Keys to be programmed into the new SKREEM so that new keys will not be required. In the event that the original Secret Key code cannot be recovered, SKREEM replacement will also require new Sentry Keys. The diagnostic scan tool will alert the technician during the SKIS initialization procedure if new Sentry Keys are required. When the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM transmits an RF signal to excite the transponder in the ignition key. The SKREEM then waits for an RF signal response from the transponder. If the response received identifies the key as valid, the SKREEM sends an electronic valid key message to the PCM over the CAN data bus. If the response received identifies the key as invalid or if no response is received from the key transponder, the SKREEM sends an invalid key message to the PCM. The PCM will enable or disable engine operation based upon the status of the SKREEM messages. It is important to note that the default condition in the PCM is an invalid key ; therefore, if no message is received from the SKREEM by the PCM, the engine will be disabled and the vehicle immobilized after two seconds of running. The SKREEM also sends electronic security indicator request messages to the EMIC over the CAN data bus to tell the EMIC how to operate the security indicator. The security indicator request message from the SKREEM tells the EMIC to turn the indicator ON for about three seconds each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position as a bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKREEM sends security indicator request messages to the EMIC to turn the indicator OFF, turn the indicator ON, or to flash the indicator ON and OFF. If the security indicator flashes or stays ON solid after the bulb test, it signifies a SKIS fault. If the SKREEM detects a system malfunction or if the SKIS has become ineffective, the security indicator will stay ON solid. If the SKREEM detects an invalid key or if a key transponder-related fault exists, the security indicator will flash. If the vehicle is equipped with the Customer Learn transponder programming feature, the SKREEM will also send messages to the EMIC to flash the security indicator whenever the Customer Learn programming mode is being utilized. . The SKIS performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, and will store fault information in the form of a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in SKREEM memory if a system malfunction is detected. The hard wired circuits of the SKREEM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the SKREEM or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the SKIS. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the SKREEM or the electronic controls and communication related to SKREEM operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 3. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 4. Using hand pressure, push gently inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 5. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 6. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 7. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 8420 8. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1). 9. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, disconnect the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. 10. Remove the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM (1) to the steering column housing. 11. Disengage the antenna ring (3) from around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4) and remove the SKREEM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 8421 Keyless Entry Module: Service and Repair Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (1) onto the steering column with the antenna ring (3) oriented around the ignition lock cylinder housing (4). 2. Install and tighten the screw (2) that secures the SKREEM to the steering column housing. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the SKREEM (1). 4. On vehicles equipped with the optional remote start system, reconnect the coaxial cable to the coaxial connector receptacle on the SKREEM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Keyless Entry Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Sentry Key Remote Entry Module - Removal > Page 8422 5. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 6. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 7. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 8. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 9. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 10. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 11. Reconnect the battery negative cable. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS), if the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) is replaced with a new unit, a diagnostic scan tool MUST be used to initialize the new SKREEM and to program at least two Sentry Key transponders before the vehicle can be operated.See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Towing Relay: Locations Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Left Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay > Page 8427 Trailer Towing Relay: Locations Right Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Right Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 186 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trailer Towing Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) > Page 8430 Trailer Towing Relay: Diagrams Right Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 187 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sun Shade: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove glass assembly from the sunroof assembly. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Removal 2. Remove two screws (3) from trough assembly (1). 3. Remove trough assembly (1). 4. Slide the sunshade forward to disengage the guide feet from the tracks through the cutouts at the front of the tracks. CAUTION: Use care not to crease the sunshade when removing or installing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sun Shade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8437 Sun Shade: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place sunshade into position, through the cutouts at the front of the tracks and slide the sunshade back. 2. Place trough (1) assembly into position on sunroof module and install the screws (3). 3. Install the glass panel. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Diagrams Component ID: 164 Component : MOTOR-SUNROOF Connector: Name : MOTOR-SUNROOF Color : # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z955 16BK GROUND 2 Z138 18BK/VT GROUND 3 F30 16PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 4 Q554 18OR/TN SUNROOF CLOSED 5 Q553 18OR/YL SUNROOF OPEN 6 A912 16RD FUSED B(+) 7- 8910 Q555 18OR/LB SUNROOF MOTOR B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8441 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. If the power top is completely inoperative perform the following diagnostic steps. 1. Check the Accessory delay 30 amp Circuit breaker in the Junction Block. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as required and replace the inoperative circuit breaker. 2. Partially remove the headliner to access the sunroof motor/module. 3. Disconnect the motor/module electrical connector. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position check for Battery voltage at the Accessory Relay Output terminal of the harness connector. If OK , go to STEP 4. If not OK repair the Accessory Relay Output circuit as necessary. 4. Using an ohmmeter test for continuity between the harness connector ground circuit and a known good ground. Continuity should be present. If OK go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit as necessary. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. Reconnect the motor/module electrical connector. With the ignition switch in the "RUN" position check for 5 volts on the "VENT", "CLOSE" and "OPEN" control circuits at the back side of the motor/module connector. If OK, go to STEP 6. If not OK replace the motor/module assembly, See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal. 6. Turn the ignition switch to the "OFF" position. Disconnect the motor/module and sunroof switch electrical connectors. Using an ohmmeter check for continuity on the "VENT", "CLOSE" and "OPEN" circuits between the motor/module and sunroof switch. Continuity should be present. If OK, See: Sunroof / Moonroof Switch/Testing and Inspection for diagnosis of the sunroof switch. If not OK, repair the control circuits as necessary. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Procedures DRIVE MOTOR TEACH PROCEDURE REPLACEMENT DRIVE MOTOR 1. Press and hold the sunroof switch open until the sunroof glass fully opens, automatically reverses direction, and stops at a position just forward of the full open position. 2. Release sunroof switch. 3. Within five seconds of releasing sunroof switch, press and hold the sunroof switch open again until the sunroof glass closes, goes into vent position, and then finally stops in the closed position. 4. Release sunroof switch. Sunroof will now operate normally. ORIGINAL DRIVE MOTOR 1. Press and hold sunroof switch open until the sunroof glass opens and stops. 2. Release sunroof switch. 3. Press and hold sunroof switch open once again for at least 10 seconds. After 10 seconds of pressing the switch open, the sunroof glass will automatically move and stop at a new location. 4. Release sunroof switch. 5. Within five seconds of releasing the sunroof switch, press and hold the switch open again until the sunroof glass closes, goes into vent position, and then finally stops in the closed position. 6. Release sunroof switch. The sunroof will now operate normally. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8444 Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Removal and Replacement Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove headliner. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner Removal 2. Disconnect the electrical connector (1). 3. Remove three motor assembly attaching screws (4) from bottom side of motor assembly (3) and remove motor assembly from the motor bracket. Installation INSTALLATION 1. If sunroof was open when drive motor was removed, carefully move glass panel into closed position and remove glass panel. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Removal 2. Set lifter arm timing by manually sliding the mechanisms (1) in the track until timing holes in the trollies are aligned with the timing holes in the lifter arm cams (2) and insert pins (3) into the mechanisms to hold mechanisms in closed position. 3. Place motor (3) into position and install screws (4) attaching motor to bracket (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8445 4. Tighten the screws (4) to 3 Nm (26 in. lbs.). 5. If sunroof glass panel was removed previously, remove the timing pins and install the sunroof glass panel. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Installation 6. Partially install the headliner and connect the sunroof wiring electrical connectors. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation 7. Temporarily install sunroof switch and perform the sunroof motor teach procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 8. Test sunroof operation, adjust glass as necessary. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Adjustments 9. Complete the headliner installation. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 320 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Gender : FEMALE Pin Circuit Description 1 Q554 18OR/TN SUNROOF CLOSED 2 Z138 18BK/VT GROUND 3 Q553 18OR/YL SUNROOF OPEN 4 Q555 18OR/LB SUNROOF MOTOR B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a power sunroof utilize a sunroof control switch. On this model, the sunroof control switch is located in the overhead console, in between the two reading lamps. The switch is mounted in the overhead console with four plastic retaining tabs, molded into the switch housing. This switch incorporates six selections of operation open, auto open, close, auto close, auto vent and vent. The individual switches in the sunroof control switch unit cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or faulty, the entire sunroof control switch unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8451 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION With the operation of the sunroof control switch, voltage is directed to the sunroof motor, through the switch contacts or control module. If the control switch is depressed and held depressed the voltage signal is controlled manually through the switch contacts, so when the switch is released the sunroof stops. Refer to the Owner's Manual for more information on the operation of the sunroof switch and system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8452 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection CONTROL SWITCH The following test will determine if the sunroof control switch is operating properly. 1. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 2. Remove the sunroof control switch from the overhead console See: Service and Repair/Control Switch/Removal. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the switch terminals for proper continuity using the table below. If any of the terminals do not show proper continuity, replace the sunroof control switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Switch Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Control Switch Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 3. Disconnect the sunroof control switch electrical connector. Depress the connector retaining tab and pull the connector straight out. 4. To remove the switch from the overhead console, push on the back of the switch until it comes free from the overhead console. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch in the overhead console assembly. Be certain the switch is securely snapped in place. 2. Connect the sunroof control switch electrical connector. Be certain the switch connector is securely snapped in place. 3. Install the overhead console See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Installation. 4. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Switch > Page 8455 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 3. Disconnect the sunroof control switch electrical connector. Depress the connector retaining tab and pull the connector straight out. 4. To remove the switch from the overhead console, push on the back of the switch until it comes free from the overhead console. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Switch > Page 8456 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch in the overhead console assembly. Be certain the switch is securely snapped in place. 2. Connect the sunroof control switch electrical connector. Be certain the switch connector is securely snapped in place. 3. Install the overhead console See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Installation. 4. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Operate the sunroof glass into the vent position. 2. Remove trough. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Drain/Service and Repair/Trough/Removal 3. Disconnect the guide link (2). 4. Slide trough guide (1) forward and disengage the sliders (2) through the notches (3) in the guide channels. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8461 Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the trough guide (1) and engage the sliders (2) into the guide channels through the small notch (3) in track. 2. Connect the guide link (2). 3. Install the trough. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Drain/Service and Repair/Trough/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open sunroof glass panel to the full open position. 2. Remove screws (2) attaching wind deflector straps to front crossmember. 3. Rotate wind deflector back about 110° and slide backwards to disengage from the spring hook. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8466 Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Place wind deflector (1) in position 110° to roof. 2. Push arms (3) down and forward to engage spring hooks. 3. Rotate wind deflector forward into correct position. Depress wind deflector down onto front crossmember to check spring function. 4. Install fasteners attaching wind deflector straps (2) to front crossmember. 5. Test sunroof operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Hose Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Drain Hose Removal REMOVAL FRONT DRAIN TUBES 1. Move glass panel to the fully closed position. 2. Remove the headliner See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Removal. 3. Disconnect the drain hose from the sunroof housing (2). 4. Drain any liquid from hose connection, if necessary. 5. Remove the power amplifier, See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Amplifier/Service and Repair/Radio Amplifier - Removal. 6. Remove the left side door sill scuff plate, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Scuff Plate/Service and Repair/Door Sill Scuff Plate - Removal. 7. Disconnect the grommet (4), attachment clips (1) and remove the drain tube (5). 8. Connect the new drain tube to the top of the old drain tube and feed down through the A-piller. REAR DRAIN TUBES 1. Move glass panel to the fully closed position. 2. Remove the headliner, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Removal. 3. Remove the lower C-pillar trim, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal 4. Disconnect the drain hose from the sunroof housing (1). 5. Drain any liquid from hose connection, if necessary. 6. Disconnect the grommet, attachment clips (4) and remove the drain tube (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Hose > Page 8471 Installation INSTALLATION FRONT DRAIN TUBES 1. Connect the drain hose to the sunroof housing (2) and test drainage. 2. Connect the body grommet (4) and attachment clips (1). 3. Install the power amplifier, See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Amplifier/Service and Repair/Radio Amplifier - Installation. 4. Install the headliner. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner Installation REAR DRAIN TUBES 1. Connect the drain hose (2) to the sunroof housing (1) and test drainage. 2. Connect the body grommet and attachment clips (4). 3. Install the lower C-pillar trim, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation. 4. Install the headliner, See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Drain Hose > Page 8472 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Trough Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the glass panel. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Removal 2. Through the top of the roof opening remove two screws (3) from trough assembly (1). 3. Remove trough assembly (1). Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: When installing the trough be sure the trough crosses over the top of the sunshade. 1. Install the trough (1) and install the two screws (3). 2. Install the glass panel. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Move glass panel to fully closed position. 2. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable. 3. Remove control switch. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Switch/Service and Repair/Control Switch/Removal 4. Remove headliner. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Removal 5. Disconnect wire harness push in fasteners electrical connector from vehicle harness. 6. Disconnect drain tubes from sunroof housing. 7. Cut foam support pad at rear of module if necessary. 8. Remove two module side bracket bolts (2) and loosen the six remaining fasteners. 9. With the aid of a helper, remove the six (2) fasteners attaching sunroof module assembly (1) to roof panel. 10. Remove the glass panel. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Removal 11. Remove the sunshade. See: Sun Shade/Service and Repair/Removal 12. Remove the drive motor. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Motor/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal 13. Remove the wire harness. 14. Remove the sight shields. 15. Remove the trough guides. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Track/Service and Repair/Removal Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8477 Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the trough guides. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Track/Service and Repair/Installation 2. Install the sight shields. 3. Install the drive motor. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Motor/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Installation 4. Install the sunshade. See: Sun Shade/Service and Repair/Installation 5. Install the glass panel. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Installation 6. Remove the backing tape from the foam support pad, if necessary. 7. Raise rear end of sunroof module assembly and guide into position and start fasteners. 8. Tighten the fasteners to 9 Nm (80 in. lbs.). 9. Connect the drain tubes. 10. Install the wire harness See: Sunroof / Moonroof Wiring Harness/Service and Repair/Installation. 11. Connect battery negative cable. 12. Test sunroof operation, adjust glass as necessary. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Adjustments 13. Partially install the headliner and connect the sunroof wiring electrical connectors. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation 14. Temporarily install sunroof switch and perform the sunroof motor teach procedure. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning 15. Complete headliner installation. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation 16. Verify correct sunroof operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Adjustments Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Adjustments SUNROOF GLASS PANEL ADJUSTMENT 1. Move the sunshade rearward to the open position. 2. Move the sunroof glass panel to the fully closed position. 3. Disconnect the sight shield (2) and rotate out of the way to provide access to the glass panel screws (1). 4. Adjust the glass one corner at a time. a. Loosen four glass screws (1). b. Lift glass assembly and align the top of the glass panel to the top of the roof panel. c. Tighten screw to 3.5 Nm (31 in. lbs.). d. Repeat steps a. and b. for each corner of the glass panel. e. When properly adjusted, the front of the glass panel is 1.75 mm (0.07 in.) to 2.75 mm (0.11 in.) lower than the roof surface and the rear edge of the glass panel is 1.75 mm (0.07 in.) to.75 mm (0.03 in.) lower than the roof surface. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 8481 NOTE: When properly adjusted, the front of the glass panel (3) is 1.75 mm (0.07 in.) to 2.75 mm (0.11 in.) lower than the roof surface (2). NOTE: When properly adjusted, the rear edge of the glass panel (3) is 1.75 mm (0.07 in.) to.75 mm (0.03 in.) lower than the roof surface (2). NOTE: Glass assembly seal is 2.5 mm (0.1 in) higher than the glass panel. Measure at 300 mm (11.8 in) outboard of the centerline of the vehicle. 5. Verify sunroof operation and alignment. Check fit and re-adjust as necessary. 6. Rotate the sight shield (2) back into position and seat fully. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Slide sunshade rearward to the open position. 2. Move the glass panel to the closed position. 3. Disconnect the sight shields (2) and rotate our of the way to provide access to the glass panel screws (1). 4. Remove the four glass panel screws (1). 5. Lift off glass panel and remove from vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8484 Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position glass panel (2) on to mechanism lift arm. 2. Start the four attaching screws (1). 3. Center glass in opening by running a business card around the glass. 4. Adjust glass panel. See: Adjustments Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove sunroof glass panel. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Removal 2. Place glass panel on clean work area with the top side up. Support the glass assembly from underside to avoid bending or otherwise damaging the mounting tabs. 3. Grasp the seal and pull seal away from the glass panel. The seal is a one piece seal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8489 Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Always position seal seam on center of the passenger side of glass panel. 1. Place seal into position. 2. Install seal on glass. Using care working the seal around the glass, being careful not to over stretch the seal while installing. 3. Install the glass panel. See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Wiring Harness > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Wiring Harness: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the headliner. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner Removal 2. Disconnect wire harness from vehicle harness (2).A■ 3. Disconnect drive motor electrical connector (4) and cut tie straps (5). 4. Remove harness (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Wiring Harness > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8494 Sunroof / Moonroof Wiring Harness: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect drive motor (4) electrical connectors. 2. Replace the two tie straps (5) on the module assembly (3). 3. Connect vehicle harness electrical connectors (2). 4. Install the headliner. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headrest - Removal Head Rest: Service and Repair Headrest - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cab back trim panel See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel - Removal. 3. Remove the fasteners (3) securing the lower headrest to the cab back. 4. Lower the headrest (2) to disengage the upper post from the grommet (1). 5. Remove the headrest from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Head Rest > Component Information > Service and Repair > Headrest - Removal > Page 8500 Head Rest: Service and Repair Headrest - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the headrest (2) into the vehicle. 2. Insert the upper post into the grommet (1) and push up slightly on the headrest (2). 3. Install the fasteners (3) to secure the lower headrest to the cab back. 4. Tighten the fasteners to 12 Nm (9 ft. lbs.). 5. Install the cab back trim panel See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Cab Back Trim Panel - Installation. 6. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Motor: Locations Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-SEAT MOTOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SEAT MOTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 P17 10LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 2 P19 10LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER 3 P11 10LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER 4 P15 10LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 5 P21 10LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER 6 P13 10LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8504 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8505 Power Seat Motor: Diagrams Component ID: 14 Component : ASSEMBLY-SEAT MOTOR Connector: Name : ASSEMBLY-SEAT MOTOR Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 P17 10LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 2 P19 10LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER 3 P11 10LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER 4 P15 10LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 5 P21 10LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER 6 P13 10LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 8506 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations Component ID: 316 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 2 Z975 12BK GROUND 3-4 P21 10LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER 5-6-- 7-8 P19 10LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER 9 P15 10LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 10 P17 10LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 11 P13 10LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER 12 P11 10LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8510 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8511 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 316 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 2 Z975 12BK GROUND 3-4 P21 10LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER 5-6-- 7-8 P19 10LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER 9 P15 10LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 10 P17 10LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 11 P13 10LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER 12 P11 10LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8512 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The power seat can be adjusted in six different ways using the power seat switch. The switch is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion side shield. The individual switches in the power seat switch unit cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or inoperative, the entire power seat switch assembly must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8515 Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When a power switch control knob or knobs are actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the switch contacts to the power seat track or recliner adjuster motor. The selected adjuster motor operates to move the seat track or recliner through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached. When the switch is moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor are reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the adjuster motor to run in the opposite direction. No power seat switch should be held applied in any direction after the adjuster has reached its travel limit. The power seat adjuster motors each contain a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect them from overload. However, consecutive or frequent resetting of the circuit breaker must not be allowed to continue, or the motor may be damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8516 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER SEAT SWITCH For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. See: Service and Repair/Power Seat Switch - Removal for the appropriate procedure. 3. With assistance from another person, use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the power seat switches in each position. See the Power Seat Switch schematic and Continuity chart. If OK, See: Seat Track/Testing and Inspection for additional diagnostic procedures. If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch assembly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8517 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Switch - Removal Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Power Seat Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (4) that secures the recliner lever (5) to the recliner mechanism release shaft on the outboard side of the driver side front seat cushion side shield (2). 3. Pull the recliner lever (5) off of the recliner mechanism release shaft. 4. Remove the two screws (3) and (6) that secure the driver side seat cushion side shield (2) to the outboard seat cushion frame. 5. Pull the driver side seat cushion side shield (2) away from the seat cushion frame far enough to access the power seat switch assembly (1) wire harness connector. 6. Unplug the wire harness connector from the power seat switch module. 7. Remove the seat cushion side shield and power seat switch module from the seat as a unit. 8. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the power seat switch (2) to the inside of the seat cushion side shield (1). 9. Remove the power seat switch from the seat cushion side shield. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Switch - Removal > Page 8520 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Power Seat Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the two screws (3) that secure the power seat switch (2) to the inside of the seat cushion side shield (1). 2. Install the wire harness connector on the power seat switch assembly. 3. position the seat cushion side shield (2) and power seat switch assembly (1) onto the seat frame. 4. Install the seat cushion side shield screws (3) and (6). 5. Install the recliner lever (5) on the recliner mechanism release shaft. 6. Install the screw (4) that secures the recliner lever (5) to the recliner mechanism release shaft on the outboard side of the driver side front seat. 7. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Cushion / Cover - Removal Seat Back: Service and Repair Seat Back Cushion / Cover - Removal REMOVAL 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. See: Service Precautions 2. Remove the front seat. See: Service and Repair/Seat - Removal 3. Remove the lumbar and recliner handles. 4. Remove the screws and remove the side shields. 5. Remove the belt buckle. 6. Remove the seat back bolts from both sides. 7. Push in the buttons on both headrest sleeves, pull the headrest up and remove. 8. Separate the j-straps and pull cover up over frame and remove cushion. 9. Pinch both headrest sleeve ribs from inside the seat back frame with pliers or equivalent. 10. Strike the bottom of the sleeve with a rubber mallet or equivalent, and remove the headrest sleeves. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Back Cushion / Cover - Removal > Page 8525 Seat Back: Service and Repair Seat Back Cushion / Cover - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. See: Service Precautions 2. Position the seat back cover over the seat back frame and install the headrest sleeves. 3. Position the seat back cushion on the frame and position the cover over the cushion. 4. Connect the j-straps. 5. Install the seat back bolts and tighten to 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.). 6. Position the front seat belt buckle lower anchor onto the stud near the rear of the inboard seat cushion frame. Be certain the anti-rotation tab on the anchor is engaged in the clearance hole of the frame. 7. Tighten the nut to 43 Nm (32 ft. lbs.) 8. Install the side shields and install the screws. 9. Install the lumbar and recliner handles. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Cushion / Cover - Removal Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Seat Cushion / Cover - Removal REMOVAL 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. See: Service Precautions 2. Move the seat to the forward position and disconnect and isolate the batter negative cable. 3. Remove the bolts and the clamps and remove the seat cushion. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector, if equipped. 5. Separate the j-straps and seat cushion cover and foam. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Cushion / Cover - Removal > Page 8530 Seat Cushion: Service and Repair Seat Cushion / Cover - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. See: Service Precautions 2. Position the cushion cover and foam over the seat pan and connect the j-straps. 3. Position the seat cushion assembly onto the seat frame and install the clamps. 4. Connect the wire harness to the seat cushion pan, if equipped. 5. Install the bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (90 in. lbs.). 6. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver Seat Heater: Locations Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver Component ID: 117 Component : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-DRIVER Connector: Name : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HEATED SEATS) Pin Circuit Description 1 P187 16LG/BR LEFT SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER 4 Z970 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 8535 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 8536 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 8537 Seat Heater: Locations Heater-Cushion Pad-Passenger Component ID: 118 Component : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-PASSENGER Connector: Name : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HEATED SEATS) Pin Circuit Description 1 P188 18LG/VT RIGHT SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER 2 Z969 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 8538 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Locations > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 8539 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver Seat Heater: Diagrams Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver Component ID: 117 Component : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-DRIVER Connector: Name : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HEATED SEATS) Pin Circuit Description 1 P187 16LG/BR LEFT SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER 4 Z970 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 8542 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 8543 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 8544 Seat Heater: Diagrams Heater-Cushion Pad-Passenger Component ID: 118 Component : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-PASSENGER Connector: Name : HEATER-CUSHION PAD-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (HEATED SEATS) Pin Circuit Description 1 P188 18LG/VT RIGHT SEAT HEATER B(+) DRIVER 2 Z969 20BK GROUND Component Location - 31 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 8545 Component Location - 32 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 8546 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 8547 Seat Heater: Diagrams Heater-Seat Back-Driver Component ID: 119 Component : HEATER-SEAT BACK-DRIVER Connector: Name : HEATER-SEAT BACK-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z970 18BK GROUND 2 P187 18RD DRIVER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Heater-Cushion Pad-Driver > Page 8548 Seat Heater: Diagrams Heater-Seat Back-Passenger Component ID: 120 Component : HEATER-SEAT BACK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : HEATER-SEAT BACK-PASSENGER Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z969 18BK GROUND 2 P188 18RD PASSENGER SEAT HEATER SUPPLY Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats - Description Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seats - Description DESCRIPTION WARNING: The front passenger seat assembly contains critical components that affect the front passenger airbag deployment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat components are critical for the Occupant Classification System (OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calculate the proper airbag deployment. Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly, its related components, or trim cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. The following requirements must be strictly adhered to: - Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or components in any way. - Do not modify the front seat center console or center position seat in any way. - Do not use prior or future model year seat trim covers not designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat trim cover specified for the vehicle. - Do not replace the seat trim cover with an aftermarket trim cover. - Do not add a secondary trim cover other than those approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar. - At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar. Vehicles with the heated seat option can be visually identified by the two heated seat switches located in the center floor console. The heated seat system allows the driver and front seat passenger to select from two different levels of electrical seat heating (HI/LO). The heated seat system for this vehicle includes the following major components: Heated Seat Switch/Module - Two heated seat switch/modules are used per vehicle, including two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps for heat level indication. One switch/module for the driver and one for the passenger front seats. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated seat system. The switch/modules are mounted in the front center floor console. - Heated Seat Elements - Four heated seat elements are used per vehicle, one for each front seat back and one for each front seat cushion. The elements are integral to the individual front seat and seat back cushions and cannot be removed from the cushions, once installed at the factory. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats - Description > Page 8551 Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seats - Operation OPERATION The heated seat system operates on battery current received through a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Fused ignition switch output (run) circuits are used, so that the heated seat system will only operate when the ignition switch is in the On position. The heated seat system will turn Off automatically whenever the ignition switch is turned to any position except On. A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated seat system. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after two hours of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue indefinitely until the switch/module button is pushed to turn the system off. The system will automatically turn off the heating elements if it detects an OPEN or LOW short in the heating element circuit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats - Description > Page 8552 Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seat Element - Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with the optional heated seat system have two, carbon fiber heated seat elements, located in each front seat. One heating element is used for each seat cushion and another for each seat back. Each of the heated seat element consists of multiple heating circuits operating in parallel throughout the carbon fiber element. The heated seat elements are captured between the leather trim cover and the seat cushion assembly. If a malfunction occurs in one or more of the individual carbon fiber circuits, the others will continue to provide heat. The heated seat elements cannot be repaired. If found to be damaged or inoperative, a new heating element assembly must be installed. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated Seats - Description > Page 8553 Seat Heater: Description and Operation Heated Seat Element - Operation OPERATION One end of the heated seat element is connected to ground at all times through a splice under the seat. Battery current is directed to the other end of the heated seat element by the heated seat switch/module. The heated seat switch/module will energize the heated seat element when the heated seat switch/module button is depressed in the Low or High position. As electrical current passes through the heated seat element, the resistance of the wire used in the element disperses some of the electrical current in the form of heat. The heat produced by the heated seat element then radiates through the underside of the seat cushion and seat back trim covers, warming the seat cover and its occupant. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat System Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat System HEATED SEAT SYSTEM There are two methods of diagnosing the heated seat system. The "HEATED SEAT SYSTEM SELF-DIAGNOSIS" is to be performed when the system is inoperative and one or more of the heated seat switch/module Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps are flashing. The "HEATED SEAT SYSTEM BASE DIAGNOSIS" is to be performed when the system is inoperative and no LEDs are flashing or lighting when the switch/module buttons are pressed. HEATED SEAT SYSTEM SELF-DIAGNOSIS NOTE: Before testing the individual components in the heated seat system, check the vehicles battery open-circuit voltage and charging system performance. If the vehicles electrical system is defective or weak it may not be suppling sufficient energy to operate the heated seat system. The heated seat system is capable of performing some self-diagnostics. The following table depicts the various monitored failures which will be reported to the vehicle operator or technician by flashing the individual heated seat switch/module Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps. Refer to the Heated Seat System Self-Diagnosis table (below) for failure identification. The driver side heated seat switch/module indicator lamps will flash if a failure occurs in the driver side heated seat, and the passenger side heated seat switch/module indicator lamps will flash for a passenger side heated seat failure. If a monitored heated seat system failure occurs, the switch/module indicator lamps will flash at a pulse rate of about one-half second on, followed by about one-half second off for a duration of about one minute after the switch/module for the faulty heated seat is depressed in either the Low or High direction. This process will repeat every time the faulty heated seat switch/module is actuated until the problem has been corrected. Before testing the individual components in the heated seat system, check the vehicles battery open-circuit voltage and charging system performance. If the vehicles electrical system is defective or weak it may not be suppling sufficient energy to operate the heated seat system. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Diagnostic logic is built into the heated seat switch/module to help locate the problem by the most efficient means possible. Anytime a problem is suspected, locate the diagnosis and testing procedure for the component in question and follow the steps until the specific problem is located and resolved. Once the problem is thought to be corrected, verify correct system operation. If the heated seat system is functioning correctly return the vehicle to service. If a problem could not be verified such as not finding anything wrong when following the diagnostic procedure, this is a good indication that a INTERMITTENT problem may be present. You must then attempt to find the intermittent problem, such as moving the heating element within the seat while testing continuity or wiggling the wire harness's/electrical connectors under the seat while testing continuity. Always, eliminate all other potential problems before attempting to replace the heated seat switch/module. HEATED SEAT SYSTEM BASE DIAGNOSIS NOTE: Before testing the individual components in the heated seat system, check the vehicles battery open-circuit voltage and charging system performance. If the vehicles electrical system is defective or weak it may not be suppling sufficient energy to operate the heated seat system. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. PRELIMINARY TEST - If a single LED indicator lamp for one heated seat switch/module does not operate and the heated seat elements heat, replace the switch with the inoperative indicator lamp See: Seat Heater Switch/Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch - Removal. - If both LED indicator lamps for a heated seat switch/module operate, but the heated seat elements do not heat, See: Heated Seat Element - Diagnosis and Testing to check the suspect heated seat elements. If the elements test OK, proceed to STEP 1. - If both seats (driver and passenger) fail to heat and the indicator lamps on the heated seat switch/modules for both seats fail to operate, test the heated seat fuses in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If the heated seat fuses check OK, go to STEP 1. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat System > Page 8556 DRIVER HEATED SEAT SWITCH/MODULE 1. Remove the heated seat switch/modules from the center floor console, See: Seat Heater Switch/Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch - Removal. 2. Connect the battery negative cable. 3. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 4. Check for battery voltage on terminals 4 and 6 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat. Battery voltage should be present on both terminals. If OK go to STEP 5. If NOT OK repair the open or shorted fused B(+) circuit as required. 5. Check for continuity between ground terminal 1 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat and a good ground. If OK go to STEP 6. If NOT OK, repair the open or shorted ground circuit as required. 6. Check for continuity between the heated seat element supply circuit terminal 3 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat and the heated seat element connector of the inoperative seat. If OK go to STEP 7. If NOT OK, repair the open or shorted supply circuit as required. 7. Perform the heated seat element diagnosis for the inoperative seat. See: Heated Seat Element Diagnosis and Testing to check the suspect heated seat elements. If the elements test OK, replace the inoperative heated seat switch/module, See: Seat Heater Switch/Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch - Removal for the appropriate procedure. If NOT OK, replace the inoperative heated seat element, See: Service and Repair/Heated Seat Element - Removal for the appropriate procedure. PASSENGER HEATED SEAT SWITCH/MODULE 8. Remove the heated seat switch/modules from the center floor console, See: Seat Heater Switch/Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch - Removal. 9. Connect the battery negative cable. 10. Turn the ignition to the "RUN" position. 11. Check for battery voltage on terminals 4 and 6 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat. Battery voltage should be present on both terminals. If OK go to STEP 5. If NOT OK repair the open or shorted fused B(+) circuit as required. 12. Check for continuity between ground terminal 1 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat and a good ground. If OK go to STEP 6. If NOT OK, repair the open or shorted ground circuit as required. 13. Check for continuity between the heated seat element supply circuit terminal 3 of the switch/module connector of the inoperative seat and the heated seat element connector of the inoperative seat. If OK go to STEP 7. If NOT OK, repair the open or shorted supply circuit as required. 14. Perform the heated seat element diagnosis for the inoperative seat. See: Heated Seat Element - Diagnosis and Testing to check the suspect heated seat elements. If the elements test OK, replace the inoperative heated seat switch/module, See: Seat Heater Switch/Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch - Removal for the appropriate procedure. If NOT OK, replace the inoperative heated seat element, See: Service and Repair/Heated Seat Element - Removal for the appropriate procedure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat System > Page 8557 Seat Heater: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Element - Diagnosis and Testing HEATED SEAT ELEMENT Refer to the appropriate wiring information for complete circuit schematic or connector pin-out information. The wire harness connectors (2&3) for the heating elements are located under the seat (1). NOTE: When checking heated seat elements for continuity, be certain to move the heating element being checked. Moving the element, such as sitting in the seat will eliminate the possibility of an intermittent open in the element which would only be evident if the element was in a certain position. Failure to check the element in various positions could result in an incomplete test. 1. Locate and disconnect the seat electrical connector. 2. Check the resistance between the circuit leading in and out of the suspect heated seat element. The resistance should be between 3.8 - 4.8 ohms for a seat cushion element and 4.3 - 5.4 ohms for a seat back element. If OK, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures. If not OK, replace the inoperative heated seat element. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Element - Removal Seat Heater: Service and Repair Heated Seat Element - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: Do not remove the factory installed heating elements (3) from the seat or seat back cushions. The original element is permanently attached and cannot be removed without permanent damage. The replacement heating element is designed to be applied directly on top of the inoperative factory installed heating element. 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the appropriate seat cushion, See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Seat Cushion / Cover - Removal or seat back trim cover, See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Seat Back Cushion / Cover - Removal. 3. Disconnect the inoperative heated seat cushion or seat back element electrical connectors (2). 4. Locate the wires leading from the inoperative heating element and cut them off flush with the edge of the original heating element. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Element - Removal > Page 8560 Seat Heater: Service and Repair Heated Seat Element - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Peel off the adhesive backing on the back of the replacement heating element (2) and stick directly on top of the factory installed heating element (1). CAUTION: During the installation of the replacement heating element, be careful not to fold or crease the element assembly. Folds or creases will cause premature failure. 2. Connect the new heating element electrical connectors (3&4). 3. Connect the battery negative cable. 4. Verify heated seat system operation. 5. Install the appropriate seat cushion, See: Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Seat Cushion / Cover - Installation or seat back trim cover, See: Seat Back/Service and Repair/Seat Back Cushion / Cover - Installation. NOTE: Make certain the seat wire harness is correctly routed through the seat and seat back. The excess wire between the cushion and back elements should be securely tucked between the rear of the cushion foam and the rear carpet flap of the trim cover. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat Heater-Driver Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat Heater-Driver Component ID: 314 Component : SWITCH-SEAT HEATER-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT HEATER-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z737 18BK/LB GROUND 2-3 P187 18LG/BR DRIVER SEAT HEATED LED DRIVER 4 F525 16TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 5-6 F525 16TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat Heater-Driver > Page 8565 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat Heater-Passenger Component ID: 315 Component : SWITCH-SEAT HEATER-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT HEATER-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z737 18BK/LB GROUND 2-3 P188 18LG/VT PASSENGER SEAT HEATED LED DRIVER 4 F525 16TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 5-6 F525 16TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Momentary contact push button switch/modules mounted in the front face of the center console storage bin operate the heated seat system. Each heated seat switch/module has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Pressing the switch/module button initiates heat. Heat remains on until switched off or until the ignition is turned off. If switched off by the ignition, a switch/module button must be pressed to restart heating. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated seat system. If any of the heated seat elements are inoperative or damaged one or more of the LED lamps in the switch/module for the effected seat will flash. The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch/module cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are faulty or damaged, or the switch/module is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch/module assembly must be replaced. See: Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch Removal for the switch/module replacement procedure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8568 Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated seat system. The heated seat switch/modules receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after two hours of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue indefinitely until the switch/module button is pushed to turn the system off. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Switch - Removal Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/modules from the console by gently prying up from the top edge of the switch/module bezel. Take care not to scratch or damage the console or bezel in any way. 3. Disconnect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 4. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/module (3) from the bezel (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Switch - Removal > Page 8571 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Align the tabs of the switch/module to the bezel and gently push together until the tabs are securely in place. 2. Connect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 3. Gently push the heated seat switch/module bezel into the mounting hole in the center console until it is securely in place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Track: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with the power seat option, utilize a power seat track. Three reversible DC motors are incorporated into the power seat track. The motors are connected to worm-drive gearboxes that move the seat track through a combination of screw-type drive units. The front and rear of the seat are operated by different motors. They can be raised or lowered independently of each other. When the center power seat switch is pushed in the Up or Down direction, both the front and rear motors operate in unison. Each motor contains a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect it from overload. Consecutive or frequent resetting of the circuit breakers must not be allowed to continue, or the motors may be damaged. The power seat track cannot be repaired, and is serviced only as a complete assembly. If any component in this assembly is inoperative or damaged, the entire power seat track must be replaced, See: Service and Repair/Power Seat Track - Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8576 Seat Track: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When a power seat switch is actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the power seat switch contacts to the appropriate motor or motors. The motor and drive unit operate to move the seat in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the power seat track is reached. When the switch is moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor is reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the motor to run in the opposite direction. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8577 Seat Track: Testing and Inspection DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - POWER SEAT TRACK NOTE: Before any testing of the power seat system is attempted, the battery should be fully-charged and all wire harness connections and pins checked to ensure proper continuity and grounds. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. Operate the power seat switch to move all three seat motors in each direction. The seat should move in each of the selected directions. If the power seat track fails to operate in only one direction, move the seat track a short distance in the opposite direction and test again to be certain that the track is not at its travel limit. If the power seat track still fails to operate in only one direction, See: Power Seat Switch/Testing and Inspection. If the power seat track fails to operate in more than one direction, proceed as follows: 1. Check the power seat fuse in the power distribution center. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the faulty fuse. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the seat. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity of the power seat switch wire harness connector. If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the power distribution center as required. 3. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the power seat switch wire harness connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, repair the open circuit to ground as required. 4. Test the power seat switch See: Power Seat Switch/Testing and Inspection If the switch tests OK, check the wire harness between the power seat switch and the motor for shorts or opens. If the circuits check OK, replace the faulty power seat track (adjuster) assembly. If the circuits are not OK, repair the wire harness as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Track - Removal Seat Track: Service and Repair Power Seat Track - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver side seat assembly from the vehicle See: Service and Repair/Seat - Removal. 3. Disconnect the power seat wire harness connectors. 4. Disconnect the power seat wire harness retainers from the seat track assembly. 5. Remove the four bolts that secure the power seat track assembly to the seat cushion frame. 6. If the vehicle is equipped with a split bench seat, remove the fasteners that secure the center seat cushion section to the brackets on the power seat track assembly. 7. Remove the power seat track assembly from the seat cushion frame. CAUTION: Before installing the seat into the vehicle, be certain to adjust the seat fully rearward on its tracks. Then install and tighten the front track mounting screws before installing the rear screws or the tracks may be damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Track - Removal > Page 8580 Seat Track: Service and Repair Power Seat Track - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the power seat track assembly on the seat cushion frame and compare the old and replacement seat tracks to be certain the correct part is available. 2. If the vehicle is equipped with a split bench seat, Install the fasteners that secure the center seat cushion section to the brackets on the power seat track assembly. 3. Install the four bolts that secure the power seat track assembly to the seat cushion frame. Torque the bolts to 27 Nm (20 ft. lbs.). 4. Install the power seat wire harness retainers on the seat track assembly. 5. Connect the power seat wire harness connectors. 6. Install the driver side seat assembly in the vehicle. See: Service and Repair/Seat - Installation for the procedure. 7. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Locations Component ID: 302 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z384 20BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8586 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8587 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Diagrams Component ID: 302 Component : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-HOOD AJAR Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G70 20VT/LB HOOD AJAR SWITCH SENSE 2 Z384 20BK GROUND Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Locations > Page 8588 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The hood ajar switch is a normally closed, single pole, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch. This switch has two unique versions that are used in two different applications. One switch is used only on vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Theft Alarm (VTA) system for sale in certain export markets where protection of the underhood area is required equipment. The second switch is used only on domestic market vehicles equipped with an optional remote starter system. The molded plastic switch body (5) has an integral molded connector receptacle (1) on the lower end containing two terminal pins. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness. Two integral latches (2) lock the switch into a keyed mounting hole in the left side of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel below the left rear corner of the inner hood panel reinforcement. The underside of the hood panel inner reinforcement actuates the switch plunger as the hood panel is closed. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) and a sleeve-like retainer ring on the upper end of the switch body. The retainer ring has a one time, self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by closing the hood. The retainer ring is also color-coded to aid in identifying the switch application. A dark brown retainer ring identifies the underhood security switch application, while a white retainer ring identifies the remote starter system application. An installed hood ajar switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or requires readjustment, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8591 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The hood ajar switches are interchangeable physically, but not functionally. In each case, the hood ajar switch is a normally closed switch that is held open as the spring-loaded switch plunger is depressed by the inner hood panel reinforcement when the hood panel is closed and latched. When the hood is opened, the spring-loaded switch plunger extends from the switch body and the switch contacts are closed. In the underhood security application (export market vehicles only - dark brown retainer ring), the switch is connected in series between ground and the hood ajar switch sense input of the Front Control Module (FCM). The FCM uses an internal resistor pull up to monitor the state of the hood ajar switch contacts. In the remote starter system application (domestic market vehicles only - white retainer ring) the switch has a 1 kOhm diagnostic resistor connected in parallel to the switch contacts between the two switch terminals. The switch is connected in series between an output of the FCM and the hood ajar switch sense input of the FCM. The FCM continually monitors this circuit and will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any fault that it detects. The components of the switch self-adjustment feature include an integral stop on the shaft of the plunger and a ribbed, ratcheting sleeve-like retainer ring at the top of the switch body from which the plunger extends. With the switch mounting collar secured in its mounting bracket, the plunger is depressed by the hood inner reinforcement as the hood is closed. As the plunger is depressed, the plunger stop contacts the top of the retainer ring and it is driven downward, ratcheting through the switch mounting collar until the hood is fully closed and latched. The ribs on the retainer ring are engaged within the mounting collar to maintain this adjusted position. The hood ajar switch as well as the hard wired circuits between the switch and the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices related to hood ajar switch operation that provide some features of the export market vehicle theft or domestic market remote starter systems. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the electronic controls and communication related to hood ajar switch operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch - Removal Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Unlatch and open the hood. 2. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 3. From the top of the left outboard end of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel, squeeze the two hood ajar switch latch tabs (2) together and pull the switch upward out of the mounting hole (1). 4. Pull the hood ajar switch up through the mounting hole far enough to access and disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the switch connector receptacle. 5. Remove the hood ajar switch from the vehicle. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Hood Switch / Sensor > Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Hood Ajar Switch - Removal > Page 8594 Hood Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Service and Repair Hood Ajar Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the hood ajar switch (2) near the mounting hole (1) in the left outboard end of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (3) to the switch connector receptacle. 3. Insert the switch into the mounting hole until the integral switch latch tabs lock it into place. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Close and latch the hood. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Component ID: 323 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 3 Z940 20BK GROUND 4 Z13 16BK/WT GROUND 5 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 7 Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP 8 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8599 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 2 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 3 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 4 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 5 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8600 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8601 Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 324 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 2 Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 3 Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP 4 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 5 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 6 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 7 Z974 20BK/OR GROUND 8 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8602 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Component ID: 323 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 3 Z940 20BK GROUND 4 Z13 16BK/WT GROUND 5 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 7 Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP 8 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8605 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 2 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 3 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 4 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 5 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8606 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8607 Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 324 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 2 Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 3 Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP 4 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 5 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 6 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 7 Z974 20BK/OR GROUND 8 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express > Page 8608 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A window/lock switch located in each front door trim panel. The driver's side window/lock switch includes the following: - Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the power lock system. - Window Lockout Switch - A two-way, latching, push-button switch allows the vehicle operator to lock out the window switches on each passenger door so that the passenger door power windows may be operated only from the drivers door switch. - Window Switches - A two-way, momentary window switch for the driver side front door also has a second detent in the Down direction and internal circuitry to provide an Auto-Down feature for the driver side front door window. In addition to the window switch for its own door, the window/lock switch houses individual switches for each passenger door window. The passenger side window/lock switch includes the following: - Lock Switch - A two-way, momentary, resistor multiplexed switch to control the lock system. - Window Switch - A two-way, momentary window switch for the passenger side front door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8611 Power Door Lock Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The driver side window/lock switch combines a lock switch, a driver window switch with an Auto-down feature, master switches for each passenger door window, and a window lockout switch. Lock Switch The lock switch circuitry is connected in series between ground and the driver door switch mux input of the instrument cluster. Each lock switch position (Lock, Unlock, and Neutral) provides a different resistance value to the instrument cluster input, which allows the instrument cluster to sense the switch position. Based upon the lock switch input, the instrument cluster controls the battery and ground feed outputs to the individual lock motors to lock or unlock the door latches. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) in the lock switch is connected to battery current through the window circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the switch will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Window Switches The window switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit so that the windows will operate whenever the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions. Each two-way, momentary master passenger window switch in the window/lock switch provides battery current and ground to the individual window switches on each passenger door so that the window switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to its respective window motor. The switch for the driver side front door window includes an auto-down feature. When this switch is depressed to a second momentary detent position and released, the driver door window is automatically operated through an internal circuit and relay to its fully lowered position. The Auto-down event is cancelled if the switch paddle is depressed a second time in either the Up or Down direction. When the two position window lockout switch in the window/lock switch is depressed and latched in the lockout position, the battery current feed to each of the individual passenger window switches is interrupted so that the passenger door power windows can only be operated from the switches in the window/lock switch. The window lockout switch also controls the battery current feed for the LED in each passenger window switch so that the switch will not be illuminated when it is locked out. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8612 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection WINDOW/DOOR LOCK SWITCH Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the window/lock switch window and lock switches receive battery current through the circuit breaker in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If only one LED in the switch is inoperative, replace the switch. If the driver side front door window operates in a normal manner, but the Auto-Down feature is inoperative, replace the window/lock switch. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the window/lock switch from the door trim panel See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Trim Panel - Removal. 3. Disconnect the door wire harness connectors from the switch. 4. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switches in each switch position. If not OK, replace the window/lock switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using a trim stick, start at the rear of the switch and pry up to remove from door trim panel. 3. Disconnect electrical harness connectors from switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8615 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect electrical harness connectors to switch. 2. Insert front end of switch into door trim panel opening. Press into place. 3. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Mirror Switch: Locations Component ID: 305 Component : SWITCH-MIRROR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MIRROR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 P76 20TN/RD MIRROR COMMON DRIVER 4 Z13 20BK/WT GROUND 5 A940 16RD FUSED B(+) 6 P72 20TN/DG PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER 7 P71 20DB DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER 8 P74 20TN/YL PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER 9 P75 20TN/LG DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER 10 - Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8619 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8620 Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 305 Component : SWITCH-MIRROR Connector: Name : SWITCH-MIRROR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 10 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1-2-3 P76 20TN/RD MIRROR COMMON DRIVER 4 Z13 20BK/WT GROUND 5 A940 16RD FUSED B(+) 6 P72 20TN/DG PASSENGER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER 7 P71 20DB DRIVER MIRROR VERTICAL DRIVER 8 P74 20TN/YL PASSENGER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER 9 P75 20TN/LG DRIVER MIRROR HORIZONTAL DRIVER 10 - Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8621 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Mirror Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A power mirror switch is located on the driver's door trim panel, attached to the window/lock switch. The power mirror switch includes the following: - Power Mirror Selector Switch - A three-position rotary joystick switch selects the right or left power mirror for adjustment, or turns the power mirror system Off in the center position. - Power Mirror Adjustment Switch - A momentary joystick directional switch allows the driver to adjust the selected power mirror in the Up, Down, Right or Left directions. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8624 Power Mirror Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The power mirror switch circuitry is connected to battery current through a fuse in the IPM on a fused B(+) circuit so that the power mirrors remain operational regardless of the ignition switch position. A rotary joystick selector switch has three positions, one to select the right mirror, one to select the left mirror, and a center Off position. After the right or left mirror is selected, the joystick is moved to move the selected mirror Up, Down, Right or Left. The power mirror switch controls the battery current and ground feeds to each of the four (two in each mirror head) power mirror motors. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8625 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection SWITCH - MIRROR 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power mirror switch See: Service and Repair/Removal. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the switch. 4. Test the switch continuity. See the Switch Tests chart to determine if the continuity is correct for the suspect switch in each switch position. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the window/lock switch See: Power Door Lock Switch/Service and Repair/Removal. 3. Remove the mirror switch from the window/lock switch assembly by twisting switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8628 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install mirror switch to window/lock switch assembly. 2. Connect wire harness connectors to switches. 3. Install window/lock switch assembly See: Power Door Lock Switch/Service and Repair/Installation. 4. Connect battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations Power Seat Switch: Locations Component ID: 316 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 2 Z975 12BK GROUND 3-4 P21 10LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER 5-6-- 7-8 P19 10LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER 9 P15 10LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 10 P17 10LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 11 P13 10LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER 12 P11 10LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8632 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8633 Power Seat Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 316 Component : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT-DRIVER Color : BLACK # of pins : 12 Qualifier : (POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 A915 10RD FUSED B(+) 2 Z975 12BK GROUND 3-4 P21 10LG/TN DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER DOWN DRIVER 5-6-- 7-8 P19 10LG/LB DRIVER SEAT FRONT RISER UP DRIVER 9 P15 10LG/WT DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD DRIVER 10 P17 10LG/DG DRIVER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD DRIVER 11 P13 10LG/OR DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER DOWN DRIVER 12 P11 10LG/YL DRIVER SEAT REAR RISER UP DRIVER Component Location - 30 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8634 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The power seat can be adjusted in six different ways using the power seat switch. The switch is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion side shield. The individual switches in the power seat switch unit cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or inoperative, the entire power seat switch assembly must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8637 Power Seat Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When a power switch control knob or knobs are actuated, a battery feed and a ground path are applied through the switch contacts to the power seat track or recliner adjuster motor. The selected adjuster motor operates to move the seat track or recliner through its drive unit in the selected direction until the switch is released, or until the travel limit of the adjuster is reached. When the switch is moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and ground path to the motor are reversed through the switch contacts. This causes the adjuster motor to run in the opposite direction. No power seat switch should be held applied in any direction after the adjuster has reached its travel limit. The power seat adjuster motors each contain a self-resetting circuit breaker to protect them from overload. However, consecutive or frequent resetting of the circuit breaker must not be allowed to continue, or the motor may be damaged. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8638 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER SEAT SWITCH For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the power seat switch from the power seat. See: Service and Repair/Power Seat Switch - Removal for the appropriate procedure. 3. With assistance from another person, use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the power seat switches in each position. See the Power Seat Switch schematic and Continuity chart. If OK, See: Seats/Seat Track/Testing and Inspection for additional diagnostic procedures. If not OK, replace the inoperative power seat switch assembly. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8639 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Switch - Removal Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Power Seat Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the screw (4) that secures the recliner lever (5) to the recliner mechanism release shaft on the outboard side of the driver side front seat cushion side shield (2). 3. Pull the recliner lever (5) off of the recliner mechanism release shaft. 4. Remove the two screws (3) and (6) that secure the driver side seat cushion side shield (2) to the outboard seat cushion frame. 5. Pull the driver side seat cushion side shield (2) away from the seat cushion frame far enough to access the power seat switch assembly (1) wire harness connector. 6. Unplug the wire harness connector from the power seat switch module. 7. Remove the seat cushion side shield and power seat switch module from the seat as a unit. 8. Remove the two screws (3) that secure the power seat switch (2) to the inside of the seat cushion side shield (1). 9. Remove the power seat switch from the seat cushion side shield. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Seat Switch - Removal > Page 8642 Power Seat Switch: Service and Repair Power Seat Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the two screws (3) that secure the power seat switch (2) to the inside of the seat cushion side shield (1). 2. Install the wire harness connector on the power seat switch assembly. 3. position the seat cushion side shield (2) and power seat switch assembly (1) onto the seat frame. 4. Install the seat cushion side shield screws (3) and (6). 5. Install the recliner lever (5) on the recliner mechanism release shaft. 6. Install the screw (4) that secures the recliner lever (5) to the recliner mechanism release shaft on the outboard side of the driver side front seat. 7. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat Heater-Driver Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat Heater-Driver Component ID: 314 Component : SWITCH-SEAT HEATER-DRIVER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT HEATER-DRIVER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z737 18BK/LB GROUND 2-3 P187 18LG/BR DRIVER SEAT HEATED LED DRIVER 4 F525 16TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 5-6 F525 16TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Seat Heater-Driver > Page 8647 Seat Heater Switch: Diagrams Switch-Seat Heater-Passenger Component ID: 315 Component : SWITCH-SEAT HEATER-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-SEAT HEATER-PASSENGER Color : # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Z737 18BK/LB GROUND 2-3 P188 18LG/VT PASSENGER SEAT HEATED LED DRIVER 4 F525 16TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) 5-6 F525 16TN/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Momentary contact push button switch/modules mounted in the front face of the center console storage bin operate the heated seat system. Each heated seat switch/module has two Light-Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lamps, which indicate the selected level (Low or High) of the seat heater. Pressing the switch/module button initiates heat. Heat remains on until switched off or until the ignition is turned off. If switched off by the ignition, a switch/module button must be pressed to restart heating. The switch/modules contain the solid state electronic control and diagnostic logic circuitry for the heated seat system. If any of the heated seat elements are inoperative or damaged one or more of the LED lamps in the switch/module for the effected seat will flash. The LED indicator lamps in each heated seat switch/module cannot be repaired. If the LED lamps are faulty or damaged, or the switch/module is inoperative or damaged the individual heated seat switch/module assembly must be replaced. See: Service and Repair/Heated Seat Switch Removal for the switch/module replacement procedure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8650 Seat Heater Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION A Heated Seat Switch/Module is used to control the heated seat system. The heated seat switch/modules receive battery current through a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit when the ignition switch is in the On position. The switch/module responds to heated seat switch/module button input and ignition switch status inputs by controlling the 12v output to the front seat heating elements through integral solid-state relays. When either of the heated seat switch/module buttons are depressed the heating element for the selected seat is energized. Amber Light Emitting Diodes (LEDS) on the side of each switch/module indicate the level of heat in use: Two LEDs are illuminated for high, one for low, and none for off. Pressing the switch/module button once will select high-level heating. Pressing the button a second time will select low-level heating. Pressing the button a third time will shut the heating elements off. The heated seat switch/module energizes an integral solid-state relay, which supplies battery current to the heating elements. When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation after heating is activated. The heat output then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If high-level heating is selected, the control system will automatically switch to the low level after two hours of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. Operation on the low setting will continue indefinitely until the switch/module button is pushed to turn the system off. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Switch - Removal Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/modules from the console by gently prying up from the top edge of the switch/module bezel. Take care not to scratch or damage the console or bezel in any way. 3. Disconnect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 4. Using an appropriate flat bladed tool, remove the heated seat switch/module (3) from the bezel (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Seat Switch - Removal > Page 8653 Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Heated Seat Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Align the tabs of the switch/module to the bezel and gently push together until the tabs are securely in place. 2. Connect the switch/module electrical connectors (2) and (4). 3. Gently push the heated seat switch/module bezel into the mounting hole in the center console until it is securely in place. 4. Connect the battery negative cable. 5. Verify heated seat system operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Diagrams Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 320 Component : SWITCH-SUNROOF Connector: Name : SWITCH-SUNROOF Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Gender : FEMALE Pin Circuit Description 1 Q554 18OR/TN SUNROOF CLOSED 2 Z138 18BK/VT GROUND 3 Q553 18OR/YL SUNROOF OPEN 4 Q555 18OR/LB SUNROOF MOTOR B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a power sunroof utilize a sunroof control switch. On this model, the sunroof control switch is located in the overhead console, in between the two reading lamps. The switch is mounted in the overhead console with four plastic retaining tabs, molded into the switch housing. This switch incorporates six selections of operation open, auto open, close, auto close, auto vent and vent. The individual switches in the sunroof control switch unit cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or faulty, the entire sunroof control switch unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8659 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION With the operation of the sunroof control switch, voltage is directed to the sunroof motor, through the switch contacts or control module. If the control switch is depressed and held depressed the voltage signal is controlled manually through the switch contacts, so when the switch is released the sunroof stops. Refer to the Owner's Manual for more information on the operation of the sunroof switch and system. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8660 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection CONTROL SWITCH The following test will determine if the sunroof control switch is operating properly. 1. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 2. Remove the sunroof control switch from the overhead console See: Service and Repair/Control Switch/Removal. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the switch terminals for proper continuity using the table below. If any of the terminals do not show proper continuity, replace the sunroof control switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Switch Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Control Switch Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 3. Disconnect the sunroof control switch electrical connector. Depress the connector retaining tab and pull the connector straight out. 4. To remove the switch from the overhead console, push on the back of the switch until it comes free from the overhead console. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch in the overhead console assembly. Be certain the switch is securely snapped in place. 2. Connect the sunroof control switch electrical connector. Be certain the switch connector is securely snapped in place. 3. Install the overhead console See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Installation. 4. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Switch > Page 8663 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 3. Disconnect the sunroof control switch electrical connector. Depress the connector retaining tab and pull the connector straight out. 4. To remove the switch from the overhead console, push on the back of the switch until it comes free from the overhead console. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Control Switch > Page 8664 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Service and Repair Sunroof Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the switch in the overhead console assembly. Be certain the switch is securely snapped in place. 2. Connect the sunroof control switch electrical connector. Be certain the switch connector is securely snapped in place. 3. Install the overhead console See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Installation. 4. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Spare Tire Carrier: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: "Do NOT use impact tools on the Spare Tire Winch assembly to raise or lower the Spare Tire". 1. Remove the spare tire. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Remove the three bolts securing the spare tire winch to the crossmember and then remove the winch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8669 Spare Tire Carrier: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the winch to the crossmember and tighten the three bolts to 39 Nm (28 ft.lbs.). 2. Lower the vehicle. NOTE: "Do NOT use impact tools on the Spare Tire Winch assembly to raise or lower the Spare Tire". 3. Install the spare tire back into position. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Splash Guard: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the screws and remove the shields. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Splash Guard > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8674 Splash Guard: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the shields and install the screws. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tailgate Latch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the bolt (2) that secures the tailgate check cable (3) to the tailgate. 2. Remove the second bolt (2) to the latch (4) and remove from the side of the tailgate. 3. Remove the release handle link (5) from the latch (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8680 Tailgate Latch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Connect the release handle link (5) to the latch (4). 2. Position the latch (4) into the tailgate and install the upper bolt (2). 3. Install the bolt (2) that secures the tailgate check cable (3) to the tailgate. Tighten both bolts to 22.5 Nm (16.5 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Release Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tailgate Release Handle: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: If equipped with a tailgate cover, it must be removed to access the release handle mounting bolts. 1. Remove the three mounting screws (2) to the release handle (1). 2. Pull out the release handle (2) far enough to disconnect the tailgate latch links (3) from the clips (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Release Handle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8685 Tailgate Release Handle: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the release handle (2) in the tailgate and connect the latch links (3) to the clips (1). 2. Remove the three mounting screws (2) to the release handle (1). Tighten bolts to 26 Nm (19 ft. lbs.). NOTE: If equipped with a tailgate cover, it must be reinstalled after the release handle mounting bolts are tightened. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tailgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the tailgate and locate the tailgate check cable (3) on the left and right of the cargo box below the tailgate striker (1) as necessary. 2. Pry the cable lock tab(s) (4) outward using a screwdriver or flat bladed tool (2) and remove the tailgate check cable(s) from the cargo box. 3. Remove the bolt (2) that secures the tailgate check cable (3) to the left and right side of the tailgate as necessary. 4. Remove the tailgate check cable(s) from the tailgate. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Shock / Support > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8690 Tailgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the tailgate check cable(s) (3) onto the tailgate, install the bolt (1) that secures the tailgate check cable (3) to the left and right side of the tailgate as necessary. Tighten bolt to 23 Nm (17 ft. lbs.). 2. Slip the cable over the bolt on the cargo box until it snaps on, securing the lock tab(s) (4). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Striker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tailgate Striker: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the tailgate and remove the striker (1) from the cargo box. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Tailgate > Tailgate Striker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8695 Tailgate Striker: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the latch striker (1) and tighten to 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the Front End Sheet Metal (FESM) mounting bolt (3). 2. Remove the two lower fascia support nuts (1) and remove the tow hook assembly (5). 3. Remove the nuts (3) and remove the brackets (1 & 2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Towing Hook / Bracket > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8700 Towing Hook / Bracket: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the brackets (1 & 2) and install the nuts (3). 2. Tighten the nuts to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). 3. Install the hook assembly (5) and install the FESM bolt (3). 4. Install the fascia support nuts (1). 5. Tighten the FESM Bolt (3) to 75 Nm (55 ft. lbs.). 6. Tighten the fascia support nuts (1) to 95 Nm (70 ft. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Truck Bed > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Box Removal Truck Bed: Service and Repair Cargo Box - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the fuel fill hose and vent hose. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Removal 2. Disconnect the tail lamp wire harness. 3. Remove the cargo box bolts. 4. Remove the cargo box. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Truck Bed > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Box Removal > Page 8705 Truck Bed: Service and Repair Cargo Box - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the cargo box and install the bolts. 2. Tighten the bolts to 108 Nm (80 ft. lbs.). 3. Connect the fuel fill and vent hoses. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank Installation 4. Connect the tail lamp wire harness. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair > Cowl Top Panel - Removal Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair Cowl Top Panel - Removal REMOVAL 1. Open the hood and remove the wiper arm nuts and wiper arms. See: Wiper and Washer Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms Removal 2. Remove the four rear nuts and the two front pins. 3. Remove the cowl grille. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Locations > Club Door Sealing System Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Weatherstrip > Component Information > Locations > Club Door Sealing System > Page 8717 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove sunroof glass panel. See: Roof and Associated Components/Sunroof / Moonroof/Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Removal 2. Place glass panel on clean work area with the top side up. Support the glass assembly from underside to avoid bending or otherwise damaging the mounting tabs. 3. Grasp the seal and pull seal away from the glass panel. The seal is a one piece seal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8722 Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Always position seal seam on center of the passenger side of glass panel. 1. Place seal into position. 2. Install seal on glass. Using care working the seal around the glass, being careful not to over stretch the seal while installing. 3. Install the glass panel. See: Roof and Associated Components/Sunroof / Moonroof/Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and Repair/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Locations Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 317 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 8728 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 8729 Cruise Control Switch: Locations Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 318 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 8730 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 317 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 8733 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 8734 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 318 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 8735 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two separate switch pods operate the speed control system. The steering-wheel-mounted switches use multiplexed circuits to provide inputs to the PCM for ON, OFF, RESUME, ACCELERATE, SET, DECEL and CANCEL modes. Refer to "Operation" for more information on speed control switch functions and setting procedures. The individual switches cannot be repaired. If one switch fails, the entire switch module must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8738 Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When speed control is selected by depressing the ON, OFF switch, the PCM allows a set speed to be stored in its RAM for speed control. To store a set speed, depress the SET switch while the vehicle is moving at a speed between approximately 35 and 85 mph. In order for the speed control to engage, the brakes cannot be applied, nor can the gear selector be indicating the transmission is in Park or Neutral. The speed control can be disengaged manually by: - Stepping on the brake pedal - Depressing the OFF switch - Depressing the CANCEL switch. The speed control can be disengaged also by any of the following conditions: - An indication of Park or Neutral (auto. trans.) - The VSS signal increases at a rate of 10 mph per second (indicates that the co-efficient of friction between the road surface and tires is extremely low) - Depressing the clutch pedal (manual trans.). - Excessive engine rpm (indicates that the transmission may be in a low gear) - The VSS signal decreases at a rate of 10 mph per second (indicates that the vehicle may have decelerated at an extremely high rate) - If the actual speed is not within 20 mph of the set speed The previous disengagement conditions are programmed for added safety. Once the speed control has been disengaged, depressing the ACCEL switch restores the vehicle to the target speed that was stored in the PCM's RAM NOTE: Depressing the OFF switch will erase the set speed stored in the PCM's RAM. If, while the speed control is engaged, the driver wishes to increase vehicle speed, the PCM is programmed for an acceleration feature. With the ACCEL switch held closed, the vehicle accelerates slowly to the desired speed. The new target speed is stored in the PCM's RAM when the ACCEL switch is released. The PCM also has a "tap-up" feature in which vehicle speed increases at a rate of approximately 2 mph for each momentary switch activation of the ACCEL switch. The PCM also provides a means to decelerate without disengaging speed control. To decelerate from an existing recorded target speed, depress and hold the COAST switch until the desired speed is reached. Then release the switch. The ON, OFF switch operates two components: the PCM's ON, OFF input, and the battery voltage to the brake switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Before attempting to diagnose, remove or install any airbag system or related steering wheel and steering column components you must first disconnect and isolate the negative (ground) battery cable. Wait 2 minutes for system capacitor to discharge before further system service. Failure to do so could result in accidental deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable from battery. 2. Remove airbag module. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal . 3. Unplug electrical connector. 4. Remove speed control switch mounting screw (1) and remove switch from steering wheel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8741 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position switch to steering wheel. 2. Install switch mounting screw and tighten to 1.7 Nm (15 in. lbs.). 3. Plug electrical connector into switch. 4. Install airbag module. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation 5. Connect negative battery cable to battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Locations Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 317 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 8747 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 8748 Cruise Control Switch: Locations Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 318 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 8749 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Left Component ID: 317 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-LEFT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 8752 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 8753 Cruise Control Switch: Diagrams Switch-Speed Control-Right Component ID: 318 Component : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Connector: Name : SWITCH-SPEED CONTROL-RIGHT Color : BLACK # of pins : 3 A V38 22VT/OR S/C SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL B K900 22DB/DG SENSOR GROUND C V37 22VT S/C SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Speed Control-Left > Page 8754 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two separate switch pods operate the speed control system. The steering-wheel-mounted switches use multiplexed circuits to provide inputs to the PCM for ON, OFF, RESUME, ACCELERATE, SET, DECEL and CANCEL modes. Refer to "Operation" for more information on speed control switch functions and setting procedures. The individual switches cannot be repaired. If one switch fails, the entire switch module must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8757 Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When speed control is selected by depressing the ON, OFF switch, the PCM allows a set speed to be stored in its RAM for speed control. To store a set speed, depress the SET switch while the vehicle is moving at a speed between approximately 35 and 85 mph. In order for the speed control to engage, the brakes cannot be applied, nor can the gear selector be indicating the transmission is in Park or Neutral. The speed control can be disengaged manually by: - Stepping on the brake pedal - Depressing the OFF switch - Depressing the CANCEL switch. The speed control can be disengaged also by any of the following conditions: - An indication of Park or Neutral (auto. trans.) - The VSS signal increases at a rate of 10 mph per second (indicates that the co-efficient of friction between the road surface and tires is extremely low) - Depressing the clutch pedal (manual trans.). - Excessive engine rpm (indicates that the transmission may be in a low gear) - The VSS signal decreases at a rate of 10 mph per second (indicates that the vehicle may have decelerated at an extremely high rate) - If the actual speed is not within 20 mph of the set speed The previous disengagement conditions are programmed for added safety. Once the speed control has been disengaged, depressing the ACCEL switch restores the vehicle to the target speed that was stored in the PCM's RAM NOTE: Depressing the OFF switch will erase the set speed stored in the PCM's RAM. If, while the speed control is engaged, the driver wishes to increase vehicle speed, the PCM is programmed for an acceleration feature. With the ACCEL switch held closed, the vehicle accelerates slowly to the desired speed. The new target speed is stored in the PCM's RAM when the ACCEL switch is released. The PCM also has a "tap-up" feature in which vehicle speed increases at a rate of approximately 2 mph for each momentary switch activation of the ACCEL switch. The PCM also provides a means to decelerate without disengaging speed control. To decelerate from an existing recorded target speed, depress and hold the COAST switch until the desired speed is reached. Then release the switch. The ON, OFF switch operates two components: the PCM's ON, OFF input, and the battery voltage to the brake switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: Before attempting to diagnose, remove or install any airbag system or related steering wheel and steering column components you must first disconnect and isolate the negative (ground) battery cable. Wait 2 minutes for system capacitor to discharge before further system service. Failure to do so could result in accidental deployment and possible personal injury. 1. Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable from battery. 2. Remove airbag module. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal . 3. Unplug electrical connector. 4. Remove speed control switch mounting screw (1) and remove switch from steering wheel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8760 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position switch to steering wheel. 2. Install switch mounting screw and tighten to 1.7 Nm (15 in. lbs.). 3. Plug electrical connector into switch. 4. Install airbag module. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation 5. Connect negative battery cable to battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description ABS Light: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator serves both the standard equipment Rear Wheel Anti-Lock (RWAL) and optional equipment 4-Wheel Anti-Lock (4WAL) brake systems. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The ABS indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Failure of Anti-lock Braking System in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ABS indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > ABS Light > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8766 ABS Light: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ABS indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the ABS system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ABS indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ABS indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ABS indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - ABS Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ABS indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB, the ABS indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the CAB for five consecutive message cycles, the ABS indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a valid message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the ABS indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. - ABS Diagnostic Test - The ABS indicator is blinked ON and OFF by lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the CAB during the performance of the ABS diagnostic tests. The CAB continually monitors the ABS circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the CAB sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a system malfunction or that the ABS system has become ineffective. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the ABS indicator fails to light due to an open or short in the cluster ABS indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the CAB of the condition, then the instrument cluster and the CAB will each store a DTC. For proper diagnosis of the antilock brake system, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ABS indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Chime/Buzzer - Description Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Chime/Buzzer - Description DESCRIPTION A chime warning system is standard factory-installed equipment. The chime warning system uses an electromechanical transducer and an electromechanical relay that are soldered onto the electronic circuit board inside of the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (1) to provide audible indications of various vehicle conditions that may require the attention of the vehicle operator or occupants. The EMIC also includes the hardware and software necessary to serve as the electronic body control module and is sometimes referred to as the Cab Compartment Node or CCN. The electromechanical transducer generates beep tones and chime tones, while the electromechanical relay generates click tones to emulate the sounds associated with conventional turn signal and hazard warning flasher operation. The microprocessor-based EMIC utilizes electronic chime request messages received from other modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus along with hard wired inputs to monitor many sensors and switches throughout the vehicle. In response to those inputs, the circuitry and programming of the EMIC allow it to control the audible outputs that are produced through its on-board transducer and relay. The EMIC is capable of producing the following audible outputs: - Slow Rate Repetitive Click - Repeated click tones that are issued at a slow rate of about 50 clicks per minute. - Fast Rate Repetitive Click - Repeated click tones that are issued at a fast rate of more than about 100 clicks per minute. - Fixed Duration Beep - A short, sharp, single tactile beep tone. - Single Chime Tone - A single chime tone. - Slow Rate Repetitive Chime - Repeated chime tones that are issued at a slow rate of about 50 chimes per minute. - Fast Rate Repetitive Chime - Repeated chime tones that are issued at a fast rate of about 180 chimes per minute. Hard wired circuitry connects the EMIC and the various chime warning system switch and sensor inputs to their modules and to each other through the electrical system of the vehicle. These hard wired circuits are integral to several wire harnesses, which are routed throughout the vehicle and retained by many different methods. These circuits may be connected to each other, to the vehicle electrical system and to the EMIC through the use of a combination of soldered splices, splice block connectors, and many different types of wire harness terminal connectors and insulators. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, further details on wire harness routing and retention, as well as pin-out and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. The EMIC chime warning system circuits and components cannot be adjusted or repaired. If the EMIC circuitry, the on-board transducer or the relay are damaged or ineffective, the EMIC unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Chime/Buzzer - Description > Page 8771 Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Chime/Buzzer - Operation OPERATION The chime warning system operates on battery voltage received through a fuse in the Junction Block (JB) on a non-switched fused B(+) circuit so that the system may operate regardless of the ignition switch position. The chime warning system also monitors the ignition switch position so that some chime features are functional only with the ignition switch in the ON position, while others are functional regardless of the ignition switch position. The chime warning system provides an audible indication to the vehicle operator or occupants under the following conditions: - Airbag Indicator Warning - The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch is in the ON position, and an electronic message is received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) requesting airbag indicator illumination. This warning will only occur following completion of the airbag indicator bulb test, and will only occur once during any ignition cycle. - Door Ajar Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch is in the ON position, a hard wired input is received indicating that the status of any door ajar switch has changed, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus indicating that the vehicle is moving. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Data Reset - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the ignition switch is in the ON position, and an electronic message is received over the CAN data bus from the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) requesting that the EVIC average fuel economy, trip odometer, distance to empty or customer programmable features data be reset. The EVIC monitors hard wired inputs from the EVIC control push button switches to determine the proper reset messages to send to the EMIC. - Fasten Seat Belt Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to announce that a hard wired input from the seat belt switch indicates that the driver side front seat belt is not fastened with the ignition switch in the ON position. The chime warning system also supports the enhanced seatbelt reminder (beltminder) when this feature is enabled. See: Seat Belt Reminder Lamp/Description and Operation/Operation. - Head/Park Lamps-On Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a fast rate to indicate that hard wired inputs from the driver door ajar switch, the headlamp switch, and the ignition switch indicate that the exterior lamps are turned ON with the driver side front door opened and the ignition switch in the OFF position. The chimes will continue to sound until the exterior lamps are turned OFF, the driver side front door is closed, or the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, whichever occurs first. - Key-In-Ignition Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a fast rate to indicate that hard wired inputs from the driver door ajar switch, the ignition switch, and the key-in ignition switch circuitry of the ignition switch indicate that the key is in the ignition lock cylinder with the driver side front door open and the ignition switch in the OFF position. The chimes will continue to sound until the key is removed from the ignition lock cylinder, the driver side front door is closed, or the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, whichever occurs first. - Low Fuel Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the low fuel indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. This chime will only occur once during any ignition cycle. - Low Wash Indicator Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime when the low washer fluid indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. This chime will only occur once during any ignition cycle. - Overspeed Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to indicate that the vehicle speed is over a pre-programmed speed value. The EMIC monitors electronic vehicle speed messages received over the CAN data bus. This feature is only enabled on an EMIC that has been programmed with a Middle East Gulf Coast Country (GCC) country code. - Park Brake Reminder - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime to announce that the hard wired input from the park brake switch and an electronic vehicle speed message received over the CAN data bus indicate that the park brake is applied and the vehicle is moving. This chime will repeat each time the input conditions are met. - Sentry Key Customer Learn Mode Announcement - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime to confirm that an electronic Customer Learn mode message has been received over the CAN data bus to indicate that the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) is prepared for programming additional sentry key transponders. This chime feature is only active on vehicles equipped with the optional Sentry Key system, and sold in a market where Customer Learn programming is an allowed feature. - Trans Overtemp Indicator Warning - On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission only, the EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate when the transmission overtemp indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry for a high or critical transmission fluid temperature condition. This chime will repeat each time the trans overtemp indicator is cycled from OFF to ON. - Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Flasher Emulation - The EMIC relay will generate repetitive clicks at a slow rate to emulate an electromechanical flasher when the turn signal or hazard warning system are operating. The EMIC relay will generate repetitive clicks at a fast rate to indicate that the right or left turn signal are operating with one or more bulbs ineffective. In either case, the clicks will continue until the turn signal and hazard warning systems are turned OFF. - Turn Signal On Warning - The EMIC transducer will generate repetitive chimes at a slow rate to indicate that a turn signal has been active continuously for 1.6 kilometers (1 mile) with the vehicle speed greater than 22 kilometers-per-hour (15 miles-per hour). Vehicles built for markets other than the United States and Canada have a revised distance threshold of 4 kilometers (2.49 miles) for this feature. The chime will continue until the turn signal input becomes inactive or until the electronic vehicle speed message indicates that the speed is less than 22 kilometers-per-hour (15 miles-per-hour), whichever occurs first. The hazard warning flashers will not activate this chime feature. - Warning Indicator Announcement - The EMIC transducer will generate one short chime each time the check gauges indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster circuitry. The check gauges indicator may be illuminated when any critical engine or transmission systems are operating outside of their normal parameters. The instrument cluster monitors electronic messages received over the CAN data bus to determine when to Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Chime/Buzzer - Description > Page 8772 illuminate the check gauges indicator. The EMIC provides chime service for all available features in the chime warning system. The EMIC relies upon its internal programming, numerous hard wired inputs, and electronic message inputs received from other modules over the CAN data bus network to provide the chime warning system features. The internal programming of the EMIC determines the priority of each chime request input that is received, as well as the rate and duration of each chime that is to be generated. The hard wired circuits between components related to the chime warning system may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the chime warning system or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the chime warning system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the chime warning system or the electronic controls and communication related to chime warning system operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Audible Warning Device > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8773 Audible Warning Device: Testing and Inspection CHIME WARNING SYSTEM WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. The hard wired circuits between components related to the chime warning system may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the chime warning system or the electronic controls or communication between modules and other devices that provide some features of the chime warning system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the chime warning system or the electronic controls and communication related to chime warning system operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A brake indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area below and right of the speedometer needle hub. The brake indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the word BRAKE (all clusters with a miles-per-hour primary speedometer scale), or the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Brake Failure (all clusters with a kilometers-per-hour primary scale) in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The brake indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8778 Brake Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the parking brake is applied, when there are certain brake hydraulic system malfunctions as indicated by a low brake hydraulic fluid level condition, or when the brake fluid level switch is disconnected. The brake indicator can also give an indication when certain faults are detected in the Antilock Brake System (ABS). This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming, electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, and a hard wired input from the park brake switch. The brake indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the brake indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the brake indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - Brake Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic brake indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB, the brake indicator will be illuminated. The CAB may also send lamp-ON messages as feedback during ABS diagnostic procedures. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Park Brake Switch Input - Each time the cluster detects ground on the park brake switch sense circuit (park brake switch closed = park brake applied or not fully released) while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the brake indicator flashes ON and OFF. The indicator continues to flash until the park brake switch sense input to the cluster is an open circuit (park brake switch open = park brake fully released), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the instrument cluster is put through the actuator test, the brake indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The park brake switch on the park brake pedal mechanism provides a hard wired ground input to the instrument cluster circuitry through the park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied or not fully released. The CAB continually monitors the ABS system circuits and sensors, including the brake fluid level switch on the brake master cylinder reservoir, to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the CAB sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the CAB has detected a brake hydraulic system malfunction or that the ABS system has become ineffective. The CAB will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. For further diagnosis of the brake indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection The hard wired park brake switch input to the instrument cluster may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. For proper diagnosis of the brake fluid level switch, the ABS, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to brake indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Brake Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8779 Brake Warning Indicator: Testing and Inspection BRAKE INDICATOR WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. The hard wired park brake switch input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. However, conventional diagnostic methods may not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the EMIC, the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB), the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus, or the electronic message inputs also used by the EMIC to provide brake indicator operation. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the EMIC, the CAB, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to brake indicator operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Charge Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A charging indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The charging indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Battery Charging Condition in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The charging indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Charge Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8784 Charge Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The charging indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electrical system voltage is too low or too high. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The charging indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the charging indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the charging indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Voltage Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic system voltage message from the PCM indicating the voltage is low (less than about 11.5 volts is a charge fail condition), the charging indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the voltage is normal (greater than about 12.0 volts, but less than 16.0 volts), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Voltage High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic system voltage message from the PCM indicating the voltage is high (greater than about 16.0 volts), the charging indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating the voltage is normal (less than about 15.5 volts, but greater than 11.5 volts), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the charging indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the electrical system voltage to control the generator output. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the charging indicator due to a charge fail or voltage high condition, it may indicate that the charging system requires service. For further diagnosis of the charging indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the charging system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to charging indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8789 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8790 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8791 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8792 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8793 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts reference the figure numbers of the illustrations. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8794 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8795 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8796 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8797 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in Connector Replacement. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure)See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing. 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8798 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8799 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8800 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8801 Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8802 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8803 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8804 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8805 Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-41-02 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8806 Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clock: > 08-006-09 > Mar > 09 > Audio System - RES Radio Clock Lockup Clock: Customer Interest Audio System - RES Radio Clock Lockup NUMBER: 08-006-09 GROUP: Electrical DATE: March 19, 2009 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 9.04 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: RES Radio Clock Lockup and SDARS Reset OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flashing the Radio (RES) with new software. MODELS: 2008 (HB) Durango 2008 (HG) Aspen 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2008 (JS41) Sebring/Avenger 2008 (K1) Cherokee(CKD) 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty 2008 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2008 (ND) Dakota 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2008 (W2) Grand Cherokee (CKD) 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2008 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may experience an intermittent lock up of the clock. No manual reset will be possible thru setup or time button. Customers with (SDARS) my also lose Satellite preset channels after an over the air GCI update from Sirius. DIAGNOSIS: Customers unable to change the time and/or complain of time lockup on the display. Customer with Satellite may complain of the preset channels changing on their own. Especially, if the customer has noticed a Sirius updating message recently. Presets will return to the default settings without any other satellite symptoms. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clock: > 08-006-09 > Mar > 09 > Audio System - RES Radio Clock Lockup > Page 8815 If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarMOBILE(TM) in standalone mode can be used for the flash. NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 9.04 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service> StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN® vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle data link connector (DLC). 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition key to the run position. 6. Select "ECU View" 7. Touch the screen to highlight the Radio in the list of modules. 8. Select "More Options" 9. Select "ECU Flash". 10. Record the "Part Number", displayed on the "Flash Radio" screen, for later reference. 11. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 12. Highlight the listed Radio calibration. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Clock: > 08-006-09 > Mar > 09 > Audio System - RES Radio Clock Lockup > Page 8816 13. Select "Download to Scantool". 14. Select "Close after the download is complete, then select "Back". 15. Select "Update Controller". Follow the on screen instructions. 16. When the Radio update is complete, select "OK". 17. Verify that the part number changed at the top of the "Flash Radio" screen. 18. Verify proper operation of the Radio. NOTE: Due to the Radio programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clock: > 08-006-09 > Mar > 09 > Audio System - RES Radio Clock Lockup Clock: All Technical Service Bulletins Audio System - RES Radio Clock Lockup NUMBER: 08-006-09 GROUP: Electrical DATE: March 19, 2009 THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 9.04 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: Flash: RES Radio Clock Lockup and SDARS Reset OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves flashing the Radio (RES) with new software. MODELS: 2008 (HB) Durango 2008 (HG) Aspen 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2008 (JS41) Sebring/Avenger 2008 (K1) Cherokee(CKD) 2008 (KA) Nitro 2008 (KK) Liberty 2008 (LX) 300/Magnum/Charger 2008 (ND) Dakota 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Caravan 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Grand Voyager (International Markets) 2008 (W2) Grand Cherokee (CKD) 2008 (WK) Grand Cherokee 2008 (XK) Commander SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Customers may experience an intermittent lock up of the clock. No manual reset will be possible thru setup or time button. Customers with (SDARS) my also lose Satellite preset channels after an over the air GCI update from Sirius. DIAGNOSIS: Customers unable to change the time and/or complain of time lockup on the display. Customer with Satellite may complain of the preset channels changing on their own. Especially, if the customer has noticed a Sirius updating message recently. Presets will return to the default settings without any other satellite symptoms. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clock: > 08-006-09 > Mar > 09 > Audio System - RES Radio Clock Lockup > Page 8822 If the vehicle operator describes or experiences the Symptom/Condition, perform the Repair Procedure. SPECIAL TOOLS/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: The StarMOBILE(TM) in standalone mode can be used for the flash. NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R); must be programmed with software release level 9.04 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service> StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Install a battery charger and verify that the charging rate provides approximately 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN® vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle data link connector (DLC). 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition key to the run position. 6. Select "ECU View" 7. Touch the screen to highlight the Radio in the list of modules. 8. Select "More Options" 9. Select "ECU Flash". 10. Record the "Part Number", displayed on the "Flash Radio" screen, for later reference. 11. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. 12. Highlight the listed Radio calibration. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Clock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Clock: > 08-006-09 > Mar > 09 > Audio System - RES Radio Clock Lockup > Page 8823 13. Select "Download to Scantool". 14. Select "Close after the download is complete, then select "Back". 15. Select "Update Controller". Follow the on screen instructions. 16. When the Radio update is complete, select "OK". 17. Verify that the part number changed at the top of the "Flash Radio" screen. 18. Verify proper operation of the Radio. NOTE: Due to the Radio programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules (TCM, BCM, SKREEM, etc.) within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Compass: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION NOTE: The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) module is sometimes referred to as Electronic Overhead Module (EOM) for the purposes of scan tool and diagnostic information naming. Please treat the CMTC and EOM as one and the same when diagnosing the vehicle. The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) is located in the overhead console and consists of the following components: - HomeLink(R) transceiver (3) - if equipped - Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) (6) - Push button function switches (1, 2, 3, 4 and 5) - Replaceable light bulbs to illuminate the push button function switches The CMTC contains a central processing unit and interfaces with other electronic modules in the vehicle on the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The CAN data bus allows the sharing of sensor information. This helps to reduce wire harness complexity, reduce internal controller hardware, and reduce component sensor current loads. At the same time, this system provides increased reliability, enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of many new feature capabilities. The individual components of the CMTC module are not serviced separately and if damaged or inoperative, must be replaced as a unit. The CMTC provides several electronic functions and features. Some of the functions and features that the CMTC supports and/or controls, include the following display options: - Compass and Temperature - provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing. - Trip Odometer (ODO) - shows the distance travelled since the last trip computer reset up to 6000 miles. - Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) - shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Average fuel economy is a running average of the amount of fuel used and the distance the vehicle has traveled. When the fuel economy is reset, the display will momentarily blank. Then, the display will show the same value as before the rest. The reset value is based on a minimal amount of fuel used and the distance traveled from the previous drive cycle. The display may take several miles for this value to change dependent upon driving habits. - Distance To Empty (DTE) - shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is determined by weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel tank level. This is not resettable. Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change to an alternating test display of "LO" and "FUEL". This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the "LO FUEL" text and a new DTE value will be displayed, based on the current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel tank level. Elapsed time (ET) - shows the accumulated ignition-on time since the last trip computer reset. - Blank screen - the compass mini-trip computer VFD is turned off or in Blank Screen Mode. COMPASS NOTE: If the compass functions, but accuracy is suspect, it may be necessary to perform a variance adjustment. This procedure allows the compass unit to accommodate variances in the earth's magnetic field strength, based on geographic location. See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC for the appropriate procedure. While in the compass/temperature mode, the compass will display the direction in which the vehicle is pointed using the eight major compass headings (Examples: north is N, northeast is NE). The auto-calibrating compass unit requires no manual adjusting in normal use. The only calibration that may prove necessary is to drive the vehicle in one or two complete circles, on level ground, not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). This will reorient the compass unit Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8828 to its vehicle. The compass unit also will compensate for vehicle magnetism acquired during normal use. However, avoid placing anything magnetic directly on the roof of the vehicle. Magnetic mounts for an antenna, a repair order hat, or a funeral procession flag can exceed the compensating ability of the compass unit if placed on the roof panel. Magnetic bit drivers used on the fasteners that hold the overhead console assembly to the roof header can also affect compass operation. If the vehicle roof should become magnetized, See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Demagnetizing CMTC to restore proper compass operation. TEMPERATURE NOTE: The displayed temperature is not an instant reading of conditions, but an average temperature. It may take the temperature display several minutes to respond to a major temperature change, such as driving out of a heated garage into winter temperatures. The temperature displays the outside ambient temperature in whole degrees. The temperature display can be toggled from Fahrenheit to Celsius using the U.S./Metric push button. Displayed temperature reading stays in the temperature unit memory. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, the temperature will display the memory temperature if the engine OFF time is less than 255 minutes. If the engine OFF time is more than 255 minutes, the temperature will display the actual temperature sensed by the ambient temperature sensor. The temperature display update interval varies with the vehicle speed. The temperature function is supported by an ambient temperature sensor. This sensor is mounted outside the passenger compartment near the front and center of the vehicle, and is hard wired to the Front Control Module (FCM). The instrument cluster, also known as the Cab Compartment Node (CCN) averages and filters the ambient temperature signal and supplies it to other modules on the CAN data bus. Data input for all other compass mini-trip computer functions, including VFD dimming level, is received through CAN data bus messages. The maximum temperature displayed is 66°C (140° F). It could take several miles for the accurate temperature to be displayed as the CCN filters out heat from the engine compartment. The CMTC uses its internal programming and all of these inputs to calculate and display the requested data. If the data displayed is incorrect, perform the self-diagnostic tests, as described in Testing and Inspection. If these tests prove inconclusive, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information are recommended for further testing of the CMTC and the CAN data bus. NOTE: The CMTC will display min and max temperatures of -40° C (-40° F) and 66°C (140° F). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8829 Compass: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) only operates with the ignition switch in the On position and the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse functioning and in place. When the ignition switch is turned to the On position, all of the segments in the CMTC Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) will be turned off for one second, then the display will return to the last function being displayed before the ignition was turned to the Off position. With the ignition switch in the On position, momentarily depressing and releasing the STEP push button (4) will cause the CMTC to change its mode of operation. Momentarily depressing and releasing the U.S./M push button (1) will cause the unit to toggle between U.S. and Metric measurements. Momentarily depressing and releasing the C/T (compass/temperature) push button (5) will cause the CMTC to return to the compass/temperature display mode from any other mode. Pressing the RESET push button (2) for more than one second with the ignition switch in the On position will reset the following CMTC functions: - Average Fuel Economy (AVG ECO) - Trip Odometer (ODO) - Elapsed Time (ET) However, the reset will only occur if the function currently displayed is a function that can be reset. If the RESET push button is pressed twice within two seconds while in any of the three resettable functions (AVG ECO, ODO, ET), all three of these functions will be reset. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8830 Compass: Testing and Inspection COMPASS MINI-TRIP COMPUTER NOTE: The temperature, fuel economy, distance to empty and trip odometer are calculated in the Cab Compartment Node (CCN) and transferred to the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) for display. If the CMTC and Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) test OK, testing of the CCN and Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus circuit may be necessary. Refer to the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to test the CCN and CAN data bus circuit. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Manufacturer Code Charts If the problem with the CMTC is an inaccurate or scrambled display, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST (below). If the problem with the CMTC is incorrect Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) dimming levels, use a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information to test for the correct dimming message inputs being received from the Cab Compartment Node (CCN) or Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus circuit. If the problem is a no-display condition, use the following procedure. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. 1. Remove the overhead console from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console Removal. 2. Inspect the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM). If the IOD fuse is OK and in place, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the open IOD fuse circuit as required. 3. Check for battery voltage at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 4. If not OK, Check for battery voltage at the appropriate B(+) fuse in the Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM), repair the open fused B(+) circuit as required. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check the fused ignition switch output circuit(s) at the overhead console electrical connector. If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open or shorted circuit as required. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the overhead console electrical connector and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, refer to SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST (below) for further diagnosis of the CMTC module and the CAN data bus circuit. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit as required. SELF- DIAGNOSTIC TEST NOTE: The CMTC self - test can also be performed using a scan tool. Navigate to the Auto Self Test screen under System Tests of the scan tool and initiate the CMTC self - test. A self-diagnostic test is used to determine that the CMTC is operating properly electrically. Initiate the self-diagnostic test as follows: 1. With the ignition switch in the Off position, simultaneously depress and hold the STEP and RESET buttons while rotating the ignition switch to the Run/On position. 2. Continue to hold both buttons depressed until the CMTC enters the display segment test. In this test, all of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) segments are lighted while the CMTC performs the following checks: Non-Volatile Memory Status (NVM) - RAM Status - ROM Status - ASIC Communication Status - Compass Status - DC Status - CAN Data Bus Communications Status NOTE: If the CMTC module is equipped with the Universal Transmitter (also known as HomeLink(R)), the module also checks "HomeLink(R) Communication Test Status". 3. Following completion of these tests, the CMTC will display one of two messages: "FAIL" or "PASS." Press the RESET or STEP button to exit and enter normal mode. Respond to these test results as follows: If no test result message is displayed, but CMTC operation is still improper, the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information are required for further diagnosis. - If the "FAIL" message is displayed, the CMTC is inoperative and must be replaced. - If the "PASS" message is displayed, the CMTC is OK, no faults are present. - If any VFD segment does not light during the display segment test, the CMTC is inoperative and must be replaced. If the first seven tests pass, the CMTC shall verify that all the required CAN bus messages are present on the CAN bus. If all required messages are present on the CAN bus, the CMTC will automatically return to normal operation after sixty seconds. The CMTC can also be returned to normal operation any time during the test by pressing the STEP , CT , RESET or US/M buttons. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8831 NOTE: Pressing the STEP or RESET buttons during any portion of the CMTC Self - Diagnostic Test Procedure will cause the CMTC to exit diagnostics and return to compass/temperature mode. NOTE: If the compass functions, but accuracy is suspect, it may be necessary to perform a variance adjustment. This procedure allows the compass unit to accommodate variations in the earth's magnetic field strength, based on geographic location. See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC NOTE: If the compass reading has blanked out, and only "CAL" appears in the display, demagnetizing may be necessary to remove excessive residual magnetic fields from the vehicle. Check for stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and follow the proper Diagnostic Procedures Information as needed. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Compass: Procedures Manual Compass Calibration - CMTC MANUAL COMPASS CALIBRATION CAUTION: Do not place any external magnets, such as magnetic roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of the overhead console. Do not use magnetic tools when servicing the overhead console. NOTE: Whenever the compass is calibrated manually, the variance number must also be reset. See: Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC for the appropriate procedure. The electronic compass unit features a self-calibrating design, which simplifies the calibration procedure. This feature automatically updates the compass calibration while the vehicle is being driven. This allows the compass unit to compensate for small changes in the residual magnetism that the vehicle may acquire during normal use. If the compass readings appear to be erratic or out of calibration, perform the following calibration procedure. Also, new service replacement Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) modules must have their compass calibrated using this procedure. Do not attempt to calibrate the compass near large metal objects such as other vehicles, large buildings, or bridges; or, near overhead or underground power lines. Calibrate the compass manually as follows: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. If the compass/temperature data is not currently being displayed, momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to return to the compass/temperature display. 2. Depress and hold the RESET push button (2). Hold the push button down until "CAL" appears in the display. This takes about ten seconds. 3. Slowly drive the vehicle on a level surface, away from large metal objects and power lines, through one or two complete circles not exceeding 8 km/h (5 mph). The "CAL" message will disappear from the display to indicate that the compass is now calibrated. NOTE: A blank compass display indicates that vehicle degaussing (demagnetizing) may be necessary. NOTE: If the "CAL" message remains in the display, either there is excessive magnetism near the compass, or the CMTC is inoperative. Attempt the calibration procedure at least one more time before performing CMTC diagnosis. NOTE: If the wrong direction is still indicated in the compass display, the area selected for calibration may be too close to a strong magnetic field. Repeat the calibration procedure in another location. Compass Demagnetizing - CMTC COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8834 A degaussing tool (Special Tool 6029) is used to demagnetize, or degauss, the overhead console forward mounting screw and the roof panel above the overhead console. Equivalent units must be rated as continuous duty for 110/115 volts and 60 Hz. They must also have a field strength of over 350 gauss at 7 millimeters (0.25 inch) beyond the tip of the probe. To demagnetize the roof panel and the overhead console forward mounting screw, proceed as follows: 1. Be certain that the ignition switch is in the Off position, before you begin the demagnetizing procedure. 2. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 3. Slowly approach the head of the overhead console forward mounting screw with the degaussing tool connected. 4. Contact the head of the screw with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool for about two seconds. 5. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the screw. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the screw head, disconnect the tool. 6. Place a piece of paper approximately 22 by 28 centimeters (8.5 by 11 inches), oriented on the vehicle lengthwise from front to rear, on the center line of the roof at the windshield header. The purpose of the paper is to protect the roof panel from scratches, and to define the area to be demagnetized. 7. Connect the degaussing tool to an electrical outlet, while keeping the tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the compass unit. 8. Slowly approach the center line of the roof panel at the windshield header, with the degaussing tool connected. 9. Contact the roof panel with the plastic coated tip of the degaussing tool. Be sure that the template is in place to avoid scratching the roof panel. Using a slow, back-and-forth sweeping motion, and allowing 13 millimeters (0.50 inch) between passes, move the tool at least 11 centimeters (4 inches) to each side of the roof center line, and 28 centimeters (11 inches) back from the windshield header. 10. With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly back it away from the roof panel. When the tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the roof panel, disconnect the tool. 11. Calibrate the compass, See: Manual Compass Calibration - CMTC and adjust the compass variance, See: Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC. Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC COMPASS VARIANCE ADJUSTMENT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8835 Compass variance, also known as magnetic declination, is the difference in angle between magnetic north and true geographic north. In some geographic locations, the difference between magnetic and geographic north is great enough to cause the compass to give false readings. If this problem occurs, the compass variance must be set. NOTE: If the vehicle is taken on long trips into a new variance zone the compass function may be effected. Compass variance may need to be adjusted to the new zone number to function properly. NOTE: The default for the compass variance from the factory is 8. To set the compass variance: 1. Using the Variance Settings Map, find your geographic location and note the zone number. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On/Run position. If the compass/temperature data is not currently being displayed, momentarily depress and release the C/T push button (5) to return to the compass/temperature display. 3. Press and hold the RESET push button (2) down for approximately five seconds. The last variance zone number will be displayed. 4. Momentarily depress and release the STEP push button (4) to toggle through the zone numbers (1-15), until the zone number for your geographic location appears in the display. 5. Momentarily depress and release the RESET push button (2) to enter the displayed zone number into the compass unit memory. 6. Confirm that the correct directions are now indicated by the compass. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8836 Compass: Removal and Replacement Compass Mini - Trip Computer COMPASS MINI - TRIP COMPUTER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (3) from the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 3. Remove the screws (1) that secure the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC) (4) to the overhead console housing (3). 4. Remove the CMTC (4) from the overhead console housing (3). Bulb - CMTC Control BULB - CMTC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There are provisions for up to three bulb/bulb holder units on the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the CMTC push buttons, while the center bulb illuminates the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb location is only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (1) from the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8837 Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) unit (2) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Compass Mini - Trip Computer COMPASS MINI - TRIP COMPUTER NOTE: If a new Compass Mini - Trip Computer has been installed, the compass will have to be calibrated and the variance set. See: Procedures/Manual Compass Calibration - CMTC and See: Procedures/Compass Variance Adjustment - CMTC for the appropriate procedures. 1. Position the CMTC (4) onto the overhead console housing (3). 2. Install the screws (1) that secure the CMTC (4) to the overhead console housing (3). Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Install the overhead console (3) onto the headliner See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Installation. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - CMTC Control BULB - CMTC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are provisions for up to three bulb/bulb holder units on the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the CMTC push buttons, while the center bulb illuminates the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb location is only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 8838 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the overhead console (1) onto the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Installation. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cruise Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A cruise indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional speed control system, this indicator is electronically disabled. The cruise indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The cruise indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the word CRUISE in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A green Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in green through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON the illumination intensity of the cruise indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The cruise indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cruise Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8843 Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The cruise indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the speed control system is ON, regardless of whether the speed control is engaged. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The cruise indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the cruise indicator for the following reasons: - Cruise Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic cruise indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating the speed control system is ON, the cruise indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the cruise indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the speed control switches to determine the proper outputs to the speed control servo. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the cruise indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the speed control system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to cruise indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A door ajar indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located within the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The door ajar indicator consists of the text DOOR , which appears in place of the odometer/trip odometer information in the odometer VFD unit. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the tachometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The door ajar indicator appears in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer/trip odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The door ajar indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD in the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8848 Door/Trunk Ajar Indicator/Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator that one or more of the passenger compartment doors may be open or not completely latched. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and hard wired inputs received by the cluster from the door ajar switches located in each door latch unit. The door ajar indicator function of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the VFD door ajar indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the door ajar indicator for the following reasons: - Door Ajar Switch Input - Each time the cluster detects ground on any one of the door ajar switch sense circuits (door ajar switch closed = door is open or not completely latched) the door ajar indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until all of the door ajar switch sense inputs to the cluster are an open circuit (door ajar switch open = door fully closed), until the cluster has completed an interior lamps load shed (about five minutes), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) continually monitors the door ajar switches to determine the status of the doors. For further diagnosis of the door ajar indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection The hard wired door ajar switches and circuits related to door ajar indicator operation may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle has up to four door ajar switches, one for each full door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair/Front Door Latch - Removal or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Latch/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8853 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then uses these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The EMIC also sends the proper electronic door ajar switch status messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagram Information and Instructions Warnings WARNINGS - GENERAL WARNINGS provide information to prevent personal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of general warnings that should be followed any time a vehicle is being serviced. WARNING: Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. WARNING: Use safety stands anytime a procedure requires being under a vehicle. WARNING: Be sure that the ignition switch always is in the off position, unless the procedure requires it to be on. WARNING: Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in park. A manual transmission should be in neutral. WARNING: Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area. WARNING: Keep away from moving parts when the engine is running, especially the fan and belts. WARNING: To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold(s), tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. WARNING: Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery. WARNING: Always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid loose clothing. How to Use Wiring Diagrams DESCRIPTION - HOW TO USE WIRING DIAGRAMS DaimlerChrysler Corporation wiring diagrams are designed to provide information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In order to effectively use the wiring diagrams to diagnose and repair DaimlerChrysler Corporation vehicles, it is important to understand all of their features and characteristics. Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near the bottom of the page. All switches, components, and modules are shown in the at rest position with the doors closed and the key removed from the ignition. Components are shown two ways. A solid line around a component indicates that the component is complete. A dashed line around the component indicates that the component is being shown is not complete. Incomplete components have a reference number to indicate the page where the component is shown complete. It is important to realize that no attempt is made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In addition, switches and other components are shown as simply as possible, with regard to function only. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8858 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8859 SYMBOLS International symbols are used throughout the wiring diagrams. These symbols are consistent with those being used around the world. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8860 TERMINOLOGY This is a list of terms and definitions used in the wiring diagrams. LHD - Left Hand Drive Vehicles RHD - Right Hand Drive Vehicles ATX - Automatic Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive MTX Manual Transmissions-Front Wheel Drive Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8861 AT - Automatic Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive MT - Manual Transmissions-Rear Wheel Drive SOHC - Single Over Head Cam Engine DOHC - Double Over Head Cam Engine Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In Markets Other Than North America Except Export - Vehicles Built For Sale In North America Circuit Functions DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric code to identify the wire and it's function. To identify which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows the main circuits only and does not show the secondary codes that may apply to some models. Circuit Information DESCRIPTION - CIRCUIT INFORMATION Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code which identifies the main circuit, a specific part of the main circuit, gage of wire, and color. An example would be A 2 18 LB/YL. This is a Battery Feed circuit, level two, eighteen gauge, light blue with a yellow tracer. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8862 Connector, Ground and Splice Information DESCRIPTION - CONNECTOR, GROUND AND SPLICE INFORMATION CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typical example might be the Supplemental Restraint System connectors. Always check parts availability before attempting a repair. IDENTIFICATION In-line connectors are identified by a number, as follows: - In-line connectors located in the engine compartment are C100 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the instrument panel area are C200 series numbers. - In-line connectors located in the body are C300 series numbers. - Jumper harness connectors are C400 series numbers. - Grounds and ground connectors are identified with a "G" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. - Splices are identified with an "S" and follow the same series numbering as the in-line connectors. In addition, S001-S099 numbers are located in the engine compartment. - Component connectors are identified by the component name instead of a number. Multiple connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identifier. LOCATIONS Vehicle/Locations contains connector/ground/splice location illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector name (or number)/ground number/splice number and component identification. Connector/ground/splice location charts reference the figure numbers of the illustrations. The abbreviation T/O is used in the component location section to indicate a point in which the wiring harness branches out to a component. The abbreviation N/S means Not Shown in the illustrations Section Identification and Information DESCRIPTION - SECTION IDENTIFICATION AND INFORMATION The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual sections. If a component is most likely found in a particular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8863 connectors, and pins) within that group. For example, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be found in Powertrain Management, so it is shown there complete. It can, however, be shown partially in another group if it contains some associated wiring. Splice diagrams show the entire splice and provide references to other sections the splices serves. Splice Information contains splice diagrams that are not shown in their entirety somewhere else in the wiring diagrams. Connector Pin-Outs shows each connector and the circuits involved with that connector. The connectors are identified using the name/number on the diagram pages. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect battery. 2. Release Connector Lock (2). 3. Disconnect the connector (3) being repaired from its mating half/component. 4. Remove the dress cover (if applicable) (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8864 5. Release the Secondary Terminal Lock, if required (1). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8865 6. Position the connector locking finger away from the terminal using the proper special tool. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal from the connector. Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8866 INSTALLATION 1. Insert the removed terminal in the same cavity on the repair connector. 2. Repeat steps for each terminal in the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. When the connector is re-assembled, the secondary terminal lock must be placed in the locked position to prevent terminal push out. 4. Replace dress cover (if applicable). 5. Connect connector to its mating half/component. 6. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Locate the diode in the harness, and remove the protective covering. 3. Remove the diode from the harness, pay attention to the current flow direction (1) (2) (3). Installation INSTALLATION 1. Remove the insulation from the wires in the harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in the new diode. 2. Install the new diode in the harness, making sure current flow is correct. If necessary, refer to the appropriate wiring diagram for current flow. 3. Solder the connection together using rosin core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder. 4. Tape the diode to the harness using electrical tape. Make sure the diode is completely sealed from the elements. 5. Re-connect the battery and test affected systems. Removal REMOVAL 1. Follow steps for removing terminals described in Connector Replacement. 2. Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the connector. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Select a wire from the terminal repair kit that best matches the color and gage of the wire being repaired. 2. Cut the repair wire to the proper length and remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation. 3. Splice the repair wire to the wire harness (see wire splicing procedure)See: Service Procedures/Wire Splicing. 4. Insert the repaired wire into the connector. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8867 5. Install the connector locking wedge, if required, and reconnect the connector to its mating half/component. 6. Re-tape the wire harness starting at 1-1/2 inches behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. 7. Connect battery and test all affected systems. Wire Splicing STANDARD PROCEDURE - WIRE SPLICING When splicing a wire, it is important that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring diagrams. 1. Remove one-half (1/2) inch of insulation from each wire that needs to be spliced. 2. Place a piece of adhesive lined heat shrink tubing on one side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long enough to cover and seal the entire repair area. 3. Place the strands of wire overlapping each other inside of the splice clip (1). 4. Using crimping tool (1), Mopar p/n 05019912AA, crimp the splice clip and wires together. 5. Solder (3) the connection (2) together using rosin core type solder (1) only. CAUTION: DO NOT USE ACID CORE SOLDER. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8868 6. Center the heat shrink tubing (2) over the joint and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the tubing is tightly sealed and sealant (1) comes out of both ends of the tubing. Special Tools WIRING/TERMINAL Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8869 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8870 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagnostic Aids Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Devices STANDARD PROCEDURE - ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE DEVICES All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a symbol is used to indicate this. When handling any component with this symbol, comply with the following procedures to reduce the possibility of electrostatic charge build up on the body and inadvertent discharge into the component. If it is not known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume that it is. 1. Always touch a known good ground before handling the part. This should be repeated while handling the part and more frequently after sliding across a seat, sitting down from a standing position, or walking a distance. 2. Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part, unless instructed to do so by a written procedure. 3. When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the ground lead first. 4. Do not remove the part from it's protective packing until it is time to install the part. 5. Before removing the part from it's package, ground the package to a known good ground on the vehicle. Testing Of Voltage Potential STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING OF VOLTAGE POTENTIAL 1. Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a known good ground. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropriate test procedure. Testing For Continuity Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8871 STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR CONTINUITY 1. Remove the fuse (1) for the circuit being checked or, disconnect the battery. 2. Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side of the circuit being tested 3. Connect the other lead to the other end of the circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good continuity. Testing For A Short To Ground STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND 1. Remove the fuse and disconnect all items involved with the fuse. 2. Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the terminals of the fuse. 3. Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring harness about six to eight inches apart and watch the voltmeter/test lamp. 4. If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that general area of the wiring harness. Testing For A Short To Ground On Fuses Powering Several Loads STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES POWERING SEVERAL LOADS 1. Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. 2. Replace the blown fuse. 3. Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. 4. Start connecting or energizing the items in the fuse circuit one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with the short to ground has been isolated. Testing For A Voltage Drop STANDARD PROCEDURE - TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8872 1. Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to the side of the circuit closest to the battery. 2. Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the other side of the switch, component or circuit. 3. Operate the item. 4. The voltmeter will show the difference in voltage between the two points. Troubleshooting Wiring Problems DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING - WIRING HARNESS TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit there are several common tools necessary. These tools are listed and explained below. - Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to connect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass an open in a circuit. WARNING: Never use a jumper wire across a load, such as a motor, connected between a battery feed and ground. - Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a circuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good ground and the red lead to the positive side of the circuit. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking voltages in these circuits, use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. - Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance in a circuit means good continuity. CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used in today's vehicles are Solid State. When checking resistance in these circuits use a meter with a 10 - megohm or greater impedance rating. In addition, make sure the power is disconnected from the circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle's electrical system can cause damage to the equipment and provide false readings. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8873 - Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing terminals in connectors. Select the proper size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert the probing end (2) into the terminal being tested. Use the other end of the tool (1) to insert the meter probe. INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS Most intermittent electrical problems are caused by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a problem. Before condemning a component or wiring assembly, check the following items. - Connectors are fully seated - Spread terminals, or terminal push out - Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully seated into the connector/component and locked into position - Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent problem - Damaged connector/component casing exposing the item to dirt or moisture - Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing a short to ground - Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside of the insulation - Wiring broken inside of the insulation TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS When troubleshooting wiring problems there are six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps are listed and explained below. Always check for non-factory items added to the vehicle before doing any diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items, disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not the cause of the problem. 1. Verify the problem. 2. Verify any related symptoms. Do this by performing operational checks on components that are in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. 3. Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring diagrams to determine what the circuit is doing, where the problem most likely is occurring and where the diagnosis will continue. 4. Isolate the problem area. 5. Repair the problem area. 6. Verify the proper operation. For this step, check for proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8874 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Connector Views Component ID: 156 Component : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Connector: Name : MODULE-ELECTRONIC OVERHEAD Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 A918 18RD/LB FUSED B(+) 3 D55 20WT/OR CAN B BUS(+) 4 D54 20WT CAN B BUS(-) 5 Z993 18BK GROUND 6-- Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8875 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 8w-49-02 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8876 8w-49-03 Other Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 8W-70-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at the vehicle level under Diagrams by Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Electronic Throttle Control Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Electronic Throttle Control Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with ETC, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The ETC indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Electronic Throttle Control in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The ETC indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Electronic Throttle Control Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8881 Electronic Throttle Control Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the ETC system, or a circuit or component of the system is ineffective. The ETC indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The ETC indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the ETC indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the ETC indicator is illuminated for about 15 seconds. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - ETC Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic ETC indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM, the ETC indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM message. The indicator remains illuminated solid or continues to flash for about 12 seconds or until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, whichever is longer. If the indicator is illuminated solid with the engine running the vehicle will usually remain drivable. If the indicator is flashing with the engine running the vehicle may require towing. A flashing indicator means the ETC system requires immediate service. The indicator will be extinguished when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM for three consecutive seconds, the ETC indicator is illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a single lamp-OFF message from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the ETC indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The actuator test illumination of the ETC indicator is a function of the PCM. The PCM continually monitors the ETC system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the PCM sends a lamp-ON message after the bulb test, it indicates that the PCM has detected an ETC system malfunction or that the ETC system is ineffective. The PCM will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for any malfunction it detects. Each time the ETC indicator fails to illuminate due to an open or short in the cluster ETC indicator circuit, the cluster sends a message notifying the PCM of the condition, then the instrument cluster and the PCM will each store a DTC. For proper diagnosis of the ETC system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to ETC indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A fog lamp indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with optional fog lamps, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located within the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The fog lamp indicator consists of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light in the lower left corner of the VFD unit. The VFD unit is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the icon from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The fog lamp indicator icon appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the VFD unit is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the VFD unit lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer function of the interior lighting thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the thumbwheel allows the VFD unit to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The fog lamp indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8886 Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The fog lamp indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator whenever the optional fog lamps are illuminated. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The fog lamp indicator is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the indicator will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The indicator only illuminates when it is energized by the instrument cluster logic circuit. The instrument cluster will turn ON the fog lamp indicator for the following reasons: - Fog Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic fog indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM indicating the fog lamp relay is energized, the fog lamp indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until the exterior lamp load shedding (battery saver) timed interval expires, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the fog lamp indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors electronic exterior lighting switch status messages from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) to determine the appropriate outputs to the fog lamp relay. The FCM activates or deactivates the fog lamp relay then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message back to the EMIC. For further diagnosis of the fog lamp indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the fog lamp system, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to fog lamp indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR A 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. 4WD Low Indicator 4WD LOW INDICATOR A 4WD low indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. The 4WD low indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The 4WD low indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text 4LOW in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. When the exterior lighting is turned ON, the illumination intensity of the 4WD low indicator is dimmable, which is adjusted along with the cluster general illumination lighting using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. The 4WD low indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8891 Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation 4WD Indicator 4WD INDICATOR The 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into a 4WD mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD mode is engaged. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. 4WD Low Indicator 4WD LOW INDICATOR The 4WD low indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic transfer case has been shifted into the 4WD low mode. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The 4WD low indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the 4WD low indicator for the following reasons: - 4WD Low Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic 4WD low indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the 4WD low indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the LED portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case through the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine when the 4WD low mode is engaged. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the 4WD low indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transfer case shift motor/mode sensor, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to 4WD low indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A gas cap indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The gas cap indication appears within the odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The gas cap indicator consists of a textual gASCAP message which appears in place of the odometer/trip odometer information in the display. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the tachometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gas cap textual message appears in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer/trip odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The gas cap indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD in the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8896 Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The gas cap indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when there is a gross leak detected in the on-board fuel vapor recovery system. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The gas cap indicator function of the odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the VFD gas cap indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the gas cap indicator for the following reasons: - Gas Cap Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic gas cap indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating there is a gross leak in the vapor recovery system, the gas cap indicator will be illuminated. If the ignition switch is in the ON position and the vehicle is not moving when the message is received, the VFD will repeatedly and sequentially cycle the gas cap indication in two second intervals with the odometer/trip odometer information and any other active textual warnings. If the vehicle is moving, or once the cluster of a non-moving vehicle receives an electronic vehicle speed message from the PCM indicating a speed greater than zero, the warning sequence will consist of three complete display cycles with an audible single chime tone accompanying each cycle, then revert to only the visual gas cap indication and odometer/trip odometer display cycling until the cluster receives a message indicating there is no gross leak in the vapor recovery system, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The VFD can be reverted to the odometer display and any currently displayed textual messages suspended by momentarily depressing and releasing the odometer/trip odometer reset switch button on the front of the cluster. The PCM continually monitors the on board vapor recovery system to determine whether there are air leaks in the system. The PCM then sends the proper electronic messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the EMIC turns ON the gas cap indicator due to a monitored gross leak in the vapor recovery system, it may indicate that the gas cap has been removed or is improperly installed. For proper diagnosis of the on board vapor recovery system, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gas cap indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A fuel gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This gauge is part of the minor gauge set with the engine coolant temperature gauge located on the left side of the instrument cluster, just left of the speedometer. This gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree gauge scale on the cluster overlay that reads bottom-to-top from E (or Empty) to F (or Full). An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Fuel is located on the cluster overlay, in the center of the gauge directly below the bottom end of the scale. An arrowhead pointed to the left side of the vehicle is imprinted on the cluster overlay next to the Fuel icon on the gauge to provide the driver with a reminder as to the location of the fuel filler access. The fuel gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the low end of the gauge scale, making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the white gauge dial face appears blue-green with the black graphics silhouetted against the illuminated background and the red graphics and the red gauge needle still appear red. Gauge illumination is provided by an integral electro-luminescent lamp that is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. The fuel gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8901 Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The fuel gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the level of fuel in the fuel tank. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input received by the cluster from the fuel level sending unit on the fuel pump module in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Fuel Level Sending Unit Input - The cluster provides a constant current source to the fuel level sending unit and monitors a return input on a fuel level sense circuit. The resistance through the fuel level sending unit increases as the fuel level falls and decreases as the fuel level rises causing changes in the fuel level sense input voltage. The cluster programming applies an algorithm to calculate the proper fuel gauge needle position based upon the fuel level sense input, then moves the gauge needle to the proper relative position on the gauge scale. This algorithm is used to dampen gauge needle movement against the negative effect that fuel sloshing within the fuel tank can have on accurate inputs from the fuel tank sending unit to the cluster. - Less Than 14 Percent Tank Full Input - Each time the fuel level sense input to the cluster indicates the fuel tank is about 14 percent full or less for 10 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for 60 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, the gauge needle is moved to about the one-sixteenth graduation on the gauge scale, the low fuel indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The low fuel indicator remains illuminated until the fuel level sense input indicates that the fuel tank is greater than about 17 percent full for 10 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for 60 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the low fuel indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate inputs from the fuel level sending unit. - Less Than Empty Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank is less than the EMPTY gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the fuel level sense input to the cluster is a short circuit. - More Than Full Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank is more than the FULL gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the fuel level sense input to the cluster is an open circuit. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the fuel gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) continually monitors the fuel tank sending unit to determine the level of fuel in the fuel tank. The EMIC then sends the proper electronic fuel level message to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. For further diagnosis of the fuel gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the fuel tank sending unit, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to fuel gauge operation or fuel level data processing a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations The module assembly (5) contains the following components: An internal fuel filter See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Fuel Filter/Description and Operation/Fuel Filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor Description DESCRIPTION The fuel gauge level sending unit is attached to the side of fuel pump module. The level sensor is a variable resistor. Operation OPERATION Its resistance changes with the amount of fuel in the tank. The float arm attached to the sensor moves as the fuel level changes. The fuel level input is used as an input for OBD II. If the fuel level is below 15% or above 85% of total tank capacity several monitors are disabled. There are diagnostics for the level circuit open and shorted. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor > Page 8907 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor > Page 8908 Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Removal 2. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 3. Position Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 4. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 5. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring. 6. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 7. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal > Page 8911 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Whenever the fuel pump module is serviced, the rubber seal (gasket) must be replaced. 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Install fuel tank. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A low fuel indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The low fuel indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Fuel in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The low fuel indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8916 Low Fuel Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The low fuel indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the level of fuel in the fuel tank becomes low. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input received by the cluster from the fuel level sending unit on the fuel pump module in the fuel tank. The low fuel indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the low fuel indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the low fuel indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Less Than 14 Percent Tank Full Input - The cluster provides a constant current source to the fuel level sending unit and monitors a return input on a fuel level sense circuit. The resistance through the fuel level sending unit increases as the fuel level falls and decreases as the fuel level rises causing changes in the sense input voltage. Each time the fuel level sense input to the cluster indicates the fuel tank is about 14 percent full or less for 10 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for 60 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, the fuel gauge needle is moved to about the one-sixteenth graduation on the gauge scale, the low fuel indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The low fuel indicator remains illuminated until the fuel level sense input indicates that the fuel tank is greater than about 17 percent full for 10 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is zero, or for 60 consecutive seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than zero, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the low fuel indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate inputs from the fuel level sending unit. - Less Than Empty Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank is less than the E (or Empty) gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the fuel level sense input to the cluster is a short circuit. - More Than Full Stop Input - Each time the cluster receives a fuel level sense input that indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank is more than the F (or Full) gauge needle stop position, the gauge needle is moved to the low end of the gauge scale and the low fuel indicator is illuminated immediately. This input would indicate that the fuel level sense input to the cluster is an open circuit. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low fuel indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) continually monitors the fuel tank sending unit to determine the level of fuel in the fuel tank. The cluster then sends the proper electronic fuel level message to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. For further diagnosis of the low fuel indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the fuel tank sending unit, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to low fuel indicator operation or fuel level data processing a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional TPM, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the speedometer dial face to the left of the speedometer needle hub in the instrument cluster overlay. The TPM indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of an icon that represents a cross-section of a tire with a centered exclamation point in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The TPM indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8921 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the TPM system. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TPM indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the TPM indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM sends an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message to the cluster to illuminate the TPM indicator for about three seconds as a bulb test. - TPM Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message from the SKREEM, the TPM indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the SKREEM or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no TPM lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the SKREEM for six consecutive seconds, the TPM indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message is received from the SKREEM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the TPM indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The SKREEM performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to decide whether the TPM system is in good operating condition and whether the tire inflation pressures are too high or too low. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the TPM indicator after the bulb test, it indicates that the inflation pressure of a tire is too low or that a malfunction has occurred and the TPM system is ineffective. For proper diagnosis of the TPM system, the SKREEM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to TPM indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair DaimlerChrysler provides no information regarding a Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area to the left of the speedometer needle hub. The MIL consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The MIL is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8929 Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an On-Board Diagnostics II (OBDII) emissions-related circuit or component malfunction. The MIL is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the PCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The MIL Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the MIL for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the indicator is illuminated for about 15 seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - MIL Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic MIL lamp-ON message from the PCM, the indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the PCM message. For some DTCs, if a problem does not recur, the PCM will send a lamp-OFF message automatically. Other DTCs may require that a fault be repaired and the PCM be reset before a lamp-OFF message will be sent. For more information on the PCM, and the DTC set and reset parameters, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the PCM for 10 consecutive message cycles, the MIL is illuminated by the instrument cluster to indicate a loss of bus communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the MIL indicator will be turned ON during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the fuel and emissions system circuits and sensors to decide whether the system is in good operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the MIL or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection If the EMIC turns ON the MIL after the bulb test, it may indicate that a malfunction has occurred and that the fuel and emissions systems may require service. For proper diagnosis of the fuel and emissions systems, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to MIL operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A service 4WD indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional four-wheel drive system and electronically shifted transfer case, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located below the minor gauge set on the left side of the cluster. The service 4WD indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the text SVC 4WD in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The service 4WD indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8934 Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The service 4WD indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) has recorded a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for an electronic transfer case circuit or component malfunction. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the FCM over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The service 4WD indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the service 4WD indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the service 4WD indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. - Service 4WD Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic service 4WD indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM, the service 4WD indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the FCM for 10 seconds, the service 4WD indicator is illuminated by the cluster to indicate a loss of FCM communication. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid message is received from the FCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the service 4WD indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors the electronic transfer case control circuits and transfer case shift motor/mode sensor assembly to determine the condition of the system. The FCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the service 4WD indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to service 4WD indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Odometer: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An odometer and trip odometer are standard factory-installed equipment in all instrument clusters. The odometer, trip odometer, and engine hours information are displayed in a common electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located below the tachometer in the lower right area of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The odometer, trip odometer, and engine hours information are not displayed simultaneously. The trip odometer reset switch on the instrument cluster circuit board toggles the display between odometer and trip odometer modes by depressing the odometer/trip odometer switch button that extends through the lower edge of the cluster lens, just left of the minor gauge set. When the trip odometer information is displayed, the word TRIP is also illuminated in the lower right corner of the odometer/trip odometer VFD in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the trip odometer information. The engine hours information replaces the selected odometer or trip odometer information whenever the ignition switch is in the ON position and the engine is not running. The odometer, trip odometer, and engine hours information is stored in the instrument cluster memory. This information can be increased when the proper inputs are provided to the instrument cluster, but the information cannot be decreased. The odometer can display values up to 999,999 kilometers (999,999 miles). The odometer latches at these values, and will not roll over to zero. The trip odometer can display values up to 999.9 kilometers (999.9 miles) before it rolls over to zero. Engine hours are displayed in the format, hr9999. The cluster will accumulate values up to 9,999 hours before the display rolls over to zero. The odometer display does not have a decimal point and will not show values less than a full unit (kilometer or mile), while the trip odometer display does have a decimal point and will show tenths of a unit (kilometer or mile). The unit of measure (kilometers or miles) for the odometer and trip odometer display is not shown in the VFD. The unit of measure for the instrument cluster odometer/trip odometer is selected at the time that it is manufactured, and cannot be changed. The odometer also has a RENTAL CAR mode, which will illuminate the odometer information in the VFD whenever the driver side front door is opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or ACCESSORY positions. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the odometer VFD is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the VFD lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the VFD to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The odometer/trip odometer VFD, the trip odometer switch, and the trip odometer switch button are serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Odometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8939 Odometer: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The odometer and trip odometer give an indication to the vehicle operator of the distance the vehicle has traveled. The engine hours give an indication of the cumulative engine-ON time. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The odometer, trip odometer and engine hours information is displayed by the instrument cluster odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD). The VFD will display the odometer information whenever any door is opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or ACCESSORY positions, and will display the last previously selected odometer or trip odometer information when the ignition switch is turned to the ON or START positions. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the VFD and provides the following features: - Odometer/Trip Odometer Display Toggling - Actuating the trip odometer reset switch button momentarily with the VFD illuminated will toggle the display between the odometer and trip odometer information. Each time the VFD is illuminated with the ignition switch in the ON or START positions, the display will automatically return to the last mode previously selected (odometer or trip odometer). - Engine Hours Display Toggling - When the trip odometer reset switch button is pressed and held for longer than about six seconds with the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine speed message from the PCM is zero, the trip odometer information will be momentarily displayed, then the engine hours information will be displayed. The VFD must be displaying the odometer information when the trip odometer reset switch button is pressed in order to toggle to the engine hours display. The engine hours will remain displayed for about 30 seconds, until the engine speed message is greater than zero, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Trip Odometer Reset - When the trip odometer reset switch button is pressed and held for longer than about two seconds with the ignition switch in the ON or START positions, the trip odometer will be reset to 0.0 kilometers (miles). The VFD must be displaying the trip odometer information in order for the trip odometer information to be reset. - GASCAP Message Display - On vehicles manufactured with a United States country code, each time the cluster receives an electronic message from the PCM indicating a monitored leak in the evaporative emissions system, the cluster replaces the displayed odometer/trip odometer value with the textual message, GASCAP. This message serves as a reminder to the vehicle operator to check that the gas cap is properly installed and tightened, but could also indicate another source of air leakage in the on-board evaporative and vapor recovery emissions systems. Unless the leak is corrected, this message will latch and remain displayed during the current and each subsequent ignition cycle until the trip odometer reset button is pressed and released momentarily, which will revert the display to the odometer/trip odometer information that was last displayed for the remainder of that ignition cycle. Once the source of a leak has been corrected, either momentarily pressing the trip odometer reset button or cycling the ignition switch will unlatch the message and return the odometer/trip odometer to normal operation. - NO-FUSE Message Display - Each time the cluster receives an electronic message from the Front Control Module (FCM) indicating the Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) feed for the cluster is an open circuit, the cluster replaces the displayed odometer/trip odometer value with the textual message, NO-FUSE. This message indicates that the IOD fuse is missing, blown or that the IOD feed circuit is ineffective. Unless the problem is corrected, this message will latch and remain displayed during the current and each subsequent ignition cycle until the trip odometer reset button is pressed and released momentarily, which will revert the display to the odometer/trip odometer information that was last displayed for the remainder of that ignition cycle. Once the problem has been corrected, either momentarily pressing the trip odometer reset button or cycling the ignition switch will unlatch the message and return the odometer/trip odometer to normal operation. - Ambient Temperature Display - On vehicles that are not equipped with the optional Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC), each time the cluster receives an electronic ambient temperature message from the FCM, the cluster replaces the displayed odometer/trip odometer value with the ambient temperature value. This value will be displayed and updated during the current ignition cycle until the trip odometer reset button is pressed and released momentarily, which will revert the display to the odometer/trip odometer information that was last displayed for the remainder of that ignition cycle. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an electronic distance message during normal operation, it will hold and display the last data received until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. If the cluster does not receive a distance message within one second after the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, it will display the last distance value stored in the cluster memory. If the cluster is unable to display distance information due to an error internal to the cluster, the VFD will display Error. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer VFD will display all of its segments simultaneously, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the vehicle speed pulse information received from the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) and engine speed pulse information received from the crankshaft position sensor, then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the odometer/trip odometer or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls these functions, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the VSS, the crankshaft position sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to odometer/trip odometer operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Customer Interest Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator NUMBER: 18-005-08 REV. B GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: August 20, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-005-08 REV. A, DATED JUNE 13, 2008, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.05 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: FLASH: Turn Off Oil Change Indicator Message OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). MODELS: **2008 (DR) Ram Truck (International Markets)** **2008 (HB) Durango (International Markets)** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler (International Markets)** **2007 (JK) wrangler** **2008 (KA) Nitro (International Markets)** **2008 (ND) Dakota (International Markets)** 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to: - **2007 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) after June 17, 2008 (MDH 0617XX)** - **2008 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) before April 28, 2008 (MDH 0428XX)** - **2008 DR/HB/ND vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE )** - WK/WH vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built before January 25, 2008 (0125XXMDH) - KA vehicles equipped with a 4.0L engine (sales code EGS) built before July 8.2008 (MDH 0708XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some international vehicle's may experience message on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or in the Odometer that tells the driver an oil change is necessary after 3000 miles. This message should not be displayed for these international vehicles and this PCM flash will turn this feature off. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If no DTC's are present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 8948 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.05 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 8949 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator Oil Change Reminder Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator NUMBER: 18-005-08 REV. B GROUP: Vehicle Performance DATE: August 20, 2008 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 18-005-08 REV. A, DATED JUNE 13, 2008, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. ALL REVISIONS ARE HIGHLIGHTED WITH **ASTERISKS** AND INCLUDE ADDITIONAL MODELS. THE StarSCAN(R) FLASH FILES FOR THIS BULLETIN MUST BE RETRIEVED FROM THE INTERNET. StarSCAN(R) SOFTWARE LEVEL MUST BE AT RELEASE 8.05 OR HIGHER FOR THIS BULLETIN. StarMOBILE STANDALONE MODE OR StarMOBILE DESKTOP CLIENT MAY ALSO BE USED TO PERFORM THIS PROCEDURE. SUBJECT: FLASH: Turn Off Oil Change Indicator Message OVERVIEW: This bulletin involves selectively erasing and reprogramming the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). MODELS: **2008 (DR) Ram Truck (International Markets)** **2008 (HB) Durango (International Markets)** **2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler (International Markets)** **2007 (JK) wrangler** **2008 (KA) Nitro (International Markets)** **2008 (ND) Dakota (International Markets)** 2008 (WH) Grand Cherokee (International Markets) 2008 (XH) Commander (International Markets) NOTE: This bulletin applies to: - **2007 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) after June 17, 2008 (MDH 0617XX)** - **2008 JK vehicles built with a 3.8L engine (sales code EGK) before April 28, 2008 (MDH 0428XX)** - **2008 DR/HB/ND vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE )** - WK/WH vehicles built with a 4.7L engine (sales code EVE) built before January 25, 2008 (0125XXMDH) - KA vehicles equipped with a 4.0L engine (sales code EGS) built before July 8.2008 (MDH 0708XX) SYMPTOM/CONDITION: Some international vehicle's may experience message on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or in the Odometer that tells the driver an oil change is necessary after 3000 miles. This message should not be displayed for these international vehicles and this PCM flash will turn this feature off. DIAGNOSIS: Using a Scan Tool (StarSCAN(R)) with the appropriate Diagnostic Procedures available in TechCONNECT, verify all engine systems are functioning as designed. If DTC's are present record them on the repair order and repair as necessary before proceeding further with this bulletin. If no DTC's are present, perform the Repair Procedure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 8955 SPECIAL TOOLS / EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: REPAIR PROCEDURE - USING THE INTERNET TO RETRIEVE THE FLASH FILE: NOTE: Before performing this Repair Procedure, the operating software in the StarSCAN(R) must be programmed with software release level 8.05 or higher. The software release level is visible in the blue header at the top of the StarSCAN(R) screen. NOTE: The StarSCAN(R) diagnostic scan tool fully supports Internet connectivity. However, to take advantage of this feature you must first configure the StarSCAN(R) for your dealership's network. Make sure the StarSCAN(R) is configured to the dealership's network before proceeding. For instruction on setting up your StarSCAN(R) for the dealer's network refer to either: "DealerCONNECT > Service > StarSCAN and StarMOBILE tools > Online Documentation", or refer to the StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide. The StarSCAN(R) Quick Start Networking Guide is also available on the website under the "Download Center". NOTE: If this flash process is interrupted/aborted, the flash should be restarted. 1. Open the hood and install a battery charger. Using a voltmeter, verify that the charging rate provides 13.2 - 13.5 volts. Set the battery charger to continuous charge. Do not allow the charger to time out during the flash process. Remove the charger from the battery when the flash process is complete. NOTE: Do not allow the charging voltage to climb above 13.5 volts during the flash process. 2. Connect the CH9410 StarSCAN(R) ethernet cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the dealer's network drop. 3. Connect the CH9404D StarSCAN(R) vehicle cable to the StarSCAN(R) and the vehicle. 4. Power ON the StarSCAN(R). 5. Turn the ignition switch on. 6. Retrieve the old PCM part number. Using the StarSCAN(R) at the "Home" screen: a. Select "ECU View" b. Touch the screen to highlight the PCM in the list of modules. c. Select "More Options" d. Select "ECU Flash". e. Record the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen for later reference. f. Select "Browse for New File". Follow the on screen instructions. g. Select "Download to Scantool". h. Select "Close" after the download is complete, then select "Back". i. Highlight the listed calibration. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Oil Change Reminder Lamp: > 18-005-08B > Aug > 08 > Engine Controls - False Oil Change Indicator > Page 8956 j. Select "Update Controller". k. When the update is complete, select "OK". 7. Verify the part number at the top of the "Flash PCM" screen has updated to the new part number. NOTE: Due to the PCM programming procedure, a DTC may be set in other modules within the vehicle, if so equipped. Some DTC's may cause the MIL to illuminate. From the "Home" screen select "System View". Then select "All DTCs". Press "Clear All Stored DTCs" if there are any DTCs shown on the list. POLICY: Reimbursable within the provisions of the warranty. TIME ALLOWANCE: FAILURE CODE: Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A change oil indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles manufactured for export markets, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located within the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The change oil indicator consists of cycling textual CHAngE and OIL messages which appear in place of the odometer/trip odometer information in the odometer VFD unit. The odometer VFD is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the tachometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents it from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The change oil textual messages appear in the same blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information when they are illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The change oil indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD in the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8959 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The change oil indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when a duty-cycle algorithm contained within the software of the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) determines that a recommended oil change interval has been attained. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus from the PCM. The change oil indicator function of the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the VFD change oil indication will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The instrument cluster will turn ON the change oil indicator for the following reasons: - Change Oil Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and the cluster receives an electronic change oil indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that a duty-cycle based recommended oil change interval has been attained, the change oil indicator will be illuminated for about three seconds, until the trip odometer reset switch button is depressed, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Change Oil Indicator Reset Procedure - Once an engine oil change has been completed, the PCM duty cycle counters can be reset using the following procedure. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but DO NOT start the engine. Slowly depress and release the accelerator pedal fully three times within ten seconds. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. If the change oil indicator illuminates the next time the engine is started, repeat this procedure. The PCM continually monitors numerous sensor inputs to determine the duty-cycles to which the engine is being subjected. A pre-programmed algorithm within the PCM then determines when to send the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For proper diagnosis of the change oil indicator, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to change oil indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8960 Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair OIL CHANGE INDICATOR - RESET To reset the "Oil Change Required" indicator (after performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure: 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start engine). 2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. NOTE: If the indicator message illumination when you start the vehicle, the "Oil Change Required" indicator did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations Component ID: 307 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8964 Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8965 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8966 Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams Component ID: 307 Component : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Connector: Name : SWITCH-OIL PRESSURE Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 G6 16VT/GY ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SIGNAL 2-Component Location - 17 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8967 Component Location - 13 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 8968 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The oil pressure switch is a pressure sensitive switch that is activated by the engine's oil pressure (in the main oil gallery). The switch is a two terminal device (one terminal is provided to the wiring harness and the other terminal is the switch's metal housing that screws into the engine block). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8971 Oil Pressure Sender: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The oil pressure switch is normally "Closed." The switch changes from a "Closed" circuit to an "Open" circuit, on increasing pressure of 7 psig. The oil pressure switch changes from an "Open" circuit to a "Closed" circuit, on decreasing pressure, between 2 psig and 4 psig. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install oil pressure sender. 2. Connect oil pressure sender wire. 3. Install front splash shield. 4. Lower vehicle. 5. Connect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Installation > Page 8974 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure Sensor/Switch - Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. 2. Raise vehicle on hoist. 3. Remove front splash shield. 4. Disconnect oil pressure sender wire (4). 5. Remove the pressure sender (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A low oil pressure indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the speedometer. The low oil pressure indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Oil in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the icon to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The low oil pressure indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8979 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The low oil pressure indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine oil pressure reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The low oil pressure indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the low oil pressure indicator for the following reasons: - Engine Oil Pressure Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine oil pressure message from the PCM indicating the pressure is about 6.9 kPa (1 psi) or lower, the low oil pressure indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the pressure is above about 6.9 kPa (1 psi), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The cluster will only turn the indicator ON in response to low engine oil pressure if the engine speed is greater than zero. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the low oil pressure indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine oil pressure sensor to determine the engine oil pressure. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the low oil pressure indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier - Testing and Inspection See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection. For proper diagnosis of the engine oil pressure sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to low oil pressure indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor mounted to a bracket that is secured with a screw to the left side of the radiator yoke, behind the radiator grille and in front of the engine compartment. The ambient temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if inoperative or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8985 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a five-volt reference signal sent by the Front Control Module (FCM). The resistance in the sensor changes as temperature changes, changing the temperature sensor signal circuit voltage to the FCM. Based upon the resistance in the sensor, the FCM senses a specific voltage on the temperature sensor signal circuit. The FCM then translates the voltage into a temperature reading that it sent over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to other modules utilizing temperature information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8986 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Testing and Inspection AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR The temperature function is supported by the ambient temperature sensor, a wiring circuit, and the Front Control Module (FCM). When the sensor is exposed to temperatures above 60° C (140° F), or if the sensor circuit is shorted, 60° C (130/140° F) will appear in the display in place of the temperature. When the sensor is exposed to temperatures below - 40° C (- 40° F) or if the sensor circuit is open, - 40° C (- 40° F) will appear in the display. The ambient temperature sensor circuit can be diagnosed using the following Temperature System Test, and Sensor Test. If the temperature sensor and circuit are confirmed to be OK, but the temperature display is inoperative or incorrect, test the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC),See: Compass/Testing and Inspection. TEMPERATURE SYSTEM TEST For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. NOTE: Temperature readings do not update immediately. Allow up to 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the On position for readings to meet test specifications. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the ambient temperature sensor. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The CMTC display should now read - 40° C (- 40° F). If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the shorted sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Taking care not to damage the wire terminals, connect a jumper wire between the two terminals in the body half of the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The CMTC display should now read 60° C (130/140° F). If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 5. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes that may have been set while performing the test. Perform further diagnosis of the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC),See: Compass/Testing and Inspection as needed. SENSOR TEST 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the ambient temperature sensor. At - 40° C (- 40° F), the sensor resistance is 336 kilohms. At 55° C (130° F), the sensor resistance is 2.488 kilohms. The sensor resistance should read between these two values. If OK, perform further diagnosis of the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC),See: Compass/Testing and Inspection Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the ambient temperature sensor (1), on the left side of the radiator yoke (2) behind the grille. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the ambient temperature sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the one screw that secures the ambient temperature sensor bracket to the radiator yoke. 5. Remove the ambient temperature sensor from the radiator yoke. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 8989 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the ambient temperature sensor (1) onto the radiator yoke (2). 2. Install the screw that secures the ambient temperature sensor to the radiator yoke. Tighten the screw to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector (3) to the ambient temperature sensor (1). 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 308 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 33 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8993 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8994 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 308 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 33 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8995 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 8998 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8999 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. Refer to appropriate testing. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9002 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A seatbelt indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The seatbelt indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Seat Belt in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The seatbelt indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9007 Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The seatbelt indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the driver side front seatbelt. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired input from the seatbelt switch in the driver side front seatbelt retractor through the seat belt indicator driver circuit. The seatbelt indicator also includes a programmable enhanced seatbelt reminder or BELTMINDER feature that is enabled when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. This BELTMINDER feature can be disabled and enabled by the customer using a specific programming event sequence, or by the dealer using a diagnostic scan tool. The seatbelt indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the seatbelt indicator for the following reasons: Seatbelt Reminder Function - Each time the cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit, the indicator will be illuminated as a seatbelt reminder for about six seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. This reminder function will occur regardless of the status of the seatbelt switch input to the cluster. - Driver Side Front Seatbelt Not Buckled - Beltminder Active - Following the seatbelt reminder function, each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seatbelt switch open = seatbelt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the START or ON positions, the indicator will be illuminated. In addition, if the driver side front seat belt remains unbuckled about 60 seconds after the conclusion of the seatbelt reminder function with the vehicle speed greater than about 8 kilometers-per-hour (5 miles-per-hour), the seatbelt indicator will begin to cycle between flashing ON and OFF for 3 seconds, then lighting solid for 2 seconds. The seatbelt indicator will continue to cycle between flashing and solid illumination for 13 complete cycles, until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seatbelt switch closed = seatbelt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Driver Side Front Seatbelt Not Buckled - Beltminder Inactive - Following the seatbelt reminder function, each time the cluster detects an open circuit on the seat belt indicator driver circuit (seatbelt switch open = seatbelt unbuckled) with the ignition switch in the START or ON positions, the indicator will be illuminated. The seatbelt indicator remains illuminated until the seat belt indicator driver input to the cluster is closed to ground (seatbelt switch closed = seatbelt buckled), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Airbag Indicator Backup - If the instrument cluster detects a fault in the airbag indicator circuit it will send an electronic message indicating the fault to the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), then flash the seatbelt indicator ON and OFF. The cluster will continue to flash the indicator until the airbag indicator circuit fault is resolved, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the seatbelt indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The seatbelt switch is connected in series between ground and the seat belt indicator driver input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The hard wired seatbelt switch input to the EMIC may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle has up to four door ajar switches, one for each full door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair/Front Door Latch - Removal or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Latch/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9013 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then uses these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The EMIC also sends the proper electronic door ajar switch status messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Locations Fuel Gauge Sender: Locations The module assembly (5) contains the following components: An internal fuel filter See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Fuel Filter/Description and Operation/Fuel Filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor Description DESCRIPTION The fuel gauge level sending unit is attached to the side of fuel pump module. The level sensor is a variable resistor. Operation OPERATION Its resistance changes with the amount of fuel in the tank. The float arm attached to the sensor moves as the fuel level changes. The fuel level input is used as an input for OBD II. If the fuel level is below 15% or above 85% of total tank capacity several monitors are disabled. There are diagnostics for the level circuit open and shorted. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor > Page 9019 Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump Module DESCRIPTION The fuel pump module assembly (4) is located on the top of the fuel tank (2). The module assembly (5) contains the following components: - An internal fuel filter - A separate fuel pick-up, or inlet filter (3) - A fuel pressure regulator (4) - An electric fuel pump (2) - A lockring to retain pump module to tank - A soft gasket between tank flange and module - A fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) (1) - Fuel line connection (6) If the fuel gauge sending unit, electrical fuel pump, primary inlet filter, fuel filter or fuel pressure regulator require service, the fuel pump module must be replaced. Electric Fuel Pump The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel pump module. A 12 volt, permanent magnet, electric motor powers the fuel pump. The electric fuel pump is not a separate, serviceable component. Fuel Filters Two fuel filters are used. One is located at the bottom of the fuel pump module. The other is located inside the module. A separate frame mounted fuel filter is not used with any engine. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Level Sending Unit / Sensor > Page 9020 Both fuel filters are designed for extended service. They do not require normal scheduled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if a diagnostic procedure indicates to do so. Fuel Pressure Regulator The fuel pressure regulator is located within fuel pump module. Fuel Gauge Sending Unit (Fuel level sensor) The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a variable resistor track (card). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Removal REMOVAL WARNING: The fuel system is under a constant pressure (even with the engine off). Before servicing the fuel pump module, the fuel system pressure must be released. 1. Drain and remove fuel tank. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Removal 2. Note rotational position of module before attempting removal. An indexing arrow is located on top of module for this purpose. 3. Position Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) into notches on outside edge of lockring (5). 4. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker bar (1) to Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 5. Rotate breaker bar counter-clockwise to remove lockring. 6. Remove lockring. The module will spring up slightly when lockring is removed. 7. Remove module from fuel tank. Be careful not to bend float arm while removing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Pump Module - Removal > Page 9023 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Whenever the fuel pump module is serviced, the rubber seal (gasket) must be replaced. 1. Using a new seal (gasket), position fuel pump module into opening in fuel tank. 2. Position lockring (5) over top of fuel pump module. 3. Rotate module until embossed alignment arrow points to center alignment mark. This step must be performed to prevent float from contacting side of fuel tank. Also be sure fuel fitting on top of pump module is pointed to drivers side of vehicle. 4. Install Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3) to lockring. 5. Install 1/2 inch drive breaker (1) into Lockring Remover/Installer 9340 (3). 6. Tighten lockring (clockwise) until all seven notches have engaged. 7. Install fuel tank. See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Tank/Service and Repair/Fuel Tank - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor mounted to a bracket that is secured with a screw to the left side of the radiator yoke, behind the radiator grille and in front of the engine compartment. The ambient temperature sensor cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if inoperative or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9028 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The ambient temperature sensor is a variable resistor that operates on a five-volt reference signal sent by the Front Control Module (FCM). The resistance in the sensor changes as temperature changes, changing the temperature sensor signal circuit voltage to the FCM. Based upon the resistance in the sensor, the FCM senses a specific voltage on the temperature sensor signal circuit. The FCM then translates the voltage into a temperature reading that it sent over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus to other modules utilizing temperature information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9029 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Testing and Inspection AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR The temperature function is supported by the ambient temperature sensor, a wiring circuit, and the Front Control Module (FCM). When the sensor is exposed to temperatures above 60° C (140° F), or if the sensor circuit is shorted, 60° C (130/140° F) will appear in the display in place of the temperature. When the sensor is exposed to temperatures below - 40° C (- 40° F) or if the sensor circuit is open, - 40° C (- 40° F) will appear in the display. The ambient temperature sensor circuit can be diagnosed using the following Temperature System Test, and Sensor Test. If the temperature sensor and circuit are confirmed to be OK, but the temperature display is inoperative or incorrect, test the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC),See: Compass/Testing and Inspection. TEMPERATURE SYSTEM TEST For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The wiring information includes wiring diagrams, proper wire and connector repair procedures, details of wire harness routing and retention, connector pin-out information and location views for the various wire harness connectors, splices and grounds. NOTE: Temperature readings do not update immediately. Allow up to 60 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the On position for readings to meet test specifications. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the ambient temperature sensor. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The CMTC display should now read - 40° C (- 40° F). If OK, go to STEP 3. If not OK, repair the shorted sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Taking care not to damage the wire terminals, connect a jumper wire between the two terminals in the body half of the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The CMTC display should now read 60° C (130/140° F). If OK, go to STEP 5. If not OK, repair the open sensor return circuit or ambient temperature sensor signal circuit to the ambient temperature sensor as required. 5. Clear any Diagnostic Trouble Codes that may have been set while performing the test. Perform further diagnosis of the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC),See: Compass/Testing and Inspection as needed. SENSOR TEST 1. Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Disconnect the ambient temperature sensor harness connector. 2. Measure the resistance of the ambient temperature sensor. At - 40° C (- 40° F), the sensor resistance is 336 kilohms. At 55° C (130° F), the sensor resistance is 2.488 kilohms. The sensor resistance should read between these two values. If OK, perform further diagnosis of the Compass Mini - Trip Computer (CMTC),See: Compass/Testing and Inspection Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the ambient temperature sensor (1), on the left side of the radiator yoke (2) behind the grille. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (3) from the ambient temperature sensor connector receptacle. 4. Remove the one screw that secures the ambient temperature sensor bracket to the radiator yoke. 5. Remove the ambient temperature sensor from the radiator yoke. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Outside Temperature Display Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9032 Outside Temperature Display Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the ambient temperature sensor (1) onto the radiator yoke (2). 2. Install the screw that secures the ambient temperature sensor to the radiator yoke. Tighten the screw to 5.5 Nm (50 in. lbs.). 3. Connect the wire harness connector (3) to the ambient temperature sensor (1). 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations Component ID: 308 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 33 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9036 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9037 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 308 Component : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Connector: Name : SWITCH-PARKING BRAKE Color : GRAY # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 B25 20DG/WT PARK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 33 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9038 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park brake switch (1) is located on the park brake lever mechanism on the cowl side inner panel below the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. This switch includes a spade-type output terminal (3) that connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the body wire harness. The output terminal is integral to the stationary contact within a molded plastic insulator. A locating tab on the insulator engages a slot in the park brake lever mechanism for positive switch location. External to the insulator is a movable leaf contact with an integral grounding lug (4) on one end and an integral actuating lever and follower (2) on the opposite end. The switch is secured to and grounded by a single screw to the park brake lever mechanism. The park brake switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9041 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park brake switch is a normally closed, mechanically actuated leaf contact switch that is operated by the park brake lever mechanism. The switch is grounded through its mounting to the park brake lever mechanism and provides a ground input to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a park brake switch sense circuit whenever the park brake is applied, and opens this circuit whenever the park brake is released. The park brake switch sense input to the EMIC is used for control of the brake indicator and may also be used as a logic input for other electronic features in the vehicle. The park brake switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9042 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Testing and Inspection PARK BRAKE SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: If the brake indicator stays ON with the ignition switch in the ON position and the park brake released, or comes ON while driving, the brake system must be diagnosed and repaired prior to performing the following tests. Refer to appropriate testing. If no brake system problem is found, the following procedures will help to locate a shorted or open park brake switch sense circuit, or an ineffective park brake switch. INDICATOR ILLUMINATES DURING BULB TEST, BUT DOES NOT WHEN PARK BRAKE APPLIED 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Apply the parking brake. Check for continuity between the park brake switch terminal and a good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 2. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavities of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and the instrument panel wire harness connector for the instrument cluster. There should be continuity. If not OK, repair the open park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. INDICATOR REMAINS ILLUMINATED - BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKS OKAY 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Disconnect the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch from the switch terminal. Check for continuity between the terminal of the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity with the park brake released, and continuity with the park brake applied. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the ineffective park brake switch. 4. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness connector (Connector C1) for the instrument cluster from the cluster connector receptacle. Check for continuity between the park brake switch sense circuit cavity of the body wire harness connector for the park brake switch and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If not OK, repair the shorted park brake switch sense circuit between the park brake switch and the instrument cluster as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to access and disconnect the body wire harness connector (2) from the terminal of the park brake switch (4) located on the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. 4. Remove the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. 5. Remove the switch from the park brake lever mechanism. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9045 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Reach under the left end of the instrument panel to position park brake switch (4) onto the park brake lever mechanism (1) on the left cowl side inner panel. Be certain to engage the locating pin on the back of the switch insulator into the locating slot in the lever mechanism bracket. 2. Install and tighten the screw (3) that secures the park brake switch to the park brake lever mechanism. Tighten the screw to 3 Nm (24 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the body wire harness connector (2) to the terminal of the park brake switch. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and check for proper brake indicator operation with the parking brake applied, then release the parking brake and check that the brake indicator extinguishes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Speedometer Head: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A speedometer is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The speedometer is located in the center of the instrument cluster, between the tachometer and the minor gauge set. The speedometer consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 210 degree primary scale on the gauge dial face that reads left-to-right either from 0 to 120 mph, or from 0 to 200 km/h, depending upon the market for which the vehicle is manufactured. Each version also has a secondary inner scale on the gauge dial face that provides the equivalent opposite units from the primary scale. Text appearing on the cluster overlay above the hub of the speedometer needle abbreviates the unit of measure for the primary scale (either MPH or km/h ), followed by the unit of measure for the secondary scale. The speedometer graphics are black (primary scale) and blue (secondary scale) against a white field, making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the white gauge dial face appears blue-green with the black and blue graphics silhouetted against the illuminated background and the red gauge needle still appears red. Gauge illumination is provided by an integral electro-luminescent lamp that is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. The speedometer is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Speedometer Head > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9050 Speedometer Head: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The speedometer gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the vehicle road speed. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The speedometer is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Vehicle Speed Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic vehicle speed message from the PCM it will calculate the correct vehicle speed reading and position the gauge needle at that relative speed position on the gauge scale. The cluster will receive a new message and reposition the gauge pointer accordingly about every 88 milliseconds. The gauge needle will continually be positioned at the relative vehicle speed position on the gauge scale until the vehicle stops moving, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a speed message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about three seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After three seconds, the gauge needle will return to the left end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the speedometer needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) to determine the vehicle road speed. The PCM then sends the proper vehicle speed messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the speedometer or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the VSS, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to speedometer operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tachometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tachometer: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A tachometer is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The tachometer is located to the right side of the instrument cluster, just right of the speedometer. The tachometer consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 210 degree scale on the gauge dial face that reads left-to-right from 0 to 7. The text RPM X 1000 imprinted on the cluster overlay directly above the hub of the tachometer needle identifies that each number on the tachometer scale is to be multiplied by 1000 rpm. The tachometer graphics are black against a white field, making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the white gauge dial face appears blue-green with the black graphics silhouetted against the illuminated background and the red gauge needle still appears red. Gauge illumination is provided by an integral electro-luminescent lamp that is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. The tachometer is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tachometer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9055 Tachometer: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The tachometer gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine speed. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The tachometer is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Speed Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine speed message from the PCM it will calculate the correct engine speed reading and position the gauge needle at that relative speed position on the gauge scale. The cluster will receive a new message and reposition the gauge pointer accordingly about every 88 milliseconds. The gauge needle will continually be repositioned at the relative engine speed position on the gauge scale until the engine stops running, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine speed message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about three seconds, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After three seconds, the gauge needle will return to the left end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the tachometer needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the crankshaft position sensor to determine the engine speed. The PCM then sends the proper engine speed messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the tachometer or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the crankshaft position sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to tachometer operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine coolant temperature gauge is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This gauge is part of the minor gauge set with the fuel gauge located on the left side of the instrument cluster, just left of the speedometer. The gauge consists of a movable gauge needle or pointer controlled by the instrument cluster circuitry and a fixed 90 degree gauge scale on the cluster overlay that reads bottom-to-top from C (or Cold) to H (or Hot). An International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature is located on the cluster overlay, directly below the bottom end of the scale. The engine coolant temperature gauge graphics are black against a white field except for a single red graduation at the high end of the gauge scale, making them clearly visible within the instrument cluster in daylight. When illuminated from behind by the panel lamps dimmer controlled cluster general illumination lighting with the exterior lamps turned ON, the white gauge dial face appears blue-green with the black graphics silhouetted against the illuminated background and the red graphics and the red gauge needle still appear red. Gauge illumination is provided by an integral electro-luminescent lamp that is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. The engine coolant temperature gauge is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Gauge > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9060 Temperature Gauge: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine coolant temperature gauge gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the engine coolant temperature. This gauge is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine coolant temperature gauge is an air core magnetic unit that receives battery current on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board through the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or START positions. The cluster is programmed to move the gauge needle back to the low end of the scale after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. The instrument cluster circuitry controls the gauge needle position and provides the following features: - Engine Temperature Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is between the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F)] and the high end of normal [about 122 °C (252 °F)], the gauge needle is moved to the actual relative temperature position on the gauge scale. - Engine Temperature Low Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is below the low end of normal [about 54 °C (130 °F)], the gauge needle is held at the C increment at the low end of the gauge scale. The gauge needle remains at the low end of the gauge scale until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is above about 54 °C (130 °F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is above about 122 °C (252 °F), the gauge needle is moved to the red zone at the high end of the gauge scale, the engine temperature indicator is illuminated, and a single chime tone is sounded. The gauge needle remains in the red zone and the engine temperature indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is below about 122 °C (252 °F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive an engine temperature message, it will hold the gauge needle at the last indication for about five seconds or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. After five seconds, the cluster will move the gauge needle to the low end of the gauge scale. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine coolant temperature gauge needle will be swept to several calibration points on the gauge scale in a prescribed sequence in order to confirm the functionality of the gauge and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature gauge or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the gauge, Refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier Testing and Inspection See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection. If the instrument cluster turns ON the engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine coolant temperature gauge operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A transmission over-temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The transmission over-temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Transmission Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The transmission over-temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9065 Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The transmission over-temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the transmission fluid temperature is excessive, which may lead to accelerated transmission component wear or failure. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The transmission over-temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the transmission over-temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the transmission over-temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. Trans Over-Temp Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic trans over-temp indicator lamp-ON message from the PCM indicating that the transmission fluid temperature is 135 °C (275 °F) or higher, the indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the PCM, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the indicator is cycled OFF and then ON again by the appropriate lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the transmission over-temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the transmission temperature sensor to determine the transmission operating condition. The PCM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster illuminates the transmission over-temperature indicator due to a high transmission oil temperature condition, it may indicate that the transmission or the transmission cooling system are being overloaded, or that they require service. For further diagnosis of the transmission over-temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the transmission temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to transmission over-temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An engine temperature indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The engine temperature indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The engine temperature indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Engine Coolant Temperature in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A red Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in red through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The engine temperature indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9070 Temperature Warning Lamp/Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The engine temperature indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the engine temperature gauge reading reflects a condition requiring immediate attention. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The engine temperature indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the engine temperature indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the engine temperature indicator is illuminated for about two seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the PCM. - Engine Temperature High Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic engine temperature message from the PCM indicating the temperature is above about 122 °C (252 °F), the engine temperature indicator will be illuminated and a single chime tone is sounded. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a message from the PCM indicating that the temperature is below about 119 °C (246 °F), or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. The chime tone feature will only repeat during the same ignition cycle if the engine temperature indicator is cycled OFF, then ON again by the appropriate messages from the PCM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the engine temperature indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors the engine coolant temperature sensor to determine the engine operating temperature. The PCM then sends the proper messages to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the engine temperature indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the LED, Refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier Testing and Inspection See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection. If the instrument cluster turns ON the engine temperature indicator due to a high engine temperature gauge reading, it may indicate that the engine or the engine cooling system requires service. For proper diagnosis of the engine coolant temperature sensor, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to engine temperature indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional TPM, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the speedometer dial face to the left of the speedometer needle hub in the instrument cluster overlay. The TPM indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of an icon that represents a cross-section of a tire with a centered exclamation point in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The TPM indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9076 Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the status of the TPM system. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Sentry Key REmote Entry Module (SKREEM) (also known as the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module/SKIM or the Wireless Control Module/WCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The TPM indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the LED will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the TPM indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the SKREEM sends an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message to the cluster to illuminate the TPM indicator for about three seconds as a bulb test. - TPM Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic TPM indicator lamp-ON message from the SKREEM, the TPM indicator will be illuminated. The indicator can be flashed ON and OFF, or illuminated solid, as dictated by the SKREEM message. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the SKREEM or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster receives no TPM lamp-ON or lamp-OFF messages from the SKREEM for six consecutive seconds, the TPM indicator is illuminated by the instrument cluster. The indicator remains controlled and illuminated by the cluster until a valid lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message is received from the SKREEM. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the TPM indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The SKREEM performs a self-test each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position to decide whether the TPM system is in good operating condition and whether the tire inflation pressures are too high or too low. The SKREEM then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). If the instrument cluster turns ON the TPM indicator after the bulb test, it indicates that the inflation pressure of a tire is too low or that a malfunction has occurred and the TPM system is ineffective. For proper diagnosis of the TPM system, the SKREEM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to TPM indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Refer to the appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service Precautions Tire Pressure Sensor: Service Precautions CAUTION CAUTION: The use of tire sealants is not recommended for vehicles equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring system. Tire sealants may clog tire pressure sensors. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. Use tire pressure sensors in original style factory wheels only. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION On vehicles equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System, one tire pressure sensor (6) is mounted to each wheel in place of the traditional tire valve stem. Each sensor has an internal battery that lasts up to 10 years. The battery is not serviceable. At the time of battery failure, the sensor (6) must be replaced. The TPM system operates on a 315 MHz radio frequency. The 315 MHz sensors can be easily identified by a GREEN sensor body, with (an triangle insignia) (1). The 433 MHz sensors can be identified by a grey sensor body with an oval insignia. For car applications, there is a 315 MHz TPM sensor with a Black sensor body with an oval insignia. NOTE: This vehicle uses the 315 MHz TPM sensor with the GREEN sensor body. Although 315 MHz and 433 MHz sensors are identical in size and shape, they are not interchangeable. Always make sure the correct color sensor is being used. A RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to determine the sensor's frequency without having to dismount the tire. The TPM sensors are designed for original style factory wheels. It is not recommended to install a tire pressure sensor in an aftermarket wheel. (This could cause sealing and system performance issues.) The serviceable components of the tire pressure sensor are: - Sensor-To-Wheel Seal (4) - Valve Stem Cap (2) - Valve Stem Core - Valve Stem Nut (3) The valve stem caps and cores used are specifically designed for the tire pressure monitoring sensors. Although similar to standard valve stem caps and cores, they are different. The valve stem cap has a special seal inside to keep moisture and corrosion out. The valve stem core has a special nickel coating to protect from corrosion. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9082 Tire Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION CAUTION: The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. After-market wheels can cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. CAUTION: After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor. CAUTION: Tire pressure sensor valve stem caps and cores are specially designed for the sensors. Due to risk of corrosion, do not use a standard valve stem cap or core in a tire pressure sensor in place of the original equipment style sensor cap and core. CAUTION: Any time a sensor is to be reinstalled in a wheel, a new seal, nut, cap and valve core must be installed on the stem to ensure air tight sealing. NOTE: TPM thresholds have been established for the original tire size equipped on the vehicle. Use original size tires only to maintain system accuracy. The battery operated tire pressure sensor is both a transmitter and a receiver. The TPM sensor can be forced to transmit if using a special tool such as a TPM-RKE Analyzer, or from a transponder. The TPM-RKE Analyzer has the ability to change the sensor mode and to diagnose a faulty TPM sensor. Using a TPM-RKE Analyzer can take up to a minute to force a transmission from a sensor. The High Pressure TPM sensor can be in one of the following modes: Sleep Mode - A new TPM sensor will be in this mode. If placed on the vehicle as a road tire, the TPM sensor will transmit once every 20 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle is not moving, the sensor will only transmit on a pressure change greater then 2 psi (13.8 kPA). Driving the vehicle continuously at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for more then 4 minutes will change the sensor state into 30 BLOCK MODE. The TPM sensor will not return to SLEEP MODE. Now, if the vehicle has been stopped for 20 minutes, the TPM sensor state will change to PARK MODE. - Park Mode - This is the correct mode when the vehicle is not moving. The sensor will transmit once every 13 hours to update the WCM, or will transmit on a 2 psi (13.8 kPA) delta change. The sensors will internally take a measurement of the tire pressure every minute to determine a change in tire pressure. - 30 Block Mode - If the vehicle has not been moving for more then 20 minutes, or if the sensor's mode was forced to Park Mode using a TPM-RKE Analyzer, the sensor's operating mode will transition from PARK MODE to 30 BLOCK MODE once the vehicle is driven over 15 mph. In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every 15 seconds when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h) for the first 30 transmissions. After 8 minutes of continuous driving above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM sensor will change to DRIVE MODE. Drive Mode - In this mode, the sensor will transmit once every minute when the vehicle is driven at speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). At any time that the vehicle speed drops below 15mph, the sensor will not transmit. The sensor mode will still be in drive mode when the sensor reaches speeds over 15 mph (24 km/h). If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, the TPM sensor will change to PARK MODE. Each sensor's (transmitter) broadcast is uniquely coded so that the wireless control module (WCM) can monitor the state of each of the sensors on the four rotating road wheels. The WCM can automatically learn and store the sensor's ID while driving "within 10 minutes continuously above 15 m.p.h. (24 Km/h)" after a sensor has been replaced. The vehicle must be stationary for more then 20 minutes in order to initiate the learning sequence. The sensor IDs can also be programmed using the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool. Scan each TPM sensor at each road wheel, and store each Sensor ID in the correct location. (LEFT FRONT, LEFT REAR, RIGHT FRONT, and RIGHT REAR) Connect the TPM-RKE Analyzer Tool to the Scan Tool. Then follow the programming steps outlined in the diagnostic Scan Tool for "Program Tire Pressure Sensor ID w/ TPM Tool" under "MISC" for the "WCM/WIRELESS CONTROL MODULE". Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise and support vehicle. 2. Remove the tire and wheel assembly See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. CAUTION: The cap used on this valve stem contains an O-ring seal to prevent contamination and moisture from entering the valve stem. Retain this valve stem cap for reuse. Do not substitute a regular valve stem cap in its place. CAUTION: The valve stem used on this vehicle is made of aluminum and the core is nickel plated brass. The original valve stem core must be reinstalled and not substituted with a valve stem core made of a different material. This is required to prevent corrosion in the valve stem caused by the different metals. 3. Let the air out of the tire. 4. Remove the nut (3). 5. Push the sensor into the tire (1) (so the sensor is loose inside the tire). 6. Remove the tire from the rim. 7. Retrieve the sensor (1) from the tire. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9085 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Before reinstalling an existing tire pressure sensor (6), replace valve cap (2), valve core and sensor seal (4) to ensure proper sealing. NOTE: The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 1. Wipe area clean around sensor/valve stem mounting hole in wheel. Make sure surface of wheel is not damaged. 2. Insert sensor (1) through wheel (2) as shown keeping pressure against rear of metal valve stem (See Arrow). Potted side of sensor is to be positioned toward wheel. Damage to the sensor may occur if the sensor is installed incorrectly. NOTE: A flat on the seal seat is used to key the seat to the sensor housing. The notch/flat should be lined up together and facing towards the wheel during installation. 3. Install sensor nut (3) and hand tighten. NOTE: Before tightening sensor nut, push downward on sensor housing (2) in an attempt to make it flush with interior contour of wheel (1). 4. While holding sensor in position, tighten sensor nut to 6 Nm (53 in. lbs.). CAUTION: Over-tightening the sensor to as much as 10 Nm (88 in. lbs.) may result in sensor separation from the valve stem. Under this condition, the sensor may still function, however, the condition should be corrected immediately. 5. Mount tire on wheel following tire changer manufacturer's instructions, paying special attention to the following to avoid damaging tire pressure sensor: a. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9086 Rotating Wheel Tire Changers- Once the wheel is mounted to the changer, position the sensor valve stem (2) approximately 180° from the head of the changer (located at 1) in a clockwise direction before rotating the wheel (also in a clockwise direction) to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. b. Rotating Tool Tire Changers - Position the wheel on the changer so that the sensor valve stem (1) is located approximately 180° clockwise from the installation end of the mounting/dismounting tool (2) once the tool is mounted for tire installation. Make sure the sensor is clear of the lower bead breaker area (3) to avoid damaging the sensor when the breaker rises. Rotate the tool (2) in a counterclockwise direction to mount the tire. Use this procedure on both the upper and lower tire beads. 6. Adjust air pressure to that listed on Tire Inflation Pressure Label (Placard) provided with vehicle (usually applied to driver's side B-pillar). Make sure original style valve stem cap is securely installed to keep moisture out of sensor. 7. Install tire and wheel assembly on vehicle See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 8. Lower vehicle. 9. If the vehicle has been stationary for more then 20 minutes, drive the vehicle for a minimum of 10 minutes while maintaining a continuous speed above 15 mph (24 km/h). During this time, the system will learn the new sensor ID. NOTE: A new TPM sensor ID can also be programmed directly into the WCM by using a RKE-TPM Analyzer in conjunction with a Scan Tool. Once the new TPM sensor ID has been programmed, the RKE-TPM Analyzer can be used to update the TPMS by activation the TPM sensor. If a sensor cannot be trained, refer to appropriate diagnostic information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Traction Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A traction control indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with the optional Traction Control System (TCS), this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located in the center of the speedometer, in the area above and to the right of the speedometer needle hub. The traction control indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Stability - Anti-Spin in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. An amber Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in amber through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The traction control indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Traction Control Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9091 Traction Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The traction control indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator when the electronic Traction Control System (TCS) has been activated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The traction control indicator is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate when the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the indicator will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The indicator only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the traction control indicator for the following reasons: - Bulb Test - Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON position the traction control indicator is illuminated for about four seconds as a bulb test. The entire bulb test is a function of the CAB. - Traction Control Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic traction control indicator lamp-ON message from the CAB indicating that the TCS has been activated, the traction control indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the CAB, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the traction control indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The CAB continually monitors the status of the inputs to the TCS system to determine the proper outputs to the components of the Antilock Brake System (ABS). The CAB then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC). For further diagnosis of the traction control indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the TCS, the CAB, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to traction control indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION An electronic automatic transmission gear selector indicator is standard factory-installed equipment on this vehicle. However, on vehicles not equipped with an optional automatic transmission, this indicator is electronically disabled. The gear selector indicator information is displayed in an electronic, blue-green Vacuum-Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. This VFD unit is soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located below the tachometer in the lower right area of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The gear selector indicator displays the following characters from left to right: P , R , N , D , 2 , and 1. Each character appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information. Respectively, these characters represent the PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, second gear, and first gear positions of the transmission gear selector lever on the steering column. The indicator also illuminates a rectangular box around the character that represents the currently selected lever position. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the gear selector indicator is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the indicator lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster general illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the panel lamps dimmer thumbwheel allows the indicator to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The gear selector indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9096 Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The electronic gear selector indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator of the transmission gear that has been selected with the automatic transmission gear selector lever. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The gear selector indicator information is displayed by the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and the VFD will not display the gear selector indicator information after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Each time the cluster is disconnected from battery current for more than about five minutes, it must configure itself for the automatic transmission type that is in the vehicle once it is reconnected to battery current. The instrument cluster circuitry operates the gear selector indicator to provide the following features: - Selected Gear Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic selected gear message from the PCM, a box will be illuminated around the appropriate character in the gear selector indicator. The box will remain illuminated until the cluster receives a different selected gear message, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Communication Error - If the cluster fails to receive a selected gear message from the PCM within three seconds, the instrument cluster circuitry will display all gear selector positions boxed (selected) until a valid selected gear message is received or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the odometer/trip odometer VFD will display all of its characters at once, then step through each character segment individually during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The PCM continually monitors a hard wired multiplex input from the Transmission Range Sensor (TRS), then sends the proper message to the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). For further diagnosis of the gear selector indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls this function, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the TRS, the PCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to gear selector indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 298 Component : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z906 20BK GROUND Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9102 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9103 Backup Lamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 298 Component : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z906 20BK GROUND Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9104 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission have a normally open, spring-loaded plunger type backup lamp switch (2). Vehicles with an optional electronic automatic transmission have a Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) that is used to perform several functions, including that of the backup lamp switch. The TRS is described in further detail in Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems/Transmission Position Switch/Sensor/Description and Operation The backup lamp switch is located in a threaded hole on the side of the manual transmission housing. The switch has a threaded body and a hex formation near the plunger end of the switch. An integral connector receptacle at the end of the switch opposite the plunger connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a take out and connector of the engine wire harness. When installed, only the switch connector and the hex formation are visible on the outside of the transmission housing. The backup lamp switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire switch unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9107 Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The backup lamp switch controls the flow of battery voltage to the backup lamp bulbs through an output on the backup lamp feed circuit. The switch plunger is mechanically actuated by the gearshift mechanism within the transmission, which will depress the switch plunger and close the switch contacts whenever the REVERSE gear has been selected. The switch receives battery voltage through a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON position. The backup lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9108 Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection BACKUP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Locate and disconnect the engine wire harness connector for the backup lamp switch. 4. Check for continuity between the two terminal pins in the backup lamp switch connector receptacle. a. With the gear selector lever in the REVERSE position, there should be continuity. b. With the gear selector lever in any position other than REVERSE, there should be no continuity. 5. If the switch fails either of these two continuity tests, replace the ineffective backup lamp switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear lamp unit (1) from the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit Removal. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (4) from the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (3) bulb socket on the back of the lamp housing. 4. Firmly grasp the socket on the back of the housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9113 Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (3) bulb socket. 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the rear lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reconnect the wire harness connector (4) to the socket. 7. Reinstall the rear lamp unit onto the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit - Installation. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear lamp unit (1) from the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit Removal. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (4) from the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (3) bulb socket on the back of the lamp housing. 4. Firmly grasp the socket on the back of the housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Brake Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9119 Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (3) bulb socket. 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the rear lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reconnect the wire harness connector (4) to the socket. 7. Reinstall the rear lamp unit onto the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit - Installation. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Component ID: 319 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 16WT/LB BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 F202 22PK/GY S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 22DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9123 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9124 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9125 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 319 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 16WT/LB BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 F202 22PK/GY S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 22DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9126 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9127 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The brake lamp switch (2) is a three circuit, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch that is secured to the steering column support bracket under the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle. The molded plastic switch housing has an integral connector receptacle (1) containing six terminal pins and featuring a Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the instrument panel wire harness. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) on one end of the switch housing. The plunger has a one time telescoping self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by moving an adjustment release lever (5) on the opposite end of the switch housing clockwise, until it locks into a position that is horizontal and parallel to the connector receptacle. An installed brake lamp switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or removed from its mounting position for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9130 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake lamp switch controls three independent circuits. These circuits are described as follows: - Brake Lamp Switch Circuit - A normally open brake lamp switch circuit receives a battery voltage input, and supplies this battery voltage to the brake lamps and the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) on a brake lamp switch output circuit only when the brake pedal is depressed (brake lamp switch plunger released). - Brake Lamp Switch Signal Circuit - A normally closed brake lamp switch signal circuit receives a direct path to ground, and supplies this ground input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on a brake lamp switch sense circuit only when the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). - Speed Control Circuit - A normally closed speed control circuit receives a battery voltage input from the Powertrain Control Module on a speed control supply circuit, and supplies this battery voltage to the speed control servo solenoids (dump, vacuum, and vent) on a speed control brake switch output circuit only when the speed control system is turned ON and the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). The components of the self-adjusting brake switch plunger consist of a two-piece telescoping plunger, a split plunger locking collar, and a release wedge. The release lever has a shaft with a wedge that spreads the plunger locking collar to an open or released position. After the switch is installed and the brake pedal is released, the plunger telescopes to the correct adjustment position. When the release lever is moved to the release position, the wedge is disengaged from the locking collar causing the collar to apply a clamping pressure to the two plunger halves, fixing the plunger length. The brake lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9131 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection BRAKE LAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Do not remove the brake lamp switch from the mounting bracket. The self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the brake lamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, perform the continuity tests at the terminal pins (1) in the brake lamp switch connector receptacle as shown in the Brake Lamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the continuity tests, replace the ineffective brake lamp switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the brake lamp switch (1) near the support bracket on the lower steering column (3). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (5) from the brake lamp switch. 4. Rotate the brake lamp switch housing clockwise about 30 degrees to align the tabs on the switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket (4). 5. Pull the switch straight back from the keyed hole to remove it from the bracket. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 6. Discard the removed brake lamp switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9134 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal in the depressed position. 2. Align the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket (4) on the lower steering column (3). 3. Insert the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar through the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket until the switch housing (1) is firmly seated against the bracket. 4. Rotate the switch housing counterclockwise about 30 degrees to engage the tabs on the locking collar with the switch mounting bracket. CAUTION: Do not release or pull up on the brake pedal before the switch plunger adjustment has been completed. 5. Release the brake pedal, but do not pull it upward. 6. Rotate the plunger adjustment release lever (2) clockwise until it locks into place. The lever should be parallel to the brake lamp switch connector receptacle. This action will set the switch plunger length to a final adjustment position and cannot be undone. If not performed properly the first time, a new brake lamp switch must be installed. 7. Reconnect the wire harness connector (5) to the brake lamp switch. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Lamp - Removal Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair Cargo Lamp - Removal REMOVAL NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional cargo lamps, the Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) houses three bulbs. The center bulb is the CHMSL bulb and illuminates through a red lens, while the two outboard bulbs are for the cargo lamps and illuminate through clear lenses. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for all three of these bulbs. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the two screws that secure the CHMSL to the rear cab roof header panel. 3. Pull the CHMSL lens and housing (1) away from the header panel far enough to access the lamp wiring and bulb sockets (4) on the back of the lamp. 4. Firmly grasp the center socket on the back of the lamp housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb (2) straight out of the socket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cargo Lamp - Removal > Page 9139 Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair Cargo Lamp - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional cargo lamps, the Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) houses three bulbs. The center bulb is the CHMSL bulb and illuminates through a red lens, while the two outboard bulbs are for the cargo lamps and illuminate through clear lenses. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for all three of these bulbs. 1. Align the base of the cargo lamp bulb (2) with the socket (4). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of CHMSL housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Position the CHMSL into the opening in the rear cab roof header panel. 7. Install and tighten the two screws that secure the CHMSL to the header panel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Bulb - Removal Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Bulb Removal BULB NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional cargo lamps, the Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) houses three bulbs. The center bulb is the CHMSL bulb and illuminates through a red lens, while the two outboard bulbs are for the cargo lamps and illuminate through clear lenses. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for all three of these bulbs. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the two screws that secure the CHMSL to the rear cab roof header panel. 3. Pull the CHMSL lens and housing (1) away from the header panel far enough to access the lamp wiring and bulb sockets (4) on the back of the lamp. 4. Firmly grasp the center socket on the back of the lamp housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb (3) straight out of the socket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Bulb - Removal > Page 9145 Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Bulb Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the optional cargo lamps, the Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) houses three bulbs. The center bulb is the CHMSL bulb and illuminates through a red lens, while the two outboard bulbs are for the cargo lamps and illuminate through clear lenses. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for all three of these bulbs. 1. Align the base of the CHMSL bulb (3) with the socket (4). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of CHMSL housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Position the CHMSL into the opening in the rear cab roof header panel. 7. Install and tighten the two screws that secure the CHMSL to the header panel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging Cornering Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging NUMBER: 23-035-07 GROUP: Body DATE: August 08, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-041-06, DATED SEPTEMBER 27, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Exterior Lamp - Lens Fogging MODELS: 2006 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2008 (DC/DM) Ram Truck - Cab & Chassis (3500/4500/5500) 2006 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck - Pick-up (1500/2500/3500) 2006 - 2008 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2006 (JR) Stratus/Sebring 2006 - 2007 (JR27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2006 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty/Cherokee 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2008 (MK49) Compass 2007 - 2008 (MK74) Patriot 2006 - 2008 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) PT Cruiser 2006 - 2007 (RS/RG) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2006-2008 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (XK/XH) Commander DISCUSSION: Some customers may report that on occasion, vehicle exterior lamp assemblies are fogged with a light layer of condensation on the inside of the lenses. This may be reported after the lamps have been turned on and brought up to operating temperature, turned off, and then rapidly cooled by cold water (such as rain, or the water from a car wash). Lens fogging can also occur under certain atmospheric conditions after a vehicle has been parked outside overnight (i.e., a warm humid day followed by clear cool night). This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate this process. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cornering Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging > Page 9150 A lamp that has large amounts of water droplets visible on most internal surfaces indicates a problem with the lamp sealing that has allowed water to enter the lamp. In this instance, the customer is likely to report that moisture in the lamp is always present and never disappears. A lamp that exhibits internal moisture permanently should be replaced. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Courtesy Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bezel Lamp Courtesy Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Center Bezel Lamp Removal BULB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the center bezel lamp (4) from the instrument panel center bezel. See: Service and Repair/Center Bezel Lamp - Removal. 3. Depress the latch tab (2) and slide the hood (1) off of the end of the lamp housing. 4. Pull the base of the bulb (3) straight out of the bulb holder within the lamp housing. Installation BULB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Courtesy Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bezel Lamp > Page 9156 1. Align the base of the center bezel lamp bulb (3) with the bulb holder within the lamp housing (4). 2. Push the bulb straight into the bulb holder until the base is firmly seated. 3. Slide the hood (1) over the end of the lamp housing until the latch tab (2) snaps into place. 4. Reinstall the lamp unit into the instrument panel. See: Service and Repair/Center Bezel Lamp - Installation. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Courtesy Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bezel Lamp > Page 9157 Courtesy Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Illumination Lamp Bulb - A/C-Heat Control BULB - A/C-HEAT CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There may be minor variations in the locations of the bulb/bulb holder units on the back of the A/C-heater control as a result of various optional A/C-heater control units. However, the bulb types and service procedures are identical for all of these bulbs. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the center bezel (1) from the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Removal. 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the front A/C-heater control (2) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Bulb - CMTC Control BULB - CMTC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the CMTC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb locations are only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Courtesy Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bezel Lamp > Page 9158 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (1) from the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 3. Use a small thin-bladed screwdriver to rotate the bulb holder (3) counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it from the keyed opening in the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) unit (2) circuit board. 4. Pull the bulb holder and bulb straight out of the circuit board. Bulb - A/C-Heat Control BULB - A/C-HEAT CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There may be minor variations in the locations of the bulb/bulb holder units on the back of the A/C-heater control as a result of various optional A/C-heater control units. However, the bulb types and service procedures are identical for all of these bulbs. 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the front A/C-heater control (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the center bezel (1) onto the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Center Bezel - Installation. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - CMTC Control Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Courtesy Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Center Bezel Lamp > Page 9159 BULB - CMTC CONTROL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are provisions for up to four bulb/bulb holder units on the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) circuit board. The two outboard bulbs illuminate the CMTC push buttons, while the two center bulbs illuminate the optional universal transmitter push buttons. Therefore, the center bulb locations are only populated on vehicles equipped with the optional universal transmitter. 1. Align the bulb holder and bulb (3) with the keyed opening in the circuit board of the Compass Mini-Trip Computer (CMTC) (2). 2. Insert the bulb holder and bulb straight into the circuit board until the bulb holder is firmly seated. 3. Using a small thin-bladed screwdriver, rotate the bulb holder clockwise about 30 degrees on the circuit board to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the overhead console (1) onto the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Installation. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Glove Box Lamp: Service and Repair Removal Bulb BULB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the glove box from the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal. 3. Reach through the window (3) behind the instrument panel glove box opening (1) to access the bulb on the glove box lamp and switch (2). 4. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the bulb holder. Lamp/Switch LAMP/SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9164 2. Remove the glove box (4) from the instrument panel (2). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box - Removal. 3. Reach behind the upper glove box opening to access and depress the retaining latch on either side of the glove box lamp and switch (3). 4. While holding the retaining latch depressed, push the glove box lamp and switch unit out through the mounting hole in the face of the instrument panel. 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the glove box lamp and switch. 6. Remove the lamp and switch from the instrument panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9165 Glove Box Lamp: Service and Repair Installation Bulb BULB WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Reach through the window (3) behind the instrument panel glove box opening (1) to align the base of the bulb with the bulb holder on the glove box lamp and switch (2). 2. Push the bulb straight into the bulb holder until the base is firmly seated. 3. Reinstall the glove box into the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box - Installation. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Lamp/Switch LAMP/SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Glove Box Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9166 1. Position the glove box lamp and switch (3) to the mounting hole in the instrument panel (2). 2. Reconnect the wire harness connector (1) to the lamp and switch. 3. Feed the wire harness back through the switch mounting hole. 4. Align the lamp and switch with the mounting hole in the instrument panel. 5. Using hand pressure, push the lamp and switch firmly and evenly into the mounting hole until it is fully seated. 6. Reinstall the glove box (4) into the instrument panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Glove Compartment/Service and Repair/Instrument Panel Glove Box - Installation. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging Daytime Running Lamp: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging NUMBER: 23-035-07 GROUP: Body DATE: August 08, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-041-06, DATED SEPTEMBER 27, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Exterior Lamp - Lens Fogging MODELS: 2006 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2008 (DC/DM) Ram Truck - Cab & Chassis (3500/4500/5500) 2006 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck - Pick-up (1500/2500/3500) 2006 - 2008 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2006 (JR) Stratus/Sebring 2006 - 2007 (JR27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2006 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty/Cherokee 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2008 (MK49) Compass 2007 - 2008 (MK74) Patriot 2006 - 2008 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) PT Cruiser 2006 - 2007 (RS/RG) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2006-2008 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (XK/XH) Commander DISCUSSION: Some customers may report that on occasion, vehicle exterior lamp assemblies are fogged with a light layer of condensation on the inside of the lenses. This may be reported after the lamps have been turned on and brought up to operating temperature, turned off, and then rapidly cooled by cold water (such as rain, or the water from a car wash). Lens fogging can also occur under certain atmospheric conditions after a vehicle has been parked outside overnight (i.e., a warm humid day followed by clear cool night). This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate this process. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging > Page 9171 A lamp that has large amounts of water droplets visible on most internal surfaces indicates a problem with the lamp sealing that has allowed water to enter the lamp. In this instance, the customer is likely to report that moisture in the lamp is always present and never disappears. A lamp that exhibits internal moisture permanently should be replaced. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9172 Daytime Running Lamp: Description and Operation - Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles manufactured for sale in Canada illuminate the high beam filament of the headlamp bulb in each front lamp unit to serve as the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). Fleet vehicles manufactured for sale in the United States illuminate the low beam filament of the headlamp bulb in each front lamp unit to serve as the DRL. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal Bulb - Front BULB - FRONT 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front dome lamp (2) from the headliner. See: Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Removal. 3. With the lamp lens (1) in the open position, carefully unsnap the bulb (3) from the two bulb holders within the front dome lamp housing. Bulb - Rear BULB - REAR NOTE: There are two types of dome lamps available in this vehicle: one with a switch (2) that is activated by depressing the lamp lens, and one without a switch. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for both of these lamps. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Insert the tip of a small flat-bladed screwdriver into the notch on one side of the rear dome lamp between the lens (4) and the lamp housing (1). 3. Gently pry the notched edge of the lens downward until it unsnaps from the housing. 4. Swing the notched end of the lens downward far enough to access the bulb (3). 5. Carefully unsnap the bulb from the two bulb holders within the rear dome lamp housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Dome Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9178 Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation Bulb - Front BULB - FRONT CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. With the dome lamp lens (1) in the open position, align the ends of the bulb (3) with the two bulb holders within the front dome lamp housing (2). 2. Carefully press the bulb firmly and evenly into the bulb holders until it snaps into place. 3. Reinstall the lamp into the headliner. See: Service and Repair/Dome Lamp - Installation. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Bulb - Rear BULB - REAR CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are two types of dome lamps available in this vehicle: one with a switch (2) that is activated by depressing the lamp lens, and one without a switch. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for both of these lamps. 1. Align the ends of the bulb (3) with the two bulb holders within the rear dome lamp housing (1). 2. Carefully press the bulb firmly and evenly into the bulb holders until it snaps into place. 3. Swing the notched end of the lens (4) up into position against the housing, then press upward on the lens firmly and evenly until it snaps into the housing. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle has up to four door ajar switches, one for each full door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair/Front Door Latch - Removal or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Latch/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9183 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then uses these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The EMIC also sends the proper electronic door ajar switch status messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fog Lamp Bulb - Removal Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Fog Lamp Bulb - Removal BULB CAUTION: Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach under and behind the front fascia to access the front fog lamp housing (3) on the back of the front bumper support (4). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (1) from the fog lamp socket (2). 4. Firmly grasp the socket on the back of the housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fog Lamp Bulb - Removal > Page 9189 Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Fog Lamp Bulb - Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. CAUTION: Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the front fog lamp socket (2). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the front fog lamp housing (3). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. The socket connector receptacle should be in a horizontal orientation. 6. Reconnect the wire harness connector (1) to the socket. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A fog lamp indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. However, on vehicles not equipped with optional fog lamps, this indicator is electronically disabled. This indicator is located within the odometer/trip odometer Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) unit. The fog lamp indicator consists of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light in the lower left corner of the VFD unit. The VFD unit is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board, and is visible through a window with a smoked clear lens located on the lower edge of the speedometer gauge dial face of the cluster overlay. The dark lens over the VFD prevents the icon from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. The fog lamp indicator icon appears in a blue-green color and at the same lighting level as the odometer information when it is illuminated by the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. During daylight hours (exterior lamps are OFF) the VFD unit is illuminated at full brightness for clear visibility. At night (exterior lamps are ON), the VFD unit lighting level is adjusted with the other cluster illumination lamps using the panel lamps dimmer function of the interior lighting thumbwheel on the headlamp switch. However, a PARADE mode position of the thumbwheel allows the VFD unit to be illuminated at full brightness if the exterior lamps are turned ON during daylight hours. The fog lamp indicator is serviced as a unit with the VFD unit in the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9194 Fog/Driving Lamp Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The fog lamp indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator whenever the optional fog lamps are illuminated. This indicator is controlled by the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and electronic messages received by the cluster from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The fog lamp indicator is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will only allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused ignition switch output (run-start) circuit. Therefore, the indicator will always be OFF when the ignition switch is in any position except ON or START. The indicator only illuminates when it is energized by the instrument cluster logic circuit. The instrument cluster will turn ON the fog lamp indicator for the following reasons: - Fog Indicator Lamp-On Message - Each time the cluster receives an electronic fog indicator lamp-ON message from the FCM indicating the fog lamp relay is energized, the fog lamp indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a lamp-OFF message from the FCM, until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until the exterior lamp load shedding (battery saver) timed interval expires, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the fog lamp indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the VFD portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the VFD and the cluster control circuitry. The FCM continually monitors electronic exterior lighting switch status messages from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) to determine the appropriate outputs to the fog lamp relay. The FCM activates or deactivates the fog lamp relay then sends the proper lamp-ON or lamp-OFF message back to the EMIC. For further diagnosis of the fog lamp indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the fog lamp system, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to fog lamp indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Fog Lamp Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9198 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 177 Component : RELAY-FOG LAMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FOG LAMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 L139 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The front fog lamp relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The front fog lamp relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The front fog lamp relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9201 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The front fog lamp relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to the front fog lamps. Within the relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the front fog lamp relay include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a fog lamp relay control circuit. The FCM controls front fog lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the front fog lamps through a fog lamp relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the front fog lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The front fog lamp relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging Hazard Warning Lamps: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging NUMBER: 23-035-07 GROUP: Body DATE: August 08, 2007 THIS BULLETIN SUPERSEDES TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN 23-041-06, DATED SEPTEMBER 27, 2006, WHICH SHOULD BE REMOVED FROM YOUR FILES. THIS IS A COMPLETE REVISION AND NO ASTERISKS HAVE BEEN USED TO HIGHLIGHT REVISIONS. SUBJECT: Exterior Lamp - Lens Fogging MODELS: 2006 - 2008 (CS) Pacifica 2006 - 2008 (DC/DM) Ram Truck - Cab & Chassis (3500/4500/5500) 2006 - 2008 (DR/DH/D1) Ram Truck - Pick-up (1500/2500/3500) 2006 - 2008 (HB/HG) Durango/Aspen 2007 - 2008 (JK) Wrangler 2006 (JR) Stratus/Sebring 2006 - 2007 (JR27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (JS) Sebring/Avenger 2008 (JS27) Sebring Convertible 2007 - 2008 (KA) Nitro 2006 - 2007 (KJ) Liberty/Cherokee 2008 (KK) Liberty/Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (LX/LE) 300/Magnum/Charger 2007 - 2008 (MK49) Compass 2007 - 2008 (MK74) Patriot 2006 - 2008 (ND) Dakota 2007 - 2008 (PM) Caliber 2006 - 2008 (PT) PT Cruiser 2006 - 2007 (RS/RG) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2008 (RT) Town & Country/Caravan/Voyager 2006-2008 (WK/WH) Grand Cherokee 2006 - 2008 (XK/XH) Commander DISCUSSION: Some customers may report that on occasion, vehicle exterior lamp assemblies are fogged with a light layer of condensation on the inside of the lenses. This may be reported after the lamps have been turned on and brought up to operating temperature, turned off, and then rapidly cooled by cold water (such as rain, or the water from a car wash). Lens fogging can also occur under certain atmospheric conditions after a vehicle has been parked outside overnight (i.e., a warm humid day followed by clear cool night). This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate this process. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Lighting - Information On Exterior Lamp Lens Fogging > Page 9206 A lamp that has large amounts of water droplets visible on most internal surfaces indicates a problem with the lamp sealing that has allowed water to enter the lamp. In this instance, the customer is likely to report that moisture in the lamp is always present and never disappears. A lamp that exhibits internal moisture permanently should be replaced. POLICY: Information Only Disclaimer: This bulletin is supplied as technical information only and is not an authorization for repair. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB - HEADLAMP CAUTION: Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front lamp unit (1) from the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Removal. 3. Firmly grasp the headlamp bulb socket (2) on the back of the front lamp unit housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the socket and bulb unit straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9212 Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB - HEADLAMP CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. CAUTION: Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. 1. Align the headlamp socket and bulb unit (2) with the keyed opening on the back of the front lamp unit housing (1). 2. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 3. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 4. Reinstall the front lamp unit onto the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit Installation. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 301 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L307 20PK/RD HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX 2 E2 20OR/BR INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL 3 L900 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN 4 E19 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL 5 Z942 20BK GROUND 6 L914 20WT FOG LAMP INDICATOR DRIVER 7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9216 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9217 Headlamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 301 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L307 20PK/RD HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX 2 E2 20OR/BR INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL 3 L900 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN 4 E19 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL 5 Z942 20BK GROUND 6 L914 20WT FOG LAMP INDICATOR DRIVER 7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9218 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The headlamp switch (1) is located on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. Three different switches are used. The standard switch features a three-position rotary knob (4) for exterior lighting control, a thumbwheel (2) for panel lamps dimming and interior lighting control, and a momentary push button (3) for cargo lamp control. An optional switch has a momentary PUSH function added to the rotary knob for front fog lamp control. A second optional switch has the same thumbwheel and momentary push button, but has a fourth detent position added to the rotary knob for selecting the optional automatic headlamps feature. Each of these switches is constructed of molded plastic. The rotary knob is molded plastic and knurled around its circumference to ease operator control. The thumbwheel is also plastic and knurled. On vehicles with optional fog lamps the rotary knob has the text PUSH and an International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light applied to it. The cargo lamp push button is plastic with a smooth finish and the text CARGO applied to it. The switch face plate is also labeled with graphics and icons to clearly identify the many functions of the rotary knob and thumbwheel. Three screws secure the switch to the back of the cluster bezel through integral mounting flanges that are molded to each side of the switch housing. The back of the switch housing has an integral connector receptacle containing terminal pins that connect the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. A panel dimmer controlled incandescent bulb soldered to the circuit board within the switch provides back lighting for visibility at night, but is not serviceable. The headlamp switch cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9221 Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The headlamp switch uses two resistor multiplexed outputs and one conventional output to control the many functions and features it provides. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a headlamp switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a headlamp switch signal circuit to control exterior lighting functions, on a panel lamps dimmer signal circuit to control panel dimmer and interior lighting functions, and on a cargo lamp return circuit to control the cargo lamps. The switch illumination circuit receives a path to ground at all times through the left instrument panel ground circuit. The illumination level is controlled by a Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) output received from the EMIC on a headlamp switch illumination control circuit. The EMIC controls this output based upon the dimmer signal select mux input from the headlamp switch. The headlamp switch operates as follows: - Cargo Lamps Control - The cargo lamp push button on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the cargo lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate cargo lighting control outputs through its internal cargo lamp driver circuit. Front Fog Lamps Control - For vehicles so equipped, the rotary knob on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the optional front fog lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic fog lamp switch status messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the front fog lamp relay in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the front fog lamp indicator. - Exterior Lighting Control - The rotary knob on the headlamp switch is rotated to a detent position to activate or deactivate the exterior lighting. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic exterior lighting switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the park lamp relay in the PDC and the high or low beam headlamp circuits, and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the high beam indicator. The FCM also remembers which headlamp beams were last selected using the multi-function switch, and energizes those beams by default the next time the headlamps are turned ON. If the vehicle is equipped with optional automatic headlamps and the A (Automatic) position is selected, the EMIC also monitors an input from a sun load sensor on the instrument panel and, based upon the monitored ambient light levels, responds by automatically sending appropriate messages to the FCM to turn the exterior lighting ON or OFF while the ignition switch is in the ON position. - Interior Lighting Control - The thumbwheel on the headlamp switch is rotated to the dome DEFEAT, dome ON, PARADE mode, or one of the six panel dimmer detent positions to control the interior courtesy/dome and panel lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate interior lighting control outputs through its internal courtesy lamp driver circuits, electronic dimming level messages to other modules over the CAN data bus, and the proper PWM outputs to control dimming levels through several panel dimmer illumination control driver circuits. The headlamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9222 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection HEADLAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the cluster bezel from the instrument panel See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Removal. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance or continuity between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Headlamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective headlamp switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cluster bezel (1) from the instrument panel. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Removal. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch (2). 4. Place the cluster bezel face down on a suitable work surface. Be certain to take the proper precautions to protect the face of the bezel from cosmetic damage. 5. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the headlamp switch to the back of the cluster bezel. 6. Remove the headlamp switch from the cluster bezel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9225 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the headlamp switch (2) to the back of the cluster bezel (1). 2. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the headlamp switch to the cluster bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Position the cluster bezel close enough to the instrument panel to reconnect the wire harness connector to the back of the headlamp switch. 4. Reinstall the cluster bezel onto the instrument panel. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Installation. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hi-Beam Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Hi-Beam Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A high beam indicator is standard equipment on all instrument clusters. This indicator is located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, between the minor gauge set and the speedometer. The high beam indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for High Beam in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents the indicator from being clearly visible when it is not illuminated. A blue Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind the cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes the indicator to appear in blue through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The high beam indicator is serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hi-Beam Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9230 Hi-Beam Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The high beam indicator gives an indication to the vehicle operator whenever the headlamp high beams are illuminated. This indicator is controlled by a transistor on the instrument cluster circuit board based upon cluster programming and a hard wired multiplex input received by the cluster from the headlamp beam select switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the washer/beam select switch mux circuit. The high beam indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, the LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the high beam indicator for the following reasons: - High Beam Headlamps-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a high beam headlamps-ON input from the headlamp beam select switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the washer/beam select switch mux circuit, the headlamp high beams and the high beam indicator will be illuminated. The indicator remains illuminated until the cluster receives a high beam headlamps-OFF input from the multi-function switch, or until the exterior lamp load shedding (battery saver) timed interval expires, whichever occurs first. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the high beam indicator will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of the LED and the cluster control circuitry. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) continually monitors the headlamp switch and the multi-function switch to determine the proper headlamp low beam and high beam control. The EMIC then sends the proper electronic low beam and high beam lamp-ON and lamp-OFF messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus and controls the high beam indicator operation accordingly. For further diagnosis of the high beam indicator or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicator, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection The hard wired headlamp switch and multi-function switch inputs and circuits related to high beam indicator operation may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. For proper diagnosis of the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to high beam indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Horn Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 179 Component : RELAY-HORN Connector: Name : RELAY-HORN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 X4 HORN RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Component ID: 303 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9238 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9239 Horn Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 303 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9240 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9241 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection HORN SWITCH The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the horn system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > License Plate Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > License Plate Lamp Bulb - Removal License Plate Bulb: Service and Repair License Plate Lamp Bulb - Removal BULB 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach under the rear bumper (2) near the center to access the back of either of the two license plate lamp housings (3). 3. Firmly grasp the socket (1) on the back of the housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 5. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > License Plate Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > License Plate Lamp Bulb - Removal > Page 9247 License Plate Bulb: Service and Repair License Plate Lamp Bulb - Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the license plate lamp socket (1). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the license plate lamp housing (3). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Map Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL - BULB NOTE: On vehicles equipped with an optional overhead console the standard front dome lamp is replaced by two combination dome and reading lamps that are integral to the console housing. Each of these lamps is controlled by the door ajar switches on the courtesy lamp circuit, but also are independently controlled by a switch that is activated by depressing the lamp lens. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for both of these lamps. NOTE: The overhead console reading lamp switches and bulb holders are serviced as a unit with the overhead console wire harness. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the overhead console (3) from the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console - Removal. 3. Firmly grasp the back of the reading lamp bulb socket (1) and unsnap it from the overhead console lamp housing. 4. Pull the socket and bulb (2) straight out from the keyed opening in the lamp housing. 5. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Map Light > Map Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9253 Map Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION - BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: On vehicles equipped with an optional overhead console the standard front dome lamp is replaced by two combination dome and reading lamps that are integral to the console housing. Each of these lamps is controlled by the door ajar switches on the courtesy lamp circuit, but also are independently controlled by a switch that is activated by depressing the lamp lens. The bulb types and service procedures are identical for both of these lamps. NOTE: The overhead console reading lamp switches and bulb holders are serviced as a unit with the overhead console wire harness. 1. Align the base of the overhead console reading lamp bulb (2) with the socket (1). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of lamp housing in the overhead console. 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing and press firmly on the back of the socket until it snaps into place and is firmly seated. 5. Reinstall the overhead console onto the headliner. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Overhead Console Installation. 6. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL/SIDE MARKER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front lamp unit (1) from the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Removal. 3. Firmly grasp the park/turn signal/side marker bulb socket (3) on the back of the front lamp unit housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 5. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Marker Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9259 Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL/SIDE MARKER CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the park/turn signal/side marker bulb socket (3). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the front lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reinstall the front lamp unit onto the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Installation. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Park Lamp Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9264 Parking Lamp Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 182 Component : RELAY-PARK LAMP Connector: Name : RELAY-PARK LAMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A INTERNAL FUSED B(+) B INTERNAL FUSED B(+) C Z385 GROUND D L779 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park lamp relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The park lamp relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The park lamp relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9267 Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park lamp relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to the park lamps. Within the relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the park lamp relay include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a park lamp relay control circuit. The FCM controls park lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the park lamps through a park lamp relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the park lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The park lamp relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL/SIDE MARKER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front lamp unit (1) from the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Removal. 3. Firmly grasp the park/turn signal/side marker bulb socket (3) on the back of the front lamp unit housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 5. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9272 Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL/SIDE MARKER CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the park/turn signal/side marker bulb socket (3). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the front lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reinstall the front lamp unit onto the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Installation. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Locations Fog Lamp Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9277 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 177 Component : RELAY-FOG LAMP Connector: Name : RELAY-FOG LAMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 L139 FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L89 18WT/YL FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The front fog lamp relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The front fog lamp relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The front fog lamp relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9280 Fog/Driving Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The front fog lamp relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to the front fog lamps. Within the relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the front fog lamp relay include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a fog lamp relay control circuit. The FCM controls front fog lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the front fog lamps through a fog lamp relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the front fog lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The front fog lamp relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Horn Relay > Component Information > Diagrams Horn Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 179 Component : RELAY-HORN Connector: Name : RELAY-HORN Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 X4 HORN RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 X2 18DG/OR HORN RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Parking Lamp Relay: Locations Park Lamp Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9287 Parking Lamp Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 182 Component : RELAY-PARK LAMP Connector: Name : RELAY-PARK LAMP Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A INTERNAL FUSED B(+) B INTERNAL FUSED B(+) C Z385 GROUND D L779 PARK LAMP RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL PARK LAMP RELAY OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The park lamp relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The park lamp relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The park lamp relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9290 Parking Lamp Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The park lamp relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to the park lamps. Within the relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the park lamp relay include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a park lamp relay control circuit. The FCM controls park lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the park lamps through a park lamp relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the park lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The park lamp relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Left Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay > Page 9295 Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Right Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Right Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 186 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) > Page 9298 Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Right Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 187 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 298 Component : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z906 20BK GROUND Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9303 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9304 Backup Lamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 298 Component : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-BACKUP LAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 T2 20DG/WT LOW/REVERSE SOLENOID CONTROL 2 Z906 20BK GROUND Component Location - 15 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9305 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission have a normally open, spring-loaded plunger type backup lamp switch (2). Vehicles with an optional electronic automatic transmission have a Transmission Range Sensor (TRS) that is used to perform several functions, including that of the backup lamp switch. The TRS is described in further detail in Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems/Transmission Position Switch/Sensor/Description and Operation The backup lamp switch is located in a threaded hole on the side of the manual transmission housing. The switch has a threaded body and a hex formation near the plunger end of the switch. An integral connector receptacle at the end of the switch opposite the plunger connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a take out and connector of the engine wire harness. When installed, only the switch connector and the hex formation are visible on the outside of the transmission housing. The backup lamp switch cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the entire switch unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9308 Backup Lamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The backup lamp switch controls the flow of battery voltage to the backup lamp bulbs through an output on the backup lamp feed circuit. The switch plunger is mechanically actuated by the gearshift mechanism within the transmission, which will depress the switch plunger and close the switch contacts whenever the REVERSE gear has been selected. The switch receives battery voltage through a fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM) on a fused ignition switch output (run) circuit whenever the ignition switch is in the ON position. The backup lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9309 Backup Lamp Switch: Testing and Inspection BACKUP LAMP SWITCH 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Raise and support the vehicle. 3. Locate and disconnect the engine wire harness connector for the backup lamp switch. 4. Check for continuity between the two terminal pins in the backup lamp switch connector receptacle. a. With the gear selector lever in the REVERSE position, there should be continuity. b. With the gear selector lever in any position other than REVERSE, there should be no continuity. 5. If the switch fails either of these two continuity tests, replace the ineffective backup lamp switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations Brake Light Switch: Locations Component ID: 319 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 16WT/LB BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 F202 22PK/GY S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 22DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9313 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9314 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9315 Brake Light Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 319 Component : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-STOPLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 A103 18GY/RD FUSED B(+) 2 L50 16WT/LB BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT 3 F202 22PK/GY S/C BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT 4 V32 20VT/YL BRAKE SWITCH NO. 2 SIGNAL 5 Z429 20BK/OR GROUND 6 B29 22DG/WT BRAKE SWITCH NO. 1 SIGNAL Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9316 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9317 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The brake lamp switch (2) is a three circuit, spring-loaded plunger actuated switch that is secured to the steering column support bracket under the instrument panel on the driver side of the vehicle. The molded plastic switch housing has an integral connector receptacle (1) containing six terminal pins and featuring a Connector Position Assurance (CPA) lock. The switch is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out of the instrument panel wire harness. The switch plunger (3) extends through a mounting collar (4) on one end of the switch housing. The plunger has a one time telescoping self-adjustment feature that is activated after the switch is installed by moving an adjustment release lever (5) on the opposite end of the switch housing clockwise, until it locks into a position that is horizontal and parallel to the connector receptacle. An installed brake lamp switch cannot be readjusted or repaired. If the switch is damaged, ineffective, or removed from its mounting position for any reason, it must be replaced with a new unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9320 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The brake lamp switch controls three independent circuits. These circuits are described as follows: - Brake Lamp Switch Circuit - A normally open brake lamp switch circuit receives a battery voltage input, and supplies this battery voltage to the brake lamps and the Controller Antilock Brake (CAB) on a brake lamp switch output circuit only when the brake pedal is depressed (brake lamp switch plunger released). - Brake Lamp Switch Signal Circuit - A normally closed brake lamp switch signal circuit receives a direct path to ground, and supplies this ground input to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) on a brake lamp switch sense circuit only when the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). - Speed Control Circuit - A normally closed speed control circuit receives a battery voltage input from the Powertrain Control Module on a speed control supply circuit, and supplies this battery voltage to the speed control servo solenoids (dump, vacuum, and vent) on a speed control brake switch output circuit only when the speed control system is turned ON and the brake pedal is released (brake lamp switch plunger is depressed). The components of the self-adjusting brake switch plunger consist of a two-piece telescoping plunger, a split plunger locking collar, and a release wedge. The release lever has a shaft with a wedge that spreads the plunger locking collar to an open or released position. After the switch is installed and the brake pedal is released, the plunger telescopes to the correct adjustment position. When the release lever is moved to the release position, the wedge is disengaged from the locking collar causing the collar to apply a clamping pressure to the two plunger halves, fixing the plunger length. The brake lamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9321 Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection BRAKE LAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. CAUTION: Do not remove the brake lamp switch from the mounting bracket. The self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the brake lamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, perform the continuity tests at the terminal pins (1) in the brake lamp switch connector receptacle as shown in the Brake Lamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the continuity tests, replace the ineffective brake lamp switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Locate the brake lamp switch (1) near the support bracket on the lower steering column (3). 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (5) from the brake lamp switch. 4. Rotate the brake lamp switch housing clockwise about 30 degrees to align the tabs on the switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket (4). 5. Pull the switch straight back from the keyed hole to remove it from the bracket. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 6. Discard the removed brake lamp switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9324 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. CAUTION: The brake lamp switch self-adjusting switch plunger is a one time only feature. If the switch is removed from the mounting bracket, it MUST be replaced with a new switch. 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal in the depressed position. 2. Align the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar with the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket (4) on the lower steering column (3). 3. Insert the tabs on the brake lamp switch locking collar through the keyed hole in the switch mounting bracket until the switch housing (1) is firmly seated against the bracket. 4. Rotate the switch housing counterclockwise about 30 degrees to engage the tabs on the locking collar with the switch mounting bracket. CAUTION: Do not release or pull up on the brake pedal before the switch plunger adjustment has been completed. 5. Release the brake pedal, but do not pull it upward. 6. Rotate the plunger adjustment release lever (2) clockwise until it locks into place. The lever should be parallel to the brake lamp switch connector receptacle. This action will set the switch plunger length to a final adjustment position and cannot be undone. If not performed properly the first time, a new brake lamp switch must be installed. 7. Reconnect the wire harness connector (5) to the brake lamp switch. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Combination Switch: Locations Component ID: 306 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G194 20LB/RD HIGH BEAM/FRONT WASHER SWITCH MUX 2 G902 20VT/OR SWITCH MUX RETURN 3 L12 20WT/OR TURN SIGNAL INPUT MUX 4 W52 20BR/YL FRONT WIPER SWITCH MUX Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9328 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9329 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9330 Combination Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 306 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G194 20LB/RD HIGH BEAM/FRONT WASHER SWITCH MUX 2 G902 20VT/OR SWITCH MUX RETURN 3 L12 20WT/OR TURN SIGNAL INPUT MUX 4 W52 20BR/YL FRONT WIPER SWITCH MUX Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9331 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9332 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Combination Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The multi-function switch (3) is located on the steering column, just below the steering wheel. The only visible components of the multi-function switch are the control stalk (2) and control knob (1) that extend through the steering column shrouds on the left side of the column, and the hazard warning push button (4) that extends through the shroud on the top of the column. The remainder of the switch including its mounting provisions, its electrical connection, and the turn signal cancel actuator (5) are concealed beneath the shrouds. The switch housing and controls are constructed of molded black plastic. Each of the switch controls has white International Control and Display Symbol graphics applied to it, which clearly identify its many functions. Three integral locating posts on the switch housing, one on the top and two on the bottom, slide into channels in a receptacle on the left side of the multi-function switch mounting housing near the top of the steering column to ensure proper positioning of the switch. Then two screws secure the switch to the mounting housing. A single integral connector receptacle containing four terminal pins on the back of the switch housing connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The multi-function switch provides the vehicle operator with a control interface for the following functions: - Hazard Warning Control - The multi-function switch hazard warning push button provides two detent positions (ON and OFF) to control the hazard warning lamps. Headlamp Beam Selection - The multi-function switch control stalk provides detent switching for selection of the headlamp HIGH or LOW beams. There is also an intermediate momentary position that allows the headlamp high beam circuits to be momentarily flashed to provide an optical horn feature (sometimes referred to as flash-to-pass) as an optical signalling device. - Turn Signal Control - The multi-function switch control stalk provides momentary non-detent (lane change) switching or detent switching with automatic cancellation for both the left and right turn signal lamps. - Washer Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides a momentary WASH position for washer system operation. - Wiper Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides two continuous wipe switch positions, LOW speed or HIGH speed; and, an intermittent wipe mode with five delay interval positions. The multi-function switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any function of the switch is ineffective, or if the switch is damaged, the entire switch must be replaced as a unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9335 Combination Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The multi-function switch uses resistor multiplexing to control the many functions and features it provides using only three hard wired output circuits. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a multi-function switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a wash/beam select switch signal circuit to control washer and headlamp beam selection, on an intermittent wiper switch signal circuit to control wipers, and on a turn lamps switch signal circuit to control turn signal and hazard warning functions. The multi-function switch operates as follows: - Hazard Warning Control - The hazard warning push button of the multi-function switch is depressed to activate the hazard warning system, and depressed again to turn the system OFF. When the push button is actuated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic hazard switch status messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM then energizes and flashes or de-energizes both the left and right turn signal circuits to provide the visual hazard warning. - Headlamp Beam Selection - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is pulled towards the steering wheel past a detent to actuate the integral beam select switch circuitry, or to an intermediate, momentary position before the detent to actuate the optical horn feature. Each time the control stalk is actuated to a detent position, the opposite headlamp beam from what is currently selected will be energized. Each time the control stalk is actuated to the momentary position with the headlamps turned OFF, the headlamp high beams will be illuminated for as long as the control stalk is held in this position. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic beam select switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes or de-energizes the selected LOW or HIGH beam circuits. - Turn Signal Control - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved upward to activate the RIGHT turn signal circuitry, and, downward to activate the LEFT turn signal circuitry. The turn signal switch has a detent position in each direction that provides turn signals with automatic cancellation, and an intermediate, momentary position in each direction that automatically provides three turn signal blinks as a LANE CHANGE feature when the control stalk is tapped or will energize the turn signals for as long as the control stalk is held in the momentary position. When the control stalk is moved to a detent turn signal switch position, the cancel actuator extends toward the center of the steering column. A turn signal cancel cam that is integral to the clockspring rotates with the steering wheel and the cam lobes contact the cancel actuator when it is extended from the multi-function switch. When the steering wheel is rotated during a turning maneuver, one of the two turn signal cancel cam lobes will contact the turn signal cancel actuator. The cancel actuator latches against the cancel cam rotation in the direction opposite that which is signaled. If the LEFT turn signal detent is selected, the lobes of the cancel cam will ratchet past the cancel actuator when the steering wheel is rotated to the left, but will unlatch the cancel actuator as the steering wheel rotates to the right and returns to center, which will cancel the turn signal event and release the control stalk from the detent so it returns to the neutral OFF position. When a turn signal is activated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic turn signal switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes and flashes or de-energizes the selected left or right turn signal circuits. - Washer Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is depressed towards the steering column to momentarily activate the washer pump in the WASH mode. The washer pump will continue to operate in the washer mode until the control knob is released or for 10 continuous seconds, whichever occurs first. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic washer switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the washer pump in the washer mode. - Wiper Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is rotated to one of the continuous wiper detents, to one of five intermittent wiper detents, or to the OFF position to select the wiper mode. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic wiper switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the wiper on/off and high/low relays in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) for wiper system control. The multi-function switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9336 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the multi-function switch from the switch mounting housing on the steering column. See: Service and Repair/Removal. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the multi-function switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Multi-Function Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective multi-function switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Combination Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal. 3. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors from the upper clockspring connector receptacles. CAUTION: Be certain that the screws that secure the steering wheel puller to the steering wheel are fully engaged in the steering wheel armature without passing through the steering wheel and damaging the clockspring. 4. Remove the steering wheel from the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Removal. 5. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 6. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 7. Using hand pressure, press inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 8. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 9. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 10. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9339 11. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the back of the multi-function switch housing (1). 12. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the multi-function switch mounting housing (3). 13. Grasp the switch control stalk and pull it toward the left side of the vehicle to remove the switch from the mounting housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9340 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Slide the multi-function switch (1) into the multi-function switch mounting housing (3) from the left side. Be certain that the alignment pins on the top and bottom of the switch are properly engaged in the channels of the mounting housing. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the mounting housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the back of the switch. 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9341 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). NOTE: When reinstalling the steering wheel, be certain to index the yellow rubber booted engagement dowel on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor between the two fins cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature hub. 10. Reinstall the steering wheel onto the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Installation. 11. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors to the upper clockspring connector receptacles. Be certain that the steering wheel wire harness is routed between the steering wheel back trim cover and the steering wheel armature. 12. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation. 13. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Door Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION This vehicle has up to four door ajar switches, one for each full door. Each switch is concealed within and integral to its respective door latch unit. The switches are momentary leaf contact-type units that are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. A short pigtail wire and connector on each door latch connects the door ajar switch to the vehicle electrical system through its respective door wire harness. The door ajar switches cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the door latch unit must be replaced. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Latch/Service and Repair/Front Door Latch - Removal or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Latch/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9346 Door Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The door ajar switches are actuated by the mechanisms internal to the door latch. When a door is closed and properly latched, its door ajar switch is an open circuit. When a door is open or only partially latched, the door ajar switch is a closed circuit. The door ajar switches are hard wired in series between a body ground and the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN). The EMIC reads the hard wired door ajar switch inputs through internal pull-ups, then uses these inputs to control many electronic functions and features of the vehicle. The EMIC also sends the proper electronic door ajar switch status messages to other electronic modules in the vehicle over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The door ajar switches as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switches may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Switch: Locations Component ID: 301 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L307 20PK/RD HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX 2 E2 20OR/BR INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL 3 L900 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN 4 E19 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL 5 Z942 20BK GROUND 6 L914 20WT FOG LAMP INDICATOR DRIVER 7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9350 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9351 Headlamp Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 301 Component : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Connector: Name : SWITCH-HEADLAMP Color : BLACK # of pins : 10 Pin Circuit Description 1 L307 20PK/RD HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX 2 E2 20OR/BR INDICATOR DIMMER SIGNAL 3 L900 20WT/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH MUX RETURN 4 E19 20OR/BR PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SIGNAL 5 Z942 20BK GROUND 6 L914 20WT FOG LAMP INDICATOR DRIVER 7-- 8-9-10 - Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9352 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The headlamp switch (1) is located on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. Three different switches are used. The standard switch features a three-position rotary knob (4) for exterior lighting control, a thumbwheel (2) for panel lamps dimming and interior lighting control, and a momentary push button (3) for cargo lamp control. An optional switch has a momentary PUSH function added to the rotary knob for front fog lamp control. A second optional switch has the same thumbwheel and momentary push button, but has a fourth detent position added to the rotary knob for selecting the optional automatic headlamps feature. Each of these switches is constructed of molded plastic. The rotary knob is molded plastic and knurled around its circumference to ease operator control. The thumbwheel is also plastic and knurled. On vehicles with optional fog lamps the rotary knob has the text PUSH and an International Control and Display Symbol icon for Front Fog Light applied to it. The cargo lamp push button is plastic with a smooth finish and the text CARGO applied to it. The switch face plate is also labeled with graphics and icons to clearly identify the many functions of the rotary knob and thumbwheel. Three screws secure the switch to the back of the cluster bezel through integral mounting flanges that are molded to each side of the switch housing. The back of the switch housing has an integral connector receptacle containing terminal pins that connect the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. A panel dimmer controlled incandescent bulb soldered to the circuit board within the switch provides back lighting for visibility at night, but is not serviceable. The headlamp switch cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9355 Headlamp Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The headlamp switch uses two resistor multiplexed outputs and one conventional output to control the many functions and features it provides. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a headlamp switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a headlamp switch signal circuit to control exterior lighting functions, on a panel lamps dimmer signal circuit to control panel dimmer and interior lighting functions, and on a cargo lamp return circuit to control the cargo lamps. The switch illumination circuit receives a path to ground at all times through the left instrument panel ground circuit. The illumination level is controlled by a Pulse-Width Modulated (PWM) output received from the EMIC on a headlamp switch illumination control circuit. The EMIC controls this output based upon the dimmer signal select mux input from the headlamp switch. The headlamp switch operates as follows: - Cargo Lamps Control - The cargo lamp push button on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the cargo lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate cargo lighting control outputs through its internal cargo lamp driver circuit. Front Fog Lamps Control - For vehicles so equipped, the rotary knob on the headlamp switch is depressed to activate or deactivate the optional front fog lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic fog lamp switch status messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the front fog lamp relay in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the front fog lamp indicator. - Exterior Lighting Control - The rotary knob on the headlamp switch is rotated to a detent position to activate or deactivate the exterior lighting. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic exterior lighting switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the park lamp relay in the PDC and the high or low beam headlamp circuits, and by sending an electronic message back to the EMIC to control the high beam indicator. The FCM also remembers which headlamp beams were last selected using the multi-function switch, and energizes those beams by default the next time the headlamps are turned ON. If the vehicle is equipped with optional automatic headlamps and the A (Automatic) position is selected, the EMIC also monitors an input from a sun load sensor on the instrument panel and, based upon the monitored ambient light levels, responds by automatically sending appropriate messages to the FCM to turn the exterior lighting ON or OFF while the ignition switch is in the ON position. - Interior Lighting Control - The thumbwheel on the headlamp switch is rotated to the dome DEFEAT, dome ON, PARADE mode, or one of the six panel dimmer detent positions to control the interior courtesy/dome and panel lamps. The headlamp switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by providing the appropriate interior lighting control outputs through its internal courtesy lamp driver circuits, electronic dimming level messages to other modules over the CAN data bus, and the proper PWM outputs to control dimming levels through several panel dimmer illumination control driver circuits. The headlamp switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9356 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection HEADLAMP SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the cluster bezel from the instrument panel See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Removal. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance or continuity between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Headlamp Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective headlamp switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the cluster bezel (1) from the instrument panel. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Removal. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the headlamp switch (2). 4. Place the cluster bezel face down on a suitable work surface. Be certain to take the proper precautions to protect the face of the bezel from cosmetic damage. 5. Remove the three screws (3) that secure the headlamp switch to the back of the cluster bezel. 6. Remove the headlamp switch from the cluster bezel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9359 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Position the headlamp switch (2) to the back of the cluster bezel (1). 2. Install and tighten the three screws (3) that secure the headlamp switch to the cluster bezel. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (17 in. lbs.). 3. Position the cluster bezel close enough to the instrument panel to reconnect the wire harness connector to the back of the headlamp switch. 4. Reinstall the cluster bezel onto the instrument panel. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Cluster Bezel - Installation. 5. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations Horn Switch: Locations Component ID: 303 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9363 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9364 Horn Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 303 Component : SWITCH-HORN Connector: Name : SWITCH-HORN Color : WHITE # of pins : 1 Pin Circuit Description 1 X3 20DG/VT HORN SWITCH SENSE Component Location - 28 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9365 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9366 Horn Switch: Testing and Inspection HORN SWITCH The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the horn system requires the use of a scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures information. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. WARNING: Disable the airbag system before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, seat belt tensioner, side airbag, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the airbag system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the airbag system. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment and possible personal injury. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair Removal BULB NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear lamp unit (1) from the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit Removal. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (4) from the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (3) bulb socket on the back of the lamp housing. 4. Firmly grasp the socket on the back of the housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Tail Light Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9372 Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (3) bulb socket. 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the rear lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reconnect the wire harness connector (4) to the socket. 7. Reinstall the rear lamp unit onto the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit - Installation. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Description and Operation > Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation Trailer Tow Relay Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with an optional factory-installed trailer towing package have two trailer tow relays, one for the trailer right turn and brake lamps and the other for the trailer left turn and brake lamps. The trailer tow relays are conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relays. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. Each relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The trailer tow relays are located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. A trailer tow relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The trailer tow relays are electromechanical switches that use a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also referred to as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) to control a high current output to trailer brake and turn signal lamps. Within each relay are an electromagnetic coil, a movable contact and two fixed contact points. A resistor is connected in parallel with the coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the field of the relay coil collapses. The movable common supply contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This field draws the movable contact away from the normally closed contact, and holds it against the normally open contact. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact back against the normally closed contact. The inputs and outputs of the trailer tow relays include: - Common Supply Terminal (30) - The common feed terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Ground Terminal (85) - The coil ground terminal is connected to a fused B(+) circuit at all times. - Coil Battery Terminal (86) - The coil battery terminal is connected to a control output of the FCM through a right or left trailer tow turn relay control circuit. The FCM controls trailer brake and turn lamp operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Normally Open Terminal (87) - The normally open terminal is connected to the trailer lamps through a right or left trailer tow turn relay output circuit and provides battery voltage to the right or left trailer brake and turn lamps whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal (87A) - The normally closed terminal is not connected to any circuit in this application, but will have battery voltage present whenever the relay is de-energized. The trailer tow relays as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relays may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Description and Operation > Trailer Tow Relay > Page 9377 Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation Trailer Tow Wiring Description DESCRIPTION Vehicles equipped with a factory-installed trailer tow package include an electric trailer brake wiring provision that terminates at a connector located on top of the large body harness connection under the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal, as well as an electric trailer brake pigtail harness and an instruction card (2) that are stored in the glove box (1) when the vehicle is shipped from the factory. Operation OPERATION If an aftermarket electric brake controller is used, the electric brake pigtail harness supplied will make installation easier. The connection (blue 4-way connector) for the harness is located under the instrument panel to the left of the brake pedal on top of the large body harness connection. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. The battery line of this harness may be used to charge the trailer battery. However, a battery isolation unit is not supplied and the trailer battery may discharge the truck battery when the engine is not running. The battery line is protected by a fuse or a circuit breaker. Refer to the owner's manual in the vehicle glove box for type, location, and ampere rating. The trailer tow connectors as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the connectors may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Trailer Lamps: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Reach behind the bracket (4) on the trailer hitch receiver (2) to access and disconnect the connector (3) of the body wire harness from the 7-way trailer tow connector (1), or to disengage the 4-way trailer tow connector (5) from the bracket. 3. Remove the four screws (6) that secure the 7-way trailer tow connector to the bracket. 4. Remove the 7-way trailer tow connector from the bracket. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9380 Trailer Lamps: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the 7-way trailer tow connector (1) into the bracket (4) on the trailer hitch receiver (2). 2. Install and tighten the four screws (6) that secure the 7-way trailer tow connector to the bracket. Tighten the screws to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). 3. Reach behind the bracket to access and reconnect the connector (3) of the body wire harness to the 7-way trailer tow connector, or to engage the 4-way trailer tow connector (5) to the bracket. 4. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Left Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Left Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Trailer Tow Relay > Page 9385 Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Right Trailer Tow Relay Trailer Tow Right Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 186 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-LEFT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L673 20YL LEFT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) > Page 9388 Trailer Lighting Relay: Diagrams Right Trailer Tow Relay (In IPM) Component ID: 187 Component : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Connector: Name : RELAY-TRAILER TOW-RIGHT Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 85 INTERNAL RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 L674 20LG RIGHT TRAILER TOW BRAKE LAMP RELAY OUTPUT 87A - - Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations Combination Switch: Locations Component ID: 306 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G194 20LB/RD HIGH BEAM/FRONT WASHER SWITCH MUX 2 G902 20VT/OR SWITCH MUX RETURN 3 L12 20WT/OR TURN SIGNAL INPUT MUX 4 W52 20BR/YL FRONT WIPER SWITCH MUX Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9393 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9394 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9395 Combination Switch: Diagrams Component ID: 306 Component : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Connector: Name : SWITCH-MULTIFUNCTION Color : BLACK # of pins : 4 Pin Circuit Description 1 G194 20LB/RD HIGH BEAM/FRONT WASHER SWITCH MUX 2 G902 20VT/OR SWITCH MUX RETURN 3 L12 20WT/OR TURN SIGNAL INPUT MUX 4 W52 20BR/YL FRONT WIPER SWITCH MUX Component Location - 22 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9396 Component Location - 29 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9397 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Combination Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The multi-function switch (3) is located on the steering column, just below the steering wheel. The only visible components of the multi-function switch are the control stalk (2) and control knob (1) that extend through the steering column shrouds on the left side of the column, and the hazard warning push button (4) that extends through the shroud on the top of the column. The remainder of the switch including its mounting provisions, its electrical connection, and the turn signal cancel actuator (5) are concealed beneath the shrouds. The switch housing and controls are constructed of molded black plastic. Each of the switch controls has white International Control and Display Symbol graphics applied to it, which clearly identify its many functions. Three integral locating posts on the switch housing, one on the top and two on the bottom, slide into channels in a receptacle on the left side of the multi-function switch mounting housing near the top of the steering column to ensure proper positioning of the switch. Then two screws secure the switch to the mounting housing. A single integral connector receptacle containing four terminal pins on the back of the switch housing connects the switch to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the instrument panel wire harness. The multi-function switch provides the vehicle operator with a control interface for the following functions: - Hazard Warning Control - The multi-function switch hazard warning push button provides two detent positions (ON and OFF) to control the hazard warning lamps. Headlamp Beam Selection - The multi-function switch control stalk provides detent switching for selection of the headlamp HIGH or LOW beams. There is also an intermediate momentary position that allows the headlamp high beam circuits to be momentarily flashed to provide an optical horn feature (sometimes referred to as flash-to-pass) as an optical signalling device. - Turn Signal Control - The multi-function switch control stalk provides momentary non-detent (lane change) switching or detent switching with automatic cancellation for both the left and right turn signal lamps. - Washer Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides a momentary WASH position for washer system operation. - Wiper Control - The multi-function switch control knob provides two continuous wipe switch positions, LOW speed or HIGH speed; and, an intermittent wipe mode with five delay interval positions. The multi-function switch cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any function of the switch is ineffective, or if the switch is damaged, the entire switch must be replaced as a unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9400 Combination Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The multi-function switch uses resistor multiplexing to control the many functions and features it provides using only three hard wired output circuits. The switch receives a clean ground from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) on a multi-function switch return circuit. It then provides outputs to the EMIC on a wash/beam select switch signal circuit to control washer and headlamp beam selection, on an intermittent wiper switch signal circuit to control wipers, and on a turn lamps switch signal circuit to control turn signal and hazard warning functions. The multi-function switch operates as follows: - Hazard Warning Control - The hazard warning push button of the multi-function switch is depressed to activate the hazard warning system, and depressed again to turn the system OFF. When the push button is actuated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic hazard switch status messages to the Front Control Module (FCM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The FCM then energizes and flashes or de-energizes both the left and right turn signal circuits to provide the visual hazard warning. - Headlamp Beam Selection - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is pulled towards the steering wheel past a detent to actuate the integral beam select switch circuitry, or to an intermediate, momentary position before the detent to actuate the optical horn feature. Each time the control stalk is actuated to a detent position, the opposite headlamp beam from what is currently selected will be energized. Each time the control stalk is actuated to the momentary position with the headlamps turned OFF, the headlamp high beams will be illuminated for as long as the control stalk is held in this position. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic beam select switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes or de-energizes the selected LOW or HIGH beam circuits. - Turn Signal Control - The control stalk of the multi-function switch is moved upward to activate the RIGHT turn signal circuitry, and, downward to activate the LEFT turn signal circuitry. The turn signal switch has a detent position in each direction that provides turn signals with automatic cancellation, and an intermediate, momentary position in each direction that automatically provides three turn signal blinks as a LANE CHANGE feature when the control stalk is tapped or will energize the turn signals for as long as the control stalk is held in the momentary position. When the control stalk is moved to a detent turn signal switch position, the cancel actuator extends toward the center of the steering column. A turn signal cancel cam that is integral to the clockspring rotates with the steering wheel and the cam lobes contact the cancel actuator when it is extended from the multi-function switch. When the steering wheel is rotated during a turning maneuver, one of the two turn signal cancel cam lobes will contact the turn signal cancel actuator. The cancel actuator latches against the cancel cam rotation in the direction opposite that which is signaled. If the LEFT turn signal detent is selected, the lobes of the cancel cam will ratchet past the cancel actuator when the steering wheel is rotated to the left, but will unlatch the cancel actuator as the steering wheel rotates to the right and returns to center, which will cancel the turn signal event and release the control stalk from the detent so it returns to the neutral OFF position. When a turn signal is activated, the multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic turn signal switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM energizes and flashes or de-energizes the selected left or right turn signal circuits. - Washer Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is depressed towards the steering column to momentarily activate the washer pump in the WASH mode. The washer pump will continue to operate in the washer mode until the control knob is released or for 10 continuous seconds, whichever occurs first. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic washer switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the washer pump in the washer mode. - Wiper Control - The control knob on the end of the multi-function switch control stalk is rotated to one of the continuous wiper detents, to one of five intermittent wiper detents, or to the OFF position to select the wiper mode. The multi-function switch provides an output to the EMIC, and the EMIC responds by sending electronic wiper switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds by energizing or de-energizing the wiper on/off and high/low relays in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) for wiper system control. The multi-function switch as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the switch may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 9401 Combination Switch: Testing and Inspection MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Remove the multi-function switch from the switch mounting housing on the steering column. See: Service and Repair/Removal. 2. Disconnect the wire harness connector from the back of the multi-function switch. 3. Using an ohmmeter, test the resistance between the terminals of the switch as shown in the Multi-Function Switch Tests table. 4. If the switch fails any of the tests, replace the ineffective multi-function switch as required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Combination Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the driver airbag from the steering wheel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Removal. 3. Disconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors from the upper clockspring connector receptacles. CAUTION: Be certain that the screws that secure the steering wheel puller to the steering wheel are fully engaged in the steering wheel armature without passing through the steering wheel and damaging the clockspring. 4. Remove the steering wheel from the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Removal. 5. Remove the screw (2) that secures the tilt steering column knob (1) and remove it from the tilt actuator (3) on the left side of the column. 6. From below the steering column, remove the two outboard screws that secure the upper column shroud (1) to the lower shroud (3). 7. Using hand pressure, press inward on both sides of the upper shroud above the parting line of the lower shroud to release the snap features that secure the two shroud halves to each other. 8. Remove the upper shroud from the lower shroud and the steering column. 9. Remove the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column (4). 10. Remove the lower shroud from the steering column. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9404 11. Disconnect the wire harness connector (2) from the back of the multi-function switch housing (1). 12. Remove the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the multi-function switch mounting housing (3). 13. Grasp the switch control stalk and pull it toward the left side of the vehicle to remove the switch from the mounting housing. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9405 Combination Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: To avoid serious or fatal injury on vehicles equipped with airbags, disable the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) before attempting any steering wheel, steering column, airbag, seat belt tensioner, impact sensor, or instrument panel component diagnosis or service. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (ground) cable, then wait two minutes for the system capacitor to discharge before performing further diagnosis or service. This is the only sure way to disable the SRS. Failure to take the proper precautions could result in accidental airbag deployment. 1. Slide the multi-function switch (1) into the multi-function switch mounting housing (3) from the left side. Be certain that the alignment pins on the top and bottom of the switch are properly engaged in the channels of the mounting housing. 2. Install and tighten the two screws (4) that secure the switch to the mounting housing. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 3. Reconnect the wire harness connector (2) to the back of the switch. 4. Position the lower shroud (3) onto the steering column (4). 5. From below the steering column, install and tighten the one center screw that secures the lower shroud to the steering column. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). 6. Position the upper shroud (1) onto the steering column over the lower shroud. On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, be certain to engage the gearshift lever gap hider into the opening in the right side of both shroud halves. 7. Align the snap features on the upper shroud with the receptacles in the lower shroud and apply hand pressure to snap them together. 8. Install and tighten the two outboard screws that secure the upper shroud to the lower shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Combination Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9406 9. Position the tilt steering column knob (1) onto the tilt adjuster actuator (3) on the left side of the steering column, then install and tighten the screw (2) to secure the knob to the actuator. Tighten the screw to 2 Nm (20 in. lbs.). NOTE: When reinstalling the steering wheel, be certain to index the yellow rubber booted engagement dowel on the upper surface of the clockspring rotor between the two fins cast into the lower surface of the steering wheel armature hub. 10. Reinstall the steering wheel onto the steering column. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Installation. 11. Reconnect the steering wheel wire harness connectors to the upper clockspring connector receptacles. Be certain that the steering wheel wire harness is routed between the steering wheel back trim cover and the steering wheel armature. 12. Reinstall the driver airbag onto the steering wheel. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Driver Airbag - Installation. 13. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Cancel Cam > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Turn Signal Cancel Cam: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The turn signal cancel cam (3) is concealed within the steering column. The turn signal cancel cam consists of two lobes on a molded plastic ring that is snapped into the lower hub of the clockspring rotor. The clockspring mechanism provides turn signal cancellation as well as a constant electrical connection between the horn switch, driver airbag, speed control switches, and remote radio switches on the steering wheel and the instrument panel wire harness on the steering column. The housing of the clockspring (2) is secured to the multi-function switch mounting housing on the steering column and remains stationary. The rotor of the clockspring, including the turn signal cancel cam lobes rotate with the steering wheel. The turn signal cancel cam is serviced as a unit with the clockspring and cannot be repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire clockspring unit must be replaced. See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Cancel Cam > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9411 Turn Signal Cancel Cam: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION When the multi-function switch control stalk is moved to a latched turn signal position, a turn signal cancel actuator is extended from the inside surface of the switch housing toward the turn signal cancel cam. As the steering wheel is rotated to complete the turn, one of the two cam lobes will contact the actuator, automatically cancelling the turn signal event and releasing the latched multi-function switch control stalk to the neutral position. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Turn Signal Indicator: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Two turn signal indicators, one right and one left, are standard equipment on all instrument clusters. The turn signal indicators are located near the upper edge of the instrument cluster, the right one is between the speedometer and the tachometer, and the left one is between the speedometer and the minor gauge set. Each turn signal indicator consists of a stencil-like cutout of the International Control and Display Symbol icon for Turn Warning in the opaque layer of the instrument cluster overlay. The dark outer layer of the overlay prevents these indicators from being clearly visible when they are not illuminated. A green Light Emitting Diode (LED) behind each cutout in the opaque layer of the overlay causes each indicator to appear in green through the translucent outer layer of the overlay when it is illuminated from behind by the LED, which is soldered onto the instrument cluster electronic circuit board. The turn signal indicators are serviced as a unit with the instrument cluster. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9416 Turn Signal Indicator: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The turn signal indicators give an indication to the vehicle operator that a turn signal (left or right indicator flashing) or the hazard warning (both left and right indicators flashing) have been selected and are operating. These indicators are controlled by transistors on the instrument cluster electronic circuit board based upon cluster programming, a hard wired multiplex input received by the cluster from the turn signal and hazard warning switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the turn/hazard switch mux circuit, and electronic messages received from the Front Control Module (FCM) (also known as the Integrated Power Module/IPM) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. Each turn signal indicator Light Emitting Diode (LED) is completely controlled by the instrument cluster logic circuit, and that logic will allow this indicator to operate whenever the instrument cluster receives a battery current input on the fused B(+) circuit. Therefore, each LED can be illuminated regardless of the ignition switch position. The LED only illuminates when it is provided a path to ground by the instrument cluster transistor. The instrument cluster will turn ON the turn signal indicators for the following reasons: - Turn Signal-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a turn signal-ON input from the turn signal switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the turn/hazard switch mux circuit, it sends the appropriate electronic turn signal switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds to these messages by controlling a battery voltage output and the flash rate for either the right or left turn signal lamps. The FCM also sends the appropriate electronic messages back to the cluster to control the flash rate of the turn signal indicators, as well as to control the click rate of an electromechanical relay soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board that emulates the sound emitted by a conventional turn signal flasher. The turn signal indicators continue to flash ON and OFF until the cluster receives a turn signal-OFF input from the multi-function switch, or until the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position, whichever occurs first. - Hazard Warning-On Input - Each time the cluster detects a hazard warning-ON input from the hazard warning switch circuitry of the multi-function switch on the turn/hazard switch mux circuit, it sends the appropriate electronic hazard switch status messages to the FCM over the CAN data bus. The FCM responds to these messages by controlling a battery voltage output and the flash rate for each of the right and left turn signal lamps. The FCM also sends the appropriate electronic messages back to the cluster to control the flash rate of the turn signal indicators, as well as to control the click rate of an electromechanical relay soldered onto the cluster electronic circuit board that emulates the sound emitted by a conventional hazard warning flasher. The turn signal indicators continue to flash ON and OFF until the cluster receives a hazard warning-OFF input from the multi-function switch. - Lamp Out Mode - If the FCM detects an ineffective turn signal lamp or circuit, it increases the flash rate for the remaining operative turn signals and sends an electronic message to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster then increases the flash rate of the turn signal indicators and the click rate of the electromechanical relay to provide an indication of the problem to the vehicle operator. - Actuator Test - Each time the cluster is put through the actuator test, the turn signal indicators will be turned ON, then OFF again during the bulb check portion of the test to confirm the functionality of each LED and the cluster control circuitry. The ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) continually monitors the multi-function switch and electronic messages from the FCM to determine the proper turn signal and hazard warning indicator operation. For further diagnosis of the turn signal indicators or the instrument cluster circuitry that controls the indicators, Refer to appropriate testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Testing and Inspection For proper diagnosis of the turn signal and hazard warning system, the multi-function switch, the FCM, the EMIC, the CAN data bus or the electronic communication related to turn signal indicator operation a diagnostic scan tool is required. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Combination Lamp Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Front Combination Lamp Removal BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL/SIDE MARKER 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the front lamp unit (1) from the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Removal. 3. Firmly grasp the park/turn signal/side marker bulb socket (3) on the back of the front lamp unit housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 4. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 5. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Installation BULB - PARK/TURN SIGNAL/SIDE MARKER CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the park/turn signal/side marker bulb socket (3). 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the front lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reinstall the front lamp unit onto the front fender. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Lamp Unit - Installation. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Combination Lamp > Page 9422 Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair Rear Lamp Unit Removal BULB NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the rear lamp unit (1) from the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit Removal. 3. Disconnect the wire harness connector (4) from the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (3) bulb socket on the back of the lamp housing. 4. Firmly grasp the socket on the back of the housing and rotate it counterclockwise about 30 degrees to unlock it. 5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the keyed opening in the housing. 6. Pull the base of the bulb straight out of the socket. Installation BULB CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket or the lamp wiring. NOTE: The rear lamp unit contains two bulbs: park/stop/turn signal/side marker and backup. The service procedures for each bulb are the same, only the bulb sizes and types may differ. 1. Align the base of the bulb with the park/stop/turn signal/side marker (2) or the backup (3) bulb socket. 2. Push the bulb straight into the socket until the base is firmly seated. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Combination Lamp > Page 9423 3. Align the socket and bulb with the keyed opening on the back of the rear lamp unit housing (1). 4. Insert the socket and bulb into the housing until the socket is firmly seated. 5. Rotate the socket clockwise about 30 degrees to lock it into place. 6. Reconnect the wire harness connector (4) to the socket. 7. Reinstall the rear lamp unit onto the end of the quarter panel. See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Lamp Unit - Installation. 8. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Rear Window Defogger Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9429 Heated Glass Element Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 183 Component : RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Connector: Name : RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A C15 12DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT B F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) C-D C115 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The rear window defogger (EBL) relay (1) is an International Standards Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal functions and patterns (2). The EBL relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current through a fuse located in the integrated power module (IPM) to the rear window defogger grid. The EBL relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a ground path by the control circuitry within the front control module (FCM). The EBL relay is located in the IPM in the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9432 Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The rear window defogger (EBL) relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input controlled by the front control module (FCM) to control the high current output to the rear window defogger grid lines. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the rear window defogger grid lines. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The EBL relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the integrated power module (IPM). The inputs and outputs of the EBL relay include: - The common feed terminal (E) receives fused battery current through a B(+) circuit at all times. - The coil ground terminal (D) receives a ground input from the FCM through the EBL control circuit only when the FCM electronically pulls the control circuit to ground. - The coil battery terminal (B) receives fused battery current through the ignition switch circuit only when the switch is in RUN. - The normally open terminal (A) provides battery current to the rear window defogger grid lines through the EBL relay output circuit only when the EBL relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (C) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the EBL relay coil is de-energized. The EBL micro-relay cannot be repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard micro-relay and for complete rear window defogger (EBL) wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Heated Glass Element Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Open the cover of the integrated power module (IPM) (1) located in the engine compartment. NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the IPM cover for EBL relay location. 3. Remove the EBL relay (2) from the IPM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9435 Heated Glass Element Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the integrated power module (IPM) cover for EBL relay location. 1. Position the EBL relay (2) into the proper receptacle of the IPM (1) located in the engine compartment. 2. Align the EBL relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the IPM receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the cover of the IPM. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The switch for the rear window defogger (EBL) system (1) is integrated into the A/C-heater control (2), which is located in the center of the instrument panel. When the rear window defogger switch is activated, the A/C-heater control requests the front control module (FCM) to operate the rear window defogger (EBL) relay and an amber indicator (3) will illuminate. When the EBL relay is activated, current is directed to the rear defogger grid lines. The grid lines heat the glass to help clear the surface of fog or frost. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9440 Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION An amber indicator will illuminate when the rear window defogger switch is activated. When the switch is activated, the A/C-heater control operates the rear window defogger (EBL) relay. The EBL relay controls the current flow to the heating grid of the rear window. NOTE: The EBL system turns off automatically after 10 minutes of initial operation. Each following activation cycle of the EBL system will last 5 minutes. The EBL system will automatically turn off after an initial programmed time interval of about 10 minutes as long as the ignition switch is in RUN. After the initial time interval has expired, if the rear window defogger switch is pressed to ON again during the same ignition cycle, the EBL system will automatically turn off after about 5 minutes. The EBL system will also turn off if the ignition switch is turned to any position other than RUN or by manually pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time. The rear window defogger switch is diagnosed using a scan tool. The rear window defogger switch and indicator cannot be adjusted or repaired. The A/C-heater control must be replaced if the rear window defogger switch or indicator is inoperative or damaged See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Assembly/Service and Repair/A/C Heater Control Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations Rear Window Defogger Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9445 Heated Glass Element Relay: Diagrams Component ID: 183 Component : RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Connector: Name : RELAY-REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) A C15 12DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT B F504 20GY/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN) C-D C115 DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL E INTERNAL FUSED B(+) Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The rear window defogger (EBL) relay (1) is an International Standards Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal functions and patterns (2). The EBL relay is a electromechanical device that switches battery current through a fuse located in the integrated power module (IPM) to the rear window defogger grid. The EBL relay is energized when the relay coil is provided a ground path by the control circuitry within the front control module (FCM). The EBL relay is located in the IPM in the engine compartment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9448 Heated Glass Element Relay: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The rear window defogger (EBL) relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input controlled by the front control module (FCM) to control the high current output to the rear window defogger grid lines. The movable, common feed relay contact is held against the fixed, normally closed relay contact by spring pressure. When the electromagnetic relay coil is energized, it draws the movable common feed relay contact away from the fixed, normally closed relay contact and, holds it against the fixed, normally open relay contact. This action allows high current to flow to the rear window defogger grid lines. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable relay contact back against the fixed, normally closed contact point. The resistor or diode is connected in parallel with the relay coil, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The EBL relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a receptacle in the integrated power module (IPM). The inputs and outputs of the EBL relay include: - The common feed terminal (E) receives fused battery current through a B(+) circuit at all times. - The coil ground terminal (D) receives a ground input from the FCM through the EBL control circuit only when the FCM electronically pulls the control circuit to ground. - The coil battery terminal (B) receives fused battery current through the ignition switch circuit only when the switch is in RUN. - The normally open terminal (A) provides battery current to the rear window defogger grid lines through the EBL relay output circuit only when the EBL relay coil is energized. - The normally closed terminal (C) is not connected to any circuit in this application, but provides a battery current output only when the EBL relay coil is de-energized. The EBL micro-relay cannot be repaired and must be replaced if inoperative or damaged. Refer to the appropriate wiring information for diagnosis and testing of the ISO-standard micro-relay and for complete rear window defogger (EBL) wiring diagrams. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Heated Glass Element Relay: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 2. Open the cover of the integrated power module (IPM) (1) located in the engine compartment. NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the IPM cover for EBL relay location. 3. Remove the EBL relay (2) from the IPM. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9451 Heated Glass Element Relay: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Refer to the fuse and relay layout map on the integrated power module (IPM) cover for EBL relay location. 1. Position the EBL relay (2) into the proper receptacle of the IPM (1) located in the engine compartment. 2. Align the EBL relay terminals with the terminal cavities in the IPM receptacle and push down firmly on the relay until the terminals are fully seated. 3. Close the cover of the IPM. 4. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The switch for the rear window defogger (EBL) system (1) is integrated into the A/C-heater control (2), which is located in the center of the instrument panel. When the rear window defogger switch is activated, the A/C-heater control requests the front control module (FCM) to operate the rear window defogger (EBL) relay and an amber indicator (3) will illuminate. When the EBL relay is activated, current is directed to the rear defogger grid lines. The grid lines heat the glass to help clear the surface of fog or frost. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9457 Heated Glass Element Switch: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION An amber indicator will illuminate when the rear window defogger switch is activated. When the switch is activated, the A/C-heater control operates the rear window defogger (EBL) relay. The EBL relay controls the current flow to the heating grid of the rear window. NOTE: The EBL system turns off automatically after 10 minutes of initial operation. Each following activation cycle of the EBL system will last 5 minutes. The EBL system will automatically turn off after an initial programmed time interval of about 10 minutes as long as the ignition switch is in RUN. After the initial time interval has expired, if the rear window defogger switch is pressed to ON again during the same ignition cycle, the EBL system will automatically turn off after about 5 minutes. The EBL system will also turn off if the ignition switch is turned to any position other than RUN or by manually pressing the rear window defogger switch a second time. The rear window defogger switch is diagnosed using a scan tool. The rear window defogger switch and indicator cannot be adjusted or repaired. The A/C-heater control must be replaced if the rear window defogger switch or indicator is inoperative or damaged See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Assembly/Service and Repair/A/C Heater Control Removal. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 309 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 2 Q211 14TN/LB LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3 Q111 14TN/YL LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 5-6 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9462 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9463 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 310 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 2 Q212 14OR/VT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3 Q112 14OR/BR RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 4 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 5-6 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9464 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9465 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Component ID: 323 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 3 Z940 20BK GROUND 4 Z13 16BK/WT GROUND 5 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 7 Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP 8 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9466 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 2 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 3 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 4 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 5 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9467 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9468 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 324 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 2 Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 3 Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP 4 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 5 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 6 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 7 Z974 20BK/OR GROUND 8 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9469 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 309 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 2 Q211 14TN/LB LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3 Q111 14TN/YL LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 5-6 Q15 14OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9472 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9473 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 310 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 2 Q212 14OR/VT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3 Q112 14OR/BR RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 4 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 5-6 Q15 14OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9474 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9475 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Component ID: 323 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 3 Z940 20BK GROUND 4 Z13 16BK/WT GROUND 5 Q15 14OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT 6 Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 7 Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP 8 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9476 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 2 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 3 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 4 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 5 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9477 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9478 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 324 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 2 Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 3 Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP 4 Q15 14OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT 5 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 6 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 7 Z974 20BK/OR GROUND 8 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9479 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9480 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER WINDOW SWITCH For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The front door power window switches are included in the window/lock switch See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Power Door Lock Switch/Testing and Inspection. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the power window switch knobs receive battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the junction block. If all of the LEDs are inoperative in the power window switch and the power windows are inoperative, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures. If the power windows operate, but any or all of the LEDs are inoperative, the power window and lock switch units with the inoperative LED(s) must be replaced. 1. Check the fuse and the circuit breaker. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the fuse or circuit breaker. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If OK, turn the ignition switch to the Off position and go to STEP 3. If not OK, check circuit breaker and repair the circuit to the ignition switch as required. 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power window switch from the door trim panel. Unplug the wire harness connector from the switch. 4. Test the power window switch continuity. See the Power Window Switch Continuity chart to determine if the continuity is correct in the Neutral, Up and Down switch positions. If OK, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The driver and front passenger side power window switch is included in the window/lock switch. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Power Door Lock Switch/Service and Repair/Removal for the service procedures. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal. 3. Remove switch from door trim panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9483 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The driver and front passenger side power window switch is included in the window/lock switch. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Power Door Lock Switch/Service and Repair/Installation. 1. Install the switch to the door trim panel. 2. Install the door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Trim Panel - Installation. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Left Front Power Window Motor: Locations Motor-Window-Left Front Component ID: 165 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN B Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9489 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9490 Power Window Motor: Locations Motor-Window-Left Rear Component ID: 166 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) A Q211 14TN/LB LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) B Q111 14TN/YL LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9491 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9492 Power Window Motor: Locations Motor-Window-Right Front Component ID: 167 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN B Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9493 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9494 Power Window Motor: Locations Motor-Window-Right Rear Component ID: 168 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) A Q212 14OR/VT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) B Q112 14OR/BR RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9495 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Left Front Power Window Motor: Diagrams Motor-Window-Left Front Component ID: 165 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT FRONT Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN B Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9498 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9499 Power Window Motor: Diagrams Motor-Window-Left Rear Component ID: 166 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) A Q211 14TN/LB LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) B Q111 14TN/YL LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9500 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9501 Power Window Motor: Diagrams Motor-Window-Right Front Component ID: 167 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT FRONT Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT FRONT Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 A Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN B Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9502 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9503 Power Window Motor: Diagrams Motor-Window-Right Rear Component ID: 168 Component : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : BLACK # of pins : 2 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) A Q212 14OR/VT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) B Q112 14OR/BR RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Motor-Window-Left Front > Page 9504 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9505 Power Window Motor: Testing and Inspection WINDOW MOTOR For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the trim panel from the door with the inoperative power window. 2. Unplug the power window motor wire harness connector. Apply 12 volts across the motor terminals to check its operation in one direction. Reverse the connections across the motor terminals to check the operation in the other direction. If the window is in the full up or full down position, the motor will not operate in that direction by design. If OK, repair the circuits from the power window motor to the power window switch as required. If not OK, replace the inoperative motor. 3. If the motor operates in both directions, check the operation of the window glass and lift mechanism through its complete up and down travel. There should be no binding or sticking of the window glass or lift mechanism through the entire travel range. If not OK, check the window glass, tracks, and regulator for sticking, binding, or improper adjustment. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 309 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 2 Q211 14TN/LB LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3 Q111 14TN/YL LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 5-6 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9510 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9511 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 310 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 2 Q212 14OR/VT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3 Q112 14OR/BR RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 4 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 5-6 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9512 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9513 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Component ID: 323 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 3 Z940 20BK GROUND 4 Z13 16BK/WT GROUND 5 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 7 Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP 8 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9514 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 2 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 3 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 4 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 5 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9515 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9516 Power Window Switch: Locations Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 324 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 2 Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 3 Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP 4 Q15 14OR/LB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 5 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 6 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 7 Z974 20BK/OR GROUND 8 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9517 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Left Rear Component ID: 309 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-LEFT REAR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 2 Q211 14TN/LB LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3 Q111 14TN/YL LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 4 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 5-6 Q15 14OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9520 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9521 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Power Window-Right Rear Component ID: 310 Component : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Connector: Name : SWITCH-POWER WINDOW-RIGHT REAR Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Qualifier : (CREW CAB/POWER CONVENIENCE) Pin Circuit Description 1 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 2 Q212 14OR/VT RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN) 3 Q112 14OR/BR RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP) 4 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 5-6 Q15 14OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT Component Location - 40 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9522 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9523 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Driver Express Component ID: 323 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C1 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 3 Z940 20BK GROUND 4 Z13 16BK/WT GROUND 5 Q15 14OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT 6 Q21 14OR/WT DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 7 Q11 14OR/LG DRIVER WINDOW DRIVER UP 8 G161 20VT/DG DRIVER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9524 Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-DRIVER EXPRESS C2 Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q411 14OR/BK MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (UP) 2 Q412 14TN/YL MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (UP) 3 Q612 14OR/DB MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR (DOWN) 4 Q611 14OR/RD MASTER WINDOW SWITCH LEFT REAR (DOWN) 5 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 6 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9525 Component Location - 39 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9526 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Switch-Window/Door Lock-Passenger Component ID: 324 Component : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Connector: Name : SWITCH-WINDOW/DOOR LOCK-PASSENGER Color : LT. GRAY # of pins : 8 Pin Circuit Description 1 Q26 14OR/GY MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER DOWN 2 Q22 14OR/VT PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER DOWN 3 Q12 14OR/BR PASSENGER WINDOW DRIVER UP 4 Q15 14OR/LB WINDOW LOCK OUT SWITCH OUTPUT 5 F30 14PK/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC) 6 G160 20VT/LG PASSENGER DOOR LOCK SWITCH MUX 7 Z974 20BK/OR GROUND 8 Q16 14OR/TN MASTER WINDOW SWITCH PASSENGER UP Component Location - 38 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Switch-Power Window-Left Rear > Page 9527 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 9528 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection POWER WINDOW SWITCH For complete circuit diagrams, refer to the appropriate wiring information. The front door power window switches are included in the window/lock switch See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Power Door Lock Switch/Testing and Inspection. The Light-Emitting Diode (LED) illumination lamps for all of the power window switch knobs receive battery current through the power window circuit breaker in the junction block. If all of the LEDs are inoperative in the power window switch and the power windows are inoperative, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures. If the power windows operate, but any or all of the LEDs are inoperative, the power window and lock switch units with the inoperative LED(s) must be replaced. 1. Check the fuse and the circuit breaker. If OK, go to STEP 2. If not OK, replace the fuse or circuit breaker. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). If OK, turn the ignition switch to the Off position and go to STEP 3. If not OK, check circuit breaker and repair the circuit to the ignition switch as required. 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. Remove the power window switch from the door trim panel. Unplug the wire harness connector from the switch. 4. Test the power window switch continuity. See the Power Window Switch Continuity chart to determine if the continuity is correct in the Neutral, Up and Down switch positions. If OK, See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures. If not OK, replace the inoperative switch. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL The driver and front passenger side power window switch is included in the window/lock switch. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Power Door Lock Switch/Service and Repair/Removal for the service procedures. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Remove the door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Trim Panel - Removal. 3. Remove switch from door trim panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9531 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION The driver and front passenger side power window switch is included in the window/lock switch. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Power Door Lock Switch/Service and Repair/Installation. 1. Install the switch to the door trim panel. 2. Install the door trim panel See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Trim Panel - Installation. 3. Connect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Backlite Back Window Glass: Service and Repair Backlite Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: It is difficult to salvage the backlite during the removal operation. The backlite is part of the structural support for the roof. The urethane bonding used to secure the glass to the fence is difficult to cut or clean from any surface. Since the molding is set in urethane, it is unlikely it would be salvaged. Before removing the backlite, check the availability from the parts supplier. NOTE: The backlite is attached to the window frame with urethane adhesive. The urethane adhesive is applied cold and seals the surface area between the window opening and the glass. The primer adheres the urethane adhesive to the backlite. 1. Roll down door glass. 2. Remove headliner (9) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Removal. 3. On club cab models remove the upper c-pillar trim (2). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Backlite > Page 9537 4. On quad cab models remove the upper c-pillar trim (2). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal 5. Disconnect the rear window defogger electrical connector (1), if equipped. 6. Bend backlite retaining tabs (2) inward against glass. 7. Using a suitable pneumatic knife from inside the vehicle, cut urethane holding backlite frame to opening fence. 8. Separate glass (1) from vehicle. Installation INSTALLATION Preparation Before Backlite Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Backlite > Page 9538 1. Manually remove as much urethane adhesive as possible from around the fence opening. For any remaining urethane that exhibits a cohesive failure at the fence, trim the remaining urethane bead (1) to a 1 to 2 mm thick layer. Bonding of the new urethane will be directly onto this 1 to 2 mm thick layer on the fence. 2. The fence must be cleaned with a new 100% alcohol wipe. 3. Apply a solid or even black layer of primer (1) to the fence (2) and allow to dry for 5 minutes. 04 BEAD DIMENSIONS NOTE: The backlight must be installed within 5 minutes of applying the urethane bead. 4. Clean urethane adhesive from around backlite opening fence. 5. If necessary, apply black-out primer to outer edge of replacement backlite frame (1). 6. If black-out primer was pre-applied on backlite, clean bonding surface with Isopropyl alcohol and clean lint free cloth. Allow 5 minutes for drying time. 7. Apply black-out primer to backlite opening fence. 8. Apply a 13 mm (0.5 in.) (2) X 9.5 mm (0.375 in) (1) bead of urethane around the perimeter of the window frame bonding surface. CAUTION: Bead location, close to the metal edge, is critical to avoid urethane "squeeze out." Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Backlite > Page 9539 9. Set glass (1) on lower fence and move glass forward into opening using the alignment pins to guide the backlite into position. 10. Firmly push glass (1) against rear window glass opening fence. 11. Bend tabs (2) around edges of backlite opening fence to retain glass. 12. Clean excess urethane from exterior with MOPAR(R), Super Clean or equivalent. 13. Allow urethane to cure at least 24 hours (full cure is 72 hours). 14. Water test to verify repair before returning vehicle to service. 15. Connect the rear window defogger electrical connector, if equipped. 16. On club cab models, install the upper c-pillar trim (2) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Backlite > Page 9540 17. On quad cab models, install the upper c-pillar trim (2). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/C-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation 18. Install the headliner (6) See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Back Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Backlite > Page 9541 Back Window Glass: Service and Repair Backlite Sliding Glass Removal REMOVAL 1. Slide the upper run channel (1) out of the window frame (2). 2. Slide the vent glass (3) upward to remove from the lower window frame (2). 3. Lower the glass (3) out of the upper window frame (2) and remove. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Slide the vent glass (3) upper edge into window frame (2) and insert the lower edge into the lower molding. 2. Position the upper run channel (1) into the window frame (2) and slide it into place. 3. Verify vent glass (3) operation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass - Removal Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Front Door Glass - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Removal 2. Temporarily install the window switch or window handle and position the glass (1) to gain access to the glass clamp screws (2). 3. Loosen the glass clamp screws (2) and carefully remove the glass (1) from the door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Glass - Removal > Page 9546 Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Front Door Glass - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the glass into the door and position the glass (1) into the glass clamps. 2. Temporarily install the window crank handle or window switches and raise the glass into the full up position. 3. Tighten the glass clamp screws (2) securely. 4. Remove the manual window crank or window switches, and install the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Door - Cargo (Club Cab) Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the door trim panel (1). See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door Cargo (Club Cab)/Panel-Trim/Removal 2. Remove the six nuts (2) holding the glass (4) onto the door fence line (3). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 9551 3. Using an adhesive cutting wire (4) or equivalent separate the glass adhesive (2) and remove the glass. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Clean the old glass sealer from the glass fence line. 2. Install new butel sealer around the edge of the glass if necessary. 3. Install the glass (1) and install the six nuts (2). 4. Tighten the nuts (2) to 4 Nm (35 in. lbs.). 5. Install the trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Cargo (Club Cab)/Panel-Trim/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 9552 Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair Door - Rear (Quad Cab) Rear Door Glass - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear glass run channel (1). See: Window Track/Service and Repair/Rear Door Channel-Glass/Removal 2. Temporarily install the window switch or window handle and position the glass (1) to gain access to the glass clamp screws (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > System Information > Service and Repair > Door - Cargo (Club Cab) > Page 9553 3. Pull rear of run channel weatherstrip out of channel. 4. Loosen the glass clamp screws (2) and carefully remove the glass (1) from the door. Rear Door Glass - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the glass into the door and position the glass (1) into the glass clamps. 2. Temporarily install the window crank handle or window switches and raise the glass into the full up position. 3. Tighten the glass clamp screws (2) securely. 4. Remove the manual window crank or window switches, and install the rear glass run channel (1). See: Window Track/Service and Repair/Rear Door Channel-Glass/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator - Removal Power REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Removal 2. Temporarily install the window switch and position the glass (1) to gain access to the glass clamp screws (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 9559 3. Loosen the glass clamp screws (2). 4. Raise the glass into the full up position and secure into place with tape or equivalent. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector (6). 6. Remove the two lower regulator bolts (5). 7. Remove the one bolt at the motor. 8. Loosen the remaining three regulator bolts (3 and 4) located at the keyhole slots. 9. Lift regulator up and out of the keyhole slots and remove from door. Manual REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Removal Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 9560 2. Reinstall the manual window crank and raise the door glass to the position shown (2). 3. Loosen the glass clamp screws (2). 4. Raise the glass into the full up position and secure into place with tape or equivalent. 5. Remove the two lower regulator bolts (5). 6. Remove the one bolt (1) at the crank mechanism (4). 7. Loosen the remaining three regulator bolts (3) located at the keyhole slots. 8. Lift regulator up and out of the keyhole slots and remove from door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 9561 Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator - Installation Power INSTALLATION 1. Place the regulator into the door and engage the bolts (3 and 4) into the keyhole slots in the door (1). 2. Install the one bolt at the motor. 3. Install the two lower bolts (5). 4. Tighten all the regulator bolts to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 5. Connect the electrical connector (6). 6. Remove the tape used to secure the glass during removal and position the glass (1) into the glass clamps. 7. Temporarily install the window switch and raise the glass into the full up position. 8. Tighten the glass clamp screws (2) securely. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 9562 9. Remove the window switch and install the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Installation Manual INSTALLATION 1. Place the regulator into the door and engage the bolts (5 and 3) into the keyhole slots in the door. 2. Install the regulator mechanism bolt (1). 3. Install the two lower bolts (5). 4. Tighten all the regulator bolts to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 5. Remove the tape used to secure the glass during removal and position the glass (1) into the glass clamps. 6. Temporarily install the window crank handle and raise the glass into the full up position. 7. Tighten the glass clamp screws (2) securely. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 9563 8. Remove the manual window crank and install the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal Manual REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Removal 2. Reinstall the manual window crank and raise the door glass to the position shown (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 9568 3. Loosen the glass clamp screws (2). 4. Raise the glass into the full up position and secure into place with tape or equivalent. 5. Remove the two lower regulator bolts (3). 6. Remove the one bolt at the crank mechanism. 7. Loosen the remaining three regulator bolts (2) located at the keyhole slots. 8. Lift regulator up and out of the keyhole slots and remove from door. Power REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Removal Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 9569 2. Temporarily install the window switch and position the glass (1) to gain access to the glass clamp screws (2). 3. Loosen the glass clamp screws (2). 4. Raise the glass (1) into the full up position and secure into place with tape or equivalent. 5. Disconnect the electrical connector (3). 6. Remove the two lower regulator bolts and the one bolt at the motor (4). 7. Loosen the remaining three regulator bolts (2) located at the keyhole slots. 8. Lift regulator (1) up and out of the keyhole slots and remove from door. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 9570 Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator - Installation Manual INSTALLATION 1. Place the regulator into the door and engage the bolts into the keyhole slots in the door. 2. Install the regulator lift mechanism bolt. 3. Install the two lower bolts (3). 4. Tighten all the regulator bolts to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 5. Remove the tape used to secure the glass during removal and position the glass (1) into the glass clamps. 6. Temporarily install the window crank handle and raise the glass into the full up position. 7. Tighten the glass clamp screws (2) securely. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 9571 8. Remove the manual window crank and install the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Installation Power INSTALLATION 1. Place the regulator into the door and engage the bolts (2) into the keyhole slots in the door. 2. Install the one bolt at the motor and the two lower bolts (4). 3. Tighten all the regulator bolts to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 4. Connect the electrical connector (3). 5. Remove the tape used to secure the glass during removal and position the glass (1) into the glass clamps. 6. Temporarily install the window switch and raise the glass into the full up position. 7. Tighten the glass clamp screws (2) securely. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Window Regulator - Removal > Page 9572 8. Remove the window switch and install the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Channel-Glass Window Track: Service and Repair Rear Door Channel-Glass Removal REMOVAL 1. Raise glass to the up position and remove the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Removal 2. Remove the screws (3) and remove the front channel (5). 3. Remove the screws (2) and remove the rear channel (1). Installation INSTALLATION Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Channel-Glass > Page 9577 1. Install the rear channel (1) and install the nut and screw (2). 2. Tighten the fasteners to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 3. Install the front channel (5) and install the screws (3). 4. Tighten the fasteners to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 5. Install the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Panel/Service and Repair/Door - Rear (Quad Cab)/Rear Door Watershield/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Channel-Glass > Page 9578 Window Track: Service and Repair Front Door Glass Channel Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Removal 2. Remove the outside mirror. See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Rear View Mirror Removal/Outside Rear View Mirror Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Channel-Glass > Page 9579 3. Remove the upper screw (2) for the front channel (1) from under the mirror. 4. Remove the remaining screws (1) and remove the front (2) and rear (3) run channels. Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install the rear glass run channel (3) and install the three screws (1). 2. Tighten the screws to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 3. Install the front glass run channel (2) and install the lower screw (1). 4. Tighten the screw to 9.5 Nm (85 in. lbs.). 5. Install the upper screw (2) of the front channel (1) under the exterior mirror. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Rear Door Channel-Glass > Page 9580 6. Install the outside mirror. See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Rear View Mirror Installation/Outside Rear View Mirror 7. Install the watershield. See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair/Front Door Watershield/Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service Precautions Windshield: Service Precautions WINDSHIELD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING: Do not operate the vehicle within 24 hours of windshield installation. It takes at least 24 hours for urethane adhesive to cure. If it is not cured, the windshield may not perform properly in an accident. - Urethane adhesives are applied as a system. Use glass cleaner, glass prep solvent, glass primer, PVC (vinyl) primer and pinch weld (fence) primer provided by the adhesive manufacturer. If not, structural integrity could be compromised. - DaimlerChrysler does not recommend glass adhesive by brand. Technicians should review product labels and technical data sheets, and use only adhesives that their manufactures warrant will restore a vehicle to the requirements of FMVSS 212. Technicians should also insure that primers and cleaners are compatible with the particular adhesive used. - Be sure to refer to the urethane manufacturer's directions for curing time specifications, and do not use adhesive after its expiration date. - Vapors that are emitted from the urethane adhesive or primer could cause personal injury. Use them in a well-ventilated area. - Skin contact with urethane adhesive should be avoided. Personal injury may result. - Always wear eye and hand protection when working with glass. CAUTION: Protect all painted and trimmed surfaces from coming in contact with urethane or primers. Be careful not to damage painted surfaces when removing moldings or cutting urethane around windshield. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Windshield: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions. See: Service Precautions 2. Remove the screws (2) attaching the side windshield molding (1) to the a-pillars and remove the molding. 3. Remove rear view mirror (1). See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Rear View Mirror - Removal/Inside Rear View Mirror 4. Remove the cowl grille. See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Cowl Top Panel - Removal Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9586 5. Remove the a-pillar trim panels (3). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/A-Pillar Trim Panel-Removal 6. Remove the headliner (6). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Removal 7. Using a windshield cut-out wire (4) or equivalent, separate the adhesive (2). 8. Carefully remove windshield. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9587 Windshield: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION WARNING: Allow the urethane at least 24 hours to cure before returning the vehicle to use. CAUTION: Roll down the left and right front door glass and open the rear glass slider (if available) before installing windshield to avoid pressurizing the passenger compartment if a door is slammed before urethane is cured. Water leaks can result. NOTE: The windshield fence should be cleaned of most of its old urethane bonding material. A small amount of old urethane, approximately 1-2 mm in height, should remain on the fence. Do not grind off or completely remove all old urethane from the fence, the paint finish and bonding strength will be adversely affected. Support spacers located on the cowl at the bottom of the windshield opening should be replaced with new parts. Replace any missing or damaged spacers around the perimeter of the windshield opening. Windshield Preparation - Installing A Previously Installed Windshield 1. Before proceeding with the following repair procedure, review all warnings and cautions, See: Service Precautions. 2. Level old bead of windshield adhesive (3) to a thickness of approximately 1 mm (0.04 in.) and remove loose adhesive. 3. Apply four new spacers (1) to the a-pillars and place them evenly apart at the top and bottom. 4. Install the lower spacer assemblies (2) into the slotted holes and verify proper installation by pulling to make sure they are locked on. NOTE: Lower spacers must be facing with the flat side upwards when installing into the slotted holes. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9588 5. Position windshield (1) in center of windshield opening and resting on the side and lower spacers (2). 6. Adjust the lower spacers (2) as required, to center the windshield in the windshield opening. 7. Apply adhesive tape (1) to the locations shown to aid with final installation. 8. Verify windshield gap is parallel to with windshield. 9. Cut tape with a sharp knife and remove windshield. NOTE: Typical primer installation shown. 10. Clean and dry area of glass (2) to be re-glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 11. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. 12. Re-prime any damaged area. If old adhesive has been exposed for more than 12 hours, entire adhesive area needs to be re-primed. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9589 13. Apply primer (1) around the perimeter of the glass to a width of 15 mm (0.5 in.) (2). 14. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. 15. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. Windshield Preparation - Installing A New Windshield 1. Apply four new spacers (1) to the a-pillars and place them evenly apart at the top and bottom. 2. Install the lower spacer assemblies (2) into the slotted holes and verify proper installation by pulling to make sure they are locked on. NOTE: Lower spacers must be facing with the flat side upwards when installing into the slotted holes. 3. Position windshield (1) in center of windshield opening and resting on the side and lower spacers (2). 4. Adjust the lower spacers (2) as required, to center the windshield in the windshield opening. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9590 5. Clean and check windshield for damage. 6. Position windshield in center of windshield opening. 7. Apply adhesive tape to the locations shown to aid with final installation. 8. Verify windshield gap is parallel to with windshield. 9. Cut tape with a sharp knife and remove windshield. 10. Clean and dry area of glass to be glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 11. Apply primer to gluing surface at windshield seal. 12. Apply primer (1) around the perimeter of the glass to a width of 15 mm (0.5 in.) (2). 13. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. 14. Using a flash light, verify that glass primer is without damage. Windshield Opening Preparation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9591 1. Clean and vacuum windshield opening. 2. Level old bead of windshield opening adhesive (1) to a thickness of approximately 1 mm (0.04 in.) and remove loose adhesive. 3. Clean and dry area of windshield opening to be re-glued with a suitable glass preparation solvent and rag. 4. Re-prime any damaged area. If old adhesive has been exposed for more than 12 hours, entire adhesive area needs to be re-primed. 5. Allow primer to air dry for at least 10 minutes. Windshield Installation 1. Apply bead of adhesive (1) with a triangular nozzle directly to the windshield seal starting at bottom in center of windshield. CAUTION: Always apply bead of adhesive to the windshield. Always install the windshield within 5 minutes after applying adhesive. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9592 04 BEAD DIMENSIONS 2. Bead dimensions should be approximately 9.5 - 12.0 mm wide (1) by 12.7 - 14.0 mm in height (2). 3. Allow end of adhesive bead to run out parallel to the start of the bead and smooth ends flush. 4. Lift windshield into place in the center of the windshield opening and use the tape as a guide to aid installation of the windshield into the center of the cutout. 5. Carefully lay down windshield and press on. CAUTION: It is no longer possible to move the windshield after installation. The windshield should never be pressed into place by more than one person, because the windshield can break if pressed simultaneously on both sides. CAUTION: Roll down the left and right front door glass and open the rear glass slider (if available) before installing windshield to avoid pressurizing the passenger compartment if a door is slammed before urethane is cured. Water leaks can result. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9593 6. Install the headliner (6). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair/Headliner - Installation 7. Install the a-pillar trim (3). See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair/Pillar Trim/A-Pillar Trim Panel-Installation 8. Install the cowl grille. See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Cowl Top Panel - Installation Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9594 9. Install the rearview mirror (1). See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and Repair/Rear View Mirror - Installation 10. Install the windshield molding retainer (1) and install the screws (2). Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Check Valve: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION A single washer system check valve is standard equipment on this vehicle, and is installed in the washer system plumbing. The check valve is integral to the washer nozzle plumbing wye fitting (2) located in the cowl plenum area beneath the cowl plenum cover/grille panel near the base of the windshield. The check valve consists of a molded plastic body with a raised arrowhead (4) molded into its center section that indicates the direction of the flow through the valve, and three barbed hose nipples (1 and 3) formed in a wye configuration on the outside circumference of the center section of the valve body. The check valve cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, it must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9600 Check Valve: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The check valve provides more than one function in this application. It serves as a wye connector fitting between the engine compartment and washer nozzle sections of the washer supply hose. It prevents washer fluid from draining out of the washer supply hoses back to the washer reservoir. This drain-back would result in a lengthy delay from when the washer switch is actuated until washer fluid was dispensed through the washer nozzles, because the washer pump would have to refill the washer plumbing from the reservoir to the nozzles. Such a drain-back condition could also result in water, dirt, or other outside contaminants being siphoned into the washer system through the washer nozzle orifice. This water could subsequently freeze and plug the nozzle, while other contaminants could interfere with proper nozzle operation and cause improper nozzle spray patterns. In addition, the check valve prevents washer fluid from siphoning through the washer nozzles after the washer system is turned OFF. When the washer pump pressurizes and pumps washer fluid from the reservoir through the washer plumbing, the fluid pressure (5) unseats a diaphragm (3) from over a sump well within the valve by overriding the pressure applied to a piston (2) by a spring (1). With the diaphragm unseated, washer fluid is allowed to flow toward the two washer nozzles (4). When the washer pump stops operating, the spring pressure on the piston seats the diaphragm over the sump well in the valve and fluid flow in either direction within the washer plumbing is prevented. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Check Valve: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove both wiper arms from the wiper pivots. See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Removal. 2. Unlatch and open the hood. 3. Remove the cowl plenum cover/grille panel from over the cowl plenum. See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Cowl Top Panel - Removal. 4. From the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel (4), disconnect the cowl plenum (1) and washer nozzle (3) hoses from the three barbed nipples of the check valve (2). 5. Remove the check valve from the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9603 Check Valve: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the check valve (2) to the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel (4). Be certain that the flow direction arrow molded into the check valve body is oriented towards the washer nozzles. 2. From the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel, reconnect the cowl plenum (1) and washer nozzle (3) hoses to the three barbed nipples of the check valve. 3. Reinstall the cowl plenum cover/grille panel over the cowl plenum. See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Cowl Top Panel - Installation. 4. Close and latch the hood. 5. Reinstall both wiper arms onto the wiper pivots. See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Wiper High/Low and On/Off Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper High/Low Component ID: 189 Component : RELAY-WIPER HIGH/LOW Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER HIGH/LOW Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL 85 INTERNAL WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 W4 14BR/OR WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 87A W3 14BR/WT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 9610 Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper On/Off Component ID: 190 Component : RELAY-WIPER ON/OFF Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER ON/OFF Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL 85 INTERNAL WIPER ON/OFF RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87A Z904 14BK GROUND Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Relay-Wiper High/Low Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Relay-Wiper High/Low Description DESCRIPTION The wiper high/low relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The wiper high/low relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The wiper high/low relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The wiper high/low relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) to control a high current output to the front wiper motor. The movable common feed contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This electromagnetic field draws the movable relay contact point away from the fixed normally closed contact point, and holds it against the fixed normally open contact point. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact point back against the fixed normally closed contact point. A resistor is connected in parallel with the relay coil in the relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The wiper high/low relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector receptacle in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the wiper high/low relay include: Common Feed Terminal - The common feed terminal (30) is connected to the output of the wiper on/off relay at all times through the wiper on/off relay output circuit. - Coil Ground Terminal - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a control output of the Front Control Module (FCM) through a wiper high/low relay control circuit. The FCM controls wiper motor operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Coil Battery Terminal - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current when the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. - Normally Open Terminal - The normally open terminal (87) is connected to the high speed brush of the wiper motor through a wiper high/low relay high speed output circuit, and is connected to the high speed brush whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal - The normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to the low speed brush of the wiper motor through a wiper high/low relay low speed output circuit, and is connected to the low speed brush whenever the relay is de-energized. The wiper high/low relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Relays and Modules - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 9613 Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Relay-Wiper On/Off Description DESCRIPTION The wiper on/off relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The wiper on/off relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The wiper on/off relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The wiper on/off relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) to control a high current output to the wiper motor. The movable common feed contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This electromagnetic field draws the movable relay contact point away from the fixed normally closed contact point, and holds it against the fixed normally open contact point. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact point back against the fixed normally closed contact point. A resistor is connected in parallel with the relay coil in the relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The wiper on/off relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector receptacle in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the wiper on/off relay include: Common Feed Terminal - The common feed terminal (30) is connected to the common feed terminal of the wiper high/low relay at all times through the wiper on/off relay output circuit. - Coil Ground Terminal - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a control output of the Front Control Module (FCM) through a wiper on/off relay control circuit. The FCM controls wiper motor operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Coil Battery Terminal - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current at all times from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. - Normally Open Terminal - The normally open terminal (87) receives battery current at all times from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit, and provides battery current to the wiper on/off relay output circuit whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal - The normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to ground at all times through a take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness with an eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a screw to the front end sheet metal, and is connected to the wiper on/off relay output circuit whenever the relay is de-energized. The wiper on/off relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Windshield Washer Hose: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The washer plumbing consists of a small diameter rubber reservoir washer hose that is routed from the barbed outlet nipple of the electric washer pump/motor unit on the combination washer reservoir/coolant reserve bottle through a trough molded into the outboard side of the reservoir/bottle unit above the washer pump to the engine compartment washer hose (2). The engine compartment washer hose is secured in routing clips located along the length of the headlamp and dash wire harness (4), which is routed through the engine compartment along the top of the right front inner fender shield (1) from the headlamp support to the dash panel. This hose is connected to the washer reservoir washer hose with a molded plastic in-line fitting that has a barbed nipple on each end. The engine compartment washer hose passes through a hole protected with a rubber grommet (3) in the right side of the cowl plenum panel. In the cowl plenum the engine compartment hose is connected to the cowl plenum washer hose by another molded plastic in-line fitting. The cowl plenum washer hose is connected to the washer system check valve/wye fitting on the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. The cowl plenum washer hose and the two washer nozzle hoses are routed through integral routing clips on the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. The cowl plenum washer hose is connected to one nipple on the wye fitting and the two washer nozzle hoses are connected to the other two nipples. The washer nozzle hoses are then routed along the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel to the two washer nozzles. Washer hose is available for service only as roll stock, which must then be cut to length. The molded plastic washer hose fittings cannot be repaired. If these fittings are ineffective or damaged, they must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9618 Windshield Washer Hose: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION Washer fluid in the washer reservoir is pressurized and fed by the washer pump/motor unit through the washer system plumbing and fittings to the two washer nozzles. Whenever routing the washer hose or a wire harness containing a washer hose, it must be routed away from hot, sharp, or moving parts; and, sharp bends that might pinch the hose must be avoided. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Pump: Locations Component ID: 172 Component : PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD Connector: Name : PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 2 Z243 18BK GROUND Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 9622 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 9623 Windshield Washer Pump: Diagrams Component ID: 172 Component : PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD Connector: Name : PUMP-WASHER-WINDSHIELD Color : # of pins : 2 Pin Circuit Description 1 W10 18BR FRONT WASHER PUMP MOTOR CONTROL 2 Z243 18BK GROUND Component Location - 2 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Locations > Page 9624 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Windshield Washer Pump: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The washer pump/motor unit (1) is located on the top of a sump area on the outward facing side of the combination washer reservoir/coolant reserve bottle, ahead of the right front fender wheel house splash shield. A small permanently lubricated and sealed electric motor is coupled to the rotor-type washer pump (3). An inlet nipple (5) on the bottom of the pump housing passes through a rubber grommet seal (4) installed in a dedicated mounting hole of the washer reservoir. When the pump is installed in the reservoir the barbed outlet nipple (6) on the pump valve body housing points rearward and connects the unit to the reservoir washer hose, which is engaged in an integral trough molded into the reservoir/bottle unit. The washer pump/motor unit is retained on the reservoir by the interference fit between the pump inlet nipple and the grommet seal, which is a light press fit. The top of the washer pump is also secured to the washer reservoir by a light snap fit into a receptacle molded into the reservoir that allows for mounting of the washer pump without the use of fasteners. An integral connector receptacle (2) on the top of the motor housing connects the unit to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The washer pump/motor unit cannot be repaired. If ineffective or damaged, the entire washer pump/motor unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9627 Windshield Washer Pump: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer pump/motor unit features a small Direct Current (DC) electric motor. The motor is connected to the vehicle electrical system through a single take out and two-cavity connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. The motor is grounded at all times through another take out of the headlamp and dash wire harness with a single eyelet terminal connector that is secured by a nut to a ground stud located on the right front fender inner shield in the engine compartment. The motor receives battery current on a washer pump/motor control circuit. The washer pump/motor control circuit is energized through a high side driver within the Front Control Module (FCM) whenever the FCM receives an electronic message requesting washer system operation from the ElectroMechanical Instrument Cluster (EMIC) (also known as the Cab Compartment Node/CCN) over the Controller Area Network (CAN) data bus. The EMIC monitors a resistor multiplexed hard wired input from the momentary washer switch contacts within the multi-function switch on the steering column to determine when it should issue the electronic message requesting washer system operation. Washer fluid is gravity-fed from the washer reservoir to the inlet side of the washer pump. When the pump motor is energized, the motor spins the rotor within the washer pump. The spinning pump rotor pressurizes the washer fluid and forces it through the pump outlet nipple, the washer plumbing, and the washer nozzles onto the windshield glass. The washer pump/motor unit and the hard wired motor control circuits from the FCM may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the washer pump/motor unit or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the wiper and washer system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the washer pump/motor unit or the electronic controls and communication related to washer pump/motor unit operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Removal REMOVAL NOTE: The washer pump/motor unit can be removed from the washer reservoir without removing the reservoir from the vehicle. 1. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 2. Siphon the washer fluid from the washer reservoir into a clean container for reuse. 3. Raise and support the vehicle. 4. Reach between the front of the right front wheel house splash shield and the right front bumper support to access the outboard facing lower surface of the combination washer reservoir/coolant reserve bottle (1). 5. Disconnect the wire harness connector (6) from the washer pump/motor unit (3). 6. Disconnect the washer hose (2) from the pump outlet nipple. 7. Grasp the top of the washer pump/motor housing and pull it firmly rearward far enough to disengage the snap fit between the motor housing and the molded motor receptacle in the reservoir. 8. Using a trim stick or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool, gently pry the inlet nipple of the washer pump out of the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir sump. Care must be taken not to damage the reservoir. 9. Remove the rubber grommet seal from the washer pump mounting hole in the reservoir and discard. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 9630 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Installation INSTALLATION 1. Install a new rubber grommet seal into the washer pump mounting hole in the sump on the outboard facing side of the combination washer reservoir/coolant reserve bottle (1). Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reservoir. 2. Position the inlet nipple of the washer pump/motor unit (3) to the rubber grommet seal in the reservoir. 3. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly downward on the washer pump/motor unit until the inlet nipple is fully seated in the rubber grommet seal in the pump mounting hole of the reservoir. 4. Align the top of the washer pump/motor housing with the molded motor receptacle in the washer reservoir. 5. Using hand pressure, press firmly and evenly on the top of washer pump/motor unit until the motor housing snaps into the receptacle. 6. Reconnect the reservoir washer hose (2) to the pump outlet nipple. 7. Reconnect the wire harness connector (6) to the connector receptacle on the top of the pump motor. 8. Lower the vehicle. 9. Refill the washer reservoir with the washer fluid siphoned from the reservoir during the removal procedure. 10. Reconnect the battery negative cable. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Windshield Washer Reservoir: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The molded plastic washer fluid reservoir (4) is integral to the engine coolant overflow bottle (1) located directly behind the grille to the right of the engine cooling module in the engine compartment. The reservoir is constructed of a translucent plastic that allows the washer fluid level or engine coolant level to be inspected without removing the reservoir caps. A bright yellow plastic filler cap (3) with a rubber seal and an International Control and Display Symbol icon for "Windshield Washer" molded into it snaps over the open end of the filler neck. The cap hinges on and is secured to the reservoir by an integral bail strap and retaining collar that is snapped over the filler neck when it is removed for inspecting or adjusting the fluid level in the reservoir. The washer reservoir is secured to the front end support structure by an integral locator pin at the bottom and through two integral mounting brackets, one at the top and one at the back, by screws. A dedicated hole on the lower outboard facing side of the reservoir is provided for the mounting of the washer/pump motor unit (5). A receptacle for the washer pump is molded into the reservoir that provides a snap fit that allows mounting of the washer pump/motor unit without the use of fasteners. A trough molded into the outboard side of the reservoir and the coolant overflow bottle secures and routes the reservoir washer hose from the pump rearward and upward into the engine compartment. The washer reservoir is serviced only as a unit with the engine coolant reserve bottle. The washer reservoir cannot be repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the coolant reserve bottle/washer reservoir unit must be replaced. See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant Reservoir/Service and Repair/Coolant Recovery Container - Removal. The grommet seal for the washer pump/motor unit and the filler cap are each available for individual service replacement. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9635 Windshield Washer Reservoir: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The washer fluid reservoir provides a secure, on-vehicle storage location for a large reserve of washer fluid for operation of the washer system. The washer reservoir filler neck provides a clearly marked and readily accessible point from which to add washer fluid to the reservoir. The washer/pump motor unit is located in a sump area near the bottom of the reservoir to be certain that washer fluid will be available to the pump as the fluid level in the reservoir becomes depleted. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The fluidic washer nozzles (2) are constructed of molded plastic. Each nozzle has two integral latches (4) and an anti-rotation tab that secure them in dedicated holes in the cowl plenum cover/grille panel located near the base of the windshield The domed upper surface of the washer nozzle is visible on the top of the plenum cover/grille panel, and the nozzle orifice (1) is oriented towards the windshield glass. The washer plumbing fittings (3) for the washer nozzles extend below the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. The cowl plenum cover/grille panel must be removed from the vehicle to access the nozzles for service. The washer nozzles cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective or damaged, they must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9640 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The two washer nozzles are designed to dispense washer fluid into the wiper pattern area on the outside of the windshield glass. Pressurized washer fluid is fed to each nozzle from the washer reservoir by the washer pump/motor unit through a single hose, which is attached to a barbed nipple on each washer nozzle below the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. A fluidic matrix within the washer nozzle causes the pressurized washer fluid to be emitted from the nozzle orifice as an oscillating stream to more effectively cover a larger area of the glass to be cleaned. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Nozzle - Removal Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Washer Nozzle - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove both wiper arms from the wiper pivots. See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Removal. 2. Unlatch and open the hood. 3. Remove the cowl plenum cover/grille panel from over the cowl plenum. See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Cowl Top Panel - Removal. 4. From the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel (1), disconnect the washer nozzle hose from the barbed nipple of the washer nozzle (2). 5. From the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel, release the integral latch features of the washer nozzle and push the nozzle out through the mounting hole toward the top side of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. 6. Remove the washer nozzle from the top of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Nozzle - Removal > Page 9643 Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair Washer Nozzle - Installation INSTALLATION 1. From the top of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel (1), position the nipple end of the washer nozzle (2) through the mounting hole and engage the anti-rotation tab of the nozzle into the anti-rotation keyway in the mounting hole. 2. Using hand pressure, push firmly and evenly on the top of the washer nozzle until the integral latch features lock into place on the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. 3. From the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel, reconnect the washer hose to the barbed nipple of the washer nozzle. 4. Reinstall the washer nozzle hose into its routing clips on the underside of the cowl plenum cover/grille panel. 5. Reinstall the cowl plenum cover/grille panel over the cowl plenum. See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Cowl Top Panel - Installation. 6. Close and latch the hood. 7. Reinstall both wiper arms onto the wiper pivots. See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Wiper Arm: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The wiper arms are the rigid members located between the wiper pivots protruding from the cowl plenum cover/grille panel near the base of the windshield and the wiper blades on the windshield glass. Both wiper arms feature an over-center hinge (6) that allows easy access to the windshield glass for cleaning. The wiper arms each have a die cast metal pivot end (4) with a large tapered mounting hole (5) at one end. A molded black plastic cap fits over the wiper arm retaining nut to conceal the nut and this mounting hole following wiper arm installation. The wide end of a tapered, stamped steel channel (3) hinges on and is secured with a hinge pin to the blade end of the wiper arm pivot end. One end of a long, rigid, stamped steel strap (2), with a small hole near its pivot end, is riveted and crimped within the narrow end of the stamped steel channel. The tip of the wiper blade end of this strap is bent back under itself to form a small hook (1). Concealed within the stamped steel channel, one end of a long spring (7) is engaged with a wire hook on the underside of the die cast pivot end, while the other end of the spring is hooked through the small hole in the steel strap. The entire wiper arm has a satin black finish applied to all of its visible surfaces. The right and left wiper arms are unique and are not interchangeable. A wiper arm cannot be adjusted or repaired. If damaged or ineffective, the entire wiper arm unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9648 Wiper Arm: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The wiper arms are designed to mechanically transmit the motion from the wiper pivots to the wiper blades. The wiper arm must be properly indexed to the wiper pivot in order to maintain the proper wiper blade travel on the glass. The tapered mounting hole in the wiper arm pivot end interlocks with the serrations on the tapered outer circumference of the wiper pivot shaft, allowing positive engagement and finite adjustment of this connection. The mounting nut locks the wiper arm to the threaded stud of the wiper pivot shaft. The spring-loaded wiper arm hinge controls the down-force applied through the tip of the wiper arm to the wiper blade on the glass. The hook formation on the tip of the wiper arm provides a cradle for securing and latching the wiper blade pivot block to the wiper arm. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arms - Removal Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Arms - Removal REMOVAL 1. Lift the wiper arm (4) to its over-center position to hold the wiper blade (1) off of the glass and relieve the spring tension on the wiper arm to wiper pivot shaft (6) connection. 2. Carefully pry the plastic nut cap (3) off of the pivot end of the wiper arm. 3. Remove the nut (5) that secures the wiper arm to the pivot shaft. 4. If necessary, use a suitable battery terminal puller (3) to disengage the wiper arm (1) from the pivot shaft (2). 5. Remove the wiper arm pivot end from the pivot shaft. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Arms - Removal > Page 9651 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Arms - Installation INSTALLATION NOTE: Be certain that the wiper motor is in the park position before attempting to install the wiper arms. Turn the ignition switch to the On position and move the multi-function switch control knob to its Off position. If the wiper pivots move, wait until they stop moving, then turn the ignition switch back to the Off position. The wiper motor is now in its park position. 1. The wiper arms (4) must be indexed to the pivot shafts (6) with the wiper motor in the park position to be properly installed. Position the wiper arm pivot end onto the pivot shaft so that the lower edge of the wiper blade (1) is aligned with the wiper alignment lines (2) concealed in the upper margin of the lower windshield blackout area. 2. Once the wiper blade is aligned, lift the wiper arm away from the windshield slightly to relieve the spring tension on the pivot end and push the arm down over the pivot shaft. 3. Install and tighten the nut (5) that secures the wiper arm to the pivot shaft. Tighten the nut to 24 Nm (18 ft. lbs.). 4. Wet the windshield glass, then operate the wipers. Turn the wiper switch to the Off position, then check for the correct wiper arm position and readjust as required. 5. Reinstall the plastic nut cap (3) onto the wiper arm pivot nut. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Wiper Blade: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION Each wiper blade is secured by an integral latching pivot block (3) to the hook formation on the tip of each wiper arm, and rests on the glass near the base of the windshield when the wipers are not in operation. The wiper blade consists of the following components: - Superstructure (1) - The superstructure includes several stamped steel bridges and links with claw formations that grip the wiper blade element. Also included in this unit is the latching, molded plastic pivot block that secures the superstructure to the wiper arm. All of the metal components of the wiper blade have a satin black finish applied. - Element (2) - The wiper element or squeegee is the resilient rubber member of the wiper blade that contacts the glass. - Flexor (7) - The flexor is a rigid metal component running along the length of each side of the wiper element where it is gripped by the claws (6) of the superstructure. The right and left wiper blades are 50.00 centimeters (19.69 inches) long, and are interchangeable. They have non-replaceable rubber elements (squeegees). The wiper blades cannot be adjusted or repaired. If ineffective, worn, or damaged the entire wiper blade unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9656 Wiper Blade: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The wiper blades are moved back and forth across the glass by the wiper arms when the wipers are being operated. The wiper blade superstructure is the flexible frame that grips the wiper blade element and evenly distributes the force of the spring-loaded wiper arm along the length of the element. The combination of the wiper arm force and the flexibility of the superstructure makes the element conform to and maintain proper contact with the glass, even as the blade is moved over the varied curvature that may be encountered across the glass surface. The wiper element flexor provides the claws of the blade superstructure with a rigid, yet flexible component on the element which can be gripped. The rubber element is designed to be stiff enough to maintain an even cleaning edge as it is drawn across the glass, yet resilient enough to conform to the glass surface and flip from one cleaning edge to the other each time the wiper blade changes directions. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Blades - Removal Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Blades - Removal REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged. NOTE: The notched end of the wiper element flexor should always be oriented towards the end of the wiper blade that is nearest to the wiper pivot. 1. Lift the wiper arm (2) to raise the wiper blade and element (6) off of the glass, until the wiper arm hinge is in its over-center position. 2. To remove the blade from the arm, depress the latch release tab (4) on the pivot block (3) under the tip of the arm and slide the blade away from the tip towards the pivot end of the arm far enough to disengage the pivot block from the hook formation (5) on the end of the arm. 3. Extract the hook formation on the tip of the wiper arm through the opening in the wiper blade superstructure (1) just ahead of the pivot block. 4. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the glass. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Blades - Removal > Page 9659 Wiper Blade: Service and Repair Wiper Blades - Installation INSTALLATION CAUTION: Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged. NOTE: The notched end of the wiper element flexor should always be oriented towards the end of the wiper blade that is nearest to the wiper pivot. 1. Lift the wiper arm (2) off of the windshield glass, until the wiper arm hinge is in its over-center position. 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook formation (5) on the tip of the arm with the notched end of the wiper element flexor oriented towards the end of the wiper arm that is nearest to the wiper pivot. 3. Insert the hook formation on the tip of the arm through the opening in the blade superstructure (1) ahead of the pivot block (3) far enough to engage the pivot block into the hook. 4. Slide the pivot block up into the hook formation on the tip of the wiper arm until the latch release tab (4) snaps into its locked position. Latch engagement will be accompanied by an audible click. 5. Gently lower the wiper blade and element (6) onto the glass. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations Wiper Motor: Locations Component ID: 169 Component : MOTOR-WINDSHIELD WIPER Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDSHIELD WIPER Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 Z103 14BK/WT GROUND 5 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 6 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9663 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9664 Wiper Motor: Diagrams Component ID: 169 Component : MOTOR-WINDSHIELD WIPER Connector: Name : MOTOR-WINDSHIELD WIPER Color : BLACK # of pins : 6 Pin Circuit Description 1-2 W7 20BR/GY FRONT WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE 3-4 Z103 14BK/WT GROUND 5 W3 14BR/WT FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT 6 W4 14BR/OR FRONT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT Component Location - 4 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 9665 Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description Wiper Motor: Description and Operation Description DESCRIPTION The wiper module is secured with screws through four rubber grommet-type insulators (1) to the cowl plenum panel. The module is concealed beneath the molded plastic cowl plenum cover/grille panel between the base of the windshield and the rear edge of the hood panel. The ends of the pivot shafts protruding through openings in the cowl plenum cover/grille panel to drive the wiper arms and blades are the only visible components of the wiper module. The wiper module consists of the following major components: - Bracket - The wiper module bracket (2) consists of a long tubular steel main member that has a die cast pivot bracket at each end to which the two wiper pivots (4) are secured. A stamped steel motor bracket is welded near the center of the tubular member to which the wiper motor (5) is secured. - Crank Arm (7) - The wiper motor crank arm is a stamped steel unit with a slotted hole on the driven end that is secured to the wiper motor output shaft with a nut, and has a long ball stud secured to the drive end to accept the wiper linkage. - Linkage (3) - Two stamped steel drive links connect the wiper motor crank arm to the wiper pivot lever arms. The right side drive link has a plastic socket-type bushing on each end. The left side drive link has a plastic socket-type bushing on one end, and a plastic sleeve-type bushing on the other end. The socket-type bushing on one end of each drive link is snap-fit over the ball stud on the lever arm of its respective pivot. The left side drive link sleeve-type bushing end is then fit over the motor crank arm ball stud, and the other socket-type bushing of the right side drive link is snap-fit over the exposed end of the wiper motor crank arm ball stud. - Motor (5) - The wiper motor features a transmission housing from which the wiper motor output shaft exits and three threaded holes that mount the motor to the module bracket with three screws. A nut secures the wiper motor crank arm to the motor output shaft. The two-speed permanent magnet wiper motor features an integral transmission, an internal park switch, and an internal automatic resetting circuit breaker. A short pigtail wire and connector (6) connect the wiper motor to the vehicle electrical system through a dedicated take out and connector of the headlamp and dash wire harness. - Pivots (4) - The two wiper pivots are secured within the die cast pivot brackets on the outboard ends of the wiper module main member. The lever arms that extend from the center of the pivot shafts each have a ball stud on their end. The upper end of each pivot shaft where the wiper arms will be fastened each has a serrated driver with a threaded stud. The lower ends of the pivot shafts are installed through lubricated bushings in the pivot brackets and are secured with snap rings. The wiper module cannot be adjusted or repaired. If any component of the module is ineffective or damaged, the entire wiper module unit must be replaced. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Description > Page 9668 Wiper Motor: Description and Operation Operation OPERATION The wiper module operation is controlled by the battery current inputs received by the wiper motor through the wiper on/off and wiper high/low relays. The wiper motor speed is controlled by current flow to either the low speed or the high speed set of brushes. The park switch is a single pole, single throw, momentary switch within the wiper motor that is mechanically actuated by the wiper motor transmission components. The park switch alternately opens and closes the wiper park switch sense circuit to ground, depending upon the position of the wipers on the glass. This feature allows the motor to complete its current wipe cycle after the wiper system has been turned OFF, and to park the wiper blades in the lowest portion of the wipe pattern. The automatic resetting circuit breaker protects the motor from overloads. The wiper motor crank arm, the two wiper linkage members, and the two driven wiper pivots mechanically convert the rotary output of the wiper motor to the back and forth wiping motion of the wiper arms and blades on the glass. The hard wired inputs and outputs of the front wiper motor may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures. Refer to the appropriate wiring information. However, conventional diagnostic methods will not prove conclusive in the diagnosis of the wiper motor or the electronic controls or communication between other modules and devices that provide some features of the wiper and washer system. The most reliable, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the wiper motor or the electronic controls and communication related to wiper motor operation requires the use of a diagnostic scan tool. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Module - Removal Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Module - Removal REMOVAL 1. Remove both wiper arms from the wiper pivots. See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Removal. 2. Unlatch and open the hood. 3. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. 4. Remove the cowl plenum cover/grille panel from over the cowl plenum (1). See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Cowl Top Panel - Removal. 5. Remove the four screws (2) that secure the wiper module (3) to the cowl plenum panel. 6. Disconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (4) from the wiper motor pigtail wire connector. 7. Remove the wiper module from the cowl plenum panel as a unit. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Module - Removal > Page 9671 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Module - Installation INSTALLATION 1. Position the wiper module (3) into the cowl plenum (1) as a unit. 2. Reconnect the headlamp and dash wire harness connector (4) to the wiper motor pigtail wire connector. 3. Loosely install the four screws (2) that secure the wiper module to the cowl plenum panel. 4. Tighten the screws that secure the wiper module near the pivot brackets, driver side first followed by the passenger side. Tighten the screws to 8 Nm (72 in. lbs.). 5. Tighten the screws that secure the wiper module near the motor bracket, passenger side first followed by the driver side. Tighten the screws to 8 Nm (72 in. lbs.). 6. Reinstall the cowl plenum cover/grille panel over the cowl plenum. See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair/Cowl Top Panel - Installation. 7. Reconnect the battery negative cable. 8. Close and latch the hood. 9. Reinstall both wiper arms onto the wiper pivots. See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Arms - Installation. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Locations Wiper Relay: Locations Wiper High/Low and On/Off Relay is located in the Integrated Power Module (IPM). Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the engine compartment, next to the battery. Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper High/Low Component ID: 189 Component : RELAY-WIPER HIGH/LOW Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER HIGH/LOW Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL 85 INTERNAL WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 W4 14BR/OR WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY HIGH SPEED OUTPUT 87A W3 14BR/WT WIPER HIGH/LOW RELAY LOW SPEED OUTPUT Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Relay-Wiper High/Low > Page 9677 Wiper Relay: Diagrams Relay-Wiper On/Off Component ID: 190 Component : RELAY-WIPER ON/OFF Connector: Name : RELAY-WIPER ON/OFF Color : # of pins : 0 Qualifier : (IN IPM) 30 INTERNAL 85 INTERNAL WIPER ON/OFF RELAY CONTROL 86 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87 INTERNAL FUSED B(+) 87A Z904 14BK GROUND Dodge Dakota 4wd Workshop Manual (V8-4.7L Flex Fuel (2008)) Dodge Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Relay > Component Information > Description and Operation > Relay-Wiper High/Low Wiper Relay: Description and Operation Relay-Wiper High/Low Description DESCRIPTION The wiper high/low relay is a conventional International Standards Organization (ISO) micro relay. Relays conforming to the ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal functions. This relay is contained within a small, rectangular, molded plastic housing and is connected to all of the required inputs and outputs through five integral male spade-type terminals that extend from the relay base plate. The wiper high/low relay is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) in the engine compartment near the battery. Refer to the layout label on the underside of the PDC cover for specific relay cavity assignment information. The wiper high/low relay cannot be adjusted or repaired and, if ineffective or damaged, the unit must be replaced. Operation OPERATION The wiper high/low relay is an electromechanical switch that uses a low current input from the Front Control Module (FCM) to control a high current output to the front wiper motor. The movable common feed contact point is held against the fixed normally closed contact point by spring pressure. When the relay coil is energized, an electromagnetic field is produced by the coil windings. This electromagnetic field draws the movable relay contact point away from the fixed normally closed contact point, and holds it against the fixed normally open contact point. When the relay coil is de-energized, spring pressure returns the movable contact point back against the fixed normally closed contact point. A resistor is connected in parallel with the relay coil in the relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes and electromagnetic interference that can be generated as the electromagnetic field of the relay coil collapses. The wiper high/low relay terminals are connected to the vehicle electrical system through a connector receptacle in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The inputs and outputs of the wiper high/low relay include: Common Feed Terminal - The common feed terminal (30) is connected to the output of the wiper on/off relay at all times through the wiper on/off relay output circuit. - Coil Ground Terminal - The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to a control output of the Front Control Module (FCM) through a wiper high/low relay control circuit. The FCM controls wiper motor operation by controlling a ground path through this circuit. - Coil Battery Terminal - The coil battery terminal (86) receives battery current when the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory positions from a fuse in the PDC through a fused ignition switch output (run-acc) circuit. - Normally Open Terminal - The normally open terminal (87) is connected to the high speed brush of the wiper motor through a wiper high/low relay high speed output circuit, and is connected to the high speed brush whenever the relay is energized. - Normally Closed Terminal - The normally closed terminal (87A) is connected to the low speed brush of the wiper motor through a wiper high/low relay low speed output circuit, and is connected to the low speed brush whenever the relay is de-energized. The wiper high/low relay as well as the hard wired inputs and outputs of the relay may be diagnosed using conventional diagnostic tools and procedures.